This is the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual corresponding to Emacs version 29.4.
Copyright © 1990–1996, 1998–2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being “GNU General Public License,” with the Front-Cover Texts being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”
(a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.”
declare
Formdisplay
Property
Most of the GNU Emacs text editor is written in the programming language called Emacs Lisp. You can write new code in Emacs Lisp and install it as an extension to the editor. However, Emacs Lisp is more than a mere extension language; it is a full computer programming language in its own right. You can use it as you would any other programming language.
Because Emacs Lisp is designed for use in an editor, it has special features for scanning and parsing text as well as features for handling files, buffers, displays, subprocesses, and so on. Emacs Lisp is closely integrated with the editing facilities; thus, editing commands are functions that can also conveniently be called from Lisp programs, and parameters for customization are ordinary Lisp variables.
This manual attempts to be a full description of Emacs Lisp. For a beginner’s introduction to Emacs Lisp, see An Introduction to Emacs Lisp Programming, by Bob Chassell, also published by the Free Software Foundation. This manual presumes considerable familiarity with the use of Emacs for editing; see The GNU Emacs Manual for this basic information.
Generally speaking, the earlier chapters describe features of Emacs Lisp that have counterparts in many programming languages, and later chapters describe features that are peculiar to Emacs Lisp or relate specifically to editing.
This is the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, corresponding to Emacs version 29.4.
This manual has gone through numerous drafts. It is nearly complete but not flawless. There are a few topics that are not covered, either because we consider them secondary (such as most of the individual modes) or because they are yet to be written. Because we are not able to deal with them completely, we have left out several parts intentionally.
The manual should be fully correct in what it does cover, and it is therefore open to criticism on anything it says—from specific examples and descriptive text, to the ordering of chapters and sections. If something is confusing, or you find that you have to look at the sources or experiment to learn something not covered in the manual, then perhaps the manual should be fixed. Please let us know.
As you use this manual, we ask that you send corrections as soon as you find them. If you think of a simple, real life example for a function or group of functions, please make an effort to write it up and send it in. Please reference any comments to the node name and function or variable name, as appropriate. Also state the number of the edition you are criticizing.
Please send comments and corrections using M-x report-emacs-bug. For more details, See Reporting Bugs in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Lisp (LISt Processing language) was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The great power of the Lisp language makes it ideal for other purposes as well, such as writing editing commands.
Dozens of Lisp implementations have been built over the years, each with its own idiosyncrasies. Many of them were inspired by Maclisp, which was written in the 1960s at MIT’s Project MAC. Eventually the implementers of the descendants of Maclisp came together and developed a standard for Lisp systems, called Common Lisp. In the meantime, Gerry Sussman and Guy Steele at MIT developed a simplified but very powerful dialect of Lisp, called Scheme.
GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, and a little by Common Lisp. If you know Common Lisp, you will notice many similarities. However, many features of Common Lisp have been omitted or simplified in order to reduce the memory requirements of GNU Emacs. Sometimes the simplifications are so drastic that a Common Lisp user might be very confused. We will occasionally point out how GNU Emacs Lisp differs from Common Lisp. If you don’t know Common Lisp, don’t worry about it; this manual is self-contained.
A certain amount of Common Lisp emulation is available via the cl-lib library. See Overview in Common Lisp Extensions.
Emacs Lisp is not at all influenced by Scheme; but the GNU project has an implementation of Scheme, called Guile. We use it in all new GNU software that calls for extensibility.
This section explains the notational conventions that are used in this manual. You may want to skip this section and refer back to it later.
nil
and t
Throughout this manual, the phrases “the Lisp reader” and “the Lisp printer” refer to those routines in Lisp that convert textual representations of Lisp objects into actual Lisp objects, and vice versa. See Printed Representation and Read Syntax, for more details. You, the person reading this manual, are thought of as the programmer and are addressed as “you”. The user is the person who uses Lisp programs, including those you write.
Examples of Lisp code are formatted like this: (list 1 2 3)
.
Names that represent metasyntactic variables, or arguments to a function
being described, are formatted like this: first-number.
nil
and t
¶In Emacs Lisp, the symbol nil
has three separate meanings: it
is a symbol with the name ‘nil’; it is the logical truth value
false; and it is the empty list—the list of zero elements.
When used as a variable, nil
always has the value nil
.
As far as the Lisp reader is concerned, ‘()’ and ‘nil’ are
identical: they stand for the same object, the symbol nil
. The
different ways of writing the symbol are intended entirely for human
readers. After the Lisp reader has read either ‘()’ or ‘nil’,
there is no way to determine which representation was actually written
by the programmer.
In this manual, we write ()
when we wish to emphasize that it
means the empty list, and we write nil
when we wish to emphasize
that it means the truth value false. That is a good convention to use
in Lisp programs also.
(cons 'foo ()) ; Emphasize the empty list (setq foo-flag nil) ; Emphasize the truth value false
In contexts where a truth value is expected, any non-nil
value
is considered to be true. However, t
is the preferred way
to represent the truth value true. When you need to choose a
value that represents true, and there is no other basis for
choosing, use t
. The symbol t
always has the value
t
.
In Emacs Lisp, nil
and t
are special symbols that always
evaluate to themselves. This is so that you do not need to quote them
to use them as constants in a program. An attempt to change their
values results in a setting-constant
error. See Variables that Never Change.
Return non-nil
if object is one of the two canonical
boolean values: t
or nil
.
A Lisp expression that you can evaluate is called a form. Evaluating a form always produces a result, which is a Lisp object. In the examples in this manual, this is indicated with ‘⇒’:
(car '(1 2)) ⇒ 1
You can read this as “(car '(1 2))
evaluates to 1”.
When a form is a macro call, it expands into a new form for Lisp to evaluate. We show the result of the expansion with ‘→’. We may or may not show the result of the evaluation of the expanded form.
(third '(a b c)) → (car (cdr (cdr '(a b c)))) ⇒ c
To help describe one form, we sometimes show another form that produces identical results. The exact equivalence of two forms is indicated with ‘≡’.
(make-sparse-keymap) ≡ (list 'keymap)
Many of the examples in this manual print text when they are
evaluated. If you execute example code in a Lisp Interaction buffer
(such as the buffer *scratch*) by typing C-j after the
closing parenthesis of the example, the printed text is inserted into
the buffer. If you execute the example by other means (such as by
evaluating the function eval-region
), the printed text is
displayed in the echo area.
Examples in this manual indicate printed text with ‘-|’, irrespective of where that text goes. The value returned by evaluating the form follows on a separate line with ‘⇒’.
(progn (prin1 'foo) (princ "\n") (prin1 'bar)) -| foo -| bar ⇒ bar
Some examples signal errors. This normally displays an error message in the echo area. We show the error message on a line starting with ‘error→’. Note that ‘error→’ itself does not appear in the echo area.
(+ 23 'x) error→ Wrong type argument: number-or-marker-p, x
Some examples describe modifications to the contents of a buffer, by showing the before and after versions of the text. These examples show the contents of the buffer in question between two lines of dashes containing the buffer name. In addition, ‘∗’ indicates the location of point. (The symbol for point, of course, is not part of the text in the buffer; it indicates the place between two characters where point is currently located.)
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the ∗contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (insert "changed ") ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the changed ∗contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
Functions, variables, macros, commands, user options, and special forms are described in this manual in a uniform format. The first line of a description contains the name of the item followed by its arguments, if any. The category—function, variable, or whatever—appears at the beginning of the line. The description follows on succeeding lines, sometimes with examples.
In a function description, the name of the function being described appears first. It is followed on the same line by a list of argument names. These names are also used in the body of the description, to stand for the values of the arguments.
The appearance of the keyword &optional
in the argument list
indicates that the subsequent arguments may be omitted (omitted
arguments default to nil
). Do not write &optional
when
you call the function.
The keyword &rest
(which must be followed by a single
argument name) indicates that any number of arguments can follow. The
single argument name following &rest
receives, as its
value, a list of all the remaining arguments passed to the function.
Do not write &rest
when you call the function.
Here is a description of an imaginary function foo
:
The function foo
subtracts integer1 from integer2,
then adds all the rest of the arguments to the result. If integer2
is not supplied, then the number 19 is used by default.
(foo 1 5 3 9) ⇒ 16 (foo 5) ⇒ 14
More generally,
(foo w x y...) ≡ (+ (- x w) y...)
By convention, any argument whose name contains the name of a type (e.g., integer, integer1 or buffer) is expected to be of that type. A plural of a type (such as buffers) often means a list of objects of that type. An argument named object may be of any type. (For a list of Emacs object types, see Lisp Data Types.) An argument with any other sort of name (e.g., new-file) is specific to the function; if the function has a documentation string, the type of the argument should be described there (see Documentation).
See Lambda Expressions, for a more complete description of
arguments modified by &optional
and &rest
.
Command, macro, and special form descriptions have the same format, but the word ‘Function’ is replaced by ‘Command’, ‘Macro’, or ‘Special Form’, respectively. Commands are simply functions that may be called interactively; macros process their arguments differently from functions (the arguments are not evaluated), but are presented the same way.
The descriptions of macros and special forms use a more complex notation to specify optional and repeated arguments, because they can break the argument list down into separate arguments in more complicated ways. ‘[optional-arg]’ means that optional-arg is optional and ‘repeated-args…’ stands for zero or more arguments. Parentheses are used when several arguments are grouped into additional levels of list structure. Here is an example:
This imaginary special form implements a loop that executes the body forms and then increments the variable var on each iteration. On the first iteration, the variable has the value from; on subsequent iterations, it is incremented by one (or by inc if that is given). The loop exits before executing body if var equals to. Here is an example:
(count-loop (i 0 10) (prin1 i) (princ " ") (prin1 (aref vector i)) (terpri))
If from and to are omitted, var is bound to
nil
before the loop begins, and the loop exits if var is
non-nil
at the beginning of an iteration. Here is an example:
(count-loop (done) (if (pending) (fixit) (setq done t)))
In this special form, the arguments from and to are optional, but must both be present or both absent. If they are present, inc may optionally be specified as well. These arguments are grouped with the argument var into a list, to distinguish them from body, which includes all remaining elements of the form.
A variable is a name that can be bound (or set) to an object. The object to which a variable is bound is called a value; we say also that variable holds that value. Although nearly all variables can be set by the user, certain variables exist specifically so that users can change them; these are called user options. Ordinary variables and user options are described using a format like that for functions, except that there are no arguments.
Here is a description of the imaginary electric-future-map
variable.
The value of this variable is a full keymap used by Electric Command Future mode. The functions in this map allow you to edit commands you have not yet thought about executing.
User option descriptions have the same format, but ‘Variable’ is replaced by ‘User Option’.
These facilities provide information about which version of Emacs is in use.
This function returns a string describing the version of Emacs that is running. It is useful to include this string in bug reports.
(emacs-version) ⇒ "GNU Emacs 26.1 (build 1, x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu, GTK+ Version 3.16) of 2017-06-01"
If here is non-nil
, it inserts the text in the buffer
before point, and returns nil
. When this function is called
interactively, it prints the same information in the echo area, but
giving a prefix argument makes here non-nil
.
The value of this variable indicates the time at which Emacs was
built. It uses the style of
current-time
(see Time of Day), or is nil
if the information is not available.
emacs-build-time ⇒ (25194 55894 8547 617000)
(This timestamp is (1651169878008547617 . 1000000000)
if current-time-list
was nil
when Emacs was built.)
The value of this variable is the version of Emacs being run. It is a
string such as "26.1"
. A value with three numeric components,
such as "26.0.91"
, indicates an unreleased test version.
(Prior to Emacs 26.1, the string includes an extra final component
with the integer that is now stored in emacs-build-number
;
e.g., "25.1.1"
.)
The major version number of Emacs, as an integer. For Emacs version 23.1, the value is 23.
The minor version number of Emacs, as an integer. For Emacs version 23.1, the value is 1.
An integer that increments each time Emacs is built in the same directory (without cleaning). This is only of relevance when developing Emacs.
A string that gives the repository revision from which Emacs was
built. If Emacs was built outside revision control, the value is
nil
.
A string that gives the repository branch from which Emacs was built.
In the most cases this is "master"
. If Emacs was built outside
revision control, the value is nil
.
This manual was originally written by Robert Krawitz, Bil Lewis, Dan LaLiberte, Richard M. Stallman and Chris Welty, the volunteers of the GNU manual group, in an effort extending over several years. Robert J. Chassell helped to review and edit the manual, with the support of the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency, ARPA Order 6082, arranged by Warren A. Hunt, Jr. of Computational Logic, Inc. Additional sections have since been written by Miles Bader, Lars Brinkhoff, Chong Yidong, Kenichi Handa, Lute Kamstra, Juri Linkov, Glenn Morris, Thien-Thi Nguyen, Dan Nicolaescu, Martin Rudalics, Kim F. Storm, Luc Teirlinck, and Eli Zaretskii, and others.
Corrections were supplied by Drew Adams, Juanma Barranquero, Karl Berry, Jim Blandy, Bard Bloom, Stephane Boucher, David Boyes, Alan Carroll, Richard Davis, Lawrence R. Dodd, Peter Doornbosch, David A. Duff, Chris Eich, Beverly Erlebacher, David Eckelkamp, Ralf Fassel, Eirik Fuller, Stephen Gildea, Bob Glickstein, Eric Hanchrow, Jesper Harder, George Hartzell, Nathan Hess, Masayuki Ida, Dan Jacobson, Jak Kirman, Bob Knighten, Frederick M. Korz, Joe Lammens, Glenn M. Lewis, K. Richard Magill, Brian Marick, Roland McGrath, Stefan Monnier, Skip Montanaro, John Gardiner Myers, Thomas A. Peterson, Francesco Potortì, Friedrich Pukelsheim, Arnold D. Robbins, Raul Rockwell, Jason Rumney, Per Starbäck, Shinichirou Sugou, Kimmo Suominen, Edward Tharp, Bill Trost, Rickard Westman, Jean White, Eduard Wiebe, Matthew Wilding, Carl Witty, Dale Worley, Rusty Wright, and David D. Zuhn.
For a more complete list of contributors, please see the relevant change log entries in the Emacs source repository.
A Lisp object is a piece of data used and manipulated by Lisp programs. For our purposes, a type or data type is a set of possible objects.
Every object belongs to at least one type. Objects of the same type have similar structures and may usually be used in the same contexts. Types can overlap, and objects can belong to two or more types. Consequently, we can ask whether an object belongs to a particular type, but not for the type of an object.
A few fundamental object types are built into Emacs. These, from which all other types are constructed, are called primitive types. Each object belongs to one and only one primitive type. These types include integer, float, cons, symbol, string, vector, hash-table, subr, byte-code function, and record, plus several special types, such as buffer, that are related to editing. (See Editing Types.)
Each primitive type has a corresponding Lisp function that checks whether an object is a member of that type.
Lisp is unlike many other languages in that its objects are self-typing: the primitive type of each object is implicit in the object itself. For example, if an object is a vector, nothing can treat it as a number; Lisp knows it is a vector, not a number.
In most languages, the programmer must declare the data type of each variable, and the type is known by the compiler but not represented in the data. Such type declarations do not exist in Emacs Lisp. A Lisp variable can have any type of value, and it remembers whatever value you store in it, type and all. (Actually, a small number of Emacs Lisp variables can only take on values of a certain type. See Variables with Restricted Values.)
This chapter describes the purpose, printed representation, and read syntax of each of the standard types in GNU Emacs Lisp. Details on how to use these types can be found in later chapters.
The printed representation of an object is the format of the
output generated by the Lisp printer (the function prin1
) for
that object. Every data type has a unique printed representation.
The read syntax of an object is the format of the input accepted
by the Lisp reader (the function read
) for that object. This
is not necessarily unique; many kinds of object have more than one
syntax. See Reading and Printing Lisp Objects.
In most cases, an object’s printed representation is also a read syntax for the object. However, some types have no read syntax, since it does not make sense to enter objects of these types as constants in a Lisp program. These objects are printed in hash notation, which consists of the characters ‘#<’, a descriptive string (typically the type name followed by the name of the object), and a closing ‘>’. (This is called “hash notation” because it begins with the ‘#’ character, known as “hash” or “number sign”). For example:
(current-buffer) ⇒ #<buffer objects.texi>
Hash notation cannot be read at all, so the Lisp reader signals the
error invalid-read-syntax
whenever it encounters ‘#<’.
We describe the read syntax and the printed representation of each Lisp data type where we describe that data type, in the following sections of this chapter. For example, see String Type, and its subsections for the read syntax and printed representation of strings; see Vector Type for the same information about vectors; etc.
In other languages, an expression is text; it has no other form. In Lisp, an expression is primarily a Lisp object and only secondarily the text that is the object’s read syntax. Often there is no need to emphasize this distinction, but you must keep it in the back of your mind, or you will occasionally be very confused.
When you evaluate an expression interactively, the Lisp interpreter
first reads the textual representation of it, producing a Lisp object,
and then evaluates that object (see Evaluation). However,
evaluation and reading are separate activities. Reading returns the
Lisp object represented by the text that is read; the object may or may
not be evaluated later. See Input Functions, for a description of
read
, the basic function for reading objects.
Emacs Lisp represents many special objects and constructs via special hash notations.
Objects that have no read syntax are presented like this (see Printed Representation and Read Syntax).
The printed representation of an interned symbol whose name is an empty string (see Symbol Type).
This is a shortcut for function
, see Anonymous Functions.
The printed representation of an uninterned symbol whose name is foo is ‘#:foo’ (see Symbol Type).
When printing circular structures, this construct is used to represent where the structure loops back onto itself, and ‘N’ is the starting list count:
(let ((a (list 1))) (setcdr a a)) => (1 . #0)
‘#N=’ gives the name to an object, and ‘#N#’ represents that object, so when reading back the object, they will be the same object instead of copies (see Read Syntax for Circular Objects).
‘N’ represented as a hexadecimal number (‘#x2a’).
‘N’ represented as an octal number (‘#o52’).
‘N’ represented as a binary number (‘#b101010’).
String text properties (see Text Properties in Strings).
A char table (see Char-Table Type).
A hash table (see Hash Table Type).
A character (see Basic Char Syntax).
The current file name in byte-compiled files (see Documentation Strings and Compilation). This is not meant to be used in Emacs Lisp source files.
Skip the next ‘N’ characters (see Comments). This is used in byte-compiled files, and is not meant to be used in Emacs Lisp source files.
Indicates that the following form isn’t readable by the Emacs Lisp reader. This is only in text for display purposes (when that would look prettier than alternative ways of indicating an unreadable form) and will never appear in any Lisp file.
A comment is text that is written in a program only for the sake of humans that read the program, and that has no effect on the meaning of the program. In Lisp, an unescaped semicolon (‘;’) starts a comment if it is not within a string or character constant. The comment continues to the end of line. The Lisp reader discards comments; they do not become part of the Lisp objects which represent the program within the Lisp system.
The ‘#@count’ construct, which skips the next count characters, is useful for program-generated comments containing binary data. The Emacs Lisp byte compiler uses this in its output files (see Byte Compilation). It isn’t meant for source files, however.
See Tips on Writing Comments, for conventions for formatting comments.
There are two general categories of types in Emacs Lisp: those having to do with Lisp programming, and those having to do with editing. The former exist in many Lisp implementations, in one form or another. The latter are unique to Emacs Lisp.
Under the hood, there are two kinds of integers—small integers, called fixnums, and large integers, called bignums.
The range of values for a fixnum depends on the machine. The minimum range is −536,870,912 to 536,870,911 (30 bits; i.e., −2**29 to 2**29 − 1) but many machines provide a wider range.
Bignums can have arbitrary precision. Operations that overflow a fixnum will return a bignum instead.
All numbers can be compared with eql
or =
; fixnums can
also be compared with eq
. To test whether an integer is a fixnum or a
bignum, you can compare it to most-negative-fixnum
and
most-positive-fixnum
, or you can use the convenience predicates
fixnump
and bignump
on any object.
The read syntax for integers is a sequence of (base ten) digits with an optional sign at the beginning and an optional period at the end. The printed representation produced by the Lisp interpreter never has a leading ‘+’ or a final ‘.’.
-1 ; The integer −1. 1 ; The integer 1. 1. ; Also the integer 1. +1 ; Also the integer 1.
See Numbers, for more information.
Floating-point numbers are the computer equivalent of scientific
notation; you can think of a floating-point number as a fraction
together with a power of ten. The precise number of significant
figures and the range of possible exponents is machine-specific; Emacs
uses the C data type double
to store the value, and internally
this records a power of 2 rather than a power of 10.
The printed representation for floating-point numbers requires either a decimal point (with at least one digit following), an exponent, or both. For example, ‘1500.0’, ‘+15e2’, ‘15.0e+2’, ‘+1500000e-3’, and ‘.15e4’ are five ways of writing a floating-point number whose value is 1500. They are all equivalent.
See Numbers, for more information.
A character in Emacs Lisp is nothing more than an integer. In other words, characters are represented by their character codes. For example, the character A is represented as the integer 65. That is also their usual printed representation; see Basic Char Syntax.
Individual characters are used occasionally in programs, but it is more common to work with strings, which are sequences composed of characters. See String Type.
Characters in strings and buffers are currently limited to the range of 0 to 4194303—twenty two bits (see Character Codes). Codes 0 through 127 are ASCII codes; the rest are non-ASCII (see Non-ASCII Characters). Characters that represent keyboard input have a much wider range, to encode modifier keys such as Control, Meta and Shift.
There are special functions for producing a human-readable textual description of a character for the sake of messages. See Describing Characters for Help Messages.
Since characters are really integers, the printed representation of a character is a decimal number. This is also a possible read syntax for a character, but writing characters that way in Lisp programs is not clear programming. You should always use the special read syntax formats that Emacs Lisp provides for characters. These syntax formats start with a question mark.
The usual read syntax for alphanumeric characters is a question mark followed by the character; thus, ‘?A’ for the character A, ‘?B’ for the character B, and ‘?a’ for the character a.
For example:
?Q ⇒ 81 ?q ⇒ 113
You can use the same syntax for punctuation characters. However, if the punctuation character has a special syntactic meaning in Lisp, you must quote it with a ‘\’. For example, ‘?\(’ is the way to write the open-paren character. Likewise, if the character is ‘\’, you must use a second ‘\’ to quote it: ‘?\\’.
You can express the characters control-g, backspace, tab, newline, vertical tab, formfeed, space, return, del, and escape as ‘?\a’, ‘?\b’, ‘?\t’, ‘?\n’, ‘?\v’, ‘?\f’, ‘?\s’, ‘?\r’, ‘?\d’, and ‘?\e’, respectively. (‘?\s’ followed by a dash has a different meaning—it applies the Super modifier to the following character.) Thus,
?\a ⇒ 7 ; control-g, C-g ?\b ⇒ 8 ; backspace, BS, C-h ?\t ⇒ 9 ; tab, TAB, C-i ?\n ⇒ 10 ; newline, C-j ?\v ⇒ 11 ; vertical tab, C-k ?\f ⇒ 12 ; formfeed character, C-l ?\r ⇒ 13 ; carriage return, RET, C-m ?\e ⇒ 27 ; escape character, ESC, C-[ ?\s ⇒ 32 ; space character, SPC ?\\ ⇒ 92 ; backslash character, \ ?\d ⇒ 127 ; delete character, DEL
These sequences which start with backslash are also known as escape sequences, because backslash plays the role of an escape character; this has nothing to do with the character ESC. ‘\s’ is meant for use in character constants; in string constants, just write the space.
A backslash is allowed, and harmless, preceding any character without a special escape meaning; thus, ‘?\+’ is equivalent to ‘?+’. There is no reason to add a backslash before most characters. However, you must add a backslash before any of the characters ‘()[]\;"’, and you should add a backslash before any of the characters ‘|'`#.,’ to avoid confusing the Emacs commands for editing Lisp code. You should also add a backslash before Unicode characters which resemble the previously mentioned ASCII ones, to avoid confusing people reading your code. Emacs will highlight some non-escaped commonly confused characters such as ‘‘’ to encourage this. You can also add a backslash before whitespace characters such as space, tab, newline and formfeed. However, it is cleaner to use one of the easily readable escape sequences, such as ‘\t’ or ‘\s’, instead of an actual whitespace character such as a tab or a space. (If you do write backslash followed by a space, you should write an extra space after the character constant to separate it from the following text.)
In addition to the specific escape sequences for special important control characters, Emacs provides several types of escape syntax that you can use to specify non-ASCII text characters.
?\N{NAME}
represents the Unicode character named
NAME. Thus, ‘?\N{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE}’ is
equivalent to ?à
and denotes the Unicode character U+00E0. To
simplify entering multi-line strings, you can replace spaces in the
names by non-empty sequences of whitespace (e.g., newlines).
?\N{U+X}
represents a character with Unicode code point
X, where X is a hexadecimal number. Also,
?\uxxxx
and ?\Uxxxxxxxx
represent code
points xxxx and xxxxxxxx, respectively, where each x
is a single hexadecimal digit. For example, ?\N{U+E0}
,
?\u00e0
and ?\U000000E0
are all equivalent to
?à
and to ‘?\N{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE}’. The
Unicode Standard defines code points only up to ‘U+10ffff’,
so if you specify a code point higher than that, Emacs signals an
error.
?\xe0
is the character à (a with grave accent).
You can use one or more hex digits after ‘x’, so you can
represent any character code in this way.
?\002
for the character C-b. Only characters up to octal code 777 can
be specified this way.
These escape sequences may also be used in strings. See Non-ASCII Characters in Strings.
Control characters can be represented using yet another read syntax. This consists of a question mark followed by a backslash, caret, and the corresponding non-control character, in either upper or lower case. For example, both ‘?\^I’ and ‘?\^i’ are valid read syntax for the character C-i, the character whose value is 9.
Instead of the ‘^’, you can use ‘C-’; thus, ‘?\C-i’ is equivalent to ‘?\^I’ and to ‘?\^i’:
?\^I ⇒ 9 ?\C-I ⇒ 9
In strings and buffers, the only control characters allowed are those that exist in ASCII; but for keyboard input purposes, you can turn any character into a control character with ‘C-’. The character codes for these non-ASCII control characters include the 2**26 bit as well as the code for the corresponding non-control character. Not all text terminals can generate non-ASCII control characters, but it is straightforward to generate them using X and other window systems.
For historical reasons, Emacs treats the DEL character as the control equivalent of ?:
?\^? ⇒ 127 ?\C-? ⇒ 127
As a result, it is currently not possible to represent the character Control-?, which is a meaningful input character under X, using ‘\C-’. It is not easy to change this, as various Lisp files refer to DEL in this way.
For representing control characters to be found in files or strings, we recommend the ‘^’ syntax; for control characters in keyboard input, we prefer the ‘C-’ syntax. Which one you use does not affect the meaning of the program, but may guide the understanding of people who read it.
A meta character is a character typed with the META modifier key. The integer that represents such a character has the 2**27 bit set. We use high bits for this and other modifiers to make possible a wide range of basic character codes.
In a string, the 2**7 bit attached to an ASCII character indicates a meta character; thus, the meta characters that can fit in a string have codes in the range from 128 to 255, and are the meta versions of the ordinary ASCII characters. See Putting Keyboard Events in Strings, for details about META-handling in strings.
The read syntax for meta characters uses ‘\M-’. For example, ‘?\M-A’ stands for M-A. You can use ‘\M-’ together with octal character codes (see below), with ‘\C-’, or with any other syntax for a character. Thus, you can write M-A as ‘?\M-A’, or as ‘?\M-\101’. Likewise, you can write C-M-b as ‘?\M-\C-b’, ‘?\C-\M-b’, or ‘?\M-\002’.
The case of a graphic character is indicated by its character code; for example, ASCII distinguishes between the characters ‘a’ and ‘A’. But ASCII has no way to represent whether a control character is upper case or lower case. Emacs uses the 2**25 bit to indicate that the shift key was used in typing a control character. This distinction is possible only on a graphical display such as a GUI display on X; text terminals do not report the distinction. The Lisp syntax for the shift bit is ‘\S-’; thus, ‘?\C-\S-o’ or ‘?\C-\S-O’ represents the shifted-control-o character.
The X Window System defines three other modifier bits that can be set in a character: hyper, super and alt. The syntaxes for these bits are ‘\H-’, ‘\s-’ and ‘\A-’. (Case is significant in these prefixes.) Thus, ‘?\H-\M-\A-x’ represents Alt-Hyper-Meta-x. (Note that ‘\s’ with no following ‘-’ represents the space character.) Numerically, the bit values are 2**22 for alt, 2**23 for super and 2**24 for hyper.
A symbol in GNU Emacs Lisp is an object with a name. The symbol name serves as the printed representation of the symbol. In ordinary Lisp use, with one single obarray (see Creating and Interning Symbols), a symbol’s name is unique—no two symbols have the same name.
A symbol can serve as a variable, as a function name, or to hold a property list. Or it may serve only to be distinct from all other Lisp objects, so that its presence in a data structure may be recognized reliably. In a given context, usually only one of these uses is intended. But you can use one symbol in all of these ways, independently.
A symbol whose name starts with a colon (‘:’) is called a keyword symbol. These symbols automatically act as constants, and are normally used only by comparing an unknown symbol with a few specific alternatives. See Variables that Never Change.
A symbol name can contain any characters whatever. Most symbol names are written with letters, digits, and the punctuation characters ‘-+=*/’. Such names require no special punctuation; the characters of the name suffice as long as the name does not look like a number. (If it does, write a ‘\’ at the beginning of the name to force interpretation as a symbol.) The characters ‘_~!@$%^&:<>{}?’ are less often used but also require no special punctuation. Any other characters may be included in a symbol’s name by escaping them with a backslash. In contrast to its use in strings, however, a backslash in the name of a symbol simply quotes the single character that follows the backslash. For example, in a string, ‘\t’ represents a tab character; in the name of a symbol, however, ‘\t’ merely quotes the letter ‘t’. To have a symbol with a tab character in its name, you must actually use a tab (preceded with a backslash). But it’s rare to do such a thing.
Common Lisp note: In Common Lisp, lower case letters are always folded to upper case, unless they are explicitly escaped. In Emacs Lisp, upper case and lower case letters are distinct.
Here are several examples of symbol names. Note that the ‘+’ in the fourth example is escaped to prevent it from being read as a number. This is not necessary in the sixth example because the rest of the name makes it invalid as a number.
foo ; A symbol named ‘foo’. FOO ; A symbol named ‘FOO’, different from ‘foo’.
1+ ; A symbol named ‘1+’ ; (not ‘+1’, which is an integer).
\+1 ; A symbol named ‘+1’ ; (not a very readable name).
\(*\ 1\ 2\) ; A symbol named ‘(* 1 2)’ (a worse name). +-*/_~!@$%^&=:<>{} ; A symbol named ‘+-*/_~!@$%^&=:<>{}’. ; These characters need not be escaped.
As an exception to the rule that a symbol’s name serves as its printed representation, ‘##’ is the printed representation for an interned symbol whose name is an empty string. Furthermore, ‘#:foo’ is the printed representation for an uninterned symbol whose name is foo. (Normally, the Lisp reader interns all symbols; see Creating and Interning Symbols.)
A sequence is a Lisp object that represents an ordered set of elements. There are two kinds of sequence in Emacs Lisp: lists and arrays.
Lists are the most commonly-used sequences. A list can hold elements of any type, and its length can be easily changed by adding or removing elements. See the next subsection for more about lists.
Arrays are fixed-length sequences. They are further subdivided into
strings, vectors, char-tables and bool-vectors. Vectors can hold
elements of any type, whereas string elements must be characters, and
bool-vector elements must be t
or nil
. Char-tables are
like vectors except that they are indexed by any valid character code.
The characters in a string can have text properties like characters in
a buffer (see Text Properties), but vectors do not support text
properties, even when their elements happen to be characters.
Lists, strings and the other array types also share important
similarities. For example, all have a length l, and all have
elements which can be indexed from zero to l minus one. Several
functions, called sequence functions, accept any kind of sequence.
For example, the function length
reports the length of any kind
of sequence. See Sequences, Arrays, and Vectors.
It is generally impossible to read the same sequence twice, since
sequences are always created anew upon reading. If you read the read
syntax for a sequence twice, you get two sequences with equal contents.
There is one exception: the empty list ()
always stands for the
same object, nil
.
A cons cell is an object that consists of two slots, called the CAR slot and the CDR slot. Each slot can hold any Lisp object. We also say that the CAR of this cons cell is whatever object its CAR slot currently holds, and likewise for the CDR.
A list is a series of cons cells, linked together so that the
CDR slot of each cons cell holds either the next cons cell or the
empty list. The empty list is actually the symbol nil
.
See Lists, for details. Because most cons cells are used as part
of lists, we refer to any structure made out of cons cells as a
list structure.
A note to C programmers: a Lisp list thus works as a linked list built up of cons cells. Because pointers in Lisp are implicit, we do not distinguish between a cons cell slot holding a value versus pointing to the value.
Because cons cells are so central to Lisp, we also have a word for an object which is not a cons cell. These objects are called atoms.
The read syntax and printed representation for lists are identical, and consist of a left parenthesis, an arbitrary number of elements, and a right parenthesis. Here are examples of lists:
(A 2 "A") ; A list of three elements. () ; A list of no elements (the empty list). nil ; A list of no elements (the empty list). ("A ()") ; A list of one element: the string"A ()"
. (A ()) ; A list of two elements:A
and the empty list. (A nil) ; Equivalent to the previous. ((A B C)) ; A list of one element ; (which is a list of three elements).
Upon reading, each object inside the parentheses becomes an element
of the list. That is, a cons cell is made for each element. The
CAR slot of the cons cell holds the element, and its CDR
slot refers to the next cons cell of the list, which holds the next
element in the list. The CDR slot of the last cons cell is set to
hold nil
.
The names CAR and CDR derive from the history of Lisp. The
original Lisp implementation ran on an IBM 704 computer which
divided words into two parts, the address and the
decrement; CAR was an instruction to extract the contents of
the address part of a register, and CDR an instruction to extract
the contents of the decrement. By contrast, cons cells are named
for the function cons
that creates them, which in turn was named
for its purpose, the construction of cells.
A list can be illustrated by a diagram in which the cons cells are
shown as pairs of boxes, like dominoes. (The Lisp reader cannot read
such an illustration; unlike the textual notation, which can be
understood by both humans and computers, the box illustrations can be
understood only by humans.) This picture represents the three-element
list (rose violet buttercup)
:
--- --- --- --- --- --- | | |--> | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- --- --- | | | | | | --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
In this diagram, each box represents a slot that can hold or refer to any Lisp object. Each pair of boxes represents a cons cell. Each arrow represents a reference to a Lisp object, either an atom or another cons cell.
In this example, the first box, which holds the CAR of the first
cons cell, refers to or holds rose
(a symbol). The second
box, holding the CDR of the first cons cell, refers to the next
pair of boxes, the second cons cell. The CAR of the second cons
cell is violet
, and its CDR is the third cons cell. The
CDR of the third (and last) cons cell is nil
.
Here is another diagram of the same list, (rose violet
buttercup)
, sketched in a different manner:
--------------- ---------------- ------------------- | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | rose | o-------->| violet | o-------->| buttercup | nil | | | | | | | | | | --------------- ---------------- -------------------
A list with no elements in it is the empty list; it is identical
to the symbol nil
. In other words, nil
is both a symbol
and a list.
Here is the list (A ())
, or equivalently (A nil)
,
depicted with boxes and arrows:
--- --- --- --- | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- | | | | --> A --> nil
Here is a more complex illustration, showing the three-element list,
((pine needles) oak maple)
, the first element of which is a
two-element list:
--- --- --- --- --- --- | | |--> | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- --- --- | | | | | | | --> oak --> maple | | --- --- --- --- --> | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- | | | | --> pine --> needles
The same list represented in the second box notation looks like this:
-------------- -------------- -------------- | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | o | o------->| oak | o------->| maple | nil | | | | | | | | | | | -- | --------- -------------- -------------- | | | -------------- ---------------- | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | ------>| pine | o------->| needles | nil | | | | | | | -------------- ----------------
Dotted pair notation is a general syntax for cons cells that
represents the CAR and CDR explicitly. In this syntax,
(a . b)
stands for a cons cell whose CAR is
the object a and whose CDR is the object b. Dotted
pair notation is more general than list syntax because the CDR
does not have to be a list. However, it is more cumbersome in cases
where list syntax would work. In dotted pair notation, the list
‘(1 2 3)’ is written as ‘(1 . (2 . (3 . nil)))’. For
nil
-terminated lists, you can use either notation, but list
notation is usually clearer and more convenient. When printing a
list, the dotted pair notation is only used if the CDR of a cons
cell is not a list.
Here’s an example using boxes to illustrate dotted pair notation.
This example shows the pair (rose . violet)
:
--- --- | | |--> violet --- --- | | --> rose
You can combine dotted pair notation with list notation to represent
conveniently a chain of cons cells with a non-nil
final CDR.
You write a dot after the last element of the list, followed by the
CDR of the final cons cell. For example, (rose violet
. buttercup)
is equivalent to (rose . (violet . buttercup))
.
The object looks like this:
--- --- --- --- | | |--> | | |--> buttercup --- --- --- --- | | | | --> rose --> violet
The syntax (rose . violet . buttercup)
is invalid because
there is nothing that it could mean. If anything, it would say to put
buttercup
in the CDR of a cons cell whose CDR is already
used for violet
.
The list (rose violet)
is equivalent to (rose . (violet))
,
and looks like this:
--- --- --- --- | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- | | | | --> rose --> violet
Similarly, the three-element list (rose violet buttercup)
is equivalent to (rose . (violet . (buttercup)))
.
It looks like this:
--- --- --- --- --- --- | | |--> | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- --- --- | | | | | | --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
An association list or alist is a specially-constructed list whose elements are cons cells. In each element, the CAR is considered a key, and the CDR is considered an associated value. (In some cases, the associated value is stored in the CAR of the CDR.) Association lists are often used as stacks, since it is easy to add or remove associations at the front of the list.
For example,
(setq alist-of-colors '((rose . red) (lily . white) (buttercup . yellow)))
sets the variable alist-of-colors
to an alist of three elements. In the
first element, rose
is the key and red
is the value.
See Association Lists, for a further explanation of alists and for functions that work on alists. See Hash Tables, for another kind of lookup table, which is much faster for handling a large number of keys.
An array is composed of an arbitrary number of slots for holding or referring to other Lisp objects, arranged in a contiguous block of memory. Accessing any element of an array takes approximately the same amount of time. In contrast, accessing an element of a list requires time proportional to the position of the element in the list. (Elements at the end of a list take longer to access than elements at the beginning of a list.)
Emacs defines four types of array: strings, vectors, bool-vectors, and char-tables.
A string is an array of characters and a vector is an array of
arbitrary objects. A bool-vector can hold only t
or nil
.
These kinds of array may have any length up to the largest fixnum,
subject to system architecture limits and available memory.
Char-tables are sparse arrays indexed by any valid character code; they
can hold arbitrary objects.
The first element of an array has index zero, the second element has index 1, and so on. This is called zero-origin indexing. For example, an array of four elements has indices 0, 1, 2, and 3. The largest possible index value is one less than the length of the array. Once an array is created, its length is fixed.
All Emacs Lisp arrays are one-dimensional. (Most other programming languages support multidimensional arrays, but they are not essential; you can get the same effect with nested one-dimensional arrays.) Each type of array has its own read syntax; see the following sections for details.
The array type is a subset of the sequence type, and contains the string type, the vector type, the bool-vector type, and the char-table type.
A string is an array of characters. Strings are used for many purposes in Emacs, as can be expected in a text editor; for example, as the names of Lisp symbols, as messages for the user, and to represent text extracted from buffers. Strings in Lisp are constants: evaluation of a string returns the same string.
See Strings and Characters, for functions that operate on strings.
The read syntax for a string is a double-quote, an arbitrary number
of characters, and another double-quote, "like this"
. To
include a double-quote in a string, precede it with a backslash; thus,
"\""
is a string containing just one double-quote
character. Likewise, you can include a backslash by preceding it with
another backslash, like this: "this \\ is a single embedded
backslash"
.
Since a string is an array of characters, you can specify the string
characters using the read syntax of characters, but without the
leading question mark. This is useful for including in string
constants characters that don’t stand for themselves. Thus, control
characters can be specified as escape sequences that start with a
backslash; for example, "foo\r"
yields ‘foo’ followed by
the carriage return character. See Basic Char Syntax, for escape
sequences of other control characters. Similarly, you can use the
special read syntax for control characters (see Control-Character Syntax),
as in "foo\^Ibar"
, which produces a tab character embedded
within a string. You can also use the escape sequences for non-ASCII
characters described in General Escape Syntax, as in
"\N{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE}"
and "\u00e0"
(however, see a caveat with non-ASCII characters in Non-ASCII Characters in Strings).
The newline character is not special in the read syntax for strings; if you write a new line between the double-quotes, it becomes a character in the string. But an escaped newline—one that is preceded by ‘\’—does not become part of the string; i.e., the Lisp reader ignores an escaped newline while reading a string. An escaped space ‘\ ’ is likewise ignored.
"It is useful to include newlines in documentation strings, but the newline is \ ignored if escaped." ⇒ "It is useful to include newlines in documentation strings, but the newline is ignored if escaped."
There are two text representations for non-ASCII characters in Emacs strings: multibyte and unibyte (see Text Representations). Roughly speaking, unibyte strings store raw bytes, while multibyte strings store human-readable text. Each character in a unibyte string is a byte, i.e., its value is between 0 and 255. By contrast, each character in a multibyte string may have a value between 0 to 4194303 (see Character Type). In both cases, characters above 127 are non-ASCII.
You can include a non-ASCII character in a string constant by writing it literally. If the string constant is read from a multibyte source, such as a multibyte buffer or string, or a file that would be visited as multibyte, then Emacs reads each non-ASCII character as a multibyte character and automatically makes the string a multibyte string. If the string constant is read from a unibyte source, then Emacs reads the non-ASCII character as unibyte, and makes the string unibyte.
Instead of writing a character literally into a multibyte string, you can write it as its character code using an escape sequence. See General Escape Syntax, for details about escape sequences.
If you use any Unicode-style escape sequence ‘\uNNNN’ or ‘\U00NNNNNN’ in a string constant (even for an ASCII character), Emacs automatically assumes that it is multibyte.
You can also use hexadecimal escape sequences (‘\xn’) and octal escape sequences (‘\n’) in string constants. But beware: If a string constant contains octal escape sequences or one- or two-digit hexadecimal escape sequences, and these escape sequences all specify unibyte characters (i.e., codepoints less than 256), and there are no other literal non-ASCII characters or Unicode-style escape sequences in the string, then Emacs automatically assumes that it is a unibyte string. That is to say, it assumes that all non-ASCII characters occurring in the string are 8-bit raw bytes.
In hexadecimal and octal escape sequences, the escaped character code may contain a variable number of digits, so the first subsequent character which is not a valid hexadecimal or octal digit terminates the escape sequence. If the next character in a string could be interpreted as a hexadecimal or octal digit, write ‘\ ’ (backslash and space) to terminate the escape sequence. For example, ‘\xe0\ ’ represents one character, ‘a’ with grave accent. ‘\ ’ in a string constant is just like backslash-newline; it does not contribute any character to the string, but it does terminate any preceding hex escape.
You can use the same backslash escape-sequences in a string constant
as in character literals (but do not use the question mark that begins a
character constant). For example, you can write a string containing the
nonprinting characters tab and C-a, with commas and spaces between
them, like this: "\t, \C-a"
. See Character Type, and its
subsections for a description of the various kinds of read syntax for
characters.
However, not all of the characters you can write with backslash escape-sequences are valid in strings. The only control characters that a string can hold are the ASCII control characters. Strings do not distinguish case in ASCII control characters.
Properly speaking, strings cannot hold meta characters; but when a
string is to be used as a key sequence, there is a special convention
that provides a way to represent meta versions of ASCII
characters in a string. If you use the ‘\M-’ syntax to indicate
a meta character in a string constant, this sets the
2**7
bit of the character in the string. If the string is used in
define-key
or lookup-key
, this numeric code is translated
into the equivalent meta character. See Character Type.
Strings cannot hold characters that have the hyper, super, or alt modifiers.
A string can hold properties for the characters it contains, in addition to the characters themselves. This enables programs that copy text between strings and buffers to copy the text’s properties with no special effort. See Text Properties, for an explanation of what text properties mean. Strings with text properties use a special read and print syntax:
#("characters" property-data...)
where property-data consists of zero or more elements, in groups of three as follows:
beg end plist
The elements beg and end are integers, and together specify a range of indices in the string; plist is the property list for that range. For example,
#("foo bar" 0 3 (face bold) 3 4 nil 4 7 (face italic))
represents a string whose textual contents are ‘foo bar’, in which
the first three characters have a face
property with value
bold
, and the last three have a face
property with value
italic
. (The fourth character has no text properties, so its
property list is nil
. It is not actually necessary to mention
ranges with nil
as the property list, since any characters not
mentioned in any range will default to having no properties.)
A vector is a one-dimensional array of elements of any type. It takes a constant amount of time to access any element of a vector. (In a list, the access time of an element is proportional to the distance of the element from the beginning of the list.)
The printed representation of a vector consists of a left square bracket, the elements, and a right square bracket. This is also the read syntax. Like numbers and strings, vectors are considered constants for evaluation.
[1 "two" (three)] ; A vector of three elements.
⇒ [1 "two" (three)]
See Vectors, for functions that work with vectors.
A char-table is a one-dimensional array of elements of any type, indexed by character codes. Char-tables have certain extra features to make them more useful for many jobs that involve assigning information to character codes—for example, a char-table can have a parent to inherit from, a default value, and a small number of extra slots to use for special purposes. A char-table can also specify a single value for a whole character set.
The printed representation of a char-table is like a vector except that there is an extra ‘#^’ at the beginning.1
See Char-Tables, for special functions to operate on char-tables. Uses of char-tables include:
A bool-vector is a one-dimensional array whose elements must
be t
or nil
.
The printed representation of a bool-vector is like a string, except
that it begins with ‘#&’ followed by the length. The string
constant that follows actually specifies the contents of the bool-vector
as a bitmap—each character in the string contains 8 bits, which
specify the next 8 elements of the bool-vector (1 stands for t
,
and 0 for nil
). The least significant bits of the character
correspond to the lowest indices in the bool-vector.
(make-bool-vector 3 t) ⇒ #&3"^G" (make-bool-vector 3 nil) ⇒ #&3"^@"
These results make sense, because the binary code for ‘C-g’ is 111 and ‘C-@’ is the character with code 0.
If the length is not a multiple of 8, the printed representation shows extra elements, but these extras really make no difference. For instance, in the next example, the two bool-vectors are equal, because only the first 3 bits are used:
(equal #&3"\377" #&3"\007") ⇒ t
A hash table is a very fast kind of lookup table, somewhat like an alist in that it maps keys to corresponding values, but much faster. The printed representation of a hash table specifies its properties and contents, like this:
(make-hash-table) ⇒ #s(hash-table size 65 test eql rehash-size 1.5 rehash-threshold 0.8125 data ())
See Hash Tables, for more information about hash tables.
Lisp functions are executable code, just like functions in other
programming languages. In Lisp, unlike most languages, functions are
also Lisp objects. A non-compiled function in Lisp is a lambda
expression: that is, a list whose first element is the symbol
lambda
(see Lambda Expressions).
In most programming languages, it is impossible to have a function without a name. In Lisp, a function has no intrinsic name. A lambda expression can be called as a function even though it has no name; to emphasize this, we also call it an anonymous function (see Anonymous Functions). A named function in Lisp is just a symbol with a valid function in its function cell (see Defining Functions).
Most of the time, functions are called when their names are written in
Lisp expressions in Lisp programs. However, you can construct or obtain
a function object at run time and then call it with the primitive
functions funcall
and apply
. See Calling Functions.
A Lisp macro is a user-defined construct that extends the Lisp
language. It is represented as an object much like a function, but with
different argument-passing semantics. A Lisp macro has the form of a
list whose first element is the symbol macro
and whose CDR
is a Lisp function object, including the lambda
symbol.
Lisp macro objects are usually defined with the built-in
defmacro
macro, but any list that begins with macro
is a
macro as far as Emacs is concerned. See Macros, for an explanation
of how to write a macro.
Warning: Lisp macros and keyboard macros (see Keyboard Macros) are entirely different things. When we use the word “macro” without qualification, we mean a Lisp macro, not a keyboard macro.
A primitive function is a function callable from Lisp but written in the C programming language. Primitive functions are also called subrs or built-in functions. (The word “subr” is derived from “subroutine”.) Most primitive functions evaluate all their arguments when they are called. A primitive function that does not evaluate all its arguments is called a special form (see Special Forms).
It does not matter to the caller of a function whether the function is primitive. However, this does matter if you try to redefine a primitive with a function written in Lisp. The reason is that the primitive function may be called directly from C code. Calls to the redefined function from Lisp will use the new definition, but calls from C code may still use the built-in definition. Therefore, we discourage redefinition of primitive functions.
The term function refers to all Emacs functions, whether written in Lisp or C. See Function Type, for information about the functions written in Lisp.
Primitive functions have no read syntax and print in hash notation with the name of the subroutine.
(symbol-function 'car) ; Access the function cell ; of the symbol. ⇒ #<subr car> (subrp (symbol-function 'car)) ; Is this a primitive function? ⇒ t ; Yes.
Byte-code function objects are produced by byte-compiling Lisp code (see Byte Compilation). Internally, a byte-code function object is much like a vector; however, the evaluator handles this data type specially when it appears in a function call. See Byte-Code Function Objects.
The printed representation and read syntax for a byte-code function object is like that for a vector, with an additional ‘#’ before the opening ‘[’.
A record is much like a vector
. However, the first
element is used to hold its type as returned by type-of
. The
purpose of records is to allow programmers to create objects with new
types that are not built into Emacs.
See Records, for functions that work with records.
A type descriptor is a record
which holds information
about a type. Slot 1 in the record must be a symbol naming the type, and
type-of
relies on this to return the type of record
objects. No other type descriptor slot is used by Emacs; they are
free for use by Lisp extensions.
An example of a type descriptor is any instance of
cl-structure-class
.
An autoload object is a list whose first element is the symbol
autoload
. It is stored as the function definition of a symbol,
where it serves as a placeholder for the real definition. The autoload
object says that the real definition is found in a file of Lisp code
that should be loaded when necessary. It contains the name of the file,
plus some other information about the real definition.
After the file has been loaded, the symbol should have a new function definition that is not an autoload object. The new definition is then called as if it had been there to begin with. From the user’s point of view, the function call works as expected, using the function definition in the loaded file.
An autoload object is usually created with the function
autoload
, which stores the object in the function cell of a
symbol. See Autoload, for more details.
A finalizer object helps Lisp code clean up after objects that are no longer needed. A finalizer holds a Lisp function object. When a finalizer object becomes unreachable after a garbage collection pass, Emacs calls the finalizer’s associated function object. When deciding whether a finalizer is reachable, Emacs does not count references from finalizer objects themselves, allowing you to use finalizers without having to worry about accidentally capturing references to finalized objects themselves.
Errors in finalizers are printed to *Messages*
. Emacs runs
a given finalizer object’s associated function exactly once, even
if that function fails.
Make a finalizer that will run function. function will be called after garbage collection when the returned finalizer object becomes unreachable. If the finalizer object is reachable only through references from finalizer objects, it does not count as reachable for the purpose of deciding whether to run function. function will be run once per finalizer object.
The types in the previous section are used for general programming purposes, and most of them are common to most Lisp dialects. Emacs Lisp provides several additional data types for purposes connected with editing.
A buffer is an object that holds text that can be edited (see Buffers). Most buffers hold the contents of a disk file (see Files) so they can be edited, but some are used for other purposes. Most buffers are also meant to be seen by the user, and therefore displayed, at some time, in a window (see Windows). But a buffer need not be displayed in any window. Each buffer has a designated position called point (see Positions); most editing commands act on the contents of the current buffer in the neighborhood of point. At any time, one buffer is the current buffer.
The contents of a buffer are much like a string, but buffers are not used like strings in Emacs Lisp, and the available operations are different. For example, you can insert text efficiently into an existing buffer, altering the buffer’s contents, whereas inserting text into a string requires concatenating substrings, and the result is an entirely new string object.
Many of the standard Emacs functions manipulate or test the characters in the current buffer; a whole chapter in this manual is devoted to describing these functions (see Text).
Several other data structures are associated with each buffer:
The local keymap and variable list contain entries that individually override global bindings or values. These are used to customize the behavior of programs in different buffers, without actually changing the programs.
A buffer may be indirect, which means it shares the text of another buffer, but presents it differently. See Indirect Buffers.
Buffers have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, showing the buffer name.
(current-buffer) ⇒ #<buffer objects.texi>
A marker denotes a position in a specific buffer. Markers therefore have two components: one for the buffer, and one for the position. Changes in the buffer’s text automatically relocate the position value as necessary to ensure that the marker always points between the same two characters in the buffer.
Markers have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, giving the current character position and the name of the buffer.
(point-marker) ⇒ #<marker at 10779 in objects.texi>
See Markers, for information on how to test, create, copy, and move markers.
A window describes the portion of the screen that Emacs uses to display buffers. Every live window (see Basic Concepts of Emacs Windows) has one associated buffer, whose contents appear in that window. By contrast, a given buffer may appear in one window, no window, or several windows. Windows are grouped on the screen into frames; each window belongs to one and only one frame. See Frame Type.
Though many windows may exist simultaneously, at any time one window is designated the selected window (see Selecting Windows). This is the window where the cursor is (usually) displayed when Emacs is ready for a command. The selected window usually displays the current buffer (see The Current Buffer), but this is not necessarily the case.
Windows have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, giving the window number and the name of the buffer being displayed. The window numbers exist to identify windows uniquely, since the buffer displayed in any given window can change frequently.
(selected-window) ⇒ #<window 1 on objects.texi>
See Windows, for a description of the functions that work on windows.
A frame is a screen area that contains one or more Emacs windows; we also use the term “frame” to refer to the Lisp object that Emacs uses to refer to the screen area.
Frames have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, giving the frame’s title, plus its address in core (useful to identify the frame uniquely).
(selected-frame) ⇒ #<frame emacs@psilocin.gnu.org 0xdac80>
See Frames, for a description of the functions that work on frames.
A terminal is a device capable of displaying one or more Emacs frames (see Frame Type).
Terminals have no read syntax. They print in hash notation giving the terminal’s ordinal number and its TTY device file name.
(get-device-terminal nil) ⇒ #<terminal 1 on /dev/tty>
A window configuration stores information about the positions, sizes, and contents of the windows in a frame, so you can recreate the same arrangement of windows later.
Window configurations do not have a read syntax; their print syntax looks like ‘#<window-configuration>’. See Window Configurations, for a description of several functions related to window configurations.
A frame configuration stores information about the positions,
sizes, and contents of the windows in all frames. It is not a
primitive type—it is actually a list whose CAR is
frame-configuration
and whose CDR is an alist. Each alist
element describes one frame, which appears as the CAR of that
element.
See Frame Configurations, for a description of several functions related to frame configurations.
The word process usually means a running program. Emacs itself runs in a process of this sort. However, in Emacs Lisp, a process is a Lisp object that designates a subprocess created by the Emacs process. Programs such as shells, GDB, ftp, and compilers, running in subprocesses of Emacs, extend the capabilities of Emacs. An Emacs subprocess takes textual input from Emacs and returns textual output to Emacs for further manipulation. Emacs can also send signals to the subprocess.
Process objects have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, giving the name of the process:
(process-list) ⇒ (#<process shell>)
See Processes, for information about functions that create, delete, return information about, send input or signals to, and receive output from processes.
A thread in Emacs represents a separate thread of Emacs Lisp execution. It runs its own Lisp program, has its own current buffer, and can have subprocesses locked to it, i.e. subprocesses whose output only this thread can accept. See Threads.
Thread objects have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, giving the name of the thread (if it has been given a name) or its address in core:
(all-threads) ⇒ (#<thread 0176fc40>)
A mutex is an exclusive lock that threads can own and disown, in order to synchronize between them. See Mutexes.
Mutex objects have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, giving the name of the mutex (if it has been given a name) or its address in core:
(make-mutex "my-mutex") ⇒ #<mutex my-mutex> (make-mutex) ⇒ #<mutex 01c7e4e0>
A condition variable is a device for a more complex thread synchronization than the one supported by a mutex. A thread can wait on a condition variable, to be woken up when some other thread notifies the condition.
Condition variable objects have no read syntax. They print in hash notation, giving the name of the condition variable (if it has been given a name) or its address in core:
(make-condition-variable (make-mutex)) ⇒ #<condvar 01c45ae8>
A stream is an object that can be used as a source or sink for characters—either to supply characters for input or to accept them as output. Many different types can be used this way: markers, buffers, strings, and functions. Most often, input streams (character sources) obtain characters from the keyboard, a buffer, or a file, and output streams (character sinks) send characters to a buffer, such as a *Help* buffer, or to the echo area.
The object nil
, in addition to its other meanings, may be used
as a stream. It stands for the value of the variable
standard-input
or standard-output
. Also, the object
t
as a stream specifies input using the minibuffer
(see Minibuffers) or output in the echo area (see The Echo Area).
Streams have no special printed representation or read syntax, and print as whatever primitive type they are.
See Reading and Printing Lisp Objects, for a description of functions related to streams, including parsing and printing functions.
A keymap maps keys typed by the user to commands. This mapping
controls how the user’s command input is executed. A keymap is actually
a list whose CAR is the symbol keymap
.
See Keymaps, for information about creating keymaps, handling prefix keys, local as well as global keymaps, and changing key bindings.
An overlay specifies properties that apply to a part of a buffer. Each overlay applies to a specified range of the buffer, and contains a property list (a list whose elements are alternating property names and values). Overlay properties are used to present parts of the buffer temporarily in a different display style. Overlays have no read syntax, and print in hash notation, giving the buffer name and range of positions.
See Overlays, for information on how you can create and use overlays.
A font specifies how to display text on a graphical terminal. There are actually three separate font types—font objects, font specs, and font entities—each of which has slightly different properties. None of them have a read syntax; their print syntax looks like ‘#<font-object>’, ‘#<font-spec>’, and ‘#<font-entity>’ respectively. See Low-Level Font Representation, for a description of these Lisp objects.
An xwidget is a special display element, such as a web browser, that can be embedded inside a buffer. Each window that displays an xwidget will also have an xwidget view, which on X-Windows corresponds to a single X window used to display the widget.
Neither of these objects are readable; their print syntaxes look like ‘#<xwidget>’ and ‘#<xwidget-view>’, respectively. See Embedded Native Widgets, for a more detailed description of xwidgets.
To represent shared or circular structures within a complex of Lisp objects, you can use the reader constructs ‘#n=’ and ‘#n#’.
Use #n=
before an object to label it for later reference;
subsequently, you can use #n#
to refer the same object in
another place. Here, n is some integer. For example, here is how
to make a list in which the first element recurs as the third element:
(#1=(a) b #1#)
This differs from ordinary syntax such as this
((a) b (a))
which would result in a list whose first and third elements look alike but are not the same Lisp object. This shows the difference:
(prog1 nil (setq x '(#1=(a) b #1#))) (eq (nth 0 x) (nth 2 x)) ⇒ t (setq x '((a) b (a))) (eq (nth 0 x) (nth 2 x)) ⇒ nil
You can also use the same syntax to make a circular structure, which appears as an element within itself. Here is an example:
#1=(a #1#)
This makes a list whose second element is the list itself. Here’s how you can see that it really works:
(prog1 nil (setq x '#1=(a #1#))) (eq x (cadr x)) ⇒ t
The Lisp printer can produce this syntax to record circular and shared
structure in a Lisp object, if you bind the variable print-circle
to a non-nil
value. See Variables Affecting Output.
The Emacs Lisp interpreter itself does not perform type checking on the actual arguments passed to functions when they are called. It could not do so, since function arguments in Lisp do not have declared data types, as they do in other programming languages. It is therefore up to the individual function to test whether each actual argument belongs to a type that the function can use.
All built-in functions do check the types of their actual arguments
when appropriate, and signal a wrong-type-argument
error if an
argument is of the wrong type. For example, here is what happens if you
pass an argument to +
that it cannot handle:
(+ 2 'a) error→ Wrong type argument: number-or-marker-p, a
If you want your program to handle different types differently, you must do explicit type checking. The most common way to check the type of an object is to call a type predicate function. Emacs has a type predicate for each type, as well as some predicates for combinations of types.
A type predicate function takes one argument; it returns t
if
the argument belongs to the appropriate type, and nil
otherwise.
Following a general Lisp convention for predicate functions, most type
predicates’ names end with ‘p’.
Here is an example which uses the predicates listp
to check for
a list and symbolp
to check for a symbol.
(defun add-on (x) (cond ((symbolp x) ;; If X is a symbol, put it on LIST. (setq list (cons x list))) ((listp x) ;; If X is a list, add its elements to LIST. (setq list (append x list))) (t ;; We handle only symbols and lists. (error "Invalid argument %s in add-on" x))))
Here is a table of predefined type predicates, in alphabetical order, with references to further information.
atom
See atom.
arrayp
See arrayp.
bignump
See floatp.
bool-vector-p
See bool-vector-p.
booleanp
See booleanp.
bufferp
See bufferp.
byte-code-function-p
See byte-code-function-p.
compiled-function-p
See compiled-function-p.
case-table-p
See case-table-p.
char-or-string-p
See char-or-string-p.
char-table-p
See char-table-p.
commandp
See commandp.
condition-variable-p
See condition-variable-p.
consp
See consp.
custom-variable-p
See custom-variable-p.
fixnump
See floatp.
floatp
See floatp.
fontp
frame-configuration-p
frame-live-p
See frame-live-p.
framep
See framep.
functionp
See functionp.
hash-table-p
See hash-table-p.
integer-or-marker-p
See integer-or-marker-p.
integerp
See integerp.
keymapp
See keymapp.
keywordp
listp
See listp.
markerp
See markerp.
mutexp
See mutexp.
nlistp
See nlistp.
number-or-marker-p
See number-or-marker-p.
numberp
See numberp.
overlayp
See overlayp.
processp
See processp.
recordp
See recordp.
sequencep
See sequencep.
string-or-null-p
See string-or-null-p.
stringp
See stringp.
subrp
See subrp.
symbolp
See symbolp.
syntax-table-p
See syntax-table-p.
threadp
See threadp.
vectorp
See vectorp.
wholenump
See wholenump.
window-configuration-p
window-live-p
See window-live-p.
windowp
See windowp.
The most general way to check the type of an object is to call the
function type-of
. Recall that each object belongs to one and
only one primitive type; type-of
tells you which one (see Lisp Data Types). But type-of
knows nothing about non-primitive
types. In most cases, it is more convenient to use type predicates than
type-of
.
This function returns a symbol naming the primitive type of
object. The value is one of the symbols bool-vector
,
buffer
, char-table
, compiled-function
,
condition-variable
, cons
, finalizer
,
float
, font-entity
, font-object
,
font-spec
, frame
, hash-table
, integer
,
marker
, mutex
, overlay
, process
,
string
, subr
, symbol
, thread
,
vector
, window
, or window-configuration
.
However, if object is a record, the type specified by its first
slot is returned; Records.
(type-of 1) ⇒ integer
(type-of 'nil)
⇒ symbol
(type-of '()) ; ()
is nil
.
⇒ symbol
(type-of '(x))
⇒ cons
(type-of (record 'foo))
⇒ foo
Here we describe functions that test for equality between two objects. Other functions test equality of contents between objects of specific types, e.g., strings. For these predicates, see the appropriate chapter describing the data type.
This function returns t
if object1 and object2 are
the same object, and nil
otherwise.
If object1 and object2 are symbols with the
same name, they are normally the same object—but see Creating and Interning Symbols for exceptions. For other non-numeric types (e.g., lists, vectors,
strings), two arguments with the same contents or elements are not
necessarily eq
to each other: they are eq
only if they
are the same object, meaning that a change in the contents of one will
be reflected by the same change in the contents of the other.
If object1 and object2 are numbers with differing types or values,
then they cannot be the same object and eq
returns nil
.
If they are fixnums with the same value,
then they are the same object and eq
returns t
.
If they were computed separately but happen to have the same value
and the same non-fixnum numeric type, then they might or might not be
the same object, and eq
returns t
or nil
depending on whether the Lisp interpreter created one object or two.
(eq 'foo 'foo) ⇒ t
(eq ?A ?A) ⇒ t
(eq 3.0 3.0) ⇒ t or nil ;; Equal floats may or may not be the same object.
(eq (make-string 3 ?A) (make-string 3 ?A)) ⇒ nil
(eq "asdf" "asdf") ⇒ t or nil ;; Equal string constants or may not be the same object.
(eq '(1 (2 (3))) '(1 (2 (3)))) ⇒ nil
(setq foo '(1 (2 (3)))) ⇒ (1 (2 (3))) (eq foo foo) ⇒ t (eq foo '(1 (2 (3)))) ⇒ nil
(eq [(1 2) 3] [(1 2) 3]) ⇒ nil
(eq (point-marker) (point-marker)) ⇒ nil
The make-symbol
function returns an uninterned symbol, distinct
from the symbol that is used if you write the name in a Lisp expression.
Distinct symbols with the same name are not eq
. See Creating and Interning Symbols.
(eq (make-symbol "foo") 'foo) ⇒ nil
The Emacs Lisp byte compiler may collapse identical literal objects,
such as literal strings, into references to the same object, with the
effect that the byte-compiled code will compare such objects as
eq
, while the interpreted version of the same code will not.
Therefore, your code should never rely on objects with the same
literal contents being either eq
or not eq
, it should
instead use functions that compare object contents such as
equal
, described below. Similarly, your code should not modify
literal objects (e.g., put text properties on literal strings), since
doing that might affect other literal objects of the same contents, if
the byte compiler collapses them.
This function returns t
if object1 and object2 have
equal components, and nil
otherwise. Whereas eq
tests
if its arguments are the same object, equal
looks inside
nonidentical arguments to see if their elements or contents are the
same. So, if two objects are eq
, they are equal
, but
the converse is not always true.
(equal 'foo 'foo) ⇒ t
(equal 456 456) ⇒ t
(equal "asdf" "asdf") ⇒ t
(eq "asdf" "asdf") ⇒ nil
(equal '(1 (2 (3))) '(1 (2 (3)))) ⇒ t
(eq '(1 (2 (3))) '(1 (2 (3)))) ⇒ nil
(equal [(1 2) 3] [(1 2) 3]) ⇒ t
(eq [(1 2) 3] [(1 2) 3]) ⇒ nil
(equal (point-marker) (point-marker)) ⇒ t
(eq (point-marker) (point-marker)) ⇒ nil
Comparison of strings is case-sensitive, but does not take account of
text properties—it compares only the characters in the strings.
See Text Properties. Use equal-including-properties
to also
compare text properties. For technical reasons, a unibyte string and
a multibyte string are equal
if and only if they contain the
same sequence of character codes and all these codes are in the range
0 through 127 (ASCII).
(equal "asdf" "ASDF") ⇒ nil
The equal
function recursively compares the contents of objects
if they are integers, strings, markers, vectors, bool-vectors,
byte-code function objects, char-tables, records, or font objects.
Other objects are considered equal
only if they are eq
.
For example, two distinct buffers are never considered equal
,
even if their textual contents are the same.
For equal
, equality is defined recursively; for example, given
two cons cells x and y, (equal x y)
returns t
if and only if both the expressions below return
t
:
(equal (car x) (car y)) (equal (cdr x) (cdr y))
Comparing circular lists may therefore cause deep recursion that leads
to an error, and this may result in counterintuitive behavior such as
(equal a b)
returning t
whereas (equal b a)
signals an error.
This function behaves like equal
in all cases but also requires
that for two strings to be equal, they have the same text properties.
(equal "asdf" (propertize "asdf" 'asdf t)) ⇒ t
(equal-including-properties "asdf" (propertize "asdf" 'asdf t)) ⇒ nil
Some Lisp objects should never change. For example, the Lisp
expression "aaa"
yields a string, but you should not change
its contents. And some objects cannot be changed; for example,
although you can create a new number by calculating one, Lisp provides
no operation to change the value of an existing number.
Other Lisp objects are mutable: it is safe to change their values via destructive operations involving side effects. For example, an existing marker can be changed by moving the marker to point to somewhere else.
Although numbers never change and all markers are mutable,
some types have members some of which are mutable and others not. These
types include conses, vectors, and strings. For example,
although "cons"
and (symbol-name 'cons)
both yield
strings that should not be changed, (copy-sequence "cons")
and
(make-string 3 ?a)
both yield mutable strings that can be
changed via later calls to aset
.
A mutable object stops being mutable if it is part of an expression that is evaluated. For example:
(let* ((x (list 0.5)) (y (eval (list 'quote x)))) (setcar x 1.5) ;; The program should not do this. y)
Although the list (0.5)
was mutable when it was created, it should not
have been changed via setcar
because it was given to eval
. The
reverse does not occur: an object that should not be changed never
becomes mutable afterwards.
If a program attempts to change objects that should not be changed, the resulting behavior is undefined: the Lisp interpreter might signal an error, or it might crash or behave unpredictably in other ways.2
When similar constants occur as parts of a program, the Lisp
interpreter might save time or space by reusing existing constants or
their components. For example, (eq "abc" "abc")
returns
t
if the interpreter creates only one instance of the string
literal "abc"
, and returns nil
if it creates two
instances. Lisp programs should be written so that they work
regardless of whether this optimization is in use.
GNU Emacs supports two numeric data types: integers and floating-point numbers. Integers are whole numbers such as −3, 0, 7, 13, and 511. Floating-point numbers are numbers with fractional parts, such as −4.5, 0.0, and 2.71828. They can also be expressed in exponential notation: ‘1.5e2’ is the same as ‘150.0’; here, ‘e2’ stands for ten to the second power, and that is multiplied by 1.5. Integer computations are exact. Floating-point computations often involve rounding errors, as the numbers have a fixed amount of precision.
The Lisp reader reads an integer as a nonempty sequence of decimal digits with optional initial sign and optional final period.
1 ; The integer 1. 1. ; The integer 1. +1 ; Also the integer 1. -1 ; The integer −1. 0 ; The integer 0. -0 ; The integer 0.
The syntax for integers in bases other than 10 consists of ‘#’ followed by a radix indication followed by one or more digits. The radix indications are ‘b’ for binary, ‘o’ for octal, ‘x’ for hex, and ‘radixr’ for radix radix. Thus, ‘#binteger’ reads integer in binary, and ‘#radixrinteger’ reads integer in radix radix. Allowed values of radix run from 2 to 36, and allowed digits are the first radix characters taken from ‘0’–‘9’, ‘A’–‘Z’. Letter case is ignored and there is no initial sign or final period. For example:
#b101100 ⇒ 44 #o54 ⇒ 44 #x2c ⇒ 44 #24r1k ⇒ 44
To understand how various functions work on integers, especially the bitwise operators (see Bitwise Operations on Integers), it is often helpful to view the numbers in their binary form.
In binary, the decimal integer 5 looks like this:
...000101
(The ellipsis ‘…’ stands for a conceptually infinite number of bits that match the leading bit; here, an infinite number of 0 bits. Later examples also use this ‘…’ notation.)
The integer −1 looks like this:
...111111
−1 is represented as all ones. (This is called two’s complement notation.)
Subtracting 4 from −1 returns the negative integer −5. In binary, the decimal integer 4 is 100. Consequently, −5 looks like this:
...111011
Many of the functions described in this chapter accept markers for arguments in place of numbers. (See Markers.) Since the actual arguments to such functions may be either numbers or markers, we often give these arguments the name number-or-marker. When the argument value is a marker, its position value is used and its buffer is ignored.
In Emacs Lisp, text characters are represented by integers. Any
integer between zero and the value of (max-char)
, inclusive, is
considered to be valid as a character. See Character Codes.
Integers in Emacs Lisp are not limited to the machine word size.
Under the hood, though, there are two kinds of integers: smaller ones,
called fixnums, and larger ones, called bignums. Although
Emacs Lisp code ordinarily should not depend on whether an integer is
a fixnum or a bignum, older Emacs versions support only fixnums, some
functions in Emacs still accept only fixnums, and older Emacs Lisp
code may have trouble when given bignums. For example, while older
Emacs Lisp code could safely compare integers for numeric equality
with eq
, the presence of bignums means that equality predicates
like eql
and =
should now be used to compare integers.
The range of values for bignums is limited by the amount of main
memory, by machine characteristics such as the size of the word used
to represent a bignum’s exponent, and by the integer-width
variable. These limits are typically much more generous than the
limits for fixnums. A bignum is never numerically equal to a fixnum;
Emacs always represents an integer in fixnum range as a fixnum, not a
bignum.
The range of values for a fixnum depends on the machine. The minimum range is −536,870,912 to 536,870,911 (30 bits; i.e., −2**29 to 2**29 − 1), but many machines provide a wider range.
The value of this variable is the greatest “small” integer that Emacs Lisp can handle. Typical values are 2**29 − 1 on 32-bit and 2**61 − 1 on 64-bit platforms.
The value of this variable is the numerically least “small” integer that Emacs Lisp can handle. It is negative. Typical values are −2**29 on 32-bit and −2**61 on 64-bit platforms.
The value of this variable is a nonnegative integer that controls whether Emacs signals a range error when a large integer would be calculated. Integers with absolute values less than 2**n, where n is this variable’s value, do not signal a range error. Attempts to create larger integers typically signal a range error, although there might be no signal if a larger integer can be created cheaply. Setting this variable to a large number can be costly if a computation creates huge integers.
Floating-point numbers are useful for representing numbers that are
not integral. The range of floating-point numbers is the same as the
range of the C data type double
on the machine you are using.
On almost all computers supported by Emacs, this is IEEE
binary64 floating point format, which is standardized by
IEEE Std
754-2019 and is discussed further in David Goldberg’s paper
“What Every Computer Scientist Should Know About Floating-Point
Arithmetic”. On modern platforms, floating-point operations follow
the IEEE-754 standard closely; however, results are not always rounded
correctly on some systems, notably 32-bit x86.
On some old computer systems, Emacs may not use IEEE floating-point. We know of one such system on which Emacs runs correctly, but does not follow IEEE-754: the VAX running NetBSD using GCC 10.4.0, where the VAX ‘D_Floating’ format is used instead. IBM System/370-derived mainframes and their XL/C compiler are also capable of utilizing a hexadecimal floating point format, but Emacs has not yet been built in such a configuration.
The read syntax for floating-point numbers requires either a decimal point, an exponent, or both. Optional signs (‘+’ or ‘-’) precede the number and its exponent. For example, ‘1500.0’, ‘+15e2’, ‘15.0e+2’, ‘+1500000e-3’, and ‘.15e4’ are five ways of writing a floating-point number whose value is 1500. They are all equivalent. Like Common Lisp, Emacs Lisp requires at least one digit after a decimal point in a floating-point number that does not have an exponent; ‘1500.’ is an integer, not a floating-point number.
Emacs Lisp treats -0.0
as numerically equal to ordinary zero
with respect to numeric comparisons like =
. This follows the
IEEE floating-point standard, which says -0.0
and
0.0
are numerically equal even though other operations can
distinguish them.
The IEEE floating-point standard supports positive
infinity and negative infinity as floating-point values. It also
provides for a class of values called NaN, or “not a number”;
numerical functions return such values in cases where there is no
correct answer. For example, (/ 0.0 0.0)
returns a NaN.
A NaN is never numerically equal to any value, not even to itself.
NaNs carry a sign and a significand, and non-numeric functions treat
two NaNs as equal when their
signs and significands agree. Significands of NaNs are
machine-dependent, as are the digits in their string representation.
NaNs are not available on systems which do not use IEEE floating-point arithmetic; if the read syntax for a NaN is used on a VAX, for example, the reader signals an error.
When NaNs and signed zeros are involved, non-numeric functions like
eql
, equal
, sxhash-eql
, sxhash-equal
and
gethash
determine whether values are indistinguishable, not
whether they are numerically equal. For example, when x and
y are the same NaN, (equal x y)
returns t
whereas
(= x y)
uses numeric comparison and returns nil
;
conversely, (equal 0.0 -0.0)
returns nil
whereas
(= 0.0 -0.0)
returns t
.
Here are read syntaxes for these special floating-point values:
‘1.0e+INF’ and ‘-1.0e+INF’
‘0.0e+NaN’ and ‘-0.0e+NaN’
The following functions are specialized for handling floating-point numbers:
This predicate returns t
if its floating-point argument is a NaN,
nil
otherwise.
This function returns a cons cell (s . e)
,
where s and e are respectively the significand and
exponent of the floating-point number x.
If x is finite, then s is a floating-point number between 0.5 (inclusive) and 1.0 (exclusive), e is an integer, and x = s * 2**e. If x is zero or infinity, then s is the same as x. If x is a NaN, then s is also a NaN. If x is zero, then e is 0.
Given a numeric significand s and an integer exponent e, this function returns the floating point number s * 2**e.
This function copies the sign of x2 to the value of x1, and returns the result. x1 and x2 must be floating point.
This function returns the binary exponent of x. More precisely, if x is finite and nonzero, the value is the logarithm base 2 of |x|, rounded down to an integer. If x is zero or infinite, the value is infinity; if x is a NaN, the value is a NaN.
(logb 10) ⇒ 3 (logb 10.0e20) ⇒ 69 (logb 0) ⇒ -1.0e+INF
The functions in this section test for numbers, or for a specific
type of number. The functions integerp
and floatp
can
take any type of Lisp object as argument (they would not be of much
use otherwise), but the zerop
predicate requires a number as
its argument. See also integer-or-marker-p
and
number-or-marker-p
, in Predicates on Markers.
This predicate tests whether its argument is a large integer, and
returns t
if so, nil
otherwise. Unlike small integers,
large integers can be =
or eql
even if they are not eq
.
This predicate tests whether its argument is a small integer, and
returns t
if so, nil
otherwise. Small integers can be
compared with eq
.
This predicate tests whether its argument is floating point
and returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This predicate tests whether its argument is an integer, and returns
t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This predicate tests whether its argument is a number (either integer or
floating point), and returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This predicate (whose name comes from the phrase “natural number”)
tests to see whether its argument is a nonnegative integer, and
returns t
if so, nil
otherwise. 0 is considered
non-negative.
wholenump
is a synonym for natnump
.
This predicate tests whether its argument is zero, and returns t
if so, nil
otherwise. The argument must be a number.
(zerop x)
is equivalent to (= x 0)
.
To test numbers for numerical equality, you should normally use
=
instead of non-numeric comparison predicates like eq
,
eql
and equal
. Distinct floating-point and large
integer objects can be numerically equal. If you use eq
to
compare them, you test whether they are the same object; if you
use eql
or equal
, you test whether their values are
indistinguishable. In contrast, =
uses numeric
comparison, and sometimes returns t
when a non-numeric
comparison would return nil
and vice versa. See Floating-Point Basics.
In Emacs Lisp, if two fixnums are numerically equal, they are the
same Lisp object. That is, eq
is equivalent to =
on
fixnums. It is sometimes convenient to use eq
for comparing
an unknown value with a fixnum, because eq
does not report an
error if the unknown value is not a number—it accepts arguments of
any type. By contrast, =
signals an error if the arguments are
not numbers or markers. However, it is better programming practice to
use =
if you can, even for comparing integers.
Sometimes it is useful to compare numbers with eql
or equal
,
which treat two numbers as equal if they have the same data type (both
integers, or both floating point) and the same value. By contrast,
=
can treat an integer and a floating-point number as equal.
See Equality Predicates.
There is another wrinkle: because floating-point arithmetic is not exact, it is often a bad idea to check for equality of floating-point values. Usually it is better to test for approximate equality. Here’s a function to do this:
(defvar fuzz-factor 1.0e-6) (defun approx-equal (x y) (or (= x y) (< (/ (abs (- x y)) (max (abs x) (abs y))) fuzz-factor)))
This function tests whether all its arguments are numerically equal,
and returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This function acts like eq
except when both arguments are
numbers. It compares numbers by type and numeric value, so that
(eql 1.0 1)
returns nil
, but (eql 1.0 1.0)
and
(eql 1 1)
both return t
. This can be used to compare
large integers as well as small ones.
Floating-point values with the same sign, exponent and fraction are eql
.
This differs from numeric comparison: (eql 0.0 -0.0)
returns
nil
and (eql 0.0e+NaN 0.0e+NaN)
returns t
,
whereas =
does the opposite.
This function tests whether its arguments are numerically equal, and
returns t
if they are not, and nil
if they are.
This function tests whether each argument is strictly less than the
following argument. It returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This function tests whether each argument is less than or equal to
the following argument. It returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This function tests whether each argument is strictly greater than
the following argument. It returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This function tests whether each argument is greater than or equal to
the following argument. It returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This function returns the largest of its arguments.
(max 20) ⇒ 20 (max 1 2.5) ⇒ 2.5 (max 1 3 2.5) ⇒ 3
This function returns the smallest of its arguments.
(min -4 1) ⇒ -4
This function returns the absolute value of number.
To convert an integer to floating point, use the function float
.
This returns number converted to floating point.
If number is already floating point, float
returns
it unchanged.
There are four functions to convert floating-point numbers to
integers; they differ in how they round. All accept an argument
number and an optional argument divisor. Both arguments
may be integers or floating-point numbers. divisor may also be
nil
. If divisor is nil
or omitted, these
functions convert number to an integer, or return it unchanged
if it already is an integer. If divisor is non-nil
, they
divide number by divisor and convert the result to an
integer. If divisor is zero (whether integer or
floating point), Emacs signals an arith-error
error.
This returns number, converted to an integer by rounding towards zero.
(truncate 1.2) ⇒ 1 (truncate 1.7) ⇒ 1 (truncate -1.2) ⇒ -1 (truncate -1.7) ⇒ -1
This returns number, converted to an integer by rounding downward (towards negative infinity).
If divisor is specified, this uses the kind of division
operation that corresponds to mod
, rounding downward.
(floor 1.2) ⇒ 1 (floor 1.7) ⇒ 1 (floor -1.2) ⇒ -2 (floor -1.7) ⇒ -2 (floor 5.99 3) ⇒ 1
This returns number, converted to an integer by rounding upward (towards positive infinity).
(ceiling 1.2) ⇒ 2 (ceiling 1.7) ⇒ 2 (ceiling -1.2) ⇒ -1 (ceiling -1.7) ⇒ -1
This returns number, converted to an integer by rounding towards the nearest integer. Rounding a value equidistant between two integers returns the even integer.
(round 1.2) ⇒ 1 (round 1.7) ⇒ 2 (round -1.2) ⇒ -1 (round -1.7) ⇒ -2
Emacs Lisp provides the traditional four arithmetic operations
(addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division), as well as
remainder and modulus functions, and functions to add or subtract 1.
Except for %
, each of these functions accepts both integer and
floating-point arguments, and returns a floating-point number if any
argument is floating point.
This function returns number-or-marker plus 1. For example,
(setq foo 4) ⇒ 4 (1+ foo) ⇒ 5
This function is not analogous to the C operator ++
—it does not
increment a variable. It just computes a sum. Thus, if we continue,
foo ⇒ 4
If you want to increment the variable, you must use setq
,
like this:
(setq foo (1+ foo)) ⇒ 5
This function returns number-or-marker minus 1.
This function adds its arguments together. When given no arguments,
+
returns 0.
(+) ⇒ 0 (+ 1) ⇒ 1 (+ 1 2 3 4) ⇒ 10
The -
function serves two purposes: negation and subtraction.
When -
has a single argument, the value is the negative of the
argument. When there are multiple arguments, -
subtracts each of
the more-numbers-or-markers from number-or-marker,
cumulatively. If there are no arguments, the result is 0.
(- 10 1 2 3 4) ⇒ 0 (- 10) ⇒ -10 (-) ⇒ 0
This function multiplies its arguments together, and returns the
product. When given no arguments, *
returns 1.
(*) ⇒ 1 (* 1) ⇒ 1 (* 1 2 3 4) ⇒ 24
With one or more divisors, this function divides number by each divisor in divisors in turn, and returns the quotient. With no divisors, this function returns 1/number, i.e., the multiplicative inverse of number. Each argument may be a number or a marker.
If all the arguments are integers, the result is an integer, obtained by rounding the quotient towards zero after each division.
(/ 6 2) ⇒ 3
(/ 5 2) ⇒ 2
(/ 5.0 2) ⇒ 2.5
(/ 5 2.0) ⇒ 2.5
(/ 5.0 2.0) ⇒ 2.5
(/ 4.0) ⇒ 0.25
(/ 4) ⇒ 0
(/ 25 3 2) ⇒ 4
(/ -17 6) ⇒ -2
If you divide an integer by the integer 0, Emacs signals an
arith-error
error (see Errors). On systems using IEEE-754
floating-point, floating-point division of a nonzero number by zero
yields either positive or negative infinity (see Floating-Point Basics);
otherwise, an arith-error
is signaled as usual.
This function returns the integer remainder after division of dividend by divisor. The arguments must be integers or markers.
For any two integers dividend and divisor,
(+ (% dividend divisor) (* (/ dividend divisor) divisor))
always equals dividend if divisor is nonzero.
(% 9 4) ⇒ 1 (% -9 4) ⇒ -1 (% 9 -4) ⇒ 1 (% -9 -4) ⇒ -1
This function returns the value of dividend modulo divisor; in other words, the remainder after division of dividend by divisor, but with the same sign as divisor. The arguments must be numbers or markers.
Unlike %
, mod
permits floating-point arguments; it
rounds the quotient downward (towards minus infinity) to an integer,
and uses that quotient to compute the remainder.
If divisor is zero, mod
signals an arith-error
error if both arguments are integers, and returns a NaN otherwise.
(mod 9 4) ⇒ 1
(mod -9 4) ⇒ 3
(mod 9 -4) ⇒ -3
(mod -9 -4) ⇒ -1
(mod 5.5 2.5) ⇒ .5
For any two numbers dividend and divisor,
(+ (mod dividend divisor) (* (floor dividend divisor) divisor))
always equals dividend, subject to rounding error if either
argument is floating point and to an arith-error
if dividend is an
integer and divisor is 0. For floor
, see Numeric Conversions.
The functions ffloor
, fceiling
, fround
, and
ftruncate
take a floating-point argument and return a floating-point
result whose value is a nearby integer. ffloor
returns the
nearest integer below; fceiling
, the nearest integer above;
ftruncate
, the nearest integer in the direction towards zero;
fround
, the nearest integer.
This function rounds float to the next lower integral value, and returns that value as a floating-point number.
This function rounds float to the next higher integral value, and returns that value as a floating-point number.
This function rounds float towards zero to an integral value, and returns that value as a floating-point number.
This function rounds float to the nearest integral value, and returns that value as a floating-point number. Rounding a value equidistant between two integers returns the even integer.
In a computer, an integer is represented as a binary number, a sequence of bits (digits which are either zero or one). Conceptually the bit sequence is infinite on the left, with the most-significant bits being all zeros or all ones. A bitwise operation acts on the individual bits of such a sequence. For example, shifting moves the whole sequence left or right one or more places, reproducing the same pattern moved over.
The bitwise operations in Emacs Lisp apply only to integers.
ash
(arithmetic shift) shifts the bits in integer1
to the left count places, or to the right if count is
negative. Left shifts introduce zero bits on the right; right shifts
discard the rightmost bits. Considered as an integer operation,
ash
multiplies integer1 by
2**count,
and then converts the result to an integer by rounding downward, toward
minus infinity.
Here are examples of ash
, shifting a pattern of bits one place
to the left and to the right. These examples show only the low-order
bits of the binary pattern; leading bits all agree with the
highest-order bit shown. As you can see, shifting left by one is
equivalent to multiplying by two, whereas shifting right by one is
equivalent to dividing by two and then rounding toward minus infinity.
(ash 7 1) ⇒ 14
;; Decimal 7 becomes decimal 14.
...000111
⇒
...001110
(ash 7 -1) ⇒ 3 ...000111 ⇒ ...000011
(ash -7 1) ⇒ -14 ...111001 ⇒ ...110010
(ash -7 -1) ⇒ -4 ...111001 ⇒ ...111100
Here are examples of shifting left or right by two bits:
; binary values (ash 5 2) ; 5 = ...000101 ⇒ 20 ; = ...010100 (ash -5 2) ; -5 = ...111011 ⇒ -20 ; = ...101100
(ash 5 -2)
⇒ 1 ; = ...000001
(ash -5 -2)
⇒ -2 ; = ...111110
lsh
, which is an abbreviation for logical shift, shifts the
bits in integer1 to the left count places, or to the right
if count is negative, bringing zeros into the vacated bits. If
count is negative, then integer1 must be either a fixnum
or a positive bignum, and lsh
treats a negative fixnum as if it
were unsigned by subtracting twice most-negative-fixnum
before
shifting, producing a nonnegative result. This quirky behavior dates
back to when Emacs supported only fixnums; nowadays ash
is a
better choice.
As lsh
behaves like ash
except when integer1 and
count1 are both negative, the following examples focus on these
exceptional cases. These examples assume 30-bit fixnums.
; binary values (ash -7 -1) ; -7 = ...111111111111111111111111111001 ⇒ -4 ; = ...111111111111111111111111111100 (lsh -7 -1) ⇒ 536870908 ; = ...011111111111111111111111111100
(ash -5 -2) ; -5 = ...111111111111111111111111111011 ⇒ -2 ; = ...111111111111111111111111111110 (lsh -5 -2) ⇒ 268435454 ; = ...001111111111111111111111111110
This function returns the bitwise AND of the arguments: the nth bit is 1 in the result if, and only if, the nth bit is 1 in all the arguments.
For example, using 4-bit binary numbers, the bitwise AND of 13 and 12 is 12: 1101 combined with 1100 produces 1100. In both the binary numbers, the leftmost two bits are both 1 so the leftmost two bits of the returned value are both 1. However, for the rightmost two bits, each is 0 in at least one of the arguments, so the rightmost two bits of the returned value are both 0.
Therefore,
(logand 13 12) ⇒ 12
If logand
is not passed any argument, it returns a value of
−1. This number is an identity element for logand
because its binary representation consists entirely of ones. If
logand
is passed just one argument, it returns that argument.
; binary values (logand 14 13) ; 14 = ...001110 ; 13 = ...001101 ⇒ 12 ; 12 = ...001100
(logand 14 13 4) ; 14 = ...001110 ; 13 = ...001101 ; 4 = ...000100 ⇒ 4 ; 4 = ...000100
(logand)
⇒ -1 ; -1 = ...111111
This function returns the bitwise inclusive OR of its arguments: the nth
bit is 1 in the result if, and only if, the nth bit is 1 in at
least one of the arguments. If there are no arguments, the result is 0,
which is an identity element for this operation. If logior
is
passed just one argument, it returns that argument.
; binary values (logior 12 5) ; 12 = ...001100 ; 5 = ...000101 ⇒ 13 ; 13 = ...001101
(logior 12 5 7) ; 12 = ...001100 ; 5 = ...000101 ; 7 = ...000111 ⇒ 15 ; 15 = ...001111
This function returns the bitwise exclusive OR of its arguments: the
nth bit is 1 in the result if, and only if, the nth bit is
1 in an odd number of the arguments. If there are no arguments, the
result is 0, which is an identity element for this operation. If
logxor
is passed just one argument, it returns that argument.
; binary values (logxor 12 5) ; 12 = ...001100 ; 5 = ...000101 ⇒ 9 ; 9 = ...001001
(logxor 12 5 7) ; 12 = ...001100 ; 5 = ...000101 ; 7 = ...000111 ⇒ 14 ; 14 = ...001110
This function returns the bitwise complement of its argument: the nth bit is one in the result if, and only if, the nth bit is zero in integer, and vice-versa. The result equals −1 − integer.
(lognot 5) ⇒ -6 ;; 5 = ...000101 ;; becomes ;; -6 = ...111010
This function returns the Hamming weight of integer: the number of ones in the binary representation of integer. If integer is negative, it returns the number of zero bits in its two’s complement binary representation. The result is always nonnegative.
(logcount 43) ; 43 = ...000101011 ⇒ 4 (logcount -43) ; -43 = ...111010101 ⇒ 3
These mathematical functions allow integers as well as floating-point numbers as arguments.
These are the basic trigonometric functions, with argument arg measured in radians.
The value of (asin arg)
is a number between
−pi/2
and
pi/2
(inclusive) whose sine is arg. If arg is out of range
(outside [−1, 1]), asin
returns a NaN.
The value of (acos arg)
is a number between 0 and
pi
(inclusive) whose cosine is arg. If arg is out of range
(outside [−1, 1]), acos
returns a NaN.
The value of (atan y)
is a number between
−pi/2
and
pi/2
(exclusive) whose tangent is y. If the optional second
argument x is given, the value of (atan y x)
is the
angle in radians between the vector [x, y]
and the
X
axis.
This is the exponential function; it returns e to the power arg.
This function returns the logarithm of arg, with base
base. If you don’t specify base, the natural base
e is used. If arg or base is negative, log
returns a NaN.
This function returns x raised to power y. If both
arguments are integers and y is nonnegative, the result is an
integer; in this case, overflow signals an error, so watch out.
If x is a finite negative number and y is a finite
non-integer, expt
returns a NaN.
This returns the square root of arg. If arg is finite
and less than zero, sqrt
returns a NaN.
In addition, Emacs defines the following common mathematical constants:
The mathematical constant e (2.71828…).
The mathematical constant pi (3.14159…).
A deterministic computer program cannot generate true random numbers. For most purposes, pseudo-random numbers suffice. A series of pseudo-random numbers is generated in a deterministic fashion. The numbers are not truly random, but they have certain properties that mimic a random series. For example, all possible values occur equally often in a pseudo-random series.
Pseudo-random numbers are generated from a seed value. Starting from
any given seed, the random
function always generates the same
sequence of numbers. By default, Emacs initializes the random seed at
startup, in such a way that the sequence of values of random
(with overwhelming likelihood) differs in each Emacs run.
The random seed is typically initialized from system entropy;
however, on obsolescent platforms lacking entropy pools,
the seed is taken from less-random volatile data such as the current time.
Sometimes you want the random number sequence to be repeatable. For
example, when debugging a program whose behavior depends on the random
number sequence, it is helpful to get the same behavior in each
program run. To make the sequence repeat, execute (random "")
.
This sets the seed to a constant value for your particular Emacs
executable (though it may differ for other Emacs builds). You can use
other strings to choose various seed values.
This function returns a pseudo-random integer. Repeated calls return a series of pseudo-random integers.
If limit is a positive integer, the value is chosen to be
nonnegative and less than limit. Otherwise, the value might be
any fixnum, i.e., any integer from most-negative-fixnum
through
most-positive-fixnum
(see Integer Basics).
If limit is a string, it means to choose a new seed based on the
string’s contents. This causes later calls to random
to return
a reproducible sequence of results.
If limit is t
, it means to choose a new seed as if Emacs
were restarting. This causes later calls to random
to return
an unpredictable sequence of results.
If you need a random nonce for cryptographic purposes, using
random
is typically not the best approach, for several reasons:
(random t)
to consult system entropy,
doing so can adversely affect other parts of your program that benefit
from reproducible results.
random
is not necessarily suitable for cryptography.
(random t)
does not give direct access to system
entropy; the entropy is passed through the system-dependent PRNG, thus
possibly biasing the results.
(random t)
call leaves information about the nonce scattered
about Emacs’s internal state, increasing the size of the internal
attack surface.
(random t)
is
seeded from a cryptographically weak source.
A string in Emacs Lisp is an array that contains an ordered sequence of characters. Strings are used as names of symbols, buffers, and files; to send messages to users; to hold text being copied between buffers; and for many other purposes. Because strings are so important, Emacs Lisp has many functions expressly for manipulating them. Emacs Lisp programs use strings more often than individual characters.
See Putting Keyboard Events in Strings, for special considerations for strings of keyboard character events.
A character is a Lisp object which represents a single character of text. In Emacs Lisp, characters are simply integers; whether an integer is a character or not is determined only by how it is used. See Character Codes, for details about character representation in Emacs.
A string is a fixed sequence of characters. It is a type of sequence called an array, meaning that its length is fixed and cannot be altered once it is created (see Sequences, Arrays, and Vectors). Unlike in C, Emacs Lisp strings are not terminated by a distinguished character code.
Since strings are arrays, and therefore sequences as well, you can
operate on them with the general array and sequence functions documented
in Sequences, Arrays, and Vectors. For example, you can access
individual characters in a string using the function aref
(see Functions that Operate on Arrays).
There are two text representations for non-ASCII characters in Emacs strings (and in buffers): unibyte and multibyte. For most Lisp programming, you don’t need to be concerned with these two representations. See Text Representations, for details.
Sometimes key sequences are represented as unibyte strings. When a unibyte string is a key sequence, string elements in the range 128 to 255 represent meta characters (which are large integers) rather than character codes in the range 128 to 255. Strings cannot hold characters that have the hyper, super or alt modifiers; they can hold ASCII control characters, but no other control characters. They do not distinguish case in ASCII control characters. If you want to store such characters in a sequence, such as a key sequence, you must use a vector instead of a string. See Character Type, for more information about keyboard input characters.
Strings are useful for holding regular expressions. You can also
match regular expressions against strings with string-match
(see Regular Expression Searching). The functions match-string
(see Simple Match Data Access) and replace-match
(see Replacing the Text that Matched) are useful for decomposing and modifying strings after
matching regular expressions against them.
Like a buffer, a string can contain text properties for the characters in it, as well as the characters themselves. See Text Properties. All the Lisp primitives that copy text from strings to buffers or other strings also copy the properties of the characters being copied.
See Text, for information about functions that display strings or
copy them into buffers. See Character Type, and String Type,
for information about the syntax of characters and strings.
See Non-ASCII Characters, for functions to convert between text
representations and to encode and decode character codes.
Also, note that length
should not be used for computing
the width of a string on display; use string-width
(see Size of Displayed Text) instead.
For more information about general sequence and array predicates, see Sequences, Arrays, and Vectors, and Arrays.
This function returns t
if object is a string, nil
otherwise.
This function returns t
if object is a string or
nil
. It returns nil
otherwise.
This function returns t
if object is a string or a
character (i.e., an integer), nil
otherwise.
The following functions create strings, either from scratch, or by
putting strings together, or by taking them apart. (For functions
that create strings based on the modified contents of other strings,
like string-replace
and replace-regexp-in-string
, see
Search and Replace.)
This function returns a string made up of count repetitions of character. If count is negative, an error is signaled.
(make-string 5 ?x) ⇒ "xxxxx" (make-string 0 ?x) ⇒ ""
Normally, if character is an ASCII character, the
result is a unibyte string. But if the optional argument
multibyte is non-nil
, the function will produce a
multibyte string instead. This is useful when you later need to
concatenate the result with non-ASCII strings or replace
some of its characters with non-ASCII characters.
Other functions to compare with this one include make-vector
(see Vectors) and make-list
(see Building Cons Cells and Lists).
This returns a string containing the characters characters.
(string ?a ?b ?c) ⇒ "abc"
This function returns a new string which consists of those characters from string in the range from (and including) the character at the index start up to (but excluding) the character at the index end. The first character is at index zero. With one argument, this function just copies string.
(substring "abcdefg" 0 3) ⇒ "abc"
In the above example, the index for ‘a’ is 0, the index for
‘b’ is 1, and the index for ‘c’ is 2. The index 3—which
is the fourth character in the string—marks the character position
up to which the substring is copied. Thus, ‘abc’ is copied from
the string "abcdefg"
.
A negative number counts from the end of the string, so that −1 signifies the index of the last character of the string. For example:
(substring "abcdefg" -3 -1) ⇒ "ef"
In this example, the index for ‘e’ is −3, the index for ‘f’ is −2, and the index for ‘g’ is −1. Therefore, ‘e’ and ‘f’ are included, and ‘g’ is excluded.
When nil
is used for end, it stands for the length of the
string. Thus,
(substring "abcdefg" -3 nil) ⇒ "efg"
Omitting the argument end is equivalent to specifying nil
.
It follows that (substring string 0)
returns a copy of all
of string.
(substring "abcdefg" 0) ⇒ "abcdefg"
But we recommend copy-sequence
for this purpose (see Sequences).
If the characters copied from string have text properties, the properties are copied into the new string also. See Text Properties.
substring
also accepts a vector for the first argument.
For example:
(substring [a b (c) "d"] 1 3) ⇒ [b (c)]
A wrong-type-argument
error is signaled if start is not
an integer or if end is neither an integer nor nil
. An
args-out-of-range
error is signaled if start indicates a
character following end, or if either integer is out of range
for string.
Contrast this function with buffer-substring
(see Examining Buffer Contents), which returns a string containing a portion of the text in
the current buffer. The beginning of a string is at index 0, but the
beginning of a buffer is at index 1.
This works like substring
but discards all text properties from
the value. Also, start may be omitted or nil
, which is
equivalent to 0. Thus, (substring-no-properties string)
returns a copy of string, with all text
properties removed.
This function returns a string consisting of the characters in the
arguments passed to it (along with their text properties, if any). The
arguments may be strings, lists of numbers, or vectors of numbers; they
are not themselves changed. If concat
receives no arguments, it
returns an empty string.
(concat "abc" "-def")
⇒ "abc-def"
(concat "abc" (list 120 121) [122])
⇒ "abcxyz"
;; nil
is an empty sequence.
(concat "abc" nil "-def")
⇒ "abc-def"
(concat "The " "quick brown " "fox.")
⇒ "The quick brown fox."
(concat)
⇒ ""
This function does not always allocate a new string. Callers are
advised not rely on the result being a new string nor on it being
eq
to an existing string.
In particular, mutating the returned value may inadvertently change
another string, alter a constant string in the program, or even raise
an error. To obtain a string that you can safely mutate, use
copy-sequence
on the result.
For information about other concatenation functions, see the
description of mapconcat
in Mapping Functions,
vconcat
in Functions for Vectors, and append
in Building Cons Cells and Lists. For concatenating individual command-line arguments into a
string to be used as a shell command, see combine-and-quote-strings.
This function splits string into substrings based on the regular expression separators (see Regular Expressions). Each match for separators defines a splitting point; the substrings between splitting points are made into a list, which is returned.
If separators is nil
(or omitted), the default is the
value of split-string-default-separators
and the function
behaves as if omit-nulls were t
.
If omit-nulls is nil
(or omitted), the result contains
null strings whenever there are two consecutive matches for
separators, or a match is adjacent to the beginning or end of
string. If omit-nulls is t
, these null strings are
omitted from the result.
If the optional argument trim is non-nil
, it should be a
regular expression to match text to trim from the beginning and end of
each substring. If trimming makes the substring empty, it is treated
as null.
If you need to split a string into a list of individual command-line
arguments suitable for call-process
or start-process
,
see split-string-and-unquote.
Examples:
(split-string " two words ") ⇒ ("two" "words")
The result is not ("" "two" "words" "")
, which would rarely be
useful. If you need such a result, use an explicit value for
separators:
(split-string " two words " split-string-default-separators) ⇒ ("" "two" "words" "")
(split-string "Soup is good food" "o") ⇒ ("S" "up is g" "" "d f" "" "d") (split-string "Soup is good food" "o" t) ⇒ ("S" "up is g" "d f" "d") (split-string "Soup is good food" "o+") ⇒ ("S" "up is g" "d f" "d")
Empty matches do count, except that split-string
will not look
for a final empty match when it already reached the end of the string
using a non-empty match or when string is empty:
(split-string "aooob" "o*") ⇒ ("" "a" "" "b" "") (split-string "ooaboo" "o*") ⇒ ("" "" "a" "b" "") (split-string "" "") ⇒ ("")
However, when separators can match the empty string,
omit-nulls is usually t
, so that the subtleties in the
three previous examples are rarely relevant:
(split-string "Soup is good food" "o*" t) ⇒ ("S" "u" "p" " " "i" "s" " " "g" "d" " " "f" "d") (split-string "Nice doggy!" "" t) ⇒ ("N" "i" "c" "e" " " "d" "o" "g" "g" "y" "!") (split-string "" "" t) ⇒ nil
Somewhat odd, but predictable, behavior can occur for certain “non-greedy” values of separators that can prefer empty matches over non-empty matches. Again, such values rarely occur in practice:
(split-string "ooo" "o*" t) ⇒ nil (split-string "ooo" "\\|o+" t) ⇒ ("o" "o" "o")
The default value of separators for split-string
. Its
usual value is "[ \f\t\n\r\v]+"
.
Clean up the whitespace in string by collapsing stretches of whitespace to a single space character, as well as removing all whitespace from the start and the end of string.
Remove the leading text that matches regexp from string. regexp defaults to ‘[ \t\n\r]+’.
Remove the trailing text that matches regexp from string. regexp defaults to ‘[ \t\n\r]+’.
Remove the leading text that matches trim-left and trailing text that matches trim-right from string. Both regexps default to ‘[ \t\n\r]+’.
Attempt to Word-wrap string so that no lines are longer than length. Filling is done on whitespace boundaries only. If there are individual words that are longer than length, these will not be shortened.
If string is shorter than length characters, string is returned as is. Otherwise, return a substring of string consisting of the first length characters. If the optional end parameter is given, return a string of the length last characters instead.
If coding-system is non-nil
, string will be encoded
before limiting, and the result will be a unibyte string that’s
shorter than length
bytes. If string contains characters
that are encoded into several bytes (for instance, when using
utf-8
), the resulting unibyte string is never truncated in the
middle of a character representation.
This function measures the string length in characters or bytes, and
thus is generally inappropriate if you need to shorten strings for
display purposes; use truncate-string-to-width
or
window-text-pixel-size
or string-glyph-split
instead
(see Size of Displayed Text).
Split string into a list of strings on newline boundaries. If
the optional argument omit-nulls is non-nil
, remove empty
lines from the results. If the optional argument keep-newlines
is non-nil
, don’t remove the trailing newlines from the result
strings.
Pad string to be of the given length using padding
as the padding character. padding defaults to the space
character. If string is longer than length, no padding is
done. If start is nil
or omitted, the padding is
appended to the characters of string, and if it’s
non-nil
, the padding is prepended to string’s characters.
Remove the final newline, if any, from string.
You can alter the contents of a mutable string via operations described in this section. See Mutability.
The most basic way to alter the contents of an existing string is with
aset
(see Functions that Operate on Arrays). (aset string idx char)
stores char into string at character
index idx. It will automatically convert a pure-ASCII
string to a multibyte string (see Text Representations) if
needed, but we recommend to always make sure string is multibyte
(e.g., by using string-to-multibyte
, see Converting Text Representations), if char is a non-ASCII character, not
a raw byte.
A more powerful function is store-substring
:
This function alters part of the contents of the specified string,
by storing obj starting at character index idx. The
argument obj may be either a character (in which case the function
behaves exactly as aset
) or a (smaller) string. If obj
is a multibyte string, we recommend to make sure string is also
multibyte, even if it’s pure-ASCII.
Since it is impossible to change the number of characters in an existing string, it is an error if obj consists of more characters than would fit in string starting at character index idx.
To clear out a string that contained a password, use
clear-string
:
This makes string a unibyte string and clears its contents to zeros. It may also change string’s length.
This function returns t
if the arguments represent the same
character, nil
otherwise. This function ignores differences
in case if case-fold-search
is non-nil
.
(char-equal ?x ?x) ⇒ t (let ((case-fold-search nil)) (char-equal ?x ?X)) ⇒ nil
This function returns t
if the characters of the two strings
match exactly. Symbols are also allowed as arguments, in which case
the symbol names are used. Case is always significant, regardless of
case-fold-search
.
This function is equivalent to equal
for comparing two strings
(see Equality Predicates). In particular, the text properties of
the two strings are ignored; use equal-including-properties
if
you need to distinguish between strings that differ only in their text
properties. However, unlike equal
, if either argument is not a
string or symbol, string=
signals an error.
(string= "abc" "abc") ⇒ t (string= "abc" "ABC") ⇒ nil (string= "ab" "ABC") ⇒ nil
A unibyte and a multibyte string are equal in the sense of
string=
if and only if they contain the same sequence of
character codes all being in the range 0–127 (ASCII).
See Text Representations.
string-equal
is another name for string=
.
string-equal-ignore-case
compares strings ignoring case
differences, like char-equal
when case-fold-search
is
t
.
This function returns t
if string1 and string2 are
equal with respect to the collation rules of the specified
locale, which defaults to your current system locale. A
collation rule is not only
determined by the lexicographic order of the characters contained in
string1 and string2, but also by further rules about
relations between these characters. Usually, it is defined by the
locale environment with which Emacs is running and by the Standard C
library against which Emacs was linked3.
For example, characters with different code points but the same meaning, like different grave accent Unicode characters, might, in some locales, be considered as equal:
(string-collate-equalp (string ?\uFF40) (string ?\u1FEF)) ⇒ t
The optional argument locale, a string, overrides the setting of
your current locale identifier for collation. The value is system
dependent; a locale "en_US.UTF-8"
is applicable on POSIX
systems, while it would be, e.g., "enu_USA.1252"
on MS-Windows
systems.
If ignore-case is non-nil
, characters are compared
case-insensitively, by converting them to lower-case. However, if the
underlying system library doesn’t provide locale-specific collation
rules, this function falls back to string-equal
, in which case
the ignore-case argument is ignored, and the comparison will
always be case-sensitive.
To emulate Unicode-compliant collation on MS-Windows systems,
bind w32-collate-ignore-punctuation
to a non-nil
value, since
the codeset part of the locale cannot be "UTF-8"
on MS-Windows.
If your system does not support a locale environment, this function
behaves like string-equal
.
Do not use this function to compare file names for equality, as filesystems generally don’t honor linguistic equivalence of strings that collation implements.
This function compares two strings a character at a time. It
scans both the strings at the same time to find the first pair of corresponding
characters that do not match. If the lesser character of these two is
the character from string1, then string1 is less, and this
function returns t
. If the lesser character is the one from
string2, then string1 is greater, and this function returns
nil
. If the two strings match entirely, the value is nil
.
Pairs of characters are compared according to their character codes. Keep in mind that lower case letters have higher numeric values in the ASCII character set than their upper case counterparts; digits and many punctuation characters have a lower numeric value than upper case letters. An ASCII character is less than any non-ASCII character; a unibyte non-ASCII character is always less than any multibyte non-ASCII character (see Text Representations).
(string< "abc" "abd") ⇒ t (string< "abd" "abc") ⇒ nil (string< "123" "abc") ⇒ t
When the strings have different lengths, and they match up to the
length of string1, then the result is t
. If they match up
to the length of string2, the result is nil
. A string of
no characters is less than any other string.
(string< "" "abc") ⇒ t (string< "ab" "abc") ⇒ t (string< "abc" "") ⇒ nil (string< "abc" "ab") ⇒ nil (string< "" "") ⇒ nil
Symbols are also allowed as arguments, in which case their print names are compared.
string-lessp
is another name for string<
.
This function returns the result of comparing string1 and
string2 in the opposite order, i.e., it is equivalent to calling
(string-lessp string2 string1)
.
This function returns t
if string1 is less than
string2 in collation order of the specified locale, which
defaults to your current system locale. A collation order is not only
determined by the lexicographic order of the characters contained in
string1 and string2, but also by further rules about
relations between these characters. Usually, it is defined by the
locale environment with which Emacs is running, and by the Standard C
library against which Emacs was linked.
For example, punctuation and whitespace characters might be ignored for sorting (see Sequences):
(sort (list "11" "12" "1 1" "1 2" "1.1" "1.2") 'string-collate-lessp) ⇒ ("11" "1 1" "1.1" "12" "1 2" "1.2")
This behavior is system-dependent; e.g., punctuation and whitespace are never ignored on Cygwin, regardless of locale.
The optional argument locale, a string, overrides the setting of
your current locale identifier for collation. The value is system
dependent; a locale "en_US.UTF-8"
is applicable on POSIX
systems, while it would be, e.g., "enu_USA.1252"
on MS-Windows
systems. The locale value of "POSIX"
or "C"
lets
string-collate-lessp
behave like string-lessp
:
(sort (list "11" "12" "1 1" "1 2" "1.1" "1.2") (lambda (s1 s2) (string-collate-lessp s1 s2 "POSIX"))) ⇒ ("1 1" "1 2" "1.1" "1.2" "11" "12")
If ignore-case is non-nil
, characters are compared
case-insensitively, by converting them to lower-case. However, if the
underlying system library doesn’t provide locale-specific collation
rules, this function falls back to string-lessp
, in which case
the ignore-case argument is ignored, and the comparison will
always be case-sensitive.
To emulate Unicode-compliant collation on MS-Windows systems,
bind w32-collate-ignore-punctuation
to a non-nil
value, since
the codeset part of the locale cannot be "UTF-8"
on MS-Windows.
If your system does not support a locale environment, this function
behaves like string-lessp
.
This function compares strings lexicographically, except it treats sequences of numerical characters as if they comprised a base-ten number, and then compares the numbers. So ‘foo2.png’ is “smaller” than ‘foo12.png’ according to this predicate, even if ‘12’ is lexicographically “smaller” than ‘2’.
This function returns non-nil
if string1 is a prefix of
string2; i.e., if string2 starts with string1. If
the optional argument ignore-case is non-nil
, the
comparison ignores case differences.
This function returns non-nil
if suffix is a suffix of
string; i.e., if string ends with suffix. If the
optional argument ignore-case is non-nil
, the comparison
ignores case differences.
Return the position of the first instance of needle in
haystack, both of which are strings. If start-pos is
non-nil
, start searching from that position in haystack.
Return nil
if no match was found.
This function only considers the characters in the strings when doing
the comparison; text properties are ignored. Matching is always
case-sensitive.
This function compares a specified part of string1 with a
specified part of string2. The specified part of string1
runs from index start1 (inclusive) up to index end1
(exclusive); nil
for start1 means the start of the
string, while nil
for end1 means the length of the
string. Likewise, the specified part of string2 runs from index
start2 up to index end2.
The strings are compared by the numeric values of their characters.
For instance, str1 is considered less than str2 if
its first differing character has a smaller numeric value. If
ignore-case is non-nil
, characters are converted to
upper-case, using the current buffer’s case-table (see The Case Table), before comparing them. Unibyte strings are converted to
multibyte for comparison (see Text Representations), so that a
unibyte string and its conversion to multibyte are always regarded as
equal.
If the specified portions of the two strings match, the value is
t
. Otherwise, the value is an integer which indicates how many
leading characters agree, and which string is less. Its absolute
value is one plus the number of characters that agree at the beginning
of the two strings. The sign is negative if string1 (or its
specified portion) is less.
This function returns the Levenshtein distance between the source string string1 and the target string string2. The Levenshtein distance is the number of single-character changes—deletions, insertions, or replacements—required to transform the source string into the target string; it is one possible definition of the edit distance between strings.
Letter-case of the strings is significant for the computed distance,
but their text properties are ignored. If the optional argument
bytecompare is non-nil
, the function calculates the
distance in terms of bytes instead of characters. The byte-wise
comparison uses the internal Emacs representation of characters, so it
will produce inaccurate results for multibyte strings that include raw
bytes (see Text Representations); make the strings unibyte by
encoding them (see Explicit Encoding and Decoding) if you need accurate results
with raw bytes.
This function works like assoc
, except that key must be a
string or symbol, and comparison is done using compare-strings
.
Symbols are converted to strings before testing.
If case-fold is non-nil
, key and the elements of
alist are converted to upper-case before comparison.
Unlike assoc
, this function can also match elements of the alist
that are strings or symbols rather than conses. In particular, alist can
be a list of strings or symbols rather than an actual alist.
See Association Lists.
See also the function compare-buffer-substrings
in
Comparing Text, for a way to compare text in buffers. The
function string-match
, which matches a regular expression
against a string, can be used for a kind of string comparison; see
Regular Expression Searching.
This section describes functions for converting between characters,
strings and integers. format
(see Formatting Strings) and
prin1-to-string
(see Output Functions) can also convert
Lisp objects into strings. read-from-string
(see Input Functions) can convert a string representation of a Lisp object
into an object. The functions string-to-multibyte
and
string-to-unibyte
convert the text representation of a string
(see Converting Text Representations).
See Documentation, for functions that produce textual descriptions
of text characters and general input events
(single-key-description
and text-char-description
). These
are used primarily for making help messages.
This function returns a string consisting of the printed base-ten representation of number. The returned value starts with a minus sign if the argument is negative.
(number-to-string 256) ⇒ "256"
(number-to-string -23) ⇒ "-23"
(number-to-string -23.5) ⇒ "-23.5"
int-to-string
is a semi-obsolete alias for this function.
See also the function format
in Formatting Strings.
This function returns the numeric value of the characters in
string. If base is non-nil
, it must be an integer
between 2 and 16 (inclusive), and integers are converted in that base.
If base is nil
, then base ten is used. Floating-point
conversion only works in base ten; we have not implemented other
radices for floating-point numbers, because that would be much more
work and does not seem useful.
The parsing skips spaces and tabs at the beginning of string, then reads as much of string as it can interpret as a number in the given base. (On some systems it ignores other whitespace at the beginning, not just spaces and tabs.) If string cannot be interpreted as a number, this function returns 0.
(string-to-number "256") ⇒ 256 (string-to-number "25 is a perfect square.") ⇒ 25 (string-to-number "X256") ⇒ 0 (string-to-number "-4.5") ⇒ -4.5 (string-to-number "1e5") ⇒ 100000.0
string-to-int
is an obsolete alias for this function.
This function returns a new string containing one character,
character. This function is semi-obsolete because the function
string
is more general. See Creating Strings.
This function returns the first character in string. This is
mostly identical to (aref string 0)
, except that it returns 0
if the string is empty. (The value is also 0 when the first character
of string is the null character, ASCII code 0.) This
function may be eliminated in the future if it does not seem useful
enough to retain.
Here are some other functions that can convert to or from a string:
concat
This function converts a vector or a list into a string. See Creating Strings.
vconcat
This function converts a string into a vector. See Functions for Vectors.
append
This function converts a string into a list. See Building Cons Cells and Lists.
byte-to-string
This function converts a byte of character data into a unibyte string. See Converting Text Representations.
Formatting means constructing a string by substituting computed values at various places in a constant string. This constant string controls how the other values are printed, as well as where they appear; it is called a format string.
Formatting is often useful for computing messages to be displayed. In
fact, the functions message
and error
provide the same
formatting feature described here; they differ from format-message
only
in how they use the result of formatting.
This function returns a string equal to string, replacing any format specifications with encodings of the corresponding objects. The arguments objects are the computed values to be formatted.
The characters in string, other than the format specifications, are copied directly into the output, including their text properties, if any. Any text properties of the format specifications are copied to the produced string representations of the argument objects.
The output string need not be newly-allocated. For example, if
x
is the string "foo"
, the expressions (eq x
(format x))
and (eq x (format "%s" x))
might both yield
t
.
This function acts like format
, except it also converts any
grave accents (`
) and apostrophes ('
) in string as per the
value of text-quoting-style
.
Typically grave accent and apostrophe in the format translate to
matching curved quotes, e.g., "Missing `%s'"
might result in
"Missing ‘foo’"
. See Text Quoting Style, for how to influence
or inhibit this translation.
A format specification is a sequence of characters beginning with a
‘%’. Thus, if there is a ‘%d’ in string, the
format
function replaces it with the printed representation of
one of the values to be formatted (one of the arguments objects).
For example:
(format "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column) ⇒ "The value of fill-column is 72."
Since format
interprets ‘%’ characters as format
specifications, you should never pass an arbitrary string as
the first argument. This is particularly true when the string is
generated by some Lisp code. Unless the string is known to
never include any ‘%’ characters, pass "%s"
, described
below, as the first argument, and the string as the second, like this:
(format "%s" arbitrary-string)
Certain format specifications require values of particular types. If you supply a value that doesn’t fit the requirements, an error is signaled.
Here is a table of valid format specifications:
Replace the specification with the printed representation of the object,
made without quoting (that is, using princ
, not
prin1
—see Output Functions). Thus, strings are represented
by their contents alone, with no ‘"’ characters, and symbols appear
without ‘\’ characters.
If the object is a string, its text properties are copied into the output. The text properties of the ‘%s’ itself are also copied, but those of the object take priority.
Replace the specification with the printed representation of the object,
made with quoting (that is, using prin1
—see Output Functions). Thus, strings are enclosed in ‘"’ characters, and
‘\’ characters appear where necessary before special characters.
Replace the specification with the base-eight representation of an integer. Negative integers are formatted in a platform-dependent way. The object can also be a floating-point number that is formatted as an integer, dropping any fraction.
Replace the specification with the base-ten representation of a signed integer. The object can also be a floating-point number that is formatted as an integer, dropping any fraction.
Replace the specification with the base-sixteen representation of an integer. Negative integers are formatted in a platform-dependent way. ‘%x’ uses lower case and ‘%X’ uses upper case. The object can also be a floating-point number that is formatted as an integer, dropping any fraction.
Replace the specification with the character which is the value given.
Replace the specification with the exponential notation for a floating-point number.
Replace the specification with the decimal-point notation for a floating-point number.
Replace the specification with notation for a floating-point number, using either exponential notation or decimal-point notation. The exponential notation is used if the exponent would be less than −4 or greater than or equal to the precision (default: 6). By default, trailing zeros are removed from the fractional portion of the result and a decimal-point character appears only if it is followed by a digit.
Replace the specification with a single ‘%’. This format
specification is unusual in that its only form is plain
‘%%’ and that it does not use a value. For example,
(format "%% %d" 30)
returns "% 30"
.
Any other format character results in an ‘Invalid format operation’ error.
Here are several examples, which assume the typical
text-quoting-style
settings:
(format "The octal value of %d is %o, and the hex value is %x." 18 18 18) ⇒ "The octal value of 18 is 22, and the hex value is 12." (format-message "The name of this buffer is ‘%s’." (buffer-name)) ⇒ "The name of this buffer is ‘strings.texi’." (format-message "The buffer object prints as `%s'." (current-buffer)) ⇒ "The buffer object prints as ‘strings.texi’."
By default, format specifications correspond to successive values from objects. Thus, the first format specification in string uses the first such value, the second format specification uses the second such value, and so on. Any extra format specifications (those for which there are no corresponding values) cause an error. Any extra values to be formatted are ignored.
A format specification can have a field number, which is a decimal number immediately after the initial ‘%’, followed by a literal dollar sign ‘$’. It causes the format specification to convert the argument with the given number instead of the next argument. Field numbers start at 1. A format can contain either numbered or unnumbered format specifications but not both, except that ‘%%’ can be mixed with numbered specifications.
(format "%2$s, %3$s, %%, %1$s" "x" "y" "z") ⇒ "y, z, %, x"
After the ‘%’ and any field number, you can put certain flag characters.
The flag ‘+’ inserts a plus sign before a nonnegative number, so that it always has a sign. A space character as flag inserts a space before a nonnegative number. (Otherwise, nonnegative numbers start with the first digit.) These flags are useful for ensuring that nonnegative and negative numbers use the same number of columns. They are ignored except for ‘%d’, ‘%e’, ‘%f’, ‘%g’, and if both flags are used, ‘+’ takes precedence.
The flag ‘#’ specifies an alternate form which depends on the format in use. For ‘%o’, it ensures that the result begins with a ‘0’. For ‘%x’ and ‘%X’, it prefixes nonzero results with ‘0x’ or ‘0X’. For ‘%e’ and ‘%f’, the ‘#’ flag means include a decimal point even if the precision is zero. For ‘%g’, it always includes a decimal point, and also forces any trailing zeros after the decimal point to be left in place where they would otherwise be removed.
The flag ‘0’ ensures that the padding consists of ‘0’ characters instead of spaces. This flag is ignored for non-numerical specification characters like ‘%s’, ‘%S’ and ‘%c’. These specification characters accept the ‘0’ flag, but still pad with spaces.
The flag ‘-’ causes any padding inserted by the width, if specified, to be inserted on the right rather than the left. If both ‘-’ and ‘0’ are present, the ‘0’ flag is ignored.
(format "%06d is padded on the left with zeros" 123) ⇒ "000123 is padded on the left with zeros" (format "'%-6d' is padded on the right" 123) ⇒ "'123 ' is padded on the right" (format "The word '%-7s' actually has %d letters in it." "foo" (length "foo")) ⇒ "The word 'foo ' actually has 3 letters in it."
A specification can have a width, which is a decimal number
that appears after any field number and flags. If the printed
representation of the object contains fewer characters than this
width, format
extends it with padding. Any padding introduced by
the width normally consists of spaces inserted on the left:
(format "%5d is padded on the left with spaces" 123) ⇒ " 123 is padded on the left with spaces"
If the width is too small, format
does not truncate the
object’s printed representation. Thus, you can use a width to specify
a minimum spacing between columns with no risk of losing information.
In the following two examples, ‘%7s’ specifies a minimum width
of 7. In the first case, the string inserted in place of ‘%7s’
has only 3 letters, and needs 4 blank spaces as padding. In the
second case, the string "specification"
is 13 letters wide but
is not truncated.
(format "The word '%7s' has %d letters in it." "foo" (length "foo")) ⇒ "The word ' foo' has 3 letters in it." (format "The word '%7s' has %d letters in it." "specification" (length "specification")) ⇒ "The word 'specification' has 13 letters in it."
All the specification characters allow an optional precision
after the field number, flags and width, if present. The precision is
a decimal-point ‘.’ followed by a digit-string. For the
floating-point specifications (‘%e’ and ‘%f’), the
precision specifies how many digits following the decimal point to
show; if zero, the decimal-point itself is also omitted. For
‘%g’, the precision specifies how many significant digits to show
(significant digits are the first digit before the decimal point and
all the digits after it). If the precision of %g is zero or
unspecified, it is treated as 1. For ‘%s’ and ‘%S’, the
precision truncates the string to the given width, so ‘%.3s’
shows only the first three characters of the representation for
object. For other specification characters, the effect of
precision is what the local library functions of the printf
family produce.
If you plan to use read
later on the formatted string to
retrieve a copy of the formatted value, use a specification that lets
read
reconstruct the value. To format numbers in this
reversible way you can use ‘%s’ and ‘%S’, to format just
integers you can also use ‘%d’, and to format just nonnegative
integers you can also use ‘#x%x’ and ‘#o%o’. Other formats
may be problematic; for example, ‘%d’ and ‘%g’ can mishandle
NaNs and can lose precision and type, and ‘#x%x’ and ‘#o%o’
can mishandle negative integers. See Input Functions.
The functions described in this section accept a fixed set of
specification characters. The next section describes a function
format-spec
which can accept custom specification characters,
such as ‘%a’ or ‘%z’.
Sometimes it is useful to allow users and Lisp programs alike to
control how certain text is generated via custom format control
strings. For example, a format string could control how to display
someone’s forename, surname, and email address. Using the function
format
described in the previous section, the format string
could be something like "%s %s <%s>"
. This approach
quickly becomes impractical, however, as it can be unclear which
specification character corresponds to which piece of information.
A more convenient format string for such cases would be something like
"%f %l <%e>"
, where each specification character carries
more semantic information and can easily be rearranged relative to
other specification characters, making such format strings more easily
customizable by the user.
The function format-spec
described in this section performs a
similar function to format
, except it operates on format
control strings that use arbitrary specification characters.
This function returns a string produced from the format string
template according to conversions specified in spec-alist,
which is an alist (see Association Lists) of the form
(letter . replacement)
. Each specification
%letter
in template will be replaced by
replacement when formatting the resulting string.
The characters in template, other than the format specifications, are copied directly into the output, including their text properties, if any. Any text properties of the format specifications are copied to their replacements.
Using an alist to specify conversions gives rise to some useful properties:
REPLACEMENT can also be a function taking no arguments, and returning a string to be used for the replacement. It will only be called when the corresponding LETTER is used in the TEMPLATE. This is useful, for example, to avoid prompting for input unless it is needed.
The optional argument ignore-missing indicates how to handle
specification characters in template that are not found in
spec-alist. If it is nil
or omitted, the function
signals an error; if it is ignore
, those format specifications
are left verbatim in the output, including their text properties, if
any; if it is delete
, those format specifications are removed
from the output; any other non-nil
value is handled like
ignore
, but any occurrences of ‘%%’ are also left verbatim
in the output.
If the optional argument split is non-nil
, instead of
returning a single string, format-spec
will split the result
into a list of strings, based on where the substitutions were
performed. For instance:
(format-spec "foo %b bar" '((?b . "zot")) nil t) ⇒ ("foo " "zot" " bar")
The syntax of format specifications accepted by format-spec
is
similar, but not identical, to that accepted by format
. In
both cases, a format specification is a sequence of characters
beginning with ‘%’ and ending with an alphabetic letter such as
‘s’.
Unlike format
, which assigns specific meanings to a fixed set
of specification characters, format-spec
accepts arbitrary
specification characters and treats them all equally. For example:
(setq my-site-info (list (cons ?s system-name) (cons ?t (symbol-name system-type)) (cons ?c system-configuration) (cons ?v emacs-version) (cons ?e invocation-name) (cons ?p (number-to-string (emacs-pid))) (cons ?a user-mail-address) (cons ?n user-full-name))) (format-spec "%e %v (%c)" my-site-info) ⇒ "emacs 27.1 (x86_64-pc-linux-gnu)" (format-spec "%n <%a>" my-site-info) ⇒ "Emacs Developers <emacs-devel@gnu.org>"
A format specification can include any number of the following flag characters immediately after the ‘%’ to modify aspects of the substitution.
This flag causes any padding specified by the width to consist of ‘0’ characters instead of spaces.
This flag causes any padding specified by the width to be inserted on the right rather than the left.
This flag causes the substitution to be truncated on the left to the given width and precision, if specified.
This flag causes the substitution to be truncated on the right to the given width and precision, if specified.
This flag converts the substituted text to upper case (see Case Conversion in Lisp).
This flag converts the substituted text to lower case (see Case Conversion in Lisp).
The result of using contradictory flags (for instance, both upper and lower case) is undefined.
As is the case with format
, a format specification can include
a width, which is a decimal number that appears after any flags, and a
precision, which is a decimal-point ‘.’ followed by a decimal
number that appears after any flags and width.
If a substitution contains fewer characters than its specified width, it is padded on the left:
(format-spec "%8a is padded on the left with spaces" '((?a . "alpha"))) ⇒ " alpha is padded on the left with spaces"
If a substitution contains more characters than its specified precision, it is truncated on the right:
(format-spec "%.2a is truncated on the right" '((?a . "alpha"))) ⇒ "al is truncated on the right"
Here is a more complicated example that combines several aforementioned features:
(setq my-battery-info (list (cons ?p "73") ; Percentage (cons ?L "Battery") ; Status (cons ?t "2:23") ; Remaining time (cons ?c "24330") ; Capacity (cons ?r "10.6"))) ; Rate of discharge (format-spec "%>^-3L : %3p%% (%05t left)" my-battery-info) ⇒ "BAT : 73% (02:23 left)" (format-spec "%>^-3L : %3p%% (%05t left)" (cons (cons ?L "AC") my-battery-info)) ⇒ "AC : 73% (02:23 left)"
As the examples in this section illustrate, format-spec
is
often used for selectively formatting an assortment of different
pieces of information. This is useful in programs that provide
user-customizable format strings, as the user can choose to format
with a regular syntax and in any desired order only a subset of the
information that the program makes available.
The character case functions change the case of single characters or of the contents of strings. The functions normally convert only alphabetic characters (the letters ‘A’ through ‘Z’ and ‘a’ through ‘z’, as well as non-ASCII letters); other characters are not altered. You can specify a different case conversion mapping by specifying a case table (see The Case Table).
These functions do not modify the strings that are passed to them as arguments.
The examples below use the characters ‘X’ and ‘x’ which have ASCII codes 88 and 120 respectively.
This function converts string-or-char, which should be either a character or a string, to lower case.
When string-or-char is a string, this function returns a new string in which each letter in the argument that is upper case is converted to lower case. When string-or-char is a character, this function returns the corresponding lower case character (an integer); if the original character is lower case, or is not a letter, the return value is equal to the original character.
(downcase "The cat in the hat") ⇒ "the cat in the hat" (downcase ?X) ⇒ 120
This function converts string-or-char, which should be either a character or a string, to upper case.
When string-or-char is a string, this function returns a new string in which each letter in the argument that is lower case is converted to upper case. When string-or-char is a character, this function returns the corresponding upper case character (an integer); if the original character is upper case, or is not a letter, the return value is equal to the original character.
(upcase "The cat in the hat") ⇒ "THE CAT IN THE HAT" (upcase ?x) ⇒ 88
This function capitalizes strings or characters. If string-or-char is a string, the function returns a new string whose contents are a copy of string-or-char in which each word has been capitalized. This means that the first character of each word is converted to upper case, and the rest are converted to lower case.
The definition of a word is any sequence of consecutive characters that are assigned to the word constituent syntax class in the current syntax table (see Table of Syntax Classes).
When string-or-char is a character, this function does the same
thing as upcase
.
(capitalize "The cat in the hat") ⇒ "The Cat In The Hat"
(capitalize "THE 77TH-HATTED CAT") ⇒ "The 77th-Hatted Cat"
(capitalize ?x) ⇒ 88
If string-or-char is a string, this function capitalizes the initials of the words in string-or-char, without altering any letters other than the initials. It returns a new string whose contents are a copy of string-or-char, in which each word has had its initial letter converted to upper case.
The definition of a word is any sequence of consecutive characters that are assigned to the word constituent syntax class in the current syntax table (see Table of Syntax Classes).
When the argument to upcase-initials
is a character,
upcase-initials
has the same result as upcase
.
(upcase-initials "The CAT in the hAt") ⇒ "The CAT In The HAt"
Note that case conversion is not a one-to-one mapping of codepoints and length of the result may differ from length of the argument. Furthermore, because passing a character forces return type to be a character, functions are unable to perform proper substitution and result may differ compared to treating a one-character string. For example:
(upcase "fi") ; note: single character, ligature "fi" ⇒ "FI"
(upcase ?fi) ⇒ 64257 ; i.e. ?fi
To avoid this, a character must first be converted into a string,
using string
function, before being passed to one of the casing
functions. Of course, no assumptions on the length of the result may
be made.
Mapping for such special cases are taken from
special-uppercase
, special-lowercase
and
special-titlecase
See Character Properties.
See Comparison of Characters and Strings, for functions that compare strings; some of them ignore case differences, or can optionally ignore case differences.
You can customize case conversion by installing a special case table. A case table specifies the mapping between upper case and lower case letters. It affects both the case conversion functions for Lisp objects (see the previous section) and those that apply to text in the buffer (see Case Changes). Each buffer has a case table; there is also a standard case table which is used to initialize the case table of new buffers.
A case table is a char-table (see Char-Tables) whose subtype is
case-table
. This char-table maps each character into the
corresponding lower case character. It has three extra slots, which
hold related tables:
The upcase table maps each character into the corresponding upper case character.
The canonicalize table maps all of a set of case-related characters into a particular member of that set.
The equivalences table maps each one of a set of case-related characters into the next character in that set.
In simple cases, all you need to specify is the mapping to lower-case; the three related tables will be calculated automatically from that one.
For some languages, upper and lower case letters are not in one-to-one correspondence. There may be two different lower case letters with the same upper case equivalent. In these cases, you need to specify the maps for both lower case and upper case.
The extra table canonicalize maps each character to a canonical equivalent; any two characters that are related by case-conversion have the same canonical equivalent character. For example, since ‘a’ and ‘A’ are related by case-conversion, they should have the same canonical equivalent character (which should be either ‘a’ for both of them, or ‘A’ for both of them).
The extra table equivalences is a map that cyclically permutes each equivalence class (of characters with the same canonical equivalent). (For ordinary ASCII, this would map ‘a’ into ‘A’ and ‘A’ into ‘a’, and likewise for each set of equivalent characters.)
When constructing a case table, you can provide nil
for
canonicalize; then Emacs fills in this slot from the lower case
and upper case mappings. You can also provide nil
for
equivalences; then Emacs fills in this slot from
canonicalize. In a case table that is actually in use, those
components are non-nil
. Do not try to specify
equivalences without also specifying canonicalize.
Here are the functions for working with case tables:
This predicate returns non-nil
if object is a valid case
table.
This function makes table the standard case table, so that it will be used in any buffers created subsequently.
This returns the standard case table.
This function returns the current buffer’s case table.
This sets the current buffer’s case table to table.
The with-case-table
macro saves the current case table, makes
table the current case table, evaluates the body forms,
and finally restores the case table. The return value is the value of
the last form in body. The case table is restored even in case
of an abnormal exit via throw
or error (see Nonlocal Exits).
Some language environments modify the case conversions of
ASCII characters; for example, in the Turkish language
environment, the ASCII capital I is downcased into
a Turkish dotless i (‘ı’). This can interfere with code that requires
ordinary ASCII case conversion, such as implementations of
ASCII-based network protocols. In that case, use the
with-case-table
macro with the variable ascii-case-table,
which stores the unmodified case table for the ASCII
character set.
The case table for the ASCII character set. This should not be modified by any language environment settings.
The following three functions are convenient subroutines for packages that define non-ASCII character sets. They modify the specified case table case-table; they also modify the standard syntax table. See Syntax Tables. Normally you would use these functions to change the standard case table.
This function specifies a pair of corresponding letters, one upper case and one lower case.
This function makes characters l and r a matching pair of case-invariant delimiters.
This function makes char case-invariant, with syntax syntax.
This command displays a description of the contents of the current buffer’s case table.
A list represents a sequence of zero or more elements (which may be any Lisp objects). The important difference between lists and vectors is that two or more lists can share part of their structure; in addition, you can insert or delete elements in a list without copying the whole list.
Lists in Lisp are not a primitive data type; they are built up from cons cells (see Cons Cell and List Types). A cons cell is a data object that represents an ordered pair. That is, it has two slots, and each slot holds, or refers to, some Lisp object. One slot is known as the CAR, and the other is known as the CDR. (These names are traditional; see Cons Cell and List Types.) CDR is pronounced “could-er”.
We say that “the CAR of this cons cell is” whatever object its CAR slot currently holds, and likewise for the CDR.
A list is a series of cons cells chained together, so that each cell refers to the next one. There is one cons cell for each element of the list. By convention, the CARs of the cons cells hold the elements of the list, and the CDRs are used to chain the list (this asymmetry between CAR and CDR is entirely a matter of convention; at the level of cons cells, the CAR and CDR slots have similar properties). Hence, the CDR slot of each cons cell in a list refers to the following cons cell.
Also by convention, the CDR of the last cons cell in a list is
nil
. We call such a nil
-terminated structure a
proper list4. In Emacs Lisp, the symbol nil
is both a symbol and a
list with no elements. For convenience, the symbol nil
is
considered to have nil
as its CDR (and also as its
CAR).
Hence, the CDR of a proper list is always a proper list. The CDR of a nonempty proper list is a proper list containing all the elements except the first.
If the CDR of a list’s last cons cell is some value other than
nil
, we call the structure a dotted list, since its
printed representation would use dotted pair notation (see Dotted Pair Notation). There is one other possibility: some cons cell’s
CDR could point to one of the previous cons cells in the list.
We call that structure a circular list.
For some purposes, it does not matter whether a list is proper,
circular or dotted. If a program doesn’t look far enough down the
list to see the CDR of the final cons cell, it won’t care.
However, some functions that operate on lists demand proper lists and
signal errors if given a dotted list. Most functions that try to find
the end of a list enter infinite loops if given a circular list. You
can use the function proper-list-p
, described in the next
section (see proper-list-p), to determine
whether a list is a proper one.
Because most cons cells are used as part of lists, we refer to any structure made out of cons cells as a list structure.
This function returns the value referred to by the first slot of the cons cell cons-cell. In other words, it returns the CAR of cons-cell.
As a special case, if cons-cell is nil
, this function
returns nil
. Therefore, any list is a valid argument. An
error is signaled if the argument is not a cons cell or nil
.
(car '(a b c)) ⇒ a
(car '()) ⇒ nil
This function returns the value referred to by the second slot of the cons cell cons-cell. In other words, it returns the CDR of cons-cell.
As a special case, if cons-cell is nil
, this function
returns nil
; therefore, any list is a valid argument. An error
is signaled if the argument is not a cons cell or nil
.
(cdr '(a b c)) ⇒ (b c)
(cdr '()) ⇒ nil
This function lets you take the CAR of a cons cell while avoiding
errors for other data types. It returns the CAR of object if
object is a cons cell, nil
otherwise. This is in contrast
to car
, which signals an error if object is not a list.
(car-safe object) ≡ (let ((x object)) (if (consp x) (car x) nil))
This function lets you take the CDR of a cons cell while
avoiding errors for other data types. It returns the CDR of
object if object is a cons cell, nil
otherwise.
This is in contrast to cdr
, which signals an error if
object is not a list.
(cdr-safe object) ≡ (let ((x object)) (if (consp x) (cdr x) nil))
This macro provides a convenient way to examine the CAR of a list, and take it off the list, all at once. It operates on the list stored in listname. It removes the first element from the list, saves the CDR into listname, then returns the removed element.
In the simplest case, listname is an unquoted symbol naming a
list; in that case, this macro is equivalent to (prog1 (car listname) (setq listname (cdr listname)))
.
x ⇒ (a b c) (pop x) ⇒ a x ⇒ (b c)
More generally, listname can be a generalized variable. In that
case, this macro saves into listname using setf
.
See Generalized Variables.
For the push
macro, which adds an element to a list,
See Modifying List Variables.
This function returns the nth element of list. Elements
are numbered starting with zero, so the CAR of list is
element number zero. If the length of list is n or less,
the value is nil
.
(nth 2 '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ 3
(nth 10 '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ nil (nth n x) ≡ (car (nthcdr n x))
The function elt
is similar, but applies to any kind of sequence.
For historical reasons, it takes its arguments in the opposite order.
See Sequences.
This function returns the nth CDR of list. In other words, it skips past the first n links of list and returns what follows.
If n is zero, nthcdr
returns all of
list. If the length of list is n or less,
nthcdr
returns nil
.
(nthcdr 1 '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ (2 3 4)
(nthcdr 10 '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ nil
(nthcdr 0 '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ (1 2 3 4)
This function returns the n first elements of list. Essentially,
it returns the part of list that nthcdr
skips.
take
returns list if shorter than n elements;
it returns nil
if n is zero or negative.
(take 3 '(a b c d)) ⇒ (a b c)
(take 10 '(a b c d)) ⇒ (a b c d)
(take 0 '(a b c d)) ⇒ nil
This is a version of take
that works by destructively modifying
the list structure of the argument. That makes it faster, but the
original value of list may be lost.
ntake
returns list unmodified if shorter than n
elements; it returns nil
if n is zero or negative.
Otherwise, it returns list truncated to its first n
elements.
This means that it is usually a good idea to use the return value and not just rely on the truncation effect unless n is known to be positive.
This function returns the last link of list. The car
of
this link is the list’s last element. If list is null,
nil
is returned. If n is non-nil
, the
nth-to-last link is returned instead, or the whole of list
if n is bigger than list’s length.
This function returns the length of list, with no risk of either an error or an infinite loop. It generally returns the number of distinct cons cells in the list. However, for circular lists, the value is just an upper bound; it is often too large.
If list is not nil
or a cons cell, safe-length
returns 0.
The most common way to compute the length of a list, when you are not
worried that it may be circular, is with length
. See Sequences.
This is the same as (car (car cons-cell))
.
This is the same as (car (cdr cons-cell))
or (nth 1 cons-cell)
.
This is the same as (cdr (car cons-cell))
.
This is the same as (cdr (cdr cons-cell))
or (nthcdr 2 cons-cell)
.
In addition to the above, 24 additional compositions of car
and
cdr
are defined as cxxxr
and cxxxxr
,
where each x
is either a
or d
. cadr
,
caddr
, and cadddr
pick out the second, third or fourth
elements of a list, respectively. cl-lib provides the same
under the names cl-second
, cl-third
, and
cl-fourth
. See List Functions in Common Lisp
Extensions.
This function returns the list x with the last element,
or the last n elements, removed. If n is greater
than zero it makes a copy of the list so as not to damage the
original list. In general, (append (butlast x n)
(last x n))
will return a list equal to x.
This is a version of butlast
that works by destructively
modifying the cdr
of the appropriate element, rather than
making a copy of the list.
Many functions build lists, as lists reside at the very heart of Lisp.
cons
is the fundamental list-building function; however, it is
interesting to note that list
is used more times in the source
code for Emacs than cons
.
This function is the most basic function for building new list structure. It creates a new cons cell, making object1 the CAR, and object2 the CDR. It then returns the new cons cell. The arguments object1 and object2 may be any Lisp objects, but most often object2 is a list.
(cons 1 '(2)) ⇒ (1 2)
(cons 1 '()) ⇒ (1)
(cons 1 2) ⇒ (1 . 2)
cons
is often used to add a single element to the front of a
list. This is called consing the element onto the list.
5
For example:
(setq list (cons newelt list))
Note that there is no conflict between the variable named list
used in this example and the function named list
described below;
any symbol can serve both purposes.
This function creates a list with objects as its elements. The
resulting list is always nil
-terminated. If no objects
are given, the empty list is returned.
(list 1 2 3 4 5) ⇒ (1 2 3 4 5)
(list 1 2 '(3 4 5) 'foo) ⇒ (1 2 (3 4 5) foo)
(list) ⇒ nil
This function creates a list of length elements, in which each
element is object. Compare make-list
with
make-string
(see Creating Strings).
(make-list 3 'pigs) ⇒ (pigs pigs pigs)
(make-list 0 'pigs) ⇒ nil
(setq l (make-list 3 '(a b))) ⇒ ((a b) (a b) (a b)) (eq (car l) (cadr l)) ⇒ t
This function returns a list containing all the elements of
sequences. The sequences may be lists, vectors,
bool-vectors, or strings, but the last one should usually be a list.
All arguments except the last one are copied, so none of the arguments
is altered. (See nconc
in Functions that Rearrange Lists, for a way to join
lists with no copying.)
More generally, the final argument to append
may be any Lisp
object. The final argument is not copied or converted; it becomes the
CDR of the last cons cell in the new list. If the final argument
is itself a list, then its elements become in effect elements of the
result list. If the final element is not a list, the result is a
dotted list since its final CDR is not nil
as required
in a proper list (see Lists and Cons Cells).
Here is an example of using append
:
(setq trees '(pine oak)) ⇒ (pine oak) (setq more-trees (append '(maple birch) trees)) ⇒ (maple birch pine oak)
trees ⇒ (pine oak) more-trees ⇒ (maple birch pine oak)
(eq trees (cdr (cdr more-trees))) ⇒ t
You can see how append
works by looking at a box diagram. The
variable trees
is set to the list (pine oak)
and then the
variable more-trees
is set to the list (maple birch pine
oak)
. However, the variable trees
continues to refer to the
original list:
more-trees trees | | | --- --- --- --- -> --- --- --- --- --> | | |--> | | |--> | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- | | | | | | | | --> maple -->birch --> pine --> oak
An empty sequence contributes nothing to the value returned by
append
. As a consequence of this, a final nil
argument
forces a copy of the previous argument:
trees ⇒ (pine oak)
(setq wood (append trees nil)) ⇒ (pine oak)
wood ⇒ (pine oak)
(eq wood trees) ⇒ nil
This once was the usual way to copy a list, before the function
copy-sequence
was invented. See Sequences, Arrays, and Vectors.
Here we show the use of vectors and strings as arguments to append
:
(append [a b] "cd" nil) ⇒ (a b 99 100)
With the help of apply
(see Calling Functions), we can append
all the lists in a list of lists:
(apply 'append '((a b c) nil (x y z) nil)) ⇒ (a b c x y z)
If no sequences are given, nil
is returned:
(append) ⇒ nil
Here are some examples where the final argument is not a list:
(append '(x y) 'z) ⇒ (x y . z) (append '(x y) [z]) ⇒ (x y . [z])
The second example shows that when the final argument is a sequence but not a list, the sequence’s elements do not become elements of the resulting list. Instead, the sequence becomes the final CDR, like any other non-list final argument.
This function returns a copy of the tree tree. If tree is a cons cell, this makes a new cons cell with the same CAR and CDR, then recursively copies the CAR and CDR in the same way.
Normally, when tree is anything other than a cons cell,
copy-tree
simply returns tree. However, if vecp is
non-nil
, it copies vectors too (and operates recursively on
their elements).
This function returns a “flattened” copy of tree, that is,
a list containing all the non-nil
terminal nodes, or leaves, of
the tree of cons cells rooted at tree. Leaves in the returned
list are in the same order as in tree.
(flatten-tree '(1 (2 . 3) nil (4 5 (6)) 7)) ⇒(1 2 3 4 5 6 7)
This function returns object as a list. If object is already a list, the function returns it; otherwise, the function returns a one-element list containing object.
This is usually useful if you have a variable that may or may not be a list, and you can then say, for instance:
(dolist (elem (ensure-list foo)) (princ elem))
This function returns a list of numbers starting with from and
incrementing by separation, and ending at or just before
to. separation can be positive or negative and defaults
to 1. If to is nil
or numerically equal to from,
the value is the one-element list (from)
. If to is
less than from with a positive separation, or greater than
from with a negative separation, the value is nil
because those arguments specify an empty sequence.
If separation is 0 and to is neither nil
nor
numerically equal to from, number-sequence
signals an
error, since those arguments specify an infinite sequence.
All arguments are numbers.
Floating-point arguments can be tricky, because floating-point
arithmetic is inexact. For instance, depending on the machine, it may
quite well happen that (number-sequence 0.4 0.6 0.2)
returns
the one element list (0.4)
, whereas
(number-sequence 0.4 0.8 0.2)
returns a list with three
elements. The nth element of the list is computed by the exact
formula (+ from (* n separation))
. Thus, if
one wants to make sure that to is included in the list, one can
pass an expression of this exact type for to. Alternatively,
one can replace to with a slightly larger value (or a slightly
more negative value if separation is negative).
Some examples:
(number-sequence 4 9) ⇒ (4 5 6 7 8 9) (number-sequence 9 4 -1) ⇒ (9 8 7 6 5 4) (number-sequence 9 4 -2) ⇒ (9 7 5) (number-sequence 8) ⇒ (8) (number-sequence 8 5) ⇒ nil (number-sequence 5 8 -1) ⇒ nil (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) ⇒ (1.5 3.5 5.5)
These functions, and one macro, provide convenient ways to modify a list which is stored in a variable.
This macro creates a new list whose CAR is element and
whose CDR is the list specified by listname, and saves that
list in listname. In the simplest case, listname is an
unquoted symbol naming a list, and this macro is equivalent
to (setq listname (cons element listname))
.
(setq l '(a b)) ⇒ (a b) (push 'c l) ⇒ (c a b) l ⇒ (c a b)
More generally, listname
can be a generalized variable. In
that case, this macro does the equivalent of (setf listname (cons element listname))
.
See Generalized Variables.
For the pop
macro, which removes the first element from a list,
See Accessing Elements of Lists.
Two functions modify lists that are the values of variables.
This function sets the variable symbol by consing element
onto the old value, if element is not already a member of that
value. It returns the resulting list, whether updated or not. The
value of symbol had better be a list already before the call.
add-to-list
uses compare-fn to compare element
against existing list members; if compare-fn is nil
, it
uses equal
.
Normally, if element is added, it is added to the front of
symbol, but if the optional argument append is
non-nil
, it is added at the end.
The argument symbol is not implicitly quoted; add-to-list
is an ordinary function, like set
and unlike setq
. Quote
the argument yourself if that is what you want.
Do not use this function when symbol refers to a lexical variable.
Here’s a scenario showing how to use add-to-list
:
(setq foo '(a b)) ⇒ (a b) (add-to-list 'foo 'c) ;; Addc
. ⇒ (c a b) (add-to-list 'foo 'b) ;; No effect. ⇒ (c a b) foo ;;foo
was changed. ⇒ (c a b)
An equivalent expression for (add-to-list 'var
value)
is this:
(if (member value var) var (setq var (cons value var)))
This function sets the variable symbol by inserting
element into the old value, which must be a list, at the
position specified by order. If element is already a
member of the list, its position in the list is adjusted according
to order. Membership is tested using eq
.
This function returns the resulting list, whether updated or not.
The order is typically a number (integer or float), and the elements of the list are sorted in non-decreasing numerical order.
order may also be omitted or nil
. Then the numeric order
of element stays unchanged if it already has one; otherwise,
element has no numeric order. Elements without a numeric list
order are placed at the end of the list, in no particular order.
Any other value for order removes the numeric order of element
if it already has one; otherwise, it is equivalent to nil
.
The argument symbol is not implicitly quoted;
add-to-ordered-list
is an ordinary function, like set
and unlike setq
. Quote the argument yourself if necessary.
The ordering information is stored in a hash table on symbol’s
list-order
property.
symbol cannot refer to a lexical variable.
Here’s a scenario showing how to use add-to-ordered-list
:
(setq foo '()) ⇒ nil (add-to-ordered-list 'foo 'a 1) ;; Adda
. ⇒ (a) (add-to-ordered-list 'foo 'c 3) ;; Addc
. ⇒ (a c) (add-to-ordered-list 'foo 'b 2) ;; Addb
. ⇒ (a b c) (add-to-ordered-list 'foo 'b 4) ;; Moveb
. ⇒ (a c b) (add-to-ordered-list 'foo 'd) ;; Appendd
. ⇒ (a c b d) (add-to-ordered-list 'foo 'e) ;; Adde
. ⇒ (a c b e d) foo ;;foo
was changed. ⇒ (a c b e d)
You can modify the CAR and CDR contents of a cons cell with the
primitives setcar
and setcdr
. These are destructive
operations because they change existing list structure.
Destructive operations should be applied only to mutable lists,
that is, lists constructed via cons
, list
or similar
operations. Lists created by quoting are part of the program and
should not be changed by destructive operations. See Mutability.
Common Lisp note: Common Lisp uses functions
rplaca
andrplacd
to alter list structure; they change structure the same way assetcar
andsetcdr
, but the Common Lisp functions return the cons cell whilesetcar
andsetcdr
return the new CAR or CDR.
setcar
¶Changing the CAR of a cons cell is done with setcar
. When
used on a list, setcar
replaces one element of a list with a
different element.
This function stores object as the new CAR of cons, replacing its previous CAR. In other words, it changes the CAR slot of cons to refer to object. It returns the value object. For example:
(setq x (list 1 2)) ⇒ (1 2)
(setcar x 4) ⇒ 4
x ⇒ (4 2)
When a cons cell is part of the shared structure of several lists, storing a new CAR into the cons changes one element of each of these lists. Here is an example:
;; Create two lists that are partly shared.
(setq x1 (list 'a 'b 'c))
⇒ (a b c)
(setq x2 (cons 'z (cdr x1)))
⇒ (z b c)
;; Replace the CAR of a shared link. (setcar (cdr x1) 'foo) ⇒ foo x1 ; Both lists are changed. ⇒ (a foo c) x2 ⇒ (z foo c)
;; Replace the CAR of a link that is not shared. (setcar x1 'baz) ⇒ baz x1 ; Only one list is changed. ⇒ (baz foo c) x2 ⇒ (z foo c)
Here is a graphical depiction of the shared structure of the two lists
in the variables x1
and x2
, showing why replacing b
changes them both:
--- --- --- --- --- --- x1---> | | |----> | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- --- --- | --> | | | | | | --> a | --> b --> c | --- --- | x2--> | | |-- --- --- | | --> z
Here is an alternative form of box diagram, showing the same relationship:
x1: -------------- -------------- -------------- | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | a | o------->| b | o------->| c | nil | | | | -->| | | | | | -------------- | -------------- -------------- | x2: | -------------- | | car | cdr | | | z | o---- | | | --------------
The lowest-level primitive for modifying a CDR is setcdr
:
This function stores object as the new CDR of cons, replacing its previous CDR. In other words, it changes the CDR slot of cons to refer to object. It returns the value object.
Here is an example of replacing the CDR of a list with a different list. All but the first element of the list are removed in favor of a different sequence of elements. The first element is unchanged, because it resides in the CAR of the list, and is not reached via the CDR.
(setq x (list 1 2 3)) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(setcdr x '(4)) ⇒ (4)
x ⇒ (1 4)
You can delete elements from the middle of a list by altering the
CDRs of the cons cells in the list. For example, here we delete
the second element, b
, from the list (a b c)
, by changing
the CDR of the first cons cell:
(setq x1 (list 'a 'b 'c)) ⇒ (a b c) (setcdr x1 (cdr (cdr x1))) ⇒ (c) x1 ⇒ (a c)
Here is the result in box notation:
-------------------- | | -------------- | -------------- | -------------- | car | cdr | | | car | cdr | -->| car | cdr | | a | o----- | b | o-------->| c | nil | | | | | | | | | | -------------- -------------- --------------
The second cons cell, which previously held the element b
, still
exists and its CAR is still b
, but it no longer forms part
of this list.
It is equally easy to insert a new element by changing CDRs:
(setq x1 (list 'a 'b 'c)) ⇒ (a b c) (setcdr x1 (cons 'd (cdr x1))) ⇒ (d b c) x1 ⇒ (a d b c)
Here is this result in box notation:
-------------- ------------- ------------- | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | a | o | -->| b | o------->| c | nil | | | | | | | | | | | | --------- | -- | ------------- ------------- | | ----- -------- | | | --------------- | | | car | cdr | | -->| d | o------ | | | ---------------
Here are some functions that rearrange lists destructively by modifying the CDRs of their component cons cells. These functions are destructive because they chew up the original lists passed to them as arguments, relinking their cons cells to form a new list that is the returned value.
See delq
, in Using Lists as Sets, for another function
that modifies cons cells.
This function returns a list containing all the elements of lists.
Unlike append
(see Building Cons Cells and Lists), the lists are
not copied. Instead, the last CDR of each of the
lists is changed to refer to the following list. The last of the
lists is not altered. For example:
(setq x (list 1 2 3)) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(nconc x '(4 5)) ⇒ (1 2 3 4 5)
x ⇒ (1 2 3 4 5)
Since the last argument of nconc
is not itself modified, it is
reasonable to use a constant list, such as '(4 5)
, as in the
above example. For the same reason, the last argument need not be a
list:
(setq x (list 1 2 3)) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(nconc x 'z) ⇒ (1 2 3 . z)
x ⇒ (1 2 3 . z)
However, the other arguments (all but the last) should be mutable lists.
A common pitfall is to use a constant list as a non-last argument to
nconc
. If you do this, the resulting behavior is undefined
(see Self-Evaluating Forms). It is possible that your program
will change each time you run it! Here is what might happen (though
this is not guaranteed to happen):
(defun add-foo (x) ; We want this function to add
(nconc '(foo) x)) ; foo
to the front of its arg.
(symbol-function 'add-foo) ⇒ (lambda (x) (nconc '(foo) x))
(setq xx (add-foo '(1 2))) ; It seems to work.
⇒ (foo 1 2)
(setq xy (add-foo '(3 4))) ; What happened?
⇒ (foo 1 2 3 4)
(eq xx xy) ⇒ t
(symbol-function 'add-foo) ⇒ (lambda (x) (nconc '(foo 1 2 3 4) x))
A list can represent an unordered mathematical set—simply consider
a value an element of a set if it appears in the list, and ignore the
order of the list. To form the union of two sets, use append
(as long as you don’t mind having duplicate elements). You can remove
equal
duplicates using delete-dups
or seq-uniq
.
Other useful functions for sets include memq
and delq
,
and their equal
versions, member
and delete
.
Common Lisp note: Common Lisp has functions
union
(which avoids duplicate elements) andintersection
for set operations. In Emacs Lisp, variants of these facilities are provided by the cl-lib library. See Lists as Sets in Common Lisp Extensions.
This function tests to see whether object is a member of
list. If it is, memq
returns a list starting with the
first occurrence of object. Otherwise, it returns nil
.
The letter ‘q’ in memq
says that it uses eq
to
compare object against the elements of the list. For example:
(memq 'b '(a b c b a)) ⇒ (b c b a)
(memq '(2) '((1) (2))) ; The two(2)
s need not beeq
. ⇒ Unspecified; might benil
or((2))
.
This function destructively removes all elements eq
to
object from list, and returns the resulting list. The
letter ‘q’ in delq
says that it uses eq
to compare
object against the elements of the list, like memq
and
remq
.
Typically, when you invoke delq
, you should use the return
value by assigning it to the variable which held the original list.
The reason for this is explained below.
The delq
function deletes elements from the front of the list
by simply advancing down the list, and returning a sublist that starts
after those elements. For example:
(delq 'a '(a b c)) ≡ (cdr '(a b c))
When an element to be deleted appears in the middle of the list, removing it involves changing the CDRs (see Altering the CDR of a List).
(setq sample-list (list 'a 'b 'c '(4))) ⇒ (a b c (4))
(delq 'a sample-list) ⇒ (b c (4))
sample-list ⇒ (a b c (4))
(delq 'c sample-list) ⇒ (a b (4))
sample-list ⇒ (a b (4))
Note that (delq 'c sample-list)
modifies sample-list
to
splice out the third element, but (delq 'a sample-list)
does not
splice anything—it just returns a shorter list. Don’t assume that a
variable which formerly held the argument list now has fewer
elements, or that it still holds the original list! Instead, save the
result of delq
and use that. Most often we store the result back
into the variable that held the original list:
(setq flowers (delq 'rose flowers))
In the following example, the (list 4)
that delq
attempts to match
and the (4)
in the sample-list
are equal
but not eq
:
(delq (list 4) sample-list) ⇒ (a c (4))
If you want to delete elements that are equal
to a given value,
use delete
(see below).
This function returns a copy of list, with all elements removed
which are eq
to object. The letter ‘q’ in remq
says that it uses eq
to compare object against the elements
of list
.
(setq sample-list (list 'a 'b 'c 'a 'b 'c)) ⇒ (a b c a b c)
(remq 'a sample-list) ⇒ (b c b c)
sample-list ⇒ (a b c a b c)
The function memql
tests to see whether object is a member
of list, comparing members with object using eql
,
so floating-point elements are compared by value.
If object is a member, memql
returns a list starting with
its first occurrence in list. Otherwise, it returns nil
.
Compare this with memq
:
(memql 1.2 '(1.1 1.2 1.3)) ; 1.2
and 1.2
are eql
.
⇒ (1.2 1.3)
(memq 1.2 '(1.1 1.2 1.3)) ; The two1.2
s need not beeq
. ⇒ Unspecified; might benil
or(1.2 1.3)
.
The following three functions are like memq
, delq
and
remq
, but use equal
rather than eq
to compare
elements. See Equality Predicates.
The function member
tests to see whether object is a member
of list, comparing members with object using equal
.
If object is a member, member
returns a list starting with
its first occurrence in list. Otherwise, it returns nil
.
Compare this with memq
:
(member '(2) '((1) (2))) ; (2)
and (2)
are equal
.
⇒ ((2))
(memq '(2) '((1) (2))) ; The two(2)
s need not beeq
. ⇒ Unspecified; might benil
or(2)
.
;; Two strings with the same contents are equal
.
(member "foo" '("foo" "bar"))
⇒ ("foo" "bar")
This function removes all elements equal
to object from
sequence, and returns the resulting sequence.
If sequence is a list, delete
is to delq
as
member
is to memq
: it uses equal
to compare
elements with object, like member
; when it finds an
element that matches, it cuts the element out just as delq
would. As with delq
, you should typically use the return value
by assigning it to the variable which held the original list.
If sequence
is a vector or string, delete
returns a copy
of sequence
with all elements equal
to object
removed.
For example:
(setq l (list '(2) '(1) '(2))) (delete '(2) l) ⇒ ((1)) l ⇒ ((2) (1)) ;; If you want to changel
reliably, ;; write(setq l (delete '(2) l))
.
(setq l (list '(2) '(1) '(2)))
(delete '(1) l)
⇒ ((2) (2))
l
⇒ ((2) (2))
;; In this case, it makes no difference whether you set l
,
;; but you should do so for the sake of the other case.
(delete '(2) [(2) (1) (2)]) ⇒ [(1)]
This function is the non-destructive counterpart of delete
. It
returns a copy of sequence
, a list, vector, or string, with
elements equal
to object
removed. For example:
(remove '(2) '((2) (1) (2))) ⇒ ((1))
(remove '(2) [(2) (1) (2)]) ⇒ [(1)]
Common Lisp note: The functions
member
,delete
andremove
in GNU Emacs Lisp are derived from Maclisp, not Common Lisp. The Common Lisp versions do not useequal
to compare elements.
This function is like member
, except that object should
be a string and that it ignores differences in letter-case and text
representation: upper-case and lower-case letters are treated as
equal, and unibyte strings are converted to multibyte prior to
comparison.
This function destructively removes all equal
duplicates from
list, stores the result in list and returns it. Of
several equal
occurrences of an element in list,
delete-dups
keeps the first one. See seq-uniq
for
non-destructive operation (see Sequences).
See also the function add-to-list
, in Modifying List Variables,
for a way to add an element to a list stored in a variable and used as a
set.
An association list, or alist for short, records a mapping from keys to values. It is a list of cons cells called associations: the CAR of each cons cell is the key, and the CDR is the associated value.6
Here is an example of an alist. The key pine
is associated with
the value cones
; the key oak
is associated with
acorns
; and the key maple
is associated with seeds
.
((pine . cones) (oak . acorns) (maple . seeds))
Both the values and the keys in an alist may be any Lisp objects.
For example, in the following alist, the symbol a
is
associated with the number 1
, and the string "b"
is
associated with the list (2 3)
, which is the CDR of
the alist element:
((a . 1) ("b" 2 3))
Sometimes it is better to design an alist to store the associated value in the CAR of the CDR of the element. Here is an example of such an alist:
((rose red) (lily white) (buttercup yellow))
Here we regard red
as the value associated with rose
. One
advantage of this kind of alist is that you can store other related
information—even a list of other items—in the CDR of the
CDR. One disadvantage is that you cannot use rassq
(see
below) to find the element containing a given value. When neither of
these considerations is important, the choice is a matter of taste, as
long as you are consistent about it for any given alist.
The same alist shown above could be regarded as having the
associated value in the CDR of the element; the value associated
with rose
would be the list (red)
.
Association lists are often used to record information that you might otherwise keep on a stack, since new associations may be added easily to the front of the list. When searching an association list for an association with a given key, the first one found is returned, if there is more than one.
In Emacs Lisp, it is not an error if an element of an association list is not a cons cell. The alist search functions simply ignore such elements. Many other versions of Lisp signal errors in such cases.
Note that property lists are similar to association lists in several respects. A property list behaves like an association list in which each key can occur only once. See Property Lists, for a comparison of property lists and association lists.
This function returns the first association for key in
alist, comparing key against the alist elements using
testfn if it is a function, and equal
otherwise
(see Equality Predicates). If testfn is a function, it is
called with two arguments: the CAR of an element from alist
and key. The function returns nil
if no
association in alist has a CAR equal to key, as
tested by testfn. For example:
(setq trees '((pine . cones) (oak . acorns) (maple . seeds))) ⇒ ((pine . cones) (oak . acorns) (maple . seeds)) (assoc 'oak trees) ⇒ (oak . acorns) (cdr (assoc 'oak trees)) ⇒ acorns (assoc 'birch trees) ⇒ nil
Here is another example, in which the keys and values are not symbols:
(setq needles-per-cluster '((2 "Austrian Pine" "Red Pine") (3 "Pitch Pine") (5 "White Pine"))) (cdr (assoc 3 needles-per-cluster)) ⇒ ("Pitch Pine") (cdr (assoc 2 needles-per-cluster)) ⇒ ("Austrian Pine" "Red Pine")
The function assoc-string
is much like assoc
except
that it ignores certain differences between strings. See Comparison of Characters and Strings.
This function returns the first association with value value in
alist. It returns nil
if no association in alist has
a CDR equal
to value.
rassoc
is like assoc
except that it compares the CDR of
each alist association instead of the CAR. You can think of
this as reverse assoc
, finding the key for a given value.
This function is like assoc
in that it returns the first
association for key in alist, but it makes the comparison
using eq
. assq
returns nil
if no association in
alist has a CAR eq
to key. This function is
used more often than assoc
, since eq
is faster than
equal
and most alists use symbols as keys. See Equality Predicates.
(setq trees '((pine . cones) (oak . acorns) (maple . seeds))) ⇒ ((pine . cones) (oak . acorns) (maple . seeds)) (assq 'pine trees) ⇒ (pine . cones)
On the other hand, assq
is not usually useful in alists where the
keys may not be symbols:
(setq leaves
'(("simple leaves" . oak)
("compound leaves" . horsechestnut)))
(assq "simple leaves" leaves)
⇒ Unspecified; might be nil
or ("simple leaves" . oak)
.
(assoc "simple leaves" leaves)
⇒ ("simple leaves" . oak)
This function is similar to assq
. It finds the first
association (key . value)
by comparing
key with alist elements, and, if found, returns the
value of that association. If no association is found, the
function returns default. Comparison of key against
alist elements uses the function specified by testfn,
defaulting to eq
.
This is a generalized variable (see Generalized Variables)
that can be used to change a value with setf
. When
using it to set a value, optional argument remove non-nil
means to remove key’s association from alist if the new
value is eql
to default.
This function returns the first association with value value in
alist. It returns nil
if no association in alist has
a CDR eq
to value.
rassq
is like assq
except that it compares the CDR of
each alist association instead of the CAR. You can think of
this as reverse assq
, finding the key for a given value.
For example:
(setq trees '((pine . cones) (oak . acorns) (maple . seeds))) (rassq 'acorns trees) ⇒ (oak . acorns) (rassq 'spores trees) ⇒ nil
rassq
cannot search for a value stored in the CAR
of the CDR of an element:
(setq colors '((rose red) (lily white) (buttercup yellow))) (rassq 'white colors) ⇒ nil
In this case, the CDR of the association (lily white)
is not
the symbol white
, but rather the list (white)
. This
becomes clearer if the association is written in dotted pair notation:
(lily white) ≡ (lily . (white))
This function searches alist for a match for key. For each
element of alist, it compares the element (if it is an atom) or
the element’s CAR (if it is a cons) against key, by calling
test with two arguments: the element or its CAR, and
key. The arguments are passed in that order so that you can get
useful results using string-match
with an alist that contains
regular expressions (see Regular Expression Searching). If test is omitted
or nil
, equal
is used for comparison.
If an alist element matches key by this criterion,
then assoc-default
returns a value based on this element.
If the element is a cons, then the value is the element’s CDR.
Otherwise, the return value is default.
If no alist element matches key, assoc-default
returns
nil
.
This function returns a two-level deep copy of alist: it creates a new copy of each association, so that you can alter the associations of the new alist without changing the old one.
(setq needles-per-cluster '((2 . ("Austrian Pine" "Red Pine")) (3 . ("Pitch Pine"))
(5 . ("White Pine")))) ⇒ ((2 "Austrian Pine" "Red Pine") (3 "Pitch Pine") (5 "White Pine")) (setq copy (copy-alist needles-per-cluster)) ⇒ ((2 "Austrian Pine" "Red Pine") (3 "Pitch Pine") (5 "White Pine")) (eq needles-per-cluster copy) ⇒ nil (equal needles-per-cluster copy) ⇒ t (eq (car needles-per-cluster) (car copy)) ⇒ nil (cdr (car (cdr needles-per-cluster))) ⇒ ("Pitch Pine")
(eq (cdr (car (cdr needles-per-cluster))) (cdr (car (cdr copy)))) ⇒ t
This example shows how copy-alist
makes it possible to change
the associations of one copy without affecting the other:
(setcdr (assq 3 copy) '("Martian Vacuum Pine")) (cdr (assq 3 needles-per-cluster)) ⇒ ("Pitch Pine")
This function deletes from alist all the elements whose CAR
is eq
to key, much as if you used delq
to delete
each such element one by one. It returns the shortened alist, and
often modifies the original list structure of alist. For
correct results, use the return value of assq-delete-all
rather
than looking at the saved value of alist.
(setq alist (list '(foo 1) '(bar 2) '(foo 3) '(lose 4))) ⇒ ((foo 1) (bar 2) (foo 3) (lose 4)) (assq-delete-all 'foo alist) ⇒ ((bar 2) (lose 4)) alist ⇒ ((foo 1) (bar 2) (lose 4))
This function is like assq-delete-all
except that it accepts
an optional argument test, a predicate function to compare the
keys in alist. If omitted or nil
, test defaults to
equal
. As assq-delete-all
, this function often modifies
the original list structure of alist.
This function deletes from alist all the elements whose CDR
is eq
to value. It returns the shortened alist, and
often modifies the original list structure of alist.
rassq-delete-all
is like assq-delete-all
except that it
compares the CDR of each alist association instead of the
CAR.
Creates a binding for each symbol used as keys the association list alist, prefixed with dot. This can be useful when accessing several items in the same association list, and it’s best understood through a simple example:
(setq colors '((rose . red) (lily . white) (buttercup . yellow))) (let-alist colors (if (eq .rose 'red) .lily)) ⇒ white
The body is inspected at compilation time, and only the symbols
that appear in body with a ‘.’ as the first character in
the symbol name will be bound. Finding the keys is done with
assq
, and the cdr
of the return value of this
assq
is assigned as the value for the binding.
Nested association lists is supported:
(setq colors '((rose . red) (lily (belladonna . yellow) (brindisi . pink)))) (let-alist colors (if (eq .rose 'red) .lily.belladonna)) ⇒ yellow
Nesting let-alist
inside each other is allowed, but the code in
the inner let-alist
can’t access the variables bound by the
outer let-alist
.
A property list (plist for short) is a list of paired elements. Each of the pairs associates a property name (usually a symbol) with a property or value. Here is an example of a property list:
(pine cones numbers (1 2 3) color "blue")
This property list associates pine
with cones
,
numbers
with (1 2 3)
, and color
with
"blue"
. The property names and values can be any Lisp objects,
but the names are usually symbols (as they are in this example).
Property lists are used in several contexts. For instance, the
function put-text-property
takes an argument which is a
property list, specifying text properties and associated values which
are to be applied to text in a string or buffer. See Text Properties.
Another prominent use of property lists is for storing symbol properties. Every symbol possesses a list of properties, used to record miscellaneous information about the symbol; these properties are stored in the form of a property list. See Symbol Properties.
This predicate function returns non-nil
if object is a
valid property list.
Association lists (see Association Lists) are very similar to property lists. In contrast to association lists, the order of the pairs in the property list is not significant, since the property names must be distinct.
Property lists are better than association lists for attaching
information to various Lisp function names or variables. If your
program keeps all such information in one association list, it will
typically need to search that entire list each time it checks for an
association for a particular Lisp function name or variable, which
could be slow. By contrast, if you keep the same information in the
property lists of the function names or variables themselves, each
search will scan only the length of one property list, which is
usually short. This is why the documentation for a variable is
recorded in a property named variable-documentation
. The byte
compiler likewise uses properties to record those functions needing
special treatment.
However, association lists have their own advantages. Depending on your application, it may be faster to add an association to the front of an association list than to update a property. All properties for a symbol are stored in the same property list, so there is a possibility of a conflict between different uses of a property name. (For this reason, it is a good idea to choose property names that are probably unique, such as by beginning the property name with the program’s usual name-prefix for variables and functions.) An association list may be used like a stack where associations are pushed on the front of the list and later discarded; this is not possible with a property list.
The following functions can be used to manipulate property lists.
They all default to comparing property names using eq
.
This returns the value of the property property stored in the
property list plist. Comparisons are done with predicate,
which defaults to eq
. It accepts a malformed plist
argument. If property is not found in the plist, it
returns nil
. For example,
(plist-get '(foo 4) 'foo) ⇒ 4 (plist-get '(foo 4 bad) 'foo) ⇒ 4 (plist-get '(foo 4 bad) 'bad) ⇒ nil (plist-get '(foo 4 bad) 'bar) ⇒ nil
This stores value as the value of the property property in
the property list plist. Comparisons are done with predicate,
which defaults to eq
. It may modify plist destructively,
or it may construct a new list structure without altering the old. The
function returns the modified property list, so you can store that back
in the place where you got plist. For example,
(setq my-plist (list 'bar t 'foo 4)) ⇒ (bar t foo 4) (setq my-plist (plist-put my-plist 'foo 69)) ⇒ (bar t foo 69) (setq my-plist (plist-put my-plist 'quux '(a))) ⇒ (bar t foo 69 quux (a))
This obsolete function is like plist-get
except that it
compares properties using equal
instead of eq
.
This obsolete function is like plist-put
except that it
compares properties using equal
instead of eq
.
This returns non-nil
if plist contains the given
property. Comparisons are done with predicate, which
defaults to eq
. Unlike plist-get
, this allows you to
distinguish between a missing property and a property with the value
nil
. The value is actually the tail of plist whose
car
is property.
The sequence type is the union of two other Lisp types: lists and arrays. In other words, any list is a sequence, and any array is a sequence. The common property that all sequences have is that each is an ordered collection of elements.
An array is a fixed-length object with a slot for each of its elements. All the elements are accessible in constant time. The four types of arrays are strings, vectors, char-tables and bool-vectors.
A list is a sequence of elements, but it is not a single primitive object; it is made of cons cells, one cell per element. Finding the nth element requires looking through n cons cells, so elements farther from the beginning of the list take longer to access. But it is possible to add elements to the list, or remove elements.
The following diagram shows the relationship between these types:
_____________________________________________ | | | Sequence | | ______ ________________________________ | | | | | | | | | List | | Array | | | | | | ________ ________ | | | |______| | | | | | | | | | | Vector | | String | | | | | |________| |________| | | | | ____________ _____________ | | | | | | | | | | | | | Char-table | | Bool-vector | | | | | |____________| |_____________| | | | |________________________________| | |_____________________________________________|
This section describes functions that accept any kind of sequence.
This function returns t
if object is a list, vector,
string, bool-vector, or char-table, nil
otherwise. See also
seqp
below.
This function returns the number of elements in sequence. The
function signals the wrong-type-argument
error if the argument
is not a sequence or is a dotted list; it signals the
circular-list
error if the argument is a circular list. For a
char-table, the value returned is always one more than the maximum
Emacs character code.
See Definition of safe-length, for the related function safe-length
.
(length '(1 2 3)) ⇒ 3
(length ()) ⇒ 0
(length "foobar") ⇒ 6
(length [1 2 3]) ⇒ 3
(length (make-bool-vector 5 nil)) ⇒ 5
See also string-bytes
, in Text Representations.
If you need to compute the width of a string on display, you should use
string-width
(see Size of Displayed Text), not length
,
since length
only counts the number of characters, but does not
account for the display width of each character.
Return non-nil
if sequence is shorter than length.
This may be more efficient than computing the length of sequence
if sequence is a long list.
Return non-nil
if sequence is longer than length.
Return non-nil
if the length of sequence is equal to
length.
This function returns the element of sequence indexed by
index. Legitimate values of index are integers ranging
from 0 up to one less than the length of sequence. If
sequence is a list, out-of-range values behave as for
nth
. See Definition of nth. Otherwise, out-of-range values
trigger an args-out-of-range
error.
(elt [1 2 3 4] 2) ⇒ 3
(elt '(1 2 3 4) 2) ⇒ 3
;; We use string
to show clearly which character elt
returns.
(string (elt "1234" 2))
⇒ "3"
(elt [1 2 3 4] 4) error→ Args out of range: [1 2 3 4], 4
(elt [1 2 3 4] -1) error→ Args out of range: [1 2 3 4], -1
This function generalizes aref
(see Functions that Operate on Arrays) and
nth
(see Definition of nth).
This function returns a copy of seqr, which should be either a sequence or a record. The copy is the same type of object as the original, and it has the same elements in the same order. However, if seqr is empty, like a string or a vector of zero length, the value returned by this function might not be a copy, but an empty object of the same type and identical to seqr.
Storing a new element into the copy does not affect the original
seqr, and vice versa. However, the elements of the copy
are not copies; they are identical (eq
) to the elements
of the original. Therefore, changes made within these elements, as
found via the copy, are also visible in the original.
If the argument is a string with text properties, the property list in the copy is itself a copy, not shared with the original’s property list. However, the actual values of the properties are shared. See Text Properties.
This function does not work for dotted lists. Trying to copy a circular list may cause an infinite loop.
See also append
in Building Cons Cells and Lists, concat
in
Creating Strings, and vconcat
in Functions for Vectors,
for other ways to copy sequences.
(setq bar (list 1 2)) ⇒ (1 2)
(setq x (vector 'foo bar)) ⇒ [foo (1 2)]
(setq y (copy-sequence x)) ⇒ [foo (1 2)]
(eq x y) ⇒ nil
(equal x y) ⇒ t
(eq (elt x 1) (elt y 1)) ⇒ t
;; Replacing an element of one sequence.
(aset x 0 'quux)
x ⇒ [quux (1 2)]
y ⇒ [foo (1 2)]
;; Modifying the inside of a shared element.
(setcar (aref x 1) 69)
x ⇒ [quux (69 2)]
y ⇒ [foo (69 2)]
This function creates a new sequence whose elements are the elements of sequence, but in reverse order. The original argument sequence is not altered. Note that char-tables cannot be reversed.
(setq x '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ (1 2 3 4)
(reverse x) ⇒ (4 3 2 1) x ⇒ (1 2 3 4)
(setq x [1 2 3 4]) ⇒ [1 2 3 4]
(reverse x) ⇒ [4 3 2 1] x ⇒ [1 2 3 4]
(setq x "xyzzy") ⇒ "xyzzy"
(reverse x) ⇒ "yzzyx" x ⇒ "xyzzy"
This function reverses the order of the elements of sequence.
Unlike reverse
the original sequence may be modified.
For example:
(setq x (list 'a 'b 'c)) ⇒ (a b c)
x ⇒ (a b c) (nreverse x) ⇒ (c b a)
;; The cons cell that was first is now last.
x
⇒ (a)
To avoid confusion, we usually store the result of nreverse
back in the same variable which held the original list:
(setq x (nreverse x))
Here is the nreverse
of our favorite example, (a b c)
,
presented graphically:
Original list head: Reversed list: ------------- ------------- ------------ | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | a | nil |<-- | b | o |<-- | c | o | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ------------- | --------- | - | -------- | - | | | | ------------- ------------
For the vector, it is even simpler because you don’t need setq:
(setq x (copy-sequence [1 2 3 4])) ⇒ [1 2 3 4] (nreverse x) ⇒ [4 3 2 1] x ⇒ [4 3 2 1]
Note that unlike reverse
, this function doesn’t work with strings.
Although you can alter string data by using aset
, it is strongly
encouraged to treat strings as immutable even when they are mutable.
See Mutability.
This function sorts sequence stably. Note that this function doesn’t work for all sequences; it may be used only for lists and vectors. If sequence is a list, it is modified destructively. This functions returns the sorted sequence and compares elements using predicate. A stable sort is one in which elements with equal sort keys maintain their relative order before and after the sort. Stability is important when successive sorts are used to order elements according to different criteria.
The argument predicate must be a function that accepts two
arguments. It is called with two elements of sequence. To get an
increasing order sort, the predicate should return non-nil
if the
first element is “less” than the second, or nil
if not.
The comparison function predicate must give reliable results for
any given pair of arguments, at least within a single call to
sort
. It must be antisymmetric; that is, if a is
less than b, b must not be less than a. It must be
transitive—that is, if a is less than b, and b
is less than c, then a must be less than c. If you
use a comparison function which does not meet these requirements, the
result of sort
is unpredictable.
The destructive aspect of sort
for lists is that it reuses the
cons cells forming sequence by changing their contents, possibly
rearranging them in a different order. This means that the value of
the input list is undefined after sorting; only the list returned by
sort
has a well-defined value. Example:
(setq nums (list 2 1 4 3 0)) (sort nums #'<) ⇒ (0 1 2 3 4) ; nums is unpredictable at this point
Most often we store the result back into the variable that held the original list:
(setq nums (sort nums #'<))
If you wish to make a sorted copy without destroying the original, copy it first and then sort:
(setq nums (list 2 1 4 3 0)) (sort (copy-sequence nums) #'<) ⇒ (0 1 2 3 4)
nums ⇒ (2 1 4 3 0)
For the better understanding of what stable sort is, consider the following
vector example. After sorting, all items whose car
is 8 are grouped
at the beginning of vector
, but their relative order is preserved.
All items whose car
is 9 are grouped at the end of vector
,
but their relative order is also preserved:
(setq vector (vector '(8 . "xxx") '(9 . "aaa") '(8 . "bbb") '(9 . "zzz") '(9 . "ppp") '(8 . "ttt") '(8 . "eee") '(9 . "fff"))) ⇒ [(8 . "xxx") (9 . "aaa") (8 . "bbb") (9 . "zzz") (9 . "ppp") (8 . "ttt") (8 . "eee") (9 . "fff")]
(sort vector (lambda (x y) (< (car x) (car y)))) ⇒ [(8 . "xxx") (8 . "bbb") (8 . "ttt") (8 . "eee") (9 . "aaa") (9 . "zzz") (9 . "ppp") (9 . "fff")]
See Sorting Text, for more functions that perform sorting.
See documentation
in Access to Documentation Strings, for a
useful example of sort
.
The seq.el library provides the following additional sequence
manipulation macros and functions, prefixed with seq-
.
All functions defined in this library are free of side-effects; i.e., they do not modify any sequence (list, vector, or string) that you pass as an argument. Unless otherwise stated, the result is a sequence of the same type as the input. For those functions that take a predicate, this should be a function of one argument.
The seq.el library can be extended to work with additional
types of sequential data-structures. For that purpose, all functions
are defined using cl-defgeneric
. See Generic Functions, for
more details about using cl-defgeneric
for adding extensions.
This function returns the element of sequence at the specified
index, which is an integer whose valid value range is zero to
one less than the length of sequence. For out-of-range values
on built-in sequence types, seq-elt
behaves like elt
.
For the details, see Definition of elt.
(seq-elt [1 2 3 4] 2) ⇒ 3
seq-elt
returns places settable using setf
(see The setf
Macro).
(setq vec [1 2 3 4]) (setf (seq-elt vec 2) 5) vec ⇒ [1 2 5 4]
This function returns the number of elements in sequence. For
built-in sequence types, seq-length
behaves like length
.
See Definition of length.
This function returns non-nil
if object is a sequence
(a list or array), or any additional type of sequence defined via
seq.el generic functions. This is an extensible variant of
sequencep
.
(seqp [1 2]) ⇒ t
(seqp 2) ⇒ nil
This function returns all but the first n (an integer) elements of sequence. If n is negative or zero, the result is sequence.
(seq-drop [1 2 3 4 5 6] 3) ⇒ [4 5 6]
(seq-drop "hello world" -4) ⇒ "hello world"
This function returns the first n (an integer) elements of
sequence. If n is negative or zero, the result
is nil
.
(seq-take '(1 2 3 4) 3) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(seq-take [1 2 3 4] 0) ⇒ []
This function returns the members of sequence in order,
stopping before the first one for which predicate returns nil
.
(seq-take-while (lambda (elt) (> elt 0)) '(1 2 3 -1 -2)) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(seq-take-while (lambda (elt) (> elt 0)) [-1 4 6]) ⇒ []
This function returns the members of sequence in order,
starting from the first one for which predicate returns nil
.
(seq-drop-while (lambda (elt) (> elt 0)) '(1 2 3 -1 -2)) ⇒ (-1 -2)
(seq-drop-while (lambda (elt) (< elt 0)) [1 4 6]) ⇒ [1 4 6]
This function returns a list consisting of sub-sequences of sequence of (at most) length length. (The final element may be shorter than length if the length of sequence isn’t a multiple of length.
(seq-split [0 1 2 3 4] 2) ⇒ ([0 1] [2 3] [4])
This function applies function to each element of sequence in turn (presumably for side effects), and returns sequence.
This function returns the result of applying function to each element of sequence. The returned value is a list.
(seq-map #'1+ '(2 4 6)) ⇒ (3 5 7)
(seq-map #'symbol-name [foo bar]) ⇒ ("foo" "bar")
This function returns the result of applying function to each element of sequence and its index within seq. The returned value is a list.
(seq-map-indexed (lambda (elt idx) (list idx elt)) '(a b c)) ⇒ ((0 a) (1 b) (2 c))
This function returns the result of applying function to each element of sequences. The arity (see subr-arity) of function must match the number of sequences. Mapping stops at the end of the shortest sequence, and the returned value is a list.
(seq-mapn #'+ '(2 4 6) '(20 40 60)) ⇒ (22 44 66)
(seq-mapn #'concat '("moskito" "bite") ["bee" "sting"]) ⇒ ("moskitobee" "bitesting")
This function returns a list of all the elements in sequence
for which predicate returns non-nil
.
(seq-filter (lambda (elt) (> elt 0)) [1 -1 3 -3 5]) ⇒ (1 3 5)
(seq-filter (lambda (elt) (> elt 0)) '(-1 -3 -5)) ⇒ nil
This function returns a list of all the elements in sequence
for which predicate returns nil
.
(seq-remove (lambda (elt) (> elt 0)) [1 -1 3 -3 5]) ⇒ (-1 -3)
(seq-remove (lambda (elt) (< elt 0)) '(-1 -3 -5)) ⇒ nil
This function returns a copy of sequence where the element at (zero-based) index n got removed. The result is a sequence of the same type as sequence.
(seq-remove-at-position [1 -1 3 -3 5] 0) ⇒ [-1 3 -3 5]
(seq-remove-at-position [1 -1 3 -3 5] 3) ⇒ [1 -1 3 5]
This function returns a list of all non-nil
results from
calling function on the elements in sequence.
(seq-keep #'cl-digit-char-p '(?6 ?a ?7)) ⇒ (6 7)
This function returns the result of calling function with initial-value and the first element of sequence, then calling function with that result and the second element of sequence, then with that result and the third element of sequence, etc. function should be a function of two arguments.
function is called with two arguments. initial-value (and then the accumulated value) is used as the first argument, and the elements in sequence are used for the second argument.
If sequence is empty, this returns initial-value without calling function.
(seq-reduce #'+ [1 2 3 4] 0) ⇒ 10
(seq-reduce #'+ '(1 2 3 4) 5) ⇒ 15
(seq-reduce #'+ '() 3) ⇒ 3
This function returns the first non-nil
value returned by
applying predicate to each element of sequence in turn.
(seq-some #'numberp ["abc" 1 nil]) ⇒ t
(seq-some #'numberp ["abc" "def"]) ⇒ nil
(seq-some #'null ["abc" 1 nil]) ⇒ t
(seq-some #'1+ [2 4 6]) ⇒ 3
This function returns the first element in sequence for which
predicate returns non-nil
. If no element matches
predicate, the function returns default.
Note that this function has an ambiguity if the found element is identical to default, as in that case it cannot be known whether an element was found or not.
(seq-find #'numberp ["abc" 1 nil]) ⇒ 1
(seq-find #'numberp ["abc" "def"]) ⇒ nil
This function returns non-nil
if applying predicate
to every element of sequence returns non-nil
.
(seq-every-p #'numberp [2 4 6]) ⇒ t
(seq-every-p #'numberp [2 4 "6"]) ⇒ nil
This function returns non-nil
if sequence is empty.
(seq-empty-p "not empty") ⇒ nil
(seq-empty-p "") ⇒ t
This function returns the number of elements in sequence for which
predicate returns non-nil
.
(seq-count (lambda (elt) (> elt 0)) [-1 2 0 3 -2]) ⇒ 2
This function returns a copy of sequence that is sorted
according to function, a function of two arguments that returns
non-nil
if the first argument should sort before the second.
This function is similar to seq-sort
, but the elements of
sequence are transformed by applying function on them
before being sorted. function is a function of one argument.
(seq-sort-by #'seq-length #'> ["a" "ab" "abc"]) ⇒ ["abc" "ab" "a"]
This function returns non-nil
if at least one element in
sequence is equal to elt. If the optional argument
function is non-nil
, it is a function of two arguments to
use instead of the default equal
.
(seq-contains-p '(symbol1 symbol2) 'symbol1) ⇒ t
(seq-contains-p '(symbol1 symbol2) 'symbol3) ⇒ nil
This function checks whether sequence1 and sequence2
contain the same elements, regardless of the order. If the optional
argument testfn is non-nil
, it is a function of two
arguments to use instead of the default equal
.
(seq-set-equal-p '(a b c) '(c b a)) ⇒ t
(seq-set-equal-p '(a b c) '(c b)) ⇒ nil
(seq-set-equal-p '("a" "b" "c") '("c" "b" "a")) ⇒ t
(seq-set-equal-p '("a" "b" "c") '("c" "b" "a") #'eq) ⇒ nil
This function returns the (zero-based) index of the first element in
sequence that is equal to elt. If the optional argument
function is non-nil
, it is a function of two arguments to
use instead of the default equal
.
(seq-position '(a b c) 'b) ⇒ 1
(seq-position '(a b c) 'd) ⇒ nil
This function returns a list of the (zero-based) indices of the
elements in sequence for which testfn returns
non-nil
when passed the element and elt as
arguments. testfn defaults to equal
.
(seq-positions '(a b c a d) 'a) ⇒ (0 3)
(seq-positions '(a b c a d) 'z) ⇒ nil
(seq-positions '(11 5 7 12 9 15) 10 #'>=) ⇒ (0 3 5)
This function returns a list of the elements of sequence with
duplicates removed. If the optional argument function is non-nil
,
it is a function of two arguments to use instead of the default equal
.
(seq-uniq '(1 2 2 1 3)) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(seq-uniq '(1 2 2.0 1.0) #'=) ⇒ (1 2)
This function returns a subset of sequence from start to end, both integers (end defaults to the last element). If start or end is negative, it counts from the end of sequence.
(seq-subseq '(1 2 3 4 5) 1) ⇒ (2 3 4 5)
(seq-subseq '[1 2 3 4 5] 1 3) ⇒ [2 3]
(seq-subseq '[1 2 3 4 5] -3 -1) ⇒ [3 4]
This function returns a sequence of type type made of the
concatenation of sequences. type may be: vector
,
list
or string
.
(seq-concatenate 'list '(1 2) '(3 4) [5 6]) ⇒ (1 2 3 4 5 6)
(seq-concatenate 'string "Hello " "world") ⇒ "Hello world"
This function returns the result of applying seq-concatenate
to the result of applying function to each element of
sequence. The result is a sequence of type type, or a
list if type is nil
.
(seq-mapcat #'seq-reverse '((3 2 1) (6 5 4))) ⇒ (1 2 3 4 5 6)
This function returns a list of the elements of sequence
grouped into sub-sequences of length n. The last sequence may
contain less elements than n. n must be an integer. If
n is a negative integer or 0, the return value is nil
.
(seq-partition '(0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7) 3) ⇒ ((0 1 2) (3 4 5) (6 7))
This function returns a list of the elements that appear either in
sequence1 or sequence2. The elements of the returned list
are all unique, in the sense that no two elements there will compare
equal. If the optional argument function is non-nil
, it
should be a function of two arguments to use to compare elements,
instead of the default equal
.
(seq-union [1 2 3] [3 5]) ⇒ (1 2 3 5)
This function returns a list of the elements that appear both in
sequence1 and sequence2. If the optional argument
function is non-nil
, it is a function of two arguments to
use to compare elements instead of the default equal
.
(seq-intersection [2 3 4 5] [1 3 5 6 7]) ⇒ (3 5)
This function returns a list of the elements that appear in
sequence1 but not in sequence2. If the optional argument
function is non-nil
, it is a function of two arguments to
use to compare elements instead of the default equal
.
(seq-difference '(2 3 4 5) [1 3 5 6 7]) ⇒ (2 4)
This function separates the elements of sequence into an alist
whose keys are the result of applying function to each element
of sequence. Keys are compared using equal
.
(seq-group-by #'integerp '(1 2.1 3 2 3.2)) ⇒ ((t 1 3 2) (nil 2.1 3.2))
(seq-group-by #'car '((a 1) (b 2) (a 3) (c 4))) ⇒ ((b (b 2)) (a (a 1) (a 3)) (c (c 4)))
This function converts the sequence sequence into a sequence
of type type. type can be one of the following symbols:
vector
, string
or list
.
(seq-into [1 2 3] 'list) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(seq-into nil 'vector) ⇒ []
(seq-into "hello" 'vector) ⇒ [104 101 108 108 111]
This function returns the smallest element of sequence. The elements of sequence must be numbers or markers (see Markers).
(seq-min [3 1 2]) ⇒ 1
(seq-min "Hello") ⇒ 72
This function returns the largest element of sequence. The elements of sequence must be numbers or markers.
(seq-max [1 3 2]) ⇒ 3
(seq-max "Hello") ⇒ 111
This macro is like dolist
(see dolist), except
that sequence can be a list, vector or string. This is
primarily useful for side-effects.
This macro binds the variables defined in var-sequence to the values that are the corresponding elements of val-sequence. This is known as destructuring binding. The elements of var-sequence can themselves include sequences, allowing for nested destructuring.
The var-sequence sequence can also include the &rest
marker followed by a variable name to be bound to the rest of
val-sequence.
(seq-let [first second] [1 2 3 4] (list first second)) ⇒ (1 2)
(seq-let (_ a _ b) '(1 2 3 4) (list a b)) ⇒ (2 4)
(seq-let [a [b [c]]] [1 [2 [3]]] (list a b c)) ⇒ (1 2 3)
(seq-let [a b &rest others] [1 2 3 4] others)
⇒ [3 4]
The pcase
patterns provide an alternative facility for
destructuring binding, see Destructuring with pcase
Patterns.
This macro works similarly to seq-let
, except that values are
assigned to variables as if by setq
instead of as in a
let
binding.
(let ((a nil) (b nil)) (seq-setq (_ a _ b) '(1 2 3 4)) (list a b)) ⇒ (2 4)
This function returns an element of sequence taken at random.
(seq-random-elt [1 2 3 4]) ⇒ 3 (seq-random-elt [1 2 3 4]) ⇒ 2 (seq-random-elt [1 2 3 4]) ⇒ 4 (seq-random-elt [1 2 3 4]) ⇒ 2 (seq-random-elt [1 2 3 4]) ⇒ 1
If sequence is empty, this function signals an error.
An array object has slots that hold a number of other Lisp objects, called the elements of the array. Any element of an array may be accessed in constant time. In contrast, the time to access an element of a list is proportional to the position of that element in the list.
Emacs defines four types of array, all one-dimensional:
strings (see String Type), vectors (see Vector Type), bool-vectors (see Bool-Vector Type), and
char-tables (see Char-Table Type). Vectors and char-tables
can hold elements of any type, but strings can only hold characters,
and bool-vectors can only hold t
and nil
.
All four kinds of array share these characteristics:
aref
and aset
, respectively (see Functions that Operate on Arrays).
When you create an array, other than a char-table, you must specify its length. You cannot specify the length of a char-table, because that is determined by the range of character codes.
In principle, if you want an array of text characters, you could use either a string or a vector. In practice, we always choose strings for such applications, for four reasons:
By contrast, for an array of keyboard input characters (such as a key sequence), a vector may be necessary, because many keyboard input characters are outside the range that will fit in a string. See Key Sequence Input.
In this section, we describe the functions that accept all types of arrays.
This function returns t
if object is an array (i.e., a
vector, a string, a bool-vector or a char-table).
(arrayp [a])
⇒ t
(arrayp "asdf")
⇒ t
(arrayp (syntax-table)) ;; A char-table.
⇒ t
This function returns the indexth element of the array or record arr. The first element is at index zero.
(setq primes [2 3 5 7 11 13]) ⇒ [2 3 5 7 11 13] (aref primes 4) ⇒ 11
(aref "abcdefg" 1)
⇒ 98 ; ‘b’ is ASCII code 98.
See also the function elt
, in Sequences.
This function sets the indexth element of array to be object. It returns object.
(setq w (vector 'foo 'bar 'baz)) ⇒ [foo bar baz] (aset w 0 'fu) ⇒ fu w ⇒ [fu bar baz]
;; copy-sequence
copies the string to be modified later.
(setq x (copy-sequence "asdfasfd"))
⇒ "asdfasfd"
(aset x 3 ?Z)
⇒ 90
x
⇒ "asdZasfd"
The array should be mutable. See Mutability.
If array is a string and object is not a character, a
wrong-type-argument
error results. The function converts a
unibyte string to multibyte if necessary to insert a character.
This function fills the array array with object, so that each element of array is object. It returns array.
(setq a (copy-sequence [a b c d e f g])) ⇒ [a b c d e f g] (fillarray a 0) ⇒ [0 0 0 0 0 0 0] a ⇒ [0 0 0 0 0 0 0]
(setq s (copy-sequence "When in the course")) ⇒ "When in the course" (fillarray s ?-) ⇒ "------------------"
If array is a string and object is not a character, a
wrong-type-argument
error results.
The general sequence functions copy-sequence
and length
are often useful for objects known to be arrays. See Sequences.
A vector is a general-purpose array whose elements can be any Lisp objects. (By contrast, the elements of a string can only be characters. See Strings and Characters.) Vectors are used in Emacs for many purposes: as key sequences (see Key Sequences), as symbol-lookup tables (see Creating and Interning Symbols), as part of the representation of a byte-compiled function (see Byte Compilation), and more.
Like other arrays, vectors use zero-origin indexing: the first element has index 0.
Vectors are printed with square brackets surrounding the elements.
Thus, a vector whose elements are the symbols a
, b
and
a
is printed as [a b a]
. You can write vectors in the
same way in Lisp input.
A vector, like a string or a number, is considered a constant for
evaluation: the result of evaluating it is the same vector. This does
not evaluate or even examine the elements of the vector.
See Self-Evaluating Forms. Vectors written with square brackets
should not be modified via aset
or other destructive
operations. See Mutability.
Here are examples illustrating these principles:
(setq avector [1 two '(three) "four" [five]]) ⇒ [1 two '(three) "four" [five]] (eval avector) ⇒ [1 two '(three) "four" [five]] (eq avector (eval avector)) ⇒ t
Here are some functions that relate to vectors:
This function returns t
if object is a vector.
(vectorp [a]) ⇒ t (vectorp "asdf") ⇒ nil
This function creates and returns a vector whose elements are the arguments, objects.
(vector 'foo 23 [bar baz] "rats") ⇒ [foo 23 [bar baz] "rats"] (vector) ⇒ []
This function returns a new vector consisting of length elements, each initialized to object.
(setq sleepy (make-vector 9 'Z)) ⇒ [Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z]
This function returns a new vector containing all the elements of sequences. The arguments sequences may be proper lists, vectors, strings or bool-vectors. If no sequences are given, the empty vector is returned.
The value is either the empty vector, or is a newly constructed
nonempty vector that is not eq
to any existing vector.
(setq a (vconcat '(A B C) '(D E F))) ⇒ [A B C D E F] (eq a (vconcat a)) ⇒ nil
(vconcat) ⇒ [] (vconcat [A B C] "aa" '(foo (6 7))) ⇒ [A B C 97 97 foo (6 7)]
The vconcat
function also allows byte-code function objects as
arguments. This is a special feature to make it easy to access the entire
contents of a byte-code function object. See Byte-Code Function Objects.
For other concatenation functions, see mapconcat
in Mapping Functions, concat
in Creating Strings, and append
in Building Cons Cells and Lists.
The append
function also provides a way to convert a vector into a
list with the same elements:
(setq avector [1 two (quote (three)) "four" [five]]) ⇒ [1 two '(three) "four" [five]] (append avector nil) ⇒ (1 two '(three) "four" [five])
A char-table is much like a vector, except that it is indexed by
character codes. Any valid character code, without modifiers, can be
used as an index in a char-table. You can access a char-table’s
elements with aref
and aset
, as with any array. In
addition, a char-table can have extra slots to hold additional
data not associated with particular character codes. Like vectors,
char-tables are constants when evaluated, and can hold elements of any
type.
Each char-table has a subtype, a symbol, which serves two purposes:
display-table
as the subtype, and syntax tables are char-tables with
syntax-table
as the subtype. The subtype can be queried using
the function char-table-subtype
, described below.
char-table-extra-slots
symbol property (see Symbol Properties), whose value should be an integer between 0 and 10. If
the subtype has no such symbol property, the char-table has no extra
slots.
A char-table can have a parent, which is another char-table. If
it does, then whenever the char-table specifies nil
for a
particular character c, it inherits the value specified in the
parent. In other words, (aref char-table c)
returns
the value from the parent of char-table if char-table itself
specifies nil
.
A char-table can also have a default value. If so, then
(aref char-table c)
returns the default value
whenever the char-table does not specify any other non-nil
value.
Return a newly-created char-table, with subtype subtype (a
symbol). Each element is initialized to init, which defaults to
nil
. You cannot alter the subtype of a char-table after the
char-table is created.
There is no argument to specify the length of the char-table, because all char-tables have room for any valid character code as an index.
If subtype has the char-table-extra-slots
symbol
property, that specifies the number of extra slots in the char-table.
This should be an integer between 0 and 10; otherwise,
make-char-table
raises an error. If subtype has no
char-table-extra-slots
symbol property (see Property Lists), the char-table has no extra slots.
This function returns t
if object is a char-table, and
nil
otherwise.
This function returns the subtype symbol of char-table.
There is no special function to access default values in a char-table.
To do that, use char-table-range
(see below).
This function returns the parent of char-table. The parent is
always either nil
or another char-table.
This function sets the parent of char-table to new-parent.
This function returns the contents of extra slot n (zero based) of char-table. The number of extra slots in a char-table is determined by its subtype.
This function stores value in extra slot n (zero based) of char-table.
A char-table can specify an element value for a single character code; it can also specify a value for an entire character set.
This returns the value specified in char-table for a range of characters range. Here are the possibilities for range:
nil
Refers to the default value.
Refers to the element for character char (supposing char is a valid character code).
(from . to)
A cons cell refers to all the characters in the inclusive range ‘[from..to]’. In this case, the function returns the value for the character specified by from.
This function sets the value in char-table for a range of characters range. Here are the possibilities for range:
nil
Refers to the default value.
t
Refers to the whole range of character codes.
Refers to the element for character char (supposing char is a valid character code).
(from . to)
A cons cell refers to all the characters in the inclusive range ‘[from..to]’.
This function calls its argument function for each element of
char-table that has a non-nil
value. The call to
function is with two arguments, a key and a value. The key
is a possible range argument for char-table-range
—either
a valid character or a cons cell (from . to)
,
specifying a range of characters that share the same value. The value is
what (char-table-range char-table key)
returns.
Overall, the key-value pairs passed to function describe all the values stored in char-table.
The return value is always nil
; to make calls to
map-char-table
useful, function should have side effects.
For example, here is how to examine the elements of the syntax table:
(let (accumulator) (map-char-table (lambda (key value) (setq accumulator (cons (list (if (consp key) (list (car key) (cdr key)) key) value) accumulator))) (syntax-table)) accumulator) ⇒ (((2597602 4194303) (2)) ((2597523 2597601) (3)) ... (65379 (5 . 65378)) (65378 (4 . 65379)) (65377 (1)) ... (12 (0)) (11 (3)) (10 (12)) (9 (0)) ((0 8) (3)))
A bool-vector is much like a vector, except that it stores only the
values t
and nil
. If you try to store any non-nil
value into an element of the bool-vector, the effect is to store
t
there. As with all arrays, bool-vector indices start from 0,
and the length cannot be changed once the bool-vector is created.
Bool-vectors are constants when evaluated.
Several functions work specifically with bool-vectors; aside from that, you manipulate them with same functions used for other kinds of arrays.
Return a new bool-vector of length elements, each one initialized to initial.
This function creates and returns a bool-vector whose elements are the arguments, objects.
This returns t
if object is a bool-vector,
and nil
otherwise.
There are also some bool-vector set operation functions, described below:
Return bitwise exclusive or of bool vectors a and b. If optional argument c is given, the result of this operation is stored into c. All arguments should be bool vectors of the same length.
Return bitwise or of bool vectors a and b. If optional argument c is given, the result of this operation is stored into c. All arguments should be bool vectors of the same length.
Return bitwise and of bool vectors a and b. If optional argument c is given, the result of this operation is stored into c. All arguments should be bool vectors of the same length.
Return set difference of bool vectors a and b. If optional argument c is given, the result of this operation is stored into c. All arguments should be bool vectors of the same length.
Return set complement of bool vector a. If optional argument b is given, the result of this operation is stored into b. All arguments should be bool vectors of the same length.
Return t
if every t
value in a is also t
in
b, nil
otherwise. All arguments should be bool vectors of the
same length.
Return the number of consecutive elements in a equal b
starting at i. a
is a bool vector, b is t
or nil
, and i is an index into a
.
Return the number of elements that are t
in bool vector a.
The printed form represents up to 8 boolean values as a single character:
(bool-vector t nil t nil) ⇒ #&4"^E" (bool-vector) ⇒ #&0""
You can use vconcat
to print a bool-vector like other vectors:
(vconcat (bool-vector nil t nil t)) ⇒ [nil t nil t]
Here is another example of creating, examining, and updating a bool-vector:
(setq bv (make-bool-vector 5 t)) ⇒ #&5"^_" (aref bv 1) ⇒ t (aset bv 3 nil) ⇒ nil bv ⇒ #&5"^W"
These results make sense because the binary codes for control-_ and control-W are 11111 and 10111, respectively.
A ring is a fixed-size data structure that supports insertion,
deletion, rotation, and modulo-indexed reference and traversal. An
efficient ring data structure is implemented by the ring
package. It provides the functions listed in this section.
Note that several rings in Emacs, like the kill ring and the
mark ring, are actually implemented as simple lists, not using
the ring
package; thus the following functions won’t work on
them.
This returns a new ring capable of holding size objects. size should be an integer.
This returns t
if object is a ring, nil
otherwise.
This returns the maximum capacity of the ring.
This returns the number of objects that ring currently contains.
The value will never exceed that returned by ring-size
.
This returns a list of the objects in ring, in order, newest first.
This returns a new ring which is a copy of ring.
The new ring contains the same (eq
) objects as ring.
This returns t
if ring is empty, nil
otherwise.
The newest element in the ring always has index 0. Higher indices correspond to older elements. Indices are computed modulo the ring length. Index −1 corresponds to the oldest element, −2 to the next-oldest, and so forth.
This returns the object in ring found at index index.
index may be negative or greater than the ring length. If
ring is empty, ring-ref
signals an error.
This inserts object into ring, making it the newest element, and returns object.
If the ring is full, insertion removes the oldest element to make room for the new element.
Remove an object from ring, and return that object. The
argument index specifies which item to remove; if it is
nil
, that means to remove the oldest item. If ring is
empty, ring-remove
signals an error.
This inserts object into ring, treating it as the oldest element. The return value is not significant.
If the ring is full, this function removes the newest element to make room for the inserted element.
Set the size of ring to size. If the new size is smaller, then the oldest items in the ring are discarded.
If you are careful not to exceed the ring size, you can use the ring as a first-in-first-out queue. For example:
(let ((fifo (make-ring 5))) (mapc (lambda (obj) (ring-insert fifo obj)) '(0 one "two")) (list (ring-remove fifo) t (ring-remove fifo) t (ring-remove fifo))) ⇒ (0 t one t "two")
The purpose of records is to allow programmers to create objects
with new types that are not built into Emacs. They are used as the
underlying representation of cl-defstruct
and defclass
instances.
Internally, a record object is much like a vector; its slots can be
accessed using aref
and it can be copied using
copy-sequence
. However, the first slot is used to hold its
type as returned by type-of
. Also, in the current
implementation records can have at most 4096 slots, whereas vectors
can be much larger. Like arrays, records use zero-origin indexing:
the first slot has index 0.
The type slot should be a symbol or a type descriptor. If it’s a type descriptor, the symbol naming its type will be returned; Type Descriptors. Any other kind of object is returned as-is.
The printed representation of records is ‘#s’ followed by a list specifying the contents. The first list element must be the record type. The following elements are the record slots.
To avoid conflicts with other type names, Lisp programs that define new types of records should normally use the naming conventions of the package where these record types are introduced for the names of the types. Note that the names of the types which could possibly conflict might not be known at the time the package defining a record type is loaded; they could be loaded at some future point in time.
A record is considered a constant for evaluation: the result of evaluating it is the same record. This does not evaluate or even examine the slots. See Self-Evaluating Forms.
This function returns t
if object is a record.
(recordp #s(a)) ⇒ t
This function creates and returns a record whose type is type and remaining slots are the rest of the arguments, objects.
(record 'foo 23 [bar baz] "rats") ⇒ #s(foo 23 [bar baz] "rats")
This function returns a new record with type type and length more slots, each initialized to object.
(setq sleepy (make-record 'foo 9 'Z)) ⇒ #s(foo Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z)
Code compiled with older versions of cl-defstruct
that
doesn’t use records may run into problems when used in a new Emacs.
To alleviate this, Emacs detects when an old cl-defstruct
is
used, and enables a mode in which type-of
handles old struct
objects as if they were records.
If arg is positive, enable backward compatibility with old-style structs.
A hash table is a very fast kind of lookup table, somewhat like an alist (see Association Lists) in that it maps keys to corresponding values. It differs from an alist in these ways:
Emacs Lisp provides a general-purpose hash table data type, along with a series of functions for operating on them. Hash tables have a special printed representation, which consists of ‘#s’ followed by a list specifying the hash table properties and contents. See Creating Hash Tables. (Hash notation, the initial ‘#’ character used in the printed representations of objects with no read representation, has nothing to do with hash tables. See Printed Representation and Read Syntax.)
Obarrays are also a kind of hash table, but they are a different type of object and are used only for recording interned symbols (see Creating and Interning Symbols).
The principal function for creating a hash table is
make-hash-table
.
This function creates a new hash table according to the specified arguments. The arguments should consist of alternating keywords (particular symbols recognized specially) and values corresponding to them.
Several keywords make sense in make-hash-table
, but the only two
that you really need to know about are :test
and :weakness
.
:test test
This specifies the method of key lookup for this hash table. The
default is eql
; eq
and equal
are other
alternatives:
eql
Keys which are numbers are the same if they are equal
, that
is, if they are equal in value and either both are integers or both
are floating point; otherwise, two distinct objects are never
the same.
eq
Any two distinct Lisp objects are different as keys.
equal
Two Lisp objects are the same, as keys, if they are equal
according to equal
.
You can use define-hash-table-test
(see Defining Hash Comparisons) to
define additional possibilities for test.
:weakness weak
The weakness of a hash table specifies whether the presence of a key or value in the hash table preserves it from garbage collection.
The value, weak, must be one of nil
, key
,
value
, key-or-value
, key-and-value
, or t
which is an alias for key-and-value
. If weak is key
then the hash table does not prevent its keys from being collected as
garbage (if they are not referenced anywhere else); if a particular key
does get collected, the corresponding association is removed from the
hash table.
If weak is value
, then the hash table does not prevent
values from being collected as garbage (if they are not referenced
anywhere else); if a particular value does get collected, the
corresponding association is removed from the hash table.
If weak is key-and-value
or t
, both the key and
the value must be live in order to preserve the association. Thus,
the hash table does not protect either keys or values from garbage
collection; if either one is collected as garbage, that removes the
association.
If weak is key-or-value
, either the key or
the value can preserve the association. Thus, associations are
removed from the hash table when both their key and value would be
collected as garbage (if not for references from weak hash tables).
The default for weak is nil
, so that all keys and values
referenced in the hash table are preserved from garbage collection.
:size size
This specifies a hint for how many associations you plan to store in the hash table. If you know the approximate number, you can make things a little more efficient by specifying it this way. If you specify too small a size, the hash table will grow automatically when necessary, but doing that takes some extra time.
The default size is 65.
:rehash-size rehash-size
When you add an association to a hash table and the table is full, it grows automatically. This value specifies how to make the hash table larger, at that time.
If rehash-size is an integer, it should be positive, and the hash table grows by adding approximately that much to the nominal size. If rehash-size is floating point, it had better be greater than 1, and the hash table grows by multiplying the old size by approximately that number.
The default value is 1.5.
:rehash-threshold threshold
This specifies the criterion for when the hash table is full (so it should be made larger). The value, threshold, should be a positive floating-point number, no greater than 1. The hash table is full whenever the actual number of entries exceeds the nominal size multiplied by an approximation to this value. The default for threshold is 0.8125.
You can also create a hash table using the printed representation
for hash tables. The Lisp reader can read this printed
representation, provided each element in the specified hash table has
a valid read syntax (see Printed Representation and Read Syntax). For instance,
the following specifies a hash table containing the keys
key1
and key2
(both symbols) associated with val1
(a symbol) and 300
(a number) respectively.
#s(hash-table size 30 data (key1 val1 key2 300))
Note, however, that when using this in Emacs Lisp code, it’s
undefined whether this creates a new hash table or not. If you want
to create a new hash table, you should always use
make-hash-table
(see Self-Evaluating Forms).
The printed representation for a hash table consists of ‘#s’
followed by a list beginning with ‘hash-table’. The rest of the
list should consist of zero or more property-value pairs specifying
the hash table’s properties and initial contents. The properties and
values are read literally. Valid property names are size
,
test
, weakness
, rehash-size
,
rehash-threshold
, and data
. The data
property
should be a list of key-value pairs for the initial contents; the
other properties have the same meanings as the matching
make-hash-table
keywords (:size
, :test
, etc.),
described above.
Note that you cannot specify a hash table whose initial contents include objects that have no read syntax, such as buffers and frames. Such objects may be added to the hash table after it is created.
This section describes the functions for accessing and storing associations in a hash table. In general, any Lisp object can be used as a hash key, unless the comparison method imposes limits. Any Lisp object can also be used as the value.
This function looks up key in table, and returns its associated value—or default, if key has no association in table.
This function enters an association for key in table, with value value. If key already has an association in table, value replaces the old associated value. This function always returns value.
This function removes the association for key from table, if
there is one. If key has no association, remhash
does
nothing.
Common Lisp note: In Common Lisp, remhash
returns
non-nil
if it actually removed an association and nil
otherwise. In Emacs Lisp, remhash
always returns nil
.
This function removes all the associations from hash table table,
so that it becomes empty. This is also called clearing the hash
table. clrhash
returns the empty table.
This function calls function once for each of the associations in
table. The function function should accept two
arguments—a key listed in table, and its associated
value. maphash
returns nil
.
You can define new methods of key lookup by means of
define-hash-table-test
. In order to use this feature, you need
to understand how hash tables work, and what a hash code means.
You can think of a hash table conceptually as a large array of many
slots, each capable of holding one association. To look up a key,
gethash
first computes an integer, the hash code, from the key.
It can reduce this integer modulo the length of the array, to produce an
index in the array. Then it looks in that slot, and if necessary in
other nearby slots, to see if it has found the key being sought.
Thus, to define a new method of key lookup, you need to specify both a function to compute the hash code from a key, and a function to compare two keys directly. The two functions should be consistent with each other: that is, two keys’ hash codes should be the same if the keys compare as equal. Also, since the two functions can be called at any time (such as by the garbage collector), the functions should be free of side effects and should return quickly, and their behavior should depend on only on properties of the keys that do not change.
This function defines a new hash table test, named name.
After defining name in this way, you can use it as the test
argument in make-hash-table
. When you do that, the hash table
will use test-fn to compare key values, and hash-fn to compute
a hash code from a key value.
The function test-fn should accept two arguments, two keys, and
return non-nil
if they are considered the same.
The function hash-fn should accept one argument, a key, and return an integer that is the hash code of that key. For good results, the function should use the whole range of fixnums for hash codes, including negative fixnums.
The specified functions are stored in the property list of name
under the property hash-table-test
; the property value’s form is
(test-fn hash-fn)
.
This function returns a hash code for Lisp object obj. This is an integer that reflects the contents of obj and the other Lisp objects it points to.
If two objects obj1 and obj2 are equal
, then
(sxhash-equal obj1)
and (sxhash-equal obj2)
are the same integer.
If the two objects are not equal
, the values returned by
sxhash-equal
are usually different, but not always.
sxhash-equal
is designed to be reasonably fast (since it’s used
for indexing hash tables) so it won’t recurse deeply into nested
structures. In addition; once in a rare while, by luck, you will
encounter two distinct-looking simple objects that give the same
result from sxhash-equal
. So you can’t, in general, use
sxhash-equal
to check whether an object has changed.
Common Lisp note: In Common Lisp a similar function is called
sxhash
. Emacs provides this name as a compatibility alias for
sxhash-equal
.
This function returns a hash code for Lisp object obj. Its result reflects identity of obj, but not its contents.
If two objects obj1 and obj2 are eq
, then
(sxhash-eq obj1)
and (sxhash-eq obj2)
are
the same integer.
This function returns a hash code for Lisp object obj suitable
for eql
comparison. I.e. it reflects identity of obj
except for the case where the object is a bignum or a float number,
in which case a hash code is generated for the value.
If two objects obj1 and obj2 are eql
, then
(sxhash-eql obj1)
and (sxhash-eql obj2)
are
the same integer.
This example creates a hash table whose keys are strings that are compared case-insensitively.
(defun string-hash-ignore-case (a) (sxhash-equal (upcase a))) (define-hash-table-test 'ignore-case 'string-equal-ignore-case 'string-hash-ignore-case) (make-hash-table :test 'ignore-case)
Here is how you could define a hash table test equivalent to the
predefined test value equal
. The keys can be any Lisp object,
and equal-looking objects are considered the same key.
(define-hash-table-test 'contents-hash 'equal 'sxhash-equal) (make-hash-table :test 'contents-hash)
Lisp programs should not rely on hash codes being preserved between Emacs sessions, as the implementation of the hash functions uses some details of the object storage that can change between sessions and between different architectures.
Here are some other functions for working with hash tables.
This returns non-nil
if table is a hash table object.
This function creates and returns a copy of table. Only the table itself is copied—the keys and values are shared.
This function returns the actual number of entries in table.
This returns the test value that was given when table was
created, to specify how to hash and compare keys. See
make-hash-table
(see Creating Hash Tables).
This function returns the weak value that was specified for hash table table.
This returns the rehash size of table.
This returns the rehash threshold of table.
This returns the current nominal size of table.
A symbol is an object with a unique name. This chapter describes symbols, their components, their property lists, and how they are created and interned. Separate chapters describe the use of symbols as variables and as function names; see Variables, and Functions. For the precise read syntax for symbols, see Symbol Type.
You can test whether an arbitrary Lisp object is a symbol with
symbolp
:
This function returns t
if object is a symbol, nil
otherwise.
Each symbol has four components (or “cells”), each of which references another object:
The symbol’s name.
The symbol’s current value as a variable.
The symbol’s function definition. It can also hold a symbol, a keymap, or a keyboard macro.
The symbol’s property list.
The print name cell always holds a string, and cannot be changed. Each of the other three cells can be set to any Lisp object.
The print name cell holds the string that is the name of a symbol.
Since symbols are represented textually by their names, it is
important not to have two symbols with the same name. The Lisp reader
ensures this: every time it reads a symbol, it looks for an existing
symbol with the specified name before it creates a new one. To get a
symbol’s name, use the function symbol-name
(see Creating and Interning Symbols). However, although each symbol has only one unique
print name, it is nevertheless possible to refer to that same
symbol via different alias names called “shorthands”
(see Shorthands).
The value cell holds a symbol’s value as a variable, which is what
you get if the symbol itself is evaluated as a Lisp expression.
See Variables, for details about how values are set and retrieved,
including complications such as local bindings and scoping
rules. Most symbols can have any Lisp object as a value, but certain
special symbols have values that cannot be changed; these include
nil
and t
, and any symbol whose name starts with
‘:’ (those are called keywords). See Variables that Never Change.
The function cell holds a symbol’s function definition. Often, we
refer to “the function foo
” when we really mean the function
stored in the function cell of foo
; we make the distinction
explicit only when necessary. Typically, the function cell is used to
hold a function (see Functions) or a macro (see Macros).
However, it can also be used to hold a symbol (see Symbol Function Indirection), keyboard macro (see Keyboard Macros), keymap
(see Keymaps), or autoload object (see Autoloading). To get
the contents of a symbol’s function cell, use the function
symbol-function
(see Accessing Function Cell Contents).
The property list cell normally should hold a correctly formatted
property list. To get a symbol’s property list, use the function
symbol-plist
. See Symbol Properties.
The function cell or the value cell may be void, which means
that the cell does not reference any object. (This is not the same
thing as holding the symbol void
, nor the same as holding the
symbol nil
.) Examining a function or value cell that is void
results in an error, such as ‘Symbol's value as variable is void’.
Because each symbol has separate value and function cells, variables
names and function names do not conflict. For example, the symbol
buffer-file-name
has a value (the name of the file being
visited in the current buffer) as well as a function definition (a
primitive function that returns the name of the file):
buffer-file-name ⇒ "/gnu/elisp/symbols.texi" (symbol-function 'buffer-file-name) ⇒ #<subr buffer-file-name>
A definition is a special kind of Lisp expression that announces your intention to use a symbol in a particular way. It typically specifies a value or meaning for the symbol for one kind of use, plus documentation for its meaning when used in this way. Thus, when you define a symbol as a variable, you can supply an initial value for the variable, plus documentation for the variable.
defvar
and defconst
are special forms that define a
symbol as a global variable—a variable that can be accessed at
any point in a Lisp program. See Variables, for details about
variables. To define a customizable variable, use the
defcustom
macro, which also calls defvar
as a subroutine
(see Customization Settings).
In principle, you can assign a variable value to any symbol with
setq
, whether or not it has first been defined as a variable.
However, you ought to write a variable definition for each global
variable that you want to use; otherwise, your Lisp program may not
act correctly if it is evaluated with lexical scoping enabled
(see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings).
defun
defines a symbol as a function, creating a lambda
expression and storing it in the function cell of the symbol. This
lambda expression thus becomes the function definition of the symbol.
(The term “function definition”, meaning the contents of the function
cell, is derived from the idea that defun
gives the symbol its
definition as a function.) defsubst
and defalias
are two
other ways of defining a function. See Functions.
defmacro
defines a symbol as a macro. It creates a macro
object and stores it in the function cell of the symbol. Note that a
given symbol can be a macro or a function, but not both at once, because
both macro and function definitions are kept in the function cell, and
that cell can hold only one Lisp object at any given time.
See Macros.
As previously noted, Emacs Lisp allows the same symbol to be defined
both as a variable (e.g., with defvar
) and as a function or
macro (e.g., with defun
). Such definitions do not conflict.
These definitions also act as guides for programming tools. For example, the C-h f and C-h v commands create help buffers containing links to the relevant variable, function, or macro definitions. See Name Help in The GNU Emacs Manual.
To understand how symbols are created in GNU Emacs Lisp, you must know how Lisp reads them. Lisp must ensure that it finds the same symbol every time it reads the same sequence of characters in the same context. Failure to do so would cause complete confusion.
When the Lisp reader encounters a name that references a symbol in the source code, it reads all the characters of that name. Then it looks up that name in a table called an obarray to find the symbol that the programmer meant. The technique used in this lookup is called “hashing”, an efficient method of looking something up by converting a sequence of characters to a number, known as a “hash code”. For example, instead of searching a telephone book cover to cover when looking up Jan Jones, you start with the J’s and go from there. That is a simple version of hashing. Each element of the obarray is a bucket which holds all the symbols with a given hash code; to look for a given name, it is sufficient to look through all the symbols in the bucket for that name’s hash code. (The same idea is used for general Emacs hash tables, but they are a different data type; see Hash Tables.)
When looking up names, the Lisp reader also considers “shorthands”. If the programmer supplied them, this allows the reader to find a symbol even if its name isn’t present in its full form in the source code. Of course, the reader needs to be aware of some pre-established context about such shorthands, much as one needs context to be to able to refer uniquely to Jan Jones by just the name “Jan”: it’s probably fine when amongst the Joneses, or when Jan has been mentioned recently, but very ambiguous in any other situation. See Shorthands.
If a symbol with the desired name is found, the reader uses that symbol. If the obarray does not contain a symbol with that name, the reader makes a new symbol and adds it to the obarray. Finding or adding a symbol with a certain name is called interning it, and the symbol is then called an interned symbol.
Interning ensures that each obarray has just one symbol with any particular name. Other like-named symbols may exist, but not in the same obarray. Thus, the reader gets the same symbols for the same names, as long as you keep reading with the same obarray.
Interning usually happens automatically in the reader, but sometimes other programs may want to do it. For example, after the M-x command obtains the command name as a string using the minibuffer, it then interns the string, to get the interned symbol with that name. As another example, a hypothetical telephone book program could intern the name of each looked up person’s name as a symbol, even if the obarray did not contain it, so that it could attach information to that new symbol, such as the last time someone looked it up.
No obarray contains all symbols; in fact, some symbols are not in any obarray. They are called uninterned symbols. An uninterned symbol has the same four cells as other symbols; however, the only way to gain access to it is by finding it in some other object or as the value of a variable. Uninterned symbols are sometimes useful in generating Lisp code, see below.
In Emacs Lisp, an obarray is actually a vector. Each element of the
vector is a bucket; its value is either an interned symbol whose name
hashes to that bucket, or 0 if the bucket is empty. Each interned
symbol has an internal link (invisible to the user) to the next symbol
in the bucket. Because these links are invisible, there is no way to
find all the symbols in an obarray except using mapatoms
(below).
The order of symbols in a bucket is not significant.
In an empty obarray, every element is 0, so you can create an obarray
with (make-vector length 0)
. This is the only
valid way to create an obarray. Prime numbers as lengths tend
to result in good hashing; lengths one less than a power of two are also
good.
Do not try to put symbols in an obarray yourself. This does
not work—only intern
can enter a symbol in an obarray properly.
Common Lisp note: Unlike Common Lisp, Emacs Lisp does not provide for interning the same name in several different “packages”, thus creating multiple symbols with the same name but different packages. Emacs Lisp provides a different namespacing system called “shorthands” (see Shorthands).
Most of the functions below take a name and sometimes an obarray as
arguments. A wrong-type-argument
error is signaled if the name
is not a string, or if the obarray is not a vector.
This function returns the string that is symbol’s name. For example:
(symbol-name 'foo) ⇒ "foo"
Warning: Never alter the string returned by that function. Doing that might make Emacs dysfunctional, and might even crash Emacs.
Creating an uninterned symbol is useful in generating Lisp code, because an uninterned symbol used as a variable in the code you generate cannot clash with any variables used in other Lisp programs.
This function returns a newly-allocated, uninterned symbol whose name is
name (which must be a string). Its value and function definition
are void, and its property list is nil
. In the example below,
the value of sym
is not eq
to foo
because it is a
distinct uninterned symbol whose name is also ‘foo’.
(setq sym (make-symbol "foo")) ⇒ foo (eq sym 'foo) ⇒ nil
This function returns a symbol using make-symbol
, whose name is
made by appending gensym-counter
to prefix and incrementing
that counter, guaranteeing that no two calls to this function will
generate a symbol with the same name. The prefix defaults to
"g"
.
To avoid problems when accidentally interning printed representation
of generated code (see Printed Representation and Read Syntax), it is recommended
to use gensym
instead of make-symbol
.
This function returns the interned symbol whose name is name. If
there is no such symbol in the obarray obarray, intern
creates a new one, adds it to the obarray, and returns it. If
obarray is omitted, the value of the global variable
obarray
is used.
(setq sym (intern "foo")) ⇒ foo (eq sym 'foo) ⇒ t (setq sym1 (intern "foo" other-obarray)) ⇒ foo (eq sym1 'foo) ⇒ nil
Common Lisp note: In Common Lisp, you can intern an existing symbol in an obarray. In Emacs Lisp, you cannot do this, because the argument to
intern
must be a string, not a symbol.
This function returns the symbol in obarray whose name is
name, or nil
if obarray has no symbol with that name.
Therefore, you can use intern-soft
to test whether a symbol with
a given name is already interned. If obarray is omitted, the
value of the global variable obarray
is used.
The argument name may also be a symbol; in that case,
the function returns name if name is interned
in the specified obarray, and otherwise nil
.
(intern-soft "frazzle") ; No such symbol exists. ⇒ nil (make-symbol "frazzle") ; Create an uninterned one. ⇒ frazzle
(intern-soft "frazzle") ; That one cannot be found.
⇒ nil
(setq sym (intern "frazzle")) ; Create an interned one.
⇒ frazzle
(intern-soft "frazzle") ; That one can be found!
⇒ frazzle
(eq sym 'frazzle) ; And it is the same one.
⇒ t
This variable is the standard obarray for use by intern
and
read
.
This function calls function once with each symbol in the obarray
obarray. Then it returns nil
. If obarray is
omitted, it defaults to the value of obarray
, the standard
obarray for ordinary symbols.
(setq count 0) ⇒ 0 (defun count-syms (s) (setq count (1+ count))) ⇒ count-syms (mapatoms 'count-syms) ⇒ nil count ⇒ 1871
See documentation
in Access to Documentation Strings, for another
example using mapatoms
.
This function deletes symbol from the obarray obarray. If
symbol
is not actually in the obarray, unintern
does
nothing. If obarray is nil
, the current obarray is used.
If you provide a string instead of a symbol as symbol, it stands
for a symbol name. Then unintern
deletes the symbol (if any) in
the obarray which has that name. If there is no such symbol,
unintern
does nothing.
If unintern
does delete a symbol, it returns t
. Otherwise
it returns nil
.
A symbol may possess any number of symbol properties, which
can be used to record miscellaneous information about the symbol. For
example, when a symbol has a risky-local-variable
property with
a non-nil
value, that means the variable which the symbol names
is a risky file-local variable (see File Local Variables).
Each symbol’s properties and property values are stored in the symbol’s property list cell (see Symbol Components), in the form of a property list (see Property Lists).
The following functions can be used to access symbol properties.
This function returns the value of the property named property
in symbol’s property list. If there is no such property, it
returns nil
. Thus, there is no distinction between a value of
nil
and the absence of the property.
The name property is compared with the existing property names
using eq
, so any object is a legitimate property.
See put
for an example.
This function puts value onto symbol’s property list under
the property name property, replacing any previous property value.
The put
function returns value.
(put 'fly 'verb 'transitive) ⇒'transitive (put 'fly 'noun '(a buzzing little bug)) ⇒ (a buzzing little bug) (get 'fly 'verb) ⇒ transitive (symbol-plist 'fly) ⇒ (verb transitive noun (a buzzing little bug))
This function returns the property list of symbol.
This function sets symbol’s property list to plist. Normally, plist should be a well-formed property list, but this is not enforced. The return value is plist.
(setplist 'foo '(a 1 b (2 3) c nil)) ⇒ (a 1 b (2 3) c nil) (symbol-plist 'foo) ⇒ (a 1 b (2 3) c nil)
For symbols in special obarrays, which are not used for ordinary purposes, it may make sense to use the property list cell in a nonstandard fashion; in fact, the abbrev mechanism does so (see Abbrevs and Abbrev Expansion).
You could define put
in terms of setplist
and
plist-put
, as follows:
(defun put (symbol prop value) (setplist symbol (plist-put (symbol-plist symbol) prop value)))
This function is identical to get
, except that if symbol
is the name of a function alias, it looks in the property list of the
symbol naming the actual function. See Defining Functions. If the
optional argument autoload is non-nil
, and symbol
is auto-loaded, this function will try to autoload it, since
autoloading might set property of symbol. If
autoload is the symbol macro
, only try autoloading if
symbol is an auto-loaded macro.
This function sets property of function to value.
function should be a symbol. This function is preferred to
calling put
for setting properties of a function, because it
will allow us some day to implement remapping of old properties to new
ones.
Here, we list the symbol properties which are used for special purposes in Emacs. In the following table, whenever we say “the named function”, that means the function whose name is the relevant symbol; similarly for “the named variable” etc.
:advertised-binding
This property value specifies the preferred key binding, when showing documentation, for the named function. See Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation.
char-table-extra-slots
The value, if non-nil
, specifies the number of extra slots in
the named char-table type. See Char-Tables.
customized-face
face-defface-spec
saved-face
theme-face
These properties are used to record a face’s standard, saved,
customized, and themed face specs. Do not set them directly; they are
managed by defface
and related functions. See Defining Faces.
customized-value
saved-value
standard-value
theme-value
These properties are used to record a customizable variable’s standard
value, saved value, customized-but-unsaved value, and themed values.
Do not set them directly; they are managed by defcustom
and
related functions. See Defining Customization Variables.
definition-name
This property is used to find the definition of a symbol in the source
code, when it might be hard to find the definition by textual search
of the source file. For example, a define-derived-mode
(see Defining Derived Modes) might define a mode-specific function or a
variable implicitly; or your Lisp program might generate a run-time
call to defun
to define a function (see Defining Functions). In these and similar cases, the definition-name
property of the symbol should be another symbol whose definition can
be found by textual search and whose code defines the original symbol.
In the example with define-derived-mode
, the value of this
property of the functions and variables it defines should be the mode
symbol. The Emacs Help commands such as C-h f (see Help in The GNU Emacs Manual) use this property to show the definition
of a symbol via a button in the *Help* buffer where the
symbol’s documentation is shown.
disabled
If the value is non-nil
, the named function is disabled as a
command. See Disabling Commands.
face-documentation
The value stores the documentation string of the named face. This is
set automatically by defface
. See Defining Faces.
history-length
The value, if non-nil
, specifies the maximum minibuffer history
length for the named history list variable. See Minibuffer History.
interactive-form
The value is an interactive form for the named function. Normally,
you should not set this directly; use the interactive
special
form instead. See Interactive Call.
menu-enable
The value is an expression for determining whether the named menu item should be enabled in menus. See Simple Menu Items.
mode-class
If the value is special
, the named major mode is special.
See Major Mode Conventions.
permanent-local
If the value is non-nil
, the named variable is a buffer-local
variable whose value should not be reset when changing major modes.
See Creating and Deleting Buffer-Local Bindings.
permanent-local-hook
If the value is non-nil
, the named function should not be
deleted from the local value of a hook variable when changing major
modes. See Setting Hooks.
pure
¶If the value is non-nil
, the named function is considered to be
pure (see What Is a Function?). Calls with constant arguments can
be evaluated at compile time. This may shift run time errors to
compile time. Not to be confused with pure storage (see Pure Storage).
risky-local-variable
If the value is non-nil
, the named variable is considered risky
as a file-local variable. See File Local Variables.
safe-function
If the value is non-nil
, the named function is considered
generally safe for evaluation. See Determining whether a Function is Safe to Call.
safe-local-eval-function
If the value is non-nil
, the named function is safe to call in
file-local evaluation forms. See File Local Variables.
safe-local-variable
The value specifies a function for determining safe file-local values for the named variable. See File Local Variables. Since this value is consulted when loading files, the function should be efficient and should ideally not lead to loading any libraries to determine the safeness (e.g., it should not be an autoloaded function).
side-effect-free
¶A non-nil
value indicates that the named function is free of
side effects (see What Is a Function?), so the byte compiler may
ignore a call whose value is unused. If the property’s value is
error-free
, the byte compiler may even delete such unused
calls. In addition to byte compiler optimizations, this property is
also used for determining function safety (see Determining whether a Function is Safe to Call).
undo-inhibit-region
If non-nil
, the named function prevents the undo
operation
from being restricted to the active region, if undo
is invoked
immediately after the function. See Undo.
variable-documentation
If non-nil
, this specifies the named variable’s documentation
string. This is set automatically by defvar
and related
functions. See Defining Faces.
The symbol shorthands, sometimes known as “renamed symbols”, are symbolic forms found in Lisp source. They’re just like regular symbolic forms, except that when the Lisp reader encounters them, it produces symbols which have a different and usually longer print name (see Symbol Components).
It is useful to think of shorthands as abbreviating the full names of intended symbols. Despite this, do not confuse shorthands with the Abbrev system (see Abbrevs and Abbrev Expansion).
Shorthands make Emacs Lisp’s namespacing etiquette easier to work
with. Since all symbols are stored in a single obarray
(see Creating and Interning Symbols), programmers commonly prefix each symbol
name with the name of the library where it originates. For example,
the functions text-property-search-forward
and
text-property-search-backward
both belong to the
text-property-search.el library (see Loading). By properly
prefixing symbol names, one effectively prevents clashes between
similarly named symbols which belong to different libraries and thus do
different things. However, this practice commonly originates very
long symbols names, which are inconvenient to type and read after a
while. Shorthands solve these issues in a clean way.
This variable’s value is an alist whose elements have the form
(shorthand-prefix . longhand-prefix)
. Each element
instructs the Lisp reader to read every symbol form which starts with
shorthand-prefix as if it started with longhand-prefix
instead.
This variable may only be set in file-local variables (see Local Variables in Files in The GNU Emacs Manual).
Here’s an example of shorthands usage in a hypothetical string manipulating library some-nice-string-utils.el.
(defun some-nice-string-utils-split (separator s &optional omit-nulls) "A match-data saving variant of `split-string'." (save-match-data (split-string s separator omit-nulls))) (defun some-nice-string-utils-lines (s) "Split string S at newline characters into a list of strings." (some-nice-string-utils-split "\\(\r\n\\|[\n\r]\\)" s))
As can be seen, it’s quite tedious to read or develop this code since the symbol names to type are so long. We can use shorthands to alleviate that.
(defun snu-split (separator s &optional omit-nulls) "A match-data saving variation on `split-string'." (save-match-data (split-string s separator omit-nulls))) (defun snu-lines (s) "Split string S into a list of strings on newline characters." (snu-split "\\(\r\n\\|[\n\r]\\)" s)) ;; Local Variables: ;; read-symbol-shorthands: (("snu-" . "some-nice-string-utils-")) ;; End:
Even though the two excerpts look different, they are quite identical
after the Lisp reader processes them. Both will lead to the very same
symbols being interned (see Creating and Interning Symbols). Thus loading or
byte-compiling any of the two files has equivalent results. The
shorthands snu-split
and snu-lines
used in the second
version are not interned in the obarray. This is easily seen
by moving point to the location where the shorthands are used and
waiting for ElDoc (see Local Variables
in Files in The GNU Emacs Manual) to hint at the true full name
of the symbol under point in the echo area.
Since read-symbol-shorthands
is a file-local variable, it is
possible that multiple libraries depending on
some-nice-string-utils-lines.el refer to the same symbols under
different shorthands, or not using shorthands at all. In the
next example, the my-tricks.el library refers to the symbol
some-nice-string-utils-lines
using the sns-
prefix
instead of snu-
.
(defun t-reverse-lines (s) (string-join (reverse (sns-lines s)) "\n") ;; Local Variables: ;; read-symbol-shorthands: (("t-" . "my-tricks-") ;; ("sns-" . "some-nice-string-utils-")) ;; End:
There are two exceptions to rules governing Shorthand transformations:
-
or /=
as shorthand
prefixes, but that won’t shadow the arithmetic functions of
those names.
A symbol with position is a symbol, the bare symbol, together with an unsigned integer called the position. These objects are intended for use by the byte compiler, which records in them the position of each symbol occurrence and uses those positions in warning and error messages.
The printed representation of a symbol with position uses the hash
notation outlined in Printed Representation and Read Syntax. It looks like
‘#<symbol foo at 12345>’. It has no read syntax. You can cause
just the bare symbol to be printed by binding the variable
print-symbols-bare
to non-nil
around the print
operation. The byte compiler does this before writing its output to
the compiled Lisp file.
For most purposes, when the flag variable
symbols-with-pos-enabled
is non-nil
, symbols with
positions behave just as bare symbols do. For example, ‘(eq
#<symbol foo at 12345> foo)’ has a value t
when that variable
is set (but nil
when it isn’t set). Most of the time in Emacs this
variable is nil
, but the byte compiler binds it to t
when it runs.
Typically, symbols with position are created by the byte compiler
calling the reader function read-positioning-symbols
(see Input Functions). One can also be created with the function
position-symbol
.
When this variable is non-nil
, symbols with position behave
like the contained bare symbol. Emacs runs a little more slowly in
this case.
When bound to non-nil
, the Lisp printer prints only the bare symbol of
a symbol with position, ignoring the position.
This function returns t
if symbol is a symbol with
position, nil
otherwise.
This function returns the bare symbol contained in symbol, or symbol itself if it is already a bare symbol. For any other type of object, it signals an error.
This function returns the position, a number, from a symbol with position. For any other type of object, it signals an error.
Make a new symbol with position. sym is either a bare symbol or a symbol with position, and supplies the symbol part of the new object. pos is either an integer which becomes the number part of the new object, or a symbol with position whose position is used. Emacs signals an error if either argument is invalid.
The evaluation of expressions in Emacs Lisp is performed by the
Lisp interpreter—a program that receives a Lisp object as input
and computes its value as an expression. How it does this depends
on the data type of the object, according to rules described in this
chapter. The interpreter runs automatically to evaluate portions of
your program, but can also be called explicitly via the Lisp primitive
function eval
.
The Lisp interpreter, or evaluator, is the part of Emacs that computes the value of an expression that is given to it. When a function written in Lisp is called, the evaluator computes the value of the function by evaluating the expressions in the function body. Thus, running any Lisp program really means running the Lisp interpreter.
A Lisp object that is intended for evaluation is called a form or expression7. The fact that forms are data objects and not merely text is one of the fundamental differences between Lisp-like languages and typical programming languages. Any object can be evaluated, but in practice only numbers, symbols, lists and strings are evaluated very often.
In subsequent sections, we will describe the details of what evaluation means for each kind of form.
It is very common to read a Lisp form and then evaluate the form,
but reading and evaluation are separate activities, and either can be
performed alone. Reading per se does not evaluate anything; it
converts the printed representation of a Lisp object to the object
itself. It is up to the caller of read
to specify whether this
object is a form to be evaluated, or serves some entirely different
purpose. See Input Functions.
Evaluation is a recursive process, and evaluating a form often
involves evaluating parts within that form. For instance, when you
evaluate a function call form such as (car x)
, Emacs
first evaluates the argument (the subform x
). After evaluating
the argument, Emacs executes the function (car
), and if
the function is written in Lisp, execution works by evaluating the
body of the function (in this example, however, car
is
not a Lisp function; it is a primitive function implemented in C).
See Functions, for more information about functions and function
calls.
Evaluation takes place in a context called the environment, which consists of the current values and bindings of all Lisp variables (see Variables).8 Whenever a form refers to a variable without creating a new binding for it, the variable evaluates to the value given by the current environment. Evaluating a form may also temporarily alter the environment by binding variables (see Local Variables).
Evaluating a form may also make changes that persist; these changes
are called side effects. An example of a form that produces a
side effect is (setq foo 1)
.
Do not confuse evaluation with command key interpretation. The
editor command loop translates keyboard input into a command (an
interactively callable function) using the active keymaps, and then
uses call-interactively
to execute that command. Executing the
command usually involves evaluation, if the command is written in
Lisp; however, this step is not considered a part of command key
interpretation. See Command Loop.
A Lisp object that is intended to be evaluated is called a form (or an expression). How Emacs evaluates a form depends on its data type. Emacs has three different kinds of form that are evaluated differently: symbols, lists, and all other types. This section describes all three kinds, one by one, starting with the other types, which are self-evaluating forms.
A self-evaluating form is any form that is not a list or
symbol. Self-evaluating forms evaluate to themselves: the result of
evaluation is the same object that was evaluated. Thus, the number 25
evaluates to 25, and the string "foo"
evaluates to the string
"foo"
. Likewise, evaluating a vector does not cause evaluation
of the elements of the vector—it returns the same vector with its
contents unchanged.
'123 ; A number, shown without evaluation.
⇒ 123
123 ; Evaluated as usual—result is the same.
⇒ 123
(eval '123) ; Evaluated "by hand"—result is the same.
⇒ 123
(eval (eval '123)) ; Evaluating twice changes nothing.
⇒ 123
A self-evaluating form yields a value that becomes part of the program,
and you should not try to modify it via setcar
, aset
or
similar operations. The Lisp interpreter might unify the constants
yielded by your program’s self-evaluating forms, so that these
constants might share structure. See Mutability.
It is common to write numbers, characters, strings, and even vectors in Lisp code, taking advantage of the fact that they self-evaluate. However, it is quite unusual to do this for types that lack a read syntax, because there’s no way to write them textually. It is possible to construct Lisp expressions containing these types by means of a Lisp program. Here is an example:
;; Build an expression containing a buffer object.
(setq print-exp (list 'print (current-buffer)))
⇒ (print #<buffer eval.texi>)
;; Evaluate it.
(eval print-exp)
-| #<buffer eval.texi>
⇒ #<buffer eval.texi>
When a symbol is evaluated, it is treated as a variable. The result is the variable’s value, if it has one. If the symbol has no value as a variable, the Lisp interpreter signals an error. For more information on the use of variables, see Variables.
In the following example, we set the value of a symbol with
setq
. Then we evaluate the symbol, and get back the value that
setq
stored.
(setq a 123) ⇒ 123
(eval 'a) ⇒ 123
a ⇒ 123
The symbols nil
and t
are treated specially, so that the
value of nil
is always nil
, and the value of t
is
always t
; you cannot set or bind them to any other values. Thus,
these two symbols act like self-evaluating forms, even though
eval
treats them like any other symbol. A symbol whose name
starts with ‘:’ also self-evaluates in the same way; likewise,
its value ordinarily cannot be changed. See Variables that Never Change.
A form that is a nonempty list is either a function call, a macro call, or a special form, according to its first element. These three kinds of forms are evaluated in different ways, described below. The remaining list elements constitute the arguments for the function, macro, or special form.
The first step in evaluating a nonempty list is to examine its first element. This element alone determines what kind of form the list is and how the rest of the list is to be processed. The first element is not evaluated, as it would be in some Lisp dialects such as Scheme.
If the first element of the list is a symbol then evaluation examines the symbol’s function cell, and uses its contents instead of the original symbol. If the contents are another symbol, this process, called symbol function indirection, is repeated until it obtains a non-symbol. See Naming a Function, for more information about symbol function indirection.
One possible consequence of this process is an infinite loop, in the event that a symbol’s function cell refers to the same symbol. Otherwise, we eventually obtain a non-symbol, which ought to be a function or other suitable object.
More precisely, we should now have a Lisp function (a lambda
expression), a byte-code function, a primitive function, a Lisp macro,
a special form, or an autoload object. Each of these types is a case
described in one of the following sections. If the object is not one
of these types, Emacs signals an invalid-function
error.
The following example illustrates the symbol indirection process.
We use fset
to set the function cell of a symbol and
symbol-function
to get the function cell contents
(see Accessing Function Cell Contents). Specifically, we store the symbol
car
into the function cell of first
, and the symbol
first
into the function cell of erste
.
;; Build this function cell linkage:
;; ------------- ----- ------- -------
;; | #<subr car> | <-- | car | <-- | first | <-- | erste |
;; ------------- ----- ------- -------
(symbol-function 'car) ⇒ #<subr car>
(fset 'first 'car) ⇒ car
(fset 'erste 'first) ⇒ first
(erste '(1 2 3)) ; Call the function referenced by erste
.
⇒ 1
By contrast, the following example calls a function without any symbol function indirection, because the first element is an anonymous Lisp function, not a symbol.
((lambda (arg) (erste arg)) '(1 2 3)) ⇒ 1
Executing the function itself evaluates its body; this does involve
symbol function indirection when calling erste
.
This form is rarely used and is now deprecated. Instead, you should write it as:
(funcall (lambda (arg) (erste arg)) '(1 2 3))
or just
(let ((arg '(1 2 3))) (erste arg))
The built-in function indirect-function
provides an easy way to
perform symbol function indirection explicitly.
This function returns the meaning of function as a function. If function is a symbol, then it finds function’s function definition and starts over with that value. If function is not a symbol, then it returns function itself.
This function returns nil
if the final symbol is unbound. It
signals a cyclic-function-indirection
error if there is a loop
in the chain of symbols.
The optional argument noerror is obsolete, kept for backward compatibility, and has no effect.
Here is how you could define indirect-function
in Lisp:
(defun indirect-function (function) (if (and function (symbolp function)) (indirect-function (symbol-function function)) function))
If the first element of a list being evaluated is a Lisp function
object, byte-code object or primitive function object, then that list is
a function call. For example, here is a call to the function
+
:
(+ 1 x)
The first step in evaluating a function call is to evaluate the
remaining elements of the list from left to right. The results are the
actual argument values, one value for each list element. The next step
is to call the function with this list of arguments, effectively using
the function apply
(see Calling Functions). If the function
is written in Lisp, the arguments are used to bind the argument
variables of the function (see Lambda Expressions); then the forms
in the function body are evaluated in order, and the value of the last
body form becomes the value of the function call.
If the first element of a list being evaluated is a macro object, then the list is a macro call. When a macro call is evaluated, the elements of the rest of the list are not initially evaluated. Instead, these elements themselves are used as the arguments of the macro. The macro definition computes a replacement form, called the expansion of the macro, to be evaluated in place of the original form. The expansion may be any sort of form: a self-evaluating constant, a symbol, or a list. If the expansion is itself a macro call, this process of expansion repeats until some other sort of form results.
Ordinary evaluation of a macro call finishes by evaluating the expansion. However, the macro expansion is not necessarily evaluated right away, or at all, because other programs also expand macro calls, and they may or may not evaluate the expansions.
Normally, the argument expressions are not evaluated as part of computing the macro expansion, but instead appear as part of the expansion, so they are computed when the expansion is evaluated.
For example, given a macro defined as follows:
(defmacro cadr (x) (list 'car (list 'cdr x)))
an expression such as (cadr (assq 'handler list))
is a macro
call, and its expansion is:
(car (cdr (assq 'handler list)))
Note that the argument (assq 'handler list)
appears in the
expansion.
See Macros, for a complete description of Emacs Lisp macros.
A special form is a primitive specially marked so that its arguments are not all evaluated. Most special forms define control structures or perform variable bindings—things which functions cannot do.
Each special form has its own rules for which arguments are evaluated and which are used without evaluation. Whether a particular argument is evaluated may depend on the results of evaluating other arguments.
If an expression’s first symbol is that of a special form, the
expression should follow the rules of that special form; otherwise,
Emacs’s behavior is not well-defined (though it will not crash). For
example, ((lambda (x) x . 3) 4)
contains a subexpression that
begins with lambda
but is not a well-formed lambda
expression, so Emacs may signal an error, or may return 3 or 4 or
nil
, or may behave in other ways.
This predicate tests whether its argument is a special form, and
returns t
if so, nil
otherwise.
Here is a list, in alphabetical order, of all of the special forms in Emacs Lisp with a reference to where each is described.
and
catch
cond
see Conditionals
condition-case
defconst
defvar
function
if
see Conditionals
interactive
see Interactive Call
lambda
let
let*
see Local Variables
or
prog1
prog2
progn
see Sequencing
quote
see Quoting
save-current-buffer
save-excursion
see Excursions
save-restriction
see Narrowing
setq
setq-default
unwind-protect
see Nonlocal Exits
while
see Iteration
Common Lisp note: Here are some comparisons of special forms in GNU Emacs Lisp and Common Lisp.
setq
,if
, andcatch
are special forms in both Emacs Lisp and Common Lisp.save-excursion
is a special form in Emacs Lisp, but doesn’t exist in Common Lisp.throw
is a special form in Common Lisp (because it must be able to throw multiple values), but it is a function in Emacs Lisp (which doesn’t have multiple values).
The autoload feature allows you to call a function or macro whose function definition has not yet been loaded into Emacs. It specifies which file contains the definition. When an autoload object appears as a symbol’s function definition, calling that symbol as a function automatically loads the specified file; then it calls the real definition loaded from that file. The way to arrange for an autoload object to appear as a symbol’s function definition is described in Autoload.
The special form quote
returns its single argument, as written,
without evaluating it. This provides a way to include constant symbols
and lists, which are not self-evaluating objects, in a program. (It is
not necessary to quote self-evaluating objects such as numbers, strings,
and vectors.)
This special form returns object, without evaluating it. The returned value might be shared and should not be modified. See Self-Evaluating Forms.
Because quote
is used so often in programs, Lisp provides a
convenient read syntax for it. An apostrophe character (‘'’)
followed by a Lisp object (in read syntax) expands to a list whose first
element is quote
, and whose second element is the object. Thus,
the read syntax 'x
is an abbreviation for (quote x)
.
Here are some examples of expressions that use quote
:
(quote (+ 1 2)) ⇒ (+ 1 2)
(quote foo) ⇒ foo
'foo ⇒ foo
''foo ⇒ 'foo
'(quote foo) ⇒ 'foo
['foo] ⇒ ['foo]
Although the expressions (list '+ 1 2)
and '(+ 1 2)
both yield lists equal to (+ 1 2)
, the former yields a
freshly-minted mutable list whereas the latter yields a list
built from conses that might be shared and should not be modified.
See Self-Evaluating Forms.
Other quoting constructs include function
(see Anonymous Functions), which causes an anonymous lambda expression written in Lisp
to be compiled, and ‘`’ (see Backquote), which is used to quote
only part of a list, while computing and substituting other parts.
Backquote constructs allow you to quote a list, but
selectively evaluate elements of that list. In the simplest case, it
is identical to the special form
quote
(described in the previous section; see Quoting).
For example, these two forms yield identical results:
`(a list of (+ 2 3) elements) ⇒ (a list of (+ 2 3) elements)
'(a list of (+ 2 3) elements) ⇒ (a list of (+ 2 3) elements)
The special marker ‘,’ inside of the argument to backquote indicates a value that isn’t constant. The Emacs Lisp evaluator evaluates the argument of ‘,’, and puts the value in the list structure:
`(a list of ,(+ 2 3) elements) ⇒ (a list of 5 elements)
Substitution with ‘,’ is allowed at deeper levels of the list structure also. For example:
`(1 2 (3 ,(+ 4 5))) ⇒ (1 2 (3 9))
You can also splice an evaluated value into the resulting list, using the special marker ‘,@’. The elements of the spliced list become elements at the same level as the other elements of the resulting list. The equivalent code without using ‘`’ is often unreadable. Here are some examples:
(setq some-list '(2 3)) ⇒ (2 3)
(cons 1 (append some-list '(4) some-list)) ⇒ (1 2 3 4 2 3)
`(1 ,@some-list 4 ,@some-list) ⇒ (1 2 3 4 2 3)
(setq list '(hack foo bar)) ⇒ (hack foo bar)
(cons 'use (cons 'the (cons 'words (append (cdr list) '(as elements))))) ⇒ (use the words foo bar as elements)
`(use the words ,@(cdr list) as elements) ⇒ (use the words foo bar as elements)
If a subexpression of a backquote construct has no substitutions or
splices, it acts like quote
in that it yields conses,
vectors and strings that might be shared and should not be modified.
See Self-Evaluating Forms.
Most often, forms are evaluated automatically, by virtue of their
occurrence in a program being run. On rare occasions, you may need to
write code that evaluates a form that is computed at run time, such as
after reading a form from text being edited or getting one from a
property list. On these occasions, use the eval
function.
Often eval
is not needed and something else should be used instead.
For example, to get the value of a variable, while eval
works,
symbol-value
is preferable; or rather than store expressions
in a property list that then need to go through eval
, it is better to
store functions instead that are then passed to funcall
.
The functions and variables described in this section evaluate forms, specify limits to the evaluation process, or record recently returned values. Loading a file also does evaluation (see Loading).
It is generally cleaner and more flexible to store a function in a
data structure, and call it with funcall
or apply
, than
to store an expression in the data structure and evaluate it. Using
functions provides the ability to pass information to them as
arguments.
This is the basic function for evaluating an expression. It evaluates form in the current environment, and returns the result. The type of the form object determines how it is evaluated. See Kinds of Forms.
The argument lexical specifies the scoping rule for local
variables (see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings). If it is omitted or nil
,
that means to evaluate form using the default dynamic scoping
rule. If it is t
, that means to use the lexical scoping rule.
The value of lexical can also be a non-empty alist specifying a
particular lexical environment for lexical bindings; however,
this feature is only useful for specialized purposes, such as in Emacs
Lisp debuggers. See Lexical Binding.
Since eval
is a function, the argument expression that appears
in a call to eval
is evaluated twice: once as preparation before
eval
is called, and again by the eval
function itself.
Here is an example:
(setq foo 'bar) ⇒ bar
(setq bar 'baz) ⇒ baz ;; Hereeval
receives argumentfoo
(eval 'foo) ⇒ bar ;; Hereeval
receives argumentbar
, which is the value offoo
(eval foo) ⇒ baz
The number of currently active calls to eval
is limited to
max-lisp-eval-depth
(see below).
This function evaluates the forms in the current buffer in the region
defined by the positions start and end. It reads forms from
the region and calls eval
on them until the end of the region is
reached, or until an error is signaled and not handled.
By default, eval-region
does not produce any output. However,
if stream is non-nil
, any output produced by output
functions (see Output Functions), as well as the values that
result from evaluating the expressions in the region are printed using
stream. See Output Streams.
If read-function is non-nil
, it should be a function,
which is used instead of read
to read expressions one by one.
This function is called with one argument, the stream for reading
input. You can also use the variable load-read-function
(see How Programs Do Loading)
to specify this function, but it is more robust to use the
read-function argument.
eval-region
does not move point. It always returns nil
.
This is similar to eval-region
, but the arguments provide
different optional features. eval-buffer
operates on the
entire accessible portion of buffer buffer-or-name
(see Narrowing in The GNU Emacs Manual).
buffer-or-name can be a buffer, a buffer name (a string), or
nil
(or omitted), which means to use the current buffer.
stream is used as in eval-region
, unless stream is
nil
and print non-nil
. In that case, values that
result from evaluating the expressions are still discarded, but the
output of the output functions is printed in the echo area.
filename is the file name to use for load-history
(see Unloading), and defaults to buffer-file-name
(see Buffer File Name). If unibyte is non-nil
,
read
converts strings to unibyte whenever possible.
This variable defines the maximum depth allowed in calls to eval
,
apply
, and funcall
before an error is signaled (with error
message "Lisp nesting exceeds max-lisp-eval-depth"
).
This limit, with the associated error when it is exceeded, is how
Emacs Lisp avoids infinite recursion on an ill-defined function. If
you increase the value of max-lisp-eval-depth
too much, such
code can cause stack overflow instead. On some systems, this overflow
can be handled. In that case, normal Lisp evaluation is interrupted
and control is transferred back to the top level command loop
(top-level
). Note that there is no way to enter Emacs Lisp
debugger in this situation. See Entering the Debugger on an Error.
The depth limit counts internal uses of eval
, apply
, and
funcall
, such as for calling the functions mentioned in Lisp
expressions, and recursive evaluation of function call arguments and
function body forms, as well as explicit calls in Lisp code.
The default value of this variable is 1600. If you set it to a value less than 100, Lisp will reset it to 100 if the given value is reached. Entry to the Lisp debugger increases the value, if there is little room left, to make sure the debugger itself has room to execute.
The value of this variable is a list of the values returned by all the
expressions that were read, evaluated, and printed from buffers
(including the minibuffer) by the standard Emacs commands which do
this. (Note that this does not include evaluation in
*ielm* buffers, nor evaluation using C-j, C-x C-e,
and similar evaluation commands in lisp-interaction-mode
.)
This variable is obsolete, and will be removed in a future version, since it constantly enlarges the memory footprint of the Emacs process. For that reason, we recommend against using it.
The elements of values
are ordered most recent first.
(setq x 1) ⇒ 1
(list 'A (1+ 2) auto-save-default) ⇒ (A 3 t)
values ⇒ ((A 3 t) 1 ...)
This variable could be useful for referring back to values of forms
recently evaluated. It is generally a bad idea to print the value of
values
itself, since this may be very long. Instead, examine
particular elements, like this:
;; Refer to the most recent evaluation result.
(nth 0 values)
⇒ (A 3 t)
;; That put a new element on, ;; so all elements move back one. (nth 1 values) ⇒ (A 3 t)
;; This gets the element that was next-to-most-recent ;; before this example. (nth 3 values) ⇒ 1
Sometimes it is useful to delay the evaluation of an expression, for example if you want to avoid performing a time-consuming calculation if it turns out that the result is not needed in the future of the program. The thunk library provides the following functions and macros to support such deferred evaluation:
Return a thunk for evaluating the forms. A thunk is a
closure (see Closures) that inherits the lexical environment of the
thunk-delay
call. Using this macro requires
lexical-binding
.
Force thunk to perform the evaluation of the forms specified in
the thunk-delay
that created the thunk. The result of the
evaluation of the last form is returned. The thunk also
“remembers” that it has been forced: Any further calls of
thunk-force
with the same thunk will just return the same
result without evaluating the forms again.
This macro is analogous to let
but creates “lazy” variable
bindings. Any binding has the form (symbol value-form)
. Unlike let
, the evaluation of any
value-form is deferred until the binding of the according
symbol is used for the first time when evaluating the
forms. Any value-form is evaluated at most once. Using
this macro requires lexical-binding
.
Example:
(defun f (number) (thunk-let ((derived-number (progn (message "Calculating 1 plus 2 times %d" number) (1+ (* 2 number))))) (if (> number 10) derived-number number)))
(f 5) ⇒ 5
(f 12) -| Calculating 1 plus 2 times 12 ⇒ 25
Because of the special nature of lazily bound variables, it is an error
to set them (e.g. with setq
).
This is like thunk-let
but any expression in bindings is allowed
to refer to preceding bindings in this thunk-let*
form. Using
this macro requires lexical-binding
.
(thunk-let* ((x (prog2 (message "Calculating x...") (+ 1 1) (message "Finished calculating x"))) (y (prog2 (message "Calculating y...") (+ x 1) (message "Finished calculating y"))) (z (prog2 (message "Calculating z...") (+ y 1) (message "Finished calculating z"))) (a (prog2 (message "Calculating a...") (+ z 1) (message "Finished calculating a")))) (* z x)) -| Calculating z... -| Calculating y... -| Calculating x... -| Finished calculating x -| Finished calculating y -| Finished calculating z ⇒ 8
thunk-let
and thunk-let*
use thunks implicitly: their
expansion creates helper symbols and binds them to thunks wrapping the
binding expressions. All references to the original variables in the
body forms are then replaced by an expression that calls
thunk-force
with the according helper variable as the argument.
So, any code using thunk-let
or thunk-let*
could be
rewritten to use thunks, but in many cases using these macros results
in nicer code than using thunks explicitly.
A Lisp program consists of a set of expressions, or forms (see Kinds of Forms). We control the order of execution of these forms by enclosing them in control structures. Control structures are special forms which control when, whether, or how many times to execute the forms they contain.
The simplest order of execution is sequential execution: first form a, then form b, and so on. This is what happens when you write several forms in succession in the body of a function, or at top level in a file of Lisp code—the forms are executed in the order written. We call this textual order. For example, if a function body consists of two forms a and b, evaluation of the function evaluates first a and then b. The result of evaluating b becomes the value of the function.
Explicit control structures make possible an order of execution other than sequential.
Emacs Lisp provides several kinds of control structure, including other varieties of sequencing, conditionals, iteration, and (controlled) jumps—all discussed below. The built-in control structures are special forms since their subforms are not necessarily evaluated or not evaluated sequentially. You can use macros to define your own control structure constructs (see Macros).
Evaluating forms in the order they appear is the most common way
control passes from one form to another. In some contexts, such as in a
function body, this happens automatically. Elsewhere you must use a
control structure construct to do this: progn
, the simplest
control construct of Lisp.
A progn
special form looks like this:
(progn a b c ...)
and it says to execute the forms a, b, c, and so on, in
that order. These forms are called the body of the progn
form.
The value of the last form in the body becomes the value of the entire
progn
. (progn)
returns nil
.
In the early days of Lisp, progn
was the only way to execute
two or more forms in succession and use the value of the last of them.
But programmers found they often needed to use a progn
in the
body of a function, where (at that time) only one form was allowed. So
the body of a function was made into an implicit progn
:
several forms are allowed just as in the body of an actual progn
.
Many other control structures likewise contain an implicit progn
.
As a result, progn
is not used as much as it was many years ago.
It is needed now most often inside an unwind-protect
, and
,
or
, or in the then-part of an if
.
This special form evaluates all of the forms, in textual order, returning the result of the final form.
(progn (print "The first form") (print "The second form") (print "The third form")) -| "The first form" -| "The second form" -| "The third form" ⇒ "The third form"
Two other constructs likewise evaluate a series of forms but return different values:
This special form evaluates form1 and all of the forms, in textual order, returning the result of form1.
(prog1 (print "The first form") (print "The second form") (print "The third form")) -| "The first form" -| "The second form" -| "The third form" ⇒ "The first form"
Here is a way to remove the first element from a list in the variable
x
, then return the value of that former element:
(prog1 (car x) (setq x (cdr x)))
This special form evaluates form1, form2, and all of the following forms, in textual order, returning the result of form2.
(prog2 (print "The first form") (print "The second form") (print "The third form")) -| "The first form" -| "The second form" -| "The third form" ⇒ "The second form"
Conditional control structures choose among alternatives. Emacs Lisp
has five conditional forms: if
, which is much the same as in
other languages; when
and unless
, which are variants of
if
; cond
, which is a generalized case statement;
and pcase
, which is a generalization of cond
(see Pattern-Matching Conditional).
if
chooses between the then-form and the else-forms
based on the value of condition. If the evaluated condition is
non-nil
, then-form is evaluated and the result returned.
Otherwise, the else-forms are evaluated in textual order, and the
value of the last one is returned. (The else part of if
is
an example of an implicit progn
. See Sequencing.)
If condition has the value nil
, and no else-forms are
given, if
returns nil
.
if
is a special form because the branch that is not selected is
never evaluated—it is ignored. Thus, in this example,
true
is not printed because print
is never called:
(if nil (print 'true) 'very-false) ⇒ very-false
This is a variant of if
where there are no else-forms,
and possibly several then-forms. In particular,
(when condition a b c)
is entirely equivalent to
(if condition (progn a b c) nil)
This is a variant of if
where there is no then-form:
(unless condition a b c)
is entirely equivalent to
(if condition nil a b c)
cond
chooses among an arbitrary number of alternatives. Each
clause in the cond
must be a list. The CAR of this
list is the condition; the remaining elements, if any, the
body-forms. Thus, a clause looks like this:
(condition body-forms...)
cond
tries the clauses in textual order, by evaluating the
condition of each clause. If the value of condition is
non-nil
, the clause succeeds; then cond
evaluates its
body-forms, and returns the value of the last of body-forms.
Any remaining clauses are ignored.
If the value of condition is nil
, the clause fails, so
the cond
moves on to the following clause, trying its condition.
A clause may also look like this:
(condition)
Then, if condition is non-nil
when tested, the cond
form returns the value of condition.
If every condition evaluates to nil
, so that every clause
fails, cond
returns nil
.
The following example has four clauses, which test for the cases where
the value of x
is a number, string, buffer and symbol,
respectively:
(cond ((numberp x) x) ((stringp x) x) ((bufferp x) (setq temporary-hack x) ; multiple body-forms (buffer-name x)) ; in one clause ((symbolp x) (symbol-value x)))
Often we want to execute the last clause whenever none of the previous
clauses was successful. To do this, we use t
as the
condition of the last clause, like this: (t
body-forms)
. The form t
evaluates to t
, which is
never nil
, so this clause never fails, provided the cond
gets to it at all. For example:
(setq a 5) (cond ((eq a 'hack) 'foo) (t "default")) ⇒ "default"
This cond
expression returns foo
if the value of a
is hack
, and returns the string "default"
otherwise.
Any conditional construct can be expressed with cond
or with
if
. Therefore, the choice between them is a matter of style.
For example:
(if a b c) ≡ (cond (a b) (t c))
It can be convenient to bind variables in conjunction with using a
conditional. It’s often the case that you compute a value, and then
want to do something with that value if it’s non-nil
. The
straightforward way to do that is to just write, for instance:
(let ((result1 (do-computation))) (when result1 (let ((result2 (do-more result1))) (when result2 (do-something result2)))))
Since this is a very common pattern, Emacs provides a number of macros to make this easier and more readable. The above can be written the following way instead:
(when-let ((result1 (do-computation)) (result2 (do-more result1))) (do-something result2))
There’s a number of variations on this theme, and they’re briefly described below.
Evaluate each binding in spec in turn, like in let*
(see Local Variables), stopping if a binding value is nil
.
If all are non-nil
, return the value of then-form,
otherwise the last form in else-forms.
Like if-let
, but without else-forms.
Like when-let
, but repeat until a binding in spec is
nil
. The return value is always nil
.
This section describes constructs that are often used together with
if
and cond
to express complicated conditions. The
constructs and
and or
can also be used individually as
kinds of multiple conditional constructs.
This function tests for the falsehood of condition. It returns
t
if condition is nil
, and nil
otherwise.
The function not
is identical to null
, and we recommend
using the name null
if you are testing for an empty list or
nil
value.
The and
special form tests whether all the conditions are
true. It works by evaluating the conditions one by one in the
order written.
If any of the conditions evaluates to nil
, then the result
of the and
must be nil
regardless of the remaining
conditions; so and
returns nil
right away, ignoring
the remaining conditions.
If all the conditions turn out non-nil
, then the value of
the last of them becomes the value of the and
form. Just
(and)
, with no conditions, returns t
, appropriate
because all the conditions turned out non-nil
. (Think
about it; which one did not?)
Here is an example. The first condition returns the integer 1, which is
not nil
. Similarly, the second condition returns the integer 2,
which is not nil
. The third condition is nil
, so the
remaining condition is never evaluated.
(and (print 1) (print 2) nil (print 3)) -| 1 -| 2 ⇒ nil
Here is a more realistic example of using and
:
(if (and (consp foo) (eq (car foo) 'x)) (message "foo is a list starting with x"))
Note that (car foo)
is not executed if (consp foo)
returns
nil
, thus avoiding an error.
and
expressions can also be written using either if
or
cond
. Here’s how:
(and arg1 arg2 arg3) ≡ (if arg1 (if arg2 arg3)) ≡ (cond (arg1 (cond (arg2 arg3))))
The or
special form tests whether at least one of the
conditions is true. It works by evaluating all the
conditions one by one in the order written.
If any of the conditions evaluates to a non-nil
value, then
the result of the or
must be non-nil
; so or
returns
right away, ignoring the remaining conditions. The value it
returns is the non-nil
value of the condition just evaluated.
If all the conditions turn out nil
, then the or
expression returns nil
. Just (or)
, with no
conditions, returns nil
, appropriate because all the
conditions turned out nil
. (Think about it; which one
did not?)
For example, this expression tests whether x
is either
nil
or the integer zero:
(or (eq x nil) (eq x 0))
Like the and
construct, or
can be written in terms of
cond
. For example:
(or arg1 arg2 arg3) ≡ (cond (arg1) (arg2) (arg3))
You could almost write or
in terms of if
, but not quite:
(if arg1 arg1 (if arg2 arg2 arg3))
This is not completely equivalent because it can evaluate arg1 or
arg2 twice. By contrast, (or arg1 arg2
arg3)
never evaluates any argument more than once.
This function returns the boolean exclusive-or of condition1 and
condition2. That is, xor
returns nil
if either
both arguments are nil
, or both are non-nil
. Otherwise,
it returns the value of that argument which is non-nil
.
Note that in contrast to or
, both arguments are always evaluated.
Aside from the four basic conditional forms, Emacs Lisp also
has a pattern-matching conditional form, the pcase
macro,
a hybrid of cond
and cl-case
(see Conditionals in Common Lisp Extensions)
that overcomes their limitations and introduces
the pattern matching programming style.
The limitations that pcase
overcomes are:
cond
form chooses among alternatives by evaluating the
predicate condition of each of its clauses
(see Conditionals). The primary limitation is that variables
let-bound in condition are not available to the clause’s
body-forms.
Another annoyance (more an inconvenience than a limitation)
is that when a series of condition predicates implement
equality tests, there is a lot of repeated code. (cl-case
solves this inconvenience.)
cl-case
macro chooses among alternatives by evaluating
the equality of its first argument against a set of specific
values.
Its limitations are two-fold:
eql
.
These render cl-case
unsuitable for strings or compound
data structures (e.g., lists or vectors). (cond
doesn’t have
these limitations, but it has others, see above.)
Conceptually, the pcase
macro borrows the first-arg focus
of cl-case
and the clause-processing flow of cond
,
replacing condition with a generalization of
the equality test which is a variant of pattern matching,
and adding facilities so that you can concisely express a
clause’s predicate, and arrange to share let-bindings between
a clause’s predicate and body-forms.
The concise expression of a predicate is known as a pattern.
When the predicate, called on the value of the first arg, returns
non-nil
, we say that “the pattern matches the value” (or
sometimes “the value matches the pattern”).
pcase
macro ¶For background, See Pattern-Matching Conditional.
Each clause in clauses has the form:
(pattern body-forms…)
.
Evaluate expression to determine its value, expval. Find the first clause in clauses whose pattern matches expval and pass control to that clause’s body-forms.
If there is a match, the value of pcase
is the value
of the last of body-forms in the successful clause.
Otherwise, pcase
evaluates to nil
.
Each pattern has to be a pcase pattern, which can use
either one of the core patterns defined below, or one of the patterns
defined via pcase-defmacro
(see Extending pcase
).
The rest of this subsection describes different forms of core patterns, presents some examples, and concludes with important caveats on using the let-binding facility provided by some pattern forms. A core pattern can have the following forms:
_ (underscore)
Matches any expval. This is also known as don’t care or wildcard.
'val
Matches if expval equals val. The comparison is done as
if by equal
(see Equality Predicates).
keyword
integer
string
Matches if expval equals the literal object.
This is a special case of 'val
, above,
possible because literal objects of these types are self-quoting.
symbol
Matches any expval, and additionally let-binds symbol to expval, such that this binding is available to body-forms (see Dynamic Binding).
If symbol is part of a sequencing pattern seqpat
(e.g., by using and
, below), the binding is also available to
the portion of seqpat following the appearance of symbol.
This usage has some caveats, see caveats.
Two symbols to avoid are t
, which behaves like _
(above) and is deprecated, and nil
, which signals an error.
Likewise, it makes no sense to bind keyword symbols
(see Variables that Never Change).
`qpat
A backquote-style pattern. See Backquote-Style Patterns, for the details.
(cl-type type)
Matches if expval is of type type, which is a type
descriptor as accepted by cl-typep
(see Type Predicates in Common
Lisp Extensions). Examples:
(cl-type integer) (cl-type (integer 0 10))
(pred function)
Matches if the predicate function returns non-nil
when called on expval. The test can be negated with the syntax
(pred (not function))
.
The predicate function can have one of the following forms:
Call the named function with one argument, expval.
Example: integerp
Call the anonymous function with one argument, expval (see Lambda Expressions).
Example: (lambda (n) (= 42 n))
Call the function (the first element of the function call) with n arguments (the other elements) and an additional n+1-th argument that is expval.
Example: (= 42)
In this example, the function is =
, n is one, and
the actual function call becomes: (= 42 expval)
.
(app function pattern)
Matches if function called on expval returns a
value that matches pattern.
function can take one of the forms described for pred
,
above. Unlike pred
, however, app
tests the result
against pattern, rather than against a boolean truth value.
(guard boolean-expression)
Matches if boolean-expression evaluates to non-nil
.
(let pattern expr)
Evaluates expr to get exprval and matches if exprval
matches pattern. (It is called let
because pattern
can bind symbols to values using symbol.)
A sequencing pattern (also known as seqpat) is a
pattern that processes its sub-pattern arguments in sequence.
There are two for pcase
: and
and or
.
They behave in a similar manner to the special forms
that share their name (see Constructs for Combining Conditions),
but instead of processing values, they process sub-patterns.
(and pattern1…)
Attempts to match pattern1…, in order, until one of them
fails to match. In that case, and
likewise fails to match, and
the rest of the sub-patterns are not tested. If all sub-patterns
match, and
matches.
(or pattern1 pattern2…)
Attempts to match pattern1, pattern2, …, in order,
until one of them succeeds. In that case, or
likewise matches,
and the rest of the sub-patterns are not tested.
To present a consistent environment
(see Introduction to Evaluation)
to body-forms (thus avoiding an evaluation error on match),
the set of variables bound by the pattern is the union of the
variables bound by each sub-pattern. If a variable is not bound by
the sub-pattern that matched, then it is bound to nil
.
(rx rx-expr…)
Matches strings against the regexp rx-expr…, using the
rx
regexp notation (see The rx
Structured Regexp Notation), as if by
string-match
.
In addition to the usual rx
syntax, rx-expr… can
contain the following constructs:
(let ref rx-expr…)
Bind the symbol ref to a submatch that matches
rx-expr.... ref is bound in body-forms to
the string of the submatch or nil
, but can also be used in
backref
.
(backref ref)
Like the standard backref
construct, but ref can here
also be a name introduced by a previous (let ref …)
construct.
cl-case
¶Here’s an example that highlights some advantages pcase
has over cl-case
(see Conditionals in Common Lisp Extensions).
(pcase (get-return-code x) ;; string ((and (pred stringp) msg) (message "%s" msg))
;; symbol ('success (message "Done!")) ('would-block (message "Sorry, can't do it now")) ('read-only (message "The schmilblick is read-only")) ('access-denied (message "You do not have the needed rights"))
;; default (code (message "Unknown return code %S" code)))
With cl-case
, you would need to explicitly declare a local
variable code
to hold the return value of get-return-code
.
Also cl-case
is difficult to use with strings because it
uses eql
for comparison.
and
¶A common idiom is to write a pattern starting with and
,
with one or more symbol sub-patterns providing bindings
to the sub-patterns that follow (as well as to the body forms).
For example, the following pattern matches single-digit integers.
(and
(pred integerp)
n ; bind n
to expval
(guard (<= -9 n 9)))
First, pred
matches if (integerp expval)
evaluates to non-nil
.
Next, n
is a symbol pattern that matches
anything and binds n
to expval.
Lastly, guard
matches if the boolean expression
(<= -9 n 9)
(note the reference to n
)
evaluates to non-nil
.
If all these sub-patterns match, and
matches.
pcase
¶Here is another example that shows how to reformulate a simple
matching task from its traditional implementation
(function grok/traditional
) to one using
pcase
(function grok/pcase
).
The docstring for both these functions is:
“If OBJ is a string of the form "key:NUMBER", return NUMBER
(a string). Otherwise, return the list ("149" default).”
First, the traditional implementation (see Regular Expressions):
(defun grok/traditional (obj) (if (and (stringp obj) (string-match "^key:\\([[:digit:]]+\\)$" obj)) (match-string 1 obj) (list "149" 'default)))
(grok/traditional "key:0") ⇒ "0" (grok/traditional "key:149") ⇒ "149" (grok/traditional 'monolith) ⇒ ("149" default)
The reformulation demonstrates symbol binding as well as
or
, and
, pred
, app
and let
.
(defun grok/pcase (obj) (pcase obj ((or ; line 1 (and ; line 2 (pred stringp) ; line 3 (pred (string-match ; line 4 "^key:\\([[:digit:]]+\\)$")) ; line 5 (app (match-string 1) ; line 6 val)) ; line 7 (let val (list "149" 'default))) ; line 8 val))) ; line 9
(grok/pcase "key:0") ⇒ "0" (grok/pcase "key:149") ⇒ "149" (grok/pcase 'monolith) ⇒ ("149" default)
The bulk of grok/pcase
is a single clause of a pcase
form, the pattern on lines 1-8, the (single) body form on line 9.
The pattern is or
, which tries to match in turn its argument
sub-patterns, first and
(lines 2-7), then let
(line 8),
until one of them succeeds.
As in the previous example (see Example 1),
and
begins with a pred
sub-pattern to ensure
the following sub-patterns work with an object of the correct
type (string, in this case). If (stringp expval)
returns nil
, pred
fails, and thus and
fails, too.
The next pred
(lines 4-5) evaluates
(string-match RX expval)
and matches if the result is non-nil
, which means
that expval has the desired form: key:NUMBER
.
Again, failing this, pred
fails and and
, too.
Lastly (in this series of and
sub-patterns), app
evaluates (match-string 1 expval)
(line 6)
to get a temporary value tmp (i.e., the “NUMBER” substring)
and tries to match tmp against pattern val
(line 7).
Since that is a symbol pattern, it matches unconditionally
and additionally binds val
to tmp.
Now that app
has matched, all and
sub-patterns
have matched, and so and
matches.
Likewise, once and
has matched, or
matches
and does not proceed to try sub-pattern let
(line 8).
Let’s consider the situation where obj
is not a string,
or it is a string but has the wrong form.
In this case, one of the pred
(lines 3-5) fails to match,
thus and
(line 2) fails to match,
thus or
(line 1) proceeds to try sub-pattern let
(line 8).
First, let
evaluates (list "149" 'default)
to get ("149" default)
, the exprval, and then
tries to match exprval against pattern val
.
Since that is a symbol pattern, it matches unconditionally
and additionally binds val
to exprval.
Now that let
has matched, or
matches.
Note how both and
and let
sub-patterns finish in the
same way: by trying (always successfully) to match against the
symbol pattern val
, in the process binding val
.
Thus, or
always matches and control always passes
to the body form (line 9).
Because that is the last body form in a successfully matched
pcase
clause, it is the value of pcase
and likewise
the return value of grok/pcase
(see What Is a Function?).
The preceding examples all use sequencing patterns which include the symbol sub-pattern in some way. Here are some important details about that usage.
eq
.
The following example features a pcase
form
with two clauses and two seqpat, A and B.
Both A and B first check that expval is a
pair (using pred
),
and then bind symbols to the car
and cdr
of expval (using one app
each).
For A, because symbol st
is mentioned twice, the second
mention becomes an equality test using eq
.
On the other hand, B uses two separate symbols, s1
and
s2
, both of which become independent bindings.
(defun grok (object) (pcase object ((and (pred consp) ; seqpat A (app car st) ; first mention: st (app cdr st)) ; second mention: st (list 'eq st))
((and (pred consp) ; seqpat B (app car s1) ; first mention: s1 (app cdr s2)) ; first mention: s2 (list 'not-eq s1 s2))))
(let ((s "yow!")) (grok (cons s s))) ⇒ (eq "yow!") (grok (cons "yo!" "yo!")) ⇒ (not-eq "yo!" "yo!") (grok '(4 2)) ⇒ (not-eq 4 (2))
and
, symbol and guard
:
(defun square-double-digit-p/CLEAN (integer) (pcase (* integer integer) ((and n (guard (< 9 n 100))) (list 'yes n)) (sorry (list 'no sorry)))) (square-double-digit-p/CLEAN 9) ⇒ (yes 81) (square-double-digit-p/CLEAN 3) ⇒ (no 9)
(defun square-double-digit-p/MAYBE (integer)
(pcase (* integer integer)
((and n (guard (< 9 (incf n) 100))) (list 'yes n))
(sorry (list 'no sorry))))
(square-double-digit-p/MAYBE 9) ⇒ (yes 81)
(square-double-digit-p/MAYBE 3) ⇒ (yes 9) ; WRONG!
The difference is in boolean-expression in guard
:
CLEAN
references n
simply and directly,
while MAYBE
references n
with a side-effect,
in the expression (incf n)
.
When integer
is 3, here’s what happens:
n
binds it to expval,
i.e., the result of evaluating (* 3 3)
, or 9.
start: (< 9 (incf n) 100) becomes: (< 9 (setq n (1+ n)) 100) becomes: (< 9 (setq n (1+ 9)) 100)
becomes: (< 9 (setq n 10) 100)
; side-effect here!
becomes: (< 9 n 100) ; n
now bound to 10
becomes: (< 9 10 100)
becomes: t
nil
,
guard
matches, and
matches, and
control passes to that clause’s body forms.
Aside from the mathematical incorrectness of asserting that 9 is a
double-digit integer, there is another problem with MAYBE
.
The body form references n
once more, yet we do not see
the updated value—10—at all. What happened to it?
To sum up, it’s best to avoid side-effecting references to
symbol patterns entirely, not only
in boolean-expression (in guard
),
but also in expr (in let
)
and function (in pred
and app
).
and
, this set is
the union of all the symbols each of its sub-patterns let-binds.
This makes sense because, for and
to match,
all the sub-patterns must match.
When seqpat is or
, things are different:
or
matches at the first sub-pattern that matches;
the rest of the sub-patterns are ignored.
It makes no sense for each sub-pattern to let-bind a different
set of symbols because the body forms have no way to distinguish
which sub-pattern matched and choose among the different sets.
For example, the following is invalid:
(require 'cl-lib) (pcase (read-number "Enter an integer: ") ((or (and (pred cl-evenp) e-num) ; binde-num
to expval o-num) ; bindo-num
to expval (list e-num o-num)))
Enter an integer: 42 error→ Symbol’s value as variable is void: o-num
Enter an integer: 149 error→ Symbol’s value as variable is void: e-num
Evaluating body form (list e-num o-num)
signals error.
To distinguish between sub-patterns, you can use another symbol,
identical in name in all sub-patterns but differing in value.
Reworking the above example:
(require 'cl-lib) (pcase (read-number "Enter an integer: ") ((and num ; line 1 (or (and (pred cl-evenp) ; line 2 (let spin 'even)) ; line 3 (let spin 'odd))) ; line 4 (list spin num))) ; line 5
Enter an integer: 42 ⇒ (even 42)
Enter an integer: 149 ⇒ (odd 149)
Line 1 “factors out” the expval binding with
and
and symbol (in this case, num
).
On line 2, or
begins in the same way as before,
but instead of binding different symbols, uses let
twice
(lines 3-4) to bind the same symbol spin
in both sub-patterns.
The value of spin
distinguishes the sub-patterns.
The body form references both symbols (line 5).
pcase
¶The pcase
macro supports several kinds of patterns
(see Pattern-Matching Conditional).
You can add support for other kinds of patterns
using the pcase-defmacro
macro.
Define a new kind of pattern for pcase
, to be invoked
as (name actual-args)
.
The pcase
macro expands this into a function call
that evaluates body, whose job it is to
rewrite the invoked pattern into some other pattern,
in an environment where args are bound to actual-args.
Additionally, arrange to display doc along with
the docstring of pcase
.
By convention, doc should use EXPVAL
to stand for the result of
evaluating expression (first arg to pcase
).
Typically, body rewrites the invoked pattern
to use more basic patterns.
Although all patterns eventually reduce to core patterns,
body
need not use core patterns straight away.
The following example defines two patterns, named
less-than
and integer-less-than
.
(pcase-defmacro less-than (n) "Matches if EXPVAL is a number less than N." `(pred (> ,n)))
(pcase-defmacro integer-less-than (n) "Matches if EXPVAL is an integer less than N." `(and (pred integerp) (less-than ,n)))
Note that the docstrings mention args
(in this case, only one: n
) in the usual way,
and also mention EXPVAL
by convention.
The first rewrite (i.e., body for less-than
)
uses one core pattern: pred
.
The second uses two core patterns: and
and pred
,
as well as the newly-defined pattern less-than
.
Both use a single backquote construct (see Backquote).
This subsection describes backquote-style patterns, a set of builtin patterns that eases structural matching. For background, see Pattern-Matching Conditional.
Backquote-style patterns are a powerful set of pcase
pattern
extensions (created using pcase-defmacro
) that make it easy to
match expval against specifications of its structure.
For example, to match expval that must be a list of two elements whose first element is a specific string and the second element is any value, you can write a core pattern:
(and (pred listp) ls
(guard (= 2 (length ls))) (guard (string= "first" (car ls))) (let second-elem (cadr ls)))
or you can write the equivalent backquote-style pattern:
`("first" ,second-elem)
The backquote-style pattern is more concise,
resembles the structure of expval,
and avoids binding ls
.
A backquote-style pattern has the form `qpat
where
qpat can have the following forms:
(qpat1 . qpat2)
Matches if expval is a cons cell whose car
matches qpat1 and whose cdr
matches qpat2.
This readily generalizes to lists as in
(qpat1 qpat2 …)
.
[qpat1 qpat2 … qpatm]
Matches if expval is a vector of length m whose
0
..(m-1)
th elements match qpat1,
qpat2 … qpatm, respectively.
symbol
keyword
number
string
Matches if the corresponding element of expval is
equal
to the specified literal object.
,pattern
Matches if the corresponding element of expval
matches pattern.
Note that pattern is any kind that pcase
supports.
(In the example above, second-elem
is a symbol
core pattern; it therefore matches anything,
and let-binds second-elem
.)
The corresponding element is the portion of expval
that is in the same structural position as the structural position
of qpat in the backquote-style pattern.
(In the example above, the corresponding element of
second-elem
is the second element of expval.)
Here is an example of using pcase
to implement a simple
interpreter for a little expression language
(note that this requires lexical binding for the
lambda expression in the fn
clause to properly
capture body
and arg
(see Lexical Binding):
(defun evaluate (form env) (pcase form (`(add ,x ,y) (+ (evaluate x env) (evaluate y env)))
(`(call ,fun ,arg) (funcall (evaluate fun env) (evaluate arg env))) (`(fn ,arg ,body) (lambda (val) (evaluate body (cons (cons arg val) env))))
((pred numberp) form) ((pred symbolp) (cdr (assq form env))) (_ (error "Syntax error: %S" form))))
The first three clauses use backquote-style patterns.
`(add ,x ,y)
is a pattern that checks that form
is a three-element list starting with the literal symbol add
,
then extracts the second and third elements and binds them
to symbols x
and y
, respectively. This is known as
destructuring, see Destructuring with pcase
Patterns.
The clause body evaluates x
and y
and adds the results.
Similarly, the call
clause implements a function call,
and the fn
clause implements an anonymous function definition.
The remaining clauses use core patterns.
(pred numberp)
matches if form
is a number.
On match, the body evaluates it.
(pred symbolp)
matches if form
is a symbol.
On match, the body looks up the symbol in env
and
returns its association.
Finally, _
is the catch-all pattern that
matches anything, so it’s suitable for reporting syntax errors.
Here are some sample programs in this small language, including their evaluation results:
(evaluate '(add 1 2) nil) ⇒ 3 (evaluate '(add x y) '((x . 1) (y . 2))) ⇒ 3 (evaluate '(call (fn x (add 1 x)) 2) nil) ⇒ 3 (evaluate '(sub 1 2) nil) ⇒ error
pcase
Patterns ¶Pcase patterns not only express a condition on the form of the objects
they can match, but they can also extract sub-fields of those objects.
For example we can extract 2 elements from a list that is the value of
the variable my-list
with the following code:
(pcase my-list (`(add ,x ,y) (message "Contains %S and %S" x y)))
This will not only extract x
and y
but will additionally
test that my-list
is a list containing exactly 3 elements and
whose first element is the symbol add
. If any of those tests
fail, pcase
will immediately return nil
without calling
message
.
Extraction of multiple values stored in an object is known as
destructuring. Using pcase
patterns allows to perform
destructuring binding, which is similar to a local binding
(see Local Variables), but gives values to multiple elements of
a variable by extracting those values from an object of compatible
structure.
The macros described in this section use pcase
patterns to
perform destructuring binding. The condition of the object to be of
compatible structure means that the object must match the pattern,
because only then the object’s subfields can be extracted. For
example:
(pcase-let ((`(add ,x ,y) my-list)) (message "Contains %S and %S" x y))
does the same as the previous example, except that it directly tries
to extract x
and y
from my-list
without first
verifying if my-list
is a list which has the right number of
elements and has add
as its first element. The precise
behavior when the object does not actually match the pattern is
undefined, although the body will not be silently skipped: either an
error is signaled or the body is run with some of the variables
potentially bound to arbitrary values like nil
.
The pcase patterns that are useful for destructuring bindings are generally those described in Backquote-Style Patterns, since they express a specification of the structure of objects that will match.
For an alternative facility for destructuring binding, see seq-let.
Perform destructuring binding of variables according to bindings, and then evaluate body.
bindings is a list of bindings of the form (pattern exp)
, where exp is an expression to evaluate and
pattern is a pcase
pattern.
All exps are evaluated first, after which they are matched against their respective pattern, introducing new variable bindings that can then be used inside body. The variable bindings are produced by destructuring binding of elements of pattern to the values of the corresponding elements of the evaluated exp.
Here’s a trivial example:
(pcase-let ((`(,major ,minor) (split-string "image/png" "/"))) minor) ⇒ "png"
Perform destructuring binding of variables according to bindings, and then evaluate body.
bindings is a list of bindings of the form (pattern
exp)
, where exp is an expression to evaluate and
pattern is a pcase
pattern. The variable bindings are
produced by destructuring binding of elements of pattern to the
values of the corresponding elements of the evaluated exp.
Unlike pcase-let
, but similarly to let*
, each exp
is matched against its corresponding pattern before processing
the next element of bindings, so the variable bindings
introduced in each one of the bindings are available in the
exps of the bindings that follow it, additionally to
being available in body.
Execute body once for each element of list, on each
iteration performing a destructuring binding of variables in
pattern to the values of the corresponding subfields of the
element of list. The bindings are performed as if by
pcase-let
. When pattern is a simple variable, this ends
up being equivalent to dolist
(see Iteration).
Assign values to variables in a setq
form, destructuring each
value according to its respective pattern.
This is like lambda
, but allows each argument to be a pattern.
For instance, here’s a simple function that takes a cons cell as the
argument:
(setq fun (pcase-lambda (`(,key . ,val)) (vector key (* val 10)))) (funcall fun '(foo . 2)) ⇒ [foo 20]
Iteration means executing part of a program repetitively. For
example, you might want to repeat some computation once for each element
of a list, or once for each integer from 0 to n. You can do this
in Emacs Lisp with the special form while
:
while
first evaluates condition. If the result is
non-nil
, it evaluates forms in textual order. Then it
reevaluates condition, and if the result is non-nil
, it
evaluates forms again. This process repeats until condition
evaluates to nil
.
There is no limit on the number of iterations that may occur. The loop
will continue until either condition evaluates to nil
or
until an error or throw
jumps out of it (see Nonlocal Exits).
The value of a while
form is always nil
.
(setq num 0) ⇒ 0
(while (< num 4) (princ (format "Iteration %d." num)) (setq num (1+ num))) -| Iteration 0. -| Iteration 1. -| Iteration 2. -| Iteration 3. ⇒ nil
To write a repeat-until loop, which will execute something on each
iteration and then do the end-test, put the body followed by the
end-test in a progn
as the first argument of while
, as
shown here:
(while (progn (forward-line 1) (not (looking-at "^$"))))
This moves forward one line and continues moving by lines until it
reaches an empty line. It is peculiar in that the while
has no
body, just the end test (which also does the real work of moving point).
The dolist
and dotimes
macros provide convenient ways to
write two common kinds of loops.
This construct executes body once for each element of
list, binding the variable var locally to hold the current
element. Then it returns the value of evaluating result, or
nil
if result is omitted. For example, here is how you
could use dolist
to define the reverse
function:
(defun reverse (list) (let (value) (dolist (elt list value) (setq value (cons elt value)))))
This construct executes body once for each integer from 0
(inclusive) to count (exclusive), binding the variable var
to the integer for the current iteration. Then it returns the value
of evaluating result, or nil
if result is omitted.
Use of result is deprecated. Here is an example of using
dotimes
to do something 100 times:
(dotimes (i 100) (insert "I will not obey absurd orders\n"))
A generator is a function that produces a potentially-infinite stream of values. Each time the function produces a value, it suspends itself and waits for a caller to request the next value.
iter-defun
defines a generator function. A generator function
has the same signature as a normal function, but works differently.
Instead of executing body when called, a generator function
returns an iterator object. That iterator runs body to generate
values, emitting a value and pausing where iter-yield
or
iter-yield-from
appears. When body returns normally,
iter-next
signals iter-end-of-sequence
with body’s
result as its condition data.
Any kind of Lisp code is valid inside body, but
iter-yield
and iter-yield-from
cannot appear inside
unwind-protect
forms.
iter-lambda
produces an unnamed generator function that works
just like a generator function produced with iter-defun
.
When it appears inside a generator function, iter-yield
indicates that the current iterator should pause and return
value from iter-next
. iter-yield
evaluates to the
value
parameter of next call to iter-next
.
iter-yield-from
yields all the values that iterator
produces and evaluates to the value that iterator’s generator
function returns normally. While it has control, iterator
receives values sent to the iterator using iter-next
.
To use a generator function, first call it normally, producing a
iterator object. An iterator is a specific instance of a
generator. Then use iter-next
to retrieve values from this
iterator. When there are no more values to pull from an iterator,
iter-next
raises an iter-end-of-sequence
condition with
the iterator’s final value.
It’s important to note that generator function bodies only execute
inside calls to iter-next
. A call to a function defined with
iter-defun
produces an iterator; you must drive this
iterator with iter-next
for anything interesting to happen.
Each call to a generator function produces a different
iterator, each with its own state.
Retrieve the next value from iterator. If there are no more
values to be generated (because iterator’s generator function
returned), iter-next
signals the iter-end-of-sequence
condition; the data value associated with this condition is the value
with which iterator’s generator function returned.
value is sent into the iterator and becomes the value to which
iter-yield
evaluates. value is ignored for the first
iter-next
call to a given iterator, since at the start of
iterator’s generator function, the generator function is not
evaluating any iter-yield
form.
If iterator is suspended inside an unwind-protect
’s
bodyform
and becomes unreachable, Emacs will eventually run
unwind handlers after a garbage collection pass. (Note that
iter-yield
is illegal inside an unwind-protect
’s
unwindforms
.) To ensure that these handlers are run before
then, use iter-close
.
Some convenience functions are provided to make working with iterators easier:
Run body with var bound to each value that iterator produces.
The Common Lisp loop facility also contains features for working with iterators. See Loop Facility in Common Lisp Extensions.
The following piece of code demonstrates some important principles of working with iterators.
(require 'generator) (iter-defun my-iter (x) (iter-yield (1+ (iter-yield (1+ x)))) ;; Return normally -1) (let* ((iter (my-iter 5)) (iter2 (my-iter 0))) ;; Prints 6 (print (iter-next iter)) ;; Prints 9 (print (iter-next iter 8)) ;; Prints 1; iter and iter2 have distinct states (print (iter-next iter2 nil)) ;; We expect the iter sequence to end now (condition-case x (iter-next iter) (iter-end-of-sequence ;; Prints -1, which my-iter returned normally (print (cdr x)))))
A nonlocal exit is a transfer of control from one point in a program to another remote point. Nonlocal exits can occur in Emacs Lisp as a result of errors; you can also use them under explicit control. Nonlocal exits unbind all variable bindings made by the constructs being exited.
catch
and throw
catch
and throw
catch
and throw
¶Most control constructs affect only the flow of control within the
construct itself. The function throw
is the exception to this
rule of normal program execution: it performs a nonlocal exit on
request. (There are other exceptions, but they are for error handling
only.) throw
is used inside a catch
, and jumps back to
that catch
. For example:
(defun foo-outer () (catch 'foo (foo-inner))) (defun foo-inner () ... (if x (throw 'foo t)) ...)
The throw
form, if executed, transfers control straight back to
the corresponding catch
, which returns immediately. The code
following the throw
is not executed. The second argument of
throw
is used as the return value of the catch
.
The function throw
finds the matching catch
based on the
first argument: it searches for a catch
whose first argument is
eq
to the one specified in the throw
. If there is more
than one applicable catch
, the innermost one takes precedence.
Thus, in the above example, the throw
specifies foo
, and
the catch
in foo-outer
specifies the same symbol, so that
catch
is the applicable one (assuming there is no other matching
catch
in between).
Executing throw
exits all Lisp constructs up to the matching
catch
, including function calls. When binding constructs such
as let
or function calls are exited in this way, the bindings
are unbound, just as they are when these constructs exit normally
(see Local Variables). Likewise, throw
restores the buffer
and position saved by save-excursion
(see Excursions), and
the narrowing status saved by save-restriction
. It also runs
any cleanups established with the unwind-protect
special form
when it exits that form (see Cleaning Up from Nonlocal Exits).
The throw
need not appear lexically within the catch
that it jumps to. It can equally well be called from another function
called within the catch
. As long as the throw
takes place
chronologically after entry to the catch
, and chronologically
before exit from it, it has access to that catch
. This is why
throw
can be used in commands such as exit-recursive-edit
that throw back to the editor command loop (see Recursive Editing).
Common Lisp note: Most other versions of Lisp, including Common Lisp, have several ways of transferring control nonsequentially:
return
,return-from
, andgo
, for example. Emacs Lisp has onlythrow
. The cl-lib library provides versions of some of these. See Blocks and Exits in Common Lisp Extensions.
catch
establishes a return point for the throw
function.
The return point is distinguished from other such return points by
tag, which may be any Lisp object except nil
. The argument
tag is evaluated normally before the return point is established.
With the return point in effect, catch
evaluates the forms of the
body in textual order. If the forms execute normally (without
error or nonlocal exit) the value of the last body form is returned from
the catch
.
If a throw
is executed during the execution of body,
specifying the same value tag, the catch
form exits
immediately; the value it returns is whatever was specified as the
second argument of throw
.
The purpose of throw
is to return from a return point previously
established with catch
. The argument tag is used to choose
among the various existing return points; it must be eq
to the value
specified in the catch
. If multiple return points match tag,
the innermost one is used.
The argument value is used as the value to return from that
catch
.
If no return point is in effect with tag tag, then a no-catch
error is signaled with data (tag value)
.
catch
and throw
¶One way to use catch
and throw
is to exit from a doubly
nested loop. (In most languages, this would be done with a goto
.)
Here we compute (foo i j)
for i and j
varying from 0 to 9:
(defun search-foo () (catch 'loop (let ((i 0)) (while (< i 10) (let ((j 0)) (while (< j 10) (if (foo i j) (throw 'loop (list i j))) (setq j (1+ j)))) (setq i (1+ i))))))
If foo
ever returns non-nil
, we stop immediately and return a
list of i and j. If foo
always returns nil
, the
catch
returns normally, and the value is nil
, since that
is the result of the while
.
Here are two tricky examples, slightly different, showing two
return points at once. First, two return points with the same tag,
hack
:
(defun catch2 (tag) (catch tag (throw 'hack 'yes))) ⇒ catch2
(catch 'hack (print (catch2 'hack)) 'no) -| yes ⇒ no
Since both return points have tags that match the throw
, it goes to
the inner one, the one established in catch2
. Therefore,
catch2
returns normally with value yes
, and this value is
printed. Finally the second body form in the outer catch
, which is
'no
, is evaluated and returned from the outer catch
.
Now let’s change the argument given to catch2
:
(catch 'hack (print (catch2 'quux)) 'no) ⇒ yes
We still have two return points, but this time only the outer one has
the tag hack
; the inner one has the tag quux
instead.
Therefore, throw
makes the outer catch
return the value
yes
. The function print
is never called, and the
body-form 'no
is never evaluated.
When Emacs Lisp attempts to evaluate a form that, for some reason, cannot be evaluated, it signals an error.
When an error is signaled, Emacs’s default reaction is to print an error message and terminate execution of the current command. This is the right thing to do in most cases, such as if you type C-f at the end of the buffer.
In complicated programs, simple termination may not be what you want.
For example, the program may have made temporary changes in data
structures, or created temporary buffers that should be deleted before
the program is finished. In such cases, you would use
unwind-protect
to establish cleanup expressions to be
evaluated in case of error. (See Cleaning Up from Nonlocal Exits.) Occasionally, you may
wish the program to continue execution despite an error in a subroutine.
In these cases, you would use condition-case
to establish
error handlers to recover control in case of error.
For reporting problems without terminating the execution of the current command, consider issuing a warning instead. See Reporting Warnings.
Resist the temptation to use error handling to transfer control from
one part of the program to another; use catch
and throw
instead. See Explicit Nonlocal Exits: catch
and throw
.
Signaling an error means beginning error processing. Error processing normally aborts all or part of the running program and returns to a point that is set up to handle the error (see How Emacs Processes Errors). Here we describe how to signal an error.
Most errors are signaled automatically within Lisp primitives
which you call for other purposes, such as if you try to take the
CAR of an integer or move forward a character at the end of the
buffer. You can also signal errors explicitly with the functions
error
and signal
.
Quitting, which happens when the user types C-g, is not considered an error, but it is handled almost like an error. See Quitting.
Every error specifies an error message, one way or another. The message should state what is wrong (“File does not exist”), not how things ought to be (“File must exist”). The convention in Emacs Lisp is that error messages should start with a capital letter, but should not end with any sort of punctuation.
This function signals an error with an error message constructed by
applying format-message
(see Formatting Strings) to
format-string and args.
These examples show typical uses of error
:
(error "That is an error -- try something else") error→ That is an error -- try something else
(error "Invalid name `%s'" "A%%B") error→ Invalid name ‘A%%B’
error
works by calling signal
with two arguments: the
error symbol error
, and a list containing the string returned by
format-message
.
Typically grave accent and apostrophe in the format translate to
matching curved quotes, e.g., "Missing `%s'"
might result in
"Missing ‘foo’"
. See Text Quoting Style, for how to influence
or inhibit this translation.
Warning: If you want to use your own string as an error message
verbatim, don’t just write (error string)
. If string
string contains ‘%’, ‘`’, or ‘'’ it may be
reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use (error "%s"
string)
.
When noninteractive
is non-nil
(see Batch Mode),
this function kills Emacs if the signaled error has no handler.
This function signals an error named by error-symbol. The argument data is a list of additional Lisp objects relevant to the circumstances of the error.
The argument error-symbol must be an error symbol—a symbol
defined with define-error
. This is how Emacs Lisp classifies different
sorts of errors. See Error Symbols and Condition Names, for a description of error symbols,
error conditions and condition names.
If the error is not handled, the two arguments are used in printing
the error message. Normally, this error message is provided by the
error-message
property of error-symbol. If data is
non-nil
, this is followed by a colon and a comma separated list
of the unevaluated elements of data. For error
, the
error message is the CAR of data (that must be a string).
Subcategories of file-error
are handled specially.
The number and significance of the objects in data depends on
error-symbol. For example, with a wrong-type-argument
error,
there should be two objects in the list: a predicate that describes the type
that was expected, and the object that failed to fit that type.
Both error-symbol and data are available to any error
handlers that handle the error: condition-case
binds a local
variable to a list of the form (error-symbol .
data)
(see Writing Code to Handle Errors).
The function signal
never returns.
If the error error-symbol has no handler, and
noninteractive
is non-nil
(see Batch Mode),
this function eventually kills Emacs.
(signal 'wrong-number-of-arguments '(x y)) error→ Wrong number of arguments: x, y
(signal 'no-such-error '("My unknown error condition")) error→ peculiar error: "My unknown error condition"
This function behaves exactly like error
, except that it uses
the error symbol user-error
rather than error
. As the
name suggests, this is intended to report errors on the part of the
user, rather than errors in the code itself. For example,
if you try to use the command Info-history-back
(l) to
move back beyond the start of your Info browsing history, Emacs
signals a user-error
. Such errors do not cause entry to the
debugger, even when debug-on-error
is non-nil
.
See Entering the Debugger on an Error.
Common Lisp note: Emacs Lisp has nothing like the Common Lisp concept of continuable errors.
When an error is signaled, signal
searches for an active
handler for the error. A handler is a sequence of Lisp
expressions designated to be executed if an error happens in part of the
Lisp program. If the error has an applicable handler, the handler is
executed, and control resumes following the handler. The handler
executes in the environment of the condition-case
that
established it; all functions called within that condition-case
have already been exited, and the handler cannot return to them.
If there is no applicable handler for the error, it terminates the
current command and returns control to the editor command loop. (The
command loop has an implicit handler for all kinds of errors.) The
command loop’s handler uses the error symbol and associated data to
print an error message. You can use the variable
command-error-function
to control how this is done:
This variable, if non-nil
, specifies a function to use to
handle errors that return control to the Emacs command loop. The
function should take three arguments: data, a list of the same
form that condition-case
would bind to its variable;
context, a string describing the situation in which the error
occurred, or (more often) nil
; and caller, the Lisp
function which called the primitive that signaled the error.
An error that has no explicit handler may call the Lisp debugger
(see Invoking the Debugger). The debugger is enabled if the
variable debug-on-error
(see Entering the Debugger on an Error) is
non-nil
. Unlike error handlers, the debugger runs in the
environment of the error, so that you can examine values of variables
precisely as they were at the time of the error. In batch mode
(see Batch Mode), the Emacs process then normally exits with a
non-zero exit status.
The usual effect of signaling an error is to terminate the command
that is running and return immediately to the Emacs editor command loop.
You can arrange to trap errors occurring in a part of your program by
establishing an error handler, with the special form
condition-case
. A simple example looks like this:
(condition-case nil (delete-file filename) (error nil))
This deletes the file named filename, catching any error and
returning nil
if an error occurs. (You can use the macro
ignore-errors
for a simple case like this; see below.)
The condition-case
construct is often used to trap errors that
are predictable, such as failure to open a file in a call to
insert-file-contents
. It is also used to trap errors that are
totally unpredictable, such as when the program evaluates an expression
read from the user.
The second argument of condition-case
is called the
protected form. (In the example above, the protected form is a
call to delete-file
.) The error handlers go into effect when
this form begins execution and are deactivated when this form returns.
They remain in effect for all the intervening time. In particular, they
are in effect during the execution of functions called by this form, in
their subroutines, and so on. This is a good thing, since, strictly
speaking, errors can be signaled only by Lisp primitives (including
signal
and error
) called by the protected form, not by the
protected form itself.
The arguments after the protected form are handlers. Each handler
lists one or more condition names (which are symbols) to specify
which errors it will handle. The error symbol specified when an error
is signaled also defines a list of condition names. A handler applies
to an error if they have any condition names in common. In the example
above, there is one handler, and it specifies one condition name,
error
, which covers all errors.
The search for an applicable handler checks all the established handlers
starting with the most recently established one. Thus, if two nested
condition-case
forms offer to handle the same error, the inner of
the two gets to handle it.
If an error is handled by some condition-case
form, this
ordinarily prevents the debugger from being run, even if
debug-on-error
says this error should invoke the debugger.
If you want to be able to debug errors that are caught by a
condition-case
, set the variable debug-on-signal
to a
non-nil
value. You can also specify that a particular handler
should let the debugger run first, by writing debug
among the
conditions, like this:
(condition-case nil (delete-file filename) ((debug error) nil))
The effect of debug
here is only to prevent
condition-case
from suppressing the call to the debugger. Any
given error will invoke the debugger only if debug-on-error
and
the other usual filtering mechanisms say it should. See Entering the Debugger on an Error.
The macro condition-case-unless-debug
provides another way to
handle debugging of such forms. It behaves exactly like
condition-case
, unless the variable debug-on-error
is
non-nil
, in which case it does not handle any errors at all.
Once Emacs decides that a certain handler handles the error, it
returns control to that handler. To do so, Emacs unbinds all variable
bindings made by binding constructs that are being exited, and
executes the cleanups of all unwind-protect
forms that are
being exited. Once control arrives at the handler, the body of the
handler executes normally.
After execution of the handler body, execution returns from the
condition-case
form. Because the protected form is exited
completely before execution of the handler, the handler cannot resume
execution at the point of the error, nor can it examine variable
bindings that were made within the protected form. All it can do is
clean up and proceed.
Error signaling and handling have some resemblance to throw
and
catch
(see Explicit Nonlocal Exits: catch
and throw
), but they are entirely separate
facilities. An error cannot be caught by a catch
, and a
throw
cannot be handled by an error handler (though using
throw
when there is no suitable catch
signals an error
that can be handled).
This special form establishes the error handlers handlers around
the execution of protected-form. If protected-form executes
without error, the value it returns becomes the value of the
condition-case
form (in the absence of a success handler; see below).
In this case, the condition-case
has
no effect. The condition-case
form makes a difference when an
error occurs during protected-form.
Each of the handlers is a list of the form (conditions
body…)
. Here conditions is an error condition name
to be handled, or a list of condition names (which can include debug
to allow the debugger to run before the handler). A condition name of
t
matches any condition. body is one or more Lisp
expressions to be executed when this handler handles an error. Here
are examples of handlers:
(error nil) (arith-error (message "Division by zero")) ((arith-error file-error) (message "Either division by zero or failure to open a file"))
Each error that occurs has an error symbol that describes what
kind of error it is, and which describes also a list of condition names
(see Error Symbols and Condition Names). Emacs
searches all the active condition-case
forms for a handler that
specifies one or more of these condition names; the innermost matching
condition-case
handles the error. Within this
condition-case
, the first applicable handler handles the error.
After executing the body of the handler, the condition-case
returns normally, using the value of the last form in the handler body
as the overall value.
The argument var is a variable. condition-case
does not
bind this variable when executing the protected-form, only when it
handles an error. At that time, it binds var locally to an
error description, which is a list giving the particulars of the
error. The error description has the form (error-symbol
. data)
. The handler can refer to this list to decide what to
do. For example, if the error is for failure opening a file, the file
name is the second element of data—the third element of the
error description.
If var is nil
, that means no variable is bound. Then the
error symbol and associated data are not available to the handler.
As a special case, one of the handlers can be a list of the
form (:success body…)
, where body is executed
with var (if non-nil
) bound to the return value of
protected-form when that expression terminates without error.
Sometimes it is necessary to re-throw a signal caught by
condition-case
, for some outer-level handler to catch. Here’s
how to do that:
(signal (car err) (cdr err))
where err
is the error description variable, the first argument
to condition-case
whose error condition you want to re-throw.
See Definition of signal.
This function returns the error message string for a given error descriptor. It is useful if you want to handle an error by printing the usual error message for that error. See Definition of signal.
Here is an example of using condition-case
to handle the error
that results from dividing by zero. The handler displays the error
message (but without a beep), then returns a very large number.
(defun safe-divide (dividend divisor)
(condition-case err
;; Protected form.
(/ dividend divisor)
;; The handler. (arith-error ; Condition. ;; Display the usual message for this error. (message "%s" (error-message-string err)) 1000000))) ⇒ safe-divide
(safe-divide 5 0) -| Arithmetic error: (arith-error) ⇒ 1000000
The handler specifies condition name arith-error
so that it
will handle only division-by-zero errors. Other kinds of errors will
not be handled (by this condition-case
). Thus:
(safe-divide nil 3) error→ Wrong type argument: number-or-marker-p, nil
Here is a condition-case
that catches all kinds of errors,
including those from error
:
(setq baz 34) ⇒ 34
(condition-case err
(if (eq baz 35)
t
;; This is a call to the function error
.
(error "Rats! The variable %s was %s, not 35" 'baz baz))
;; This is the handler; it is not a form.
(error (princ (format "The error was: %s" err))
2))
-| The error was: (error "Rats! The variable baz was 34, not 35")
⇒ 2
This construct executes body, ignoring any errors that occur
during its execution. If the execution is without error,
ignore-errors
returns the value of the last form in body;
otherwise, it returns nil
.
Here’s the example at the beginning of this subsection rewritten using
ignore-errors
:
(ignore-errors (delete-file filename))
This macro is like ignore-errors
, but will only ignore the
specific error condition specified.
(ignore-error end-of-file (read ""))
condition can also be a list of error conditions.
This macro is like a milder version of ignore-errors
. Rather
than suppressing errors altogether, it converts them into messages.
It uses the string format to format the message.
format should contain a single ‘%’-sequence; e.g.,
"Error: %S"
. Use with-demoted-errors
around code
that is not expected to signal errors, but
should be robust if one does occur. Note that this macro uses
condition-case-unless-debug
rather than condition-case
.
When you signal an error, you specify an error symbol to specify the kind of error you have in mind. Each error has one and only one error symbol to categorize it. This is the finest classification of errors defined by the Emacs Lisp language.
These narrow classifications are grouped into a hierarchy of wider
classes called error conditions, identified by condition
names. The narrowest such classes belong to the error symbols
themselves: each error symbol is also a condition name. There are also
condition names for more extensive classes, up to the condition name
error
which takes in all kinds of errors (but not quit
).
Thus, each error has one or more condition names: error
, the
error symbol if that is distinct from error
, and perhaps some
intermediate classifications.
In order for a symbol to be an error symbol, it must be defined with
define-error
which takes a parent condition (defaults to error
).
This parent defines the conditions that this kind of error belongs to.
The transitive set of parents always includes the error symbol itself, and the
symbol error
. Because quitting is not considered an error, the set of
parents of quit
is just (quit)
.
In addition to its parents, the error symbol has a message which is a string to be printed when that error is signaled but not handled. If that message is not valid, the error message ‘peculiar error’ is used. See Definition of signal.
Internally, the set of parents is stored in the error-conditions
property of the error symbol and the message is stored in the
error-message
property of the error symbol.
Here is how we define a new error symbol, new-error
:
(define-error 'new-error "A new error" 'my-own-errors)
This error has several condition names: new-error
, the narrowest
classification; my-own-errors
, which we imagine is a wider
classification; and all the conditions of my-own-errors
which should
include error
, which is the widest of all.
The error string should start with a capital letter but it should not end with a period. This is for consistency with the rest of Emacs.
Naturally, Emacs will never signal new-error
on its own; only
an explicit call to signal
(see Definition of signal) in
your code can do this:
(signal 'new-error '(x y)) error→ A new error: x, y
This error can be handled through any of its condition names.
This example handles new-error
and any other errors in the class
my-own-errors
:
(condition-case foo (bar nil t) (my-own-errors nil))
The significant way that errors are classified is by their condition
names—the names used to match errors with handlers. An error symbol
serves only as a convenient way to specify the intended error message
and list of condition names. It would be cumbersome to give
signal
a list of condition names rather than one error symbol.
By contrast, using only error symbols without condition names would
seriously decrease the power of condition-case
. Condition names
make it possible to categorize errors at various levels of generality
when you write an error handler. Using error symbols alone would
eliminate all but the narrowest level of classification.
See Standard Errors, for a list of the main error symbols and their conditions.
The unwind-protect
construct is essential whenever you
temporarily put a data structure in an inconsistent state; it permits
you to make the data consistent again in the event of an error or
throw. (Another more specific cleanup construct that is used only for
changes in buffer contents is the atomic change group; Atomic Change Groups.)
unwind-protect
executes body-form with a guarantee that
the cleanup-forms will be evaluated if control leaves
body-form, no matter how that happens. body-form may
complete normally, or execute a throw
out of the
unwind-protect
, or cause an error; in all cases, the
cleanup-forms will be evaluated.
If body-form finishes normally, unwind-protect
returns the
value of body-form, after it evaluates the cleanup-forms.
If body-form does not finish, unwind-protect
does not
return any value in the normal sense.
Only body-form is protected by the unwind-protect
. If any
of the cleanup-forms themselves exits nonlocally (via a
throw
or an error), unwind-protect
is not
guaranteed to evaluate the rest of them. If the failure of one of the
cleanup-forms has the potential to cause trouble, then protect
it with another unwind-protect
around that form.
For example, here we make an invisible buffer for temporary use, and make sure to kill it before finishing:
(let ((buffer (get-buffer-create " *temp*"))) (with-current-buffer buffer (unwind-protect body-form (kill-buffer buffer))))
You might think that we could just as well write (kill-buffer
(current-buffer))
and dispense with the variable buffer
.
However, the way shown above is safer, if body-form happens to
get an error after switching to a different buffer! (Alternatively,
you could write a save-current-buffer
around body-form,
to ensure that the temporary buffer becomes current again in time to
kill it.)
Emacs includes a standard macro called with-temp-buffer
which
expands into more or less the code shown above (see Current Buffer). Several of the macros defined in
this manual use unwind-protect
in this way.
Here is an actual example derived from an FTP package. It creates a
process (see Processes) to try to establish a connection to a remote
machine. As the function ftp-login
is highly susceptible to
numerous problems that the writer of the function cannot anticipate, it
is protected with a form that guarantees deletion of the process in the
event of failure. Otherwise, Emacs might fill up with useless
subprocesses.
(let ((win nil)) (unwind-protect (progn (setq process (ftp-setup-buffer host file)) (if (setq win (ftp-login process host user password)) (message "Logged in") (error "Ftp login failed"))) (or win (and process (delete-process process)))))
This example has a small bug: if the user types C-g to
quit, and the quit happens immediately after the function
ftp-setup-buffer
returns but before the variable process
is
set, the process will not be killed. There is no easy way to fix this bug,
but at least it is very unlikely.
A variable is a name used in a program to stand for a value. In Lisp, each variable is represented by a Lisp symbol (see Symbols). The variable name is simply the symbol’s name, and the variable’s value is stored in the symbol’s value cell9. See Symbol Components. In Emacs Lisp, the use of a symbol as a variable is independent of its use as a function name.
As previously noted in this manual, a Lisp program is represented primarily by Lisp objects, and only secondarily as text. The textual form of a Lisp program is given by the read syntax of the Lisp objects that constitute the program. Hence, the textual form of a variable in a Lisp program is written using the read syntax for the symbol representing the variable.
The simplest way to use a variable is globally. This means that the variable has just one value at a time, and this value is in effect (at least for the moment) throughout the Lisp system. The value remains in effect until you specify a new one. When a new value replaces the old one, no trace of the old value remains in the variable.
You specify a value for a symbol with setq
. For example,
(setq x '(a b))
gives the variable x
the value (a b)
. Note that
setq
is a special form (see Special Forms); it does not
evaluate its first argument, the name of the variable, but it does
evaluate the second argument, the new value.
Once the variable has a value, you can refer to it by using the symbol itself as an expression. Thus,
x ⇒ (a b)
assuming the setq
form shown above has already been executed.
If you do set the same variable again, the new value replaces the old one:
x ⇒ (a b)
(setq x 4) ⇒ 4
x ⇒ 4
In Emacs Lisp, certain symbols normally evaluate to themselves. These
include nil
and t
, as well as any symbol whose name starts
with ‘:’ (these are called keywords). These symbols cannot
be rebound, nor can their values be changed. Any attempt to set or bind
nil
or t
signals a setting-constant
error. The
same is true for a keyword (a symbol whose name starts with ‘:’),
if it is interned in the standard obarray, except that setting such a
symbol to itself is not an error.
nil ≡ 'nil ⇒ nil
(setq nil 500) error→ Attempt to set constant symbol: nil
function returns t
if object is a symbol whose name
starts with ‘:’, interned in the standard obarray, and returns
nil
otherwise.
These constants are fundamentally different from the constants
defined using the defconst
special form (see Defining Global Variables). A defconst
form serves to inform human readers
that you do not intend to change the value of a variable, but Emacs
does not raise an error if you actually change it.
A small number of additional symbols are made read-only for various
practical reasons. These include enable-multibyte-characters
,
most-positive-fixnum
, most-negative-fixnum
, and a few
others. Any attempt to set or bind these also signals a
setting-constant
error.
Global variables have values that last until explicitly superseded with new values. Sometimes it is useful to give a variable a local value—a value that takes effect only within a certain part of a Lisp program. When a variable has a local value, we say that it is locally bound to that value, and that it is a local variable.
For example, when a function is called, its argument variables
receive local values, which are the actual arguments supplied to the
function call; these local bindings take effect within the body of the
function. To take another example, the let
special form
explicitly establishes local bindings for specific variables, which
take effect only within the body of the let
form.
We also speak of the global binding, which is where (conceptually) the global value is kept.
Establishing a local binding saves away the variable’s previous
value (or lack of one). We say that the previous value is
shadowed. Both global and local values may be shadowed. If a
local binding is in effect, using setq
on the local variable
stores the specified value in the local binding. When that local
binding is no longer in effect, the previously shadowed value (or lack
of one) comes back.
A variable can have more than one local binding at a time (e.g., if
there are nested let
forms that bind the variable). The
current binding is the local binding that is actually in effect.
It determines the value returned by evaluating the variable symbol,
and it is the binding acted on by setq
.
For most purposes, you can think of the current binding as the innermost local binding, or the global binding if there is no local binding. To be more precise, a rule called the scoping rule determines where in a program a local binding takes effect. The default scoping rule in Emacs Lisp is called dynamic scoping, which simply states that the current binding at any given point in the execution of a program is the most recently-created binding for that variable that still exists. For details about dynamic scoping, and an alternative scoping rule called lexical scoping, see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings. Lately Emacs is moving towards using lexical binding in more and more places, with the goal of eventually making lexical binding the default. In particular, all Emacs Lisp source files and the *scratch* buffer use lexical scoping.
The special forms let
and let*
exist to create local
bindings:
This special form sets up local bindings for a certain set of
variables, as specified by bindings, and then evaluates all of
the forms in textual order. Its return value is the value of
the last form in forms. The local bindings set up by let
will be in effect only within the body of forms.
Each of the bindings is either (i) a symbol, in which case
that symbol is locally bound to nil
; or (ii) a list of the
form (symbol value-form)
, in which case
symbol is locally bound to the result of evaluating
value-form. If value-form is omitted, nil
is used.
All of the value-forms in bindings are evaluated in the
order they appear and before binding any of the symbols to them.
Here is an example of this: z
is bound to the old value of
y
, which is 2, not the new value of y
, which is 1.
(setq y 2) ⇒ 2
(let ((y 1) (z y)) (list y z)) ⇒ (1 2)
On the other hand, the order of bindings is unspecified: in the following example, either 1 or 2 might be printed.
(let ((x 1) (x 2)) (print x))
Therefore, avoid binding a variable more than once in a single
let
form.
This special form is like let
, but it binds each variable right
after computing its local value, before computing the local value for
the next variable. Therefore, an expression in bindings can
refer to the preceding symbols bound in this let*
form.
Compare the following example with the example above for let
.
(setq y 2) ⇒ 2
(let* ((y 1)
(z y)) ; Use the just-established value of y
.
(list y z))
⇒ (1 1)
Basically, the let*
binding of x
and y
in the
previous example is equivalent to using nested let
bindings:
(let ((y 1)) (let ((z y)) (list y z)))
This special form is like let*
, but all the variables are bound
before any of the local values are computed. The values are then
assigned to the locally bound variables. This is only useful when
lexical binding is in effect, and you want to create closures that
refer to bindings that would otherwise not yet be in effect when using
let*
.
For instance, here’s a closure that removes itself from a hook after being run once:
(letrec ((hookfun (lambda () (message "Run once") (remove-hook 'post-command-hook hookfun)))) (add-hook 'post-command-hook hookfun))
This special form is like let
, but it binds all variables
dynamically. This is rarely useful—you usually want to bind normal
variables lexically, and special variables (i.e., variables that are
defined with defvar
) dynamically, and this is what let
does.
dlet
can be useful when interfacing with old code that assumes
that certain variables are dynamically bound (see Dynamic Binding), but it’s impractical to defvar
these variables.
dlet
will temporarily make the bound variables special, execute
the forms, and then make the variables non-special again.
This special form is a looping construct inspired from the
Scheme language. It is similar to let
: It binds the variables in
bindings, and then evaluates body. However,
named-let
also binds name to a
local function whose formal arguments are the variables in bindings
and whose body is body. This allows body to call itself
recursively by calling
name, where the arguments passed to name are used as the
new values of the bound variables in the recursive invocation.
Example of a loop summing a list of numbers:
(named-let sum ((numbers '(1 2 3 4)) (running-sum 0)) (if numbers (sum (cdr numbers) (+ running-sum (car numbers))) running-sum)) ⇒ 10
Recursive calls to name that occur in tail positions in body are guaranteed to be optimized as tail calls, which means that they will not consume any additional stack space no matter how deeply the recursion runs. Such recursive calls will effectively jump to the top of the loop with new values for the variables.
A function call is in the tail position if it’s the very last thing
done so that the value returned by the call is the value of body
itself, as is the case in the recursive call to sum
above.
Warning: named-let
works as expected only when
lexical-binding is enabled. See Lexical Binding.
Here is a complete list of the other facilities that create local bindings:
Variables can also have buffer-local bindings (see Buffer-Local Variables); a few variables have terminal-local bindings (see Multiple Terminals). These kinds of bindings work somewhat like ordinary local bindings, but they are localized depending on where you are in Emacs.
We say that a variable is void if its symbol has an unassigned value cell (see Symbol Components).
Under Emacs Lisp’s default dynamic scoping rule (see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings), the value cell stores the variable’s current (local or
global) value. Note that an unassigned value cell is not the
same as having nil
in the value cell. The symbol nil
is
a Lisp object and can be the value of a variable, just as any other
object can be; but it is still a value. If a variable is void, trying
to evaluate the variable signals a void-variable
error, instead
of returning a value.
Under the optional lexical scoping rule, the value cell only holds the variable’s global value—the value outside of any lexical binding construct. When a variable is lexically bound, the local value is determined by the lexical environment; hence, variables can have local values even if their symbols’ value cells are unassigned.
This function empties out the value cell of symbol, making the variable void. It returns symbol.
If symbol has a dynamic local binding, makunbound
voids
the current binding, and this voidness lasts only as long as the local
binding is in effect. Afterwards, the previously shadowed local or
global binding is reexposed; then the variable will no longer be void,
unless the reexposed binding is void too.
Here are some examples (assuming dynamic binding is in effect):
(setq x 1) ; Put a value in the global binding. ⇒ 1 (let ((x 2)) ; Locally bind it. (makunbound 'x) ; Void the local binding. x) error→ Symbol's value as variable is void: x
x ; The global binding is unchanged. ⇒ 1 (let ((x 2)) ; Locally bind it. (let ((x 3)) ; And again. (makunbound 'x) ; Void the innermost-local binding. x)) ; And refer: it’s void. error→ Symbol's value as variable is void: x
(let ((x 2))
(let ((x 3))
(makunbound 'x)) ; Void inner binding, then remove it.
x) ; Now outer let
binding is visible.
⇒ 2
This function returns t
if variable (a symbol) is not
void, and nil
if it is void.
Here are some examples (assuming dynamic binding is in effect):
(boundp 'abracadabra) ; Starts out void.
⇒ nil
(let ((abracadabra 5)) ; Locally bind it.
(boundp 'abracadabra))
⇒ t
(boundp 'abracadabra) ; Still globally void.
⇒ nil
(setq abracadabra 5) ; Make it globally nonvoid.
⇒ 5
(boundp 'abracadabra) ⇒ t
A variable definition is a construct that announces your
intention to use a symbol as a global variable. It uses the special
forms defvar
or defconst
, which are documented below.
A variable definition serves three purposes. First, it informs
people who read the code that the symbol is intended to be used
a certain way (as a variable). Second, it informs the Lisp system of
this, optionally supplying an initial value and a documentation
string. Third, it provides information to programming tools such as
etags
, allowing them to find where the variable was defined.
The difference between defconst
and defvar
is mainly a
matter of intent, serving to inform human readers of whether the value
should ever change. Emacs Lisp does not actually prevent you from
changing the value of a variable defined with defconst
. One
notable difference between the two forms is that defconst
unconditionally initializes the variable, whereas defvar
initializes it only if it is originally void.
To define a customizable variable, you should use defcustom
(which calls defvar
as a subroutine). See Defining Customization Variables.
This special form defines symbol as a variable. Note that
symbol is not evaluated; the symbol to be defined should appear
explicitly in the defvar
form. The variable is marked as
special, meaning that it should always be dynamically bound
(see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings).
If value is specified, and symbol is void (i.e., it has no dynamically bound value; see When a Variable is Void), then value is evaluated and symbol is set to the result. But if symbol is not void, value is not evaluated, and symbol’s value is left unchanged. If value is omitted, the value of symbol is not changed in any case.
Note that specifying a value, even nil
, marks the variable as
special permanently. Whereas if value is omitted then the
variable is only marked special locally (i.e. within the current
lexical scope, or file if at the top-level). This can be useful for
suppressing byte compilation warnings, see Compiler Errors.
If symbol has a buffer-local binding in the current buffer,
defvar
acts on the default value, which is buffer-independent,
rather than the buffer-local binding. It sets the default value if
the default value is void. See Buffer-Local Variables.
If symbol is already let bound (e.g., if the defvar
form occurs in a let
form), then defvar
sets the toplevel
default value, like set-default-toplevel-value
.
The let binding remains in effect until its binding construct exits.
See Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings.
When you evaluate a top-level defvar
form with C-M-x
(eval-defun
) or with C-x C-e (eval-last-sexp
) in
Emacs Lisp mode, a special feature of these two commands arranges to
set the variable unconditionally, without testing whether its value is
void.
If the doc-string argument is supplied, it specifies the
documentation string for the variable (stored in the symbol’s
variable-documentation
property). See Documentation.
Here are some examples. This form defines foo
but does not
initialize it:
(defvar foo) ⇒ foo
This example initializes the value of bar
to 23
, and gives
it a documentation string:
(defvar bar 23 "The normal weight of a bar.") ⇒ bar
The defvar
form returns symbol, but it is normally used
at top level in a file where its value does not matter.
For a more elaborate example of using defvar
without a value,
see Local defvar example.
This special form defines symbol as a value and initializes it.
It informs a person reading your code that symbol has a standard
global value, established here, that should not be changed by the user
or by other programs. Note that symbol is not evaluated; the
symbol to be defined must appear explicitly in the defconst
.
The defconst
form, like defvar
, marks the variable as
special, meaning that it should always be dynamically bound
(see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings). In addition, it marks the variable as
risky (see File Local Variables).
defconst
always evaluates value, and sets the value of
symbol to the result. If symbol does have a buffer-local
binding in the current buffer, defconst
sets the default value,
not the buffer-local value. (But you should not be making
buffer-local bindings for a symbol that is defined with
defconst
.)
An example of the use of defconst
is Emacs’s definition of
float-pi
—the mathematical constant pi, which ought not
to be changed by anyone (attempts by the Indiana State Legislature
notwithstanding). As the second form illustrates, however,
defconst
is only advisory.
(defconst float-pi 3.141592653589793 "The value of Pi.") ⇒ float-pi
(setq float-pi 3) ⇒ float-pi
float-pi ⇒ 3
Warning: If you use a defconst
or defvar
special form while the variable has a local binding (made with
let
, or a function argument), it sets the local binding rather
than the global binding. This is not what you usually want. To
prevent this, use these special forms at top level in a file, where
normally no local binding is in effect, and make sure to load the file
before making a local binding for the variable.
When you define a variable whose value is a function, or a list of functions, use a name that ends in ‘-function’ or ‘-functions’, respectively.
There are several other variable name conventions; here is a complete list:
The variable is a normal hook (see Hooks).
The value is a function.
The value is a list of functions.
The value is a form (an expression).
The value is a list of forms (expressions).
The value is a predicate—a function of one argument that returns
non-nil
for success and nil
for failure.
The value is significant only as to whether it is nil
or not.
Since such variables often end up acquiring more values over time,
this convention is not strongly recommended.
The value is a program name.
The value is a whole shell command.
The value specifies options for a command.
The variable is intended for internal use and is defined in the file prefix.el. (Emacs code contributed before 2018 may follow other conventions, which are being phased out.)
The variable is intended for internal use and is defined in C code. (Emacs code contributed before 2018 may follow other conventions, which are being phased out.)
When you define a variable, always consider whether you should mark it as safe or risky; see File Local Variables.
When defining and initializing a variable that holds a complicated
value (such as a syntax table for a major mode), it’s best to put the
entire computation of the value into the defvar
, like this:
(defvar my-major-mode-syntax-table (let ((table (make-syntax-table))) (modify-syntax-entry ?# "<" table) ... table) docstring)
This method has several benefits. First, if the user quits while
loading the file, the variable is either still uninitialized or
initialized properly, never in-between. If it is still uninitialized,
reloading the file will initialize it properly. Second, reloading the
file once the variable is initialized will not alter it; that is
important if the user has changed its value. Third, evaluating the
defvar
form with C-M-x will reinitialize the variable
completely.
The usual way to reference a variable is to write the symbol which names it. See Symbol Forms.
Occasionally, you may want to reference a variable which is only
determined at run time. In that case, you cannot specify the variable
name in the text of the program. You can use the symbol-value
function to extract the value.
This function returns the value stored in symbol’s value cell.
This is where the variable’s current (dynamic) value is stored. If
the variable has no local binding, this is simply its global value.
If the variable is void, a void-variable
error is signaled.
If the variable is lexically bound, the value reported by
symbol-value
is not necessarily the same as the variable’s
lexical value, which is determined by the lexical environment rather
than the symbol’s value cell. See Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings.
(setq abracadabra 5) ⇒ 5
(setq foo 9) ⇒ 9
;; Here the symbol abracadabra
;; is the symbol whose value is examined.
(let ((abracadabra 'foo))
(symbol-value 'abracadabra))
⇒ foo
;; Here, the value ofabracadabra
, ;; which isfoo
, ;; is the symbol whose value is examined. (let ((abracadabra 'foo)) (symbol-value abracadabra)) ⇒ 9
(symbol-value 'abracadabra) ⇒ 5
The usual way to change the value of a variable is with the special
form setq
. When you need to compute the choice of variable at
run time, use the function set
.
This special form is the most common method of changing a variable’s value. Each symbol is given a new value, which is the result of evaluating the corresponding form. The current binding of the symbol is changed.
setq
does not evaluate symbol; it sets the symbol that you
write. We say that this argument is automatically quoted. The
‘q’ in setq
stands for “quoted”.
The value of the setq
form is the value of the last form.
(setq x (1+ 2)) ⇒ 3
x ; x
now has a global value.
⇒ 3
(let ((x 5))
(setq x 6) ; The local binding of x
is set.
x)
⇒ 6
x ; The global value is unchanged.
⇒ 3
Note that the first form is evaluated, then the first symbol is set, then the second form is evaluated, then the second symbol is set, and so on:
(setq x 10 ; Notice thatx
is set before y (1+ x)) ; the value ofy
is computed. ⇒ 11
This function puts value in the value cell of symbol. Since it is a function rather than a special form, the expression written for symbol is evaluated to obtain the symbol to set. The return value is value.
When dynamic variable binding is in effect (the default), set
has the same effect as setq
, apart from the fact that
set
evaluates its symbol argument whereas setq
does not. But when a variable is lexically bound, set
affects
its dynamic value, whereas setq
affects its current
(lexical) value. See Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings.
(set one 1) error→ Symbol's value as variable is void: one
(set 'one 1) ⇒ 1
(set 'two 'one) ⇒ one
(set two 2) ; two
evaluates to symbol one
.
⇒ 2
one ; So it isone
that was set. ⇒ 2 (let ((one 1)) ; This binding ofone
is set, (set 'one 3) ; not the global value. one) ⇒ 3
one ⇒ 2
If symbol is not actually a symbol, a wrong-type-argument
error is signaled.
(set '(x y) 'z) error→ Wrong type argument: symbolp, (x y)
This is like setq
(see above), but meant for user options.
This macro uses the Customize machinery to set the variable(s)
(see Defining Customization Variables). In particular, setopt
will run
the setter function associated with the variable. For instance, if
you have:
(defcustom my-var 1 "My var." :type 'number :set (lambda (var val) (set-default var val) (message "We set %s to %s" var val)))
then the following, in addition to setting my-var
to ‘2’,
will also issue a message:
(setopt my-var 2)
setopt
also checks whether the value is valid for the user
option. For instance, using setopt
to set a user option
defined with a number
type to a string will signal an error.
Unlike defcustom
and related customization commands, such as
customize-variable
, setopt
is meant for non-interactive
use, in particular in the user init file. For that reason, it doesn’t
record the standard, saved, and user-set values, and doesn’t mark the
variable as candidate for saving in the custom file.
The setopt
macro can be used on regular, non-user option
variables, but is much less efficient than setq
. The main use
case for this macro is setting user options in the user’s init file.
It is sometimes useful to take some action when a variable changes its value. The variable watchpoint facility provides the means to do so. Some possible uses for this feature include keeping display in sync with variable settings, and invoking the debugger to track down unexpected changes to variables (see Entering the debugger when a variable is modified).
The following functions may be used to manipulate and query the watch functions for a variable.
This function arranges for watch-function to be called whenever symbol is modified. Modifications through aliases (see Variable Aliases) will have the same effect.
watch-function will be called, just before changing the value of
symbol, with 4 arguments: symbol, newval,
operation, and where.
symbol is the variable being changed. newval is the value
it will be changed to. (The old value is available to
watch-function as the value of symbol, since it was not
yet changed to newval.) operation is a symbol
representing the kind of change, one of: set
, let
,
unlet
, makunbound
, or defvaralias
. where
is a buffer if the buffer-local value of the variable is being
changed, nil
otherwise.
This function removes watch-function from symbol’s list of watchers.
This function returns the list of symbol’s active watcher functions.
There are a couple of ways in which a variable could be modified (or at least appear to be modified) without triggering a watchpoint.
Since watchpoints are attached to symbols, modification to the objects contained within variables (e.g., by a list modification function see Modifying Existing List Structure) is not caught by this mechanism.
Additionally, C code can modify the value of variables directly, bypassing the watchpoint mechanism.
A minor limitation of this feature, again because it targets symbols, is that only variables of dynamic scope may be watched. This poses little difficulty, since modifications to lexical variables can be discovered easily by inspecting the code within the scope of the variable (unlike dynamic variables, which can be modified by any code at all, see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings).
When you create a local binding for a variable, that binding takes effect only within a limited portion of the program (see Local Variables). This section describes exactly what this means.
Each local binding has a certain scope and extent. Scope refers to where in the textual source code the binding can be accessed. Extent refers to when, as the program is executing, the binding exists.
By default, the local bindings that Emacs creates are dynamic
bindings. Such a binding has dynamic scope, meaning that any
part of the program can potentially access the variable binding. It
also has dynamic extent, meaning that the binding lasts only
while the binding construct (such as the body of a let
form) is
being executed.
Emacs can optionally create lexical bindings. A lexical binding has lexical scope, meaning that any reference to the variable must be located textually within the binding construct10. It also has indefinite extent, meaning that under some circumstances the binding can live on even after the binding construct has finished executing, by means of special objects called closures.
The dynamic binding was (and still is) the default in Emacs for many years, but lately Emacs is moving towards using lexical binding in more and more places, with the goal of eventually making that the default.
The following subsections describe dynamic binding and lexical binding in greater detail, and how to enable lexical binding in Emacs Lisp programs.
By default, the local variable bindings made by Emacs are dynamic bindings. When a variable is dynamically bound, its current binding at any point in the execution of the Lisp program is simply the most recently-created dynamic local binding for that symbol, or the global binding if there is no such local binding.
Dynamic bindings have dynamic scope and extent, as shown by the following example:
(defvar x -99) ;x
receives an initial value of −99. (defun getx () x) ;x
is used free in this function. (let ((x 1)) ;x
is dynamically bound. (getx)) ⇒ 1 ;; After thelet
form finishes,x
reverts to its ;; previous value, which is −99. (getx) ⇒ -99
The function getx
refers to x
. This is a free
reference, in the sense that there is no binding for x
within
that defun
construct itself. When we call getx
from
within a let
form in which x
is (dynamically) bound, it
retrieves the local value (i.e., 1). But when we call getx
outside the let
form, it retrieves the global value (i.e.,
−99).
Here is another example, which illustrates setting a dynamically
bound variable using setq
:
(defvar x -99) ;x
receives an initial value of −99. (defun addx () (setq x (1+ x))) ; Add 1 tox
and return its new value. (let ((x 1)) (addx) (addx)) ⇒ 3 ; The twoaddx
calls add tox
twice. ;; After thelet
form finishes,x
reverts to its ;; previous value, which is −99. (addx) ⇒ -98
Dynamic binding is implemented in Emacs Lisp in a simple way. Each symbol has a value cell, which specifies its current dynamic value (or absence of value). See Symbol Components. When a symbol is given a dynamic local binding, Emacs records the contents of the value cell (or absence thereof) in a stack, and stores the new local value in the value cell. When the binding construct finishes executing, Emacs pops the old value off the stack, and puts it in the value cell.
Note that when code using Dynamic Binding is native compiled the native compiler will not perform any Lisp specific optimization.
Dynamic binding is a powerful feature, as it allows programs to refer to variables that are not defined within their local textual scope. However, if used without restraint, this can also make programs hard to understand. There are two clean ways to use this technique:
let
form where the variable was bound. If this convention is followed
consistently throughout a program, the value of the variable will not
affect, nor be affected by, any uses of the same variable symbol
elsewhere in the program.
defvar
, defconst
(see Defining Global Variables), or defcustom
(see Defining Customization Variables). Usually, the definition should be at top-level in an
Emacs Lisp file. As far as possible, it should include a
documentation string which explains the meaning and purpose of the
variable. You should also choose the variable’s name to avoid name
conflicts (see Emacs Lisp Coding Conventions).
Then you can bind the variable anywhere in a program, knowing reliably what the effect will be. Wherever you encounter the variable, it will be easy to refer back to the definition, e.g., via the C-h v command (provided the variable definition has been loaded into Emacs). See Name Help in The GNU Emacs Manual.
For example, it is common to use local bindings for customizable
variables like case-fold-search
:
(defun search-for-abc () "Search for the string \"abc\", ignoring case differences." (let ((case-fold-search t)) (re-search-forward "abc")))
Lexical binding was introduced to Emacs, as an optional feature, in version 24.1. We expect its importance to increase with time. Lexical binding opens up many more opportunities for optimization, so programs using it are likely to run faster in future Emacs versions. Lexical binding is also more compatible with concurrency, which was added to Emacs in version 26.1.
A lexically-bound variable has lexical scope, meaning that any reference to the variable must be located textually within the binding construct. Here is an example (see Using Lexical Binding, for how to actually enable lexical binding):
(let ((x 1)) ;x
is lexically bound. (+ x 3)) ⇒ 4 (defun getx () x) ;x
is used free in this function. (let ((x 1)) ;x
is lexically bound. (getx)) error→ Symbol's value as variable is void: x
Here, the variable x
has no global value. When it is lexically
bound within a let
form, it can be used in the textual confines
of that let
form. But it can not be used from within a
getx
function called from the let
form, since the
function definition of getx
occurs outside the let
form
itself.
Here is how lexical binding works. Each binding construct defines a lexical environment, specifying the variables that are bound within the construct and their local values. When the Lisp evaluator wants the current value of a variable, it looks first in the lexical environment; if the variable is not specified in there, it looks in the symbol’s value cell, where the dynamic value is stored.
(Internally, the lexical environment is a list whose members are
usually cons cells that are symbol-value pairs, but some of its
members can be symbols rather than cons cells. A symbol in the list
means the lexical environment declared that symbol’s variable as
locally considered to be dynamically bound. This list can be passed
as the second argument to the eval
function, in order to
specify a lexical environment in which to evaluate a form.
See Eval. Most Emacs Lisp programs, however, should not interact
directly with lexical environments in this way; only specialized
programs like debuggers.)
Lexical bindings have indefinite extent. Even after a binding construct has finished executing, its lexical environment can be “kept around” in Lisp objects called closures. A closure is created when you define a named or anonymous function with lexical binding enabled. See Closures, for details.
When a closure is called as a function, any lexical variable references within its definition use the retained lexical environment. Here is an example:
(defvar my-ticker nil) ; We will use this dynamically bound ; variable to store a closure. (let ((x 0)) ;x
is lexically bound. (setq my-ticker (lambda () (setq x (1+ x))))) ⇒ (closure ((x . 0)) () (setq x (1+ x))) (funcall my-ticker) ⇒ 1 (funcall my-ticker) ⇒ 2 (funcall my-ticker) ⇒ 3 x ; Note thatx
has no global value. error→ Symbol's value as variable is void: x
The let
binding defines a lexical environment in which the
variable x
is locally bound to 0. Within this binding
construct, we define a lambda expression which increments x
by
one and returns the incremented value. This lambda expression is
automatically turned into a closure, in which the lexical environment
lives on even after the let
binding construct has exited. Each
time we evaluate the closure, it increments x
, using the
binding of x
in that lexical environment.
Note that unlike dynamic variables which are tied to the symbol
object itself, the relationship between lexical variables and symbols
is only present in the interpreter (or compiler). Therefore,
functions which take a symbol argument (like symbol-value
,
boundp
, and set
) can only retrieve or modify a
variable’s dynamic binding (i.e., the contents of its symbol’s value
cell).
When loading an Emacs Lisp file or evaluating a Lisp buffer, lexical
binding is enabled if the buffer-local variable lexical-binding
is non-nil
:
If this buffer-local variable is non-nil
, Emacs Lisp files and
buffers are evaluated using lexical binding instead of dynamic
binding. (However, special variables are still dynamically bound; see
below.) If nil
, dynamic binding is used for all local
variables. This variable is typically set for a whole Emacs Lisp
file, as a file local variable (see File Local Variables).
Note that unlike other such variables, this one must be set in the
first line of a file.
When evaluating Emacs Lisp code directly using an eval
call,
lexical binding is enabled if the lexical argument to
eval
is non-nil
. See Eval.
Lexical binding is also enabled in Lisp Interaction and IELM mode,
used in the *scratch* and *ielm* buffers, and also when
evaluating expressions via M-: (eval-expression
) and when
processing the --eval command-line options of Emacs
(see Action Arguments in The GNU Emacs Manual) and
emacsclient
(see emacsclient Options in The GNU
Emacs Manual).
Even when lexical binding is enabled, certain variables will
continue to be dynamically bound. These are called special
variables. Every variable that has been defined with defvar
,
defcustom
or defconst
is a special variable
(see Defining Global Variables). All other variables are subject to
lexical binding.
Using defvar
without a value, it is possible to bind a variable
dynamically just in one file, or in just one part of a file while
still binding it lexically elsewhere. For example:
(let (_) (defvar x) ; Let-bindings ofx
will be dynamic within this let. (let ((x -99)) ; This is a dynamic binding ofx
. (defun get-dynamic-x () x))) (let ((x 'lexical)) ; This is a lexical binding ofx
. (defun get-lexical-x () x)) (let (_) (defvar x) (let ((x 'dynamic)) (list (get-lexical-x) (get-dynamic-x)))) ⇒ (lexical dynamic)
This function returns non-nil
if symbol is a special
variable (i.e., it has a defvar
, defcustom
, or
defconst
variable definition). Otherwise, the return value is
nil
.
Note that since this is a function, it can only return
non-nil
for variables which are permanently special, but not
for those that are only special in the current lexical scope.
The use of a special variable as a formal argument in a function is not supported.
Converting an Emacs Lisp program to lexical binding is easy. First,
add a file-local variable setting of lexical-binding
to
t
in the header line of the Emacs Lisp source file (see File Local Variables). Second, check that every variable in the program
which needs to be dynamically bound has a variable definition, so that
it is not inadvertently bound lexically.
A simple way to find out which variables need a variable definition
is to byte-compile the source file. See Byte Compilation. If a
non-special variable is used outside of a let
form, the
byte-compiler will warn about reference or assignment to a free
variable. If a non-special variable is bound but not used within a
let
form, the byte-compiler will warn about an unused lexical
variable. The byte-compiler will also issue a warning if you use a
special variable as a function argument.
A warning about a reference or an assignment to a free variable is
usually a clear sign that that variable should be marked as
dynamically scoped, so you need to add an appropriate defvar
before the first use of that variable.
A warning about an unused variable may be a good hint that the
variable was intended to be dynamically scoped (because it is actually
used, but in another function), but it may also be an indication that
the variable is simply really not used and could simply be removed.
So you need to find out which case it is, and based on that, either
add a defvar
or remove the variable altogether. If removal is
not possible or not desirable (typically because it is a formal
argument and that we cannot or don’t want to change all the callers),
you can also add a leading underscore to the variable’s name to
indicate to the compiler that this is a variable known not to
be used.)
Caution: This is an experimental feature that may change or disappear without prior notice.
The byte-compiler can also warn about lexical variables that are
special in other Emacs Lisp files, often indicating a missing
defvar
declaration. This useful but somewhat specialized check
requires three steps:
EMACS_GENERATE_DYNVARS
set to a nonempty string. These are typically all the files in the
same package or related packages or Emacs subsystems. The process
will generate a file whose name ends in .dynvars for each
compiled Emacs Lisp file.
EMACS_DYNVARS_FILE
set to the name
of the aggregated file created in step 2.
Here is an example illustrating how this could be done, assuming that
a Unix shell and make
are used for byte-compilation:
$ rm *.elc # force recompilation $ EMACS_GENERATE_DYNVARS=1 make # generate .dynvars $ cat *.dynvars > ~/my-dynvars # combine .dynvars $ rm *.elc # force recompilation $ EMACS_DYNVARS_FILE=~/my-dynvars make # perform checks
Global and local variable bindings are found in most programming languages in one form or another. Emacs, however, also supports additional, unusual kinds of variable binding, such as buffer-local bindings, which apply only in one buffer. Having different values for a variable in different buffers is an important customization method. (Variables can also have bindings that are local to each terminal. See Multiple Terminals.)
A buffer-local variable has a buffer-local binding associated with a particular buffer. The binding is in effect when that buffer is current; otherwise, it is not in effect. If you set the variable while a buffer-local binding is in effect, the new value goes in that binding, so its other bindings are unchanged. This means that the change is visible only in the buffer where you made it.
The variable’s ordinary binding, which is not associated with any specific buffer, is called the default binding. In most cases, this is the global binding.
A variable can have buffer-local bindings in some buffers but not in other buffers. The default binding is shared by all the buffers that don’t have their own bindings for the variable. (This includes all newly-created buffers.) If you set the variable in a buffer that does not have a buffer-local binding for it, this sets the default binding, so the new value is visible in all the buffers that see the default binding.
The most common use of buffer-local bindings is for major modes to change
variables that control the behavior of commands. For example, C mode and
Lisp mode both set the variable paragraph-start
to specify that only
blank lines separate paragraphs. They do this by making the variable
buffer-local in the buffer that is being put into C mode or Lisp mode, and
then setting it to the new value for that mode. See Major Modes.
The usual way to make a buffer-local binding is with
make-local-variable
, which is what major mode commands typically
use. This affects just the current buffer; all other buffers (including
those yet to be created) will continue to share the default value unless
they are explicitly given their own buffer-local bindings.
A more powerful operation is to mark the variable as
automatically buffer-local by calling
make-variable-buffer-local
. You can think of this as making the
variable local in all buffers, even those yet to be created. More
precisely, the effect is that setting the variable automatically makes
the variable local to the current buffer if it is not already so. All
buffers start out by sharing the default value of the variable as usual,
but setting the variable creates a buffer-local binding for the current
buffer. The new value is stored in the buffer-local binding, leaving
the default binding untouched. This means that the default value cannot
be changed with setq
in any buffer; the only way to change it is
with setq-default
.
Warning: When a variable has buffer-local
bindings in one or more buffers, let
rebinds the binding that’s
currently in effect. For instance, if the current buffer has a
buffer-local value, let
temporarily rebinds that. If no
buffer-local bindings are in effect, let
rebinds
the default value. If inside the let
you then change to a
different current buffer in which a different binding is in effect,
you won’t see the let
binding any more. And if you exit the
let
while still in the other buffer, you won’t see the
unbinding occur (though it will occur properly). Here is an example
to illustrate:
(setq foo 'g) (set-buffer "a") (make-local-variable 'foo)
(setq foo 'a) (let ((foo 'temp)) ;; foo ⇒ 'temp ; let binding in buffer ‘a’ (set-buffer "b") ;; foo ⇒ 'g ; the global value since foo is not local in ‘b’ body...)
foo ⇒ 'g ; exiting restored the local value in buffer ‘a’, ; but we don’t see that in buffer ‘b’
(set-buffer "a") ; verify the local value was restored
foo ⇒ 'a
Note that references to foo
in body access the
buffer-local binding of buffer ‘b’.
When a file specifies local variable values, these become buffer-local values when you visit the file. See File Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual.
A buffer-local variable cannot be made terminal-local (see Multiple Terminals).
This function creates a buffer-local binding in the current buffer for variable (a symbol). Other buffers are not affected. The value returned is variable.
The buffer-local value of variable starts out as the same value variable previously had. If variable was void, it remains void.
;; In buffer ‘b1’: (setq foo 5) ; Affects all buffers. ⇒ 5
(make-local-variable 'foo) ; Now it is local in ‘b1’.
⇒ foo
foo ; That did not change ⇒ 5 ; the value.
(setq foo 6) ; Change the value ⇒ 6 ; in ‘b1’.
foo ⇒ 6
;; In buffer ‘b2’, the value hasn’t changed.
(with-current-buffer "b2"
foo)
⇒ 5
Making a variable buffer-local within a let
-binding for that
variable does not work reliably, unless the buffer in which you do this
is not current either on entry to or exit from the let
. This is
because let
does not distinguish between different kinds of
bindings; it knows only which variable the binding was made for.
It is an error to make a constant or a read-only variable buffer-local. See Variables that Never Change.
If the variable is terminal-local (see Multiple Terminals), this function signals an error. Such variables cannot have buffer-local bindings as well.
Warning: do not use make-local-variable
for a hook
variable. The hook variables are automatically made buffer-local as
needed if you use the local argument to add-hook
or
remove-hook
.
pairs is a list of variable and value pairs. This macro creates
a buffer-local binding in the current buffer for each of the
variables, and gives them a buffer-local value. It is equivalent to
calling make-local-variable
followed by setq
for each of
the variables. The variables should be unquoted symbols.
(setq-local var1 "value1" var2 "value2")
This function marks variable (a symbol) automatically
buffer-local, so that any subsequent attempt to set it will make it
local to the current buffer at the time. Unlike
make-local-variable
, with which it is often confused, this
cannot be undone, and affects the behavior of the variable in all
buffers.
A peculiar wrinkle of this feature is that binding the variable (with
let
or other binding constructs) does not create a buffer-local
binding for it. Only setting the variable (with set
or
setq
), while the variable does not have a let
-style
binding that was made in the current buffer, does so.
If variable does not have a default value, then calling this
command will give it a default value of nil
. If variable
already has a default value, that value remains unchanged.
Subsequently calling makunbound
on variable will result
in a void buffer-local value and leave the default value unaffected.
The value returned is variable.
It is an error to make a constant or a read-only variable buffer-local. See Variables that Never Change.
Warning: Don’t assume that you should use
make-variable-buffer-local
for user-option variables, simply
because users might want to customize them differently in
different buffers. Users can make any variable local, when they wish
to. It is better to leave the choice to them.
The time to use make-variable-buffer-local
is when it is crucial
that no two buffers ever share the same binding. For example, when a
variable is used for internal purposes in a Lisp program which depends
on having separate values in separate buffers, then using
make-variable-buffer-local
can be the best solution.
This macro defines variable as a variable with initial value
value and docstring, and marks it as automatically
buffer-local. It is equivalent to calling defvar
followed by
make-variable-buffer-local
. variable should be an
unquoted symbol.
This returns t
if variable is buffer-local in buffer
buffer (which defaults to the current buffer); otherwise,
nil
.
This returns t
if variable either has a buffer-local
value in buffer buffer, or is automatically buffer-local.
Otherwise, it returns nil
. If omitted or nil
,
buffer defaults to the current buffer.
This function returns the buffer-local binding of variable (a symbol) in buffer buffer. If variable does not have a buffer-local binding in buffer buffer, it returns the default value (see The Default Value of a Buffer-Local Variable) of variable instead.
This returns non-nil
if there’s either a buffer-local binding
of variable (a symbol) in buffer buffer, or variable
has a global binding.
This function returns a list describing the buffer-local variables in
buffer buffer. (If buffer is omitted, the current buffer
is used.) Normally, each list element has the form
(sym . val)
, where sym is a buffer-local
variable (a symbol) and val is its buffer-local value. But when
a variable’s buffer-local binding in buffer is void, its list
element is just sym.
(make-local-variable 'foobar) (makunbound 'foobar) (make-local-variable 'bind-me) (setq bind-me 69)
(setq lcl (buffer-local-variables))
;; First, built-in variables local in all buffers:
⇒ ((mark-active . nil)
(buffer-undo-list . nil)
(mode-name . "Fundamental")
...
;; Next, non-built-in buffer-local variables. ;; This one is buffer-local and void: foobar ;; This one is buffer-local and nonvoid: (bind-me . 69))
Note that storing new values into the CDRs of cons cells in this list does not change the buffer-local values of the variables.
This function deletes the buffer-local binding (if any) for variable (a symbol) in the current buffer. As a result, the default binding of variable becomes visible in this buffer. This typically results in a change in the value of variable, since the default value is usually different from the buffer-local value just eliminated.
If you kill the buffer-local binding of a variable that automatically becomes buffer-local when set, this makes the default value visible in the current buffer. However, if you set the variable again, that will once again create a buffer-local binding for it.
kill-local-variable
returns variable.
This function is a command because it is sometimes useful to kill one buffer-local variable interactively, just as it is useful to create buffer-local variables interactively.
This function eliminates all the buffer-local variable bindings of the
current buffer. As a result, the buffer will see the default values
of most variables. By default, for variables marked as permanent and
local hook functions that have a non-nil
permanent-local-hook
property (see Setting Hooks) won’t be
killed, but if the optional kill-permanent argument is
non-nil
, even these variables will be killed.
This function also resets certain other information pertaining to the
buffer: it sets the local keymap to nil
, the syntax table to the
value of (standard-syntax-table)
, the case table to
(standard-case-table)
, and the abbrev table to the value of
fundamental-mode-abbrev-table
.
The very first thing this function does is run the normal hook
change-major-mode-hook
(see below).
Every major mode command begins by calling this function, which has the effect of switching to Fundamental mode and erasing most of the effects of the previous major mode. To ensure that this does its job, the variables that major modes set should not be marked permanent.
kill-all-local-variables
returns nil
.
The function kill-all-local-variables
runs this normal hook
before it does anything else. This gives major modes a way to arrange
for something special to be done if the user switches to a different
major mode. It is also useful for buffer-specific minor modes
that should be forgotten if the user changes the major mode.
For best results, make this variable buffer-local, so that it will disappear after doing its job and will not interfere with the subsequent major mode. See Hooks.
A buffer-local variable is permanent if the variable name (a
symbol) has a permanent-local
property that is non-nil
.
Such variables are unaffected by kill-all-local-variables
, and
their local bindings are therefore not cleared by changing major modes.
Permanent locals are appropriate for data pertaining to where the file
came from or how to save it, rather than with how to edit the contents.
The global value of a variable with buffer-local bindings is also called the default value, because it is the value that is in effect whenever neither the current buffer nor the selected frame has its own binding for the variable.
The functions default-value
and setq-default
access and
change a variable’s default value regardless of whether the current
buffer has a buffer-local binding. For example, you could use
setq-default
to change the default setting of
paragraph-start
for most buffers; and this would work even when
you are in a C or Lisp mode buffer that has a buffer-local value for
this variable.
The special forms defvar
and defconst
also set the
default value (if they set the variable at all), rather than any
buffer-local value.
This function returns symbol’s default value. This is the value
that is seen in buffers and frames that do not have their own values for
this variable. If symbol is not buffer-local, this is equivalent
to symbol-value
(see Accessing Variable Values).
The function default-boundp
tells you whether symbol’s
default value is nonvoid. If (default-boundp 'foo)
returns
nil
, then (default-value 'foo)
would get an error.
default-boundp
is to default-value
as boundp
is to
symbol-value
.
This special form gives each symbol a new default value, which is
the result of evaluating the corresponding form. It does not
evaluate symbol, but does evaluate form. The value of the
setq-default
form is the value of the last form.
If a symbol is not buffer-local for the current buffer, and is not
marked automatically buffer-local, setq-default
has the same
effect as setq
. If symbol is buffer-local for the current
buffer, then this changes the value that other buffers will see (as long
as they don’t have a buffer-local value), but not the value that the
current buffer sees.
;; In buffer ‘foo’:
(make-local-variable 'buffer-local)
⇒ buffer-local
(setq buffer-local 'value-in-foo) ⇒ value-in-foo
(setq-default buffer-local 'new-default) ⇒ new-default
buffer-local ⇒ value-in-foo
(default-value 'buffer-local) ⇒ new-default
;; In (the new) buffer ‘bar’:
buffer-local
⇒ new-default
(default-value 'buffer-local) ⇒ new-default
(setq buffer-local 'another-default) ⇒ another-default
(default-value 'buffer-local) ⇒ another-default
;; Back in buffer ‘foo’:
buffer-local
⇒ value-in-foo
(default-value 'buffer-local)
⇒ another-default
This function is like setq-default
, except that symbol is
an ordinary evaluated argument.
(set-default (car '(a b c)) 23) ⇒ 23
(default-value 'a) ⇒ 23
A variable can be let-bound (see Local Variables) to a value.
This makes its global value shadowed by the binding;
default-value
will then return the value from that binding, not
the global value, and set-default
will be prevented from
setting the global value (it will change the let-bound value instead).
The following two functions allow to reference the global value even
if it’s shadowed by a let-binding.
This function returns the top-level default value of symbol, which is its value outside of any let-binding.
(defvar variable 'global-value) ⇒ variable
(let ((variable 'let-binding)) (default-value 'variable)) ⇒ let-binding
(let ((variable 'let-binding)) (default-toplevel-value 'variable)) ⇒ global-value
This function sets the top-level default value of symbol to the specified value. This comes in handy when you want to set the global value of symbol regardless of whether your code runs in the context of symbol’s let-binding.
A file can specify local variable values; Emacs uses these to create buffer-local bindings for those variables in the buffer visiting that file. See Local Variables in Files in The GNU Emacs Manual, for basic information about file-local variables. This section describes the functions and variables that affect how file-local variables are processed.
If a file-local variable could specify an arbitrary function or Lisp expression that would be called later, visiting a file could take over your Emacs. Emacs protects against this by automatically setting only those file-local variables whose specified values are known to be safe. Other file-local variables are set only if the user agrees.
For additional safety, read-circle
is temporarily bound to
nil
when Emacs reads file-local variables (see Input Functions). This prevents the Lisp reader from recognizing circular
and shared Lisp structures (see Read Syntax for Circular Objects).
This variable controls whether to process file-local variables. The possible values are:
t
(the default)Set the safe variables, and query (once) about any unsafe variables.
:safe
Set only the safe variables and do not query.
:all
Set all the variables and do not query.
nil
Don’t set any variables.
Query (once) about all the variables.
This is a list of regular expressions. If a file has a name matching an element of this list, then it is not scanned for any form of file-local variable. For examples of why you might want to use this, see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode.
Some local variable settings will, by default, be heeded even if
enable-local-variables
is nil
. By default, this is only
the case for the lexical-binding
local variable setting, but
this can be controlled by using this variable, which is a list of
symbols.
This function parses, and binds or evaluates as appropriate, any local
variables specified by the contents of the current buffer. The variable
enable-local-variables
has its effect here. However, this
function does not look for the ‘mode:’ local variable in the
‘-*-’ line. set-auto-mode
does that, also taking
enable-local-variables
into account (see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode).
This function works by walking the alist stored in
file-local-variables-alist
and applying each local variable in
turn. It calls before-hack-local-variables-hook
and
hack-local-variables-hook
before and after applying the
variables, respectively. It only calls the before-hook if the alist
is non-nil
; it always calls the other hook. This
function ignores a ‘mode’ element if it specifies the same major
mode as the buffer already has.
If the optional argument handle-mode is t
, then all this
function does is return a symbol specifying the major mode, if the
‘-*-’ line or the local variables list specifies one, and
nil
otherwise. It does not set the mode or any other
file-local variable. If handle-mode has any value other than
nil
or t
, any settings of ‘mode’ in the
‘-*-’ line or the local variables list are ignored, and the
other settings are applied. If handle-mode is nil
, all
the file local variables are set.
This buffer-local variable holds the alist of file-local variable
settings. Each element of the alist is of the form
(var . value)
, where var is a symbol of
the local variable and value is its value. When Emacs visits a
file, it first collects all the file-local variables into this alist,
and then the hack-local-variables
function applies them one by
one.
Emacs calls this hook immediately before applying file-local variables
stored in file-local-variables-alist
.
Emacs calls this hook immediately after it finishes applying
file-local variables stored in file-local-variables-alist
.
You can specify safe values for a variable with a
safe-local-variable
property. The property has to be a
function of one argument; any value is safe if the function returns
non-nil
given that value. Many commonly-encountered file
variables have safe-local-variable
properties; these include
fill-column
, fill-prefix
, and indent-tabs-mode
.
For boolean-valued variables that are safe, use booleanp
as the
property value.
If you want to define safe-local-variable
properties for
variables defined in C source code, add the names and the properties
of those variables to the list in the “Safe local variables” section
of files.el.
When defining a user option using defcustom
, you can set its
safe-local-variable
property by adding the arguments
:safe function
to defcustom
(see Defining Customization Variables). However, a safety predicate defined using :safe
will only be known once the package that contains the defcustom
is loaded, which is often too late. As an alternative, you can use
the autoload cookie (see Autoload) to assign the option its safety
predicate, like this:
;;;###autoload (put 'var 'safe-local-variable 'pred)
The safe value definitions specified with autoload
are copied
into the package’s autoloads file (loaddefs.el for most
packages bundled with Emacs), and are known to Emacs since the
beginning of a session.
This variable provides another way to mark some variable values as
safe. It is a list of cons cells (var . val)
,
where var is a variable name and val is a value which is
safe for that variable.
When Emacs asks the user whether or not to obey a set of file-local
variable specifications, the user can choose to mark them as safe.
Doing so adds those variable/value pairs to
safe-local-variable-values
, and saves it to the user’s custom
file.
If there are some values of particular local variables that you always
want to ignore completely, you can use this variable. Its value has
the same form as safe-local-variable-values
; a file-local
variable setting to the value that appears in the list will always be
ignored when processing the local variables specified by the file. As
with that variable, when Emacs queries the user about whether to obey
file-local variables, the user can choose to ignore their particular
values permanently, and that will alter this variable and save it to
the user’s custom file. Variable-value pairs that appear in this
variable take precedence over the same pairs in
safe-local-variable-values
.
This function returns non-nil
if it is safe to give sym
the value val, based on the above criteria.
Some variables are considered risky. If a variable is risky,
it is never entered automatically into
safe-local-variable-values
; Emacs always queries before setting
a risky variable, unless the user explicitly allows a value by
customizing safe-local-variable-values
directly.
Any variable whose name has a non-nil
risky-local-variable
property is considered risky. When you
define a user option using defcustom
, you can set its
risky-local-variable
property by adding the arguments
:risky value
to defcustom
(see Defining Customization Variables). In addition, any variable whose name ends in any of
‘-command’, ‘-frame-alist’, ‘-function’,
‘-functions’, ‘-hook’, ‘-hooks’, ‘-form’,
‘-forms’, ‘-map’, ‘-map-alist’, ‘-mode-alist’,
‘-program’, or ‘-predicate’ is automatically considered
risky. The variables ‘font-lock-keywords’,
‘font-lock-keywords’ followed by a digit, and
‘font-lock-syntactic-keywords’ are also considered risky.
This function returns non-nil
if sym is a risky variable,
based on the above criteria.
This variable holds a list of variables that should not be given local values by files. Any value specified for one of these variables is completely ignored.
The ‘Eval:’ “variable” is also a potential loophole, so Emacs normally asks for confirmation before handling it.
This variable controls processing of ‘Eval:’ in ‘-*-’ lines
or local variables
lists in files being visited. A value of t
means process them
unconditionally; nil
means ignore them; anything else means ask
the user what to do for each file. The default value is maybe
.
This variable holds a list of expressions that are safe to evaluate when found in the ‘Eval:’ “variable” in a file local variables list.
If the expression is a function call and the function has a
safe-local-eval-function
property, the property value
determines whether the expression is safe to evaluate. The property
value can be a predicate to call to test the expression, a list of
such predicates (it’s safe if any predicate succeeds), or t
(always safe provided the arguments are constant).
Text properties are also potential loopholes, since their values could include functions to call. So Emacs discards all text properties from string values specified for file-local variables.
A directory can specify local variable values common to all files in that directory; Emacs uses these to create buffer-local bindings for those variables in buffers visiting any file in that directory. This is useful when the files in the directory belong to some project and therefore share the same local variables.
There are two different methods for specifying directory local variables: by putting them in a special file, or by defining a project class for that directory.
This constant is the name of the file where Emacs expects to find the directory-local variables. The name of the file is .dir-locals.el11. A file by that name in a directory causes Emacs to apply its settings to any file in that directory or any of its subdirectories (optionally, you can exclude subdirectories; see below). If some of the subdirectories have their own .dir-locals.el files, Emacs uses the settings from the deepest file it finds starting from the file’s directory and moving up the directory tree. This constant is also used to derive the name of a second dir-locals file .dir-locals-2.el. If this second dir-locals file is present, then that is loaded in addition to .dir-locals.el. This is useful when .dir-locals.el is under version control in a shared repository and cannot be used for personal customizations. The file specifies local variables as a specially formatted list; see Per-directory Local Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more details.
This function reads the .dir-locals.el
file and stores the
directory-local variables in file-local-variables-alist
that is
local to the buffer visiting any file in the directory, without
applying them. It also stores the directory-local settings in
dir-locals-class-alist
, where it defines a special class for
the directory in which .dir-locals.el file was found. This
function works by calling dir-locals-set-class-variables
and
dir-locals-set-directory-class
, described below.
This function looks for directory-local variables, and immediately
applies them in the current buffer. It is intended to be called in
the mode commands for non-file buffers, such as Dired buffers, to let
them obey directory-local variable settings. For non-file buffers,
Emacs looks for directory-local variables in default-directory
and its parent directories.
This function defines a set of variable settings for the named
class, which is a symbol. You can later assign the class to one
or more directories, and Emacs will apply those variable settings to
all files in those directories. The list in variables can be of
one of the two forms: (major-mode . alist)
or
(directory . list)
. With the first form, if the
file’s buffer turns on a mode that is derived from major-mode,
then all the variables in the associated alist are applied;
alist should be of the form (name . value)
.
A special value nil
for major-mode means the settings are
applicable to any mode. In alist, you can use a special
name: subdirs
. If the associated value is
nil
, the alist is only applied to files in the relevant
directory, not to those in any subdirectories.
With the second form of variables, if directory is the initial substring of the file’s directory, then list is applied recursively by following the above rules; list should be of one of the two forms accepted by this function in variables.
This function assigns class to all the files in directory
and its subdirectories. Thereafter, all the variable settings
specified for class will be applied to any visited file in
directory and its children. class must have been already
defined by dir-locals-set-class-variables
.
Emacs uses this function internally when it loads directory variables
from a .dir-locals.el
file. In that case, the optional
argument mtime holds the file modification time (as returned by
file-attributes
). Emacs uses this time to check stored
local variables are still valid. If you are assigning a class
directly, not via a file, this argument should be nil
.
This alist holds the class symbols and the associated variable
settings. It is updated by dir-locals-set-class-variables
.
This alist holds directory names, their assigned class names, and
modification times of the associated directory local variables file
(if there is one). The function dir-locals-set-directory-class
updates this list.
If nil
, directory-local variables are ignored. This variable
may be useful for modes that want to ignore directory-locals while
still respecting file-local variables (see File Local Variables).
Connection-local variables provide a general mechanism for different variable settings in buffers with a remote connection (see Remote Files in The GNU Emacs Manual). They are bound and set depending on the remote connection a buffer is dedicated to.
Emacs uses connection-local profiles to store the variable settings
to apply to particular connections. You can then associate these with
remote connections by defining the criteria when they should apply,
using connection-local-set-profiles
.
This function defines a set of variable settings for the connection
profile, which is a symbol. You can later assign the connection
profile to one or more remote connections, and Emacs will apply those
variable settings to all process buffers for those connections. The
list in variables is an alist of the form
(name . value)
. Example:
(connection-local-set-profile-variables 'remote-bash '((shell-file-name . "/bin/bash") (shell-command-switch . "-c") (shell-interactive-switch . "-i") (shell-login-switch . "-l")))
(connection-local-set-profile-variables 'remote-ksh '((shell-file-name . "/bin/ksh") (shell-command-switch . "-c") (shell-interactive-switch . "-i") (shell-login-switch . "-l")))
(connection-local-set-profile-variables 'remote-null-device '((null-device . "/dev/null")))
If you want to append variable settings to an existing profile, you
could use the function connection-local-get-profile-variables
in order to retrieve the existing settings, like
(connection-local-set-profile-variables 'remote-bash (append (connection-local-get-profile-variables 'remote-bash) '((shell-command-dont-erase-buffer . t))))
This alist holds the connection profile symbols and the associated
variable settings. It is updated by
connection-local-set-profile-variables
.
This function assigns profiles, which are symbols, to all remote
connections identified by criteria. criteria is a plist
identifying a connection and the application using this connection.
Property names might be :application
, :protocol
,
:user
and :machine
. The property value of
:application
is a symbol, all other property values are
strings. All properties are optional; if criteria is nil
, it
always applies. Example:
(connection-local-set-profiles '(:application tramp :protocol "ssh" :machine "localhost") 'remote-bash 'remote-null-device)
(connection-local-set-profiles '(:application tramp :protocol "sudo" :user "root" :machine "localhost") 'remote-ksh 'remote-null-device)
If criteria is nil
, it applies for all remote connections.
Therefore, the example above would be equivalent to
(connection-local-set-profiles '(:application tramp :protocol "ssh" :machine "localhost") 'remote-bash)
(connection-local-set-profiles '(:application tramp :protocol "sudo" :user "root" :machine "localhost") 'remote-ksh)
(connection-local-set-profiles nil 'remote-null-device)
Any connection profile of profiles must have been already
defined by connection-local-set-profile-variables
.
This alist contains connection criteria and their assigned profile
names. The function connection-local-set-profiles
updates this
list.
When writing connection-aware code, you’ll need to collect, and possibly apply, any connection-local variables. There are several ways to do this, as described below.
This function collects applicable connection-local variables
associated with criteria in
connection-local-variables-alist
, without applying them.
Example:
(hack-connection-local-variables '(:application tramp :protocol "ssh" :machine "localhost"))
connection-local-variables-alist ⇒ ((null-device . "/dev/null") (shell-login-switch . "-l") (shell-interactive-switch . "-i") (shell-command-switch . "-c") (shell-file-name . "/bin/bash"))
This function looks for connection-local variables according to criteria, and immediately applies them in the current buffer.
Apply all connection-local variables for application
, which are
specified by default-directory
.
After that, body is executed, and the connection-local variables are unwound. Example:
(connection-local-set-profile-variables 'my-remote-perl '((perl-command-name . "/usr/local/bin/perl5") (perl-command-switch . "-e %s")))
(connection-local-set-profiles '(:application my-app :protocol "ssh" :machine "remotehost") 'my-remote-perl)
(let ((default-directory "/ssh:remotehost:/working/dir/")) (with-connection-local-application-variables 'my-app do something useful))
The default application, a symbol, to be applied in
with-connection-local-variables
. It defaults to tramp
,
but you can let-bind it to change the application temporarily
(see Local Variables).
This variable must not be changed globally.
This is equivalent to
with-connection-local-application-variables
, but uses
connection-local-default-application
for the application.
This macro sets each symbol connection-locally to the result of
evaluating the corresponding form, using the connection-local
profile specified in connection-local-profile-name-for-setq
; if
the profile name is nil
, this macro will just set the variables
normally, as with setq
(see Setting Variable Values).
For example, you can use this macro in combination with
with-connection-local-variables
or
with-connection-local-application-variables
to lazily
initialize connection-local settings:
(defvar my-app-variable nil) (connection-local-set-profile-variables 'my-app-connection-default-profile '((my-app-variable . nil))) (connection-local-set-profiles '(:application my-app) 'my-app-connection-default-profile)
(defun my-app-get-variable () (with-connection-local-application-variables 'my-app (or my-app-variable (setq-connection-local my-app-variable do something useful))))
The connection-local profile name, a symbol, to use when setting
variables via setq-connection-local
. This is let-bound in the
body of with-connection-local-variables
, but you can also
let-bind it yourself if you’d like to set variables on a different
profile.
This variable must not be changed globally.
If nil
, connection-local variables are ignored. This variable
shall be changed temporarily only in special modes.
It is sometimes useful to make two variables synonyms, so that both
variables always have the same value, and changing either one also
changes the other. Whenever you change the name of a
variable—either because you realize its old name was not well
chosen, or because its meaning has partly changed—it can be useful
to keep the old name as an alias of the new one for
compatibility. You can do this with defvaralias
.
This function defines the symbol new-alias as a variable alias for symbol base-variable. This means that retrieving the value of new-alias returns the value of base-variable, and changing the value of new-alias changes the value of base-variable. The two aliased variable names always share the same value and the same bindings.
If the docstring argument is non-nil
, it specifies the
documentation for new-alias; otherwise, the alias gets the same
documentation as base-variable has, if any, unless
base-variable is itself an alias, in which case new-alias gets
the documentation of the variable at the end of the chain of aliases.
This function returns base-variable.
Variable aliases are convenient for replacing an old name for a
variable with a new name. make-obsolete-variable
declares that
the old name is obsolete and therefore that it may be removed at some
stage in the future.
This function makes the byte compiler warn that the variable obsolete-name is obsolete. If current-name is a symbol, it is the variable’s new name; then the warning message says to use current-name instead of obsolete-name. If current-name is a string, this is the message and there is no replacement variable. when should be a string indicating when the variable was first made obsolete (usually a version number string).
The optional argument access-type, if non-nil
, should
specify the kind of access that will trigger obsolescence warnings; it
can be either get
or set
.
You can make two variables synonyms and declare one obsolete at the
same time using the macro define-obsolete-variable-alias
.
This macro marks the variable obsolete-name as obsolete and also makes it an alias for the variable current-name. It is equivalent to the following:
(defvaralias obsolete-name current-name docstring) (make-obsolete-variable obsolete-name current-name when)
This macro evaluates all its parameters, and both obsolete-name and current-name should be symbols, so a typical usage would look like:
(define-obsolete-variable-alias 'foo-thing 'bar-thing "27.1")
This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases of variable. If variable is not a symbol, or if variable is not defined as an alias, the function returns variable.
This function signals a cyclic-variable-indirection
error if
there is a loop in the chain of symbols.
(defvaralias 'foo 'bar) (indirect-variable 'foo) ⇒ bar (indirect-variable 'bar) ⇒ bar (setq bar 2) bar ⇒ 2
foo ⇒ 2
(setq foo 0) bar ⇒ 0 foo ⇒ 0
Ordinary Lisp variables can be assigned any value that is a valid
Lisp object. However, certain Lisp variables are not defined in Lisp,
but in C. Most of these variables are defined in the C code using
DEFVAR_LISP
. Like variables defined in Lisp, these can take on
any value. However, some variables are defined using
DEFVAR_INT
or DEFVAR_BOOL
. See Writing Emacs Primitives, in particular the
description of functions of the type syms_of_filename
,
for a brief discussion of the C implementation.
Variables of type DEFVAR_BOOL
can only take on the values
nil
or t
. Attempting to assign them any other value
will set them to t
:
(let ((display-hourglass 5)) display-hourglass) ⇒ t
This variable holds a list of all variables of type DEFVAR_BOOL
.
Variables of type DEFVAR_INT
can take on only integer values.
Attempting to assign them any other value will result in an error:
(setq undo-limit 1000.0) error→ Wrong type argument: integerp, 1000.0
A generalized variable or place form is one of the many
places in Lisp memory where values can be stored using the setf
macro (see The setf
Macro). The simplest place
form is a regular Lisp variable. But the CARs and CDRs of
lists, elements of arrays, properties of symbols, and many other
locations are also places where Lisp values get stored.
Generalized variables are analogous to lvalues in the C
language, where ‘x = a[i]’ gets an element from an array
and ‘a[i] = x’ stores an element using the same notation.
Just as certain forms like a[i]
can be lvalues in C, there
is a set of forms that can be generalized variables in Lisp.
setf
Macro ¶The setf
macro is the most basic way to operate on generalized
variables. The setf
form is like setq
, except that it
accepts arbitrary place forms in the first (left) argument of each
pair rather than just symbols. For example, (setf (car a) b)
sets the car of a
to b
, doing the same operation as
(setcar a b)
, but without you having to use two separate
functions for setting and accessing this type of place.
This macro evaluates form and stores its value in place,
which must be a valid generalized variable form. If there are several
place and form pairs, the assignments are done sequentially
just as with setq
. setf
returns the value of the last
form.
The following Lisp forms are the forms in Emacs that will work as
generalized variables, and so may appear in the place argument
of setf
:
(setf x y)
is exactly equivalent to
(setq x y)
, and setq
itself is strictly speaking
redundant given that setf
exists. Most programmers will
continue to prefer setq
for setting simple variables, though,
for stylistic and historical reasons. The macro (setf x y)
actually expands to (setq x y)
, so there is no performance
penalty for using it in compiled code.
aref cddr symbol-function car elt symbol-plist caar get symbol-value cadr gethash cdr nth cdar nthcdr
alist-get overlay-start default-value overlay-get face-background process-buffer face-font process-filter face-foreground process-get face-stipple process-sentinel face-underline-p terminal-parameter file-modes window-buffer frame-parameter window-dedicated-p frame-parameters window-display-table get-register window-hscroll getenv window-parameter keymap-parent window-point match-data window-start overlay-end
(substring subplace n [m])
,
where subplace is itself a valid generalized variable whose
current value is a string, and where the value stored is also a
string. The new string is spliced into the specified part of the
destination string. For example:
(setq a (list "hello" "world")) ⇒ ("hello" "world") (cadr a) ⇒ "world" (substring (cadr a) 2 4) ⇒ "rl" (setf (substring (cadr a) 2 4) "o") ⇒ "o" (cadr a) ⇒ "wood" a ⇒ ("hello" "wood")
if
and cond
conditionals will work as generalized
variables. For instance, this will set either the foo
or the
bar
variable to zot
:
(setf (if (zerop (random 2)) foo bar) 'zot)
setf
signals an error if you pass a place form that it
does not know how to handle.
Note that for nthcdr
, the list argument of the function must
itself be a valid place form. For example, (setf (nthcdr
0 foo) 7)
will set foo
itself to 7.
The macros push
(see Modifying List Variables) and pop
(see Accessing Elements of Lists) can manipulate generalized variables,
not just lists. (pop place)
removes and returns the first
element of the list stored in place. It is analogous to
(prog1 (car place) (setf place (cdr place)))
,
except that it takes care to evaluate all subforms only once.
(push x place)
inserts x at the front of
the list stored in place. It is analogous to (setf
place (cons x place))
, except for evaluation of the
subforms. Note that push
and pop
on an nthcdr
place can be used to insert or delete at any position in a list.
The cl-lib library defines various extensions for generalized
variables, including additional setf
places.
See Generalized Variables in Common Lisp Extensions.
setf
forms ¶This section describes how to define new forms that setf
can
operate on.
This macro enables you to easily define setf
methods for simple
cases. name is the name of a function, macro, or special form.
You can use this macro whenever name has a directly
corresponding setter function that updates it, e.g.,
(gv-define-simple-setter car setcar)
.
This macro translates a call of the form
(setf (name args...) value)
into
(setter args... value)
Such a setf
call is documented to return value. This is
no problem with, e.g., car
and setcar
, because
setcar
returns the value that it set. If your setter
function does not return value, use a non-nil
value for
the fix-return argument of gv-define-simple-setter
. This
expands into something equivalent to
(let ((temp value)) (setter args... temp) temp)
so ensuring that it returns the correct result.
This macro allows for more complex setf
expansions than the
previous form. You may need to use this form, for example, if there
is no simple setter function to call, or if there is one but it
requires different arguments to the place form.
This macro expands the form
(setf (name args…) value)
by
first binding the setf
argument forms
(value args…)
according to arglist,
and then executing body. body should return a Lisp
form that does the assignment, and finally returns the value that was
set. An example of using this macro is:
(gv-define-setter caar (val x) `(setcar (car ,x) ,val))
For more control over the expansion, the gv-define-expander
macro can be used. For instance, a settable substring
could be
implemented this way:
(gv-define-expander substring (lambda (do place from &optional to) (gv-letplace (getter setter) place (macroexp-let2* (from to) (funcall do `(substring ,getter ,from ,to) (lambda (v) (macroexp-let2* (v) `(progn ,(funcall setter `(cl--set-substring ,getter ,from ,to ,v)) ,v))))))))
The macro gv-letplace
can be useful in defining macros that
perform similarly to setf
; for example, the incf
macro
of Common Lisp could be implemented this way:
(defmacro incf (place &optional n) (gv-letplace (getter setter) place (macroexp-let2* ((v (or n 1))) (funcall setter `(+ ,v ,getter)))))
getter will be bound to a copyable expression that returns the value of place. setter will be bound to a function that takes an expression v and returns a new expression that sets place to v. body should return a Emacs Lisp expression manipulating place via getter and setter.
Consult the source file gv.el for more details.
This function makes the byte compiler warn that the generalized variable obsolete-name is obsolete. If current-name is a symbol, then the warning message says to use current-name instead of obsolete-name. If current-name is a string, this is the message. when should be a string indicating when the variable was first made obsolete (usually a version number string).
Common Lisp note: Common Lisp defines another way to specify the
setf
behavior of a function, namelysetf
functions, whose names are lists(setf name)
rather than symbols. For example,(defun (setf foo) …)
defines the function that is used whensetf
is applied tofoo
. Emacs does not support this. It is a compile-time error to usesetf
on a form that has not already had an appropriate expansion defined. In Common Lisp, this is not an error since the function(setf func)
might be defined later.
When you set a variable to a value and then close Emacs and restart it, that value won’t be automatically restored. Users usually set normal variables in their startup files, or use Customize (see Customization Settings) to set user options permanently, and various packages have various files where they store the data (e.g., Gnus stores this in .newsrc.eld and the URL library stores cookies in ~/.emacs.d/url/cookies).
For things in between these two extremes (i.e., configuration which goes in the startup file, and massive application state that goes into separate files), Emacs provides a facility to replicate data between sessions called multisession variables. (This facility may not be available on all systems.) To give you an idea of how these are meant to be used, here’s a small example:
(define-multisession-variable foo 0) (defun my-adder (num) (interactive "nAdd number: ") (setf (multisession-value foo) (+ (multisession-value foo) num)) (message "The new number is: %s" (multisession-value foo)))
This defines the variable foo
and binds it to a special
multisession object which is initialized with the value ‘0’ (if
the variable doesn’t already exist from a previous session). The
my-adder
command queries the user for a number, adds this to
the old (possibly saved value), and then saves the new value.
This facility isn’t meant to be used for huge data structures, but should be performant for most values.
This macro defines name as a multisession variable, and gives it the initial-value if this variable hasn’t been assigned a value earlier. doc is the doc string, and several keyword arguments can be used in args:
:package package-symbol
This keyword says that a multisession variable belongs to the package
specified by package-symbol. The combination of
package-symbol and name has to be unique. If
package-symbol isn’t given, this will default to the first
“segment” of the name symbol’s name, which is the part of its
name up to and excluding the first ‘-’. For instance, if
name is foo
and package-symbol isn’t given,
package-symbol will default to foo
.
:synchronized bool
¶Multisession variables can be synchronized if bool is
non-nil
. This means that if there’re two concurrent Emacs
instances running, and the other Emacs changes the multisession
variable foo
, the current Emacs instance will retrieve that
modified data when accessing the value. If synchronized is
nil
or missing, this won’t happen, and the values in all
Emacs sessions using the variable will be independent of each other.
:storage storage
Use the specified storage method. This can be either
sqlite
(in Emacs compiled with SQLite support) or files
.
If not given, this defaults to the value of the
multisession-storage
variable, described below.
This function returns the current value of variable. If this variable hasn’t been accessed before in this Emacs session, or if it’s changed externally, it will be read in from external storage. If not, the current value in this session is returned as is. It is an error to call this function for a variable that is not a multisession variable.
Values retrieved via multisession-value
may or may not be
eq
to each other, but they will always be equal
.
This is a generalized variable (see Generalized Variables), so the way to update such a variable is to say, for instance:
(setf (multisession-value foo-bar) 'zot)
Only Emacs Lisp values that have a readable print syntax (see Printed Representation and Read Syntax) can be saved this way.
If the multisession variable is synchronized, setting it may update the value first. For instance:
(cl-incf (multisession-value foo-bar))
This first checks whether the value has changed in a different Emacs instance, retrieves that value, and then adds 1 to that value and stores it. But note that this is done without locking, so if many instances are updating the value at the same time, it’s unpredictable which instance “wins”.
This function deletes object and its value from its persistent storage.
You can also make persistent values that aren’t tied to a specific variable, but are tied to an explicit package and key.
(setq foo (make-multisession :package "mail" :key "friends")) (setf (multisession-value foo) 'everybody)
This supports the same keywords as
define-multisession-variable
, but also supports a
:initial-value
keyword, which specifies the default value.
This variable controls how the multisession variables are stored. It
value defaults to files
, which means that the values are stored
in a one-file-per-variable structure inside the directory specified by
multisession-directory
. If this value is sqlite
instead, the values are stored in an SQLite database; this is only
available if Emacs was built with SQLite support.
The multisession variables are stored under this directory, which
defaults to multisession/ subdirectory of the
user-emacs-directory
, which is typically
~/.emacs.d/multisession/.
This command pops up a buffer listing all the multisession variables,
and enters a special mode multisession-edit-mode
which allows
you to delete them and edit their values.
A Lisp program is composed mainly of Lisp functions. This chapter explains what functions are, how they accept arguments, and how to define them.
declare
FormIn a general sense, a function is a rule for carrying out a computation given input values called arguments. The result of the computation is called the value or return value of the function. The computation can also have side effects, such as lasting changes in the values of variables or the contents of data structures (see Definition of side effect). A pure function is a function which, in addition to having no side effects, always returns the same value for the same combination of arguments, regardless of external factors such as machine type or system state.
In most computer languages, every function has a name. But in Lisp,
a function in the strictest sense has no name: it is an object which
can optionally be associated with a symbol (e.g., car
)
that serves as the function name. See Naming a Function. When a
function has been given a name, we usually also refer to that symbol
as a “function” (e.g., we refer to “the function car
”).
In this manual, the distinction between a function name and the
function object itself is usually unimportant, but we will take note
wherever it is relevant.
Certain function-like objects, called special forms and macros, also accept arguments to carry out computations. However, as explained below, these are not considered functions in Emacs Lisp.
Here are important terms for functions and function-like objects:
A function (in the strict sense, i.e., a function object) which is written in Lisp. These are described in the following section. See Lambda Expressions.
A function which is callable from Lisp but is actually written in C.
Primitives are also called built-in functions, or subrs.
Examples include functions like car
and append
. In
addition, all special forms (see below) are also considered
primitives.
Usually, a function is implemented as a primitive because it is a
fundamental part of Lisp (e.g., car
), or because it provides a
low-level interface to operating system services, or because it needs
to run fast. Unlike functions defined in Lisp, primitives can be
modified or added only by changing the C sources and recompiling
Emacs. See Writing Emacs Primitives.
A primitive that is like a function but does not evaluate all of its
arguments in the usual way. It may evaluate only some of the
arguments, or may evaluate them in an unusual order, or several times.
Examples include if
, and
, and while
.
See Special Forms.
A construct defined in Lisp, which differs from a function in that it translates a Lisp expression into another expression which is to be evaluated instead of the original expression. Macros enable Lisp programmers to do the sorts of things that special forms can do. See Macros.
An object which can be invoked via the command-execute
primitive, usually due to the user typing in a key sequence
bound to that command. See Interactive Call. A command is
usually a function; if the function is written in Lisp, it is made
into a command by an interactive
form in the function
definition (see Defining Commands). Commands that are functions
can also be called from Lisp expressions, just like other functions.
Keyboard macros (strings and vectors) are commands also, even though they are not functions. See Keyboard Macros. We say that a symbol is a command if its function cell contains a command (see Symbol Components); such a named command can be invoked with M-x.
A function object that is much like a lambda expression, except that it also encloses an environment of lexical variable bindings. See Closures.
A function that has been compiled by the byte compiler. See Byte-Code Function Type.
A place-holder for a real function. If the autoload object is called, Emacs loads the file containing the definition of the real function, and then calls the real function. See Autoload.
You can use the function functionp
to test if an object is a
function:
This function returns t
if object is any kind of
function, i.e., can be passed to funcall
. Note that
functionp
returns t
for symbols that are function names,
and returns nil
for symbols that are macros or special forms.
If object is not a function, this function ordinarily returns
nil
. However, the representation of function objects is
complicated, and for efficiency reasons in rare cases this function
can return t
even when object is not a function.
It is also possible to find out how many arguments an arbitrary function expects:
This function provides information about the argument list of the
specified function. The returned value is a cons cell of the
form (min . max)
, where min is the
minimum number of arguments, and max is either the maximum
number of arguments, or the symbol many
for functions with
&rest
arguments, or the symbol unevalled
if
function is a special form.
Note that this function might return inaccurate results in some situations, such as the following:
apply-partially
(see apply-partially).
advice-add
(see Advising Named Functions).
Unlike functionp
, the next three functions do not treat
a symbol as its function definition.
This function returns t
if object is a built-in function
(i.e., a Lisp primitive).
(subrp 'message) ; message
is a symbol,
⇒ nil ; not a subr object.
(subrp (symbol-function 'message)) ⇒ t
This function returns t
if object is a byte-code
function. For example:
(byte-code-function-p (symbol-function 'next-line)) ⇒ t
This function returns t
if object is a function object
that is not in the form of ELisp source code but something like
machine code or byte code instead. More specifically it returns
t
if the function is built-in (a.k.a. “primitive”,
see What Is a Function?), or byte-compiled (see Byte Compilation), or natively-compiled (see Compilation of Lisp to Native Code), or
a function loaded from a dynamic module (see Emacs Dynamic Modules).
This works like func-arity
, but only for built-in functions and
without symbol indirection. It signals an error for non-built-in
functions. We recommend to use func-arity
instead.
A lambda expression is a function object written in Lisp. Here is an example:
(lambda (x) "Return the hyperbolic cosine of X." (* 0.5 (+ (exp x) (exp (- x)))))
In Emacs Lisp, such a list is a valid expression which evaluates to a function object.
A lambda expression, by itself, has no name; it is an anonymous function. Although lambda expressions can be used this way (see Anonymous Functions), they are more commonly associated with symbols to make named functions (see Naming a Function). Before going into these details, the following subsections describe the components of a lambda expression and what they do.
A lambda expression is a list that looks like this:
(lambda (arg-variables...) [documentation-string] [interactive-declaration] body-forms...)
The first element of a lambda expression is always the symbol
lambda
. This indicates that the list represents a function. The
reason functions are defined to start with lambda
is so that
other lists, intended for other uses, will not accidentally be valid as
functions.
The second element is a list of symbols—the argument variable names (see Features of Argument Lists). This is called the lambda list. When a Lisp function is called, the argument values are matched up against the variables in the lambda list, which are given local bindings with the values provided. See Local Variables.
The documentation string is a Lisp string object placed within the function definition to describe the function for the Emacs help facilities. See Documentation Strings of Functions.
The interactive declaration is a list of the form (interactive
code-string)
. This declares how to provide arguments if the
function is used interactively. Functions with this declaration are called
commands; they can be called using M-x or bound to a key.
Functions not intended to be called in this way should not have interactive
declarations. See Defining Commands, for how to write an interactive
declaration.
The rest of the elements are the body of the function: the Lisp code to do the work of the function (or, as a Lisp programmer would say, “a list of Lisp forms to evaluate”). The value returned by the function is the value returned by the last element of the body.
Consider the following example:
(lambda (a b c) (+ a b c))
We can call this function by passing it to funcall
, like this:
(funcall (lambda (a b c) (+ a b c)) 1 2 3)
This call evaluates the body of the lambda expression with the variable
a
bound to 1, b
bound to 2, and c
bound to 3.
Evaluation of the body adds these three numbers, producing the result 6;
therefore, this call to the function returns the value 6.
Note that the arguments can be the results of other function calls, as in this example:
(funcall (lambda (a b c) (+ a b c)) 1 (* 2 3) (- 5 4))
This evaluates the arguments 1
, (* 2 3)
, and (- 5
4)
from left to right. Then it applies the lambda expression to the
argument values 1, 6 and 1 to produce the value 8.
As these examples show, you can use a form with a lambda expression
as its CAR to make local variables and give them values. In the
old days of Lisp, this technique was the only way to bind and
initialize local variables. But nowadays, it is clearer to use the
special form let
for this purpose (see Local Variables).
Lambda expressions are mainly used as anonymous functions for passing
as arguments to other functions (see Anonymous Functions), or
stored as symbol function definitions to produce named functions
(see Naming a Function).
Our simple sample function, (lambda (a b c) (+ a b c))
,
specifies three argument variables, so it must be called with three
arguments: if you try to call it with only two arguments or four
arguments, you get a wrong-number-of-arguments
error
(see Errors).
It is often convenient to write a function that allows certain
arguments to be omitted. For example, the function substring
accepts three arguments—a string, the start index and the end
index—but the third argument defaults to the length of the
string if you omit it. It is also convenient for certain functions to
accept an indefinite number of arguments, as the functions list
and +
do.
To specify optional arguments that may be omitted when a function
is called, simply include the keyword &optional
before the optional
arguments. To specify a list of zero or more extra arguments, include the
keyword &rest
before one final argument.
Thus, the complete syntax for an argument list is as follows:
(required-vars... [&optional [optional-vars...]] [&rest rest-var])
The square brackets indicate that the &optional
and &rest
clauses, and the variables that follow them, are optional.
A call to the function requires one actual argument for each of the
required-vars. There may be actual arguments for zero or more of
the optional-vars, and there cannot be any actual arguments beyond
that unless the lambda list uses &rest
. In that case, there may
be any number of extra actual arguments.
If actual arguments for the optional and rest variables are omitted,
then they always default to nil
. There is no way for the
function to distinguish between an explicit argument of nil
and
an omitted argument. However, the body of the function is free to
consider nil
an abbreviation for some other meaningful value.
This is what substring
does; nil
as the third argument to
substring
means to use the length of the string supplied.
Common Lisp note: Common Lisp allows the function to specify what default value to use when an optional argument is omitted; Emacs Lisp always uses
nil
. Emacs Lisp does not supportsupplied-p
variables that tell you whether an argument was explicitly passed.
For example, an argument list that looks like this:
(a b &optional c d &rest e)
binds a
and b
to the first two actual arguments, which are
required. If one or two more arguments are provided, c
and
d
are bound to them respectively; any arguments after the first
four are collected into a list and e
is bound to that list.
Thus, if there are only two arguments, c
, d
and e
are nil
; if two or three arguments, d
and e
are
nil
; if four arguments or fewer, e
is nil
. Note
that exactly five arguments with an explicit nil
argument
provided for e
will cause that nil
argument to be passed
as a list with one element, (nil)
, as with any other single
value for e
.
There is no way to have required arguments following optional
ones—it would not make sense. To see why this must be so, suppose
that c
in the example were optional and d
were required.
Suppose three actual arguments are given; which variable would the
third argument be for? Would it be used for the c, or for
d? One can argue for both possibilities. Similarly, it makes
no sense to have any more arguments (either required or optional)
after a &rest
argument.
Here are some examples of argument lists and proper calls:
(funcall (lambda (n) (1+ n)) ; One required: 1) ; requires exactly one argument. ⇒ 2 (funcall (lambda (n &optional n1) ; One required and one optional: (if n1 (+ n n1) (1+ n))) ; 1 or 2 arguments. 1 2) ⇒ 3 (funcall (lambda (n &rest ns) ; One required and one rest: (+ n (apply '+ ns))) ; 1 or more arguments. 1 2 3 4 5) ⇒ 15
A lambda expression may optionally have a documentation string just after the lambda list. This string does not affect execution of the function; it is a kind of comment, but a systematized comment which actually appears inside the Lisp world and can be used by the Emacs help facilities. See Documentation, for how the documentation string is accessed.
It is a good idea to provide documentation strings for all the functions in your program, even those that are called only from within your program. Documentation strings are like comments, except that they are easier to access.
The first line of the documentation string should stand on its own,
because apropos
displays just this first line. It should consist
of one or two complete sentences that summarize the function’s purpose.
The start of the documentation string is usually indented in the source file, but since these spaces come before the starting double-quote, they are not part of the string. Some people make a practice of indenting any additional lines of the string so that the text lines up in the program source. That is a mistake. The indentation of the following lines is inside the string; what looks nice in the source code will look ugly when displayed by the help commands.
You may wonder how the documentation string could be optional, since there are required components of the function that follow it (the body). Since evaluation of a string returns that string, without any side effects, it has no effect if it is not the last form in the body. Thus, in practice, there is no confusion between the first form of the body and the documentation string; if the only body form is a string then it serves both as the return value and as the documentation.
The last line of the documentation string can specify calling conventions different from the actual function arguments. Write text like this:
\(fn arglist)
following a blank line, at the beginning of the line, with no newline following it inside the documentation string. (The ‘\’ is used to avoid confusing the Emacs motion commands.) The calling convention specified in this way appears in help messages in place of the one derived from the actual arguments of the function.
This feature is particularly useful for macro definitions, since the arguments written in a macro definition often do not correspond to the way users think of the parts of the macro call.
Do not use this feature if you want to deprecate the calling
convention and favor the one you advertise by the above specification.
Instead, use the advertised-calling-convention
declaration
(see The declare
Form) or set-advertised-calling-convention
(see Declaring Functions Obsolete), because these two will cause the byte
compiler emit a warning message when it compiles Lisp programs which
use the deprecated calling convention.
The (fn)
feature is typically used in the following situations:
(defmacro lambda (&rest cdr) "... \(fn ARGS [DOCSTRING] [INTERACTIVE] BODY)"...)
(defmacro macroexp--accumulate (var+list &rest body) "... \(fn (VAR LIST) BODY...)" (declare (indent 1)) (let ((var (car var+list)) (list (cadr var+list)) ...)))
defalias
. Example:
(defalias 'abbrev-get 'get "... \(fn ABBREV PROP)")
Documentation strings are usually static, but occasionally it can be
necessary to generate them dynamically. In some cases you can do so
by writing a macro which generates at compile time the code of the
function, including the desired documentation string. But you can
also generate the docstring dynamically by writing
(:documentation form)
instead of the documentation
string. This will evaluate form at run-time when the function
is defined and use it as the documentation string12. You can also compute
the documentation string on the fly when it is requested, by setting
the function-documentation
property of the function’s symbol to
a Lisp form that evaluates to a string.
For example:
(defun adder (x) (lambda (y) (:documentation (format "Add %S to the argument Y." x)) (+ x y))) (defalias 'adder5 (adder 5)) (documentation 'adder5) ⇒ "Add 5 to the argument Y."
(put 'adder5 'function-documentation '(concat (documentation (symbol-function 'adder5) 'raw) " Consulted at " (format-time-string "%H:%M:%S"))) (documentation 'adder5) ⇒ "Add 5 to the argument Y. Consulted at 15:52:13" (documentation 'adder5) ⇒ "Add 5 to the argument Y. Consulted at 15:52:18"
A symbol can serve as the name of a function. This happens when the symbol’s function cell (see Symbol Components) contains a function object (e.g., a lambda expression). Then the symbol itself becomes a valid, callable function, equivalent to the function object in its function cell.
The contents of the function cell are also called the symbol’s function definition. The procedure of using a symbol’s function definition in place of the symbol is called symbol function indirection; see Symbol Function Indirection. If you have not given a symbol a function definition, its function cell is said to be void, and it cannot be used as a function.
In practice, nearly all functions have names, and are referred to by
their names. You can create a named Lisp function by defining a
lambda expression and putting it in a function cell (see Accessing Function Cell Contents). However, it is more common to use the defun
macro,
described in the next section.
See Defining Functions.
We give functions names because it is convenient to refer to them by their names in Lisp expressions. Also, a named Lisp function can easily refer to itself—it can be recursive. Furthermore, primitives can only be referred to textually by their names, since primitive function objects (see Primitive Function Type) have no read syntax.
A function need not have a unique name. A given function object
usually appears in the function cell of only one symbol, but
this is just a convention. It is easy to store it in several symbols
using fset
; then each of the symbols is a valid name for the
same function.
Note that a symbol used as a function name may also be used as a variable; these two uses of a symbol are independent and do not conflict. (This is not the case in some dialects of Lisp, like Scheme.)
By convention, if a function’s symbol consists of two names
separated by ‘--’, the function is intended for internal use and
the first part names the file defining the function. For example, a
function named vc-git--rev-parse
is an internal function
defined in vc-git.el. Internal-use functions written in C have
names ending in ‘-internal’, e.g., bury-buffer-internal
.
Emacs code contributed before 2018 may follow other internal-use
naming conventions, which are being phased out.
We usually give a name to a function when it is first created. This
is called defining a function, and we usually do it with the
defun
macro. This section also describes other ways to define
a function.
defun
is the usual way to define new Lisp functions. It
defines the symbol name as a function with argument list
args (see Features of Argument Lists) and body forms given by body.
Neither name nor args should be quoted.
doc, if present, should be a string specifying the function’s
documentation string (see Documentation Strings of Functions). declare,
if present, should be a declare
form specifying function
metadata (see The declare
Form). interactive, if present,
should be an interactive
form specifying how the function is to
be called interactively (see Interactive Call).
The return value of defun
is undefined.
Here are some examples:
(defun foo () 5) (foo) ⇒ 5
(defun bar (a &optional b &rest c) (list a b c)) (bar 1 2 3 4 5) ⇒ (1 2 (3 4 5))
(bar 1) ⇒ (1 nil nil)
(bar) error→ Wrong number of arguments.
(defun capitalize-backwards () "Upcase the last letter of the word at point." (interactive) (backward-word 1) (forward-word 1) (backward-char 1) (capitalize-word 1))
Most Emacs functions are part of the source code of Lisp programs, and
are defined when the Emacs Lisp reader reads the program source before
executing it. However, you can also define functions dynamically at
run time, e.g., by generating defun
calls when your program’s
code is executed. If you do this, be aware that Emacs’s Help
commands, such as C-h f, which present in the *Help*
buffer a button to jump to the function’s definition, might be unable
to find the source code because generating a function dynamically
usually looks very different from the usual static calls to
defun
. You can make the job of finding the code which
generates such functions easier by using the definition-name
property, see Standard Symbol Properties.
Be careful not to redefine existing functions unintentionally.
defun
redefines even primitive functions such as car
without any hesitation or notification. Emacs does not prevent you
from doing this, because redefining a function is sometimes done
deliberately, and there is no way to distinguish deliberate
redefinition from unintentional redefinition.
This function defines the symbol name as a function, with
definition definition. definition can be any valid Lisp
function or macro, or a special form (see Special Forms), or a
keymap (see Keymaps), or a vector or string (a keyboard macro).
The return value of defalias
is undefined.
If doc is non-nil
, it becomes the function documentation
of name. Otherwise, any documentation provided by
definition is used.
Internally, defalias
normally uses fset
to set the definition.
If name has a defalias-fset-function
property, however,
the associated value is used as a function to call in place of fset
.
The proper place to use defalias
is where a specific function
or macro name is being defined—especially where that name appears
explicitly in the source file being loaded. This is because
defalias
records which file defined the function, just like
defun
(see Unloading).
By contrast, in programs that manipulate function definitions for other
purposes, it is better to use fset
, which does not keep such
records. See Accessing Function Cell Contents.
Checks whether object is a function alias. If it is, it returns
a list of symbols representing the function alias chain, else
nil
. For instance, if a
is an alias for b
, and
b
is an alias for c
:
(function-alias-p 'a) ⇒ (b c)
If there’s a loop in the definitions, an error will be signaled. If
noerror is non-nil
, the non-looping parts of the chain is
returned instead.
You cannot create a new primitive function with defun
or
defalias
, but you can use them to change the function definition of
any symbol, even one such as car
or x-popup-menu
whose
normal definition is a primitive. However, this is risky: for
instance, it is next to impossible to redefine car
without
breaking Lisp completely. Redefining an obscure function such as
x-popup-menu
is less dangerous, but it still may not work as
you expect. If there are calls to the primitive from C code, they
call the primitive’s C definition directly, so changing the symbol’s
definition will have no effect on them.
See also defsubst
, which defines a function like defun
and tells the Lisp compiler to perform inline expansion on it.
See Inline Functions.
To undefine a function name, use fmakunbound
.
See Accessing Function Cell Contents.
Defining functions is only half the battle. Functions don’t do anything until you call them, i.e., tell them to run. Calling a function is also known as invocation.
The most common way of invoking a function is by evaluating a list.
For example, evaluating the list (concat "a" "b")
calls the
function concat
with arguments "a"
and "b"
.
See Evaluation, for a description of evaluation.
When you write a list as an expression in your program, you specify
which function to call, and how many arguments to give it, in the text
of the program. Usually that’s just what you want. Occasionally you
need to compute at run time which function to call. To do that, use
the function funcall
. When you also need to determine at run
time how many arguments to pass, use apply
.
funcall
calls function with arguments, and returns
whatever function returns.
Since funcall
is a function, all of its arguments, including
function, are evaluated before funcall
is called. This
means that you can use any expression to obtain the function to be
called. It also means that funcall
does not see the
expressions you write for the arguments, only their values.
These values are not evaluated a second time in the act of
calling function; the operation of funcall
is like the
normal procedure for calling a function, once its arguments have
already been evaluated.
The argument function must be either a Lisp function or a
primitive function. Special forms and macros are not allowed, because
they make sense only when given the unevaluated argument
expressions. funcall
cannot provide these because, as we saw
above, it never knows them in the first place.
If you need to use funcall
to call a command and make it behave
as if invoked interactively, use funcall-interactively
(see Interactive Call).
(setq f 'list) ⇒ list
(funcall f 'x 'y 'z) ⇒ (x y z)
(funcall f 'x 'y '(z)) ⇒ (x y (z))
(funcall 'and t nil) error→ Invalid function: #<subr and>
Compare these examples with the examples of apply
.
apply
calls function with arguments, just like
funcall
but with one difference: the last of arguments is a
list of objects, which are passed to function as separate
arguments, rather than a single list. We say that apply
spreads this list so that each individual element becomes an
argument.
apply
with a single argument is special: the first element of
the argument, which must be a non-empty list, is called as a function
with the remaining elements as individual arguments. Passing two or
more arguments will be faster.
apply
returns the result of calling function. As with
funcall
, function must either be a Lisp function or a
primitive function; special forms and macros do not make sense in
apply
.
(setq f 'list) ⇒ list
(apply f 'x 'y 'z) error→ Wrong type argument: listp, z
(apply '+ 1 2 '(3 4)) ⇒ 10
(apply '+ '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ 10
(apply 'append '((a b c) nil (x y z) nil)) ⇒ (a b c x y z)
(apply '(+ 3 4)) ⇒ 7
For an interesting example of using apply
, see Definition of mapcar.
Sometimes it is useful to fix some of the function’s arguments at certain values, and leave the rest of arguments for when the function is actually called. The act of fixing some of the function’s arguments is called partial application of the function13. The result is a new function that accepts the rest of arguments and calls the original function with all the arguments combined.
Here’s how to do partial application in Emacs Lisp:
This function returns a new function which, when called, will call
func with the list of arguments composed from args and
additional arguments specified at the time of the call. If func
accepts n arguments, then a call to apply-partially
with
m <= n
arguments will produce a new function of
n - m
arguments14.
Here’s how we could define the built-in function 1+
, if it
didn’t exist, using apply-partially
and +
, another
built-in function15:
(defalias '1+ (apply-partially '+ 1) "Increment argument by one.")
(1+ 10) ⇒ 11
It is common for Lisp functions to accept functions as arguments or
find them in data structures (especially in hook variables and property
lists) and call them using funcall
or apply
. Functions
that accept function arguments are often called functionals.
Sometimes, when you call a functional, it is useful to supply a no-op function as the argument. Here are three different kinds of no-op functions:
This function returns argument and has no side effects.
This function ignores any arguments and returns nil
.
This function ignores any arguments and returns t
.
Some functions are user-visible commands, which can be called
interactively (usually by a key sequence). It is possible to invoke
such a command exactly as though it was called interactively, by using
the call-interactively
function. See Interactive Call.
A mapping function applies a given function (not a
special form or macro) to each element of a list or other collection.
Emacs Lisp has several such functions; this section describes
mapcar
, mapc
, mapconcat
, and mapcan
, which
map over a list. See Definition of mapatoms, for the function
mapatoms
which maps over the symbols in an obarray.
See Definition of maphash, for the function maphash
which
maps over key/value associations in a hash table.
These mapping functions do not allow char-tables because a char-table
is a sparse array whose nominal range of indices is very large. To map
over a char-table in a way that deals properly with its sparse nature,
use the function map-char-table
(see Char-Tables).
mapcar
applies function to each element of sequence
in turn, and returns a list of the results.
The argument sequence can be any kind of sequence except a char-table; that is, a list, a vector, a bool-vector, or a string. The result is always a list. The length of the result is the same as the length of sequence. For example:
(mapcar #'car '((a b) (c d) (e f))) ⇒ (a c e) (mapcar #'1+ [1 2 3]) ⇒ (2 3 4) (mapcar #'string "abc") ⇒ ("a" "b" "c")
;; Call each function in my-hooks
.
(mapcar 'funcall my-hooks)
(defun mapcar* (function &rest args) "Apply FUNCTION to successive cars of all ARGS. Return the list of results." ;; If no list is exhausted, (if (not (memq nil args)) ;; apply function to CARs. (cons (apply function (mapcar #'car args)) (apply #'mapcar* function ;; Recurse for rest of elements. (mapcar #'cdr args)))))
(mapcar* #'cons '(a b c) '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ ((a . 1) (b . 2) (c . 3))
This function applies function to each element of
sequence, like mapcar
, but instead of collecting the
results into a list, it returns a single list with all the elements of
the results (which must be lists), by altering the results (using
nconc
; see Functions that Rearrange Lists). Like with mapcar
,
sequence can be of any type except a char-table.
;; Contrast this: (mapcar #'list '(a b c d)) ⇒ ((a) (b) (c) (d)) ;; with this: (mapcan #'list '(a b c d)) ⇒ (a b c d)
mapc
is like mapcar
except that function is used for
side-effects only—the values it returns are ignored, not collected
into a list. mapc
always returns sequence.
mapconcat
applies function to each element of
sequence; the results, which must be sequences of characters
(strings, vectors, or lists), are concatenated into a single string
return value. Between each pair of result sequences, mapconcat
inserts the characters from separator, which also must be a
string, or a vector or list of characters; a nil
value is
treated as the empty string. See Sequences, Arrays, and Vectors.
The argument function must be a function that can take one argument and returns a sequence of characters: a string, a vector, or a list. The argument sequence can be any kind of sequence except a char-table; that is, a list, a vector, a bool-vector, or a string.
(mapconcat #'symbol-name '(The cat in the hat) " ") ⇒ "The cat in the hat"
(mapconcat (lambda (x) (format "%c" (1+ x))) "HAL-8000") ⇒ "IBM.9111"
Although functions are usually defined with defun
and given
names at the same time, it is sometimes convenient to use an explicit
lambda expression—an anonymous function. Anonymous functions
are valid wherever function names are. They are often assigned as
variable values, or as arguments to functions; for instance, you might
pass one as the function argument to mapcar
, which
applies that function to each element of a list (see Mapping Functions). See describe-symbols example, for a realistic example
of this.
When defining a lambda expression that is to be used as an anonymous
function, you can in principle use any method to construct the list.
But typically you should use the lambda
macro, or the
function
special form, or the #'
read syntax:
This macro returns an anonymous function with argument list args, documentation string doc (if any), interactive spec interactive (if any), and body forms given by body.
Under dynamic binding, this macro effectively makes lambda
forms self-quoting: evaluating a form whose CAR is lambda
yields the form itself:
(lambda (x) (* x x)) ⇒ (lambda (x) (* x x))
Note that when evaluating under lexical binding the result is a closure object (see Closures).
The lambda
form has one other effect: it tells the Emacs
evaluator and byte-compiler that its argument is a function, by using
function
as a subroutine (see below).
This special form returns function-object without evaluating it.
In this, it is similar to quote
(see Quoting). But unlike
quote
, it also serves as a note to the Emacs evaluator and
byte-compiler that function-object is intended to be used as a
function. Assuming function-object is a valid lambda
expression, this has two effects:
When function-object is a symbol and the code is byte compiled, the byte-compiler will warn if that function is not defined or might not be known at run time.
The read syntax #'
is a short-hand for using function
.
The following forms are all equivalent:
(lambda (x) (* x x)) (function (lambda (x) (* x x))) #'(lambda (x) (* x x))
In the following example, we define a change-property
function that takes a function as its third argument, followed by a
double-property
function that makes use of
change-property
by passing it an anonymous function:
(defun change-property (symbol prop function) (let ((value (get symbol prop))) (put symbol prop (funcall function value))))
(defun double-property (symbol prop) (change-property symbol prop (lambda (x) (* 2 x))))
Note that we do not quote the lambda
form.
If you compile the above code, the anonymous function is also compiled. This would not happen if, say, you had constructed the anonymous function by quoting it as a list:
(defun double-property (symbol prop) (change-property symbol prop '(lambda (x) (* 2 x))))
In that case, the anonymous function is kept as a lambda expression in
the compiled code. The byte-compiler cannot assume this list is a
function, even though it looks like one, since it does not know that
change-property
intends to use it as a function.
Functions defined using defun
have a hard-coded set of
assumptions about the types and expected values of their arguments.
For example, a function that was designed to handle values of its
argument that are either numbers or lists of numbers will fail or
signal an error if called with a value of any other type, such as a
vector or a string. This happens because the implementation of the
function is not prepared to deal with types other than those assumed
during the design.
By contrast, object-oriented programs use polymorphic functions: a set of specialized functions having the same name, each one of which was written for a certain specific set of argument types. Which of the functions is actually called is decided at run time based on the types of the actual arguments.
Emacs provides support for polymorphism. Like other Lisp environments, notably Common Lisp and its Common Lisp Object System (CLOS), this support is based on generic functions. The Emacs generic functions closely follow CLOS, including use of similar names, so if you have experience with CLOS, the rest of this section will sound very familiar.
A generic function specifies an abstract operation, by defining its
name and list of arguments, but (usually) no implementation. The
actual implementation for several specific classes of arguments is
provided by methods, which should be defined separately. Each
method that implements a generic function has the same name as the
generic function, but the method’s definition indicates what kinds of
arguments it can handle by specializing the arguments defined by
the generic function. These argument specializers can be more
or less specific; for example, a string
type is more specific
than a more general type, such as sequence
.
Note that, unlike in message-based OO languages, such as C++
and
Simula, methods that implement generic functions don’t belong to a
class, they belong to the generic function they implement.
When a generic function is invoked, it selects the applicable methods by comparing the actual arguments passed by the caller with the argument specializers of each method. A method is applicable if the actual arguments of the call are compatible with the method’s specializers. If more than one method is applicable, they are combined using certain rules, described below, and the combination then handles the call.
This macro defines a generic function with the specified name
and arguments. If body is present, it provides the
default implementation. If documentation is present (it should
always be), it specifies the documentation string for the generic
function, in the form (:documentation docstring)
. The
optional options-and-methods can be one of the following forms:
(declare declarations)
A declare form, as described in The declare
Form.
(:argument-precedence-order &rest args)
This form affects the sorting order for combining applicable methods. Normally, when two methods are compared during combination, method arguments are examined left to right, and the first method whose argument specializer is more specific will come before the other one. The order defined by this form overrides that, and the arguments are examined according to their order in this form, and not left to right.
(:method [qualifiers…] args &rest body)
This form defines a method like cl-defmethod
does.
This macro defines a particular implementation for the generic
function called name. The implementation code is given by
body. If present, docstring is the documentation string
for the method. The arguments list, which must be identical in
all the methods that implement a generic function, and must match the
argument list of that function, provides argument specializers of the
form (arg spec)
, where arg is the argument
name as specified in the cl-defgeneric
call, and spec is
one of the following specializer forms:
type
This specializer requires the argument to be of the given type, one of the types from the type hierarchy described below.
(eql object)
This specializer requires the argument be eql
to the given
object.
(head object)
The argument must be a cons cell whose car
is eql
to
object.
struct-type
The argument must be an instance of a class named struct-type
defined with cl-defstruct
(see Structures in Common Lisp
Extensions for GNU Emacs Lisp), or of one of its child classes.
Method definitions can make use of a new argument-list keyword,
&context
, which introduces extra specializers that test the
environment at the time the method is run. This keyword should appear
after the list of required arguments, but before any &rest
or
&optional
keywords. The &context
specializers look much
like regular argument specializers—(expr spec)—except
that expr is an expression to be evaluated in the current
context, and the spec is a value to compare against. For
example, &context (overwrite-mode (eql t))
will make the method
applicable only when overwrite-mode
is turned on. The
&context
keyword can be followed by any number of context
specializers. Because the context specializers are not part of the
generic function’s argument signature, they may be omitted in methods
that don’t require them.
The type specializer, (arg type)
, can specify one
of the system types in the following list. When a parent type
is specified, an argument whose type is any of its more specific child
types, as well as grand-children, grand-grand-children, etc. will also
be compatible.
integer
Parent type: number
.
number
null
Parent type: symbol
symbol
string
Parent type: array
.
array
Parent type: sequence
.
cons
Parent type: list
.
list
Parent type: sequence
.
marker
overlay
float
Parent type: number
.
window-configuration
process
window
subr
compiled-function
buffer
char-table
Parent type: array
.
bool-vector
Parent type: array
.
vector
Parent type: array
.
frame
hash-table
font-spec
font-entity
font-object
The optional extra element, expressed as ‘:extra string’, allows you to add more methods, distinguished by string, for the same specializers and qualifiers.
The optional qualifier allows combining several applicable methods. If it is not present, the defined method is a primary method, responsible for providing the primary implementation of the generic function for the specialized arguments. You can also define auxiliary methods, by using one of the following values as qualifier:
:before
This auxiliary method will run before the primary method. More
accurately, all the :before
methods will run before the
primary, in the most-specific-first order.
:after
This auxiliary method will run after the primary method. More accurately, all such methods will run after the primary, in the most-specific-last order.
:around
This auxiliary method will run instead of the primary method.
The most specific of such methods will be run before any other method.
Such methods normally use cl-call-next-method
, described below,
to invoke the other auxiliary or primary methods.
Functions defined using cl-defmethod
cannot be made
interactive, i.e. commands (see Defining Commands), by adding
the interactive
form to them. If you need a polymorphic
command, we recommend defining a normal command that calls a
polymorphic function defined via cl-defgeneric
and
cl-defmethod
.
Each time a generic function is called, it builds the effective method which will handle this invocation by combining the applicable methods defined for the function. The process of finding the applicable methods and producing the effective method is called dispatch. The applicable methods are those all of whose specializers are compatible with the actual arguments of the call. Since all of the arguments must be compatible with the specializers, they all determine whether a method is applicable. Methods that explicitly specialize more than one argument are called multiple-dispatch methods.
The applicable methods are sorted into the order in which they will be
combined. The method whose left-most argument specializer is the most
specific one will come first in the order. (Specifying
:argument-precedence-order
as part of cl-defmethod
overrides that, as described above.) If the method body calls
cl-call-next-method
, the next most-specific method will run.
If there are applicable :around
methods, the most-specific of
them will run first; it should call cl-call-next-method
to run
any of the less specific :around
methods. Next, the
:before
methods run in the order of their specificity, followed
by the primary method, and lastly the :after
methods in the
reverse order of their specificity.
When invoked from within the lexical body of a primary or an
:around
auxiliary method, call the next applicable method for
the same generic function. Normally, it is called with no arguments,
which means to call the next applicable method with the same arguments
that the calling method was invoked. Otherwise, the specified
arguments are used instead.
This function, when called from within the lexical body of a primary
or an :around
auxiliary method, returns non-nil
if there
is a next method to call.
The function definition of a symbol is the object stored in the function cell of the symbol. The functions described here access, test, and set the function cell of symbols.
See also the function indirect-function
. See Definition of indirect-function.
This returns the object in the function cell of symbol. It does not check that the returned object is a legitimate function.
If the function cell is void, the return value is nil
. To
distinguish between a function cell that is void and one set to
nil
, use fboundp
(see below).
(defun bar (n) (+ n 2)) (symbol-function 'bar) ⇒ (lambda (n) (+ n 2))
(fset 'baz 'bar) ⇒ bar
(symbol-function 'baz) ⇒ bar
If you have never given a symbol any function definition, we say
that that symbol’s function cell is void. In other words, the
function cell does not have any Lisp object in it. If you try to call
the symbol as a function, Emacs signals a void-function
error.
Note that void is not the same as nil
or the symbol
void
. The symbols nil
and void
are Lisp objects,
and can be stored into a function cell just as any other object can be
(and void
can be a valid function if you define it with
defun
). A void function cell contains no object whatsoever.
You can test the voidness of a symbol’s function definition with
fboundp
. After you have given a symbol a function definition, you
can make it void once more using fmakunbound
.
This function returns t
if the symbol has an object in its
function cell, nil
otherwise. It does not check that the object
is a legitimate function.
This function makes symbol’s function cell void, so that a
subsequent attempt to access this cell will cause a
void-function
error. It returns symbol. (See also
makunbound
, in When a Variable is Void.)
(defun foo (x) x) (foo 1) ⇒1
(fmakunbound 'foo) ⇒ foo
(foo 1) error→ Symbol's function definition is void: foo
This function stores definition in the function cell of symbol. The result is definition. Normally definition should be a function or the name of a function, but this is not checked. The argument symbol is an ordinary evaluated argument.
The primary use of this function is as a subroutine by constructs that define
or alter functions, like defun
or advice-add
(see Advising Emacs Lisp Functions). You can also use it to give a symbol a function definition that
is not a function, e.g., a keyboard macro (see Keyboard Macros):
;; Define a named keyboard macro.
(fset 'kill-two-lines "\^u2\^k")
⇒ "\^u2\^k"
If you wish to use fset
to make an alternate name for a
function, consider using defalias
instead. See Definition of defalias.
As explained in Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings, Emacs can optionally enable
lexical binding of variables. When lexical binding is enabled, any
named function that you create (e.g., with defun
), as well as
any anonymous function that you create using the lambda
macro
or the function
special form or the #'
syntax
(see Anonymous Functions), is automatically converted into a
closure.
A closure is a function that also carries a record of the lexical environment that existed when the function was defined. When it is invoked, any lexical variable references within its definition use the retained lexical environment. In all other respects, closures behave much like ordinary functions; in particular, they can be called in the same way as ordinary functions.
See Lexical Binding, for an example of using a closure.
Currently, an Emacs Lisp closure object is represented by a list
with the symbol closure
as the first element, a list
representing the lexical environment as the second element, and the
argument list and body forms as the remaining elements:
;; lexical binding is enabled.
(lambda (x) (* x x))
⇒ (closure (t) (x) (* x x))
However, the fact that the internal structure of a closure is exposed to the rest of the Lisp world is considered an internal implementation detail. For this reason, we recommend against directly examining or altering the structure of closure objects.
Traditionally, functions are opaque objects which offer no other functionality but to call them. (Emacs Lisp functions aren’t fully opaque since you can extract some info out of them such as their docstring, their arglist, or their interactive spec, but they are still mostly opaque.) This is usually what we want, but occasionally we need functions to expose a bit more information about themselves.
Open closures, or OClosures for short, are function objects which carry additional type information and expose some information about themselves in the form of slots which you can access via accessor functions.
OClosures are defined in two steps: first you use
oclosure-define
to define a new OClosure type by specifying the
slots carried by the OClosures of this type, and then you use
oclosure-lambda
to create an OClosure object of a given type.
Let’s say we want to define keyboard macros, i.e. interactive functions which re-execute a sequence of key events (see Keyboard Macros). You could do it with a plain function as follows:
(defun kbd-macro (key-sequence) (lambda (&optional arg) (interactive "P") (execute-kbd-macro key-sequence arg)))
But with such a definition there is no easy way to extract the key-sequence from that function, for example to print it.
We can solve this problem using OClosures as follows. First we define
the type of our keyboard macros (to which we decided to add
a counter
slot while at it):
(oclosure-define kbd-macro "Keyboard macro." keys (counter :mutable t))
After which we can rewrite our kbd-macro
function:
(defun kbd-macro (key-sequence) (oclosure-lambda (kbd-macro (keys key-sequence) (counter 0)) (&optional arg) (interactive "P") (execute-kbd-macro keys arg) (setq counter (1+ counter))))
As you can see, the keys
and counter
slots of the
OClosure can be accessed as local variables from within the body
of the OClosure. But we can now also access them from outside of the
body of the OClosure, for example to describe a keyboard macro:
(defun describe-kbd-macro (km) (if (not (eq 'kbd-macro (oclosure-type km))) (message "Not a keyboard macro") (let ((keys (kbd-macro--keys km)) (counter (kbd-macro--counter km))) (message "Keys=%S, called %d times" keys counter))))
Where kbd-macro--keys
and kbd-macro--counter
are
accessor functions generated by the oclosure-define
macro for
oclosures whose type is kbd-macro
.
This macro defines a new OClosure type along with accessor functions
for its slots. oname can be a symbol (the name of the new
type), or a list of the form
(oname . type-props)
, in which case
type-props is a list of additional properties of this oclosure
type. slots is a list of slot descriptions where each slot can
be either a symbol (the name of the slot) or it can be of the form
(slot-name . slot-props)
, where
slot-props is a property list of the corresponding slot
slot-name.
The OClosure type’s properties specified by type-props can
include the following:
(:predicate pred-name)
This requests creation of a predicate function named pred-name.
This function will be used to recognize OClosures of the type
oname. If this type property is not specified,
oclosure-define
will generate a default name for the
predicate.
(:parent otype)
This makes type otype of OClosures be the parent of the type oname. The OClosures of type oname inherit the slots defined by their parent type.
(:copier copier-name copier-args)
This causes the definition of a functional update function, knows as the copier, which takes an OClosure of type oname as its first argument and returns a copy of it with the slots named in copier-args modified to contain the value passed in the corresponding argument in the actual call to copier-name.
For each slot in slots, the oclosure-define
macro creates
an accessor function named oname--slot-name
; these
can be used to access the values of the slots. The slot definitions
in slots can specify the following properties of the slots:
:mutable val
By default, slots are immutable, but if you specify the
:mutable
property with a non-nil
value, the slot can be
mutated, for example with setf
(see The setf
Macro).
:type val-type
This specifies the type of the values expected to appear in the slot.
This macro creates an anonymous OClosure of type type, which
should have been defined with oclosure-define
. slots
should be a list of elements of the form
(slot-name expr)
. At run time, each expr
is evaluated, in order, after which the OClosure is created with its
slots initialized with the resulting values.
When called as a function (see Calling Functions), the OClosure created by this macro will accept arguments according to arglist and will execute the code in body. body can refer to the value of any of its slot directly as if it were a local variable that had been captured by static scoping.
This function returns the OClosure type (a symbol) of object if
it is an OClosure, and nil
otherwise.
One other function related to OClosures is
oclosure-interactive-form
, which allows some types of OClosures
to compute their interactive forms dynamically. See oclosure-interactive-form.
When you need to modify a function defined in another library, or when you need
to modify a hook like foo-function
, a process filter, or basically
any variable or object field which holds a function value, you can use the
appropriate setter function, such as fset
or defun
for named
functions, setq
for hook variables, or set-process-filter
for
process filters, but those are often too blunt, completely throwing away the
previous value.
The advice feature lets you add to the existing definition of a function, by advising the function. This is a cleaner method than redefining the whole function.
Emacs’s advice system provides two sets of primitives for that: the core set,
for function values held in variables and object fields (with the corresponding
primitives being add-function
and remove-function
) and another
set layered on top of it for named functions (with the main primitives being
advice-add
and advice-remove
).
As a trivial example, here’s how to add advice that’ll modify the return value of a function every time it’s called:
(defun my-double (x) (* x 2)) (defun my-increase (x) (+ x 1)) (advice-add 'my-double :filter-return #'my-increase)
After adding this advice, if you call my-double
with ‘3’,
the return value will be ‘7’. To remove this advice, say
(advice-remove 'my-double #'my-increase)
A more advanced example would be to trace the calls to the process filter of a process proc:
(defun my-tracing-function (proc string) (message "Proc %S received %S" proc string)) (add-function :before (process-filter proc) #'my-tracing-function)
This will cause the process’s output to be passed to my-tracing-function
before being passed to the original process filter. my-tracing-function
receives the same arguments as the original function. When you’re done with
it, you can revert to the untraced behavior with:
(remove-function (process-filter proc) #'my-tracing-function)
Similarly, if you want to trace the execution of the function named
display-buffer
, you could use:
(defun his-tracing-function (orig-fun &rest args) (message "display-buffer called with args %S" args) (let ((res (apply orig-fun args))) (message "display-buffer returned %S" res) res)) (advice-add 'display-buffer :around #'his-tracing-function)
Here, his-tracing-function
is called instead of the original function
and receives the original function (additionally to that function’s arguments)
as argument, so it can call it if and when it needs to.
When you’re tired of seeing this output, you can revert to the untraced
behavior with:
(advice-remove 'display-buffer #'his-tracing-function)
The arguments :before
and :around
used in the above examples
specify how the two functions are composed, since there are many different
ways to do it. The added function is also called a piece of advice.
This macro is the handy way to add the advice function to the function stored in place (see Generalized Variables).
where determines how function is composed with the existing function, e.g., whether function should be called before, or after the original function. See Ways to compose advice, for the list of available ways to compose the two functions.
When modifying a variable (whose name will usually end with -function
),
you can choose whether function is used globally or only in the current
buffer: if place is just a symbol, then function is added to the
global value of place. Whereas if place is of the form
(local symbol)
, where symbol is an expression which returns
the variable name, then function will only be added in the
current buffer. Finally, if you want to modify a lexical variable, you will
have to use (var variable)
.
Every function added with add-function
can be accompanied by an
association list of properties props. Currently only two of those
properties have a special meaning:
name
This gives a name to the advice, which remove-function
can use to
identify which function to remove. Typically used when function is an
anonymous function.
depth
This specifies how to order the advice, should several pieces of advice be present. By default, the depth is 0. A depth of 100 indicates that this piece of advice should be kept as deep as possible, whereas a depth of −100 indicates that it should stay as the outermost piece. When two pieces of advice specify the same depth, the most recently added one will be outermost.
For :before
advice, being outermost means that this advice will
be run first, before any other advice, whereas being innermost means
that it will run right before the original function, with no other
advice run between itself and the original function. Similarly, for
:after
advice innermost means that it will run right after the
original function, with no other advice run in between, whereas
outermost means that it will be run right at the end after all other
advice. An innermost :override
piece of advice will only
override the original function and other pieces of advice will apply
to it, whereas an outermost :override
piece of advice will
override not only the original function but all other advice applied
to it as well.
If function is not interactive, then the combined function will inherit
the interactive spec, if any, of the original function. Else, the combined
function will be interactive and will use the interactive spec of
function. One exception: if the interactive spec of function
is a function (i.e., a lambda
expression or an fbound
symbol rather than an expression or a string), then the interactive
spec of the combined function will be a call to that function with
the interactive spec of the original function as sole argument. To
interpret the spec received as argument, use
advice-eval-interactive-spec
.
Note: The interactive spec of function will apply to the combined
function and should hence obey the calling convention of the combined function
rather than that of function. In many cases, it makes no difference
since they are identical, but it does matter for :around
,
:filter-args
, and :filter-return
, where function
receives different arguments than the original function stored in
place.
This macro removes function from the function stored in
place. This only works if function was added to place
using add-function
.
function is compared with functions added to place using
equal
, to try and make it work also with lambda expressions. It is
additionally compared also with the name
property of the functions added
to place, which can be more reliable than comparing lambda expressions
using equal
.
Return non-nil
if advice is already in function-def.
Like for remove-function
above, instead of advice being the actual
function, it can also be the name
of the piece of advice.
Call the function f for every piece of advice that was added to function-def. f is called with two arguments: the advice function and its properties.
Evaluate the interactive spec just like an interactive call to a function
with such a spec would, and then return the corresponding list of arguments
that was built. E.g., (advice-eval-interactive-spec "r\nP")
will
return a list of three elements, containing the boundaries of the region and
the current prefix argument.
For instance, if you want to make the C-x m
(compose-mail
) command prompt for a ‘From:’ header, you
could say something like this:
(defun my-compose-mail-advice (orig &rest args) "Read From: address interactively." (interactive (lambda (spec) (let* ((user-mail-address (completing-read "From: " '("one.address@example.net" "alternative.address@example.net"))) (from (message-make-from user-full-name user-mail-address)) (spec (advice-eval-interactive-spec spec))) ;; Put the From header into the OTHER-HEADERS argument. (push (cons 'From from) (nth 2 spec)) spec))) (apply orig args)) (advice-add 'compose-mail :around #'my-compose-mail-advice)
A common use of advice is for named functions and macros.
You could just use add-function
as in:
(add-function :around (symbol-function 'fun) #'his-tracing-function)
But you should use advice-add
and advice-remove
for that
instead. This separate set of functions to manipulate pieces of advice applied
to named functions, offers the following extra features compared to
add-function
: they know how to deal with macros and autoloaded
functions, they let describe-function
preserve the original docstring as
well as document the added advice, and they let you add and remove advice
before a function is even defined.
advice-add
can be useful for altering the behavior of existing calls
to an existing function without having to redefine the whole function.
However, it can be a source of bugs, since existing callers to the function may
assume the old behavior, and work incorrectly when the behavior is changed by
advice. Advice can also cause confusion in debugging, if the person doing the
debugging does not notice or remember that the function has been modified
by advice.
For these reasons, advice should be reserved for the cases where you cannot modify a function’s behavior in any other way. If it is possible to do the same thing via a hook, that is preferable (see Hooks). If you simply want to change what a particular key does, it may be better to write a new command, and remap the old command’s key bindings to the new one (see Remapping Commands).
If you are writing code for release, for others to use, try to avoid
including advice in it. If the function you want to advise has no
hook to do the job, please talk with the Emacs developers about adding
a suitable hook. Especially, Emacs’s own source files should not put
advice on functions in Emacs. (There are currently a few exceptions
to this convention, but we aim to correct them.) It is generally
cleaner to create a new hook in foo
, and make bar
use
the hook, than to have bar
put advice in foo
.
Special forms (see Special Forms) cannot be advised, however macros can be advised, in much the same way as functions. Of course, this will not affect code that has already been macro-expanded, so you need to make sure the advice is installed before the macro is expanded.
It is possible to advise a primitive (see What Is a Function?), but one should typically not do so, for two reasons. Firstly, some primitives are used by the advice mechanism, and advising them could cause an infinite recursion. Secondly, many primitives are called directly from C, and such calls ignore advice; hence, one ends up in a confusing situation where some calls (occurring from Lisp code) obey the advice and other calls (from C code) do not.
This macro defines a piece of advice and adds it to the function named
symbol. The advice is an anonymous function if name is
nil
or a function named symbol@name
. See
advice-add
for explanation of other arguments.
Add the advice function to the named function symbol.
where and props have the same meaning as for add-function
(see Primitives to manipulate advices).
Remove the advice function from the named function symbol.
function can also be the name
of a piece of advice.
Return non-nil
if the advice function is already in the named
function symbol. function can also be the name
of
a piece of advice.
Call function for every piece of advice that was added to the named function symbol. function is called with two arguments: the advice function and its properties.
Here are the different possible values for the where argument of
add-function
and advice-add
, specifying how the advice
function and the original function should be composed.
:before
Call function before the old function. Both functions receive the same arguments, and the return value of the composition is the return value of the old function. More specifically, the composition of the two functions behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (apply function r) (apply oldfun r))
(add-function :before funvar function)
is comparable for
single-function hooks to (add-hook 'hookvar function)
for
normal hooks.
:after
Call function after the old function. Both functions receive the same arguments, and the return value of the composition is the return value of the old function. More specifically, the composition of the two functions behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (prog1 (apply oldfun r) (apply function r)))
(add-function :after funvar function)
is comparable for
single-function hooks to (add-hook 'hookvar function
'append)
for normal hooks.
:override
This completely replaces the old function with the new one. The old function
can of course be recovered if you later call remove-function
.
:around
Call function instead of the old function, but provide the old function as an extra argument to function. This is the most flexible composition. For example, it lets you call the old function with different arguments, or many times, or within a let-binding, or you can sometimes delegate the work to the old function and sometimes override it completely. More specifically, the composition of the two functions behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (apply function oldfun r))
:before-while
Call function before the old function and don’t call the old
function if function returns nil
. Both functions receive the
same arguments, and the return value of the composition is the return value of
the old function. More specifically, the composition of the two functions
behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (and (apply function r) (apply oldfun r)))
(add-function :before-while funvar function)
is comparable
for single-function hooks to (add-hook 'hookvar function)
when hookvar is run via run-hook-with-args-until-failure
.
:before-until
Call function before the old function and only call the old function if
function returns nil
. More specifically, the composition of the
two functions behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (or (apply function r) (apply oldfun r)))
(add-function :before-until funvar function)
is comparable
for single-function hooks to (add-hook 'hookvar function)
when hookvar is run via run-hook-with-args-until-success
.
:after-while
Call function after the old function and only if the old function
returned non-nil
. Both functions receive the same arguments, and the
return value of the composition is the return value of function.
More specifically, the composition of the two functions behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (and (apply oldfun r) (apply function r)))
(add-function :after-while funvar function)
is comparable
for single-function hooks to (add-hook 'hookvar function
'append)
when hookvar is run via
run-hook-with-args-until-failure
.
:after-until
Call function after the old function and only if the old function
returned nil
. More specifically, the composition of the two functions
behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (or (apply oldfun r) (apply function r)))
(add-function :after-until funvar function)
is comparable
for single-function hooks to (add-hook 'hookvar function
'append)
when hookvar is run via
run-hook-with-args-until-success
.
:filter-args
Call function first and use the result (which should be a list) as the new arguments to pass to the old function. More specifically, the composition of the two functions behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (apply oldfun (funcall function r)))
:filter-return
Call the old function first and pass the result to function. More specifically, the composition of the two functions behaves like:
(lambda (&rest r) (funcall function (apply oldfun r)))
A lot of code uses the old defadvice
mechanism, which is largely made
obsolete by the new advice-add
, whose implementation and semantics is
significantly simpler.
An old piece of advice such as:
(defadvice previous-line (before next-line-at-end (&optional arg try-vscroll)) "Insert an empty line when moving up from the top line." (if (and next-line-add-newlines (= arg 1) (save-excursion (beginning-of-line) (bobp))) (progn (beginning-of-line) (newline))))
could be translated in the new advice mechanism into a plain function:
(defun previous-line--next-line-at-end (&optional arg try-vscroll) "Insert an empty line when moving up from the top line." (if (and next-line-add-newlines (= arg 1) (save-excursion (beginning-of-line) (bobp))) (progn (beginning-of-line) (newline))))
Obviously, this does not actually modify previous-line
. For that the
old advice needed:
(ad-activate 'previous-line)
whereas the new advice mechanism needs:
(advice-add 'previous-line :before #'previous-line--next-line-at-end)
Note that ad-activate
had a global effect: it activated all pieces of
advice enabled for that specified function. If you wanted to only activate or
deactivate a particular piece, you needed to enable or disable
it with ad-enable-advice
and ad-disable-advice
.
The new mechanism does away with this distinction.
Around advice such as:
(defadvice foo (around foo-around) "Ignore case in `foo'." (let ((case-fold-search t)) ad-do-it)) (ad-activate 'foo)
could translate into:
(defun foo--foo-around (orig-fun &rest args) "Ignore case in `foo'." (let ((case-fold-search t)) (apply orig-fun args))) (advice-add 'foo :around #'foo--foo-around)
Regarding the advice’s class, note that the new :before
is not
quite equivalent to the old before
, because in the old advice you could
modify the function’s arguments (e.g., with ad-set-arg
), and that would
affect the argument values seen by the original function, whereas in the new
:before
, modifying an argument via setq
in the advice has no
effect on the arguments seen by the original function.
When porting before
advice which relied on this behavior, you’ll need
to turn it into new :around
or :filter-args
advice instead.
Similarly old after
advice could modify the returned value by
changing ad-return-value
, whereas new :after
advice cannot, so
when porting such old after
advice, you’ll need to turn it into new
:around
or :filter-return
advice instead.
Not all functions can be reliably advised. The byte compiler may choose to replace a call to a function with a sequence of instructions that doesn’t call the function you were interested in altering.
This usually happens due to one of the three following mechanisms:
byte-compile
propertiesIf a function’s symbol has a byte-compile
property, that
property will be used instead of the symbol’s function definition.
See Byte-Compilation Functions.
byte-optimize
propertiesIf a function’s symbol has a byte-optimize
property, the byte
compiler may rewrite the function arguments, or decide to use a
different function altogether.
compiler-macro
declare formsA function can have a special compiler-macro
declare
form in its definition (see The declare
Form) that defines an
expander to call when compiling the function. The expander
could then cause the produced byte-code not to call the original
function.
You can mark a named function as obsolete, meaning that it may be removed at some point in the future. This causes Emacs to warn that the function is obsolete whenever it byte-compiles code containing that function, and whenever it displays the documentation for that function. In all other respects, an obsolete function behaves like any other function.
The easiest way to mark a function as obsolete is to put a
(declare (obsolete …))
form in the function’s
defun
definition. See The declare
Form. Alternatively, you can
use the make-obsolete
function, described below.
A macro (see Macros) can also be marked obsolete with
make-obsolete
; this has the same effects as for a function. An
alias for a function or macro can also be marked as obsolete; this
makes the alias itself obsolete, not the function or macro which it
resolves to.
This function marks obsolete-name as obsolete. obsolete-name should be a symbol naming a function or macro, or an alias for a function or macro.
If current-name is a symbol, the warning message says to use
current-name instead of obsolete-name. current-name
does not need to be an alias for obsolete-name; it can be a
different function with similar functionality. current-name can
also be a string, which serves as the warning message. The message
should begin in lower case, and end with a period. It can also be
nil
, in which case the warning message provides no additional
details.
The argument when should be a string indicating when the function was first made obsolete—for example, a date or a release number.
This convenience macro marks the function obsolete-name obsolete and also defines it as an alias for the function current-name. It is equivalent to the following:
(defalias obsolete-name current-name doc) (make-obsolete obsolete-name current-name when)
In addition, you can mark a particular calling convention for a function as obsolete:
This function specifies the argument list signature as the correct way to call function. This causes the Emacs byte compiler to issue a warning whenever it comes across an Emacs Lisp program that calls function any other way (however, it will still allow the code to be byte compiled). when should be a string indicating when the variable was first made obsolete (usually a version number string).
For instance, in old versions of Emacs the sit-for
function
accepted three arguments, like this
(sit-for seconds milliseconds nodisp)
However, calling sit-for
this way is considered obsolete
(see Waiting for Elapsed Time or Input). The old calling convention is deprecated like
this:
(set-advertised-calling-convention 'sit-for '(seconds &optional nodisp) "22.1")
The alternative to using this function is the
advertised-calling-convention
declare
spec, see
The declare
Form.
An inline function is a function that works just like an ordinary function, except for one thing: when you byte-compile a call to the function (see Byte Compilation), the function’s definition is expanded into the caller.
The simple way to define an inline function, is to write
defsubst
instead of defun
. The rest of the definition
looks just the same, but using defsubst
says to make it inline
for byte compilation.
This macro defines an inline function. Its syntax is exactly the same
as defun
(see Defining Functions).
Making a function inline often makes its function calls run faster. But it also has disadvantages. For one thing, it reduces flexibility; if you change the definition of the function, calls already inlined still use the old definition until you recompile them.
Another disadvantage is that making a large function inline can increase the size of compiled code both in files and in memory. Since the speed advantage of inline functions is greatest for small functions, you generally should not make large functions inline.
Also, inline functions do not behave well with respect to debugging,
tracing, and advising (see Advising Emacs Lisp Functions). Since ease of
debugging and the flexibility of redefining functions are important
features of Emacs, you should not make a function inline, even if it’s
small, unless its speed is really crucial, and you’ve timed the code
to verify that using defun
actually has performance problems.
After an inline function is defined, its inline expansion can be performed later on in the same file, just like macros.
It’s possible to use defmacro
to define a macro to expand
into the same code that an inline function would execute
(see Macros). But the macro would be limited to direct use in
expressions—a macro cannot be called with apply
,
mapcar
and so on. Also, it takes some work to convert an
ordinary function into a macro. To convert it into an inline function
is easy; just replace defun
with defsubst
. Since each
argument of an inline function is evaluated exactly once, you needn’t
worry about how many times the body uses the arguments, as you do for
macros.
Alternatively, you can define a function by providing the code which
will inline it as a compiler macro (see The declare
Form). The
following macros make this possible.
Define a function name by providing code that does its inlining, as a compiler macro. The function will accept the argument list args and will have the specified body.
If present, doc should be the function’s documentation string
(see Documentation Strings of Functions); declare, if present, should be
a declare
form (see The declare
Form) specifying the function’s
metadata.
Functions defined via define-inline
have several advantages
with respect to macros defined by defsubst
or defmacro
:
mapcar
(see Mapping Functions).
cl-defsubst
(see Argument Lists in Common Lisp Extensions for GNU Emacs
Lisp).
Like defmacro
, a function inlined with define-inline
inherits the scoping rules, either dynamic or lexical, from the call
site. See Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings.
The following macros should be used in the body of a function defined
by define-inline
.
Quote expression for define-inline
. This is similar to
the backquote (see Backquote), but quotes code and accepts only
,
, not ,@
.
This provides a convenient way to ensure that the arguments to an inlined function are evaluated exactly once, as well as to create local variables.
It’s similar to let
(see Local Variables): It sets up local
variables as specified by bindings, and then evaluates
body with those bindings in effect.
Each element of bindings should be either a symbol or a list of
the form (var expr)
; the result is to evaluate
expr and bind var to the result. However, when an element
of bindings is just a symbol var, the result of evaluating
var is re-bound to var (which is quite different from the
way let
works).
The tail of bindings can be either nil
or a symbol which
should hold a list of arguments, in which case each argument is
evaluated, and the symbol is bound to the resulting list.
Return non-nil
if the value of expression is already
known.
Return the value of expression.
Signal an error, formatting args according to format.
Here’s an example of using define-inline
:
(define-inline myaccessor (obj) (inline-letevals (obj) (inline-quote (if (foo-p ,obj) (aref (cdr ,obj) 3) (aref ,obj 2)))))
This is equivalent to
(defsubst myaccessor (obj) (if (foo-p obj) (aref (cdr obj) 3) (aref obj 2)))
declare
Form ¶declare
is a special macro which can be used to add meta
properties to a function or macro: for example, marking it as
obsolete, or giving its forms a special TAB indentation
convention in Emacs Lisp mode.
This macro ignores its arguments and evaluates to nil
; it has
no run-time effect. However, when a declare
form occurs in the
declare argument of a defun
or defsubst
function
definition (see Defining Functions) or a defmacro
macro
definition (see Defining Macros), it appends the properties
specified by specs to the function or macro. This work is
specially performed by defun
, defsubst
, and
defmacro
.
Each element in specs should have the form (property
args…)
, which should not be quoted. These have the
following effects:
(advertised-calling-convention signature when)
¶This acts like a call to set-advertised-calling-convention
(see Declaring Functions Obsolete); signature specifies the correct
argument list for calling the function or macro, and when should
be a string indicating when the old argument list was first made obsolete.
(debug edebug-form-spec)
This is valid for macros only. When stepping through the macro with Edebug, use edebug-form-spec. See Instrumenting Macro Calls.
(doc-string n)
This is used when defining a function or macro which itself will be used to define entities like functions, macros, or variables. It indicates that the nth argument, if any, should be considered as a documentation string.
(indent indent-spec)
Indent calls to this function or macro according to indent-spec. This is typically used for macros, though it works for functions too. See Indenting Macros.
(interactive-only value)
Set the function’s interactive-only
property to value.
See The interactive-only property.
(obsolete current-name when)
¶Mark the function or macro as obsolete, similar to a call to
make-obsolete
(see Declaring Functions Obsolete). current-name
should be a symbol (in which case the warning message says to use that
instead), a string (specifying the warning message), or nil
(in
which case the warning message gives no extra details). when
should be a string indicating when the function or macro was first
made obsolete.
(compiler-macro expander)
¶This can only be used for functions, and tells the compiler to use
expander as an optimization function. When encountering a call to the
function, of the form (function args…)
, the macro
expander will call expander with that form as well as with
args…, and expander can either return a new expression to use
instead of the function call, or it can return just the form unchanged,
to indicate that the function call should be left alone.
When expander is a lambda form it should be written with
a single argument (i.e., be of the form (lambda (arg)
body)
) because the function’s formal arguments are
automatically added to the lambda’s list of arguments for you.
(gv-expander expander)
Declare expander to be the function to handle calls to the macro (or
function) as a generalized variable, similarly to gv-define-expander
.
expander can be a symbol or it can be of the form (lambda
(arg) body)
in which case that function will additionally have
access to the macro (or function)’s arguments.
(gv-setter setter)
Declare setter to be the function to handle calls to the macro (or
function) as a generalized variable. setter can be a symbol in which
case it will be passed to gv-define-simple-setter
, or it can be of the
form (lambda (arg) body)
in which case that function will
additionally have access to the macro (or function)’s arguments and it will
be passed to gv-define-setter
.
(completion completion-predicate)
Declare completion-predicate as a function to determine whether
to include a function’s symbol in the list of functions when asking
for completions in M-x. This predicate function will only be
called when read-extended-command-predicate
is customized to
command-completion-default-include-p
; by default the value of
read-extended-command-predicate
is nil (see execute-extended-command). The predicate
completion-predicate is called with two arguments: the
function’s symbol and the current buffer.
(modes modes)
Specify that this command is meant to be applicable only to specified modes. See Specifying Modes For Commands.
(interactive-args arg ...)
Specify the arguments that should be stored for repeat-command
.
Each arg is on the form argument-name form
.
(pure val)
If val is non-nil
, this function is pure
(see What Is a Function?). This is the same as the pure
property of the function’s symbol (see Standard Symbol Properties).
(side-effect-free val)
If val is non-nil
, this function is free of side effects,
so the byte compiler can ignore calls whose value is ignored. This is
the same as the side-effect-free
property of the function’s
symbol, see Standard Symbol Properties.
(speed n)
Specify the value of native-comp-speed
in effect for native
compilation of this function (see Native-Compilation Variables).
This allows function-level control of the optimization level used for
native code emitted for the function. In particular, if n is
−1, native compilation of the function will emit bytecode
instead of native code for the function.
no-font-lock-keyword
This is valid for macros only. Macros with this declaration are highlighted by font-lock (see Font Lock Mode) as normal functions, not specially as macros.
Byte-compiling a file often produces warnings about functions that the compiler doesn’t know about (see Compiler Errors). Sometimes this indicates a real problem, but usually the functions in question are defined in other files which would be loaded if that code is run. For example, byte-compiling simple.el used to warn:
simple.el:8727:1:Warning: the function ‘shell-mode’ is not known to be defined.
In fact, shell-mode
is used only in a function that executes
(require 'shell)
before calling shell-mode
, so
shell-mode
will be defined properly at run-time. When you know
that such a warning does not indicate a real problem, it is good to
suppress the warning. That makes new warnings which might mean real
problems more visible. You do that with declare-function
.
All you need to do is add a declare-function
statement before the
first use of the function in question:
(declare-function shell-mode "shell" ())
This says that shell-mode
is defined in shell.el (the
‘.el’ can be omitted). The compiler takes for granted that that file
really defines the function, and does not check.
The optional third argument specifies the argument list of
shell-mode
. In this case, it takes no arguments
(nil
is different from not specifying a value). In other
cases, this might be something like (file &optional overwrite)
.
You don’t have to specify the argument list, but if you do the
byte compiler can check that the calls match the declaration.
Tell the byte compiler to assume that function is defined in the
file file. The optional third argument arglist is either
t
, meaning the argument list is unspecified, or a list of
formal parameters in the same style as defun
(including the
parentheses). An omitted arglist defaults to t
, not
nil
; this is atypical behavior for omitted arguments, and it
means that to supply a fourth but not third argument one must specify
t
for the third-argument placeholder instead of the usual
nil
. The optional fourth argument fileonly
non-nil
means check only that file exists, not that it
actually defines function.
To verify that these functions really are declared where
declare-function
says they are, use check-declare-file
to check all declare-function
calls in one source file, or use
check-declare-directory
check all the files in and under a
certain directory.
These commands find the file that ought to contain a function’s
definition using locate-library
; if that finds no file, they
expand the definition file name relative to the directory of the file
that contains the declare-function
call.
You can also say that a function is a primitive by specifying a file name ending in ‘.c’ or ‘.m’. This is useful only when you call a primitive that is defined only on certain systems. Most primitives are always defined, so they will never give you a warning.
Sometimes a file will optionally use functions from an external package.
If you prefix the filename in the declare-function
statement with
‘ext:’, then it will be checked if it is found, otherwise skipped
without error.
There are some function definitions that ‘check-declare’ does not
understand (e.g., defstruct
and some other macros). In such cases,
you can pass a non-nil
fileonly argument to
declare-function
, meaning to only check that the file exists, not
that it actually defines the function. Note that to do this without
having to specify an argument list, you should set the arglist
argument to t
(because nil
means an empty argument list, as
opposed to an unspecified one).
Some major modes, such as SES, call functions that are stored in user files. (See Simple Emacs Spreadsheet, for more information on SES.) User files sometimes have poor pedigrees—you can get a spreadsheet from someone you’ve just met, or you can get one through email from someone you’ve never met. So it is risky to call a function whose source code is stored in a user file until you have determined that it is safe.
Returns nil
if form is a safe Lisp expression, or
returns a list that describes why it might be unsafe. The argument
unsafep-vars is a list of symbols known to have temporary
bindings at this point; it is mainly used for internal recursive
calls. The current buffer is an implicit argument, which provides a
list of buffer-local bindings.
Being quick and simple, unsafep
does a very light analysis and
rejects many Lisp expressions that are actually safe. There are no
known cases where unsafep
returns nil
for an unsafe
expression. However, a safe Lisp expression can return a string
with a display
property, containing an associated Lisp
expression to be executed after the string is inserted into a buffer.
This associated expression can be a virus. In order to be safe, you
must delete properties from all strings calculated by user code before
inserting them into buffers.
Here is a table of several functions that do things related to function calling and function definitions. They are documented elsewhere, but we provide cross references here.
apply
See Calling Functions.
autoload
See Autoload.
call-interactively
See Interactive Call.
called-interactively-p
commandp
See Interactive Call.
documentation
eval
See Eval.
funcall
See Calling Functions.
function
See Anonymous Functions.
ignore
See Calling Functions.
indirect-function
interactive
See Using interactive
.
interactive-p
mapatoms
mapcar
See Mapping Functions.
map-char-table
See Char-Tables.
mapconcat
See Mapping Functions.
undefined
Macros enable you to define new control constructs and other language features. A macro is defined much like a function, but instead of telling how to compute a value, it tells how to compute another Lisp expression which will in turn compute the value. We call this expression the expansion of the macro.
Macros can do this because they operate on the unevaluated expressions for the arguments, not on the argument values as functions do. They can therefore construct an expansion containing these argument expressions or parts of them.
If you are using a macro to do something an ordinary function could do, just for the sake of speed, consider using an inline function instead. See Inline Functions.
Suppose we would like to define a Lisp construct to increment a
variable value, much like the ++
operator in C. We would like to
write (inc x)
and have the effect of (setq x (1+ x))
.
Here’s a macro definition that does the job:
(defmacro inc (var) (list 'setq var (list '1+ var)))
When this is called with (inc x)
, the argument var is the
symbol x
—not the value of x
, as it would
be in a function. The body of the macro uses this to construct the
expansion, which is (setq x (1+ x))
. Once the macro definition
returns this expansion, Lisp proceeds to evaluate it, thus incrementing
x
.
This predicate tests whether its argument is a macro, and returns
t
if so, nil
otherwise.
A macro call looks just like a function call in that it is a list which starts with the name of the macro. The rest of the elements of the list are the arguments of the macro.
Evaluation of the macro call begins like evaluation of a function call except for one crucial difference: the macro arguments are the actual expressions appearing in the macro call. They are not evaluated before they are given to the macro definition. By contrast, the arguments of a function are results of evaluating the elements of the function call list.
Having obtained the arguments, Lisp invokes the macro definition just
as a function is invoked. The argument variables of the macro are bound
to the argument values from the macro call, or to a list of them in the
case of a &rest
argument. And the macro body executes and
returns its value just as a function body does.
The second crucial difference between macros and functions is that the value returned by the macro body is an alternate Lisp expression, also known as the expansion of the macro. The Lisp interpreter proceeds to evaluate the expansion as soon as it comes back from the macro.
Since the expansion is evaluated in the normal manner, it may contain calls to other macros. It may even be a call to the same macro, though this is unusual.
Note that Emacs tries to expand macros when loading an uncompiled Lisp file. This is not always possible, but if it is, it speeds up subsequent execution. See How Programs Do Loading.
You can see the expansion of a given macro call by calling
macroexpand
.
This function expands form, if it is a macro call. If the result
is another macro call, it is expanded in turn, until something which is
not a macro call results. That is the value returned by
macroexpand
. If form is not a macro call to begin with, it
is returned as given.
Note that macroexpand
does not look at the subexpressions of
form (although some macro definitions may do so). Even if they
are macro calls themselves, macroexpand
does not expand them.
The function macroexpand
does not expand calls to inline functions.
Normally there is no need for that, since a call to an inline function is
no harder to understand than a call to an ordinary function.
If environment is provided, it specifies an alist of macro definitions that shadow the currently defined macros. Byte compilation uses this feature.
(defmacro inc (var) (list 'setq var (list '1+ var)))
(macroexpand '(inc r)) ⇒ (setq r (1+ r))
(defmacro inc2 (var1 var2) (list 'progn (list 'inc var1) (list 'inc var2)))
(macroexpand '(inc2 r s))
⇒ (progn (inc r) (inc s)) ; inc
not expanded here.
macroexpand-all
expands macros like macroexpand
, but
will look for and expand all macros in form, not just at the
top-level. If no macros are expanded, the return value is eq
to form.
Repeating the example used for macroexpand
above with
macroexpand-all
, we see that macroexpand-all
does
expand the embedded calls to inc
:
(macroexpand-all '(inc2 r s)) ⇒ (progn (setq r (1+ r)) (setq s (1+ s)))
This function expands macros like macroexpand
, but it only
performs one step of the expansion: if the result is another macro
call, macroexpand-1
will not expand it.
You might ask why we take the trouble to compute an expansion for a macro and then evaluate the expansion. Why not have the macro body produce the desired results directly? The reason has to do with compilation.
When a macro call appears in a Lisp program being compiled, the Lisp compiler calls the macro definition just as the interpreter would, and receives an expansion. But instead of evaluating this expansion, it compiles the expansion as if it had appeared directly in the program. As a result, the compiled code produces the value and side effects intended for the macro, but executes at full compiled speed. This would not work if the macro body computed the value and side effects itself—they would be computed at compile time, which is not useful.
In order for compilation of macro calls to work, the macros must
already be defined in Lisp when the calls to them are compiled. The
compiler has a special feature to help you do this: if a file being
compiled contains a defmacro
form, the macro is defined
temporarily for the rest of the compilation of that file.
Byte-compiling a file also executes any require
calls at
top-level in the file, so you can ensure that necessary macro
definitions are available during compilation by requiring the files
that define them (see Features). To avoid loading the macro
definition files when someone runs the compiled program, write
eval-when-compile
around the require
calls (see Evaluation During Compilation).
A Lisp macro object is a list whose CAR is macro
, and
whose CDR is a function. Expansion of the macro works
by applying the function (with apply
) to the list of
unevaluated arguments from the macro call.
It is possible to use an anonymous Lisp macro just like an anonymous
function, but this is never done, because it does not make sense to
pass an anonymous macro to functionals such as mapcar
. In
practice, all Lisp macros have names, and they are almost always
defined with the defmacro
macro.
defmacro
defines the symbol name (which should not be
quoted) as a macro that looks like this:
(macro lambda args . body)
(Note that the CDR of this list is a lambda expression.) This
macro object is stored in the function cell of name. The
meaning of args is the same as in a function, and the keywords
&rest
and &optional
may be used (see Features of Argument Lists).
Neither name nor args should be quoted. The return value
of defmacro
is undefined.
doc, if present, should be a string specifying the macro’s
documentation string. declare, if present, should be a
declare
form specifying metadata for the macro (see The declare
Form). Note that macros cannot have interactive declarations, since
they cannot be called interactively.
Macros often need to construct large list structures from a mixture of constants and nonconstant parts. To make this easier, use the ‘`’ syntax (see Backquote). For example:
(defmacro t-becomes-nil (variable) `(if (eq ,variable t) (setq ,variable nil)))
(t-becomes-nil foo) ≡ (if (eq foo t) (setq foo nil))
Macro expansion can have counterintuitive consequences. This section describes some important consequences that can lead to trouble, and rules to follow to avoid trouble.
The most common problem in writing macros is doing some of the real work prematurely—while expanding the macro, rather than in the expansion itself. For instance, one real package had this macro definition:
(defmacro my-set-buffer-multibyte (arg) (if (fboundp 'set-buffer-multibyte) (set-buffer-multibyte arg)))
With this erroneous macro definition, the program worked fine when
interpreted but failed when compiled. This macro definition called
set-buffer-multibyte
during compilation, which was wrong, and
then did nothing when the compiled package was run. The definition
that the programmer really wanted was this:
(defmacro my-set-buffer-multibyte (arg) (if (fboundp 'set-buffer-multibyte) `(set-buffer-multibyte ,arg)))
This macro expands, if appropriate, into a call to
set-buffer-multibyte
that will be executed when the compiled
program is actually run.
When defining a macro you must pay attention to the number of times the arguments will be evaluated when the expansion is executed. The following macro (used to facilitate iteration) illustrates the problem. This macro allows us to write a for-loop construct.
(defmacro for (var from init to final do &rest body) "Execute a simple \"for\" loop. For example, (for i from 1 to 10 do (print i))." (list 'let (list (list var init)) (cons 'while (cons (list '<= var final) (append body (list (list 'inc var)))))))
(for i from 1 to 3 do (setq square (* i i)) (princ (format "\n%d %d" i square))) →
(let ((i 1)) (while (<= i 3) (setq square (* i i)) (princ (format "\n%d %d" i square)) (inc i)))
-|1 1 -|2 4 -|3 9 ⇒ nil
The arguments from
, to
, and do
in this macro are
syntactic sugar; they are entirely ignored. The idea is that you
will write noise words (such as from
, to
, and do
)
in those positions in the macro call.
Here’s an equivalent definition simplified through use of backquote:
(defmacro for (var from init to final do &rest body) "Execute a simple \"for\" loop. For example, (for i from 1 to 10 do (print i))." `(let ((,var ,init)) (while (<= ,var ,final) ,@body (inc ,var))))
Both forms of this definition (with backquote and without) suffer from
the defect that final is evaluated on every iteration. If
final is a constant, this is not a problem. If it is a more
complex form, say (long-complex-calculation x)
, this can slow
down the execution significantly. If final has side effects,
executing it more than once is probably incorrect.
A well-designed macro definition takes steps to avoid this problem by
producing an expansion that evaluates the argument expressions exactly
once unless repeated evaluation is part of the intended purpose of the
macro. Here is a correct expansion for the for
macro:
(let ((i 1) (max 3)) (while (<= i max) (setq square (* i i)) (princ (format "%d %d" i square)) (inc i)))
Here is a macro definition that creates this expansion:
(defmacro for (var from init to final do &rest body) "Execute a simple for loop: (for i from 1 to 10 do (print i))." `(let ((,var ,init) (max ,final)) (while (<= ,var max) ,@body (inc ,var))))
Unfortunately, this fix introduces another problem, described in the following section.
In the previous section, the definition of for
was fixed as
follows to make the expansion evaluate the macro arguments the proper
number of times:
(defmacro for (var from init to final do &rest body) "Execute a simple for loop: (for i from 1 to 10 do (print i))."
`(let ((,var ,init) (max ,final)) (while (<= ,var max) ,@body (inc ,var))))
The new definition of for
has a new problem: it introduces a
local variable named max
which the user does not expect. This
causes trouble in examples such as the following:
(let ((max 0)) (for x from 0 to 10 do (let ((this (frob x))) (if (< max this) (setq max this)))))
The references to max
inside the body of the for
, which
are supposed to refer to the user’s binding of max
, really access
the binding made by for
.
The way to correct this is to use an uninterned symbol instead of
max
(see Creating and Interning Symbols). The uninterned symbol can be
bound and referred to just like any other symbol, but since it is
created by for
, we know that it cannot already appear in the
user’s program. Since it is not interned, there is no way the user can
put it into the program later. It will never appear anywhere except
where put by for
. Here is a definition of for
that works
this way:
(defmacro for (var from init to final do &rest body) "Execute a simple for loop: (for i from 1 to 10 do (print i))." (let ((tempvar (make-symbol "max"))) `(let ((,var ,init) (,tempvar ,final)) (while (<= ,var ,tempvar) ,@body (inc ,var)))))
This creates an uninterned symbol named max
and puts it in the
expansion instead of the usual interned symbol max
that appears
in expressions ordinarily.
Another problem can happen if the macro definition itself
evaluates any of the macro argument expressions, such as by calling
eval
(see Eval). You have to take into account that macro
expansion may take place long before the code is executed, when the
context of the caller (where the macro expansion will be evaluated) is
not yet accessible.
Also, if your macro definition does not use lexical-binding
, its
formal arguments may hide the user’s variables of the same name. Inside
the macro body, the macro argument binding is the most local binding of
such variable, so any references inside the form being evaluated do refer
to it. Here is an example:
(defmacro foo (a) (list 'setq (eval a) t))
(setq x 'b) (foo x) → (setq b t) ⇒ t ; andb
has been set. ;; but (setq a 'c) (foo a) → (setq a t) ⇒ t ; but this seta
, notc
.
It makes a difference whether the user’s variable is named a
or
x
, because a
conflicts with the macro argument variable
a
.
Also, the expansion of (foo x)
above will return something
different or signal an error when the code is compiled, since in that case
(foo x)
is expanded during compilation, whereas the execution of
(setq x 'b)
will only take place later when the code is executed.
To avoid these problems, don’t evaluate an argument expression while computing the macro expansion. Instead, substitute the expression into the macro expansion, so that its value will be computed as part of executing the expansion. This is how the other examples in this chapter work.
Occasionally problems result from the fact that a macro call is expanded each time it is evaluated in an interpreted function, but is expanded only once (during compilation) for a compiled function. If the macro definition has side effects, they will work differently depending on how many times the macro is expanded.
Therefore, you should avoid side effects in computation of the macro expansion, unless you really know what you are doing.
One special kind of side effect can’t be avoided: constructing Lisp objects. Almost all macro expansions include constructed lists; that is the whole point of most macros. This is usually safe; there is just one case where you must be careful: when the object you construct is part of a quoted constant in the macro expansion.
If the macro is expanded just once, in compilation, then the object is constructed just once, during compilation. But in interpreted execution, the macro is expanded each time the macro call runs, and this means a new object is constructed each time.
In most clean Lisp code, this difference won’t matter. It can matter only if you perform side-effects on the objects constructed by the macro definition. Thus, to avoid trouble, avoid side effects on objects constructed by macro definitions. Here is an example of how such side effects can get you into trouble:
(defmacro empty-object () (list 'quote (cons nil nil)))
(defun initialize (condition) (let ((object (empty-object))) (if condition (setcar object condition)) object))
If initialize
is interpreted, a new list (nil)
is
constructed each time initialize
is called. Thus, no side effect
survives between calls. If initialize
is compiled, then the
macro empty-object
is expanded during compilation, producing a
single constant (nil)
that is reused and altered each time
initialize
is called.
One way to avoid pathological cases like this is to think of
empty-object
as a funny kind of constant, not as a memory
allocation construct. You wouldn’t use setcar
on a constant such
as '(nil)
, so naturally you won’t use it on (empty-object)
either.
Within a macro definition, you can use the declare
form
(see Defining Macros) to specify how TAB should indent
calls to the macro. An indentation specification is written like this:
(declare (indent indent-spec))
This results in the lisp-indent-function
property being set on
the macro name.
Here are the possibilities for indent-spec:
nil
This is the same as no property—use the standard indentation pattern.
defun
Handle this function like a ‘def’ construct: treat the second line as the start of a body.
The first number arguments of the function are
distinguished arguments; the rest are considered the body
of the expression. A line in the expression is indented according to
whether the first argument on it is distinguished or not. If the
argument is part of the body, the line is indented lisp-body-indent
more columns than the open-parenthesis starting the containing
expression. If the argument is distinguished and is either the first
or second argument, it is indented twice that many extra columns.
If the argument is distinguished and not the first or second argument,
the line uses the standard pattern.
symbol should be a function name; that function is called to calculate the indentation of a line within this expression. The function receives two arguments:
The position at which the line being indented begins.
The value returned by parse-partial-sexp
(a Lisp primitive for
indentation and nesting computation) when it parses up to the
beginning of this line.
It should return either a number, which is the number of columns of indentation for that line, or a list whose car is such a number. The difference between returning a number and returning a list is that a number says that all following lines at the same nesting level should be indented just like this one; a list says that following lines might call for different indentations. This makes a difference when the indentation is being computed by C-M-q; if the value is a number, C-M-q need not recalculate indentation for the following lines until the end of the list.
Users of Emacs can customize variables and faces without writing Lisp code, by using the Customize interface. See Easy Customization in The GNU Emacs Manual. This chapter describes how to define customization items that users can interact with through the Customize interface.
Customization items include customizable variables, which are
defined with the
defcustom
macro;
customizable faces, which are defined with defface
(described
separately in Defining Faces); and customization groups,
defined with
defgroup
,
which act as containers for groups of related customization items.
The customization declarations that we will describe in the next few
sections—defcustom
, defgroup
, etc.—all accept
keyword arguments (see Variables that Never Change) for specifying various
information. This section describes keywords that apply to all types
of customization declarations.
All of these keywords, except :tag
, can be used more than once
in a given item. Each use of the keyword has an independent effect.
The keyword :tag
is an exception because any given item can only
display one name.
:tag label
¶Use label, a string, instead of the item’s name, to label the item in customization menus and buffers. Don’t use a tag which is substantially different from the item’s real name; that would cause confusion.
:group group
¶Put this customization item in group group. If this keyword is missing from a customization item, it’ll be placed in the same group that was last defined (in the current file).
When you use :group
in a defgroup
, it makes the new
group a subgroup of group.
If you use this keyword more than once, you can put a single item into more than one group. Displaying any of those groups will show this item. Please don’t overdo this, since the result would be annoying.
:link link-data
¶Include an external link after the documentation string for this item. This is a sentence containing a button that references some other documentation.
There are several alternatives you can use for link-data:
(custom-manual info-node)
Link to an Info node; info-node is a string which specifies the
node name, as in "(emacs)Top"
. The link appears as
‘[Manual]’ in the customization buffer and enters the built-in
Info reader on info-node.
(info-link info-node)
Like custom-manual
except that the link appears
in the customization buffer with the Info node name.
(url-link url)
Link to a web page; url is a string which specifies the
URL. The link appears in the customization buffer as
url and invokes the WWW browser specified by
browse-url-browser-function
.
(emacs-commentary-link library)
Link to the commentary section of a library; library is a string which specifies the library name. See Conventional Headers for Emacs Libraries.
(emacs-library-link library)
Link to an Emacs Lisp library file; library is a string which specifies the library name.
(file-link file)
Link to a file; file is a string which specifies the name of the
file to visit with find-file
when the user invokes this link.
(function-link function)
Link to the documentation of a function; function is a string
which specifies the name of the function to describe with
describe-function
when the user invokes this link.
(variable-link variable)
Link to the documentation of a variable; variable is a string
which specifies the name of the variable to describe with
describe-variable
when the user invokes this link.
(face-link face)
Link to the documentation of a face; face is a string which
specifies the name of the face to describe with describe-face
when the user invokes this link.
(custom-group-link group)
Link to another customization group. Invoking it creates a new customization buffer for group.
You can specify the text to use in the customization buffer by adding
:tag name
after the first element of the link-data;
for example, (info-link :tag "foo" "(emacs)Top")
makes a link to
the Emacs manual which appears in the buffer as ‘foo’.
You can use this keyword more than once, to add multiple links.
:load file
¶Load file file (a string) before displaying this customization
item (see Loading). Loading is done with load
, and only if
the file is not already loaded.
:require feature
¶Execute (require 'feature)
when your saved customizations
set the value of this item. feature should be a symbol.
The most common reason to use :require
is when a variable enables
a feature such as a minor mode, and just setting the variable won’t have
any effect unless the code which implements the mode is loaded.
:version version
¶This keyword specifies that the item was first introduced in Emacs version version, or that its default value was changed in that version. The value version must be a string.
:package-version '(package . version)
¶This keyword specifies that the item was first introduced in
package version version, or that its meaning or default
value was changed in that version. This keyword takes priority over
:version
.
package should be the official name of the package, as a symbol
(e.g., MH-E
). version should be a string. If the
package package is released as part of Emacs, package and
version should appear in the value of
customize-package-emacs-version-alist
.
Packages distributed as part of Emacs that use the
:package-version
keyword must also update the
customize-package-emacs-version-alist
variable.
This alist provides a mapping for the versions of Emacs that are
associated with versions of a package listed in the
:package-version
keyword. Its elements are:
(package (pversion . eversion)...)
For each package, which is a symbol, there are one or more elements that contain a package version pversion with an associated Emacs version eversion. These versions are strings. For example, the MH-E package updates this alist with the following:
(add-to-list 'customize-package-emacs-version-alist '(MH-E ("6.0" . "22.1") ("6.1" . "22.1") ("7.0" . "22.1") ("7.1" . "22.1") ("7.2" . "22.1") ("7.3" . "22.1") ("7.4" . "22.1") ("8.0" . "22.1")))
The value of package needs to be unique and it needs to match
the package value appearing in the :package-version
keyword. Since the user might see the value in an error message, a good
choice is the official name of the package, such as MH-E or Gnus.
Each Emacs Lisp package should have one main customization group which contains all the options, faces and other groups in the package. If the package has a small number of options and faces, use just one group and put everything in it. When there are more than twenty or so options and faces, then you should structure them into subgroups, and put the subgroups under the package’s main customization group. It is OK to put some of the options and faces in the package’s main group alongside the subgroups.
The package’s main or only group should be a member of one or more of
the standard customization groups. (To display the full list of them,
use M-x customize.) Choose one or more of them (but not too
many), and add your group to each of them using the :group
keyword.
The way to declare new customization groups is with defgroup
.
Declare group as a customization group containing members. Do not quote the symbol group. The argument doc specifies the documentation string for the group.
The argument members is a list specifying an initial set of
customization items to be members of the group. However, most often
members is nil
, and you specify the group’s members by
using the :group
keyword when defining those members.
If you want to specify group members through members, each element
should have the form (name widget)
. Here name
is a symbol, and widget is a widget type for editing that symbol.
Useful widgets are custom-variable
for a variable,
custom-face
for a face, and custom-group
for a group.
When you introduce a new group into Emacs, use the :version
keyword in the defgroup
; then you need not use it for
the individual members of the group.
In addition to the common keywords (see Common Item Keywords), you can
also use this keyword in defgroup
:
:prefix prefix
¶If the name of an item in the group starts with prefix, and the
customizable variable custom-unlispify-remove-prefixes
is
non-nil
, the item’s tag will omit prefix. A group can
have any number of prefixes.
The variables, faces, and subgroups of a group are stored in the
custom-group
property of the group’s symbol. See Accessing Symbol Properties. The value of that property is a list of pairs whose
car
is the symbol of the variable or the face or the subgroup,
and the cdr
is one of the corresponding symbols
custom-variable
, custom-face
, or custom-group
.
If this variable is non-nil
, the prefixes specified by a
group’s :prefix
keyword are omitted from tag names, whenever
the user customizes the group.
The default value is nil
, i.e., the prefix-discarding feature
is disabled. This is because discarding prefixes often leads to
confusing names for options and faces.
Customizable variables, also called user options, are
global Lisp variables whose values can be set through the Customize
interface. Unlike other global variables, which are defined with
defvar
(see Defining Global Variables), customizable variables are
defined using the defcustom
macro. In addition to calling
defvar
as a subroutine, defcustom
states how the
variable should be displayed in the Customize interface, the values it
is allowed to take, etc.
This macro declares option as a user option (i.e., a customizable variable). You should not quote option.
The argument standard is an expression that specifies the
standard value for option. Evaluating the defcustom
form
evaluates standard, but does not necessarily bind the option to
that value. If option already has a default value, it is left
unchanged. If the user has already saved a customization for
option, the user’s customized value is installed as the default
value. Otherwise, the result of evaluating standard is
installed as the default value.
Like defvar
, this macro marks option
as a special
variable, meaning that it should always be dynamically bound. If
option is already lexically bound, that lexical binding remains
in effect until the binding construct exits. See Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings.
The expression standard can be evaluated at various other times, too—whenever the customization facility needs to know option’s standard value. So be sure to use an expression which is harmless to evaluate at any time.
The argument doc specifies the documentation string for the variable.
If a defcustom
does not specify any :group
, the last group
defined with defgroup
in the same file will be used. This way, most
defcustom
do not need an explicit :group
.
When you evaluate a defcustom
form with C-M-x in Emacs Lisp
mode (eval-defun
), a special feature of eval-defun
arranges to set the variable unconditionally, without testing whether
its value is void. (The same feature applies to defvar
,
see Defining Global Variables.) Using eval-defun
on a defcustom
that is already defined calls the :set
function (see below),
if there is one.
If you put a defcustom
in a pre-loaded Emacs Lisp file
(see Building Emacs), the standard value installed at dump time
might be incorrect, e.g., because another variable that it depends on
has not been assigned the right value yet. In that case, use
custom-reevaluate-setting
, described below, to re-evaluate the
standard value after Emacs starts up.
In addition to the keywords listed in Common Item Keywords, this macro accepts the following keywords:
:type type
Use type as the data type for this option. It specifies which
values are legitimate, and how to display the value
(see Customization Types). Every defcustom
should specify
a value for this keyword.
:options value-list
¶Specify the list of reasonable values for use in this option. The user is not restricted to using only these values, but they are offered as convenient alternatives.
This is meaningful only for certain types, currently including
hook
, plist
and alist
. See the definition of the
individual types for a description of how to use :options
.
Re-evaluating a defcustom
form with a different :options
value does not clear the values added by previous evaluations, or
added by calls to custom-add-frequent-value
(see below).
:set setfunction
¶Specify setfunction as the way to change the value of this
option when using the Customize interface. The function
setfunction should take two arguments, a symbol (the option
name) and the new value, and should do whatever is necessary to update
the value properly for this option (which may not mean simply setting
the option as a Lisp variable); preferably, though, it should not
modify its value argument destructively. The default for
setfunction is set-default-toplevel-value
.
If defined, setfunction will also be called when evaluating a
defcustom
form with C-M-x in Emacs Lisp mode and when the
option’s value is changed via the setopt
macro
(see setopt).
If you specify this keyword, the variable’s documentation string
should describe how to do the same job in hand-written Lisp code,
either by invoking setfunction directly or by using
setopt
.
:get getfunction
¶Specify getfunction as the way to extract the value of this
option. The function getfunction should take one argument, a
symbol, and should return whatever customize should use as the
current value for that symbol (which need not be the symbol’s Lisp
value). The default is default-toplevel-value
.
You have to really understand the workings of Custom to use
:get
correctly. It is meant for values that are treated in
Custom as variables but are not actually stored in Lisp variables. It
is almost surely a mistake to specify getfunction for a value
that really is stored in a Lisp variable.
:initialize function
¶function should be a function used to initialize the variable
when the defcustom
is evaluated. It should take two arguments,
the option name (a symbol) and the value. Here are some predefined
functions meant for use in this way:
custom-initialize-set
Use the variable’s :set
function to initialize the variable, but
do not reinitialize it if it is already non-void.
custom-initialize-default
Like custom-initialize-set
, but use the function
set-default-toplevel-value
to set the variable, instead of the
variable’s :set
function. This is the usual choice for a
variable whose :set
function enables or disables a minor mode;
with this choice, defining the variable will not call the minor mode
function, but customizing the variable will do so.
custom-initialize-reset
Always use the :set
function to initialize the variable. If
the variable is already non-void, reset it by calling the :set
function using the current value (returned by the :get
method).
This is the default :initialize
function.
custom-initialize-changed
Use the :set
function to initialize the variable, if it is
already set or has been customized; otherwise, just use
set-default-toplevel-value
.
custom-initialize-delay
This function behaves like custom-initialize-set
, but it
delays the actual initialization to the next Emacs start. This should
be used in files that are preloaded (or for autoloaded variables), so
that the initialization is done in the run-time context rather than
the build-time context. This also has the side-effect that the
(delayed) initialization is performed with the :set
function.
See Building Emacs.
:local value
¶If the value is t
, mark option as automatically
buffer-local; if the value is permanent
, also set options
permanent-local
property to t
. See Creating and Deleting Buffer-Local Bindings.
:risky value
¶Set the variable’s risky-local-variable
property to
value (see File Local Variables).
:safe function
¶Set the variable’s safe-local-variable
property to
function (see File Local Variables).
:set-after variables
¶When setting variables according to saved customizations, make sure to
set the variables variables before this one; i.e., delay
setting this variable until after those others have been handled. Use
:set-after
if setting this variable won’t work properly unless
those other variables already have their intended values.
It is useful to specify the :require
keyword for an option
that turns on a certain feature. This causes Emacs to load the
feature, if it is not already loaded, whenever the option is set.
See Common Item Keywords. Here is an example:
(defcustom frobnicate-automatically nil "Non-nil means automatically frobnicate all buffers." :type 'boolean :require 'frobnicate-mode :group 'frobnicate)
If a customization item has a type such as hook
or
alist
, which supports :options
, you can add additional
values to the list from outside the defcustom
declaration by
calling custom-add-frequent-value
. For example, if you define a
function my-lisp-mode-initialization
intended to be called from
emacs-lisp-mode-hook
, you might want to add that to the list of
reasonable values for emacs-lisp-mode-hook
, but not by editing
its definition. You can do it thus:
(custom-add-frequent-value 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook 'my-lisp-mode-initialization)
For the customization option symbol, add value to the list of reasonable values.
The precise effect of adding a value depends on the customization type of symbol.
Since evaluating a defcustom
form does not clear values added
previously, Lisp programs can use this function to add values for user
options not yet defined.
Internally, defcustom
uses the symbol property
standard-value
to record the expression for the standard value,
saved-value
to record the value saved by the user with the
customization buffer, and customized-value
to record the value
set by the user with the customization buffer, but not saved.
See Symbol Properties. In addition, there’s themed-value
,
which is used to record the value set by a theme (see Custom Themes). These properties are lists, the car of which is an
expression that evaluates to the value.
This function re-evaluates the standard value of symbol, which
should be a user option declared via defcustom
. If the
variable was customized, this function re-evaluates the saved value
instead. Then it sets the user option to that value (using the
option’s :set
property if that is defined).
This is useful for customizable options that are defined before their value could be computed correctly. For example, during startup Emacs calls this function for some user options that were defined in pre-loaded Emacs Lisp files, but whose initial values depend on information available only at run-time.
This function returns non-nil
if arg is a customizable
variable. A customizable variable is either a variable that has a
standard-value
or custom-autoload
property (usually
meaning it was declared with defcustom
), or an alias for
another customizable variable.
When you define a user option with defcustom
, you must specify
its customization type. That is a Lisp object which describes (1)
which values are legitimate and (2) how to display the value in the
customization buffer for editing.
You specify the customization type in defcustom
with the
:type
keyword. The argument of :type
is evaluated, but
only once when the defcustom
is executed, so it isn’t useful
for the value to vary. Normally we use a quoted constant. For
example:
(defcustom diff-command "diff" "The command to use to run diff." :type '(string) :group 'diff)
In general, a customization type is a list whose first element is a symbol, one of the customization type names defined in the following sections. After this symbol come a number of arguments, depending on the symbol. Between the type symbol and its arguments, you can optionally write keyword-value pairs (see Type Keywords).
Some type symbols do not use any arguments; those are called
simple types. For a simple type, if you do not use any
keyword-value pairs, you can omit the parentheses around the type
symbol. For example just string
as a customization type is
equivalent to (string)
.
All customization types are implemented as widgets; see Introduction in The Emacs Widget Library, for details.
This section describes all the simple customization types. For several of these customization types, the customization widget provides inline completion with C-M-i or M-TAB.
sexp
The value may be any Lisp object that can be printed and read back.
You can use sexp
as a fall-back for any option, if you don’t
want to take the time to work out a more specific type to use.
integer
The value must be an integer.
natnum
The value must be a nonnegative integer.
number
The value must be a number (floating point or integer).
float
The value must be floating point.
string
The value must be a string. The customization buffer shows the string without delimiting ‘"’ characters or ‘\’ quotes.
regexp
Like string
except that the string must be a valid regular
expression.
character
The value must be a character code. A character code is actually an integer, but this type shows the value by inserting the character in the buffer, rather than by showing the number.
file
The value must be a file name. The widget provides completion.
(file :must-match t)
The value must be a file name for an existing file. The widget provides completion.
directory
The value must be a directory. The widget provides completion.
hook
The value must be a list of functions. This customization type is
used for hook variables. You can use the :options
keyword in a
hook variable’s defcustom
to specify a list of functions
recommended for use in the hook; See Defining Customization Variables.
symbol
The value must be a symbol. It appears in the customization buffer as the symbol name. The widget provides completion.
function
The value must be either a lambda expression or a function name. The widget provides completion for function names.
variable
The value must be a variable name. The widget provides completion.
face
The value must be a symbol which is a face name. The widget provides completion.
boolean
The value is boolean—either nil
or t
. Note that by
using choice
and const
together (see the next section),
you can specify that the value must be nil
or t
, but also
specify the text to describe each value in a way that fits the specific
meaning of the alternative.
key
The value is a valid key according to key-valid-p, and suitable
for use with, for example keymap-set
.
key-sequence
The value is a key sequence. The customization buffer shows the key
sequence using the same syntax as the kbd function. See Key Sequences. This is a legacy type; use key
instead.
coding-system
The value must be a coding-system name, and you can do completion with M-TAB.
color
The value must be a valid color name. The widget provides completion for color names, as well as a sample and a button for selecting a color name from a list of color names shown in a *Colors* buffer.
fringe-bitmap
The value must be a valid fringe bitmap name. The widget provides completion.
When none of the simple types is appropriate, you can use composite types, which build new types from other types or from specified data. The specified types or data are called the arguments of the composite type. The composite type normally looks like this:
(constructor arguments...)
but you can also add keyword-value pairs before the arguments, like this:
(constructor {keyword value}... arguments...)
Here is a table of constructors and how to use them to write composite types:
(cons car-type cdr-type)
The value must be a cons cell, its CAR must fit car-type, and
its CDR must fit cdr-type. For example, (cons string
symbol)
is a customization type which matches values such as
("foo" . foo)
.
In the customization buffer, the CAR and CDR are displayed and edited separately, each according to their specified type.
(list element-types…)
The value must be a list with exactly as many elements as the element-types given; and each element must fit the corresponding element-type.
For example, (list integer string function)
describes a list of
three elements; the first element must be an integer, the second a
string, and the third a function.
In the customization buffer, each element is displayed and edited separately, according to the type specified for it.
(group element-types…)
This works like list
except for the formatting
of text in the Custom buffer. list
labels each
element value with its tag; group
does not.
(vector element-types…)
Like list
except that the value must be a vector instead of a
list. The elements work the same as in list
.
(alist :key-type key-type :value-type value-type)
The value must be a list of cons-cells, the CAR of each cell representing a key of customization type key-type, and the CDR of the same cell representing a value of customization type value-type. The user can add and delete key/value pairs, and edit both the key and the value of each pair.
If omitted, key-type and value-type default to
sexp
.
The user can add any key matching the specified key type, but you can
give some keys a preferential treatment by specifying them with the
:options
(see Defining Customization Variables). The specified keys
will always be shown in the customize buffer (together with a suitable
value), with a checkbox to include or exclude or disable the key/value
pair from the alist. The user will not be able to edit the keys
specified by the :options
keyword argument.
The argument to the :options
keywords should be a list of
specifications for reasonable keys in the alist. Ordinarily, they are
simply atoms, which stand for themselves. For example:
:options '("foo" "bar" "baz")
specifies that there are three known keys, namely "foo"
,
"bar"
and "baz"
, which will always be shown first.
You may want to restrict the value type for specific keys, for
example, the value associated with the "bar"
key can only be an
integer. You can specify this by using a list instead of an atom in
the list. The first element will specify the key, like before, while
the second element will specify the value type. For example:
:options '("foo" ("bar" integer) "baz")
Finally, you may want to change how the key is presented. By default,
the key is simply shown as a const
, since the user cannot change
the special keys specified with the :options
keyword. However,
you may want to use a more specialized type for presenting the key, like
function-item
if you know it is a symbol with a function binding.
This is done by using a customization type specification instead of a
symbol for the key.
:options '("foo" ((function-item some-function) integer) "baz")
Many alists use lists with two elements, instead of cons cells. For example,
(defcustom list-alist '(("foo" 1) ("bar" 2) ("baz" 3)) "Each element is a list of the form (KEY VALUE).")
instead of
(defcustom cons-alist '(("foo" . 1) ("bar" . 2) ("baz" . 3)) "Each element is a cons-cell (KEY . VALUE).")
Because of the way lists are implemented on top of cons cells, you can
treat list-alist
in the example above as a cons cell alist, where
the value type is a list with a single element containing the real
value.
(defcustom list-alist '(("foo" 1) ("bar" 2) ("baz" 3)) "Each element is a list of the form (KEY VALUE)." :type '(alist :value-type (group integer)))
The group
widget is used here instead of list
only because
the formatting is better suited for the purpose.
Similarly, you can have alists with more values associated with each key, using variations of this trick:
(defcustom person-data '(("brian" 50 t) ("dorith" 55 nil) ("ken" 52 t)) "Alist of basic info about people. Each element has the form (NAME AGE MALE-FLAG)." :type '(alist :value-type (group integer boolean)))
(plist :key-type key-type :value-type value-type)
This customization type is similar to alist
(see above), except
that (i) the information is stored as a property list,
(see Property Lists), and (ii) key-type, if omitted,
defaults to symbol
rather than sexp
.
(choice alternative-types…)
The value must fit one of alternative-types. For example,
(choice integer string)
allows either an integer or a string.
In the customization buffer, the user selects an alternative using a menu, and can then edit the value in the usual way for that alternative.
Normally the strings in this menu are determined automatically from the
choices; however, you can specify different strings for the menu by
including the :tag
keyword in the alternatives. For example, if
an integer stands for a number of spaces, while a string is text to use
verbatim, you might write the customization type this way,
(choice (integer :tag "Number of spaces") (string :tag "Literal text"))
so that the menu offers ‘Number of spaces’ and ‘Literal text’.
In any alternative for which nil
is not a valid value, other than
a const
, you should specify a valid default for that alternative
using the :value
keyword. See Type Keywords.
If some values are covered by more than one of the alternatives, customize will choose the first alternative that the value fits. This means you should always list the most specific types first, and the most general last. Here’s an example of proper usage:
(choice (const :tag "Off" nil) symbol (sexp :tag "Other"))
This way, the special value nil
is not treated like other
symbols, and symbols are not treated like other Lisp expressions.
(radio element-types…)
¶This is similar to choice
, except that the choices are displayed
using radio buttons rather than a menu. This has the advantage of
displaying documentation for the choices when applicable and so is often
a good choice for a choice between constant functions
(function-item
customization types).
(const value)
The value must be value—nothing else is allowed.
The main use of const
is inside of choice
. For example,
(choice integer (const nil))
allows either an integer or
nil
.
:tag
is often used with const
, inside of choice
.
For example,
(choice (const :tag "Yes" t) (const :tag "No" nil) (const :tag "Ask" foo))
describes a variable for which t
means yes, nil
means no,
and foo
means “ask”.
(other value)
This alternative can match any Lisp value, but if the user chooses this alternative, that selects the value value.
The main use of other
is as the last element of choice
.
For example,
(choice (const :tag "Yes" t) (const :tag "No" nil) (other :tag "Ask" foo))
describes a variable for which t
means yes, nil
means no,
and anything else means “ask”. If the user chooses ‘Ask’ from
the menu of alternatives, that specifies the value foo
; but any
other value (not t
, nil
or foo
) displays as
‘Ask’, just like foo
.
(function-item function)
Like const
, but used for values which are functions. This
displays the documentation string as well as the function name.
The documentation string is either the one you specify with
:doc
, or function’s own documentation string.
(variable-item variable)
Like const
, but used for values which are variable names. This
displays the documentation string as well as the variable name. The
documentation string is either the one you specify with :doc
, or
variable’s own documentation string.
(set types…)
The value must be a list, and each element of the list must match one of the types specified.
This appears in the customization buffer as a checklist, so that each of
types may have either one corresponding element or none. It is
not possible to specify two different elements that match the same one
of types. For example, (set integer symbol)
allows one
integer and/or one symbol in the list; it does not allow multiple
integers or multiple symbols. As a result, it is rare to use
nonspecific types such as integer
in a set
.
Most often, the types in a set
are const
types, as
shown here:
(set (const :bold) (const :italic))
Sometimes they describe possible elements in an alist:
(set (cons :tag "Height" (const height) integer) (cons :tag "Width" (const width) integer))
That lets the user specify a height value optionally and a width value optionally.
(repeat element-type)
The value must be a list and each element of the list must fit the type element-type. This appears in the customization buffer as a list of elements, with ‘[INS]’ and ‘[DEL]’ buttons for adding more elements or removing elements.
(restricted-sexp :match-alternatives criteria)
¶This is the most general composite type construct. The value may be any Lisp object that satisfies one of criteria. criteria should be a list, and each element should be one of these possibilities:
nil
or non-nil
according to the argument. Using a
predicate in the list says that objects for which the predicate
returns non-nil
are acceptable.
'object
. This sort of element
in the list says that object itself is an acceptable value.
For example,
(restricted-sexp :match-alternatives (integerp 't 'nil))
allows integers, t
and nil
as legitimate values.
The customization buffer shows all legitimate values using their read syntax, and the user edits them textually.
Here is a table of the keywords you can use in keyword-value pairs in a composite type:
:tag tag
Use tag as the name of this alternative, for user communication
purposes. This is useful for a type that appears inside of a
choice
.
:match-alternatives criteria
¶Use criteria to match possible values. This is used only in
restricted-sexp
.
:args argument-list
¶Use the elements of argument-list as the arguments of the type
construct. For instance, (const :args (foo))
is equivalent to
(const foo)
. You rarely need to write :args
explicitly,
because normally the arguments are recognized automatically as
whatever follows the last keyword-value pair.
The :inline
feature lets you splice a variable number of
elements into the middle of a list
or vector
customization type. You use it by adding :inline t
to a type
specification which is contained in a list
or vector
specification.
Normally, each entry in a list
or vector
type
specification describes a single element type. But when an entry
contains :inline t
, the value it matches is merged directly
into the containing sequence. For example, if the entry matches a
list with three elements, those become three elements of the overall
sequence. This is analogous to ‘,@’ in a backquote construct
(see Backquote).
For example, to specify a list whose first element must be baz
and whose remaining arguments should be zero or more of foo
and
bar
, use this customization type:
(list (const baz) (set :inline t (const foo) (const bar)))
This matches values such as (baz)
, (baz foo)
, (baz bar)
and (baz foo bar)
.
When the element-type is a choice
, you use :inline
not
in the choice
itself, but in (some of) the alternatives of the
choice
. For example, to match a list which must start with a
file name, followed either by the symbol t
or two strings, use
this customization type:
(list file (choice (const t) (list :inline t string string)))
If the user chooses the first alternative in the choice, then the
overall list has two elements and the second element is t
. If
the user chooses the second alternative, then the overall list has three
elements and the second and third must be strings.
The widgets can specify predicates to say whether an inline value
matches the widget with the :match-inline
element.
You can specify keyword-argument pairs in a customization type after the type name symbol. Here are the keywords you can use, and their meanings:
:value default
Provide a default value.
If nil
is not a valid value for the alternative, then it is
essential to specify a valid default with :value
.
If you use this for a type that appears as an alternative inside of
choice
; it specifies the default value to use, at first, if and
when the user selects this alternative with the menu in the
customization buffer.
Of course, if the actual value of the option fits this alternative, it will appear showing the actual value, not default.
:format format-string
¶This string will be inserted in the buffer to represent the value corresponding to the type. The following ‘%’ escapes are available for use in format-string:
Display the text button marked as a button. The :action
attribute specifies what the button will do if the user invokes it;
its value is a function which takes two arguments—the widget which
the button appears in, and the event.
There is no way to specify two different buttons with different actions.
Show sample in a special face specified by :sample-face
.
Substitute the item’s value. How the value is represented depends on the kind of item, and (for variables) on the customization type.
Substitute the item’s documentation string.
Like ‘%d’, but if the documentation string is more than one line, add a button to control whether to show all of it or just the first line.
Substitute the tag here. You specify the tag with the :tag
keyword.
Display a literal ‘%’.
:action action
¶Perform action if the user clicks on a button.
:button-face face
¶Use the face face (a face name or a list of face names) for button text displayed with ‘%[…%]’.
:button-prefix prefix
¶:button-suffix suffix
These specify the text to display before and after a button. Each can be:
nil
No text is inserted.
The string is inserted literally.
The symbol’s value is used.
:tag tag
Use tag (a string) as the tag for the value (or part of the value) that corresponds to this type.
:doc doc
¶Use doc as the documentation string for this value (or part of the
value) that corresponds to this type. In order for this to work, you
must specify a value for :format
, and use ‘%d’ or ‘%h’
in that value.
The usual reason to specify a documentation string for a type is to
provide more information about the meanings of alternatives inside a
choice
type or the parts of some other composite type.
:help-echo motion-doc
¶When you move to this item with widget-forward
or
widget-backward
, it will display the string motion-doc in
the echo area. In addition, motion-doc is used as the mouse
help-echo
string and may actually be a function or form evaluated
to yield a help string. If it is a function, it is called with one
argument, the widget.
:match function
¶Specify how to decide whether a value matches the type. The
corresponding value, function, should be a function that accepts
two arguments, a widget and a value; it should return non-nil
if
the value is acceptable.
:match-inline function
¶Specify how to decide whether an inline value matches the type. The
corresponding value, function, should be a function that accepts
two arguments, a widget and an inline value; it should return
non-nil
if the value is acceptable. See Splicing into Lists for more information about inline values.
:validate function
Specify a validation function for input. function takes a
widget as an argument, and should return nil
if the widget’s
current value is valid for the widget. Otherwise, it should return
the widget containing the invalid data, and set that widget’s
:error
property to a string explaining the error.
:type-error string
¶string should be a string that describes why a value doesn’t
match the type, as determined by the :match
function. When the
:match
function returns nil
, the widget’s :error
property will be set to string.
In the previous sections we have described how to construct elaborate
type specifications for defcustom
. In some cases you may want
to give such a type specification a name. The obvious case is when
you are using the same type for many user options: rather than repeat
the specification for each option, you can give the type specification
a name, and use that name each defcustom
. The other case is
when a user option’s value is a recursive data structure. To make it
possible for a datatype to refer to itself, it needs to have a name.
Since custom types are implemented as widgets, the way to define a new customize type is to define a new widget. We are not going to describe the widget interface here in details, see Introduction in The Emacs Widget Library, for that. Instead we are going to demonstrate the minimal functionality needed for defining new customize types by a simple example.
(define-widget 'binary-tree-of-string 'lazy "A binary tree made of cons-cells and strings." :offset 4 :tag "Node" :type '(choice (string :tag "Leaf" :value "") (cons :tag "Interior" :value ("" . "") binary-tree-of-string binary-tree-of-string))) (defcustom foo-bar "" "Sample variable holding a binary tree of strings." :type 'binary-tree-of-string)
The function to define a new widget is called define-widget
. The
first argument is the symbol we want to make a new widget type. The
second argument is a symbol representing an existing widget, the new
widget is going to be defined in terms of difference from the existing
widget. For the purpose of defining new customization types, the
lazy
widget is perfect, because it accepts a :type
keyword
argument with the same syntax as the keyword argument to
defcustom
with the same name. The third argument is a
documentation string for the new widget. You will be able to see that
string with the M-x widget-browse RET binary-tree-of-string
RET command.
After these mandatory arguments follow the keyword arguments. The most
important is :type
, which describes the data type we want to match
with this widget. Here a binary-tree-of-string
is described as
being either a string, or a cons-cell whose car and cdr are themselves
both binary-tree-of-string
. Note the reference to the widget
type we are currently in the process of defining. The :tag
attribute is a string to name the widget in the user interface, and the
:offset
argument is there to ensure that child nodes are
indented four spaces relative to the parent node, making the tree
structure apparent in the customization buffer.
The defcustom
shows how the new widget can be used as an ordinary
customization type.
The reason for the name lazy
is that the other composite
widgets convert their inferior widgets to internal form when the
widget is instantiated in a buffer. This conversion is recursive, so
the inferior widgets will convert their inferior widgets. If
the data structure is itself recursive, this conversion is an infinite
recursion. The lazy
widget prevents the recursion: it convert
its :type
argument only when needed.
The following functions are responsible for installing the user’s
customization settings for variables and faces, respectively. When
the user invokes ‘Save for future sessions’ in the Customize
interface, that takes effect by writing a custom-set-variables
and/or a custom-set-faces
form into the custom file, to be
evaluated the next time Emacs starts.
This function installs the variable customizations specified by args. Each argument in args should have the form
(var expression [now [request [comment]]])
var is a variable name (a symbol), and expression is an expression which evaluates to the desired customized value.
If the defcustom
form for var has been evaluated prior to
this custom-set-variables
call, expression is immediately
evaluated, and the variable’s value is set to the result. Otherwise,
expression is stored into the variable’s saved-value
property, to be evaluated when the relevant defcustom
is called
(usually when the library defining that variable is loaded into
Emacs).
The now, request, and comment entries are for
internal use only, and may be omitted. now, if non-nil
,
means to set the variable’s value now, even if the variable’s
defcustom
form has not been evaluated. request is a list
of features to be loaded immediately (see Features).
comment is a string describing the customization.
This function installs the face customizations specified by args. Each argument in args should have the form
(face spec [now [comment]])
face is a face name (a symbol), and spec is the customized face specification for that face (see Defining Faces).
The now and comment entries are for internal use only, and
may be omitted. now, if non-nil
, means to install the
face specification now, even if the defface
form has not been
evaluated. comment is a string describing the customization.
Custom themes are collections of settings that can be enabled or disabled as a unit. See Custom Themes in The GNU Emacs Manual. Each Custom theme is defined by an Emacs Lisp source file, which should follow the conventions described in this section. (Instead of writing a Custom theme by hand, you can also create one using a Customize-like interface; see Creating Custom Themes in The GNU Emacs Manual.)
A Custom theme file should be named foo-theme.el, where
foo is the theme name. The first Lisp form in the file should
be a call to deftheme
, and the last form should be a call to
provide-theme
.
This macro declares theme (a symbol) as the name of a Custom
theme. The optional argument doc should be a string describing
the theme; this is the description shown when the user invokes the
describe-theme
command or types ? in the ‘*Custom
Themes*’ buffer. The remaining arguments properties are used
pass a property list with theme attributes.
The following attributes are supported:
:family
A symbol designating what “family” a theme belongs to. A family of themes is a set of similar themes that differ by minor aspects, such as face colors that are meant for the light vs dark background of the frame.
:kind
A symbol. If a theme is enabled and this property has the value
color-scheme
, then the theme-choose-variant
command will
look for other available themes that belong to the same family in
order to switch the themes. Other values are currently unspecified
and should not be used.
:background-mode
A symbol, either light
or dark
. This attribute is
currently unused, but should still be specified.
Two special theme names are disallowed (using them causes an error):
user
is a dummy theme that stores the user’s direct
customization settings, and changed
is a dummy theme that
stores changes made outside of the Customize system.
This macro declares that the theme named theme has been fully specified.
In between deftheme
and provide-theme
are Lisp forms
specifying the theme settings: usually a call to
custom-theme-set-variables
and/or a call to
custom-theme-set-faces
.
This function specifies the Custom theme theme’s variable settings. theme should be a symbol. Each argument in args should be a list of the form
(var expression [now [request [comment]]])
where the list entries have the same meanings as in
custom-set-variables
. See Applying Customizations.
This function specifies the Custom theme theme’s face settings. theme should be a symbol. Each argument in args should be a list of the form
(face spec [now [comment]])
where the list entries have the same meanings as in
custom-set-faces
. See Applying Customizations.
In theory, a theme file can also contain other Lisp forms, which would be evaluated when loading the theme, but that is bad form. To protect against loading themes containing malicious code, Emacs displays the source file and asks for confirmation from the user before loading any non-built-in theme for the first time. As such, themes are not ordinarily byte-compiled, and source files usually take precedence when Emacs is looking for a theme to load.
The following functions are useful for programmatically enabling and disabling themes:
This function return a non-nil
value if theme (a symbol)
is the name of a Custom theme (i.e., a Custom theme which has been
loaded into Emacs, whether or not the theme is enabled). Otherwise,
it returns nil
.
The value of this variable is a list of themes loaded into Emacs.
Each theme is represented by a Lisp symbol (the theme name). The
default value of this variable is a list containing two dummy
themes: (user changed)
. The changed
theme stores
settings made before any Custom themes are applied (e.g., variables
set outside of Customize). The user
theme stores settings the
user has customized and saved. Any additional themes declared with
the deftheme
macro are added to the front of this list.
This function loads the Custom theme named theme from its source
file, looking for the source file in the directories specified by the
variable custom-theme-load-path
. See Custom Themes in The GNU Emacs Manual. It also enables the theme (unless the
optional argument no-enable is non-nil
), causing its
variable and face settings to take effect. It prompts the user for
confirmation before loading the theme, unless the optional argument
no-confirm is non-nil
.
This function searches custom-theme-load-path
for a file that
provides feature and then loads it. This is like the function
require
(see Features), except it searches
custom-theme-load-path
instead of load-path
(see Library Search). This can be useful in Custom themes that
need to load supporting Lisp files when require
is unsuitable
for that.
If feature, which should be a symbol, is not already present in
the current Emacs session according to featurep
, then
require-theme
searches for a file named feature with an
added ‘.elc’ or ‘.el’ suffix, in that order, in the
directories specified by custom-theme-load-path
.
If a file providing feature is successfully found and loaded,
then require-theme
returns feature. The optional
argument noerror determines what happens if the search or
loading fails. If it is nil
, the function signals an error;
otherwise, it returns nil
. If the file loads successfully but
does not provide feature, then require-theme
signals an
error; this cannot be suppressed.
This function enables the Custom theme named theme. It signals an error if no such theme has been loaded.
This function disables the Custom theme named theme. The theme
remains loaded, so that a subsequent call to enable-theme
will
re-enable it.
Loading a file of Lisp code means bringing its contents into the Lisp environment in the form of Lisp objects. Emacs finds and opens the file, reads the text, evaluates each form, and then closes the file. Such a file is also called a Lisp library.
The load functions evaluate all the expressions in a file just
as the eval-buffer
function evaluates all the
expressions in a buffer. The difference is that the load functions
read and evaluate the text in the file as found on disk, not the text
in an Emacs buffer.
The loaded file must contain Lisp expressions, either as source code or as byte-compiled code. Each form in the file is called a top-level form. There is no special format for the forms in a loadable file; any form in a file may equally well be typed directly into a buffer and evaluated there. (Indeed, most code is tested this way.) Most often, the forms are function definitions and variable definitions.
Emacs can also load compiled dynamic modules: shared libraries that provide additional functionality for use in Emacs Lisp programs, just like a package written in Emacs Lisp would. When a dynamic module is loaded, Emacs calls a specially-named initialization function which the module needs to implement, and which exposes the additional functions and variables to Emacs Lisp programs.
For on-demand loading of external libraries which are known in advance to be required by certain Emacs primitives, see Dynamically Loaded Libraries.
Emacs Lisp has several interfaces for loading. For example,
autoload
creates a placeholder object for a function defined in a
file; trying to call the autoloading function loads the file to get the
function’s real definition (see Autoload). require
loads a
file if it isn’t already loaded (see Features). Ultimately,
all these facilities call the load
function to do the work.
This function finds and opens a file of Lisp code, evaluates all the forms in it, and closes the file.
To find the file, load
first looks for a file named
filename.elc, that is, for a file whose name is
filename with the extension ‘.elc’ appended. If such a
file exists, and Emacs was compiled with native-compilation support
(see Compilation of Lisp to Native Code), load
attempts to find a
corresponding ‘.eln’ file, and if found, loads it instead of
filename.elc. Otherwise, it loads
filename.elc (and starts a background native compilation
to produce the missing ‘.eln’ file, followed by loading that
file). If there is no filename.elc, then load
looks for a file named filename.el. If that file exists,
it is loaded. If Emacs was compiled with support for dynamic modules
(see Emacs Dynamic Modules), load
next looks for a file named
filename.ext, where ext is a system-dependent
file-name extension of shared libraries (‘.so’ on GNU and Unix
systems). Finally, if neither of those names is found, load
looks for a file named filename with nothing appended, and loads
it if it exists. (The load
function is not clever about
looking at filename. In the perverse case of a file named
foo.el.el, evaluation of (load "foo.el")
will indeed
find it.)
If Auto Compression mode is enabled, as it is by default, then if
load
can not find a file, it searches for a compressed version
of the file before trying other file names. It decompresses and loads
it if it exists. It looks for compressed versions by appending each
of the suffixes in jka-compr-load-suffixes
to the file name.
The value of this variable must be a list of strings. Its standard
value is (".gz")
.
If the optional argument nosuffix is non-nil
, then
load
does not try the suffixes ‘.elc’ and ‘.el’. In
this case, you must specify the precise file name you want, except
that, if Auto Compression mode is enabled, load
will still use
jka-compr-load-suffixes
to find compressed versions. By
specifying the precise file name and using t
for
nosuffix, you can prevent file names like foo.el.el from
being tried.
If the optional argument must-suffix is non-nil
, then
load
insists that the file name used must end in either
‘.el’ or ‘.elc’ (possibly extended with a compression
suffix) or the shared-library extension, unless it contains an
explicit directory name.
If the option load-prefer-newer
is non-nil
, then when
searching suffixes, load
selects whichever version of a file
(‘.elc’, ‘.el’, etc.) has been modified most recently.
In this case, load
doesn’t load the ‘.eln’
natively-compiled file even if it exists.
If filename is a relative file name, such as foo or
baz/foo.bar, load
searches for the file using the variable
load-path
. It appends filename to each of the directories
listed in load-path
, and loads the first file it finds whose name
matches. The current default directory is tried only if it is specified
in load-path
, where nil
stands for the default directory.
load
tries all three possible suffixes in the first directory in
load-path
, then all three suffixes in the second directory, and
so on. See Library Search.
Whatever the name under which the file is eventually found, and the
directory where Emacs found it, Emacs sets the value of the variable
load-file-name
to that file’s name.
If you get a warning that foo.elc is older than foo.el, it means you should consider recompiling foo.el. See Byte Compilation.
When loading a source file (not compiled), load
performs
character set translation just as Emacs would do when visiting the file.
See Coding Systems.
When loading an uncompiled file, Emacs tries to expand any macros that the file contains (see Macros). We refer to this as eager macro expansion. Doing this (rather than deferring the expansion until the relevant code runs) can significantly speed up the execution of uncompiled code. Sometimes, this macro expansion cannot be done, owing to a cyclic dependency. In the simplest example of this, the file you are loading refers to a macro defined in another file, and that file in turn requires the file you are loading. Emacs will issue an error about (‘Eager macro-expansion skipped due to cycle…’) giving details of the problem. You have to restructure your code so that this does not happen. Loading a compiled file does not cause macroexpansion, because this should already have happened during compilation. See Macros and Byte Compilation.
Messages like ‘Loading foo...’ and ‘Loading foo...done’ appear
in the echo area during loading unless nomessage is
non-nil
. If a natively-compiled ‘.eln’ file is loaded,
the message says so.
Any unhandled errors while loading a file terminate loading. If the
load was done for the sake of autoload
, any function definitions
made during the loading are undone.
If load
can’t find the file to load, then normally it signals a
file-error
(with ‘Cannot open load file
filename’). But if missing-ok is non-nil
, then
load
just returns nil
.
You can use the variable load-read-function
to specify a function
for load
to use instead of read
for reading expressions.
See below.
load
returns t
if the file loads successfully.
This command loads the file filename. If filename is a
relative file name, then the current default directory is assumed.
This command does not use load-path
, and does not append
suffixes. However, it does look for compressed versions (if Auto
Compression Mode is enabled). Use this command if you wish to specify
precisely the file name to load.
This command loads the library named library. It is equivalent to
load
, except for the way it reads its argument interactively.
See Lisp Libraries in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This variable is non-nil
if Emacs is in the process of loading a
file, and it is nil
otherwise.
When Emacs is in the process of loading a file, this variable’s value is the name of that file, as Emacs found it during the search described earlier in this section.
This variable specifies an alternate expression-reading function for
load
and eval-region
to use instead of read
.
The function should accept one argument, just as read
does.
By default, this variable’s value is read
. See Input Functions.
Instead of using this variable, it is cleaner to use another, newer
feature: to pass the function as the read-function argument to
eval-region
. See Eval.
For information about how load
is used in building Emacs, see
Building Emacs.
We now describe some technical details about the exact suffixes that
load
tries.
This is a list of suffixes indicating (compiled or source) Emacs Lisp
files. It should not include the empty string. load
uses
these suffixes in order when it appends Lisp suffixes to the specified
file name. The standard value is (".elc" ".el")
which produces
the behavior described in the previous section.
This is a list of suffixes that indicate representations of the same
file. This list should normally start with the empty string.
When load
searches for a file it appends the suffixes in this
list, in order, to the file name, before searching for another file.
Enabling Auto Compression mode appends the suffixes in
jka-compr-load-suffixes
to this list and disabling Auto
Compression mode removes them again. The standard value of
load-file-rep-suffixes
if Auto Compression mode is disabled is
("")
. Given that the standard value of
jka-compr-load-suffixes
is (".gz")
, the standard value
of load-file-rep-suffixes
if Auto Compression mode is enabled
is ("" ".gz")
.
This function returns the list of all suffixes that load
should
try, in order, when its must-suffix argument is non-nil
.
This takes both load-suffixes
and load-file-rep-suffixes
into account. If load-suffixes
, jka-compr-load-suffixes
and load-file-rep-suffixes
all have their standard values, this
function returns (".elc" ".elc.gz" ".el" ".el.gz")
if Auto
Compression mode is enabled and (".elc" ".el")
if Auto
Compression mode is disabled.
To summarize, load
normally first tries the suffixes in the
value of (get-load-suffixes)
and then those in
load-file-rep-suffixes
. If nosuffix is non-nil
,
it skips the former group, and if must-suffix is non-nil
,
it skips the latter group.
If this option is non-nil
, then rather than stopping at the
first suffix that exists, load
tests them all, and uses
whichever file is the newest.
When Emacs loads a Lisp library, it searches for the library
in a list of directories specified by the variable load-path
.
The value of this variable is a list of directories to search when
loading files with load
. Each element is a string (which must be
a directory) or nil
(which stands for the current working
directory).
When Emacs starts up, it sets up the value of load-path
in
several steps. First, it looks for the directory containing its own
Lisp files, using default locations set when Emacs was compiled. It
saves this directory in lisp-directory
. Normally, this is a
directory where the *.elc files are installed, something like
"/usr/local/share/emacs/version/lisp"
where version is the Emacs version. (In this and the following examples, replace /usr/local with the prefix appropriate for your Emacs installation.) This directory and its subdirectories contain the standard Lisp files that come with Emacs. If Emacs cannot find its own Lisp files, it will not start correctly.
If you run Emacs from the directory where it was built—that is, an
executable that has not been installed yet—Emacs instead initializes
lisp-directory
using the lisp subdirectory of the
directory containing the sources from which it was built.
Emacs then initializes load-path
with this lisp-directory
.
If you built Emacs in a separate directory from the
sources, it also adds the lisp subdirectory of the build directory.
All of these directories are stored in the above two variables as absolute file names.
Unless you start Emacs with the --no-site-lisp option,
it then adds two more site-lisp directories to the front of
load-path
. These are intended for locally installed Lisp files,
and are normally of the form:
"/usr/local/share/emacs/version/site-lisp"
and
"/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp"
The first one is for locally installed files for the current Emacs version; the second is for locally installed files meant for use with any installed Emacs version. (If Emacs is running uninstalled, it also adds site-lisp subdirectories from the source and build directories, if they exist. However, normally the source and build directories do not contain site-lisp subdirectories.)
If the environment variable EMACSLOADPATH
is set, it modifies
the above initialization procedure. Emacs initializes
load-path
based on the value of the environment variable.
The syntax of EMACSLOADPATH
is the same as used for PATH
;
directories are separated by ‘:’ (or ‘;’, on some
operating systems).
Here is an example of how to set EMACSLOADPATH
variable (from a
sh
-style shell):
export EMACSLOADPATH=/home/foo/.emacs.d/lisp:
An empty element in the value of the environment variable, whether
trailing (as in the above example, note the trailing ‘:’),
leading, or embedded, is replaced by the default value of
load-path
as determined by the standard initialization
procedure. If there are no such empty elements, then
EMACSLOADPATH
specifies the entire load-path
. You must
include either an empty element, or the explicit path to the directory
containing the standard Lisp files, else Emacs will not function.
(Another way to modify load-path
is to use the -L
command-line option when starting Emacs; see below.)
For each directory in load-path
, Emacs then checks to see if
it contains a file subdirs.el, and if so, loads it. The
subdirs.el file is created when Emacs is built/installed,
and contains code that causes Emacs to add any subdirectories of those
directories to load-path
. Both immediate subdirectories and
subdirectories multiple levels down are added. But it excludes
subdirectories whose names do not start with a letter or digit, and
subdirectories named RCS or CVS, and subdirectories
containing a file named .nosearch.
Next, Emacs adds any extra load directories that you specify using the -L command-line option (see Action Arguments in The GNU Emacs Manual). It also adds the directories where optional packages are installed, if any (see Packaging Basics).
It is common to add code to one’s init file (see The Init File) to
add one or more directories to load-path
. For example:
(push "~/.emacs.d/lisp" load-path)
See push, for the description of push
.
Dumping Emacs uses a special value of load-path
. If you use
a site-load.el or site-init.el file to customize the
dumped Emacs (see Building Emacs), any changes to load-path
that these files make will be lost after dumping.
This variable holds a string naming the directory which holds Emacs’s own *.el and *.elc files. This is usually the place where those files are located in the Emacs installation tree, unless Emacs is run from its build directory in which case it points to the lisp subdirectory in the source directory from which Emacs was built.
This command finds the precise file name for library library. It
searches for the library in the same way load
does, and the
argument nosuffix has the same meaning as in load
: don’t
add suffixes ‘.elc’ or ‘.el’ to the specified name
library.
If the path is non-nil
, that list of directories is used
instead of load-path
.
When locate-library
is called from a program, it returns the file
name as a string. When the user runs locate-library
interactively, the argument interactive-call is t
, and this
tells locate-library
to display the file name in the echo area.
This command shows a list of shadowed Emacs Lisp files. A
shadowed file is one that will not normally be loaded, despite being
in a directory on load-path
, due to the existence of another
similarly-named file in a directory earlier on load-path
.
For instance, suppose load-path
is set to
("/opt/emacs/site-lisp" "/usr/share/emacs/29.1/lisp")
and that both these directories contain a file named foo.el.
Then (require 'foo)
never loads the file in the second
directory. Such a situation might indicate a problem in the way Emacs
was installed.
When called from Lisp, this function prints a message listing the
shadowed files, instead of displaying them in a buffer. If the
optional argument stringp
is non-nil
, it instead returns
the shadowed files as a string.
If Emacs was compiled with support for native compilation
(see Compilation of Lisp to Native Code), then when a ‘.elc’ byte-compiled
file is found by searching load-path
, Emacs will try to look
for a corresponding ‘.eln’ file holding the corresponding
natively-compiled code. The natively-compiled files are looked up in
the directories listed by the native-comp-eln-load-path
.
This variable holds a list of directories where Emacs looks for
natively-compiled ‘.eln’ files. File names in the list that are
not absolute are interpreted as relative to invocation-directory
(see Operating System Environment). The last directory in the list is the
system directory, i.e. the directory with ‘.eln’ files
installed by the Emacs build and installation procedure. In each of
the directories in the list, Emacs looks for ‘.eln’ files in a
subdirectory whose name is constructed from the Emacs version and an
8-character hash that depends on the current native-compilation
ABI; the name of this subdirectory is stored in the variable
comp-native-version-dir
.
When Emacs Lisp programs contain string constants with non-ASCII characters, these can be represented within Emacs either as unibyte strings or as multibyte strings (see Text Representations). Which representation is used depends on how the file is read into Emacs. If it is read with decoding into multibyte representation, the text of the Lisp program will be multibyte text, and its string constants will be multibyte strings. If a file containing Latin-1 characters (for example) is read without decoding, the text of the program will be unibyte text, and its string constants will be unibyte strings. See Coding Systems.
In most Emacs Lisp programs, the fact that non-ASCII
strings are multibyte strings should not be noticeable, since
inserting them in unibyte buffers converts them to unibyte
automatically. However, if this does make a difference, you can force
a particular Lisp file to be interpreted as unibyte by writing
‘coding: raw-text’ in a local variables section. With
that designator, the file will unconditionally be interpreted as
unibyte. This can matter when making key bindings to
non-ASCII characters written as ?vliteral
.
The autoload facility lets you register the existence of a function or macro, but put off loading the file that defines it. The first call to the function automatically loads the proper library, in order to install the real definition and other associated code, then runs the real definition as if it had been loaded all along. Autoloading can also be triggered by looking up the documentation of the function or macro (see Documentation Basics), and completion of variable and function names (see Autoload by Prefix below).
There are two ways to set up an autoloaded function: by calling
autoload
, and by writing a “magic” comment in the
source before the real definition. autoload
is the low-level
primitive for autoloading; any Lisp program can call autoload
at
any time. Magic comments are the most convenient way to make a function
autoload, for packages installed along with Emacs. These comments do
nothing on their own, but they serve as a guide for the command
loaddefs-generate
, which constructs calls to autoload
and arranges to execute them when Emacs is built.
This function defines the function (or macro) named function so as to load automatically from filename. The string filename specifies the file to load to get the real definition of function.
If filename does not contain either a directory name, or the
suffix .el
or .elc
, this function insists on adding one
of these suffixes, and it will not load from a file whose name is just
filename with no added suffix. (The variable
load-suffixes
specifies the exact required suffixes.)
The argument docstring is the documentation string for the
function. Specifying the documentation string in the call to
autoload
makes it possible to look at the documentation without
loading the function’s real definition. Normally, this should be
identical to the documentation string in the function definition
itself. If it isn’t, the function definition’s documentation string
takes effect when it is loaded.
If interactive is non-nil
, that says function can be
called interactively. This lets completion in M-x work without
loading function’s real definition. The complete interactive
specification is not given here; it’s not needed unless the user
actually calls function, and when that happens, it’s time to load
the real definition.
If interactive is a list, it is interpreted as a list of modes this command is applicable for.
You can autoload macros and keymaps as well as ordinary functions.
Specify type as macro
if function is really a macro.
Specify type as keymap
if function is really a
keymap. Various parts of Emacs need to know this information without
loading the real definition.
An autoloaded keymap loads automatically during key lookup when a prefix
key’s binding is the symbol function. Autoloading does not occur
for other kinds of access to the keymap. In particular, it does not
happen when a Lisp program gets the keymap from the value of a variable
and calls keymap-set
; not even if the variable name is the same
symbol function.
If function already has a non-void function definition that is not
an autoload object, this function does nothing and returns nil
.
Otherwise, it constructs an autoload object (see Autoload Type),
and stores it as the function definition for function. The
autoload object has this form:
(autoload filename docstring interactive type)
For example,
(symbol-function 'run-prolog) ⇒ (autoload "prolog" 169681 t nil)
In this case, "prolog"
is the name of the file to load, 169681
refers to the documentation string in the
emacs/etc/DOC file (see Documentation Basics),
t
means the function is interactive, and nil
that it is
not a macro or a keymap.
This function returns non-nil
if object is an autoload
object. For example, to check if run-prolog
is defined as an
autoloaded function, evaluate
(autoloadp (symbol-function 'run-prolog))
The autoloaded file usually contains other definitions and may require
or provide one or more features. If the file is not completely loaded
(due to an error in the evaluation of its contents), any function
definitions or provide
calls that occurred during the load are
undone. This is to ensure that the next attempt to call any function
autoloading from this file will try again to load the file. If not for
this, then some of the functions in the file might be defined by the
aborted load, but fail to work properly for the lack of certain
subroutines not loaded successfully because they come later in the file.
If the autoloaded file fails to define the desired Lisp function or
macro, then an error is signaled with data "Autoloading failed to
define function function-name"
.
A magic autoload comment (often called an autoload cookie)
consists of ‘;;;###autoload’, on a line by itself,
just before the real definition of the function in its
autoloadable source file. The function loaddefs-generate
writes a corresponding autoload
call into loaddefs.el.
(The string that serves as the autoload cookie and the name of the
file generated by loaddefs-generate
can be changed from the
above defaults, see below.)
Building Emacs loads loaddefs.el and thus calls autoload
.
The same magic comment can copy any kind of form into
loaddefs.el. The form following the magic comment is copied
verbatim, except if it is one of the forms which the autoload
facility handles specially (e.g., by conversion into an
autoload
call). The forms which are not copied verbatim are
the following:
defun
and defmacro
; also cl-defun
and
cl-defmacro
(see Argument Lists in Common Lisp Extensions),
and define-overloadable-function
(see the commentary in
mode-local.el).
define-minor-mode
, define-globalized-minor-mode
,
define-generic-mode
, define-derived-mode
,
easy-mmode-define-minor-mode
,
easy-mmode-define-global-mode
, define-compilation-mode
,
and define-global-minor-mode
.
defcustom
, defgroup
, deftheme
, defclass
(see EIEIO in EIEIO), and define-skeleton
(see Autotyping in Autotyping).
You can also use a magic comment to execute a form at build time
without executing it when the file itself is loaded. To do this,
write the form on the same line as the magic comment. Since it
is in a comment, it does nothing when you load the source file; but
loaddefs-generate
copies it to loaddefs.el, where
it is executed while building Emacs.
The following example shows how doctor
is prepared for
autoloading with a magic comment:
;;;###autoload (defun doctor () "Switch to *doctor* buffer and start giving psychotherapy." (interactive) (switch-to-buffer "*doctor*") (doctor-mode))
Here’s what that produces in loaddefs.el:
(autoload 'doctor "doctor" "\ Switch to *doctor* buffer and start giving psychotherapy. \(fn)" t nil)
While the loaddefs.el isn’t for editing, we try to keep it
somewhat readable for people. For instance, control characters in
defvar
values are escaped, and we insert a backslash and
newline immediately following the double-quote of the doc string to
keep the line length down. ‘(fn)’ in the usage part of the
documentation string is replaced with the function’s name when the
various help functions (see Help Functions) display it.
If you write a function definition with an unusual macro that is not
one of the known and recognized function definition methods, use of an
ordinary magic autoload comment would copy the whole definition into
loaddefs.el
. That is not desirable. You can put the desired
autoload
call into loaddefs.el
instead by writing this:
;;;###autoload (autoload 'foo "myfile") (mydefunmacro foo ...)
You can use a non-default string as the autoload cookie and have the corresponding autoload calls written into a file whose name is different from the default loaddefs.el. Emacs provides two variables to control this:
The value of this constant is a regexp that matches autoload cookies.
loaddefs-generate
copies the Lisp form that follows the
cookie into the autoload file it generates. This will match comments
like ‘;;;###autoload’ and ‘;;;###calc-autoload’.
The value of this variable names an Emacs Lisp file where the autoload calls should go. The default value is loaddefs.el, but you can override that, e.g., in the local variables section of a .el file (see File Local Variables). The autoload file is assumed to contain a trailer starting with a formfeed character.
The following function may be used to explicitly load the library specified by an autoload object:
This function performs the loading specified by autoload, which
should be an autoload object. The optional argument name, if
non-nil
, should be a symbol whose function value is
autoload; in that case, the return value of this function is the
symbol’s new function value. If the value of the optional argument
macro-only is macro
, this function avoids loading a
function, only a macro.
During completion for the commands describe-variable
and
describe-function
, Emacs will try to load files which may
contain definitions matching the prefix being completed. The variable
definition-prefixes
holds a hashtable which maps a prefix to
the corresponding list of files to load for it. Entries to this
mapping are added by calls to register-definition-prefixes
which are generated by loaddefs-generate
(see Autoload). Files which don’t contain any definitions worth
loading (test files, for example), should set
autoload-compute-prefixes
to nil
as a file-local
variable.
Do not add an autoload comment unless it is really necessary. Autoloading code means it is always globally visible. Once an item is autoloaded, there is no compatible way to transition back to it not being autoloaded (after people become accustomed to being able to use it without an explicit load).
python-mode
function, so that people can simply use M-x
python-mode to load the library.
find-exec-terminator
.)
(defvar foo)
to silence an undefined variable warning, and
declare-function
(see Telling the Compiler that a Function is Defined) to silence an
undefined function warning; or require the relevant library; or use an
explicit autoload statement.
You can load a given file more than once in an Emacs session. For example, after you have rewritten and reinstalled a function definition by editing it in a buffer, you may wish to return to the original version; you can do this by reloading the file it came from.
When you load or reload files, bear in mind that the load
and
load-library
functions automatically load a byte-compiled file
rather than a non-compiled file of similar name. If you rewrite a file
that you intend to save and reinstall, you need to byte-compile the new
version; otherwise Emacs will load the older, byte-compiled file instead
of your newer, non-compiled file! If that happens, the message
displayed when loading the file includes, ‘(compiled; note, source is
newer)’, to remind you to recompile it.
When writing the forms in a Lisp library file, keep in mind that the
file might be loaded more than once. For example, think about whether
each variable should be reinitialized when you reload the library;
defvar
does not change the value if the variable is already
initialized. (See Defining Global Variables.)
The simplest way to add an element to an alist is like this:
(push '(leif-mode " Leif") minor-mode-alist)
But this would add multiple elements if the library is reloaded. To
avoid the problem, use add-to-list
(see Modifying List Variables):
(add-to-list 'minor-mode-alist '(leif-mode " Leif"))
Occasionally you will want to test explicitly whether a library has
already been loaded. If the library uses provide
to provide a
named feature, you can use featurep
earlier in the file to test
whether the provide
call has been executed before (see Features). Alternatively, you could use something like this:
(defvar foo-was-loaded nil) (unless foo-was-loaded execute-first-time-only (setq foo-was-loaded t))
provide
and require
are an alternative to
autoload
for loading files automatically. They work in terms of
named features. Autoloading is triggered by calling a specific
function, but a feature is loaded the first time another program asks
for it by name.
A feature name is a symbol that stands for a collection of functions, variables, etc. The file that defines them should provide the feature. Another program that uses them may ensure they are defined by requiring the feature. This loads the file of definitions if it hasn’t been loaded already.
To require the presence of a feature, call require
with the
feature name as argument. require
looks in the global variable
features
to see whether the desired feature has been provided
already. If not, it loads the feature from the appropriate file. This
file should call provide
at the top level to add the feature to
features
; if it fails to do so, require
signals an error.
For example, in idlwave.el, the definition for
idlwave-complete-filename
includes the following code:
(defun idlwave-complete-filename () "Use the comint stuff to complete a file name." (require 'comint) (let* ((comint-file-name-chars "~/A-Za-z0-9+@:_.$#%={}\\-") (comint-completion-addsuffix nil) ...) (comint-dynamic-complete-filename)))
The expression (require 'comint)
loads the file comint.el
if it has not yet been loaded, ensuring that
comint-dynamic-complete-filename
is defined. Features are
normally named after the files that provide them, so that
require
need not be given the file name. (Note that it is
important that the require
statement be outside the body of the
let
. Loading a library while its variables are let-bound can
have unintended consequences, namely the variables becoming unbound
after the let exits.)
The comint.el file contains the following top-level expression:
(provide 'comint)
This adds comint
to the global features
list, so that
(require 'comint)
will henceforth know that nothing needs to be
done.
When require
is used at top level in a file, it takes effect
when you byte-compile that file (see Byte Compilation) as well as
when you load it. This is in case the required package contains macros
that the byte compiler must know about. It also avoids byte compiler
warnings for functions and variables defined in the file loaded with
require
.
Although top-level calls to require
are evaluated during
byte compilation, provide
calls are not. Therefore, you can
ensure that a file of definitions is loaded before it is byte-compiled
by including a provide
followed by a require
for the same
feature, as in the following example.
(provide 'my-feature) ; Ignored by byte compiler,
; evaluated by load
.
(require 'my-feature) ; Evaluated by byte compiler.
The compiler ignores the provide
, then processes the
require
by loading the file in question. Loading the file does
execute the provide
call, so the subsequent require
call
does nothing when the file is loaded.
This function announces that feature is now loaded, or being loaded, into the current Emacs session. This means that the facilities associated with feature are or will be available for other Lisp programs.
The direct effect of calling provide
is to add feature to
the front of features
if it is not already in that list and
call any eval-after-load
code waiting for it (see Hooks for Loading). The argument feature must be a symbol.
provide
returns feature.
If provided, subfeatures should be a list of symbols indicating
a set of specific subfeatures provided by this version of
feature. You can test the presence of a subfeature using
featurep
. The idea of subfeatures is that you use them when a
package (which is one feature) is complex enough to make it
useful to give names to various parts or functionalities of the
package, which might or might not be loaded, or might or might not be
present in a given version. See Testing Availability of Network Features, for
an example.
features ⇒ (bar bish) (provide 'foo) ⇒ foo features ⇒ (foo bar bish)
When a file is loaded to satisfy an autoload, and it stops due to an
error in the evaluation of its contents, any function definitions or
provide
calls that occurred during the load are undone.
See Autoload.
This function checks whether feature is present in the current
Emacs session (using (featurep feature)
; see below). The
argument feature must be a symbol.
If the feature is not present, then require
loads filename
with load
. If filename is not supplied, then the name of
the symbol feature is used as the base file name to load.
However, in this case, require
insists on finding feature
with an added ‘.el’ or ‘.elc’ suffix (possibly extended with
a compression suffix); a file whose name is just feature won’t
be used. (The variable load-suffixes
specifies the exact
required Lisp suffixes.)
If noerror is non-nil
, that suppresses errors from actual
loading of the file. In that case, require
returns nil
if loading the file fails. Normally, require
returns
feature.
If loading the file succeeds but does not provide feature,
require
signals an error about the missing feature.
This function returns t
if feature has been provided in
the current Emacs session (i.e., if feature is a member of
features
.) If subfeature is non-nil
, then the
function returns t
only if that subfeature is provided as well
(i.e., if subfeature is a member of the subfeature
property of the feature symbol.)
The value of this variable is a list of symbols that are the features
loaded in the current Emacs session. Each symbol was put in this list
with a call to provide
. The order of the elements in the
features
list is not significant.
The use-package
macro provides a convenient way of loading a
feature and configuring it for use. It provides a means to combine
requiring a feature, like require
does, with code to be run
when the feature is actually loaded, similar to load-time hooks
(see Hooks for Loading). The declarative syntax of
use-package
makes it exceptionally easy to use in user init
files.
This macro specifies how to load the named feature and how to configure and customize it for use. The arguments args are keyword-value pairs. Some of the important keywords and their values are:
:init forms
Specifies forms to execute before feature is loaded.
:config forms
Specifies forms to execute after loading feature.
:defer condition
If condition is non-nil
, it specifies to defer loading
feature until any of the autoloaded commands or variables of
feature are first used. If condition is a number n,
it specifies that feature should be loaded after n
seconds of idle time.
:commands commands…
Specifies commands of feature to be autoloaded.
:bind keybindings…
Specifies the keybindings for features commands. Each binding has the form
(key-sequence . command)
or
(:map keymap (key-sequence . command))
where key-sequence is in the form accepted by the kbd
macro (see Key Sequences).
For more details about use-package
, see use-package User Manual.
This function returns the name of the file that defined symbol.
If type is nil
, then any kind of definition is acceptable.
If type is defun
, defvar
, or defface
, that
specifies function definition, variable definition, or face definition
only.
The value is normally an absolute file name. It can also be nil
,
if the definition is not associated with any file. If symbol
specifies an autoloaded function, the value can be a relative file name
without extension.
If the optional third argument native-p is non-nil
, and
Emacs was built with native compilation support (see Compilation of Lisp to Native Code), this function will try to find the .eln file
that defined symbol, instead of the .elc or .el
file. If such a .eln file is found and is not outdated, the
function will return its absolute file name; otherwise it will report
the name of either the source or the byte-compiled file.
The basis for symbol-file
is the data in the variable
load-history
.
The value of this variable is an alist that associates the names of loaded library files with the names of the functions and variables they defined, as well as the features they provided or required.
Each element in this alist describes one loaded library (including libraries that are preloaded at startup). It is a list whose CAR is the absolute file name of the library (a string). The rest of the list elements have these forms:
var
The symbol var was defined as a variable.
(defun . fun)
The function fun was defined.
(defun . fun)
, which represents defining fun as a
function.
(defface . face)
The face face was defined.
(require . feature)
The feature feature was required.
(provide . feature)
The feature feature was provided.
(cl-defmethod method specializers)
The named method was defined by using cl-defmethod
, with
specializers as its specializers.
(define-type . type)
The type type was defined.
The value of load-history
may have one element whose CAR is
nil
. This element describes definitions made with
eval-buffer
on a buffer that is not visiting a file.
The command eval-region
updates load-history
, but does so
by adding the symbols defined to the element for the file being visited,
rather than replacing that element. See Eval.
In addition to load-history
, every function keeps track of its
own history in the symbol property function-history
.
The reason why functions are treated specially in this respect is that
it is common for functions to be defined in two steps in two different
files (typically, one of them is an autoload), so in order to be
able to properly unload a file, we need to know more precisely
what that file did to the function definition.
The symbol property function-history
holds a list of the form
(file1 def2 file2 def3 ...)
, where
file1 is the last file that changed the definition and
def2 was the definition before file1, set by file2,
etc. Logically this list should end with the name of the first file
that defined this function, but to save space this last element
is usually omitted.
You can discard the functions and variables loaded by a library to
reclaim memory for other Lisp objects. To do this, use the function
unload-feature
:
This command unloads the library that provided feature feature.
It undefines all functions, macros, and variables defined in that
library with defun
, defalias
, defsubst
,
defmacro
, defconst
, defvar
, and defcustom
.
It then restores any autoloads formerly associated with those symbols.
(Loading saves these in the function-history
property of the symbol.)
Before restoring the previous definitions, unload-feature
runs
remove-hook
to remove functions defined by the library from certain
hooks. These hooks include variables whose names end in ‘-hook’
(or the deprecated suffix ‘-hooks’), plus those listed in
unload-feature-special-hooks
, as well as
auto-mode-alist
. This is to prevent Emacs from ceasing to
function because important hooks refer to functions that are no longer
defined.
Standard unloading activities also undo ELP profiling of functions in that library, unprovides any features provided by the library, and cancels timers held in variables defined by the library.
If these measures are not sufficient to prevent malfunction, a library
can define an explicit unloader named feature-unload-function
.
If that symbol is defined as a function, unload-feature
calls
it with no arguments before doing anything else. It can do whatever
is appropriate to unload the library. If it returns nil
,
unload-feature
proceeds to take the normal unload actions.
Otherwise it considers the job to be done.
Ordinarily, unload-feature
refuses to unload a library on which
other loaded libraries depend. (A library a depends on library
b if a contains a require
for b.) If the
optional argument force is non-nil
, dependencies are
ignored and you can unload any library.
The unload-feature
function is written in Lisp; its actions are
based on the variable load-history
.
This variable holds a list of hooks to be scanned before unloading a library, to remove functions defined in the library.
You can ask for code to be executed each time Emacs loads a library,
by using the variable after-load-functions
:
This abnormal hook is run after loading a file. Each function in the hook is called with a single argument, the absolute filename of the file that was just loaded.
If you want code to be executed when a particular library is
loaded, use the macro with-eval-after-load
:
This macro arranges to evaluate body at the end of loading the file library, each time library is loaded. If library is already loaded, it evaluates body right away.
You don’t need to give a directory or extension in the file name library. Normally, you just give a bare file name, like this:
(with-eval-after-load "js" (keymap-set js-mode-map "C-c C-c" 'js-eval))
To restrict which files can trigger the evaluation, include a
directory or an extension or both in library. Only a file whose
absolute true name (i.e., the name with all symbolic links chased out)
matches all the given name components will match. In the following
example, my_inst.elc or my_inst.elc.gz in some directory
..../foo/bar
will trigger the evaluation, but not
my_inst.el:
(with-eval-after-load "foo/bar/my_inst.elc" ...)
library can also be a feature (i.e., a symbol), in which case
body is evaluated at the end of any file where
(provide library)
is called.
An error in body does not undo the load, but does prevent execution of the rest of body.
Normally, well-designed Lisp programs should not use
with-eval-after-load
. If you need to examine and set the
variables defined in another library (those meant for outside use),
you can do it immediately—there is no need to wait until the library
is loaded. If you need to call functions defined by that library, you
should load the library, preferably with require
(see Features).
A dynamic Emacs module is a shared library that provides additional functionality for use in Emacs Lisp programs, just like a package written in Emacs Lisp would.
Functions that load Emacs Lisp packages can also load dynamic modules. They recognize dynamic modules by looking at their file-name extension, a.k.a. “suffix”. This suffix is platform-dependent.
This variable holds the system-dependent value of the file-name extension of the module files. Its value is .so on POSIX hosts, .dylib on macOS, and .dll on MS-Windows.
On macOS, dynamic modules can also have the suffix .so in addition to .dylib.
Every dynamic module should export a C-callable function named
emacs_module_init
, which Emacs will call as part of the call to
load
or require
which loads the module. It should also
export a symbol named plugin_is_GPL_compatible
to indicate that
its code is released under the GPL or compatible license; Emacs will
signal an error if your program tries to load modules that don’t
export such a symbol.
If a module needs to call Emacs functions, it should do so through the API (Application Programming Interface) defined and documented in the header file emacs-module.h that is part of the Emacs distribution. See Writing Dynamically-Loaded Modules, for details of using that API when writing your own modules.
Modules can create user-ptr
Lisp objects that embed pointers to
C struct’s defined by the module. This is useful for keeping around
complex data structures created by a module, to be passed back to the
module’s functions. User-ptr objects can also have associated
finalizers – functions to be run when the object is GC’ed; this
is useful for freeing any resources allocated for the underlying data
structure, such as memory, open file descriptors, etc. See Conversion Between Lisp and Module Values.
This function returns t
if its argument is a user-ptr
object.
Emacs calls this low-level primitive to load a module from the
specified file and perform the necessary initialization of the
module. This is the primitive which makes sure the module exports the
plugin_is_GPL_compatible
symbol, calls the module’s
emacs_module_init
function, and signals an error if that
function returns an error indication, or if the user typed C-g
during the initialization. If the initialization succeeds,
module-load
returns t
. Note that file must
already have the proper file-name extension, as this function doesn’t
try looking for files with known extensions, unlike load
.
Unlike load
, module-load
doesn’t record the module in
load-history
, doesn’t print any messages, and doesn’t protect
against recursive loads. Most users should therefore use load
,
load-file
, load-library
, or require
instead of
module-load
.
Loadable modules in Emacs are enabled by using the --with-modules option at configure time.
Emacs Lisp has a compiler that translates functions written in Lisp into a special representation called byte-code that can be executed more efficiently. The compiler replaces Lisp function definitions with byte-code. When a byte-code function is called, its definition is evaluated by the byte-code interpreter.
Because the byte-compiled code is evaluated by the byte-code interpreter, instead of being executed directly by the machine’s hardware (as true compiled code is), byte-code is completely transportable from machine to machine without recompilation. It is not, however, as fast as true compiled code.
In general, any version of Emacs can run byte-compiled code produced by recent earlier versions of Emacs, but the reverse is not true.
If you do not want a Lisp file to be compiled, ever, put a file-local
variable binding for no-byte-compile
into it, like this:
;; -*-no-byte-compile: t; -*-
A byte-compiled function is not as efficient as a primitive function written in C, but runs much faster than the version written in Lisp. Here is an example:
(defun silly-loop (n) "Return the time, in seconds, to run N iterations of a loop." (let ((t1 (float-time))) (while (> (setq n (1- n)) 0)) (- (float-time) t1))) ⇒ silly-loop
(silly-loop 50000000) ⇒ 5.200886011123657
(byte-compile 'silly-loop)
⇒ [Compiled code not shown]
(silly-loop 50000000) ⇒ 0.6239290237426758
In this example, the interpreted code required more than 5 seconds to run, whereas the byte-compiled code required less than 1 second. These results are representative, but actual results may vary.
You can byte-compile an individual function or macro definition with
the byte-compile
function. You can compile a whole file with
byte-compile-file
, or several files with
byte-recompile-directory
or batch-byte-compile
.
Sometimes, the byte compiler produces warning and/or error messages
(see Compiler Errors, for details). These messages are normally
recorded in a buffer called *Compile-Log*, which uses
Compilation mode. See Compilation Mode in The GNU Emacs
Manual. However, if the variable byte-compile-debug
is
non-nil
, error messages will be signaled as Lisp errors instead
(see Errors).
Be careful when writing macro calls in files that you intend to
byte-compile. Since macro calls are expanded when they are compiled,
the macros need to be loaded into Emacs or the byte compiler will not
do the right thing. The usual way to handle this is with
require
forms which specify the files containing the needed
macro definitions (see Features). Normally, the
byte compiler does not evaluate the code that it is compiling, but it
handles require
forms specially, by loading the specified
libraries. To avoid loading the macro definition files when someone
runs the compiled program, write eval-when-compile
around the require
calls (see Evaluation During Compilation). For
more details, See Macros and Byte Compilation.
Inline (defsubst
) functions are less troublesome; if you
compile a call to such a function before its definition is known, the
call will still work right, it will just run slower.
This function byte-compiles the function definition of symbol,
replacing the previous definition with the compiled one. The function
definition of symbol must be the actual code for the function;
byte-compile
does not handle function indirection. The return
value is the byte-code function object which is the compiled
definition of symbol (see Byte-Code Function Objects).
(defun factorial (integer) "Compute factorial of INTEGER." (if (= 1 integer) 1 (* integer (factorial (1- integer))))) ⇒ factorial
(byte-compile 'factorial) ⇒ #[257 "\211\300U\203^H^@\300\207\211\301^BS!_\207" [1 factorial] 4 "Compute factorial of INTEGER.\n\n(fn INTEGER)"]
If symbol’s definition is a byte-code function object,
byte-compile
does nothing and returns nil
. It does not
compile the symbol’s definition again, since the original
(non-compiled) code has already been replaced in the symbol’s function
cell by the byte-compiled code.
The argument to byte-compile
can also be a lambda
expression. In that case, the function returns the corresponding
compiled code but does not store it anywhere.
This command reads the defun containing point, compiles it, and evaluates the result. If you use this on a defun that is actually a function definition, the effect is to install a compiled version of that function.
compile-defun
normally displays the result of evaluation in the
echo area, but if arg is non-nil
, it inserts the result
in the current buffer after the form it has compiled.
This function compiles a file of Lisp code named filename into a file of byte-code. The output file’s name is made by changing the ‘.el’ suffix into ‘.elc’; if filename does not end in ‘.el’, it adds ‘.elc’ to the end of filename.
Compilation works by reading the input file one form at a time. If it is a definition of a function or macro, the compiled function or macro definition is written out. Other forms are batched together, then each batch is compiled, and written so that its compiled code will be executed when the file is read. All comments are discarded when the input file is read.
This command returns t
if there were no errors and nil
otherwise. When called interactively, it prompts for the file name.
$ ls -l push* -rw-r--r-- 1 lewis lewis 791 Oct 5 20:31 push.el
(byte-compile-file "~/emacs/push.el") ⇒ t
$ ls -l push* -rw-r--r-- 1 lewis lewis 791 Oct 5 20:31 push.el -rw-rw-rw- 1 lewis lewis 638 Oct 8 20:25 push.elc
This command recompiles every ‘.el’ file in directory (or its subdirectories) that needs recompilation. A file needs recompilation if a ‘.elc’ file exists but is older than the ‘.el’ file.
When a ‘.el’ file has no corresponding ‘.elc’ file,
flag says what to do. If it is nil
, this command ignores
these files. If flag is 0, it compiles them. If it is neither
nil
nor 0, it asks the user whether to compile each such file,
and asks about each subdirectory as well.
Interactively, byte-recompile-directory
prompts for
directory and flag is the prefix argument.
If force is non-nil
, this command recompiles every
‘.el’ file that has a ‘.elc’ file.
This command will normally not compile ‘.el’ files that are
symlinked. If the optional follow-symlink parameter is
non-nil
, symlinked ‘.el’ will also be compiled.
The returned value is unpredictable.
This function runs byte-compile-file
on files specified on the
command line. This function must be used only in a batch execution of
Emacs, as it kills Emacs on completion. An error in one file does not
prevent processing of subsequent files, but no output file will be
generated for it, and the Emacs process will terminate with a nonzero
status code.
If noforce is non-nil
, this function does not recompile
files that have an up-to-date ‘.elc’ file.
$ emacs -batch -f batch-byte-compile *.el
When Emacs loads functions and variables from a byte-compiled file, it normally does not load their documentation strings into memory. Each documentation string is dynamically loaded from the byte-compiled file only when needed. This saves memory, and speeds up loading by skipping the processing of the documentation strings.
This feature has a drawback: if you delete, move, or alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new version), Emacs may no longer be able to access the documentation string of previously-loaded functions or variables. Such a problem normally only occurs if you build Emacs yourself, and happen to edit and/or recompile the Lisp source files. To solve it, just reload each file after recompilation.
Dynamic loading of documentation strings from byte-compiled files is
determined, at compile time, for each byte-compiled file. It can be
disabled via the option byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings
.
If this is non-nil
, the byte compiler generates compiled files
that are set up for dynamic loading of documentation strings.
To disable the dynamic loading feature for a specific file, set this
option to nil
in its header line (see Local Variables in Files in The GNU Emacs Manual), like this:
-*-byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings: nil;-*-
This is useful mainly if you expect to change the file, and you want Emacs sessions that have already loaded it to keep working when the file changes.
Internally, the dynamic loading of documentation strings is accomplished by writing compiled files with a special Lisp reader construct, ‘#@count’. This construct skips the next count characters. It also uses the ‘#$’ construct, which stands for the name of this file, as a string. Do not use these constructs in Lisp source files; they are not designed to be clear to humans reading the file.
When you compile a file, you can optionally enable the dynamic function loading feature (also known as lazy loading). With dynamic function loading, loading the file doesn’t fully read the function definitions in the file. Instead, each function definition contains a place-holder which refers to the file. The first time each function is called, it reads the full definition from the file, to replace the place-holder.
The advantage of dynamic function loading is that loading the file should become faster. This is a good thing for a file which contains many separate user-callable functions, if using one of them does not imply you will probably also use the rest. A specialized mode which provides many keyboard commands often has that usage pattern: a user may invoke the mode, but use only a few of the commands it provides.
The dynamic loading feature has certain disadvantages:
These problems will never happen in normal circumstances with installed Emacs files. But they are quite likely to happen with Lisp files that you are changing. The easiest way to prevent these problems is to reload the new compiled file immediately after each recompilation.
Experience shows that using dynamic function loading provides benefits that are hardly measurable, so this feature is deprecated since Emacs 27.1.
The byte compiler uses the dynamic function loading feature if the
variable byte-compile-dynamic
is non-nil
at compilation
time. Do not set this variable globally, since dynamic loading is
desirable only for certain files. Instead, enable the feature for
specific source files with file-local variable bindings. For example,
you could do it by writing this text in the source file’s first line:
-*-byte-compile-dynamic: t;-*-
If this is non-nil
, the byte compiler generates compiled files
that are set up for dynamic function loading.
If function is a byte-code function object, this immediately finishes loading the byte code of function from its byte-compiled file, if it is not fully loaded already. Otherwise, it does nothing. It always returns function.
These features permit you to write code to be evaluated during compilation of a program.
This form marks body to be evaluated both when you compile the containing code and when you run it (whether compiled or not).
You can get a similar result by putting body in a separate file
and referring to that file with require
. That method is
preferable when body is large. Effectively require
is
automatically eval-and-compile
, the package is loaded both when
compiling and executing.
autoload
is also effectively eval-and-compile
too. It’s
recognized when compiling, so uses of such a function don’t produce
“not known to be defined” warnings.
Most uses of eval-and-compile
are fairly sophisticated.
If a macro has a helper function to build its result, and that macro
is used both locally and outside the package, then
eval-and-compile
should be used to get the helper both when
compiling and then later when running.
If functions are defined programmatically (with fset
say), then
eval-and-compile
can be used to have that done at compile-time
as well as run-time, so calls to those functions are checked (and
warnings about “not known to be defined” suppressed).
This form marks body to be evaluated at compile time but not when the compiled program is loaded. The result of evaluation by the compiler becomes a constant which appears in the compiled program. If you load the source file, rather than compiling it, body is evaluated normally.
If you have a constant that needs some calculation to produce,
eval-when-compile
can do that at compile-time. For example,
(defvar my-regexp (eval-when-compile (regexp-opt '("aaa" "aba" "abb"))))
If you’re using another package, but only need macros from it (the
byte compiler will expand those), then eval-when-compile
can be
used to load it for compiling, but not executing. For example,
(eval-when-compile (require 'my-macro-package))
The same sort of thing goes for macros and defsubst
functions
defined locally and only for use within the file. They are needed for
compiling the file, but in most cases they are not needed for
execution of the compiled file. For example,
(eval-when-compile (unless (fboundp 'some-new-thing) (defmacro some-new-thing () (compatibility code))))
This is often good for code that’s only a fallback for compatibility with other versions of Emacs.
Common Lisp Note: At top level, eval-when-compile
is analogous to the Common
Lisp idiom (eval-when (compile eval) …)
. Elsewhere, the
Common Lisp ‘#.’ reader macro (but not when interpreting) is closer
to what eval-when-compile
does.
Error and warning messages from byte compilation are printed in a buffer named *Compile-Log*. These messages include file names and line numbers identifying the location of the problem. The usual Emacs commands for operating on compiler output can be used on these messages.
When an error is due to invalid syntax in the program, the byte compiler might get confused about the error’s exact location. One way to investigate is to switch to the buffer *Compiler Input*. (This buffer name starts with a space, so it does not show up in the Buffer Menu.) This buffer contains the program being compiled, and point shows how far the byte compiler was able to read; the cause of the error might be nearby. See Debugging Invalid Lisp Syntax, for some tips for locating syntax errors.
A common type of warning issued by the byte compiler is for functions and variables that were used but not defined. Such warnings report the line number for the end of the file, not the locations where the missing functions or variables were used; to find these, you must search the file manually.
If you are sure that a warning message about a missing function or variable is unjustified, there are several ways to suppress it:
fboundp
test, like
this:
(if (fboundp 'func) ...(func ...)...)
The call to func must be in the then-form of the
if
, and func must appear quoted in the call to
fboundp
. (This feature operates for cond
as well.)
boundp
test:
(if (boundp 'variable) ...variable...)
The reference to variable must be in the then-form of the
if
, and variable must appear quoted in the call to
boundp
.
declare-function
. See Telling the Compiler that a Function is Defined.
defvar
with no initial value. (Note that this marks the
variable as special, i.e. dynamically bound, but only within the
current lexical scope, or file if at top-level.) See Defining Global Variables.
You can also suppress compiler warnings within a certain expression
using the with-suppressed-warnings
macro:
In execution, this is equivalent to (progn body...)
, but
the compiler does not issue warnings for the specified conditions in
body. warnings is an association list of warning symbols
and function/variable symbols they apply to. For instance, if you
wish to call an obsolete function called foo
, but want to
suppress the compilation warning, say:
(with-suppressed-warnings ((obsolete foo)) (foo ...))
For more coarse-grained suppression of compiler warnings, you can use
the with-no-warnings
construct:
In execution, this is equivalent to (progn body...)
,
but the compiler does not issue warnings for anything that occurs
inside body.
We recommend that you use with-suppressed-warnings
instead, but
if you do use this construct, that you use it around the smallest
possible piece of code to avoid missing possible warnings other than
one you intend to suppress.
Byte compiler warnings can be controlled more precisely by setting
the variable byte-compile-warnings
. See its documentation
string for details.
Sometimes you may wish the byte-compiler warnings to be reported
using error
. If so, set byte-compile-error-on-warn
to a
non-nil
value.
Byte-compiled functions have a special data type: they are byte-code function objects. Whenever such an object appears as a function to be called, Emacs uses the byte-code interpreter to execute the byte-code.
Internally, a byte-code function object is much like a vector; its
elements can be accessed using aref
. Its printed
representation is like that for a vector, with an additional ‘#’
before the opening ‘[’. It must have at least four elements;
there is no maximum number, but only the first six elements have any
normal use. They are:
The descriptor of the arguments. This can either be a list of
arguments, as described in Features of Argument Lists, or an integer encoding
the required number of arguments. In the latter case, the value of
the descriptor specifies the minimum number of arguments in the bits
zero to 6, and the maximum number of arguments in bits 8 to 14. If
the argument list uses &rest
, then bit 7 is set; otherwise it’s
cleared.
If argdesc is a list, the arguments will be dynamically bound before executing the byte code. If argdesc is an integer, the arguments will be instead pushed onto the stack of the byte-code interpreter, before executing the code.
The string containing the byte-code instructions.
The vector of Lisp objects referenced by the byte code. These include symbols used as function names and variable names.
The maximum stack size this function needs.
The documentation string (if any); otherwise, nil
. The value may
be a number or a list, in case the documentation string is stored in a
file. Use the function documentation
to get the real
documentation string (see Access to Documentation Strings).
The interactive spec (if any). This can be a string or a Lisp
expression. It is nil
for a function that isn’t interactive.
Here’s an example of a byte-code function object, in printed
representation. It is the definition of the command
backward-sexp
.
#[256 "\211\204^G^@\300\262^A\301^A[!\207" [1 forward-sexp] 3 1793299 "^p"]
The primitive way to create a byte-code object is with
make-byte-code
:
This function constructs and returns a byte-code function object with elements as its elements.
You should not try to come up with the elements for a byte-code function yourself, because if they are inconsistent, Emacs may crash when you call the function. Always leave it to the byte compiler to create these objects; it makes the elements consistent (we hope).
People do not write byte-code; that job is left to the byte compiler. But we provide a disassembler to satisfy a cat-like curiosity. The disassembler converts the byte-compiled code into human-readable form.
The byte-code interpreter is implemented as a simple stack machine. It pushes values onto a stack of its own, then pops them off to use them in calculations whose results are themselves pushed back on the stack. When a byte-code function returns, it pops a value off the stack and returns it as the value of the function.
In addition to the stack, byte-code functions can use, bind, and set ordinary Lisp variables, by transferring values between variables and the stack.
This command displays the disassembled code for object. In
interactive use, or if buffer-or-name is nil
or omitted,
the output goes in a buffer named *Disassemble*. If
buffer-or-name is non-nil
, it must be a buffer or the
name of an existing buffer. Then the output goes there, at point, and
point is left before the output.
The argument object can be a function name, a lambda expression
(see Lambda Expressions), or a byte-code object (see Byte-Code Function Objects). If it is a lambda expression, disassemble
compiles
it and disassembles the resulting compiled code.
Here are two examples of using the disassemble
function. We
have added explanatory comments to help you relate the byte-code to the
Lisp source; these do not appear in the output of disassemble
.
(defun factorial (integer) "Compute factorial of an integer." (if (= 1 integer) 1 (* integer (factorial (1- integer))))) ⇒ factorial
(factorial 4) ⇒ 24
(disassemble 'factorial) -| byte-code for factorial: doc: Compute factorial of an integer. args: (arg1)
0 dup ; Get the value of integer
and
; push it onto the stack.
1 constant 1 ; Push 1 onto stack.
2 eqlsign ; Pop top two values off stack, compare ; them, and push result onto stack.
3 goto-if-nil 1 ; Pop and test top of stack;
; if nil
, go to 1, else continue.
6 constant 1 ; Push 1 onto top of stack.
7 return ; Return the top element of the stack.
8:1 dup ; Push value ofinteger
onto stack. 9 constant factorial ; Pushfactorial
onto stack. 10 stack-ref 2 ; Push value ofinteger
onto stack. 11 sub1 ; Popinteger
, decrement value, ; push new value onto stack. 12 call 1 ; Call functionfactorial
using first ; (i.e., top) stack element as argument; ; push returned value onto stack.
13 mult ; Pop top two values off stack, multiply ; them, and push result onto stack. 14 return ; Return the top element of the stack.
The silly-loop
function is somewhat more complex:
(defun silly-loop (n) "Return time before and after N iterations of a loop." (let ((t1 (current-time-string))) (while (> (setq n (1- n)) 0)) (list t1 (current-time-string)))) ⇒ silly-loop
(disassemble 'silly-loop) -| byte-code for silly-loop: doc: Return time before and after N iterations of a loop. args: (arg1)
0 constant current-time-string ; Push current-time-string
; onto top of stack.
1 call 0 ; Callcurrent-time-string
with no ; argument, push result onto stack ast1
.
2:1 stack-ref 1 ; Get value of the argument n
; and push the value on the stack.
3 sub1 ; Subtract 1 from top of stack.
4 dup ; Duplicate top of stack; i.e., copy the top ; of the stack and push copy onto stack. 5 stack-set 3 ; Pop the top of the stack, ; and setn
to the value. ;; (In effect, the sequencedup stack-set
copies the top of ;; the stack into the value ofn
without popping it.)
7 constant 0 ; Push 0 onto stack. 8 gtr ; Pop top two values off stack, ; test if n is greater than 0 ; and push result onto stack.
9 goto-if-not-nil 1 ; Goto 1 if n
> 0
; (this continues the while loop)
; else continue.
12 dup ; Push value oft1
onto stack. 13 constant current-time-string ; Pushcurrent-time-string
; onto the top of the stack. 14 call 0 ; Callcurrent-time-string
again.
15 list2 ; Pop top two elements off stack, create a ; list of them, and push it onto stack. 16 return ; Return value of the top of stack.
In addition to the byte-compilation, described in the previous chapter, Emacs can also optionally compile Lisp function definitions into a true compiled code, known as native code. This feature uses the libgccjit library, which is part of the GCC distribution, and requires that Emacs be built with support for using that library. It also requires to have GCC and Binutils (the assembler and linker) available on your system for you to be able to native-compile Lisp code.
To determine whether the current Emacs process can produce and load
natively-compiled Lisp code, call
native-comp-available-p
(see Native-Compilation Functions).
Unlike byte-compiled code, natively-compiled Lisp code is executed directly by the machine’s hardware, and therefore runs at full speed that the host CPU can provide. The resulting speedup generally depends on what the Lisp code does, but is usually 2.5 to 5 times faster than the corresponding byte-compiled code.
Since native code is generally incompatible between different systems, the natively-compiled code is not transportable from one machine to another, it can only be used on the same machine where it was produced or on very similar ones (having the same CPU and run-time libraries). The transportability of natively-compiled code is the same as that of shared libraries (.so or .dll files).
Libraries of natively-compiled code include crucial dependencies on Emacs Lisp primitives (see What Is a Function?) and their calling conventions, and thus Emacs usually won’t load natively-compiled code produced by earlier or later Emacs versions; native compilation of the same Lisp code by a different Emacs version will usually produce a natively-compiled library under a unique file name that only that version of Emacs will be able to load. However, the use of unique file names allows to have in the same directory several versions of the same Lisp library natively-compiled by several different versions of Emacs.
A non-nil
file-local variable binding of
no-byte-compile
(see Byte Compilation) also disables the
native compilation of that file. In addition, a similar variable
no-native-compile
disables just the native compilation of the
file. If both no-byte-compile
and no-native-compile
are
specified, the former takes precedence.
Sometimes there could be a need to prevent the native compilation
from writing its results, the *.eln files, into a subdirectory
of user-emacs-directory
(see The Init File). You can do that
by either changing the value of native-comp-eln-load-path
(see Native-Compilation Variables) or by temporarily pointing the
HOME
environment variable to a non-existing directory. Note
that the latter technique might still produce a small number of
*.eln files if Emacs needs to generate trampolines, which
are used if Lisp primitives are advised or redefined in your Lisp code
that is being natively compiled. See trampolines. Alternatively, you can specify that the *.eln
files are written to a non-default directory using the
startup-redirect-eln-cache
function; see Native-Compilation Functions.
Native-Compilation is implemented as a side effect of byte-compilation (see Byte Compilation). Thus, compiling Lisp code natively always produces its byte code as well, and therefore all the rules and caveats of preparing Lisp code for byte compilation (see Byte-Compilation Functions) are valid for native-compilation as well.
You can natively-compile either a single function or macro
definition, or a whole file of Lisp code, with the
native-compile
function. Natively-compiling a file will
produce the .eln file with native code.
Native compilation might produce warning or error messages; these
are normally recorded in the buffer called
*Native-compile-Log*. In interactive sessions, it uses the
special LIMPLE mode (native-comp-limple-mode
), which sets up
font-lock
as appropriate for this log, and is otherwise the
same as Fundamental mode. Logging of messages resulting from
native-compilation can be controlled by the native-comp-verbose
variable (see Native-Compilation Variables).
When Emacs is run non-interactively, messages produced by
native-compilation are reported by calling message
(see Displaying Messages in the Echo Area), and are usually displayed on the
standard error stream of the terminal from which Emacs was invoked.
This function compiles function-or-file into native code. The argument function-or-file can be a function symbol, a Lisp form, or a name (a string) of the file which contains the Emacs Lisp source code to compile. If the optional argument output is provided, it must be a string specifying the name of the file to write the compiled code into. Otherwise, if function-or-file is a function or a Lisp form, this function returns the compiled object, and if function-or-file is a file name, the function returns the full absolute name of the file it created for the compiled code. The output file is by default given the .eln extension.
This function runs the final phase of the native compilation, which invokes GCC via libgccjit, in a separate subprocess, which invokes the same Emacs executable as the process that called this function.
This function runs native-compilation on files specified on the Emacs
command line in batch mode. It must be used only in a batch execution
of Emacs, as it kills Emacs upon completion of the compilation. If
one or more of the files fail to compile, the Emacs process will
attempt to compile all the other files, and will terminate with a
non-zero status code. The optional argument for-tarball, if
non-nil
, tells the function to place the resulting .eln
files in the last directory mentioned in
native-comp-eln-load-path
(see Library Search); this is
meant to be used as part of building an Emacs source tarball for the
first time, when the natively-compiled files, which are absent from
the source tarball, should be generated in the build tree instead of
the user’s cache directory.
Native compilation can be run entirely asynchronously, in a subprocess
of the main Emacs process. This leaves the main Emacs process free to
use while the compilation runs in the background. This is the method
used by Emacs to natively-compile any Lisp file or byte-compiled Lisp
file that is loaded into Emacs, when no natively-compiled file for it
is available. Note that because of this use of a subprocess, native
compilation may produce warning and errors which byte-compilation does
not, and Lisp code may thus need to be modified to work correctly. See
native-comp-async-report-warnings-errors
in see Native-Compilation Variables for more details.
This function compiles the named files asynchronously. The
argument files should be a single file name (a string) or a list
of one or more file and/or directory names. If directories are
present in the list, the optional argument recursively should be
non-nil
to cause the compilation to recurse into those
directories. If load is non-nil
, Emacs will load each
file that it succeeded to compile. The optional argument
selector allows control of which of files will be
compiled; it can have one of the following values:
nil
or omittedSelect all the files and directories in files.
Select the files and directories whose names match the regexp.
A predicate function, which will be called with each file and
directory in files, and should return non-nil
if the file
or the directory should be selected for compilation.
On systems with multiple CPU execution units, when files names
more than one file, this function will normally start several
compilation subprocesses in parallel, under the control of
native-comp-async-jobs-number
(see Native-Compilation Variables).
This command compiles the file visited by the current buffer into native code, if the file was changed since the last time it was natively-compiled.
This command compiles the file visited by the current buffer into
native code, like emacs-lisp-native-compile
, but it also loads
the native code when the compilation finishes.
The following function allows Lisp programs to test whether native-compilation is available at runtime.
This function returns non-nil
if the running Emacs process has
the native-compilation support compiled into it. On systems that load
libgccjit dynamically, it also makes sure that library is
available and can be loaded. Lisp programs that need to know up front
whether native-compilation is available should use this predicate.
By default, asynchronous native compilation writes the *.eln
files it produces to a subdirectory of the first writable directory
specified by the native-comp-eln-load-path
variable
(see Native-Compilation Variables). You can change this by using
the following function in your startup files:
This function arranges for the asynchronous native compilation to
write the produced *.eln files to cache-directory, which
must be a single directory, a string. It also destructively modifies
native-comp-eln-load-path
such that its first element is
cache-directory. If cache-directory is not an absolute
file name, it is interpreted relative to user-emacs-directory
(see The Init File).
This section documents the variables that control native-compilation.
This variable specifies the optimization level for native compilation.
Its value should be a number between −1 and 3. Values between
0 and 3 specify the optimization levels equivalent to the
corresponding compiler -O0, -O1, etc. command-line
options of the compiler. The value −1 means disable
native-compilation: functions and files will be only byte-compiled;
however, the *.eln files will still be produced, they will just
contain the compiled code in bytecode form. (This can be achieved at
function granularity by using the (declare (speed -1))
form, see The declare
Form.)
The default value is 2.
This variable specifies the level of debugging information produced by native-compilation. Its value should be a number between zero and 3, with the following meaning:
No debugging output. This is the default.
Emit debugging symbols with the native code. This allows easier
debugging of the native code with debuggers such as gdb
.
Like 1, and in addition dump pseudo-C code.
Like 2, and in addition dump the GCC intermediate passes and libgccjit log file.
This variable controls the verbosity of native-compilation by suppressing some or all of the log messages emitted by it. If its value is zero, the default, all of the log messages are suppressed. Setting it to a value between 1 and 3 will allow logging of the messages whose level is above the value. The values have the following interpretations:
No logging. This is the default.
Log the final LIMPLE representation of the code.
Log the LAP, the final LIMPLE, and some additional pass info.
Maximum verbosity: log everything.
This variable determines the maximum number of native-compilation subprocesses that will be started simultaneously. It should be a non-negative number. The default value is zero, which means use half the number of the CPU execution units, or 1 if the CPU has only one execution unit.
If this variable’s value is non-nil
, warnings and errors from
asynchronous native-compilation subprocesses are reported in the main
Emacs session in a buffer named *Warnings*. The default value
t
means display the resulting buffer. To log warnings without
popping up the *Warnings* buffer, set this variable to
silent
.
A common cause for asynchronous native-compilation to produce
warnings is compiling a file that is missing some require
of a
necessary feature. The feature may be loaded into the main emacs, but
because native compilation always starts from a subprocess with a
pristine environment, that may not be true for the subprocess.
If this variable’s value is non-nil
, Emacs will query upon exiting
whether to exit and kill any asynchronous native-compilation
subprocesses that are still running, thus preventing the corresponding
.eln files from being written. If the value is nil
, the
default, Emacs will kill these subprocesses without querying.
The variable native-comp-eln-load-path
holds the list of
directories where Emacs looks for the *.eln files
(see Library Search); in that role it is the equivalent of
load-path
used to look for *.el and *.elc files.
The directories in this list are also used for writing the
*.eln files produced by asynchronous native-compilation;
specifically, Emacs will write these files into the first writable
directory in the list. Thus, you can control where native-compilation
stores the results by changing the value of this variable.
This variable, if non-nil
, enables asynchronous (a.k.a.
just-in-time, or JIT) native compilation of the
*.elc files loaded by Emacs for which the corresponding
*.eln files do not already exist. This JIT compilation uses
separate Emacs sub-processes running in batch mode, according to the
value of native-comp-async-jobs-number
. When the JIT
compilation of a Lisp file finishes successfully, the resulting
.eln file is loaded and its code replaces the definition of
functions provided by the .elc file.
Setting the value of native-comp-jit-compilation
to nil
disables JIT native compilation. However, even when JIT native
compilation is disabled, Emacs might still need to start asynchronous
native compilation subprocesses to produce trampolines. To
control this, use a separate variable, described below.
This variable controls generation of trampolines. A trampoline is a
small piece of native code required to allow calling Lisp primitives,
which were advised or redefined, from Lisp code that was
natively-compiled with native-comp-speed
set to 2 or greater.
Emacs stores the generated trampolines on separate *.eln files.
By default, this variable’s value is t
, which enables the
generation of trampoline files; setting it to nil
disables the
generation of trampolines. Note that if a trampoline needed for
advising or redefining a primitive is not available and cannot be
generated, calls to that primitive from natively-compiled Lisp will
ignore redefinitions and advices, and will behave as if the primitive
was called directly from C. Therefore, we don’t recommend disabling
the trampoline generation, unless you know that all the trampolines
needed by your Lisp programs are already compiled and accessible to
Emacs.
The value of this variable can also be a string, in which case it
specifies the name of a directory in which to store the generated
trampoline *.eln files, overriding the directories in
native-comp-eln-load-path
. This is useful if you want the
trampolines to be generated as needed, but don’t want to store them
under the user’s HOME
directory or in the other public
directories where *.eln files are kept. However, unlike with
directories in native-comp-eln-load-path
, the trampolines will
be stored in the directory given by the value of this variable, not in
its version-specific subdirectory. If the name of this directory is
not absolute, it is interpreted relative to
invocation-directory
(see Operating System Environment)
If this variable is non-nil
, and Emacs needs to produce a
trampoline, but it cannot find any writable directory to store the
trampoline, it will store it inside temporary-file-directory
(see Generating Unique File Names).
Trampolines produced when no writable directory is found to store them, or when this variable is a string, will only be available for the duration of the current Emacs session, because Emacs doesn’t look for trampolines in either of these places.
There are several ways to find and investigate problems in an Emacs Lisp program.
trace-function-foreground
and
trace-function-background
for tracing function calls, and
trace-values
for adding values of select variables to the
trace. For the details, see the documentation of these facilities in
trace.el.
Other useful tools for debugging input and output problems are the
dribble file (see Terminal Input) and the open-termscript
function (see Terminal Output).
The ordinary Lisp debugger provides the ability to suspend evaluation of a form. While evaluation is suspended (a state that is commonly known as a break), you may examine the run time stack, examine the values of local or global variables, or change those values. Since a break is a recursive edit, all the usual editing facilities of Emacs are available; you can even run programs that will enter the debugger recursively. See Recursive Editing.
The most important time to enter the debugger is when a Lisp error happens. This allows you to investigate the immediate causes of the error.
However, entry to the debugger is not a normal consequence of an
error. Many commands signal Lisp errors when invoked inappropriately,
and during ordinary editing it would be very inconvenient to enter the
debugger each time this happens. So if you want errors to enter the
debugger, set the variable debug-on-error
to non-nil
.
(The command toggle-debug-on-error
provides an easy way to do
this.)
Note that, for technical reasons, you cannot use the facilities defined in this subsection to debug errors in Lisp that the redisplay code has invoked. See Debugging Redisplay Errors, for help with these.
This variable determines whether the debugger is called when an error
is signaled and not handled. If debug-on-error
is t
,
all kinds of errors call the debugger, except those listed in
debug-ignored-errors
(see below). If it is nil
, none
call the debugger.
The value can also be a list of error conditions (see How to Signal an Error). Then the debugger is called only for error conditions in
this list (except those also listed in debug-ignored-errors
).
For example, if you set debug-on-error
to the list
(void-variable)
, the debugger is only called for errors about a
variable that has no value.
Note that eval-expression-debug-on-error
overrides this
variable in some cases; see below.
When this variable is non-nil
, Emacs does not create an error
handler around process filter functions and sentinels. Therefore,
errors in these functions also invoke the debugger. See Processes.
This variable specifies errors which should not enter the debugger,
regardless of the value of debug-on-error
. Its value is a list
of error condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error
has any of those condition symbols, or if the error message matches
any of the regular expressions, then that error does not enter the
debugger.
The normal value of this variable includes user-error
, as well
as several errors that happen often during editing but rarely result
from bugs in Lisp programs. However, “rarely” is not “never”; if
your program fails with an error that matches this list, you may try
changing this list to debug the error. The easiest way is usually to
set debug-ignored-errors
to nil
.
If this variable has a non-nil
value (the default), running the
command eval-expression
causes debug-on-error
to be
temporarily bound to t
. See Evaluating
Emacs Lisp Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual.
If eval-expression-debug-on-error
is nil
, then the value
of debug-on-error
is not changed during eval-expression
.
Normally, errors caught by condition-case
never invoke the
debugger. The condition-case
gets a chance to handle the error
before the debugger gets a chance.
If you change debug-on-signal
to a non-nil
value, the
debugger gets the first chance at every error, regardless of the
presence of condition-case
. (To invoke the debugger, the error
must still fulfill the criteria specified by debug-on-error
and
debug-ignored-errors
.)
For example, setting this variable is useful to get a backtrace from
code evaluated by emacsclient’s --eval option. If Lisp code
evaluated by emacsclient signals an error while this variable is
non-nil
, the backtrace will popup in the running Emacs.
Warning: Setting this variable to non-nil
may have
annoying effects. Various parts of Emacs catch errors in the normal
course of affairs, and you may not even realize that errors happen
there. If you need to debug code wrapped in condition-case
,
consider using condition-case-unless-debug
(see Writing Code to Handle Errors).
If you set debug-on-event
to a special event (see Special Events), Emacs will try to enter the debugger as soon as it receives
this event, bypassing special-event-map
. At present, the only
supported values correspond to the signals SIGUSR1
and
SIGUSR2
(this is the default). This can be helpful when
inhibit-quit
is set and Emacs is not otherwise responding.
If you set debug-on-message
to a regular expression,
Emacs will enter the debugger if it displays a matching message in the
echo area. For example, this can be useful when trying to find the
cause of a particular message.
You can evaluate forms in the current stack frame in the
‘*Backtrace*’ buffer with the e command, and while
edebugging you can use the e and C-x C-e commands to do
something similar. By default, the debugger is inhibited by these
commands (because (re-)entering the debugger at this point will
usually take you out of the debugging context you’re in). Set
debug-allow-recursive-debug
to a non-nil
value to allow
these commands to enter the debugger recursively.
To debug an error that happens during loading of the init
file, use the option ‘--debug-init’. This binds
debug-on-error
to t
while loading the init file, and
bypasses the condition-case
which normally catches errors in the
init file.
When an error occurs in Lisp code which redisplay has invoked, Emacs’s usual debugging mechanisms are unusable, for technical reasons. This subsection describes how to get a backtrace from such an error, which should be helpful in debugging it.
These directions apply to Lisp forms used, for example, in
:eval
mode line constructs (see The Data Structure of the Mode Line), and in all
hooks invoked from redisplay, such as:
fontification-functions
(see Automatic Face Assignment).
window-scroll-functions
(see Hooks for Window Scrolling and Changes).
Note that if you have had an error in a hook function called from
redisplay, the error handling might have removed this function from
the hook. You will thus need to reinitialize that hook somehow,
perhaps with add-hook
, to be able to replay the bug.
To generate a backtrace in these circumstances, set the variable
backtrace-on-redisplay-error
to non-nil
. When the error
occurs, Emacs will dump the backtrace to the buffer
*Redisplay-trace*, but won’t automatically display it in a
window. This is to avoid needlessly corrupting the redisplay you are
debugging. You will thus need to display the buffer yourself, with a
command such as switch-to-buffer-other-frame
C-x 5 b.
Set this variable to non-nil
to enable the generation of a
backtrace when an error occurs in any Lisp called from redisplay.
When a program loops infinitely and fails to return, your first problem is to stop the loop. On most operating systems, you can do this with C-g, which causes a quit. See Quitting.
Ordinary quitting gives no information about why the program was
looping. To get more information, you can set the variable
debug-on-quit
to non-nil
. Once you have the debugger
running in the middle of the infinite loop, you can proceed from the
debugger using the stepping commands. If you step through the entire
loop, you may get enough information to solve the problem.
Quitting with C-g is not considered an error, and
debug-on-error
has no effect on the handling of C-g.
Likewise, debug-on-quit
has no effect on errors.
This variable determines whether the debugger is called when
quit
is signaled and not handled. If debug-on-quit
is
non-nil
, then the debugger is called whenever you quit (that
is, type C-g). If debug-on-quit
is nil
(the
default), then the debugger is not called when you quit.
To investigate a problem that happens in the middle of a program, one useful technique is to enter the debugger whenever a certain function is called. You can do this to the function in which the problem occurs, and then step through the function, or you can do this to a function called shortly before the problem, step quickly over the call to that function, and then step through its caller.
This function requests function-name to invoke the debugger each time it is called.
Any function or macro defined as Lisp code may be set to break on entry, regardless of whether it is interpreted code or compiled code. If the function is a command, it will enter the debugger when called from Lisp and when called interactively (after the reading of the arguments). You can also set debug-on-entry for primitive functions (i.e., those written in C) this way, but it only takes effect when the primitive is called from Lisp code. Debug-on-entry is not allowed for special forms.
When debug-on-entry
is called interactively, it prompts for
function-name in the minibuffer. If the function is already set
up to invoke the debugger on entry, debug-on-entry
does nothing.
debug-on-entry
always returns function-name.
Here’s an example to illustrate use of this function:
(defun fact (n) (if (zerop n) 1 (* n (fact (1- n))))) ⇒ fact
(debug-on-entry 'fact) ⇒ fact
(fact 3)
------ Buffer: *Backtrace* ------ Debugger entered--entering a function: * fact(3) eval((fact 3)) eval-last-sexp-1(nil) eval-last-sexp(nil) call-interactively(eval-last-sexp) ------ Buffer: *Backtrace* ------
This function undoes the effect of debug-on-entry
on
function-name. When called interactively, it prompts for
function-name in the minibuffer. If function-name is
omitted or nil
, it cancels break-on-entry for all functions.
Calling cancel-debug-on-entry
does nothing to a function which is
not currently set up to break on entry.
Sometimes a problem with a function is due to a wrong setting of a variable. Setting up the debugger to trigger whenever the variable is changed is a quick way to find the origin of the setting.
This function arranges for the debugger to be called whenever variable is modified.
It is implemented using the watchpoint mechanism, so it inherits the same characteristics and limitations: all aliases of variable will be watched together, only dynamic variables can be watched, and changes to the objects referenced by variables are not detected. For details, see Running a function when a variable is changed..
This function undoes the effect of debug-on-variable-change
on
variable. When called interactively, it prompts for
variable in the minibuffer. If variable is omitted or
nil
, it cancels break-on-change for all variables. Calling
cancel-debug-on-variable-change
does nothing to a variable
which is not currently set up to break on change.
You can cause the debugger to be called at a certain point in your
program by writing the expression (debug)
at that point. To do
this, visit the source file, insert the text ‘(debug)’ at the
proper place, and type C-M-x (eval-defun
, a Lisp mode key
binding). Warning: if you do this for temporary debugging
purposes, be sure to undo this insertion before you save the file!
The place where you insert ‘(debug)’ must be a place where an
additional form can be evaluated and its value ignored. (If the value
of (debug)
isn’t ignored, it will alter the execution of the
program!) The most common suitable places are inside a progn
or
an implicit progn
(see Sequencing).
If you don’t know exactly where in the source code you want to put
the debug statement, but you want to display a backtrace when a
certain message is displayed, you can set debug-on-message
to a
regular expression matching the desired message.
When the debugger is entered, it displays the previously selected buffer in one window and a buffer named *Backtrace* in another window. The backtrace buffer contains one line for each level of Lisp function execution currently going on. At the beginning of this buffer is a message describing the reason that the debugger was invoked (such as the error message and associated data, if it was invoked due to an error).
The backtrace buffer is read-only and uses a special major mode,
Debugger mode, in which letters are defined as debugger commands. The
usual Emacs editing commands are available; thus, you can switch windows
to examine the buffer that was being edited at the time of the error,
switch buffers, visit files, or do any other sort of editing. However,
the debugger is a recursive editing level (see Recursive Editing)
and it is wise to go back to the backtrace buffer and exit the debugger
(with the q command) when you are finished with it. Exiting
the debugger gets out of the recursive edit and buries the backtrace
buffer. (You can customize what the q command does with the
backtrace buffer by setting the variable debugger-bury-or-kill
.
For example, set it to kill
if you prefer to kill the buffer
rather than bury it. Consult the variable’s documentation for more
possibilities.)
When the debugger has been entered, the debug-on-error
variable is temporarily set according to
eval-expression-debug-on-error
. If the latter variable is
non-nil
, debug-on-error
will temporarily be set to
t
. However, further errors that occur while debugging won’t
(by default) trigger another debugger, because inhibit-debugger
will also be bound to non-nil
.
The debugger itself must be run byte-compiled, since it makes assumptions about the state of the Lisp interpreter. These assumptions are false if the debugger is running interpreted.
Debugger mode is derived from Backtrace mode, which is also used to show backtraces by Edebug and ERT. (see Edebug, and the ERT manual in ERT: Emacs Lisp Regression Testing.)
The backtrace buffer shows you the functions that are executing and their argument values. When a backtrace buffer is created, it shows each stack frame on one, possibly very long, line. (A stack frame is the place where the Lisp interpreter records information about a particular invocation of a function.) The most recently called function will be at the top.
In a backtrace you can specify a stack frame by moving point to a line describing that frame. The frame whose line point is on is considered the current frame.
If a function name is underlined, that means Emacs knows where its
source code is located. You can click with the mouse on that name, or
move to it and type RET, to visit the source code. You can also
type RET while point is on any name of a function or variable
which is not underlined, to see help information for that symbol in a
help buffer, if any exists. The xref-find-definitions
command,
bound to M-., can also be used on any identifier in a backtrace
(see Looking Up Identifiers in The GNU Emacs Manual).
In backtraces, the tails of long lists and the ends of long strings,
vectors or structures, as well as objects which are deeply nested,
will be printed as underlined “...”. You can click with the mouse
on a “...”, or type RET while point is on it, to show the part
of the object that was hidden. To control how much abbreviation is
done, customize backtrace-line-length
.
Here is a list of commands for navigating and viewing backtraces:
Toggle the display of local variables of the current stack frame.
Move to the beginning of the frame, or to the beginning of the previous frame.
Move to the beginning of the next frame.
Add line breaks and indentation to the top-level Lisp form at point to make it more readable.
Collapse the top-level Lisp form at point back to a single line.
Toggle print-circle
for the frame at point.
Toggle print-gensym
for the frame at point.
Expand all the forms abbreviated with “...” in the frame at point.
The debugger buffer (in Debugger mode) provides special commands in addition to the usual Emacs commands and to the Backtrace mode commands described in the previous section. The most important use of debugger commands is for stepping through code, so that you can see how control flows. The debugger can step through the control structures of an interpreted function, but cannot do so in a byte-compiled function. If you would like to step through a byte-compiled function, replace it with an interpreted definition of the same function. (To do this, visit the source for the function and type C-M-x on its definition.) You cannot use the Lisp debugger to step through a primitive function.
Some of the debugger commands operate on the current frame. If a frame starts with a star, that means that exiting that frame will call the debugger again. This is useful for examining the return value of a function.
Here is a list of Debugger mode commands:
Exit the debugger and continue execution. This resumes execution of the program as if the debugger had never been entered (aside from any side-effects that you caused by changing variable values or data structures while inside the debugger).
Continue execution, but enter the debugger the next time any Lisp function is called. This allows you to step through the subexpressions of an expression, seeing what values the subexpressions compute, and what else they do.
The stack frame made for the function call which enters the debugger in this way will be flagged automatically so that the debugger will be called again when the frame is exited. You can use the u command to cancel this flag.
Flag the current frame so that the debugger will be entered when the frame is exited. Frames flagged in this way are marked with stars in the backtrace buffer.
Don’t enter the debugger when the current frame is exited. This cancels a b command on that frame. The visible effect is to remove the star from the line in the backtrace buffer.
Flag the current frame like b. Then continue execution like
c, but temporarily disable break-on-entry for all functions that
are set up to do so by debug-on-entry
.
Read a Lisp expression in the minibuffer, evaluate it (with the
relevant lexical environment, if applicable), and print the
value in the echo area. The debugger alters certain important
variables, and the current buffer, as part of its operation; e
temporarily restores their values from outside the debugger, so you can
examine and change them. This makes the debugger more transparent. By
contrast, M-: does nothing special in the debugger; it shows you
the variable values within the debugger. By default, this command
suppresses the debugger during evaluation, so that an error in the
evaluated expression won’t add a new error on top of the existing one.
Set the debug-allow-recursive-debug
user option to a
non-nil
value to override this.
Like e, but also save the result of evaluation in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
Terminate the program being debugged; return to top-level Emacs command execution.
If the debugger was entered due to a C-g but you really want to quit, and not debug, use the q command.
Return a value from the debugger. The value is computed by reading an expression with the minibuffer and evaluating it.
The r command is useful when the debugger was invoked due to exit
from a Lisp call frame (as requested with b or by entering the
frame with d); then the value specified in the r command is
used as the value of that frame. It is also useful if you call
debug
and use its return value. Otherwise, r has the same
effect as c, and the specified return value does not matter.
You can’t use r when the debugger was entered due to an error.
Display a list of functions that will invoke the debugger when called.
This is a list of functions that are set to break on entry by means of
debug-on-entry
.
Here we describe in full detail the function debug
that is used
to invoke the debugger.
This function enters the debugger. In interactive sessions, it
switches to a buffer named *Backtrace* (or
*Backtrace*<2> if it is the second recursive entry to the
debugger, etc.), and fills it with information about the stack of Lisp
function calls. It then enters a recursive edit, showing the
backtrace buffer in Debugger mode. In batch mode (more generally,
when noninteractive
is non-nil
, see Batch Mode),
this function shows the Lisp backtrace on the standard error stream,
and then kills Emacs, causing it to exit with a non-zero exit code
(see Killing Emacs). Binding
backtrace-on-error-noninteractive
to nil
suppresses the
backtrace in batch mode, see below.
The Debugger mode c, d, j, and r commands exit
the recursive edit; then debug
switches back to the previous
buffer and returns to whatever called debug
. This is the only
way the function debug
can return to its caller.
The use of the debugger-args is that debug
displays the
rest of its arguments at the top of the *Backtrace* buffer, so
that the user can see them. Except as described below, this is the
only way these arguments are used.
However, certain values for first argument to debug
have a
special significance. (Normally, these values are used only by the
internals of Emacs, and not by programmers calling debug
.) Here
is a table of these special values:
lambda
¶A first argument of lambda
means debug
was called
because of entry to a function when debug-on-next-call
was
non-nil
. The debugger displays ‘Debugger
entered--entering a function:’ as a line of text at the top of the
buffer.
debug
debug
as first argument means debug
was called because
of entry to a function that was set to debug on entry. The debugger
displays the string ‘Debugger entered--entering a function:’,
just as in the lambda
case. It also marks the stack frame for
that function so that it will invoke the debugger when exited.
t
When the first argument is t
, this indicates a call to
debug
due to evaluation of a function call form when
debug-on-next-call
is non-nil
. The debugger displays
‘Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:’
as the top line in the buffer.
exit
When the first argument is exit
, it indicates the exit of a
stack frame previously marked to invoke the debugger on exit. The
second argument given to debug
in this case is the value being
returned from the frame. The debugger displays ‘Debugger
entered--returning value:’ in the top line of the buffer, followed by
the value being returned.
error
¶When the first argument is error
, the debugger indicates that
it is being entered because an error or quit
was signaled and
not handled, by displaying ‘Debugger entered--Lisp error:’
followed by the error signaled and any arguments to signal
.
For example,
(let ((debug-on-error t)) (/ 1 0))
------ Buffer: *Backtrace* ------ Debugger entered--Lisp error: (arith-error) /(1 0) ... ------ Buffer: *Backtrace* ------
If an error was signaled, presumably the variable
debug-on-error
is non-nil
. If quit
was signaled,
then presumably the variable debug-on-quit
is non-nil
.
nil
Use nil
as the first of the debugger-args when you want
to enter the debugger explicitly. The rest of the debugger-args
are printed on the top line of the buffer. You can use this feature to
display messages—for example, to remind yourself of the conditions
under which debug
is called.
If this variable is non-nil
, the default, entering the debugger
in batch mode shows the backtrace of Lisp functions calls. Binding
the variable to the nil
value suppresses the backtrace and
shows only the error message.
This section describes functions and variables used internally by the debugger.
The value of this variable is the function to call to invoke the
debugger. Its value must be a function of any number of arguments, or,
more typically, the name of a function. This function should invoke
some kind of debugger. The default value of the variable is
debug
.
The first argument that Lisp hands to the function indicates why it
was called. The convention for arguments is detailed in the description
of debug
(see Invoking the Debugger).
This function prints a trace of Lisp function calls currently active.
The trace is identical to the one that debug
would show in the
*Backtrace* buffer. The return value is always nil
.
In the following example, a Lisp expression calls backtrace
explicitly. This prints the backtrace to the stream
standard-output
, which, in this case, is the buffer
‘backtrace-output’.
Each line of the backtrace represents one function call. The line shows the function followed by a list of the values of the function’s arguments if they are all known; if they are still being computed, the line consists of a list containing the function and its unevaluated arguments. Long lists or deeply nested structures may be elided.
(with-output-to-temp-buffer "backtrace-output" (let ((var 1)) (save-excursion (setq var (eval '(progn (1+ var) (list 'testing (backtrace)))))))) ⇒ (testing nil)
----------- Buffer: backtrace-output ------------ backtrace() (list 'testing (backtrace))
(progn ...) eval((progn (1+ var) (list 'testing (backtrace)))) (setq ...) (save-excursion ...) (let ...) (with-output-to-temp-buffer ...) eval((with-output-to-temp-buffer ...)) eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
eval-last-sexp(nil) call-interactively(eval-last-sexp) ----------- Buffer: backtrace-output ------------
If this variable is non-nil
, every stack frame of the backtrace
is displayed as a list. This aims at improving the backtrace
readability at the cost of special forms no longer being visually
different from regular function calls.
With debugger-stack-frame-as-list
non-nil
, the above
example would look as follows:
----------- Buffer: backtrace-output ------------ (backtrace) (list 'testing (backtrace))
(progn ...) (eval (progn (1+ var) (list 'testing (backtrace)))) (setq ...) (save-excursion ...) (let ...) (with-output-to-temp-buffer ...) (eval (with-output-to-temp-buffer ...)) (eval-last-sexp-1 nil)
(eval-last-sexp nil) (call-interactively eval-last-sexp) ----------- Buffer: backtrace-output ------------
If this variable is non-nil
, it says to call the debugger before
the next eval
, apply
or funcall
. Entering the
debugger sets debug-on-next-call
to nil
.
The d command in the debugger works by setting this variable.
This function sets the debug-on-exit flag of the stack frame level
levels down the stack, giving it the value flag. If flag is
non-nil
, this will cause the debugger to be entered when that
frame later exits. Even a nonlocal exit through that frame will enter
the debugger.
This function is used only by the debugger.
This variable records the debugging status of the current interactive
command. Each time a command is called interactively, this variable is
bound to nil
. The debugger can set this variable to leave
information for future debugger invocations during the same command
invocation.
The advantage of using this variable rather than an ordinary global variable is that the data will never carry over to a subsequent command invocation.
This variable is obsolete and will be removed in future versions.
The function backtrace-frame
is intended for use in Lisp
debuggers. It returns information about what computation is happening
in the stack frame frame-number levels down.
If that frame has not evaluated the arguments yet, or is a special
form, the value is (nil function arg-forms…)
.
If that frame has evaluated its arguments and called its function
already, the return value is (t function
arg-values…)
.
In the return value, function is whatever was supplied as the
CAR of the evaluated list, or a lambda
expression in the
case of a macro call. If the function has a &rest
argument, that
is represented as the tail of the list arg-values.
If base is specified, frame-number counts relative to the topmost frame whose function is base.
If frame-number is out of range, backtrace-frame
returns
nil
.
The function mapbacktrace
calls function once for each
frame in the backtrace, starting at the first frame whose function is
base (or from the top if base is omitted or nil
).
function is called with four arguments: evald, func, args, and flags.
If a frame has not evaluated its arguments yet or is a special form,
evald is nil
and args is a list of forms.
If a frame has evaluated its arguments and called its function
already, evald is t
and args is a list of values.
flags is a plist of properties of the current frame: currently,
the only supported property is :debug-on-exit
, which is
t
if the stack frame’s debug-on-exit
flag is set.
Edebug is a source-level debugger for Emacs Lisp programs, with which you can:
The first three sections below should tell you enough about Edebug to start using it.
To debug a Lisp program with Edebug, you must first instrument
the Lisp code that you want to debug. A simple way to do this is to
first move point into the definition of a function or macro and then do
C-u C-M-x (eval-defun
with a prefix argument). See
Instrumenting for Edebug, for alternative ways to instrument code.
Once a function is instrumented, any call to the function activates Edebug. Depending on which Edebug execution mode you have selected, activating Edebug may stop execution and let you step through the function, or it may update the display and continue execution while checking for debugging commands. The default execution mode is step, which stops execution. See Edebug Execution Modes.
Within Edebug, you normally view an Emacs buffer showing the source of the Lisp code you are debugging. This is referred to as the source code buffer, and it is temporarily read-only.
An arrow in the left fringe indicates the line where the function is executing. Point initially shows where within the line the function is executing, but this ceases to be true if you move point yourself.
If you instrument the definition of fac
(shown below) and then
execute (fac 3)
, here is what you would normally see. Point is
at the open-parenthesis before if
.
(defun fac (n) =>∗(if (< 0 n) (* n (fac (1- n))) 1))
The places within a function where Edebug can stop execution are called
stop points. These occur both before and after each subexpression
that is a list, and also after each variable reference.
Here we use periods to show the stop points in the function
fac
:
(defun fac (n) .(if .(< 0 n.). .(* n. .(fac .(1- n.).).). 1).)
The special commands of Edebug are available in the source code buffer
in addition to the commands of Emacs Lisp mode. For example, you can
type the Edebug command SPC to execute until the next stop point.
If you type SPC once after entry to fac
, here is the
display you will see:
(defun fac (n) =>(if ∗(< 0 n) (* n (fac (1- n))) 1))
When Edebug stops execution after an expression, it displays the expression’s value in the echo area.
Other frequently used commands are b to set a breakpoint at a stop point, g to execute until a breakpoint is reached, and q to exit Edebug and return to the top-level command loop. Type ? to display a list of all Edebug commands.
In order to use Edebug to debug Lisp code, you must first instrument the code. Instrumenting code inserts additional code into it, to invoke Edebug at the proper places.
When you invoke command C-M-x (eval-defun
) with a
prefix argument on a function definition, it instruments the
definition before evaluating it. (This does not modify the source
code itself.) If the variable edebug-all-defs
is
non-nil
, that inverts the meaning of the prefix argument: in
this case, C-M-x instruments the definition unless it has
a prefix argument. The default value of edebug-all-defs
is
nil
. The command M-x edebug-all-defs toggles the value
of the variable edebug-all-defs
.
If edebug-all-defs
is non-nil
, then the commands
eval-region
, and eval-buffer
also instrument any
definitions they evaluate. Similarly, edebug-all-forms
controls whether eval-region
should instrument any form,
even non-defining forms. This doesn’t apply to loading or evaluations
in the minibuffer. The command M-x edebug-all-forms toggles
this option.
Another command, M-x edebug-eval-top-level-form, is available to
instrument any top-level form regardless of the values of
edebug-all-defs
and edebug-all-forms
.
edebug-defun
is an alias for edebug-eval-top-level-form
.
While Edebug is active, the command I
(edebug-instrument-callee
) instruments the definition of the
function or macro called by the list form after point, if it is not already
instrumented. This is possible only if Edebug knows where to find the
source for that function; for this reason, after loading Edebug,
eval-region
records the position of every definition it
evaluates, even if not instrumenting it. See also the i command
(see Jumping), which steps into the call after instrumenting the
function.
Edebug knows how to instrument all the standard special forms,
interactive
forms with an expression argument, anonymous lambda
expressions, and other defining forms. However, Edebug cannot determine
on its own what a user-defined macro will do with the arguments of a
macro call, so you must provide that information using Edebug
specifications; for details, see Edebug and Macros.
When Edebug is about to instrument code for the first time in a
session, it runs the hook edebug-setup-hook
, then sets it to
nil
. You can use this to load Edebug specifications
associated with a package you are using, but only when you use Edebug.
If Edebug detects a syntax error while instrumenting, it leaves point
at the erroneous code and signals an invalid-read-syntax
error.
Example:
error→ Invalid read syntax: "Expected lambda expression"
One potential reason for such a failure to instrument is that some macro definitions are not yet known to Emacs. To work around this, load the file which defines the function you are about to instrument.
To remove instrumentation from a definition, simply re-evaluate its
definition in a way that does not instrument. There are two ways of
evaluating forms that never instrument them: from a file with
load
, and from the minibuffer with eval-expression
(M-:).
A different way to remove the instrumentation from a definition is
to use the edebug-remove-instrumentation
command. It also
allows removing the instrumentation from everything that has been
instrumented.
See Evaluation, for other evaluation functions available inside of Edebug.
Edebug supports several execution modes for running the program you are debugging. We call these alternatives Edebug execution modes; do not confuse them with major or minor modes. The current Edebug execution mode determines how far Edebug continues execution before stopping—whether it stops at each stop point, or continues to the next breakpoint, for example—and how much Edebug displays the progress of the evaluation before it stops.
Normally, you specify the Edebug execution mode by typing a command to continue the program in a certain mode. Here is a table of these commands; all except for S resume execution of the program, at least for a certain distance.
Stop: don’t execute any more of the program, but wait for more
Edebug commands (edebug-stop
).
Step: stop at the next stop point encountered (edebug-step-mode
).
Next: stop at the next stop point encountered after an expression
(edebug-next-mode
). Also see edebug-forward-sexp
in
Jumping.
Trace: pause (normally one second) at each Edebug stop point
(edebug-trace-mode
).
Rapid trace: update the display at each stop point, but don’t actually
pause (edebug-Trace-fast-mode
).
Go: run until the next breakpoint (edebug-go-mode
). See Edebug Breakpoints.
Continue: pause one second at each breakpoint, and then continue
(edebug-continue-mode
).
Rapid continue: move point to each breakpoint, but don’t pause
(edebug-Continue-fast-mode
).
Go non-stop: ignore breakpoints (edebug-Go-nonstop-mode
). You
can still stop the program by typing S, or any editing command.
In general, the execution modes earlier in the above list run the program more slowly or stop sooner than the modes later in the list.
When you enter a new Edebug level, Edebug will normally stop at the
first instrumented function it encounters. If you prefer to stop only
at a break point, or not at all (for example, when gathering coverage
data), change the value of edebug-initial-mode
from its default
step
to go
, or Go-nonstop
, or one of its other
values (see Edebug Options). You can do this readily with
C-x C-a C-m (edebug-set-initial-mode
):
This command, bound to C-x C-a C-m, sets
edebug-initial-mode
. It prompts you for a key to indicate the
mode. You should enter one of the eight keys listed above, which sets
the corresponding mode.
Note that you may reenter the same Edebug level several times if, for example, an instrumented function is called several times from one command.
While executing or tracing, you can interrupt the execution by typing any Edebug command. Edebug stops the program at the next stop point and then executes the command you typed. For example, typing t during execution switches to trace mode at the next stop point. You can use S to stop execution without doing anything else.
If your function happens to read input, a character you type intending to interrupt execution may be read by the function instead. You can avoid such unintended results by paying attention to when your program wants input.
Keyboard macros containing the commands in this section do not
completely work: exiting from Edebug, to resume the program, loses track
of the keyboard macro. This is not easy to fix. Also, defining or
executing a keyboard macro outside of Edebug does not affect commands
inside Edebug. This is usually an advantage. See also the
edebug-continue-kbd-macro
option in Edebug Options.
This option specifies how many seconds to wait between execution steps in trace mode or continue mode. The default is 1 second.
The commands described in this section execute until they reach a specified location. All except i make a temporary breakpoint to establish the place to stop, then switch to go mode. Any other breakpoint reached before the intended stop point will also stop execution. See Edebug Breakpoints, for the details on breakpoints.
These commands may fail to work as expected in case of nonlocal exit, as that can bypass the temporary breakpoint where you expected the program to stop.
Proceed to the stop point near where point is (edebug-goto-here
).
Run the program for one expression
(edebug-forward-sexp
).
Run the program until the end of the containing sexp (edebug-step-out
).
Step into the function or macro called by the form after point
(edebug-step-in
).
The h command proceeds to the stop point at or after the current location of point, using a temporary breakpoint.
The f command runs the program forward over one expression. More
precisely, it sets a temporary breakpoint at the position that
forward-sexp
would reach, then executes in go mode so that
the program will stop at breakpoints.
With a prefix argument n, the temporary breakpoint is placed n sexps beyond point. If the containing list ends before n more elements, then the place to stop is after the containing expression.
You must check that the position forward-sexp
finds is a place
that the program will really get to. In cond
, for example,
this may not be true.
For flexibility, the f command does forward-sexp
starting
at point, rather than at the stop point. If you want to execute one
expression from the current stop point, first type w
(edebug-where
) to move point there, and then type f.
The o command continues out of an expression. It places a temporary breakpoint at the end of the sexp containing point. If the containing sexp is a function definition itself, o continues until just before the last sexp in the definition. If that is where you are now, it returns from the function and then stops. In other words, this command does not exit the currently executing function unless you are positioned after the last sexp.
Normally, the h, f, and o commands display “Break”
and pause for edebug-sit-for-seconds
before showing the result
of the form just evaluated. You can avoid this pause by setting
edebug-sit-on-break
to nil
. See Edebug Options.
The i command steps into the function or macro called by the list form after point, and stops at its first stop point. Note that the form need not be the one about to be evaluated. But if the form is a function call about to be evaluated, remember to use this command before any of the arguments are evaluated, since otherwise it will be too late.
The i command instruments the function or macro it’s supposed to step into, if it isn’t instrumented already. This is convenient, but keep in mind that the function or macro remains instrumented unless you explicitly arrange to deinstrument it.
Some miscellaneous Edebug commands are described here.
Display the help message for Edebug (edebug-help
).
Abort one level back to the previous command level
(abort-recursive-edit
).
Return to the top level editor command loop (top-level
). This
exits all recursive editing levels, including all levels of Edebug
activity. However, instrumented code protected with
unwind-protect
or condition-case
forms may resume
debugging.
Like q, but don’t stop even for protected code
(edebug-top-level-nonstop
).
Redisplay the most recently known expression result in the echo area
(edebug-previous-result
).
Display a backtrace, excluding Edebug’s own functions for clarity
(edebug-pop-to-backtrace
).
See Backtraces, for a description of backtraces and the commands which work on them.
If you would like to see Edebug’s functions in the backtrace, use M-x edebug-backtrace-show-instrumentation. To hide them again use M-x edebug-backtrace-hide-instrumentation.
If a backtrace frame starts with ‘>’ that means that Edebug knows where the source code for the frame is located. Use s to jump to the source code for the current frame.
The backtrace buffer is killed automatically when you continue execution.
You can invoke commands from Edebug that activate Edebug again recursively. Whenever Edebug is active, you can quit to the top level with q or abort one recursive edit level with C-]. You can display a backtrace of all the pending evaluations with d.
Edebug’s step mode stops execution when the next stop point is reached. There are three other ways to stop Edebug execution once it has started: breakpoints, the global break condition, and source breakpoints.
While using Edebug, you can specify breakpoints in the program you are testing: these are places where execution should stop. You can set a breakpoint at any stop point, as defined in Using Edebug. For setting and unsetting breakpoints, the stop point that is affected is the first one at or after point in the source code buffer. Here are the Edebug commands for breakpoints:
Set a breakpoint at the stop point at or after point
(edebug-set-breakpoint
). If you use a prefix argument, the
breakpoint is temporary—it turns off the first time it stops the
program. An overlay with the edebug-enabled-breakpoint
or
edebug-disabled-breakpoint
faces is put at the breakpoint.
Unset the breakpoint (if any) at the stop point at or after
point (edebug-unset-breakpoint
).
Unset any breakpoints in the current form
(edebug-unset-breakpoints
).
Toggle whether to disable the breakpoint near point
(edebug-toggle-disable-breakpoint
). This command is mostly
useful if the breakpoint is conditional and it would take some work to
recreate the condition.
Set a conditional breakpoint which stops the program only if
evaluating condition produces a non-nil
value
(edebug-set-conditional-breakpoint
). With a prefix argument,
the breakpoint is temporary.
Move point to the next breakpoint in the current definition
(edebug-next-breakpoint
).
While in Edebug, you can set a breakpoint with b and unset one with u. First move point to the Edebug stop point of your choice, then type b or u to set or unset a breakpoint there. Unsetting a breakpoint where none has been set has no effect.
Re-evaluating or reinstrumenting a definition removes all of its previous breakpoints.
A conditional breakpoint tests a condition each time the program
gets there. Any errors that occur as a result of evaluating the
condition are ignored, as if the result were nil
. To set a
conditional breakpoint, use x, and specify the condition
expression in the minibuffer. Setting a conditional breakpoint at a
stop point that has a previously established conditional breakpoint puts
the previous condition expression in the minibuffer so you can edit it.
You can make a conditional or unconditional breakpoint temporary by using a prefix argument with the command to set the breakpoint. When a temporary breakpoint stops the program, it is automatically unset.
Edebug always stops or pauses at a breakpoint, except when the Edebug mode is Go-nonstop. In that mode, it ignores breakpoints entirely.
To find out where your breakpoints are, use the B command, which moves point to the next breakpoint following point, within the same function, or to the first breakpoint if there are no following breakpoints. This command does not continue execution—it just moves point in the buffer.
A global break condition stops execution when a specified
condition is satisfied, no matter where that may occur. Edebug
evaluates the global break condition at every stop point; if it
evaluates to a non-nil
value, then execution stops or pauses
depending on the execution mode, as if a breakpoint had been hit. If
evaluating the condition gets an error, execution does not stop.
The condition expression is stored in
edebug-global-break-condition
. You can specify a new expression
using the X command from the source code buffer while Edebug is
active, or using C-x X X from any buffer at any time, as long as
Edebug is loaded (edebug-set-global-break-condition
).
The global break condition is the simplest way to find where in your
code some event occurs, but it makes code run much more slowly. So you
should reset the condition to nil
when not using it.
All breakpoints in a definition are forgotten each time you
reinstrument it. If you wish to make a breakpoint that won’t be
forgotten, you can write a source breakpoint, which is simply a
call to the function edebug
in your source code. You can, of
course, make such a call conditional. For example, in the fac
function, you can insert the first line as shown below, to stop when the
argument reaches zero:
(defun fac (n) (if (= n 0) (edebug)) (if (< 0 n) (* n (fac (1- n))) 1))
When the fac
definition is instrumented and the function is
called, the call to edebug
acts as a breakpoint. Depending on
the execution mode, Edebug stops or pauses there.
If no instrumented code is being executed when edebug
is called,
that function calls debug
.
Emacs normally displays an error message when an error is signaled and
not handled with condition-case
. While Edebug is active and
executing instrumented code, it normally responds to all unhandled
errors. You can customize this with the options edebug-on-error
and edebug-on-quit
; see Edebug Options.
When Edebug responds to an error, it shows the last stop point encountered before the error. This may be the location of a call to a function which was not instrumented, and within which the error actually occurred. For an unbound variable error, the last known stop point might be quite distant from the offending variable reference. In that case, you might want to display a full backtrace (see Miscellaneous Edebug Commands).
If you change debug-on-error
or debug-on-quit
while
Edebug is active, these changes will be forgotten when Edebug becomes
inactive. Furthermore, during Edebug’s recursive edit, these variables
are bound to the values they had outside of Edebug.
These Edebug commands let you view aspects of the buffer and window status as they were before entry to Edebug. The outside window configuration is the collection of windows and contents that were in effect outside of Edebug.
Switch to viewing the outside window configuration
(edebug-view-outside
). Type C-x X w to return to Edebug.
Temporarily display the outside current buffer with point at its
outside position (edebug-bounce-point
), pausing for one second
before returning to Edebug. With a prefix argument n, pause for
n seconds instead.
Move point back to the current stop point in the source code buffer
(edebug-where
).
If you use this command in a different window displaying the same buffer, that window will be used instead to display the current definition in the future.
Toggle whether Edebug saves and restores the outside window
configuration (edebug-toggle-save-windows
).
With a prefix argument, W only toggles saving and restoring of the selected window. To specify a window that is not displaying the source code buffer, you must use C-x X W from the global keymap.
You can view the outside window configuration with v or just bounce to the point in the current buffer with p, even if it is not normally displayed.
After moving point, you may wish to jump back to the stop point. You can do that with w from a source code buffer. You can jump back to the stop point in the source code buffer from any buffer using C-x X w.
Each time you use W to turn saving off, Edebug forgets the saved outside window configuration—so that even if you turn saving back on, the current window configuration remains unchanged when you next exit Edebug (by continuing the program). However, the automatic redisplay of *edebug* and *edebug-trace* may conflict with the buffers you wish to see unless you have enough windows open.
While within Edebug, you can evaluate expressions as if Edebug were not running. Edebug tries to be invisible to the expression’s evaluation and printing. Evaluation of expressions that cause side effects will work as expected, except for changes to data that Edebug explicitly saves and restores. See The Outside Context, for details on this process.
Evaluate expression exp in the context outside of Edebug
(edebug-eval-expression
). That is, Edebug tries to minimize
its interference with the evaluation. The result is shown in the echo
area, or, if this command is given a prefix, pop up a new buffer and
pretty-print the result there.
By default, this command
suppresses the debugger during evaluation, so that an error in the
evaluated expression won’t add a new error on top of the existing one.
Set the debug-allow-recursive-debug
user option to a
non-nil
value to override this.
Evaluate expression exp in the context of Edebug itself
(eval-expression
).
Evaluate the expression before point, in the context outside of Edebug
(edebug-eval-last-sexp
). With the prefix argument of zero
(C-u 0 C-x C-e), don’t shorten long items (like strings and
lists). Any other prefix will result in the value being
pretty-printed in a separate buffer.
Edebug supports evaluation of expressions containing references to
lexically bound symbols created by the following constructs in
cl.el: lexical-let
, macrolet
, and
symbol-macrolet
.
You can use the evaluation list buffer, called *edebug*, to evaluate expressions interactively. You can also set up the evaluation list of expressions to be evaluated automatically each time Edebug updates the display.
Switch to the evaluation list buffer *edebug*
(edebug-visit-eval-list
).
In the *edebug* buffer you can use the commands of Lisp Interaction mode (see Lisp Interaction in The GNU Emacs Manual) as well as these special commands:
Evaluate the expression before point, in the outside context, and
insert the value in the buffer (edebug-eval-print-last-sexp
).
With prefix argument of zero (C-u 0 C-j), don’t shorten long
items (like strings and lists).
Evaluate the expression before point, in the context outside of Edebug
(edebug-eval-last-sexp
).
Build a new evaluation list from the contents of the buffer
(edebug-update-eval-list
).
Delete the evaluation list group that point is in
(edebug-delete-eval-item
).
Switch back to the source code buffer at the current stop point
(edebug-where
).
You can evaluate expressions in the evaluation list window with C-j or C-x C-e, just as you would in *scratch*; but they are evaluated in the context outside of Edebug.
The expressions you enter interactively (and their results) are lost when you continue execution; but you can set up an evaluation list consisting of expressions to be evaluated each time execution stops.
To do this, write one or more evaluation list groups in the evaluation list buffer. An evaluation list group consists of one or more Lisp expressions. Groups are separated by comment lines.
The command C-c C-u (edebug-update-eval-list
) rebuilds the
evaluation list, scanning the buffer and using the first expression of
each group. (The idea is that the second expression of the group is the
value previously computed and displayed.)
Each entry to Edebug redisplays the evaluation list by inserting each expression in the buffer, followed by its current value. It also inserts comment lines so that each expression becomes its own group. Thus, if you type C-c C-u again without changing the buffer text, the evaluation list is effectively unchanged.
If an error occurs during an evaluation from the evaluation list, the error message is displayed in a string as if it were the result. Therefore, expressions using variables that are not currently valid do not interrupt your debugging.
Here is an example of what the evaluation list window looks like after several expressions have been added to it:
(current-buffer) #<buffer *scratch*> ;--------------------------------------------------------------- (selected-window) #<window 16 on *scratch*> ;--------------------------------------------------------------- (point) 196 ;--------------------------------------------------------------- bad-var "Symbol's value as variable is void: bad-var" ;--------------------------------------------------------------- (recursion-depth) 0 ;--------------------------------------------------------------- this-command eval-last-sexp ;---------------------------------------------------------------
To delete a group, move point into it and type C-c C-d, or simply delete the text for the group and update the evaluation list with C-c C-u. To add a new expression to the evaluation list, insert the expression at a suitable place, insert a new comment line, then type C-c C-u. You need not insert dashes in the comment line—its contents don’t matter.
After selecting *edebug*, you can return to the source code buffer with C-c C-w. The *edebug* buffer is killed when you continue execution, and recreated next time it is needed.
If an expression in your program produces a value containing circular list structure, you may get an error when Edebug attempts to print it.
One way to cope with circular structure is to set print-length
or print-level
to truncate the printing. Edebug does this for
you; it binds print-length
and print-level
to the values
of the variables edebug-print-length
and
edebug-print-level
(so long as they have non-nil
values). See Variables Affecting Output.
If non-nil
, Edebug binds print-length
to this value while
printing results. The default value is 50
.
If non-nil
, Edebug binds print-level
to this value while
printing results. The default value is 50
.
You can also print circular structures and structures that share
elements more informatively by binding print-circle
to a non-nil
value.
Here is an example of code that creates a circular structure:
(setq a (list 'x 'y)) (setcar a a)
If print-circle
is non-nil
, printing functions (e.g.,
prin1
) will print a
as ‘#1=(#1# y)’. The
‘#1=’ notation labels the structure that follows it with the
label ‘1’, and the ‘#1#’ notation references the previously
labeled structure. This notation is used for any shared elements of
lists or vectors.
If non-nil
, Edebug binds print-circle
to this value while
printing results. The default value is t
.
For further details about how printing can be customized, see see Output Functions.
Edebug can record an execution trace, storing it in a buffer named
*edebug-trace*. This is a log of function calls and returns,
showing the function names and their arguments and values. To enable
trace recording, set edebug-trace
to a non-nil
value.
Making a trace buffer is not the same thing as using trace execution mode (see Edebug Execution Modes).
When trace recording is enabled, each function entry and exit adds lines to the trace buffer. A function entry record consists of ‘::::{’, followed by the function name and argument values. A function exit record consists of ‘::::}’, followed by the function name and result of the function.
The number of ‘:’s in an entry shows its recursion depth. You can use the braces in the trace buffer to find the matching beginning or end of function calls.
You can customize trace recording for function entry and exit by
redefining the functions edebug-print-trace-before
and
edebug-print-trace-after
.
This macro requests additional trace information around the execution
of the body forms. The argument string specifies text
to put in the trace buffer, after the ‘{’ or ‘}’. All
the arguments are evaluated, and edebug-tracing
returns the
value of the last form in body.
This function inserts text in the trace buffer. It computes the text
with (apply 'format format-string format-args)
.
It also appends a newline to separate entries.
edebug-tracing
and edebug-trace
insert lines in the
trace buffer whenever they are called, even if Edebug is not active.
Adding text to the trace buffer also scrolls its window to show the last
lines inserted.
Edebug provides rudimentary coverage testing and display of execution frequency.
Coverage testing works by comparing the result of each expression with the previous result; each form in the program is considered covered if it has returned two different values since you began testing coverage in the current Emacs session. Thus, to do coverage testing on your program, execute it under various conditions and note whether it behaves correctly; Edebug will tell you when you have tried enough different conditions that each form has returned two different values.
Coverage testing makes execution slower, so it is only done if
edebug-test-coverage
is non-nil
. Frequency counting is
performed for all executions of an instrumented function, even if the
execution mode is Go-nonstop, and regardless of whether coverage testing
is enabled.
Use C-x X = (edebug-display-freq-count
) to display both
the coverage information and the frequency counts for a definition.
Just = (edebug-temp-display-freq-count
) displays the same
information temporarily, only until you type another key.
This command displays the frequency count data for each line of the current definition.
It inserts frequency counts as comment lines after each line of code.
You can undo all insertions with one undo
command. The counts
appear under the ‘(’ before an expression or the ‘)’ after
an expression, or on the last character of a variable. To simplify
the display, a count is not shown if it is equal to the count of an
earlier expression on the same line.
The character ‘=’ following the count for an expression says that the expression has returned the same value each time it was evaluated. In other words, it is not yet covered for coverage testing purposes.
To clear the frequency count and coverage data for a definition,
simply reinstrument it with eval-defun
.
For example, after evaluating (fac 5)
with a source
breakpoint, and setting edebug-test-coverage
to t
, when
the breakpoint is reached, the frequency data looks like this:
(defun fac (n) (if (= n 0) (edebug)) ;#6 1 = =5 (if (< 0 n) ;#5 = (* n (fac (1- n))) ;# 5 0 1)) ;# 0
The comment lines show that fac
was called 6 times. The
first if
statement returned 5 times with the same result each
time; the same is true of the condition on the second if
.
The recursive call of fac
did not return at all.
Edebug tries to be transparent to the program you are debugging, but it does not succeed completely. Edebug also tries to be transparent when you evaluate expressions with e or with the evaluation list buffer, by temporarily restoring the outside context. This section explains precisely what context Edebug restores, and how Edebug fails to be completely transparent.
Whenever Edebug is entered, it needs to save and restore certain data before even deciding whether to make trace information or stop the program.
max-lisp-eval-depth
(see Eval) is increased to reduce Edebug’s
impact on the stack. You could, however, still run out of stack space when
using Edebug. You can also enlarge the value of
edebug-max-depth
if Edebug reaches the limit of recursion depth
instrumenting code that contains very large quoted lists.
executing-kbd-macro
is bound to nil
unless edebug-continue-kbd-macro
is non-nil
.
When Edebug needs to display something (e.g., in trace mode), it saves the current window configuration from outside Edebug (see Window Configurations). When you exit Edebug, it restores the previous window configuration.
Emacs redisplays only when it pauses. Usually, when you continue execution, the program re-enters Edebug at a breakpoint or after stepping, without pausing or reading input in between. In such cases, Emacs never gets a chance to redisplay the outside configuration. Consequently, what you see is the same window configuration as the last time Edebug was active, with no interruption.
Entry to Edebug for displaying something also saves and restores the following data (though some of them are deliberately not restored if an error or quit signal occurs).
edebug-save-windows
is non-nil
(see Edebug Options).
If the value of edebug-save-windows
is a list, only the listed
windows are saved and restored.
The window configuration is not restored on error or quit, but the
outside selected window is reselected even on error or quit in
case a save-excursion
is active.
The window start and horizontal scrolling of the source code buffer are not restored, however, so that the display remains coherent within Edebug.
Saving and restoring the outside window configuration can sometimes
change the positions of point in the buffers on which the Lisp program
you are debugging operates, especially if your program moves point.
If this happens and interferes with your debugging, we recommend to
set edebug-save-windows
to nil
(see Edebug Options).
edebug-save-displayed-buffer-points
is non-nil
.
overlay-arrow-position
and
overlay-arrow-string
are saved and restored, so you can safely
invoke Edebug from the recursive edit elsewhere in the same buffer.
cursor-in-echo-area
is locally bound to nil
so that
the cursor shows up in the window.
When Edebug is entered and actually reads commands from the user, it saves (and later restores) these additional data:
last-command
, this-command
,
last-command-event
, last-input-event
,
last-event-frame
, last-nonmenu-event
, and
track-mouse
. Commands in Edebug do not affect these variables
outside of Edebug.
Executing commands within Edebug can change the key sequence that
would be returned by this-command-keys
, and there is no way to
reset the key sequence from Lisp.
Edebug cannot save and restore the value of
unread-command-events
. Entering Edebug while this variable has a
nontrivial value can interfere with execution of the program you are
debugging.
command-history
. In rare cases this can alter execution.
standard-output
and standard-input
are bound to nil
by the recursive-edit
, but Edebug temporarily restores them during
evaluations.
defining-kbd-macro
is bound to
edebug-continue-kbd-macro
.
To make Edebug properly instrument expressions that call macros, some extra care is needed. This subsection explains the details.
When Edebug instruments an expression that calls a Lisp macro, it needs additional information about the macro to do the job properly. This is because there is no a-priori way to tell which subexpressions of the macro call are forms to be evaluated. (Evaluation may occur explicitly in the macro body, or when the resulting expansion is evaluated, or any time later.)
Therefore, you must define an Edebug specification for each macro
that Edebug will encounter, to explain the format of calls to that
macro. To do this, add a debug
declaration to the macro
definition. Here is a simple example that shows the specification for
the for
example macro (see Evaluating Macro Arguments Repeatedly).
(defmacro for (var from init to final do &rest body) "Execute a simple \"for\" loop. For example, (for i from 1 to 10 do (print i))." (declare (debug (symbolp "from" form "to" form "do" &rest form))) ...)
The Edebug specification says which parts of a call to the macro are
forms to be evaluated. For simple macros, the specification
often looks very similar to the formal argument list of the macro
definition, but specifications are much more general than macro
arguments. See Defining Macros, for more explanation of
the declare
form.
Take care to ensure that the specifications are known to Edebug when
you instrument code. If you are instrumenting a function which uses a
macro defined in another file, you may first need to either evaluate
the require
forms in the file containing your function, or
explicitly load the file containing the macro. If the definition of a
macro is wrapped by eval-when-compile
, you may need to evaluate
it.
You can also define an edebug specification for a macro separately
from the macro definition with def-edebug-spec
. Adding
debug
declarations is preferred, and more convenient, for macro
definitions in Lisp, but def-edebug-spec
makes it possible to
define Edebug specifications for special forms implemented in C.
Specify which expressions of a call to macro macro are forms to be evaluated. specification should be the Edebug specification. Neither argument is evaluated.
The macro argument can actually be any symbol, not just a macro name.
Here is a table of the possibilities for specification and how each directs processing of arguments.
t
All arguments are instrumented for evaluation.
This is short for (body)
.
The symbol must have an Edebug specification, which is used instead. This indirection is repeated until another kind of specification is found. This allows you to inherit the specification from another macro.
The elements of the list describe the types of the arguments of a calling form. The possible elements of a specification list are described in the following sections.
If a macro has no Edebug specification, neither through a debug
declaration nor through a def-edebug-spec
call, the variable
edebug-eval-macro-args
comes into play.
This controls the way Edebug treats macro arguments with no explicit
Edebug specification. If it is nil
(the default), none of the
arguments is instrumented for evaluation. Otherwise, all arguments
are instrumented.
A specification list is required for an Edebug specification if
some arguments of a macro call are evaluated while others are not. Some
elements in a specification list match one or more arguments, but others
modify the processing of all following elements. The latter, called
specification keywords, are symbols beginning with ‘&’ (such
as &optional
).
A specification list may contain sublists, which match arguments that are themselves lists, or it may contain vectors used for grouping. Sublists and groups thus subdivide the specification list into a hierarchy of levels. Specification keywords apply only to the remainder of the sublist or group they are contained in.
When a specification list involves alternatives or repetition, matching it against an actual macro call may require backtracking. For more details, see Backtracking in Specifications.
Edebug specifications provide the power of regular expression matching, plus some context-free grammar constructs: the matching of sublists with balanced parentheses, recursive processing of forms, and recursion via indirect specifications.
Here’s a table of the possible elements of a specification list, with their meanings (see Specification Examples, for the referenced examples):
sexp
A single unevaluated Lisp object, which is not instrumented.
form
A single evaluated expression, which is instrumented. If your macro
wraps the expression with lambda
before it is evaluated, use
def-form
instead. See def-form
below.
place
A generalized variable. See Generalized Variables.
body
Short for &rest form
. See &rest
below. If your macro
wraps its body of code with lambda
before it is evaluated, use
def-body
instead. See def-body
below.
lambda-expr
A lambda expression with no quoting.
&optional
All following elements in the specification list are optional; as soon as one does not match, Edebug stops matching at this level.
To make just a few elements optional, followed by non-optional elements,
use [&optional specs…]
. To specify that several
elements must all match or none, use &optional
[specs…]
. See the defun
example.
&rest
All following elements in the specification list are repeated zero or more times. In the last repetition, however, it is not a problem if the expression runs out before matching all of the elements of the specification list.
To repeat only a few elements, use [&rest specs…]
.
To specify several elements that must all match on every repetition, use
&rest [specs…]
.
&or
Each of the following elements in the specification list is an
alternative. One of the alternatives must match, or the &or
specification fails.
Each list element following &or
is a single alternative. To
group two or more list elements as a single alternative, enclose them in
[…]
.
¬
Each of the following elements is matched as alternatives as if by using
&or
, but if any of them match, the specification fails. If none
of them match, nothing is matched, but the ¬
specification
succeeds.
&define
Indicates that the specification is for a defining form. Edebug’s definition of a defining form is a form containing one or more code forms which are saved and executed later, after the execution of the defining form.
The defining form itself is not instrumented (that is, Edebug does not
stop before and after the defining form), but forms inside it
typically will be instrumented. The &define
keyword should be
the first element in a list specification.
nil
This is successful when there are no more arguments to match at the current argument list level; otherwise it fails. See sublist specifications and the backquote example.
gate
¶No argument is matched but backtracking through the gate is disabled
while matching the remainder of the specifications at this level. This
is primarily used to generate more specific syntax error messages. See
Backtracking in Specifications, for more details. Also see the let
example.
&error
&error
should be followed by a string, an error message, in the
edebug-spec; it aborts the instrumentation, displaying the message in
the minibuffer.
&interpose
Lets a function control the parsing of the remaining code.
It takes the form &interpose spec fun args...
and means that Edebug will first match spec against the code and
then call fun with the code that matched spec
, a parsing
function pf, and finally args.... The parsing
function expects a single argument indicating the specification list
to use to parse the remaining code. It should be called exactly once
and returns the instrumented code that fun is expected to return.
For example (&interpose symbolp pcase--match-pat-args)
matches
sexps whose first element is a symbol and then lets
pcase--match-pat-args
lookup the specs associated
with that head symbol according to pcase--match-pat-args
and
pass them to the pf it received as argument.
other-symbol
¶Any other symbol in a specification list may be a predicate or an indirect specification.
If the symbol has an Edebug specification, this indirect
specification should be either a list specification that is used in
place of the symbol, or a function that is called to process the
arguments. The specification may be defined with
def-edebug-elem-spec
:
Define the specification to use in place of the symbol element. specification has to be a list.
Otherwise, the symbol should be a predicate. The predicate is called
with the argument, and if the predicate returns nil
, the
specification fails and the argument is not instrumented.
Some suitable predicates include symbolp
, integerp
,
stringp
, vectorp
, and atom
.
[elements…]
¶A vector of elements groups the elements into a single group specification. Its meaning has nothing to do with vectors.
"string"
The argument should be a symbol named string. This specification
is equivalent to the quoted symbol, 'symbol
, where the name
of symbol is the string, but the string form is preferred.
(vector elements…)
The argument should be a vector whose elements must match the elements in the specification. See the backquote example.
(elements…)
Any other list is a sublist specification and the argument must be a list whose elements match the specification elements.
A sublist specification may be a dotted list and the corresponding list
argument may then be a dotted list. Alternatively, the last CDR of a
dotted list specification may be another sublist specification (via a
grouping or an indirect specification, e.g., (spec . [(more
specs…)])
) whose elements match the non-dotted list arguments.
This is useful in recursive specifications such as in the backquote
example. Also see the description of a nil
specification
above for terminating such recursion.
Note that a sublist specification written as (specs . nil)
is equivalent to (specs)
, and (specs .
(sublist-elements…))
is equivalent to (specs
sublist-elements…)
.
Here is a list of additional specifications that may appear only after
&define
. See the defun
example.
&name
Extracts the name of the current defining form from the code.
It takes the form &name [prestring] spec
[poststring] fun args...
and means that Edebug will
match spec against the code and then call fun with the
concatenation of the current name, args..., prestring,
the code that matched spec
, and poststring. If fun
is absent, it defaults to a function that concatenates the arguments
(with an @
between the previous name and the new).
name
The argument, a symbol, is the name of the defining form.
Shorthand for [&name symbolp]
.
A defining form is not required to have a name field; and it may have multiple name fields.
arg
The argument, a symbol, is the name of an argument of the defining form. However, lambda-list keywords (symbols starting with ‘&’) are not allowed.
lambda-list
¶This matches a lambda list—the argument list of a lambda expression.
def-body
The argument is the body of code in a definition. This is like
body
, described above, but a definition body must be instrumented
with a different Edebug call that looks up information associated with
the definition. Use def-body
for the highest level list of forms
within the definition.
def-form
The argument is a single, highest-level form in a definition. This is
like def-body
, except it is used to match a single form rather than
a list of forms. As a special case, def-form
also means that
tracing information is not output when the form is executed. See the
interactive
example.
If a specification fails to match at some point, this does not necessarily mean a syntax error will be signaled; instead, backtracking will take place until all alternatives have been exhausted. Eventually every element of the argument list must be matched by some element in the specification, and every required element in the specification must match some argument.
When a syntax error is detected, it might not be reported until much
later, after higher-level alternatives have been exhausted, and with the
point positioned further from the real error. But if backtracking is
disabled when an error occurs, it can be reported immediately. Note
that backtracking is also reenabled automatically in several situations;
when a new alternative is established by &optional
,
&rest
, or &or
, or at the start of processing a sublist,
group, or indirect specification. The effect of enabling or disabling
backtracking is limited to the remainder of the level currently being
processed and lower levels.
Backtracking is disabled while matching any of the
form specifications (that is, form
, body
, def-form
, and
def-body
). These specifications will match any form so any error
must be in the form itself rather than at a higher level.
Backtracking is also disabled after successfully matching a quoted
symbol, string specification, or &define
keyword, since this
usually indicates a recognized construct. But if you have a set of
alternative constructs that all begin with the same symbol, you can
usually work around this constraint by factoring the symbol out of the
alternatives, e.g., ["foo" &or [first case] [second case] ...]
.
Most needs are satisfied by these two ways that backtracking is
automatically disabled, but occasionally it is useful to explicitly
disable backtracking by using the gate
specification. This is
useful when you know that no higher alternatives could apply. See the
example of the let
specification.
It may be easier to understand Edebug specifications by studying the examples provided here.
Consider a hypothetical macro my-test-generator
that runs
tests on supplied lists of data. Although it is Edebug’s default
behavior to not instrument arguments as code, as controlled by
edebug-eval-macro-args
(see Instrumenting Macro Calls),
it can be useful to explicitly document that the arguments are data:
(def-edebug-spec my-test-generator (&rest sexp))
A let
special form has a sequence of bindings and a body. Each
of the bindings is either a symbol or a sublist with a symbol and
optional expression. In the specification below, notice the gate
inside of the sublist to prevent backtracking once a sublist is found.
(def-edebug-spec let ((&rest &or symbolp (gate symbolp &optional form)) body))
Edebug uses the following specifications for defun
and the
associated argument list and interactive
specifications. It is
necessary to handle interactive forms specially since an expression
argument is actually evaluated outside of the function body. (The
specification for defmacro
is very similar to that for
defun
, but allows for the declare
statement.)
(def-edebug-spec defun
(&define name lambda-list
[&optional stringp] ; Match the doc string, if present.
[&optional ("interactive" interactive)]
def-body))
(def-edebug-elem-spec 'lambda-list
'(([&rest arg]
[&optional ["&optional" arg &rest arg]]
&optional ["&rest" arg]
)))
(def-edebug-elem-spec 'interactive
'(&optional &or stringp def-form)) ; Notice: def-form
The specification for backquote below illustrates how to match
dotted lists and use nil
to terminate recursion. It also
illustrates how components of a vector may be matched. (The actual
specification defined by Edebug is a little different, and does not
support dotted lists because doing so causes very deep recursion that
could fail.)
(def-edebug-spec \` (backquote-form)) ; Alias just for clarity.
(def-edebug-elem-spec 'backquote-form
'(&or ([&or "," ",@"] &or ("quote" backquote-form) form)
(backquote-form . [&or nil backquote-form])
(vector &rest backquote-form)
sexp))
These options affect the behavior of Edebug:
Functions to call before Edebug is used. Each time it is set to a new
value, Edebug will call those functions once and then
reset edebug-setup-hook
to nil
. You could use this to
load up Edebug specifications associated with a package you are using,
but only when you also use Edebug.
See Instrumenting for Edebug.
If this is non-nil
, normal evaluation of defining forms such as
defun
and defmacro
instruments them for Edebug. This
applies to eval-defun
, eval-region
and
eval-buffer
.
Use the command M-x edebug-all-defs to toggle the value of this option. See Instrumenting for Edebug.
If this is non-nil
, the commands eval-defun
,
eval-region
and eval-buffer
instrument all forms, even
those that don’t define anything. This doesn’t apply to loading or
evaluations in the minibuffer.
Use the command M-x edebug-all-forms to toggle the value of this option. See Instrumenting for Edebug.
When this is non-nil
, all macro arguments will be instrumented
in the generated code. For any macro, the debug
declaration
overrides this option. So to specify exceptions for macros that have
some arguments evaluated and some not, use the debug
declaration
specify an Edebug form specification.
If this is non-nil
, Edebug saves and restores the window
configuration. That takes some time, so if your program does not care
what happens to the window configurations, it is better to set this
variable to nil
. We also recommend to set this to nil
if the default value causes Edebug to overwrite the positions of point
in buffers that are involved in the program you are debugging, as
result of saving and restoring the window configuration; this could
happen if your program moves point in one or more of those buffers.
Another option to try to customize in this case is
edebug-save-displayed-buffer-points
, described below.
If the value of edebug-save-windows
is a list, only the listed
windows are saved and restored.
You can use the W command in Edebug to change this variable interactively. See Edebug Display Update.
If this is non-nil
, Edebug saves and restores point in all
displayed buffers.
Saving and restoring point in other buffers is necessary if you are debugging code that changes the point of a buffer that is displayed in a non-selected window. If Edebug or the user then selects the window, point in that buffer will move to the window’s value of point.
Saving and restoring point in all buffers is expensive, since it requires selecting each window twice, so enable this only if you need it. See Edebug Display Update.
If this variable is non-nil
, it specifies the initial execution
mode for Edebug when it is first activated. Possible values are
step
, next
, go
, Go-nonstop
, trace
,
Trace-fast
, continue
, and Continue-fast
.
The default value is step
. This variable can be set
interactively with C-x C-a C-m (edebug-set-initial-mode
).
See Edebug Execution Modes.
If this is non-nil
, trace each function entry and exit.
Tracing output is displayed in a buffer named *edebug-trace*, one
function entry or exit per line, indented by the recursion level.
Also see edebug-tracing
, in Trace Buffer.
If non-nil
, Edebug tests coverage of all expressions debugged.
See Coverage Testing.
If non-nil
, continue defining or executing any keyboard macro
that is executing outside of Edebug. Use this with caution since it is not
debugged.
See Edebug Execution Modes.
If non-nil
, the default value of print-length
for
printing results in Edebug. See Variables Affecting Output.
If non-nil
, the default value of print-level
for
printing results in Edebug. See Variables Affecting Output.
If non-nil
, the default value of print-circle
for
printing results in Edebug. See Variables Affecting Output.
If non-nil
, Edebug tries to remove any of its own
instrumentation when showing the results of expressions. This is
relevant when debugging macros where the results of expressions are
themselves instrumented expressions. As a very artificial example,
suppose that the example function fac
has been instrumented,
and consider a macro of the form:
(defmacro test () "Edebug example." (if (symbol-function 'fac) ...))
If you instrument the test
macro and step through it, then by
default the result of the symbol-function
call has numerous
edebug-after
and edebug-before
forms, which can make it
difficult to see the actual result. If
edebug-unwrap-results
is non-nil
, Edebug tries to remove
these forms from the result.
Edebug binds debug-on-error
to this value, if
debug-on-error
was previously nil
. See Trapping Errors.
Edebug binds debug-on-quit
to this value, if
debug-on-quit
was previously nil
. See Trapping Errors.
If you change the values of edebug-on-error
or
edebug-on-quit
while Edebug is active, their values won’t be used
until the next time Edebug is invoked via a new command.
If non-nil
, an expression to test for at every stop point. If
the result is non-nil
, then break. Errors are ignored.
See Global Break Condition.
Number of seconds to pause when a breakpoint is reached and the execution mode is trace or continue. See Edebug Execution Modes.
Whether or not to pause for edebug-sit-for-seconds
on reaching
a breakpoint. Set to nil
to prevent the pause, non-nil
to allow it.
By default, this alist contains one entry with the key edebug
and a list of three functions, which are the default implementations
of the functions inserted in instrumented code: edebug-enter
,
edebug-before
and edebug-after
. To change Edebug’s
behavior globally, modify the default entry.
Edebug’s behavior may also be changed on a per-definition basis by
adding an entry to this alist, with a key of your choice and three
functions. Then set the edebug-behavior
symbol property of an
instrumented definition to the key of the new entry, and Edebug will
call the new functions in place of its own for that definition.
A function run by Edebug after it wraps the body of a definition
or closure. After Edebug has initialized its own data, this function
is called with one argument, the symbol associated with the
definition, which may be the actual symbol defined or one generated by
Edebug. This function may be used to set the edebug-behavior
symbol property of each definition instrumented by Edebug.
To inspect or modify Edebug’s instrumentation before it is used, set this variable to a function which takes one argument, an instrumented top-level form, and returns either the same or a replacement form, which Edebug will then use as the final result of instrumentation.
The Lisp reader reports invalid syntax, but cannot say where the real problem is. For example, the error ‘End of file during parsing’ in evaluating an expression indicates an excess of open parentheses (or square brackets). The reader detects this imbalance at the end of the file, but it cannot figure out where the close parenthesis should have been. Likewise, ‘Invalid read syntax: ")"’ indicates an excess close parenthesis or missing open parenthesis, but does not say where the missing parenthesis belongs. How, then, to find what to change?
If the problem is not simply an imbalance of parentheses, a useful
technique is to try C-M-e (end-of-defun
, see Moving by
Defuns in The GNU Emacs Manual) at the beginning of each defun,
and see if it goes to the place where that defun appears to end. If
it does not, there is a problem in that defun.
However, unmatched parentheses are the most common syntax errors in Lisp, and we can give further advice for those cases. (In addition, just moving point through the code with Show Paren mode enabled might find the mismatch.)
The first step is to find the defun that is unbalanced. If there is
an excess open parenthesis, the way to do this is to go to the end of
the file and type C-u C-M-u (backward-up-list
,
see Moving by Parens in The GNU Emacs Manual). This will
move you to the beginning of the first defun that is unbalanced.
The next step is to determine precisely what is wrong. There is no
way to be sure of this except by studying the program, but often the
existing indentation is a clue to where the parentheses should have
been. The easiest way to use this clue is to reindent with C-M-q
(indent-pp-sexp
, see Multi-line Indent in The GNU
Emacs Manual) and see what moves. But don’t do this yet!
Keep reading, first.
Before you do this, make sure the defun has enough close parentheses.
Otherwise, C-M-q will get an error, or will reindent all the rest
of the file until the end. So move to the end of the defun and insert a
close parenthesis there. Don’t use C-M-e (end-of-defun
) to
move there, since that too will fail to work until the defun is balanced.
Now you can go to the beginning of the defun and type C-M-q.
Usually all the lines from a certain point to the end of the function
will shift to the right. There is probably a missing close parenthesis,
or a superfluous open parenthesis, near that point. (However, don’t
assume this is true; study the code to make sure.) Once you have found
the discrepancy, undo the C-M-q with C-_ (undo
),
since the old indentation is probably appropriate to the intended
parentheses.
After you think you have fixed the problem, use C-M-q again. If the old indentation actually fit the intended nesting of parentheses, and you have put back those parentheses, C-M-q should not change anything.
To deal with an excess close parenthesis, first go to the beginning
of the file, then type C-u -1 C-M-u (backward-up-list
with an argument of −1) to find the end of the first unbalanced
defun.
Then find the actual matching close parenthesis by typing C-M-f
(forward-sexp
, see Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual)
at the beginning of that defun. This will leave you somewhere short of
the place where the defun ought to end. It is possible that you will
find a spurious close parenthesis in that vicinity.
If you don’t see a problem at that point, the next thing to do is to
type C-M-q (indent-pp-sexp
) at the beginning of the defun.
A range of lines will probably shift left; if so, the missing open
parenthesis or spurious close parenthesis is probably near the first of
those lines. (However, don’t assume this is true; study the code to
make sure.) Once you have found the discrepancy, undo the C-M-q
with C-_ (undo
), since the old indentation is probably
appropriate to the intended parentheses.
After you think you have fixed the problem, use C-M-q again. If the old indentation actually fits the intended nesting of parentheses, and you have put back those parentheses, C-M-q should not change anything.
You can do coverage testing for a file of Lisp code by loading the
testcover
library and using the command M-x
testcover-start RET file RET to instrument the
code. Then test your code by calling it one or more times. Then use
the command M-x testcover-mark-all to display colored highlights
on the code to show where coverage is insufficient. The command
M-x testcover-next-mark will move point forward to the next
highlighted spot.
Normally, a red highlight indicates the form was never completely
evaluated; a brown highlight means it always evaluated to the same
value (meaning there has been little testing of what is done with the
result). However, the red highlight is skipped for forms that can’t
possibly complete their evaluation, such as error
. The brown
highlight is skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to
the same value, such as (setq x 14)
.
For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to give advice to the test coverage tool.
Evaluate form and return its value, but inform coverage testing that form’s value should always be the same.
Evaluate form, informing coverage testing that form should never return. If it ever does return, you get a run-time error.
Edebug also has a coverage testing feature (see Coverage Testing). These features partly duplicate each other, and it would be cleaner to combine them.
If your program is working correctly, but not fast enough, and you want to make it run more quickly or efficiently, the first thing to do is profile your code so that you know where it spends most of the execution time. If you find that one particular function is responsible for a significant portion of the execution time, you can start looking for ways to optimize that piece.
Emacs has built-in support for this. To begin profiling, type
M-x profiler-start. You can choose to sample CPU usage
periodically (cpu
), when memory is allocated (memory
),
or both. Then run the code you’d like to speed up. After that, type
M-x profiler-report to display a summary buffer for CPU usage
sampled by each type (cpu and memory) that you chose to profile. The
names of the report buffers include the times at which the reports
were generated, so you can generate another report later on without
erasing previous results. When you have finished profiling, type
M-x profiler-stop (there is a small overhead associated with
profiling, so we don’t recommend leaving it active except when you are
actually running the code you want to examine).
The profiler report buffer shows, on each line, a function that was called, preceded by how much CPU resources it used in absolute and percentage terms since profiling started. If a given line has a ‘+’ symbol to the left of the function name, you can expand that line by typing RET, in order to see the function(s) called by the higher-level function. Use a prefix argument (C-u RET) to see the whole call tree below a function. Pressing RET again will collapse back to the original state.
Press j (profiler-report-find-entry
) or mouse-2 to
jump to the definition of a function at point. Press d
(profiler-report-describe-entry
) to view a function’s
documentation. You can save a profile to a file using C-x C-w
(profiler-report-write-profile
) and read a saved profile with
M-x profiler-find-profile or M-x profiler-find-profile-other-window. You can compare two profiles
using = (profiler-report-compare-profile
).
The elp library offers an alternative approach, which is useful
when you know in advance which Lisp function(s) you want to profile.
Using that library, you begin by setting elp-function-list
to
the list of function symbols—those are the functions you want to
profile. Then type M-x elp-instrument-list RET nil RET to arrange for profiling those functions. After running
the code you want to profile, invoke M-x elp-results to
display the current results. See the file elp.el for more
detailed instructions. This approach is limited to profiling
functions written in Lisp, it cannot profile Emacs primitives.
You can measure the time it takes to evaluate individual Emacs Lisp
forms using the benchmark library. See the function
benchmark-call
as well as the macros benchmark-run
,
benchmark-run-compiled
, and benchmark-progn
in
benchmark.el. You can also use the benchmark
command
for timing forms interactively.
To profile Emacs at the level of its C code, you can build it using the
--enable-profiling option of configure
. When Emacs
exits, it generates a file gmon.out that you can examine using
the gprof
utility. This feature is mainly useful for
debugging Emacs. It actually stops the Lisp-level M-x
profiler-… commands described above from working.
Printing and reading are the operations of converting Lisp objects to textual form and vice versa. They use the printed representations and read syntax described in Lisp Data Types.
This chapter describes the Lisp functions for reading and printing. It also describes streams, which specify where to get the text (if reading) or where to put it (if printing).
Reading a Lisp object means parsing a Lisp expression in textual
form and producing a corresponding Lisp object. This is how Lisp
programs get into Lisp from files of Lisp code. We call the text the
read syntax of the object. For example, the text ‘(a . 5)’
is the read syntax for a cons cell whose CAR is a
and whose
CDR is the number 5.
Printing a Lisp object means producing text that represents that object—converting the object to its printed representation (see Printed Representation and Read Syntax). Printing the cons cell described above produces the text ‘(a . 5)’.
Reading and printing are more or less inverse operations: printing the
object that results from reading a given piece of text often produces
the same text, and reading the text that results from printing an object
usually produces a similar-looking object. For example, printing the
symbol foo
produces the text ‘foo’, and reading that text
returns the symbol foo
. Printing a list whose elements are
a
and b
produces the text ‘(a b)’, and reading that
text produces a list (but not the same list) with elements a
and b
.
However, these two operations are not precisely inverse to each other. There are three kinds of exceptions:
Most of the Lisp functions for reading text take an input stream as an argument. The input stream specifies where or how to get the characters of the text to be read. Here are the possible types of input stream:
The input characters are read from buffer, starting with the character directly after point. Point advances as characters are read.
The input characters are read from the buffer that marker is in, starting with the character directly after the marker. The marker position advances as characters are read. The value of point in the buffer has no effect when the stream is a marker.
The input characters are taken from string, starting at the first character in the string and using as many characters as required.
The input characters are generated by function, which must support two kinds of calls:
t
¶t
used as a stream means that the input is read from the
minibuffer. In fact, the minibuffer is invoked once and the text
given by the user is made into a string that is then used as the
input stream. If Emacs is running in batch mode (see Batch Mode),
standard input is used instead of the minibuffer. For example,
(message "%s" (read t))
will in batch mode read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result to standard output.
nil
¶nil
supplied as an input stream means to use the value of
standard-input
instead; that value is the default input
stream, and must be a non-nil
input stream.
A symbol as input stream is equivalent to the symbol’s function definition (if any).
Here is an example of reading from a stream that is a buffer, showing where point is located before and after:
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This∗ is the contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(read (get-buffer "foo")) ⇒ is
(read (get-buffer "foo")) ⇒ the
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the∗ contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
Note that the first read skips a space. Reading skips any amount of whitespace preceding the significant text.
Here is an example of reading from a stream that is a marker,
initially positioned at the beginning of the buffer shown. The value
read is the symbol This
.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(setq m (set-marker (make-marker) 1 (get-buffer "foo"))) ⇒ #<marker at 1 in foo>
(read m) ⇒ This
m
⇒ #<marker at 5 in foo> ;; Before the first space.
Here we read from the contents of a string:
(read "(When in) the course") ⇒ (When in)
The following example reads from the minibuffer. The
prompt is: ‘Lisp expression: ’. (That is always the prompt
used when you read from the stream t
.) The user’s input is shown
following the prompt.
(read t) ⇒ 23 ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Lisp expression: 23 RET ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
Finally, here is an example of a stream that is a function, named
useless-stream
. Before we use the stream, we initialize the
variable useless-list
to a list of characters. Then each call to
the function useless-stream
obtains the next character in the list
or unreads a character by adding it to the front of the list.
(setq useless-list (append "XY()" nil)) ⇒ (88 89 40 41)
(defun useless-stream (&optional unread) (if unread (setq useless-list (cons unread useless-list)) (prog1 (car useless-list) (setq useless-list (cdr useless-list))))) ⇒ useless-stream
Now we read using the stream thus constructed:
(read 'useless-stream) ⇒ XY
useless-list ⇒ (40 41)
Note that the open and close parentheses remain in the list. The Lisp
reader encountered the open parenthesis, decided that it ended the
input, and unread it. Another attempt to read from the stream at this
point would read ‘()’ and return nil
.
This section describes the Lisp functions and variables that pertain to reading.
In the functions below, stream stands for an input stream (see
the previous section). If stream is nil
or omitted, it
defaults to the value of standard-input
.
An end-of-file
error is signaled if reading encounters an
unterminated list, vector, or string.
This function reads one textual Lisp expression from stream, returning it as a Lisp object. This is the basic Lisp input function.
This function reads the first textual Lisp expression from the text in string. It returns a cons cell whose CAR is that expression, and whose CDR is an integer giving the position of the next remaining character in the string (i.e., the first one not read).
If start is supplied, then reading begins at index start in the string (where the first character is at index 0). If you specify end, then reading is forced to stop just before that index, as if the rest of the string were not there.
For example:
(read-from-string "(setq x 55) (setq y 5)") ⇒ ((setq x 55) . 11)
(read-from-string "\"A short string\"") ⇒ ("A short string" . 16)
;; Read starting at the first character.
(read-from-string "(list 112)" 0)
⇒ ((list 112) . 10)
;; Read starting at the second character.
(read-from-string "(list 112)" 1)
⇒ (list . 5)
;; Read starting at the seventh character, ;; and stopping at the ninth. (read-from-string "(list 112)" 6 8) ⇒ (11 . 8)
This function reads one textual expression from stream, like
read
does, but additionally positions the read symbols to the
positions in stream where they occurred. Only the symbol
nil
is not positioned, this for efficiency reasons.
See Symbols with Position. This function is used by the byte
compiler.
This variable holds the default input stream—the stream that
read
uses when the stream argument is nil
.
The default is t
, meaning use the minibuffer.
If non-nil
, this variable enables the reading of circular and
shared structures. See Read Syntax for Circular Objects. Its default value is
t
.
When reading or writing from the standard input/output streams of the Emacs process in batch mode, it is sometimes required to make sure any arbitrary binary data will be read/written verbatim, and/or that no translation of newlines to or from CR-LF pairs is performed. This issue does not exist on POSIX hosts, only on MS-Windows and MS-DOS. The following function allows you to control the I/O mode of any standard stream of the Emacs process.
Switch stream into binary or text I/O mode. If mode is
non-nil
, switch to binary mode, otherwise switch to text mode.
The value of stream can be one of stdin
, stdout
,
or stderr
. This function flushes any pending output data of
stream as a side effect, and returns the previous value of I/O
mode for stream. On POSIX hosts, it always returns a
non-nil
value and does nothing except flushing pending output.
This predicate says whether object has readable syntax,
i.e., it can be written out and then read back by the Emacs Lisp
reader. If it can’t, this function returns nil
; if it can,
this function returns a printed representation (via prin1
,
see Output Functions) of object.
An output stream specifies what to do with the characters produced by printing. Most print functions accept an output stream as an optional argument. Here are the possible types of output stream:
The output characters are inserted into buffer at point. Point advances as characters are inserted.
The output characters are inserted into the buffer that marker points into, at the marker position. The marker position advances as characters are inserted. The value of point in the buffer has no effect on printing when the stream is a marker, and this kind of printing does not move point (except that if the marker points at or before the position of point, point advances with the surrounding text, as usual).
The output characters are passed to function, which is responsible for storing them away. It is called with a single character as argument, as many times as there are characters to be output, and is responsible for storing the characters wherever you want to put them.
t
¶The output characters are displayed in the echo area. If Emacs is running in batch mode (see Batch Mode), the output is written to the standard output descriptor instead.
nil
¶nil
specified as an output stream means to use the value of the
standard-output
variable instead; that value is the
default output stream, and must not be nil
.
A symbol as output stream is equivalent to the symbol’s function definition (if any).
Many of the valid output streams are also valid as input streams. The difference between input and output streams is therefore more a matter of how you use a Lisp object, than of different types of object.
Here is an example of a buffer used as an output stream. Point is initially located as shown immediately before the ‘h’ in ‘the’. At the end, point is located directly before that same ‘h’.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is t∗he contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(print "This is the output" (get-buffer "foo")) ⇒ "This is the output"
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is t "This is the output" ∗he contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
Now we show a use of a marker as an output stream. Initially, the
marker is in buffer foo
, between the ‘t’ and the ‘h’ in
the word ‘the’. At the end, the marker has advanced over the
inserted text so that it remains positioned before the same ‘h’.
Note that the location of point, shown in the usual fashion, has no
effect.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the ∗output ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(setq m (copy-marker 10)) ⇒ #<marker at 10 in foo>
(print "More output for foo." m) ⇒ "More output for foo."
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is t "More output for foo." he ∗output ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
m ⇒ #<marker at 34 in foo>
The following example shows output to the echo area:
(print "Echo Area output" t) ⇒ "Echo Area output" ---------- Echo Area ---------- "Echo Area output" ---------- Echo Area ----------
Finally, we show the use of a function as an output stream. The
function eat-output
takes each character that it is given and
conses it onto the front of the list last-output
(see Building Cons Cells and Lists). At the end, the list contains all the characters output, but
in reverse order.
(setq last-output nil) ⇒ nil
(defun eat-output (c) (setq last-output (cons c last-output))) ⇒ eat-output
(print "This is the output" #'eat-output) ⇒ "This is the output"
last-output ⇒ (10 34 116 117 112 116 117 111 32 101 104 116 32 115 105 32 115 105 104 84 34 10)
Now we can put the output in the proper order by reversing the list:
(concat (nreverse last-output)) ⇒ " \"This is the output\" "
Calling concat
converts the list to a string so you can see its
contents more clearly.
This function can be useful as an output stream when debugging. It writes character to the standard error stream.
For example
(print "This is the output" #'external-debugging-output) -| This is the output ⇒ "This is the output"
This section describes the Lisp functions for printing Lisp objects—converting objects into their printed representation.
Some of the Emacs printing functions add quoting characters to the output when necessary so that it can be read properly. The quoting characters used are ‘"’ and ‘\’; they distinguish strings from symbols, and prevent punctuation characters in strings and symbols from being taken as delimiters when reading. See Printed Representation and Read Syntax, for full details. You specify quoting or no quoting by the choice of printing function.
If the text is to be read back into Lisp, then you should print with quoting characters to avoid ambiguity. Likewise, if the purpose is to describe a Lisp object clearly for a Lisp programmer. However, if the purpose of the output is to look nice for humans, then it is usually better to print without quoting.
Lisp objects can refer to themselves. Printing a self-referential object in the normal way would require an infinite amount of text, and the attempt could cause infinite recursion. Emacs detects such recursion and prints ‘#level’ instead of recursively printing an object already being printed. For example, here ‘#0’ indicates a recursive reference to the object at level 0 of the current print operation:
(setq foo (list nil)) ⇒ (nil) (setcar foo foo) ⇒ (#0)
In the functions below, stream stands for an output stream.
(See the previous section for a description of output streams. Also
See external-debugging-output, a useful stream value for debugging.)
If stream is nil
or omitted, it defaults to the value of
standard-output
.
The print
function is a convenient way of printing. It outputs
the printed representation of object to stream, printing in
addition one newline before object and another after it. Quoting
characters are used. print
returns object. For example:
(progn (print 'The\ cat\ in) (print "the hat") (print " came back")) -| -| The\ cat\ in -| -| "the hat" -| -| " came back" ⇒ " came back"
This function outputs the printed representation of object to
stream. It does not print newlines to separate output as
print
does, but it does use quoting characters just like
print
. It returns object.
(progn (prin1 'The\ cat\ in) (prin1 "the hat") (prin1 " came back")) -| The\ cat\ in"the hat"" came back" ⇒ " came back"
If overrides is non-nil
, it should either be t
(which tells prin1
to use the defaults for all printer related
variables), or a list of settings. See Overriding Output Variables, for details.
This function outputs the printed representation of object to stream. It returns object.
This function is intended to produce output that is readable by people,
not by read
, so it doesn’t insert quoting characters and doesn’t
put double-quotes around the contents of strings. It does not add any
spacing between calls.
(progn (princ 'The\ cat) (princ " in the \"hat\"")) -| The cat in the "hat" ⇒ " in the \"hat\""
This function outputs a newline to stream. The name stands for
“terminate print”. If ensure is non-nil
no newline is printed
if stream is already at the beginning of a line. Note in this
case stream can not be a function and an error is signaled if
it is. This function returns t
if a newline is printed.
This function outputs character to stream. It returns character.
If you have Emacs-based batch scripts that send output to the
terminal, Emacs will automatically display the output whenever you
write a newline characters to standard-output
. This function
allows you to flush to standard-output
without sending a
newline character first, which enables you to display incomplete
lines.
This function returns a string containing the text that prin1
would have printed for the same argument.
(prin1-to-string 'foo) ⇒ "foo"
(prin1-to-string (mark-marker)) ⇒ "#<marker at 2773 in strings.texi>"
If overrides is non-nil
, it should either bet
(which tellsprin1
to use the defaults for all printer related variables), or a list of settings. See Overriding Output Variables, for details.
If noescape is non-nil
, that inhibits use of quoting
characters in the output. (This argument is supported in Emacs versions
19 and later.)
(prin1-to-string "foo") ⇒ "\"foo\""
(prin1-to-string "foo" t) ⇒ "foo"
See format
, in Formatting Strings, for other ways to obtain
the printed representation of a Lisp object as a string.
This macro executes the body forms with standard-output
set
up to feed output into a string. Then it returns that string.
For example, if the current buffer name is ‘foo’,
(with-output-to-string (princ "The buffer is ") (princ (buffer-name)))
returns "The buffer is foo"
.
This function outputs object to stream, just like
prin1
, but does it in a prettier way. That is, it’ll
indent and fill the object to make it more readable for humans.
If you need to use binary I/O in batch mode, e.g., use the functions described in this section to write out arbitrary binary data or avoid conversion of newlines on non-POSIX hosts, see set-binary-mode.
The value of this variable is the default output stream—the stream
that print functions use when the stream argument is nil
.
The default is t
, meaning display in the echo area.
If this is non-nil
, that means to print quoted forms using
abbreviated reader syntax, e.g., (quote foo)
prints as
'foo
, and (function foo)
as #'foo
. The default
is t
.
If this variable is non-nil
, then newline characters in strings
are printed as ‘\n’ and formfeeds are printed as ‘\f’.
Normally these characters are printed as actual newlines and formfeeds.
This variable affects the print functions prin1
and print
that print with quoting. It does not affect princ
. Here is an
example using prin1
:
(prin1 "a\nb") -| "a -| b" ⇒ "a b"
(let ((print-escape-newlines t)) (prin1 "a\nb")) -| "a\nb" ⇒ "a b"
In the second expression, the local binding of
print-escape-newlines
is in effect during the call to
prin1
, but not during the printing of the result.
If this variable is non-nil
, control characters in strings are
printed as backslash sequences by the print functions prin1
and
print
that print with quoting. If this variable and
print-escape-newlines
are both non-nil
, the latter takes
precedences for newlines and formfeeds.
If this variable is non-nil
, then unibyte non-ASCII
characters in strings are unconditionally printed as backslash sequences
by the print functions prin1
and print
that print with
quoting.
Those functions also use backslash sequences for unibyte non-ASCII characters, regardless of the value of this variable, when the output stream is a multibyte buffer or a marker pointing into one.
If this variable is non-nil
, then multibyte non-ASCII
characters in strings are unconditionally printed as backslash sequences
by the print functions prin1
and print
that print with
quoting.
Those functions also use backslash sequences for multibyte non-ASCII characters, regardless of the value of this variable, when the output stream is a unibyte buffer or a marker pointing into one.
This variable controls printing of ‘charset’ text property on printing
a string. The value should be nil
, t
, or
default
.
If the value is nil
, charset
text properties are never
printed. If t
, they are always printed.
If the value is default
, only print charset
text
properties if there is an “unexpected” charset
property. For
ascii characters, all charsets are considered “expected”.
Otherwise, the expected charset
property of a character is
given by char-charset
.
The value of this variable is the maximum number of elements to print in any list, vector or bool-vector. If an object being printed has more than this many elements, it is abbreviated with an ellipsis.
If the value is nil
(the default), then there is no limit.
(setq print-length 2) ⇒ 2
(print '(1 2 3 4 5)) -| (1 2 ...) ⇒ (1 2 ...)
The value of this variable is the maximum depth of nesting of
parentheses and brackets when printed. Any list or vector at a depth
exceeding this limit is abbreviated with an ellipsis. A value of
nil
(which is the default) means no limit.
These are the values for print-length
and print-level
used by eval-expression
, and thus, indirectly, by many
interactive evaluation commands (see Evaluating
Emacs Lisp Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual).
These variables are used for detecting and reporting circular and shared structure:
If non-nil
, this variable enables detection of circular and
shared structure in printing. See Read Syntax for Circular Objects.
By default, Emacs prints unreadable objects as ‘#<...>"’. For instance:
(prin1-to-string (make-marker)) ⇒ "#<marker in no buffer>"
If this variable is non-nil
, it should be a function that will
be called to handle printing of these objects. The function will be
called with two arguments: the object and the noescape flag used by
the printing functions (see Output Functions).
The function should return either nil
(print the object as
usual), or a string (which will be printed), or any other object
(don’t print the object). For instance:
(let ((print-unreadable-function (lambda (object escape) "hello"))) (prin1-to-string (make-marker))) ⇒ "hello"
If non-nil
, this variable enables detection of uninterned symbols
(see Creating and Interning Symbols) in printing. When this is enabled,
uninterned symbols print with the prefix ‘#:’, which tells the Lisp
reader to produce an uninterned symbol.
If non-nil
, that means number continuously across print calls.
This affects the numbers printed for ‘#n=’ labels and
‘#m#’ references.
Don’t set this variable with setq
; you should only bind it
temporarily to t
with let
. When you do that, you should
also bind print-number-table
to nil
.
This variable holds a vector used internally by printing to implement
the print-circle
feature. You should not use it except
to bind it to nil
when you bind print-continuous-numbering
.
This variable specifies how to print floating-point numbers. The
default is nil
, meaning use the shortest output
that represents the number without losing information.
To control output format more precisely, you can put a string in this
variable. The string should hold a ‘%’-specification to be used
in the C function sprintf
. For further restrictions on what
you can use, see the variable’s documentation string.
When this variable is non-nil
, integers that represent
graphic base characters will be printed using Lisp character syntax
(see Basic Char Syntax). Other numbers are printed the usual way.
For example, the list (4 65 -1 10)
would be printed as
‘(4 ?A -1 ?\n)’.
More precisely, values printed in character syntax are those representing characters belonging to the Unicode general categories Letter, Number, Punctuation, Symbol and Private-use (see Character Properties), as well as the control characters having their own escape syntax such as newline.
The previous section (see Variables Affecting Output) lists the numerous
variables that control how the Emacs Lisp printer formats data for
outputs. These are generally available for users to change, but
sometimes you want to output data in the default format, or override
the user settings in some other way. For instance, if you’re storing
Emacs Lisp data in a file, you don’t want that data to be shortened by
a print-length
setting.
The prin1
and prin1-to-string
functions therefore have
an optional overrides argument. This argument can either be
t
(which means that all printing variables should be reset to
the default values), or a list of settings for some of the variables.
Each element in the list can be either t
(which means “reset
to defaults”, and will usually be the first element of the list), or
a pair whose car
is a symbol that stands for an output variable
and whose cdr
is the value for that variable.
For instance, this prints using nothing but defaults:
(prin1 object nil t)
This prints object using the current printing settings, but
overrides the value of print-length
to be 5:
(prin1 object nil '((length . 5)))
And finally, this prints object using only default settings, but
with print-length
bound to 5:
(prin1 object nil '(t (length . 5)))
Below is a list of symbols that can be used, and which variables they map to:
length
This overrides print-length
.
level
This overrides print-level
.
circle
This overrides print-circle
.
quoted
This overrides print-quoted
.
escape-newlines
This overrides print-escape-newlines
.
escape-control-characters
This overrides print-escape-control-characters
.
escape-nonascii
This overrides print-escape-nonascii
.
escape-multibyte
This overrides print-escape-multibyte
.
charset-text-property
This overrides print-charset-text-property
.
unreadeable-function
This overrides print-unreadable-function
.
gensym
This overrides print-gensym
.
continuous-numbering
This overrides print-continuous-numbering
.
number-table
This overrides print-number-table
.
float-format
This overrides float-output-format
.
integers-as-characters
This overrides print-integers-as-characters
.
In the future, more overrides may be offered that do not map directly to a variable, but can only be used via this parameter.
A minibuffer is a special buffer that Emacs commands use to read arguments more complicated than the single numeric prefix argument. These arguments include file names, buffer names, and command names (as in M-x). The minibuffer is displayed on the bottom line of the frame, in the same place as the echo area (see The Echo Area), but only while it is in use for reading an argument.
In most ways, a minibuffer is a normal Emacs buffer. Most operations within a buffer, such as editing commands, work normally in a minibuffer. However, many operations for managing buffers do not apply to minibuffers. The name of a minibuffer always has the form ‘ *Minibuf-number*’, and it cannot be changed. Minibuffers are displayed only in special windows used only for minibuffers; these windows always appear at the bottom of a frame. (Sometimes frames have no minibuffer window, and sometimes a special kind of frame contains nothing but a minibuffer window; see Minibuffers and Frames.)
The text in the minibuffer always starts with the prompt string,
the text that was specified by the program that is using the minibuffer
to tell the user what sort of input to type. This text is marked
read-only so you won’t accidentally delete or change it. It is also
marked as a field (see Defining and Using Fields), so that certain motion functions,
including beginning-of-line
, forward-word
,
forward-sentence
, and forward-paragraph
, stop at the
boundary between the prompt and the actual text.
The minibuffer’s window is normally a single line; it grows
automatically if the contents require more space. Whilst the minibuffer
is active, you can explicitly resize its window temporarily with the
window sizing commands; the window reverts to its normal size when the
minibuffer is exited. When the minibuffer is not active, you can resize
its window permanently by using the window sizing commands in the
frame’s other window, or dragging the mode line with the mouse. (Due to
details of the current implementation, for this to work
resize-mini-windows
must be nil
.) If the frame contains
just a minibuffer window, you can change its size by changing the
frame’s size.
Use of the minibuffer reads input events, and that alters the values
of variables such as this-command
and last-command
(see Information from the Command Loop). Your program should bind them around the
code that uses the minibuffer, if you do not want that to change them.
Under some circumstances, a command can use a minibuffer even if
there is an active minibuffer; such a minibuffer is called a
recursive minibuffer. The first minibuffer is named
‘ *Minibuf-1*’. Recursive minibuffers are named by
incrementing the number at the end of the name. (The names begin with
a space so that they won’t show up in normal buffer lists.) Of
several recursive minibuffers, the innermost (or most recently
entered) is the active minibuffer–it is the one you can
terminate by typing RET (exit-minibuffer
) in. We usually
call this the minibuffer. You can permit or forbid recursive
minibuffers by setting the variable
enable-recursive-minibuffers
, or by putting properties of that
name on command symbols (See Recursive Minibuffers.)
Like other buffers, a minibuffer uses a local keymap (see Keymaps) to specify special key bindings. The function that invokes the minibuffer also sets up its local map according to the job to be done. See Reading Text Strings with the Minibuffer, for the non-completion minibuffer local maps. See Minibuffer Commands that Do Completion, for the minibuffer local maps for completion.
An active minibuffer usually has major mode minibuffer-mode
.
This is an Emacs internal mode without any special features. To
customize the setup of minibuffers, we suggest you use
minibuffer-setup-hook
(see Minibuffer Miscellany) rather than
minibuffer-mode-hook
, since the former is run later, after the
minibuffer has been fully initialized.
When a minibuffer is inactive, its major mode is
minibuffer-inactive-mode
, with keymap
minibuffer-inactive-mode-map
. This is only really useful if
the minibuffer is in a separate frame. See Minibuffers and Frames.
When Emacs is running in batch mode, any request to read from the minibuffer actually reads a line from the standard input descriptor that was supplied when Emacs was started. This supports only basic input: none of the special minibuffer features (history, completion, etc.) are available in batch mode.
The most basic primitive for minibuffer input is
read-from-minibuffer
, which can be used to read either a string
or a Lisp object in textual form. The function read-regexp
is
used for reading regular expressions (see Regular Expressions),
which are a special kind of string. There are also specialized
functions for reading commands, variables, file names, etc.
(see Completion).
In most cases, you should not call minibuffer input functions in the
middle of a Lisp function. Instead, do all minibuffer input as part of
reading the arguments for a command, in the interactive
specification. See Defining Commands.
This function is the most general way to get input from the
minibuffer. By default, it accepts arbitrary text and returns it as a
string; however, if read is non-nil
, then it uses
read
to convert the text into a Lisp object (see Input Functions).
The first thing this function does is to activate a minibuffer and display it with prompt (which must be a string) as the prompt. Then the user can edit text in the minibuffer.
When the user types a command to exit the minibuffer,
read-from-minibuffer
constructs the return value from the text in
the minibuffer. Normally it returns a string containing that text.
However, if read is non-nil
, read-from-minibuffer
reads the text and returns the resulting Lisp object, unevaluated.
(See Input Functions, for information about reading.)
The argument default specifies default values to make available
through the history commands. It should be a string, a list of
strings, or nil
. The string or strings become the minibuffer’s
“future history”, available to the user with M-n. In
addition, if the call provides completion (e.g., via the keymap
argument), the completion candidates are added to the “future
history” when the values in default are exhausted by M-n;
see minibuffer-default-add-function.
If read is non-nil
, then default is also used
as the input to read
, if the user enters empty input.
If default is a list of strings, the first string is used as the input.
If default is nil
, empty input results in an end-of-file
error.
However, in the usual case (where read is nil
),
read-from-minibuffer
ignores default when the user enters
empty input and returns an empty string, ""
. In this respect,
it differs from all the other minibuffer input functions in this chapter.
If keymap is non-nil
, that keymap is the local keymap to
use in the minibuffer. If keymap is omitted or nil
, the
value of minibuffer-local-map
is used as the keymap. Specifying
a keymap is the most important way to customize the minibuffer for
various applications such as completion.
The argument history specifies a history list variable to use
for saving the input and for history commands used in the minibuffer.
It defaults to minibuffer-history
. If history is the
symbol t
, history is not recorded. You can optionally specify
a starting position in the history list as well. See Minibuffer History.
If the variable minibuffer-allow-text-properties
is
non-nil
, then the string that is returned includes whatever text
properties were present in the minibuffer. Otherwise all the text
properties are stripped when the value is returned. (By default this
variable is nil
.)
The text properties in minibuffer-prompt-properties
are applied
to the prompt. By default, this property list defines a face to use
for the prompt. This face, if present, is applied to the end of the
face list and merged before display.
If the user wants to completely control the look of the prompt, the
most convenient way to do that is to specify the default
face
at the end of all face lists. For instance:
(read-from-minibuffer (concat (propertize "Bold" 'face '(bold default)) (propertize " and normal: " 'face '(default))))
If the argument inherit-input-method is non-nil
, then the
minibuffer inherits the current input method (see Input Methods) and
the setting of enable-multibyte-characters
(see Text Representations) from whichever buffer was current before entering the
minibuffer.
Use of initial is mostly deprecated; we recommend using
a non-nil
value only in conjunction with specifying a cons cell
for history. See Initial Input.
This function reads a string from the minibuffer and returns it. The
arguments prompt, initial, history and
inherit-input-method are used as in read-from-minibuffer
.
The keymap used is minibuffer-local-map
.
The optional argument default is used as in
read-from-minibuffer
, except that, if non-nil
, it also
specifies a default value to return if the user enters null input. As
in read-from-minibuffer
it should be a string, a list of
strings, or nil
, which is equivalent to an empty string. When
default is a string, that string is the default value. When it
is a list of strings, the first string is the default value. (All
these strings are available to the user in the “future minibuffer
history”.)
This function works by calling the
read-from-minibuffer
function:
(read-string prompt initial history default inherit) ≡ (let ((value (read-from-minibuffer prompt initial nil nil history default inherit))) (if (and (equal value "") default) (if (consp default) (car default) default) value))
If you have a long string (for instance, one that is several lines
long) that you wish to edit, using read-string
may not be
ideal. In that case, popping to a new, normal buffer where the user
can edit the string may be more convenient, and you can use the
read-string-from-buffer
function to do that.
This function reads a regular expression as a string from the minibuffer and returns it. If the minibuffer prompt string prompt does not end in ‘:’ (followed by optional whitespace), the function adds ‘: ’ to the end, preceded by the default return value (see below), if that is non-empty.
The optional argument defaults controls the default value to
return if the user enters null input, and should be one of: a string;
nil
, which is equivalent to an empty string; a list of strings;
or a symbol.
If defaults is a symbol, read-regexp
consults the value
of the variable read-regexp-defaults-function
(see below), and
if that is non-nil
uses it in preference to defaults.
The value in this case should be either:
regexp-history-last
, which means to use the first element of
the appropriate minibuffer history list (see below).
nil
, a string, or a list of strings) becomes the value of
defaults.
read-regexp
now ensures that the result of processing
defaults is a list (i.e., if the value is nil
or a
string, it converts it to a list of one element). To this list,
read-regexp
then appends a few potentially useful candidates for
input. These are:
The function now has a list of regular expressions that it passes to
read-from-minibuffer
to obtain the user’s input. The first
element of the list is the default result in case of empty input. All
elements of the list are available to the user as the “future
minibuffer history” list (see future list in The GNU Emacs Manual).
The optional argument history, if non-nil
, is a symbol
specifying a minibuffer history list to use (see Minibuffer History). If it is omitted or nil
, the history list defaults
to regexp-history
.
The user can use the M-s c command to indicate whether case
folding should be on or off. If the user has used this command, the
returned string will have the text property case-fold
set to
either fold
or inhibit-fold
. It is up to the caller of
read-regexp
to actually use this value, and the convenience
function read-regexp-case-fold-search
is provided for that. A
typical usage pattern here might look like:
(let* ((regexp (read-regexp "Search for: ")) (case-fold-search (read-regexp-case-fold-search regexp))) (re-search-forward regexp))
The function read-regexp
may use the value of this variable to
determine its list of default regular expressions. If non-nil
,
the value of this variable should be either:
regexp-history-last
.
nil
, a string,
or a list of strings.
See read-regexp
above for details of how these values are used.
If this variable is nil
, the default, then
read-from-minibuffer
and read-string
strip all text
properties from the minibuffer input before returning it. However,
read-no-blanks-input
(see below), as well as
read-minibuffer
and related functions (see Reading Lisp Objects With the Minibuffer), and all
functions that do minibuffer input with completion, remove the
face
property unconditionally, regardless of the value of this
variable.
If this variable is non-nil
, most text properties on strings
from the completion table are preserved—but only on the part of the
strings that were completed.
(let ((minibuffer-allow-text-properties t)) (completing-read "String: " (list (propertize "foobar" 'data 'zot)))) => #("foobar" 3 6 (data zot))
In this example, the user typed ‘foo’ and then hit the TAB key, so the text properties are only preserved on the last three characters.
This is the default local keymap for reading from the minibuffer. By default, it makes the following bindings:
exit-minibuffer
exit-minibuffer
minibuffer-beginning-of-buffer
abort-recursive-edit
next-history-element
previous-history-element
next-matching-history-element
previous-matching-history-element
The variable minibuffer-mode-map
is an alias for this variable.
This function reads a string from the minibuffer, but does not allow
whitespace characters as part of the input: instead, those characters
terminate the input. The arguments prompt, initial, and
inherit-input-method are used as in read-from-minibuffer
.
This is a simplified interface to the read-from-minibuffer
function, and passes the value of the minibuffer-local-ns-map
keymap as the keymap argument for that function. Since the keymap
minibuffer-local-ns-map
does not rebind C-q, it is
possible to put a space into the string, by quoting it.
This function discards text properties, regardless of the value of
minibuffer-allow-text-properties
.
(read-no-blanks-input prompt initial) ≡ (let (minibuffer-allow-text-properties) (read-from-minibuffer prompt initial minibuffer-local-ns-map))
This built-in variable is the keymap used as the minibuffer local keymap
in the function read-no-blanks-input
. By default, it makes the
following bindings, in addition to those of minibuffer-local-map
:
Format prompt with default value default according to the
minibuffer-default-prompt-format
variable.
minibuffer-default-prompt-format
is a format string (defaulting
to ‘" (default %s)"’ that says how the “default” bit in prompts
like ‘"Local filename (default somefile): "’ are to be formatted.
To allow the users to customize how this is displayed, code that prompts the user for a value (and has a default) should look something along the lines of this code snippet:
(read-file-name (format-prompt "Local filename" file) nil file)
If format-args is nil
, prompt is used as a literal
string. If format-args is non-nil
, prompt is used
as a format control string, and prompt and format-args are
passed to format
(see Formatting Strings).
minibuffer-default-prompt-format
can be ‘""’, in which
case no default values are displayed.
If default is nil
, there is no default value, and
therefore no “default value” string is included in the result value.
If default is a non-nil
list, the first element of the
list is used in the prompt.
Both prompt and minibuffer-default-prompt-format
are run
through substitute-command-keys
(see Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation).
If this option is non-nil
(the default), getting input from the
minibuffer will restore, on exit, the window configurations of the frame
where the minibuffer was entered from and, if it is different, the frame
that owns the minibuffer window. This means that if, for example, a
user splits a window while getting input from the minibuffer on the same
frame, that split will be undone when exiting the minibuffer.
If this option is nil
, no such restorations are done. Hence, the
window split mentioned above will persist after exiting the minibuffer.
This section describes functions for reading Lisp objects with the minibuffer.
This function reads a Lisp object using the minibuffer, and returns it
without evaluating it. The arguments prompt and initial are
used as in read-from-minibuffer
.
This is a simplified interface to the
read-from-minibuffer
function:
(read-minibuffer prompt initial) ≡ (let (minibuffer-allow-text-properties) (read-from-minibuffer prompt initial nil t))
Here is an example in which we supply the string "(testing)"
as
initial input:
(read-minibuffer
"Enter an expression: " (format "%s" '(testing)))
;; Here is how the minibuffer is displayed:
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Enter an expression: (testing)∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
The user can type RET immediately to use the initial input as a default, or can edit the input.
This function reads a Lisp expression using the minibuffer, evaluates
it, then returns the result. The arguments prompt and
initial are used as in read-from-minibuffer
.
This function simply evaluates the result of a call to
read-minibuffer
:
(eval-minibuffer prompt initial) ≡ (eval (read-minibuffer prompt initial))
This function reads a Lisp expression in the minibuffer, evaluates it,
then returns the result. The difference between this command and
eval-minibuffer
is that here the initial form is not
optional and it is treated as a Lisp object to be converted to printed
representation rather than as a string of text. It is printed with
prin1
, so if it is a string, double-quote characters (‘"’)
appear in the initial text. See Output Functions.
In the following example, we offer the user an expression with initial text that is already a valid form:
(edit-and-eval-command "Please edit: " '(forward-word 1)) ;; After evaluation of the preceding expression, ;; the following appears in the minibuffer:
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Please edit: (forward-word 1)∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
Typing RET right away would exit the minibuffer and evaluate the expression, thus moving point forward one word.
A minibuffer history list records previous minibuffer inputs so the user can reuse them conveniently. It is a variable whose value is a list of strings (previous inputs), most recent first.
There are many separate minibuffer history lists, used for different kinds of inputs. It’s the Lisp programmer’s job to specify the right history list for each use of the minibuffer.
You specify a minibuffer history list with the optional history
argument to read-from-minibuffer
or completing-read
.
Here are the possible values for it:
Use variable (a symbol) as the history list.
Use variable (a symbol) as the history list, and assume that the initial history position is startpos (a nonnegative integer).
Specifying 0 for startpos is equivalent to just specifying the
symbol variable. previous-history-element
will display
the most recent element of the history list in the minibuffer. If you
specify a positive startpos, the minibuffer history functions
behave as if (elt variable (1- startpos))
were the
history element currently shown in the minibuffer.
For consistency, you should also specify that element of the history as the initial minibuffer contents, using the initial argument to the minibuffer input function (see Initial Input).
If you don’t specify history, then the default history list
minibuffer-history
is used. For other standard history lists,
see below. You can also create your own history list variable; just
initialize it to nil
before the first use. If the variable is
buffer local, then each buffer will have its own input history list.
Both read-from-minibuffer
and completing-read
add new
elements to the history list automatically, and provide commands to
allow the user to reuse items on the list (see Minibuffer Commands). The only thing your program needs to do to use a history
list is to initialize it and to pass its name to the input functions
when you wish. But it is safe to modify the list by hand when the
minibuffer input functions are not using it.
By default, when M-n (next-history-element
,
see next-history-element) reaches the end of
the list of default values provided by the command which initiated
reading input from the minibuffer, M-n adds all of the
completion candidates, as specified by
minibuffer-completion-table
(see Minibuffer Commands that Do Completion), to
the list of defaults, so that all those candidates are available as
“future history”. Your program can control that via the variable
minibuffer-default-add-function
: if its value is not a
function, this automatic addition is disabled, and you can also set
this variable to your own function which adds only some candidates, or
some other values, to the “future history”.
Emacs functions that add a new element to a history list can also
delete old elements if the list gets too long. The variable
history-length
specifies the maximum length for most history
lists. To specify a different maximum length for a particular history
list, put the length in the history-length
property of the
history list symbol. The variable history-delete-duplicates
specifies whether to delete duplicates in history.
This function adds a new element newelt, if it isn’t the empty
string, to the history list stored in the variable history-var,
and returns the updated history list. It limits the list length to
the value of maxelt (if non-nil
) or history-length
(described below). The possible values of maxelt have the same
meaning as the values of history-length
.
history-var cannot refer to a lexical variable.
Normally, add-to-history
removes duplicate members from the
history list if history-delete-duplicates
is non-nil
.
However, if keep-all is non-nil
, that says not to remove
duplicates, and to add newelt to the list even if it is empty.
If the value of this variable is nil
, standard functions that
read from the minibuffer don’t add new elements to the history list.
This lets Lisp programs explicitly manage input history by using
add-to-history
. The default value is t
.
The value of this variable specifies the maximum length for all
history lists that don’t specify their own maximum lengths. If the
value is t
, that means there is no maximum (don’t delete old
elements). If a history list variable’s symbol has a non-nil
history-length
property, it overrides this variable for that
particular history list.
If the value of this variable is t
, that means when adding a
new history element, all previous identical elements are deleted.
Here are some of the standard minibuffer history list variables:
The default history list for minibuffer history input.
A history list for arguments to query-replace
(and similar
arguments to other commands).
A history list for file-name arguments.
A history list for buffer-name arguments.
A history list for regular expression arguments.
A history list for arguments that are names of extended commands.
A history list for arguments that are shell commands.
A history list for arguments that are Lisp expressions to evaluate.
A history list for arguments that are faces.
A history list for variable-name arguments read by
read-variable
.
A history list for numbers read by read-number
.
A history list for arguments to goto-line
. This variable can
be made local in every buffer by customizing the user option
goto-line-history-local
.
Several of the functions for minibuffer input have an argument called initial. This is a mostly-deprecated feature for specifying that the minibuffer should start out with certain text, instead of empty as usual.
If initial is a string, the minibuffer starts out containing the text of the string, with point at the end, when the user starts to edit the text. If the user simply types RET to exit the minibuffer, it will use the initial input string to determine the value to return.
We discourage use of a non-nil
value for
initial, because initial input is an intrusive interface.
History lists and default values provide a much more convenient method
to offer useful default inputs to the user.
There is just one situation where you should specify a string for an initial argument. This is when you specify a cons cell for the history argument. See Minibuffer History.
initial can also be a cons cell of the form (string
. position)
. This means to insert string in the
minibuffer but put point at position within the string’s text.
As a historical accident, position was implemented
inconsistently in different functions. In completing-read
,
position’s value is interpreted as origin-zero; that is, a value
of 0 means the beginning of the string, 1 means after the first
character, etc. In read-minibuffer
, and the other
non-completion minibuffer input functions that support this argument,
1 means the beginning of the string, 2 means after the first character,
etc.
Use of a cons cell as the value for initial arguments is deprecated.
Completion is a feature that fills in the rest of a name
starting from an abbreviation for it. Completion works by comparing the
user’s input against a list of valid names and determining how much of
the name is determined uniquely by what the user has typed. For
example, when you type C-x b (switch-to-buffer
) and then
type the first few letters of the name of the buffer to which you wish
to switch, and then type TAB (minibuffer-complete
), Emacs
extends the name as far as it can.
Standard Emacs commands offer completion for names of symbols, files, buffers, and processes; with the functions in this section, you can implement completion for other kinds of names.
The try-completion
function is the basic primitive for
completion: it returns the longest determined completion of a given
initial string, with a given set of strings to match against.
The function completing-read
provides a higher-level interface
for completion. A call to completing-read
specifies how to
determine the list of valid names. The function then activates the
minibuffer with a local keymap that binds a few keys to commands useful
for completion. Other functions provide convenient simple interfaces
for reading certain kinds of names with completion.
The following completion functions have nothing in themselves to do with minibuffers. We describe them here to keep them near the higher-level completion features that do use the minibuffer.
This function returns the longest common substring of all possible completions of string in collection.
collection is called the completion table. Its value must be a list of strings or cons cells, an obarray, a hash table, or a completion function.
try-completion
compares string against each of the
permissible completions specified by the completion table. If no
permissible completions match, it returns nil
. If there is
just one matching completion, and the match is exact, it returns
t
. Otherwise, it returns the longest initial sequence common
to all possible matching completions.
If collection is a list, the permissible completions are
specified by the elements of the list, each of which should be either
a string, or a cons cell whose CAR is either a string or a symbol
(a symbol is converted to a string using symbol-name
). If the
list contains elements of any other type, those are ignored.
If collection is an obarray (see Creating and Interning Symbols), the names of all symbols in the obarray form the set of permissible completions.
If collection is a hash table, then the keys that are strings or symbols are the possible completions. Other keys are ignored.
You can also use a function as collection. Then the function is
solely responsible for performing completion; try-completion
returns whatever this function returns. The function is called with
three arguments: string, predicate and nil
(the
third argument is so that the same function can be used
in all-completions
and do the appropriate thing in either
case). See Programmed Completion.
If the argument predicate is non-nil
, then it must be a
function of one argument, unless collection is a hash table, in
which case it should be a function of two arguments. It is used to
test each possible match, and the match is accepted only if
predicate returns non-nil
. The argument given to
predicate is either a string or a cons cell (the CAR of
which is a string) from the alist, or a symbol (not a symbol
name) from the obarray. If collection is a hash table,
predicate is called with two arguments, the string key and the
associated value.
In addition, to be acceptable, a completion must also match all the
regular expressions in completion-regexp-list
. (Unless
collection is a function, in which case that function has to
handle completion-regexp-list
itself.)
In the first of the following examples, the string ‘foo’ is
matched by three of the alist CARs. All of the matches begin with
the characters ‘fooba’, so that is the result. In the second
example, there is only one possible match, and it is exact, so the
return value is t
.
(try-completion "foo" '(("foobar1" 1) ("barfoo" 2) ("foobaz" 3) ("foobar2" 4))) ⇒ "fooba"
(try-completion "foo" '(("barfoo" 2) ("foo" 3))) ⇒ t
In the following example, numerous symbols begin with the characters ‘forw’, and all of them begin with the word ‘forward’. In most of the symbols, this is followed with a ‘-’, but not in all, so no more than ‘forward’ can be completed.
(try-completion "forw" obarray) ⇒ "forward"
Finally, in the following example, only two of the three possible
matches pass the predicate test
(the string ‘foobaz’ is
too short). Both of those begin with the string ‘foobar’.
(defun test (s) (> (length (car s)) 6)) ⇒ test
(try-completion "foo" '(("foobar1" 1) ("barfoo" 2) ("foobaz" 3) ("foobar2" 4)) 'test) ⇒ "foobar"
This function returns a list of all possible completions of
string. The arguments to this function
are the same as those of try-completion
, and it
uses completion-regexp-list
in the same way that
try-completion
does.
If collection is a function, it is called with three arguments:
string, predicate and t
; then all-completions
returns whatever the function returns. See Programmed Completion.
Here is an example, using the function test
shown in the
example for try-completion
:
(defun test (s) (> (length (car s)) 6)) ⇒ test
(all-completions "foo" '(("foobar1" 1) ("barfoo" 2) ("foobaz" 3) ("foobar2" 4)) 'test) ⇒ ("foobar1" "foobar2")
This function returns non-nil
if string is a valid
completion alternative specified by collection and
predicate. The arguments are the same as in
try-completion
. For instance, if collection is a list of
strings, this is true if string appears in the list and
predicate is satisfied.
This function uses completion-regexp-list
in the same
way that try-completion
does.
If predicate is non-nil
and if collection contains
several strings that are equal to each other, as determined by
compare-strings
according to completion-ignore-case
,
then predicate should accept either all or none of them.
Otherwise, the return value of test-completion
is essentially
unpredictable.
If collection is a function, it is called with three arguments,
the values string, predicate and lambda
; whatever
it returns, test-completion
returns in turn.
This function returns the boundaries of the field on which collection will operate, assuming that string holds the text before point and suffix holds the text after point.
Normally completion operates on the whole string, so for all normal
collections, this will always return (0 . (length
suffix))
. But more complex completion, such as completion on
files, is done one field at a time. For example, completion of
"/usr/sh"
will include "/usr/share/"
but not
"/usr/share/doc"
even if "/usr/share/doc"
exists.
Also all-completions
on "/usr/sh"
will not include
"/usr/share/"
but only "share/"
. So if string is
"/usr/sh"
and suffix is "e/doc"
,
completion-boundaries
will return (5 . 1)
which tells us
that the collection will only return completion information that
pertains to the area after "/usr/"
and before "/doc"
.
try-completion
is not affected by nontrivial boundaries; e.g.,
try-completion
on "/usr/sh"
might still return
"/usr/share/"
, not "share/"
.
If you store a completion alist in a variable, you should mark the
variable as risky by giving it a non-nil
risky-local-variable
property. See File Local Variables.
If the value of this variable is non-nil
, case is not
considered significant in completion. Within read-file-name
,
this variable is overridden by
read-file-name-completion-ignore-case
(see Reading File Names); within read-buffer
, it is overridden by
read-buffer-completion-ignore-case
(see High-Level Completion Functions).
This is a list of regular expressions. The completion functions only
consider a completion acceptable if it matches all regular expressions
in this list, with case-fold-search
(see Searching and Case)
bound to the value of completion-ignore-case
.
Do not set this variable to a non-nil
value globally, as that
is not safe and will probably cause errors in completion commands.
This variable should be only let-bound to non-nil
values around
calls to basic completion functions: try-completion
,
test-completion
, and all-completions
.
This macro provides a way to initialize the variable var as a collection for completion in a lazy way, not computing its actual contents until they are first needed. You use this macro to produce a value that you store in var. The actual computation of the proper value is done the first time you do completion using var. It is done by calling fun with no arguments. The value fun returns becomes the permanent value of var.
Here is an example:
(defvar foo (lazy-completion-table foo make-my-alist))
There are several functions that take an existing completion table and
return a modified version. completion-table-case-fold
returns
a case-insensitive table. completion-table-in-turn
and
completion-table-merge
combine multiple input tables in
different ways. completion-table-subvert
alters a table to use
a different initial prefix. completion-table-with-quoting
returns a table suitable for operating on quoted text.
completion-table-with-predicate
filters a table with a
predicate function. completion-table-with-terminator
adds a
terminating string.
This section describes the basic interface for reading from the minibuffer with completion.
This function reads a string in the minibuffer, assisting the user by providing completion. It activates the minibuffer with prompt prompt, which must be a string.
The actual completion is done by passing the completion table
collection and the completion predicate predicate to the
function try-completion
(see Basic Completion Functions). This
happens in certain commands bound in the local keymaps used for
completion. Some of these commands also call test-completion
.
Thus, if predicate is non-nil
, it should be compatible
with collection and completion-ignore-case
.
See Definition of test-completion.
See Programmed Completion, for detailed requirements when collection is a function.
The value of the optional argument require-match determines how the user may exit the minibuffer:
nil
, the usual minibuffer exit commands work regardless of
the input in the minibuffer.
t
, the usual minibuffer exit commands won’t exit unless the
input completes to an element of collection.
confirm
, the user can exit with any input, but is asked for
confirmation if the input is not an element of collection.
confirm-after-completion
, the user can exit with any input,
but is asked for confirmation if the preceding command was a
completion command (i.e., one of the commands in
minibuffer-confirm-exit-commands
) and the resulting input is
not an element of collection. See Minibuffer Commands that Do Completion.
nil
value if the input is
acceptable.
t
, except
that the exit commands won’t exit if it performs completion.
However, empty input is always permitted, regardless of the value of
require-match; in that case, completing-read
returns the
first element of default, if it is a list; ""
, if
default is nil
; or default. The string or strings
in default are also available to the user through the history
commands (see Minibuffer Commands). In addition, the completion
candidates are added to the “future history” when the values in
default are exhausted by M-n; see minibuffer-default-add-function.
The function completing-read
uses
minibuffer-local-completion-map
as the keymap if
require-match is nil
, and uses
minibuffer-local-must-match-map
if require-match is
non-nil
. See Minibuffer Commands that Do Completion.
The argument history specifies which history list variable to
use for saving the input and for minibuffer history commands. It
defaults to minibuffer-history
. If history is the symbol
t
, history is not recorded. See Minibuffer History.
The argument initial is mostly deprecated; we recommend using a
non-nil
value only in conjunction with specifying a cons cell
for history. See Initial Input. For default input, use
default instead.
If the argument inherit-input-method is non-nil
, then the
minibuffer inherits the current input method (see Input Methods) and the setting of enable-multibyte-characters
(see Text Representations) from whichever buffer was current before
entering the minibuffer.
If the variable completion-ignore-case
is
non-nil
, completion ignores case when comparing the input
against the possible matches. See Basic Completion Functions. In this mode
of operation, predicate must also ignore case, or you will get
surprising results.
Here’s an example of using completing-read
:
(completing-read "Complete a foo: " '(("foobar1" 1) ("barfoo" 2) ("foobaz" 3) ("foobar2" 4)) nil t "fo")
;; After evaluation of the preceding expression, ;; the following appears in the minibuffer: ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Complete a foo: fo∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
If the user then types DEL DEL b RET,
completing-read
returns barfoo
.
The completing-read
function binds variables to pass
information to the commands that actually do completion.
They are described in the following section.
The value of this variable must be a function, which is called by
completing-read
to actually do its work. It should accept the
same arguments as completing-read
. This can be bound to a
different function to completely override the normal behavior of
completing-read
.
This section describes the keymaps, commands and user options used in the minibuffer to do completion.
The value of this variable is the completion table (see Basic Completion Functions) used for completion in the minibuffer. This is the
buffer-local variable that contains what completing-read
passes to
try-completion
. It is used by minibuffer completion commands
such as minibuffer-complete
.
This variable’s value is the predicate that completing-read
passes to try-completion
. The variable is also used by the other
minibuffer completion functions.
This variable determines whether Emacs asks for confirmation before
exiting the minibuffer; completing-read
sets this variable,
and the function minibuffer-complete-and-exit
checks the value
before exiting. If the value is nil
, confirmation is not
required. If the value is confirm
, the user may exit with an
input that is not a valid completion alternative, but Emacs asks for
confirmation. If the value is confirm-after-completion
, the
user may exit with an input that is not a valid completion
alternative, but Emacs asks for confirmation if the user submitted the
input right after any of the completion commands in
minibuffer-confirm-exit-commands
.
This variable holds a list of commands that cause Emacs to ask for
confirmation before exiting the minibuffer, if the require-match
argument to completing-read
is confirm-after-completion
.
The confirmation is requested if the user attempts to exit the
minibuffer immediately after calling any command in this list.
This function completes the minibuffer contents by at most a single
word. Even if the minibuffer contents have only one completion,
minibuffer-complete-word
does not add any characters beyond the
first character that is not a word constituent. See Syntax Tables.
This function completes the minibuffer contents as far as possible.
This function completes the minibuffer contents, and exits if
confirmation is not required, i.e., if
minibuffer-completion-confirm
is nil
. If confirmation
is required, it is given by repeating this command
immediately—the command is programmed to work without confirmation
when run twice in succession.
This function creates a list of the possible completions of the
current minibuffer contents. It works by calling all-completions
using the value of the variable minibuffer-completion-table
as
the collection argument, and the value of
minibuffer-completion-predicate
as the predicate argument.
The list of completions is displayed as text in a buffer named
*Completions*.
This function displays completions to the stream in
standard-output
, usually a buffer. (See Reading and Printing Lisp Objects, for more
information about streams.) The argument completions is normally
a list of completions just returned by all-completions
, but it
does not have to be. Each element may be a symbol or a string, either
of which is simply printed. It can also be a list of two strings,
which is printed as if the strings were concatenated. The first of
the two strings is the actual completion, the second string serves as
annotation.
This function is called by minibuffer-completion-help
. A
common way to use it is together with
with-output-to-temp-buffer
, like this:
(with-output-to-temp-buffer "*Completions*" (display-completion-list (all-completions (buffer-string) my-alist)))
If this variable is non-nil
, the completion commands
automatically display a list of possible completions whenever nothing
can be completed because the next character is not uniquely determined.
completing-read
uses this value as the local keymap when an
exact match of one of the completions is not required. By default, this
keymap makes the following bindings:
minibuffer-completion-help
minibuffer-complete-word
minibuffer-complete
and uses minibuffer-local-map
as its parent keymap
(see Definition of minibuffer-local-map).
completing-read
uses this value as the local keymap when an
exact match of one of the completions is required. Therefore, no keys
are bound to exit-minibuffer
, the command that exits the
minibuffer unconditionally. By default, this keymap makes the following
bindings:
minibuffer-complete-and-exit
minibuffer-complete-and-exit
and uses minibuffer-local-completion-map
as its parent keymap.
This is a sparse keymap that simply unbinds SPC; because
filenames can contain spaces. The function read-file-name
combines this keymap with either minibuffer-local-completion-map
or minibuffer-local-must-match-map
.
If non-nil
, the M-< command will move to the end of the
prompt if point is after the end of the prompt. If point is at or
before the end of the prompt, move to the start of the buffer. If
this variable is nil
, the command behaves like
beginning-of-buffer
.
This section describes the higher-level convenience functions for reading certain sorts of names with completion.
In most cases, you should not call these functions in the middle of a
Lisp function. When possible, do all minibuffer input as part of
reading the arguments for a command, in the interactive
specification. See Defining Commands.
This function reads the name of a buffer and returns it as a string.
It prompts with prompt. The argument default is the
default name to use, the value to return if the user exits with an
empty minibuffer. If non-nil
, it should be a string, a list of
strings, or a buffer. If it is a list, the default value is the first
element of this list. It is mentioned in the prompt, but is not
inserted in the minibuffer as initial input.
The argument prompt should be a string ending with a colon and a
space. If default is non-nil
, the function inserts it in
prompt before the colon to follow the convention for reading from
the minibuffer with a default value (see Emacs Programming Tips).
The optional argument require-match has the same meaning as in
completing-read
. See Completion and the Minibuffer.
The optional argument predicate, if non-nil
, specifies a
function to filter the buffers that should be considered: the function
will be called with every potential candidate as its argument, and
should return nil
to reject the candidate, non-nil
to
accept it.
In the following example, the user enters ‘minibuffer.t’, and
then types RET. The argument require-match is t
,
and the only buffer name starting with the given input is
‘minibuffer.texi’, so that name is the value.
(read-buffer "Buffer name: " "foo" t)
;; After evaluation of the preceding expression, ;; the following prompt appears, ;; with an empty minibuffer:
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Buffer name (default foo): ∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
;; The user types minibuffer.t RET.
⇒ "minibuffer.texi"
This variable, if non-nil
, specifies a function for reading
buffer names. read-buffer
calls this function instead of doing
its usual work, with the same arguments passed to read-buffer
.
If this variable is non-nil
, read-buffer
ignores case
when performing completion while reading the buffer name.
This function reads the name of a command and returns it as a Lisp
symbol. The argument prompt is used as in
read-from-minibuffer
. Recall that a command is anything for
which commandp
returns t
, and a command name is a symbol
for which commandp
returns t
. See Interactive Call.
The argument default specifies what to return if the user enters
null input. It can be a symbol, a string or a list of strings. If it
is a string, read-command
interns it before returning it.
If it is a list, read-command
interns the first element of this list.
If default is nil
, that means no default has been
specified; then if the user enters null input, the return value is
(intern "")
, that is, a symbol whose name is an empty string,
and whose printed representation is ##
(see Symbol Type).
(read-command "Command name? ")
;; After evaluation of the preceding expression, ;; the following prompt appears with an empty minibuffer:
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Command name? ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
If the user types forward-c RET, then this function returns
forward-char
.
The read-command
function is a simplified interface to
completing-read
. It uses the variable obarray
so as to
complete in the set of extant Lisp symbols, and it uses the
commandp
predicate so as to accept only command names:
(read-command prompt) ≡ (intern (completing-read prompt obarray 'commandp t nil))
This function reads the name of a customizable variable and returns it
as a symbol. Its arguments have the same form as those of
read-command
. It behaves just like read-command
, except
that it uses the predicate custom-variable-p
instead of
commandp
.
This function reads a string that is a color specification, either the
color’s name or an RGB hex value such as #RRRGGGBBB
. It
prompts with prompt (default: "Color (name or #RGB triplet):"
)
and provides completion for color names, but not for hex RGB values.
In addition to names of standard colors, completion candidates include
the foreground and background colors at point.
Valid RGB values are described in Color Names.
The function’s return value is the string typed by the user in the
minibuffer. However, when called interactively or if the optional
argument convert is non-nil
, it converts any input color
name into the corresponding RGB value string and instead returns that.
This function requires a valid color specification to be input.
Empty color names are allowed when allow-empty is
non-nil
and the user enters null input.
Interactively, or when display is non-nil
, the return
value is also displayed in the echo area.
See also the functions read-coding-system
and
read-non-nil-coding-system
, in User-Chosen Coding Systems,
and read-input-method-name
, in Input Methods.
The high-level completion functions read-file-name
,
read-directory-name
, and read-shell-command
are designed
to read file names, directory names, and shell commands, respectively.
They provide special features, including automatic insertion of the
default directory.
This function reads a file name, prompting with prompt and providing completion.
As an exception, this function reads a file name using a graphical file dialog instead of the minibuffer, if all of the following are true:
use-dialog-box
is non-nil
.
See Dialog Boxes in The GNU Emacs Manual.
The exact behavior when using a graphical file dialog is platform-dependent. Here, we simply document the behavior when using the minibuffer.
read-file-name
does not automatically expand the returned file
name. You can call expand-file-name
yourself if an absolute
file name is required.
The optional argument require-match has the same meaning as in
completing-read
. See Completion and the Minibuffer.
The argument directory specifies the directory to use for
completing relative file names. It should be an absolute directory
name. If the variable insert-default-directory
is non-nil
,
directory is also inserted in the minibuffer as initial input.
It defaults to the current buffer’s value of default-directory
.
If you specify initial, that is an initial file name to insert
in the buffer (after directory, if that is inserted). In this
case, point goes at the beginning of initial. The default for
initial is nil
—don’t insert any file name. To see what
initial does, try the command C-x C-v in a buffer visiting
a file. Please note: we recommend using default rather
than initial in most cases.
If default is non-nil
, then the function returns
default if the user exits the minibuffer with the same non-empty
contents that read-file-name
inserted initially. The initial
minibuffer contents are always non-empty if
insert-default-directory
is non-nil
, as it is by
default. default is not checked for validity, regardless of the
value of require-match. However, if require-match is
non-nil
, the initial minibuffer contents should be a valid file
(or directory) name. Otherwise read-file-name
attempts
completion if the user exits without any editing, and does not return
default. default is also available through the history
commands.
If default is nil
, read-file-name
tries to find a
substitute default to use in its place, which it treats in exactly the
same way as if it had been specified explicitly. If default is
nil
, but initial is non-nil
, then the default is
the absolute file name obtained from directory and
initial. If both default and initial are nil
and the buffer is visiting a file, read-file-name
uses the
absolute file name of that file as default. If the buffer is not
visiting a file, then there is no default. In that case, if the user
types RET without any editing, read-file-name
simply
returns the pre-inserted contents of the minibuffer.
If the user types RET in an empty minibuffer, this function returns an empty string, regardless of the value of require-match. This is, for instance, how the user can make the current buffer visit no file using M-x set-visited-file-name.
If predicate is non-nil
, it specifies a function of one
argument that decides which file names are acceptable completion
alternatives. A file name is an acceptable value if predicate
returns non-nil
for it.
Here is an example of using read-file-name
:
(read-file-name "The file is ") ;; After evaluation of the preceding expression, ;; the following appears in the minibuffer:
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- The file is /gp/gnu/elisp/∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
Typing manual TAB results in the following:
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- The file is /gp/gnu/elisp/manual.texi∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
If the user types RET, read-file-name
returns the file name
as the string "/gp/gnu/elisp/manual.texi"
.
If non-nil
, this should be a function that accepts the same
arguments as read-file-name
. When read-file-name
is
called, it calls this function with the supplied arguments instead of
doing its usual work.
If this variable is non-nil
, read-file-name
ignores case
when performing completion.
This function is like read-file-name
but allows only directory
names as completion alternatives.
If default is nil
and initial is non-nil
,
read-directory-name
constructs a substitute default by
combining directory (or the current buffer’s default directory
if directory is nil
) and initial. If both
default and initial are nil
, this function uses
directory as substitute default, or the current buffer’s default
directory if directory is nil
.
This variable is used by read-file-name
, and thus, indirectly,
by most commands reading file names. (This includes all commands that
use the code letters ‘f’ or ‘F’ in their interactive form.
See Code Characters for interactive.) Its
value controls whether read-file-name
starts by placing the
name of the default directory in the minibuffer, plus the initial file
name, if any. If the value of this variable is nil
, then
read-file-name
does not place any initial input in the
minibuffer (unless you specify initial input with the initial
argument). In that case, the default directory is still used for
completion of relative file names, but is not displayed.
If this variable is nil
and the initial minibuffer contents are
empty, the user may have to explicitly fetch the next history element
to access a default value. If the variable is non-nil
, the
initial minibuffer contents are always non-empty and the user can
always request a default value by immediately typing RET in an
unedited minibuffer. (See above.)
For example:
;; Here the minibuffer starts out with the default directory.
(let ((insert-default-directory t))
(read-file-name "The file is "))
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- The file is ~lewis/manual/∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
;; Here the minibuffer is empty and only the prompt ;; appears on its line. (let ((insert-default-directory nil)) (read-file-name "The file is "))
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- The file is ∗ ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
This function reads a shell command from the minibuffer, prompting with prompt and providing intelligent completion. It completes the first word of the command using candidates that are appropriate for command names, and the rest of the command words as file names.
This function uses minibuffer-local-shell-command-map
as the
keymap for minibuffer input. The history argument specifies the
history list to use; if is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
shell-command-history
(see shell-command-history). The optional argument initial
specifies the initial content of the minibuffer (see Initial Input). The rest of args, if present, are used as the
default and inherit-input-method arguments in
read-from-minibuffer
(see Reading Text Strings with the Minibuffer).
This keymap is used by read-shell-command
for completing
command and file names that are part of a shell command. It uses
minibuffer-local-map
as its parent keymap, and binds TAB
to completion-at-point
.
Here are some variables that can be used to alter the default completion behavior.
The value of this variable is a list of completion style (symbols) to
use for performing completion. A completion style is a set of
rules for generating completions. Each symbol occurring this list
must have a corresponding entry in completion-styles-alist
.
This variable stores a list of available completion styles. Each element in the list has the form
(style try-completion all-completions doc)
Here, style is the name of the completion style (a symbol),
which may be used in the completion-styles
variable to refer to
this style; try-completion is the function that does the
completion; all-completions is the function that lists the
completions; and doc is a string describing the completion
style.
The try-completion and all-completions functions should
each accept four arguments: string, collection,
predicate, and point. The string, collection,
and predicate arguments have the same meanings as in
try-completion
(see Basic Completion Functions), and the point
argument is the position of point within string. Each function
should return a non-nil
value if it performed its job, and
nil
if it did not (e.g., if there is no way to complete
string according to the completion style).
When the user calls a completion command like
minibuffer-complete
(see Minibuffer Commands that Do Completion), Emacs looks
for the first style listed in completion-styles
and calls its
try-completion function. If this function returns nil
,
Emacs moves to the next listed completion style and calls its
try-completion function, and so on until one of the
try-completion functions successfully performs completion and
returns a non-nil
value. A similar procedure is used for
listing completions, via the all-completions functions.
See Completion Styles in The GNU Emacs Manual, for a description of the available completion styles.
This variable specifies special completion styles and other completion
behaviors to use when completing certain types of text. Its value
should be an alist with elements of the form (category
. alist)
. category is a symbol describing what is being
completed; currently, the buffer
, file
, and
unicode-name
categories are defined, but others can be defined
via specialized completion functions (see Programmed Completion).
alist is an association list describing how completion should
behave for the corresponding category. The following alist keys are
supported:
styles
The value should be a list of completion styles (symbols).
cycle
The value should be a value for completion-cycle-threshold
(see Completion Options in The GNU Emacs Manual) for this
category.
Additional alist entries may be defined in the future.
This variable is used to specify extra properties of the current completion command. It is intended to be let-bound by specialized completion commands. Its value should be a list of property and value pairs. The following properties are supported:
:annotation-function
The value should be a function to add annotations in the completions
buffer. This function must accept one argument, a completion, and
should either return nil
or a string to be displayed next to
the completion. Unless this function puts own face on the annotation
suffix string, the completions-annotations
face is added by
default to that string.
:affixation-function
The value should be a function to add prefixes and suffixes to
completions. This function must accept one argument, a list of
completions, and should return a list of annotated completions. Each
element of the returned list must be a three-element list, the
completion, a prefix string, and a suffix string. This function takes
priority over :annotation-function
.
:exit-function
The value should be a function to run after performing completion.
The function should accept two arguments, string and
status, where string is the text to which the field was
completed, and status indicates what kind of operation happened:
finished
if text is now complete, sole
if the text
cannot be further completed but completion is not finished, or
exact
if the text is a valid completion but may be further
completed.
Sometimes it is not possible or convenient to create an alist or an obarray containing all the intended possible completions ahead of time. In such a case, you can supply your own function to compute the completion of a given string. This is called programmed completion. Emacs uses programmed completion when completing file names (see File Name Completion), among many other cases.
To use this feature, pass a function as the collection
argument to completing-read
. The function
completing-read
arranges to pass your completion function along
to try-completion
, all-completions
, and other basic
completion functions, which will then let your function do all
the work.
The completion function should accept three arguments:
nil
if none. The function should call the predicate for each
possible match, and ignore the match if the predicate returns
nil
.
nil
This specifies a try-completion
operation. The function should
return nil
if there are no matches; it should return t
if the specified string is a unique and exact match; and it should
return the longest common prefix substring of all matches otherwise.
t
This specifies an all-completions
operation. The function
should return a list of all possible completions of the specified
string.
lambda
This specifies a test-completion
operation. The function
should return t
if the specified string is an exact match for
some completion alternative; nil
otherwise.
(boundaries . suffix)
This specifies a completion-boundaries
operation. The function
should return (boundaries start . end)
, where
start is the position of the beginning boundary in the specified
string, and end is the position of the end boundary in
suffix.
If a Lisp program returns nontrivial boundaries, it should make sure that the
all-completions
operation is consistent with them. The
completions returned by all-completions
should only pertain to
the piece of the prefix and suffix covered by the completion
boundaries. See Basic Completion Functions, for the precise expected semantics
of completion boundaries.
metadata
¶This specifies a request for information about the state of the
current completion. The return value should have the form
(metadata . alist)
, where alist is an alist whose
elements are described below.
If the flag has any other value, the completion function should return
nil
.
The following is a list of metadata entries that a completion function
may return in response to a metadata
flag argument:
category
¶The value should be a symbol describing what kind of text the
completion function is trying to complete. If the symbol matches one
of the keys in completion-category-overrides
, the usual
completion behavior is overridden. See Completion Variables.
annotation-function
¶The value should be a function for annotating completions. The
function should take one argument, string, which is a possible
completion. It should return a string, which is displayed after the
completion string in the *Completions* buffer.
Unless this function puts own face on the annotation suffix string,
the completions-annotations
face is added by default to
that string.
affixation-function
¶The value should be a function for adding prefixes and suffixes to
completions. The function should take one argument,
completions, which is a list of possible completions. It should
return such a list of completions where each element contains a list
of three elements: a completion, a prefix which is displayed before
the completion string in the *Completions* buffer, and
a suffix displayed after the completion string. This function
takes priority over annotation-function
.
group-function
¶The value should be a function for grouping the completion candidates.
The function must take two arguments, completion, which is a
completion candidate and transform, which is a boolean flag. If
transform is nil
, the function must return the group
title of the group to which the candidate belongs. The returned title
can also be nil
. Otherwise the function must return the
transformed candidate. The transformation can for example remove a
redundant prefix, which is displayed in the group title.
display-sort-function
¶The value should be a function for sorting completions. The function should take one argument, a list of completion strings, and return a sorted list of completion strings. It is allowed to alter the input list destructively.
cycle-sort-function
¶The value should be a function for sorting completions, when
completion-cycle-threshold
is non-nil
and the user is
cycling through completion alternatives. See Completion Options in The GNU Emacs Manual. Its argument list and return value are
the same as for display-sort-function
.
This function is a convenient way to write a function that can act as
a programmed completion function. The argument function should
be a function that takes one argument, a string, and returns a
completion table (see Basic Completion Functions) containing all the
possible completions. The table returned by function can also
include elements that don’t match the string argument; they are
automatically filtered out by completion-table-dynamic
. In
particular, function can ignore its argument and return a full
list of all possible completions. You can think of
completion-table-dynamic
as a transducer between function
and the interface for programmed completion functions.
If the optional argument switch-buffer is non-nil
, and
completion is performed in the minibuffer, function will be
called with current buffer set to the buffer from which the minibuffer
was entered.
The return value of completion-table-dynamic
is a function that
can be used as the 2nd argument to try-completion
and
all-completions
. Note that this function will always return
empty metadata and trivial boundaries.
This is a wrapper for completion-table-dynamic
that saves the
last argument-result pair. This means that multiple lookups with the
same argument only need to call function once. This can be useful
when a slow operation is involved, such as calling an external process.
Although completion is usually done in the minibuffer, the
completion facility can also be used on the text in ordinary Emacs
buffers. In many major modes, in-buffer completion is performed by
the C-M-i or M-TAB command, bound to
completion-at-point
. See Symbol Completion in The GNU
Emacs Manual. This command uses the abnormal hook variable
completion-at-point-functions
:
The value of this abnormal hook should be a list of functions, which are used to compute a completion table (see Basic Completion Functions) for completing the text at point. It can be used by major modes to provide mode-specific completion tables (see Major Mode Conventions).
When the command completion-at-point
runs, it calls the
functions in the list one by one, without any argument. Each function
should return nil
unless it can and wants to take
responsibility for the completion data for the text at point.
Otherwise it should return a list of the following form:
(start end collection . props)
start and end delimit the text to complete (which should
enclose point). collection is a completion table for completing
that text, in a form suitable for passing as the second argument to
try-completion
(see Basic Completion Functions); completion
alternatives will be generated from this completion table in the usual
way, via the completion styles defined in completion-styles
(see Completion Variables). props is a property list for
additional information; any of the properties in
completion-extra-properties
are recognized (see Completion Variables), as well as the following additional ones:
:predicate
The value should be a predicate that completion candidates need to satisfy.
:exclusive
If the value is no
, then if the completion table fails to match
the text at point, completion-at-point
moves on to the
next function in completion-at-point-functions
instead of
reporting a completion failure.
The functions on this hook should generally return quickly, since they
may be called very often (e.g., from post-command-hook
).
Supplying a function for collection is strongly recommended if
generating the list of completions is an expensive operation. Emacs
may internally call functions in completion-at-point-functions
many times, but care about the value of collection for only some
of these calls. By supplying a function for collection, Emacs
can defer generating completions until necessary. You can use
completion-table-dynamic
to create a wrapper function:
;; Avoid this pattern. (let ((beg ...) (end ...) (my-completions (my-make-completions))) (list beg end my-completions)) ;; Use this instead. (let ((beg ...) (end ...)) (list beg end (completion-table-dynamic (lambda (_) (my-make-completions)))))
Additionally, the collection should generally not be
pre-filtered based on the current text between start and
end, because that is the responsibility of the caller of
completion-at-point-functions
to do that according to the
completion styles it decides to use.
A function in completion-at-point-functions
may also return a
function instead of a list as described above. In that case, that
returned function is called, with no argument, and it is entirely
responsible for performing the completion. We discourage this usage;
it is only intended to help convert old code to using
completion-at-point
.
The first function in completion-at-point-functions
to return a
non-nil
value is used by completion-at-point
. The
remaining functions are not called. The exception to this is when
there is an :exclusive
specification, as described above.
The following function provides a convenient way to perform completion on an arbitrary stretch of text in an Emacs buffer:
This function completes the text in the current buffer between the
positions start and end, using collection. The
argument collection has the same meaning as in
try-completion
(see Basic Completion Functions).
This function inserts the completion text directly into the current
buffer. Unlike completing-read
(see Completion and the Minibuffer), it does not activate the minibuffer.
For this function to work, point must be somewhere between start and end.
This section describes functions used to ask the user a yes-or-no
question. The function y-or-n-p
can be answered with a single
character; it is useful for questions where an inadvertent wrong answer
will not have serious consequences. yes-or-no-p
is suitable for
more momentous questions, since it requires three or four characters to
answer.
If either of these functions is called in a command that was
invoked using the mouse or some other window-system gesture, or in a
command invoked via a menu, then they use a dialog box or pop-up menu
to ask the question if dialog boxes are supported. Otherwise, they
use keyboard input. You can force use either of the mouse or of
keyboard input by binding last-nonmenu-event
to a suitable
value around the call—bind it to t
to force keyboard
interaction, and to a list to force dialog boxes.
Both yes-or-no-p
and y-or-n-p
use the minibuffer.
This function asks the user a question, expecting input in the minibuffer.
It returns t
if the user types y, nil
if the user
types n. This function also accepts SPC to mean yes and
DEL to mean no. It accepts C-] and C-g to quit,
because the question uses the minibuffer and for that reason the user
might try to use C-] to get out. The answer is a single
character, with no RET needed to terminate it. Upper and lower
case are equivalent.
“Asking the question” means printing prompt in the minibuffer, followed by the string ‘(y or n) ’. If the input is not one of the expected answers (y, n, SPC, DEL, or something that quits), the function responds ‘Please answer y or n.’, and repeats the request.
This function actually uses the minibuffer, but does not allow editing of the answer. The cursor moves to the minibuffer while the question is being asked.
The answers and their meanings, even ‘y’ and ‘n’, are not
hardwired, and are specified by the keymap query-replace-map
(see Search and Replace). In particular, if the user enters the
special responses recenter
, scroll-up
,
scroll-down
, scroll-other-window
, or
scroll-other-window-down
(respectively bound to C-l,
C-v, M-v, C-M-v and C-M-S-v in
query-replace-map
), this function performs the specified window
recentering or scrolling operation, and poses the question again.
If you bind help-form
(see Help Functions) to
a non-nil
value while calling y-or-n-p
, then pressing
help-char
causes it to evaluate help-form
and display
the result. help-char
is automatically added to prompt.
Like y-or-n-p
, except that if the user fails to answer within
seconds seconds, this function stops waiting and returns
default. It works by setting up a timer; see Timers for Delayed Execution.
The argument seconds should be a number.
This function asks the user a question, expecting input in the
minibuffer. It returns t
if the user enters ‘yes’,
nil
if the user types ‘no’. The user must type RET to
finalize the response. Upper and lower case are equivalent.
yes-or-no-p
starts by displaying prompt in the minibuffer,
followed by ‘(yes or no) ’. The user must type one of the
expected responses; otherwise, the function responds ‘Please answer
yes or no.’, waits about two seconds and repeats the request.
yes-or-no-p
requires more work from the user than
y-or-n-p
and is appropriate for more crucial decisions.
Here is an example:
(yes-or-no-p "Do you really want to remove everything? ") ;; After evaluation of the preceding expression, ;; the following prompt appears, ;; with an empty minibuffer:
---------- Buffer: minibuffer ---------- Do you really want to remove everything? (yes or no) ---------- Buffer: minibuffer ----------
If the user first types y RET, which is invalid because this function demands the entire word ‘yes’, it responds by displaying these prompts, with a brief pause between them:
---------- Buffer: minibuffer ---------- Please answer yes or no. Do you really want to remove everything? (yes or no) ---------- Buffer: minibuffer ----------
This section describes facilities for asking the user more complex questions or several similar questions.
When you have a series of similar questions to ask, such as “Do you
want to save this buffer?” for each buffer in turn, you should use
map-y-or-n-p
to ask the collection of questions, rather than
asking each question individually. This gives the user certain
convenient facilities such as the ability to answer the whole series at
once.
This function asks the user a series of questions, reading a single-character answer in the echo area for each one.
The value of list specifies the objects to ask questions about.
It should be either a list of objects or a generator function. If it
is a function, it will be called with no arguments, and should return
either the next object to ask about, or nil
, meaning to stop
asking questions.
The argument prompter specifies how to ask each question. If prompter is a string, the question text is computed like this:
(format prompter object)
where object is the next object to ask about (as obtained from
list). See Formatting Strings, for more information about
format
.
If prompter is not a string, it should be a function of one
argument (the object to ask about) and should return the question text
for that object. If the value prompter returns is a string,
that is the question to ask the user. The function can also return
t
, meaning to act on this object without asking the user, or
nil
, which means to silently ignore this object.
The argument actor says how to act on the objects for which the user answers yes. It should be a function of one argument, and will be called with each object from list for which the user answers yes.
If the argument help is given, it should be a list of this form:
(singular plural action)
where singular is a string containing a singular noun that describes a single object to be acted on, plural is the corresponding plural noun, and action is a transitive verb describing what actor does with the objects.
If you don’t specify help, it defaults to the list
("object" "objects" "act on")
.
Each time a question is asked, the user can answer as follows:
act on the object
skip the object
act on all the following objects
exit (skip all following objects)
act on the object and then exit
get help
These are the same answers that query-replace
accepts. The
keymap query-replace-map
defines their meaning for
map-y-or-n-p
as well as for query-replace
; see
Search and Replace.
You can use action-alist to specify additional possible answers
and what they mean. If provided, action-alist should be an
alist whose elements are of the form (char function help)
. Each of the alist elements defines one
additional answer. In each element, char is a character (the
answer); function is a function of one argument (an object from
list); and help is a string. When the user responds with
char, map-y-or-n-p
calls function. If it returns
non-nil
, the object is considered to have been acted upon, and
map-y-or-n-p
advances to the next object in list. If it
returns nil
, the prompt is repeated for the same object. If
the user requests help, the text in help is used to describe
these additional answers.
Normally, map-y-or-n-p
binds cursor-in-echo-area
while
prompting. But if no-cursor-in-echo-area is non-nil
, it
does not do that.
If map-y-or-n-p
is called in a command that was invoked using
the mouse or some other window-system gesture, or a command invoked
via a menu, then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to ask the
question if dialog boxes are supported. In this case, it does not use
keyboard input or the echo area. You can force use either of the
mouse or of keyboard input by binding last-nonmenu-event
to a
suitable value around the call—bind it to t
to force keyboard
interaction, and to a list to force dialog boxes.
The return value of map-y-or-n-p
is the number of objects acted on.
If you need to ask the user a question that might have more than just
2 answers, use read-answer
.
This function prompts the user with text in question, which should end in the ‘SPC’ character. The function includes in the prompt the possible responses in answers by appending them to the end of question. The possible responses are provided in answers as an alist whose elements are of the following form:
(long-answer short-answer help-message)
where long-answer is the complete text of the user response, a
string; short-answer is a short form of the same response, a
single character or a function key; and help-message is the text
that describes the meaning of the answer. If the variable
read-answer-short
is non-nil
, the prompt will show the
short variants of the possible answers and the user is expected to
type the single characters/keys shown in the prompt; otherwise the
prompt will show the long variants of the answers, and the user is
expected to type the full text of one of the answers and end by
pressing RET. If use-dialog-box
is non-nil
, and
this function was invoked by mouse events, the question and the
answers will be displayed in a GUI dialog box.
The function returns the text of the long-answer selected by the user, regardless of whether long or short answers were shown in the prompt and typed by the user.
Here is an example of using this function:
(let ((read-answer-short t)) (read-answer "Foo " '(("yes" ?y "perform the action") ("no" ?n "skip to the next") ("all" ?! "perform for the rest without more questions") ("help" ?h "show help") ("quit" ?q "exit"))))
This function uses the minibuffer to read and return a single
character. Optionally, it ignores any input that is not a member of
chars, a list of accepted characters. The history
argument specifies the history list symbol to use; if it is omitted or
nil
, this function doesn’t use the history.
If you bind help-form
(see Help Functions) to
a non-nil
value while calling read-char-from-minibuffer
,
then pressing help-char
causes it to evaluate help-form
and display the result.
To read a password to pass to another program, you can use the
function read-passwd
.
This function reads a password, prompting with prompt. It does
not echo the password as the user types it; instead, it echoes
‘*’ for each character in the password. If you want to apply
another character to hide the password, let-bind the variable
read-hide-char
with that character.
The optional argument confirm, if non-nil
, says to read the
password twice and insist it must be the same both times. If it isn’t
the same, the user has to type it over and over until the last two
times match.
The optional argument default specifies the default password to
return if the user enters empty input. If default is nil
,
then read-passwd
returns the null string in that case.
This section describes some commands meant for use in the minibuffer.
This command exits the active minibuffer. It is normally bound to keys in minibuffer local keymaps. The command throws an error if the current buffer is a minibuffer, but not the active minibuffer.
This command exits the active minibuffer after inserting the last
character typed on the keyboard (found in last-command-event
;
see Information from the Command Loop).
This command replaces the minibuffer contents with the value of the nth previous (older) history element.
This command replaces the minibuffer contents with the value of the nth more recent history element. The position in the history can go beyond the current position and invoke “future history” (see Reading Text Strings with the Minibuffer).
This command replaces the minibuffer contents with the value of the nth previous (older) history element that matches pattern (a regular expression).
This command replaces the minibuffer contents with the value of the nth next (newer) history element that matches pattern (a regular expression).
This command replaces the minibuffer contents with the value of the nth previous (older) history element that completes the current contents of the minibuffer before the point.
This command replaces the minibuffer contents with the value of the nth next (newer) history element that completes the current contents of the minibuffer before the point.
This function puts element of the minibuffer history in the
minibuffer. The argument nabs specifies the absolute history
position in descending order, where 0 means the current element and a
positive number n means the nth previous element. NABS
being a negative number -n means the nth entry of “future
history”. When this function reaches the end of the default values
provided by read-from-minibuffer
(see Reading Text Strings with the Minibuffer)
and completing-read
(see Completion and the Minibuffer), it adds
the completion candidates to “future history”, see minibuffer-default-add-function.
These functions access and select minibuffer windows, test whether they are active and control how they get resized.
This function returns the minibuffer window used for frame frame.
If frame is nil
, that stands for the selected frame.
Note that the minibuffer window used by a frame need not be part of that
frame—a frame that has no minibuffer of its own necessarily uses some
other frame’s minibuffer window. The minibuffer window of a
minibuffer-less frame can be changed by setting that frame’s
minibuffer
frame parameter (see Buffer Parameters).
This function specifies window as the minibuffer window to use. This affects where the minibuffer is displayed if you put text in it without invoking the usual minibuffer commands. It has no effect on the usual minibuffer input functions because they all start by choosing the minibuffer window according to the selected frame.
This function returns t
if window is a minibuffer window.
window defaults to the selected window.
The following function returns the window showing the currently active minibuffer.
This function returns the window of the currently active minibuffer, or
nil
if there is no active minibuffer.
It is not sufficient to determine whether a given window shows the
currently active minibuffer by comparing it with the result of
(minibuffer-window)
, because there can be more than one
minibuffer window if there is more than one frame.
This function returns non-nil
if window shows the currently
active minibuffer.
The following two options control whether minibuffer windows are resized automatically and how large they can get in the process.
This option specifies whether minibuffer windows are resized
automatically. The default value is grow-only
, which means that
a minibuffer window by default expands automatically to accommodate the
text it displays and shrinks back to one line as soon as the minibuffer
gets empty. If the value is t
, Emacs will always try to fit the
height of a minibuffer window to the text it displays (with a minimum of
one line). If the value is nil
, a minibuffer window never
changes size automatically. In that case the window resizing commands
(see Resizing Windows) can be used to adjust its height.
This option provides a maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows automatically. A floating-point number specifies the maximum height as a fraction of the frame’s height; an integer specifies the maximum height in units of the frame’s canonical character height (see Frame Font). The default value is 0.25.
Note that the values of the above two variables take effect at display
time, so let-binding them around code which produces echo-area messages
will not work. If you want to prevent resizing of minibuffer windows
when displaying long messages, bind the message-truncate-lines
variable instead (see Echo Area Customization).
The option resize-mini-windows
does not affect the behavior of
minibuffer-only frames (see Frame Layout). The following option
allows to automatically resize such frames as well.
If this is nil
, minibuffer-only frames are never resized
automatically.
If this is a function, that function is called with the minibuffer-only frame to be resized as sole argument. At the time this function is called, the buffer of the minibuffer window of that frame is the buffer whose contents will be shown the next time that window is redisplayed. The function is expected to fit the frame to the buffer in some appropriate way.
Any other non-nil
value means to resize minibuffer-only frames by
calling fit-mini-frame-to-buffer
, a function that behaves like
fit-frame-to-buffer
(see Resizing Windows) but does not strip
leading or trailing empty lines from the buffer text.
These functions access the minibuffer prompt and contents.
This function returns the prompt string of the currently active
minibuffer. If no minibuffer is active, it returns nil
.
This function returns the current position of the end of the minibuffer prompt, if a minibuffer is current. Otherwise, it returns the minimum valid buffer position.
This function returns the current display-width of the minibuffer prompt, if a minibuffer is current. Otherwise, it returns zero.
This function returns the editable contents of the minibuffer (that is, everything except the prompt) as a string, if a minibuffer is current. Otherwise, it returns the entire contents of the current buffer.
This is like minibuffer-contents
, except that it does not copy text
properties, just the characters themselves. See Text Properties.
This command erases the editable contents of the minibuffer (that is, everything except the prompt), if a minibuffer is current. Otherwise, it erases the entire current buffer.
These functions and variables deal with recursive minibuffers (see Recursive Editing):
This function returns the current depth of activations of the minibuffer, a nonnegative integer. If no minibuffers are active, it returns zero.
If this variable is non-nil
, you can invoke commands (such as
find-file
) that use minibuffers even while the minibuffer is
active. Such invocation produces a recursive editing level for a new
minibuffer. By default, the outer-level minibuffer is invisible while
you are editing the inner one. If you have
minibuffer-follows-selected-frame
set to nil
, you can
have minibuffers visible on several frames at the same time.
See (emacs)Basic Minibuffer.
If this variable is nil
, you cannot invoke minibuffer commands
when the minibuffer is active, not even if you switch to another window
to do it.
If a command name has a property enable-recursive-minibuffers
that is non-nil
, then the command can use the minibuffer to read
arguments even if it is invoked from the minibuffer. A command can
also achieve this by binding enable-recursive-minibuffers
to t
in the interactive declaration (see Using interactive
).
The minibuffer command next-matching-history-element
(normally
M-s in the minibuffer) does the latter.
It’s sometimes useful to be able to run Emacs as a headless server process that responds to commands given over a network connection. However, Emacs is primarily a platform for interactive usage, so many commands prompt the user for feedback in certain anomalous situations. This makes this use case more difficult, since the server process will just hang waiting for user input.
Binding the inhibit-interaction
variable to something
non-nil
makes Emacs signal a inhibited-interaction
error
instead of prompting, which can then be used by the server process to
handle these situations.
Here’s a typical use case:
(let ((inhibit-interaction t)) (respond-to-client (condition-case err (my-client-handling-function) (inhibited-interaction err))))
If my-client-handling-function
ends up calling something that
asks the user for something (via y-or-n-p
or
read-from-minibuffer
or the like), an
inhibited-interaction
error is signaled instead. The server
code then catches that error and reports it to the client.
This function returns non-nil
if buffer-or-name is a
minibuffer. If buffer-or-name is omitted or nil
, it
tests the current buffer. When live is non-nil
, the
function returns non-nil
only when buffer-or-name is an
active minibuffer.
This is a normal hook that is run whenever a minibuffer is entered. See Hooks.
This macro executes body after arranging for the specified
function to be called via minibuffer-setup-hook
. By
default, function is called before the other functions in the
minibuffer-setup-hook
list, but if function is of the
form (:append func)
, func will be called
after the other hook functions.
The body forms should not use the minibuffer more than once. If the minibuffer is re-entered recursively, function will only be called once, for the outermost use of the minibuffer.
This is a normal hook that is run whenever a minibuffer is exited. See Hooks.
The current value of this variable is used to rebind help-form
locally inside the minibuffer (see Help Functions).
If the value of this variable is non-nil
, it should be a window
object. When the function scroll-other-window
is called in the
minibuffer, it scrolls this window (see Textual Scrolling).
This function returns the window that was selected just before the
minibuffer window was selected. If the selected window is not a
minibuffer window, it returns nil
.
This function is like message
(see Displaying Messages in the Echo Area),
but it displays the messages specially when the user types in the
minibuffer, typically because Emacs prompted the user for some input.
When the minibuffer is the current buffer, this function displays the
message specified by string temporarily at the end of the
minibuffer text, and thus avoids hiding the minibuffer text by the
echo-area display of the message. It leaves the message on display
for a few seconds, or until the next input event arrives, whichever
comes first. The variable minibuffer-message-timeout
specifies
the number of seconds to wait in the absence of input. It defaults to
2. If args is non-nil
, the actual message is obtained by
passing string and args through format-message
.
See Formatting Strings.
If called when the minibuffer is not the current buffer, this function
just calls message
, and thus string will be shown in the
echo-area.
This is the major mode used in inactive minibuffers. It uses
keymap minibuffer-inactive-mode-map
. This can be useful
if the minibuffer is in a separate frame. See Minibuffers and Frames.
When you run Emacs, it enters the editor command loop almost immediately. This loop reads key sequences, executes their definitions, and displays the results. In this chapter, we describe how these things are done, and the subroutines that allow Lisp programs to do them.
The first thing the command loop must do is read a key sequence,
which is a sequence of input events that translates into a command.
It does this by calling the function read-key-sequence
. Lisp
programs can also call this function (see Key Sequence Input).
They can also read input at a lower level with read-key
or
read-event
(see Reading One Event), or discard pending
input with discard-input
(see Miscellaneous Event Input Features).
The key sequence is translated into a command through the currently
active keymaps. See Key Lookup, for information on how this is done.
The result should be a keyboard macro or an interactively callable
function. If the key is M-x, then it reads the name of another
command, which it then calls. This is done by the command
execute-extended-command
(see Interactive Call).
Prior to executing the command, Emacs runs undo-boundary
to
create an undo boundary. See Maintaining Undo Lists.
To execute a command, Emacs first reads its arguments by calling
command-execute
(see Interactive Call). For commands
written in Lisp, the interactive
specification says how to read
the arguments. This may use the prefix argument (see Prefix Command Arguments) or may read with prompting in the minibuffer
(see Minibuffers). For example, the command find-file
has
an interactive
specification which says to read a file name
using the minibuffer. The function body of find-file
does not
use the minibuffer, so if you call find-file
as a function from
Lisp code, you must supply the file name string as an ordinary Lisp
function argument.
If the command is a keyboard macro (i.e., a string or vector),
Emacs executes it using execute-kbd-macro
(see Keyboard Macros).
This normal hook is run by the editor command loop before it executes
each command. At that time, this-command
contains the command
that is about to run, and last-command
describes the previous
command. See Information from the Command Loop.
This normal hook is run by the editor command loop after it executes
each command (including commands terminated prematurely by quitting or
by errors). At that time, this-command
refers to the command
that just ran, and last-command
refers to the command before
that.
This hook is also run when Emacs first enters the command loop (at
which point this-command
and last-command
are both
nil
).
Quitting is suppressed while running pre-command-hook
and
post-command-hook
. If an error happens while executing one of
these hooks, it does not terminate execution of the hook; instead
the error is silenced and the function in which the error occurred
is removed from the hook.
A request coming into the Emacs server (see Emacs Server in The GNU Emacs Manual) runs these two hooks just as a keyboard command does.
Note that, when the buffer text includes very long lines, these two
hooks are called as if they were in a with-restriction
form
(see Narrowing), with a
long-line-optimizations-in-command-hooks
label and with the
buffer narrowed to a portion around point.
The special form interactive
turns a Lisp function into a
command. The interactive
form must be located at top-level in
the function body, usually as the first form in the body; this applies
to both lambda expressions (see Lambda Expressions) and
defun
forms (see Defining Functions). This form does
nothing during the actual execution of the function; its presence
serves as a flag, telling the Emacs command loop that the function can
be called interactively. The argument of the interactive
form
specifies how the arguments for an interactive call should be read.
Alternatively, an interactive
form may be specified in a
function symbol’s interactive-form
property. A non-nil
value for this property takes precedence over any interactive
form in the function body itself. This feature is seldom used.
Sometimes, a function is only intended to be called interactively,
never directly from Lisp. In that case, give the function a
non-nil
interactive-only
property, either directly
or via declare
(see The declare
Form). This causes the
byte compiler to warn if the command is called from Lisp. The output
of describe-function
will include similar information.
The value of the property can be: a string, which the byte-compiler
will use directly in its warning (it should end with a period, and not
start with a capital, e.g., "use (system-name) instead."
); t
; any
other symbol, which should be an alternative function to use in Lisp
code.
Generic functions (see Generic Functions) cannot be turned into
commands by adding the interactive
form to them.
interactive
interactive
interactive
interactive
¶This section describes how to write the interactive
form that
makes a Lisp function an interactively-callable command, and how to
examine a command’s interactive
form.
This special form declares that a function is a command, and that it may therefore be called interactively (via M-x or by entering a key sequence bound to it). The argument arg-descriptor declares how to compute the arguments to the command when the command is called interactively.
A command may be called from Lisp programs like any other function, but then the caller supplies the arguments and arg-descriptor has no effect.
The interactive
form must be located at top-level in the
function body, or in the function symbol’s interactive-form
property (see Symbol Properties). It has its effect because the
command loop looks for it before calling the function
(see Interactive Call). Once the function is called, all its body
forms are executed; at this time, if the interactive
form
occurs within the body, the form simply returns nil
without
even evaluating its argument.
The modes list allows specifying which modes the command is meant to be used in. See Specifying Modes For Commands for more details about the effect of specifying modes, and when to use it.
By convention, you should put the interactive
form in the
function body, as the first top-level form. If there is an
interactive
form in both the interactive-form
symbol
property and the function body, the former takes precedence. The
interactive-form
symbol property can be used to add an
interactive form to an existing function, or change how its arguments
are processed interactively, without redefining the function.
There are three possibilities for the argument arg-descriptor:
nil
; then the command is called with no
arguments. This leads quickly to an error if the command requires one
or more arguments.
interactive
) optionally followed by a prompt (which
some code characters use and some ignore). Here is an example:
(interactive "P\nbFrobnicate buffer: ")
The code letter ‘P’ sets the command’s first argument to the raw command prefix (see Prefix Command Arguments). ‘bFrobnicate buffer: ’ prompts the user with ‘Frobnicate buffer: ’ to enter the name of an existing buffer, which becomes the second and final argument.
The prompt string can use ‘%’ to include previous argument values
(starting with the first argument) in the prompt. This is done using
format-message
(see Formatting Strings). For example, here is how
you could read the name of an existing buffer followed by a new name to
give to that buffer:
(interactive "bBuffer to rename: \nsRename buffer %s to: ")
If ‘*’ appears at the beginning of the string, then an error is signaled if the buffer is read-only.
If ‘@’ appears at the beginning of the string, and if the key sequence used to invoke the command includes any mouse events, then the window associated with the first of those events is selected before the command is run.
If ‘^’ appears at the beginning of the string, and if the command
was invoked through shift-translation, set the mark and activate
the region temporarily, or extend an already active region, before the
command is run. If the command was invoked without shift-translation,
and the region is temporarily active, deactivate the region before the
command is run. Shift-translation is controlled on the user level by
shift-select-mode
; see Shift Selection in The GNU
Emacs Manual.
You can use ‘*’, ‘@’, and ^
together; the order does
not matter. Actual reading of arguments is controlled by the rest of
the prompt string (starting with the first character that is not
‘*’, ‘@’, or ‘^’).
Providing point or the mark as an argument value is also common, but if you do this and read input (whether using the minibuffer or not), be sure to get the integer values of point or the mark after reading. The current buffer may be receiving subprocess output; if subprocess output arrives while the command is waiting for input, it could relocate point and the mark.
Here’s an example of what not to do:
(interactive (list (region-beginning) (region-end) (read-string "Foo: " nil 'my-history)))
Here’s how to avoid the problem, by examining point and the mark after reading the keyboard input:
(interactive (let ((string (read-string "Foo: " nil 'my-history))) (list (region-beginning) (region-end) string)))
Warning: the argument values should not include any data
types that can’t be printed and then read. Some facilities save
command-history
in a file to be read in the subsequent
sessions; if a command’s arguments contain a data type that prints
using ‘#<…>’ syntax, those facilities won’t work.
There are, however, a few exceptions: it is ok to use a limited set of
expressions such as (point)
, (mark)
,
(region-beginning)
, and (region-end)
, because Emacs
recognizes them specially and puts the expression (rather than its
value) into the command history. To see whether the expression you
wrote is one of these exceptions, run the command, then examine
(car command-history)
.
This function returns the interactive
form of function.
If function is an interactively callable function
(see Interactive Call), the value is the command’s
interactive
form (interactive spec)
, which
specifies how to compute its arguments. Otherwise, the value is
nil
. If function is a symbol, its function definition is
used.
When called on an OClosure, the work is delegated to the generic
function oclosure-interactive-form
.
Just like interactive-form
, this function takes a command and
returns its interactive form. The difference is that it is a generic
function and it is only called when function is an OClosure
(see Open Closures). The purpose is to make it possible for some
OClosure types to compute their interactive forms dynamically instead
of carrying it in one of their slots.
This is used for example for kmacro
functions in order to
reduce their memory size, since they all share the same interactive
form. It is also used for advice
functions, where the
interactive form is computed from the interactive forms of its
components, so as to make this computation more lazily and to
correctly adjust the interactive form when one of its component’s
is redefined.
interactive
¶The code character descriptions below contain a number of key words, defined here as follows:
Provide completion. TAB, SPC, and RET perform name
completion because the argument is read using completing-read
(see Completion). ? displays a list of possible completions.
Require the name of an existing object. An invalid name is not accepted; the commands to exit the minibuffer do not exit if the current input is not valid.
A default value of some sort is used if the user enters no text in the minibuffer. The default depends on the code character.
This code letter computes an argument without reading any input. Therefore, it does not use a prompt string, and any prompt string you supply is ignored.
Even though the code letter doesn’t use a prompt string, you must follow it with a newline if it is not the last code character in the string.
A prompt immediately follows the code character. The prompt ends either with the end of the string or with a newline.
This code character is meaningful only at the beginning of the interactive string, and it does not look for a prompt or a newline. It is a single, isolated character.
Here are the code character descriptions for use with interactive
:
Signal an error if the current buffer is read-only. Special.
Select the window mentioned in the first mouse event in the key sequence that invoked this command. Special.
If the command was invoked through shift-translation, set the mark and activate the region temporarily, or extend an already active region, before the command is run. If the command was invoked without shift-translation, and the region is temporarily active, deactivate the region before the command is run. Special.
A function name (i.e., a symbol satisfying fboundp
). Existing,
Completion, Prompt.
The name of an existing buffer. By default, uses the name of the current buffer (see Buffers). Existing, Completion, Default, Prompt.
A buffer name. The buffer need not exist. By default, uses the name of a recently used buffer other than the current buffer. Completion, Default, Prompt.
A character. The cursor does not move into the echo area. Prompt.
A command name (i.e., a symbol satisfying commandp
). Existing,
Completion, Prompt.
The position of point, as an integer (see Point). No I/O.
A directory. The default is the current default directory of the
current buffer, default-directory
(see Functions that Expand Filenames).
Existing, Completion, Default, Prompt.
The first or next non-keyboard event in the key sequence that invoked the command. More precisely, ‘e’ gets events that are lists, so you can look at the data in the lists. See Input Events. No I/O.
You use ‘e’ for mouse events and for special system events (see Miscellaneous System Events). The event list that the command receives depends on the event. See Input Events, which describes the forms of the list for each event in the corresponding subsections.
You can use ‘e’ more than once in a single command’s interactive specification. If the key sequence that invoked the command has n events that are lists, the nth ‘e’ provides the nth such event. Events that are not lists, such as function keys and ASCII characters, do not count where ‘e’ is concerned.
A file name of an existing file (see File Names). See Reading File Names, for details about default values. Existing, Completion, Default, Prompt.
A file name. The file need not exist. Completion, Default, Prompt.
A file name. The file need not exist. If the user enters just a directory name, then the value is just that directory name, with no file name within the directory added. Completion, Default, Prompt.
An irrelevant argument. This code always supplies nil
as
the argument’s value. No I/O.
A key sequence (see Key Sequences). This keeps reading events until a command (or undefined command) is found in the current key maps. The key sequence argument is represented as a string or vector. The cursor does not move into the echo area. Prompt.
If ‘k’ reads a key sequence that ends with a down-event, it also reads and discards the following up-event. You can get access to that up-event with the ‘U’ code character.
This kind of input is used by commands such as describe-key
and
keymap-global-set
.
A key sequence on a form that can be used as input to functions like
keymap-set
. This works like ‘k’, except that it
suppresses, for the last input event in the key sequence, the
conversions that are normally used (when necessary) to convert an
undefined key into a defined one (see Key Sequence Input), so this
form is usually used when prompting for a new key sequence that is to
be bound to a command.
The position of the mark, as an integer. No I/O.
Arbitrary text, read in the minibuffer using the current buffer’s input method, and returned as a string (see Input Methods in The GNU Emacs Manual). Prompt.
A number, read with the minibuffer. If the input is not a number, the user has to try again. ‘n’ never uses the prefix argument. Prompt.
The numeric prefix argument; but if there is no prefix argument, read a number as with n. The value is always a number. See Prefix Command Arguments. Prompt.
The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this ‘p’ is lower case.) No I/O.
The raw prefix argument. (Note that this ‘P’ is upper case.) No I/O.
Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This is
the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments rather than
one. This will signal an error if the mark is not set in the buffer
which is current when the command is invoked. If Transient Mark mode
is turned on (see The Mark) — as it is by default — and user
option mark-even-if-inactive
is nil
, Emacs will signal
an error even if the mark is set, but is inactive. No I/O.
Arbitrary text, read in the minibuffer and returned as a string (see Reading Text Strings with the Minibuffer). Terminate the input with either C-j or RET. (C-q may be used to include either of these characters in the input.) Prompt.
An interned symbol whose name is read in the minibuffer. Terminate the input with either C-j or RET. Other characters that normally terminate a symbol (e.g., whitespace, parentheses and brackets) do not do so here. Prompt.
A key sequence or nil
. Can be used after a ‘k’ or
‘K’ argument to get the up-event that was discarded (if any)
after ‘k’ or ‘K’ read a down-event. If no up-event has been
discarded, ‘U’ provides nil
as the argument. No I/O.
A variable declared to be a user option (i.e., satisfying the
predicate custom-variable-p
). This reads the variable using
read-variable
. See Definition of read-variable. Existing,
Completion, Prompt.
A Lisp object, specified with its read syntax, terminated with a C-j or RET. The object is not evaluated. See Reading Lisp Objects with the Minibuffer. Prompt.
A Lisp form’s value. ‘X’ reads as ‘x’ does, then evaluates the form so that its value becomes the argument for the command. Prompt.
A coding system name (a symbol). If the user enters null input, the
argument value is nil
. See Coding Systems. Completion,
Existing, Prompt.
A coding system name (a symbol)—but only if this command has a prefix
argument. With no prefix argument, ‘Z’ provides nil
as the
argument value. Completion, Existing, Prompt.
interactive
¶Here are some examples of interactive
:
(defun foo1 () ; foo1
takes no arguments,
(interactive) ; just moves forward two words.
(forward-word 2))
⇒ foo1
(defun foo2 (n) ;foo2
takes one argument, (interactive "^p") ; which is the numeric prefix. ; undershift-select-mode
, ; will activate or extend region. (forward-word (* 2 n))) ⇒ foo2
(defun foo3 (n) ; foo3
takes one argument,
(interactive "nCount:") ; which is read with the Minibuffer.
(forward-word (* 2 n)))
⇒ foo3
(defun three-b (b1 b2 b3) "Select three existing buffers. Put them into three windows, selecting the last one."
(interactive "bBuffer1:\nbBuffer2:\nbBuffer3:") (delete-other-windows) (split-window (selected-window) 8) (switch-to-buffer b1) (other-window 1) (split-window (selected-window) 8) (switch-to-buffer b2) (other-window 1) (switch-to-buffer b3)) ⇒ three-b
(three-b "*scratch*" "declarations.texi" "*mail*") ⇒ nil
Many commands in Emacs are general, and not tied to any specific mode. For instance, M-x kill-region can be used in pretty much any mode that has editable text, and commands that display information (like M-x list-buffers) can be used in pretty much any context.
Many other commands, however, are specifically tied to a mode, and
make no sense outside of that context. For instance, M-x
dired-diff
will just signal an error if used outside of a Dired
buffer.
Emacs therefore has a mechanism for specifying what mode (or modes) a command “belongs” to:
(defun dired-diff (...) ... (interactive "p" dired-mode) ...)
This will mark the command as applicable to dired-mode
only (or
any modes that are derived from dired-mode
). Any number of
modes can be added to the interactive
form.
Specifying modes affects command completion in M-S-x
(execute-extended-command-for-buffer
, see Interactive Call). It may also affect completion in M-x, depending on the
value of read-extended-command-predicate
.
For instance, when using the
command-completion-default-include-p
predicate as the value of
read-extended-command-predicate
, M-x won’t list commands
that have been marked as being applicable to a specific mode (unless
you are in a buffer that uses that mode, of course). This goes for
both major and minor modes. (By contrast, M-S-x always omits
inapplicable commands from the completion candidates.)
By default, read-extended-command-predicate
is nil
, and
completion in M-x lists all the commands that match what the
user has typed, whether those commands are or aren’t marked as
applicable to the current buffer’s mode.
Marking commands to be applicable to a mode will also make C-h m list these commands (if they aren’t bound to any keys).
If using this extended interactive
form isn’t convenient
(because the code is supposed to work in older versions of Emacs that
don’t support the extended interactive
form), the following
equivalent declaration (see The declare
Form) can be used instead:
(declare (modes dired-mode))
Which commands to tag with modes is to some degree a matter of taste, but commands that clearly do not work outside of the mode should be tagged. This includes commands that will signal an error if called from somewhere else, but also commands that are destructive when called from an unexpected mode. (This usually includes most of the commands that are written for special (i.e., non-editing) modes.)
Some commands may be harmless, and “work” when called from other
modes, but should still be tagged with a mode if they don’t actually
make much sense to use elsewhere. For instance, many special modes
have commands to exit the buffer bound to q, and may not do
anything but issue a message like "Goodbye from this mode" and then
call kill-buffer
. This command will “work” from any mode,
but it is highly unlikely that anybody would actually want to use the
command outside the context of this special mode.
Many modes have a set of different commands that start the mode in
different ways (e.g., eww-open-in-new-buffer
and
eww-open-file
). Commands like that should never be tagged as
mode-specific, as they can be issued by the user from pretty much any
context.
Sometimes it is useful to define a command that serves as a “generic
dispatcher” capable of invoking one of a set of commands according to
the user’s needs. For example, imagine that you want to define a
command named ‘open’ that can “open” and display several
different types of objects. Or you could have a command named
‘mua’ (which stands for Mail User Agent) that can read and send
email using one of several email backends, such as Rmail, Gnus, or
MH-E. The macro define-alternatives
can be used to define such
generic commands. A generic command is an interactive function
whose implementation can be selected from several alternatives, as a
matter of user preference.
This macro defines the new generic command, which can have several alternative implementations. The argument command should be an unquoted symbol.
When invoked, the macro creates an interactive Lisp closure
(see Closures). When the user runs M-x command RET for the first time, Emacs asks to select one of the
alternative implementations of command, offering completion for
the names of these alternatives. These names come from the user
option whose name is command-alternatives
, which the
macro creates (if it didn’t exist before). To be useful, this
variable’s value should be an alist whose elements have the form
(alt-name . alt-func)
, where alt-name is
the name of the alternative and alt-func is the interactive
function to be called if this alternative is selected. When the user
selects an alternative, Emacs remembers the selection, and will
thereafter automatically call that selected alternative without
prompting when the user invokes M-x command again. To
choose a different alternative, type C-u M-x command RET–then Emacs will again prompt for one of the alternatives,
and the selection will override the previous one.
The variable command-alternatives
can be created before
calling define-alternatives
, with the appropriate values;
otherwise the macro creates the variable with a nil
value, and
it should then be populated with the associations describing the
alternatives. Packages that wish to provide their own implementation
of an existing generic command can use autoload
cookies
(see Autoload) to add to the alist, for example:
;;;###autoload (push '("My name" . my-foo-symbol) foo-alternatives
If the optional argument customizations is non-nil
, it
should consist of alternating defcustom
keywords (typically
:group
and :version
) and values to add to the definition
of the defcustom
command-alternatives
.
Here is an example of a simple generic dispatcher command named
open
with 3 alternative implementations:
(define-alternatives open :group 'files :version "42.1")
(setq open-alternatives '(("file" . find-file) ("directory" . dired) ("hexl" . hexl-find-file)))
After the command loop has translated a key sequence into a command,
it invokes that command using the function command-execute
. If
the command is a function, command-execute
calls
call-interactively
, which reads the arguments and calls the
command. You can also call these functions yourself.
Note that the term “command”, in this context, refers to an interactively callable function (or function-like object), or a keyboard macro. It does not refer to the key sequence used to invoke a command (see Keymaps).
This function returns t
if object is a command.
Otherwise, it returns nil
.
Commands include strings and vectors (which are treated as keyboard
macros), lambda expressions that contain a top-level
interactive
form (see Using interactive
), byte-code
function objects made from such lambda expressions, autoload objects
that are declared as interactive (non-nil
fourth argument to
autoload
), and some primitive functions. Also, a symbol is
considered a command if it has a non-nil
interactive-form
property, or if its function definition
satisfies commandp
.
If for-call-interactively is non-nil
, then
commandp
returns t
only for objects that
call-interactively
could call—thus, not for keyboard macros.
See documentation
in Access to Documentation Strings, for a
realistic example of using commandp
.
This function calls the interactively callable function command, providing arguments according to its interactive calling specifications. It returns whatever command returns.
If, for instance, you have a function with the following signature:
(defun foo (begin end) (interactive "r") ...)
then saying
(call-interactively 'foo)
will call foo
with the region (point
and mark
) as
the arguments.
An error is signaled if command is not a function or if it
cannot be called interactively (i.e., is not a command). Note that
keyboard macros (strings and vectors) are not accepted, even though
they are considered commands, because they are not functions. If
command is a symbol, then call-interactively
uses its
function definition.
If record-flag is non-nil
, then this command and its
arguments are unconditionally added to the list command-history
.
Otherwise, the command is added only if it uses the minibuffer to read
an argument. See Command History.
The argument keys, if given, should be a vector which specifies
the sequence of events to supply if the command inquires which events
were used to invoke it. If keys is omitted or nil
, the
default is the return value of this-command-keys-vector
.
See Definition of this-command-keys-vector.
This function works like funcall
(see Calling Functions),
but it makes the call look like an interactive invocation: a call to
called-interactively-p
inside function will return
t
. If function is not a command, it is called without
signaling an error.
This function executes command. The argument command must
satisfy the commandp
predicate; i.e., it must be an interactively
callable function or a keyboard macro.
A string or vector as command is executed with
execute-kbd-macro
. A function is passed to
call-interactively
(see above), along with the
record-flag and keys arguments.
If command is a symbol, its function definition is used in its
place. A symbol with an autoload
definition counts as a
command if it was declared to stand for an interactively callable
function. Such a definition is handled by loading the specified
library and then rechecking the definition of the symbol.
The argument special, if given, means to ignore the prefix argument and not clear it. This is used for executing special events (see Special Events).
This function reads a command name from the minibuffer using
completing-read
(see Completion). Then it uses
command-execute
to call the specified command. Whatever that
command returns becomes the value of execute-extended-command
.
If the command asks for a prefix argument, it receives the value
prefix-argument. If execute-extended-command
is called
interactively, the current raw prefix argument is used for
prefix-argument, and thus passed on to whatever command is run.
execute-extended-command
is the normal definition of M-x,
so it uses the string ‘M-x ’ as a prompt. (It would be better
to take the prompt from the events used to invoke
execute-extended-command
, but that is painful to implement.) A
description of the value of the prefix argument, if any, also becomes
part of the prompt.
(execute-extended-command 3) ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- 3 M-x forward-word RET ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- ⇒ t
This command heeds the read-extended-command-predicate
variable, which can filter out commands that are not applicable to the
current major mode (or enabled minor modes). By default, the value of
this variable is nil
, and no commands are filtered out.
However, customizing it to invoke the function
command-completion-default-include-p
will perform
mode-dependent filtering. read-extended-command-predicate
can
be any predicate function; it will be called with two parameters: the
command’s symbol and the current buffer. If should return
non-nil
if the command is to be included when completing in
that buffer.
This is like execute-extended-command
, but limits the commands
offered for completion to those commands that are of particular
relevance to the current major mode (and enabled minor modes). This
includes commands that are tagged with the modes (see Using interactive
), and also commands that are bound to locally active
keymaps. This command is the normal definition of M-S-x
(that’s “meta shift x”).
Both these commands prompt for a command name, but with different completion rules. You can toggle between these two modes by using the M-S-x command while being prompted.
Sometimes a command should display additional visual feedback (such
as an informative message in the echo area) for interactive calls
only. There are three ways to do this. The recommended way to test
whether the function was called using call-interactively
is to
give it an optional argument print-message
and use the
interactive
spec to make it non-nil
in interactive
calls. Here’s an example:
(defun foo (&optional print-message) (interactive "p") (when print-message (message "foo")))
We use "p"
because the numeric prefix argument is never
nil
. Defined in this way, the function does display the
message when called from a keyboard macro.
The above method with the additional argument is usually best,
because it allows callers to say “treat this call as interactive”.
But you can also do the job by testing called-interactively-p
.
This function returns t
when the calling function was called
using call-interactively
.
The argument kind should be either the symbol interactive
or the symbol any
. If it is interactive
, then
called-interactively-p
returns t
only if the call was
made directly by the user—e.g., if the user typed a key sequence
bound to the calling function, but not if the user ran a
keyboard macro that called the function (see Keyboard Macros). If
kind is any
, called-interactively-p
returns
t
for any kind of interactive call, including keyboard macros.
If in doubt, use any
; the only known proper use of
interactive
is if you need to decide whether to display a
helpful message while a function is running.
A function is never considered to be called interactively if it was
called via Lisp evaluation (or with apply
or funcall
).
Here is an example of using called-interactively-p
:
(defun foo () (interactive) (when (called-interactively-p 'any) (message "Interactive!") 'foo-called-interactively))
;; Type M-x foo.
-| Interactive!
(foo) ⇒ nil
Here is another example that contrasts direct and indirect calls to
called-interactively-p
.
(defun bar () (interactive) (message "%s" (list (foo) (called-interactively-p 'any))))
;; Type M-x bar.
-| (nil t)
The editor command loop sets several Lisp variables to keep status
records for itself and for commands that are run. With the exception of
this-command
and last-command
it’s generally a bad idea to
change any of these variables in a Lisp program.
This variable records the name of the previous command executed by the command loop (the one before the current command). Normally the value is a symbol with a function definition, but this is not guaranteed.
The value is copied from this-command
when a command returns to
the command loop, except when the command has specified a prefix
argument for the following command.
This variable is always local to the current terminal and cannot be buffer-local. See Multiple Terminals.
This variable is set up by Emacs just like last-command
,
but never altered by Lisp programs.
This variable stores the most recently executed command that was not
part of an input event. This is the command repeat
will try to
repeat, See Repeating in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This variable records the name of the command now being executed by
the editor command loop. Like last-command
, it is normally a symbol
with a function definition.
The command loop sets this variable just before running a command, and
copies its value into last-command
when the command finishes
(unless the command specified a prefix argument for the following
command).
Some commands set this variable during their execution, as a flag for
whatever command runs next. In particular, the functions for killing text
set this-command
to kill-region
so that any kill commands
immediately following will know to append the killed text to the
previous kill.
If you do not want a particular command to be recognized as the previous
command in the case where it got an error, you must code that command to
prevent this. One way is to set this-command
to t
at the
beginning of the command, and set this-command
back to its proper
value at the end, like this:
(defun foo (args...)
(interactive ...)
(let ((old-this-command this-command))
(setq this-command t)
...do the work...
(setq this-command old-this-command)))
We do not bind this-command
with let
because that would
restore the old value in case of error—a feature of let
which
in this case does precisely what we want to avoid.
This has the same value as this-command
except when command
remapping occurs (see Remapping Commands). In that case,
this-command
gives the command actually run (the result of
remapping), and this-original-command
gives the command that
was specified to run but remapped into another command.
This has the same value as this-command
, but is bound
recursively when entering a minibuffer. This variable can be used
from minibuffer hooks and the like to determine what command opened
the current minibuffer session.
This function returns a string or vector containing the key sequence
that invoked the present command. Any events read by the command
using read-event
without a timeout get tacked on to the end.
However, if the command has called read-key-sequence
, it
returns the last read key sequence. See Key Sequence Input. The
value is a string if all events in the sequence were characters that
fit in a string. See Input Events.
(this-command-keys)
;; Now use C-u C-x C-e to evaluate that.
⇒ "^X^E"
Like this-command-keys
, except that it always returns the events
in a vector, so you don’t need to deal with the complexities of storing
input events in a string (see Putting Keyboard Events in Strings).
This function empties out the table of events for
this-command-keys
to return. Unless keep-record is
non-nil
, it also empties the records that the function
recent-keys
(see Recording Input) will subsequently return.
This is useful after reading a password, to prevent the password from
echoing inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
This variable holds the last input event read as part of a key sequence, not counting events resulting from mouse menus.
One use of this variable is for telling x-popup-menu
where to pop
up a menu. It is also used internally by y-or-n-p
(see Yes-or-No Queries).
This variable is set to the last input event that was read by the
command loop as part of a command. The principal use of this variable
is in self-insert-command
, which uses it to decide which
character to insert, and in post-self-insert-hook
(see User-Level Insertion Commands), which uses it to access the
character that was just inserted.
last-command-event
;; Now use C-u C-x C-e to evaluate that.
⇒ 5
The value is 5 because that is the ASCII code for C-e.
This variable records which frame the last input event was directed to. Usually this is the frame that was selected when the event was generated, but if that frame has redirected input focus to another frame, the value is the frame to which the event was redirected. See Input Focus.
If the last event came from a keyboard macro, the value is macro
.
Input events must come from somewhere; sometimes, that is a keyboard macro, a signal, or ‘unread-command-events’, but it is usually a physical input device connected to a computer that is controlled by the user. Those devices are referred to as input devices, and Emacs associates each input event with the input device from which it originated. They are identified by a name that is unique to each input device.
The ability to determine the precise input device used depends on the details of each system. When that information is unavailable, Emacs reports keyboard events as originating from the ‘"Virtual core keyboard"’, and other events as originating from the ‘"Virtual core pointer"’. (These values are used on every platform because the X server reports them when detailed device information is not known.)
This variable records the name of the input device from which the last
input event read was generated. It is nil
if no such device
exists, i.e., the last input event was read from
unread-command-events
, or it came from a keyboard macro.
When the X Input Extension is being used on X Windows, the device name is a string that is unique to each physical keyboard, pointing device and touchscreen attached to the X server. Otherwise, it is either the string ‘"Virtual core pointer"’ or ‘"Virtual core keyboard"’, depending on whether the event was generated by a pointing device (such as a mouse) or a keyboard.
There are various different types of devices, which can be determined from their names. This function can be used to determined the correct type of the device name for an event originating from frame.
The return value is one of the following symbols (“device classes”):
core-keyboard
The core keyboard; this is means the device is a keyboard-like device, but no other characteristics are unknown.
core-pointer
The core pointer; this means the device is a pointing device, but no other characteristics are known.
mouse
A computer mouse.
trackpoint
A trackpoint or joystick (or other similar control.)
eraser
The other end of a stylus on a graphics tablet, or a standalone eraser.
pen
The pointed end of a pen on a graphics tablet, a stylus, or some other similar device.
puck
A device that looks like a computer mouse, but reports absolute coordinates relative to some other surface.
power-button
A power button or volume button (or other similar control.)
keyboard
A computer keyboard.
touchscreen
A computer touchpad.
pad
A collection of sensitive buttons, rings, and strips commonly found around a drawing tablet.
touchpad
An indirect touch device such as a touchpad.
piano
A musical instrument such as an electronic keyboard.
test
A device used by the XTEST extension to report input.
Emacs cannot display the cursor when point is in the middle of a
sequence of text that has the display
or composition
property, or is invisible. Therefore, after a command finishes and
returns to the command loop, if point is within such a sequence, the
command loop normally moves point to the edge of the sequence, making this
sequence effectively intangible.
A command can inhibit this feature by setting the variable
disable-point-adjustment
:
If this variable is non-nil
when a command returns to the
command loop, then the command loop does not check for those text
properties, and does not move point out of sequences that have them.
The command loop sets this variable to nil
before each command,
so if a command sets it, the effect applies only to that command.
If you set this variable to a non-nil
value, the feature of
moving point out of these sequences is completely turned off.
The Emacs command loop reads a sequence of input events that represent keyboard or mouse activity, or system events sent to Emacs. The events for keyboard activity are characters or symbols; other events are always lists. This section describes the representation and meaning of input events in detail.
This function returns non-nil
if object is an input event
or event type.
Note that any non-nil
symbol might be used as an event or an
event type; eventp
cannot distinguish whether a symbol is
intended by Lisp code to be used as an event.
There are two kinds of input you can get from the keyboard: ordinary keys, and function keys. Ordinary keys correspond to (possibly modified) characters; the events they generate are represented in Lisp as characters. The event type of a character event is the character itself (an integer), which might have some modifier bits set; see Classifying Events.
An input character event consists of a basic code between 0 and 524287, plus any or all of these modifier bits:
The 2**27 bit in the character code indicates a character typed with the meta key held down.
The 2**26 bit in the character code indicates a non-ASCII control character.
ASCII control characters such as C-a have special basic codes of their own, so Emacs needs no special bit to indicate them. Thus, the code for C-a is just 1.
But if you type a control combination not in ASCII, such as % with the control key, the numeric value you get is the code for % plus 2**26 (assuming the terminal supports non-ASCII control characters), i.e. with the 27th bit set.
The 2**25 bit (the 26th bit) in the character event code indicates an ASCII control character typed with the shift key held down.
For letters, the basic code itself indicates upper versus lower case; for digits and punctuation, the shift key selects an entirely different character with a different basic code. In order to keep within the ASCII character set whenever possible, Emacs avoids using the 2**25 bit for those character events.
However, ASCII provides no way to distinguish C-A from C-a, so Emacs uses the 2**25 bit in C-A and not in C-a.
The 2**24 bit in the character event code indicates a character typed with the hyper key held down.
The 2**23 bit in the character event code indicates a character typed with the super key held down.
The 2**22 bit in the character event code indicates a character typed with the alt key held down. (The key labeled Alt on most keyboards is actually treated as the meta key, not this.)
It is best to avoid mentioning specific bit numbers in your program.
To test the modifier bits of a character, use the function
event-modifiers
(see Classifying Events). When making key
bindings with keymap-set
, you specify these events using
strings like ‘C-H-x’ instead (for “control hyper x”)
(see Changing Key Bindings).
Most keyboards also have function keys—keys that have names or
symbols that are not characters. Function keys are represented in
Emacs Lisp as symbols; the symbol’s name is the function key’s label,
in lower case. For example, pressing a key labeled F1 generates
an input event represented by the symbol f1
.
The event type of a function key event is the event symbol itself. See Classifying Events.
Here are a few special cases in the symbol-naming convention for function keys:
backspace
, tab
, newline
, return
, delete
These keys correspond to common ASCII control characters that have special keys on most keyboards.
In ASCII, C-i and TAB are the same character. If the
terminal can distinguish between them, Emacs conveys the distinction to
Lisp programs by representing the former as the integer 9, and the
latter as the symbol tab
.
Most of the time, it’s not useful to distinguish the two. So normally
local-function-key-map
(see Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events) is set up
to map tab
into 9. Thus, a key binding for character code 9
(the character C-i) also applies to tab
. Likewise for
the other symbols in this group. The function read-char
likewise converts these events into characters.
In ASCII, BS is really C-h. But backspace
converts into the character code 127 (DEL), not into code 8
(BS). This is what most users prefer.
left
, up
, right
, down
Cursor arrow keys
kp-add
, kp-decimal
, kp-divide
, …Keypad keys (to the right of the regular keyboard).
kp-0
, kp-1
, …Keypad keys with digits.
kp-f1
, kp-f2
, kp-f3
, kp-f4
Keypad PF keys.
kp-home
, kp-left
, kp-up
, kp-right
, kp-down
Keypad arrow keys. Emacs normally translates these into the
corresponding non-keypad keys home
, left
, …
kp-prior
, kp-next
, kp-end
, kp-begin
, kp-insert
, kp-delete
Additional keypad duplicates of keys ordinarily found elsewhere. Emacs normally translates these into the like-named non-keypad keys.
You can use the modifier keys ALT, CTRL, HYPER, META, SHIFT, and SUPER with function keys. The way to represent them is with prefixes in the symbol name:
The alt modifier.
The control modifier.
The hyper modifier.
The meta modifier.
The shift modifier.
The super modifier.
Thus, the symbol for the key F3 with META held down is
M-f3
. When you use more than one prefix, we recommend you
write them in alphabetical order; but the order does not matter in
arguments to the key-binding lookup and modification functions.
Emacs supports four kinds of mouse events: click events, drag events, button-down events, and motion events. All mouse events are represented as lists. The CAR of the list is the event type; this says which mouse button was involved, and which modifier keys were used with it. The event type can also distinguish double or triple button presses (see Repeat Events). The rest of the list elements give position and time information.
For key lookup, only the event type matters: two events of the same type
necessarily run the same command. The command can access the full
values of these events using the ‘e’ interactive code.
See Code Characters for interactive
.
A key sequence that starts with a mouse event is read using the keymaps of the buffer in the window that the mouse was in, not the current buffer. This does not imply that clicking in a window selects that window or its buffer—that is entirely under the control of the command binding of the key sequence.
When the user presses a mouse button and releases it at the same location, that generates a click event. Depending on how your window-system reports mouse-wheel events, turning the mouse wheel can generate either a mouse click or a mouse-wheel event. All mouse event share the same format:
(event-type position click-count)
This is a symbol that indicates which mouse button was used. It is
one of the symbols mouse-1
, mouse-2
, …, where the
buttons are numbered left to right. For mouse-wheel event, it can be
wheel-up
or wheel-down
.
You can also use prefixes ‘A-’, ‘C-’, ‘H-’, ‘M-’, ‘S-’ and ‘s-’ for modifiers alt, control, hyper, meta, shift and super, just as you would with function keys.
This symbol also serves as the event type of the event. Key bindings
describe events by their types; thus, if there is a key binding for
mouse-1
, that binding would apply to all events whose
event-type is mouse-1
.
This is a mouse position list specifying where the mouse event occurred; see below for details.
This is the number of rapid repeated presses so far of the same mouse button or the number of repeated turns of the wheel. See Repeat Events.
To access the contents of a mouse position list in the position slot of a mouse event, you should typically use the functions documented in Accessing Mouse Events.
The explicit format of the list depends on where the event occurred. For clicks in the text area, mode line, header line, tab line, or in the fringe or marginal areas, the mouse position list has the form
(window pos-or-area (x . y) timestamp object text-pos (col . row) image (dx . dy) (width . height))
The meanings of these list elements are as follows:
The window in which the mouse event occurred.
The buffer position of the character clicked on in the text area; or,
if the event was outside the text area, the window area where it
occurred. It is one of the symbols mode-line
,
header-line
, tab-line
, vertical-line
,
left-margin
, right-margin
, left-fringe
, or
right-fringe
.
In one special case, pos-or-area is a list containing a symbol (one of the symbols listed above) instead of just the symbol. This happens after the imaginary prefix keys for the event are registered by Emacs. See Key Sequence Input.
The relative pixel coordinates of the event. For events in the text
area of a window, the coordinate origin (0 . 0)
is taken to be
the top left corner of the text area. See Window Sizes. For
events in a mode line, header line or tab line, the coordinate origin
is the top left corner of the window itself. For fringes, margins,
and the vertical border, x does not have meaningful data.
For fringes and margins, y is relative to the bottom edge of the
header line. In all cases, the x and y coordinates
increase rightward and downward respectively.
The time at which the event occurred, as an integer number of milliseconds since a system-dependent initial time.
Either nil
, which means the event occurred on buffer text, or a
cons cell of the form (string . string-pos) if there
is a string from a text property or an overlay at the event position.
The string which was clicked on, including any properties.
The position in the string where the click occurred.
For clicks on a marginal area or on a fringe, this is the buffer
position of the first visible character in the corresponding line in
the window. For clicks on the mode line, the header line or the tab
line, this is nil
. For other events, it is the buffer position
closest to the click.
These are the actual column and row coordinate numbers of the glyph under the x, y position. If x lies beyond the last column of actual text on its line, col is reported by adding fictional extra columns that have the default character width. Row 0 is taken to be the header line if the window has one, or Row 1 if the window also has the tab line, or the topmost row of the text area otherwise. Column 0 is taken to be the leftmost column of the text area for clicks on a window text area, or the leftmost mode line or header line column for clicks there. For clicks on fringes or vertical borders, these have no meaningful data. For clicks on margins, col is measured from the left edge of the margin area and row is measured from the top of the margin area.
If there is an image at the click location, this is the image object
as returned by find-image
(see Defining Images); otherwise
this is nil
.
These are the pixel offsets of the click relative to the top left
corner of the object’s glyph that is the nearest one to the
click. The relevant objects can be either a buffer, or a string,
or an image, see above. If object is nil
or a string,
the coordinates are relative to the top left corner of the character
glyph clicked on. Note that the offsets are always zero on text-mode
frames, when object is nil
, since each glyph there is
considered to have exactly 1x1 pixel dimensions.
If the click is on a character, either from buffer text or from overlay or display string, these are the pixel width and height of that character’s glyph; otherwise they are dimensions of object clicked on.
For clicks on a scroll bar, position has this form:
(window area (portion . whole) timestamp part)
The window whose scroll bar was clicked on.
This is the symbol vertical-scroll-bar
.
The number of pixels from the top of the scroll bar to the click
position. On some toolkits, including GTK+, Emacs cannot extract this
data, so the value is always 0
.
The total length, in pixels, of the scroll bar. On some toolkits,
including GTK+, Emacs cannot extract this data, so the value is always
0
.
The time at which the event occurred, in milliseconds. On some
toolkits, including GTK+, Emacs cannot extract this data, so the value
is always 0
.
The part of the scroll bar on which the click occurred. It is one of
the symbols handle
(the scroll bar handle), above-handle
(the area above the handle), below-handle
(the area below the
handle), up
(the up arrow at one end of the scroll bar), or
down
(the down arrow at one end of the scroll bar).
For clicks on the frame’s internal border (see Frame Layout), the frame’s tool bar (see Tool bars) or tab bar, position has this form:
(frame part (X . Y) timestamp)
The frame whose internal border or tool bar or tab bar was clicked on.
The part of the frame which was clicked on. This can be one of the following:
tool-bar
¶The frame has a tool bar, and the event was in the tool-bar area.
tab-bar
¶The frame has a tab bar, and the event was in the tab-bar area.
left-edge
top-edge
right-edge
bottom-edge
The click was on the corresponding border at an offset of at least one canonical character from the border’s nearest corner.
top-left-corner
top-right-corner
bottom-right-corner
bottom-left-corner
The click was on the corresponding corner of the internal border.
nil
The frame does not have an internal border, and the event was not on
the tab bar or the tool bar. This usually happens on text-mode
frames. This can also happen on GUI frames with internal border if
the frame doesn’t have its drag-internal-border
parameter
(see Mouse Dragging Parameters) set to a non-nil
value.
With Emacs, you can have a drag event without even changing your clothes. A drag event happens every time the user presses a mouse button and then moves the mouse to a different character position before releasing the button. Like all mouse events, drag events are represented in Lisp as lists. The lists record both the starting mouse position and the final position, like this:
(event-type (window1 START-POSITION) (window2 END-POSITION))
For a drag event, the name of the symbol event-type contains the
prefix ‘drag-’. For example, dragging the mouse with button 2
held down generates a drag-mouse-2
event. The second and third
elements of the event give the starting and ending position of the
drag, as mouse position lists (see Click Events). You can access
the second element of any mouse event in the same way. However, the
drag event may end outside the boundaries of the frame that was
initially selected. In that case, the third element’s position list
contains that frame in place of a window.
The ‘drag-’ prefix follows the modifier key prefixes such as ‘C-’ and ‘M-’.
If read-key-sequence
receives a drag event that has no key
binding, and the corresponding click event does have a binding, it
changes the drag event into a click event at the drag’s starting
position. This means that you don’t have to distinguish between click
and drag events unless you want to.
Click and drag events happen when the user releases a mouse button. They cannot happen earlier, because there is no way to distinguish a click from a drag until the button is released.
If you want to take action as soon as a button is pressed, you need to handle button-down events.17 These occur as soon as a button is pressed. They are represented by lists that look exactly like click events (see Click Events), except that the event-type symbol name contains the prefix ‘down-’. The ‘down-’ prefix follows modifier key prefixes such as ‘C-’ and ‘M-’.
The function read-key-sequence
ignores any button-down events
that don’t have command bindings; therefore, the Emacs command loop
ignores them too. This means that you need not worry about defining
button-down events unless you want them to do something. The usual
reason to define a button-down event is so that you can track mouse
motion (by reading motion events) until the button is released.
See Motion Events.
If you press the same mouse button more than once in quick succession without moving the mouse, Emacs generates special repeat mouse events for the second and subsequent presses.
The most common repeat events are double-click events. Emacs generates a double-click event when you click a button twice; the event happens when you release the button (as is normal for all click events).
The event type of a double-click event contains the prefix
‘double-’. Thus, a double click on the second mouse button with
meta held down comes to the Lisp program as
M-double-mouse-2
. If a double-click event has no binding, the
binding of the corresponding ordinary click event is used to execute
it. Thus, you need not pay attention to the double click feature
unless you really want to.
When the user performs a double click, Emacs generates first an ordinary click event, and then a double-click event. Therefore, you must design the command binding of the double click event to assume that the single-click command has already run. It must produce the desired results of a double click, starting from the results of a single click.
This is convenient, if the meaning of a double click somehow builds on the meaning of a single click—which is recommended user interface design practice for double clicks.
If you click a button, then press it down again and start moving the mouse with the button held down, then you get a double-drag event when you ultimately release the button. Its event type contains ‘double-drag’ instead of just ‘drag’. If a double-drag event has no binding, Emacs looks for an alternate binding as if the event were an ordinary drag.
Before the double-click or double-drag event, Emacs generates a double-down event when the user presses the button down for the second time. Its event type contains ‘double-down’ instead of just ‘down’. If a double-down event has no binding, Emacs looks for an alternate binding as if the event were an ordinary button-down event. If it finds no binding that way either, the double-down event is ignored.
To summarize, when you click a button and then press it again right away, Emacs generates a down event and a click event for the first click, a double-down event when you press the button again, and finally either a double-click or a double-drag event.
If you click a button twice and then press it again, all in quick succession, Emacs generates a triple-down event, followed by either a triple-click or a triple-drag. The event types of these events contain ‘triple’ instead of ‘double’. If any triple event has no binding, Emacs uses the binding that it would use for the corresponding double event.
If you click a button three or more times and then press it again, the events for the presses beyond the third are all triple events. Emacs does not have separate event types for quadruple, quintuple, etc. events. However, you can look at the event list to find out precisely how many times the button was pressed.
This function returns the number of consecutive button presses that led up to event. If event is a double-down, double-click or double-drag event, the value is 2. If event is a triple event, the value is 3 or greater. If event is an ordinary mouse event (not a repeat event), the value is 1.
To generate repeat events, successive mouse button presses must be at
approximately the same screen position. The value of
double-click-fuzz
specifies the maximum number of pixels the
mouse may be moved (horizontally or vertically) between two successive
clicks to make a double-click.
This variable is also the threshold for motion of the mouse to count as a drag.
To generate repeat events, the number of milliseconds between
successive button presses must be less than the value of
double-click-time
. Setting double-click-time
to
nil
disables multi-click detection entirely. Setting it to
t
removes the time limit; Emacs then detects multi-clicks by
position only.
Emacs sometimes generates mouse motion events to describe motion of the mouse without any button activity. Mouse motion events are represented by lists that look like this:
(mouse-movement POSITION)
position is a mouse position list (see Click Events), specifying the current position of the mouse cursor. As with the end-position of a drag event, this position list may represent a location outside the boundaries of the initially selected frame, in which case the list contains that frame in place of a window.
The track-mouse
macro enables generation of motion
events within its body. Outside of track-mouse
body, Emacs
does not generate events for mere motion of the mouse, and these
events do not appear. See Mouse Tracking.
When non-nil
, mouse motion events are generated even for very
small movements. Otherwise, motion events are not generated as long
as the mouse cursor remains pointing to the same glyph in the text.
Some window systems provide support for input devices that react to the user’s touching the screen and moving fingers while touching the screen. These input devices are known as touchscreens, and Emacs reports the events they generate as touchscreen events.
Most individual events generated by a touchscreen only have meaning as part of a larger sequence of other events: for instance, the simple operation of tapping the touchscreen involves the user placing and raising a finger on the touchscreen, and swiping the display to scroll it involves placing a finger, moving it many times upwards or downwards, and then raising the finger.
While a simplistic model consisting of one finger is adequate for taps and scrolling, more complicated gestures require support for keeping track of multiple fingers, where the position of each finger is represented by a touch point. For example, a “pinch to zoom” gesture might consist of the user placing two fingers and moving them individually in opposite directions, where the distance between the positions of their individual points determine the amount by which to zoom the display, and the center of an imaginary line between those positions determines where to pan the display after zooming.
The low-level touchscreen events described below can be used to implement all the touch sequences described above. In those events, each point is represented by a cons of an arbitrary number identifying the point and a mouse position list (see Click Events) specifying the position of the finger when the event occurred.
(touchscreen-begin point)
¶This event is sent when point is created by the user pressing a finger against the touchscreen.
(touchscreen-update points)
¶This event is sent when a point on the touchscreen has changed position. points is a list of touch points containing the up-to-date positions of each touch point currently on the touchscreen.
(touchscreen-end point)
¶This event is sent when point is no longer present on the display, because another program took the grab, or because the user raised the finger from the touchscreen.
Window systems provide general ways for the user to control which window gets keyboard input. This choice of window is called the focus. When the user does something to switch between Emacs frames, that generates a focus event. The normal definition of a focus event, in the global keymap, is to select a new frame within Emacs, as the user would expect. See Input Focus, which also describes hooks related to focus events.
Focus events are represented in Lisp as lists that look like this:
(switch-frame new-frame)
where new-frame is the frame switched to.
Some X window managers are set up so that just moving the mouse into a window is enough to set the focus there. Usually, there is no need for a Lisp program to know about the focus change until some other kind of input arrives. Emacs generates a focus event only when the user actually types a keyboard key or presses a mouse button in the new frame; just moving the mouse between frames does not generate a focus event.
A focus event in the middle of a key sequence would garble the sequence. So Emacs never generates a focus event in the middle of a key sequence. If the user changes focus in the middle of a key sequence—that is, after a prefix key—then Emacs reorders the events so that the focus event comes either before or after the multi-event key sequence, and not within it.
Xwidgets (see Embedded Native Widgets) can send events to update Lisp programs on
their status. These events are dubbed xwidget-events
, and
contain various data describing the nature of the change.
(xwidget-event kind xwidget arg)
¶This event is sent whenever some kind of update occurs in xwidget. There are several types of updates, identified by their kind.
It is a special event (see Special Events), which should be handled by adding a callback to an xwidget that is called whenever an xwidget event for xwidget is received.
You can add a callback by setting the callback
of an xwidget’s
property list, which should be a function that accepts xwidget
and kind as arguments.
load-changed
¶This xwidget event indicates that the xwidget has reached a particular point of the page-loading process. When these events are sent, arg will contain a string that further describes the status of the widget:
This means the widget has begun a page-loading operation.
This means the xwidget has finished processing whatever page-loading operation that it was previously performing.
This means the xwidget has encountered and followed a redirect during the page-loading operation.
This means the xwidget has committed to a given URL during the page-loading operation, i.e. the URL is the final URL that will be rendered by xwidget during the current page-loading operation.
download-callback
¶This event indicates that a download of some kind has been completed.
In the above events, there can be arguments after arg, which itself indicates the URL from which the download file was retrieved: the first argument after arg indicates the MIME type of the download, as a string, while the second argument contains the full file name of the downloaded file.
(xwidget-display-event xwidget source)
¶This event is sent whenever an xwidget requests that another xwidget be displayed. xwidget is the xwidget that should be displayed, and source is the xwidget that asked to display xwidget.
It is also a special event which should be handled through callbacks.
You can add such a callback by setting the display-callback
of
source’s property list, which should be a function that accepts
xwidget and source as arguments.
xwidget’s buffer will be set to a temporary buffer. When
displaying the widget, care should be taken to replace the buffer with
the buffer in which the xwidget will be displayed, using
set-xwidget-buffer
(see Embedded Native Widgets).
A few other event types represent occurrences within the system.
(delete-frame (frame))
¶This kind of event indicates that the user gave the window manager a command to delete a particular window, which happens to be an Emacs frame.
The standard definition of the delete-frame
event is to delete frame.
(iconify-frame (frame))
¶This kind of event indicates that the user iconified frame using
the window manager. Its standard definition is ignore
; since the
frame has already been iconified, Emacs has no work to do. The purpose
of this event type is so that you can keep track of such events if you
want to.
(make-frame-visible (frame))
¶This kind of event indicates that the user deiconified frame using
the window manager. Its standard definition is ignore
; since the
frame has already been made visible, Emacs has no work to do.
(touch-end (position))
¶This kind of event indicates that the user’s finger moved off the mouse wheel or the touchpad. The position element is a mouse position list (see Click Events), specifying the position of the mouse cursor when the finger moved off the mouse wheel.
(wheel-up position clicks lines pixel-delta)
¶(wheel-down position clicks lines pixel-delta)
These events are generated by moving a mouse wheel. The position element is a mouse position list (see Click Events), specifying the position of the mouse cursor when the event occurred.
clicks, if present, is the number of times that the wheel was
moved in quick succession. See Repeat Events. lines, if
present and not nil
, is the positive number of screen lines
that should be scrolled (either up, when the event is wheel-up
,
or down when the event is wheel-down
). pixel-delta, if
present, is a cons cell of the form (x . y)
,
where x and y are the numbers of pixels by which to scroll
in each axis, a.k.a. pixelwise deltas. Usually, only one of
the two will be non-zero, the other will be either zero or very close
to zero; the larger number indicates the axis to scroll the window.
When the variable mwheel-coalesce-scroll-events
is nil
,
the scroll commands ignore the lines element, even if it’s
non-nil
, and use the pixel-delta data instead; in that
case, the direction of scrolling is determined by the sign of the
pixelwise deltas, and the direction (up or down) implied by the event
kind is ignored.
You can use these x and y pixelwise deltas to determine
how much the mouse wheel has actually moved at pixel resolution. For
example, the pixelwise deltas could be used to scroll the display at
pixel resolution, exactly according to the user’s turning the mouse
wheel. This pixelwise scrolling is possible only when
mwheel-coalesce-scroll-events
is nil
, and in general the
pixel-delta data is not generated when that variable is
non-nil
.
The wheel-up
and wheel-down
events are generated only on
some kinds of systems. On other systems, mouse-4
and
mouse-5
are used instead. For portable code, use the variables
mouse-wheel-up-event
, mouse-wheel-up-alternate-event
,
mouse-wheel-down-event
and
mouse-wheel-down-alternate-event
defined in mwheel.el to
determine what event types to expect from the mouse wheel.
Similarly, some mice can generate mouse-wheel-left-event
and
mouse-wheel-right-event
and can be used to scroll if
mouse-wheel-tilt-scroll
is non-nil
. However, some mice
also generate other events at the same time as they’re generating
these scroll events which may get in the way. The way to fix this is
generally to unbind these events (for instance, mouse-6
or
mouse-7
, but this is very hardware and operating system
dependent).
(pinch position dx dy scale angle)
¶This kind of event is generated by the user performing a “pinch” gesture by placing two fingers on a touchpad and moving them towards or away from each other. position is a mouse position list (see Click Events) that provides the position of the mouse pointer when the event occurred, dx is the change in the horizontal distance between the fingers since the last event in the same sequence, dy is the vertical movement of the fingers since the last event in the same sequence, scale is the ratio of the current distance between the fingers to that distance at the start of the sequence, and angle is the angular difference in degrees between the direction of the line connecting the fingers in this event and the direction of that line in the last event of the same sequence.
As pinch events are only sent at the beginning or during a pinch sequence, they do not report gestures where the user moves two fingers on a touchpad in a rotating fashion without pinching the fingers.
All arguments after position are floating point numbers.
This event is usually sent as part of a sequence, which begins with
the user placing two fingers on the touchpad, and ends with the user
removing those fingers. dx, dy, and angle will be
0.0
in the first event of a sequence; subsequent events will
report non-zero values for these members of the event structure.
dx and dy are reported in imaginary relative units, in
which 1.0
is the width and height of the touchpad
respectively. They are usually interpreted as being relative to the
size of the object beneath the gesture: image, window, etc.
(preedit-text arg)
¶This event is sent when a system input method tells Emacs to display some text to indicate to the user what will be inserted. The contents of arg are dependent on the window system being used.
On X, arg is a string describing some text to place behind the
cursor. It can be nil
, which means to remove any text
previously displayed.
On PGTK frames (see Frames), arg is a list of strings with information about their color and underline attributes. It has the following form:
((string1 (ul . underline-color) (bg . background-color) (fg . foreground-color)) (string2 (ul . underline-color) (bg . background-color) (fg . foreground-color)) ... )
Color information can be omitted, leaving just the text of the
strings. underline-color can be t
, meaning underlined
text with default underline color, or it can be a string, the name of
the color to draw the underline.
This is a special event (see Special Events), which normally should not be bound by the user to any command. Emacs will typically display the text contained in the event in an overlay behind point when it is received.
(drag-n-drop position files)
¶This kind of event is generated when a group of files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged and dropped onto an Emacs frame.
The element position is a list describing the position of the event, in the same format as used in a mouse-click event (see Click Events), and files is the list of file names that were dragged and dropped. The usual way to handle this event is by visiting these files.
This kind of event is generated, at present, only on some kinds of systems.
help-echo
¶This kind of event is generated when a mouse pointer moves onto a
portion of buffer text which has a help-echo
text property.
The generated event has this form:
(help-echo frame help window object pos)
The precise meaning of the event parameters and the way these parameters are used to display the help-echo text are described in Text help-echo.
sigusr1
¶sigusr2
These events are generated when the Emacs process receives
the signals SIGUSR1
and SIGUSR2
. They contain no
additional data because signals do not carry additional information.
They can be useful for debugging (see Entering the Debugger on an Error).
To catch a user signal, bind the corresponding event to an interactive
command in the special-event-map
(see Controlling the Active Keymaps).
The command is called with no arguments, and the specific signal event is
available in last-input-event
(see Miscellaneous Event Input Features. For
example:
(defun sigusr-handler () (interactive) (message "Caught signal %S" last-input-event)) (keymap-set special-event-map "<sigusr1>" 'sigusr-handler)
To test the signal handler, you can make Emacs send a signal to itself:
(signal-process (emacs-pid) 'sigusr1)
language-change
¶This kind of event is generated on MS-Windows when the input language has changed. This typically means that the keyboard keys will send to Emacs characters from a different language. The generated event has this form:
(language-change frame codepage language-id)
Here frame is the frame which was current when the input
language changed; codepage is the new codepage number; and
language-id is the numerical ID of the new input language. The
coding-system (see Coding Systems) that corresponds to
codepage is cpcodepage
or
windows-codepage
. To convert language-id to a
string (e.g., to use it for various language-dependent features, such
as set-language-environment
), use the
w32-get-locale-info
function, like this:
;; Get the abbreviated language name, such as "ENU" for English (w32-get-locale-info language-id) ;; Get the full English name of the language, ;; such as "English (United States)" (w32-get-locale-info language-id 4097) ;; Get the full localized name of the language (w32-get-locale-info language-id t)
end-session
¶This event is generated on MS-Windows when the operating system
informs Emacs that the user terminated the interactive session, or
that the system is shutting down. The standard definition of this
event is to invoke the kill-emacs
command (see Killing Emacs) so as to shut down Emacs in an orderly fashion; if there are
unsaved changes, this will produce auto-save files
(see Auto-Saving) that the user can use after restarting the
session to restore the unsaved edits.
If one of these events arrives in the middle of a key sequence—that is, after a prefix key—then Emacs reorders the events so that this event comes either before or after the multi-event key sequence, not within it.
Some of these special events, such as delete-frame
, invoke
Emacs commands by default; others are not bound. If you want to
arrange for a special event to invoke a command, you can do that via
special-event-map
. The command you bind to a function key in
that map can then examine the full event which invoked it in
last-input-event
. See Special Events.
If the user presses and releases the left mouse button over the same location, that generates a sequence of events like this:
(down-mouse-1 (#<window 18 on NEWS> 2613 (0 . 38) -864320)) (mouse-1 (#<window 18 on NEWS> 2613 (0 . 38) -864180))
While holding the control key down, the user might hold down the second mouse button, and drag the mouse from one line to the next. That produces two events, as shown here:
(C-down-mouse-2 (#<window 18 on NEWS> 3440 (0 . 27) -731219)) (C-drag-mouse-2 (#<window 18 on NEWS> 3440 (0 . 27) -731219) (#<window 18 on NEWS> 3510 (0 . 28) -729648))
While holding down the meta and shift keys, the user might press the second mouse button on the window’s mode line, and then drag the mouse into another window. That produces a pair of events like these:
(M-S-down-mouse-2 (#<window 18 on NEWS> mode-line (33 . 31) -457844)) (M-S-drag-mouse-2 (#<window 18 on NEWS> mode-line (33 . 31) -457844) (#<window 20 on carlton-sanskrit.tex> 161 (33 . 3) -453816))
The frame with input focus might not take up the entire screen, and
the user might move the mouse outside the scope of the frame. Inside
the track-mouse
macro, that produces an event like this:
(mouse-movement (#<frame *ielm* 0x102849a30> nil (563 . 205) 532301936))
Every event has an event type, which classifies the event for key binding purposes. For a keyboard event, the event type equals the event value; thus, the event type for a character is the character, and the event type for a function key symbol is the symbol itself. For events that are lists, the event type is the symbol in the CAR of the list. Thus, the event type is always a symbol or a character.
Two events of the same type are equivalent where key bindings are concerned; thus, they always run the same command. That does not necessarily mean they do the same things, however, as some commands look at the whole event to decide what to do. For example, some commands use the location of a mouse event to decide where in the buffer to act.
Sometimes broader classifications of events are useful. For example, you might want to ask whether an event involved the META key, regardless of which other key or mouse button was used.
The functions event-modifiers
and event-basic-type
are
provided to get such information conveniently.
This function returns a list of the modifiers that event has. The
modifiers are symbols; they include shift
, control
,
meta
, alt
, hyper
and super
. In addition,
the modifiers list of a mouse event symbol always contains one of
click
, drag
, and down
. For double or triple
events, it also contains double
or triple
.
The argument event may be an entire event object, or just an
event type. If event is a symbol that has never been used in an
event that has been read as input in the current Emacs session, then
event-modifiers
can return nil
, even when event
actually has modifiers.
Here are some examples:
(event-modifiers ?a) ⇒ nil (event-modifiers ?A) ⇒ (shift) (event-modifiers ?\C-a) ⇒ (control) (event-modifiers ?\C-%) ⇒ (control) (event-modifiers ?\C-\S-a) ⇒ (control shift) (event-modifiers 'f5) ⇒ nil (event-modifiers 's-f5) ⇒ (super) (event-modifiers 'M-S-f5) ⇒ (meta shift) (event-modifiers 'mouse-1) ⇒ (click) (event-modifiers 'down-mouse-1) ⇒ (down)
The modifiers list for a click event explicitly contains click
,
but the event symbol name itself does not contain ‘click’.
Similarly, the modifiers list for an ASCII control
character, such as ‘C-a’, contains control
, even though
reading such an event via read-char
will return the value 1
with the control modifier bit removed.
This function returns the key or mouse button that event
describes, with all modifiers removed. The event argument is as
in event-modifiers
. For example:
(event-basic-type ?a) ⇒ 97 (event-basic-type ?A) ⇒ 97 (event-basic-type ?\C-a) ⇒ 97 (event-basic-type ?\C-\S-a) ⇒ 97 (event-basic-type 'f5) ⇒ f5 (event-basic-type 's-f5) ⇒ f5 (event-basic-type 'M-S-f5) ⇒ f5 (event-basic-type 'down-mouse-1) ⇒ mouse-1
This function returns non-nil
if object is a mouse movement
event. See Motion Events.
This section describes convenient functions for accessing the data in
a mouse button or motion event. Keyboard event data can be accessed
using the same functions, but data elements that aren’t applicable to
keyboard events are zero or nil
.
The following two functions return a mouse position list (see Click Events), specifying the position of a mouse event.
This returns the starting position of event.
If event is a click or button-down event, this returns the location of the event. If event is a drag event, this returns the drag’s starting position.
This returns the ending position of event.
If event is a drag event, this returns the position where the user released the mouse button. If event is a click or button-down event, the value is actually the starting position, which is the only position such events have.
This function returns non-nil
if object is a mouse
position list, in the format documented in Click Events); and
nil
otherwise.
These functions take a mouse position list as argument, and return various parts of it:
Return the window that position is in. If position represents a location outside the frame where the event was initiated, return that frame instead.
Return the window area recorded in position. It returns nil
when the event occurred in the text area of the window; otherwise, it
is a symbol identifying the area in which the event occurred.
Return the buffer position in position. When the event occurred in the text area of the window, in a marginal area, or on a fringe, this is an integer specifying a buffer position. Otherwise, the value is undefined.
Return the pixel-based x and y coordinates in position, as a
cons cell (x . y)
. These coordinates are
relative to the window given by posn-window
.
This example shows how to convert the window-relative coordinates in the text area of a window into frame-relative coordinates:
(defun frame-relative-coordinates (position) "Return frame-relative coordinates from POSITION. POSITION is assumed to lie in a window text area." (let* ((x-y (posn-x-y position)) (window (posn-window position)) (edges (window-inside-pixel-edges window))) (cons (+ (car x-y) (car edges)) (+ (cdr x-y) (cadr edges)))))
This function returns a cons cell (col . row)
,
containing the estimated column and row corresponding to buffer
position described by position. The return value is given in
units of the frame’s default character width and default line height
(including spacing), as computed from the x and y values
corresponding to position. (So, if the actual characters have
non-default sizes, the actual row and column may differ from these
computed values.) If the optional window argument is
non-nil
, use the default character width in the window
indicated by position instead of the frame. (This makes a
difference if that window is showing a buffer with a non-default
zooming level, for instance.)
Note that row is counted from the top of the text area. If the window given by position possesses a header line (see Window Header Lines) or a tab line, they are not included in the row count.
Return the actual row and column in position, as a cons cell
(col . row)
. The values are the actual row and
column numbers in the window given by position. See Click Events, for details. The function returns nil
if
position does not include actual position values; in that case
posn-col-row
can be used to get approximate values.
Note that this function doesn’t account for the visual width of
characters on display, like the number of visual columns taken by a
tab character or an image. If you need the coordinates in canonical
character units, use posn-col-row
instead.
Return the string object described by position, either
nil
(which means position describes buffer text), or a
cons cell (string . string-pos)
.
Return the image object in position, either nil
(if
there’s no image at position), or an image spec (image …)
.
Return the image or string object described by position, either
nil
(which means position describes buffer text), an
image (image …)
, or a cons cell
(string . string-pos)
.
Return the pixel-based x and y coordinates relative to the upper left
corner of the object described by position, as a cons cell
(dx . dy)
. If the position describes
buffer text, return the relative coordinates of the buffer-text character
closest to that position.
Return the pixel width and height of the object described by
position, as a cons cell (width . height)
.
If the position describes a buffer position, return the size of
the character at that position.
Return the timestamp in position. This is the time at which the event occurred, in milliseconds. Such a timestamp is reported relative to an arbitrary starting time that varies according to the window system in use. On the X Window System, for example, it is the number of milliseconds since the X server was started.
These functions compute a position list given particular buffer position or screen position. You can access the data in this position list with the functions described above.
This function returns a position list for position pos in window. pos defaults to point in window; window defaults to the selected window.
posn-at-point
returns nil
if pos is not visible in
window.
This function returns position information corresponding to pixel
coordinates x and y in a specified frame or window,
frame-or-window, which defaults to the selected window.
The coordinates x and y are relative to the
text area of the selected window.
If whole is non-nil
, the x coordinate is relative
to the entire window area including scroll bars, margins and fringes.
These functions are useful for decoding scroll bar events.
This function returns the fractional vertical position of a scroll bar
event within the scroll bar. The value is a cons cell
(portion . whole)
containing two integers whose ratio
is the fractional position.
This function multiplies (in effect) ratio by total,
rounding the result to an integer. The argument ratio is not a
number, but rather a pair (num . denom)
—typically a
value returned by scroll-bar-event-ratio
.
This function is handy for scaling a position on a scroll bar into a buffer position. Here’s how to do that:
(+ (point-min) (scroll-bar-scale (posn-x-y (event-start event)) (- (point-max) (point-min))))
Recall that scroll bar events have two integers forming a ratio, in place of a pair of x and y coordinates.
In most of the places where strings are used, we conceptualize the string as containing text characters—the same kind of characters found in buffers or files. Occasionally Lisp programs use strings that conceptually contain keyboard characters; for example, they may be key sequences or keyboard macro definitions. However, storing keyboard characters in a string is a complex matter, for reasons of historical compatibility, and it is not always possible.
We recommend that new programs avoid dealing with these complexities
by not storing keyboard events in strings containing control
characters or the like, but instead store them in the common Emacs
format as understood by key-valid-p
.
If you read a key sequence with read-key-sequence-vector
(or
read-key-sequence
), or access a key sequence with
this-command-keys-vector
(or this-command-keys
), you can
transform this to the recommended format by using key-description
.
The complexities stem from the modifier bits that keyboard input characters can include. Aside from the Meta modifier, none of these modifier bits can be included in a string, and the Meta modifier is allowed only in special cases.
The earliest GNU Emacs versions represented meta characters as codes
in the range of 128 to 255. At that time, the basic character codes
ranged from 0 to 127, so all keyboard character codes did fit in a
string. Many Lisp programs used ‘\M-’ in string constants to stand
for meta characters, especially in arguments to define-key
and
similar functions, and key sequences and sequences of events were always
represented as strings.
When we added support for larger basic character codes beyond 127, and additional modifier bits, we had to change the representation of meta characters. Now the flag that represents the Meta modifier in a character is 2**27 and such numbers cannot be included in a string.
To support programs with ‘\M-’ in string constants, there are special rules for including certain meta characters in a string. Here are the rules for interpreting a string as a sequence of input characters:
Functions such as read-key-sequence
that construct strings of
keyboard input characters follow these rules: they construct vectors
instead of strings, when the events won’t fit in a string.
When you use the read syntax ‘\M-’ in a string, it produces a code in the range of 128 to 255—the same code that you get if you modify the corresponding keyboard event to put it in the string. Thus, meta events in strings work consistently regardless of how they get into the strings.
However, most programs would do well to avoid these issues by following the recommendations at the beginning of this section.
The editor command loop reads key sequences using the function
read-key-sequence
, which uses read-event
. These and other
functions for event input are also available for use in Lisp programs.
See also momentary-string-display
in Temporary Displays,
and sit-for
in Waiting for Elapsed Time or Input. See Terminal Input, for
functions and variables for controlling terminal input modes and
debugging terminal input.
For higher-level input facilities, see Minibuffers.
The command loop reads input a key sequence at a time, by calling
read-key-sequence
. Lisp programs can also call this function;
for example, describe-key
uses it to read the key to describe.
This function reads a key sequence and returns it as a string or vector. It keeps reading events until it has accumulated a complete key sequence; that is, enough to specify a non-prefix command using the currently active keymaps. (Remember that a key sequence that starts with a mouse event is read using the keymaps of the buffer in the window that the mouse was in, not the current buffer.)
If the events are all characters and all can fit in a string, then
read-key-sequence
returns a string (see Putting Keyboard Events in Strings).
Otherwise, it returns a vector, since a vector can hold all kinds of
events—characters, symbols, and lists. The elements of the string or
vector are the events in the key sequence.
Reading a key sequence includes translating the events in various ways. See Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events.
The argument prompt is either a string to be displayed in the
echo area as a prompt, or nil
, meaning not to display a prompt.
The argument continue-echo, if non-nil
, means to echo
this key as a continuation of the previous key.
Normally any upper case event is converted to lower case if the
original event is undefined and the lower case equivalent is defined.
The argument dont-downcase-last, if non-nil
, means do not
convert the last event to lower case. This is appropriate for reading
a key sequence to be defined.
The argument switch-frame-ok, if non-nil
, means that this
function should process a switch-frame
event if the user
switches frames before typing anything. If the user switches frames
in the middle of a key sequence, or at the start of the sequence but
switch-frame-ok is nil
, then the event will be put off
until after the current key sequence.
The argument command-loop, if non-nil
, means that this
key sequence is being read by something that will read commands one
after another. It should be nil
if the caller will read just
one key sequence.
In the following example, Emacs displays the prompt ‘?’ in the echo area, and then the user types C-x C-f.
(read-key-sequence "?")
---------- Echo Area ---------- ?C-x C-f ---------- Echo Area ---------- ⇒ "^X^F"
The function read-key-sequence
suppresses quitting: C-g
typed while reading with this function works like any other character,
and does not set quit-flag
. See Quitting.
This is like read-key-sequence
except that it always
returns the key sequence as a vector, never as a string.
See Putting Keyboard Events in Strings.
If an input character is upper-case (or has the shift modifier) and
has no key binding, but its lower-case equivalent has one, then
read-key-sequence
converts the character to lower case. (This
behavior can be disabled by setting the
translate-upper-case-key-bindings
user option to nil
.)
Note that lookup-key
does not perform case conversion in this
way.
When reading input results in such a shift-translation, Emacs
sets the variable this-command-keys-shift-translated
to a
non-nil
value. Lisp programs can examine this variable if they
need to modify their behavior when invoked by shift-translated keys.
For example, the function handle-shift-selection
examines the
value of this variable to determine how to activate or deactivate the
region (see handle-shift-selection).
The function read-key-sequence
also transforms some mouse events.
It converts unbound drag events into click events, and discards unbound
button-down events entirely. It also reshuffles focus events and
miscellaneous window events so that they never appear in a key sequence
with any other events.
When mouse events occur in special parts of a window or frame, such as a mode
line or a scroll bar, the event type shows nothing special—it is the
same symbol that would normally represent that combination of mouse
button and modifier keys. The information about the window part is kept
elsewhere in the event—in the coordinates. But
read-key-sequence
translates this information into imaginary
prefix keys, all of which are symbols: tab-line
, header-line
,
horizontal-scroll-bar
, menu-bar
, tab-bar
, mode-line
,
vertical-line
, vertical-scroll-bar
, left-margin
,
right-margin
, left-fringe
, right-fringe
,
right-divider
, and bottom-divider
. You can define meanings for
mouse clicks in special window parts by defining key sequences using these
imaginary prefix keys.
For example, if you call read-key-sequence
and then click the
mouse on the window’s mode line, you get two events, like this:
(read-key-sequence "Click on the mode line: ") ⇒ [mode-line (mouse-1 (#<window 6 on NEWS> mode-line (40 . 63) 5959987))]
This variable’s value is the number of key sequences processed so far in this Emacs session. This includes key sequences read from the terminal and key sequences read from keyboard macros being executed.
The lowest level functions for command input are read-event
,
read-char
, and read-char-exclusive
.
If you need a function to read a character using the minibuffer, use
read-char-from-minibuffer
(see Asking Multiple-Choice Questions).
This function reads and returns the next event of command input, waiting if necessary until an event is available.
The returned event may come directly from the user, or from a keyboard macro. It is not decoded by the keyboard’s input coding system (see Terminal I/O Encoding).
If the optional argument prompt is non-nil
, it should be
a string to display in the echo area as a prompt. If prompt is
nil
or the string ‘""’, read-event
does not display
any message to indicate it is waiting for input; instead, it prompts
by echoing: it displays descriptions of the events that led to or were
read by the current command. See The Echo Area.
If inherit-input-method is non-nil
, then the current input
method (if any) is employed to make it possible to enter a
non-ASCII character. Otherwise, input method handling is disabled
for reading this event.
If cursor-in-echo-area
is non-nil
, then read-event
moves the cursor temporarily to the echo area, to the end of any message
displayed there. Otherwise read-event
does not move the cursor.
If seconds is non-nil
, it should be a number specifying
the maximum time to wait for input, in seconds. If no input arrives
within that time, read-event
stops waiting and returns
nil
. A floating point seconds means to wait
for a fractional number of seconds. Some systems support only a whole
number of seconds; on these systems, seconds is rounded down.
If seconds is nil
, read-event
waits as long as
necessary for input to arrive.
If seconds is nil
, Emacs is considered idle while waiting
for user input to arrive. Idle timers—those created with
run-with-idle-timer
(see Idle Timers)—can run during this
period. However, if seconds is non-nil
, the state of
idleness remains unchanged. If Emacs is non-idle when
read-event
is called, it remains non-idle throughout the
operation of read-event
; if Emacs is idle (which can happen if
the call happens inside an idle timer), it remains idle.
If read-event
gets an event that is defined as a help character,
then in some cases read-event
processes the event directly without
returning. See Help Functions. Certain other events, called
special events, are also processed directly within
read-event
(see Special Events).
Here is what happens if you call read-event
and then press the
right-arrow function key:
(read-event) ⇒ right
This function reads and returns a character input event. If the
user generates an event which is not a character (i.e., a mouse click or
function key event), read-char
signals an error. The arguments
work as in read-event
.
If the event has modifiers, Emacs attempts to resolve them and return
the code of the corresponding character. For example, if the user
types C-a, the function returns 1, which is the ASCII
code of the ‘C-a’ character. If some of the modifiers cannot be
reflected in the character code, read-char
leaves the
unresolved modifier bits set in the returned event. For example, if
the user types C-M-a, the function returns 134217729, 8000001 in
hex, i.e. ‘C-a’ with the Meta modifier bit set. This value is
not a valid character code: it fails the characterp
test
(see Character Codes). Use event-basic-type
(see Classifying Events) to recover the character code with the
modifier bits removed; use event-modifiers
to test for
modifiers in the character event returned by read-char
.
In the first example below, the user types the character 1
(ASCII code 49). The second example shows a keyboard macro
definition that calls read-char
from the minibuffer using
eval-expression
. read-char
reads the keyboard macro’s
very next character, which is 1. Then eval-expression
displays its return value in the echo area.
(read-char) ⇒ 49
;; We assume here you use M-: to evaluate this.
(symbol-function 'foo)
⇒ "^[:(read-char)^M1"
(execute-kbd-macro 'foo) -| 49 ⇒ nil
This function reads and returns a character input event. If the
user generates an event which is not a character event,
read-char-exclusive
ignores it and reads another event, until it
gets a character. The arguments work as in read-event
. The
returned value may include modifier bits, as with read-char
.
None of the above functions suppress quitting.
This variable holds the total number of input events received so far from the terminal—not counting those generated by keyboard macros.
We emphasize that, unlike read-key-sequence
, the functions
read-event
, read-char
, and read-char-exclusive
do
not perform the translations described in Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events.
If you wish to read a single key taking these translations into
account (for example, to read Function Keys in a terminal or
Mouse Events from xterm-mouse-mode
), use the function
read-key
:
This function reads a single key. It is intermediate between
read-key-sequence
and read-event
. Unlike the former, it
reads a single key, not a key sequence. Unlike the latter, it does
not return a raw event, but decodes and translates the user input
according to input-decode-map
, local-function-key-map
,
and key-translation-map
(see Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events).
The argument prompt is either a string to be displayed in the
echo area as a prompt, or nil
, meaning not to display a prompt.
If argument disable-fallbacks is non-nil
then the usual
fallback logic for unbound keys in read-key-sequence
is not
applied. This means that mouse button-down and multi-click events
will not be discarded and local-function-key-map
and
key-translation-map
will not get applied. If nil
or
unspecified, the only fallback disabled is downcasing of the last
event.
This function uses read-from-minibuffer
to read and return a
single character that is a member of chars, which should be a
list of single characters. It discards any input characters that are
not members of chars, and shows a message to that effect.
The optional argument inhibit-quit is by default ignored, but if
the variable read-char-choice-use-read-key
is non-nil
,
this function uses read-key
instead of
read-from-minibuffer
, and in that case inhibit-quit
non-nil
means ignore keyboard-quit events while waiting for
valid input. In addition, if read-char-choice-use-read-key
is
non-nil
, binding help-form
(see Help Functions) to a
non-nil
value while calling this function causes it to evaluate
help-form
and display the result when the user presses
help-char
; it then continues to wait for a valid input
character, or for keyboard-quit.
Ask user a multiple choice question. prompt should be a string that will be displayed as the prompt.
choices is an alist where the first element in each entry is a character to be entered, the second element is a short name for the entry to be displayed while prompting (if there’s room, it might be shortened), and the third, optional entry is a longer explanation that will be displayed in a help buffer if the user requests more help.
If optional argument help-string is non-nil
, it should be
a string with a more detailed description of all choices. It will be
displayed in a help buffer instead of the default auto-generated
description when the user types ?.
If optional argument show-help is non-nil
, the help
buffer will be displayed immediately, before any user input. If it is
a string, use it as the name of the help buffer.
If optional argument long-form is non-nil
, the user
will have to type in long-form answers (using completing-read
)
instead of hitting a single key. The answers must be among the second
elements of the values in the choices list.
The return value is the matching value from choices.
(read-multiple-choice "Continue connecting?" '((?a "always" "Accept certificate for this and future sessions.") (?s "session only" "Accept certificate this session only.") (?n "no" "Refuse to use certificate, close connection.")))
The read-multiple-choice-face
face is used to highlight the
matching characters in the name string on graphical terminals.
Emacs modifies every event it reads according to
extra-keyboard-modifiers
, then translates it through
keyboard-translate-table
(if applicable), before returning it
from read-event
.
This variable lets Lisp programs “press” the modifier keys on the
keyboard. The value is a character. Only the modifiers of the
character matter. Each time the user types a keyboard key, it is
altered as if those modifier keys were held down. For instance, if
you bind extra-keyboard-modifiers
to ?\C-\M-a
, then all
keyboard input characters typed during the scope of the binding will
have the control and meta modifiers applied to them. The character
?\C-@
, equivalent to the integer 0, does not count as a control
character for this purpose, but as a character with no modifiers.
Thus, setting extra-keyboard-modifiers
to zero cancels any
modification.
When using a window system, the program can press any of the modifier keys in this way. Otherwise, only the CTL and META keys can be virtually pressed.
Note that this variable applies only to events that really come from the keyboard, and has no effect on mouse events or any other events.
This terminal-local variable is the translate table for keyboard
characters. It lets you reshuffle the keys on the keyboard without
changing any command bindings. Its value is normally a char-table, or
else nil
. (It can also be a string or vector, but this is
considered obsolete.)
If keyboard-translate-table
is a char-table
(see Char-Tables), then each character read from the keyboard is
looked up in this char-table. If the value found there is
non-nil
, then it is used instead of the actual input character.
Note that this translation is the first thing that happens to a
character after it is read from the terminal. Record-keeping features
such as recent-keys
and dribble files record the characters after
translation.
Note also that this translation is done before the characters are
supplied to input methods (see Input Methods). Use
translation-table-for-input
(see Translation of Characters),
if you want to translate characters after input methods operate.
This function modifies keyboard-translate-table
to translate
character code from into character code to. It creates
the keyboard translate table if necessary.
Here’s an example of using the keyboard-translate-table
to
make C-x, C-c and C-v perform the cut, copy and paste
operations:
(key-translate "C-x" "<control-x>") (key-translate "C-c" "<control-c>") (key-translate "C-v" "<control-v>") (keymap-global-set "<control-x>" 'kill-region) (keymap-global-set "<control-c>" 'kill-ring-save) (keymap-global-set "<control-v>" 'yank)
On a graphical terminal that supports extended ASCII input, you can still get the standard Emacs meanings of one of those characters by typing it with the shift key. That makes it a different character as far as keyboard translation is concerned, but it has the same usual meaning.
See Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events, for mechanisms that translate event sequences
at the level of read-key-sequence
. If you need to translate
input events that are not characters (i.e., characterp
returns
nil
for them), you must use the event translation mechanism
described there.
The event-reading functions invoke the current input method, if any
(see Input Methods). If the value of input-method-function
is non-nil
, it should be a function; when read-event
reads
a printing character (including SPC) with no modifier bits, it
calls that function, passing the character as an argument.
If this is non-nil
, its value specifies the current input method
function.
Warning: don’t bind this variable with let
. It is often
buffer-local, and if you bind it around reading input (which is exactly
when you would bind it), switching buffers asynchronously while
Emacs is waiting will cause the value to be restored in the wrong
buffer.
The input method function should return a list of events which should
be used as input. (If the list is nil
, that means there is no
input, so read-event
waits for another event.) These events are
processed before the events in unread-command-events
(see Miscellaneous Event Input Features). Events
returned by the input method function are not passed to the input method
function again, even if they are printing characters with no modifier
bits.
If the input method function calls read-event
or
read-key-sequence
, it should bind input-method-function
to
nil
first, to prevent recursion.
The input method function is not called when reading the second and
subsequent events of a key sequence. Thus, these characters are not
subject to input method processing. The input method function should
test the values of overriding-local-map
and
overriding-terminal-local-map
; if either of these variables is
non-nil
, the input method should put its argument into a list and
return that list with no further processing.
You can use the function read-quoted-char
to ask the user to
specify a character, and allow the user to specify a control or meta
character conveniently, either literally or as an octal character code.
The command quoted-insert
uses this function.
This function is like read-char
, except that if the first
character read is an octal digit (0–7), it reads any number of octal
digits (but stopping if a non-octal digit is found), and returns the
character represented by that numeric character code. If the
character that terminates the sequence of octal digits is RET,
it is discarded. Any other terminating character is used as input
after this function returns.
Quitting is suppressed when the first character is read, so that the user can enter a C-g. See Quitting.
If prompt is supplied, it specifies a string for prompting the user. The prompt string is always displayed in the echo area, followed by a single ‘-’.
In the following example, the user types in the octal number 177 (which is 127 in decimal).
(read-quoted-char "What character")
---------- Echo Area ---------- What character 1 7 7- ---------- Echo Area ---------- ⇒ 127
This section describes how to peek ahead at events without using
them up, how to check for pending input, and how to discard pending
input. See also the function read-passwd
(see Reading a Password).
This variable holds a list of events waiting to be read as command input. The events are used in the order they appear in the list, and removed one by one as they are used.
The variable is needed because in some cases a function reads an event and then decides not to use it. Storing the event in this variable causes it to be processed normally, by the command loop or by the functions to read command input.
For example, the function that implements numeric prefix arguments reads any number of digits. When it finds a non-digit event, it must unread the event so that it can be read normally by the command loop. Likewise, incremental search uses this feature to unread events with no special meaning in a search, because these events should exit the search and then execute normally.
The reliable and easy way to extract events from a key sequence so as
to put them in unread-command-events
is to use
listify-key-sequence
(see below).
Normally you add events to the front of this list, so that the events most recently unread will be reread first.
Events read from this list are not normally added to the current
command’s key sequence (as returned by, e.g., this-command-keys
),
as the events will already have been added once as they were read for
the first time. An element of the form (t . event)
forces event to be added to the current command’s key sequence.
Elements read from this list are normally recorded by the
record-keeping features (see Recording Input) and while defining a
keyboard macro (see Keyboard Macros). However, an element of the
form (no-record . event)
causes event to be
processed normally without recording it.
This function converts the string or vector key to a list of
individual events, which you can put in unread-command-events
.
This function determines whether any command input is currently
available to be read. It returns immediately, with value t
if
there is available input, nil
otherwise. On rare occasions it
may return t
when no input is available.
If the optional argument check-timers is non-nil
, then if
no input is available, Emacs runs any timers which are ready.
See Timers for Delayed Execution.
This variable records the last terminal input event read, whether as part of a command or explicitly by a Lisp program.
In the example below, the Lisp program reads the character 1,
ASCII code 49. It becomes the value of last-input-event
,
while C-e (we assume C-x C-e command is used to evaluate
this expression) remains the value of last-command-event
.
(progn (print (read-char)) (print last-command-event) last-input-event) -| 49 -| 5 ⇒ 49
This construct runs the body forms and returns the value of the
last one—but only if no input arrives. If any input arrives during
the execution of the body forms, it aborts them (working much
like a quit). The while-no-input
form returns nil
if
aborted by a real quit, and returns t
if aborted by arrival of
other input.
If a part of body binds inhibit-quit
to non-nil
,
arrival of input during those parts won’t cause an abort until
the end of that part.
If you want to be able to distinguish all possible values computed by body from both kinds of abort conditions, write the code like this:
(while-no-input (list (progn . body)))
This variable allow setting which special events while-no-input
should ignore. It is a list of event symbols (see Event Examples).
This function discards the contents of the terminal input buffer and
cancels any keyboard macro that might be in the process of definition.
It returns nil
.
In the following example, the user may type a number of characters right
after starting the evaluation of the form. After the sleep-for
finishes sleeping, discard-input
discards any characters typed
during the sleep.
(progn (sleep-for 2) (discard-input)) ⇒ nil
Certain special events are handled at a very low level—as soon
as they are read. The read-event
function processes these
events itself, and never returns them. Instead, it keeps waiting for
the first event that is not special and returns that one.
Special events do not echo, they are never grouped into key
sequences, and they never appear in the value of
last-command-event
or (this-command-keys)
. They do not
discard a numeric argument, they cannot be unread with
unread-command-events
, they may not appear in a keyboard macro,
and they are not recorded in a keyboard macro while you are defining
one.
Special events do, however, appear in last-input-event
immediately after they are read, and this is the way for the event’s
definition to find the actual event.
The events types iconify-frame
, make-frame-visible
,
delete-frame
, drag-n-drop
, language-change
, and
user signals like sigusr1
are normally handled in this way.
The keymap which defines how to handle special events—and which
events are special—is in the variable special-event-map
(see Controlling the Active Keymaps).
The wait functions are designed to wait for a certain amount of time
to pass or until there is input. For example, you may wish to pause in
the middle of a computation to allow the user time to view the display.
sit-for
pauses and updates the screen, and returns immediately if
input comes in, while sleep-for
pauses without updating the
screen.
This function performs redisplay (provided there is no pending input
from the user), then waits seconds seconds, or until input is
available. The usual purpose of sit-for
is to give the user
time to read text that you display. The value is t
if
sit-for
waited the full time with no input arriving
(see Miscellaneous Event Input Features). Otherwise, the value is nil
.
The argument seconds need not be an integer. If it is floating
point, sit-for
waits for a fractional number of seconds.
Some systems support only a whole number of seconds; on these systems,
seconds is rounded down.
The expression (sit-for 0)
is equivalent to (redisplay)
,
i.e., it requests a redisplay, without any delay, if there is no pending input.
See Forcing Redisplay.
If nodisp is non-nil
, then sit-for
does not
redisplay, but it still returns as soon as input is available (or when
the timeout elapses).
In batch mode (see Batch Mode), sit-for
cannot be
interrupted, even by input from the standard input descriptor. It is
thus equivalent to sleep-for
, which is described below.
It is also possible to call sit-for
with three arguments,
as (sit-for seconds millisec nodisp)
,
but that is considered obsolete.
This function simply pauses for seconds seconds without updating
the display. It pays no attention to available input. It returns
nil
.
The argument seconds need not be an integer. If it is floating
point, sleep-for
waits for a fractional number of seconds.
Some systems support only a whole number of seconds; on these systems,
seconds is rounded down.
The optional argument millisec specifies an additional waiting period measured in milliseconds. This adds to the period specified by seconds. If the system doesn’t support waiting fractions of a second, you get an error if you specify nonzero millisec.
Use sleep-for
when you wish to guarantee a delay.
See Time of Day, for functions to get the current time.
Typing C-g while a Lisp function is running causes Emacs to quit whatever it is doing. This means that control returns to the innermost active command loop.
Typing C-g while the command loop is waiting for keyboard input
does not cause a quit; it acts as an ordinary input character. In the
simplest case, you cannot tell the difference, because C-g
normally runs the command keyboard-quit
, whose effect is to quit.
However, when C-g follows a prefix key, they combine to form an
undefined key. The effect is to cancel the prefix key as well as any
prefix argument.
In the minibuffer, C-g has a different definition: it aborts out of the minibuffer. This means, in effect, that it exits the minibuffer and then quits. (Simply quitting would return to the command loop within the minibuffer.) The reason why C-g does not quit directly when the command reader is reading input is so that its meaning can be redefined in the minibuffer in this way. C-g following a prefix key is not redefined in the minibuffer, and it has its normal effect of canceling the prefix key and prefix argument. This too would not be possible if C-g always quit directly.
When C-g does directly quit, it does so by setting the variable
quit-flag
to t
. Emacs checks this variable at appropriate
times and quits if it is not nil
. Setting quit-flag
non-nil
in any way thus causes a quit.
At the level of C code, quitting cannot happen just anywhere; only at the
special places that check quit-flag
. The reason for this is
that quitting at other places might leave an inconsistency in Emacs’s
internal state. Because quitting is delayed until a safe place, quitting
cannot make Emacs crash.
Certain functions such as read-key-sequence
or
read-quoted-char
prevent quitting entirely even though they wait
for input. Instead of quitting, C-g serves as the requested
input. In the case of read-key-sequence
, this serves to bring
about the special behavior of C-g in the command loop. In the
case of read-quoted-char
, this is so that C-q can be used
to quote a C-g.
You can prevent quitting for a portion of a Lisp function by binding
the variable inhibit-quit
to a non-nil
value. Then,
although C-g still sets quit-flag
to t
as usual, the
usual result of this—a quit—is prevented. Eventually,
inhibit-quit
will become nil
again, such as when its
binding is unwound at the end of a let
form. At that time, if
quit-flag
is still non-nil
, the requested quit happens
immediately. This behavior is ideal when you wish to make sure that
quitting does not happen within a critical section of the program.
In some functions (such as read-quoted-char
), C-g is
handled in a special way that does not involve quitting. This is done
by reading the input with inhibit-quit
bound to t
, and
setting quit-flag
to nil
before inhibit-quit
becomes nil
again. This excerpt from the definition of
read-quoted-char
shows how this is done; it also shows that
normal quitting is permitted after the first character of input.
(defun read-quoted-char (&optional prompt)
"...documentation..."
(let ((message-log-max nil) done (first t) (code 0) char)
(while (not done)
(let ((inhibit-quit first)
...)
(and prompt (message "%s-" prompt))
(setq char (read-event))
(if inhibit-quit (setq quit-flag nil)))
...set the variable code
...)
code))
If this variable is non-nil
, then Emacs quits immediately, unless
inhibit-quit
is non-nil
. Typing C-g ordinarily sets
quit-flag
non-nil
, regardless of inhibit-quit
.
This variable determines whether Emacs should quit when quit-flag
is set to a value other than nil
. If inhibit-quit
is
non-nil
, then quit-flag
has no special effect.
This macro executes body forms in sequence, but allows quitting, at
least locally, within body even if inhibit-quit
was
non-nil
outside this construct. It returns the value of the
last form in body, unless exited by quitting, in which case
it returns nil
.
If inhibit-quit
is nil
on entry to with-local-quit
,
it only executes the body, and setting quit-flag
causes
a normal quit. However, if inhibit-quit
is non-nil
so
that ordinary quitting is delayed, a non-nil
quit-flag
triggers a special kind of local quit. This ends the execution of
body and exits the with-local-quit
body with
quit-flag
still non-nil
, so that another (ordinary) quit
will happen as soon as that is allowed. If quit-flag
is
already non-nil
at the beginning of body, the local quit
happens immediately and the body doesn’t execute at all.
This macro is mainly useful in functions that can be called from
timers, process filters, process sentinels, pre-command-hook
,
post-command-hook
, and other places where inhibit-quit
is
normally bound to t
.
This function signals the quit
condition with (signal 'quit
nil)
. This is the same thing that quitting does. (See signal
in Errors.)
To quit without aborting a keyboard macro definition or execution,
you can signal the minibuffer-quit
condition. This has almost
the same effect as the quit
condition except that the error
handling in the command loop handles it without exiting keyboard macro
definition or execution.
You can specify a character other than C-g to use for quitting.
See the function set-input-mode
in Input Modes.
Most Emacs commands can use a prefix argument, a number
specified before the command itself. (Don’t confuse prefix arguments
with prefix keys.) The prefix argument is at all times represented by a
value, which may be nil
, meaning there is currently no prefix
argument. Each command may use the prefix argument or ignore it.
There are two representations of the prefix argument: raw and numeric. The editor command loop uses the raw representation internally, and so do the Lisp variables that store the information, but commands can request either representation.
Here are the possible values of a raw prefix argument:
nil
, meaning there is no prefix argument. Its numeric value is
1, but numerous commands make a distinction between nil
and the
integer 1.
-
. This indicates that M-- or C-u - was
typed, without following digits. The equivalent numeric value is
−1, but some commands make a distinction between the integer
−1 and the symbol -
.
We illustrate these possibilities by calling the following function with various prefixes:
(defun display-prefix (arg) "Display the value of the raw prefix arg." (interactive "P") (message "%s" arg))
Here are the results of calling display-prefix
with various
raw prefix arguments:
M-x display-prefix -| nil C-u M-x display-prefix -| (4) C-u C-u M-x display-prefix -| (16) C-u 3 M-x display-prefix -| 3 M-3 M-x display-prefix -| 3 ; (Same asC-u 3
.) C-u - M-x display-prefix -| - M-- M-x display-prefix -| - ; (Same asC-u -
.) C-u - 7 M-x display-prefix -| -7 M-- 7 M-x display-prefix -| -7 ; (Same asC-u -7
.)
Emacs uses two variables to store the prefix argument:
prefix-arg
and current-prefix-arg
. Commands such as
universal-argument
that set up prefix arguments for other
commands store them in prefix-arg
. In contrast,
current-prefix-arg
conveys the prefix argument to the current
command, so setting it has no effect on the prefix arguments for future
commands.
Normally, commands specify which representation to use for the prefix
argument, either numeric or raw, in the interactive
specification.
(See Using interactive
.) Alternatively, functions may look at the
value of the prefix argument directly in the variable
current-prefix-arg
, but this is less clean.
This function returns the numeric meaning of a valid raw prefix argument
value, arg. The argument may be a symbol, a number, or a list.
If it is nil
, the value 1 is returned; if it is -
, the
value −1 is returned; if it is a number, that number is returned;
if it is a list, the CAR of that list (which should be a number) is
returned.
This variable holds the raw prefix argument for the current
command. Commands may examine it directly, but the usual method for
accessing it is with (interactive "P")
.
The value of this variable is the raw prefix argument for the
next editing command. Commands such as universal-argument
that specify prefix arguments for the following command work by setting
this variable.
The raw prefix argument value used by the previous command.
The following commands exist to set up prefix arguments for the following command. Do not call them for any other reason.
This command reads input and specifies a prefix argument for the following command. Don’t call this command yourself unless you know what you are doing.
This command adds to the prefix argument for the following command. The argument arg is the raw prefix argument as it was before this command; it is used to compute the updated prefix argument. Don’t call this command yourself unless you know what you are doing.
This command adds to the numeric argument for the next command. The argument arg is the raw prefix argument as it was before this command; its value is negated to form the new prefix argument. Don’t call this command yourself unless you know what you are doing.
The Emacs command loop is entered automatically when Emacs starts up. This top-level invocation of the command loop never exits; it keeps running as long as Emacs does. Lisp programs can also invoke the command loop. Since this makes more than one activation of the command loop, we call it recursive editing. A recursive editing level has the effect of suspending whatever command invoked it and permitting the user to do arbitrary editing before resuming that command.
The commands available during recursive editing are the same ones available in the top-level editing loop and defined in the keymaps. Only a few special commands exit the recursive editing level; the others return to the recursive editing level when they finish. (The special commands for exiting are always available, but they do nothing when recursive editing is not in progress.)
All command loops, including recursive ones, set up all-purpose error handlers so that an error in a command run from the command loop will not exit the loop.
Minibuffer input is a special kind of recursive editing. It has a few special wrinkles, such as enabling display of the minibuffer and the minibuffer window, but fewer than you might suppose. Certain keys behave differently in the minibuffer, but that is only because of the minibuffer’s local map; if you switch windows, you get the usual Emacs commands.
To invoke a recursive editing level, call the function
recursive-edit
. This function contains the command loop; it
also contains a call to catch
with tag exit
, which makes
it possible to exit the recursive editing level by throwing to
exit
(see Explicit Nonlocal Exits: catch
and throw
). Throwing a t
value
causes recursive-edit
to quit, so that control returns to the
command loop one level up. This is called aborting, and is done
by C-] (abort-recursive-edit
). Similarly, you can throw
a string value to make recursive-edit
signal an error, printing
this string as the message. If you throw a function,
recursive-edit
will call it without arguments before returning.
Throwing any other value, will make recursive-edit
return
normally to the function that called it. The command C-M-c
(exit-recursive-edit
) does this.
Most applications should not use recursive editing, except as part of using the minibuffer. Usually it is more convenient for the user if you change the major mode of the current buffer temporarily to a special major mode, which should have a command to go back to the previous mode. (The e command in Rmail uses this technique.) Or, if you wish to give the user different text to edit recursively, create and select a new buffer in a special mode. In this mode, define a command to complete the processing and go back to the previous buffer. (The m command in Rmail does this.)
Recursive edits are useful in debugging. You can insert a call to
debug
into a function definition as a sort of breakpoint, so that
you can look around when the function gets there. debug
invokes
a recursive edit but also provides the other features of the debugger.
Recursive editing levels are also used when you type C-r in
query-replace
or use C-x q (kbd-macro-query
).
This function invokes the editor command loop. It is called automatically by the initialization of Emacs, to let the user begin editing. When called from a Lisp program, it enters a recursive editing level.
If the current buffer is not the same as the selected window’s buffer,
recursive-edit
saves and restores the current buffer. Otherwise,
if you switch buffers, the buffer you switched to is current after
recursive-edit
returns.
In the following example, the function simple-rec
first
advances point one word, then enters a recursive edit, printing out a
message in the echo area. The user can then do any editing desired, and
then type C-M-c to exit and continue executing simple-rec
.
(defun simple-rec () (forward-word 1) (message "Recursive edit in progress") (recursive-edit) (forward-word 1)) ⇒ simple-rec (simple-rec) ⇒ nil
This function exits from the innermost recursive edit (including
minibuffer input). Its definition is effectively (throw 'exit
nil)
.
This function aborts the command that requested the innermost recursive
edit (including minibuffer input), by signaling quit
after exiting the recursive edit. Its definition is effectively
(throw 'exit t)
. See Quitting.
This function exits all recursive editing levels; it does not return a value, as it jumps completely out of any computation directly back to the main command loop.
This function returns the current depth of recursive edits. When no recursive edit is active, it returns 0.
Disabling a command marks the command as requiring user confirmation before it can be executed. Disabling is used for commands which might be confusing to beginning users, to prevent them from using the commands by accident.
The low-level mechanism for disabling a command is to put a
non-nil
disabled
property on the Lisp symbol for the
command. These properties are normally set up by the user’s
init file (see The Init File) with Lisp expressions such as this:
(put 'upcase-region 'disabled t)
For a few commands, these properties are present by default (you can remove them in your init file if you wish).
If the value of the disabled
property is a string, the message
saying the command is disabled includes that string. For example:
(put 'delete-region 'disabled "Text deleted this way cannot be yanked back!\n")
See Disabling in The GNU Emacs Manual, for the details on what happens when a disabled command is invoked interactively. Disabling a command has no effect on calling it as a function from Lisp programs.
The value of the disabled
property can also be a list where
the first element is the symbol query
. In that case, the user
will be queried whether to execute the command. The second element in
the list should be nil
or non-nil
to say whether to use
y-or-n-p
or yes-or-no-p
, respectively, and the third
element is the question to use. The command-query
convenience
function should be used to enable querying for a command.
Allow command (a symbol) to be executed without special confirmation from now on, and alter the user’s init file (see The Init File) so that this will apply to future sessions.
Require special confirmation to execute command from now on, and alter the user’s init file so that this will apply to future sessions.
The value of this variable should be a function. When the user
invokes a disabled command interactively, this function is called
instead of the disabled command. It can use this-command-keys
to determine what the user typed to run the command, and thus find the
command itself.
The value may also be nil
. Then all commands work normally,
even disabled ones.
By default, the value is a function that asks the user whether to proceed.
The command loop keeps a history of the complex commands that have
been executed, to make it convenient to repeat these commands. A
complex command is one for which the interactive argument reading
uses the minibuffer. This includes any M-x command, any
M-: command, and any command whose interactive
specification reads an argument from the minibuffer. Explicit use of
the minibuffer during the execution of the command itself does not cause
the command to be considered complex.
This variable’s value is a list of recent complex commands, each represented as a form to evaluate. It continues to accumulate all complex commands for the duration of the editing session, but when it reaches the maximum size (see Minibuffer History), the oldest elements are deleted as new ones are added.
command-history ⇒ ((switch-to-buffer "chistory.texi") (describe-key "^X^[") (visit-tags-table "~/emacs/src/") (find-tag "repeat-complex-command"))
This history list is actually a special case of minibuffer history (see Minibuffer History), with one special twist: the elements are expressions rather than strings.
There are a number of commands devoted to the editing and recall of
previous commands. The commands repeat-complex-command
, and
list-command-history
are described in the user manual
(see Repetition in The GNU Emacs Manual). Within the
minibuffer, the usual minibuffer history commands are available.
A keyboard macro is a canned sequence of input events that can be considered a command and made the definition of a key. The Lisp representation of a keyboard macro is a string or vector containing the events. Don’t confuse keyboard macros with Lisp macros (see Macros).
This function executes kbdmacro as a sequence of events. If kbdmacro is a string or vector, then the events in it are executed exactly as if they had been input by the user. The sequence is not expected to be a single key sequence; normally a keyboard macro definition consists of several key sequences concatenated.
If kbdmacro is a symbol, then its function definition is used in place of kbdmacro. If that is another symbol, this process repeats. Eventually the result should be a string or vector. If the result is not a symbol, string, or vector, an error is signaled.
The argument count is a repeat count; kbdmacro is executed that
many times. If count is omitted or nil
, kbdmacro is
executed once. If it is 0, kbdmacro is executed over and over until it
encounters an error or a failing search.
If loopfunc is non-nil
, it is a function that is called,
without arguments, prior to each iteration of the macro. If
loopfunc returns nil
, then this stops execution of the macro.
See Reading One Event, for an example of using execute-kbd-macro
.
This variable contains the string or vector that defines the keyboard
macro that is currently executing. It is nil
if no macro is
currently executing. A command can test this variable so as to behave
differently when run from an executing macro. Do not set this variable
yourself.
This variable is non-nil
if and only if a keyboard macro is
being defined. A command can test this variable so as to behave
differently while a macro is being defined. The value is
append
while appending to the definition of an existing macro.
The commands start-kbd-macro
, kmacro-start-macro
and
end-kbd-macro
set this variable—do not set it yourself.
The variable is always local to the current terminal and cannot be buffer-local. See Multiple Terminals.
This variable is the definition of the most recently defined keyboard
macro. Its value is a string or vector, or nil
.
The variable is always local to the current terminal and cannot be buffer-local. See Multiple Terminals.
This normal hook is run when a keyboard macro terminates, regardless of what caused it to terminate (reaching the macro end or an error which ended the macro prematurely).
The command bindings of input events are recorded in data structures called keymaps. Each entry in a keymap associates (or binds) an individual event type, either to another keymap or to a command. When an event type is bound to a keymap, that keymap is used to look up the next input event; this continues until a command is found. The whole process is called key lookup.
A key sequence, or key for short, is a sequence of one
or more input events that form a unit. Input events include
characters, function keys, mouse actions, or system events external to
Emacs, such as iconify-frame
(see Input Events).
The Emacs Lisp representation for a key sequence is a string or
vector. Unless otherwise stated, any Emacs Lisp function that accepts
a key sequence as an argument can handle both representations.
In the string representation, alphanumeric characters ordinarily
stand for themselves; for example, "a"
represents a
and "2"
represents 2. Control character events are
prefixed by the substring "\C-"
, and meta characters by
"\M-"
; for example, "\C-x"
represents the key C-x.
In addition, the TAB, RET, ESC, and DEL events
are represented by "\t"
, "\r"
, "\e"
, and
"\d"
respectively. The string representation of a complete key
sequence is the concatenation of the string representations of the
constituent events; thus, "\C-xl"
represents the key sequence
C-x l.
Key sequences containing function keys, mouse button events, system events, or non-ASCII characters such as C-= or H-a cannot be represented as strings; they have to be represented as vectors.
In the vector representation, each element of the vector represents
an input event, in its Lisp form. See Input Events. For example,
the vector [?\C-x ?l]
represents the key sequence C-x l.
For examples of key sequences written in string and vector representations, Init Rebinding in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This function converts the text keyseq-text (a string constant)
into a key sequence (a string or vector constant). The contents of
keyseq-text should use the same syntax as in the buffer invoked
by the C-x C-k RET (kmacro-edit-macro
) command; in
particular, you must surround function key names with
‘<…>’. See Edit Keyboard Macro in The GNU Emacs
Manual.
(kbd "C-x") ⇒ "\C-x" (kbd "C-x C-f") ⇒ "\C-x\C-f" (kbd "C-x 4 C-f") ⇒ "\C-x4\C-f" (kbd "X") ⇒ "X" (kbd "RET") ⇒ "^M" (kbd "C-c SPC") ⇒ "\C-c " (kbd "<f1> SPC") ⇒ [f1 32] (kbd "C-M-<down>") ⇒ [C-M-down]
The kbd
function is very permissive, and will try to return
something sensible even if the syntax used isn’t completely
conforming. To check whether the syntax is actually valid, use the
key-valid-p
function.
A keymap is a Lisp data structure that specifies key bindings for various key sequences.
A single keymap directly specifies definitions for individual events. When a key sequence consists of a single event, its binding in a keymap is the keymap’s definition for that event. The binding of a longer key sequence is found by an iterative process: first find the definition of the first event (which must itself be a keymap); then find the second event’s definition in that keymap, and so on until all the events in the key sequence have been processed.
If the binding of a key sequence is a keymap, we call the key sequence
a prefix key. Otherwise, we call it a complete key (because
no more events can be added to it). If the binding is nil
,
we call the key undefined. Examples of prefix keys are C-c,
C-x, and C-x 4. Examples of defined complete keys are
X, RET, and C-x 4 C-f. Examples of undefined complete
keys are C-x C-g, and C-c 3. See Prefix Keys, for more
details.
The rule for finding the binding of a key sequence assumes that the intermediate bindings (found for the events before the last) are all keymaps; if this is not so, the sequence of events does not form a unit—it is not really one key sequence. In other words, removing one or more events from the end of any valid key sequence must always yield a prefix key. For example, C-f C-n is not a key sequence; C-f is not a prefix key, so a longer sequence starting with C-f cannot be a key sequence.
The set of possible multi-event key sequences depends on the bindings for prefix keys; therefore, it can be different for different keymaps, and can change when bindings are changed. However, a one-event sequence is always a key sequence, because it does not depend on any prefix keys for its well-formedness.
At any time, several primary keymaps are active—that is, in use for finding key bindings. These are the global map, which is shared by all buffers; the local keymap, which is usually associated with a specific major mode; and zero or more minor mode keymaps, which belong to currently enabled minor modes. (Not all minor modes have keymaps.) The local keymap bindings shadow (i.e., take precedence over) the corresponding global bindings. The minor mode keymaps shadow both local and global keymaps. See Active Keymaps, for details.
Each keymap is a list whose CAR is the symbol keymap
. The
remaining elements of the list define the key bindings of the keymap.
A symbol whose function definition is a keymap is also a keymap. Use
the function keymapp
(see below) to test whether an object is a
keymap.
Several kinds of elements may appear in a keymap, after the symbol
keymap
that begins it:
(type . binding)
This specifies one binding, for events of type type. Each ordinary binding applies to events of a particular event type, which is always a character or a symbol. See Classifying Events. In this kind of binding, binding is a command.
(type item-name . binding)
This specifies a binding which is also a simple menu item that displays as item-name in the menu. See Simple Menu Items.
(type item-name help-string . binding)
This is a simple menu item with help string help-string.
(type menu-item . details)
This specifies a binding which is also an extended menu item. This allows use of other features. See Extended Menu Items.
(t . binding)
¶This specifies a default key binding; any event not bound by other
elements of the keymap is given binding as its binding. Default
bindings allow a keymap to bind all possible event types without having
to enumerate all of them. A keymap that has a default binding
completely masks any lower-precedence keymap, except for events
explicitly bound to nil
(see below).
char-table
If an element of a keymap is a char-table, it counts as holding bindings for all character events with no modifier bits (see modifier bits): the element whose index is c is the binding for the character c. This is a compact way to record lots of bindings. A keymap with such a char-table is called a full keymap. Other keymaps are called sparse keymaps.
vector
This kind of element is similar to a char-table: the element whose index is c is the binding for the character c. Since the range of characters that can be bound this way is limited by the vector size, and vector creation allocates space for all character codes from 0 up, this format should not be used except for creating menu keymaps (see Menu Keymaps), where the bindings themselves don’t matter.
string
¶Aside from elements that specify bindings for keys, a keymap can also have a string as an element. This is called the overall prompt string and makes it possible to use the keymap as a menu. See Defining Menus.
(keymap …)
If an element of a keymap is itself a keymap, it counts as if this inner keymap
were inlined in the outer keymap. This is used for multiple-inheritance, such
as in make-composed-keymap
.
When the binding is nil
, it doesn’t constitute a definition
but it does take precedence over a default binding or a binding in the
parent keymap. On the other hand, a binding of nil
does
not override lower-precedence keymaps; thus, if the local map
gives a binding of nil
, Emacs uses the binding from the
global map.
Keymaps do not directly record bindings for the meta characters.
Instead, meta characters are regarded for purposes of key lookup as
sequences of two characters, the first of which is ESC (or
whatever is currently the value of meta-prefix-char
). Thus, the
key M-a is internally represented as ESC a, and its
global binding is found at the slot for a in esc-map
(see Prefix Keys).
This conversion applies only to characters, not to function keys or other input events; thus, M-end has nothing to do with ESC end.
Here as an example is the local keymap for Lisp mode, a sparse keymap. It defines bindings for DEL, C-c C-z, C-M-q, and C-M-x (the actual value also contains a menu binding, which is omitted here for the sake of brevity).
lisp-mode-map ⇒
(keymap (3 keymap ;; C-c C-z (26 . run-lisp))
(27 keymap
;; C-M-x, treated as ESC C-x
(24 . lisp-send-defun))
;; This part is inherited from lisp-mode-shared-map
.
keymap
;; DEL
(127 . backward-delete-char-untabify)
(27 keymap
;; C-M-q, treated as ESC C-q
(17 . indent-sexp)))
This function returns t
if object is a keymap, nil
otherwise. More precisely, this function tests for a list whose
CAR is keymap
, or for a symbol whose function definition
satisfies keymapp
.
(keymapp '(keymap)) ⇒ t
(fset 'foo '(keymap)) (keymapp 'foo) ⇒ t
(keymapp (current-global-map)) ⇒ t
Here we describe the functions for creating keymaps.
This function creates and returns a new sparse keymap with no entries.
(A sparse keymap is the kind of keymap you usually want.) The new
keymap does not contain a char-table, unlike make-keymap
, and
does not bind any events.
(make-sparse-keymap) ⇒ (keymap)
If you specify prompt, that becomes the overall prompt string for the keymap. You should specify this only for menu keymaps (see Defining Menus). A keymap with an overall prompt string will always present a mouse menu or a keyboard menu if it is active for looking up the next input event. Don’t specify an overall prompt string for the main map of a major or minor mode, because that would cause the command loop to present a keyboard menu every time.
This function creates and returns a new full keymap. That keymap
contains a char-table (see Char-Tables) with slots for all
characters without modifiers. The new keymap initially binds all
these characters to nil
, and does not bind any other kind of
event. The argument prompt specifies a
prompt string, as in make-sparse-keymap
.
(make-keymap) ⇒ (keymap #^[nil nil keymap nil nil nil ...])
A full keymap is more efficient than a sparse keymap when it holds lots of bindings; for just a few, the sparse keymap is better.
You can create a keymap with the functions described above, and then
use keymap-set
(see Changing Key Bindings) to specify key
bindings in that map. When writing modes, however, you frequently
have to bind a large number of keys at once, and using
keymap-set
on them all can be tedious and error-prone. Instead
you can use define-keymap
, which creates a keymap and binds a
number of keys. Here’s a very basic example:
(define-keymap "n" #'forward-line "f" #'previous-line "C-c C-c" #'quit-window)
This function creates a new sparse keymap, defines the keystrokes in pairs, and returns the new keymap. It signals an error if there are duplicate key bindings in pairs.
pairs is a list of alternating key bindings and key definitions,
as accepted by keymap-set
. In addition, the key can be the
special symbol :menu
, in which case the definition should be a
menu definition as accepted by easy-menu-define
(see Easy Menu). Here’s a brief example of this usage:
(define-keymap :full t "g" #'eww-reload :menu '("Eww" ["Exit" quit-window t] ["Reload" eww-reload t]))
A number of keywords can be used before the key/definition pairs to
change features of the new keymap. If any of the feature keywords is
missing from the define-keymap
call, the default value for that
feature is nil
. Here’s a list of the available feature
keywords:
:full
If non-nil
, create a char-table keymap (as from
make-keymap
) instead of a sparse keymap (as from
make-sparse-keymap
(see Creating Keymaps). A sparse keymap
is the default.
:parent
If non-nil
, the value should be a keymap to use as the parent
(see Inheritance and Keymaps).
:keymap
If non-nil
, the value should be a keymap. Instead of creating
a new keymap, the specified keymap is modified instead.
:suppress
If non-nil
, the keymap will be suppressed with
suppress-keymap
(see Changing Key Bindings). By default,
digits and the minus sign are exempt from suppressing, but if the
value is nodigits
, this suppresses digits and minus-sign like
it does with other characters.
:name
If non-nil
, the value should be a string to use as the menu for
the keymap if you use it as a menu with x-popup-menu
(see Pop-Up Menus).
:prefix
If non-nil
, the value should be a symbol to be used as a prefix
command (see Prefix Keys). If this is the case, this symbol is
returned by define-keymap
instead of the map itself.
By far, the most common thing to do with a keymap is to bind it to a
variable. This is what virtually all modes do—a mode called
foo
almost always has a variable called foo-mode-map
.
This macro defines name as a variable, passes options
and pairs to define-keymap
, and uses the result as the
default value for the variable. It signals an error if there are
duplicate key bindings in pairs.
options is like the keywords in define-keymap
, but
there’s an additional :doc
keyword that provides the doc
string for the defined variable.
Here’s an example:
(defvar-keymap eww-textarea-map :parent text-mode-map :doc "Keymap for the eww text area." "RET" #'forward-line "TAB" #'shr-next-link)
Each command in the keymap can be marked as ‘repeatable’, i.e. usable
in repeat-mode
, by putting a repeat-map
property on it,
e.g.
(put 'undo 'repeat-map 'undo-repeat-map)
where the value of the property is the map to be used by
repeat-mode
.
To avoid repetitive invocations of put
, defvar-keymap
also has a :repeat
keyword, which can be used to specify which
commands in the keymap are usable by repeat-mode
. The
following values are available:
t
This means all the commands in the keymap are repeatable, and is the most common usage.
(:enter (commands ...) :exit (commands ...))
This specifies that the commands in the :enter
list enter
repeat-mode
, and the commands in the :exit
list exit
repeat mode.
If the :enter
list is empty, then all commands in the map enter
repeat-mode
. Specifying one or more commands in this list is
useful if there is a command which doesn’t exist in the map being
defined, but which should have the repeat-map
property.
If the :exit
list is empty then no commands in the map exit
repeat-mode
. Specifying one or more commands in this list is
useful if the keymap being defined contains a command that should not
have the repeat-map
property.
In order to make e.g. u repeat the undo
command, the
following two stanzas are equivalent:
(defvar-keymap undo-repeat-map "u" #'undo) (put 'undo 'repeat-map 'undo-repeat-map)
and
(defvar-keymap undo-repeat-map :repeat t "u" #'undo)
The latter is preferred when there are many commands in the map, all of which should be repeatable.
This function returns a copy of keymap. This is almost never needed. If you want a keymap that’s like another yet with a few changes, you should use map inheritance rather than copying. I.e., something like:
(let ((map (make-sparse-keymap))) (set-keymap-parent map <theirmap>) (keymap-set map ...) ...)
When performing copy-keymap
, any keymaps that
appear directly as bindings in keymap are also copied recursively,
and so on to any number of levels. However, recursive copying does not
take place when the definition of a character is a symbol whose function
definition is a keymap; the same symbol appears in the new copy.
(setq map (copy-keymap (current-local-map))) ⇒ (keymap
;; (This implements meta characters.)
(27 keymap
(83 . center-paragraph)
(115 . center-line))
(9 . tab-to-tab-stop))
(eq map (current-local-map)) ⇒ nil
(equal map (current-local-map)) ⇒ t
A keymap can inherit the bindings of another keymap, which we call the parent keymap. Such a keymap looks like this:
(keymap elements... . parent-keymap)
The effect is that this keymap inherits all the bindings of parent-keymap, whatever they may be at the time a key is looked up, but can add to them or override them with elements.
If you change the bindings in parent-keymap using
keymap-set
or other key-binding functions, these changed
bindings are visible in the inheriting keymap, unless shadowed by the
bindings made by elements. The converse is not true: if you use
keymap-set
to change bindings in the inheriting keymap, these
changes are recorded in elements, but have no effect on
parent-keymap.
The proper way to construct a keymap with a parent is to use
set-keymap-parent
; if you have code that directly constructs a
keymap with a parent, please convert the program to use
set-keymap-parent
instead.
This returns the parent keymap of keymap. If keymap
has no parent, keymap-parent
returns nil
.
This sets the parent keymap of keymap to parent, and returns
parent. If parent is nil
, this function gives
keymap no parent at all.
If keymap has submaps (bindings for prefix keys), they too receive new parent keymaps that reflect what parent specifies for those prefix keys.
Here is an example showing how to make a keymap that inherits
from text-mode-map
:
(let ((map (make-sparse-keymap))) (set-keymap-parent map text-mode-map) map)
A non-sparse keymap can have a parent too, but this is not very
useful. A non-sparse keymap always specifies something as the binding
for every numeric character code without modifier bits, even if it is
nil
, so these character’s bindings are never inherited from
the parent keymap.
Sometimes you want to make a keymap that inherits from more than one
map. You can use the function make-composed-keymap
for this.
This function returns a new keymap composed of the existing keymap(s)
maps, and optionally inheriting from a parent keymap
parent. maps can be a single keymap or a list of more
than one. When looking up a key in the resulting new map, Emacs
searches in each of the maps in turn, and then in parent,
stopping at the first match. A nil
binding in any one of
maps overrides any binding in parent, but it does not
override any non-nil
binding in any other of the maps.
For example, here is how Emacs sets the parent of
help-mode-map
, such that it inherits from both
button-buffer-map
and special-mode-map
:
(defvar-keymap help-mode-map :parent (make-composed-keymap button-buffer-map special-mode-map) ...)
A prefix key is a key sequence whose binding is a keymap. The
keymap defines what to do with key sequences that extend the prefix key.
For example, C-x is a prefix key, and it uses a keymap that is
also stored in the variable ctl-x-map
. This keymap defines
bindings for key sequences starting with C-x.
Some of the standard Emacs prefix keys use keymaps that are also found in Lisp variables:
esc-map
is the global keymap for the ESC prefix key. Thus,
the global definitions of all meta characters are actually found here.
This map is also the function definition of ESC-prefix
.
help-map
is the global keymap for the C-h prefix key.
mode-specific-map
is the global keymap for the prefix key
C-c. This map is actually global, not mode-specific, but its name
provides useful information about C-c in the output of C-h b
(display-bindings
), since the main use of this prefix key is for
mode-specific bindings.
ctl-x-map
is the global keymap used for the C-x prefix key.
This map is found via the function cell of the symbol
Control-X-prefix
.
mule-keymap
is the global keymap used for the C-x RET
prefix key.
ctl-x-4-map
is the global keymap used for the C-x 4 prefix
key.
ctl-x-5-map
is the global keymap used for the C-x 5 prefix
key.
2C-mode-map
is the global keymap used for the C-x 6 prefix
key.
tab-prefix-map
is the global keymap used for the C-x t prefix
key.
vc-prefix-map
is the global keymap used for the C-x v prefix
key.
goto-map
is the global keymap used for the M-g prefix
key.
search-map
is the global keymap used for the M-s prefix
key.
The keymap binding of a prefix key is used for looking up the event
that follows the prefix key. (It may instead be a symbol whose function
definition is a keymap. The effect is the same, but the symbol serves
as a name for the prefix key.) Thus, the binding of C-x is the
symbol Control-X-prefix
, whose function cell holds the keymap
for C-x commands. (The same keymap is also the value of
ctl-x-map
.)
Prefix key definitions can appear in any active keymap. The definitions of C-c, C-x, C-h and ESC as prefix keys appear in the global map, so these prefix keys are always available. Major and minor modes can redefine a key as a prefix by putting a prefix key definition for it in the local map or the minor mode’s map. See Active Keymaps.
If a key is defined as a prefix in more than one active map, then its various definitions are in effect merged: the commands defined in the minor mode keymaps come first, followed by those in the local map’s prefix definition, and then by those from the global map.
In the following example, we make C-p a prefix key in the local
keymap, in such a way that C-p is identical to C-x. Then
the binding for C-p C-f is the function find-file
, just
like C-x C-f. By contrast, the key sequence C-p 9 is not
found in any active keymap.
(use-local-map (make-sparse-keymap)) ⇒ nil
(keymap-local-set "C-p" ctl-x-map) ⇒ (keymap #^[nil nil keymap ...
(keymap-lookup nil "C-p C-f") ⇒ find-file
(keymap-lookup nil "C-p 9") ⇒ nil
This function prepares symbol for use as a prefix key’s binding:
it creates a sparse keymap and stores it as symbol’s function
definition. Subsequently binding a key sequence to symbol will
make that key sequence into a prefix key. The return value is symbol
.
This function also sets symbol as a variable, with the keymap as
its value. But if mapvar is non-nil
, it sets mapvar
as a variable instead.
If prompt is non-nil
, that becomes the overall prompt
string for the keymap. The prompt string should be given for menu keymaps
(see Defining Menus).
Emacs contains many keymaps, but at any time only a few keymaps are active. When Emacs receives user input, it translates the input event (see Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events), and looks for a key binding in the active keymaps.
Usually, the active keymaps are: (i) the keymap specified by the
keymap
property, (ii) the keymaps of enabled minor modes, (iii)
the current buffer’s local keymap, and (iv) the global keymap, in that
order. Emacs searches for each input key sequence in all these
keymaps.
Of these usual keymaps, the highest-precedence one is specified
by the keymap
text or overlay property at point, if any. (For
a mouse input event, Emacs uses the event position instead of point;
see Searching the Active Keymaps.)
Next in precedence are keymaps specified by enabled minor modes.
These keymaps, if any, are specified by the variables
emulation-mode-map-alists
,
minor-mode-overriding-map-alist
, and
minor-mode-map-alist
. See Controlling the Active Keymaps.
Next in precedence is the buffer’s local keymap, containing
key bindings specific to the buffer. The minibuffer also has a local
keymap (see Introduction to Minibuffers). If there is a local-map
text or overlay property at point, that specifies the local keymap to
use, in place of the buffer’s default local keymap.
The local keymap is normally set by the buffer’s major mode, and
every buffer with the same major mode shares the same local keymap.
Hence, if you call keymap-local-set
(see Commands for Binding Keys)
to change the local keymap in one buffer, that also affects the local
keymaps in other buffers with the same major mode.
Finally, the global keymap contains key bindings that are
defined regardless of the current buffer, such as C-f. It is
always active, and is bound to the variable global-map
.
Apart from the above usual keymaps, Emacs provides special ways
for programs to make other keymaps active. Firstly, the variable
overriding-local-map
specifies a keymap that replaces the usual
active keymaps, except for the global keymap. Secondly, the
terminal-local variable overriding-terminal-local-map
specifies
a keymap that takes precedence over all other keymaps
(including overriding-local-map
); this is normally used for
modal/transient key bindings (the function set-transient-map
provides a convenient interface for this). See Controlling the Active Keymaps, for details.
Making keymaps active is not the only way to use them. Keymaps are
also used in other ways, such as for translating events within
read-key-sequence
. See Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events.
See Standard Keymaps, for a list of some standard keymaps.
This returns the list of active keymaps that would be used by the
command loop in the current circumstances to look up a key sequence.
Normally it ignores overriding-local-map
and
overriding-terminal-local-map
, but if olp is non-nil
then it pays attention to them. position can optionally be either
an event position as returned by event-start
or a buffer
position, and may change the keymaps as described for
keymap-lookup
(see keymap-lookup).
Here is a pseudo-Lisp summary of how Emacs searches the active keymaps:
(or (if overriding-terminal-local-map (find-in overriding-terminal-local-map)) (if overriding-local-map (find-in overriding-local-map) (or (find-in (get-char-property (point) 'keymap)) (find-in-any emulation-mode-map-alists) (find-in-any minor-mode-overriding-map-alist) (find-in-any minor-mode-map-alist) (if (get-char-property (point) 'local-map) (find-in (get-char-property (point) 'local-map)) (find-in (current-local-map))))) (find-in (current-global-map)))
Here, find-in and find-in-any are pseudo functions that
search in one keymap and in an alist of keymaps, respectively. Note
that the set-transient-map
function works by setting
overriding-terminal-local-map
(see Controlling the Active Keymaps).
In the above pseudo-code, if a key sequence starts with a mouse
event (see Mouse Events), that event’s position is used instead of
point, and the event’s buffer is used instead of the current buffer.
In particular, this affects how the keymap
and local-map
properties are looked up. If a mouse event occurs on a string
embedded with a display
, before-string
, or
after-string
property (see Properties with Special Meanings), and the
string has a non-nil
keymap
or local-map
property, that overrides the corresponding property in the underlying
buffer text (i.e., the property specified by the underlying text is
ignored).
When a key binding is found in one of the active keymaps, and that binding is a command, the search is over—the command is executed. However, if the binding is a symbol with a value or a string, Emacs replaces the input key sequences with the variable’s value or the string, and restarts the search of the active keymaps. See Key Lookup.
The command which is finally found might also be remapped. See Remapping Commands.
This variable contains the default global keymap that maps Emacs
keyboard input to commands. The global keymap is normally this
keymap. The default global keymap is a full keymap that binds
self-insert-command
to all of the printing characters.
It is normal practice to change the bindings in the global keymap, but you should not assign this variable any value other than the keymap it starts out with.
This function returns the current global keymap. This is the same as
the value of global-map
unless you change one or the other.
The return value is a reference, not a copy; if you use
keymap-set
or other functions on it you will alter global
bindings.
(current-global-map) ⇒ (keymap [set-mark-command beginning-of-line ... delete-backward-char])
This function returns the current buffer’s local keymap, or nil
if it has none. In the following example, the keymap for the
*scratch* buffer (using Lisp Interaction mode) is a sparse keymap
in which the entry for ESC, ASCII code 27, is another sparse
keymap.
(current-local-map) ⇒ (keymap (10 . eval-print-last-sexp) (9 . lisp-indent-line) (127 . backward-delete-char-untabify)
(27 keymap (24 . eval-defun) (17 . indent-sexp)))
current-local-map
returns a reference to the local keymap, not
a copy of it; if you use keymap-set
or other functions on it
you will alter local bindings.
This function returns a list of the keymaps of currently enabled minor modes.
This function makes keymap the new current global keymap. It
returns nil
.
It is very unusual to change the global keymap.
This function makes keymap the new local keymap of the current
buffer. If keymap is nil
, then the buffer has no local
keymap. use-local-map
returns nil
. Most major mode
commands use this function.
This variable is an alist describing keymaps that may or may not be active according to the values of certain variables. Its elements look like this:
(variable . keymap)
The keymap keymap is active whenever variable has a
non-nil
value. Typically variable is the variable that
enables or disables a minor mode. See Keymaps and Minor Modes.
Note that elements of minor-mode-map-alist
do not have the same
structure as elements of minor-mode-alist
. The map must be the
CDR of the element; a list with the map as the second element will
not do. The CDR can be either a keymap (a list) or a symbol whose
function definition is a keymap.
When more than one minor mode keymap is active, the earlier one in
minor-mode-map-alist
takes priority. But you should design
minor modes so that they don’t interfere with each other. If you do
this properly, the order will not matter.
See Keymaps and Minor Modes, for more information about minor
modes. See also minor-mode-key-binding
(see Functions for Key Lookup).
This variable allows major modes to override the key bindings for
particular minor modes. The elements of this alist look like the
elements of minor-mode-map-alist
: (variable
. keymap)
.
If a variable appears as an element of
minor-mode-overriding-map-alist
, the map specified by that
element totally replaces any map specified for the same variable in
minor-mode-map-alist
.
minor-mode-overriding-map-alist
is automatically buffer-local in
all buffers.
If non-nil
, this variable holds a keymap to use instead of the
buffer’s local keymap, any text property or overlay keymaps, and any
minor mode keymaps. This keymap, if specified, overrides all other
maps that would have been active, except for the current global map.
If non-nil
, this variable holds a keymap to use instead of
overriding-local-map
, the buffer’s local keymap, text property
or overlay keymaps, and all the minor mode keymaps.
This variable is always local to the current terminal and cannot be buffer-local. See Multiple Terminals. It is used to implement incremental search mode.
If this variable is non-nil
, the value of
overriding-local-map
or overriding-terminal-local-map
can
affect the display of the menu bar. The default value is nil
, so
those map variables have no effect on the menu bar.
Note that these two map variables do affect the execution of key sequences entered using the menu bar, even if they do not affect the menu bar display. So if a menu bar key sequence comes in, you should clear the variables before looking up and executing that key sequence. Modes that use the variables would typically do this anyway; normally they respond to events that they do not handle by “unreading” them and exiting.
This variable holds a keymap for special events. If an event type has a
binding in this keymap, then it is special, and the binding for the
event is run directly by read-event
. See Special Events.
This variable holds a list of keymap alists to use for emulation
modes. It is intended for modes or packages using multiple minor-mode
keymaps. Each element is a keymap alist which has the same format and
meaning as minor-mode-map-alist
, or a symbol with a variable
binding which is such an alist. The active keymaps in each alist
are used before minor-mode-map-alist
and
minor-mode-overriding-map-alist
.
This function adds keymap as a transient keymap, which takes precedence over other keymaps for one (or more) subsequent keys.
Normally, keymap is used just once, to look up the very next key.
If the optional argument keep-pred is t
, the map stays
active as long as the user types keys defined in keymap; when the
user types a key that is not in keymap, the transient keymap is
deactivated and normal key lookup continues for that key.
The keep-pred argument can also be a function. In that case, the
function is called with no arguments, prior to running each command,
while keymap is active; it should return non-nil
if
keymap should stay active.
The optional argument on-exit, if non-nil
, specifies a
function that is called, with no arguments, after keymap is
deactivated.
The optional argument message specifies the message to display
after activating the transient map. If message is a string, it
is the format string for the message, and any ‘%k’ specifier in
that string is replaced with the list of keys from the transient map.
Any other non-nil
value of message stands for the default
message format ‘Repeat with %k’.
If the optional argument timeout is non-nil
, it should be
a number that specifies how many seconds of idle time to wait before
deactivating keymap. The value of the variable
set-transient-map-timeout
, if non-nil
, overrides the
value of this argument.
This function works by adding and removing keymap from the
variable overriding-terminal-local-map
, which takes precedence
over all other active keymaps (see Searching the Active Keymaps).
Key lookup is the process of finding the binding of a key sequence from a given keymap. The execution or use of the binding is not part of key lookup.
Key lookup uses just the event type of each event in the key sequence;
the rest of the event is ignored. In fact, a key sequence used for key
lookup may designate a mouse event with just its types (a symbol)
instead of the entire event (a list). See Input Events. Such
a key sequence is insufficient for command-execute
to run,
but it is sufficient for looking up or rebinding a key.
When the key sequence consists of multiple events, key lookup processes the events sequentially: the binding of the first event is found, and must be a keymap; then the second event’s binding is found in that keymap, and so on until all the events in the key sequence are used up. (The binding thus found for the last event may or may not be a keymap.) Thus, the process of key lookup is defined in terms of a simpler process for looking up a single event in a keymap. How that is done depends on the type of object associated with the event in that keymap.
Let’s use the term keymap entry to describe the value found by
looking up an event type in a keymap. (This doesn’t include the item
string and other extra elements in a keymap element for a menu item, because
keymap-lookup
and other key lookup functions don’t include them in
the returned value.) While any Lisp object may be stored in a keymap
as a keymap entry, not all make sense for key lookup. Here is a table
of the meaningful types of keymap entries:
nil
¶nil
means that the events used so far in the lookup form an
undefined key. When a keymap fails to mention an event type at all, and
has no default binding, that is equivalent to a binding of nil
for that event type.
The events used so far in the lookup form a complete key, and command is its binding. See What Is a Function?.
The array (either a string or a vector) is a keyboard macro. The events used so far in the lookup form a complete key, and the array is its binding. See Keyboard Macros, for more information.
The events used so far in the lookup form a prefix key. The next event of the key sequence is looked up in keymap.
The meaning of a list depends on what it contains:
keymap
, then the list
is a keymap, and is treated as a keymap (see above).
lambda
, then the list is a
lambda expression. This is presumed to be a function, and is treated
as such (see above). In order to execute properly as a key binding,
this function must be a command—it must have an interactive
specification. See Defining Commands.
The function definition of symbol is used in place of symbol. If that too is a symbol, then this process is repeated, any number of times. Ultimately this should lead to an object that is a keymap, a command, or a keyboard macro.
Note that keymaps and keyboard macros (strings and vectors) are not
valid functions, so a symbol with a keymap, string, or vector as its
function definition is invalid as a function. It is, however, valid as
a key binding. If the definition is a keyboard macro, then the symbol
is also valid as an argument to command-execute
(see Interactive Call).
The symbol undefined
is worth special mention: it means to treat
the key as undefined. Strictly speaking, the key is defined, and its
binding is the command undefined
; but that command does the same
thing that is done automatically for an undefined key: it rings the bell
(by calling ding
) but does not signal an error.
undefined
is used in local keymaps to override a global key
binding and make the key undefined locally. A local binding of
nil
would fail to do this because it would not override the
global binding.
If any other type of object is found, the events used so far in the lookup form a complete key, and the object is its binding, but the binding is not executable as a command.
In short, a keymap entry may be a keymap, a command, a keyboard
macro, a symbol that leads to one of them, or nil
.
Here are the functions and variables pertaining to key lookup.
This function returns the definition of key in keymap. All
the other functions described in this chapter that look up keys use
keymap-lookup
. Here are examples:
(keymap-lookup (current-global-map) "C-x C-f") ⇒ find-file
(keymap-lookup (current-global-map) "C-x C-f 1 2 3 4 5") ⇒ 2
If the string or vector key is not a valid key sequence according to the prefix keys specified in keymap, it must be too long and have extra events at the end that do not fit into a single key sequence. Then the value is a number, the number of events at the front of key that compose a complete key.
If accept-defaults is non-nil
, then keymap-lookup
considers default bindings as well as bindings for the specific events
in key. Otherwise, keymap-lookup
reports only bindings for
the specific sequence key, ignoring default bindings except when
you explicitly ask about them. (To do this, supply t
as an
element of key; see Format of Keymaps.)
If key contains a meta character (not a function key), that
character is implicitly replaced by a two-character sequence: the value
of meta-prefix-char
, followed by the corresponding non-meta
character. Thus, the first example below is handled by conversion into
the second example.
(keymap-lookup (current-global-map) "M-f") ⇒ forward-word
(keymap-lookup (current-global-map) "ESC f") ⇒ forward-word
The keymap argument can be nil
, meaning to look up
key in the current keymaps (as returned by
current-active-maps
, see Active Keymaps); or it can be a
keymap or a list of keymaps, meaning to look up key only in the
specified keymaps.
Unlike read-key-sequence
, this function does not modify the
specified events in ways that discard information (see Key Sequence Input). In particular, it does not convert letters to lower case and
it does not change drag events to clicks.
Like the normal command loop, keymap-lookup
will remap the
command resulting from looking up key by looking up the command
in the current keymaps. However, if the optional third argument
no-remap is non-nil
, keymap-lookup
returns the
command without remapping.
If the optional argument position is non-nil
, it
specifies a mouse position as returned by event-start
and
event-end
, and the lookup occurs in the keymaps associated with
that position, instead of in keymap. position can also be
a number or a marker, in which case it is interpreted as a buffer
position, and the function uses the keymap properties at that position
instead of at point.
Used in keymaps to undefine keys. It calls ding
, but does
not cause an error.
This function returns the binding for key in the current
local keymap, or nil
if it is undefined there.
The argument accept-defaults controls checking for default bindings,
as in keymap-lookup
(above).
This function returns the binding for command key in the
current global keymap, or nil
if it is undefined there.
The argument accept-defaults controls checking for default bindings,
as in keymap-lookup
(above).
This function returns a list of all the active minor mode bindings of
key. More precisely, it returns an alist of pairs
(modename . binding)
, where modename is the
variable that enables the minor mode, and binding is key’s
binding in that mode. If key has no minor-mode bindings, the
value is nil
.
If the first binding found is not a prefix definition (a keymap or a symbol defined as a keymap), all subsequent bindings from other minor modes are omitted, since they would be completely shadowed. Similarly, the list omits non-prefix bindings that follow prefix bindings.
The argument accept-defaults controls checking for default
bindings, as in keymap-lookup
(above).
This variable is the meta-prefix character code. It is used for translating a meta character to a two-character sequence so it can be looked up in a keymap. For useful results, the value should be a prefix event (see Prefix Keys). The default value is 27, which is the ASCII code for ESC.
As long as the value of meta-prefix-char
remains 27, key lookup
translates M-b into ESC b, which is normally defined
as the backward-word
command. However, if you were to set
meta-prefix-char
to 24, the code for C-x, then Emacs will
translate M-b into C-x b, whose standard binding is the
switch-to-buffer
command. (Don’t actually do this!) Here is an
illustration of what would happen:
meta-prefix-char ; The default value.
⇒ 27
(key-binding "\M-b") ⇒ backward-word
?\C-x ; The print representation ⇒ 24 ; of a character.
(setq meta-prefix-char 24) ⇒ 24
(key-binding "\M-b") ⇒ switch-to-buffer ; Now, typing M-b is ; like typing C-x b. (setq meta-prefix-char 27) ; Avoid confusion! ⇒ 27 ; Restore the default value!
This translation of one event into two happens only for characters, not for other kinds of input events. Thus, M-F1, a function key, is not converted into ESC F1.
The way to rebind a key is to change its entry in a keymap. If you
change a binding in the global keymap, the change is effective in all
buffers (though it has no direct effect in buffers that shadow the
global binding with a local one). If you change the current buffer’s
local map, that usually affects all buffers using the same major mode.
The keymap-global-set
and keymap-local-set
functions are
convenient interfaces for these operations (see Commands for Binding Keys). You can also use keymap-set
, a more general
function; then you must explicitly specify the map to change.
When choosing the key sequences for Lisp programs to rebind, please follow the Emacs conventions for use of various keys (see Key Binding Conventions).
The functions below signal an error if keymap is not a keymap, or if key is not a valid key.
key is a string representing a single key or a series of key
strokes, and must satisfy key-valid-p
. Key strokes are
separated by a single space character.
Each key stroke is either a single character, or the name of an event, surrounded by angle brackets. In addition, any key stroke may be preceded by one or more modifier keys. Finally, a limited number of characters have a special shorthand syntax. Here’s some example key sequences:
The key f.
A three key sequence of the keys S, o and m.
A two key sequence of the keys c with the control modifier and then the key o
The key named left with the hyper modifier.
The return key with a meta modifier.
The space key with both the control and meta modifiers.
The only keys that have a special shorthand syntax are NUL, RET, TAB, LFD, ESC, SPC and DEL.
The modifiers have to be specified in alphabetical order: ‘A-C-H-M-S-s’, which is ‘Alt-Control-Hyper-Meta-Shift-super’.
This function sets the binding for key in keymap. (If
key is more than one event long, the change is actually made
in another keymap reached from keymap.) The argument
binding can be any Lisp object, but only certain types are
meaningful. (For a list of meaningful types, see Key Lookup.)
The value returned by keymap-set
is binding.
If key is <t>, this sets the default binding in keymap. When an event has no binding of its own, the Emacs command loop uses the keymap’s default binding, if there is one.
Every prefix of key must be a prefix key (i.e., bound to a keymap)
or undefined; otherwise an error is signaled. If some prefix of
key is undefined, then keymap-set
defines it as a prefix
key so that the rest of key can be defined as specified.
If there was previously no binding for key in keymap, the new binding is added at the beginning of keymap. The order of bindings in a keymap makes no difference for keyboard input, but it does matter for menu keymaps (see Menu Keymaps).
This function is the inverse of keymap-set
, it unsets the
binding for key in keymap, which is the same as setting
the binding to nil
. In order to instead remove the binding
completely, specify remove as non-nil
. This only makes a
difference if keymap has a parent keymap: if you just unset a key
in a child map, it will still shadow the same key in the parent
keymap; using remove instead will allow the key in the parent keymap
to be used.
Note: using keymap-unset
with remove non-nil
is
intended for users to put in their init file; Emacs packages should
avoid using it if possible, since they have complete control over
their own keymaps anyway, and they should not be altering other
packages’ keymaps.
This example creates a sparse keymap and makes a number of bindings in it:
(setq map (make-sparse-keymap)) ⇒ (keymap)
(keymap-set map "C-f" 'forward-char) ⇒ forward-char
map ⇒ (keymap (6 . forward-char))
;; Build sparse submap for C-x and bind f in that.
(keymap-set map "C-x f" 'forward-word)
⇒ forward-word
map ⇒ (keymap (24 keymap ; C-x (102 . forward-word)) ; f (6 . forward-char)) ; C-f
;; Bind C-p to thectl-x-map
. (keymap-set map "C-p" ctl-x-map) ;;ctl-x-map
⇒ [nil ... find-file ... backward-kill-sentence]
;; Bind C-f to foo
in the ctl-x-map
.
(keymap-set map "C-p C-f" 'foo)
⇒ 'foo
map
⇒ (keymap ; Note foo
in ctl-x-map
.
(16 keymap [nil ... foo ... backward-kill-sentence])
(24 keymap
(102 . forward-word))
(6 . forward-char))
Note that storing a new binding for C-p C-f actually works by
changing an entry in ctl-x-map
, and this has the effect of
changing the bindings of both C-p C-f and C-x C-f in the
default global map.
keymap-set
is the general work horse for defining a key in a
keymap. When writing modes, however, you frequently have to bind a
large number of keys at once, and using keymap-set
on them all
can be tedious and error-prone. Instead you can use
define-keymap
, which creates a keymap and binds a number of
keys. See Creating Keymaps, for details.
The function substitute-key-definition
scans a keymap for
keys that have a certain binding and rebinds them with a different
binding. Another feature which is cleaner and can often produce the
same results is to remap one command into another (see Remapping Commands).
This function replaces olddef with newdef for any keys in
keymap that were bound to olddef. In other words,
olddef is replaced with newdef wherever it appears. The
function returns nil
.
For example, this redefines C-x C-f, if you do it in an Emacs with standard bindings:
(substitute-key-definition 'find-file 'find-file-read-only (current-global-map))
If oldmap is non-nil
, that changes the behavior of
substitute-key-definition
: the bindings in oldmap determine
which keys to rebind. The rebindings still happen in keymap, not
in oldmap. Thus, you can change one map under the control of the
bindings in another. For example,
(substitute-key-definition 'delete-backward-char 'my-funny-delete my-map global-map)
puts the special deletion command in my-map
for whichever keys
are globally bound to the standard deletion command.
Here is an example showing a keymap before and after substitution:
(setq map (list 'keymap (cons ?1 olddef-1) (cons ?2 olddef-2) (cons ?3 olddef-1))) ⇒ (keymap (49 . olddef-1) (50 . olddef-2) (51 . olddef-1))
(substitute-key-definition 'olddef-1 'newdef map) ⇒ nil
map ⇒ (keymap (49 . newdef) (50 . olddef-2) (51 . newdef))
This function changes the contents of the full keymap keymap by
remapping self-insert-command
to the command undefined
(see Remapping Commands). This has the effect of undefining all
printing characters, thus making ordinary insertion of text impossible.
suppress-keymap
returns nil
.
If nodigits is nil
, then suppress-keymap
defines
digits to run digit-argument
, and - to run
negative-argument
. Otherwise it makes them undefined like the
rest of the printing characters.
The suppress-keymap
function does not make it impossible to
modify a buffer, as it does not suppress commands such as yank
and quoted-insert
. To prevent any modification of a buffer, make
it read-only (see Read-Only Buffers).
Since this function modifies keymap, you would normally use it
on a newly created keymap. Operating on an existing keymap
that is used for some other purpose is likely to cause trouble; for
example, suppressing global-map
would make it impossible to use
most of Emacs.
This function can be used to initialize the local keymap of a major
mode for which insertion of text is not desirable. But usually such a
mode should be derived from special-mode
(see Basic Major Modes); then its keymap will automatically inherit from
special-mode-map
, which is already suppressed. Here is how
special-mode-map
is defined:
(defvar special-mode-map (let ((map (make-sparse-keymap))) (suppress-keymap map) (keymap-set map "q" 'quit-window) ... map))
Historically, Emacs has supported a number of different syntaxes for
defining keys. The documented way to bind a key today is to use the
syntax supported by key-valid-p
, which is what all the
functions like keymap-set
and keymap-lookup
supports.
This section documents the old-style syntax and interface functions;
they should not be used in new code.
define-key
(and other low-level functions that are used to
rebind keys) understand a number of different syntaxes for the keys.
You can use a list containing modifier names plus one base event (a
character or function key name). For example, [(control ?a)
(meta b)]
is equivalent to C-a M-b and [(hyper control
left)]
is equivalent to C-H-left.
Internally, key sequences are often represented as strings using the
special escape sequences for shift, control and meta modifiers
(see String Type), but this representation can also be used by
users when rebinding keys. A string like "\M-x"
is read as
containing a single M-x, "\C-f"
is read as containing a
single C-f, and "\M-\C-x"
and "\C-\M-x"
are both
read as containing a single C-M-x.
This is the other internal representation of key sequences. It supports a fuller range of modifiers than the string representation, and also support function keys. An example is ‘[?\C-\H-x home]’, which represents the C-H-x home key sequence. See Character Type.
This function is like keymap-set
(see Changing Key Bindings, but understands only the legacy key syntaxes.
In addition, this function also has a remove argument. If it is
non-nil
, the definition will be removed. This is almost the
same as setting the definition to nil
, but makes a difference
if the keymap has a parent, and key is shadowing the same
binding in the parent. With remove, subsequent lookups will
return the binding in the parent, whereas with a nil
definition the
lookups will return nil
.
Here are other legacy key definition functions and commands, with the equivalent modern function to use instead in new code.
This function sets the binding of key in the current global map
to binding. Use keymap-global-set
instead.
This function removes the binding of key from the current
global map. Use keymap-global-unset
instead.
This function sets the binding of key in the current local
keymap to binding. Use keymap-local-set
instead.
This function removes the binding of key from the current
local map. Use keymap-local-unset
instead.
This function replaces olddef with newdef for any keys in
keymap that were bound to olddef. In other words,
olddef is replaced with newdef wherever it appears. The
function returns nil
. Use keymap-substitute
instead.
Define a binding in map for key, with value binding,
just like define-key
, but position the binding in map after
the binding for the event after. The argument key should be
of length one—a vector or string with just one element. But
after should be a single event type—a symbol or a character, not
a sequence. The new binding goes after the binding for after. If
after is t
or is omitted, then the new binding goes last, at
the end of the keymap. However, new bindings are added before any
inherited keymap. Use keymap-set-after
instead of this function.
This function modifies keyboard-translate-table
to translate
character code from into character code to. It creates
the keyboard translate table if necessary. Use key-translate
instead.
This function returns the binding for key according to the
current active keymaps. The result is nil
if key is
undefined in the keymaps. The argument accept-defaults controls
checking for default bindings, as in lookup-key
(see Functions for Key Lookup). If no-remap is
non-nil
, key-binding
ignores command remappings
(see Remapping Commands) and returns the binding directly
specified for key. The optional argument position should
be either a buffer position or an event position like the value of
event-start
; it tells the function to consult the maps
determined based on that position.
Emacs signals an error if key is not a string or a vector.
Use keymap-lookup
instead of this function.
This function returns the definition of key in keymap. If the string or vector key is not a valid key sequence according to the prefix keys specified in keymap, it must be too long and have extra events at the end that do not fit into a single key sequence. Then the value is a number, the number of events at the front of key that compose a complete key.
If accept-defaults is non-nil
, then lookup-key
considers default bindings as well as bindings for the specific events
in key. Otherwise, lookup-key
reports only bindings for
the specific sequence key, ignoring default bindings except when
you explicitly ask about them.
Use keymap-lookup
instead of this function.
This function returns the binding for key in the current
local keymap, or nil
if it is undefined there.
The argument accept-defaults controls checking for default bindings,
as in lookup-key
(above).
This function returns the binding for command key in the
current global keymap, or nil
if it is undefined there.
The argument accept-defaults controls checking for default bindings,
as in lookup-key
(above).
This function converts a list of modifier names and a basic event type to an event type which specifies all of them. The basic event type must be the last element of the list. For example,
(event-convert-list '(control ?a)) ⇒ 1 (event-convert-list '(control meta ?a)) ⇒ -134217727 (event-convert-list '(control super f1)) ⇒ C-s-f1
A special kind of key binding can be used to remap one command
to another, without having to refer to the key sequence(s) bound to
the original command. To use this feature, make a key binding for a
key sequence that starts with the dummy event remap
, followed
by the command name you want to remap; for the binding, specify the
new definition (usually a command name, but possibly any other valid
definition for a key binding).
For example, suppose My mode provides a special command
my-kill-line
, which should be invoked instead of
kill-line
. To establish this, its mode keymap should contain
the following remapping:
(keymap-set my-mode-map "<remap> <kill-line>" 'my-kill-line)
Then, whenever my-mode-map
is active, if the user types
C-k (the default global key sequence for kill-line
) Emacs
will instead run my-kill-line
.
Note that remapping only takes place through active keymaps; for
example, putting a remapping in a prefix keymap like ctl-x-map
typically has no effect, as such keymaps are not themselves active.
In addition, remapping only works through a single level; in the
following example,
(keymap-set my-mode-map "<remap> <kill-line>" 'my-kill-line) (keymap-set my-mode-map "<remap> <my-kill-line>" 'my-other-kill-line)
kill-line
is not remapped to my-other-kill-line
.
Instead, if an ordinary key binding specifies kill-line
, it is
remapped to my-kill-line
; if an ordinary binding specifies
my-kill-line
, it is remapped to my-other-kill-line
.
To undo the remapping of a command, remap it to nil
; e.g.,
(keymap-set my-mode-map "<remap> <kill-line>" nil)
This function returns the remapping for command (a symbol),
given the current active keymaps. If command is not remapped
(which is the usual situation), or not a symbol, the function returns
nil
. position
can optionally specify a buffer position
or an event position to determine the keymaps to use, as in
key-binding
.
If the optional argument keymaps
is non-nil
, it
specifies a list of keymaps to search in. This argument is ignored if
position
is non-nil
.
When the read-key-sequence
function reads a key sequence
(see Key Sequence Input), it uses translation keymaps to
translate certain event sequences into others. The translation
keymaps are input-decode-map
, local-function-key-map
,
and key-translation-map
(in order of priority).
Translation keymaps have the same structure as other keymaps, but are used differently: they specify translations to make while reading key sequences, rather than bindings for complete key sequences. As each key sequence is read, it is checked against each translation keymap. If one of the translation keymaps binds k to a vector v, then whenever k appears as a sub-sequence anywhere in a key sequence, that sub-sequence is replaced with the events in v.
For example, VT100 terminals send ESC O P when the
keypad key PF1 is pressed. On such terminals, Emacs must
translate that sequence of events into a single event pf1
.
This is done by binding ESC O P to [pf1]
in
input-decode-map
. Thus, when you type C-c PF1 on
the terminal, the terminal emits the character sequence C-c
ESC O P, and read-key-sequence
translates this back into
C-c PF1 and returns it as the vector [?\C-c pf1]
.
Translation keymaps take effect only after Emacs has decoded the
keyboard input (via the input coding system specified by
keyboard-coding-system
). See Terminal I/O Encoding.
This variable holds a keymap that describes the character sequences sent by function keys on an ordinary character terminal.
The value of input-decode-map
is usually set up automatically
according to the terminal’s Terminfo or Termcap entry, but sometimes
those need help from terminal-specific Lisp files. Emacs comes with
terminal-specific files for many common terminals; their main purpose is
to make entries in input-decode-map
beyond those that can be
deduced from Termcap and Terminfo. See Terminal-Specific Initialization.
This variable holds a keymap similar to input-decode-map
except
that it describes key sequences which should be translated to
alternative interpretations that are usually preferred. It applies
after input-decode-map
and before key-translation-map
.
Entries in local-function-key-map
are ignored if they conflict
with bindings made in the minor mode, local, or global keymaps. I.e.,
the remapping only applies if the original key sequence would
otherwise not have any binding.
local-function-key-map
inherits from function-key-map
.
The latter should only be altered if you want the binding to apply in
all terminals, so using the former is almost always preferred.
This variable is another keymap used just like input-decode-map
to translate input events into other events. It differs from
input-decode-map
in that it goes to work after
local-function-key-map
is finished rather than before; it
receives the results of translation by local-function-key-map
.
Just like input-decode-map
, but unlike
local-function-key-map
, this keymap is applied regardless of
whether the input key-sequence has a normal binding. Note however
that actual key bindings can have an effect on
key-translation-map
, even though they are overridden by it.
Indeed, actual key bindings override local-function-key-map
and
thus may alter the key sequence that key-translation-map
receives. Clearly, it is better to avoid this type of situation.
The intent of key-translation-map
is for users to map one
character set to another, including ordinary characters normally bound
to self-insert-command
.
You can use input-decode-map
, local-function-key-map
,
and key-translation-map
for more than simple aliases, by using
a function, instead of a key sequence, as the translation of a
key. Then this function is called to compute the translation of that
key.
The key translation function receives one argument, which is the prompt
that was specified in read-key-sequence
—or nil
if the
key sequence is being read by the editor command loop. In most cases
you can ignore the prompt value.
If the function reads input itself, it can have the effect of altering the event that follows. For example, here’s how to define C-c h to turn the character that follows into a Hyper character:
(defun hyperify (prompt) (let ((e (read-event))) (vector (if (numberp e) (logior (ash 1 24) e) (if (memq 'hyper (event-modifiers e)) e (add-event-modifier "H-" e)))))) (defun add-event-modifier (string e) (let ((symbol (if (symbolp e) e (car e)))) (setq symbol (intern (concat string (symbol-name symbol)))) (if (symbolp e) symbol (cons symbol (cdr e))))) (keymap-set local-function-key-map "C-c h" 'hyperify)
The end of a key sequence is detected when that key sequence either is bound to a command, or when Emacs determines that no additional event can lead to a sequence that is bound to a command.
This means that, while input-decode-map
and key-translation-map
apply regardless of whether the original key sequence would have a binding, the
presence of such a binding can still prevent translation from taking place.
For example, let us return to our VT100 example above and add a binding for
C-c ESC to the global map; now when the user hits C-c
PF1 Emacs will fail to decode C-c ESC O P into C-c
PF1 because it will stop reading keys right after C-c ESC,
leaving O P for later. This is in case the user really hit C-c
ESC, in which case Emacs should not sit there waiting for the next key
to decide whether the user really pressed ESC or PF1.
For that reason, it is better to avoid binding commands to key sequences where the end of the key sequence is a prefix of a key translation. The main such problematic suffixes/prefixes are ESC, M-O (which is really ESC O) and M-[ (which is really ESC [).
This section describes some convenient interactive interfaces for
changing key bindings. They work by calling keymap-set
(see Changing Key Bindings). In interactive use, these commands
prompt for the argument key and expect the user to type a valid
key sequence; they also prompt for the binding of the key
sequence, and expect the name of a command (i.e., a symbol that
satisfies commandp
, see Interactive Call). When called
from Lisp, these commands expect key to be a string that
satisfies key-valid-p
(see Key Sequences), and
binding to be any Lisp object that is meaningful in a keymap
(see Key Lookup).
People often use keymap-global-set
in their init files
(see The Init File) for simple customization. For example,
(keymap-global-set "C-x C-\\" 'next-line)
redefines C-x C-\ to move down a line.
(keymap-global-set "M-<mouse-1>" 'mouse-set-point)
redefines the first (leftmost) mouse button, entered with the Meta key, to set point where you click.
Be careful when using non-ASCII text characters in Lisp specifications of keys to bind. If these are read as multibyte text, as they usually will be in a Lisp file (see Loading Non-ASCII Characters), you must type the keys as multibyte too. For instance, if you use this:
(keymap-global-set "ö" 'my-function) ; bind o-umlaut
and your language environment is multibyte Latin-1, these commands actually bind the multibyte character with code 246, not the byte code 246 (M-v) sent by a Latin-1 terminal. In order to use this binding, you need to teach Emacs how to decode the keyboard by using an appropriate input method (see Input Methods in The GNU Emacs Manual).
This function sets the binding of key in the current global map to binding.
(keymap-global-set key binding) ≡ (keymap-set (current-global-map) key binding)
This function removes the binding of key from the current global map.
One use of this function is in preparation for defining a longer key that uses key as a prefix—which would not be allowed if key has a non-prefix binding. For example:
(keymap-global-unset "C-l") ⇒ nil
(keymap-global-set "C-l C-l" 'redraw-display) ⇒ nil
This function sets the binding of key in the current local keymap to binding.
(keymap-local-set key binding) ≡ (keymap-set (current-local-map) key binding)
This function removes the binding of key from the current local map.
This section describes functions used to scan all the current
keymaps for the sake of printing help information. To display the
bindings in a particular keymap, you can use the
describe-keymap
command (see Other Help
Commands in The GNU Emacs Manual)
This function returns a list of all the keymaps that can be reached (via
zero or more prefix keys) from keymap. The value is an
association list with elements of the form (key .
map)
, where key is a prefix key whose definition in
keymap is map.
The elements of the alist are ordered so that the key increases
in length. The first element is always ([] . keymap)
,
because the specified keymap is accessible from itself with a prefix of
no events.
If prefix is given, it should be a prefix key sequence; then
accessible-keymaps
includes only the submaps whose prefixes start
with prefix. These elements look just as they do in the value of
(accessible-keymaps)
; the only difference is that some elements
are omitted.
In the example below, the returned alist indicates that the key
ESC, which is displayed as ‘^[’, is a prefix key whose
definition is the sparse keymap (keymap (83 . center-paragraph)
(115 . foo))
.
(accessible-keymaps (current-local-map))
⇒(([] keymap
(27 keymap ; Note this keymap for ESC is repeated below.
(83 . center-paragraph)
(115 . center-line))
(9 . tab-to-tab-stop))
("^[" keymap (83 . center-paragraph) (115 . foo)))
In the following example, C-h is a prefix key that uses a sparse
keymap starting with (keymap (118 . describe-variable)…)
.
Another prefix, C-x 4, uses a keymap which is also the value of
the variable ctl-x-4-map
. The event mode-line
is one of
several dummy events used as prefixes for mouse actions in special parts
of a window.
(accessible-keymaps (current-global-map)) ⇒ (([] keymap [set-mark-command beginning-of-line ... delete-backward-char])
("^H" keymap (118 . describe-variable) ... (8 . help-for-help))
("^X" keymap [x-flush-mouse-queue ... backward-kill-sentence])
("^[" keymap [mark-sexp backward-sexp ... backward-kill-word])
("^X4" keymap (15 . display-buffer) ...)
([mode-line] keymap (S-mouse-2 . mouse-split-window-horizontally) ...))
These are not all the keymaps you would see in actuality.
The function map-keymap
calls function once
for each binding in keymap. It passes two arguments,
the event type and the value of the binding. If keymap
has a parent, the parent’s bindings are included as well.
This works recursively: if the parent has itself a parent, then the
grandparent’s bindings are also included and so on.
This function is the cleanest way to examine all the bindings in a keymap.
This function is a subroutine used by the where-is
command
(see Help in The GNU Emacs Manual). It returns a list
of all key sequences (of any length) that are bound to command in a
set of keymaps.
The argument command can be any object; it is compared with all
keymap entries using eq
.
If keymap is nil
, then the maps used are the current active
keymaps, disregarding overriding-local-map
(that is, pretending
its value is nil
). If keymap is a keymap, then the
maps searched are keymap and the global keymap. If keymap
is a list of keymaps, only those keymaps are searched.
Usually it’s best to use overriding-local-map
as the expression
for keymap. Then where-is-internal
searches precisely
the keymaps that are active. To search only the global map, pass the
value (keymap)
(an empty keymap) as keymap.
If firstonly is non-ascii
, then the value is a single
vector representing the first key sequence found, rather than a list of
all possible key sequences. If firstonly is t
, then the
value is the first key sequence, except that key sequences consisting
entirely of ASCII characters (or meta variants of ASCII
characters) are preferred to all other key sequences and that the
return value can never be a menu binding.
If noindirect is non-nil
, where-is-internal
doesn’t look
inside menu-items to find their commands. This makes it possible to search for
a menu-item itself.
The fifth argument, no-remap, determines how this function treats command remappings (see Remapping Commands). There are two cases of interest:
If no-remap is nil
, find the bindings for
other-command and treat them as though they are also bindings
for command. If no-remap is non-nil
, include the
vector [remap other-command]
in the list of possible key
sequences, instead of finding those bindings.
If no-remap is nil
, return the bindings for
other-command rather than command. If no-remap is
non-nil
, return the bindings for command, ignoring the
fact that it is remapped.
If a command maps to a key binding like [some-event]
, and
some-event
has a symbol plist containing a non-nil
non-key-event
property, then that binding is ignored by
where-is-internal
.
This function creates a listing of all current key bindings, and displays it in a buffer named *Help*. The text is grouped by modes—minor modes first, then the major mode, then global bindings.
If prefix is non-nil
, it should be a prefix key; then the
listing includes only keys that start with prefix.
When several characters with consecutive ASCII codes have the
same definition, they are shown together, as
‘firstchar..lastchar’. In this instance, you need to
know the ASCII codes to understand which characters this means.
For example, in the default global map, the characters ‘SPC
.. ~’ are described by a single line. SPC is ASCII 32,
~ is ASCII 126, and the characters between them include all
the normal printing characters, (e.g., letters, digits, punctuation,
etc.); all these characters are bound to self-insert-command
.
If buffer-or-name is non-nil
, it should be a buffer or a
buffer name. Then describe-bindings
lists that buffer’s bindings,
instead of the current buffer’s.
A keymap can operate as a menu as well as defining bindings for keyboard keys and mouse buttons. Menus are usually actuated with the mouse, but they can function with the keyboard also. If a menu keymap is active for the next input event, that activates the keyboard menu feature.
A keymap acts as a menu if it has an overall prompt string, which is a string that appears as an element of the keymap. (See Format of Keymaps.) The string should describe the purpose of the menu’s commands. Emacs displays the overall prompt string as the menu title in some cases, depending on the toolkit (if any) used for displaying menus.18 Keyboard menus also display the overall prompt string.
The easiest way to construct a keymap with a prompt string is to
specify the string as an argument when you call make-keymap
,
make-sparse-keymap
(see Creating Keymaps), or
define-prefix-command
(see Definition of define-prefix-command). If you do not want the keymap to operate as
a menu, don’t specify a prompt string for it.
This function returns the overall prompt string of keymap,
or nil
if it has none.
The menu’s items are the bindings in the keymap. Each binding associates an event type to a definition, but the event types have no significance for the menu appearance. (Usually we use pseudo-events, symbols that the keyboard cannot generate, as the event types for menu item bindings.) The menu is generated entirely from the bindings that correspond in the keymap to these events.
The order of items in the menu is the same as the order of bindings in
the keymap. Since define-key
puts new bindings at the front, you
should define the menu items starting at the bottom of the menu and
moving to the top, if you care about the order. When you add an item to
an existing menu, you can specify its position in the menu using
keymap-set-after
(see Modifying Menus).
The simpler (and original) way to define a menu item is to bind some event type (it doesn’t matter what event type) to a binding like this:
(item-string . real-binding)
The CAR, item-string, is the string to be displayed in the menu. It should be short—preferably one to three words. It should describe the action of the command it corresponds to. Note that not all graphical toolkits can display non-ASCII text in menus (it will work for keyboard menus and will work to a large extent with the GTK+ toolkit).
You can also supply a second string, called the help string, as follows:
(item-string help . real-binding)
help specifies a help-echo string to display while the mouse
is on that item in the same way as help-echo
text properties
(see Help display).
As far as define-key
is concerned, item-string and
help-string are part of the event’s binding. However,
lookup-key
returns just real-binding, and only
real-binding is used for executing the key.
If real-binding is nil
, then item-string appears in
the menu but cannot be selected.
If real-binding is a symbol and has a non-nil
menu-enable
property, that property is an expression that
controls whether the menu item is enabled. Every time the keymap is
used to display a menu, Emacs evaluates the expression, and it enables
the menu item only if the expression’s value is non-nil
. When a
menu item is disabled, it is displayed in a fuzzy fashion, and
cannot be selected.
The menu bar does not recalculate which items are enabled every time you
look at a menu. This is because the X toolkit requires the whole tree
of menus in advance. To force recalculation of the menu bar, call
force-mode-line-update
(see Mode Line Format).
An extended-format menu item is a more flexible and also cleaner
alternative to the simple format. You define an event type with a
binding that’s a list starting with the symbol menu-item
.
For a non-selectable string, the binding looks like this:
(menu-item item-name)
A string starting with two or more dashes specifies a separator line; see Menu Separators.
To define a real menu item which can be selected, the extended format binding looks like this:
(menu-item item-name real-binding . item-property-list)
Here, item-name is an expression which evaluates to the menu item string. Thus, the string need not be a constant.
The third element, real-binding, can be the command to execute
(in which case you get a normal menu item). It can also be a keymap,
which will result in a submenu, and item-name is used as the
submenu name. Finally, it can be nil
, in which case you will
get a non-selectable menu item. This is mostly useful when creating
separator lines and the like.
The tail of the list, item-property-list, has the form of a property list (see Property Lists) which contains other information.
Here is a table of the properties that are supported:
:enable form
The result of evaluating form determines whether the item is
enabled (non-nil
means yes). If the item is not enabled,
you can’t really click on it.
:visible form
The result of evaluating form determines whether the item should
actually appear in the menu (non-nil
means yes). If the item
does not appear, then the menu is displayed as if this item were
not defined at all.
:help help
The value of this property, help, specifies a help-echo string
to display while the mouse is on that item. This is displayed in the
same way as help-echo
text properties (see Help display).
Note that this must be a constant string, unlike the help-echo
property for text and overlays.
:button (type . selected)
This property provides a way to define radio buttons and toggle buttons.
The CAR, type, says which: it should be :toggle
or
:radio
. The CDR, selected, should be a form; the
result of evaluating it says whether this button is currently selected.
A toggle is a menu item which is labeled as either on or off
according to the value of selected. The command itself should
toggle selected, setting it to t
if it is nil
,
and to nil
if it is t
. Here is how the menu item
to toggle the debug-on-error
flag is defined:
(menu-item "Debug on Error" toggle-debug-on-error :button (:toggle . (and (boundp 'debug-on-error) debug-on-error)))
This works because toggle-debug-on-error
is defined as a command
which toggles the variable debug-on-error
.
Radio buttons are a group of menu items, in which at any time one and only one is selected. There should be a variable whose value says which one is selected at any time. The selected form for each radio button in the group should check whether the variable has the right value for selecting that button. Clicking on the button should set the variable so that the button you clicked on becomes selected.
:key-sequence key-sequence
This property specifies which key sequence to display as keyboard equivalent.
Before Emacs displays key-sequence in the menu, it verifies that
key-sequence is really equivalent to this menu item, so it only
has an effect if you specify a correct key sequence.
Specifying nil
for key-sequence is equivalent to the
:key-sequence
attribute being absent.
:keys string
This property specifies that string is the string to display as the keyboard equivalent for this menu item. You can use the ‘\\[...]’ documentation construct in string.
This property can also be a function (which will be called with no arguments). This function should return a string. This function will be called every time the menu is computed, so using a function that takes a lot of time to compute is not a good idea, and it should expect to be called from any context.
:filter filter-fn
This property provides a way to compute the menu item dynamically. The property value filter-fn should be a function of one argument; when it is called, its argument will be real-binding. The function should return the binding to use instead.
Emacs can call this function at any time that it does redisplay or operates on menu data structures, so you should write it so it can safely be called at any time.
A menu separator is a kind of menu item that doesn’t display any text—instead, it divides the menu into subparts with a horizontal line. A separator looks like this in the menu keymap:
(menu-item separator-type)
where separator-type is a string starting with two or more dashes.
In the simplest case, separator-type consists of only dashes.
That specifies the default kind of separator. (For compatibility,
""
and -
also count as separators.)
Certain other values of separator-type specify a different style of separator. Here is a table of them:
"--no-line"
"--space"
An extra vertical space, with no actual line.
"--single-line"
A single line in the menu’s foreground color.
"--double-line"
A double line in the menu’s foreground color.
"--single-dashed-line"
A single dashed line in the menu’s foreground color.
"--double-dashed-line"
A double dashed line in the menu’s foreground color.
"--shadow-etched-in"
A single line with a 3D sunken appearance. This is the default, used separators consisting of dashes only.
"--shadow-etched-out"
A single line with a 3D raised appearance.
"--shadow-etched-in-dash"
A single dashed line with a 3D sunken appearance.
"--shadow-etched-out-dash"
A single dashed line with a 3D raised appearance.
"--shadow-double-etched-in"
Two lines with a 3D sunken appearance.
"--shadow-double-etched-out"
Two lines with a 3D raised appearance.
"--shadow-double-etched-in-dash"
Two dashed lines with a 3D sunken appearance.
"--shadow-double-etched-out-dash"
Two dashed lines with a 3D raised appearance.
You can also give these names in another style, adding a colon after
the double-dash and replacing each single dash with capitalization of
the following word. Thus, "--:singleLine"
, is equivalent to
"--single-line"
.
You can use a longer form to specify keywords such as :enable
and :visible
for a menu separator:
(menu-item separator-type nil . item-property-list)
For example:
(menu-item "--" nil :visible (boundp 'foo))
Some systems and display toolkits don’t really handle all of these separator types. If you use a type that isn’t supported, the menu displays a similar kind of separator that is supported.
Sometimes it is useful to make menu items that use the same
command but with different enable conditions. The best way to do this
in Emacs now is with extended menu items; before that feature existed,
it could be done by defining alias commands and using them in menu
items. Here’s an example that makes two aliases for
read-only-mode
and gives them different enable conditions:
(defalias 'make-read-only 'read-only-mode) (put 'make-read-only 'menu-enable '(not buffer-read-only)) (defalias 'make-writable 'read-only-mode) (put 'make-writable 'menu-enable 'buffer-read-only)
When using aliases in menus, often it is useful to display the
equivalent key bindings for the real command name, not the aliases
(which typically don’t have any key bindings except for the menu
itself). To request this, give the alias symbol a non-nil
menu-alias
property. Thus,
(put 'make-read-only 'menu-alias t) (put 'make-writable 'menu-alias t)
causes menu items for make-read-only
and make-writable
to
show the keyboard bindings for read-only-mode
.
The usual way to make a menu keymap produce a menu is to make it the definition of a prefix key. (A Lisp program can explicitly pop up a menu and receive the user’s choice—see Pop-Up Menus.)
If the prefix key ends with a mouse event, Emacs handles the menu keymap by popping up a visible menu, so that the user can select a choice with the mouse. When the user clicks on a menu item, the event generated is whatever character or symbol has the binding that brought about that menu item. (A menu item may generate a series of events if the menu has multiple levels or comes from the menu bar.)
It’s often best to use a button-down event to trigger the menu. Then the user can select a menu item by releasing the button.
If the menu keymap contains a binding to a nested keymap, the nested keymap specifies a submenu. There will be a menu item, labeled by the nested keymap’s item string, and clicking on this item automatically pops up the specified submenu. As a special exception, if the menu keymap contains a single nested keymap and no other menu items, the menu shows the contents of the nested keymap directly, not as a submenu.
However, if Emacs is compiled without X toolkit support, or on text terminals, submenus are not supported. Each nested keymap is shown as a menu item, but clicking on it does not automatically pop up the submenu. If you wish to imitate the effect of submenus, you can do that by giving a nested keymap an item string which starts with ‘@’. This causes Emacs to display the nested keymap using a separate menu pane; the rest of the item string after the ‘@’ is the pane label. If Emacs is compiled without X toolkit support, or if a menu is displayed on a text terminal, menu panes are not used; in that case, a ‘@’ at the beginning of an item string is omitted when the menu label is displayed, and has no other effect.
When a prefix key ending with a keyboard event (a character or function key) has a definition that is a menu keymap, the keymap operates as a keyboard menu; the user specifies the next event by choosing a menu item with the keyboard.
Emacs displays the keyboard menu with the map’s overall prompt
string, followed by the alternatives (the item strings of the map’s
bindings), in the echo area. If the bindings don’t all fit at once,
the user can type SPC to see the next line of alternatives.
Successive uses of SPC eventually get to the end of the menu and
then cycle around to the beginning. (The variable
menu-prompt-more-char
specifies which character is used for
this; SPC is the default.)
When the user has found the desired alternative from the menu, he or she should type the corresponding character—the one whose binding is that alternative.
This variable specifies the character to use to ask to see the next line of a menu. Its initial value is 32, the code for SPC.
Here is a complete example of defining a menu keymap. It is the definition of the ‘Replace’ submenu in the ‘Edit’ menu in the menu bar, and it uses the extended menu item format (see Extended Menu Items). First we create the keymap, and give it a name:
(defvar menu-bar-replace-menu (make-sparse-keymap "Replace"))
Next we define the menu items:
(define-key menu-bar-replace-menu [tags-repl-continue]
'(menu-item "Continue Replace" multifile-continue
:help "Continue last tags replace operation"))
(define-key menu-bar-replace-menu [tags-repl]
'(menu-item "Replace in tagged files" tags-query-replace
:help "Interactively replace a regexp in all tagged files"))
(define-key menu-bar-replace-menu [separator-replace-tags]
'(menu-item "--"))
;; ...
Note the symbols which the bindings are made for; these appear
inside square brackets, in the key sequence being defined. In some
cases, this symbol is the same as the command name; sometimes it is
different. These symbols are treated as function keys, but they are
not real function keys on the keyboard. They do not affect the
functioning of the menu itself, but they are echoed in the echo area
when the user selects from the menu, and they appear in the output of
where-is
and apropos
.
The menu in this example is intended for use with the mouse. If a menu is intended for use with the keyboard, that is, if it is bound to a key sequence ending with a keyboard event, then the menu items should be bound to characters or real function keys, that can be typed with the keyboard.
The binding whose definition is ("--")
is a separator line.
Like a real menu item, the separator has a key symbol, in this case
separator-replace-tags
. If one menu has two separators, they
must have two different key symbols.
Here is how we make this menu appear as an item in the parent menu:
(define-key menu-bar-edit-menu [replace] (list 'menu-item "Replace" menu-bar-replace-menu))
Note that this incorporates the submenu keymap, which is the value of
the variable menu-bar-replace-menu
, rather than the symbol
menu-bar-replace-menu
itself. Using that symbol in the parent
menu item would be meaningless because menu-bar-replace-menu
is
not a command.
If you wanted to attach the same replace menu to a mouse click, you can do it this way:
(define-key global-map [C-S-down-mouse-1] menu-bar-replace-menu)
Emacs usually shows a menu bar at the top of each frame. See Menu Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual. Menu bar items are subcommands of the fake function key MENU-BAR, as defined in the active keymaps.
To add an item to the menu bar, invent a fake function key of your
own (let’s call it key), and make a binding for the key sequence
[menu-bar key]
. Most often, the binding is a menu keymap,
so that pressing a button on the menu bar item leads to another menu.
When more than one active keymap defines the same function key for the menu bar, the item appears just once. If the user clicks on that menu bar item, it brings up a single, combined menu containing all the subcommands of that item—the global subcommands, the local subcommands, and the minor mode subcommands.
The variable overriding-local-map
is normally ignored when
determining the menu bar contents. That is, the menu bar is computed
from the keymaps that would be active if overriding-local-map
were nil
. See Active Keymaps.
Here’s an example of setting up a menu bar item:
;; Make a menu keymap (with a prompt string) ;; and make it the menu bar item’s definition. (define-key global-map [menu-bar words] (cons "Words" (make-sparse-keymap "Words")))
;; Define specific subcommands in this menu.
(define-key global-map
[menu-bar words forward]
'("Forward word" . forward-word))
(define-key global-map [menu-bar words backward] '("Backward word" . backward-word))
A local keymap can cancel a menu bar item made by the global keymap by
rebinding the same fake function key with undefined
as the
binding. For example, this is how Dired suppresses the ‘Edit’ menu
bar item:
(define-key dired-mode-map [menu-bar edit] 'undefined)
Here, edit
is the symbol produced by a fake function key, it is
used by the global map for the ‘Edit’ menu bar item. The main
reason to suppress a global menu bar item is to regain space for
mode-specific items.
Normally the menu bar shows global items followed by items defined by the local maps.
This variable holds a list of fake function keys for items to display at
the end of the menu bar rather than in normal sequence. The default
value is (help-menu)
; thus, the ‘Help’ menu item normally appears
at the end of the menu bar, following local menu items.
This normal hook is run by redisplay to update the menu bar contents, before redisplaying the menu bar. You can use it to update menus whose contents should vary. Since this hook is run frequently, we advise you to ensure that the functions it calls do not take much time in the usual case.
Next to every menu bar item, Emacs displays a key binding that runs
the same command (if such a key binding exists). This serves as a
convenient hint for users who do not know the key binding. If a
command has multiple bindings, Emacs normally displays the first one
it finds. You can specify one particular key binding by assigning an
:advertised-binding
symbol property to the command. See Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation.
A tool bar is a row of clickable icons at the top of a frame, just below the menu bar. See Tool Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual. Emacs normally shows a tool bar on graphical displays.
On each frame, the frame parameter tool-bar-lines
controls
how many lines’ worth of height to reserve for the tool bar. A zero
value suppresses the tool bar. If the value is nonzero, and
auto-resize-tool-bars
is non-nil
, the tool bar expands
and contracts automatically as needed to hold the specified contents.
If the value is grow-only
, the tool bar expands automatically,
but does not contract automatically.
The tool bar contents are controlled by a menu keymap attached to a
fake function key called TOOL-BAR (much like the way the menu
bar is controlled). So you define a tool bar item using
define-key
, like this:
(define-key global-map [tool-bar key] item)
where key is a fake function key to distinguish this item from other items, and item is a menu item key binding (see Extended Menu Items), which says how to display this item and how it behaves.
The usual menu keymap item properties, :visible
,
:enable
, :button
, and :filter
, are useful in
tool bar bindings and have their normal meanings. The real-binding
in the item must be a command, not a keymap; in other words, it does not
work to define a tool bar icon as a prefix key.
The :help
property specifies a help-echo string to display
while the mouse is on that item. This is displayed in the same way as
help-echo
text properties (see Help display).
In addition, you should use the :image
property;
this is how you specify the image to display in the tool bar:
:image image
image is either a single image specification (see Images) or a vector of four image specifications. If you use a vector of four, one of them is used, depending on circumstances:
Used when the item is enabled and selected.
Used when the item is enabled and deselected.
Used when the item is disabled and selected.
Used when the item is disabled and deselected.
The GTK+ and NS versions of Emacs ignores items 1 to 3, because disabled and/or deselected images are autocomputed from item 0.
If image is a single image specification, Emacs draws the tool bar button in disabled state by applying an edge-detection algorithm to the image.
The :rtl
property specifies an alternative image to use for
right-to-left languages. Only the GTK+ version of Emacs supports this
at present.
Some toolkits display both an image and a text in the toolbar. If you
want to force using only the image, use a :vert-only
non-nil
property.
Like the menu bar, the tool bar can display separators (see Menu Separators). Tool bar separators are vertical rather than
horizontal, though, and only a single style is supported. They are
represented in the tool bar keymap by (menu-item "--")
entries;
properties like :visible
are not supported for tool bar
separators. Separators are rendered natively in GTK+ and Nextstep
tool bars; in the other cases, they are rendered using an image of a
vertical line.
The default tool bar is defined so that items specific to editing do not
appear for major modes whose command symbol has a mode-class
property of special
(see Major Mode Conventions). Major
modes may add items to the global bar by binding [tool-bar
foo]
in their local map. It makes sense for some major modes to
replace the default tool bar items completely, since not many can be
accommodated conveniently, and the default bindings make this easy by
using an indirection through tool-bar-map
.
By default, the global map binds [tool-bar]
as follows:
(keymap-global-set "<tool-bar>" `(menu-item ,(purecopy "tool bar") ignore :filter tool-bar-make-keymap))
The function tool-bar-make-keymap
, in turn, derives the actual
tool bar map dynamically from the value of the variable
tool-bar-map
. Hence, you should normally adjust the default
(global) tool bar by changing that map. Some major modes, such as
Info mode, completely replace the global tool bar by making
tool-bar-map
buffer-local and setting it to a different keymap.
There are two convenience functions for defining tool bar items, as follows.
This function adds an item to the tool bar by modifying
tool-bar-map
. The image to use is defined by icon, which
is the base name of an XPM, XBM or PBM image file to be located by
find-image
. Given a value ‘"exit"’, say, exit.xpm,
exit.pbm and exit.xbm would be searched for in that order
on a color display. On a monochrome display, the search order is
‘.pbm’, ‘.xbm’ and ‘.xpm’. The binding to use is the
command def, and key is the fake function key symbol in the
prefix keymap. The remaining arguments props are additional
property list elements to add to the menu item specification.
To define items in some local map, bind tool-bar-map
with
let
around calls of this function:
(defvar foo-tool-bar-map (let ((tool-bar-map (make-sparse-keymap))) (tool-bar-add-item ...) ... tool-bar-map))
This function is a convenience for defining tool bar items which are
consistent with existing menu bar bindings. The binding of
command is looked up in the menu bar in map (default
global-map
) and modified to add an image specification for
icon, which is found in the same way as by
tool-bar-add-item
. The resulting binding is then placed in
tool-bar-map
, so use this function only for global tool bar
items.
map must contain an appropriate keymap bound to
[menu-bar]
. The remaining arguments props are additional
property list elements to add to the menu item specification.
This function is used for making non-global tool bar items. Use it
like tool-bar-add-item-from-menu
except that in-map
specifies the local map to make the definition in. The argument
from-map is like the map argument of
tool-bar-add-item-from-menu
.
If this variable is non-nil
, the tool bar automatically resizes to
show all defined tool bar items—but not larger than a quarter of the
frame’s height.
If the value is grow-only
, the tool bar expands automatically,
but does not contract automatically. To contract the tool bar, the
user has to redraw the frame by entering C-l.
If Emacs is built with GTK+ or Nextstep, the tool bar can only show one line, so this variable has no effect.
If this variable is non-nil
, tool bar items display
in raised form when the mouse moves over them.
This variable specifies an extra margin to add around tool bar items. The value is an integer, a number of pixels. The default is 4.
This variable specifies the shadow width for tool bar items. The value is an integer, a number of pixels. The default is 1.
This variable specifies the height of the border drawn below the tool
bar area. An integer specifies height as a number of pixels.
If the value is one of internal-border-width
(the default) or
border-width
, the tool bar border height corresponds to the
corresponding frame parameter.
You can define a special meaning for clicking on a tool bar item with the shift, control, meta, etc., modifiers. You do this by setting up additional items that relate to the original item through the fake function keys. Specifically, the additional items should use the modified versions of the same fake function key used to name the original item.
Thus, if the original item was defined this way,
(define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] '(menu-item "Shell" shell :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
then here is how you can define clicking on the same tool bar image with the shift modifier:
(define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
See Function Keys, for more information about how to add modifiers to function keys.
If you have functions that change whether a tool bar item is enabled
or not, this status is not necessarily updated visually immediately.
To force recalculation of the tool bar, call
force-mode-line-update
(see Mode Line Format).
When you insert a new item in an existing menu, you probably want to
put it in a particular place among the menu’s existing items. If you
use define-key
to add the item, it normally goes at the front of
the menu. To put it elsewhere in the menu, use keymap-set-after
:
Define a binding in map for key, with value binding,
just like keymap-set
(see Changing Key Bindings), but
position the binding in map after the binding for the event
after. The argument key should represent a single menu
item or key, and should satisfy key-valid-p
(see Key Sequences). after should be a single event type—a symbol or
a character, not a sequence. The new binding goes after the binding
for after. If after is t
or is omitted, then the
new binding goes last, at the end of the keymap. However, new
bindings are added before any inherited keymap.
Here is an example:
(keymap-set-after my-menu "<drink>" '("Drink" . drink-command) 'eat)
makes a binding for the fake function key DRINK and puts it right after the binding for EAT.
Here is how to insert an item called ‘Work’ in the ‘Signals’
menu of Shell mode, after the item break
:
(keymap-set-after shell-mode-map "<menu-bar> <signals> <work>" '("Work" . work-command) 'break)
The following macro provides a convenient way to define pop-up menus and/or menu bar menus.
This macro defines a pop-up menu and/or menu bar submenu, whose contents are given by menu.
If symbol is non-nil
, it should be a symbol; then this
macro defines symbol as a function for popping up the menu
(see Pop-Up Menus), with doc as its documentation string.
symbol should not be quoted.
Regardless of the value of symbol, if maps is a keymap, the menu is added to that keymap, as a top-level menu for the menu bar (see The Menu Bar). It can also be a list of keymaps, in which case the menu is added separately to each of those keymaps.
The first element of menu must be a string, which serves as the menu label. It may be followed by any number of the following keyword-argument pairs:
:filter function
function must be a function which, if called with one argument—the list of the other menu items—returns the actual items to be displayed in the menu.
:visible include
include is an expression; if it evaluates to nil
, the
menu is made invisible. :included
is an alias for
:visible
.
:active enable
enable is an expression; if it evaluates to nil
, the menu
is not selectable. :enable
is an alias for :active
.
The remaining elements in menu are menu items.
A menu item can be a vector of three elements, [name
callback enable]
. name is the menu item name (a
string). callback is a command to run, or an expression to
evaluate, when the item is chosen. enable is an expression; if
it evaluates to nil
, the item is disabled for selection.
Alternatively, a menu item may have the form:
[ name callback [ keyword arg ]... ]
where name and callback have the same meanings as above, and each optional keyword and arg pair should be one of the following:
:keys keys
keys is a string to display as keyboard equivalent to the menu item.
This is normally not needed, as keyboard equivalents are computed
automatically. keys is expanded with
substitute-command-keys
before it is displayed (see Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation).
:key-sequence keys
keys is a hint indicating which key sequence to display as keyboard equivalent, in case the command is bound to several key sequences. It has no effect if keys is not bound to same command as this menu item.
:active enable
enable is an expression; if it evaluates to nil
, the item
is made unselectable. :enable
is an alias for :active
.
:visible include
include is an expression; if it evaluates to nil
, the
item is made invisible. :included
is an alias for
:visible
.
:label form
form is an expression that is evaluated to obtain a value which serves as the menu item’s label (the default is name).
:suffix form
form is an expression that is dynamically evaluated and whose value is concatenated with the menu entry’s label.
:style style
style is a symbol describing the type of menu item; it should be
toggle
(a checkbox), or radio
(a radio button), or
anything else (meaning an ordinary menu item).
:selected selected
selected is an expression; the checkbox or radio button is
selected whenever the expression’s value is non-nil
.
:help help
help is a string describing the menu item.
Alternatively, a menu item can be a string. Then that string appears in the menu as unselectable text. A string consisting of dashes is displayed as a separator (see Menu Separators).
Alternatively, a menu item can be a list with the same format as menu. This is a submenu.
Here is an example of using easy-menu-define
to define a menu
similar to the one defined in the example in The Menu Bar:
(easy-menu-define words-menu global-map "Menu for word navigation commands." '("Words" ["Forward word" forward-word] ["Backward word" backward-word]))
A mode is a set of definitions that customize Emacs behavior in useful ways. There are two varieties of modes: minor modes, which provide features that users can turn on and off while editing; and major modes, which are used for editing or interacting with a particular kind of text. Each buffer has exactly one major mode at a time.
This chapter describes how to write both major and minor modes, how to indicate them in the mode line, and how they run hooks supplied by the user. For related topics such as keymaps and syntax tables, see Keymaps, and Syntax Tables.
A hook is a variable where you can store a function or functions (see What Is a Function?) to be called on a particular occasion by an existing program. Emacs provides hooks for the sake of customization. Most often, hooks are set up in the init file (see The Init File), but Lisp programs can set them also. See Standard Hooks, for a list of some standard hook variables.
Most of the hooks in Emacs are normal hooks. These variables contain lists of functions to be called with no arguments. By convention, whenever the hook name ends in ‘-hook’, that tells you it is normal. We try to make all hooks normal, as much as possible, so that you can use them in a uniform way.
Every major mode command is supposed to run a normal hook called the
mode hook as one of the last steps of initialization. This makes
it easy for a user to customize the behavior of the mode, by overriding
the buffer-local variable assignments already made by the mode. Most
minor mode functions also run a mode hook at the end. But hooks are
used in other contexts too. For example, the hook suspend-hook
runs just before Emacs suspends itself (see Suspending Emacs).
If the hook variable’s name does not end with ‘-hook’, that indicates it is probably an abnormal hook. These differ from normal hooks in two ways: they can be called with one or more arguments, and their return values can be used in some way. The hook’s documentation says how the functions are called and how their return values are used. Any functions added to an abnormal hook must follow the hook’s calling convention. By convention, abnormal hook names end in ‘-functions’.
If the name of the variable ends in ‘-predicate’ or ‘-function’ (singular) then its value must be a function, not a list of functions. As with abnormal hooks, the expected arguments and meaning of the return value vary across such single function hooks. The details are explained in each variable’s docstring.
Since hooks (both multi and single function) are variables, their
values can be modified with setq
or temporarily with
let
. However, it is often useful to add or remove a particular
function from a hook while preserving any other functions it might
have. For multi function hooks, the recommended way of doing this is
with add-hook
and remove-hook
(see Setting Hooks).
Most normal hook variables are initially void; add-hook
knows
how to deal with this. You can add hooks either globally or
buffer-locally with add-hook
. For hooks which hold only a
single function, add-hook
is not appropriate, but you can use
add-function
(see Advising Emacs Lisp Functions) to combine new
functions with the hook. Note that some single function hooks may be
nil
which add-function
cannot deal with, so you must
check for that before calling add-function
.
In this section, we document the run-hooks
function, which is
used to run a normal hook. We also document the functions for running
various kinds of abnormal hooks.
This function takes one or more normal hook variable names as arguments, and runs each hook in turn. Each argument should be a symbol that is a normal hook variable. These arguments are processed in the order specified.
If a hook variable has a non-nil
value, that value should be a
list of functions. run-hooks
calls all the functions, one by
one, with no arguments.
The hook variable’s value can also be a single function—either a
lambda expression or a symbol with a function definition—which
run-hooks
calls. But this usage is obsolete.
If the hook variable is buffer-local, the buffer-local variable will
be used instead of the global variable. However, if the buffer-local
variable contains the element t
, the global hook variable will
be run as well.
This function runs an abnormal hook by calling all the hook functions in hook, passing each one the arguments args.
This function runs an abnormal hook by calling each hook function in
turn, stopping if one of them fails by returning nil
. Each
hook function is passed the arguments args. If this function
stops because one of the hook functions fails, it returns nil
;
otherwise it returns a non-nil
value.
This function runs an abnormal hook by calling each hook function,
stopping if one of them succeeds by returning a non-nil
value. Each hook function is passed the arguments args. If this
function stops because one of the hook functions returns a
non-nil
value, it returns that value; otherwise it returns
nil
.
Here’s an example that adds a function to a mode hook to turn on Auto Fill mode when in Lisp Interaction mode:
(add-hook 'lisp-interaction-mode-hook 'auto-fill-mode)
The value of a hook variable should be a list of functions. You can
manipulate that list using the normal Lisp facilities, but the modular
way is to use the functions add-hook
and remove-hook
,
defined below. They take care to handle some unusual situations and
avoid problems.
It works to put a lambda
-expression function on a hook, but
we recommend avoiding this because it can lead to confusion. If you
add the same lambda
-expression a second time but write it
slightly differently, you will get two equivalent but distinct
functions on the hook. If you then remove one of them, the other will
still be on it.
This function is the handy way to add function function to hook variable hook. You can use it for abnormal hooks as well as for normal hooks. function can be any Lisp function that can accept the proper number of arguments for hook. For example,
(add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'my-text-hook-function)
adds my-text-hook-function
to the hook called text-mode-hook
.
If function is already present in hook (comparing using
equal
), then add-hook
does not add it a second time.
If function has a non-nil
property
permanent-local-hook
, then kill-all-local-variables
(or
changing major modes) won’t delete it from the hook variable’s local
value.
For a normal hook, hook functions should be designed so that the order
in which they are executed does not matter. Any dependence on the order
is asking for trouble. However, the order is predictable: normally,
function goes at the front of the hook list, so it is executed
first (barring another add-hook
call).
In some cases, it is important to control the relative ordering of functions
on the hook. The optional argument depth lets you indicate where the
function should be inserted in the list: it should then be a number
between -100 and 100 where the higher the value, the closer to the end of the
list the function should go. The depth defaults to 0 and for backward
compatibility when depth is a non-nil
symbol it is interpreted as a depth
of 90. Furthermore, when depth is strictly greater than 0 the function
is added after rather than before functions of the same depth.
One should never use a depth of 100 (or -100), because one can never be
sure that no other function will ever need to come before (or after) us.
add-hook
can handle the cases where hook is void or its
value is a single function; it sets or changes the value to a list of
functions.
If local is non-nil
, that says to add function to the
buffer-local hook list instead of to the global hook list. This makes
the hook buffer-local and adds t
to the buffer-local value. The
latter acts as a flag to run the hook functions in the default value as
well as in the local value.
This function removes function from the hook variable
hook. It compares function with elements of hook
using equal
, so it works for both symbols and lambda
expressions.
If local is non-nil
, that says to remove function
from the buffer-local hook list instead of from the global hook list.
Major modes specialize Emacs for editing or interacting with particular kinds of text. Each buffer has exactly one major mode at a time. Every major mode is associated with a major mode command, whose name should end in ‘-mode’. This command takes care of switching to that mode in the current buffer, by setting various buffer-local variables such as a local keymap. See Major Mode Conventions. Note that unlike minor modes there is no way to “turn off” a major mode, instead the buffer must be switched to a different one. However, you can temporarily suspend a major mode and later restore the suspended mode, see below.
The least specialized major mode is called Fundamental mode, which has no mode-specific definitions or variable settings.
This is the major mode command for Fundamental mode. Unlike other mode commands, it does not run any mode hooks (see Major Mode Conventions), since you are not supposed to customize this mode.
This function works like fundamental-mode
, in that it kills all
buffer-local variables, but it also records the major mode in effect,
so that it could subsequently be restored. This function and
major-mode-restore
(described next) are useful when you need to
put a buffer under some specialized mode other than the one Emacs
chooses for it automatically (see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode), but would also
like to be able to switch back to the original mode later.
This function restores the major mode recorded by
major-mode-suspend
. If no major mode was recorded, this
function calls normal-mode
(see normal-mode), but tries to force it not to choose any modes in
avoided-modes, if that argument is non-nil
.
Changing the major mode clears out most local variables, but it
doesn’t remove all artifacts in the buffer (like text properties and
overlays). It’s rare to change a buffer from one major mode to
another (except from fundamental-mode
to everything else), so
this is usually not a concern. It can sometimes be convenient (mostly
when debugging a problem in a buffer) to do a “full reset” of the
buffer, and that’s what the clean-mode
major mode offers. It
will kill all local variables (even the permanently local ones), and
also removes all overlays and text properties.
The easiest way to write a major mode is to use the macro
define-derived-mode
, which sets up the new mode as a variant of
an existing major mode. See Defining Derived Modes. We recommend using
define-derived-mode
even if the new mode is not an obvious
derivative of another mode, as it automatically enforces many coding
conventions for you. See Basic Major Modes, for common modes to
derive from.
The standard GNU Emacs Lisp directory tree contains the code for several major modes, in files such as text-mode.el, texinfo.el, lisp-mode.el, and rmail.el. You can study these libraries to see how modes are written.
The buffer-local value of this variable holds the symbol for the current
major mode. Its default value holds the default major mode for new
buffers. The standard default value is fundamental-mode
.
If the default value is nil
, then whenever Emacs creates a new
buffer via a command such as C-x b (switch-to-buffer
), the
new buffer is put in the major mode of the previously current buffer.
As an exception, if the major mode of the previous buffer has a
mode-class
symbol property with value special
, the new
buffer is put in Fundamental mode (see Major Mode Conventions).
The code for every major mode should follow various coding conventions, including conventions for local keymap and syntax table initialization, function and variable names, and hooks.
If you use the define-derived-mode
macro, it will take care of
many of these conventions automatically. See Defining Derived Modes. Note
also that Fundamental mode is an exception to many of these conventions,
because it represents the default state of Emacs.
The following list of conventions is only partial. Each major mode should aim for consistency in general with other Emacs major modes, as this makes Emacs as a whole more coherent. It is impossible to list here all the possible points where this issue might come up; if the Emacs developers point out an area where your major mode deviates from the usual conventions, please make it compatible.
The documentation string may include the special documentation substrings, ‘\[command]’, ‘\{keymap}’, and ‘\<keymap>’, which allow the help display to adapt automatically to the user’s own key bindings. See Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation.
kill-all-local-variables
. This runs the normal hook
change-major-mode-hook
, then gets rid of the buffer-local
variables of the major mode previously in effect. See Creating and Deleting Buffer-Local Bindings.
major-mode
to the
major mode command symbol. This is how describe-mode
discovers
which documentation to print.
mode-name
to the
“pretty” name of the mode, usually a string (but see The Data Structure of the Mode Line, for other possible forms). The name of the mode appears
in the mode line.
indent-line-function
to a suitable function, and probably customize other variables
for indentation. See Automatic Indentation of code.
use-local-map
to install this local map. See Active Keymaps, for more information.
This keymap should be stored permanently in a global variable named
modename-mode-map
. Normally the library that defines the
mode sets this variable.
See Tips for Defining Variables Robustly, for advice about how to write the code to set up the mode’s keymap variable.
A major mode can also rebind the keys M-n, M-p and M-s. The bindings for M-n and M-p should normally be some kind of moving forward and backward, but this does not necessarily mean cursor motion.
It is legitimate for a major mode to rebind a standard key sequence if
it provides a command that does the same job in a way better
suited to the text this mode is used for. For example, a major mode
for editing a programming language might redefine C-M-a to
move to the beginning of a function in a way that works better for
that language. The recommended way of tailoring C-M-a to the
needs of a major mode is to set beginning-of-defun-function
(see Moving over Balanced Expressions) to invoke the function specific to the mode.
It is also legitimate for a major mode to rebind a standard key sequence whose standard meaning is rarely useful in that mode. For instance, minibuffer modes rebind M-r, whose standard meaning is rarely of any use in the minibuffer. Major modes such as Dired or Rmail that do not allow self-insertion of text can reasonably redefine letters and other printing characters as special commands.
modename-mode-syntax-table
. See Syntax Tables.
modename-mode-abbrev-table
. If the
major mode command defines any abbrevs itself, it should pass t
for the system-flag argument to define-abbrev
.
See Defining Abbrevs.
font-lock-defaults
(see Font Lock Mode).
context-menu-mode
(see Menu
Mouse Clicks in The Emacs Manual). To this end, define a
mode-specific function which builds one or more menus depending on the
location of the mouse-3 click in the buffer, and then add that
function to the buffer-local value of context-menu-functions
.
imenu-generic-expression
, for the two variables
imenu-prev-index-position-function
and
imenu-extract-index-name-function
, or for the variable
imenu-create-index-function
(see Imenu).
eldoc-documentation-functions
.
completion-at-point-functions
. See Completion in Ordinary Buffers.
make-local-variable
in the major mode command, not
make-variable-buffer-local
. The latter function would make the
variable local to every buffer in which it is subsequently set, which
would affect buffers that do not use this mode. It is undesirable for a
mode to have such global effects. See Buffer-Local Variables.
With rare exceptions, the only reasonable way to use
make-variable-buffer-local
in a Lisp package is for a variable
which is used only within that package. Using it on a variable used by
other packages would interfere with them.
modename-mode-hook
. The very last thing the major mode command
should do is to call run-mode-hooks
. This runs the normal
hook change-major-mode-after-body-hook
, the mode hook, the
function hack-local-variables
(when the buffer is visiting a file),
and then the normal hook after-change-major-mode-hook
.
See Mode Hooks.
define-derived-mode
macro, but this is not required. Such a mode should call the parent
mode command inside a delay-mode-hooks
form. (Using
define-derived-mode
does this automatically.) See Defining Derived Modes, and Mode Hooks.
change-major-mode-hook
(see Creating and Deleting Buffer-Local Bindings).
mode-class
with value special
, put on as
follows:
(put 'funny-mode 'mode-class 'special)
This tells Emacs that new buffers created while the current buffer is in
Funny mode should not be put in Funny mode, even though the default
value of major-mode
is nil
. By default, the value of
nil
for major-mode
means to use the current buffer’s major
mode when creating new buffers (see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode), but with such
special
modes, Fundamental mode is used instead. Modes such as
Dired, Rmail, and Buffer List use this feature.
The function view-buffer
does not enable View mode in buffers
whose mode-class is special, because such modes usually provide their
own View-like bindings.
The define-derived-mode
macro automatically marks the derived
mode as special if the parent mode is special. Special mode is a
convenient parent for such modes to inherit from; See Basic Major Modes.
auto-mode-alist
to select
the mode for those file names (see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode). If you
define the mode command to autoload, you should add this element in
the same file that calls autoload
. If you use an autoload
cookie for the mode command, you can also use an autoload cookie for
the form that adds the element (see autoload cookie). If you do
not autoload the mode command, it is sufficient to add the element in
the file that contains the mode definition.
defvar
or defcustom
to set mode-related
variables, so that they are not reinitialized if they already have a
value (see Defining Global Variables).
When Emacs visits a file, it automatically selects a major mode for the buffer based on information in the file name or in the file itself. It also processes local variables specified in the file text.
This function establishes the proper major mode and buffer-local
variable bindings for the current buffer. It calls
set-auto-mode
(see below). As of Emacs 26.1, it no longer
runs hack-local-variables
, this now being done in
run-mode-hooks
at the initialization of major modes
(see Mode Hooks).
If the find-file argument to normal-mode
is non-nil
,
normal-mode
assumes that the find-file
function is calling
it. In this case, it may process local variables in the ‘-*-’
line or at the end of the file. The variable
enable-local-variables
controls whether to do so. See Local Variables in Files in The GNU Emacs Manual,
for the syntax of the local variables section of a file.
If you run normal-mode
interactively, the argument
find-file is normally nil
. In this case,
normal-mode
unconditionally processes any file local variables.
The function calls set-auto-mode
to choose and set a major
mode. If this does not specify a mode, the buffer stays in the major
mode determined by the default value of major-mode
(see below).
normal-mode
uses condition-case
around the call to the
major mode command, so errors are caught and reported as a ‘File
mode specification error’, followed by the original error message.
This function selects and sets the major mode that is appropriate
for the current buffer. It bases its decision (in order of
precedence) on the ‘-*-’ line, on any ‘mode:’ local
variable near the end of a file, on the ‘#!’ line (using
interpreter-mode-alist
), on the text at the beginning of the
buffer (using magic-mode-alist
), and finally on the visited
file name (using auto-mode-alist
). See How
Major Modes are Chosen in The GNU Emacs Manual. If
enable-local-variables
is nil
, set-auto-mode
does
not check the ‘-*-’ line, or near the end of the file, for
any mode tag.
There are some file types where it is not appropriate to scan the file
contents for a mode specifier. For example, a tar archive may happen to
contain, near the end of the file, a member file that has a local
variables section specifying a mode for that particular file. This
should not be applied to the containing tar file. Similarly, a tiff
image file might just happen to contain a first line that seems to
match the ‘-*-’ pattern. For these reasons, both these file
extensions are members of the list inhibit-local-variables-regexps
.
Add patterns to this list to prevent Emacs searching them for local
variables of any kind (not just mode specifiers).
If keep-mode-if-same is non-nil
, this function does not
call the mode command if the buffer is already in the proper major
mode. For instance, set-visited-file-name
sets this to
t
to avoid killing buffer local variables that the user may
have set.
This function sets the major mode of buffer to the default value of
major-mode
; if that is nil
, it uses the
current buffer’s major mode (if that is suitable). As an exception,
if buffer’s name is *scratch*, it sets the mode to
initial-major-mode
.
The low-level primitives for creating buffers do not use this function,
but medium-level commands such as switch-to-buffer
and
find-file-noselect
use it whenever they create buffers.
The value of this variable determines the major mode of the initial
*scratch* buffer. The value should be a symbol that is a major
mode command. The default value is lisp-interaction-mode
.
This variable specifies major modes to use for scripts that specify a
command interpreter in a ‘#!’ line. Its value is an alist with
elements of the form (regexp . mode)
; this says to
use mode mode if the file specifies an interpreter which matches
\\`regexp\\'
. For example, one of the default elements
is ("python[0-9.]*" . python-mode)
.
This variable’s value is an alist with elements of the form
(regexp . function)
, where regexp is a
regular expression and function is a function or nil
.
After visiting a file, set-auto-mode
calls function if
the text at the beginning of the buffer matches regexp and
function is non-nil
; if function is nil
,
auto-mode-alist
gets to decide the mode.
This works like magic-mode-alist
, except that it is handled
only if auto-mode-alist
does not specify a mode for this file.
This variable contains an association list of file name patterns
(regular expressions) and corresponding major mode commands. Usually,
the file name patterns test for suffixes, such as ‘.el’ and
‘.c’, but this need not be the case. An ordinary element of the
alist looks like (regexp . mode-function)
.
For example,
(("\\`/tmp/fol/" . text-mode) ("\\.texinfo\\'" . texinfo-mode) ("\\.texi\\'" . texinfo-mode)
("\\.el\\'" . emacs-lisp-mode) ("\\.c\\'" . c-mode) ("\\.h\\'" . c-mode) ...)
When you visit a file whose expanded file name (see Functions that Expand Filenames), with version numbers and backup suffixes removed using
file-name-sans-versions
(see File Name Components), matches
a regexp, set-auto-mode
calls the corresponding
mode-function. This feature enables Emacs to select the proper
major mode for most files.
If an element of auto-mode-alist
has the form (regexp
function t)
, then after calling function, Emacs searches
auto-mode-alist
again for a match against the portion of the file
name that did not match before. This feature is useful for
uncompression packages: an entry of the form ("\\.gz\\'"
function t)
can uncompress the file and then put the uncompressed
file in the proper mode according to the name sans ‘.gz’.
If auto-mode-alist
has more than one element whose regexp
matches the file name, Emacs will use the first match.
Here is an example of how to prepend several pattern pairs to
auto-mode-alist
. (You might use this sort of expression in your
init file.)
(setq auto-mode-alist (append ;; File name (within directory) starts with a dot. '(("/\\.[^/]*\\'" . fundamental-mode) ;; File name has no dot. ("/[^\\./]*\\'" . fundamental-mode) ;; File name ends in ‘.C’. ("\\.C\\'" . c++-mode)) auto-mode-alist))
The describe-mode
function provides information about major
modes. It is normally bound to C-h m. It uses the value of the
variable major-mode
(see Major Modes), which is why every
major mode command needs to set that variable.
This command displays the documentation of the current buffer’s major
mode and minor modes. It uses the documentation
function to
retrieve the documentation strings of the major and minor mode
commands (see Access to Documentation Strings).
If called from Lisp with a non-nil
buffer argument, this
function displays the documentation for that buffer’s major and minor
modes, rather than those of the current buffer.
The recommended way to define a new major mode is to derive it from an
existing one using define-derived-mode
. If there is no closely
related mode, you should inherit from either text-mode
,
special-mode
, or prog-mode
. See Basic Major Modes. If
none of these are suitable, you can inherit from fundamental-mode
(see Major Modes).
This macro defines variant as a major mode command, using name as the string form of the mode name. variant and parent should be unquoted symbols.
The new command variant is defined to call the function parent, then override certain aspects of that parent mode:
variant-map
. define-derived-mode
makes the parent mode’s keymap the parent of the new map, unless
variant-map
is already set and already has a parent.
variant-syntax-table
, unless you override this using the
:syntax-table
keyword (see below). define-derived-mode
makes the parent mode’s syntax-table the parent of
variant-syntax-table
, unless the latter is already set
and already has a parent different from the standard syntax table.
variant-abbrev-table
, unless you override this using the
:abbrev-table
keyword (see below).
variant-hook
. It
runs this hook, after running the hooks of its ancestor modes, with
run-mode-hooks
, as the last thing it does, apart from running
any :after-hook
form it may have. See Mode Hooks.
In addition, you can specify how to override other aspects of parent with body. The command variant evaluates the forms in body after setting up all its usual overrides, just before running the mode hooks.
If parent has a non-nil
mode-class
symbol
property, then define-derived-mode
sets the mode-class
property of variant to the same value. This ensures, for
example, that if parent is a special mode, then variant is
also a special mode (see Major Mode Conventions).
You can also specify nil
for parent. This gives the new
mode no parent. Then define-derived-mode
behaves as described
above, but, of course, omits all actions connected with parent.
The argument docstring specifies the documentation string for the
new mode. define-derived-mode
adds some general information
about the mode’s hook, followed by the mode’s keymap, at the end of this
documentation string. If you omit docstring,
define-derived-mode
generates a documentation string.
The keyword-args are pairs of keywords and values. The values,
except for :after-hook
’s, are evaluated. The following
keywords are currently supported:
:syntax-table
You can use this to explicitly specify a syntax table for the new
mode. If you specify a nil
value, the new mode uses the same
syntax table as parent, or the standard syntax table if
parent is nil
. (Note that this does not follow
the convention used for non-keyword arguments that a nil
value
is equivalent with not specifying the argument.)
:abbrev-table
You can use this to explicitly specify an abbrev table for the new
mode. If you specify a nil
value, the new mode uses the same
abbrev table as parent, or fundamental-mode-abbrev-table
if parent is nil
. (Again, a nil
value is
not equivalent to not specifying this keyword.)
:interactive
Modes are interactive commands by default. If you specify a
nil
value, the mode defined here won’t be interactive. This is
useful for modes that are never meant to be activated by users
manually, but are only supposed to be used in some specially-formatted
buffer.
:group
If this is specified, the value should be the customization group for
this mode. (Not all major modes have one.) The command
customize-mode
uses this. define-derived-mode
does
not automatically define the specified customization group.
:after-hook
This optional keyword specifies a single Lisp form to evaluate as the
final act of the mode function, after the mode hooks have been run.
It should not be quoted. Since the form might be evaluated after the
mode function has terminated, it should not access any element of the
mode function’s local state. An :after-hook
form is useful for
setting up aspects of the mode which depend on the user’s settings,
which in turn may have been changed in a mode hook.
Here is a hypothetical example:
(defvar-keymap hypertext-mode-map "<down-mouse-3>" #'do-hyper-link) (define-derived-mode hypertext-mode text-mode "Hypertext" "Major mode for hypertext." (setq-local case-fold-search nil))
Do not write an interactive
spec in the definition;
define-derived-mode
does that automatically.
This function returns non-nil
if the current major mode is
derived from any of the major modes given by the symbols modes.
Apart from Fundamental mode, there are three major modes that other major modes commonly derive from: Text mode, Prog mode, and Special mode. While Text mode is useful in its own right (e.g., for editing files ending in .txt), Prog mode and Special mode exist mainly to let other modes derive from them.
As far as possible, new major modes should be derived, either directly
or indirectly, from one of these three modes. One reason is that this
allows users to customize a single mode hook
(e.g., prog-mode-hook
) for an entire family of relevant modes
(e.g., all programming language modes).
Text mode is a major mode for editing human languages. It defines the
‘"’ and ‘\’ characters as having punctuation syntax
(see Table of Syntax Classes), and binds M-TAB to
ispell-complete-word
(see Spelling in The GNU Emacs
Manual).
An example of a major mode derived from Text mode is HTML mode. See SGML and HTML Modes in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Prog mode is a basic major mode for buffers containing programming language source code. Most of the programming language major modes built into Emacs are derived from it.
Prog mode binds parse-sexp-ignore-comments
to t
(see Motion Commands Based on Parsing) and bidi-paragraph-direction
to
left-to-right
(see Bidirectional Display).
Special mode is a basic major mode for buffers containing text that is
produced specially by Emacs, rather than directly from a file. Major
modes derived from Special mode are given a mode-class
property
of special
(see Major Mode Conventions).
Special mode sets the buffer to read-only. Its keymap defines several
common bindings, including q for quit-window
and g
for revert-buffer
(see Reverting).
An example of a major mode derived from Special mode is Buffer Menu mode, which is used by the *Buffer List* buffer. See Listing Existing Buffers in The GNU Emacs Manual.
In addition, modes for buffers of tabulated data can inherit from Tabulated List mode, which is in turn derived from Special mode. See Tabulated List mode.
Every major mode command should finish by running the mode-independent
normal hook change-major-mode-after-body-hook
, its mode hook,
and the normal hook after-change-major-mode-hook
.
It does this by calling run-mode-hooks
. If the major mode is a
derived mode, that is if it calls another major mode (the parent mode)
in its body, it should do this inside delay-mode-hooks
so that
the parent won’t run these hooks itself. Instead, the derived mode’s
call to run-mode-hooks
runs the parent’s mode hook too.
See Major Mode Conventions.
Emacs versions before Emacs 22 did not have delay-mode-hooks
.
Versions before 24 did not have change-major-mode-after-body-hook
.
When user-implemented major modes do not use run-mode-hooks
and
have not been updated to use these newer features, they won’t entirely
follow these conventions: they may run the parent’s mode hook too early,
or fail to run after-change-major-mode-hook
. If you encounter
such a major mode, please correct it to follow these conventions.
When you define a major mode using define-derived-mode
, it
automatically makes sure these conventions are followed. If you
define a major mode “by hand”, not using define-derived-mode
,
use the following functions to handle these conventions automatically.
Major modes should run their mode hook using this function. It is
similar to run-hooks
(see Hooks), but it also runs
change-major-mode-after-body-hook
, hack-local-variables
(when the buffer is visiting a file) (see File Local Variables),
and after-change-major-mode-hook
. The last thing it does is to
evaluate any :after-hook
forms declared by parent modes
(see Defining Derived Modes).
When this function is called during the execution of a
delay-mode-hooks
form, it does not run the hooks or
hack-local-variables
or evaluate the forms immediately.
Instead, it arranges for the next call to run-mode-hooks
to run
them.
When one major mode command calls another, it should do so inside of
delay-mode-hooks
.
This macro executes body, but tells all run-mode-hooks
calls during the execution of body to delay running their hooks.
The hooks will actually run during the next call to
run-mode-hooks
after the end of the delay-mode-hooks
construct.
This is a normal hook run by run-mode-hooks
. It is run before
the mode hooks.
This is a normal hook run by run-mode-hooks
. It is run at the
very end of every properly-written major mode command.
Tabulated List mode is a major mode for displaying tabulated data, i.e., data consisting of entries, each entry occupying one row of text with its contents divided into columns. Tabulated List mode provides facilities for pretty-printing rows and columns, and sorting the rows according to the values in each column. It is derived from Special mode (see Basic Major Modes).
Tabulated List mode is geared towards displaying text using
monospaced fonts, using a single font and text size. If you want to
display a table using variable pitch fonts or images,
make-vtable
can be used instead. vtable also support having
more than a single table in a buffer, or having a buffer that contains
both a table and additional text in it. See (vtable)Introduction,
for more information.
Tabulated List mode is intended to be used as a parent mode by a more specialized major mode. Examples include Process Menu mode (see Process Information) and Package Menu mode (see Package Menu in The GNU Emacs Manual).
Such a derived mode should use define-derived-mode
in the usual
way, specifying tabulated-list-mode
as the second argument
(see Defining Derived Modes). The body of the define-derived-mode
form should specify the format of the tabulated data, by assigning
values to the variables documented below; optionally, it can then call
the function tabulated-list-init-header
, which will populate a
header with the names of the columns.
The derived mode should also define a listing command. This,
not the mode command, is what the user calls (e.g., M-x
list-processes). The listing command should create or switch to a
buffer, turn on the derived mode, specify the tabulated data, and
finally call tabulated-list-print
to populate the buffer.
This variable specifies the character to be used on GUI frames as an indication that the column is sorted in the ascending order.
Whenever you change the sort direction in Tabulated List buffers, this indicator toggles between ascending (“asc”) and descending (“desc”).
Like tabulated-list-gui-sort-indicator-asc
, but used when the
column is sorted in the descending order.
Like tabulated-list-gui-sort-indicator-asc
, but used for
text-mode frames.
Like tabulated-list-tty-sort-indicator-asc
, but used when the
column is sorted in the descending order.
This buffer-local variable specifies the format of the Tabulated List
data. Its value should be a vector. Each element of the vector
represents a data column, and should be a list (name
width sort . props)
, where
nil
,
the column cannot be used for sorting. If t
, the column is
sorted by comparing string values. Otherwise, this should be a
predicate function for sort
(see Functions that Rearrange Lists), which
accepts two arguments with the same form as the elements of
tabulated-list-entries
(see below).
:right-align
is
non-nil
then the column should be right-aligned. And the
property :pad-right
specifies the number of additional padding
spaces to the right of the column (by default 1 if omitted).
This buffer-local variable specifies the entries displayed in the Tabulated List buffer. Its value should be either a list, or a function.
If the value is a list, each list element corresponds to one entry, and
should have the form (id contents)
, where
nil
, or a Lisp object that identifies the
entry. If the latter, the cursor stays on the same entry when
re-sorting entries. Comparison is done with equal
.
tabulated-list-format
. Each vector element is either a string,
which is inserted into the buffer as-is; an image descriptor, which is
used to insert an image (see Image Descriptors); or a list
(label . properties)
, which means to insert a
text button by calling insert-text-button
with label and
properties as arguments (see Making Buttons).
There should be no newlines in any of these strings.
Otherwise, the value should be a function which returns a list of the above form when called with no arguments.
This normal hook is run prior to reverting a Tabulated List buffer. A
derived mode can add a function to this hook to recompute
tabulated-list-entries
.
The value of this variable is the function called to insert an entry at
point, including its terminating newline. The function should accept
two arguments, id and contents, having the same meanings as
in tabulated-list-entries
. The default value is a function which
inserts an entry in a straightforward way; a mode which uses Tabulated
List mode in a more complex way can specify another function.
The value of this variable specifies the current sort key for the
Tabulated List buffer. If it is nil
, no sorting is done.
Otherwise, it should have the form (name . flip)
,
where name is a string matching one of the column names in
tabulated-list-format
, and flip, if non-nil
, means
to invert the sort order.
This function computes and sets header-line-format
for the
Tabulated List buffer (see Window Header Lines), and assigns a keymap to
the header line to allow sorting entries by clicking on column headers.
Modes derived from Tabulated List mode should call this after setting
the above variables (in particular, only after setting
tabulated-list-format
).
This function populates the current buffer with entries. It should be
called by the listing command. It erases the buffer, sorts the entries
specified by tabulated-list-entries
according to
tabulated-list-sort-key
, then calls the function specified by
tabulated-list-printer
to insert each entry.
If the optional argument remember-pos is non-nil
, this
function looks for the id element on the current line, if any, and
tries to move to that entry after all the entries are (re)inserted.
If the optional argument update is non-nil
, this function
will only erase or add entries that have changed since the last print.
This is several times faster if most entries haven’t changed since the
last time this function was called. The only difference in outcome is
that tags placed via tabulated-list-put-tag
will not be removed
from entries that haven’t changed (normally all tags are removed).
This function deletes the entry at point.
It returns a list (id cols)
, where id is the
ID of the deleted entry and cols is a vector of its column
descriptors. It moves point to the beginning of the current line. It
returns nil
if there is no entry at point.
Note that this function only changes the buffer contents; it does not
alter tabulated-list-entries
.
This defsubst
returns the ID object from
tabulated-list-entries
(if that is a list) or from the list
returned by tabulated-list-entries
(if it is a function). If
omitted or nil
, pos defaults to point.
This defsubst
returns the entry object from
tabulated-list-entries
(if that is a list) or from the list
returned by tabulated-list-entries
(if it is a function). This
will be a vector for the ID at pos. If there is no entry at
pos, then the function returns nil
.
This defsubst
returns non-nil
if there is a fake header at
pos. A fake header is used if
tabulated-list-use-header-line
is nil
to put the column
names at the beginning of the buffer. If omitted or nil
,
pos defaults to point-min
.
This function puts tag in the padding area of the current line.
The padding area can be empty space at the beginning of the line, the
width of which is governed by tabulated-list-padding
.
tag should be a string, with a length less than or equal to
tabulated-list-padding
. If advance is non-nil
, this
function advances point by one line.
This function clears all tags from the padding area in the current buffer.
This function changes the tabulated list entry at point, setting
col to desc. col is the column number to change, or
the name of the column to change. desc is the new column
descriptor, which is inserted via tabulated-list-print-col
.
If change-entry-data is non-nil
, this function modifies the
underlying data (usually the column descriptor in the list
tabulated-list-entries
) by setting the column descriptor of the
vector to desc
.
Generic modes are simple major modes with basic support for
comment syntax and Font Lock mode. To define a generic mode, use the
macro define-generic-mode
. See the file generic-x.el
for some examples of the use of define-generic-mode
.
This macro defines a generic mode command named mode (a symbol,
not quoted). The optional argument docstring is the
documentation for the mode command. If you do not supply it,
define-generic-mode
generates one by default.
The argument comment-list is a list in which each element is
either a character, a string of one or two characters, or a cons cell.
A character or a string is set up in the mode’s syntax table as a
comment starter. If the entry is a cons cell, the CAR is set
up as a comment starter and the CDR as a comment ender.
(Use nil
for the latter if you want comments to end at the end
of the line.) Note that the syntax table mechanism has limitations
about what comment starters and enders are actually possible.
See Syntax Tables.
The argument keyword-list is a list of keywords to highlight
with font-lock-keyword-face
. Each keyword should be a string.
Meanwhile, font-lock-list is a list of additional expressions to
highlight. Each element of this list should have the same form as an
element of font-lock-keywords
. See Search-based Fontification.
The argument auto-mode-list is a list of regular expressions to
add to the variable auto-mode-alist
. They are added by the execution
of the define-generic-mode
form, not by expanding the macro call.
Finally, function-list is a list of functions for the mode
command to call for additional setup. It calls these functions just
before it runs the mode hook variable mode-hook
.
Text mode is perhaps the simplest mode besides Fundamental mode. Here are excerpts from text-mode.el that illustrate many of the conventions listed above:
;; Create the syntax table for this mode.
(defvar text-mode-syntax-table
(let ((st (make-syntax-table)))
(modify-syntax-entry ?\" ". " st)
(modify-syntax-entry ?\\ ". " st)
;; Add 'p' so M-c on 'hello' leads to 'Hello', not 'hello'.
(modify-syntax-entry ?' "w p" st)
...
st)
"Syntax table used while in `text-mode'.")
;; Create the keymap for this mode.
(defvar-keymap text-mode-map :doc "Keymap for `text-mode'. Many other modes, such as `mail-mode' and `outline-mode', inherit all the commands defined in this map." "C-M-i" #'ispell-complete-word)
Here is how the actual mode command is defined now:
(define-derived-mode text-mode nil "Text" "Major mode for editing text written for humans to read. In this mode, paragraphs are delimited only by blank or white lines. You can thus get the full benefit of adaptive filling (see the variable `adaptive-fill-mode'). \\{text-mode-map} Turning on Text mode runs the normal hook `text-mode-hook'."
(setq-local text-mode-variant t) (setq-local require-final-newline mode-require-final-newline))
The three Lisp modes (Lisp mode, Emacs Lisp mode, and Lisp Interaction mode) have more features than Text mode and the code is correspondingly more complicated. Here are excerpts from lisp-mode.el that illustrate how these modes are written.
Here is how the Lisp mode syntax and abbrev tables are defined:
;; Create mode-specific table variables.
(define-abbrev-table 'lisp-mode-abbrev-table ()
"Abbrev table for Lisp mode.")
(defvar lisp-mode-syntax-table
(let ((table (make-syntax-table lisp--mode-syntax-table)))
(modify-syntax-entry ?\[ "_ " table)
(modify-syntax-entry ?\] "_ " table)
(modify-syntax-entry ?# "' 14" table)
(modify-syntax-entry ?| "\" 23bn" table)
table)
"Syntax table used in `lisp-mode'.")
The three modes for Lisp share much of their code. For instance, Lisp mode and Emacs Lisp mode inherit from Lisp Data mode and Lisp Interaction Mode inherits from Emacs Lisp mode.
Amongst other things, Lisp Data mode sets up the comment-start
variable to handle Lisp comments:
(setq-local comment-start ";") ...
Each of the different Lisp modes has a slightly different keymap. For
example, Lisp mode binds C-c C-z to run-lisp
, but the other
Lisp modes do not. However, all Lisp modes have some commands in
common. The following code sets up the common commands:
(defvar-keymap lisp-mode-shared-map :parent prog-mode-map :doc "Keymap for commands shared by all sorts of Lisp modes." "C-M-q" #'indent-sexp "DEL" #'backward-delete-char-untabify)
And here is the code to set up the keymap for Lisp mode:
(defvar-keymap lisp-mode-map :doc "Keymap for ordinary Lisp mode. All commands in `lisp-mode-shared-map' are inherited by this map." :parent lisp-mode-shared-map "C-M-x" #'lisp-eval-defun "C-c C-z" #'run-lisp)
Finally, here is the major mode command for Lisp mode:
(define-derived-mode lisp-mode lisp-data-mode "Lisp" "Major mode for editing Lisp code for Lisps other than GNU Emacs Lisp. Commands: Delete converts tabs to spaces as it moves back. Blank lines separate paragraphs. Semicolons start comments. \\{lisp-mode-map} Note that `run-lisp' may be used either to start an inferior Lisp job or to switch back to an existing one."
(setq-local find-tag-default-function 'lisp-find-tag-default) (setq-local comment-start-skip "\\(\\(^\\|[^\\\n]\\)\\(\\\\\\\\\\)*\\)\\(;+\\|#|\\) *") (setq imenu-case-fold-search t))
A minor mode provides optional features that users may enable or disable independently of the choice of major mode. Minor modes can be enabled individually or in combination.
Most minor modes implement features that are independent of the major mode, and can thus be used with most major modes. For example, Auto Fill mode works with any major mode that permits text insertion. A few minor modes, however, are specific to a particular major mode. For example, Diff Auto Refine mode is a minor mode that is intended to be used only with Diff mode.
Ideally, a minor mode should have its desired effect regardless of the other minor modes in effect. It should be possible to activate and deactivate minor modes in any order.
This buffer-local variable lists the currently enabled minor modes in the current buffer, and is a list of symbols.
This variable lists the currently enabled global minor modes, and is a list of symbols.
The value of this variable is a list of all minor mode commands.
There are conventions for writing minor modes just as there are for
major modes (see Major Modes). These conventions are described below. The easiest way to
follow them is to use the macro define-minor-mode
.
See Defining Minor Modes.
nil
if the mode is disabled, and non-nil
if the mode is enabled. The variable should be buffer-local if the
minor mode is buffer-local.
This variable is used in conjunction with the minor-mode-alist
to
display the minor mode name in the mode line. It also determines
whether the minor mode keymap is active, via minor-mode-map-alist
(see Controlling the Active Keymaps). Individual commands or hooks can
also check its value.
The mode command should accept one optional argument. If called interactively with no prefix argument, it should toggle the mode (i.e., enable if it is disabled, and disable if it is enabled). If called interactively with a prefix argument, it should enable the mode if the argument is positive and disable it otherwise.
If the mode command is called from Lisp (i.e., non-interactively), it
should enable the mode if the argument is omitted or nil
; it
should toggle the mode if the argument is the symbol toggle
;
otherwise it should treat the argument in the same way as for an
interactive call with a numeric prefix argument, as described above.
The following example shows how to implement this behavior (it is
similar to the code generated by the define-minor-mode
macro):
(interactive (list (or current-prefix-arg 'toggle)))
(let ((enable
(if (eq arg 'toggle)
(not foo-mode) ; this is the mode’s mode variable
(> (prefix-numeric-value arg) 0))))
(if enable
do-enable
do-disable))
The reason for this somewhat complex behavior is that it lets users easily toggle the minor mode interactively, and also lets the minor mode be easily enabled in a mode hook, like this:
(add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'foo-mode)
This behaves correctly whether or not foo-mode
was already
enabled, since the foo-mode
mode command unconditionally enables
the minor mode when it is called from Lisp with no argument. Disabling
a minor mode in a mode hook is a little uglier:
(add-hook 'text-mode-hook (lambda () (foo-mode -1)))
However, this is not very commonly done.
Enabling or disabling a minor mode twice in direct succession should not fail and should do the same thing as enabling or disabling it only once. In other words, the minor mode command should be idempotent.
minor-mode-alist
for each minor mode
(see Definition of minor-mode-alist), if you want to indicate the
minor mode in the mode line. This element should be a list of the
following form:
(mode-variable string)
Here mode-variable is the variable that controls enabling of the minor mode, and string is a short string, starting with a space, to represent the mode in the mode line. These strings must be short so that there is room for several of them at once.
When you add an element to minor-mode-alist
, use assq
to
check for an existing element, to avoid duplication. For example:
(unless (assq 'leif-mode minor-mode-alist) (push '(leif-mode " Leif") minor-mode-alist))
or like this, using add-to-list
(see Modifying List Variables):
(add-to-list 'minor-mode-alist '(leif-mode " Leif"))
In addition, several major mode conventions (see Major Mode Conventions) apply to minor modes as well: those regarding the names of global symbols, the use of a hook at the end of the initialization function, and the use of keymaps and other tables.
The minor mode should, if possible, support enabling and disabling via
Custom (see Customization Settings). To do this, the mode variable should be
defined with defcustom
, usually with :type 'boolean
. If
just setting the variable is not sufficient to enable the mode, you
should also specify a :set
method which enables the mode by
invoking the mode command. Note in the variable’s documentation string
that setting the variable other than via Custom may not take effect.
Also, mark the definition with an autoload cookie (see autoload cookie), and specify a :require
so that customizing the variable
will load the library that defines the mode. For example:
;;;###autoload (defcustom msb-mode nil "Toggle msb-mode. Setting this variable directly does not take effect; use either \\[customize] or the function `msb-mode'." :set 'custom-set-minor-mode :initialize 'custom-initialize-default :version "20.4" :type 'boolean :group 'msb :require 'msb)
Each minor mode can have its own keymap, which is active when the mode
is enabled. To set up a keymap for a minor mode, add an element to the
alist minor-mode-map-alist
. See Definition of minor-mode-map-alist.
One use of minor mode keymaps is to modify the behavior of certain
self-inserting characters so that they do something else as well as
self-insert. (Another way to customize self-insert-command
is
through post-self-insert-hook
, see User-Level Insertion Commands. Apart from this, the facilities for customizing
self-insert-command
are limited to special cases, designed for
abbrevs and Auto Fill mode. Do not try substituting your own
definition of self-insert-command
for the standard one. The
editor command loop handles this function specially.)
Minor modes may bind commands to key sequences consisting of C-c followed by a punctuation character. However, sequences consisting of C-c followed by one of {}<>:;, or a control character or digit, are reserved for major modes. Also, C-c letter is reserved for users. See Key Binding Conventions.
The macro define-minor-mode
offers a convenient way of
implementing a mode in one self-contained definition.
This macro defines a new minor mode whose name is mode (a symbol). It defines a command named mode to toggle the minor mode, with doc as its documentation string.
The toggle command takes one optional (prefix) argument.
If called interactively with no argument it toggles the mode on or off.
A positive prefix argument enables the mode, any other prefix argument
disables it. From Lisp, an argument of toggle
toggles the mode,
whereas an omitted or nil
argument enables the mode.
This makes it easy to enable the minor mode in a major mode hook, for example.
If doc is nil
, the macro supplies a default documentation string
explaining the above.
By default, it also defines a variable named mode, which is set to
t
or nil
by enabling or disabling the mode.
The keyword-args consist of keywords followed by corresponding values. A few keywords have special meanings:
:global global
If non-nil
, this specifies that the minor mode should be global
rather than buffer-local. It defaults to nil
.
One of the effects of making a minor mode global is that the
mode variable becomes a customization variable. Toggling it
through the Customize interface turns the mode on and off, and its
value can be saved for future Emacs sessions (see Saving
Customizations in The GNU Emacs Manual. For the saved
variable to work, you should ensure that the minor mode function
is available each time Emacs starts; usually this is done by
marking the define-minor-mode
form as autoloaded.
:init-value init-value
This is the value to which the mode variable is initialized.
Except in unusual circumstances (see below), this value must be
nil
.
:lighter lighter
The string lighter says what to display in the mode line
when the mode is enabled; if it is nil
, the mode is not displayed
in the mode line.
:keymap keymap
The optional argument keymap specifies the keymap for the minor
mode. If non-nil
, it should be a variable name (whose value is
a keymap), a keymap, or an alist of the form
(key-sequence . definition)
where each key-sequence and definition are arguments
suitable for passing to define-key
(see Changing Key Bindings). If keymap is a keymap or an alist, this also
defines the variable mode-map
.
:variable place
This replaces the default variable mode, used to store the state
of the mode. If you specify this, the mode variable is not
defined, and any init-value argument is unused. place
can be a different named variable (which you must define yourself), or
anything that can be used with the setf
function
(see Generalized Variables).
place can also be a cons (get . set)
,
where get is an expression that returns the current state,
and set is a function of one argument (a state) which should be
assigned to place.
:after-hook after-hook
This defines a single Lisp form which is evaluated after the mode hooks have run. It should not be quoted.
:interactive value
Minor modes are interactive commands by default. If value is
nil
, this is inhibited. If value is a list of symbols,
it’s used to say which major modes this minor mode is useful in.
Any other keyword arguments are passed directly to the
defcustom
generated for the variable mode.
See Defining Customization Variables, for the description of those keywords and
their values.
The command named mode first performs the standard actions such as
setting the variable named mode and then executes the body
forms, if any. It then runs the mode hook variable
mode-hook
and finishes by evaluating any form in
:after-hook
. (Note that all of this, including running the
hook, is done both when the mode is enabled and disabled.)
The initial value must be nil
except in cases where (1) the
mode is preloaded in Emacs, or (2) it is painless for loading to
enable the mode even though the user did not request it. For
instance, if the mode has no effect unless something else is enabled,
and will always be loaded by that time, enabling it by default is
harmless. But these are unusual circumstances. Normally, the
initial value must be nil
.
The name easy-mmode-define-minor-mode
is an alias
for this macro.
Here is an example of using define-minor-mode
:
(define-minor-mode hungry-mode "Toggle Hungry mode. Interactively with no argument, this command toggles the mode. A positive prefix argument enables the mode, any other prefix argument disables it. From Lisp, argument omitted or nil enables the mode, `toggle' toggles the state. When Hungry mode is enabled, the control delete key gobbles all preceding whitespace except the last. See the command \\[hungry-electric-delete]." ;; The initial value. nil ;; The indicator for the mode line. " Hungry" ;; The minor mode bindings. '(([C-backspace] . hungry-electric-delete)))
This defines a minor mode named “Hungry mode”, a command named
hungry-mode
to toggle it, a variable named hungry-mode
which indicates whether the mode is enabled, and a variable named
hungry-mode-map
which holds the keymap that is active when the
mode is enabled. It initializes the keymap with a key binding for
C-DEL. There are no body forms—many minor modes
don’t need any.
Here’s an equivalent way to write it:
(define-minor-mode hungry-mode "Toggle Hungry mode. ...rest of documentation as before..." ;; The initial value. :init-value nil ;; The indicator for the mode line. :lighter " Hungry" ;; The minor mode bindings. :keymap '(([C-backspace] . hungry-electric-delete) ([C-M-backspace] . (lambda () (interactive) (hungry-electric-delete t)))))
This defines a global toggle named global-mode whose meaning is to enable or disable the buffer-local minor mode mode in all (or some; see below) buffers. It also executes the body forms. To turn on the minor mode in a buffer, it uses the function turn-on; to turn off the minor mode, it calls mode with −1 as argument. (The function turn-on is a separate function so it could determine whether to enable the minor mode or not when it is not a priori clear that it should always be enabled.)
Globally enabling the mode also affects buffers subsequently created by visiting files, and buffers that use a major mode other than Fundamental mode; but it does not detect the creation of a new buffer in Fundamental mode.
This macro defines the customization option global-mode
(see Customization Settings), which can be toggled via the Customize
interface to turn the minor mode on and off. As with
define-minor-mode
, you should ensure that the
define-globalized-minor-mode
form is evaluated each time Emacs
starts, for example by providing a :require
keyword.
Use :group group
in keyword-args to specify the
custom group for the mode variable of the global minor mode.
By default, the buffer-local minor mode variable that says whether the
mode is switched on or off is the same as the name of the mode itself.
Use :variable variable
if that’s not the case–some minor
modes use a different variable to store this state information.
Generally speaking, when you define a globalized minor mode, you should also define a non-globalized version, so that people could use it (or disable it) in individual buffers. This also allows them to disable a globally enabled minor mode in a specific major mode, by using that mode’s hook.
If the macro is given a :predicate
keyword, it will create a
user option called the same as the global mode variable, but with
-modes
instead of -mode
at the end, i.e.
global-modes
. This variable will be used in a predicate
function that determines whether the minor mode should be activated in
a particular major mode, and users can customize the value of the
variable to control the modes in which the minor mode will be switched
on. Valid values of :predicate
(and thus valid values of the
user option it creates) include t
(use in all major modes),
nil
(don’t use in any major modes), or a list of mode names,
optionally preceded with not
(as in (not mode-name …)
). These elements can be mixed, as shown in
the following examples.
(c-mode (not mail-mode message-mode) text-mode)
This means “use in modes derived from c-mode
, and not in
modes derived from message-mode
or mail-mode
, but do use
in modes derived from text-mode
, and otherwise no other
modes”.
((not c-mode) t)
This means “don’t use in modes derived from c-mode
, but do use
everywhere else”.
(text-mode)
This means “use in modes derived from text-mode
, but nowhere
else”. (There’s an implicit nil
element at the end.)
Minor modes often set buffer-local variables that affect some features
in Emacs. When a minor mode is switched off, the mode is expected to
restore the previous state of these variables. This convenience macro
helps with doing that: It works much like setq-local
, but
returns an object that can be used to restore these values back to
their previous values/states (using the companion function
buffer-local-restore-state
).
Each Emacs window (aside from minibuffer windows) typically has a mode line at the bottom, which displays status information about the buffer displayed in the window. The mode line contains information about the buffer, such as its name, associated file, depth of recursive editing, and major and minor modes. A window can also have a header line, which is much like the mode line but appears at the top of the window.
This section describes how to control the contents of the mode line and header line. We include it in this chapter because much of the information displayed in the mode line relates to the enabled major and minor modes.
%
-Constructs in the Mode LineThe contents of each mode line are specified by the buffer-local
variable mode-line-format
(see The Top Level of Mode Line Control). This variable
holds a mode line construct: a template that controls what is
displayed on the buffer’s mode line. The value of
header-line-format
specifies the buffer’s header line in the same
way. All windows for the same buffer use the same
mode-line-format
and header-line-format
unless a
mode-line-format
or header-line-format
parameter has been
specified for that window (see Window Parameters).
For efficiency, Emacs does not continuously recompute each window’s
mode line and header line. It does so when circumstances appear to call
for it—for instance, if you change the window configuration, switch
buffers, narrow or widen the buffer, scroll, or modify the buffer. If
you alter any of the variables referenced by mode-line-format
or
header-line-format
(see Variables Used in the Mode Line), or any other
data structures that affect how text is displayed (see Emacs Display), you
should use the function force-mode-line-update
to update the
display.
This function forces Emacs to update the current buffer’s mode line and
header line, based on the latest values of all relevant variables,
during its next redisplay cycle. If the optional argument all is
non-nil
, it forces an update for all mode lines and header lines.
This function also forces an update of the menu bar and frame title.
The selected window’s mode line is usually displayed in a different
color using the face mode-line-active
. Other windows’ mode
lines appear in the face mode-line-inactive
instead.
See Faces.
If you want to have more extensive differences between the mode lines
in selected and non-selected windows, you can use this predicate in an
:eval
construct. For instance, if you want to display the
buffer name in bold in selected windows, but in italics in the other
windows, you can say something like:
(setq-default mode-line-buffer-identification '(:eval (propertize "%12b" 'face (if (mode-line-window-selected-p) 'bold 'italic))))
Some modes put a lot of data in the mode line, pushing elements at
the end of the mode line off to the right. Emacs can “compress” the
mode line if the mode-line-compact
variable is non-nil
by turning stretches of spaces into a single space. If this variable
is long
, this is only done when the mode line is wider than the
currently selected window. (This computation is approximate, based on
the number of characters, and not their displayed width.) This
variable can be buffer-local to only compress mode-lines in certain
buffers.
The mode line contents are controlled by a data structure called a mode line construct, made up of lists, strings, symbols, and numbers kept in buffer-local variables. Each data type has a specific meaning for the mode line appearance, as described below. The same data structure is used for constructing frame titles (see Frame Titles) and header lines (see Window Header Lines).
A mode line construct may be as simple as a fixed string of text, but it usually specifies how to combine fixed strings with variables’ values to construct the text. Many of these variables are themselves defined to have mode line constructs as their values.
Here are the meanings of various data types as mode line constructs:
string
¶A string as a mode line construct appears verbatim except for
%
-constructs in it. These stand for substitution of
other data; see %
-Constructs in the Mode Line.
If parts of the string have face
properties, they control
display of the text just as they would text in the buffer. Any
characters which have no face
properties are displayed, by
default, in the face mode-line
or mode-line-inactive
(see Standard Faces in The GNU Emacs Manual). The
help-echo
and keymap
properties in string have
special meanings. See Properties in the Mode Line.
symbol
A symbol as a mode line construct stands for its value. The value of
symbol is used as a mode line construct, in place of symbol.
However, the symbols t
and nil
are ignored, as is any
symbol whose value is void.
There is one exception: if the value of symbol is a string, it is
displayed verbatim: the %
-constructs are not recognized.
Unless symbol is marked as risky (i.e., it has a
non-nil
risky-local-variable
property), all text
properties specified in symbol’s value are ignored. This includes
the text properties of strings in symbol’s value, as well as all
:eval
and :propertize
forms in it. (The reason for this
is security: non-risky variables could be set automatically from file
variables without prompting the user.)
(string rest…)
(list rest…)
A list whose first element is a string or list means to process all
the elements recursively and concatenate the results. This is the
most common form of mode line construct. (Note that text properties
are handled specially (for reasons of efficiency) when displaying
strings in the mode line: Only the text property on the first
character of the string are considered, and they are then used over
the entire string. If you need a string with different text
properties, you have to use the special :propertize
mode line
construct.)
(:eval form)
A list whose first element is the symbol :eval
says to evaluate
form, and use the result as a string to display. Make sure this
evaluation cannot load any files, as doing so could cause infinite
recursion.
(:propertize elt props…)
A list whose first element is the symbol :propertize
says to
process the mode line construct elt recursively, then add the
text properties specified by props to the result. The argument
props should consist of zero or more pairs text-property
value. If elt is or produces a string with text
properties, all the characters of that string should have the same
properties, or else some of them might be removed by
:propertize
.
(symbol then else)
A list whose first element is a symbol that is not a keyword specifies
a conditional. Its meaning depends on the value of symbol. If
symbol has a non-nil
value, the second element,
then, is processed recursively as a mode line construct.
Otherwise, the third element, else, is processed recursively.
You may omit else; then the mode line construct displays nothing
if the value of symbol is nil
or void.
(width rest…)
A list whose first element is an integer specifies truncation or padding of the results of rest. The remaining elements rest are processed recursively as mode line constructs and concatenated together. When width is positive, the result is space filled on the right if its width is less than width. When width is negative, the result is truncated on the right to −width columns if its width exceeds −width.
For example, the usual way to show what percentage of a buffer is above
the top of the window is to use a list like this: (-3 "%p")
.
The variable in overall control of the mode line is
mode-line-format
.
The value of this variable is a mode line construct that controls the contents of the mode-line. It is always buffer-local in all buffers.
If you set this variable to nil
in a buffer, that buffer does not
have a mode line. (A window that is just one line tall also does not
display a mode line.)
The default value of mode-line-format
is designed to use the
values of other variables such as mode-line-position
and
mode-line-modes
(which in turn incorporates the values of the
variables mode-name
and minor-mode-alist
). Very few
modes need to alter mode-line-format
itself. For most
purposes, it is sufficient to alter some of the variables that
mode-line-format
either directly or indirectly refers to.
If you do alter mode-line-format
itself, the new value should
use the same variables that appear in the default value (see Variables Used in the Mode Line), rather than duplicating their contents or displaying
the information in another fashion. This way, customizations made by
the user or by Lisp programs (such as display-time
and major
modes) via changes to those variables remain effective.
Here is a hypothetical example of a mode-line-format
that might
be useful for Shell mode (in reality, Shell mode does not set
mode-line-format
):
(setq mode-line-format (list "-" 'mode-line-mule-info 'mode-line-modified 'mode-line-frame-identification "%b--"
;; Note that this is evaluated while making the list. ;; It makes a mode line construct which is just a string. (getenv "HOST")
":" 'default-directory " " 'global-mode-string " %[(" '(:eval (format-time-string "%F")) 'mode-line-process 'minor-mode-alist "%n" ")%]--"
'(which-function-mode ("" which-func-format "--")) '(line-number-mode "L%l--") '(column-number-mode "C%c--") '(-3 "%p")))
(The variables line-number-mode
, column-number-mode
and
which-function-mode
enable particular minor modes; as usual,
these variable names are also the minor mode command names.)
This section describes variables incorporated by the standard value of
mode-line-format
into the text of the mode line. There is
nothing inherently special about these variables; any other variables
could have the same effects on the mode line if the value of
mode-line-format
is changed to use them. However, various parts
of Emacs set these variables on the understanding that they will control
parts of the mode line; therefore, practically speaking, it is essential
for the mode line to use them. Also see
Optional Mode Line in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This variable holds the value of the mode line construct that displays information about the language environment, buffer coding system, and current input method. See Non-ASCII Characters.
This variable holds the value of the mode line construct that displays whether the current buffer is modified. Its default value displays ‘**’ if the buffer is modified, ‘--’ if the buffer is not modified, ‘%%’ if the buffer is read only, and ‘%*’ if the buffer is read only and modified.
Changing this variable does not force an update of the mode line.
This variable identifies the current frame. Its default value
displays " "
if you are using a window system which can show
multiple frames, or "-%F "
on an ordinary terminal which shows
only one frame at a time.
This variable identifies the buffer being displayed in the window. Its default value displays the buffer name, padded with spaces to at least 12 columns.
This variable indicates the position in the buffer. Its default value displays the buffer percentage and, optionally, the buffer size, the line number and the column number.
This option is used in mode-line-position
. Its value specifies
both the buffer percentage to display (one of nil
, "%o"
,
"%p"
, "%P"
or "%q"
, see %
-Constructs in the Mode Line) and a
width to space-fill or truncate to. You are recommended to set this
option with the customize-variable
facility.
The variable vc-mode
, buffer-local in each buffer, records
whether the buffer’s visited file is maintained with version control,
and, if so, which kind. Its value is a string that appears in the mode
line, or nil
for no version control.
This variable displays the buffer’s major and minor modes. Its default value also displays the recursive editing level, information on the process status, and whether narrowing is in effect.
This variable is used to show whether default-directory
for the
current buffer is remote.
This variable is used to identify emacsclient
frames.
The following three variables are used in mode-line-modes
:
This buffer-local variable holds the “pretty” name of the current
buffer’s major mode. Each major mode should set this variable so that
the mode name will appear in the mode line. The value does not have
to be a string, but can use any of the data types valid in a mode-line
construct (see The Data Structure of the Mode Line). To compute the string that will
identify the mode name in the mode line, use format-mode-line
(see Emulating Mode Line Formatting).
This buffer-local variable contains the mode line information on process
status in modes used for communicating with subprocesses. It is
displayed immediately following the major mode name, with no intervening
space. For example, its value in the *shell* buffer is
(":%s")
, which allows the shell to display its status along
with the major mode as: ‘(Shell:run)’. Normally this variable
is nil
.
This variable is displayed at the front of the mode line. By default, this construct is displayed right at the beginning of the mode line, except that if there is a memory-full message, it is displayed first.
This variable is displayed at the end of the mode line.
Mode line construct for miscellaneous information. By default, this
shows the information specified by global-mode-string
.
The format used to display line numbers when line-number-mode
(see Optional Mode Line in The GNU Emacs Manual) is
switched on. ‘%l’ in the format will be replaced with the line
number.
The format used to display column numbers when
column-number-mode
(see Optional Mode Line in The GNU
Emacs Manual) is switched on. ‘%c’ in the format will be
replaced with a zero-based column number, and ‘%C’ will be
replaced with a one-based column number.
The format used to display column numbers when both
line-number-mode
and column-number-mode
are switched on.
See the previous two variables for the meaning of the ‘%l’,
‘%c’ and ‘%C’ format specs.
This variable holds an association list whose elements specify how the
mode line should indicate that a minor mode is active. Each element of
the minor-mode-alist
should be a two-element list:
(minor-mode-variable mode-line-string)
More generally, mode-line-string can be any mode line construct.
It appears in the mode line when the value of minor-mode-variable
is non-nil
, and not otherwise. These strings should begin with
spaces so that they don’t run together. Conventionally, the
minor-mode-variable for a specific mode is set to a non-nil
value when that minor mode is activated.
minor-mode-alist
itself is not buffer-local. Each variable
mentioned in the alist should be buffer-local if its minor mode can be
enabled separately in each buffer.
This variable holds a mode line construct that, by default, appears in
the mode line as part of mode-line-misc-info
, just after the
which-function-mode
information if that minor mode is enabled,
else after mode-line-modes
. Elements that are added to this
construct should normally end in a space (to ensure that consecutive
global-mode-string
elements display properly). For instance,
the command display-time
sets global-mode-string
to
refer to the variable display-time-string
, which holds a string
containing the time and load information.
The ‘%M’ construct substitutes the value of
global-mode-string
. This construct is not used by the default
mode line, as the variable itself is used in
mode-line-misc-info
.
Here is a simplified version of the default value of
mode-line-format
. The real default value also
specifies addition of text properties.
("-" mode-line-mule-info mode-line-modified mode-line-frame-identification mode-line-buffer-identification
" " mode-line-position (vc-mode vc-mode) " "
mode-line-modes (which-function-mode ("" which-func-format "--")) (global-mode-string ("--" global-mode-string)) "-%-")
%
-Constructs in the Mode Line ¶Strings used as mode line constructs can use certain
%
-constructs to substitute various kinds of data. The
following is a list of the defined %
-constructs, and what they
mean.
In any construct except ‘%%’, you can add a decimal integer after the ‘%’ to specify a minimum field width. If the width is less, the field is padded to that width. Purely numeric constructs (‘c’, ‘i’, ‘I’, and ‘l’) are padded by inserting spaces to the left, and others are padded by inserting spaces to the right.
%b
The current buffer name, obtained with the buffer-name
function.
See Buffer Names.
%c
The current column number of point, counting from zero starting at the left margin of the window.
%C
The current column number of point, counting from one starting at the left margin of the window.
%e
When Emacs is nearly out of memory for Lisp objects, a brief message saying so. Otherwise, this is empty.
%f
The visited file name, obtained with the buffer-file-name
function. See Buffer File Name.
%F
The title (only on a window system) or the name of the selected frame. See Basic Parameters.
%i
The size of the accessible part of the current buffer; basically
(- (point-max) (point-min))
.
%I
Like ‘%i’, but the size is printed in a more readable way by using ‘k’ for 10^3, ‘M’ for 10^6, ‘G’ for 10^9, etc., to abbreviate.
%l
The current line number of point, counting within the accessible portion of the buffer.
%M
The value of global-mode-string
(which is part of
mode-line-misc-info
by default).
%n
‘Narrow’ when narrowing is in effect; nothing otherwise (see
narrow-to-region
in Narrowing).
%o
The degree of travel of the window through (the visible portion of) the buffer, i.e. the size of the text above the top of the window expressed as a percentage of all the text outside the window, or ‘Top’, ‘Bottom’ or ‘All’.
%p
The percentage of the buffer text above the top of window, or ‘Top’, ‘Bottom’ or ‘All’. Note that the default mode line construct truncates this to three characters.
%P
The percentage of the buffer text that is above the bottom of the window (which includes the text visible in the window, as well as the text above the top), plus ‘Top’ if the top of the buffer is visible on screen; or ‘Bottom’ or ‘All’.
%q
The percentages of text above both the top and the bottom of the window, separated by ‘-’, or ‘All’.
%s
The status of the subprocess belonging to the current buffer, obtained with
process-status
. See Process Information.
%z
The mnemonics of keyboard, terminal, and buffer coding systems.
%Z
Like ‘%z’, but including the end-of-line format.
%*
‘%’ if the buffer is read only (see buffer-read-only
);
‘*’ if the buffer is modified (see buffer-modified-p
);
‘-’ otherwise. See Buffer Modification.
%+
‘*’ if the buffer is modified (see buffer-modified-p
);
‘%’ if the buffer is read only (see buffer-read-only
);
‘-’ otherwise. This differs from ‘%*’ only for a modified
read-only buffer. See Buffer Modification.
%&
‘*’ if the buffer is modified, and ‘-’ otherwise.
%@
‘@’ if the buffer’s default-directory
(see Functions that Expand Filenames) is on a remote machine, and ‘-’ otherwise.
%[
An indication of the depth of recursive editing levels (not counting minibuffer levels): one ‘[’ for each editing level. See Recursive Editing.
%]
One ‘]’ for each recursive editing level (not counting minibuffer levels).
%-
Dashes sufficient to fill the remainder of the mode line.
%%
The character ‘%’—this is how to include a literal ‘%’ in a
string in which %
-constructs are allowed.
%
-Constructs ¶The following constructs should no longer be used.
%m
Obsolete; use the mode-name
variable instead. The %m
construct is inadequate, as it produces an empty string if the value
of mode-name
is a non-string mode-line construct (as in
emacs-lisp-mode
, for example).
Certain text properties are meaningful in the
mode line. The face
property affects the appearance of text; the
help-echo
property associates help strings with the text, and
keymap
can make the text mouse-sensitive.
There are four ways to specify text properties for text in the mode line:
(:propertize elt props…)
construct to
give elt a text property specified by props.
:eval form
in the mode line data
structure, and make form evaluate to a string that has a text
property.
You can use the keymap
property to specify a keymap. This
keymap only takes real effect for mouse clicks; binding character keys
and function keys to it has no effect, since it is impossible to move
point into the mode line.
When the mode line refers to a variable which does not have a
non-nil
risky-local-variable
property, any text
properties given or specified within that variable’s values are
ignored. This is because such properties could otherwise specify
functions to be called, and those functions could come from file
local variables.
A window can have a header line at the top, just as it can have
a mode line at the bottom. The header line feature works just like the
mode line feature, except that it’s controlled by
header-line-format
:
This variable, local in every buffer, specifies how to display the
header line, for windows displaying the buffer. The format of the value
is the same as for mode-line-format
(see The Data Structure of the Mode Line).
It is normally nil
, so that ordinary buffers have no header
line.
If display-line-numbers-mode
is turned on in a buffer
(see display-line-numbers-mode in The GNU
Emacs Manual), the buffer text is indented on display by the amount
of screen space needed to show the line numbers. By contrast, text of
the header line is not automatically indented, because a header line
never displays a line number, and because the text of the header line
is not necessarily directly related to buffer text below it. If a
Lisp program needs the header-line text to be aligned with buffer text
(for example, if the buffer displays columnar data, like
tabulated-list-mode
does, see Tabulated List mode), it
should turn on the minor mode header-line-indent-mode
.
This buffer-local minor mode tracks the changes of the width of the
line-number display on screen (which may vary depending on the range
of line numbers shown in the window), and allows Lisp programs to
arrange that header-line text is always aligned with buffer text when
the line-number width changes. Such Lisp programs should turn on this
mode in the buffer, and use the variables header-line-indent
and header-line-indent-width
in the header-line-format
to ensure it is adjusted to the text indentation at all times.
This variable’s value is a whitespace string whose width is kept equal
to the current width of line-numbers on display, provided that
header-line-indent-mode
is turned on in the buffer shown in the
window. The number of spaces is calculated under the assumption that
the face of the header-line text uses the same font, including size,
as the frame’s default font; if that assumption is false, use
header-line-indent-width
, described below, instead. This
variable is intended to be used in simple situations where the
header-line text needs to be indented as a whole to be realigned with
buffer text, by prepending this variable’s value to the actual
header-line text. For example, the following definition of
header-line-format
:
(setq header-line-format `("" header-line-indent ,my-header-line))
where my-header-line
is the format string that produces the
actual text of the header line, will make sure the header-line text
is always indented like the buffer text below it.
This variable’s value is kept updated to provide the current width, in
units of the frame’s canonical character width, used for displaying
the line numbers, provided that header-line-indent-mode
is
turned on in the buffer shown in the window. It can be used for
aligning the header-line text with the buffer text when
header-line-indent
is not flexible enough. For example, if the
header line uses a font whose metrics is different from the default
face’s font, your Lisp program can calculate the width of line-number
display in pixels, by multiplying the value of this variable by the
value returned by frame-char-width
(see Frame Font), and
then use the result to align header-line text using the
:align-to
display property spec (see Specified Spaces) in
pixels on the relevant parts of header-line-format
.
This function returns the height in pixels of window’s header line. window must be a live window, and defaults to the selected window.
A window that is just one line tall never displays a header line. A window that is two lines tall cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if it has a mode line, then it does not display a header line.
You can use the function format-mode-line
to compute the text
that would appear in a mode line or header line based on a certain
mode line construct.
This function formats a line of text according to format as if it
were generating the mode line for window, but it also returns the
text as a string. The argument window defaults to the selected
window. If buffer is non-nil
, all the information used is
taken from buffer; by default, it comes from window’s
buffer.
The value string normally has text properties that correspond to the
faces, keymaps, etc., that the mode line would have. Any character for
which no face
property is specified by format gets a
default value determined by face. If face is t
, that
stands for either mode-line
if window is selected,
otherwise mode-line-inactive
. If face is nil
or
omitted, that stands for the default face. If face is an integer,
the value returned by this function will have no text properties.
You can also specify other valid faces as the value of face.
If specified, that face provides the face
property for characters
whose face is not specified by format.
Note that using mode-line
, mode-line-inactive
, or
header-line
as face will actually redisplay the mode line
or the header line, respectively, using the current definitions of the
corresponding face, in addition to returning the formatted string.
(Other faces do not cause redisplay.)
For example, (format-mode-line header-line-format)
returns the
text that would appear in the selected window’s header line (""
if it has no header line). (format-mode-line header-line-format
'header-line)
returns the same text, with each character
carrying the face that it will have in the header line itself, and also
redraws the header line.
Font Lock mode is a buffer-local minor mode that automatically
attaches face
properties to certain parts of the buffer based on
their syntactic role. How it parses the buffer depends on the major
mode; most major modes define syntactic criteria for which faces to use
in which contexts. This section explains how to customize Font Lock for
a particular major mode.
Font Lock mode finds text to highlight in three ways: through parsing based on a full-blown parser (usually, via an external library or program), through syntactic parsing based on the Emacs’s built-in syntax table, or through searching (usually for regular expressions). If enabled, parser-based fontification happens first (see Parser-based Font Lock). Syntactic fontification happens next; it finds comments and string constants and highlights them. Search-based fontification happens last.
The Font Lock functionality is based on several basic functions. Each of these calls the function specified by the corresponding variable. This indirection allows major and minor modes to modify the way fontification works in the buffers of that mode, and even use the Font Lock mechanisms for features that have nothing to do with fontification. (This is why the description below says “should” when it describes what the functions do: the mode can customize the values of the corresponding variables to do something entirely different.) The variables mentioned below are described in Other Font Lock Variables.
font-lock-fontify-buffer
¶This function should fontify the current buffer’s accessible portion,
by calling the function specified by
font-lock-fontify-buffer-function
.
font-lock-unfontify-buffer
¶Used when turning Font Lock off to remove the fontification. Calls
the function specified by font-lock-unfontify-buffer-function
.
font-lock-fontify-region beg end &optional loudly
¶Should fontify the region between beg and end. If
loudly is non-nil
, should display status messages while
fontifying. Calls the function specified by
font-lock-fontify-region-function
.
font-lock-unfontify-region beg end
¶Should remove fontification from the region between beg and
end. Calls the function specified by
font-lock-unfontify-region-function
.
font-lock-flush &optional beg end
¶This function should mark the fontification of the region between
beg and end as outdated. If not specified or nil
,
beg and end default to the beginning and end of the
buffer’s accessible portion. Calls the function specified by
font-lock-flush-function
.
font-lock-ensure &optional beg end
¶This function should make sure the region between beg and
end has been fontified. The optional arguments beg and
end default to the beginning and the end of the buffer’s
accessible portion. Calls the function specified by
font-lock-ensure-function
.
font-lock-debug-fontify
¶This is a convenience command meant to be used when developing font
locking for a mode, and should not be called from Lisp code. It
recomputes all the relevant variables and then calls
font-lock-fontify-region
on the entire buffer.
There are several variables that control how Font Lock mode highlights
text. But major modes should not set any of these variables directly.
Instead, they should set font-lock-defaults
as a buffer-local
variable. The value assigned to this variable is used, if and when Font
Lock mode is enabled, to set all the other variables.
This variable is set by modes to specify how to fontify text in that
mode. It automatically becomes buffer-local when set. If its value
is nil
, Font Lock mode does no highlighting, and you can use
the ‘Faces’ menu (under ‘Edit’ and then ‘Text
Properties’ in the menu bar) to assign faces explicitly to text in the
buffer.
If non-nil
, the value should look like this:
(keywords [keywords-only [case-fold [syntax-alist other-vars...]]])
The first element, keywords, indirectly specifies the value of
font-lock-keywords
which directs search-based fontification.
It can be a symbol, a variable or a function whose value is the list
to use for font-lock-keywords
. It can also be a list of
several such symbols, one for each possible level of fontification.
The first symbol specifies the ‘mode default’ level of
fontification, the next symbol level 1 fontification, the next level 2,
and so on. The ‘mode default’ level is normally the same as level
1. It is used when font-lock-maximum-decoration
has a nil
value. See Levels of Font Lock.
The second element, keywords-only, specifies the value of the
variable font-lock-keywords-only
. If this is omitted or
nil
, syntactic fontification (of strings and comments) is also
performed. If this is non-nil
, syntactic fontification is not
performed. See Syntactic Font Lock.
The third element, case-fold, specifies the value of
font-lock-keywords-case-fold-search
. If it is non-nil
,
Font Lock mode ignores case during search-based fontification.
If the fourth element, syntax-alist, is non-nil
, it should
be a list of cons cells of the form (char-or-string
. string)
. These are used to set up a syntax table for syntactic
fontification; the resulting syntax table is stored in
font-lock-syntax-table
. If syntax-alist is omitted or
nil
, syntactic fontification uses the syntax table returned by
the syntax-table
function. See Syntax Table Functions.
All the remaining elements (if any) are collectively called
other-vars. Each of these elements should have the form
(variable . value)
—which means, make
variable buffer-local and then set it to value. You can
use these other-vars to set other variables that affect
fontification, aside from those you can control with the first five
elements. See Other Font Lock Variables.
If your mode fontifies text explicitly by adding
font-lock-face
properties, it can specify (nil t)
for
font-lock-defaults
to turn off all automatic fontification.
However, this is not required; it is possible to fontify some things
using font-lock-face
properties and set up automatic
fontification for other parts of the text.
The variable which directly controls search-based fontification is
font-lock-keywords
, which is typically specified via the
keywords element in font-lock-defaults
.
The value of this variable is a list of the keywords to highlight. Lisp
programs should not set this variable directly. Normally, the value is
automatically set by Font Lock mode, using the keywords element in
font-lock-defaults
. The value can also be altered using the
functions font-lock-add-keywords
and
font-lock-remove-keywords
(see Customizing Search-Based Fontification).
Each element of font-lock-keywords
specifies how to find
certain cases of text, and how to highlight those cases. Font Lock mode
processes the elements of font-lock-keywords
one by one, and for
each element, it finds and handles all matches. Ordinarily, once
part of the text has been fontified already, this cannot be overridden
by a subsequent match in the same text; but you can specify different
behavior using the override element of a subexp-highlighter.
Each element of font-lock-keywords
should have one of these
forms:
regexp
Highlight all matches for regexp using
font-lock-keyword-face
. For example,
;; Highlight occurrences of the word ‘foo’
;; using font-lock-keyword-face
.
"\\<foo\\>"
Be careful when composing these regular expressions; a poorly written
pattern can dramatically slow things down! The function
regexp-opt
(see Regular Expression Functions) is useful for calculating
optimal regular expressions to match several keywords.
function
Find text by calling function, and highlight the matches
it finds using font-lock-keyword-face
.
When function is called, it receives one argument, the limit of
the search; it should begin searching at point, and not search beyond the
limit. It should return non-nil
if it succeeds, and set the
match data to describe the match that was found. Returning nil
indicates failure of the search.
Fontification will call function repeatedly with the same limit, and with point where the previous invocation left it, until function fails. On failure, function need not reset point in any particular way.
(matcher . subexp)
In this kind of element, matcher is either a regular expression or a function, as described above. The CDR, subexp, specifies which subexpression of matcher should be highlighted (instead of the entire text that matcher matched).
;; Highlight the ‘bar’ in each occurrence of ‘fubar’,
;; using font-lock-keyword-face
.
("fu\\(bar\\)" . 1)
(matcher . facespec)
In this kind of element, facespec is an expression whose value specifies the face to use for highlighting. In the simplest case, facespec is a Lisp variable (a symbol) whose value is a face name.
;; Highlight occurrences of ‘fubar’,
;; using the face which is the value of fubar-face
.
("fubar" . fubar-face)
However, facespec can also evaluate to a list of this form:
(subexp (face face prop1 val1 prop2 val2...))
to specify the face face and various additional text properties
to put on the text that matches. If you do this, be sure to add the
other text property names that you set in this way to the value of
font-lock-extra-managed-props
so that the properties will also
be cleared out when they are no longer appropriate. Alternatively,
you can set the variable font-lock-unfontify-region-function
to
a function that clears these properties. See Other Font Lock Variables.
(matcher . subexp-highlighter)
In this kind of element, subexp-highlighter is a list which specifies how to highlight matches found by matcher. It has the form:
(subexp facespec [override [laxmatch]])
The CAR, subexp, is an integer specifying which subexpression of the match to fontify (0 means the entire matching text). The second subelement, facespec, is an expression whose value specifies the face, as described above.
The last two values in subexp-highlighter, override and
laxmatch, are optional flags. If override is t
,
this element can override existing fontification made by previous
elements of font-lock-keywords
. If it is keep
, then
each character is fontified if it has not been fontified already by
some other element. If it is prepend
, the face specified by
facespec is added to the beginning of the font-lock-face
property. If it is append
, the face is added to the end of the
font-lock-face
property.
If laxmatch is non-nil
, it means there should be no error
if there is no subexpression numbered subexp in matcher.
Obviously, fontification of the subexpression numbered subexp will
not occur. However, fontification of other subexpressions (and other
regexps) will continue. If laxmatch is nil
, and the
specified subexpression is missing, then an error is signaled which
terminates search-based fontification.
Here are some examples of elements of this kind, and what they do:
;; Highlight occurrences of either ‘foo’ or ‘bar’, using ;;foo-bar-face
, even if they have already been highlighted. ;;foo-bar-face
should be a variable whose value is a face. ("foo\\|bar" 0 foo-bar-face t) ;; Highlight the first subexpression within each occurrence ;; that the functionfubar-match
finds, ;; using the face which is the value offubar-face
. (fubar-match 1 fubar-face)
(matcher . anchored-highlighter)
In this kind of element, anchored-highlighter specifies how to highlight text that follows a match found by matcher. So a match found by matcher acts as the anchor for further searches specified by anchored-highlighter. anchored-highlighter is a list of the following form:
(anchored-matcher pre-form post-form subexp-highlighters...)
Here, anchored-matcher, like matcher, is either a regular expression or a function. After a match of matcher is found, point is at the end of the match. Now, Font Lock evaluates the form pre-form. Then it searches for matches of anchored-matcher and uses subexp-highlighters to highlight these. A subexp-highlighter is as described above. Finally, Font Lock evaluates post-form.
The forms pre-form and post-form can be used to initialize before, and cleanup after, anchored-matcher is used. Typically, pre-form is used to move point to some position relative to the match of matcher, before starting with anchored-matcher. post-form might be used to move back, before resuming with matcher.
After Font Lock evaluates pre-form, it does not search for anchored-matcher beyond the end of the line. However, if pre-form returns a buffer position that is greater than the position of point after pre-form is evaluated, then the position returned by pre-form is used as the limit of the search instead. It is generally a bad idea to return a position greater than the end of the line; in other words, the anchored-matcher search should not span lines.
For example,
;; Highlight occurrences of the word ‘item’ following
;; an occurrence of the word ‘anchor’ (on the same line)
;; in the value of item-face
.
("\\<anchor\\>" "\\<item\\>" nil nil (0 item-face))
Here, pre-form and post-form are nil
. Therefore
searching for ‘item’ starts at the end of the match of
‘anchor’, and searching for subsequent instances of ‘anchor’
resumes from where searching for ‘item’ concluded.
(matcher highlighters…)
This sort of element specifies several highlighter lists for a single matcher. A highlighter list can be of the type subexp-highlighter or anchored-highlighter as described above.
For example,
;; Highlight occurrences of the word ‘anchor’ in the value ;; ofanchor-face
, and subsequent occurrences of the word ;; ‘item’ (on the same line) in the value ofitem-face
. ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face) ("\\<item\\>" nil nil (0 item-face)))
(eval . form)
Here form is an expression to be evaluated the first time
this value of font-lock-keywords
is used in a buffer.
Its value should have one of the forms described in this table.
Warning: Do not design an element of font-lock-keywords
to match text which spans lines; this does not work reliably.
For details, see Multiline Font Lock Constructs.
You can use case-fold in font-lock-defaults
to specify
the value of font-lock-keywords-case-fold-search
which says
whether search-based fontification should be case-insensitive.
Non-nil
means that regular expression matching for the sake of
font-lock-keywords
should be case-insensitive.
You can use font-lock-add-keywords
to add additional
search-based fontification rules to a major mode, and
font-lock-remove-keywords
to remove rules. You can also
customize the font-lock-ignore
option to selectively disable
fontification rules for keywords that match certain criteria.
This function adds highlighting keywords, for the current buffer
or for major mode mode. The argument keywords should be a
list with the same format as the variable font-lock-keywords
.
If mode is a symbol which is a major mode command name, such as
c-mode
, the effect is that enabling Font Lock mode in
mode will add keywords to font-lock-keywords
.
Calling with a non-nil
value of mode is correct only in
your ~/.emacs file.
If mode is nil
, this function adds keywords to
font-lock-keywords
in the current buffer. This way of calling
font-lock-add-keywords
is usually used in mode hook functions.
By default, keywords are added at the beginning of
font-lock-keywords
. If the optional argument how is
set
, they are used to replace the value of
font-lock-keywords
. If how is any other non-nil
value, they are added at the end of font-lock-keywords
.
Some modes provide specialized support you can use in additional
highlighting patterns. See the variables
c-font-lock-extra-types
, c++-font-lock-extra-types
,
and java-font-lock-extra-types
, for example.
Warning: Major mode commands must not call
font-lock-add-keywords
under any circumstances, either directly
or indirectly, except through their mode hooks. (Doing so would lead to
incorrect behavior for some minor modes.) They should set up their
rules for search-based fontification by setting
font-lock-keywords
.
This function removes keywords from font-lock-keywords
for the current buffer or for major mode mode. As in
font-lock-add-keywords
, mode should be a major mode
command name or nil
. All the caveats and requirements for
font-lock-add-keywords
apply here too. The argument
keywords must exactly match the one used by the corresponding
font-lock-add-keywords
.
For example, the following code adds two fontification patterns for C mode: one to fontify the word ‘FIXME’, even in comments, and another to fontify the words ‘and’, ‘or’ and ‘not’ as keywords.
(font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<\\(FIXME\\):" 1 font-lock-warning-face prepend) ("\\<\\(and\\|or\\|not\\)\\>" . font-lock-keyword-face)))
This example affects only C mode proper. To add the same patterns to C mode and all modes derived from it, do this instead:
(add-hook 'c-mode-hook (lambda () (font-lock-add-keywords nil '(("\\<\\(FIXME\\):" 1 font-lock-warning-face prepend) ("\\<\\(and\\|or\\|not\\)\\>" . font-lock-keyword-face)))))
This option defines conditions for selectively disabling
fontifications due to certain Font Lock keywords. If non-nil
,
its value is a list of elements of the following form:
(symbol condition ...)
Here, symbol is a symbol, usually a major or minor mode. The
subsequent conditions of a symbol’s list element will be in
effect if symbol is bound and its value is non-nil
. For
a mode’s symbol, it means that the current major mode is derived from
that mode, or that minor mode is enabled in the buffer. When a
condition is in effect, any fontifications caused by
font-lock-keywords
elements that match the condition will
be disabled.
Each condition can be one of the following:
This condition matches any element of Font Lock keywords that
references the symbol. This is usually a face, but can be any symbol
referenced by an element of the font-lock-keywords
list. The
symbol can contain wildcards: *
matches any string in the
symbol’ss name, ?
matches a single character, and
[char-set]
, where char-set is a string of one or
more characters, matches a single character from the set.
This condition matches any element of Font Lock keywords whose matcher is a regexp which matches the string. In other words, this condition matches a Font Lock rule which highlights the string. Thus, the string could be a specific program keyword whose highlighting you want to disable.
(pred function)
This condition matches any element of Font Lock keywords for which
function, when called with the element as the argument, returns
non-nil
.
(not condition)
This matches if condition doesn’t.
(and condition …)
This matches if each of the conditions matches.
(or condition …)
This matches if at least one of the conditions matches.
(except condition)
This condition can only be used at top level or inside an
or
clause. It undoes the effect of a previously matching
condition on the same level.
As an example, consider the following setting:
(setq font-lock-ignore '((prog-mode font-lock-*-face (except help-echo)) (emacs-lisp-mode (except ";;;###autoload)") (whitespace-mode whitespace-empty-at-bob-regexp) (makefile-mode (except *))))
Line by line, this does the following:
help-echo
text property.
whitespace-mode
(a minor mode) is enabled, also don’t
highlight an empty line at beginning of buffer.
This section describes additional variables that a major mode can
set by means of other-vars in font-lock-defaults
(see Font Lock Basics).
If this variable is non-nil
, it should be a function that is
called with no arguments, to choose an enclosing range of text for
refontification for the command M-x font-lock-fontify-block.
The function should report its choice by placing the region around it.
A good choice is a range of text large enough to give proper results,
but not too large so that refontification becomes slow. Typical values
are mark-defun
for programming modes or mark-paragraph
for
textual modes.
This variable specifies additional properties (other than
font-lock-face
) that are being managed by Font Lock mode. It
is used by font-lock-default-unfontify-region
, which normally
only manages the font-lock-face
property. If you want Font
Lock to manage other properties as well, you must specify them in a
facespec in font-lock-keywords
as well as add them to
this list. See Search-based Fontification.
Function to use for fontifying the buffer. The default value is
font-lock-default-fontify-buffer
.
Function to use for unfontifying the buffer. This is used when
turning off Font Lock mode. The default value is
font-lock-default-unfontify-buffer
.
Function to use for fontifying a region. It should take two
arguments, the beginning and end of the region, and an optional third
argument verbose. If verbose is non-nil
, the
function should print status messages. The default value is
font-lock-default-fontify-region
.
Function to use for unfontifying a region. It should take two
arguments, the beginning and end of the region. The default value is
font-lock-default-unfontify-region
.
Function to use for declaring that a region’s fontification is out of
date. It takes two arguments, the beginning and end of the region.
The default value of this variable is
font-lock-after-change-function
.
Function to use for making sure a region of the current buffer has
been fontified. It is called with two arguments, the beginning and
end of the region. The default value of this variable is a function
that calls font-lock-default-fontify-buffer
if the buffer is
not fontified; the effect is to make sure the entire accessible
portion of the buffer is fontified.
This function tells Font Lock mode to run the Lisp function
function any time it has to fontify or refontify part of the
current buffer. It calls function before calling the default
fontification functions, and gives it two arguments, start and
end, which specify the region to be fontified or refontified.
If function performs fontifications, it can return a list of the
form (jit-lock-bounds beg . end)
, to indicate
the bounds of the region it actually fontified; Just-In-Time (a.k.a.
“JIT”) font-lock will use
this information to optimize subsequent redisplay cycles and regions
of buffer text it will pass to future calls to function.
The optional argument contextual, if non-nil
, forces Font
Lock mode to always refontify a syntactically relevant part of the
buffer, and not just the modified lines. This argument can usually be
omitted.
When Font Lock is activated in a buffer, it calls this function with a
non-nil
value of contextual if the value of
font-lock-keywords-only
(see Syntactic Font Lock) is
nil
.
If function was previously registered as a fontification
function using jit-lock-register
, this function unregisters it.
This is a minor mode whose purpose is to help in debugging code that
is run by JIT font-lock. When this mode is enabled, most of the code
that JIT font-lock normally runs during redisplay cycles, where Lisp
errors are suppressed, is instead run by a timer. Thus, this mode
allows using debugging aids such as debug-on-error
(see Entering the Debugger on an Error) and Edebug (see Edebug) for finding and
fixing problems in font-lock code and any other code run by JIT
font-lock. Another command that could be useful when developing and
debugging font-lock is font-lock-debug-fontify
, see Font Lock Basics.
Some major modes offer three different levels of fontification. You
can define multiple levels by using a list of symbols for keywords
in font-lock-defaults
. Each symbol specifies one level of
fontification; it is up to the user to choose one of these levels,
normally by setting font-lock-maximum-decoration
(see Font
Lock in the GNU Emacs Manual). The chosen level’s symbol value
is used to initialize font-lock-keywords
.
Here are the conventions for how to define the levels of fontification:
Some major modes such as list-buffers
and occur
construct the buffer text programmatically. The easiest way for them
to support Font Lock mode is to specify the faces of text when they
insert the text in the buffer.
The way to do this is to specify the faces in the text with the
special text property font-lock-face
(see Properties with Special Meanings). When Font Lock mode is enabled, this property controls
the display, just like the face
property. When Font Lock mode
is disabled, font-lock-face
has no effect on the display.
It is ok for a mode to use font-lock-face
for some text and
also use the normal Font Lock machinery. But if the mode does not use
the normal Font Lock machinery, it should not set the variable
font-lock-defaults
. In this case the face
property will
not be overridden, so using the face
property could work too.
However, using font-lock-face
is generally preferable as it
allows the user to control the fontification by toggling
font-lock-mode
, and lets the code work regardless of whether
the mode uses Font Lock machinery or not.
Font Lock mode can highlight using any face, but Emacs defines several faces specifically for Font Lock to use to highlight text. These Font Lock faces are listed below. They can also be used by major modes for syntactic highlighting outside of Font Lock mode (see Major Mode Conventions).
Each of these symbols is both a face name, and a variable whose
default value is the symbol itself. Thus, the default value of
font-lock-comment-face
is font-lock-comment-face
.
The faces are listed with descriptions of their typical usage, and in order of greater to lesser prominence. If a mode’s syntactic categories do not fit well with the usage descriptions, the faces can be assigned using the ordering as a guide.
font-lock-warning-face
¶for a construct that is peculiar (e.g., an unescaped confusable quote in an Emacs Lisp symbol like ‘‘foo’), or that greatly changes the meaning of other text, like ‘;;;###autoload’ in Emacs Lisp and ‘#error’ in C.
font-lock-function-name-face
¶for the name of a function being defined or declared.
font-lock-function-call-face
¶for the name of a function being called. This face inherits, by
default, from font-lock-function-name-face
.
font-lock-variable-name-face
¶for the name of a variable being defined or declared.
font-lock-variable-use-face
¶for the name of a variable being referenced. This face inherits, by
default, from font-lock-variable-name-face
.
font-lock-keyword-face
¶for a keyword with special syntactic significance, like ‘for’ and ‘if’ in C.
font-lock-comment-face
¶for comments.
font-lock-comment-delimiter-face
¶for comments delimiters, like ‘/*’ and ‘*/’ in C. On most
terminals, this inherits from font-lock-comment-face
.
font-lock-type-face
¶for the names of user-defined data types.
font-lock-constant-face
¶for the names of constants, like ‘NULL’ in C.
font-lock-builtin-face
¶for the names of built-in functions.
font-lock-preprocessor-face
¶for preprocessor commands. This inherits, by default, from
font-lock-builtin-face
.
font-lock-string-face
¶for string constants.
font-lock-doc-face
¶for documentation embedded in program code inside specially-formed
comments or strings. This face inherits, by default, from
font-lock-string-face
.
font-lock-doc-markup-face
¶for mark-up elements in text using font-lock-doc-face
.
It is typically used for the mark-up constructs in documentation embedded
in program code, following conventions such as Haddock, Javadoc or Doxygen.
This face inherits, by default, from font-lock-constant-face
.
font-lock-negation-char-face
¶for easily-overlooked negation characters.
font-lock-escape-face
¶for escape sequences in strings.
This face inherits, by default, from font-lock-regexp-grouping-backslash
.
Here is an example in Python, where the escape sequence \n
is used:
print('Hello world!\n')
font-lock-number-face
¶for numbers.
font-lock-operator-face
¶for operators.
font-lock-property-name-face
¶for properties of an object, such as the declaration of fields in a
struct. This face inherits, by default, from
font-lock-variable-name-face
.
font-lock-property-use-face
¶for properties of an object, such as use of fields in a struct. This
face inherits, by default, from font-lock-property-name-face
.
For example,
typedef struct { int prop; // ^ property } obj; int main() { obj o; o.prop = 3; // ^ property }
font-lock-punctuation-face
¶for punctuation such as brackets and delimiters.
font-lock-bracket-face
¶for brackets (e.g., ()
, []
, {}
).
This face inherits, by default, from font-lock-punctuation-face
.
font-lock-delimiter-face
¶for delimiters (e.g., ;
, :
, ,
).
This face inherits, by default, from font-lock-punctuation-face
.
font-lock-misc-punctuation-face
¶for punctuation that is not a bracket or delimiter.
This face inherits, by default, from font-lock-punctuation-face
.
Syntactic fontification uses a syntax table (see Syntax Tables) to
find and highlight syntactically relevant text. If enabled, it runs
prior to search-based fontification. The variable
font-lock-syntactic-face-function
, documented below, determines
which syntactic constructs to highlight. There are several variables
that affect syntactic fontification; you should set them by means of
font-lock-defaults
(see Font Lock Basics).
Whenever Font Lock mode performs syntactic fontification on a stretch
of text, it first calls the function specified by
syntax-propertize-function
. Major modes can use this to apply
syntax-table
text properties to override the buffer’s syntax
table in special cases. See Syntax Properties.
If the value of this variable is non-nil
, Font Lock does not do
syntactic fontification, only search-based fontification based on
font-lock-keywords
. It is normally set by Font Lock mode based
on the keywords-only element in font-lock-defaults
. If
the value is nil
, Font Lock will call jit-lock-register
(see Other Font Lock Variables) to set up for automatic
refontification of buffer text following a modified line to reflect
the new syntactic context due to the change.
To use only syntactic fontification, this variable should
be non-nil
, while font-lock-keywords
should be set to
nil
(see Font Lock Basics).
This variable holds the syntax table to use for fontification of
comments and strings. It is normally set by Font Lock mode based on the
syntax-alist element in font-lock-defaults
. If this value
is nil
, syntactic fontification uses the buffer’s syntax table
(the value returned by the function syntax-table
; see Syntax Table Functions).
If this variable is non-nil
, it should be a function to determine
which face to use for a given syntactic element (a string or a comment).
The function is called with one argument, the parse state at point
returned by parse-partial-sexp
, and should return a face. The
default value returns font-lock-comment-face
for comments and
font-lock-string-face
for strings (see Faces for Font Lock).
This variable is normally set through the “other” elements in
font-lock-defaults
:
(setq-local font-lock-defaults `(,python-font-lock-keywords nil nil nil nil (font-lock-syntactic-face-function . python-font-lock-syntactic-face-function)))
Normally, elements of font-lock-keywords
should not match
across multiple lines; that doesn’t work reliably, because Font Lock
usually scans just part of the buffer, and it can miss a multi-line
construct that crosses the line boundary where the scan starts. (The
scan normally starts at the beginning of a line.)
Making elements that match multiline constructs work properly has two aspects: correct identification and correct rehighlighting. The first means that Font Lock finds all multiline constructs. The second means that Font Lock will correctly rehighlight all the relevant text when a multiline construct is changed—for example, if some of the text that was previously part of a multiline construct ceases to be part of it. The two aspects are closely related, and often getting one of them to work will appear to make the other also work. However, for reliable results you must attend explicitly to both aspects.
There are three ways to ensure correct identification of multiline constructs:
font-lock-extend-region-functions
that does
the identification and extends the scan so that the scanned
text never starts or ends in the middle of a multiline construct.
font-lock-fontify-region-function
hook similarly to
extend the scan so that the scanned text never starts or ends in the
middle of a multiline construct.
font-lock-multiline
which will instruct font-lock not to start or end the scan in the
middle of the construct.
There are several ways to do rehighlighting of multiline constructs:
font-lock-multiline
property on the construct. This
will rehighlight the whole construct if any part of it is changed. In
some cases you can do this automatically by setting the
font-lock-multiline
variable, which see.
jit-lock-contextually
is set and rely on it doing its
job. This will only rehighlight the part of the construct that
follows the actual change, and will do it after a short delay.
This only works if the highlighting of the various parts of your
multiline construct never depends on text in subsequent lines.
Since jit-lock-contextually
is activated by default, this can
be an attractive solution.
jit-lock-defer-multiline
property on the construct.
This works only if jit-lock-contextually
is used, and with the
same delay before rehighlighting, but like font-lock-multiline
,
it also handles the case where highlighting depends on
subsequent lines.
syntax-multiline
text property
over the construct in question. The most common use for this is when
the syntax property to apply to ‘FOO’ depend on some later text
‘BAR’: By placing this text property over the whole of
‘FOO...BAR’, you make sure that any change of ‘BAR’ will
also cause the syntax property of ‘FOO’ to be recomputed.
Note: For this to work, the mode needs to add
syntax-propertize-multiline
to
syntax-propertize-extend-region-functions
.
One way to ensure reliable rehighlighting of multiline Font Lock
constructs is to put on them the text property font-lock-multiline
.
It should be present and non-nil
for text that is part of a
multiline construct.
When Font Lock is about to highlight a range of text, it first
extends the boundaries of the range as necessary so that they do not
fall within text marked with the font-lock-multiline
property.
Then it removes any font-lock-multiline
properties from the
range, and highlights it. The highlighting specification (mostly
font-lock-keywords
) must reinstall this property each time,
whenever it is appropriate.
Warning: don’t use the font-lock-multiline
property
on large ranges of text, because that will make rehighlighting slow.
If the font-lock-multiline
variable is set to t
, Font
Lock will try to add the font-lock-multiline
property
automatically on multiline constructs. This is not a universal
solution, however, since it slows down Font Lock somewhat. It can
miss some multiline constructs, or make the property larger or smaller
than necessary.
For elements whose matcher is a function, the function should
ensure that submatch 0 covers the whole relevant multiline construct,
even if only a small subpart will be highlighted. It is often just as
easy to add the font-lock-multiline
property by hand.
The font-lock-multiline
property is meant to ensure proper
refontification; it does not automatically identify new multiline
constructs. Identifying them requires that Font Lock mode operate on
large enough chunks at a time. This will happen by accident on many
cases, which may give the impression that multiline constructs magically
work. If you set the font-lock-multiline
variable
non-nil
, this impression will be even stronger, since the
highlighting of those constructs which are found will be properly
updated from then on. But that does not work reliably.
To find multiline constructs reliably, you must either manually place
the font-lock-multiline
property on the text before Font Lock
mode looks at it, or use font-lock-fontify-region-function
.
When a buffer is changed, the region that Font Lock refontifies is by default the smallest sequence of whole lines that spans the change. While this works well most of the time, sometimes it doesn’t—for example, when a change alters the syntactic meaning of text on an earlier line.
You can enlarge (or even reduce) the region to refontify by setting the following variable:
This buffer-local variable is either nil
or a function for Font
Lock mode to call to determine the region to scan and fontify.
The function is given three parameters, the standard beg,
end, and old-len from after-change-functions
(see Change Hooks). It should return either a cons of the
beginning and end buffer positions (in that order) of the region to
fontify, or nil
(which means choose the region in the standard
way). This function needs to preserve point, the match-data, and the
current restriction. The region it returns may start or end in the
middle of a line.
Since this function is called after every buffer change, it should be reasonably fast.
Besides simple syntactic font lock and regexp-based font lock, Emacs also provides complete syntactic font lock with the help of a parser. Currently, Emacs uses the tree-sitter library (see Parsing Program Source) for this purpose.
Parser-based font lock and other font lock mechanisms are not mutually exclusive. By default, if enabled, parser-based font lock runs first, replacing syntactic font lock, followed by regexp-based font lock.
Although parser-based font lock doesn’t share the same customization
variables with regexp-based font lock, it uses similar customization
schemes. The tree-sitter counterpart of font-lock-keywords
is
treesit-font-lock-settings
.
In general, tree-sitter fontification works as follows:
font-lock-keyword
would be highlighted in font-lock-keyword
face.
For more information about queries, patterns, and capture names, see Pattern Matching Tree-sitter Nodes.
To set up tree-sitter fontification, a major mode should first set
treesit-font-lock-settings
with the output of
treesit-font-lock-rules
, then call
treesit-major-mode-setup
.
This function is used to set treesit-font-lock-settings
. It
takes care of compiling queries and other post-processing, and outputs
a value that treesit-font-lock-settings
accepts. Here’s an
example:
(treesit-font-lock-rules :language 'javascript :feature 'constant :override t '((true) @font-lock-constant-face (false) @font-lock-constant-face) :language 'html :feature 'script "(script_element) @font-lock-builtin-face")
This function takes a series of query-specs, where each query-spec is a query preceded by one or more keyword/value pairs. Each query is a tree-sitter query in either the string, s-expression, or compiled form.
For each query, the keyword/value pairs that precede
it add meta information to it. The :language
keyword declares
query’s language. The :feature
keyword sets the feature
name of query. Users can control which features are enabled
with treesit-font-lock-level
and
treesit-font-lock-feature-list
(described below). These two
keywords are mandatory.
Other keywords are optional:
Keyword | Value | Description |
---|---|---|
:override | nil | If the region already has a face, discard the new face |
t | Always apply the new face | |
append | Append the new face to existing ones | |
prepend | Prepend the new face to existing ones | |
keep | Fill-in regions without an existing face |
Lisp programs mark patterns in query with capture names (names
that start with @
), and tree-sitter will return matched nodes
tagged with those same capture names. For the purpose of
fontification, capture names in query should be face names like
font-lock-keyword-face
. The captured node will be fontified
with that face.
A capture name can also be a function name, in which case the function
is called with 4 arguments: node and override, start
and end, where node is the node itself, override is
the :override
property of the rule which captured this node,
and start and end limit the region which this function
should fontify. (If this function wants to respect the override
argument, it can use treesit-fontify-with-override
.)
Beyond the 4 arguments presented, this function should accept more arguments as optional arguments for future extensibility.
If a capture name is both a face and a function, the face takes priority. If a capture name is neither a face nor a function, it is ignored.
This is a list of lists of feature symbols. Each element of the list
is a list that represents a decoration level.
treesit-font-lock-level
controls which levels are
activated.
Each element of the list is a list of the form (feature …)
, where each feature corresponds to the
:feature
value of a query defined in
treesit-font-lock-rules
. Removing a feature symbol from this
list disables the corresponding query during font-lock.
Common feature names, for many programming languages, include
definition
, type
, assignment
, builtin
,
constant
, keyword
, string-interpolation
,
comment
, doc
, string
, operator
,
preprocessor
, escape-sequence
, and key
. Major
modes are free to subdivide or extend these common features.
Some of these features warrant some explanation: definition
highlights whatever is being defined, e.g., the function name in a
function definition, the struct name in a struct definition, the
variable name in a variable definition; assignment
highlights
whatever is being assigned to, e.g., the variable or field in an
assignment statement; key
highlights keys in key-value pairs,
e.g., keys in a JSON object or Python dictionary; doc
highlights docstrings or doc-comments.
For example, the value of this variable could be:
((comment string doc) ; level 1 (function-name keyword type builtin constant) ; level 2 (variable-name string-interpolation key)) ; level 3
Major modes should set this variable before calling
treesit-major-mode-setup
.
For this variable to take effect, a Lisp program should call
treesit-font-lock-recompute-features
(which resets
treesit-font-lock-settings
accordingly), or
treesit-major-mode-setup
(which calls
treesit-font-lock-recompute-features
).
A list of settings for tree-sitter based font lock. The exact format
of each setting is considered internal. One should always use
treesit-font-lock-rules
to set this variable.
Multi-language major modes should provide range functions in
treesit-range-functions
, and Emacs will set the ranges
accordingly before fontifing a region (see Parsing Text in Multiple Languages).
For programming languages, an important feature of a major mode is to
provide automatic indentation. There are two parts: one is to decide what
is the right indentation of a line, and the other is to decide when to
reindent a line. By default, Emacs reindents a line whenever you
type a character in electric-indent-chars
, which by default only
includes Newline. Major modes can add chars to electric-indent-chars
according to the syntax of the language.
Deciding what is the right indentation is controlled in Emacs by
indent-line-function
(see Indentation Controlled by Major Mode). For some modes,
the right indentation cannot be known reliably, typically because
indentation is significant so several indentations are valid but with different
meanings. In that case, the mode should set electric-indent-inhibit
to
make sure the line is not constantly re-indented against the user’s wishes.
Writing a good indentation function can be difficult and to a large extent it is still a black art. Many major mode authors will start by writing a simple indentation function that works for simple cases, for example by comparing with the indentation of the previous text line. For most programming languages that are not really line-based, this tends to scale very poorly: improving such a function to let it handle more diverse situations tends to become more and more difficult, resulting in the end with a large, complex, unmaintainable indentation function which nobody dares to touch.
A good indentation function will usually need to actually parse the text, according to the syntax of the language. Luckily, it is not necessary to parse the text in as much detail as would be needed for a compiler, but on the other hand, the parser embedded in the indentation code will want to be somewhat friendly to syntactically incorrect code.
Good maintainable indentation functions usually fall into two categories: either parsing forward from some safe starting point until the position of interest, or parsing backward from the position of interest. Neither of the two is a clearly better choice than the other: parsing backward is often more difficult than parsing forward because programming languages are designed to be parsed forward, but for the purpose of indentation it has the advantage of not needing to guess a safe starting point, and it generally enjoys the property that only a minimum of text will be analyzed to decide the indentation of a line, so indentation will tend to be less affected by syntax errors in some earlier unrelated piece of code. Parsing forward on the other hand is usually easier and has the advantage of making it possible to reindent efficiently a whole region at a time, with a single parse.
Rather than write your own indentation function from scratch, it is often preferable to try and reuse some existing ones or to rely on a generic indentation engine. There are sadly few such engines. The CC-mode indentation code (used with C, C++, Java, Awk and a few other such modes) has been made more generic over the years, so if your language seems somewhat similar to one of those languages, you might try to use that engine. Another one is SMIE which takes an approach in the spirit of Lisp sexps and adapts it to non-Lisp languages. Yet another one is to rely on a full-blown parser, for example, the tree-sitter library.
SMIE is a package that provides a generic navigation and indentation engine. Based on a very simple parser using an operator precedence grammar, it lets major modes extend the sexp-based navigation of Lisp to non-Lisp languages as well as provide a simple to use but reliable auto-indentation.
Operator precedence grammar is a very primitive technology for parsing
compared to some of the more common techniques used in compilers.
It has the following characteristics: its parsing power is very limited,
and it is largely unable to detect syntax errors, but it has the
advantage of being algorithmically efficient and able to parse forward
just as well as backward. In practice that means that SMIE can use it
for indentation based on backward parsing, that it can provide both
forward-sexp
and backward-sexp
functionality, and that it
will naturally work on syntactically incorrect code without any extra
effort. The downside is that it also means that most programming
languages cannot be parsed correctly using SMIE, at least not without
resorting to some special tricks (see Living With a Weak Parser).
SMIE is meant to be a one-stop shop for structural navigation and
various other features which rely on the syntactic structure of code, in
particular automatic indentation. The main entry point is
smie-setup
which is a function typically called while setting
up a major mode.
Setup SMIE navigation and indentation.
grammar is a grammar table generated by smie-prec2->grammar
.
rules-function is a set of indentation rules for use on
smie-rules-function
.
keywords are additional arguments, which can include the following
keywords:
:forward-token
fun: Specify the forward lexer to use.
:backward-token
fun: Specify the backward lexer to use.
Calling this function is sufficient to make commands such as
forward-sexp
, backward-sexp
, and transpose-sexps
be
able to properly handle structural elements other than just the paired
parentheses already handled by syntax tables. For example, if the
provided grammar is precise enough, transpose-sexps
can correctly
transpose the two arguments of a +
operator, taking into account
the precedence rules of the language.
Calling smie-setup
is also sufficient to make TAB
indentation work in the expected way, extends
blink-matching-paren
to apply to elements like
begin...end
, and provides some commands that you can bind in
the major mode keymap.
This command closes the most recently opened (and not yet closed) block.
This command is like down-list
but it also pays attention to
nesting of tokens other than parentheses, such as begin...end
.
SMIE’s precedence grammars simply give to each token a pair of
precedences: the left-precedence and the right-precedence. We say
T1 < T2
if the right-precedence of token T1
is less than
the left-precedence of token T2
. A good way to read this
<
is as a kind of parenthesis: if we find ... T1 something
T2 ...
then that should be parsed as ... T1 (something T2 ...
rather than as ... T1 something) T2 ...
. The latter
interpretation would be the case if we had T1 > T2
. If we have
T1 = T2
, it means that token T2 follows token T1 in the same
syntactic construction, so typically we have "begin" = "end"
.
Such pairs of precedences are sufficient to express left-associativity
or right-associativity of infix operators, nesting of tokens like
parentheses and many other cases.
This function takes a prec2 grammar table and returns an
alist suitable for use in smie-setup
. The prec2
table is itself meant to be built by one of the functions below.
This function takes several prec2 tables and merges them into a new prec2 table.
This function builds a prec2 table from a table of precedences
precs. precs should be a list, sorted by precedence (for
example "+"
will come before "*"
), of elements of the form
(assoc op ...)
, where each op is a token that
acts as an operator; assoc is their associativity, which can be
either left
, right
, assoc
, or nonassoc
.
All operators in a given element share the same precedence level
and associativity.
This function lets you specify the grammar using a BNF notation. It accepts a bnf description of the grammar along with a set of conflict resolution rules resolvers, and returns a prec2 table.
bnf is a list of nonterminal definitions of the form
(nonterm rhs1 rhs2 ...)
where each rhs
is a (non-empty) list of terminals (aka tokens) or non-terminals.
Not all grammars are accepted:
Additionally, conflicts can occur:
opener
(something similar to an open-paren),
a closer
(like a close-paren), or neither
of the two
(e.g., an infix operator, or an inner token like "else"
).
Precedence conflicts can be resolved via resolvers, which
is a list of precs tables (see smie-precs->prec2
): for
each precedence conflict, if those precs
tables
specify a particular constraint, then the conflict is resolved by using
this constraint instead, else a conflict is reported and one of the
conflicting constraints is picked arbitrarily and the others are
simply ignored.
The usual way to define the SMIE grammar of a language is by defining a new global variable that holds the precedence table by giving a set of BNF rules. For example, the grammar definition for a small Pascal-like language could look like:
(require 'smie) (defvar sample-smie-grammar (smie-prec2->grammar (smie-bnf->prec2
'((id) (inst ("begin" insts "end") ("if" exp "then" inst "else" inst) (id ":=" exp) (exp)) (insts (insts ";" insts) (inst)) (exp (exp "+" exp) (exp "*" exp) ("(" exps ")")) (exps (exps "," exps) (exp)))
'((assoc ";")) '((assoc ",")) '((assoc "+") (assoc "*")))))
A few things to note:
begin ... end
blocks
to appear anywhere anyway.
id
has no right hand side: this does not
mean that it can match only the empty string, since as mentioned any
sequence of sexps can appear anywhere anyway.
";"
as a statement separator instead,
which SMIE can handle very well.
","
and ";"
above)
are best defined with BNF rules such as (foo (foo "separator" foo) ...)
which generate precedence conflicts which are then resolved by giving
them an explicit (assoc "separator")
.
("(" exps ")")
rule was not needed to pair up parens, since
SMIE will pair up any characters that are marked as having paren syntax
in the syntax table. What this rule does instead (together with the
definition of exps
) is to make it clear that ","
should
not appear outside of parentheses.
left
or
right
, it is usually preferable to mark operators as associative,
using assoc
. For that reason "+"
and "*"
are
defined above as assoc
, although the language defines them
formally as left associative.
SMIE comes with a predefined lexical analyzer which uses syntax tables
in the following way: any sequence of characters that have word or
symbol syntax is considered a token, and so is any sequence of
characters that have punctuation syntax. This default lexer is
often a good starting point but is rarely actually correct for any given
language. For example, it will consider "2,+3"
to be composed
of 3 tokens: "2"
, ",+"
, and "3"
.
To describe the lexing rules of your language to SMIE, you need 2 functions, one to fetch the next token, and another to fetch the previous token. Those functions will usually first skip whitespace and comments and then look at the next chunk of text to see if it is a special token. If so it should skip the token and return a description of this token. Usually this is simply the string extracted from the buffer, but it can be anything you want. For example:
(defvar sample-keywords-regexp (regexp-opt '("+" "*" "," ";" ">" ">=" "<" "<=" ":=" "=")))
(defun sample-smie-forward-token () (forward-comment (point-max)) (cond ((looking-at sample-keywords-regexp) (goto-char (match-end 0)) (match-string-no-properties 0)) (t (buffer-substring-no-properties (point) (progn (skip-syntax-forward "w_") (point))))))
(defun sample-smie-backward-token () (forward-comment (- (point))) (cond ((looking-back sample-keywords-regexp (- (point) 2) t) (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (match-string-no-properties 0)) (t (buffer-substring-no-properties (point) (progn (skip-syntax-backward "w_") (point))))))
Notice how those lexers return the empty string when in front of
parentheses. This is because SMIE automatically takes care of the
parentheses defined in the syntax table. More specifically if the lexer
returns nil
or an empty string, SMIE tries to handle the corresponding
text as a sexp according to syntax tables.
The parsing technique used by SMIE does not allow tokens to behave differently in different contexts. For most programming languages, this manifests itself by precedence conflicts when converting the BNF grammar.
Sometimes, those conflicts can be worked around by expressing the grammar slightly differently. For example, for Modula-2 it might seem natural to have a BNF grammar that looks like this:
... (inst ("IF" exp "THEN" insts "ELSE" insts "END") ("CASE" exp "OF" cases "END") ...) (cases (cases "|" cases) (caselabel ":" insts) ("ELSE" insts)) ...
But this will create conflicts for "ELSE"
: on the one hand, the
IF rule implies (among many other things) that "ELSE" = "END"
;
but on the other hand, since "ELSE"
appears within cases
,
which appears left of "END"
, we also have "ELSE" > "END"
.
We can solve the conflict either by using:
... (inst ("IF" exp "THEN" insts "ELSE" insts "END") ("CASE" exp "OF" cases "END") ("CASE" exp "OF" cases "ELSE" insts "END") ...) (cases (cases "|" cases) (caselabel ":" insts)) ...
or
... (inst ("IF" exp "THEN" else "END") ("CASE" exp "OF" cases "END") ...) (else (insts "ELSE" insts)) (cases (cases "|" cases) (caselabel ":" insts) (else)) ...
Reworking the grammar to try and solve conflicts has its downsides, tho, because SMIE assumes that the grammar reflects the logical structure of the code, so it is preferable to keep the BNF closer to the intended abstract syntax tree.
Other times, after careful consideration you may conclude that those
conflicts are not serious and simply resolve them via the
resolvers argument of smie-bnf->prec2
. Usually this is
because the grammar is simply ambiguous: the conflict does not affect
the set of programs described by the grammar, but only the way those
programs are parsed. This is typically the case for separators and
associative infix operators, where you want to add a resolver like
'((assoc "|"))
. Another case where this can happen is for the
classic dangling else problem, where you will use '((assoc
"else" "then"))
. It can also happen for cases where the conflict is
real and cannot really be resolved, but it is unlikely to pose a problem
in practice.
Finally, in many cases some conflicts will remain despite all efforts to
restructure the grammar. Do not despair: while the parser cannot be
made more clever, you can make the lexer as smart as you want. So, the
solution is then to look at the tokens involved in the conflict and to
split one of those tokens into 2 (or more) different tokens. E.g., if
the grammar needs to distinguish between two incompatible uses of the
token "begin"
, make the lexer return different tokens (say
"begin-fun"
and "begin-plain"
) depending on which kind of
"begin"
it finds. This pushes the work of distinguishing the
different cases to the lexer, which will thus have to look at the
surrounding text to find ad-hoc clues.
Based on the provided grammar, SMIE will be able to provide automatic indentation without any extra effort. But in practice, this default indentation style will probably not be good enough. You will want to tweak it in many different cases.
SMIE indentation is based on the idea that indentation rules should be
as local as possible. To this end, it relies on the idea of
virtual indentation, which is the indentation that a particular
program point would have if it were at the beginning of a line.
Of course, if that program point is indeed at the beginning of a line,
its virtual indentation is its current indentation. But if not, then
SMIE uses the indentation algorithm to compute the virtual indentation
of that point. Now in practice, the virtual indentation of a program
point does not have to be identical to the indentation it would have if
we inserted a newline before it. To see how this works, the SMIE rule
for indentation after a {
in C does not care whether the
{
is standing on a line of its own or is at the end of the
preceding line. Instead, these different cases are handled in the
indentation rule that decides how to indent before a {
.
Another important concept is the notion of parent: The
parent of a token, is the head token of the nearest enclosing
syntactic construct. For example, the parent of an else
is the
if
to which it belongs, and the parent of an if
, in turn,
is the lead token of the surrounding construct. The command
backward-sexp
jumps from a token to its parent, but there are
some caveats: for openers (tokens which start a construct, like
if
), you need to start with point before the token, while for
others you need to start with point after the token.
backward-sexp
stops with point before the parent token if that is
the opener of the token of interest, and otherwise it stops with
point after the parent token.
SMIE indentation rules are specified using a function that takes two arguments method and arg where the meaning of arg and the expected return value depend on method.
method can be:
:after
, in which case arg is a token and the function
should return the offset to use for indentation after arg.
:before
, in which case arg is a token and the function
should return the offset to use to indent arg itself.
:elem
, in which case the function should return either the offset
to use to indent function arguments (if arg is the symbol
arg
) or the basic indentation step (if arg is the symbol
basic
).
:list-intro
, in which case arg is a token and the function
should return non-nil
if the token is followed by a list of
expressions (not separated by any token) rather than an expression.
When arg is a token, the function is called with point just before
that token. A return value of nil
always means to fallback on the
default behavior, so the function should return nil
for arguments it
does not expect.
offset can be:
nil
: use the default indentation rule.
(column . column)
: indent to column column.
:after
and its parent for :before
.
SMIE provides various functions designed specifically for use in the
indentation rules function (several of those functions break if used in
another context). These functions all start with the prefix
smie-rule-
.
Return non-nil
if the current token is the first on the line.
Return non-nil
if the current token is hanging.
A token is hanging if it is the last token on the line
and if it is preceded by other tokens: a lone token on a line is not
hanging.
Return non-nil
if the next token is among tokens.
Return non-nil
if the previous token is among tokens.
Return non-nil
if the current token’s parent is among parents.
Return non-nil
if the current token’s parent is actually a
sibling. This is the case for example when the parent of a ","
is just the previous ","
.
Return the proper offset to align the current token with the parent.
If non-nil
, offset should be an integer giving an
additional offset to apply.
Indent current token as a separator.
By separator, we mean here a token whose sole purpose is to separate various elements within some enclosing syntactic construct, and which does not have any semantic significance in itself (i.e., it would typically not exist as a node in an abstract syntax tree).
Such a token is expected to have an associative syntax and be closely
tied to its syntactic parent. Typical examples are ","
in lists
of arguments (enclosed inside parentheses), or ";"
in sequences
of instructions (enclosed in a {...}
or begin...end
block).
method should be the method name that was passed to
smie-rules-function
.
Here is an example of an indentation function:
(defun sample-smie-rules (kind token) (pcase (cons kind token) (`(:elem . basic) sample-indent-basic) (`(,_ . ",") (smie-rule-separator kind)) (`(:after . ":=") sample-indent-basic) (`(:before . ,(or `"begin" `"(" `"{")) (if (smie-rule-hanging-p) (smie-rule-parent))) (`(:before . "if") (and (not (smie-rule-bolp)) (smie-rule-prev-p "else") (smie-rule-parent)))))
A few things to note:
sample-indent-basic
is nil
, then SMIE uses the global
setting smie-indent-basic
. The major mode could have set
smie-indent-basic
buffer-locally instead, but that
is discouraged.
","
make SMIE try to be more clever when
the comma separator is placed at the beginning of lines. It tries to
outdent the separator so as to align the code after the comma; for
example:
x = longfunctionname ( arg1 , arg2 );
":="
exists because otherwise
SMIE would treat ":="
as an infix operator and would align the
right argument with the left one.
"begin"
is an example of the use
of virtual indentation: This rule is used only when "begin"
is
hanging, which can happen only when "begin"
is not at the
beginning of a line. So this is not used when indenting
"begin"
itself but only when indenting something relative to this
"begin"
. Concretely, this rule changes the indentation from:
if x > 0 then begin dosomething(x); end
to
if x > 0 then begin dosomething(x); end
"if"
is similar to the one for
"begin"
, but where the purpose is to treat "else if"
as a single unit, so as to align a sequence of tests rather than indent
each test further to the right. This function does this only in the
case where the "if"
is not placed on a separate line, hence the
smie-rule-bolp
test.
If we know that the "else"
is always aligned with its "if"
and is always at the beginning of a line, we can use a more efficient
rule:
((equal token "if") (and (not (smie-rule-bolp)) (smie-rule-prev-p "else") (save-excursion (sample-smie-backward-token) (cons 'column (current-column)))))
The advantage of this formulation is that it reuses the indentation of
the previous "else"
, rather than going all the way back to the
first "if"
of the sequence.
If you are using a mode whose indentation is provided by SMIE, you can
customize the indentation to suit your preferences. You can do this
on a per-mode basis (using the option smie-config
), or a
per-file basis (using the function smie-config-local
in a
file-local variable specification).
This option lets you customize indentation on a per-mode basis.
It is an alist with elements of the form (mode . rules)
.
For the precise form of rules, see the variable’s documentation; but
you may find it easier to use the command smie-config-guess
.
This command tries to work out appropriate settings to produce your preferred style of indentation. Simply call the command while visiting a file that is indented with your style.
Call this command after using smie-config-guess
, to save your
settings for future sessions.
This command displays the rules that are used to indent the current line.
This command adds a local rule to adjust the indentation of the current line.
This function adds rules as indentation rules for the current buffer.
These add to any mode-specific rules defined by the smie-config
option.
To specify custom indentation rules for a specific file, add an entry
to the file’s local variables of the form:
eval: (smie-config-local '(rules))
.
When built with the tree-sitter library (see Parsing Program Source), Emacs is capable of parsing the program source and producing a syntax tree. This syntax tree can be used for guiding the program source indentation commands. For maximum flexibility, it is possible to write a custom indentation function that queries the syntax tree and indents accordingly for each language, but that is a lot of work. It is more convenient to use the simple indentation engine described below: then the major mode needs only write some indentation rules, and the engine takes care of the rest.
To enable the parser-based indentation engine, either set
treesit-simple-indent-rules
and call
treesit-major-mode-setup
, or equivalently, set the value of
indent-line-function
to treesit-indent
.
This variable stores the actual function called by
treesit-indent
. By default, its value is
treesit-simple-indent
. In the future we might add other,
more complex indentation engines.
This local variable stores indentation rules for every language. It
is an alist with elements of the form (language . rules)
, where language is a language symbol, and
rules is a list with elements of the form
(matcher anchor offset)
.
First, Emacs passes the smallest tree-sitter node at the beginning of
the current line to matcher; if it returns non-nil
, this
rule is applicable. Then Emacs passes the node to anchor, which
returns a buffer position. Emacs takes the column number of that
position, adds offset to it, and the result is the indentation
column for the current line.
The matcher and anchor are functions, and Emacs provides convenient defaults for them.
Each matcher or anchor is a function that takes three
arguments: node, parent, and bol. The argument
bol is the buffer position whose indentation is required: the
position of the first non-whitespace character after the beginning of
the line. The argument node is the largest node that starts at
that position (and is not a root node); and parent is the parent
of node. However, when that position is in a whitespace or
inside a multi-line string, no node can start at that position, so
node is nil
. In that case, parent would be the
smallest node that spans that position.
matcher should return non-nil
if the rule is applicable,
and anchor should return a buffer position.
offset can be an integer, a variable whose value is an integer, or a function that returns an integer. If it is a function, it is passed node, parent, and bol, like matchers and anchors.
This is a list of defaults for matchers and anchors in
treesit-simple-indent-rules
. Each of them represents a
function that takes 3 arguments: node, parent, and
bol. The available default functions are:
no-node
¶This matcher is a function that is called with 3 arguments:
node, parent, and bol. It returns non-nil
,
indicating a match, if node is nil
, i.e., there is no
node that starts at bol. This is the case when bol is on
an empty line or inside a multi-line string, etc.
parent-is
¶This matcher is a function of one argument, type; it returns a
function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent,
and bol, and returns non-nil
(i.e., a match) if
parent’s type matches regexp type.
node-is
¶This matcher is a function of one argument, type; it returns a
function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent,
and bol, and returns non-nil
if node’s type matches
regexp type.
field-is
¶This matcher is a function of one argument, name; it returns a
function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent,
and bol, and returns non-nil
if node’s field name
in parent matches regexp name.
query
¶This matcher is a function of one argument, query; it returns a
function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent,
and bol, and returns non-nil
if querying parent
with query captures node (see Pattern Matching Tree-sitter Nodes).
match
¶This matcher is a function of 5 arguments: node-type,
parent-type, node-field, node-index-min, and
node-index-max). It returns a function that is called with 3
arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns
non-nil
if node’s type matches regexp node-type,
parent’s type matches regexp parent-type, node’s
field name in parent matches regexp node-field, and
node’s index among its siblings is between node-index-min
and node-index-max. If the value of an argument is nil
,
this matcher doesn’t check that argument. For example, to match the
first child where parent is argument_list
, use
(match nil "argument_list" nil 0 0)
In addition, node-type can be a special value null
,
which matches when the value of node is nil
.
n-p-gp
¶Short for “node-parent-grandparent”, this matcher is a function of 3
arguments: node-type, parent-type, and
grandparent-type. It returns a function that is called with 3
arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns
non-nil
if: (1) node-type matches node’s type, and
(2) parent-type matches parent’s type, and (3)
grandparent-type matches parent’s parent’s type. If any
of node-type, parent-type, and grandparent-type is
nil
, this function doesn’t check for it.
comment-end
¶This matcher is a function that is called with 3 arguments:
node, parent, and bol, and returns non-nil
if
point is before a comment-ending token. Comment-ending tokens are
defined by regexp comment-end-skip
.
catch-all
¶This matcher is a function that is called with 3 arguments:
node, parent, and bol. It always returns
non-nil
, indicating a match.
first-sibling
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the start of the first child of parent.
nth-sibling
¶This anchor is a function of two arguments: n, and an optional
argument named. It returns a function that is called with 3
arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the
start of the nth child of parent. If named is
non-nil
, only named children are counted (see named node).
parent
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the start of parent.
grand-parent
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the start of parent’s parent.
great-grand-parent
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the start of parent’s parent’s parent.
parent-bol
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the first non-space character on the line which parent’s start is on.
standalone-parent
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol. It finds the first ancestor node (parent, grandparent, etc.) of node that starts on its own line, and return the start of that node. “Starting on its own line” means there is only whitespace character before the node on the line which the node’s start is on.
prev-sibling
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the start of the previous sibling of node.
no-indent
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the start of node.
prev-line
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the first non-whitespace character on the previous line.
column-0
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node, parent, and bol, and returns the beginning of the current line, which is at column 0.
comment-start
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node,
parent, and bol, and returns the position after the
comment-start token. Comment-start tokens are defined by regular
expression comment-start-skip
. This function assumes
parent is the comment node.
prev-adaptive-prefix
¶This anchor is a function that is called with 3 arguments: node,
parent, and bol. It tries to match
adaptive-fill-regexp
to the text at the beginning of the
previous non-empty line. If there is a match, this function returns
the end of the match, otherwise it returns nil
. However, if
the current line begins with a prefix (e.g., ‘-’), return the
beginning of the prefix of the previous line instead, so that the two
prefixes align. This anchor is useful for an
indent-relative
-like indent behavior for block comments.
Here are some utility functions that can help writing parser-based indentation rules.
This command checks the current buffer’s indentation against major mode mode. It indents the current buffer according to mode and compares the results with the current indentation. Then it pops up a buffer showing the differences. Correct indentation (target) is shown in green color, current indentation is shown in red color.
It is also helpful to use treesit-inspect-mode
(see Tree-sitter Language Grammar) when writing indentation rules.
Desktop Save Mode is a feature to save the state of Emacs from one session to another. The user-level commands for using Desktop Save Mode are described in the GNU Emacs Manual (see Saving Emacs Sessions in the GNU Emacs Manual). Modes whose buffers visit a file, don’t have to do anything to use this feature.
For buffers not visiting a file to have their state saved, the major
mode must bind the buffer local variable desktop-save-buffer
to
a non-nil
value.
If this buffer-local variable is non-nil
, the buffer will have
its state saved in the desktop file at desktop save. If the value is
a function, it is called at desktop save with argument
desktop-dirname, and its value is saved in the desktop file along
with the state of the buffer for which it was called. When file names
are returned as part of the auxiliary information, they should be
formatted using the call
(desktop-file-name file-name desktop-dirname)
For buffers not visiting a file to be restored, the major mode must
define a function to do the job, and that function must be listed in
the alist desktop-buffer-mode-handlers
.
Alist with elements
(major-mode . restore-buffer-function)
The function restore-buffer-function will be called with argument list
(buffer-file-name buffer-name desktop-buffer-misc)
and it should return the restored buffer.
Here desktop-buffer-misc is the value returned by the function
optionally bound to desktop-save-buffer
.
GNU Emacs has convenient built-in help facilities, most of which derive their information from documentation strings associated with functions and variables. This chapter describes how to access documentation strings in Lisp programs.
The contents of a documentation string should follow certain conventions. In particular, its first line should be a complete sentence (or two complete sentences) that briefly describes what the function or variable does. See Tips for Documentation Strings, for how to write good documentation strings.
Note that the documentation strings for Emacs are not the same thing as the Emacs manual. Manuals have their own source files, written in the Texinfo language; documentation strings are specified in the definitions of the functions and variables they apply to. A collection of documentation strings is not sufficient as a manual because a good manual is not organized in that fashion; it is organized in terms of topics of discussion.
For commands to display documentation strings, see Help in The GNU Emacs Manual.
A documentation string is written using the Lisp syntax for strings, with double-quote characters surrounding the text. It is, in fact, an actual Lisp string. When the string appears in the proper place in a function or variable definition, it serves as the function’s or variable’s documentation.
In a function definition (a lambda
or defun
form), the
documentation string is specified after the argument list, and is
normally stored directly in the function object. See Documentation Strings of Functions. You can also put function documentation in the
function-documentation
property of a function name
(see Access to Documentation Strings).
In a variable definition (a defvar
form), the documentation
string is specified after the initial value. See Defining Global Variables. The string is stored in the variable’s
variable-documentation
property.
Sometimes, Emacs does not keep documentation strings in memory.
There are two such circumstances. Firstly, to save memory, the
documentation for primitive functions (see What Is a Function?) and
built-in variables is kept in a file named DOC, in the
directory specified by doc-directory
(see Access to Documentation Strings). Secondly, when a function or variable is loaded from
a byte-compiled file, Emacs avoids loading its documentation string
(see Documentation Strings and Compilation). In both cases, Emacs looks up the
documentation string from the file only when needed, such as when the
user calls C-h f (describe-function
) for a function.
Documentation strings can contain special key substitution sequences, referring to key bindings which are looked up only when the user views the documentation. This allows the help commands to display the correct keys even if a user rearranges the default key bindings. See Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation.
In the documentation string of an autoloaded command (see Autoload), these key-substitution sequences have an additional special effect: they cause C-h f on the command to trigger autoloading. (This is needed for correctly setting up the hyperlinks in the *Help* buffer.)
This function returns the documentation string recorded in
symbol’s property list under property property. It is
most often used to look up the documentation strings of variables, for
which property is variable-documentation
. However, it
can also be used to look up other kinds of documentation, such as for
customization groups (but for function documentation, use the
documentation
function, below).
If the property value refers to a documentation string stored in the DOC file or a byte-compiled file, this function looks up that string and returns it.
If the property value isn’t nil
, isn’t a string, and doesn’t
refer to text in a file, then it is evaluated as a Lisp expression to
obtain a string.
Finally, this function passes the string through
substitute-command-keys
to substitute key bindings (see Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation). It skips this step if verbatim is
non-nil
.
(documentation-property 'command-line-processed 'variable-documentation) ⇒ "Non-nil once command line has been processed"
(symbol-plist 'command-line-processed) ⇒ (variable-documentation 188902)
(documentation-property 'emacs 'group-documentation) ⇒ "Customization of the One True Editor."
This function returns the documentation string of function. It handles macros, named keyboard macros, and special forms, as well as ordinary functions.
If function is a symbol, this function first looks for the
function-documentation
property of that symbol; if that has a
non-nil
value, the documentation comes from that value (if the
value is not a string, it is evaluated).
If function is not a symbol, or if it has no
function-documentation
property, then documentation
extracts the documentation string from the actual function definition,
reading it from a file if called for.
Finally, unless verbatim is non-nil
, this function calls
substitute-command-keys
. The result is the documentation
string to return.
The documentation
function signals a void-function
error
if function has no function definition. However, it is OK if
the function definition has no documentation string. In that case,
documentation
returns nil
.
Generic function used by documentation
to extract the raw
docstring from a function object. You can specify how to get the
docstring of a specific function type by adding a corresponding method
to it.
This function returns the documentation string of face as a face.
Here is an example of using the two functions, documentation
and
documentation-property
, to display the documentation strings for
several symbols in a *Help* buffer.
(defun describe-symbols (pattern) "Describe the Emacs Lisp symbols matching PATTERN. All symbols that have PATTERN in their name are described in the *Help* buffer." (interactive "sDescribe symbols matching: ") (let ((describe-func (lambda (s)
;; Print description of symbol. (if (fboundp s) ; It is a function. (princ (format "%s\t%s\n%s\n\n" s (if (commandp s) (let ((keys (where-is-internal s))) (if keys (concat "Keys: " (mapconcat 'key-description keys " ")) "Keys: none")) "Function")
(or (documentation s)
"not documented"))))
(if (boundp s) ; It is a variable.
(princ (format "%s\t%s\n%s\n\n" s (if (custom-variable-p s) "Option " "Variable")
(or (documentation-property s 'variable-documentation) "not documented")))))) sym-list)
;; Build a list of symbols that match pattern.
(mapatoms (lambda (sym)
(if (string-match pattern (symbol-name sym))
(setq sym-list (cons sym sym-list)))))
;; Display the data.
(help-setup-xref (list 'describe-symbols pattern)
(called-interactively-p 'interactive))
(with-help-window (help-buffer)
(mapcar describe-func (sort sym-list 'string<)))))
The describe-symbols
function works like apropos
,
but provides more information.
(describe-symbols "goal") ---------- Buffer: *Help* ---------- goal-column Option Semipermanent goal column for vertical motion, as set by ...
minibuffer-temporary-goal-position Variable not documented
set-goal-column Keys: C-x C-n Set the current horizontal position as a goal for C-n and C-p.
Those commands will move to this position in the line moved to rather than trying to keep the same horizontal position. With a non-nil argument ARG, clears out the goal column so that C-n and C-p resume vertical motion. The goal column is stored in the variable ‘goal-column’. (fn ARG)
temporary-goal-column Variable Current goal column for vertical motion. It is the column where point was at the start of the current run of vertical motion commands. When moving by visual lines via the function ‘line-move-visual’, it is a cons cell (COL . HSCROLL), where COL is the x-position, in pixels, divided by the default column width, and HSCROLL is the number of columns by which window is scrolled from left margin. When the ‘track-eol’ feature is doing its job, the value is ‘most-positive-fixnum’. ---------- Buffer: *Help* ----------
This function is used when building Emacs, just before the runnable Emacs is dumped. It finds the positions of the documentation strings stored in the file filename, and records those positions into memory in the function definitions and variable property lists. See Building Emacs.
Emacs reads the file filename from the emacs/etc directory.
When the dumped Emacs is later executed, the same file will be looked
for in the directory doc-directory
. Usually filename is
"DOC"
.
This variable holds the name of the directory which should contain the
file "DOC"
that contains documentation strings for
built-in functions and variables.
In most cases, this is the same as data-directory
. They may be
different when you run Emacs from the directory where you built it,
without actually installing it. See Definition of data-directory.
When documentation strings refer to key sequences, they should use the
current, actual key bindings. They can do so using certain special text
sequences described below. Accessing documentation strings in the usual
way substitutes current key binding information for these special
sequences. This works by calling substitute-command-keys
. You
can also call that function yourself.
Here is a list of the special sequences and what they mean:
\[command]
stands for a key sequence that will invoke command, or ‘M-x command’ if command has no key bindings.
\{mapvar}
stands for a summary of the keymap which is the value of the variable
mapvar. The summary is made using describe-bindings
.
The summary will normally exclude meny bindings, but if the
include-menus argument to substitute-command-keys
is
non-nil
, the menu bindings will be included.
\<mapvar>
stands for no text itself. It is used only for a side effect: it specifies mapvar’s value as the keymap for any following ‘\[command]’ sequences in this documentation string.
\`KEYSEQ'
stands for a key sequence KEYSEQ, which will use the same face
as a command substitution. This should be used only when a key
sequence has no corresponding command, for example when it is read
directly with read-key-sequence
. It must be a valid key
sequence according to key-valid-p
. It can also be used with
command names, like ‘\`M-x foo'’, where you want this to be
fontified like a keyboard sequence, but you want to inhibit
translating it into a key sequence like ‘\[foo]’ does.
`
(grave accent) stands for a left quote.
This generates a left single quotation mark, an apostrophe, or a grave
accent depending on the value of text-quoting-style
.
See Text Quoting Style.
'
(apostrophe) stands for a right quote.
This generates a right single quotation mark or an apostrophe
depending on the value of text-quoting-style
.
\=
quotes the following character and is discarded; thus, ‘\=`’ puts ‘`’ into the output, ‘\=\[’ puts ‘\[’ into the output, and ‘\=\=’ puts ‘\=’ into the output.
\+
This indicates that the symbol directly following should not be marked as link in the *Help* buffer.
Please note: Each ‘\’ must be doubled when written in a string in Emacs Lisp.
This function scans string for the above special sequences and
replaces them by what they stand for, returning the result as a string.
This permits display of documentation that refers accurately to the
user’s own customized key bindings. By default, the key bindings are
given a special face help-key-binding
, but if the optional
argument no-face is non-nil
, the function doesn’t add
this face to the produced string.
If a command has multiple bindings, this function normally uses the
first one it finds. You can specify one particular key binding by
assigning an :advertised-binding
symbol property to the
command, like this:
(put 'undo :advertised-binding [?\C-/])
The :advertised-binding
property also affects the binding shown
in menu items (see The Menu Bar). The property is ignored if it
specifies a key binding that the command does not actually have.
Here are examples of the special sequences:
(substitute-command-keys "To abort recursive edit, type `\\[abort-recursive-edit]'.") ⇒ "To abort recursive edit, type ‘C-]’."
(substitute-command-keys "The keys that are defined for the minibuffer here are: \\{minibuffer-local-must-match-map}") ⇒ "The keys that are defined for the minibuffer here are:
? minibuffer-completion-help
SPC minibuffer-complete-word
TAB minibuffer-complete
C-j minibuffer-complete-and-exit
RET minibuffer-complete-and-exit
C-g abort-recursive-edit
"
The keymap description will normally exclude menu items, but if
include-menus is non-nil
, include them.
(substitute-command-keys "To abort a recursive edit from the minibuffer, type \ `\\<minibuffer-local-must-match-map>\\[abort-recursive-edit]'.") ⇒ "To abort a recursive edit from the minibuffer, type ‘C-g’."
This function works like substitute-command-keys
, but only
replaces quote characters.
There are other special conventions for the text in documentation strings—for instance, you can refer to functions, variables, and sections of this manual. See Tips for Documentation Strings, for details.
Typically, grave accents and apostrophes are treated specially in
documentation strings and diagnostic messages, and translate to matching
single quotation marks (also called “curved quotes”). For example,
the documentation string "Alias for `foo'."
and the function call
(message "Alias for `foo'.")
both translate to "Alias for
‘foo’."
. Less commonly, Emacs displays grave accents and apostrophes
as themselves, or as apostrophes only (e.g., "Alias for 'foo'."
).
Documentation strings and message formats should be written so that
they display well with any of these styles. For example, the
documentation string "Alias for 'foo'."
is probably not what you
want, as it can display as "Alias for ’foo’."
, an unusual style in
English.
Sometimes you may need to display a grave accent or apostrophe
without translation, regardless of text quoting style. In a
documentation string, you can do this with escapes. For example, in
the documentation string "\\=`(a ,(sin 0)) ==> (a 0.0)"
the grave
accent is intended to denote Lisp code, so it is escaped and displays
as itself regardless of quoting style. In a call to message
or
error
, you can avoid translation by using a format "%s"
with an argument that is a call to format
. For example,
(message "%s" (format "`(a ,(sin %S)) ==> (a %S)" x (sin x)))
displays a message that starts with grave accent regardless of text
quoting style.
The value of this user option is a symbol that specifies the style
Emacs should use for single quotes in the wording of help and
messages. If the option’s value is curve
, the style is
‘like this’
with curved single quotes. If the value is
straight
, the style is 'like this'
with straight
apostrophes. If the value is grave
, quotes are not translated
and the style is `like this'
with grave accent and apostrophe, the
standard style before Emacs version 25. The default value nil
acts like curve
if curved single quotes seem to be displayable,
and like grave
otherwise.
This option is useful on platforms that have problems with curved quotes. You can customize it freely according to your personal preference.
You should not read the value of the variable
text-quoting-style
directly. Instead, use this function with
the same name to dynamically compute the correct quoting style on the
current terminal in the nil
case described above.
These functions convert events, key sequences, or characters to textual descriptions. These descriptions are useful for including arbitrary text characters or key sequences in messages, because they convert non-printing and whitespace characters to sequences of printing characters. The description of a non-whitespace printing character is the character itself.
This function returns a string containing the Emacs standard notation
for the input events in sequence. If prefix is
non-nil
, it is a sequence of input events leading up to
sequence and is included in the return value. Both arguments
may be strings, vectors or lists. See Input Events, for more
information about valid events.
(key-description [?\M-3 delete]) ⇒ "M-3 <delete>"
(key-description [delete] "\M-3") ⇒ "M-3 <delete>"
See also the examples for single-key-description
, below.
This function returns a string describing event in the standard Emacs notation for keyboard input. A normal printing character appears as itself, but a control character turns into a string starting with ‘C-’, a meta character turns into a string starting with ‘M-’, and space, tab, etc., appear as ‘SPC’, ‘TAB’, etc. A function key symbol appears inside angle brackets ‘<…>’. An event that is a list appears as the name of the symbol in the CAR of the list, inside angle brackets.
If the optional argument no-angles is non-nil
, the angle
brackets around function keys and event symbols are omitted; this is
for compatibility with old versions of Emacs which didn’t use the
brackets.
(single-key-description ?\C-x) ⇒ "C-x"
(key-description "\C-x \M-y \n \t \r \f123") ⇒ "C-x SPC M-y SPC C-j SPC TAB SPC RET SPC C-l 1 2 3"
(single-key-description 'delete) ⇒ "<delete>"
(single-key-description 'C-mouse-1) ⇒ "C-<mouse-1>"
(single-key-description 'C-mouse-1 t) ⇒ "C-mouse-1"
This function returns a string describing character in the
standard Emacs notation for characters that can appear in
text—similar to single-key-description
, except that the
argument must be a valid character code that passes a
characterp
test (see Character Codes). The function
produces descriptions of control characters with a leading caret
(which is how Emacs usually displays control characters in buffers).
Characters with modifier bits will cause this function to signal an
error (ASCII characters with the Control modifier are an
exception, they are represented as control characters).
(text-char-description ?\C-c) ⇒ "^C"
(text-char-description ?\M-m) error→ Wrong type argument: characterp, 134217837
This function is used mainly for operating on keyboard macros, but it
can also be used as a rough inverse for key-description
. You
call it with a string containing key descriptions, separated by spaces;
it returns a string or vector containing the corresponding events.
(This may or may not be a single valid key sequence, depending on what
events you use; see Key Sequences.) If need-vector is
non-nil
, the return value is always a vector.
Emacs provides a variety of built-in help functions, all accessible to the user as subcommands of the prefix C-h. For more information about them, see Help in The GNU Emacs Manual. Here we describe some program-level interfaces to the same information.
This function finds all meaningful symbols whose names contain a match for the apropos pattern pattern. An apropos pattern is either a word to match, a space-separated list of words of which at least two must match, or a regular expression (if any special regular expression characters occur). A symbol is meaningful if it has a definition as a function, variable, or face, or has properties.
The function returns a list of elements that look like this:
(symbol score function-doc variable-doc plist-doc widget-doc face-doc group-doc)
Here, score is an integer measure of how important the symbol
seems to be as a match. Each of the remaining elements is a
documentation string, or nil
, for symbol as a function,
variable, etc.
It also displays the symbols in a buffer named *Apropos*, each with a one-line description taken from the beginning of its documentation string.
If do-all is non-nil
, or if the user option
apropos-do-all
is non-nil
, then apropos
also
shows key bindings for the functions that are found; it also shows
all interned symbols, not just meaningful ones (and it lists
them in the return value as well).
The value of this variable is a local keymap for characters following the Help key, C-h.
This symbol is not a function; its function definition cell holds the
keymap known as help-map
. It is defined in help.el as
follows:
(keymap-set global-map (key-description (string help-char)) 'help-command) (fset 'help-command help-map)
The value of this variable is the help character—the character that
Emacs recognizes as meaning Help. By default, its value is 8, which
stands for C-h. When Emacs reads this character, if
help-form
is a non-nil
Lisp expression, it evaluates that
expression, and displays the result in a window if it is a string.
Usually the value of help-form
is nil
. Then the
help character has no special meaning at the level of command input, and
it becomes part of a key sequence in the normal way. The standard key
binding of C-h is a prefix key for several general-purpose help
features.
The help character is special after prefix keys, too. If it has no
binding as a subcommand of the prefix key, it runs
describe-prefix-bindings
, which displays a list of all the
subcommands of the prefix key.
The value of this variable is a list of event types that serve as
alternative help characters. These events are handled just like the
event specified by help-char
.
If this variable is non-nil
, its value is a form to evaluate
whenever the character help-char
is read. If evaluating the form
produces a string, that string is displayed.
A command that calls read-event
, read-char-choice
,
read-char
, read-char-from-minibuffer
, or
y-or-n-p
probably should bind help-form
to a
non-nil
expression while it does input. (The time when you
should not do this is when C-h has some other meaning.)
Evaluating this expression should result in a string that explains
what the input is for and how to enter it properly.
Entry to the minibuffer binds this variable to the value of
minibuffer-help-form
(see Definition of minibuffer-help-form).
This variable holds a function to print help for a prefix key. The
function is called when the user types a prefix key followed by the help
character, and the help character has no binding after that prefix. The
variable’s default value is describe-prefix-bindings
.
This function calls describe-bindings
to display a list of all
the subcommands of the prefix key of the most recent key sequence. The
prefix described consists of all but the last event of that key
sequence. (The last event is, presumably, the help character.)
The following two functions are meant for modes that want to provide help without relinquishing control, such as the electric modes. Their names begin with ‘Helper’ to distinguish them from the ordinary help functions.
This command pops up a window displaying a help buffer containing a
listing of all of the key bindings from both the local and global keymaps.
It works by calling describe-bindings
.
This command provides help for the current mode. It prompts the user
in the minibuffer with the message ‘Help (Type ? for further
options)’, and then provides assistance in finding out what the key
bindings are, and what the mode is intended for. It returns nil
.
This can be customized by changing the map Helper-help-map
.
This variable holds the name of the directory in which Emacs finds certain documentation and text files that come with Emacs.
This function returns the name of the help buffer, which is normally *Help*; if such a buffer does not exist, it is first created.
This macro evaluates body like with-output-to-temp-buffer
(see Temporary Displays), inserting any output produced by its
forms into a buffer specified by buffer-or-name, which can be a
buffer or the name of a buffer. (Frequently, buffer-or-name is
the value returned by the function help-buffer
.) This macro
puts the specified buffer into Help mode and displays a message
telling the user how to quit and scroll the help window. It selects
the help window if the current value of the user option
help-window-select
has been set accordingly. It returns the
last value in body.
This function updates the cross reference data in the *Help*
buffer, which is used to regenerate the help information when the user
clicks on the ‘Back’ or ‘Forward’ buttons. Most commands
that use the *Help* buffer should invoke this function before
clearing the buffer. The item argument should have the form
(function . args)
, where function is a function
to call, with argument list args, to regenerate the help buffer.
The interactive-p argument is non-nil
if the calling
command was invoked interactively; in that case, the stack of items
for the *Help* buffer’s ‘Back’ buttons is cleared.
See describe-symbols example, for an example of using
help-buffer
, with-help-window
, and
help-setup-xref
.
This macro defines a help command named fname that acts like a prefix key that shows a list of the subcommands it offers.
When invoked, fname displays help-text in a window, then reads and executes a key sequence according to help-map. The string help-text should describe the bindings available in help-map.
The command fname is defined to handle a few events itself, by scrolling the display of help-text. When fname reads one of those special events, it does the scrolling and then reads another event. When it reads an event that is not one of those few, and which has a binding in help-map, it executes that key’s binding and then returns.
The argument help-line should be a single-line summary of the
alternatives in help-map. In the current version of Emacs, this
argument is used only if you set the option three-step-help
to
t
.
This macro is used in the command help-for-help
which is the
binding of C-h C-h.
If this variable is non-nil
, commands defined with
make-help-screen
display their help-line strings in the
echo area at first, and display the longer help-text strings only
if the user types the help character again.
Emacs can list functions based on various groupings. For instance,
string-trim
and mapconcat
are “string” functions, so
M-x shortdoc RET string RET will give an overview
of functions that operate on strings.
The documentation groups are created with the
define-short-documentation-group
macro.
Define group as a group of functions, and provide short summaries of using those functions. The optional argument functions is a list whose elements are of the form:
(func [keyword val]...)
The following keywords are recognized:
:eval
The value should be a form that has no side effect when evaluated.
The form will be used in the documentation by printing it with
prin1
(see Output Functions). However, if the form is a
string, it will be inserted as-is, and the string will then be
read
to yield the form. In any case, the form will then be
evaluated, and the result used. For instance:
:eval (concat "foo" "bar" "zot") :eval "(make-string 5 ?x)"
will result in:
(concat "foo" "bar" "zot") ⇒ "foobarzot" (make-string 5 ?x) ⇒ "xxxxx"
(The reason for allowing both Lisp forms and strings here is so that printing could be controlled in the few cases where a certain presentation of the form is wished for. In the example, ‘?x’ would otherwise have been printed as ‘120’ if it hadn’t been included in a string.)
:no-eval
This is like :eval
, except that the form will not be evaluated.
In these cases, a :result
element of some kind (see below)
should be included.
:no-eval (file-symlink-p "/tmp/foo") :eg-result t
:no-eval*
Like :no-eval
, but always inserts ‘[it depends]’ as the
result. For instance:
:no-eval* (buffer-string)
will result in:
(buffer-string) → [it depends]
:no-value
Like :no-eval
, but is used when the function in question has no
well-defined return value, and is used for side effect only.
:result
Used to output the result from non-evaluating example forms.
:no-eval (setcar list 'c) :result c
:eg-result
Used to output an example result from non-evaluating example forms. For instance:
:no-eval (looking-at "f[0-9]") :eg-result t
will result in:
(looking-at "f[0-9]") eg. → t
:result-string
:eg-result-string
These two are the same as :result
and :eg-result
,
respectively, but are inserted as is. This is useful when the result
is unreadable or should be of a particular form:
:no-eval (find-file "/tmp/foo") :eg-result-string "#<buffer foo>" :no-eval (default-file-modes) :eg-result-string "#o755"
:no-manual
Indicates that this function is not documented in the manual.
:args
By default, the function’s actual argument list is shown. If
:args
is present, they are used instead.
:args (regexp string)
Here’s a very short example:
(define-short-documentation-group string "Creating Strings" (substring :eval (substring "foobar" 0 3) :eval (substring "foobar" 3)) (concat :eval (concat "foo" "bar" "zot")))
The first argument is the name of the group to be defined, and then follows any number of function descriptions.
A function can belong to any number of documentation groups.
In addition to function descriptions, the list can also have string elements, which are used to divide a documentation group into sections.
Lisp packages can add functions to groups with this function. Each elem should be a function description, as described above. group is the function group, and section is what section in the function group to insert the function into.
If group doesn’t exist, it will be created. If section doesn’t exist, it will be added to the end of the function group.
This chapter describes the Emacs Lisp functions and variables to find, create, view, save, and otherwise work with files and directories. A few other file-related functions are described in Buffers, and those related to backups and auto-saving are described in Backups and Auto-Saving.
Many of the file functions take one or more arguments that are file
names. A file name is a string. Most of these functions expand file
name arguments using the function expand-file-name
, so that
~ is handled correctly, as are relative file names (including
../ and the empty string). See Functions that Expand Filenames.
In addition, certain magic file names are handled specially. For example, when a remote file name is specified, Emacs accesses the file over the network via an appropriate protocol. See Remote Files in The GNU Emacs Manual. This handling is done at a very low level, so you may assume that all the functions described in this chapter accept magic file names as file name arguments, except where noted. See Making Certain File Names “Magic”, for details.
When file I/O functions signal Lisp errors, they usually use the
condition file-error
(see Writing Code to Handle Errors). The error
message is in most cases obtained from the operating system, according
to locale system-messages-locale
, and decoded using coding system
locale-coding-system
(see Locales).
Visiting a file means reading a file into a buffer. Once this is done, we say that the buffer is visiting that file, and call the file the visited file of the buffer.
A file and a buffer are two different things. A file is information recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer, on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). When a buffer is visiting a file, it contains information copied from the file. The copy in the buffer is what you modify with editing commands. Changes to the buffer do not change the file; to make the changes permanent, you must save the buffer, which means copying the altered buffer contents back into the file.
Despite the distinction between files and buffers, people often refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-versa. Indeed, we say, “I am editing a file”, rather than, “I am editing a buffer that I will soon save as a file of the same name”. Humans do not usually need to make the distinction explicit. When dealing with a computer program, however, it is good to keep the distinction in mind.
This section describes the functions normally used to visit files. For historical reasons, these functions have names starting with ‘find-’ rather than ‘visit-’. See Buffer File Name, for functions and variables that access the visited file name of a buffer or that find an existing buffer by its visited file name.
In a Lisp program, if you want to look at the contents of a file but
not alter it, the fastest way is to use insert-file-contents
in a
temporary buffer. Visiting the file is not necessary and takes longer.
See Reading from Files.
This command selects a buffer visiting the file filename, using an existing buffer if there is one, and otherwise creating a new buffer and reading the file into it. It also returns that buffer.
Aside from some technical details, the body of the find-file
function is basically equivalent to:
(switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards))
(See switch-to-buffer
in Switching to a Buffer in a Window.)
If wildcards is non-nil
, which is always true in an
interactive call, then find-file
expands wildcard characters in
filename and visits all the matching files.
When find-file
is called interactively, it prompts for
filename in the minibuffer.
This command visits filename, like find-file
does, but it
does not perform any format conversions (see File Format Conversion),
character code conversions (see Coding Systems), or end-of-line
conversions (see End of line conversion).
The buffer visiting the file is made unibyte, and its major mode is
Fundamental mode, regardless of the file name. File local variable
specifications in the file (see File Local Variables) are
ignored, and automatic decompression and adding a newline at the end
of the file due to require-final-newline
(see require-final-newline) are also disabled.
Note that if Emacs already has a buffer visiting the same file
non-literally, it will not visit the same file literally, but instead
just switch to the existing buffer. If you want to be sure of
accessing a file’s contents literally, you should create a temporary
buffer and then read the file contents into it using
insert-file-contents-literally
(see Reading from Files).
This function is the guts of all the file-visiting functions. It returns a buffer visiting the file filename. You may make the buffer current or display it in a window if you wish, but this function does not do so.
The function returns an existing buffer if there is one; otherwise it
creates a new buffer and reads the file into it. When
find-file-noselect
uses an existing buffer, it first verifies
that the file has not changed since it was last visited or saved in
that buffer. If the file has changed, this function asks the user
whether to reread the changed file. If the user says ‘yes’, any
edits previously made in the buffer are lost.
Reading the file involves decoding the file’s contents (see Coding Systems), including end-of-line conversion, and format conversion
(see File Format Conversion). If wildcards is non-nil
,
then find-file-noselect
expands wildcard characters in
filename and visits all the matching files.
This function displays warning or advisory messages in various peculiar
cases, unless the optional argument nowarn is non-nil
. For
example, if it needs to create a buffer, and there is no file named
filename, it displays the message ‘(New file)’ in the echo
area, and leaves the buffer empty.
The find-file-noselect
function normally calls
after-find-file
after reading the file (see Subroutines of Visiting). That function sets the buffer major mode, parses local
variables, warns the user if there exists an auto-save file more recent
than the file just visited, and finishes by running the functions in
find-file-hook
.
If the optional argument rawfile is non-nil
, then
after-find-file
is not called, and the
find-file-not-found-functions
are not run in case of failure.
What’s more, a non-nil
rawfile value suppresses coding
system conversion and format conversion.
The find-file-noselect
function usually returns the buffer that
is visiting the file filename. But, if wildcards are actually
used and expanded, it returns a list of buffers that are visiting the
various files.
(find-file-noselect "/etc/fstab") ⇒ #<buffer fstab>
This command selects a buffer visiting the file filename, but does so in a window other than the selected window. It may use another existing window or split a window; see Switching to a Buffer in a Window.
When this command is called interactively, it prompts for filename.
This command selects a buffer visiting the file filename, like
find-file
, but it marks the buffer as read-only. See Read-Only Buffers, for related functions and variables.
When this command is called interactively, it prompts for filename.
If this variable is non-nil
, then the various find-file
commands check for wildcard characters and visit all the files that
match them (when invoked interactively or when their wildcards
argument is non-nil
). If this option is nil
, then
the find-file
commands ignore their wildcards argument
and never treat wildcard characters specially.
The value of this variable is a list of functions to be called after a file is visited. The file’s local-variables specification (if any) will have been processed before the hooks are run. The buffer visiting the file is current when the hook functions are run.
This variable is a normal hook. See Hooks.
The value of this variable is a list of functions to be called when
find-file
or find-file-noselect
is passed a nonexistent
file name. find-file-noselect
calls these functions as soon as
it detects a nonexistent file. It calls them in the order of the list,
until one of them returns non-nil
. buffer-file-name
is
already set up.
This is not a normal hook because the values of the functions are used, and in many cases only some of the functions are called.
This buffer-local variable, if set to a non-nil
value, makes
save-buffer
behave as if the buffer were visiting its file
literally, i.e., without conversions of any kind. The command
find-file-literally
sets this variable’s local value, but other
equivalent functions and commands can do that as well, e.g., to avoid
automatic addition of a newline at the end of the file. This variable
is permanent local, so it is unaffected by changes of major modes.
The find-file-noselect
function uses two important subroutines
which are sometimes useful in user Lisp code: create-file-buffer
and after-find-file
. This section explains how to use them.
This function creates a suitably named buffer for visiting filename, and returns it. It uses filename (sans directory) as the name if that name is free; otherwise, it appends a string such as ‘<2>’ to get an unused name. See also Creating Buffers. Note that the uniquify library affects the result of this function. See Uniquify in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Please note: create-file-buffer
does not
associate the new buffer with a file and does not select the buffer.
It also does not use the default major mode.
(create-file-buffer "foo") ⇒ #<buffer foo>
(create-file-buffer "foo") ⇒ #<buffer foo<2>>
(create-file-buffer "foo") ⇒ #<buffer foo<3>>
This function is used by find-file-noselect
.
It uses generate-new-buffer
(see Creating Buffers).
This function sets the buffer major mode, and parses local variables
(see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode). It is called by find-file-noselect
and by the default revert function (see Reverting).
If reading the file got an error because the file does not exist, but
its directory does exist, the caller should pass a non-nil
value
for error. In that case, after-find-file
issues a warning:
‘(New file)’. For more serious errors, the caller should usually not
call after-find-file
.
If warn is non-nil
, then this function issues a warning
if an auto-save file exists and is more recent than the visited file.
If noauto is non-nil
, that says not to enable or disable
Auto-Save mode. The mode remains enabled if it was enabled before.
If after-find-file-from-revert-buffer is non-nil
, that
means this call was from revert-buffer
. This has no direct
effect, but some mode functions and hook functions check the value
of this variable.
If nomodes is non-nil
, that means don’t alter the buffer’s
major mode, don’t process local variables specifications in the file,
and don’t run find-file-hook
. This feature is used by
revert-buffer
in some cases.
The last thing after-find-file
does is call all the functions
in the list find-file-hook
.
When you edit a file in Emacs, you are actually working on a buffer
that is visiting that file—that is, the contents of the file are
copied into the buffer and the copy is what you edit. Changes to the
buffer do not change the file until you save the buffer, which
means copying the contents of the buffer into the file. Buffers which
are not visiting a file can still be “saved”, in a sense, using
functions in the buffer-local write-contents-functions
hook.
This function saves the contents of the current buffer in its visited file if the buffer has been modified since it was last visited or saved. Otherwise it does nothing.
save-buffer
is responsible for making backup files. Normally,
backup-option is nil
, and save-buffer
makes a backup
file only if this is the first save since visiting the file. Other
values for backup-option request the making of backup files in
other circumstances:
save-buffer
function marks this version of the file to be
backed up when the buffer is next saved.
save-buffer
function unconditionally backs up the previous
version of the file before saving it.
This command saves some modified file-visiting buffers. Normally it
asks the user about each buffer. But if save-silently-p is
non-nil
, it saves all the file-visiting buffers without
querying the user.
The optional pred argument provides a predicate that controls
which buffers to ask about (or to save silently if
save-silently-p is non-nil
). If pred is
nil
, that means to use the value of
save-some-buffers-default-predicate
instead of pred. If
the result is nil
, it means ask only about file-visiting
buffers. If it is t
, that means also offer to save certain
other non-file buffers—those that have a non-nil
buffer-local
value of buffer-offer-save
(see Killing Buffers). A user
who says ‘yes’ to saving a non-file buffer is asked to specify
the file name to use. The save-buffers-kill-emacs
function
passes the value t
for pred.
If the predicate is neither t
nor nil
, then it should be
a function of no arguments. It will be called in each buffer to decide
whether to offer to save that buffer. If it returns a non-nil
value in a certain buffer, that means do offer to save that buffer.
This function writes the current buffer into file filename, makes
the buffer visit that file, and marks it not modified. Then it renames
the buffer based on filename, appending a string like ‘<2>’
if necessary to make a unique buffer name. It does most of this work by
calling set-visited-file-name
(see Buffer File Name) and
save-buffer
.
If confirm is non-nil
, that means to ask for confirmation
before overwriting an existing file. Interactively, confirmation is
required, unless the user supplies a prefix argument.
If filename is a directory name (see Directory Names),
write-file
uses the name of the visited file, in directory
filename. If the buffer is not visiting a file, it uses the
buffer name instead.
Saving a buffer runs several hooks. It also performs format
conversion (see File Format Conversion). Note that these hooks,
described below, are only run by save-buffer
, they are not run
by other primitives and functions that write buffer text to files, and
in particular auto-saving (see Auto-Saving) doesn’t run these
hooks.
The value of this variable is a list of functions to be called before
writing out a buffer to its visited file. If one of them returns
non-nil
, the file is considered already written and the rest of
the functions are not called, nor is the usual code for writing the file
executed.
If a function in write-file-functions
returns non-nil
, it
is responsible for making a backup file (if that is appropriate).
To do so, execute the following code:
(or buffer-backed-up (backup-buffer))
You might wish to save the file modes value returned by
backup-buffer
and use that (if non-nil
) to set the mode
bits of the file that you write. This is what save-buffer
normally does. See Making Backup Files.
The hook functions in write-file-functions
are also responsible
for encoding the data (if desired): they must choose a suitable coding
system and end-of-line conversion (see Coding Systems in Lisp),
perform the encoding (see Explicit Encoding and Decoding), and set
last-coding-system-used
to the coding system that was used
(see Encoding and I/O).
If you set this hook locally in a buffer, it is assumed to be
associated with the file or the way the contents of the buffer were
obtained. Thus the variable is marked as a permanent local, so that
changing the major mode does not alter a buffer-local value. On the
other hand, calling set-visited-file-name
will reset it.
If this is not what you want, you might like to use
write-contents-functions
instead.
Even though this is not a normal hook, you can use add-hook
and
remove-hook
to manipulate the list. See Hooks.
This works just like write-file-functions
, but it is intended
for hooks that pertain to the buffer’s contents, not to the particular
visited file or its location, and can be used to create arbitrary save
processes for buffers that aren’t visiting files at all. Such hooks
are usually set up by major modes, as buffer-local bindings for this
variable. This variable automatically becomes buffer-local whenever
it is set; switching to a new major mode always resets this variable,
but calling set-visited-file-name
does not.
If any of the functions in this hook returns non-nil
, the file
is considered already written and the rest are not called and neither
are the functions in write-file-functions
.
When using this hook to save buffers that are not visiting files (for
instance, special-mode buffers), keep in mind that, if the function
fails to save correctly and returns a nil
value,
save-buffer
will go on to prompt the user for a file to save
the buffer in. If this is undesirable, consider having the function
fail by raising an error.
This normal hook runs before a buffer is saved in its visited file, regardless of whether that is done normally or by one of the hooks described above. For instance, the copyright.el program uses this hook to make sure the file you are saving has the current year in its copyright notice.
This normal hook runs after a buffer has been saved in its visited file.
If this variable is non-nil
, then save-buffer
protects
against I/O errors while saving by writing the new file to a temporary
name instead of the name it is supposed to have, and then renaming it to
the intended name after it is clear there are no errors. This procedure
prevents problems such as a lack of disk space from resulting in an
invalid file.
As a side effect, backups are necessarily made by copying. See Backup by Renaming or by Copying?. Yet, at the same time, saving a precious file always breaks all hard links between the file you save and other file names.
Some modes give this variable a non-nil
buffer-local value
in particular buffers.
This variable determines whether files may be written out that do
not end with a newline. If the value of the variable is
t
, then save-buffer
silently adds a newline at the end
of the buffer whenever it does not already end in one. If the value
is visit
, Emacs adds a missing newline just after it visits the
file. If the value is visit-save
, Emacs adds a missing newline
both on visiting and on saving. For any other non-nil
value,
save-buffer
asks the user whether to add a newline each time
the case arises.
If the value of the variable is nil
, then save-buffer
doesn’t add newlines at all. nil
is the default value, but a few
major modes set it to t
in particular buffers.
See also the function set-visited-file-name
(see Buffer File Name).
To copy the contents of a file into a buffer, use the function
insert-file-contents
. (Don’t use the command
insert-file
in a Lisp program, as that sets the mark.)
This function inserts the contents of file filename into the current buffer after point. It returns a list of the absolute file name and the length of the data inserted. An error is signaled if filename is not the name of a file that can be read.
This function checks the file contents against the defined file
formats, and converts the file contents if appropriate and also calls
the functions in the list after-insert-file-functions
.
See File Format Conversion. Normally, one of the functions in the
after-insert-file-functions
list determines the coding system
(see Coding Systems) used for decoding the file’s contents,
including end-of-line conversion. However, if the file contains null
bytes, it is by default visited without any code conversions.
See inhibit-null-byte-detection.
If visit is non-nil
, this function additionally marks the
buffer as unmodified and sets up various fields in the buffer so that it
is visiting the file filename: these include the buffer’s visited
file name and its last save file modtime. This feature is used by
find-file-noselect
and you probably should not use it yourself.
If beg and end are non-nil
, they should be numbers
that are byte offsets specifying the portion of the file to insert.
In this case, visit must be nil
. For example,
(insert-file-contents filename nil 0 500)
inserts the characters coded by the first 500 bytes of a file.
If beg or end happens to be in the middle of a character’s
multibyte sequence, Emacs’s character code conversion will insert one
or more eight-bit characters (a.k.a. “raw bytes”)
(see Character Sets) into the buffer. If you want to read part of
a file this way, we recommend to bind coding-system-for-read
to
a suitable value around the call to this function (see Specifying a Coding System for One Operation), and to write Lisp code which will check for raw
bytes at the boundaries, read the entire sequence of these bytes, and
convert them back to valid characters.
If the argument replace is non-nil
, it means to replace the
contents of the buffer (actually, just the accessible portion) with the
contents of the file. This is better than simply deleting the buffer
contents and inserting the whole file, because (1) it preserves some
marker positions and (2) it puts less data in the undo list.
It is possible to read a special file (such as a FIFO or an I/O
device) with insert-file-contents
, as long as replace,
and visit and beg are nil
. However, you should
normally use an end argument for these files to avoid inserting
(potentially) unlimited data into the buffer (for instance, when
inserting data from /dev/urandom).
This function works like insert-file-contents
except that each
byte in the file is handled separately, being converted into an
eight-bit character if needed. It does not run
after-insert-file-functions
, and does not do format decoding,
character code conversion, automatic uncompression, and so on.
If you want to pass a file name to another process so that another
program can read the file, use the function file-local-copy
; see
Making Certain File Names “Magic”.
You can write the contents of a buffer, or part of a buffer, directly
to a file on disk using the append-to-file
and
write-region
functions. Don’t use these functions to write to
files that are being visited; that could cause confusion in the
mechanisms for visiting.
This function appends the contents of the region delimited by
start and end in the current buffer to the end of file
filename. If that file does not exist, it is created. This
function returns nil
.
An error is signaled if you cannot write or create filename.
When called from Lisp, this function is completely equivalent to:
(write-region start end filename t)
This function writes the region delimited by start and end in the current buffer into the file specified by filename.
If start is nil
, then the command writes the entire buffer
contents (not just the accessible portion) to the file and
ignores end.
If start is a string, then write-region
writes or appends
that string, rather than text from the buffer. end is ignored in
this case.
If append is non-nil
, then the specified text is appended
to the existing file contents (if any). If append is a
number, write-region
seeks to that byte offset from the start
of the file and writes the data from there.
If mustbenew is non-nil
, then write-region
asks
for confirmation if filename names an existing file. If
mustbenew is the symbol excl
, then write-region
does not ask for confirmation, but instead it signals an error
file-already-exists
if the file already exists. Although
write-region
normally follows a symbolic link and creates the
pointed-to file if the symbolic link is dangling, it does not follow
symbolic links if mustbenew is excl
.
The test for an existing file, when mustbenew is excl
, uses
a special system feature. At least for files on a local disk, there is
no chance that some other program could create a file of the same name
before Emacs does, without Emacs’s noticing.
If visit is t
, then Emacs establishes an association
between the buffer and the file: the buffer is then visiting that file.
It also sets the last file modification time for the current buffer to
filename’s modtime, and marks the buffer as not modified. This
feature is used by save-buffer
, but you probably should not use
it yourself.
If visit is a string, it specifies the file name to visit. This
way, you can write the data to one file (filename) while recording
the buffer as visiting another file (visit). The argument
visit is used in the echo area message and also for file locking;
visit is stored in buffer-file-name
. This feature is used
to implement file-precious-flag
; don’t use it yourself unless you
really know what you’re doing.
The optional argument lockname, if non-nil
, specifies the
file name to use for purposes of locking and unlocking, overriding
filename and visit for that purpose.
The function write-region
converts the data which it writes to
the appropriate file formats specified by buffer-file-format
and also calls the functions in the list
write-region-annotate-functions
.
See File Format Conversion.
Normally, write-region
displays the message ‘Wrote
filename’ in the echo area. This message is inhibited if
visit is neither t
nor nil
nor a string, or if
Emacs is operating in batch mode (see Batch Mode). This
feature is useful for programs that use files for internal purposes,
files that the user does not need to know about.
If this variable’s value is nil
, write-region
uses the
fsync
system call after writing a file. Although this slows
Emacs down, it lessens the risk of data loss after power failure. If
the value is t
, Emacs does not use fsync
. The default
value is nil
when Emacs is interactive, and t
when Emacs
runs in batch mode. See Files and Secondary Storage.
The with-temp-file
macro evaluates the body forms with a
temporary buffer as the current buffer; then, at the end, it writes the
buffer contents into file file. It kills the temporary buffer
when finished, restoring the buffer that was current before the
with-temp-file
form. Then it returns the value of the last form
in body.
The current buffer is restored even in case of an abnormal exit via
throw
or error (see Nonlocal Exits).
Like with-temp-buffer
(see Current Buffer), the temporary buffer used by this macro does not run
the hooks kill-buffer-hook
, kill-buffer-query-functions
(see Killing Buffers), and buffer-list-update-hook
(see The Buffer List).
When two users edit the same file at the same time, they are likely
to interfere with each other. Emacs tries to prevent this situation
from arising by recording a file lock when a file is being
modified.
Emacs can then detect the first attempt to modify a buffer visiting a
file that is locked by another Emacs job, and ask the user what to do.
The file lock is really a file, a symbolic link with a special name,
stored in the same directory as the file you are editing. The name is
constructed by prepending .# to the file name of the buffer.
The target of the symbolic link will be of the form
user@host.pid:boot
, where user
is replaced with the current username (from user-login-name
),
host with the name of the host where Emacs is running (from
system-name
), pid with Emacs’s process id, and boot
with the time since the last reboot. :boot
is omitted if
the boot time is unavailable. (On file systems that do not support
symbolic links, a regular file is used instead, with contents of the
form user@host.pid:boot
.)
When you access files using NFS, there may be a small probability that you and another user will both lock the same file simultaneously. If this happens, it is possible for the two users to make changes simultaneously, but Emacs will still warn the user who saves second. Also, the detection of modification of a buffer visiting a file changed on disk catches some cases of simultaneous editing; see Buffer Modification Time.
This function returns nil
if the file filename is not
locked. It returns t
if it is locked by this Emacs process, and
it returns the name of the user who has locked it if it is locked by
some other job.
(file-locked-p "foo") ⇒ nil
This function locks the file filename, if the current buffer is
modified. The argument filename defaults to the current buffer’s
visited file. Nothing is done if the current buffer is not visiting a
file, or is not modified, or if the option create-lockfiles
is
nil
.
This function unlocks the file being visited in the current buffer,
if the buffer is modified. If the buffer is not modified, then
the file should not be locked, so this function does nothing. It also
does nothing if the current buffer is not visiting a file, or is not locked.
This function handles file system errors by calling display-warning
and otherwise ignores the error.
If this variable is nil
, Emacs does not lock files.
By default, Emacs creates the lock files in the same directory as the
files that are being locked. This can be changed by customizing this
variable. Is has the same syntax as
auto-save-file-name-transforms
(see Auto-Saving). For
instance, to make Emacs write all the lock files to /var/tmp/,
you could say something like:
(setq lock-file-name-transforms '(("\\`/.*/\\([^/]+\\)\\'" "/var/tmp/\\1" t)))
This function is called when the user tries to modify file, but it is locked by another user named other-user. The default definition of this function asks the user to say what to do. The value this function returns determines what Emacs does next:
t
says to grab the lock on the file. Then
this user may edit the file and other-user loses the lock.
nil
says to ignore the lock and let this
user edit the file anyway.
file-locked
error, in which
case the change that the user was about to make does not take place.
The error message for this error looks like this:
error→ File is locked: file other-user
where file
is the name of the file and other-user is the
name of the user who has locked the file.
If you wish, you can replace the ask-user-about-lock
function
with your own version that makes the decision in another way.
You can prevent the creation of remote lock files by setting the
variable remote-file-name-inhibit-locks
to t
.
This command, called interactively, toggles the local value of
create-lockfiles
in the current buffer.
This section describes the functions for retrieving various types of information about files (or directories or symbolic links), such as whether a file is readable or writable, and its size. These functions all take arguments which are file names. Except where noted, these arguments need to specify existing files, or an error is signaled.
Be careful with file names that end in spaces. On some filesystems (notably, MS-Windows), trailing whitespace characters in file names are silently and automatically ignored.
These functions test for permission to access a file for reading, writing, or execution. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, they follow symbolic links. See Distinguishing Kinds of Files.
On some operating systems, more complex sets of access permissions can be specified, via mechanisms such as Access Control Lists (ACLs). See Extended File Attributes, for how to query and set those permissions.
This function returns t
if a file named filename appears
to exist. This does not mean you can necessarily read the file, only
that you can probably find out its attributes. (On GNU and other POSIX-like
systems, this is true if the file exists and you have execute
permission on the containing directories, regardless of the
permissions of the file itself.)
If the file does not exist, or if there was trouble determining
whether the file exists, this function returns nil
.
Since a file name that is an empty string is interpreted relative to
the current buffer’s default directory (see Absolute and Relative File Names),
calling file-exists-p
with an argument that is an empty string
will report about the buffer’s default directory.
Directories are files, so file-exists-p
can return t
when given a directory. However, because file-exists-p
follows
symbolic links, it returns t
for a symbolic link name only if
the target of the link exists; if your Lisp program needs to consider
dangling symlinks whose target doesn’t exist as existing files,
use file-attributes
(see File Attributes) instead of
file-exists-p
.
This function returns t
if a file named filename exists
and you can read it. It returns nil
otherwise.
This function returns t
if a file named filename exists
and you can execute it. It returns nil
otherwise. On GNU and
other POSIX-like systems, if the file is a directory, execute
permission means you can check the existence and attributes of files
inside the directory, and open those files if their modes permit.
This function returns t
if the file filename can be written
or created by you, and nil
otherwise. A file is writable if the
file exists and you can write it. It is creatable if it does not exist,
but its parent directory does exist and you can write in that
directory.
In the example below, foo is not writable because the parent directory does not exist, even though the user could create such a directory.
(file-writable-p "~/no-such-dir/foo") ⇒ nil
This function returns t
if you have permission to open existing
files in the directory whose name as a file is dirname;
otherwise (e.g., if there is no such directory), it returns nil
.
The value of dirname may be either a directory name (such as
/foo/) or the file name of a file which is a directory
(such as /foo, without the final slash).
For example, from the following we deduce that any attempt to read a file in /foo/ will give an error:
(file-accessible-directory-p "/foo") ⇒ nil
This macro ensures that default-directory
is bound to an
existing directory before executing body. If
default-directory
already exists, that’s preferred, and
otherwise some other directory is used. This macro can be useful, for
instance, when calling an external command that requires that it’s
running in a directory that exists. The chosen directory is not
guaranteed to be writable.
If you can read filename this function returns nil
;
otherwise it signals an error
using string as the error message text.
This function returns t
if deleting the file filename and
then creating it anew would keep the file’s owner unchanged. It also
returns t
for nonexistent files.
If the optional argument group is non-nil
, this function
also checks that the file’s group would be unchanged.
This function does not follow symbolic links.
This function returns the mode bits of filename—an
integer summarizing its read, write, and execution permissions.
This function follows symbolic links. If the file does not exist, the
return value is nil
.
See File permissions in The GNU Coreutils
Manual, for a description of mode bits. For example, if the
low-order bit is 1, the file is executable by all users; if the
second-lowest-order bit is 1, the file is writable by all users; etc.
The highest possible value is 4095 (7777 octal), meaning that everyone
has read, write, and execute permission, the SUID bit is set
for both others and group, and the sticky bit is set.
By default this function follows symbolic links. However, if the
optional argument flag is the symbol nofollow
, this
function does not follow filename if it is a symbolic link;
this can help prevent inadvertently obtaining the mode bits of a file
somewhere else, and is more consistent with file-attributes
(see File Attributes).
See Changing File Names and Attributes, for the set-file-modes
function, which
can be used to set these permissions.
(file-modes "~/junk/diffs" 'nofollow)
⇒ 492 ; Decimal integer.
(format "%o" 492)
⇒ "754" ; Convert to octal.
(set-file-modes "~/junk/diffs" #o666 'nofollow) ⇒ nil
$ ls -l diffs -rw-rw-rw- 1 lewis lewis 3063 Oct 30 16:00 diffs
MS-DOS note: On MS-DOS, there is no such thing as an
executable file mode bit. So file-modes
considers a file
executable if its name ends in one of the standard executable
extensions, such as .com, .bat, .exe, and some
others. Files that begin with the POSIX-standard ‘#!’ signature,
such as shell and Perl scripts, are also considered executable.
Directories are also reported as executable, for compatibility with
POSIX. These conventions are also followed by file-attributes
(see File Attributes).
This section describes how to distinguish various kinds of files, such as directories, symbolic links, and ordinary files.
Symbolic links are ordinarily followed wherever they appear. For example, to interpret the file name a/b/c, any of a, a/b, and a/b/c can be symbolic links that are followed, possibly recursively if the link targets are themselves symbolic links. However, a few functions do not follow symbolic links at the end of a file name (a/b/c in this example). Such a function is said to not follow symbolic links.
If the file filename is a symbolic link, this function does not follow it and instead returns its link target as a string. (The link target string is not necessarily the full absolute file name of the target; determining the full file name that the link points to is nontrivial, see below.)
If the file filename is not a symbolic link, or does not exist,
or if there is trouble determining whether it is a symbolic link,
file-symlink-p
returns nil
.
Here are a few examples of using this function:
(file-symlink-p "not-a-symlink") ⇒ nil
(file-symlink-p "sym-link") ⇒ "not-a-symlink"
(file-symlink-p "sym-link2") ⇒ "sym-link"
(file-symlink-p "/bin") ⇒ "/pub/bin"
Note that in the third example, the function returned sym-link, but did not proceed to resolve it, although that file is itself a symbolic link. That is because this function does not follow symbolic links—the process of following the symbolic links does not apply to the last component of the file name.
The string that this function returns is what is recorded in the symbolic link; it may or may not include any leading directories. This function does not expand the link target to produce a fully-qualified file name, and in particular does not use the leading directories, if any, of the filename argument if the link target is not an absolute file name. Here’s an example:
(file-symlink-p "/foo/bar/baz") ⇒ "some-file"
Here, although /foo/bar/baz was given as a fully-qualified file
name, the result is not, and in fact does not have any leading
directories at all. And since some-file might itself be a
symbolic link, you cannot simply prepend leading directories to it,
nor even naively use expand-file-name
(see Functions that Expand Filenames) to produce its absolute file name.
For this reason, this function is seldom useful if you need to
determine more than just the fact that a file is or isn’t a symbolic
link. If you actually need the file name of the link target, use
file-chase-links
or file-truename
, described in
Truenames.
This function returns t
if filename is the name of an
existing directory. It returns nil
if filename does
not name a directory, or if there is trouble determining whether
it is a directory.
This function follows symbolic links.
(file-directory-p "~rms") ⇒ t
(file-directory-p "~rms/lewis/files.texi") ⇒ nil
(file-directory-p "~rms/lewis/no-such-file") ⇒ nil
(file-directory-p "$HOME") ⇒ nil
(file-directory-p (substitute-in-file-name "$HOME")) ⇒ t
This function returns t
if the file filename exists and is
a regular file (not a directory, named pipe, terminal, or
other I/O device).
It returns nil
if filename does not exist or is not a regular
file, or if there is trouble determining whether it is a regular file.
This function follows symbolic links.
The truename of a file is the name that you get by following symbolic links at all levels until none remain, then simplifying away ‘.’ and ‘..’ appearing as name components. This results in a sort of canonical name for the file. A file does not always have a unique truename; the number of distinct truenames a file has is equal to the number of hard links to the file. However, truenames are useful because they eliminate symbolic links as a cause of name variation.
This function returns the truename of the file filename. If the
argument is not an absolute file name, this function first expands it
against default-directory
.
This function does not expand environment variables. Only
substitute-in-file-name
does that. See Definition of substitute-in-file-name.
If you may need to follow symbolic links preceding ‘..’
appearing as a name component, call file-truename
without prior
direct or indirect calls to expand-file-name
. Otherwise, the
file name component immediately preceding ‘..’ will be
simplified away before file-truename
is called. To
eliminate the need for a call to expand-file-name
,
file-truename
handles ‘~’ in the same way that
expand-file-name
does.
If the target of a symbolic links has remote file name syntax,
file-truename
returns it quoted. See Functions that Expand Filenames.
This function follows symbolic links, starting with filename, until it finds a file name which is not the name of a symbolic link. Then it returns that file name. This function does not follow symbolic links at the level of parent directories.
If you specify a number for limit, then after chasing through that many links, the function just returns what it has even if that is still a symbolic link.
To illustrate the difference between file-chase-links
and
file-truename
, suppose that /usr/foo is a symbolic link to
the directory /home/foo, and /home/foo/hello is an
ordinary file (or at least, not a symbolic link) or nonexistent. Then
we would have:
(file-chase-links "/usr/foo/hello") ;; This does not follow the links in the parent directories. ⇒ "/usr/foo/hello" (file-truename "/usr/foo/hello") ;; Assuming that /home is not a symbolic link. ⇒ "/home/foo/hello"
This function returns t
if the files file1 and
file2 name the same file. This is similar to comparing their
truenames, except that remote file names are also handled in an
appropriate manner. If file1 or file2 does not exist, the
return value is unspecified.
Sometimes file names or their parts need to be compared as strings, in
which case it’s important to know whether the underlying filesystem is
case-insensitive. This function returns t
if file
filename is on a case-insensitive filesystem. It always returns
t
on MS-DOS and MS-Windows. On Cygwin and macOS,
filesystems may or may not be case-insensitive, and the function tries
to determine case-sensitivity by a runtime test. If the test is
inconclusive, the function returns t
on Cygwin and nil
on macOS.
Currently this function always returns nil
on platforms other
than MS-DOS, MS-Windows, Cygwin, and macOS. It does not detect
case-insensitivity of mounted filesystems, such as Samba shares or
NFS-mounted Windows volumes. On remote hosts, it assumes t
for
the ‘smb’ method. For all other connection methods, runtime
tests are performed.
This function determines the responsible VC backend of the given
file. For example, if emacs.c is a file tracked by Git,
(vc-responsible-backend "emacs.c")
returns ‘Git’.
Note that if file is a symbolic link,
vc-responsible-backend
will not resolve it—the backend of the
symbolic link file itself is reported. To get the backend VC of the
file to which file refers, wrap file with a symbolic link
resolving function such as file-chase-links
:
(vc-responsible-backend (file-chase-links "emacs.c"))
This section describes the functions for getting detailed information about a file, including the owner and group numbers, the number of names, the inode number, the size, and the times of access and modification.
This function returns t
if the file filename1 is
newer than file filename2. If filename1 does not
exist, it returns nil
. If filename1 does exist, but
filename2 does not, it returns t
.
In the following example, assume that the file aug-19 was written on the 19th, aug-20 was written on the 20th, and the file no-file doesn’t exist at all.
(file-newer-than-file-p "aug-19" "aug-20") ⇒ nil
(file-newer-than-file-p "aug-20" "aug-19") ⇒ t
(file-newer-than-file-p "aug-19" "no-file") ⇒ t
(file-newer-than-file-p "no-file" "aug-19") ⇒ nil
This function returns non-nil
if the time stamp of
filename has changed since the last call. When called for the
first time for some filename, it records the last modification
time and size of the file, and returns non-nil
when
filename exists. Thereafter, when called for the same
filename, it compares the current time stamp and size with the
recorded ones, and returns non-nil
only if either the time
stamp or the size (or both) are different. This is useful when a Lisp
program wants to re-read a file whenever it changes. With an optional
argument tag, which must be a symbol, the size and modification
time comparisons are limited to calls with the same tag.
This function returns a list of attributes of file filename. If
the specified file does not exist, it returns nil
.
This function does not follow symbolic links.
The optional parameter id-format specifies the preferred format
of attributes UID and GID (see below)—the
valid values are 'string
and 'integer
. The latter is
the default, but we plan to change that, so you should specify a
non-nil
value for id-format if you use the returned
UID or GID.
On GNU platforms when operating on a local file, this function is
atomic: if the filesystem is simultaneously being changed by some
other process, this function returns the file’s attributes either
before or after the change. Otherwise this function is not atomic,
and might return nil
if it detects the race condition, or might
return a hodgepodge of the previous and current file attributes.
Accessor functions are provided to access the elements in this list. The accessors are mentioned along with the descriptions of the elements below.
The elements of the list, in order, are:
t
for a directory, a string for a symbolic link (the name
linked to), or nil
for a text file
(file-attribute-type
).
file-attribute-link-number
).
Alternate names, also known as hard links, can be created by using the
add-name-to-file
function (see Changing File Names and Attributes).
file-attribute-user-id
). However, if it does not correspond
to a named user, the value is an integer.
file-attribute-group-id
).
file-attribute-access-time
). The timestamp is in the
style of current-time
(see Time of Day) and is truncated
to that of the filesystem’s timestamp resolution; for example, on some
FAT-based filesystems, only the date of last access is recorded, so
this time will always hold the midnight of the day of the last access.
file-attribute-modification-time
). This is the last time when
the file’s contents were modified.
file-attribute-status-change-time
). This is the time of the
last change to the file’s access mode bits, its owner and group, and
other information recorded in the filesystem for the file, beyond the
file’s contents.
file-attribute-size
).
file-attribute-modes
).
file-attribute-inode-number
),
a nonnegative integer.
file-attribute-device-number
), an integer or a cons cell of
two integers. The latter is sometimes used by remote files, in order
to distinguish remote filesystems from local ones.
The file’s inode and device together give enough information
to distinguish any two files on the system—no two files can have the
same values for both of these attributes. This tuple that uniquely
identifies the file is returned by file-attribute-file-identifier
.
For example, here are the file attributes for files.texi:
(file-attributes "files.texi" 'string) ⇒ (nil 1 "lh" "users" (20614 64019 50040 152000) (20000 23 0 0) (20614 64555 902289 872000) 122295 "-rw-rw-rw-" t 6473924464520138 1014478468)
and here is how the result is interpreted:
nil
is neither a directory nor a symbolic link.
1
has only one name (the name files.texi in the current default directory).
"lh"
is owned by the user with name ‘lh’.
"users"
is in the group with name ‘users’.
(20614 64019 50040 152000)
was last accessed on October 23, 2012, at 20:12:03.050040152 UTC.
(This timestamp is (1351023123050040152 . 1000000000)
if current-time-list
is nil
.)
(20000 23 0 0)
was last modified on July 15, 2001, at 08:53:43.000000000 UTC.
(This timestamp is (1310720023000000000 . 1000000000)
if current-time-list
is nil
.)
(20614 64555 902289 872000)
last had its status changed on October 23, 2012, at 20:20:59.902289872 UTC.
(This timestamp is (1351023659902289872 . 1000000000)
if current-time-list
is nil
.)
122295
is 122295 bytes long. (It may not contain 122295 characters, though, if some of the bytes belong to multibyte sequences, and also if the end-of-line format is CR-LF.)
"-rw-rw-rw-"
has a mode of read and write access for the owner, group, and world.
t
is merely a placeholder; it carries no information.
6473924464520138
has an inode number of 6473924464520138.
1014478468
is on the file-system device whose number is 1014478468.
This function returns the number of names (i.e., hard links) that
file filename has. If the file does not exist, this function
returns nil
. Note that symbolic links have no effect on this
function, because they are not considered to be names of the files
they link to. This function does not follow symbolic links.
$ ls -l foo* -rw-rw-rw- 2 rms rms 4 Aug 19 01:27 foo -rw-rw-rw- 2 rms rms 4 Aug 19 01:27 foo1
(file-nlinks "foo") ⇒ 2
(file-nlinks "doesnt-exist") ⇒ nil
On some operating systems, each file can be associated with arbitrary extended file attributes. At present, Emacs supports querying and setting two specific sets of extended file attributes: Access Control Lists (ACLs) and SELinux contexts. These extended file attributes are used, on some systems, to impose more sophisticated file access controls than the basic Unix-style permissions discussed in the previous sections.
A detailed explanation of ACLs and SELinux is beyond the scope of this manual. For our purposes, each file can be associated with an ACL, which specifies its properties under an ACL-based file control system, and/or an SELinux context, which specifies its properties under the SELinux system.
This function returns the ACL for the file filename. The exact
Lisp representation of the ACL is unspecified (and may change in
future Emacs versions), but it is the same as what set-file-acl
takes for its acl argument (see Changing File Names and Attributes).
The underlying ACL implementation is platform-specific; on GNU/Linux and BSD, Emacs uses the POSIX ACL interface, while on MS-Windows Emacs emulates the POSIX ACL interface with native file security APIs.
If ACLs are not supported or the file does not exist,
then the return value is nil
.
This function returns the SELinux context of the file filename,
as a list of the form (user role type
range)
. The list elements are the context’s user, role, type,
and range respectively, as Lisp strings; see the SELinux documentation
for details about what these actually mean. The return value has the
same form as what set-file-selinux-context
takes for its
context argument (see Changing File Names and Attributes).
If SELinux is not supported or the file does not exist,
then the return value is (nil nil nil nil)
.
This function returns an alist of the Emacs-recognized extended
attributes of file filename. Currently, it serves as a
convenient way to retrieve both the ACL and SELinux context; you can
then call the function set-file-extended-attributes
, with the
returned alist as its second argument, to apply the same file access
attributes to another file (see Changing File Names and Attributes).
One of the elements is (acl . acl)
, where acl has
the same form returned by file-acl
.
Another element is (selinux-context . context)
, where
context is the SELinux context, in the same form returned by
file-selinux-context
.
This section explains how to search for a file in a list of directories (a path), or for an executable file in the standard list of executable file directories.
To search for a user-specific configuration file, See Standard File Names, for the locate-user-emacs-file
function.
This function searches for a file whose name is filename in a
list of directories given by path, trying the suffixes in
suffixes. If it finds such a file, it returns the file’s
absolute file name (see Absolute and Relative File Names); otherwise it returns
nil
.
The optional argument suffixes gives the list of file-name
suffixes to append to filename when searching.
locate-file
tries each possible directory with each of these
suffixes. If suffixes is nil
, or ("")
, then there
are no suffixes, and filename is used only as-is. Typical
values of suffixes are exec-suffixes
(see Functions that Create Subprocesses), load-suffixes
, load-file-rep-suffixes
and
the return value of the function get-load-suffixes
(see Load Suffixes).
Typical values for path are exec-path
(see Functions that Create Subprocesses) when looking for executable programs, or load-path
(see Library Search) when looking for Lisp files. If
filename is absolute, path has no effect, but the suffixes
in suffixes are still tried.
The optional argument predicate, if non-nil
, specifies a
predicate function for testing whether a candidate file is suitable.
The predicate is passed the candidate file name as its single
argument. If predicate is nil
or omitted,
locate-file
uses file-readable-p
as the predicate.
See Distinguishing Kinds of Files, for other useful predicates, e.g.,
file-executable-p
and file-directory-p
.
This function will normally skip directories, so if you want it to
find directories, make sure the predicate function returns
dir-ok
for them. For example:
(locate-file "html" '("/var/www" "/srv") nil (lambda (f) (if (file-directory-p f) 'dir-ok)))
For compatibility, predicate can also be one of the symbols
executable
, readable
, writable
, exists
, or
a list of one or more of these symbols.
This function searches for the executable file of the named
program and returns the absolute file name of the executable,
including its file-name extensions, if any. It returns nil
if
the file is not found. The function searches in all the directories
in exec-path
, and tries all the file-name extensions in
exec-suffixes
(see Functions that Create Subprocesses).
If remote is non-nil
, and default-directory
is a
remote directory, program is searched on the respective remote host.
The functions in this section rename, copy, delete, link, and set
the modes (permissions) of files. Typically, they signal a
file-error
error if they fail to perform their function,
reporting the system-dependent error message that describes the reason
for the failure. If they fail because a file is missing, they signal
a file-missing
error instead.
For performance, the operating system may cache or alias changes made by these functions instead of writing them immediately to secondary storage. See Files and Secondary Storage.
In the functions that have an argument newname, if this argument is a directory name it is treated as if the nondirectory part of the source name were appended. Typically, a directory name is one that ends in ‘/’ (see Directory Names). For example, if the old name is a/b/c, the newname d/e/f/ is treated as if it were d/e/f/c. This special treatment does not apply if newname is not a directory name but names a file that is a directory; for example, the newname d/e/f is left as-is even if d/e/f happens to be a directory.
In the functions that have an argument newname, if a file by the name of newname already exists, the actions taken depend on the value of the argument ok-if-already-exists:
file-already-exists
error if
ok-if-already-exists is nil
.
This function gives the file named oldname the additional name newname. This means that newname becomes a new hard link to oldname.
If newname is a symbolic link, its directory entry is replaced, not the directory entry it points to. If oldname is a symbolic link, this function might or might not follow the link; it does not follow the link on GNU platforms. If oldname is a directory, this function typically fails, although for the superuser on a few old-fashioned non-GNU platforms it can succeed and create a filesystem that is not tree-structured.
In the first part of the following example, we list two files, foo and foo3.
$ ls -li fo* 81908 -rw-rw-rw- 1 rms rms 29 Aug 18 20:32 foo 84302 -rw-rw-rw- 1 rms rms 24 Aug 18 20:31 foo3
Now we create a hard link, by calling add-name-to-file
, then list
the files again. This shows two names for one file, foo and
foo2.
(add-name-to-file "foo" "foo2") ⇒ nil
$ ls -li fo* 81908 -rw-rw-rw- 2 rms rms 29 Aug 18 20:32 foo 81908 -rw-rw-rw- 2 rms rms 29 Aug 18 20:32 foo2 84302 -rw-rw-rw- 1 rms rms 24 Aug 18 20:31 foo3
Finally, we evaluate the following:
(add-name-to-file "foo" "foo3" t)
and list the files again. Now there are three names for one file: foo, foo2, and foo3. The old contents of foo3 are lost.
(add-name-to-file "foo1" "foo3") ⇒ nil
$ ls -li fo* 81908 -rw-rw-rw- 3 rms rms 29 Aug 18 20:32 foo 81908 -rw-rw-rw- 3 rms rms 29 Aug 18 20:32 foo2 81908 -rw-rw-rw- 3 rms rms 29 Aug 18 20:32 foo3
This function is meaningless on operating systems where multiple names for one file are not allowed. Some systems implement multiple names by copying the file instead.
See also file-nlinks
in File Attributes.
This command renames the file filename as newname.
If filename has additional names aside from filename, it
continues to have those names. In fact, adding the name newname
with add-name-to-file
and then deleting filename has the
same effect as renaming, aside from momentary intermediate states and
treatment of errors, directories and symbolic links.
This command does not follow symbolic links. If filename is a symbolic link, this command renames the symbolic link, not the file it points to. If newname is a symbolic link, its directory entry is replaced, not the directory entry it points to.
This command does nothing if filename and newname are the same directory entry, i.e., if they refer to the same parent directory and give the same name within that directory. Otherwise, if filename and newname name the same file, this command does nothing on POSIX-conforming systems, and removes filename on some non-POSIX systems.
If newname exists, then it must be an empty directory if oldname is a directory and a non-directory otherwise.
This command copies the file oldname to newname. An error is signaled if oldname is not a regular file. If newname names a directory, it copies oldname into that directory, preserving its final name component.
This function follows symbolic links, except that it does not follow a dangling symbolic link to create newname.
If time is non-nil
, then this function gives the new file
the same last-modified time that the old one has. (This works on only
some operating systems.) If setting the time gets an error,
copy-file
signals a file-date-error
error. In an
interactive call, a prefix argument specifies a non-nil
value
for time.
If argument preserve-uid-gid is nil
, we let the operating
system decide the user and group ownership of the new file (this is
usually set to the user running Emacs). If preserve-uid-gid is
non-nil
, we attempt to copy the user and group ownership of the
file. This works only on some operating systems, and only if you have
the correct permissions to do so.
If the optional argument preserve-permissions is non-nil
,
this function copies the file modes (or “permissions”) of
oldname to newname, as well as the Access Control List and
SELinux context (if any). See Information about Files.
Otherwise, the file modes of newname are left unchanged if it is
an existing file, and set to those of oldname, masked by the
default file permissions (see set-default-file-modes
below), if
newname is to be newly created. The Access Control List or
SELinux context are not copied over in either case.
This command makes a symbolic link to target, named linkname. This is like the shell command ‘ln -s target linkname’. The target argument is treated only as a string; it need not name an existing file. If ok-if-already-exists is an integer, indicating interactive use, then leading ‘~’ is expanded and leading ‘/:’ is stripped in the target string.
If target is a relative file name, the resulting symbolic link is interpreted relative to the directory containing the symbolic link. See Absolute and Relative File Names.
If both target and linkname have remote file name syntax, and if both remote identifications are equal, the symbolic link points to the local file name part of target.
This function is not available on systems that don’t support symbolic links.
This command deletes the file filename. If the file has
multiple names, it continues to exist under the other names. If
filename is a symbolic link, delete-file
deletes only the
symbolic link and not its target.
The command signals a suitable kind of file-error
error if
filename cannot be deleted. (On GNU and other POSIX-like
systems, a file can be deleted if its directory is writable.) If the
file does not exist, this command will not signal any error.
If the optional argument trash is non-nil
and the
variable delete-by-moving-to-trash
is non-nil
, this
command moves the file into the system Trash instead of deleting it.
See Miscellaneous File Operations in The GNU
Emacs Manual. When called interactively, trash is t
if
no prefix argument is given, and nil
otherwise.
See also delete-directory
in Creating, Copying and Deleting Directories.
This function sets the file mode (or permissions) of filename to mode.
By default this function follows symbolic links. However, if the
optional argument flag is the symbol nofollow
, this
function does not follow filename if it is a symbolic link;
this can help prevent inadvertently changing the mode bits of a file
somewhere else. On platforms that do not support changing mode bits
on a symbolic link, this function signals an error when filename
is a symbolic link and flag is nofollow
.
If called non-interactively, mode must be an integer. Only the lowest 12 bits of the integer are used; on most systems, only the lowest 9 bits are meaningful. You can use the Lisp construct for octal numbers to enter mode. For example,
(set-file-modes "myfile" #o644 'nofollow)
specifies that the file should be readable and writable for its owner,
readable for group members, and readable for all other users.
See File permissions in The GNU Coreutils
Manual, for a description of mode bit specifications.
Interactively, mode is read from the minibuffer using
read-file-modes
(see below), which lets the user type in either
an integer or a string representing the permissions symbolically.
See Testing Accessibility, for the function file-modes
, which
returns the permissions of a file.
This function sets the default permissions for new files created by
Emacs and its subprocesses. Every file created with Emacs initially
has these permissions, or a subset of them (write-region
will
not grant execute permissions even if the default file permissions
allow execution). On GNU and other POSIX-like systems, the default
permissions are given by the bitwise complement of the ‘umask’
value, i.e. each bit that is set in the argument mode will be
reset in the default permissions with which Emacs creates
files.
The argument mode should be an integer which specifies the
permissions, similar to set-file-modes
above. Only the lowest
9 bits are meaningful.
The default file permissions have no effect when you save a modified version of an existing file; saving a file preserves its existing permissions.
This macro evaluates the body forms with the default
permissions for new files temporarily set to modes (whose value
is as for set-file-modes
above). When finished, it restores
the original default file permissions, and returns the value of the
last form in body.
This is useful for creating private files, for example.
This function returns the default file permissions, as an integer.
This function reads a set of file mode bits from the minibuffer. The first optional argument prompt specifies a non-default prompt. Second second optional argument base-file is the name of a file on whose permissions to base the mode bits that this function returns, if what the user types specifies mode bits relative to permissions of an existing file.
If user input represents an octal number, this function returns that
number. If it is a complete symbolic specification of mode bits, as
in "u=rwx"
, the function converts it to the equivalent numeric
value using file-modes-symbolic-to-number
and returns the
result. If the specification is relative, as in "o+g"
, then
the permissions on which the specification is based are taken from the
mode bits of base-file. If base-file is omitted or
nil
, the function uses 0
as the base mode bits. The
complete and relative specifications can be combined, as in
"u+r,g+rx,o+r,g-w"
. See File permissions in The
GNU Coreutils
Manual, for a description of file mode
specifications.
This function converts a symbolic file mode specification in
modes into the equivalent integer. If the symbolic
specification is based on an existing file, that file’s mode bits are
taken from the optional argument base-modes; if that argument is
omitted or nil
, it defaults to 0, i.e., no access rights at
all.
This function converts a numeric file mode specification in
modes into the equivalent string form. The string which this
function returns is in the same format produced by the shell command
ls -l and by file-attributes
, not the symbolic
form accepted by file-modes-symbolic-to-number
and the
chmod
shell command.
This function sets the access and modification times of filename
to time. The return value is t
if the times are successfully
set, otherwise it is nil
. time defaults to the current
time and must be a time value (see Time of Day).
By default this function follows symbolic links. However, if the
optional argument flag is the symbol nofollow
, this
function does not follow filename if it is a symbolic link;
this can help prevent inadvertently changing the times of a file
somewhere else. On platforms that do not support changing times
on a symbolic link, this function signals an error when filename
is a symbolic link and flag is nofollow
.
This function sets the Emacs-recognized extended file attributes for
filename. The second argument attribute-alist should be
an alist of the same form returned by file-extended-attributes
.
The return value is t
if the attributes are successfully set,
otherwise it is nil
.
See Extended File Attributes.
This function sets the SELinux security context for filename to
context. The context argument should be a list
(user role type range)
, where each
element is a string. See Extended File Attributes.
The function returns t
if it succeeds in setting the SELinux
context of filename. It returns nil
if the context was
not set (e.g., if SELinux is disabled, or if Emacs was compiled
without SELinux support).
This function sets the Access Control List for filename to
acl. The acl argument should have the same form returned
by the function file-acl
. See Extended File Attributes.
The function returns t
if it successfully sets the ACL of
filename, nil
otherwise.
After Emacs changes a file, there are two reasons the changes might not survive later failures of power or media, both having to do with efficiency. First, the operating system might alias written data with data already stored elsewhere on secondary storage until one file or the other is later modified; this will lose both files if the only copy on secondary storage is lost due to media failure. Second, the operating system might not write data to secondary storage immediately, which will lose the data if power is lost.
Although both sorts of failures can largely be avoided by a suitably
configured file system, such systems are typically more expensive or
less efficient. In more-typical systems, to survive media failure you
can copy the file to a different device, and to survive a power
failure you can use the write-region
function with the
write-region-inhibit-fsync
variable set to nil
.
See Writing to Files.
Files are generally referred to by their names, in Emacs as elsewhere. File names in Emacs are represented as strings. The functions that operate on a file all expect a file name argument.
In addition to operating on files themselves, Emacs Lisp programs often need to operate on file names; i.e., to take them apart and to use part of a name to construct related file names. This section describes how to manipulate file names.
The functions in this section do not actually access files, so they can operate on file names that do not refer to an existing file or directory.
On MS-DOS and MS-Windows, these functions (like the function that actually operate on files) accept MS-DOS or MS-Windows file-name syntax, where backslashes separate the components, as well as POSIX syntax; but they always return POSIX syntax. This enables Lisp programs to specify file names in POSIX syntax and work properly on all systems without change.19
The operating system groups files into directories. To specify a file, you must specify the directory and the file’s name within that directory. Therefore, Emacs considers a file name as having two main parts: the directory name part, and the nondirectory part (or file name within the directory). Either part may be empty. Concatenating these two parts reproduces the original file name. 20
On most systems, the directory part is everything up to and including the last slash (backslash is also allowed in input on MS-DOS or MS-Windows); the nondirectory part is the rest.
For some purposes, the nondirectory part is further subdivided into the name proper and the version number. On most systems, only backup files have version numbers in their names.
This function returns the directory part of filename, as a
directory name (see Directory Names), or nil
if
filename does not include a directory part.
On GNU and other POSIX-like systems, a string returned by this function always ends in a slash. On MS-DOS it can also end in a colon.
(file-name-directory "lewis/foo") ; GNU example
⇒ "lewis/"
(file-name-directory "foo") ; GNU example
⇒ nil
This function returns the nondirectory part of filename.
(file-name-nondirectory "lewis/foo") ⇒ "foo"
(file-name-nondirectory "foo") ⇒ "foo"
(file-name-nondirectory "lewis/") ⇒ ""
This function returns filename with any file version numbers, backup version numbers, or trailing tildes discarded.
If keep-backup-version is non-nil
, then true file version
numbers understood as such by the file system are discarded from the
return value, but backup version numbers are kept.
(file-name-sans-versions "~rms/foo.~1~") ⇒ "~rms/foo"
(file-name-sans-versions "~rms/foo~") ⇒ "~rms/foo"
(file-name-sans-versions "~rms/foo") ⇒ "~rms/foo"
This function returns filename’s final extension, if any,
after applying file-name-sans-versions
to remove any
version/backup part. The extension, in a file name, is the part that
follows the last ‘.’ in the last name component (minus any
version/backup part).
This function returns nil
for extensionless file names such as
foo. It returns ""
for null extensions, as in
foo.. If the last component of a file name begins with a
‘.’, that ‘.’ doesn’t count as the beginning of an
extension. Thus, .emacs’s extension is nil
, not
‘.emacs’.
If period is non-nil
, then the returned value includes
the period that delimits the extension, and if filename has no
extension, the value is ""
.
This function returns filename with its extension set to extension. A single leading dot in the extension will be stripped if there is one. For example:
(file-name-with-extension "file" "el") ⇒ "file.el" (file-name-with-extension "file" ".el") ⇒ "file.el" (file-name-with-extension "file.c" "el") ⇒ "file.el"
Note that this function will error if filename or
extension are empty, or if the filename is shaped like a
directory (i.e., if directory-name-p
returns non-nil
).
This function returns filename minus its extension, if any. The version/backup part, if present, is only removed if the file has an extension. For example,
(file-name-sans-extension "foo.lose.c") ⇒ "foo.lose" (file-name-sans-extension "big.hack/foo") ⇒ "big.hack/foo" (file-name-sans-extension "/my/home/.emacs") ⇒ "/my/home/.emacs" (file-name-sans-extension "/my/home/.emacs.el") ⇒ "/my/home/.emacs" (file-name-sans-extension "~/foo.el.~3~") ⇒ "~/foo" (file-name-sans-extension "~/foo.~3~") ⇒ "~/foo.~3~"
Note that the ‘.~3~’ in the two last examples is the backup part, not an extension.
This function is the composition of file-name-sans-extension
and file-name-nondirectory
. For example,
(file-name-base "/my/home/foo.c") ⇒ "foo"
This function splits a file name into its components, and can be
thought of as the inverse of string-join
with the appropriate
directory separator. For example,
(file-name-split "/tmp/foo.txt") ⇒ ("" "tmp" "foo.txt") (string-join (file-name-split "/tmp/foo.txt") "/") ⇒ "/tmp/foo.txt"
All the directories in the file system form a tree starting at the root directory. A file name can specify all the directory names starting from the root of the tree; then it is called an absolute file name. Or it can specify the position of the file in the tree relative to a default directory; then it is called a relative file name. On GNU and other POSIX-like systems, after any leading ‘~’ has been expanded, an absolute file name starts with a ‘/’ (see abbreviate-file-name), and a relative one does not. On MS-DOS and MS-Windows, an absolute file name starts with a slash or a backslash, or with a drive specification ‘x:/’, where x is the drive letter.
This function returns t
if file filename is an absolute
file name, nil
otherwise. A file name is considered to be
absolute if its first component is ‘~’, or is ‘~user’
where user is a valid login name. In the following examples,
assume that there is a user named ‘rms’ but no user named
‘nosuchuser’.
(file-name-absolute-p "~rms/foo") ⇒ t
(file-name-absolute-p "~nosuchuser/foo") ⇒ nil
(file-name-absolute-p "rms/foo") ⇒ nil
(file-name-absolute-p "/user/rms/foo") ⇒ t
Given a possibly relative file name, you can expand any
leading ‘~’ and convert the result to an
absolute name using expand-file-name
(see Functions that Expand Filenames). This function converts absolute file names to relative
names:
This function tries to return a relative name that is equivalent to
filename, assuming the result will be interpreted relative to
directory (an absolute directory name or directory file name).
If directory is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the
current buffer’s default directory.
On some operating systems, an absolute file name begins with a device
name. On such systems, filename has no relative equivalent based
on directory if they start with two different device names. In
this case, file-relative-name
returns filename in absolute
form.
(file-relative-name "/foo/bar" "/foo/") ⇒ "bar" (file-relative-name "/foo/bar" "/hack/") ⇒ "../foo/bar"
A file name that is an empty string stands for the current buffer’s default directory.
A directory name is a string that must name a directory if it names any file at all. A directory is actually a kind of file, and it has a file name (called the directory file name), which is related to the directory name but is typically not identical. (This is not quite the same as the usual POSIX terminology.) These two names for the same entity are related by a syntactic transformation. On GNU and other POSIX-like systems, this is simple: to obtain a directory name, append a ‘/’ to a directory file name that does not already end in ‘/’. On MS-DOS the relationship is more complicated.
The difference between a directory name and a directory file name is
subtle but crucial. When an Emacs variable or function argument is
described as being a directory name, a directory file name is not
acceptable. When file-name-directory
returns a string, that is
always a directory name.
The following two functions convert between directory names and directory file names. They do nothing special with environment variable substitutions such as ‘$HOME’, and the constructs ‘~’, ‘.’ and ‘..’.
This function returns a string representing filename in a form that the operating system will interpret as the name of a directory (a directory name). On most systems, this means appending a slash to the string (if it does not already end in one).
(file-name-as-directory "~rms/lewis") ⇒ "~rms/lewis/"
This function returns non-nil
if filename ends with a
directory separator character. This is the forward slash ‘/’ on
GNU and other POSIX-like systems; MS-Windows and MS-DOS recognize both
the forward slash and the backslash ‘\’ as directory separators.
This function returns a string representing dirname in a form that the operating system will interpret as the name of a file (a directory file name). On most systems, this means removing the final directory separators from the string, unless the string consists entirely of directory separators.
(directory-file-name "~lewis/") ⇒ "~lewis"
Concatenate components to directory, inserting a slash before the components if directory or the preceding component didn’t end with a slash.
(file-name-concat "/tmp" "foo") ⇒ "/tmp/foo"
A directory or components that are nil
or the empty
string are ignored—they are filtered out first and do not affect the
results in any way.
This is almost the same as using concat
, but dirname (and
the non-final components) may or may not end with slash characters,
and this function will not double those characters.
To convert a directory name to its abbreviation, use this function:
This function returns an abbreviated form of filename. It
applies the abbreviations specified in directory-abbrev-alist
(see File Aliases in The GNU Emacs Manual),
then substitutes ‘~’ for the user’s home directory if the
argument names a file in the home directory or one of its
subdirectories. If the home directory is a root directory, it is not
replaced with ‘~’, because this does not make the result shorter
on many systems.
You can use this function for directory names and for file names, because it recognizes abbreviations even as part of the name.
This function returns the directory name of the parent directory of
filename. If filename is at the root directory of the
filesystem, it returns nil
. A relative filename is
assumed to be relative to default-directory
, and the return
value will also be relative in that case. If the return value is
non-nil
, it ends in a slash.
Expanding a file name means converting a relative file name to an absolute one. Since this is done relative to a default directory, you must specify the default directory as well as the file name to be expanded. It also involves expanding abbreviations like ~/ (see abbreviate-file-name), and eliminating redundancies like ./ and name/../.
This function converts filename to an absolute file name. If
directory is supplied, it is the default directory to start with
if filename is relative and does not start with ‘~’.
(The value of directory should
itself be an absolute directory name or directory file name; it may
start with ‘~’.) Otherwise, the current buffer’s value of
default-directory
is used. For example:
(expand-file-name "foo") ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/lewis/foo"
(expand-file-name "../foo") ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/foo"
(expand-file-name "foo" "/usr/spool/") ⇒ "/usr/spool/foo"
If the part of filename before the first slash is
‘~’, it expands to your home directory, which is typically
specified by the value of the HOME
environment variable
(see General Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual).
If the part before the first
slash is ‘~user’ and if user is a valid login name,
it expands to user’s home directory.
If you do not want this expansion for a relative filename that
might begin with a literal ‘~’, you can use (concat
(file-name-as-directory directory) filename)
instead of
(expand-file-name filename directory)
.
File names containing ‘.’ or ‘..’ are simplified to their canonical form:
(expand-file-name "bar/../foo") ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/lewis/foo"
In some cases, a leading ‘..’ component can remain in the output:
(expand-file-name "../home" "/") ⇒ "/../home"
This is for the sake of filesystems that have the concept of a superroot above the root directory /. On other filesystems, /../ is interpreted exactly the same as /.
Expanding . or the empty string returns the default directory:
(expand-file-name "." "/usr/spool/") ⇒ "/usr/spool" (expand-file-name "" "/usr/spool/") ⇒ "/usr/spool"
Note that expand-file-name
does not expand environment
variables; only substitute-in-file-name
does that:
(expand-file-name "$HOME/foo") ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/lewis/$HOME/foo"
Note also that expand-file-name
does not follow symbolic links
at any level. This results in a difference between the way
file-truename
and expand-file-name
treat ‘..’.
Assuming that ‘/tmp/bar’ is a symbolic link to the directory
‘/tmp/foo/bar’ we get:
(file-truename "/tmp/bar/../myfile") ⇒ "/tmp/foo/myfile"
(expand-file-name "/tmp/bar/../myfile") ⇒ "/tmp/myfile"
If you may need to follow symbolic links preceding ‘..’, you
should make sure to call file-truename
without prior direct or
indirect calls to expand-file-name
. See Truenames.
The value of this buffer-local variable is the default directory for the current buffer. It should be an absolute directory name; it may start with ‘~’. This variable is buffer-local in every buffer.
expand-file-name
uses the default directory when its second
argument is nil
.
The value is always a string ending with a slash.
default-directory ⇒ "/user/lewis/manual/"
This function replaces environment variable references in filename with the environment variable values. Following standard Unix shell syntax, ‘$’ is the prefix to substitute an environment variable value. If the input contains ‘$$’, that is converted to ‘$’; this gives the user a way to quote a ‘$’.
The environment variable name is the series of alphanumeric characters (including underscores) that follow the ‘$’. If the character following the ‘$’ is a ‘{’, then the variable name is everything up to the matching ‘}’.
Calling substitute-in-file-name
on output produced by
substitute-in-file-name
tends to give incorrect results. For
instance, use of ‘$$’ to quote a single ‘$’ won’t work
properly, and ‘$’ in an environment variable’s value could lead
to repeated substitution. Therefore, programs that call this function
and put the output where it will be passed to this function need to
double all ‘$’ characters to prevent subsequent incorrect
results.
Here we assume that the environment variable HOME
, which holds
the user’s home directory, has value ‘/xcssun/users/rms’.
(substitute-in-file-name "$HOME/foo") ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/foo"
After substitution, if a ‘~’ or a ‘/’ appears immediately after another ‘/’, the function discards everything before it (up through the immediately preceding ‘/’).
(substitute-in-file-name "bar/~/foo") ⇒ "~/foo"
(substitute-in-file-name "/usr/local/$HOME/foo")
⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/foo"
;; /usr/local/ has been discarded.
Sometimes, it is not desired to expand file names. In such cases, the file name can be quoted to suppress the expansion, and to handle the file name literally. Quoting happens by prefixing the file name with ‘/:’.
This macro adds the quotation prefix ‘/:’ to the file name. For a local file name, it prefixes name with ‘/:’. If name is a remote file name, the local part of name (see Making Certain File Names “Magic”) is quoted. If name is already a quoted file name, name is returned unchanged.
(substitute-in-file-name (file-name-quote "bar/~/foo")) ⇒ "/:bar/~/foo"
(substitute-in-file-name (file-name-quote "/ssh:host:bar/~/foo")) ⇒ "/ssh:host:/:bar/~/foo"
The macro cannot be used to suppress file name handlers from magic file names (see Making Certain File Names “Magic”).
This macro removes the quotation prefix ‘/:’ from the file name, if any. If name is a remote file name, the local part of name is unquoted.
This macro returns non-nil
, when name is quoted with the
prefix ‘/:’. If name is a remote file name, the local part
of name is checked.
Some programs need to write temporary files. Here is the usual way to construct a name for such a file:
(make-temp-file name-of-application)
The job of make-temp-file
is to prevent two different users or
two different jobs from trying to use the exact same file name.
This function creates a temporary file and returns its name. Emacs
creates the temporary file’s name by adding to prefix some
random characters that are different in each Emacs job. The result is
guaranteed to be a newly created file, containing text if that’s
given as a string and empty otherwise. On MS-DOS, this function can
truncate prefix to fit into the 8+3 file-name limits. If
prefix is a relative file name, it is expanded against
temporary-file-directory
.
(make-temp-file "foo") ⇒ "/tmp/foo232J6v"
When make-temp-file
returns, the file has been created and is
empty. At that point, you should write the intended contents into the
file.
If dir-flag is non-nil
, make-temp-file
creates an
empty directory instead of an empty file. It returns the file name,
not the directory name, of that directory. See Directory Names.
If suffix is non-nil
, make-temp-file
adds it at
the end of the file name.
If text is a string, make-temp-file
inserts it in the file.
To prevent conflicts among different libraries running in the same
Emacs, each Lisp program that uses make-temp-file
should have its
own prefix. The number added to the end of prefix
distinguishes between the same application running in different Emacs
jobs. Additional added characters permit a large number of distinct
names even in one Emacs job.
The default directory for temporary files is controlled by the
variable temporary-file-directory
. This variable gives the user
a uniform way to specify the directory for all temporary files. Some
programs use small-temporary-file-directory
instead, if that is
non-nil
. To use it, you should expand the prefix against
the proper directory before calling make-temp-file
.
This variable specifies the directory name for creating temporary files.
Its value should be a directory name (see Directory Names), but it
is good for Lisp programs to cope if the value is a directory’s file
name instead. Using the value as the second argument to
expand-file-name
is a good way to achieve that.
The default value is determined in a reasonable way for your operating
system; it is based on the TMPDIR
, TMP
and TEMP
environment variables, with a fall-back to a system-dependent name if
none of these variables is defined.
Even if you do not use make-temp-file
to create the temporary
file, you should still use this variable to decide which directory to
put the file in. However, if you expect the file to be small, you
should use small-temporary-file-directory
first if that is
non-nil
.
This variable specifies the directory name for creating certain temporary files, which are likely to be small.
If you want to write a temporary file which is likely to be small, you should compute the directory like this:
(make-temp-file (expand-file-name prefix (or small-temporary-file-directory temporary-file-directory)))
This function generates a string that might be a unique file
name. The name starts with base-name, and has several random
characters appended to it, which are different in each Emacs job. It
is like make-temp-file
except that (i) it just constructs a
name and does not create a file, (ii) base-name should be an
absolute file name that is not magic, and (iii) if the returned file
name is magic, it might name an existing file. See Making Certain File Names “Magic”.
Warning: In most cases, you should not use this function; use
make-temp-file
instead! This function is susceptible to a race
condition, between the make-temp-name
call and the creation of
the file, which in some cases may cause a security hole.
Sometimes, it is necessary to create a temporary file on a remote host or a mounted directory. The following two functions support this.
This function is similar to make-temp-file
, but it creates a
temporary file as close as possible to default-directory
. If
prefix is a relative file name, and default-directory
is
a remote file name or located on a mounted file systems, the temporary
file is created in the directory returned by the function
temporary-file-directory
. Otherwise, the function
make-temp-file
is used. prefix, dir-flag and
suffix have the same meaning as in make-temp-file
.
(let ((default-directory "/ssh:remotehost:")) (make-nearby-temp-file "foo")) ⇒ "/ssh:remotehost:/tmp/foo232J6v"
The directory for writing temporary files via
make-nearby-temp-file
. In case of a remote
default-directory
, this is a directory for temporary files on
that remote host. If such a directory does not exist, or
default-directory
ought to be located on a mounted file system
(see mounted-file-systems
), the function returns
default-directory
. For a non-remote and non-mounted
default-directory
, the value of the variable
temporary-file-directory
is returned.
In order to extract the local part of the file’s name of a temporary
file, use file-local-name
(see Making Certain File Names “Magic”).
This section describes low-level subroutines for completing a file name. For higher level functions, see Reading File Names.
This function returns a list of all possible completions for a file whose name starts with partial-filename in directory directory. The order of the completions is the order of the files in the directory, which is unpredictable and conveys no useful information.
The argument partial-filename must be a file name containing no directory part and no slash (or backslash on some systems). The current buffer’s default directory is prepended to directory, if directory is not absolute.
In the following example, suppose that ~rms/lewis is the current default directory, and has five files whose names begin with ‘f’: foo, file~, file.c, file.c.~1~, and file.c.~2~.
(file-name-all-completions "f" "") ⇒ ("foo" "file~" "file.c.~2~" "file.c.~1~" "file.c")
(file-name-all-completions "fo" "") ⇒ ("foo")
This function completes the file name filename in directory
directory. It returns the longest prefix common to all file names
in directory directory that start with filename. If
predicate is non-nil
then it ignores possible completions
that don’t satisfy predicate, after calling that function
with one argument, the expanded absolute file name.
If only one match exists and filename matches it exactly, the
function returns t
. The function returns nil
if directory
directory contains no name starting with filename.
In the following example, suppose that the current default directory has five files whose names begin with ‘f’: foo, file~, file.c, file.c.~1~, and file.c.~2~.
(file-name-completion "fi" "") ⇒ "file"
(file-name-completion "file.c.~1" "") ⇒ "file.c.~1~"
(file-name-completion "file.c.~1~" "") ⇒ t
(file-name-completion "file.c.~3" "") ⇒ nil
file-name-completion
usually ignores file names that end in any
string in this list. It does not ignore them when all the possible
completions end in one of these suffixes. This variable has no effect
on file-name-all-completions
.
A typical value might look like this:
completion-ignored-extensions ⇒ (".o" ".elc" "~" ".dvi")
If an element of completion-ignored-extensions
ends in a slash
‘/’, it signals a directory. The elements which do not end
in a slash will never match a directory; thus, the above value will not
filter out a directory named foo.elc.
Sometimes, an Emacs Lisp program needs to specify a standard file
name for a particular use—typically, to hold configuration data
specified by the current user. Usually, such files should be located
in the directory specified by user-emacs-directory
, which is
typically ~/.config/emacs/ or ~/.emacs.d/ by default (see How Emacs Finds Your Init File in The GNU Emacs Manual).
For example, abbrev definitions are stored by default in
~/.config/emacs/abbrev_defs or ~/.emacs.d/abbrev_defs.
The easiest way to specify such a file name is to use the function
locate-user-emacs-file
.
This function returns an absolute file name for an Emacs-specific
configuration or data file. The argument base-name should be a
relative file name. The return value is the absolute name of a file
in the directory specified by user-emacs-directory
; if that
directory does not exist, this function creates it.
If the optional argument old-name is non-nil
, it
specifies a file in the user’s home directory,
~/old-name. If such a file exists, the return value is
the absolute name of that file, instead of the file specified by
base-name. This argument is intended to be used by Emacs
packages to provide backward compatibility. For instance, prior to
the introduction of user-emacs-directory
, the abbrev file was
located in ~/.abbrev_defs. Here is the definition of
abbrev-file-name
:
(defcustom abbrev-file-name (locate-user-emacs-file "abbrev_defs" ".abbrev_defs") "Default name of file from which to read abbrevs." ... :type 'file)
A lower-level function for standardizing file names, which
locate-user-emacs-file
uses as a subroutine, is
convert-standard-filename
.
This function returns a file name based on filename, which fits the conventions of the current operating system.
On GNU and other POSIX-like systems, this simply returns filename. On other operating systems, it may enforce system-specific file name conventions; for example, on MS-DOS this function performs a variety of changes to enforce MS-DOS file name limitations, including converting any leading ‘.’ to ‘_’ and truncating to three characters after the ‘.’.
The recommended way to use this function is to specify a name which
fits the conventions of GNU and Unix systems, and pass it to
convert-standard-filename
.
A directory is a kind of file that contains other files entered under various names. Directories are a feature of the file system.
Emacs can list the names of the files in a directory as a Lisp list,
or display the names in a buffer using the ls
shell command. In
the latter case, it can optionally display information about each file,
depending on the options passed to the ls
command.
This function returns a list of the names of the files in the directory directory. By default, the list is in alphabetical order.
If full-name is non-nil
, the function returns the files’
absolute file names. Otherwise, it returns the names relative to
the specified directory.
If match-regexp is non-nil
, this function returns only
those file names whose non-directory part contain a match for that
regular expression—the other file names are excluded from the list.
On case-insensitive filesystems, the regular expression matching is
case-insensitive.
If nosort is non-nil
, directory-files
does not sort
the list, so you get the file names in no particular order. Use this if
you want the utmost possible speed and don’t care what order the files
are processed in. If the order of processing is visible to the user,
then the user will probably be happier if you do sort the names.
If count is non-nil
, the function will return names of
first count number of files, or names of all files, whichever
occurs first. count has to be an integer greater than zero.
(directory-files "~lewis") ⇒ ("#foo#" "#foo.el#" "." ".." "dired-mods.el" "files.texi" "files.texi.~1~")
An error is signaled if directory is not the name of a directory that can be read.
This utility function returns t
if given directory is an
accessible directory and it does not contain any files, i.e., is an
empty directory. It will ignore ‘.’ and ‘..’ on systems
that return them as files in a directory.
Symbolic links to directories count as directories. See file-symlink-p to distinguish symlinks.
Return all files under directory whose names match regexp.
This function searches the specified directory and its
sub-directories, recursively, for files whose basenames (i.e., without
the leading directories) match the specified regexp, and returns
a list of the absolute file names of the matching files
(see absolute file names). The file names
are returned in depth-first order, meaning that files in some
sub-directory are returned before the files in its parent directory.
In addition, matching files found in each subdirectory are sorted
alphabetically by their basenames. By default, directories whose
names match regexp are omitted from the list, but if the
optional argument include-directories is non-nil
, they
are included.
By default, all subdirectories are descended into. If predicate
is t
, errors when trying to descend into a subdirectory (for
instance, if it’s not readable by this user) are ignored. If it’s
neither nil
nor t
, it should be a function that takes
one parameter (the subdirectory name) and should return non-nil
if the directory is to be descended into.
Symbolic links to subdirectories are not followed by default, but if
follow-symlinks is non-nil
, they are followed.
Starting at file, go up the directory tree hierarchy looking for
the first directory where name, a string, exists, and return that
directory. If file is a file, its directory will serve as the
starting point for the search; otherwise file should be a
directory from which to start. The function looks in the starting
directory, then in its parent, then in its parent’s parent, etc.,
until it either finds a directory with name or reaches the root
directory of the filesystem without finding name – in the
latter case the function returns nil
.
The argument name
can also be a predicate function. The
predicate is called for every directory examined by the function,
starting from file (even if file is not a directory). It
is called with one argument (the file or directory) and should return
non-nil
if that directory is the one it is looking for.
This function returns t
if file is a file in directory
dir, or in a subdirectory of dir. It also returns
t
if file and dir are the same directory. It
compares the truenames of the two directories. If dir does not
name an existing directory, the return value is nil
.
This is similar to directory-files
in deciding which files
to report on and how to report their names. However, instead
of returning a list of file names, it returns for each file a
list (filename . attributes)
, where attributes
is what file-attributes
returns for that file.
The optional argument id-format has the same meaning as the
corresponding argument to file-attributes
(see Definition of file-attributes).
This regular expression matches any file name except ‘.’ and
‘..’. More precisely, it matches parts of any nonempty string
except those two. It is useful as the match-regexp argument to
directory-files
and directory-files-and-attributes
:
(directory-files "/foo" nil directory-files-no-dot-files-regexp)
returns nil
, if directory ‘/foo’ is empty.
This function expands the wildcard pattern pattern, returning a list of file names that match it.
pattern is, by default, a “glob”/wildcard string, e.g.,
‘"/tmp/*.png"’ or ‘"/*/*/foo.png"’, but can also be a
regular expression if the optional regexp parameter is non-nil
.
In any case, the matches are applied per sub-directory, so a match
can’t span a parent/sub directory.
If pattern is written as an absolute file name, the values are absolute also.
If pattern is written as a relative file name, it is interpreted
relative to the current default directory. The file names returned are
normally also relative to the current default directory. However, if
full is non-nil
, they are absolute.
This function inserts (in the current buffer) a directory listing for
directory file, formatted with ls
according to
switches. It leaves point after the inserted text.
switches may be a string of options, or a list of strings
representing individual options.
The argument file may be either a directory or a file
specification including wildcard characters. If wildcard is
non-nil
, that means treat file as a file specification with
wildcards.
If full-directory-p is non-nil
, that means the directory
listing is expected to show the full contents of a directory. You
should specify t
when file is a directory and switches do
not contain ‘-d’. (The ‘-d’ option to ls
says to
describe a directory itself as a file, rather than showing its
contents.)
On most systems, this function works by running a directory listing
program whose name is in the variable insert-directory-program
.
If wildcard is non-nil
, it also runs the shell specified by
shell-file-name
, to expand the wildcards.
MS-DOS and MS-Windows systems usually lack the standard Unix program
ls
, so this function emulates the standard Unix program ls
with Lisp code.
As a technical detail, when switches contains the long
‘--dired’ option, insert-directory
treats it specially,
for the sake of dired. However, the normally equivalent short
‘-D’ option is just passed on to insert-directory-program
,
as any other option.
This variable’s value is the program to run to generate a directory listing
for the function insert-directory
. It is ignored on systems
which generate the listing with Lisp code.
Most Emacs Lisp file-manipulation functions get errors when used on
files that are directories. For example, you cannot delete a directory
with delete-file
. These special functions exist to create and
delete directories.
This command creates a directory named dirname. If
parents is non-nil
, as is always the case in an
interactive call, that means to create the parent directories first,
if they don’t already exist.
As a function, make-directory
returns non-nil
if dirname
already exists as a directory and parents is non-nil
,
and returns nil
if it successfully created dirname.
mkdir
is an alias for this.
This command creates an empty file named filename.
As make-directory
, this command creates parent directories
if parents is non-nil
.
If filename already exists, this command signals an error.
This command copies the directory named dirname to newname. If newname is a directory name, dirname will be copied to a subdirectory there. See Directory Names.
It always sets the file modes of the copied files to match the corresponding original file.
The third argument keep-time non-nil
means to preserve the
modification time of the copied files. A prefix arg makes
keep-time non-nil
.
The fourth argument parents says whether to create parent directories if they don’t exist. Interactively, this happens by default.
The fifth argument copy-contents, if non-nil
, means to
copy the contents of dirname directly into newname if the
latter is a directory name, instead of copying dirname into
it as a subdirectory.
This command deletes the directory named dirname. The function
delete-file
does not work for files that are directories; you
must use delete-directory
for them. If recursive is
nil
, and the directory contains any files,
delete-directory
signals an error.
If recursive is non-nil
, there is no error merely because the
directory or its files are deleted by some other process before
delete-directory
gets to them.
delete-directory
only follows symbolic links at the level of
parent directories.
If the optional argument trash is non-nil
and the
variable delete-by-moving-to-trash
is non-nil
, this
command moves the file into the system Trash instead of deleting it.
See Miscellaneous File Operations in The GNU
Emacs Manual. When called interactively, trash is t
if
no prefix argument is given, and nil
otherwise.
You can implement special handling for certain file names. This is called making those names magic. The principal use for this feature is in implementing access to remote files (see Remote Files in The GNU Emacs Manual).
To define a kind of magic file name, you must supply a regular expression to define the class of names (all those that match the regular expression), plus a handler that implements all the primitive Emacs file operations for file names that match.
The variable file-name-handler-alist
holds a list of handlers,
together with regular expressions that determine when to apply each
handler. Each element has this form:
(regexp . handler)
All the Emacs primitives for file access and file name transformation
check the given file name against file-name-handler-alist
. If
the file name matches regexp, the primitives handle that file by
calling handler.
The first argument given to handler is the name of the primitive, as a symbol; the remaining arguments are the arguments that were passed to that primitive. (The first of these arguments is most often the file name itself.) For example, if you do this:
(file-exists-p filename)
and filename has handler handler, then handler is called like this:
(funcall handler 'file-exists-p filename)
When a function takes two or more arguments that must be file names, it checks each of those names for a handler. For example, if you do this:
(expand-file-name filename dirname)
then it checks for a handler for filename and then for a handler for dirname. In either case, the handler is called like this:
(funcall handler 'expand-file-name filename dirname)
The handler then needs to figure out whether to handle filename or dirname.
If the specified file name matches more than one handler, the one whose match starts last in the file name gets precedence. This rule is chosen so that handlers for jobs such as uncompression are handled first, before handlers for jobs such as remote file access.
Here are the operations that a magic file name handler gets to handle:
abbreviate-file-name
, access-file
,
add-name-to-file
, byte-compiler-base-file-name
,
copy-directory
, copy-file
,
delete-directory
, delete-file
,
diff-latest-backup-file
,
directory-file-name
,
directory-files
,
directory-files-and-attributes
,
dired-compress-file
, dired-uncache
,
exec-path
, expand-file-name
,
file-accessible-directory-p
,
file-acl
,
file-attributes
,
file-directory-p
,
file-equal-p
,
file-executable-p
, file-exists-p
,
file-in-directory-p
,
file-local-copy
, file-locked-p
,
file-modes
, file-name-all-completions
,
file-name-as-directory
,
file-name-case-insensitive-p
,
file-name-completion
,
file-name-directory
,
file-name-nondirectory
,
file-name-sans-versions
, file-newer-than-file-p
,
file-notify-add-watch
, file-notify-rm-watch
,
file-notify-valid-p
,
file-ownership-preserved-p
,
file-readable-p
, file-regular-p
,
file-remote-p
, file-selinux-context
,
file-symlink-p
, file-system-info
,
file-truename
, file-writable-p
,
find-backup-file-name
,
get-file-buffer
,
insert-directory
,
insert-file-contents
,
list-system-processes
,
load
, lock-file
,
make-auto-save-file-name
,
make-directory
,
make-lock-file-name
,
make-nearby-temp-file
,
make-process
,
make-symbolic-link
,
memory-info
, process-attributes
, process-file
,
rename-file
, set-file-acl
, set-file-modes
,
set-file-selinux-context
, set-file-times
,
set-visited-file-modtime
, shell-command
,
start-file-process
,
substitute-in-file-name
,
temporary-file-directory
,
unhandled-file-name-directory
,
unlock-file
,
vc-registered
,
verify-visited-file-modtime
,
write-region
.
Handlers for insert-file-contents
typically need to clear the
buffer’s modified flag, with (set-buffer-modified-p nil)
, if the
visit argument is non-nil
. This also has the effect of
unlocking the buffer if it is locked.
The handler function must handle all of the above operations, and possibly others to be added in the future. It need not implement all these operations itself—when it has nothing special to do for a certain operation, it can reinvoke the primitive, to handle the operation in the usual way. It should always reinvoke the primitive for an operation it does not recognize. Here’s one way to do this:
(defun my-file-handler (operation &rest args) ;; First check for the specific operations ;; that we have special handling for. (cond ((eq operation 'insert-file-contents) ...) ((eq operation 'write-region) ...) ... ;; Handle any operation we don’t know about. (t (let ((inhibit-file-name-handlers (cons 'my-file-handler (and (eq inhibit-file-name-operation operation) inhibit-file-name-handlers))) (inhibit-file-name-operation operation)) (apply operation args)))))
When a handler function decides to call the ordinary Emacs primitive for
the operation at hand, it needs to prevent the primitive from calling
the same handler once again, thus leading to an infinite recursion. The
example above shows how to do this, with the variables
inhibit-file-name-handlers
and
inhibit-file-name-operation
. Be careful to use them exactly as
shown above; the details are crucial for proper behavior in the case of
multiple handlers, and for operations that have two file names that may
each have handlers.
Handlers that don’t really do anything special for actual access to the
file—such as the ones that implement completion of host names for
remote file names—should have a non-nil
safe-magic
property. For instance, Emacs normally protects directory names
it finds in PATH
from becoming magic, if they look like magic
file names, by prefixing them with ‘/:’. But if the handler that
would be used for them has a non-nil
safe-magic
property, the ‘/:’ is not added.
A file name handler can have an operations
property to
declare which operations it handles in a nontrivial way. If this
property has a non-nil
value, it should be a list of
operations; then only those operations will call the handler. This
avoids inefficiency, but its main purpose is for autoloaded handler
functions, so that they won’t be loaded except when they have real
work to do.
Simply deferring all operations to the usual primitives does not
work. For instance, if the file name handler applies to
file-exists-p
, then it must handle load
itself, because
the usual load
code won’t work properly in that case. However,
if the handler uses the operations
property to say it doesn’t
handle file-exists-p
, then it need not handle load
nontrivially.
This variable holds a list of handlers whose use is presently inhibited for a certain operation.
The operation for which certain handlers are presently inhibited.
This function returns the handler function for file name file,
or nil
if there is none. The argument operation should
be the operation to be performed on the file—the value you will pass
to the handler as its first argument when you call it. If
operation equals inhibit-file-name-operation
, or if it is
not found in the operations
property of the handler, this
function returns nil
.
This function copies file filename to an ordinary non-magic file
on the local machine, if it isn’t on the local machine already. Magic
file names should handle the file-local-copy
operation if they
refer to files on other machines. A magic file name that is used for
other purposes than remote file access should not handle
file-local-copy
; then this function will treat the file as
local.
If filename is local, whether magic or not, this function does
nothing and returns nil
. Otherwise it returns the file name
of the local copy file.
This function tests whether filename is a remote file. If
filename is local (not remote), the return value is nil
.
If filename is indeed remote, the return value is a string that
identifies the remote system.
This identifier string can include a host name and a user name, as
well as characters designating the method used to access the remote
system. For example, the remote identifier string for the file name
/sudo::/some/file
is /sudo:root@localhost:
.
If file-remote-p
returns the same identifier for two different
file names, that means they are stored on the same file system and can
be accessed locally with respect to each other. This means, for
example, that it is possible to start a remote process accessing both
files at the same time. Implementers of file name handlers need to
ensure this principle is valid.
identification specifies which part of the identifier shall be
returned as string. identification can be the symbol
method
, user
or host
; any other value is handled
like nil
and means to return the complete identifier string.
In the example above, the remote user
identifier string would
be root
.
If connected is non-nil
, this function returns nil
even if filename is remote, if Emacs has no network connection
to its host. This is useful when you want to avoid the delay of
making connections when they don’t exist.
This function returns the name of a directory that is not magic. For
a non-magic filename it returns the corresponding directory name
(see Directory Names). For a magic filename, it invokes the
file name handler, which therefore decides what value to return. If
filename is not accessible from a local process, then the file
name handler should indicate that by returning nil
.
This is useful for running a subprocess; every subprocess must have a non-magic directory to serve as its current directory, and this function is a good way to come up with one.
This function returns the local part of filename. This is the part of the file’s name that identifies it on the remote host, and is typically obtained by removing from the remote file name the parts that specify the remote host and the method of accessing it. For example:
(file-local-name "/ssh:user@host:/foo/bar") ⇒ "/foo/bar"
For a remote filename, this function returns a file name which could be used directly as an argument of a remote process (see Creating an Asynchronous Process, and see Creating a Synchronous Process), and as the program to run on the remote host. If filename is local, this function returns it unchanged.
The attributes of remote files can be cached for better performance. If they are changed outside of Emacs’s control, the cached values become invalid, and must be reread.
When this variable is set to nil
, cached values are never
expired. Use this setting with caution, only if you are sure nothing
other than Emacs ever changes the remote files. If it is set to
t
, cached values are never used. This is the safest value, but
could result in performance degradation.
A compromise is to set it to a positive number. This means that cached values are used for that amount of seconds since they were cached. If a remote file is checked regularly, it might be a good idea to let-bind this variable to a value less than the time period between consecutive checks. For example:
(defun display-time-file-nonempty-p (file) (let ((remote-file-name-inhibit-cache (- display-time-interval 5))) (and (file-exists-p file) (< 0 (file-attribute-size (file-attributes (file-chase-links file)))))))
Emacs performs several steps to convert the data in a buffer (text,
text properties, and possibly other information) to and from a
representation suitable for storing into a file. This section describes
the fundamental functions that perform this format conversion,
namely insert-file-contents
for reading a file into a buffer,
and write-region
for writing a buffer into a file.
The function insert-file-contents
:
format-alist
; and
after-insert-file-functions
.
The function write-region
:
write-region-annotate-functions
;
format-alist
;
This shows the symmetry of the lowest-level operations; reading and writing handle things in opposite order. The rest of this section describes the two facilities surrounding the three variables named above, as well as some related functions. Coding Systems, for details on character encoding and decoding.
The most general of the two facilities is controlled by the variable
format-alist
, a list of file format specifications, which
describe textual representations used in files for the data in an Emacs
buffer. The descriptions for reading and writing are paired, which is
why we call this “round-trip” specification
(see Piecemeal Specification, for non-paired specification).
This list contains one format definition for each defined file format. Each format definition is a list of this form:
(name doc-string regexp from-fn to-fn modify mode-fn preserve)
Here is what the elements in a format definition mean:
The name of this format.
A documentation string for the format.
A regular expression which is used to recognize files represented in
this format. If nil
, the format is never applied automatically.
A shell command or function to decode data in this format (to convert file data into the usual Emacs data representation).
A shell command is represented as a string; Emacs runs the command as a filter to perform the conversion.
If from-fn is a function, it is called with two arguments, begin and end, which specify the part of the buffer it should convert. It should convert the text by editing it in place. Since this can change the length of the text, from-fn should return the modified end position.
One responsibility of from-fn is to make sure that the beginning of the file no longer matches regexp. Otherwise it is likely to get called again. Also, from-fn must not involve buffers or files other than the one being decoded, otherwise the internal buffer used for formatting might be overwritten.
A shell command or function to encode data in this format—that is, to convert the usual Emacs data representation into this format.
If to-fn is a string, it is a shell command; Emacs runs the command as a filter to perform the conversion.
If to-fn is a function, it is called with three arguments: begin and end, which specify the part of the buffer it should convert, and buffer, which specifies which buffer. There are two ways it can do the conversion:
(position . string)
, where position is an
integer specifying the relative position in the text to be written, and
string is the annotation to add there. The list must be sorted in
order of position when to-fn returns it.
When write-region
actually writes the text from the buffer to the
file, it intermixes the specified annotations at the corresponding
positions. All this takes place without modifying the buffer.
to-fn must not involve buffers or files other than the one being encoded, otherwise the internal buffer used for formatting might be overwritten.
A flag, t
if the encoding function modifies the buffer, and
nil
if it works by returning a list of annotations.
A minor-mode function to call after visiting a file converted from this format. The function is called with one argument, the integer 1; that tells a minor-mode function to enable the mode.
A flag, t
if format-write-file
should not remove this format
from buffer-file-format
.
The function insert-file-contents
automatically recognizes file
formats when it reads the specified file. It checks the text of the
beginning of the file against the regular expressions of the format
definitions, and if it finds a match, it calls the decoding function for
that format. Then it checks all the known formats over again.
It keeps checking them until none of them is applicable.
Visiting a file, with find-file-noselect
or the commands that use
it, performs conversion likewise (because it calls
insert-file-contents
); it also calls the mode function for each
format that it decodes. It stores a list of the format names in the
buffer-local variable buffer-file-format
.
This variable states the format of the visited file. More precisely, this is a list of the file format names that were decoded in the course of visiting the current buffer’s file. It is always buffer-local in all buffers.
When write-region
writes data into a file, it first calls the
encoding functions for the formats listed in buffer-file-format
,
in the order of appearance in the list.
This command writes the current buffer contents into the file file
in a format based on format, which is a list of format names. It
constructs the actual format starting from format, then appending
any elements from the value of buffer-file-format
with a
non-nil
preserve flag (see above), if they are not already
present in format. It then updates buffer-file-format
with
this format, making it the default for future saves. Except for the
format argument, this command is similar to write-file
. In
particular, confirm has the same meaning and interactive treatment
as the corresponding argument to write-file
. See Definition of write-file.
This command finds the file file, converting it according to format format. It also makes format the default if the buffer is saved later.
The argument format is a list of format names. If format is
nil
, no conversion takes place. Interactively, typing just
RET for format specifies nil
.
This command inserts the contents of file file, converting it
according to format format. If beg and end are
non-nil
, they specify which part of the file to read, as in
insert-file-contents
(see Reading from Files).
The return value is like what insert-file-contents
returns: a
list of the absolute file name and the length of the data inserted
(after conversion).
The argument format is a list of format names. If format is
nil
, no conversion takes place. Interactively, typing just
RET for format specifies nil
.
This variable specifies the format to use for auto-saving. Its value is
a list of format names, just like the value of
buffer-file-format
; however, it is used instead of
buffer-file-format
for writing auto-save files. If the value
is t
, the default, auto-saving uses the same format as a
regular save in the same buffer. This variable is always buffer-local
in all buffers.
In contrast to the round-trip specification described in the previous
subsection (see Round-Trip Specification), you can use the variables
after-insert-file-functions
and write-region-annotate-functions
to separately control the respective reading and writing conversions.
Conversion starts with one representation and produces another representation. When there is only one conversion to do, there is no conflict about what to start with. However, when there are multiple conversions involved, conflict may arise when two conversions need to start with the same data.
This situation is best understood in the context of converting text
properties during write-region
. For example, the character at
position 42 in a buffer is ‘X’ with a text property foo
. If
the conversion for foo
is done by inserting into the buffer, say,
‘FOO:’, then that changes the character at position 42 from
‘X’ to ‘F’. The next conversion will start with the wrong
data straight away.
To avoid conflict, cooperative conversions do not modify the buffer,
but instead specify annotations, a list of elements of the form
(position . string)
, sorted in order of increasing
position.
If there is more than one conversion, write-region
merges their
annotations destructively into one sorted list. Later, when the text
from the buffer is actually written to the file, it intermixes the
specified annotations at the corresponding positions. All this takes
place without modifying the buffer.
In contrast, when reading, the annotations intermixed with the text
are handled immediately. insert-file-contents
sets point to
the beginning of some text to be converted, then calls the conversion
functions with the length of that text. These functions should always
return with point at the beginning of the inserted text. This
approach makes sense for reading because annotations removed by the
first converter can’t be mistakenly processed by a later converter.
Each conversion function should scan for the annotations it
recognizes, remove the annotation, modify the buffer text (to set a
text property, for example), and return the updated length of the
text, as it stands after those changes. The value returned by one
function becomes the argument to the next function.
A list of functions for write-region
to call. Each function in
the list is called with two arguments: the start and end of the region
to be written. These functions should not alter the contents of the
buffer. Instead, they should return annotations.
As a special case, a function may return with a different buffer
current. Emacs takes this to mean that the current buffer contains
altered text to be output. It therefore changes the start and
end arguments of the write-region
call, giving them the
values of point-min
and point-max
in the new buffer,
respectively. It also discards all previous annotations, because they
should have been dealt with by this function.
The value of this variable, if non-nil
, should be a function.
This function is called, with no arguments, after write-region
has completed.
If any function in write-region-annotate-functions
returns with
a different buffer current, Emacs calls
write-region-post-annotation-function
more than once. Emacs
calls it with the last buffer that was current, and again with the
buffer before that, and so on back to the original buffer.
Thus, a function in write-region-annotate-functions
can create
a buffer, give this variable the local value of kill-buffer
in
that buffer, set up the buffer with altered text, and make the buffer
current. The buffer will be killed after write-region
is done.
Each function in this list is called by insert-file-contents
with one argument, the number of characters inserted, and with point
at the beginning of the inserted text. Each function should leave
point unchanged, and return the new character count describing the
inserted text as modified by the function.
We invite users to write Lisp programs to store and retrieve text properties in files, using these hooks, and thus to experiment with various data formats and find good ones. Eventually we hope users will produce good, general extensions we can install in Emacs.
We suggest not trying to handle arbitrary Lisp objects as text property names or values—because a program that general is probably difficult to write, and slow. Instead, choose a set of possible data types that are reasonably flexible, and not too hard to encode.
Backup files and auto-save files are two methods by which Emacs tries to protect the user from the consequences of crashes or of the user’s own errors. Auto-saving preserves the text from earlier in the current editing session; backup files preserve file contents prior to the current session.
A backup file is a copy of the old contents of a file you are editing. Emacs makes a backup file the first time you save a buffer into its visited file. Thus, normally, the backup file contains the contents of the file as it was before the current editing session. The contents of the backup file normally remain unchanged once it exists.
Backups are usually made by renaming the visited file to a new name. Optionally, you can specify that backup files should be made by copying the visited file. This choice makes a difference for files with multiple names; it also can affect whether the edited file remains owned by the original owner or becomes owned by the user editing it.
By default, Emacs makes a single backup file for each file edited. You can alternatively request numbered backups; then each new backup file gets a new name. You can delete old numbered backups when you don’t want them any more, or Emacs can delete them automatically.
For performance, the operating system may not write the backup file’s contents to secondary storage immediately, or may alias the backup data with the original until one or the other is later modified. See Files and Secondary Storage.
This function makes a backup of the file visited by the current
buffer, if appropriate. It is called by save-buffer
before
saving the buffer the first time.
If a backup was made by renaming, the return value is a cons cell of
the form (modes extra-alist backupname), where
modes are the mode bits of the original file, as returned by
file-modes
(see Testing Accessibility), extra-alist
is an alist describing the original file’s extended attributes, as
returned by file-extended-attributes
(see Extended File Attributes), and backupname is the name of the backup.
In all other cases (i.e., if a backup was made by copying or if no
backup was made), this function returns nil
.
This buffer-local variable says whether this buffer’s file has
been backed up on account of this buffer. If it is non-nil
,
the backup file has been written. Otherwise, the file should be backed
up when it is next saved (if backups are enabled). This is a
permanent local; kill-all-local-variables
does not alter it.
This variable determines whether or not to make backup files. If it
is non-nil
, then Emacs creates a backup of each file when it is
saved for the first time—provided that backup-inhibited
is nil
(see below).
The following example shows how to change the make-backup-files
variable only in the Rmail buffers and not elsewhere. Setting it
nil
stops Emacs from making backups of these files, which may
save disk space. (You would put this code in your init file.)
(add-hook 'rmail-mode-hook (lambda () (setq-local make-backup-files nil)))
This variable’s value is a function to be called on certain occasions to
decide whether a file should have backup files. The function receives
one argument, an absolute file name to consider. If the function returns
nil
, backups are disabled for that file. Otherwise, the other
variables in this section say whether and how to make backups.
The default value is normal-backup-enable-predicate
, which checks
for files in temporary-file-directory
and
small-temporary-file-directory
.
If this variable is non-nil
, backups are inhibited. It records
the result of testing backup-enable-predicate
on the visited file
name. It can also coherently be used by other mechanisms that inhibit
backups based on which file is visited. For example, VC sets this
variable non-nil
to prevent making backups for files managed
with a version control system.
This is a permanent local, so that changing the major mode does not lose
its value. Major modes should not set this variable—they should set
make-backup-files
instead.
This variable’s value is an alist of filename patterns and backup directories. Each element looks like
(regexp . directory)
Backups of files with names matching regexp will be made in directory. directory may be relative or absolute. If it is absolute, so that all matching files are backed up into the same directory, the file names in this directory will be the full name of the file backed up with all directory separators changed to ‘!’ to prevent clashes. This will not work correctly if your filesystem truncates the resulting name.
For the common case of all backups going into one directory, the alist should contain a single element pairing ‘"."’ with the appropriate directory.
If this variable is nil
(the default), or it fails to match a
filename, the backup is made in the original file’s directory.
On MS-DOS filesystems without long names this variable is always ignored.
This variable’s value is a function to use for making backup file names.
The function make-backup-file-name
calls it.
See Naming Backup Files.
This could be buffer-local to do something special for specific
files. If you change it, you may need to change
backup-file-name-p
and file-name-sans-versions
too.
There are two ways that Emacs can make a backup file:
The first method, renaming, is the default.
The variable backup-by-copying
, if non-nil
, says to use
the second method, which is to copy the original file and overwrite it
with the new buffer contents. The variable file-precious-flag
,
if non-nil
, also has this effect (as a sideline of its main
significance). See Saving Buffers.
If this variable is non-nil
, Emacs always makes backup files by
copying. The default is nil
.
The following three variables, when non-nil
, cause the second
method to be used in certain special cases. They have no effect on the
treatment of files that don’t fall into the special cases.
If this variable is non-nil
, Emacs makes backups by copying for
files with multiple names (hard links). The default is nil
.
This variable is significant only if backup-by-copying
is
nil
, since copying is always used when that variable is
non-nil
.
If this variable is non-nil
(the default), Emacs makes backups
by copying in cases where renaming would change either the owner or
the group of the file.
The value has no effect when renaming would not alter the owner or group of the file; that is, for files which are owned by the user and whose group matches the default for a new file created there by the user.
This variable is significant only if backup-by-copying
is
nil
, since copying is always used when that variable is
non-nil
.
This variable, if non-nil
, specifies the same behavior as
backup-by-copying-when-mismatch
, but only for certain user-id
and group-id values: namely, those less than or equal to a certain number.
You set this variable to that number.
Thus, if you set backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch
to 0, backup by copying is done for the superuser and group 0 only,
when necessary to prevent a change in the owner of the file.
The default is 200.
If a file’s name is foo, the names of its numbered backup versions are foo.~v~, for various integers v, like this: foo.~1~, foo.~2~, foo.~3~, …, foo.~259~, and so on.
This variable controls whether to make a single non-numbered backup file or multiple numbered backups.
nil
Make numbered backups if the visited file already has numbered backups; otherwise, do not. This is the default.
never
Do not make numbered backups.
Make numbered backups.
The use of numbered backups ultimately leads to a large number of backup versions, which must then be deleted. Emacs can do this automatically or it can ask the user whether to delete them.
The value of this variable is the number of newest versions to keep when a new numbered backup is made. The newly made backup is included in the count. The default value is 2.
The value of this variable is the number of oldest versions to keep when a new numbered backup is made. The default value is 2.
If there are backups numbered 1, 2, 3, 5, and 7, and both of these
variables have the value 2, then the backups numbered 1 and 2 are kept
as old versions and those numbered 5 and 7 are kept as new versions;
backup version 3 is excess. The function find-backup-file-name
(see Naming Backup Files) is responsible for determining which backup
versions to delete, but does not delete them itself.
If this variable is t
, then saving a file deletes excess
backup versions silently. If it is nil
, that means
to ask for confirmation before deleting excess backups.
Otherwise, they are not deleted at all.
This variable specifies how many of the newest backup versions to keep
in the Dired command . (dired-clean-directory
). That’s the
same thing kept-new-versions
specifies when you make a new backup
file. The default is 2.
The functions in this section are documented mainly because you can customize the naming conventions for backup files by redefining them. If you change one, you probably need to change the rest.
This function returns a non-nil
value if filename is a
possible name for a backup file. It just checks the name, not whether
a file with the name filename exists.
(backup-file-name-p "foo") ⇒ nil
(backup-file-name-p "foo~") ⇒ 3
The standard definition of this function is as follows:
(defun backup-file-name-p (file) "Return non-nil if FILE is a backup file \ name (numeric or not)..." (string-match "~\\'" file))
Thus, the function returns a non-nil
value if the file name ends
with a ‘~’. (We use a backslash to split the documentation
string’s first line into two lines in the text, but produce just one
line in the string itself.)
This simple expression is placed in a separate function to make it easy to redefine for customization.
This function returns a string that is the name to use for a non-numbered backup file for file filename. On Unix, this is just filename with a tilde appended.
The standard definition of this function, on most operating systems, is as follows:
(defun make-backup-file-name (file) "Create the non-numeric backup file name for FILE..." (concat file "~"))
You can change the backup-file naming convention by redefining this
function. The following example redefines make-backup-file-name
to prepend a ‘.’ in addition to appending a tilde:
(defun make-backup-file-name (filename) (expand-file-name (concat "." (file-name-nondirectory filename) "~") (file-name-directory filename)))
(make-backup-file-name "backups.texi") ⇒ ".backups.texi~"
Some parts of Emacs, including some Dired commands, assume that backup file names end with ‘~’. If you do not follow that convention, it will not cause serious problems, but these commands may give less-than-desirable results.
This function computes the file name for a new backup file for
filename. It may also propose certain existing backup files for
deletion. find-backup-file-name
returns a list whose CAR is
the name for the new backup file and whose CDR is a list of backup
files whose deletion is proposed. The value can also be nil
,
which means not to make a backup.
Two variables, kept-old-versions
and kept-new-versions
,
determine which backup versions should be kept. This function keeps
those versions by excluding them from the CDR of the value.
See Making and Deleting Numbered Backup Files.
In this example, the value says that ~rms/foo.~5~ is the name to use for the new backup file, and ~rms/foo.~3~ is an excess version that the caller should consider deleting now.
(find-backup-file-name "~rms/foo") ⇒ ("~rms/foo.~5~" "~rms/foo.~3~")
This function returns a list of all the backup file names for
filename, or nil
if there are none. The files are sorted
by modification time, descending, so that the most recent files are
first.
This function returns the first element of the list returned by
file-backup-file-names
.
Some file comparison commands use this function so that they can automatically compare a file with its most recent backup.
Emacs periodically saves all files that you are visiting; this is called auto-saving. Auto-saving prevents you from losing more than a limited amount of work if the system crashes. By default, auto-saves happen every 300 keystrokes, or after around 30 seconds of idle time. See Auto-Saving: Protection Against Disasters in The GNU Emacs Manual, for information on auto-save for users. Here we describe the functions used to implement auto-saving and the variables that control them.
This buffer-local variable is the name of the file used for
auto-saving the current buffer. It is nil
if the buffer
should not be auto-saved.
buffer-auto-save-file-name ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/lewis/#backups.texi#"
This is the mode command for Auto Save mode, a buffer-local minor mode. When Auto Save mode is enabled, auto-saving is enabled in the buffer. The calling convention is the same as for other minor mode commands (see Conventions for Writing Minor Modes).
Unlike most minor modes, there is no auto-save-mode
variable.
Auto Save mode is enabled if buffer-auto-save-file-name
is
non-nil
and buffer-saved-size
(see below) is non-zero.
This variable lists transforms to apply to buffer’s file name before making the auto-save file name.
Each transform is a list of the form (regexp replacement [uniquify])
. regexp is a regular
expression to match against the file name; if it matches,
replace-match
is used to replace the matching part with
replacement. If the optional element uniquify is non-nil
,
the auto-save file name is constructed by concatenating the directory
part of the transformed file name with the buffer’s file name in which
all directory separators were changed to ‘!’ to prevent clashes.
(This will not work correctly if your filesystem truncates the
resulting name.)
If uniquify is one of the members of
secure-hash-algorithms
, Emacs constructs the nondirectory part
of the auto-save file name by applying that secure-hash
to the
buffer file name. This avoids any risk of excessively long file
names.
All the transforms in the list are tried, in the order they are listed. When one transform applies, its result is final; no further transforms are tried.
The default value is set up to put the auto-save files of remote files into the temporary directory (see Generating Unique File Names).
On MS-DOS filesystems without long names this variable is always ignored.
This function returns a non-nil
value if filename is a
string that could be the name of an auto-save file. It assumes
the usual naming convention for auto-save files: a name that
begins and ends with hash marks (‘#’) is a possible auto-save file
name. The argument filename should not contain a directory part.
(make-auto-save-file-name) ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/lewis/#backups.texi#"
(auto-save-file-name-p "#backups.texi#") ⇒ 0
(auto-save-file-name-p "backups.texi") ⇒ nil
This function returns the file name to use for auto-saving the current
buffer. This is just the file name with hash marks (‘#’) prepended
and appended to it. This function does not look at the variable
auto-save-visited-file-name
(described below); callers of this
function should check that variable first.
(make-auto-save-file-name) ⇒ "/xcssun/users/rms/lewis/#backups.texi#"
If this variable is non-nil
, Emacs auto-saves buffers in
the files they are visiting. That is, the auto-save is done in the same
file that you are editing. Normally, this variable is nil
, so
auto-save files have distinct names that are created by
make-auto-save-file-name
.
When you change the value of this variable, the new value does not take
effect in an existing buffer until the next time auto-save mode is
reenabled in it. If auto-save mode is already enabled, auto-saves
continue to go in the same file name until auto-save-mode
is
called again.
Note that setting this variable to a non-nil
value does not
change the fact that auto-saving is different from saving the buffer;
e.g., the hooks described in Saving Buffers are not run
when a buffer is auto-saved.
This function returns t
if the current buffer has been
auto-saved since the last time it was read in or saved.
This function marks the current buffer as auto-saved. The buffer will
not be auto-saved again until the buffer text is changed again. The
function returns nil
.
The value of this variable specifies how often to do auto-saving, in terms of number of input events. Each time this many additional input events are read, Emacs does auto-saving for all buffers in which that is enabled. Setting this to zero disables autosaving based on the number of characters typed.
The value of this variable is the number of seconds of idle time that should cause auto-saving. Each time the user pauses for this long, Emacs does auto-saving for all buffers in which that is enabled. (If the current buffer is large, the specified timeout is multiplied by a factor that increases as the size increases; for a million-byte buffer, the factor is almost 4.)
If the value is zero or nil
, then auto-saving is not done as a
result of idleness, only after a certain number of input events as
specified by auto-save-interval
.
This normal hook is run whenever an auto-save is about to happen.
If this variable is non-nil
, buffers that are visiting files
have auto-saving enabled by default. Otherwise, they do not.
This function auto-saves all buffers that need to be auto-saved. It saves all buffers for which auto-saving is enabled and that have been changed since the previous auto-save.
If any buffers are auto-saved, do-auto-save
normally displays a
message saying ‘Auto-saving...’ in the echo area while
auto-saving is going on. However, if no-message is
non-nil
, the message is inhibited.
If current-only is non-nil
, only the current buffer
is auto-saved.
This function deletes the current buffer’s auto-save file if
delete-auto-save-files
is non-nil
. It is called every
time a buffer is saved.
Unless force is non-nil
, this function only deletes the
file if it was written by the current Emacs session since the last
true save.
This variable is used by the function
delete-auto-save-file-if-necessary
. If it is non-nil
,
Emacs deletes auto-save files when a true save is done (in the visited
file). This saves disk space and unclutters your directory.
This function adjusts the current buffer’s auto-save file name if the visited file name has changed. It also renames an existing auto-save file, if it was made in the current Emacs session. If the visited file name has not changed, this function does nothing.
The value of this buffer-local variable is the length of the current buffer, when it was last read in, saved, or auto-saved. This is used to detect a substantial decrease in size, and turn off auto-saving in response.
If it is −1, that means auto-saving is temporarily shut off in this buffer due to a substantial decrease in size. Explicitly saving the buffer stores a positive value in this variable, thus reenabling auto-saving. Turning auto-save mode off or on also updates this variable, so that the substantial decrease in size is forgotten.
If it is −2, that means this buffer should disregard changes in buffer size; in particular, it should not shut off auto-saving temporarily due to changes in buffer size.
This variable (if non-nil
) specifies a file for recording the
names of all the auto-save files. Each time Emacs does auto-saving, it
writes two lines into this file for each buffer that has auto-saving
enabled. The first line gives the name of the visited file (it’s empty
if the buffer has none), and the second gives the name of the auto-save
file.
When Emacs exits normally, it deletes this file; if Emacs crashes, you
can look in the file to find all the auto-save files that might contain
work that was otherwise lost. The recover-session
command uses
this file to find them.
The default name for this file specifies your home directory and starts with ‘.saves-’. It also contains the Emacs process ID and the host name.
After Emacs reads your init file, it initializes
auto-save-list-file-name
(if you have not already set it
non-nil
) based on this prefix, adding the host name and process
ID. If you set this to nil
in your init file, then Emacs does
not initialize auto-save-list-file-name
.
If you have made extensive changes to a file and then change your mind
about them, you can get rid of them by reading in the previous version
of the file with the revert-buffer
command. See Reverting a Buffer in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This command replaces the buffer text with the text of the visited file on disk. This action undoes all changes since the file was visited or saved.
By default, if the latest auto-save file is more recent than the visited
file, and the argument ignore-auto is nil
,
revert-buffer
asks the user whether to use that auto-save
instead. When you invoke this command interactively, ignore-auto
is t
if there is no numeric prefix argument; thus, the
interactive default is not to check the auto-save file.
Normally, revert-buffer
asks for confirmation before it changes
the buffer; but if the argument noconfirm is non-nil
,
revert-buffer
does not ask for confirmation.
Normally, this command reinitializes the buffer’s major and minor modes
using normal-mode
. But if preserve-modes is
non-nil
, the modes remain unchanged.
Reverting tries to preserve marker positions in the buffer by using the
replacement feature of insert-file-contents
. If the buffer
contents and the file contents are identical before the revert
operation, reverting preserves all the markers. If they are not
identical, reverting does change the buffer; in that case, it preserves
the markers in the unchanged text (if any) at the beginning and end of
the buffer. Preserving any additional markers would be problematic.
When reverting from non-file sources, markers are usually not
preserved, but this is up to the specific revert-buffer-function
implementation.
revert-buffer
binds this variable to a non-nil
value
while it is working.
You can customize how revert-buffer
does its work by setting
the variables described in the rest of this section.
This variable holds a list of files that should be reverted without
query. The value is a list of regular expressions. If the visited file
name matches one of these regular expressions, and the file has changed
on disk but the buffer is not modified, then revert-buffer
reverts the file without asking the user for confirmation.
Some major modes customize revert-buffer
by making
buffer-local bindings for these variables:
The value of this variable is the function to use to revert this
buffer. It should be a function with two optional
arguments to do the work of reverting. The two optional arguments,
ignore-auto and noconfirm, are the arguments that
revert-buffer
received.
Modes such as Dired mode, in which the text being edited does not consist of a file’s contents but can be regenerated in some other fashion, can give this variable a buffer-local value that is a special function to regenerate the contents.
The value of this variable specifies the function to use to
insert the updated contents when reverting this buffer. The function
receives two arguments: first the file name to use; second, t
if
the user has asked to read the auto-save file.
The reason for a mode to change this variable instead of
revert-buffer-function
is to avoid duplicating or replacing the
rest of what revert-buffer
does: asking for confirmation,
clearing the undo list, deciding the proper major mode, and running the
hooks listed below.
This normal hook is run by the default revert-buffer-function
before inserting the modified contents. A custom revert-buffer-function
may or may not run this hook.
This normal hook is run by the default revert-buffer-function
after inserting the modified contents. A custom revert-buffer-function
may or may not run this hook.
Emacs can revert buffers automatically. It does that by default for buffers visiting files. The following describes how to add support for auto-reverting new types of buffers.
First, such buffers must have a suitable revert-buffer-function
and buffer-stale-function
defined.
The value of this variable specifies a function to call to check
whether a buffer needs reverting. The default value only handles
buffers that are visiting files, by checking their modification time.
Buffers that are not visiting files require a custom function of one
optional argument noconfirm. The function should return
non-nil
if the buffer should be reverted. The buffer is
current when this function is called.
While this function is mainly intended for use in auto-reverting, it
could be used for other purposes as well. For instance, if
auto-reverting is not enabled, it could be used to warn the user that
the buffer needs reverting. The idea behind the noconfirm
argument is that it should be t
if the buffer is going to be
reverted without asking the user and nil
if the function is
just going to be used to warn the user that the buffer is out of date.
In particular, for use in auto-reverting, noconfirm is t
.
If the function is only going to be used for auto-reverting, you can
ignore the noconfirm argument.
If you just want to automatically auto-revert every
auto-revert-interval
seconds (like the Buffer Menu), use:
(setq-local buffer-stale-function (lambda (&optional noconfirm) 'fast))
in the buffer’s mode function.
The special return value ‘fast’ tells the caller that the need
for reverting was not checked, but that reverting the buffer is fast.
It also tells Auto Revert not to print any revert messages, even if
auto-revert-verbose
is non-nil
. This is important, as
getting revert messages every auto-revert-interval
seconds can
be very annoying. The information provided by this return value could
also be useful if the function is consulted for purposes other than
auto-reverting.
Once the buffer has a suitable revert-buffer-function
and
buffer-stale-function
, several problems usually remain.
The buffer will only auto-revert if it is marked unmodified. Hence,
you will have to make sure that various functions mark the buffer
modified if and only if either the buffer contains information that
might be lost by reverting, or there is reason to believe that the user
might be inconvenienced by auto-reverting, because he is actively
working on the buffer. The user can always override this by manually
adjusting the modified status of the buffer. To support this, calling
the revert-buffer-function
on a buffer that is marked
unmodified should always keep the buffer marked unmodified.
It is important to assure that point does not continuously jump around as a consequence of auto-reverting. Of course, moving point might be inevitable if the buffer radically changes.
You should make sure that the revert-buffer-function
does not
print messages that unnecessarily duplicate Auto Revert’s own messages,
displayed if auto-revert-verbose
is t
, and effectively
override a nil
value for auto-revert-verbose
. Hence,
adapting a mode for auto-reverting often involves getting rid of such
messages. This is especially important for buffers that automatically
revert every auto-revert-interval
seconds.
If the new auto-reverting is part of Emacs, you should mention it
in the documentation string of global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers
.
Similarly, you should document the additions in the Emacs manual.
A buffer is a Lisp object containing text to be edited. Buffers are used to hold the contents of files that are being visited; there may also be buffers that are not visiting files. While several buffers may exist at one time, only one buffer is designated the current buffer at any time. Most editing commands act on the contents of the current buffer. Each buffer, including the current buffer, may or may not be displayed in any windows.
A buffer is a Lisp object containing text to be edited. Buffers are used to hold the contents of files that are being visited; there may also be buffers that are not visiting files. Although several buffers normally exist, only one buffer is designated the current buffer at any time. Most editing commands act on the contents of the current buffer. Each buffer, including the current buffer, may or may not be displayed in any windows.
Buffers in Emacs editing are objects that have distinct names and hold text that can be edited. Buffers appear to Lisp programs as a special data type. You can think of the contents of a buffer as a string that you can extend; insertions and deletions may occur in any part of the buffer. See Text.
A Lisp buffer object contains numerous pieces of information. Some of this information is directly accessible to the programmer through variables, while other information is accessible only through special-purpose functions. For example, the visited file name is directly accessible through a variable, while the value of point is accessible only through a primitive function.
Buffer-specific information that is directly accessible is stored in
buffer-local variable bindings, which are variable values that are
effective only in a particular buffer. This feature allows each buffer
to override the values of certain variables. Most major modes override
variables such as fill-column
or comment-column
in this
way. For more information about buffer-local variables and functions
related to them, see Buffer-Local Variables.
For functions and variables related to visiting files in buffers, see Visiting Files and Saving Buffers. For functions and variables related to the display of buffers in windows, see Buffers and Windows.
This function returns t
if object is a buffer,
nil
otherwise.
There are, in general, many buffers in an Emacs session. At any time, one of them is designated the current buffer—the buffer in which most editing takes place. Most of the primitives for examining or changing text operate implicitly on the current buffer (see Text).
Normally, the buffer displayed in the selected window
(see Selecting Windows) is the current buffer, but this is not
always so: a Lisp program can temporarily designate any buffer as
current in order to operate on its contents, without changing what is
displayed on the screen. The most basic function for designating a
current buffer is set-buffer
.
This function returns the current buffer.
(current-buffer) ⇒ #<buffer buffers.texi>
This function makes buffer-or-name the current buffer. buffer-or-name must be an existing buffer or the name of an existing buffer. The return value is the buffer made current.
This function does not display the buffer in any window, so the user cannot necessarily see the buffer. But Lisp programs will now operate on it.
When an editing command returns to the editor command loop, Emacs
automatically calls set-buffer
on the buffer shown in the
selected window (see Selecting Windows). This is to prevent
confusion: it ensures that the buffer that the cursor is in, when Emacs
reads a command, is the buffer to which that command applies
(see Command Loop). Thus, you should not use set-buffer
to
switch visibly to a different buffer; for that, use the functions
described in Switching to a Buffer in a Window.
When writing a Lisp function, do not rely on this behavior of the command loop to restore the current buffer after an operation. Editing commands can also be called as Lisp functions by other programs, not just from the command loop; it is convenient for the caller if the subroutine does not change which buffer is current (unless, of course, that is the subroutine’s purpose).
To operate temporarily on another buffer, put the set-buffer
within a save-current-buffer
form. Here, as an example, is a
simplified version of the command append-to-buffer
:
(defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end) "Append the text of the region to BUFFER." (interactive "BAppend to buffer: \nr") (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer))) (save-current-buffer (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)) (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end))))
Here, we bind a local variable to record the current buffer, and then
save-current-buffer
arranges to make it current again later.
Next, set-buffer
makes the specified buffer current, and
insert-buffer-substring
copies the string from the original
buffer to the specified (and now current) buffer.
Alternatively, we can use the with-current-buffer
macro:
(defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end) "Append the text of the region to BUFFER." (interactive "BAppend to buffer: \nr") (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer))) (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end))))
In either case, if the buffer appended to happens to be displayed in some window, the next redisplay will show how its text has changed. If it is not displayed in any window, you will not see the change immediately on the screen. The command causes the buffer to become current temporarily, but does not cause it to be displayed.
If you make local bindings (with let
or function arguments)
for a variable that may also have buffer-local bindings, make sure
that the same buffer is current at the beginning and at the end of the
local binding’s scope. Otherwise you might bind it in one buffer and
unbind it in another!
Do not rely on using set-buffer
to change the current buffer
back, because that won’t do the job if a quit happens while the wrong
buffer is current. For instance, in the previous example, it would
have been wrong to do this:
(let ((oldbuf (current-buffer))) (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)) (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end) (set-buffer oldbuf))
Using save-current-buffer
or with-current-buffer
, as we
did, correctly handles quitting, errors, and throw
, as well as
ordinary evaluation.
The save-current-buffer
special form saves the identity of the
current buffer, evaluates the body forms, and finally restores
that buffer as current. The return value is the value of the last
form in body. The current buffer is restored even in case of an
abnormal exit via throw
or error (see Nonlocal Exits).
If the buffer that used to be current has been killed by the time of
exit from save-current-buffer
, then it is not made current again,
of course. Instead, whichever buffer was current just before exit
remains current.
The with-current-buffer
macro saves the identity of the current
buffer, makes buffer-or-name current, evaluates the body
forms, and finally restores the current buffer. buffer-or-name
must specify an existing buffer or the name of an existing buffer.
The return value is the value of the last form in body. The
current buffer is restored even in case of an abnormal exit via
throw
or error (see Nonlocal Exits).
The with-temp-buffer
macro evaluates the body forms with
a temporary buffer as the current buffer. It saves the identity of
the current buffer, creates a temporary buffer and makes it current,
evaluates the body forms, and finally restores the previous
current buffer while killing the temporary buffer.
By default, undo information (see Undo) is not recorded in the
buffer created by this macro (but body can enable that, if
needed). The temporary buffer also does not run the hooks
kill-buffer-hook
, kill-buffer-query-functions
(see Killing Buffers), and buffer-list-update-hook
(see The Buffer List).
The return value is the value of the last form in body. You can
return the contents of the temporary buffer by using
(buffer-string)
as the last form.
The current buffer is restored even in case of an abnormal exit via
throw
or error (see Nonlocal Exits).
See also with-temp-file
in Writing to Files.
Each buffer has a unique name, which is a string. Many of the functions that work on buffers accept either a buffer or a buffer name as an argument. Any argument called buffer-or-name is of this sort, and an error is signaled if it is neither a string nor a buffer. Any argument called buffer must be an actual buffer object, not a name.
Buffers that are ephemeral and generally uninteresting to the user
have names starting with a space, so that the list-buffers
and
buffer-menu
commands don’t mention them (but if such a buffer
visits a file, it is mentioned). A name starting with
space also initially disables recording undo information; see
Undo.
This function returns the name of buffer as a string. buffer defaults to the current buffer.
If buffer-name
returns nil
, it means that buffer
has been killed. See Killing Buffers.
(buffer-name) ⇒ "buffers.texi"
(setq foo (get-buffer "temp")) ⇒ #<buffer temp>
(kill-buffer foo) ⇒ nil
(buffer-name foo) ⇒ nil
foo ⇒ #<killed buffer>
This function renames the current buffer to newname. An error is signaled if newname is not a string.
Ordinarily, rename-buffer
signals an error if newname is
already in use. However, if unique is non-nil
, it modifies
newname to make a name that is not in use. Interactively, you can
make unique non-nil
with a numeric prefix argument.
(This is how the command rename-uniquely
is implemented.)
This function returns the name actually given to the buffer.
This function returns the buffer specified by buffer-or-name.
If buffer-or-name is a string and there is no buffer with that
name, the value is nil
. If buffer-or-name is a buffer, it
is returned as given; that is not very useful, so the argument is usually
a name. For example:
(setq b (get-buffer "lewis")) ⇒ #<buffer lewis>
(get-buffer b) ⇒ #<buffer lewis>
(get-buffer "Frazzle-nots") ⇒ nil
See also the function get-buffer-create
in Creating Buffers.
This function returns a name that would be unique for a new buffer—but does not create the buffer. It starts with starting-name, and produces a name not currently in use for any buffer by appending a number inside of ‘<…>’. It starts at 2 and keeps incrementing the number until it is not the name of an existing buffer.
If the optional second argument ignore is non-nil
, it
should be a string, a potential buffer name. It means to consider
that potential buffer acceptable, if it is tried, even if it is the
name of an existing buffer (which would normally be rejected). Thus,
if buffers named ‘foo’, ‘foo<2>’, ‘foo<3>’ and
‘foo<4>’ exist,
(generate-new-buffer-name "foo") ⇒ "foo<5>" (generate-new-buffer-name "foo" "foo<3>") ⇒ "foo<3>" (generate-new-buffer-name "foo" "foo<6>") ⇒ "foo<5>"
See the related function generate-new-buffer
in Creating Buffers.
The buffer file name is the name of the file that is visited in
that buffer. When a buffer is not visiting a file, its buffer file name
is nil
. Most of the time, the buffer name is the same as the
nondirectory part of the buffer file name, but the buffer file name and
the buffer name are distinct and can be set independently.
See Visiting Files.
This function returns the absolute file name of the file that
buffer is visiting. If buffer is not visiting any file,
buffer-file-name
returns nil
. If buffer is not
supplied, it defaults to the current buffer.
(buffer-file-name (other-buffer)) ⇒ "/usr/user/lewis/manual/files.texi"
This buffer-local variable contains the name of the file being visited
in the current buffer, or nil
if it is not visiting a file. It
is a permanent local variable, unaffected by
kill-all-local-variables
.
buffer-file-name ⇒ "/usr/user/lewis/manual/buffers.texi"
It is risky to change this variable’s value without doing various other
things. Normally it is better to use set-visited-file-name
(see
below); some of the things done there, such as changing the buffer name,
are not strictly necessary, but others are essential to avoid confusing
Emacs.
This buffer-local variable holds the abbreviated truename of the file
visited in the current buffer, or nil
if no file is visited.
It is a permanent local, unaffected by
kill-all-local-variables
. See Truenames, and
abbreviate-file-name.
This buffer-local variable holds the inode number and device
identifier of the file visited in the current buffer, or nil
if no
file or a nonexistent file is visited. It is a permanent local,
unaffected by kill-all-local-variables
.
The value is normally a list of the form (inodenum
device)
. This tuple uniquely identifies the file among
all files accessible on the system. See the function
file-attributes
, in File Attributes, for more information
about them.
If buffer-file-name
is the name of a symbolic link, then both
inodenum and device refer to the recursive target of the link.
This function returns the buffer visiting file filename. If
there is no such buffer, it returns nil
. The argument
filename, which must be a string, is expanded (see Functions that Expand Filenames), then compared against the visited file names of all live
buffers. Note that the buffer’s buffer-file-name
must match
the expansion of filename exactly. This function will not
recognize other names for the same file.
(get-file-buffer "buffers.texi") ⇒ #<buffer buffers.texi>
In unusual circumstances, there can be more than one buffer visiting the same file name. In such cases, this function returns the first such buffer in the buffer list.
This is like get-file-buffer
, except that it can return any
buffer visiting the file possibly under a different name. That
is, the buffer’s buffer-file-name
does not need to match the
expansion of filename exactly, it only needs to refer to the
same file. If predicate is non-nil
, it should be a
function of one argument, a buffer visiting filename. The
buffer is only considered a suitable return value if predicate
returns non-nil
. If it can not find a suitable buffer to
return, find-buffer-visiting
returns nil
.
If filename is a non-empty string, this function changes the name of the file visited in the current buffer to filename. (If the buffer had no visited file, this gives it one.) The next time the buffer is saved it will go in the newly-specified file.
This command marks the buffer as modified, since it does not (as far as Emacs knows) match the contents of filename, even if it matched the former visited file. It also renames the buffer to correspond to the new file name, unless the new name is already in use.
If filename is nil
or the empty string, that stands for
“no visited file”. In this case, set-visited-file-name
marks
the buffer as having no visited file, without changing the buffer’s
modified flag.
Normally, this function asks the user for confirmation if there
already is a buffer visiting filename. If no-query is
non-nil
, that prevents asking this question. If there already
is a buffer visiting filename, and the user confirms or
no-query is non-nil
, this function makes the new
buffer name unique by appending a number inside of ‘<…>’ to
filename.
If along-with-file is non-nil
, that means to assume that
the former visited file has been renamed to filename. In this
case, the command does not change the buffer’s modified flag, nor the
buffer’s recorded last file modification time as reported by
visited-file-modtime
(see Buffer Modification Time). If
along-with-file is nil
, this function clears the recorded
last file modification time, after which visited-file-modtime
returns zero.
When the function set-visited-file-name
is called
interactively, it prompts for filename in the minibuffer.
This buffer-local variable specifies a string to display in a buffer listing where the visited file name would go, for buffers that don’t have a visited file name. Dired buffers use this variable.
Emacs keeps a flag called the modified flag for each buffer, to
record whether you have changed the text of the buffer. This flag is
set to t
whenever you alter the contents of the buffer, and
cleared to nil
when you save it. Thus, the flag shows whether
there are unsaved changes. The flag value is normally shown in the mode
line (see Variables Used in the Mode Line), and controls saving (see Saving Buffers) and auto-saving (see Auto-Saving).
Some Lisp programs set the flag explicitly. For example, the function
set-visited-file-name
sets the flag to t
, because the text
does not match the newly-visited file, even if it is unchanged from the
file formerly visited.
The functions that modify the contents of buffers are described in Text.
This function returns non-nil
if buffer has
been modified since it was last read in from a file or saved, or
nil
otherwise. If buffer has been auto-saved since the
time it was last modified, this function returns the symbol
autosaved
. If buffer is nil
or omitted, it
defaults to the current buffer.
This function marks the current buffer as modified if flag is
non-nil
, or as unmodified if the flag is nil
.
Another effect of calling this function is to cause unconditional
redisplay of the mode line for the current buffer. In fact, the
function force-mode-line-update
works by doing this:
(set-buffer-modified-p (buffer-modified-p))
Like set-buffer-modified-p
, but does not force redisplay of
mode lines. This function also allows flag’s value to be
the symbol autosaved
, which marks the buffer as modified and
auto-saved after the last modification.
This command marks the current buffer as unmodified, and not needing
to be saved. If arg is non-nil
, it marks the buffer as
modified, so that it will be saved at the next suitable occasion.
Interactively, arg is the prefix argument.
Don’t use this function in programs, since it prints a message in the
echo area; use set-buffer-modified-p
(above) instead.
This function returns buffer’s modification-count. This is a
counter that increments every time the buffer is modified. If
buffer is nil
(or omitted), the current buffer is used.
This function returns buffer’s character-change modification-count.
Changes to text properties leave this counter unchanged; however, each
time text is inserted or removed from the buffer, the counter is reset
to the value that would be returned by buffer-modified-tick
.
By comparing the values returned by two buffer-chars-modified-tick
calls, you can tell whether a character change occurred in that buffer
in between the calls. If buffer is nil
(or omitted), the
current buffer is used.
Sometimes there’s a need for modifying buffer in a way that doesn’t
really change its text, like if only its text properties are changed.
If your program needs to modify a buffer without triggering any hooks
and features that react to buffer modifications, use the
with-silent-modifications
macro.
Execute body pretending it does not modify the buffer. This includes checking whether the buffer’s file is locked (see File Locks), running buffer modification hooks (see Change Hooks), etc. Note that if body actually modifies the buffer text (as opposed to its text properties), its undo data may become corrupted.
Suppose that you visit a file and make changes in its buffer, and meanwhile the file itself is changed on disk. At this point, saving the buffer would overwrite the changes in the file. Occasionally this may be what you want, but usually it would lose valuable information. Emacs therefore checks the file’s modification time using the functions described below before saving the file. (See File Attributes, for how to examine a file’s modification time.)
This function compares what buffer (by default, the current-buffer) has recorded for the modification time of its visited file against the actual modification time of the file as recorded by the operating system. The two should be the same unless some other process has written the file since Emacs visited or saved it.
The function returns t
if the last actual modification time and
Emacs’s recorded modification time are the same, nil
otherwise.
It also returns t
if the buffer has no recorded last
modification time, that is if visited-file-modtime
would return
zero.
It always returns t
for buffers that are not visiting a file,
even if visited-file-modtime
returns a non-zero value. For
instance, it always returns t
for dired buffers. It returns
t
for buffers that are visiting a file that does not exist and
never existed, but nil
for file-visiting buffers whose file has
been deleted.
This function clears out the record of the last modification time of the file being visited by the current buffer. As a result, the next attempt to save this buffer will not complain of a discrepancy in file modification times.
This function is called in set-visited-file-name
and other
exceptional places where the usual test to avoid overwriting a changed
file should not be done.
This function returns the current buffer’s recorded last file modification time, as a Lisp timestamp (see Time of Day).
If the buffer has no recorded last modification time, this function
returns zero. This case occurs, for instance, if the buffer is not
visiting a file or if the time has been explicitly cleared by
clear-visited-file-modtime
. Note, however, that
visited-file-modtime
returns a timestamp for some non-file buffers
too. For instance, in a Dired buffer listing a directory, it returns
the last modification time of that directory, as recorded by Dired.
If the buffer is visiting a file that doesn’t exist, this function returns −1.
This function updates the buffer’s record of the last modification time
of the visited file, to the value specified by time if time
is not nil
, and otherwise to the last modification time of the
visited file.
If time is neither nil
nor an integer flag returned
by visited-file-modtime
, it should be a Lisp time value
(see Time of Day).
This function is useful if the buffer was not read from the file normally, or if the file itself has been changed for some known benign reason.
This function is used to ask a user how to proceed after an attempt to modify a buffer visiting file filename when the file is newer than the buffer text. Emacs detects this because the modification time of the file on disk is newer than the last save-time and its contents have changed. This means some other program has probably altered the file.
Depending on the user’s answer, the function may return normally, in
which case the modification of the buffer proceeds, or it may signal a
file-supersession
error with data (filename)
, in which
case the proposed buffer modification is not allowed.
This function is called automatically by Emacs on the proper occasions. It exists so you can customize Emacs by redefining it. See the file userlock.el for the standard definition.
See also the file locking mechanism in File Locks.
If a buffer is read-only, then you cannot change its contents, although you may change your view of the contents by scrolling and narrowing.
Read-only buffers are used in two kinds of situations:
Here, the purpose is to inform the user that editing the buffer with the aim of saving it in the file may be futile or undesirable. The user who wants to change the buffer text despite this can do so after clearing the read-only flag with C-x C-q.
The special commands of these modes bind buffer-read-only
to
nil
(with let
) or bind inhibit-read-only
to
t
around the places where they themselves change the text.
This buffer-local variable specifies whether the buffer is read-only.
The buffer is read-only if this variable is non-nil
. However,
characters that have the inhibit-read-only
text property can
still be modified. See inhibit-read-only.
If this variable is non-nil
, then read-only buffers and,
depending on the actual value, some or all read-only characters may be
modified. Read-only characters in a buffer are those that have a
non-nil
read-only
text property. See Properties with Special Meanings, for more information about text properties.
If inhibit-read-only
is t
, all read-only
character
properties have no effect. If inhibit-read-only
is a list, then
read-only
character properties have no effect if they are members
of the list (comparison is done with eq
).
This is the mode command for Read Only minor mode, a buffer-local
minor mode. When the mode is enabled, buffer-read-only
is
non-nil
in the buffer; when disabled, buffer-read-only
is nil
in the buffer. The calling convention is the same as
for other minor mode commands (see Conventions for Writing Minor Modes).
This minor mode mainly serves as a wrapper for
buffer-read-only
; unlike most minor modes, there is no separate
read-only-mode
variable. Even when Read Only mode is disabled,
characters with non-nil
read-only
text properties remain
read-only. To temporarily ignore all read-only states, bind
inhibit-read-only
, as described above.
When enabling Read Only mode, this mode command also enables View mode
if the option view-read-only
is non-nil
. See Miscellaneous Buffer Operations in The GNU Emacs Manual.
When disabling Read Only mode, it disables View mode if View mode was
enabled.
This function signals a buffer-read-only
error if the current
buffer is read-only. If the text at position (which defaults to
point) has the inhibit-read-only
text property set, the error
will not be raised.
See Using interactive
, for another way to signal an error if the
current buffer is read-only.
The buffer list is a list of all live buffers. The order of the
buffers in this list is based primarily on how recently each buffer has
been displayed in a window. Several functions, notably
other-buffer
, use this ordering. A buffer list displayed for the
user also follows this order.
Creating a buffer adds it to the end of the buffer list, and killing
a buffer removes it from that list. A buffer moves to the front of
this list whenever it is chosen for display in a window
(see Switching to a Buffer in a Window) or a window displaying it is selected
(see Selecting Windows). A buffer moves to the end of the list
when it is buried (see bury-buffer
, below). There are no
functions available to the Lisp programmer which directly manipulate
the buffer list.
In addition to the fundamental buffer list just described, Emacs
maintains a local buffer list for each frame, in which the buffers that
have been displayed (or had their windows selected) in that frame come
first. (This order is recorded in the frame’s buffer-list
frame
parameter; see Buffer Parameters.) Buffers never displayed in
that frame come afterward, ordered according to the fundamental buffer
list.
This function returns the buffer list, including all buffers, even those whose names begin with a space. The elements are actual buffers, not their names.
If frame is a frame, this returns frame’s local buffer list.
If frame is nil
or omitted, the fundamental buffer list is
used: the buffers appear in order of most recent display or selection,
regardless of which frames they were displayed on.
(buffer-list) ⇒ (#<buffer buffers.texi> #<buffer *Minibuf-1*> #<buffer buffer.c> #<buffer *Help*> #<buffer TAGS>)
;; Note that the name of the minibuffer ;; begins with a space! (mapcar #'buffer-name (buffer-list)) ⇒ ("buffers.texi" " *Minibuf-1*" "buffer.c" "*Help*" "TAGS")
The list returned by buffer-list
is constructed specifically;
it is not an internal Emacs data structure, and modifying it has no
effect on the order of buffers. If you want to change the order of
buffers in the fundamental buffer list, here is an easy way:
(defun reorder-buffer-list (new-list) (while new-list (bury-buffer (car new-list)) (setq new-list (cdr new-list))))
With this method, you can specify any order for the list, but there is no danger of losing a buffer or adding something that is not a valid live buffer.
To change the order or value of a specific frame’s buffer list, set
that frame’s buffer-list
parameter with
modify-frame-parameters
(see Access to Frame Parameters).
This function returns the first buffer in the buffer list other than buffer. Usually, this is the buffer appearing in the most recently selected window (in frame frame or else the selected frame, see Input Focus), aside from buffer. Buffers whose names start with a space are not considered at all.
If buffer is not supplied (or if it is not a live buffer), then
other-buffer
returns the first buffer in the selected frame’s
local buffer list. (If frame is non-nil
, it returns the
first buffer in frame’s local buffer list instead.)
If frame has a non-nil
buffer-predicate
parameter,
then other-buffer
uses that predicate to decide which buffers to
consider. It calls the predicate once for each buffer, and if the value
is nil
, that buffer is ignored. See Buffer Parameters.
If visible-ok is nil
, other-buffer
avoids returning
a buffer visible in any window on any visible frame, except as a last
resort. If visible-ok is non-nil
, then it does not matter
whether a buffer is displayed somewhere or not.
If no suitable buffer exists, the buffer *scratch* is returned (and created, if necessary).
This function returns the last buffer in frame’s buffer list other
than buffer. If frame is omitted or nil
, it uses the
selected frame’s buffer list.
The argument visible-ok is handled as with other-buffer
,
see above. If no suitable buffer can be found, the buffer
*scratch* is returned.
This command puts buffer-or-name at the end of the buffer list,
without changing the order of any of the other buffers on the list.
This buffer therefore becomes the least desirable candidate for
other-buffer
to return. The argument can be either a buffer
itself or the name of one.
This function operates on each frame’s buffer-list
parameter as
well as the fundamental buffer list; therefore, the buffer that you bury
will come last in the value of (buffer-list frame)
and in
the value of (buffer-list)
. In addition, it also puts the buffer
at the end of the list of buffers of the selected window (see Window History) provided it is shown in that window.
If buffer-or-name is nil
or omitted, this means to bury the
current buffer. In addition, if the current buffer is displayed in the
selected window (see Selecting Windows), this makes sure that the
window is either deleted or another buffer is shown in it. More
precisely, if the selected window is dedicated (see Dedicated Windows) and there are other windows on its frame, the window is
deleted. If it is the only window on its frame and that frame is not
the only frame on its terminal, the frame is dismissed by calling the
function specified by frame-auto-hide-function
(see Quitting Windows). Otherwise, it calls switch-to-prev-buffer
(see Window History) to show another buffer in that window. If
buffer-or-name is displayed in some other window, it remains
displayed there.
To replace a buffer in all the windows that display it, use
replace-buffer-in-windows
, See Buffers and Windows.
This command switches to the last buffer in the local buffer list of
the selected frame. More precisely, it calls the function
switch-to-buffer
(see Switching to a Buffer in a Window), to display the
buffer returned by last-buffer
(see above), in the selected
window.
This is a normal hook run whenever the buffer list changes. Functions
(implicitly) running this hook are get-buffer-create
(see Creating Buffers), rename-buffer
(see Buffer Names), kill-buffer
(see Killing Buffers),
bury-buffer
(see above), and select-window
(see Selecting Windows). This hook is not run for internal or
temporary buffers created by get-buffer-create
or
generate-new-buffer
with a non-nil
argument
inhibit-buffer-hooks.
Functions run by this hook should avoid calling select-window
with a nil
norecord argument since this may lead to
infinite recursion.
This function checks if a buffer designated by buffer-or-name
satisfies the specified condition. Optional third argument
arg is passed to the predicate function in condition. A
valid condition can be one of the following:
nil
if the buffer
matches. If the function expects one argument, it is called with
buffer-or-name as the argument; if it expects 2 arguments, the
first argument is buffer-or-name and the second is arg
(or nil
if arg is omitted).
(oper . expr)
where oper is one
of
(not cond)
Satisfied if cond doesn’t satisfy buffer-match-p
with
the same buffer and arg
.
(or conds…)
Satisfied if any condition in conds satisfies
buffer-match-p
, with the same buffer and arg
.
(and conds…)
Satisfied if all the conditions in conds satisfy
buffer-match-p
, with the same buffer and arg
.
derived-mode
Satisfied if the buffer’s major mode derives from expr. Note
that this condition might fail to report a match if
buffer-match-p
is invoked before the major mode of the buffer
has been established.
major-mode
Satisfied if the buffer’s major mode is equal to expr. Prefer
using derived-mode
instead, when both can work. Note that this
condition might fail to report a match if buffer-match-p
is
invoked before the major mode of the buffer has been established.
""
(empty
string) or (and)
(empty conjunction).
This function returns a list of all buffers that satisfy the
condition. If no buffers match, the function returns
nil
. The argument condition is as defined in
buffer-match-p
above. By default, all the buffers are
considered, but this can be restricted via the optional argument
buffer-list
, which should be a list of buffers to consider.
Optional third argument arg will be passed to condition in
the same way as buffer-match-p
does.
This section describes the two primitives for creating buffers.
get-buffer-create
creates a buffer if it finds no existing
buffer with the specified name; generate-new-buffer
always
creates a new buffer and gives it a unique name.
Both functions accept an optional argument inhibit-buffer-hooks.
If it is non-nil
, the buffer they create does not run the hooks
kill-buffer-hook
, kill-buffer-query-functions
(see Killing Buffers), and buffer-list-update-hook
(see The Buffer List). This avoids slowing down internal or temporary
buffers that are never presented to users or passed on to other
applications.
Other functions you can use to create buffers include
with-output-to-temp-buffer
(see Temporary Displays) and
create-file-buffer
(see Visiting Files). Starting a
subprocess can also create a buffer (see Processes).
This function returns a buffer named buffer-or-name. The buffer returned does not become the current buffer—this function does not change which buffer is current.
buffer-or-name must be either a string or an existing buffer. If
it is a string and a live buffer with that name already exists,
get-buffer-create
returns that buffer. If no such buffer exists,
it creates a new buffer. If buffer-or-name is a buffer instead of
a string, it is returned as given, even if it is dead.
(get-buffer-create "foo") ⇒ #<buffer foo>
The major mode for a newly created buffer is set to Fundamental mode.
(The default value of the variable major-mode
is handled at a higher
level; see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode.) If the name begins with a space, the
buffer initially disables undo information recording (see Undo).
This function returns a newly created, empty buffer, but does not make
it current. The name of the buffer is generated by passing name
to the function generate-new-buffer-name
(see Buffer Names). Thus, if there is no buffer named name, then that is
the name of the new buffer; if that name is in use, a suffix of the
form ‘<n>’, where n is an integer, is appended to
name.
An error is signaled if name is not a string.
(generate-new-buffer "bar") ⇒ #<buffer bar>
(generate-new-buffer "bar") ⇒ #<buffer bar<2>>
(generate-new-buffer "bar") ⇒ #<buffer bar<3>>
The major mode for the new buffer is set to Fundamental mode. The default
value of the variable major-mode
is handled at a higher level.
See How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode.
Killing a buffer makes its name unknown to Emacs and makes the memory space it occupied available for other use.
The buffer object for the buffer that has been killed remains in
existence as long as anything refers to it, but it is specially marked
so that you cannot make it current or display it. Killed buffers retain
their identity, however; if you kill two distinct buffers, they remain
distinct according to eq
although both are dead.
If you kill a buffer that is current or displayed in a window, Emacs automatically selects or displays some other buffer instead. This means that killing a buffer can change the current buffer. Therefore, when you kill a buffer, you should also take the precautions associated with changing the current buffer (unless you happen to know that the buffer being killed isn’t current). See The Current Buffer.
If you kill a buffer that is the base buffer of one or more indirect buffers (see Indirect Buffers), the indirect buffers are automatically killed as well.
The buffer-name
of a buffer is nil
if, and only if,
the buffer is killed. A buffer that has not been killed is called a
live buffer. To test whether a buffer is live or killed, use
the function buffer-live-p
(see below).
This function kills the buffer buffer-or-name, freeing all its
memory for other uses or to be returned to the operating system. If
buffer-or-name is nil
or omitted, it kills the current
buffer.
Any processes that have this buffer as the process-buffer
are
sent the SIGHUP
(hangup) signal, which normally causes them
to terminate. See Sending Signals to Processes.
If the buffer is visiting a file and contains unsaved changes,
kill-buffer
asks the user to confirm before the buffer is killed.
It does this even if not called interactively. To prevent the request
for confirmation, clear the modified flag before calling
kill-buffer
. See Buffer Modification.
This function calls replace-buffer-in-windows
for cleaning up
all windows currently displaying the buffer to be killed.
Killing a buffer that is already dead has no effect.
This function returns t
if it actually killed the buffer. It
returns nil
if the user refuses to confirm or if
buffer-or-name was already dead.
(kill-buffer "foo.unchanged") ⇒ t (kill-buffer "foo.changed") ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Buffer foo.changed modified; kill anyway? (yes or no) yes ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- ⇒ t
Before confirming unsaved changes, kill-buffer
calls the functions
in the list kill-buffer-query-functions
, in order of appearance,
with no arguments. The buffer being killed is the current buffer when
they are called. The idea of this feature is that these functions will
ask for confirmation from the user. If any of them returns nil
,
kill-buffer
spares the buffer’s life.
This hook is not run for internal or temporary buffers created by
get-buffer-create
or generate-new-buffer
with a
non-nil
argument inhibit-buffer-hooks.
This is a normal hook run by kill-buffer
after asking all the
questions it is going to ask, just before actually killing the buffer.
The buffer to be killed is current when the hook functions run.
See Hooks. This variable is a permanent local, so its local binding
is not cleared by changing major modes.
This hook is not run for internal or temporary buffers created by
get-buffer-create
or generate-new-buffer
with a
non-nil
argument inhibit-buffer-hooks.
This variable, if non-nil
in a particular buffer, tells
save-buffers-kill-emacs
to offer to save that buffer, just as
it offers to save file-visiting buffers. If save-some-buffers
is called with the second optional argument set to t
, it will
also offer to save the buffer. Lastly, if this variable is set to the
symbol always
, both save-buffers-kill-emacs
and
save-some-buffers
will always offer to save. See Definition of save-some-buffers. The variable buffer-offer-save
automatically becomes buffer-local when set for any reason.
See Buffer-Local Variables.
This variable, if non-nil
in a particular buffer, tells
save-buffers-kill-emacs
and save-some-buffers
to save
this buffer (if it’s modified) without asking the user. The variable
automatically becomes buffer-local when set for any reason.
This function returns t
if object is a live buffer (a
buffer which has not been killed), nil
otherwise.
An indirect buffer shares the text of some other buffer, which is called the base buffer of the indirect buffer. In some ways it is the analogue, for buffers, of a symbolic link among files. The base buffer may not itself be an indirect buffer.
The text of the indirect buffer is always identical to the text of its base buffer; changes made by editing either one are visible immediately in the other. This includes the text properties as well as the characters themselves.
In all other respects, the indirect buffer and its base buffer are completely separate. They have different names, independent values of point, independent narrowing, independent markers and overlays (though inserting or deleting text in either buffer relocates the markers and overlays for both), independent major modes, and independent buffer-local variable bindings.
An indirect buffer cannot visit a file, but its base buffer can. If you try to save the indirect buffer, that actually saves the base buffer.
Killing an indirect buffer has no effect on its base buffer. Killing the base buffer effectively kills the indirect buffer in that it cannot ever again be the current buffer.
This creates and returns an indirect buffer named name whose base buffer is base-buffer. The argument base-buffer may be a live buffer or the name (a string) of an existing buffer. If name is the name of an existing buffer, an error is signaled.
If clone is non-nil
, then the indirect buffer originally
shares the state of base-buffer such as major mode, minor
modes, buffer local variables and so on. If clone is omitted
or nil
the indirect buffer’s state is set to the default state
for new buffers.
If base-buffer is an indirect buffer, its base buffer is used as
the base for the new buffer. If, in addition, clone is
non-nil
, the initial state is copied from the actual base
buffer, not from base-buffer.
See Creating Buffers, for the meaning of inhibit-buffer-hooks.
This function creates and returns a new indirect buffer that shares the current buffer’s base buffer and copies the rest of the current buffer’s attributes. (If the current buffer is not indirect, it is used as the base buffer.)
If display-flag is non-nil
, as it always is in
interactive calls, that means to display the new buffer by calling
pop-to-buffer
. If norecord is non-nil
, that means
not to put the new buffer to the front of the buffer list.
This function returns the base buffer of buffer, which defaults
to the current buffer. If buffer is not indirect, the value is
nil
. Otherwise, the value is another buffer, which is never an
indirect buffer.
Specialized modes sometimes need to let the user access from the same buffer several vastly different types of text. For example, you may need to display a summary of the buffer text, in addition to letting the user access the text itself.
This could be implemented with multiple buffers (kept in sync when the user edits the text), or with narrowing (see Narrowing). But these alternatives might sometimes become tedious or prohibitively expensive, especially if each type of text requires expensive buffer-global operations in order to provide correct display and editing commands.
Emacs provides another facility for such modes: you can quickly swap
buffer text between two buffers with buffer-swap-text
. This
function is very fast because it doesn’t move any text, it only
changes the internal data structures of the buffer object to point to
a different chunk of text. Using it, you can pretend that a group of
two or more buffers are actually a single virtual buffer that holds
the contents of all the individual buffers together.
This function swaps the text of the current buffer and that of its argument buffer. It signals an error if one of the two buffers is an indirect buffer (see Indirect Buffers) or is a base buffer of an indirect buffer.
All the buffer properties that are related to the buffer text are
swapped as well: the positions of point and mark, all the markers, the
overlays, the text properties, the undo list, the value of the
enable-multibyte-characters
flag (see enable-multibyte-characters), etc.
Warning: If this function is called from within a
save-excursion
form, the current buffer will be set to
buffer upon leaving the form, since the marker used by
save-excursion
to save the position and buffer will be swapped
as well.
If you use buffer-swap-text
on a file-visiting buffer, you
should set up a hook to save the buffer’s original text rather than
what it was swapped with. write-region-annotate-functions
works for this purpose. You should probably set
buffer-saved-size
to −2 in the buffer, so that changes
in the text it is swapped with will not interfere with auto-saving.
Emacs buffers are implemented using an invisible gap to make insertion and deletion faster. Insertion works by filling in part of the gap, and deletion adds to the gap. Of course, this means that the gap must first be moved to the locus of the insertion or deletion. Emacs moves the gap only when you try to insert or delete. This is why your first editing command in one part of a large buffer, after previously editing in another far-away part, sometimes involves a noticeable delay.
This mechanism works invisibly, and Lisp code should never be affected by the gap’s current location, but these functions are available for getting information about the gap status.
This function returns the current gap position in the current buffer.
This function returns the current gap size of the current buffer.
This chapter describes the functions and variables related to Emacs windows. See Frames, for how windows are assigned an area of screen available for Emacs to use. See Emacs Display, for information on how text is displayed in windows.
A window is an area of the screen that can be used to display a buffer (see Buffers). Windows are grouped into frames (see Frames). Each frame contains at least one window; the user can subdivide a frame into multiple, non-overlapping windows to view several buffers at once. Lisp programs can use multiple windows for a variety of purposes. In Rmail, for example, you can view a summary of message titles in one window, and the contents of the selected message in another window.
Emacs uses the term “window” with a different meaning than in graphical desktop environments and window systems, such as the X Window System. When Emacs is run on X, each graphical X window owned by the Emacs process corresponds to one Emacs frame. When Emacs is run on a text terminal, each Emacs frame fills the entire terminal screen. In either case, the frame may contain one or more Emacs windows. For disambiguation, we use the term window-system window when we mean the window-system window corresponding to an Emacs frame.
Unlike X windows, Emacs windows are tiled; they never overlap within the area of their frame. When a window is created, resized, or deleted, the change in window space is taken from or given to other windows on the same frame, so that the total area of the frame is unchanged.
In Emacs Lisp, windows are represented by a special Lisp object type (see Window Type).
This function returns t
if object is a window (whether or
not it displays a buffer). Otherwise, it returns nil
.
A live window is one that is actually displaying a buffer in a frame.
This function returns t
if object is a live window and
nil
otherwise. A live window is one that displays a buffer.
The windows in each frame are organized into a window tree. See Windows and Frames. The leaf nodes of each window tree are live windows—the ones actually displaying buffers. The internal nodes of the window tree are internal windows, which are not live.
A valid window is one that is either live or internal. A valid window can be deleted, i.e., removed from its frame (see Deleting Windows); then it is no longer valid, but the Lisp object representing it might be still referenced from other Lisp objects. A deleted window may be made valid again by restoring a saved window configuration (see Window Configurations).
You can distinguish valid windows from deleted windows with
window-valid-p
.
This function returns t
if object is a live window, or an
internal window in a window tree. Otherwise, it returns nil
,
including for the case where object is a deleted window.
The following schematic shows the structure of a live window:
____________________________________________ |________________ Tab Line _______________|RD| ^ |______________ Header Line ______________| | | ^ |LS|LM|LF| |RF|RM|RS| | | | | | | | | | | | | | Window | | | | | | | | | Window Body | | | | | Window Body | | | | | Total Height | | | | | | | | | Height | | | | |<- Window Body Width ->| | | | | | v |__|__|__|_______________________|__|__|__| | | |_________ Horizontal Scroll Bar _________| | | |_______________ Mode Line _______________|__| | |_____________ Bottom Divider _______________| v <---------- Window Total Width ------------>
At the center of that window is the body, where the buffer text is displayed. The body can be surrounded by a series of optional areas which we will call window decorations. On the left and right, from innermost to outermost, these are the left and right fringes, denoted by LF and RF (see Fringes); the left and right margins, denoted by LM and RM in the schematic (see Displaying in the Margins); the left or right vertical scroll bar, only one of which is present at any time, denoted by LS and RS (see Scroll Bars); and the right divider, denoted by RD (see Window Dividers). Together these are the window’s left and right decorations.
At the top of the window are the tab line and the header line (see Window Header Lines). The text area of the window includes the header line and the tab line, if they are present in the window. At the bottom of the window are the horizontal scroll bar (see Scroll Bars); the mode line (see Mode Line Format); and the bottom divider (see Window Dividers). Together these form the window’s top and bottom decorations.
There are two special areas omitted in the schematic:
In either case, the resulting artifact is considered part of the window’s body although its screen space cannot be used for displaying buffer text.
Note also, that line numbers (and their surrounding whitespace) as
displayed by display-line-numbers-mode
(see Display Custom in The GNU Emacs Manual) do not count as decorations either; they
are part of the window’s body too.
Internal windows neither show any text nor do they have decorations. Hence, the concept of “body” does not make sense for them. In fact, most functions operating on the body of a window will yield an error when applied to an internal window.
By default, an Emacs frame exhibits one special live window that is used for displaying messages and accepting user input—the minibuffer window (see Minibuffer Windows). Since the minibuffer window is used for displaying text, it has a body but it does not have a tab or header line or any margins. Finally, a tooltip window which is used for displaying a tooltip in a tooltip frame (see Tooltips) has a body too but no decorations at all.
Each window belongs to exactly one frame (see Frames). For all windows belonging to a specific frame, we sometimes also say that these windows are owned by that frame or simply that they are on that frame.
This function returns the specified window’s frame—the frame
that window belongs to. If window is omitted or nil
,
it defaults to the selected window (see Selecting Windows).
This function returns a list of all live windows owned by the specified
frame. If frame is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the selected frame (see Input Focus).
The optional argument minibuffer specifies whether to include the
minibuffer window (see Minibuffer Windows) in that list. If
minibuffer is t
, the minibuffer window is included. If
nil
or omitted, the minibuffer window is included only if it is
active. If minibuffer is neither nil
nor t
, the
minibuffer window is never included.
The optional argument window, if non-nil
, must be a live
window on the specified frame; then window will be the first
element in the returned list. If window is omitted or nil
,
the window selected within frame (see Selecting Windows) is
the first element.
Windows on the same frame are organized into a window tree, whose leaf nodes are the live windows. The internal nodes of a window tree are not live; they exist for the purpose of organizing the relationships between live windows. The root node of a window tree is called the root window. It is either a live window or an internal window. If it is a live window, then the frame has just one window besides the minibuffer window, or the frame is a minibuffer-only frame, see Frame Layout.
A minibuffer window (see Minibuffer Windows) that is not alone on
its frame does not have a parent window, so it strictly speaking is not
part of its frame’s window tree. Nonetheless, it is a sibling window of
the frame’s root window, and thus can be reached from the root window via
window-next-sibling
, see below. Also, the function
window-tree
described at the end of this section lists the
minibuffer window alongside the actual window tree.
This function returns the root window for frame-or-window. The
argument frame-or-window should be either a window or a frame;
if omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected frame. If
frame-or-window is a window, the return value is the root window
of that window’s frame.
When a live window is split (see Splitting Windows), there are two live windows where previously there was one. One of these is represented by the same Lisp window object as the original window, and the other is represented by a newly-created Lisp window object. Both of these live windows become leaf nodes of the window tree, as child windows of a single internal window. If necessary, Emacs automatically creates this internal window, which is also called the parent window, and assigns it to the appropriate position in the window tree. The set of windows that share the same parent are called siblings.
This function returns the parent window of window. If
window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected
window. The return value is nil
if window has no parent
(i.e., it is a minibuffer window or the root window of its frame).
A parent window always has at least two child windows. If this number were to fall to one as a result of window deletion (see Deleting Windows), Emacs automatically deletes the parent window too, and its sole remaining child window takes its place in the window tree.
A child window can be either a live window, or an internal window (which in turn would have its own child windows). Therefore, each internal window can be thought of as occupying a certain rectangular screen area—the union of the areas occupied by the live windows that are ultimately descended from it.
For each internal window, the screen areas of the immediate children are arranged either vertically or horizontally (never both). If the child windows are arranged one above the other, they are said to form a vertical combination; if they are arranged side by side, they are said to form a horizontal combination. Consider the following example:
______________________________________ | ______ ____________________________ | || || __________________________ || || ||| ||| || ||| ||| || ||| ||| || |||____________W4____________||| || || __________________________ || || ||| ||| || ||| ||| || |||____________W5____________||| ||__W2__||_____________W3_____________ | |__________________W1__________________|
The root window of this frame is an internal window, W1. Its child windows form a horizontal combination, consisting of the live window W2 and the internal window W3. The child windows of W3 form a vertical combination, consisting of the live windows W4 and W5. Hence, the live windows in this window tree are W2, W4, and W5.
The following functions can be used to retrieve a child window of an internal window, and the siblings of a child window. Their window argument always defaults to the selected window (see Selecting Windows).
This function returns the topmost child window of window, if
window is an internal window whose children form a vertical
combination. For any other type of window, the return value is
nil
.
This function returns the leftmost child window of window, if
window is an internal window whose children form a horizontal
combination. For any other type of window, the return value is
nil
.
This function returns the first child window of the internal window
window—the topmost child window for a vertical combination, or
the leftmost child window for a horizontal combination. If
window is a live window, the return value is nil
.
This function returns a non-nil
value if and only if
window is part of a vertical combination.
If the optional argument horizontal is non-nil
, this
means to return non-nil
if and only if window is part of
a horizontal combination.
This function returns the next sibling of the specified window. The
return value is nil
if window is the last child of its
parent.
This function returns the previous sibling of the specified window.
The return value is nil
if window is the first child of its
parent.
The functions window-next-sibling
and window-prev-sibling
should not be confused with the functions next-window
and
previous-window
, which return the next and previous window in the
cyclic ordering of windows (see Cyclic Ordering of Windows).
The following functions can be useful to locate a window within its frame.
This function returns the live window at the upper left corner of the
frame specified by frame-or-window. The argument
frame-or-window must denote a window or a live frame and defaults
to the selected frame. If frame-or-window specifies a window,
this function returns the first window on that window’s frame. Under
the assumption that the frame from our canonical example is selected
(frame-first-window)
returns W2.
This function returns t
if window is located at
side of its containing frame. The argument window must be
a valid window and defaults to the selected one. The argument
side can be any of the symbols left
, top
,
right
or bottom
. The default value nil
is
handled like bottom
.
Note that this function disregards the minibuffer window
(see Minibuffer Windows). Hence, with side equal to
bottom
it may return t
also when the minibuffer window
appears right below window.
This function returns the nearest live window in direction
direction as seen from the position of window-point
in
window window. The argument direction must be one of
above
, below
, left
or right
. The optional
argument window must denote a live window and defaults to the
selected one.
This function does not return a window whose no-other-window
parameter is non-nil
(see Window Parameters). If the nearest
window’s no-other-window
parameter is non-nil
, this
function tries to find another window in the indicated direction whose
no-other-window
parameter is nil
. If the optional
argument ignore is non-nil
, a window may be returned even
if its no-other-window
parameter is non-nil
.
If the optional argument sign is a negative number, it means to
use the right or bottom edge of window as reference position
instead of window-point
. If sign is a positive number, it
means to use the left or top edge of window as reference position.
If the optional argument wrap is non-nil
, this means to
wrap direction around frame borders. For example, if window
is at the top of the frame and direction is above
, then
this function usually returns the frame’s minibuffer window if it’s
active and a window at the bottom of the frame otherwise.
If the optional argument minibuf is t
, this function may
return the minibuffer window even when it’s not active. If the
optional argument minibuf is nil
, this means to return
the minibuffer window if and only if it is currently active.
If minibuf is neither nil
nor t
, this function
never returns the minibuffer window. However, if wrap is
non-nil
, it always acts as if minibuf were nil
.
If it doesn’t find a suitable window, this function returns
nil
.
Don’t use this function to check whether there is no window in
direction. Calling window-at-side-p
described above is a
much more efficient way to do that.
The following function retrieves the entire window tree of a frame:
This function returns a list representing the window tree for frame
frame. If frame is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the selected frame.
The return value is a list of the form (root mini)
,
where root represents the window tree of the frame’s root
window, and mini is the frame’s minibuffer window.
If the root window is live, root is that window itself.
Otherwise, root is a list (dir edges w1
w2 ...)
where dir is nil
for a horizontal
combination and t
for a vertical combination, edges gives
the size and position of the combination, and the remaining elements
are the child windows. Each child window may again be a window object
(for a live window) or a list with the same format as above (for an
internal window). The edges element is a list (left
top right bottom)
, similar to the value returned by
window-edges
(see Coordinates and Windows).
In each frame, at any time, exactly one Emacs window is designated
as selected within the frame. For the selected frame, that
window is called the selected window—the one in which most
editing takes place, and in which the cursor for selected windows
appears (see Cursor Parameters). Keyboard input that inserts or
deletes text is also normally directed to this window. The selected
window’s buffer is usually also the current buffer, except when
set-buffer
has been used (see The Current Buffer). As for
non-selected frames, the window selected within the frame becomes the
selected window if the frame is ever selected.
This function returns the selected window (which is always a live window).
The following function explicitly selects a window and its frame.
This function makes window the selected window and the window
selected within its frame, and selects that frame. It also makes
window’s buffer (see Buffers and Windows) current and sets
that buffer’s value of point
to the value of window-point
(see Windows and Point) in window. window must be a live
window. The return value is window.
By default, this function also moves window’s buffer to the front
of the buffer list (see The Buffer List) and makes window the most
recently selected window. If the optional argument norecord is
non-nil
, these additional actions are omitted.
In addition, this function by default also tells the display engine to
update the display of window when its frame gets redisplayed the
next time. If norecord is non-nil
, such updates are
usually not performed. If, however, norecord equals the special
symbol mark-for-redisplay
, the additional actions mentioned above
are omitted but window’s display will be nevertheless updated.
Note that sometimes selecting a window is not enough to show it, or make its frame the top-most frame on display: you may also need to raise the frame or make sure input focus is directed to that frame. See Input Focus.
For historical reasons, Emacs does not run a separate hook whenever a window gets selected. Applications and internal routines often temporarily select a window to perform a few actions on it. They do that either to simplify coding—because many functions by default operate on the selected window when no window argument is specified—or because some functions did not (and still do not) take a window as argument and always operate(d) on the selected window instead. Running a hook every time a window gets selected for a short time and once more when the previously selected window gets restored is not useful.
However, when its norecord argument is nil
,
select-window
updates the buffer list and thus indirectly runs
the normal hook buffer-list-update-hook
(see The Buffer List).
Consequently, that hook provides one way to run a function whenever a
window gets selected more “permanently”.
Since buffer-list-update-hook
is also run by functions that are
not related to window management, it will usually make sense to save the
value of the selected window somewhere and compare it with the value of
selected-window
while running that hook. Also, to avoid false
positives when using buffer-list-update-hook
, it is good practice
that every select-window
call supposed to select a window only
temporarily passes a non-nil
norecord argument. If
possible, the macro with-selected-window
(see below) should be
used in such cases.
Emacs also runs the hook window-selection-change-functions
whenever the redisplay routine detects that another window has been
selected since last redisplay. See Hooks for Window Scrolling and Changes, for a detailed
explanation. window-state-change-functions
(described in the
same section) is another abnormal hook run after a different window
has been selected but is triggered by other window changes as well.
The sequence of calls to select-window
with a non-nil
norecord argument determines an ordering of windows by their
selection or use time, see below. The function get-lru-window
,
for example, can then be used to retrieve the least recently selected
window (see Cyclic Ordering of Windows).
This function returns the window on frame that is selected
within that frame. frame should be a live frame; if omitted or
nil
, it defaults to the selected frame.
This function makes window the window selected within the frame
frame. frame should be a live frame; if nil
, it
defaults to the selected frame. window must denote a live window.
If frame is the selected frame, this makes window the selected window.
If the optional argument norecord is non-nil
, this function
does not alter the ordering of the most recently selected windows, nor
the buffer list.
The following macros are useful to temporarily select a window without affecting the ordering of recently selected windows or the buffer list.
This macro records the selected frame, as well as the selected window of each frame, executes forms in sequence, then restores the earlier selected frame and windows. It also saves and restores the current buffer. It returns the value of the last form in forms.
This macro does not save or restore anything about the sizes, arrangement or contents of windows; therefore, if forms change them, the change persists. If the previously selected window of some frame is no longer live at the time of exit from forms, that frame’s selected window is left alone. If the previously selected window is no longer live, then whatever window is selected at the end of forms remains selected. The current buffer is restored if and only if it is still live when exiting forms.
This macro changes neither the ordering of recently selected windows nor the buffer list.
This macro selects window, executes forms in sequence, then
restores the previously selected window and current buffer. The
ordering of recently selected windows and the buffer list remain
unchanged unless you deliberately change them within forms; for
example, by calling select-window
with argument norecord
nil
. Hence, this macro is the preferred way to temporarily work
with window as the selected window without needlessly running
buffer-list-update-hook
.
Note that this macro temporarily puts the window management code in an
unstable state. In particular, the most recently used window (see below)
will not necessarily match the selected one. Hence, functions like
get-lru-window
and get-mru-window
may return unexpected
results when called from the body of this macro.
This macro executes forms with frame as the selected frame. The value returned is the value of the last form in forms. This macro saves and restores the selected frame, and changes the order of neither the recently selected windows nor the buffers in the buffer list.
This function returns the use time of window window. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
The use time of a window is not really a time value, but an
integer that does increase monotonically with each call of
select-window
with a nil
norecord argument. The
window with the lowest use time is usually called the least recently
used window. The window with the highest use time is called the most
recently used one (see Cyclic Ordering of Windows) and is usually the
selected window unless with-selected-window
has been used.
This function marks window as being the second most recently
used one (after the selected window). It does nothing if window
is the selected window or the selected window does not have the
highest use time among all windows which may happen within the scope
of with-selected-window
.
Sometimes several windows collectively and
cooperatively display a buffer, for example, under the management of
Follow Mode (see (emacs)Follow Mode), where the windows together
display a bigger portion of the buffer than one window could alone.
It is often useful to consider such a window group as a single
entity. Several functions such as window-group-start
(see The Window Start and End Positions) allow you to do this by supplying, as
an argument, one of the windows as a stand-in for the whole group.
When the selected window is a member of a group of windows, this function returns a list of the windows in the group, ordered such that the first window in the list is displaying the earliest part of the buffer, and so on. Otherwise the function returns a list containing just the selected window.
The selected window is considered part of a group when the buffer
local variable selected-window-group-function
is set to a
function. In this case, selected-window-group
calls it with no
arguments and returns its result (which should be the list of windows
in the group).
Emacs provides miscellaneous functions for finding the height and width
of a window. The return value of many of these functions can be
specified either in units of pixels or in units of lines and columns.
On a graphical display, the latter actually correspond to the height and
width of a default character specified by the frame’s default font as
returned by frame-char-height
and frame-char-width
(see Frame Font). Thus, if a window is displaying text with a
different font or size, the reported line height and column width for
that window may differ from the actual number of text lines or columns
displayed within it.
The total height of a window is the number of lines comprising its body and its top and bottom decorations (see Basic Concepts of Emacs Windows).
This function returns the total height, in lines, of the window
window. If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the selected window. If window is an internal window, the return
value is the total height occupied by its descendant windows.
If a window’s pixel height is not an integral multiple of its frame’s default character height, the number of lines occupied by the window is rounded internally. This is done in a way such that, if the window is a parent window, the sum of the total heights of all its child windows internally equals the total height of their parent. This means that although two windows have the same pixel height, their internal total heights may differ by one line. This means also, that if window is vertically combined and has a next sibling, the topmost row of that sibling can be calculated as the sum of this window’s topmost row and total height (see Coordinates and Windows)
If the optional argument round is ceiling
, this
function returns the smallest integer larger than window’s pixel
height divided by the character height of its frame; if it is
floor
, it returns the largest integer smaller than said value;
with any other round it returns the internal value of
windows’s total height.
The total width of a window is the number of columns comprising its body and its left and right decorations (see Basic Concepts of Emacs Windows).
This function returns the total width, in columns, of the window
window. If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the selected window. If window is internal, the return value is
the total width occupied by its descendant windows.
If a window’s pixel width is not an integral multiple of its frame’s
character width, the number of columns occupied by the window is rounded
internally. This is done in a way such that, if the window is a parent
window, the sum of the total widths of all its children internally
equals the total width of their parent. This means that although two
windows have the same pixel width, their internal total widths may
differ by one column. This means also, that if this window is
horizontally combined and has a next sibling, the leftmost column of
that sibling can be calculated as the sum of this window’s leftmost
column and total width (see Coordinates and Windows). The optional
argument round behaves as it does for window-total-height
.
This function returns either the total height in lines or the total
width in columns of the window window. If horizontal is
omitted or nil
, this is equivalent to calling
window-total-height
for window; otherwise it is equivalent
to calling window-total-width
for window. The optional
argument round behaves as it does for window-total-height
.
The following two functions can be used to return the total size of a window in units of pixels.
This function returns the total height of window window in pixels. window must be a valid window and defaults to the selected one.
The return value includes the heights of window’s top and bottom decorations. If window is an internal window, its pixel height is the pixel height of the screen areas spanned by its children.
This function returns the width of window window in pixels. window must be a valid window and defaults to the selected one.
The return value includes the widths of window’s left and right decorations. If window is an internal window, its pixel width is the width of the screen areas spanned by its children.
The following functions can be used to determine whether a given window has any adjacent windows.
This function returns non-nil
if window has no other window
above or below it in its frame. More precisely, this means that the
total height of window equals the total height of the root window
on that frame. The minibuffer window does not count in this regard. If
window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected
window.
This function returns non-nil
if window has no other
window to the left or right in its frame, i.e., its total width equals
that of the root window on that frame. If window is omitted or
nil
, it defaults to the selected window.
The body height of a window is the height of its body, which does not include any of its top or bottom decorations (see Basic Concepts of Emacs Windows).
This function returns the height, in lines, of the body of window
window. If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the selected window; otherwise it must be a live window.
The optional argument pixelwise defines the units to use for the
height. If nil
, return the body height of window in
characters, rounded down to the nearest integer, if necessary. This
means that if a line at the bottom of the text area is only partially
visible, that line is not counted. It also means that the height of a
window’s body can never exceed its total height as returned by
window-total-height
.
If pixelwise is remap
and the default face is remapped
(see Face Remapping), use the remapped face to determine the
character height. For any other non-nil
value, return the
height in pixels.
The body width of a window is the width of its body and of the text area, which does not include any of its left or right decorations (see Basic Concepts of Emacs Windows).
Note that when one or both fringes are removed (by setting their width
to zero), the display engine reserves two character cells, one on each
side of the window, for displaying the continuation and truncation
glyphs, which leaves 2 columns less for text display. (The function
window-max-chars-per-line
, described below, takes this
peculiarity into account.)
This function returns the width, in columns, of the body of window
window. If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the selected window; otherwise it must be a live window.
The optional argument pixelwise defines the units to use for the
width. If nil
, return the body width of window in
characters, rounded down to the nearest integer, if necessary. This
means that if a column on the right of the text area is only partially
visible, that column is not counted. It also means that the width of
a window’s body can never exceed its total width as returned by
window-total-width
.
If pixelwise is remap
and the default face is remapped
(see Face Remapping), use the remapped face to determine the
character width. For any other non-nil
value, return the width
in pixels.
This function returns the body height or body width of window. If
horizontal is omitted or nil
, it is equivalent to calling
window-body-height
for window; otherwise it is equivalent
to calling window-body-width
. In either case, the optional
argument pixelwise is passed to the function called.
The pixel heights of a window’s mode, tab and header line can be retrieved with the functions given below. Their return value is usually accurate unless the window has not been displayed before: In that case, the return value is based on an estimate of the font used for the window’s frame.
This function returns the height in pixels of window’s mode line. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one. If window has no mode line, the return value is zero.
This function returns the height in pixels of window’s tab line. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one. If window has no tab line, the return value is zero.
This function returns the height in pixels of window’s header line. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one. If window has no header line, the return value is zero.
Functions for retrieving the height and/or width of window dividers (see Window Dividers), fringes (see Fringes), scroll bars (see Scroll Bars), and display margins (see Displaying in the Margins) are described in the corresponding sections.
If your Lisp program needs to make layout decisions, you will find the following function useful:
This function returns the number of characters displayed in the
specified face face in the specified window window (which
must be a live window). If face was remapped (see Face Remapping), the information is returned for the remapped face. If
omitted or nil
, face defaults to the default face, and
window defaults to the selected window.
Unlike window-body-width
, this function accounts for the actual
size of face’s font, instead of working in units of the canonical
character width of window’s frame (see Frame Font). It also
accounts for space used by the continuation glyph, if window lacks
one or both of its fringes.
Commands that change the size of windows (see Resizing Windows),
or split them (see Splitting Windows), obey the variables
window-min-height
and window-min-width
, which specify the
smallest allowable window height and width. They also obey the variable
window-size-fixed
, with which a window can be fixed in
size (see Preserving Window Sizes).
This option specifies the minimum total height, in lines, of any window. Its value has to accommodate at least one text line and any top or bottom decorations.
This option specifies the minimum total width, in columns, of any window. Its value has to accommodate at least two text columns and any left or right decorations.
The following function tells how small a specific window can get taking
into account the sizes of its areas and the values of
window-min-height
, window-min-width
and
window-size-fixed
(see Preserving Window Sizes).
This function returns the minimum size of window. window
must be a valid window and defaults to the selected one. The optional
argument horizontal non-nil
means to return the minimum
number of columns of window; otherwise return the minimum number
of window’s lines.
The return value makes sure that all components of window remain
fully visible if window’s size were actually set to it. With
horizontal nil
it includes any top or bottom decorations.
With horizontal non-nil
it includes any left or right
decorations of window.
The optional argument ignore, if non-nil
, means ignore
restrictions imposed by fixed size windows, window-min-height
or
window-min-width
settings. If ignore equals safe
,
live windows may get as small as window-safe-min-height
lines and
window-safe-min-width
columns. If ignore is a window,
ignore restrictions for that window only. Any other non-nil
value means ignore all of the above restrictions for all windows.
The optional argument pixelwise non-nil
means to return the
minimum size of window counted in pixels.
This section describes functions for resizing a window without changing the size of its frame. Because live windows do not overlap, these functions are meaningful only on frames that contain two or more windows: resizing a window also changes the size of at least one other window. If there is just one window on a frame, its size cannot be changed except by resizing the frame (see Frame Size).
Except where noted, these functions also accept internal windows as arguments. Resizing an internal window causes its child windows to be resized to fit the same space.
This function returns delta if the size of window can be
changed vertically by delta lines. If the optional argument
horizontal is non-nil
, it instead returns delta if
window can be resized horizontally by delta columns. It
does not actually change the window size.
If window is nil
, it defaults to the selected window.
A positive value of delta means to check whether the window can be enlarged by that number of lines or columns; a negative value of delta means to check whether the window can be shrunk by that many lines or columns. If delta is non-zero, a return value of 0 means that the window cannot be resized.
Normally, the variables window-min-height
and
window-min-width
specify the smallest allowable window size
(see Window Sizes). However, if the optional argument ignore
is non-nil
, this function ignores window-min-height
and
window-min-width
, as well as window-size-fixed
. Instead,
it considers the minimum height of a window as the sum of its top and
bottom decorations plus the text of one line; and its minimum width
as the sum of its left and right decorations plus text that takes two
columns.
If the optional argument pixelwise is non-nil
,
delta is interpreted as pixels.
This function resizes window by delta increments. If
horizontal is nil
, it changes the height by delta
lines; otherwise, it changes the width by delta columns. A
positive delta means to enlarge the window, and a negative
delta means to shrink it.
If window is nil
, it defaults to the selected window. If
the window cannot be resized as demanded, an error is signaled.
The optional argument ignore has the same meaning as for the
function window-resizable
above.
If the optional argument pixelwise is non-nil
,
delta will be interpreted as pixels.
The choice of which window edges this function alters depends on the
values of the option window-combination-resize
and the
combination limits of the involved windows; in some cases, it may alter
both edges. See Recombining Windows. To resize by moving only the
bottom or right edge of a window, use the function
adjust-window-trailing-edge
.
This function moves window’s bottom edge by delta lines.
If optional argument horizontal is non-nil
, it instead
moves the right edge by delta columns. If window is
nil
, it defaults to the selected window.
If the optional argument pixelwise is non-nil
,
delta is interpreted as pixels.
A positive delta moves the edge downwards or to the right; a negative delta moves it upwards or to the left. If the edge cannot be moved as far as specified by delta, this function moves it as far as possible but does not signal an error.
This function tries to resize windows adjacent to the edge that is moved. If this is not possible for some reason (e.g., if that adjacent window is fixed-size), it may resize other windows.
If the value of this option is non-nil
, Emacs resizes windows in
units of pixels. This currently affects functions like
split-window
(see Splitting Windows), maximize-window
,
minimize-window
, fit-window-to-buffer
,
fit-frame-to-buffer
and
shrink-window-if-larger-than-buffer
(all listed below).
Note that when a frame’s pixel size is not a multiple of its character
size, at least one window may get resized pixelwise even if this
option is nil
. The default value is nil
.
The following commands resize windows in more specific ways. When called interactively, they act on the selected window.
This command adjusts the height or width of window to fit the text
in it. It returns non-nil
if it was able to resize window,
and nil
otherwise. If window is omitted or nil
, it
defaults to the selected window. Otherwise, it should be a live window.
If window is part of a vertical combination, this function adjusts
window’s height. The new height is calculated from the actual
height of the accessible portion of its buffer. The optional argument
max-height, if non-nil
, specifies the maximum total height
that this function can give window. The optional argument
min-height, if non-nil
, specifies the minimum total height
that it can give, which overrides the variable window-min-height
.
Both max-height and min-height are specified in lines and
include any top or bottom decorations of window.
If window is part of a horizontal combination and the value of the
option fit-window-to-buffer-horizontally
(see below) is
non-nil
, this function adjusts window’s width. The new
width of window is calculated from the maximum length of its
buffer’s lines that follow the current start position of window.
The optional argument max-width specifies a maximum width and
defaults to the width of window’s frame. The optional argument
min-width specifies a minimum width and defaults to
window-min-width
. Both max-width and min-width are
specified in columns and include any left or right decorations of
window.
The optional argument preserve-size, if non-nil
, will
install a parameter to preserve the size of window during future
resize operations (see Preserving Window Sizes).
If the option fit-frame-to-buffer
(see below) is non-nil
,
this function will try to resize the frame of window to fit its
contents by calling fit-frame-to-buffer
(see below).
If this is non-nil
, fit-window-to-buffer
can resize
windows horizontally. If this is nil
(the default)
fit-window-to-buffer
never resizes windows horizontally. If this
is only
, it can resize windows horizontally only. Any other
value means fit-window-to-buffer
can resize windows in both
dimensions.
If this option is non-nil
, fit-window-to-buffer
can fit a
frame to its buffer. A frame is fit if and only if its root window is a
live window and this option is non-nil
. If this is
horizontally
, frames are fit horizontally only. If this is
vertically
, frames are fit vertically only. Any other
non-nil
value means frames can be resized in both dimensions.
If you have a frame that displays only one window, you can fit that
frame to its buffer using the command fit-frame-to-buffer
.
This command adjusts the size of frame to display the contents of its buffer exactly. frame can be any live frame and defaults to the selected one. Fitting is done only if frame’s root window is live.
The arguments max-height, min-height, max-width and
min-width, if non-nil
, specify bounds on the new body size
of frame’s root window. A non-nil
value specified by any
of these arguments overrides the corresponding value specified by
the option fit-frame-to-buffer-sizes
described below.
If the optional argument only is vertically
, this function
may resize the frame vertically only. If only is
horizontally
, it may resize the frame horizontally only.
The behavior of fit-frame-to-buffer
can be controlled with the
help of the two options listed next.
This option can be used to specify margins around frames to be fit by
fit-frame-to-buffer
. Such margins can be useful to avoid, for
example, that the resized frame overlaps the taskbar or parts of its
parent frame.
It specifies the numbers of pixels to be left free on the left, above,
the right, and below a frame that shall be fit. The default specifies
nil
for each which means to use no margins. The value specified
here can be overridden for a specific frame by that frame’s
fit-frame-to-buffer-margins
parameter, if present.
This option specifies size boundaries for fit-frame-to-buffer
.
It specifies the maximum and minimum lines and maximum and minimum
columns of the root window’s body of any frame that shall be fit to its
buffer. Any value this option specifies will be overridden by the
corresponding argument of fit-frame-to-buffer
, if non-nil
.
This command attempts to reduce window’s height as much as
possible while still showing its full buffer, but no less than
window-min-height
lines. The return value is non-nil
if
the window was resized, and nil
otherwise. If window is
omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected window. Otherwise,
it should be a live window.
This command does nothing if the window is already too short to display all of its buffer, or if any of the buffer is scrolled off-screen, or if the window is the only live window in its frame.
This command calls fit-window-to-buffer
(see above) to do its
work.
This function balances windows in a way that gives more space to full-width and/or full-height windows. If window-or-frame specifies a frame, it balances all windows on that frame. If window-or-frame specifies a window, it balances only that window and its siblings (see Windows and Frames).
This function attempts to give all windows on the selected frame approximately the same share of the screen area. Full-width or full-height windows are not given more space than other windows.
This function attempts to make window as large as possible, in
both dimensions, without resizing its frame or deleting other windows.
If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected
window.
This function attempts to make window as small as possible, in
both dimensions, without deleting it or resizing its frame. If
window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected
window.
A window can get resized explicitly by using one of the functions from the preceding section or implicitly, for example, when resizing an adjacent window, when splitting or deleting a window (see Splitting Windows, see Deleting Windows) or when resizing the window’s frame (see Frame Size).
It is possible to avoid implicit resizing of a specific window when there are one or more other resizable windows on the same frame. For this purpose, Emacs must be advised to preserve the size of that window. There are two basic ways to do that.
If this buffer-local variable is non-nil
, the size of any window
displaying the buffer cannot normally be changed. Deleting a window or
changing the frame’s size may still change the window’s size, if there
is no choice.
If the value is height
, then only the window’s height is fixed;
if the value is width
, then only the window’s width is fixed.
Any other non-nil
value fixes both the width and the height.
If this variable is nil
, this does not necessarily mean that any
window showing the buffer can be resized in the desired direction. To
determine that, use the function window-resizable
.
See Resizing Windows.
Often window-size-fixed
is overly aggressive because it inhibits
any attempt to explicitly resize or split an affected window as well.
This may even happen after the window has been resized implicitly, for
example, when deleting an adjacent window or resizing the window’s
frame. The following function tries hard to never disallow resizing
such a window explicitly:
This function (un-)marks the height of window window as preserved
for future resize operations. window must be a live window and
defaults to the selected one. If the optional argument horizontal
is non-nil
, it (un-)marks the width of window as preserved.
If the optional argument preserve is t
, this means to
preserve the current height/width of window’s body. The
height/width of window will change only if Emacs has no better
choice. Resizing a window whose height/width is preserved by this
function never throws an error.
If preserve is nil
, this means to stop preserving the
height/width of window, lifting any respective restraint induced
by a previous call of this function for window. Calling
enlarge-window
, shrink-window
or
fit-window-to-buffer
with window as argument may also
remove the respective restraint.
window-preserve-size
is currently invoked by the following
functions:
fit-window-to-buffer
If the optional argument preserve-size of that function
(see Resizing Windows) is non-nil
, the size established by
that function is preserved.
display-buffer
If the alist argument of that function (see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer)
contains a preserve-size
entry, the size of the window produced
by that function is preserved.
window-preserve-size
installs a window parameter (see Window Parameters) called window-preserved-size
which is consulted by the
window resizing functions. This parameter will not prevent resizing the
window when the window shows another buffer than the one when
window-preserve-size
was invoked or if its size has changed since
then.
The following function can be used to check whether the height of a particular window is preserved:
This function returns the preserved height of window window in
pixels. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected
one. If the optional argument horizontal is non-nil
, it
returns the preserved width of window. It returns nil
if
the size of window is not preserved.
This section describes functions for creating a new window by splitting an existing one. Note that some windows are special in the sense that these functions may fail to split them as described here. Examples of such windows are side windows (see Side Windows) and atomic windows (see Atomic Windows).
This function creates a new live window next to the window
window. If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults
to the selected window. That window is split, and reduced in
size. The space is taken up by the new window, which is returned.
The optional second argument size determines the sizes of
window and/or the new window. If it is omitted or nil
,
both windows are given equal sizes; if there is an odd line, it is
allocated to the new window. If size is a positive number,
window is given size lines (or columns, depending on the
value of side). If size is a negative number, the new
window is given −size lines (or columns).
If size is nil
, this function obeys the variables
window-min-height
and window-min-width
(see Window Sizes). Thus, it signals an error if splitting would result in making
a window smaller than those variables specify. However, a
non-nil
value for size causes those variables to be
ignored; in that case, the smallest allowable window is considered to be
one that has space for a text that is one line tall and/or two columns
wide.
Hence, if size is specified, it’s the caller’s responsibility to
check whether the emanating windows are large enough to encompass all of
their decorations like a mode line or a scroll bar. The function
window-min-size
(see Window Sizes) can be used to determine
the minimum requirements of window in this regard. Since the new
window usually inherits areas like the mode line or the scroll bar from
window, that function is also a good guess for the minimum size of
the new window. The caller should specify a smaller size only if it
correspondingly removes an inherited area before the next redisplay.
The optional third argument side determines the position of the
new window relative to window. If it is nil
or
below
, the new window is placed below window. If it is
above
, the new window is placed above window. In both
these cases, size specifies a total window height, in lines.
If side is t
or right
, the new window is placed on
the right of window. If side is left
, the new
window is placed on the left of window. In both these cases,
size specifies a total window width, in columns.
The optional fourth argument pixelwise, if non-nil
, means
to interpret size in units of pixels, instead of lines and
columns.
If window is a live window, the new window inherits various properties from it, including margins and scroll bars. If window is an internal window, the new window inherits the properties of the window selected within window’s frame.
The behavior of this function may be altered by the window parameters
of window, so long as the variable
ignore-window-parameters
is nil
. If the value of
the split-window
window parameter is t
, this function
ignores all other window parameters. Otherwise, if the value of the
split-window
window parameter is a function, that function is
called with the arguments window, size, and side, in
lieu of the usual action of split-window
. Otherwise, this
function obeys the window-atom
or window-side
window
parameter, if any. See Window Parameters.
As an example, here is a sequence of split-window
calls that
yields the window configuration discussed in Windows and Frames.
This example demonstrates splitting a live window as well as splitting
an internal window. We begin with a frame containing a single window
(a live root window), which we denote by W4. Calling
(split-window W4)
yields this window configuration:
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || ||_________________W4_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || ||_________________W5_________________|| |__________________W3__________________|
The split-window
call has created a new live window, denoted by
W5. It has also created a new internal window, denoted by
W3, which becomes the root window and the parent of both
W4 and W5.
Next, we call (split-window W3 nil 'left)
, passing the
internal window W3 as the argument. The result:
______________________________________ | ______ ____________________________ | || || __________________________ || || ||| ||| || ||| ||| || ||| ||| || |||____________W4____________||| || || __________________________ || || ||| ||| || ||| ||| || |||____________W5____________||| ||__W2__||_____________W3_____________ | |__________________W1__________________|
A new live window W2 is created, to the left of the internal window W3. A new internal window W1 is created, becoming the new root window.
For interactive use, Emacs provides two commands which always split
the selected window. These call split-window
internally.
This function splits the window window-to-split into two side-by-side windows, putting window-to-split on the left. window-to-split defaults to the selected window. If size is positive, the left window gets size columns; if size is negative, the right window gets −size columns.
This function splits the window window-to-split into two windows, one above the other, leaving the upper window selected. window-to-split defaults to the selected window. If size is positive, the upper window gets size lines; if size is negative, the lower window gets −size lines.
This function splits the whole frame in two. The current window
configuration is retained on the top, and a new window is created
below, taking up the whole width of the frame. size is treated
as by split-window-below
.
This function splits the whole frame in two. The current window
configuration is retained on the left, and a new window is created on
the right, taking up the whole height of the frame. size is treated
as by split-window-right
.
If the value of this variable is non-nil
(the default),
split-window-below
behaves as described above.
If it is nil
, split-window-below
adjusts point in each
of the two windows to minimize redisplay. (This is useful on slow
terminals.) It selects whichever window contains the screen line that
point was previously on. Note that this only affects
split-window-below
, not the lower-level split-window
function.
Deleting a window removes it from the frame’s window tree. If the window is a live window, it disappears from the screen. If the window is an internal window, its child windows are deleted too.
Even after a window is deleted, it continues to exist as a Lisp object, until there are no more references to it. Window deletion can be reversed, by restoring a saved window configuration (see Window Configurations).
This function removes window from display and returns
nil
. If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the selected window.
If deleting the window would leave no more windows in the window tree (e.g., if it is the only live window in the frame) or all remaining windows on window’s frame are side windows (see Side Windows), an error is signaled. If window is part of an atomic window (see Atomic Windows), this function tries to delete the root of that atomic window instead.
By default, the space taken up by window is given to one of its
adjacent sibling windows, if any. However, if the variable
window-combination-resize
is non-nil
, the space is
proportionally distributed among any remaining windows in the same
window combination. See Recombining Windows.
The behavior of this function may be altered by the window parameters of
window, so long as the variable ignore-window-parameters
is
nil
. If the value of the delete-window
window parameter
is t
, this function ignores all other window parameters.
Otherwise, if the value of the delete-window
window parameter is
a function, that function is called with the argument window, in
lieu of the usual action of delete-window
. See Window Parameters.
When delete-window
deletes the selected window of its frame, it
has to make another window the new selected window of that frame. The
following option allows configuring which window is chosen.
This option allows specifying which window should become a frame’s
selected window after delete-window
has deleted the previously
selected one. Possible choices are
mru
(the default) choose the most recently used window on that frame.
pos
choose the window comprising the frame coordinates of point of the
previously selected window on that frame.
nil
choose the first window (the window returned by
frame-first-window
) on that frame.
A window with a non-nil
no-other-window
parameter is
chosen only if all other windows on that frame have that parameter set
to a non-nil
value too.
This function makes window fill its frame, deleting other
windows as necessary. If window is omitted or nil
, it
defaults to the selected window. An error is signaled if window
is a side window (see Side Windows). If window is part of
an atomic window (see Atomic Windows), this function tries to make
the root of that atomic window fill its frame. The return
value is nil
.
The behavior of this function may be altered by the window parameters of
window, so long as the variable ignore-window-parameters
is
nil
. If the value of the delete-other-windows
window
parameter is t
, this function ignores all other window
parameters. Otherwise, if the value of the delete-other-windows
window parameter is a function, that function is called with the
argument window, in lieu of the usual action of
delete-other-windows
. See Window Parameters.
Also, if ignore-window-parameters
is nil
, this function
does not delete any window whose no-delete-other-windows
parameter is non-nil
.
This function deletes all windows showing buffer-or-name, by
calling delete-window
on those windows. buffer-or-name
should be a buffer, or the name of a buffer; if omitted or nil
,
it defaults to the current buffer. If there are no windows showing
the specified buffer, this function does nothing. If the specified
buffer is a minibuffer, an error is signaled.
If there is a dedicated window showing the buffer, and that window is the only one on its frame, this function also deletes that frame if it is not the only frame on the terminal.
The optional argument frame specifies which frames to operate on:
nil
means operate on all frames.
t
means operate on the selected frame.
visible
means operate on all visible frames.
0
means operate on all visible or iconified frames.
Note that this argument does not have the same meaning as in other
functions which scan all live windows (see Cyclic Ordering of Windows). Specifically, the meanings of t
and nil
here
are the opposite of what they are in those other functions.
When deleting the last sibling of a window W, its parent window is deleted too, with W replacing it in the window tree. This means that W must be recombined with its parent’s siblings to form a new window combination (see Windows and Frames). In some occasions, deleting a live window may even entail the deletion of two internal windows.
______________________________________ | ______ ____________________________ | || || __________________________ || || ||| ___________ ___________ ||| || |||| || |||| || ||||____W6_____||_____W7____|||| || |||____________W4____________||| || || __________________________ || || ||| ||| || ||| ||| || |||____________W5____________||| ||__W2__||_____________W3_____________ | |__________________W1__________________|
Deleting W5 in this configuration normally causes the deletion of W3 and W4. The remaining live windows W2, W6 and W7 are recombined to form a new horizontal combination with parent W1.
Sometimes, however, it makes sense to not delete a parent window like W4. In particular, a parent window should not be removed when it was used to preserve a combination embedded in a combination of the same type. Such embeddings make sense to assure that when you split a window and subsequently delete the new window, Emacs reestablishes the layout of the associated frame as it existed before the splitting.
Consider a scenario starting with two live windows W2 and W3 and their parent W1.
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || || || || || || || ||_________________W2_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W3_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
Split W2 to make a new window W4 as follows.
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W2_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W4_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W3_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
Now, when enlarging a window vertically, Emacs tries to obtain the corresponding space from its lower sibling, provided such a window exists. In our scenario, enlarging W4 will steal space from W3.
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W2_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || || || ||_________________W4_________________|| | ____________________________________ | ||_________________W3_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
Deleting W4 will now give its entire space to W2, including the space earlier stolen from W3.
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||_________________W2_________________|| | ____________________________________ | ||_________________W3_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
This can be counterintuitive, in particular if W4 were used for displaying a buffer only temporarily (see Temporary Displays), and you want to continue working with the initial layout.
The behavior can be fixed by making a new parent window when splitting W2. The variable described next allows that to be done.
This variable controls whether splitting a window shall make a new parent window. The following values are recognized:
nil
This means that the new live window is allowed to share the existing parent window, if one exists, provided the split occurs in the same direction as the existing window combination (otherwise, a new internal window is created anyway).
window-size
This means that display-buffer
makes a new parent window when
it splits a window and is passed a window-height
or
window-width
entry in the alist argument (see Action Functions for Buffer Display). Otherwise, window splitting behaves as
for a value of nil
.
temp-buffer-resize
In this case with-temp-buffer-window
makes a new parent window
when it splits a window and temp-buffer-resize-mode
is enabled
(see Temporary Displays). Otherwise, window splitting behaves as
for nil
.
temp-buffer
In this case with-temp-buffer-window
always makes a new parent
window when it splits an existing window (see Temporary Displays).
Otherwise, window splitting behaves as for nil
.
display-buffer
This means that when display-buffer
(see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer)
splits a window it always makes a new parent window. Otherwise, window
splitting behaves as for nil
.
t
This means that splitting a window always creates a new parent window.
Thus, if the value of this variable is at all times t
, then at
all times every window tree is a binary tree (a tree where each window
except the root window has exactly one sibling).
The default is window-size
. Other values are reserved for future
use.
If, as a consequence of this variable’s setting, split-window
makes a new parent window, it also calls
set-window-combination-limit
(see below) on the newly-created
internal window. This affects how the window tree is rearranged when
the child windows are deleted (see below).
If window-combination-limit
is t
, splitting W2 in
the initial configuration of our scenario would have produced this:
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || __________________________________ || ||| ||| |||________________W2________________||| || __________________________________ || ||| ||| |||________________W4________________||| ||_________________W5_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W3_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
A new internal window W5 has been created; its children are W2 and the new live window W4. Now, W2 is the only sibling of W4, so enlarging W4 will try to shrink W2, leaving W3 unaffected. Observe that W5 represents a vertical combination of two windows embedded in the vertical combination W1.
This function sets the combination limit of the window
window to limit. This value can be retrieved via the
function window-combination-limit
. See below for its effects;
note that it is only meaningful for internal windows. The
split-window
function automatically calls this function, passing
it t
as limit, provided the value of the variable
window-combination-limit
is t
when it is called.
This function returns the combination limit for window.
The combination limit is meaningful only for an internal window. If it
is nil
, then Emacs is allowed to automatically delete
window, in response to a window deletion, in order to group the
child windows of window with its sibling windows to form a new
window combination. If the combination limit is t
, the child
windows of window are never automatically recombined with its
siblings.
If, in the configuration shown at the beginning of this section, the
combination limit of W4 (the parent window of W6 and
W7) is t
, deleting W5 will not implicitly delete
W4 too.
Alternatively, the problems sketched above can be avoided by always resizing all windows in the same combination whenever one of its windows is split or deleted. This also permits splitting windows that would be otherwise too small for such an operation.
If this variable is nil
, split-window
can only split a
window (denoted by window) if window’s screen area is large
enough to accommodate both itself and the new window.
If this variable is t
, split-window
tries to resize all
windows that are part of the same combination as window, in order
to accommodate the new window. In particular, this may allow
split-window
to succeed even if window is a fixed-size
window or too small to ordinarily split. Furthermore, subsequently
resizing or deleting window may resize all other windows in its
combination.
The default is nil
. Other values are reserved for future use. A
specific split operation may ignore the value of this variable if it is
affected by a non-nil
value of window-combination-limit
.
To illustrate the effect of window-combination-resize
, consider
the following frame layout.
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || || || ||_________________W2_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || || || ||_________________W3_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
If window-combination-resize
is nil
, splitting window
W3 leaves the size of W2 unchanged:
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || || || || || ||_________________W2_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || ||_________________W3_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || ||_________________W4_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
If window-combination-resize
is t
, splitting W3
instead leaves all three live windows with approximately the same
height:
______________________________________ | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W2_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W3_________________|| | ____________________________________ | || || || || ||_________________W4_________________|| |__________________W1__________________|
Deleting any of the live windows W2, W3 or W4 will distribute its space proportionally among the two remaining live windows.
When you use the command C-x o (other-window
) to select
some other window, it moves through live windows in a specific order.
For any given configuration of windows, this order never varies. It
is called the cyclic ordering of windows.
The ordering is determined by a depth-first traversal of each frame’s window tree, retrieving the live windows which are the leaf nodes of the tree (see Windows and Frames). If the minibuffer is active, the minibuffer window is included too. The ordering is cyclic, so the last window in the sequence is followed by the first one.
This function returns a live window, the one following window in
the cyclic ordering of windows. window should be a live window;
if omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected window.
The optional argument minibuf specifies whether minibuffer windows
should be included in the cyclic ordering. Normally, when minibuf
is nil
, a minibuffer window is included only if it is currently
active; this matches the behavior of C-x o. (Note that a
minibuffer window is active as long as its minibuffer is in use; see
Minibuffers).
If minibuf is t
, the cyclic ordering includes all
minibuffer windows. If minibuf is neither t
nor
nil
, minibuffer windows are not included even if they are active.
The optional argument all-frames specifies which frames to consider:
nil
means to consider windows on window’s frame. If the minibuffer
window is considered (as specified by the minibuf argument),
then frames that share the minibuffer window are considered too.
t
means to consider windows on all existing frames.
visible
means to consider windows on all visible frames.
If more than one frame is considered, the cyclic ordering is obtained by appending the orderings for those frames, in the same order as the list of all live frames (see Finding All Frames).
This function returns a live window, the one preceding window in
the cyclic ordering of windows. The other arguments are handled like
in next-window
.
This function selects a live window, one count places from the selected window in the cyclic ordering of windows. If count is a positive number, it skips count windows forwards; if count is negative, it skips −count windows backwards; if count is zero, that simply re-selects the selected window. When called interactively, count is the numeric prefix argument.
The optional argument all-frames has the same meaning as in
next-window
, like a nil
minibuf argument to
next-window
.
This function does not select a window that has a non-nil
no-other-window
window parameter (see Window Parameters),
provided that ignore-window-parameters
is nil
.
If the other-window
parameter of the selected window is a
function, and ignore-window-parameters
is nil
, that
function will be called with the arguments count and
all-frames instead of the normal operation of this function.
This function calls the function fun once for each live window, with the window as the argument.
It follows the cyclic ordering of windows. The optional arguments
minibuf and all-frames specify the set of windows
included; these have the same arguments as in next-window
. If
all-frames specifies a frame, the first window walked is the
first window on that frame (the one returned by
frame-first-window
), not necessarily the selected window.
If fun changes the window configuration by splitting or deleting windows, that does not alter the set of windows walked, which is determined prior to calling fun for the first time.
This function returns t
if the selected window is the only live
window, and nil
otherwise.
If the minibuffer window is active, it is normally considered (so that
this function returns nil
). However, if the optional argument
no-mini is non-nil
, the minibuffer window is ignored even
if active. The optional argument all-frames has the same
meaning as for next-window
.
The following functions return a window which satisfies some criterion, without selecting it:
This function returns a live window which is heuristically the least
recently used one. The least recently used window is the least
recently selected one—the window whose use time is less than the use
time of all other live windows (see Selecting Windows). The
optional argument all-frames has the same meaning as in
next-window
.
If any full-width windows are present, only those windows are
considered. A minibuffer window is never a candidate. A dedicated
window (see Dedicated Windows) is never a candidate unless the
optional argument dedicated is non-nil
. The selected
window is never returned, unless it is the only candidate. However, if
the optional argument not-selected is non-nil
, this
function returns nil
in that case. The optional argument
no-other, if non-nil
, means to never return a window whose
no-other-window
parameter is non-nil
.
This function is like get-lru-window
, but it returns the most
recently used window instead. The most recently used window is
the most recently selected one—the window whose use time exceeds the
use time of all other live windows (see Selecting Windows). The
meaning of the arguments is the same as for get-lru-window
.
Since in practice the most recently used window is always the selected
one, it usually makes sense to call this function with a non-nil
not-selected argument only.
This function returns the window with the largest area (height times
width). If there are two candidate windows of the same size, it prefers
the one that comes first in the cyclic ordering of windows, starting
from the selected window. The meaning of the arguments is the same as
for get-lru-window
.
This function calls the function predicate for each of the
windows in the cyclic order of windows in turn, passing it the window
as an argument. If the predicate returns non-nil
for any
window, this function stops and returns that window. If no such
window is found, the return value is default (which defaults to
nil
).
The optional arguments minibuf and all-frames specify the
windows to search, and have the same meanings as in
next-window
.
This section describes low-level functions for examining and setting the contents of windows. See Switching to a Buffer in a Window, for higher-level functions for displaying a specific buffer in a window.
This function returns the buffer that window is displaying. If
window is omitted or nil
it defaults to the selected
window. If window is an internal window, this function returns
nil
.
This function makes window display buffer-or-name.
window should be a live window; if nil
, it defaults to
the selected window. buffer-or-name should be a buffer, or the
name of an existing buffer. This function does not change which
window is selected, nor does it directly change which buffer is
current (see The Current Buffer). Its return value is nil
.
If window is strongly dedicated to a buffer and buffer-or-name does not specify that buffer, this function signals an error. See Dedicated Windows.
By default, this function resets window’s position, display
margins, fringe widths, and scroll bar settings, based on the local
variables in the specified buffer. However, if the optional argument
keep-margins is non-nil
, it leaves window’s display
margins, fringes and scroll bar settings alone.
When writing an application, you should normally use
display-buffer
(see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) or the higher-level
functions described in Switching to a Buffer in a Window, instead of calling
set-window-buffer
directly.
This runs window-scroll-functions
, followed by
window-configuration-change-hook
. See Hooks for Window Scrolling and Changes.
This buffer-local variable records the number of times a buffer has been
displayed in a window. It is incremented each time
set-window-buffer
is called for the buffer.
This buffer-local variable records the time at which a buffer was last
displayed in a window. The value is nil
if the buffer has
never been displayed. It is updated each time
set-window-buffer
is called for the buffer, with the value
returned by current-time
(see Time of Day).
This function returns the first window displaying buffer-or-name
in the cyclic ordering of windows, starting from the selected window
(see Cyclic Ordering of Windows). If no such window exists, the
return value is nil
.
buffer-or-name should be a buffer or the name of a buffer; if
omitted or nil
, it defaults to the current buffer. The
optional argument all-frames specifies which windows to
consider:
t
means consider windows on all existing frames.
visible
means consider windows on all visible frames.
Note that these meanings differ slightly from those of the
all-frames argument to next-window
(see Cyclic Ordering of Windows). This function may be changed in a future version of Emacs
to eliminate this discrepancy.
This function returns a list of all windows currently displaying
buffer-or-name. buffer-or-name should be a buffer or the
name of an existing buffer. If omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the current buffer. If the currently selected window displays
buffer-or-name, it will be the first in the list returned by
this function.
The arguments minibuf and all-frames have the same
meanings as in the function next-window
(see Cyclic Ordering of Windows). Note that the all-frames argument does not
behave exactly like in get-buffer-window
.
This command replaces buffer-or-name with some other buffer, in
all windows displaying it. buffer-or-name should be a buffer, or
the name of an existing buffer; if omitted or nil
, it defaults to
the current buffer.
The replacement buffer in each window is chosen via
switch-to-prev-buffer
(see Window History). With the
exception of side windows (see Side Windows), any dedicated window
displaying buffer-or-name is deleted if possible (see Dedicated Windows). If such a window is the only window on its frame and there
are other frames on the same terminal, the frame is deleted as well.
If the dedicated window is the only window on the only frame on its
terminal, the buffer is replaced anyway.
This section describes high-level functions for switching to a specified buffer in some window. In general, “switching to a buffer” means to (1) show the buffer in some window, (2) make that window the selected window (and its frame the selected frame), and (3) make the buffer the current buffer.
Do not use these functions to make a buffer temporarily
current just so a Lisp program can access or modify it. They have
side-effects, such as changing window histories (see Window History), which will surprise the user if used that way. If you want
to make a buffer current to modify it in Lisp, use
with-current-buffer
, save-current-buffer
, or
set-buffer
. See The Current Buffer.
This command attempts to display buffer-or-name in the selected window and make it the current buffer. It is often used interactively (as the binding of C-x b), as well as in Lisp programs. The return value is the buffer switched to.
If buffer-or-name is nil
, it defaults to the buffer
returned by other-buffer
(see The Buffer List). If
buffer-or-name is a string that is not the name of any existing
buffer, this function creates a new buffer with that name; the new
buffer’s major mode is determined by the variable major-mode
(see Major Modes).
Normally, the specified buffer is put at the front of the buffer
list—both the global buffer list and the selected frame’s buffer
list (see The Buffer List). However, this is not done if the
optional argument norecord is non-nil
.
Sometimes, the selected window may not be suitable for displaying the
buffer. This happens if the selected window is a minibuffer window, or
if the selected window is strongly dedicated to its buffer
(see Dedicated Windows). In such cases, the command normally tries
to display the buffer in some other window, by invoking
pop-to-buffer
(see below).
If the optional argument force-same-window is non-nil
and
the selected window is not suitable for displaying the buffer, this
function always signals an error when called non-interactively. In
interactive use, if the selected window is a minibuffer window, this
function will try to use some other window instead. If the selected
window is strongly dedicated to its buffer, the option
switch-to-buffer-in-dedicated-window
described next can be used
to proceed.
This option, if non-nil
, allows switch-to-buffer
to
proceed when called interactively and the selected window is strongly
dedicated to its buffer.
The following values are respected:
nil
Disallows switching and signals an error as in non-interactive use.
prompt
Prompts the user whether to allow switching.
pop
Invokes pop-to-buffer
to proceed.
t
Marks the selected window as non-dedicated and proceeds.
This option does not affect non-interactive calls of
switch-to-buffer
.
By default, switch-to-buffer
tries to preserve
window-point
. This behavior can be tuned using the following
option.
If this variable is nil
, switch-to-buffer
displays the
buffer specified by buffer-or-name at the position of that
buffer’s point
. If this variable is already-displayed
, it
tries to display the buffer at its previous position in the selected
window, provided the buffer is currently displayed in some other window
on any visible or iconified frame. If this variable is t
,
switch-to-buffer
unconditionally tries to display the buffer at
its previous position in the selected window.
This variable is ignored if the buffer is already displayed in the
selected window or never appeared in it before, or if
switch-to-buffer
calls pop-to-buffer
to display the
buffer.
If this variable is non-nil
, switch-to-buffer
respects
display actions specified by display-buffer-overriding-action
,
display-buffer-alist
and other display related variables.
The next two commands are similar to switch-to-buffer
, except for
the described features.
This function displays the buffer specified by buffer-or-name in
some window other than the selected window. It uses the function
pop-to-buffer
internally (see below).
If the selected window already displays the specified buffer, it continues to do so, but another window is nonetheless found to display it as well.
The buffer-or-name and norecord arguments have the same
meanings as in switch-to-buffer
.
This function displays the buffer specified by buffer-or-name in a
new frame. It uses the function pop-to-buffer
internally (see
below).
If the specified buffer is already displayed in another window, in any frame on the current terminal, this switches to that window instead of creating a new frame. However, the selected window is never used for this.
The buffer-or-name and norecord arguments have the same
meanings as in switch-to-buffer
.
The above commands use the function pop-to-buffer
, which
flexibly displays a buffer in some window and selects that window for
editing. In turn, pop-to-buffer
uses display-buffer
for
displaying the buffer. Hence, all the variables affecting
display-buffer
will affect it as well. See Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer,
for the documentation of display-buffer
.
This function makes buffer-or-name the current buffer and displays it in some window, preferably not the window currently selected. It then selects the displaying window. If that window is on a different graphical frame, that frame is given input focus if possible (see Input Focus).
If buffer-or-name is nil
, it defaults to the buffer
returned by other-buffer
(see The Buffer List). If
buffer-or-name is a string that is not the name of any existing
buffer, this function creates a new buffer with that name; the new
buffer’s major mode is determined by the variable major-mode
(see Major Modes). In any case, that buffer is made current and
returned, even when no suitable window was found to display it.
If action is non-nil
, it should be a display action to
pass to display-buffer
(see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer).
Alternatively, a non-nil
, non-list value means to pop to a
window other than the selected one—even if the buffer is already
displayed in the selected window.
Like switch-to-buffer
, this function updates the buffer list
unless norecord is non-nil
.
This section describes lower-level functions Emacs uses to find or
create a window for displaying a specified buffer. The common
workhorse of these functions is display-buffer
which eventually
handles all incoming requests for buffer display (see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer).
display-buffer
delegates the task of finding a suitable
window to so-called action functions (see Action Functions for Buffer Display). First, display-buffer
compiles a so-called action
alist—a special association list that action functions can use to
fine-tune their behavior. Then it passes that alist on to each action
function it calls (see Action Alists for Buffer Display).
The behavior of display-buffer
is highly customizable. To
understand how customizations are used in practice, you may wish to
study examples illustrating the order of precedence which
display-buffer
uses to call action functions (see Precedence of Action Functions). To avoid conflicts between Lisp programs
calling display-buffer
and user customizations of its behavior,
it may make sense to follow a number of guidelines which are sketched
in the final part of this section (see The Zen of Buffer Display).
The command display-buffer
flexibly chooses a window for
display, and displays a specified buffer in that window. It can be
called interactively, via the key binding C-x 4 C-o. It is also
used as a subroutine by many functions and commands, including
switch-to-buffer
and pop-to-buffer
(see Switching to a Buffer in a Window).
This command performs several complex steps to find a window to
display in. These steps are described by means of display
actions, which have the form (functions . alist)
.
Here, functions is either a single function or a list of
functions, referred to as “action functions” (see Action Functions for Buffer Display); and alist is an association list, referred
to as “action alist” (see Action Alists for Buffer Display).
See The Zen of Buffer Display, for samples of display actions.
An action function accepts two arguments: the buffer to display and
an action alist. It attempts to display the buffer in some window,
picking or creating a window according to its own criteria. If
successful, it returns the window; otherwise, it returns nil
.
display-buffer
works by combining display actions from
several sources, and calling the action functions in turn, until one
of them manages to display the buffer and returns a non-nil
value.
This command makes buffer-or-name appear in some window, without
selecting the window or making the buffer current. The argument
buffer-or-name must be a buffer or the name of an existing
buffer. The return value is the window chosen to display the buffer,
or nil
if no suitable window was found.
The optional argument action, if non-nil
, should normally
be a display action (described above). display-buffer
builds a
list of action functions and an action alist, by consolidating display
actions from the following sources (in order of their precedence,
from highest to lowest):
display-buffer-overriding-action
.
display-buffer-alist
.
display-buffer-base-action
.
display-buffer-fallback-action
.
In practice this means that display-buffer
builds a list of all
action functions specified by these display actions. The first
element of this list is the first action function specified by
display-buffer-overriding-action
, if any. Its last element is
display-buffer-pop-up-frame
—the last action function
specified by display-buffer-fallback-action
. Duplicates are
not removed from this list—hence one and the same action function
may be called multiple times during one call of display-buffer
.
display-buffer
calls the action functions specified by this
list in turn, passing the buffer as the first argument and the
combined action alist as the second argument, until one of the
functions returns non-nil
. See Precedence of Action Functions, for examples how display actions specified by different
sources are processed by display-buffer
.
Note that the second argument is always the list of all action
alist entries specified by the sources named above. Hence, the first
element of that list is the first action alist entry specified by
display-buffer-overriding-action
, if any. Its last element is
the last alist entry of display-buffer-base-action
, if any (the
action alist of display-buffer-fallback-action
is empty).
Note also, that the combined action alist may contain duplicate entries and entries for the same key with different values. As a rule, action functions always use the first association of a key they find. Hence, the association an action function uses is not necessarily the association provided by the display action that specified that action function,
The argument action can also have a non-nil
, non-list
value. This has the special meaning that the buffer should be
displayed in a window other than the selected one, even if the
selected window is already displaying it. If called interactively
with a prefix argument, action is t
. Lisp programs
should always supply a list value.
The optional argument frame, if non-nil
, specifies which
frames to check when deciding whether the buffer is already displayed.
It is equivalent to adding an element (reusable-frames . frame)
to the action alist of action (see Action Alists for Buffer Display). The frame argument is provided for
compatibility reasons, Lisp programs should not use it.
The value of this variable should be a display action, which is
treated with the highest priority by display-buffer
. The
default value is an empty display action, i.e., (nil . nil)
.
The value of this option is an alist mapping conditions to display
actions. Each condition is passed to buffer-match-p
(see The Buffer List), along with the buffer name and the action
argument passed to display-buffer
. If it returns a
non-nil
value, then display-buffer
uses the
corresponding display action to display the buffer. Caveat: if you
use derived-mode
or major-mode
as condition,
buffer-match-p
could fail to report a match if
display-buffer
is called before the major mode of the buffer is
set.
The value of this option should be a display action. This option can
be used to define a standard display action for calls to
display-buffer
.
This display action specifies the fallback behavior for
display-buffer
if no other display actions are given.
An action function is a function display-buffer
calls for
choosing a window to display a buffer. Action functions take two
arguments: buffer, the buffer to display, and alist, an
action alist (see Action Alists for Buffer Display). They are
supposed to return a window displaying buffer if they succeed
and nil
if they fail.
The following basic action functions are defined in Emacs.
This function tries to display buffer in the selected window.
It fails if the selected window is a minibuffer window or is dedicated
to another buffer (see Dedicated Windows). It also fails if
alist has a non-nil
inhibit-same-window
entry.
This function tries to display buffer by finding a window that is already displaying it. Windows on the selected frame are preferred to windows on other frames.
If alist has a non-nil
inhibit-same-window
entry,
the selected window is not eligible for reuse. The set of frames to
search for a window already displaying buffer can be specified
with the help of the reusable-frames
action alist entry. If
alist contains no reusable-frames
entry, this function
searches just the selected frame.
If this function chooses a window on another frame, it makes that
frame visible and, unless alist contains an
inhibit-switch-frame
entry, raises that frame if necessary.
This function tries to display buffer by finding a window that is displaying a buffer in a given mode.
If alist contains a mode
entry, its value specifies a
major mode (a symbol) or a list of major modes. If alist
contains no mode
entry, the current major mode of buffer
is used instead. A window is a candidate if it displays a buffer
whose mode derives from one of the modes specified thusly.
The behavior is also controlled by alist entries for
inhibit-same-window
, reusable-frames
and
inhibit-switch-frame
, like display-buffer-reuse-window
does.
This function tries to display buffer by splitting the largest
or least recently-used window (usually located on the selected frame).
It actually performs the split by calling the function specified by
split-window-preferred-function
(see Additional Options for Displaying Buffers).
The size of the new window can be adjusted by supplying
window-height
and window-width
entries in alist.
If alist contains a preserve-size
entry, Emacs will also
try to preserve the size of the new window during future resize
operations (see Preserving Window Sizes).
This function fails if no window can be split. More often than not,
this happens because no window is large enough to allow splitting.
Setting split-height-threshold
or split-width-threshold
to lower values may help in this regard. Splitting also fails when
the selected frame has an unsplittable
frame parameter;
see Buffer Parameters.
This function tries to display buffer in a window where it was displayed previously.
If alist contains a non-nil
inhibit-same-window
entry, the selected window is not eligible for use. A dedicated
window is usable only if it already shows buffer. If
alist contains a previous-window
entry, the window
specified by that entry is usable even if it never showed buffer
before.
If alist contains a reusable-frames
entry (see Action Alists for Buffer Display), its value determines which frames to search
for a suitable window. If alist contains no
reusable-frames
entry, this function searches just the selected
frame if display-buffer-reuse-frames
and pop-up-frames
are both nil
; it searches all frames on the current terminal if
either of those variables is non-nil
.
If more than one window qualifies as usable according to these rules, this function makes a choice in the following order of preference:
previous-window
alist entry,
provided it is not the selected window.
previous-window
alist entry or showed buffer
before.
This function tries to display buffer by choosing an existing
window and displaying the buffer in that window. It first tries to find
a window that has not been used recently (see Cyclic Ordering of Windows) on any frame specified by a lru-frames
alist
entry, falling back to the selected frame if no such entry exists. It
also prefers windows that satisfy the constraints specified by
window-min-width
and window-min-height
alist
entries; preferring full-width windows if no window-min-width
entry is found. Finally, it will not return a window whose use time is
higher than that specified by any lru-time
entry provided by
alist.
If no less recently used window is found, this function will try to use some other window, preferably a large window on some visible frame. It can fail if all windows are dedicated to other buffers (see Dedicated Windows).
This function is similar to display-buffer-use-some-window
, but
will try harder to not use the a recently used window. In particular,
it does not use the selected window. In addition, it will first try to
reuse a window that shows buffer already, base the decision
whether it should use a window showing another buffer on that window’s
use time alone and pop up a new window if no usable window is found.
Finally, this function will bump the use time (see Selecting Windows) of any window it returns in order to avoid that further
invocations will use that window for showing another buffer. An
application that wants to display several buffers in a row can help this
function by providing a lru-time
alist entry it has
initially set to the value of the selected window’s use time. Each
invocation of this function will then bump the use time of the window
returned to a value higher than that and a subsequent invocation will
inhibit this function to use a window it returned earlier.
This function tries to display buffer at a location specified by
alist. For this purpose, alist should contain a
direction
entry whose value is one of left
, above
(or up
), right
and below
(or down
). Other
values are usually interpreted as below
.
If alist also contains a window
entry, its value
specifies a reference window. That value can be a special symbol like
main
which stands for the selected frame’s main window
(see Side Window Options and Functions) or root
standing
for the selected frame’s root window (see Windows and Frames). It
can also specify an arbitrary valid window. Any other value (or
omitting the window
entry entirely) means to use the selected
window as reference window.
This function first tries to reuse a window in the specified direction
that already shows buffer. If no such window exists, it tries
to split the reference window in order to produce a new window in the
specified direction. If this fails as well, it will try to display
buffer in an existing window in the specified direction. In
either case, the window chosen will appear on the side of the
reference window specified by the direction
entry, sharing at
least one edge with the reference window.
If the reference window is live, the edge the chosen window will share
with it is always the opposite of the one specified by the
direction
entry. For example, if the value of the
direction
entry is left
, the chosen window’s right edge
coordinate (see Coordinates and Windows) will equal the reference
window’s left edge coordinate.
If the reference window is internal, a reused window must share with
it the edge specified by the direction
entry. Hence if, for
example, the reference window is the frame’s root window and the value
of the direction
entry is left
, a reused window must be
on the left of the frame. This means that the left edge coordinate of
the chosen window and that of the reference window are the same.
A new window, however, will be created by splitting the reference window such that the chosen window will share the opposite edge with the reference window. In our example, a new root window would be created with a new live window and the reference window as its children. The chosen window’s right edge coordinate would then equal the left edge coordinate of the reference window. Its left edge coordinate would equal the left edge coordinate of the frame’s new root window.
Four special values for direction
entries allow to implicitly
specify the selected frame’s main window as the reference window:
leftmost
, top
, rightmost
and bottom
. This
means that instead of, for example, (direction . left) (window . main)
one can just specify (direction . leftmost)
. An existing window
alist entry is ignored
in such cases.
This function tries to display buffer in a window below the selected window. If there is a window below the selected one and that window already displays buffer, it reuses that window.
If there is no such window, this function tries to create a new window
by splitting the selected one, and displays buffer there. It will
also try to adjust that window’s size provided alist contains a
suitable window-height
or window-width
entry, see above.
If splitting the selected window fails and there is a non-dedicated window below the selected one showing some other buffer, this function tries to use that window for showing buffer.
If alist contains a window-min-height
entry, this
function ensures that the window used is or can become at least as
high as specified by that entry’s value. Note that this is only a
guarantee. In order to actually resize the window used, alist
must also provide an appropriate window-height
entry.
This function tries to display buffer in a window at the bottom of the selected frame.
This either tries to split the window at the bottom of the frame or the frame’s root window, or to reuse an existing window at the bottom of the selected frame.
This function creates a new frame, and displays the buffer in that
frame’s window. It actually performs the frame creation by calling
the function specified in pop-up-frame-function
(see Additional Options for Displaying Buffers). If alist contains a
pop-up-frame-parameters
entry, the associated value is added to
the newly created frame’s parameters.
This function displays the buffer on the current frame, deleting all other windows so that it takes up the full frame.
This function tries to display buffer in a child frame
(see Child Frames) of the selected frame, either reusing an
existing child frame or by making a new one. If alist has a
non-nil
child-frame-parameters
entry, the corresponding
value is an alist of frame parameters to give the new frame. A
parent-frame
parameter specifying the selected frame is
provided by default. If the child frame should become the child of
another frame, a corresponding entry must be added to alist.
The appearance of child frames is largely dependent on the parameters
provided via alist. It is advisable to use at least ratios to
specify the size (see Size Parameters) and the position
(see Position Parameters) of the child frame, and to add a
keep-ratio
parameter (see Frame Interaction Parameters), in
order to make sure that the child frame remains visible. For other
parameters that should be considered see Child Frames.
This function tries to display buffer by finding a frame that meets a predicate (by default any frame other than the selected frame).
If this function chooses a window on another frame, it makes that
frame visible and, unless alist contains an
inhibit-switch-frame
entry, raises that frame if necessary.
If alist has a non-nil
frame-predicate
entry, its
value is a function taking one argument (a frame), returning
non-nil
if the frame is a candidate; this function replaces the
default predicate.
If alist has a non-nil
inhibit-same-window
entry,
the selected window is not used; thus if the selected frame has a
single window, it is not used.
If alist has a non-nil
allow-no-window
entry, then
this function does not display buffer and returns the symbol
fail
. This constitutes the only exception to the convention
that an action function returns either nil
or a window showing
buffer. If alist has no such allow-no-window
entry, this function returns nil
.
If this function returns fail
, display-buffer
will skip
the execution of any further display actions and return nil
immediately. If this function returns nil
,
display-buffer
will continue with the next display action, if
any.
It is assumed that when a caller of display-buffer
specifies a
non-nil
allow-no-window
entry, it is also able to handle
a nil
return value.
Two other action functions are described in their proper
sections—display-buffer-in-side-window
(see Displaying Buffers in Side Windows) and display-buffer-in-atom-window
(see Atomic Windows).
An action alist is an association list mapping predefined
symbols recognized by action functions to values these functions are
supposed to interpret accordingly. In each call,
display-buffer
constructs a new, possibly empty action alist
and passes that entire list on to any action function it calls.
By design, action functions are free in their interpretation of
action alist entries. In fact, some entries like
allow-no-window
or previous-window
have a meaning only
for one or a few action functions, and are ignored by the rest. Other
entries, like inhibit-same-window
or window-parameters
,
are supposed to be respected by most action functions, including those
provided by application programs and external packages.
In the previous subsection we have described in detail how
individual action functions interpret the action alist entries they
care about. Here we give a reference list of all known action alist
entries according to their symbols, together with their values and
action functions (see Action Functions for Buffer Display) that
recognize them. Throughout this list, the terms “buffer” will refer
to the buffer display-buffer
is supposed to display, and
“value” refers to the entry’s value.
inhibit-same-window
¶If the value is non-nil
, this signals that the selected window
must not be used for displaying the buffer. All action functions that
(re-)use an existing window should respect this entry.
previous-window
¶The value must specify a window that may have displayed the buffer
previously. display-buffer-in-previous-window
will give
preference to such a window provided it is still live and not
dedicated to another buffer.
mode
¶The value is either a major mode or a list of major modes.
display-buffer-reuse-mode-window
may reuse a window whenever
the value specified by this entry matches the major mode of that
window’s buffer. Other action functions ignore such entries.
frame-predicate
¶The value must be a function taking one argument (a frame), supposed
to return non-nil
if that frame is a candidate for displaying
the buffer. This entry is used by
display-buffer-use-some-frame
.
reusable-frames
¶The value specifies the set of frames to search for a window that can be reused because it already displays the buffer. It can be set as follows:
nil
means consider only windows on the selected frame.
(Actually, the last frame used that is not a minibuffer-only frame.)
visible
means consider windows on all visible frames.
t
means consider windows on all frames. (Note that this value
is rarely the right thing to use—it might also return a tooltip frame.)
Note that the meaning of nil
differs slightly from that of the
all-frames argument to next-window
(see Cyclic Ordering of Windows).
A major client of this is display-buffer-reuse-window
, but all
other action functions that try to reuse a window are affected as
well. display-buffer-in-previous-window
consults it when
searching for a window that previously displayed the buffer on another
frame.
inhibit-switch-frame
¶A non-nil
value prevents another frame from being raised or
selected, if the window chosen by display-buffer
is displayed
there. Primarily affected by this are
display-buffer-use-some-frame
and
display-buffer-reuse-window
. Ideally,
display-buffer-pop-up-frame
should be affected as well, but there
is no guarantee that the window manager will comply.
window-parameters
¶The value specifies an alist of window parameters to give the chosen window. All action functions that choose a window should process this entry.
window-min-width
¶The value specifies a minimum width of the window used, in canonical
frame columns. The special value full-width
means the chosen
window should be one that has no other windows on the left or right of
it in its frame.
This entry is currently honored by display-buffer-use-some-window
and display-buffer-use-least-recent-window
, which try hard to avoid
returning a less recently used window that does not satisfy the entry.
Note that providing such an entry alone does not necessarily make the
window as wide as specified by its value. To actually resize an
existing window or make a new window as wide as specified by this
entry’s value, a window-width
entry specifying that value
should be provided as well. Such a window-width
entry can,
however, specify a completely different value, or ask the window width
to fit that of its buffer, in which case the
window-min-width
entry provides the guaranteed minimum width of
the window.
window-min-height
¶The value specifies a minimum height of the window used, in canonical
frame lines. The special value full-height
means the chosen
window should be a full-height window, one that has no other windows
above or below it in its frame.
This entry is currently honored by display-buffer-below-selected
which does not use a window that is not as high as specified by this
entry. It’s also honored by display-buffer-use-some-window
and
display-buffer-use-least-recent-window
which try hard to avoid
returning a less recently used window if it does not satisfy this
constraint.
Note that providing such an entry alone does not necessarily make the
window as tall as specified by its value. To actually resize an
existing window or make a new window as tall as specified by that
value, a window-height
entry specifying that value should be
provided as well. Such a window-height
entry can, however,
specify a completely different value or ask the window height to be
fit to that of its buffer in which case the window-min-height
entry provides the guaranteed minimum height of the window used.
window-height
¶The value specifies whether and how to adjust the height of the chosen window and can be one of the following:
nil
means to leave the height of the chosen window alone.
body-lines
and whose CDR is an
integer that specifies the height of the chosen window’s body in frame
lines.
fit-window-to-buffer
and
shrink-window-if-larger-than-buffer
, see Resizing Windows.
By convention, the height of the chosen window is adjusted only if the window is part of a vertical combination (see Windows and Frames) to avoid changing the height of other, unrelated windows. Also, this entry should be processed only under certain conditions which are specified right below this list.
window-width
¶This entry is similar to the window-height
entry described
before, but used to adjust the chosen window’s width instead. The
value can be one of the following:
nil
means to leave the width of the chosen window alone.
body-columns
and whose CDR is
an integer that specifies the width of the chosen window’s body in frame
columns.
window-size
¶This entry is a combination of the two preceding ones and can be used to
adjust the chosen window’s height and width. Since windows can
be resized in one direction only without affecting other windows,
window-size
is effective only to set up the size of a window
appearing alone on a frame. The value can be one of the following:
nil
means to leave the size of the chosen window alone.
body-chars
and whose CDR
is a cons cell of two integers—the desired body width and height of
the chosen window in frame columns and lines. It’s effect is to adjust
the size of the frame accordingly.
This entry should be processed under only certain conditions which are specified right below this list.
dedicated
¶If non-nil
, such an entry tells display-buffer
to mark
any window it creates as dedicated to its buffer (see Dedicated Windows). It does that by calling set-window-dedicated-p
with
the chosen window as first argument and the entry’s value as second.
Side windows are by default dedicated with the value side
(see Side Window Options and Functions).
preserve-size
¶If non-nil
such an entry tells Emacs to preserve the size of
the window chosen (see Preserving Window Sizes). The value should
be either (t . nil)
to preserve the width of the window,
(nil . t)
to preserve its height or (t . t)
to
preserve both, its width and its height. This entry should be
processed only under certain conditions which are specified right
after this list.
lru-frames
¶The value specifies the set of frames to search for a window that can be
used to display the buffer. It is honored by
display-buffer-use-some-window
and
display-buffer-use-least-recent-window
when trying to find a less
recently used window showing some other buffer. Its values are the same
as for the reusable-frames
entry described above.
lru-time
¶The value is supposed to specify a use time (see Selecting Windows).
This entry is honored by display-buffer-use-some-window
and
display-buffer-use-least-recent-window
when trying to find a less
recently used window showing some other buffer. If a window’s use time
is higher than the value specified by this option, these action
functions will not consider such a window for displaying the buffer.
bump-use-time
¶If non-nil
, such an entry will cause display-buffer
to
bump the use time (see Selecting Windows) of the window it uses.
This should avoid later use of this window by action functions
like display-buffer-use-some-window
and
display-buffer-use-least-recent-window
for showing another
buffer.
There is a fine difference between using this entry and using the action
function display-buffer-use-least-recent-window
. Calling the
latter means to only bump the use times of windows that function uses
for displaying the buffer. The entry described here will cause
display-buffer
to bump the use time of any window used for
displaying a buffer.
pop-up-frame-parameters
¶The value specifies an alist of frame parameters to give a new frame,
if one is created. display-buffer-pop-up-frame
is its one and
only addressee.
parent-frame
¶The value specifies the parent frame to be used when the buffer is
displayed on a child frame. This entry is used only by
display-buffer-in-child-frame
.
child-frame-parameters
¶The value specifies an alist of frame parameters to use when the buffer
is displayed on a child frame. This entry is used only by
display-buffer-in-child-frame
.
side
¶The value denotes the side of the frame or window where a new window
displaying the buffer shall be created. This entry is used by
display-buffer-in-side-window
to indicate the side of the frame
where a new side window shall be placed (see Displaying Buffers in Side Windows). It is also used by
display-buffer-in-atom-window
to indicate the side of an
existing window where the new window shall be located (see Atomic Windows).
slot
¶If non-nil
, the value specifies the slot of the side window
supposed to display the buffer. This entry is used only by
display-buffer-in-side-window
.
direction
¶The value specifies a direction which, together with a window
entry, allows display-buffer-in-direction
to determine the
location of the window to display the buffer.
window
¶The value specifies a window that is in some way related to the window
chosen by display-buffer
. This entry is currently used by
display-buffer-in-atom-window
to indicate the window on whose
side the new window shall be created. It is also used by
display-buffer-in-direction
to specify the reference window on
whose side the resulting window shall appear.
allow-no-window
¶If the value is non-nil
, display-buffer
does not
necessarily have to display the buffer and the caller is prepared to
accept that. This entry is not intended for user customizations,
since there is no guarantee that an arbitrary caller of
display-buffer
will be able to handle the case that no window
will display the buffer. display-buffer-no-window
is the only
action function that cares about this entry.
body-function
¶The value must be a function taking one argument (a displayed window).
This function can be used to fill the displayed window’s body with
some contents that might depend on dimensions of the displayed window.
It is called after the buffer is displayed, and before
the entries window-height
, window-width
and
preserve-size
are applied that could resize the window to fit
it to the inserted contents.
By convention, the entries window-height
, window-width
and preserve-size
are applied after the chosen window’s buffer
has been set up and if and only if that window never showed another
buffer before. More precisely, the latter means that the window must
have been either created by the current display-buffer
call or
the window was created earlier by display-buffer
to show the
buffer and never was used to show another buffer until it was reused
by the current invocation of display-buffer
.
If no window-height
, window-width
or window-size
entry was specified, the window may still be resized automatically when
the buffer is temporary and temp-buffer-resize-mode
has been
enabled, Temporary Displays. In that case, the CDR of a
window-height
, window-width
or window-size
entry
can be used to inhibit or override the default behavior of
temp-buffer-resize-mode
for specific buffers or invocations of
display-buffer
.
The behavior of buffer display actions (see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) can be further modified by the following user options.
If the value of this variable is non-nil
, display-buffer
is allowed to split an existing window to make a new window for
displaying in. This is the default.
This variable is provided for backward compatibility only. It is
obeyed by display-buffer
via a special mechanism in
display-buffer-fallback-action
, which calls the action function
display-buffer-pop-up-window
(see Action Functions for Buffer Display) when the value of this option is non-nil
. It is
not consulted by display-buffer-pop-up-window
itself, which the
user may specify directly in display-buffer-alist
etc.
This variable specifies a function for splitting a window, in order to
make a new window for displaying a buffer. It is used by the
display-buffer-pop-up-window
action function to actually split
the window.
The value must be a function that takes one argument, a window, and
returns either a new window (which will be used to display the desired
buffer) or nil
(which means the splitting failed). The default
value is split-window-sensibly
, which is documented next.
This function tries to split window and return the newly created
window. If window cannot be split, it returns nil
. If
window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected
window.
This function obeys the usual rules that determine when a window may
be split (see Splitting Windows). It first tries to split by
placing the new window below, subject to the restriction imposed by
split-height-threshold
(see below), in addition to any other
restrictions. If that fails, it tries to split by placing the new
window to the right, subject to split-width-threshold
(see
below). If that also fails, and the window is the only window on its
frame, this function again tries to split and place the new window
below, disregarding split-height-threshold
. If this fails as
well, this function gives up and returns nil
.
This variable specifies whether split-window-sensibly
is
allowed to split the window placing the new window below. If it is an
integer, that means to split only if the original window has at least
that many lines. If it is nil
, that means not to split this
way.
This variable specifies whether split-window-sensibly
is
allowed to split the window placing the new window to the right. If
the value is an integer, that means to split only if the original
window has at least that many columns. If the value is nil
,
that means not to split this way.
This variable, if non-nil
, causes display-buffer
to even
window sizes whenever it reuses an existing window, and that window is
adjacent to the selected one.
If its value is width-only
, sizes are evened only if the reused
window is on the left or right of the selected one and the selected
window is wider than the reused one. If its value is height-only
sizes are evened only if the reused window is above or beneath the
selected window and the selected window is higher than the reused one.
Any other non-nil
value means to even sizes in any of these cases
provided the selected window is larger than the reused one in the sense
of their combination.
If the value of this variable is non-nil
, that means
display-buffer
may display buffers by making new frames. The
default is nil
.
A non-nil
value also means that when display-buffer
is
looking for a window already displaying buffer-or-name, it can
search any visible or iconified frame, not just the selected frame.
This variable is provided mainly for backward compatibility. It is
obeyed by display-buffer
via a special mechanism in
display-buffer-fallback-action
, which calls the action function
display-buffer-pop-up-frame
(see Action Functions for Buffer Display) if the value is non-nil
. (This is done before
attempting to split a window.) This variable is not consulted by
display-buffer-pop-up-frame
itself, which the user may specify
directly in display-buffer-alist
etc.
This variable specifies a function for creating a new frame, in order
to make a new window for displaying a buffer. It is used by the
display-buffer-pop-up-frame
action function.
The value should be a function that takes no arguments and returns a
frame, or nil
if no frame could be created. The default value
is a function that creates a frame using the parameters specified by
pop-up-frame-alist
(see below).
This variable holds an alist of frame parameters (see Frame Parameters), which is used by the function specified by
pop-up-frame-function
to make a new frame. The default is
nil
.
This option is provided for backward compatibility only. Note, that
when display-buffer-pop-up-frame
calls the function specified
by pop-up-frame-function
, it prepends the value of all
pop-up-frame-parameters
action alist entries to
pop-up-frame-alist
so that the values specified by the action
alist entry effectively override any corresponding values of
pop-up-frame-alist
.
Hence, users should set up a pop-up-frame-parameters
action
alist entry in display-buffer-alist
instead of customizing
pop-up-frame-alist
. Only this will guarantee that the value of
a parameter specified by the user overrides the value of that
parameter specified by the caller of display-buffer
.
Many efforts in the design of display-buffer
have been given
to maintain compatibility with code that uses older options like
pop-up-windows
, pop-up-frames
,
pop-up-frame-alist
, same-window-buffer-names
and
same-window-regexps
. Lisp Programs and users should refrain
from using these options. Above we already warned against customizing
pop-up-frame-alist
. Here we describe how to convert the
remaining options to use display actions instead.
pop-up-windows
¶This variable is t
by default. Instead of customizing it to
nil
and thus telling display-buffer
what not to do, it’s
much better to list in display-buffer-base-action
the action
functions it should try instead as, for example:
(setopt display-buffer-base-action '((display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer-same-window display-buffer-in-previous-window display-buffer-use-some-window)))
pop-up-frames
¶Instead of customizing this variable to t
, customize
display-buffer-base-action
, for example, as follows:
(setopt display-buffer-base-action '((display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer-pop-up-frame) (reusable-frames . 0)))
same-window-buffer-names
¶same-window-regexps
Instead of adding a buffer name or a regular expression to one of
these options use a display-buffer-alist
entry for that buffer
specifying the action function display-buffer-same-window
.
(setopt display-buffer-alist (cons '("\\*foo\\*" (display-buffer-same-window)) display-buffer-alist))
From the past subsections we already know that display-buffer
must be supplied with a number of display actions (see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) in order to display a buffer. In a completely uncustomized
Emacs, these actions are specified by
display-buffer-fallback-action
in the following order of
precedence: Reuse a window, pop up a new window on the same frame, use
a window previously showing the buffer, use some window and pop up a
new frame. (Note that the remaining actions named by
display-buffer-fallback-action
are void in an uncustomized
Emacs).
Consider the following form:
(display-buffer (get-buffer-create "*foo*"))
Evaluating this form in the buffer *scratch* of an uncustomized
Emacs session will usually fail to reuse a window that shows
*foo* already, but succeed in popping up a new window.
Evaluating the same form again will now not cause any visible
changes—display-buffer
reused the window already showing
*foo* because that action was applicable and had the highest
precedence among all applicable actions.
Popping up a new window will fail if there is not enough space on
the selected frame. In an uncustomized Emacs it typically fails when
there are already two windows on a frame. For example, if you now
type C-x 1 followed by C-x 2 and evaluate the form
once more, *foo* should show up in the lower
window—display-buffer
just used “some” window. If, before
typing C-x 2 you had typed C-x o, *foo*
would have been shown in the upper window because “some” window
stands for the “least recently used” window and the selected window
has been least recently used if and only if it is alone on its frame.
Let’s assume you did not type C-x o and *foo* is shown in the lower window. Type C-x o to get there followed by C-x left and evaluate the form again. This should display *foo* in the same, lower window because that window had already shown *foo* previously and was therefore chosen instead of some other window.
So far we have only observed the default behavior in an uncustomized
Emacs session. To see how this behavior can be customized, let’s
consider the option display-buffer-base-action
. It provides a
very coarse customization which conceptually affects the display of
any buffer. It can be used to supplement the actions supplied
by display-buffer-fallback-action
by reordering them or by
adding actions that are not present there but fit more closely the
user’s editing practice. However, it can also be used to change the
default behavior in a more profound way.
Let’s consider a user who, as a rule, prefers to display buffers on another frame. Such a user might provide the following customization:
(setopt display-buffer-base-action '((display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer-pop-up-frame) (reusable-frames . 0)))
This setting will cause display-buffer
to first try to find a
window showing the buffer on a visible or iconified frame and, if no
such frame exists, pop up a new frame. You can observe this behavior
on a graphical system by typing C-x 1 in the window showing
*scratch* and evaluating our canonical display-buffer
form. This will usually create (and give focus to) a new frame whose
root window shows *foo*. Iconify that frame and evaluate the
canonical form again: display-buffer
will reuse the window on
the new frame (usually raising the frame and giving it focus too).
Only if creating a new frame fails, display-buffer
will
apply the actions supplied by display-buffer-fallback-action
which means to again try reusing a window, popping up a new window and
so on. A trivial way to make frame creation fail is supplied by the
following form:
(let ((pop-up-frame-function 'ignore)) (display-buffer (get-buffer-create "*foo*")))
We will forget about that form immediately after observing that it fails to create a new frame and uses a fallback action instead.
Note that display-buffer-reuse-window
appears redundant in
the customization of display-buffer-base-action
because it is
already part of display-buffer-fallback-action
and should be
tried there anyway. However, that would fail because due to the
precedence of display-buffer-base-action
over
display-buffer-fallback-action
, at that time
display-buffer-pop-up-frame
would have already won the race.
In fact, this:
(setopt display-buffer-base-action '(display-buffer-pop-up-frame (reusable-frames . 0)))
would cause display-buffer
to always pop up a new frame
which is probably not what our user wants.
So far, we have only shown how users can customize the
default behavior of display-buffer
. Let us now see how
applications can change the course of display-buffer
.
The canonical way to do that is to use the action argument of
display-buffer
or a function that calls it, like, for example,
pop-to-buffer
(see Switching to a Buffer in a Window).
Suppose an application wants to display *foo* preferably below the selected window (to immediately attract the attention of the user to the new window) or, if that fails, in a window at the bottom of the frame. It could do that with a call like this:
(display-buffer (get-buffer-create "*foo*") '((display-buffer-below-selected display-buffer-at-bottom)))
In order to see how this new, modified form works, delete any frame
showing *foo*, type C-x 1 followed by C-x 2 in the
window showing *scratch*, and subsequently evaluate that form.
display-buffer
should split the upper window, and show
*foo* in the new window. Alternatively, if after C-x 2
you had typed C-x o, display-buffer
would have split the
window at the bottom instead.
Suppose now that, before evaluating the new form, you have made the
selected window as small as possible, for example, by evaluating the
form (fit-window-to-buffer)
in that window. In that case,
display-buffer
would have failed to split the selected window
and would have split the frame’s root window instead, effectively
displaying *foo* at the bottom of the frame.
In either case, evaluating the new form a second time should reuse the window already showing *foo* since both functions supplied by the action argument try to reuse such a window first.
By setting the action argument, an application effectively
overrules any customization of display-buffer-base-action
. Our
user can now either accept the choice of the application, or redouble
by customizing the option display-buffer-alist
as follows:
(setopt display-buffer-alist '(("\\*foo\\*" (display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer-pop-up-frame))))
Trying this with the new, modified form above in a configuration that
does not show *foo* anywhere, will display *foo* on a
separate frame, completely ignoring the action argument of
display-buffer
.
Note that we didn’t care to specify a reusable-frames
action
alist entry in our specification of display-buffer-alist
.
display-buffer
always takes the first one it finds—in our
case the one specified by display-buffer-base-action
. If we
wanted to use a different specification, for example, to exclude
iconified frames showing *foo* from the list of reusable ones,
we would have to specify that separately, however:
(setopt display-buffer-alist '(("\\*foo\\*" (display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer-pop-up-frame) (reusable-frames . visible))))
If you try this, you will notice that repeated attempts to display *foo* will succeed to reuse a frame only if that frame is visible.
The above example would allow the conclusion that users customize
display-buffer-alist
for the sole purpose to overrule the
action argument chosen by applications. Such a conclusion would
be incorrect. display-buffer-alist
is the standard option for
users to direct the course of display of specific buffers in a
preferred way regardless of whether the display is also guided by an
action argument.
We can, however, reasonably conclude that customizing
display-buffer-alist
differs from customizing
display-buffer-base-action
in two major aspects: it is stronger
because it overrides the action argument of
display-buffer
, and it allows to explicitly specify the
affected buffers. In fact, displaying other buffers is not affected
in any way by a customization for *foo*. For example,
(display-buffer (get-buffer-create "*bar*"))
continues being governed by the settings of
display-buffer-base-action
and
display-buffer-fallback-action
only.
We could stop with our examples here but Lisp programs still have
an ace up their sleeves which they can use to overrule any
customization of display-buffer-alist
. It’s the variable
display-buffer-overriding-action
which they can bind around
display-buffer
calls as follows:
(let ((display-buffer-overriding-action '((display-buffer-same-window)))) (display-buffer (get-buffer-create "*foo*") '((display-buffer-below-selected display-buffer-at-bottom))))
Evaluating this form will usually display *foo* in the selected window regardless of the action argument and any user customizations. (Usually, an application will not bother to also provide an action argument. Here it just serves to illustrate the fact that it gets overridden.)
It might be illustrative to look at the list of action functions
display-buffer
would have tried to display *foo* with
the customizations we provided here. The list (including comments
explaining who added this and the subsequent elements) is:
(display-buffer-same-window ;; `display-buffer-overriding-action' display-buffer-reuse-window ;; `display-buffer-alist' display-buffer-pop-up-frame display-buffer-below-selected ;; ACTION argument display-buffer-at-bottom display-buffer-reuse-window ;; `display-buffer-base-action' display-buffer-pop-up-frame display-buffer--maybe-same-window ;; `display-buffer-fallback-action' display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer--maybe-pop-up-frame-or-window display-buffer-in-previous-window display-buffer-use-some-window display-buffer-pop-up-frame)
Note that among the internal functions listed here,
display-buffer--maybe-same-window
is effectively ignored while
display-buffer--maybe-pop-up-frame-or-window
actually runs
display-buffer-pop-up-window
.
The action alist passed in each function call is:
((reusable-frames . visible) (reusable-frames . 0))
which shows that we have used the second specification of
display-buffer-alist
above, overriding the specification
supplied by display-buffer-base-action
. Suppose our user had
written that as
(setopt display-buffer-alist '(("\\*foo\\*" (display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer-pop-up-frame) (inhibit-same-window . t) (reusable-frames . visible))))
In this case the inhibit-same-window
alist entry will
successfully invalidate the display-buffer-same-window
specification from display-buffer-overriding-action
and
display-buffer
will show *foo* on another frame. To
make display-buffer-overriding-action
more robust in this
regard, the application would have to specify an appropriate
inhibit-same-window
entry too, for example, as follows:
(let ((display-buffer-overriding-action '(display-buffer-same-window (inhibit-same-window . nil)))) (display-buffer (get-buffer-create "*foo*")))
This last example shows that while the precedence order of action functions is fixed, as described in Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer, an action alist entry specified by a display action ranked lower in that order can affect the execution of a higher ranked display action.
In its most simplistic form, a frame accommodates always one single
window that can be used for displaying a buffer. As a consequence, it
is always the latest call of display-buffer
that will have
succeeded in placing its buffer there.
Since working with such a frame is not very practical, Emacs by
default allows for more complex frame layouts controlled by the
default values of the frame size and the split-height-threshold
and split-width-threshold
options. Displaying a buffer not yet
shown on a frame then either splits the single window on that frame or
(re-)uses one of its two windows.
The default behavior is abandoned as soon as the user customizes
one of these thresholds or manually changes the frame’s layout. The
default behavior is also abandoned when calling display-buffer
with a non-nil
action argument or the user customizes one
of the options mentioned in the previous subsections. Mastering
display-buffer
soon may become a frustrating experience due to
the plethora of applicable display actions and the resulting frame
layouts.
However, refraining from using buffer display functions and falling back on a split & delete windows metaphor is not a good idea either. Buffer display functions give Lisp programs and users a framework to reconcile their different needs; no comparable framework exists for splitting and deleting windows. Buffer display functions also allow to at least partially restore the layout of a frame when removing a buffer from it later (see Quitting Windows).
Below we will give a number of guidelines to redeem the frustration mentioned above and thus to avoid literally losing buffers in-between the windows of a frame.
Writing display actions can be a pain because one has to lump together
action functions and action alists in one huge list. (Historical
reasons prevented us from having display-buffer
support
separate arguments for these.) It might help to memorize some basic
forms like the ones listed below:
'(nil (inhibit-same-window . t))
specifies an action alist entry only and no action function. Its sole
purpose is to inhibit a display-buffer-same-window
function
specified elsewhere from showing the buffer in the same window, see
also the last example of the preceding subsection.
'(display-buffer-below-selected)
on the other hand, specifies one action function and an empty action alist. To combine the effects of the above two specifications one would write the form
'(display-buffer-below-selected (inhibit-same-window . t))
to add another action function one would write
'((display-buffer-below-selected display-buffer-at-bottom) (inhibit-same-window . t))
and to add another alist entry one would write
'((display-buffer-below-selected display-buffer-at-bottom) (inhibit-same-window . t) (window-height . fit-window-to-buffer))
That last form can be used as action argument of
display-buffer
in the following way:
(display-buffer (get-buffer-create "*foo*") '((display-buffer-below-selected display-buffer-at-bottom) (inhibit-same-window . t) (window-height . fit-window-to-buffer)))
In a customization of display-buffer-alist
it would be used as
follows:
(setopt display-buffer-alist '(("\\*foo\\*" (display-buffer-below-selected display-buffer-at-bottom) (inhibit-same-window . t) (window-height . fit-window-to-buffer))))
To add a customization for a second buffer one would then write:
(setopt display-buffer-alist '(("\\*foo\\*" (display-buffer-below-selected display-buffer-at-bottom) (inhibit-same-window . t) (window-height . fit-window-to-buffer)) ("\\*bar\\*" (display-buffer-reuse-window display-buffer-pop-up-frame) (reusable-frames . visible))))
display-buffer-alist
and display-buffer-base-action
are
user options—Lisp programs must never set or rebind them.
display-buffer-overriding-action
, on the other hand, is
reserved for applications—who seldom use that option and if they use
it, then with utmost care.
Older implementations of display-buffer
frequently caused
users and applications to fight over the settings of user options like
pop-up-frames
and pop-up-windows
(see Additional Options for Displaying Buffers). This was one major reason for redesigning
display-buffer
—to provide a clear framework specifying what
users and applications should be allowed to do.
Lisp programs must be prepared that user customizations may
cause buffers to get displayed in an unexpected way. They should
never assume in their subsequent behavior, that the buffer has been
shown precisely the way they asked for in the action argument of
display-buffer
.
Users should not pose too many and too severe restrictions on how
arbitrary buffers get displayed. Otherwise, they will risk to lose
the characteristics of showing a buffer for a certain purpose.
Suppose a Lisp program has been written to compare different versions
of a buffer in two windows side-by-side. If the customization of
display-buffer-alist
prescribes that any such buffer should be
always shown in or below the selected window, the program will have a
hard time to set up the desired window configuration via
display-buffer
.
To specify a preference for showing an arbitrary buffer, users
should customize display-buffer-base-action
. An example of how
users who prefer working with multiple frames would do that was given
in the previous subsection. display-buffer-alist
should be
reserved for displaying specific buffers in a specific way.
Generally, it’s always a good idea for users and Lisp
programmers to be prepared for the case that a window already shows
the buffer in question and to reuse that window. In the preceding
subsection we have shown that failing to do so properly may cause
display-buffer
to continuously pop up a new frame although a
frame showing that buffer existed already. In a few cases only, it
might be undesirable to reuse a window, for example, when a different
portion of the buffer should be shown in that window.
Hence, display-buffer-reuse-window
is one action function
that should be used as often as possible, both in action
arguments and customizations. An inhibit-same-window
entry in
the action argument usually takes care of the most common case
where reusing a window showing the buffer should be avoided—that
where the window in question is the selected one.
This is a no-brainer for people working with multiple frames—the
frame showing the buffer will automatically raise and get focus unless
an inhibit-switch-frame
entry forbids it. For single frame
users this task can be considerably more difficult. In particular,
display-buffer-pop-up-window
and
display-buffer-use-some-window
can become obtrusive in this
regard. They split or use a seemingly arbitrary (often the largest or
least recently used) window, distracting the user’s attention.
Some Lisp programs therefore try to choose a window at the bottom of
the frame, for example, in order to display the buffer in vicinity of
the minibuffer window where the user is expected to answer a question
related to the new window. For non-input related actions
display-buffer-below-selected
might be preferable because the
selected window usually already has the user’s attention.
Many applications call display-buffer
from within window
excursions produced by with-selected-window
or
select-window
calls with a non-nil
norecord
argument. This is almost always a bad idea because the window selected
within such an excursion is usually not the window selected in the
configuration presented to the user.
If, for example, a user had added an inhibit-same-window
alist
entry, that entry would have avoided the window selected within the
scope of the excursion and not the window selected in the resulting
configuration. Even if no such entry has been added, the resulting
behavior might be strange. While in a frame containing one live
window, evaluating the following form
(progn (split-window) (display-buffer "*Messages*"))
will display a window showing the *Messages* buffer at the bottom and leave the other window selected. Evaluating the next form
(with-selected-window (split-window) (display-buffer "*Messages*"))
will display *Messages* in a window on the top and select it
which is usually not what display-buffer
is supposed to do.
On the other hand, while evaluating the following form
(progn (split-window) (pop-to-buffer "*Messages*"))
will correctly select the *Messages* buffer, the next form
(progn (split-window) (with-selected-window (selected-window) (pop-to-buffer "*Messages*")))
will not.
Also, invocations of action functions like
display-buffer-use-some-window
and
display-buffer-use-least-recent-window
that expect the selected
window to have the highest use time among all windows, may fail to
produce a window according to their specifications.
Hence, an application that relies on using a window excursion should try
to postpone the display-buffer
call until after the excursion has
terminated.
Each window remembers in a list the buffers it has previously
displayed, and the order in which these buffers were removed from it.
This history is used, for example, by replace-buffer-in-windows
(see Buffers and Windows), and when quitting windows
(see Quitting Windows). The list is automatically maintained by
Emacs, but you can use the following functions to explicitly inspect
or alter it:
This function returns a list specifying the previous contents of window. The optional argument window should be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
Each list element has the form (buffer window-start
window-pos)
, where buffer is a buffer previously shown in
the window, window-start is the window start position
(see The Window Start and End Positions) when that buffer was last shown, and
window-pos is the point position (see Windows and Point) when
that buffer was last shown in window.
The list is ordered so that earlier elements correspond to more recently-shown buffers, and the first element usually corresponds to the buffer most recently removed from the window.
This function sets window’s previous buffers to the value of
prev-buffers. The argument window must be a live window
and defaults to the selected one. The argument prev-buffers
should be a list of the same form as that returned by
window-prev-buffers
.
In addition, each window maintains a list of next buffers, which
is a list of buffers re-shown by switch-to-prev-buffer
(see
below). This list is mainly used by switch-to-prev-buffer
and
switch-to-next-buffer
for choosing buffers to switch to.
This function returns the list of buffers recently re-shown in
window via switch-to-prev-buffer
. The window
argument must denote a live window or nil
(meaning the selected
window).
This function sets the next buffer list of window to
next-buffers. The window argument should be a live window
or nil
(meaning the selected window). The argument
next-buffers should be a list of buffers.
The following commands can be used to cycle through the global buffer
list, much like bury-buffer
and unbury-buffer
. However,
they cycle according to the specified window’s history list, rather
than the global buffer list. In addition, they restore
window-specific window start and point positions, and may show a
buffer even if it is already shown in another window. The
switch-to-prev-buffer
command, in particular, is used by
replace-buffer-in-windows
, bury-buffer
and
quit-window
to find a replacement buffer for a window.
This command displays the previous buffer in window. The
argument window should be a live window or nil
(meaning
the selected window). If the optional argument bury-or-kill is
non-nil
, this means that the buffer currently shown in
window is about to be buried or killed and consequently should
not be switched to in future invocations of this command.
The previous buffer is usually the buffer shown before the buffer
currently shown in window. However, a buffer that has been buried
or killed, or has been already shown by a recent invocation of
switch-to-prev-buffer
, does not qualify as previous buffer.
If repeated invocations of this command have already shown all buffers previously shown in window, further invocations will show buffers from the buffer list of the frame window appears on (see The Buffer List).
The option switch-to-prev-buffer-skip
described below can be
used to inhibit switching to certain buffers, for example, to those
already shown in another window. Also, if window’s frame has a
buffer-predicate
parameter (see Buffer Parameters), that
predicate may inhibit switching to certain buffers.
This command switches to the next buffer in window, thus undoing
the effect of the last switch-to-prev-buffer
command in
window. The argument window must be a live window and
defaults to the selected one.
If there is no recent invocation of switch-to-prev-buffer
that
can be undone, this function tries to show a buffer from the buffer list
of the frame window appears on (see The Buffer List).
The option switch-to-prev-buffer-skip
and the
buffer-predicate
(see Buffer Parameters) of window’s
frame affect this command as they do for switch-to-prev-buffer
.
By default switch-to-prev-buffer
and
switch-to-next-buffer
can switch to a buffer that is already
shown in another window. The following option can be used to override
this behavior.
If this variable is nil
, switch-to-prev-buffer
may
switch to any buffer, including those already shown in other windows.
If this variable is non-nil
, switch-to-prev-buffer
will
refrain from switching to certain buffers. The following values can
be used:
this
means do not switch to a buffer shown on the frame that
hosts the window switch-to-prev-buffer
is acting upon.
visible
means do not switch to a buffer shown on any visible
frame.
t
means do not switch to a buffer shown on any live frame.
switch-to-prev-buffer
, a buffer switch-to-prev-buffer
intends to switch to and the bury-or-kill argument of
switch-to-prev-buffer
. If that function returns
non-nil
, switch-to-prev-buffer
will refrain from
switching to the buffer specified by the second argument.
The command switch-to-next-buffer
obeys this option in a
similar way. If this option specifies a function,
switch-to-next-buffer
will call that function with the third
argument always nil
.
Note that since switch-to-prev-buffer
is called by
bury-buffer
, replace-buffer-in-windows
and
quit-restore-window
as well, customizing this option may also
affect the behavior of Emacs when a window is quit or a buffer gets
buried or killed.
Note also that under certain circumstances
switch-to-prev-buffer
and switch-to-next-buffer
may
ignore this option, for example, when there is only one buffer left
these functions can switch to.
This user option should be either a regular expression or a list of
regular expressions. Buffers whose names match one of those regular
expressions will be ignored by switch-to-prev-buffer
and
switch-to-next-buffer
(except when there’s no other buffer to
switch to).
Functions for displaying a buffer can be told to not use specific
windows by marking these windows as dedicated to their buffers.
display-buffer
(see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) never uses a dedicated
window for displaying another buffer in it. get-lru-window
and
get-largest-window
(see Cyclic Ordering of Windows) do not
consider dedicated windows as candidates when their dedicated
argument is non-nil
. The behavior of set-window-buffer
(see Buffers and Windows) with respect to dedicated windows is
slightly different, see below.
Functions supposed to remove a buffer from a window or a window from
a frame can behave specially when a window they operate on is dedicated.
We will distinguish four basic cases, namely where (1) the window is
not the only window on its frame, (2) the window is the only window on
its frame but there are other frames on the same terminal left, (3)
the window is the only window on the only frame on the same terminal,
and (4) the dedication’s value is side
(see Displaying Buffers in Side Windows).
In particular, delete-windows-on
(see Deleting Windows)
handles case (2) by deleting the associated frame and cases (3) and (4)
by showing another buffer in that frame’s only window. The function
replace-buffer-in-windows
(see Buffers and Windows) which is
called when a buffer gets killed, deletes the window in case (1) and
behaves like delete-windows-on
otherwise.
When bury-buffer
(see The Buffer List) operates on the
selected window (which shows the buffer that shall be buried), it
handles case (2) by calling frame-auto-hide-function
(see Quitting Windows) to deal with the selected frame. The other
two cases are handled as with replace-buffer-in-windows
.
This function returns non-nil
if window is dedicated to its
buffer and nil
otherwise. More precisely, the return value is
the value assigned by the last call of set-window-dedicated-p
for
window, or nil
if that function was never called with
window as its argument. The default for window is the
selected window.
This function marks window as dedicated to its buffer if
flag is non-nil
, and non-dedicated otherwise.
As a special case, if flag is t
, window becomes
strongly dedicated to its buffer. set-window-buffer
signals an error when the window it acts upon is strongly dedicated to
its buffer and does not already display the buffer it is asked to
display. Other functions do not treat t
differently from any
non-nil
value.
You can also tell display-buffer
to mark a window it creates as
dedicated to its buffer by providing a suitable dedicated
action alist entry (see Action Alists for Buffer Display).
After a command uses display-buffer
to put a buffer on the
screen, the user may decide to hide it and return to the previous
configuration of the Emacs display. We call that quitting the
window. The way to do this is to call quit-window
while the
window used by display-buffer
is the selected window.
The right way to restore the previous configuration of the display depends on what was done to the window where the buffer now appears. It might be right to delete that window, or delete its frame, or just display another buffer in that window. One complication is that the user may have changed the window configuration since the act of displaying that buffer, and it would be undesirable to undo the user’s explicitly requested changes.
To enable quit-window
to do the right thing,
display-buffer
saves information about what it did in the
window’s quit-restore
parameter (see Window Parameters).
This command quits window and buries its buffer. The argument
window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
With prefix argument kill non-nil
, it kills the buffer
instead of burying it.
The function quit-window
first runs quit-window-hook
.
Then it calls the function quit-restore-window
, described next,
which does the hard work.
You can get more control by calling quit-restore-window
instead.
This function handles window and its buffer after quitting. The
optional argument window must be a live window and defaults to
the selected one. The function takes account of the window’s
quit-restore
parameter.
The optional argument bury-or-kill specifies how to deal with window’s buffer. The following values are meaningful:
nil
This means to not deal with the buffer in any particular way. As a
consequence, if window is not deleted, invoking
switch-to-prev-buffer
will usually show the buffer again.
append
This means that if window is not deleted, its buffer is moved to
the end of window’s list of previous buffers (see Window History), so it’s less likely that future invocations of
switch-to-prev-buffer
will switch to it. Also, it moves the
buffer to the end of the frame’s buffer list (see The Buffer List).
bury
This means that if window is not deleted, its buffer is removed
from window’s list of previous buffers. Also, it moves the
buffer to the end of the frame’s buffer list. This is the most
reliable way to prevent switch-to-prev-buffer
from switching to
this buffer again, short of killing the buffer.
kill
This means to kill window’s buffer.
The argument bury-or-kill also specifies what to do with
window’s frame when window should be deleted, if it is the
only window on its frame, and there are other frames on that frame’s
terminal. If bury-or-kill equals kill
, it means to
delete the frame. Otherwise, the fate of the frame is determined by
calling frame-auto-hide-function
(see below) with that frame as
sole argument.
This function always sets window’s quit-restore
parameter
to nil
unless it deletes the window.
The window window’s quit-restore
parameter (see Window Parameters) should be nil
or a list of four elements:
(method obuffer owindow this-buffer)
The first element, method, is one of the four symbols
window
, frame
, same
and other
.
frame
and window
control how to delete window,
while same
and other
control displaying some other
buffer in it.
Specifically, window
means that the window has been specially
created by display-buffer
; frame
means that a separate
frame has been created; same
, that the window has only ever
displayed this buffer; other
, that the window showed another
buffer before.
The second element, obuffer, is either one of the symbols
window
or frame
, or a list of the form
(prev-buffer prev-window-start prev-window-point height)
which says which buffer was shown in window before, that buffer’s window start (see The Window Start and End Positions) and window point (see Windows and Point) positions at that time, and window’s height at that time. If prev-buffer is still live when quitting window, quitting the window may reuse window to display prev-buffer.
The third element, owindow, is the window that was selected just before the displaying was done. If quitting deletes window, it tries to select owindow.
The fourth element, this-buffer, is the buffer whose displaying
set the quit-restore
parameter. Quitting window may delete
that window only if it still shows that buffer.
Quitting window tries to delete it if and only if (1)
method is either window
or frame
, (2) the window
has no history of previously-displayed buffers and (3)
this-buffer equals the buffer currently displayed in
window. If window is part of an atomic window
(see Atomic Windows), quitting will try to delete the root of that
atomic window instead. In either case, it tries to avoid signaling an
error when window cannot be deleted.
If obuffer is a list, and prev-buffer is still live, quitting displays prev-buffer in window according to the rest of the elements of obuffer. This includes resizing the window to height if it was temporarily resized to display this-buffer.
Otherwise, if window was previously used for displaying other buffers (see Window History), the most recent buffer in that history will be displayed.
The following option specifies a function to do the right thing with a frame containing one window when quitting that window.
The function specified by this option is called to automatically hide frames. This function is called with one argument—a frame.
The function specified here is called by bury-buffer
(see The Buffer List) when the selected window is dedicated and shows
the buffer to bury. It is also called by quit-restore-window
(see above) when the frame of the window to quit has been specially
created for displaying that window’s buffer and the buffer is not
killed.
The default is to call iconify-frame
(see Visibility of Frames). Alternatively, you may specify either delete-frame
(see Deleting Frames) to remove the frame from its display,
make-frame-invisible
to make the frame invisible, ignore
to leave the frame unchanged, or any other function that can take a
frame as its sole argument.
Note that the function specified by this option is called only if the specified frame contains just one live window and there is at least one other frame on the same terminal.
For a particular frame, the value specified here may be overridden by
that frame’s auto-hide-function
frame parameter (see Frame Interaction Parameters).
Side windows are special windows positioned at any of the four sides of a frame’s root window (see Windows and Frames). In practice, this means that the area of the frame’s root window is subdivided into a main window and a number of side windows surrounding that main window. The main window is either a “normal” live window or specifies the area containing all the normal windows.
In their most simple form of use, side windows allow to display
specific buffers always in the same area of a frame. Hence they can
be regarded as a generalization of the concept provided by
display-buffer-at-bottom
(see Action Functions for Buffer Display) to the remaining sides of a frame. With suitable
customizations, however, side windows can be also used to provide
frame layouts similar to those found in so-called integrated
development environments (IDEs).
The following action function for display-buffer
(see Action Functions for Buffer Display) creates or reuses a side window for
displaying the specified buffer.
This function displays buffer in a side window of the selected
frame. It returns the window used for displaying buffer,
nil
if no such window can be found or created.
alist is an association list of symbols and values as for
display-buffer
. The following symbols in alist are special
for this function:
side
Denotes the side of the frame where the window shall be located. Valid
values are left
, top
, right
and bottom
. If
unspecified, the window is located at the bottom of the frame.
slot
Denotes a slot at the specified side where to locate the window. A
value of zero means to preferably position the window in the middle of
the specified side. A negative value means to use a slot preceding
(that is, above or on the left of) the middle slot. A positive value
means to use a slot following (that is, below or on the right of) the
middle slot. Hence, all windows on a specific side are ordered by their
slot
value. If unspecified, the window is located in the middle
of the specified side.
dedicated
The dedicated flag (see Dedicated Windows) has a slightly different
meaning for side windows. When a side window is created, that flag is
set to the value side
to prevent display-buffer
to use the
window in other action functions. Its value persists across invocations
of quit-window
, kill-buffer
, previous-buffer
and
next-buffer
.
In particular, these commands will refrain from showing, in a side
window, buffers that have not been displayed in that window before.
They will also refrain from having a normal, non-side window show a
buffer that has been already displayed in a side window. A notable
exception to the latter rule occurs when an application, after
displaying a buffer, resets that buffer’s local variables. To override
these rules and always delete a side window with quit-window
or
kill-buffer
, and eventually prevent the use of
previous-buffer
and next-buffer
, set this value to
t
or specify a value via display-buffer-mark-dedicated
.
If you specify the same slot on the same side for two or more different buffers, the buffer displayed last is shown in the corresponding window. Hence, slots can be used for sharing the same side window between buffers.
This function installs the window-side
and window-slot
parameters (see Window Parameters) and makes them persistent. It
does not install any other window parameters unless they have been
explicitly provided via a window-parameters
entry in alist.
By default, side windows cannot be split via split-window
(see Splitting Windows). Also, a side window is not reused or
split by any buffer display action (see Action Functions for Buffer Display) unless it is explicitly specified as target of that
action. Note also that delete-other-windows
cannot make a side
window the only window on its frame (see Deleting Windows).
The following options provide additional control over the placement of side windows.
If non-nil
, the side windows on the left and right of a frame
occupy the frame’s full height. Otherwise, the side windows on the top
and bottom of the frame occupy the frame’s full width.
This option specifies the maximum number of side windows on each side of
a frame. The value is a list of four elements specifying the number of
side window slots on (in this order) the left, top, right and bottom of
each frame. If an element is a number, it means to display at most that
many windows on the corresponding side. If an element is nil
, it
means there’s no bound on the number of slots on that side.
If any of the specified values is zero, no window can be created on the
corresponding side. display-buffer-in-side-window
will not
signal an error in that case, but will return nil
. If a specified
value just forbids the creation of an additional side window, the most
suitable window on that side is reused and may have its
window-slot
parameter changed accordingly.
This option specifies whether top/bottom side windows should appear in
reverse order. When this is nil
, side windows on the top and
bottom of a frame are always drawn from left to right with increasing
slot values. When this is t
, the drawing order is reversed and
side windows on the top and bottom of a frame are drawn from right to
left with increasing slot values.
When this is bidi
, the drawing order is reversed if and only if
the value of bidi-paragraph-direction
(see Bidirectional Display) is right-to-left
in the buffer displayed in the window
most recently selected within the main window area of this frame.
Sometimes that window may be hard to find, so heuristics are used to
avoid that the drawing order changes inadvertently when another window
gets selected.
The layout of side windows on the left or right of a frame is not affected by the value of this variable.
When a frame has side windows, the following function returns the main window of that frame.
This function returns the main window of the specified frame. The optional argument frame must be a live frame and defaults to the selected one.
If frame has no side windows, it returns frame’s root
window. Otherwise, it returns either an internal non-side window such
that all other non-side windows on frame descend from it, or the
single live non-side window of frame. Note that the main window
of a frame cannot be deleted via delete-window
.
The following command is handy to toggle the appearance of all side windows on a specified frame.
This command toggles side windows on the specified frame. The optional argument frame must be a live frame and defaults to the selected one.
If frame has at least one side window, this command saves the
state of frame’s root window in the frame’s
window-state
frame parameter and deletes all side windows on
frame afterwards.
If frame has no side windows, but does have a window-state
parameter, this command uses that parameter’s value to restore the side
windows on frame leaving frame’s main window alone.
An error is signaled if frame has no side windows and no saved state is found for it.
Side windows can be used to create more complex frame layouts like those provided by integrated development environments (IDEs). In such layouts, the area of the main window is where the normal editing activities take place. Side windows are not conceived for editing in the usual sense. Rather, they are supposed to display information complementary to the current editing activity, like lists of files, tags or buffers, help information, search or grep results or shell output.
The layout of such a frame might appear as follows:
___________________________________ | *Buffer List* | |___________________________________| | | | | | * | | * | | d | | T | | i | | a | | r | Main Window Area | g | | e | | s | | d | | * | | * | | | |_____|_______________________|_____| | *help*/*grep*/ | *shell*/ | | *Completions* | *compilation* | |_________________|_________________| | Echo Area | |___________________________________|
The following example illustrates how window parameters (see Window Parameters) can be used with display-buffer-in-side-window
(see Displaying Buffers in Side Windows) to set up code for
producing the frame layout sketched above.
(defvar parameters '(window-parameters . ((no-other-window . t) (no-delete-other-windows . t)))) (setq fit-window-to-buffer-horizontally t) (setq window-resize-pixelwise t) (setq display-buffer-alist `(("\\*Buffer List\\*" display-buffer-in-side-window (side . top) (slot . 0) (window-height . fit-window-to-buffer) (preserve-size . (nil . t)) ,parameters) ("\\*Tags List\\*" display-buffer-in-side-window (side . right) (slot . 0) (window-width . fit-window-to-buffer) (preserve-size . (t . nil)) ,parameters) ("\\*\\(?:help\\|grep\\|Completions\\)\\*" display-buffer-in-side-window (side . bottom) (slot . -1) (preserve-size . (nil . t)) ,parameters) ("\\*\\(?:shell\\|compilation\\)\\*" display-buffer-in-side-window (side . bottom) (slot . 1) (preserve-size . (nil . t)) ,parameters)))
This specifies display-buffer-alist
entries (see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) for buffers with fixed names. In particular, it asks for
showing *Buffer List* with adjustable height at the top of the
frame and *Tags List* with adjustable width on the frame’s right.
It also asks for having the *help*, *grep* and
*Completions* buffers share a window on the bottom left side of
the frame and the *shell* and *compilation* buffers appear
in a window on the bottom right side of the frame.
Note that the option fit-window-to-buffer-horizontally
must
have a non-nil
value in order to allow horizontal adjustment of
windows. Entries are also added that ask for preserving the height of
side windows at the top and bottom of the frame and the width of side
windows at the left or right of the frame. To assure that side windows
retain their respective sizes when maximizing the frame, the variable
window-resize-pixelwise
is set to a non-nil
value.
See Resizing Windows.
The last form also makes sure that none of the created side windows
are accessible via C-x o by installing the no-other-window
parameter for each of these windows. In addition, it makes sure that
side windows are not deleted via C-x 1 by installing the
no-delete-other-windows
parameter for each of these windows.
Since dired
buffers have no fixed names, we use a special
function dired-default-directory-on-left
in order to display a
lean directory buffer on the left side of the frame.
(defun dired-default-directory-on-left () "Display `default-directory' in side window on left, hiding details." (interactive) (let ((buffer (dired-noselect default-directory))) (with-current-buffer buffer (dired-hide-details-mode t)) (display-buffer-in-side-window buffer `((side . left) (slot . 0) (window-width . fit-window-to-buffer) (preserve-size . (t . nil)) ,parameters))))
Evaluating the preceding forms and typing, in any order, M-x list-buffers, C-h f, M-x shell, M-x list-tags, and M-x dired-default-directory-on-left should now reproduce the frame layout sketched above.
Atomic windows are rectangular compositions of at least two live windows. They have the following distinctive characteristics:
split-window
(see Splitting Windows), when
applied to a constituent of an atomic window, will try to create the new
window outside of the atomic window.
delete-window
(see Deleting Windows), when
applied to a constituent of an atomic window, will try to delete the
entire atomic window instead.
delete-other-windows
(see Deleting Windows),
when applied to a constituent of an atomic window, will try to make the
atomic window fill its frame or main window (see Side Windows).
This means that the basic groups of functions that alter the window structure treat an atomic window like a live one, thus preserving the internal structure of the atomic window.
Atomic windows are useful to construct and preserve window layouts that are meaningful only when all involved buffers are shown simultaneously in a specific manner, such as when showing differences between file revisions, or the same text in different languages or markups. They can also be used to permanently display information pertinent to a specific window in bars on that window’s sides.
Atomic windows are implemented with the help of the reserved
window-atom
window parameter (see Window Parameters) and an
internal window (see Basic Concepts of Emacs Windows) called the root window of the
atomic window. All windows that are part of the same atomic window have
this root window as their common ancestor and are assigned a
non-nil
window-atom
parameter.
The following function returns the root of the atomic window a specified window is part of:
This functions returns the root of the atomic window window is a
part of. The specified window must be a valid window and defaults
to the selected one. It returns nil
if window is not part
of an atomic window.
The most simple approach to make a new atomic window is to take an existing internal window and apply the following function:
This function converts window into an atomic window. The
specified window must be an internal window. All this function
does is to set the window-atom
parameter of each descendant of
window to t
.
To create a new atomic window from an existing live window or to add a new window to an existing atomic window, the following buffer display action function (see Action Functions for Buffer Display) can be used:
This function tries to display buffer in a new window that will be combined with an existing window to form an atomic window. If the existing window is already part of an atomic window, it adds the new window to that atomic window.
The specified alist is an association list of symbols and values. The following symbols have a special meaning:
window
The value of such an element specifies an existing window the new window
shall be combined with. If it specifies an internal window, all
children of that window become part of the atomic window too. If no
window is specified, the new window becomes a sibling of the selected
window. The window-atom
parameter of the existing window is set
to main
provided that window is live and its window-atom
parameter was not already set.
side
The value of such an element denotes the side of the existing window
where the new window shall be located. Valid values are below
,
right
, above
and left
. The default is
below
. The window-atom
parameter of the new window is set
to this value.
The return value is the new window, nil
when creating that window
failed.
Note that the value of the window-atom
parameter does not really
matter as long as it is non-nil
. The values assigned by
display-buffer-in-atom-window
just allow for easy retrieval of
the original and the new window after that function has been applied.
Note also that the window-atom
parameter is the only window
parameter assigned by display-buffer-in-atom-window
. Further
parameters have to be set by the application explicitly via a
window-parameters
entry in alist.
Atomic windows automatically cease to exist when one of their
constituents gets deleted. To dissolve an atomic window manually,
reset the window-atom
parameter of its constituents—the root
of the atomic window and all its descendants.
The following code snippet, when applied to a single-window frame, first splits the selected window and makes the selected and the new window constituents of an atomic window with their parent as root. It then displays the buffer *Messages* in a new window at the frame’s bottom and makes that new window part of the atomic window just created.
(let ((window (split-window-right))) (window-make-atom (window-parent window)) (display-buffer-in-atom-window (get-buffer-create "*Messages*") `((window . ,(window-parent window)) (window-height . 5))))
At this moment typing C-x 2 in any window of that frame produces a new window at the bottom of the frame. Typing C-x 3 instead will put the new window at the frame’s right. In either case, typing now C-x 1 in any window of the atomic window will remove the new window only. Typing C-x 0 in any window of the atomic window will make that new window fill the frame.
Each window has its own value of point (see Point), independent of the value of point in other windows displaying the same buffer. This makes it useful to have multiple windows showing one buffer.
Emacs displays the cursor, by default as a rectangular block, in each window at the position of that window’s point. When the user switches to another buffer in a window, Emacs moves that window’s cursor to where point is in that buffer. If the exact position of point is hidden behind some display element, such as a display string or an image, Emacs displays the cursor immediately before or after that display element.
This function returns the current position of point in window. For a nonselected window, this is the value point would have (in that window’s buffer) if that window were selected. The default for window is the selected window.
When window is the selected window, the value returned is the
value of point in that window’s buffer. Strictly speaking, it would be
more correct to return the top-level value of point, outside of any
save-excursion
forms. But that value is hard to find.
This function positions point in window at position position in window’s buffer. It returns position.
If window is selected, this simply does goto-char
in
window’s buffer.
This variable specifies the marker insertion type (see Marker Insertion Types) of window-point
. The default is nil
,
so window-point
will stay behind text inserted there.
Each window maintains a marker used to keep track of a buffer position that specifies where in the buffer display should start. This position is called the display-start position of the window (or just the start). The character after this position is the one that appears at the upper left corner of the window. It is usually, but not inevitably, at the beginning of a text line.
After switching windows or buffers, and in some other cases, if the window start is in the middle of a line, Emacs adjusts the window start to the start of a line. This prevents certain operations from leaving the window start at a meaningless point within a line. This feature may interfere with testing some Lisp code by executing it using the commands of Lisp mode, because they trigger this readjustment. To test such code, put it into a command and bind the command to a key.
This function returns the display-start position of window
window. If window is nil
, the selected window is
used.
When you create a window, or display a different buffer in it, the
display-start position is set to a display-start position recently used
for the same buffer, or to point-min
if the buffer doesn’t have
any.
Redisplay updates the window-start position (if you have not specified it explicitly since the previous redisplay)—to make sure point appears on the screen. Nothing except redisplay automatically changes the window-start position; if you move point, do not expect the window-start position to change in response until after the next redisplay.
This function is like window-start
, except that when
window is a part of a group of windows (see Window Group),
window-group-start
returns the start position of the entire
group. This condition holds when the buffer local variable
window-group-start-function
is set to a function. In this
case, window-group-start
calls the function with the single
argument window, then returns its result.
This function returns the position where display of its buffer ends in window. The default for window is the selected window.
Simply changing the buffer text or moving point does not update the
value that window-end
returns. The value is updated only when
Emacs redisplays and redisplay completes without being preempted.
If the last redisplay of window was preempted, and did not finish,
Emacs does not know the position of the end of display in that window.
In that case, this function returns nil
.
If update is non-nil
, window-end
always returns an
up-to-date value for where display ends, based on the current
window-start
value. If a previously saved value of that position
is still valid, window-end
returns that value; otherwise it
computes the correct value by scanning the buffer text.
Even if update is non-nil
, window-end
does not
attempt to scroll the display if point has moved off the screen, the
way real redisplay would do. It does not alter the
window-start
value. In effect, it reports where the displayed
text will end if scrolling is not required. Note that the position it
returns might be only partially visible.
This function is like window-end
, except that when window
is a part of a group of windows (see Window Group),
window-group-end
returns the end position of the entire group.
This condition holds when the buffer local variable
window-group-end-function
is set to a function. In this case,
window-group-end
calls the function with the two arguments
window and update, then returns its result. The argument
update has the same meaning as in window-end
.
This function sets the display-start position of window to position in window’s buffer. It returns position.
The display routines insist that the position of point be visible when a
buffer is displayed. Normally, they select the display-start position
according to their internal logic (and scroll the window if necessary)
to make point visible. However, if you specify the start position
with this function using nil
for noforce, it means you
want display to start at position even if that would put the
location of point off the screen. If this does place point off
screen, the display routines attempt to move point to the left margin
on the middle line in the window.
For example, if point is 1 and you set the start of the window to 37, the start of the next line, point will be above the top of the window. The display routines will automatically move point if it is still 1 when redisplay occurs. Here is an example:
;; Here is what ‘foo’ looks like before executing
;; the set-window-start
expression.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- ∗This is the contents of buffer foo. 2 3 4 5 6 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(set-window-start (selected-window) (save-excursion (goto-char 1) (forward-line 1) (point))) ⇒ 37
;; Here is what ‘foo’ looks like after executing
;; the set-window-start
expression.
---------- Buffer: foo ----------
2
3
∗4
5
6
---------- Buffer: foo ----------
If the attempt to make point visible (i.e., in a fully-visible screen line) fails, the display routines will disregard the requested window-start position and compute a new one anyway. Thus, for reliable results Lisp programs that call this function should always move point to be inside the window whose display starts at position.
If noforce is non-nil
, and position would place point
off screen at the next redisplay, then redisplay computes a new window-start
position that works well with point, and thus position is not used.
This function is like set-window-start
, except that when
window is a part of a group of windows (see Window Group),
set-window-group-start
sets the start position of the entire
group. This condition holds when the buffer local variable
set-window-group-start-function
is set to a function. In this
case, set-window-group-start
calls the function with the three
arguments window, position, and noforce, then
returns its result. The arguments position and noforce in
this function have the same meaning as in set-window-start
.
This function returns non-nil
if position is within the
range of text currently visible on the screen in window. It
returns nil
if position is scrolled vertically out of
view. Locations that are partially obscured are not considered
visible unless partially is non-nil
. The argument
position defaults to the current position of point in
window; window defaults to the selected window. If
position is t
, that means to check either the first
visible position of the last screen line in window, or the
end-of-buffer position, whichever comes first.
This function considers only vertical scrolling. If position is
out of view only because window has been scrolled horizontally,
pos-visible-in-window-p
returns non-nil
anyway.
See Horizontal Scrolling.
If position is visible, pos-visible-in-window-p
returns
t
if partially is nil
; if partially is
non-nil
, and the character following position is fully
visible, it returns a list of the form (x y)
, where
x and y are the pixel coordinates relative to the top left
corner of the window; otherwise it returns an extended list of the form
(x y rtop rbot rowh vpos)
,
where rtop and rbot specify the number of off-window pixels
at the top and bottom of the row at position, rowh specifies
the visible height of that row, and vpos specifies the vertical
position (zero-based row number) of that row.
Here is an example:
;; If point is off the screen now, recenter it now.
(or (pos-visible-in-window-p
(point) (selected-window))
(recenter 0))
This function is like pos-visible-in-window-p
, except that when
window is a part of a group of windows (see Window Group),
pos-visible-in-window-group-p
tests the visibility of pos
in the entire group, not just in the single window. This
condition holds when the buffer local variable
pos-visible-in-window-group-p-function
is set to a function.
In this case pos-visible-in-window-group-p
calls the function
with the three arguments position, window, and
partially, then returns its result. The arguments
position and partially have the same meaning as in
pos-visible-in-window-p
.
This function returns the height of text line line in
window. If line is one of header-line
or
mode-line
, window-line-height
returns information about
the corresponding line of the window. Otherwise, line is a text
line number starting from 0. A negative number counts from the end of
the window. The default for line is the current line in
window; the default for window is the selected window.
If the display is not up to date, window-line-height
returns
nil
. In that case, pos-visible-in-window-p
may be used
to obtain related information.
If there is no line corresponding to the specified line,
window-line-height
returns nil
. Otherwise, it returns
a list (height vpos ypos offbot)
,
where height is the height in pixels of the visible part of the
line, vpos and ypos are the vertical position in lines and
pixels of the line relative to the top of the first text line, and
offbot is the number of off-window pixels at the bottom of the
text line. If there are off-window pixels at the top of the (first)
text line, ypos is negative.
Textual scrolling means moving the text up or down through a
window. It works by changing the window’s display-start location. It
may also change the value of window-point
to keep point on the
screen (see Windows and Point).
The basic textual scrolling functions are scroll-up
(which
scrolls forward) and scroll-down
(which scrolls backward). In
these function names, “up” and “down” refer to the direction of
motion of the buffer text relative to the window. Imagine that the
text is written on a long roll of paper and that the scrolling
commands move the paper up and down. Thus, if you are looking at the
middle of a buffer and repeatedly call scroll-down
, you will
eventually see the beginning of the buffer.
Unfortunately, this sometimes causes confusion, because some people tend to think in terms of the opposite convention: they imagine the window moving over text that remains in place, so that “down” commands take you to the end of the buffer. This convention is consistent with fact that such a command is bound to a key named PageDown on modern keyboards.
Textual scrolling functions (aside from scroll-other-window
)
have unpredictable results if the current buffer is not the one
displayed in the selected window. See The Current Buffer.
If the window contains a row taller than the height of the window
(for example in the presence of a large image), the scroll functions
will adjust the window’s vertical scroll position to scroll the
partially visible row. Lisp callers can disable this feature by
binding the variable auto-window-vscroll
to nil
(see Vertical Fractional Scrolling).
This function scrolls forward by count lines in the selected window.
If count is negative, it scrolls backward instead. If
count is nil
(or omitted), the distance scrolled is
next-screen-context-lines
lines less than the height of the
window’s body.
If the selected window cannot be scrolled any further, this function
signals an error. Otherwise, it returns nil
.
This function scrolls backward by count lines in the selected window.
If count is negative, it scrolls forward instead. In other
respects, it behaves the same way as scroll-up
does.
This behaves like scroll-up
, except that if the selected window
cannot be scrolled any further and the value of the variable
scroll-error-top-bottom
is t
, it tries to move to the
end of the buffer instead. If point is already there, it signals an
error.
This behaves like scroll-down
, except that if the selected
window cannot be scrolled any further and the value of the variable
scroll-error-top-bottom
is t
, it tries to move to the
beginning of the buffer instead. If point is already there, it
signals an error.
This function scrolls the text in another window upward count
lines. Negative values of count, or nil
, are handled
as in scroll-up
.
You can specify which buffer to scroll by setting the variable
other-window-scroll-buffer
to a buffer. If that buffer isn’t
already displayed, scroll-other-window
displays it in some
window.
When the selected window is the minibuffer, the next window is normally
the leftmost one immediately above it. You can specify a different
window to scroll, when the minibuffer is selected, by setting the variable
minibuffer-scroll-window
. This variable has no effect when any
other window is selected. When it is non-nil
and the
minibuffer is selected, it takes precedence over
other-window-scroll-buffer
. See Definition of minibuffer-scroll-window.
This function scrolls the text in another window downward count
lines. Negative values of count, or nil
, are handled as
in scroll-down
. In other respects, it behaves the same way as
scroll-other-window
does.
If this variable is non-nil
, it tells scroll-other-window
which buffer’s window to scroll.
This option specifies the size of the scroll margin—a minimum number of lines between point and the top or bottom of a window. Whenever point gets within this many lines of the top or bottom of the window, redisplay scrolls the text automatically (if possible) to move point out of the margin, closer to the center of the window.
This variable limits the effective value of scroll-margin
to a
fraction of the current window line height. For example, if the
current window has 20 lines and maximum-scroll-margin
is 0.1,
then the scroll margins will never be larger than 2 lines, no matter
how big scroll-margin
is.
maximum-scroll-margin
itself has a maximum value of 0.5, which
allows setting margins large to keep the cursor at the middle line of
the window (or two middle lines if the window has an even number of
lines). If it’s set to a larger value (or any value other than a
float between 0.0 and 0.5) then the default value of 0.25 will be used
instead.
This variable controls how scrolling is done automatically when point
moves off the screen (or into the scroll margin). If the value is a
positive integer n, then redisplay scrolls the text up to
n lines in either direction, if that will bring point back into
proper view. This behavior is called conservative scrolling.
Otherwise, scrolling happens in the usual way, under the control of
other variables such as scroll-up-aggressively
and
scroll-down-aggressively
.
The default value is zero, which means that conservative scrolling never happens.
The value of this variable should be either nil
or a fraction
f between 0 and 1. If it is a fraction, that specifies where on
the screen to put point when scrolling down. More precisely, when a
window scrolls down because point is above the window start, the new
start position is chosen to put point f part of the window
height from the top. The larger f, the more aggressive the
scrolling.
A value of nil
is equivalent to .5, since its effect is to center
point. This variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set in any
fashion.
Likewise, for scrolling up. The value, f, specifies how far
point should be placed from the bottom of the window; thus, as with
scroll-down-aggressively
, a larger value scrolls more
aggressively.
This variable is an older variant of scroll-conservatively
.
The difference is that if its value is n, that permits scrolling
only by precisely n lines, not a smaller number. This feature
does not work with scroll-margin
. The default value is zero.
If this option is t
, whenever a scrolling command moves point
off-window, Emacs tries to adjust point to keep the cursor at its old
vertical position in the window, rather than the window edge.
If the value is non-nil
and not t
, Emacs adjusts point
to keep the cursor at the same vertical position, even if the
scrolling command didn’t move point off-window.
This option affects all scroll commands that have a non-nil
scroll-command
symbol property.
The value of this variable is the number of lines of continuity to
retain when scrolling by full screens. For example, scroll-up
with an argument of nil
scrolls so that this many lines at the
bottom of the window appear instead at the top. The default value is
2
.
If this option is nil
(the default), scroll-up-command
and scroll-down-command
simply signal an error when no more
scrolling is possible.
If the value is t
, these commands instead move point to the
beginning or end of the buffer (depending on scrolling direction);
only if point is already on that position do they signal an error.
This function scrolls the text in the selected window so that point is displayed at a specified vertical position within the window. It does not move point with respect to the text.
If count is a non-negative number, that puts the line containing point count lines down from the top of the window. If count is a negative number, then it counts upward from the bottom of the window, so that −1 stands for the last usable line in the window.
If count is nil
(or a non-nil
list),
recenter
puts the line containing point in the middle of the
window. If count is nil
and redisplay is
non-nil
, this function may redraw the frame, according to the
value of recenter-redisplay
. Thus, omitting the second
argument can be used to countermand the effect of
recenter-redisplay
being non-nil
. Interactive calls
pass non-nil
for redisplay.
When recenter
is called interactively, count is the raw
prefix argument. Thus, typing C-u as the prefix sets the
count to a non-nil
list, while typing C-u 4 sets
count to 4, which positions the current line four lines from the
top.
With an argument of zero, recenter
positions the current line at
the top of the window. The command recenter-top-bottom
offers
a more convenient way to achieve this.
This function is like recenter
, except that when the selected
window is part of a group of windows (see Window Group),
recenter-window-group
scrolls the entire group. This condition
holds when the buffer local variable
recenter-window-group-function
is set to a function. In this
case, recenter-window-group
calls the function with the
argument count, then returns its result. The argument
count has the same meaning as in recenter
, but with
respect to the entire window group.
If this variable is non-nil
, calling recenter
with a
nil
count argument and non-nil
redisplay
argument redraws the frame. The default value is tty
, which
means only redraw the frame if it is a tty frame.
This command, which is the default binding for C-l, acts like
recenter
, except if called with no argument. In that case,
successive calls place point according to the cycling order defined
by the variable recenter-positions
.
This variable controls how recenter-top-bottom
behaves when
called with no argument. The default value is (middle top
bottom)
, which means that successive calls of
recenter-top-bottom
with no argument cycle between placing
point at the middle, top, and bottom of the window.
Vertical fractional scrolling means shifting text in a window up or down by a specified multiple or fraction of a line. Emacs uses it, for example, on images and screen lines which are taller than the window. Each window has a vertical scroll position, which is a number, never less than zero. It specifies how far to raise the contents of the window when displaying them. Raising the window contents generally makes all or part of some lines disappear off the top, and all or part of some other lines appear at the bottom. The usual value is zero.
The vertical scroll position is measured in units of the normal line height, which is the height of the default font. Thus, if the value is .5, that means the window contents will be scrolled up half the normal line height. If it is 3.3, that means the window contents are scrolled up somewhat over three times the normal line height.
What fraction of a line the vertical scrolling covers, or how many lines, depends on what the lines contain. A value of .5 could scroll a line whose height is very short off the screen, while a value of 3.3 could scroll just part of the way through a tall line or an image.
This function returns the current vertical scroll position of
window. The default for window is the selected window.
If pixels-p is non-nil
, the return value is measured in
pixels, rather than in units of the normal line height.
(window-vscroll) ⇒ 0
This function sets window’s vertical scroll position to
lines. If window is nil
, the selected window is
used. The argument lines should be zero or positive; if not, it
is taken as zero.
The actual vertical scroll position must always correspond to an integral number of pixels, so the value you specify is rounded accordingly.
The return value is the result of this rounding.
(set-window-vscroll (selected-window) 1.2) ⇒ 1.13
If pixels-p is non-nil
, lines specifies a number of
pixels. In this case, the return value is lines.
Normally, the vscroll does not take effect on windows that aren’t the
minibuffer-scroll-window
or the selected window when the
mini-window is resized (see Minibuffer Windows). This “frozen”
behavior is disabled when the preserve-vscroll-p parameter is
non-nil
, which means to set the vscroll as usual.
If this variable is non-nil
, the line-move
,
scroll-up
, and scroll-down
functions will automatically
modify the vertical scroll position to scroll through display rows
that are taller than the height of the window, for example in the
presence of large images.
Horizontal scrolling means shifting the image in the window left or right by a specified multiple of the normal character width. Each window has a horizontal scroll position, which is a number, never less than zero. It specifies how far to shift the contents left. Shifting the window contents left generally makes all or part of some characters disappear off the left, and all or part of some other characters appear at the right. The usual value is zero.
The horizontal scroll position is measured in units of the normal character width, which is the width of space in the default font. Thus, if the value is 5, that means the window contents are scrolled left by 5 times the normal character width. How many characters actually disappear off to the left depends on their width, and could vary from line to line.
Because we read from side to side in the inner loop, and from top to bottom in the outer loop, the effect of horizontal scrolling is not like that of textual or vertical scrolling. Textual scrolling involves selection of a portion of text to display, and vertical scrolling moves the window contents contiguously; but horizontal scrolling causes part of each line to go off screen.
Usually, no horizontal scrolling is in effect; then the leftmost column is at the left edge of the window. In this state, scrolling to the right is meaningless, since there is no data to the left of the edge to be revealed by it; so this is not allowed. Scrolling to the left is allowed; it scrolls the first columns of text off the edge of the window and can reveal additional columns on the right that were truncated before. Once a window has a nonzero amount of leftward horizontal scrolling, you can scroll it back to the right, but only so far as to reduce the net horizontal scroll to zero. There is no limit to how far left you can scroll, but eventually all the text will disappear off the left edge.
If auto-hscroll-mode
is set, redisplay automatically alters
the horizontal scrolling of a window as necessary to ensure that point
is always visible. However, you can still set the horizontal
scrolling value explicitly. The value you specify serves as a lower
bound for automatic scrolling, i.e., automatic scrolling will not
scroll a window to a column less than the specified one.
The default value of auto-hscroll-mode
is t
; setting
it to current-line
activates a variant of automatic horizontal
scrolling whereby only the line showing the cursor is horizontally
scrolled to make point visible, the rest of the window is left either
unscrolled, or at the minimum scroll amount set by scroll-left
and scroll-right
, see below.
This function scrolls the selected window count columns to the left (or to the right if count is negative). The default for count is the window width, minus 2.
The return value is the total amount of leftward horizontal scrolling in
effect after the change—just like the value returned by
window-hscroll
(below).
Note that text in paragraphs whose base direction is right-to-left
(see Bidirectional Display) moves in the opposite direction: e.g.,
it moves to the right when scroll-left
is invoked with a
positive value of count.
Once you scroll a window as far right as it can go, back to its normal position where the total leftward scrolling is zero, attempts to scroll any farther right have no effect.
If set-minimum is non-nil
, the new scroll amount becomes
the lower bound for automatic scrolling; that is, automatic scrolling
will not scroll a window to a column less than the value returned by
this function. Interactive calls pass non-nil
for
set-minimum.
This function scrolls the selected window count columns to the
right (or to the left if count is negative). The default
for count is the window width, minus 2. Aside from the direction
of scrolling, this works just like scroll-left
.
This function returns the total leftward horizontal scrolling of window—the number of columns by which the text in window is scrolled left past the left margin. (In right-to-left paragraphs, the value is the total amount of the rightward scrolling instead.) The default for window is the selected window.
The return value is never negative. It is zero when no horizontal scrolling has been done in window (which is usually the case).
(window-hscroll) ⇒ 0
(scroll-left 5) ⇒ 5
(window-hscroll) ⇒ 5
This function sets horizontal scrolling of window. The value of columns specifies the amount of scrolling, in terms of columns from the left margin (right margin in right-to-left paragraphs). The argument columns should be zero or positive; if not, it is taken as zero. Fractional values of columns are not supported at present.
Note that set-window-hscroll
may appear not to work if you test
it by evaluating a call with M-: in a simple way. What happens
is that the function sets the horizontal scroll value and returns, but
then redisplay adjusts the horizontal scrolling to make point visible,
and this overrides what the function did. You can observe the
function’s effect if you call it while point is sufficiently far from
the left margin that it will remain visible.
The value returned is columns.
(set-window-hscroll (selected-window) 10) ⇒ 10
Here is how you can determine whether a given position position is off the screen due to horizontal scrolling:
(defun hscroll-on-screen (window position) (save-excursion (goto-char position) (and (>= (- (current-column) (window-hscroll window)) 0) (< (- (current-column) (window-hscroll window)) (window-width window)))))
This section describes functions that report positions of and within a window. Most of these functions report positions relative to an origin at the native position of the window’s frame (see Frame Geometry). Some functions report positions relative to the origin of the display of the window’s frame. In any case, the origin has the coordinates (0, 0) and X and Y coordinates increase rightward and downward respectively.
For the following functions, X and Y coordinates are reported in integer character units, i.e., numbers of lines and columns respectively. On a graphical display, each “line” and “column” corresponds to the height and width of the default character specified by the frame’s default font (see Frame Font).
This function returns a list of the edge coordinates of window.
If window is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected
window.
The return value has the form (left top right
bottom)
. These list elements are, respectively, the X
coordinate of the leftmost column occupied by the window, the Y
coordinate of the topmost row, the X coordinate one column to the
right of the rightmost column, and the Y coordinate one row down from
the bottommost row.
Note that these are the actual outer edges of the window, including any of its decorations. On a text terminal, if the window has a neighbor on its right, its right edge includes the separator line between the window and its neighbor.
If the optional argument body is nil
, this means to
return the edges corresponding to the total size of window.
body non-nil
means to return the edges of window’s
body. If body is non-nil
, window must specify a
live window.
If the optional argument absolute is nil
, this means to
return edges relative to the native position of window’s frame.
absolute non-nil
means to return coordinates relative to
the origin (0, 0) of window’s display. On non-graphical systems
this argument has no effect.
If the optional argument pixelwise is nil
, this means to
return the coordinates in terms of the default character width and
height of window’s frame (see Frame Font), rounded if
necessary. pixelwise non-nil
means to return the
coordinates in pixels. Note that the pixel specified by right and
bottom is immediately outside of these edges. If absolute
is non-nil
, pixelwise is implicitly non-nil
too.
This function returns the edges of window’s body (see Window Sizes). Calling (window-body-edges window)
is equivalent to
calling (window-edges window t)
, see above.
The following functions can be used to relate a set of frame-relative coordinates to a window:
This function returns the live window at the coordinates x and y given in default character sizes (see Frame Font) relative to the native position of frame (see Frame Geometry).
If there is no window at that position, the return value is nil
.
If frame is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected
frame.
This function checks whether a window window occupies the frame relative coordinates coordinates, and if so, which part of the window that is. window should be a live window.
coordinates should be a cons cell of the form (x
. y)
, where x and y are given in default character
sizes (see Frame Font) relative to the native position of
window’s frame (see Frame Geometry).
If there is no window at the specified position, the return value is
nil
. Otherwise, the return value is one of the following:
(relx . rely)
The coordinates are inside window. The numbers relx and rely are the equivalent window-relative coordinates for the specified position, counting from 0 at the top left corner of the window.
mode-line
The coordinates are in the mode line of window.
header-line
The coordinates are in the header line of window.
tab-line
The coordinates are in the tab line of window.
right-divider
The coordinates are in the divider separating window from a window on the right.
bottom-divider
The coordinates are in the divider separating window from a window beneath.
vertical-line
The coordinates are in the vertical line between window and its neighbor to the right. This value occurs only if the window doesn’t have a scroll bar; positions in a scroll bar are considered outside the window for these purposes.
left-fringe
right-fringe
The coordinates are in the left or right fringe of the window.
left-margin
right-margin
The coordinates are in the left or right margin of the window.
nil
The coordinates are not in any part of window.
The function coordinates-in-window-p
does not require a frame as
argument because it always uses the frame that window is on.
The following functions return window positions in pixels, rather than character units. Though mostly useful on graphical displays, they can also be called on text terminals, where the screen area of each text character is taken to be one pixel.
This function returns a list of pixel coordinates for the edges of
window. Calling (window-pixel-edges window)
is equivalent
to calling (window-edges window nil nil t)
, see above.
This function returns the pixel edges of window’s body. Calling
(window-body-pixel-edges window)
is equivalent to calling
(window-edges window t nil t)
, see above.
The following functions return window positions in pixels, relative to the origin of the display screen rather than that of the frame:
This function returns the pixel coordinates of window relative to
an origin at (0, 0) of the display of window’s frame. Calling
(window-absolute-pixel-edges)
is equivalent to calling
(window-edges window nil t t)
, see above.
This function returns the pixel coordinates of window’s body
relative to an origin at (0, 0) of the display of window’s frame.
Calling (window-absolute-body-pixel-edges window)
is equivalent
to calling (window-edges window t t t)
, see above.
Combined with set-mouse-absolute-pixel-position
, this function
can be used to move the mouse pointer to an arbitrary buffer position
visible in some window:
(let ((edges (window-absolute-body-pixel-edges)) (position (pos-visible-in-window-p nil nil t))) (set-mouse-absolute-pixel-position (+ (nth 0 edges) (nth 0 position)) (+ (nth 1 edges) (nth 1 position))))
On a graphical terminal this form “warps” the mouse cursor to the upper left corner of the glyph at the selected window’s point. A position calculated this way can be also used to show a tooltip window there.
The following function returns the screen coordinates of a buffer position visible in a window:
If the buffer position position is visible in window window,
this function returns the display coordinates of the upper/left corner
of the glyph at position. The return value is a cons of the X-
and Y-coordinates of that corner, relative to an origin at (0, 0) of
window’s display. It returns nil
if position is not
visible in window.
window must be a live window and defaults to the selected
window. position defaults to the value of window-point
of window.
This means that in order to move the mouse pointer to the position of point in the selected window, it’s sufficient to write:
(let ((position (window-absolute-pixel-position))) (set-mouse-absolute-pixel-position (car position) (cdr position)))
The following function returns the largest rectangle that can be inscribed in a window without covering text displayed in that window.
This function calculates the dimensions of the largest empty rectangle that can be inscribed in the specified window’s text area. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
The return value is a triple of the width and the start and end
y-coordinates of the largest rectangle that can be inscribed into the
empty space (space not displaying any text) of the text area of
window. No x-coordinates are returned by this function—any such
rectangle is assumed to end at the right edge of window’s text
area. If no empty space can be found, the return value is nil
.
The optional argument count, if non-nil
, specifies a
maximum number of rectangles to return. This means that the return
value is a list of triples specifying rectangles with the largest
rectangle first. count can be also a cons cell whose car
specifies the number of rectangles to return and whose CDR, if
non-nil
, states that all rectangles returned must be disjoint.
The optional arguments min-width and min-height, if
non-nil
, specify the minimum width and height of any rectangle
returned.
The optional argument positions, if non-nil
, is a cons cell
whose CAR specifies the uppermost and whose CDR specifies the
lowermost pixel position that must be covered by any rectangle returned.
These positions measure from the start of the text area of window.
The optional argument left, if non-nil
, means to return
values suitable for buffers displaying right to left text. In that
case, any rectangle returned is assumed to start at the left edge of
window’s text area.
Note that this function has to retrieve the dimensions of each line of
window’s glyph matrix via window-lines-pixel-dimensions
(see Size of Displayed Text). Hence, this function may also return
nil
when the current glyph matrix of window is not
up-to-date.
The following option allows to automatically select the window under the mouse pointer. This accomplishes a policy similar to that of window managers that give focus to a frame (and thus trigger its subsequent selection) whenever the mouse pointer enters its window-system window (see Input Focus).
If this variable is non-nil
, Emacs will try to automatically
select the window under the mouse pointer. The following values are
meaningful:
This specifies a delay in seconds after which auto-selection triggers. The window under the mouse pointer is selected after the mouse has remained in it for the entire duration of the delay.
A negative number has a similar effect as a positive number, but selects the window under the mouse pointer only after the mouse pointer has remained in it for the entire duration of the absolute value of that number and in addition has stopped moving.
Any other non-nil
value means to select a window instantaneously
as soon as the mouse pointer enters it.
In either case, the mouse pointer must enter the text area of a window in order to trigger its selection. Dragging the scroll bar slider or the mode line of a window conceptually should not cause its auto-selection.
Mouse auto-selection selects the minibuffer window only if it is active, and never deselects the active minibuffer window.
Mouse auto-selection can be used to emulate a focus follows mouse policy
for child frames (see Child Frames) which usually are not tracked by
the window manager. This requires to set the value of
focus-follows-mouse
(see Input Focus) to a non-nil
value. If the value of focus-follows-mouse
is auto-raise
,
entering a child frame with the mouse will raise it automatically above
all other child frames of that frame’s parent frame.
A window configuration records the entire layout of one
frame—all windows, their sizes, their decorations, which buffers they
contain, how those buffers are scrolled, and their value of point, It
also includes the value of minibuffer-scroll-window
. As a
special exception, the window configuration does not record the value of
point in the selected window for the current buffer.
You can bring back an entire frame layout by restoring a previously saved window configuration. If you want to record the layout of all frames instead of just one, use a frame configuration instead of a window configuration. See Frame Configurations.
This function returns a new object representing frame’s current
window configuration. The default for frame is the selected
frame. The variable window-persistent-parameters
specifies
which window parameters (if any) are saved by this function.
See Window Parameters.
This function restores the configuration of windows and buffers as
specified by configuration, for the frame that
configuration was created for, regardless of whether that frame
is selected or not. The argument configuration must be a value
that was previously returned by current-window-configuration
for that frame. Normally the function also selects the frame which is
recorded in the configuration, but if dont-set-frame is
non-nil
, it leaves selected the frame which was already
selected at the start of the function.
Normally the function restores the saved minibuffer (if any), but if
dont-set-miniwindow is non-nil
, the minibuffer current
at the start of the function (if any) remains in the mini-window.
If the frame from which configuration was saved is dead, all
this function does is to restore the value of the variable
minibuffer-scroll-window
and to adjust the value returned by
minibuffer-selected-window
. In this case, the function returns
nil
. Otherwise, it returns t
.
If the buffer of a window of configuration has been killed since configuration was made, that window is, as a rule, removed from the restored configuration. However, if that window is the last window remaining in the restored configuration, another live buffer is shown in it.
Here is a way of using this function to get the same effect as
save-window-excursion
:
(let ((config (current-window-configuration))) (unwind-protect (progn (split-window-below nil) ...) (set-window-configuration config)))
This macro records the window configuration of the selected frame, executes forms in sequence, then restores the earlier window configuration. The return value is the value of the final form in forms.
Most Lisp code should not use this macro; save-selected-window
is typically sufficient. In particular, this macro cannot reliably
prevent the code in forms from opening new windows, because new
windows might be opened in other frames (see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer), and
save-window-excursion
only saves and restores the window
configuration on the current frame.
This function returns t
if object is a window configuration.
This function says whether two window configurations have the same
window layout, but ignores the values of point and the saved scrolling
positions—it can return t
even if those aspects differ.
This function returns the frame for which the window configuration config was made.
Other primitives to look inside of window configurations would make sense, but are not implemented because we did not need them. See the file winner.el for some more operations on windows configurations.
The objects returned by current-window-configuration
die
together with the Emacs process. In order to store a window
configuration on disk and read it back in another Emacs session, you
can use the functions described next. These functions are also useful
to clone the state of a frame into an arbitrary live window
(set-window-configuration
effectively clones the windows of a
frame into the root window of that very frame only).
This function returns the state of window as a Lisp object. The argument window must be a valid window and defaults to the root window of the selected frame.
If the optional argument writable is non-nil
, this means to
not use markers for sampling positions like window-point
or
window-start
. This argument should be non-nil
when the
state will be written to disk and read back in another session.
Together, the argument writable and the variable
window-persistent-parameters
specify which window parameters are
saved by this function. See Window Parameters.
The value returned by window-state-get
can be used in the same
session to make a clone of a window in another window. It can be also
written to disk and read back in another session. In either case, use
the following function to restore the state of the window.
This function puts the window state state into window.
The argument state should be the state of a window returned by
an earlier invocation of window-state-get
, see above. The
optional argument window can be either a live window or an
internal window (see Windows and Frames). If window is not
a live window, it is replaced by a new live window created on the same
frame before putting state into it. If window is nil
,
it puts the window state into a new window.
If the optional argument ignore is non-nil
, it means to ignore
minimum window sizes and fixed-size restrictions. If ignore
is safe
, this means windows can get as small as one line
and/or two columns.
The functions window-state-get
and window-state-put
also
allow to exchange the contents of two live windows. The following
function does precisely that:
This command swaps the states of the two live windows window-1 and window-2. window-1 must specify a live window and defaults to the selected one. window-2 must specify a live window and defaults to the window following window-1 in the cyclic ordering of windows, excluding minibuffer windows and including live windows on all visible frames.
Optional argument size non-nil
means to try swapping the
sizes of window-1 and window-2 as well. A value of
height
means to swap heights only, a value of width
means to swap widths only, while t
means to swap both widths
and heights, if possible. Frames are not resized by this function.
This section describes the window parameters that can be used to associate additional information with windows.
This function returns window’s value for parameter. The
default for window is the selected window. If window has no
setting for parameter, this function returns nil
.
This function returns all parameters of window and their values.
The default for window is the selected window. The return value
is either nil
, or an association list whose elements have the form
(parameter . value)
.
This function sets window’s value of parameter to value and returns value. The default for window is the selected window.
By default, the functions that save and restore window configurations
or the states of windows (see Window Configurations) do not care
about window parameters. This means that when you change the value of
a parameter within the body of a save-window-excursion
, the
previous value is not restored when that macro exits. It also means
that when you restore via window-state-put
a window state saved
earlier by window-state-get
, all cloned windows have their
parameters reset to nil
. The following variable allows you to
override the standard behavior:
This variable is an alist specifying which parameters get saved by
current-window-configuration
and window-state-get
, and
subsequently restored by set-window-configuration
and
window-state-put
. See Window Configurations.
The CAR of each entry of this alist is a symbol specifying the parameter. The CDR should be one of the following:
nil
This value means the parameter is saved neither by
window-state-get
nor by current-window-configuration
.
t
This value specifies that the parameter is saved by
current-window-configuration
and (provided its writable
argument is nil
) by window-state-get
.
writable
This means that the parameter is saved unconditionally by both
current-window-configuration
and window-state-get
. This
value should not be used for parameters whose values do not have a read
syntax. Otherwise, invoking window-state-put
in another session
may fail with an invalid-read-syntax
error.
Some functions (notably delete-window
,
delete-other-windows
and split-window
), may behave
specially when the window specified by their window argument has
a parameter whose name is equal to the function’s name. You can
override such special behavior by binding the following variable to a
non-nil
value:
If this variable is non-nil
, some standard functions do not
process window parameters. The functions currently affected by this are
split-window
, delete-window
, delete-other-windows
,
and other-window
.
An application can bind this variable to a non-nil
value around
calls to these functions. If it does so, the application is fully
responsible for correctly assigning the parameters of all involved
windows when exiting that function.
The following parameters are currently used by the window management code:
delete-window
¶This parameter affects the execution of delete-window
(see Deleting Windows).
delete-other-windows
¶This parameter affects the execution of delete-other-windows
(see Deleting Windows).
no-delete-other-windows
¶This parameter marks the window as not deletable by
delete-other-windows
(see Deleting Windows).
split-window
¶This parameter affects the execution of split-window
(see Splitting Windows).
other-window
¶This parameter affects the execution of other-window
(see Cyclic Ordering of Windows).
no-other-window
¶This parameter marks the window as not selectable by other-window
(see Cyclic Ordering of Windows).
clone-of
¶This parameter specifies the window that this one has been cloned
from. It is installed by window-state-get
(see Window Configurations).
window-preserved-size
¶This parameter specifies a buffer, a direction where nil
means
vertical and t
horizontal, and a size in pixels. If this window
displays the specified buffer and its size in the indicated direction
equals the size specified by this parameter, then Emacs will try to
preserve the size of this window in the indicated direction. This
parameter is installed and updated by the function
window-preserve-size
(see Preserving Window Sizes).
quit-restore
¶This parameter is installed by the buffer display functions
(see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) and consulted by quit-restore-window
(see Quitting Windows). It is a list of four elements, see the
description of quit-restore-window
in Quitting Windows
for details.
window-side
¶window-slot
These parameters are used internally for implementing side windows (see Side Windows).
window-atom
¶This parameter is used internally for implementing atomic windows, see Atomic Windows.
mode-line-format
¶This parameter replaces the value of the buffer-local variable
mode-line-format
(see Mode Line Basics) of this window’s
buffer whenever this window is displayed. The symbol none
means
to suppress display of a mode line for this window. Display and
contents of the mode line on other windows showing this buffer are not
affected.
header-line-format
¶This parameter replaces the value of the buffer-local variable
header-line-format
(see Mode Line Basics) of this window’s
buffer whenever this window is displayed. The symbol none
means
to suppress display of a header line for this window. Display and
contents of the header line on other windows showing this buffer are not
affected.
tab-line-format
¶This parameter replaces the value of the buffer-local variable
tab-line-format
(see Mode Line Basics) of this window’s
buffer whenever this window is displayed. The symbol none
means
to suppress display of a tab line for this window. Display and
contents of the tab line on other windows showing this buffer are not
affected.
min-margins
¶The value of this parameter is a cons cell whose CAR and
CDR, if non-nil
, specify the minimum values (in columns)
for the left and right margin of this window (see Displaying in the Margins.
When present, Emacs will use these values instead of the actual margin
widths for determining whether a window can be split or shrunk
horizontally.
Emacs never auto-adjusts the margins of any window after splitting or
resizing it. It is the sole responsibility of any application setting
this parameter to adjust the margins of this window as well as those of
any new window that inherits this window’s margins due to a split.
Both window-configuration-change-hook
and
window-size-change-functions
(see Hooks for Window Scrolling and Changes) should be
employed for this purpose.
This parameter was introduced in Emacs version 25.1 to support applications that use large margins to center buffer text within a window and should be used, with due care, exclusively by those applications. It might be replaced by an improved solution in future versions of Emacs.
This section describes how Lisp programs can take action after a window has been scrolled or other window modifications occurred. We first consider the case where a window shows a different part of its buffer.
This variable holds a list of functions that Emacs should call before redisplaying a window with scrolling. Displaying a different buffer in a window and making a new window also call these functions.
This variable is not a normal hook, because each function is called with two arguments: the window, and its new display-start position. At the time of the call, the display-start position of the argument window is already set to its new value, and the buffer to be displayed in the window is set as the current buffer.
These functions must take care when using window-end
(see The Window Start and End Positions); if you need an up-to-date value, you
must use the update argument to ensure you get it.
Warning: don’t use this feature to alter the way the window is scrolled. It’s not designed for that, and such use probably won’t work.
In addition, you can use jit-lock-register
to register a Font
Lock fontification function, which will be called whenever parts of a
buffer are (re)fontified because a window was scrolled or its size
changed. See Other Font Lock Variables.
The remainder of this section covers six hooks that are called
during redisplay provided a significant, non-scrolling change of a
window has been detected. For simplicity, these hooks and the
functions they call will be collectively referred to as window
change functions. As any hook, these hooks can be set either
globally or buffer-locally via the local argument of
add-hook
(see Setting Hooks) when the hook is installed.
The first of these hooks is run after a window buffer change is detected, which means that a window was created, deleted or assigned another buffer.
This variable specifies functions called during redisplay when window buffers have changed. The value should be a list of functions that take one argument.
Functions specified buffer-locally are called for any window showing the corresponding buffer if that window has been created or assigned that buffer since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the window is passed as argument.
Functions specified by the default value are called for a frame if at least one window on that frame has been added, deleted or assigned another buffer since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the frame is passed as argument.
The second of these hooks is run when a window size change has been detected which means that a window was created, assigned another buffer, or changed its total size or that of its text area.
This variable specifies functions called during redisplay when a window size change occurred. The value should be a list of functions that take one argument.
Functions specified buffer-locally are called for any window showing the corresponding buffer if that window has been added or assigned another buffer or changed its total or body size since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the window is passed as argument.
Functions specified by the default value are called for a frame if at least one window on that frame has been added or assigned another buffer or changed its total or body size since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the frame is passed as argument.
The third of these hooks is run when a window selection change has selected another window since the last redisplay.
This variable specifies functions called during redisplay when the selected window or a frame’s selected window has changed. The value should be a list of functions that take one argument.
Functions specified buffer-locally are called for any window showing the corresponding buffer if that window has been selected or deselected (among all windows or among all windows on its frame) since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the window is passed as argument.
Functions specified by the default value are called for a frame if that frame has been selected or deselected or the frame’s selected window has changed since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the frame is passed as argument.
The fourth of these hooks is run when a window state change has been detected, which means that at least one of the three preceding window changes has occurred.
This variable specifies functions called during redisplay when a window buffer or size change occurred or the selected window or a frame’s selected window has changed. The value should be a list of functions that take one argument.
Functions specified buffer-locally are called for any window showing the corresponding buffer if that window has been added or assigned another buffer, changed its total or body size or has been selected or deselected (among all windows or among all windows on its frame) since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the window is passed as argument.
Functions specified by the default value are called for a frame if at least one window on that frame has been added, deleted or assigned another buffer, changed its total or body size or that frame has been selected or deselected or the frame’s selected window has changed since the last time window change functions were run. In this case the frame is passed as argument.
Functions specified by the default value are also run for a frame when that frame’s window state change flag (see below) has been set since last redisplay.
The fifth of these hooks is run when a window configuration change has been detected which means that either the buffer or the size of a window changed. It differs from the four preceding hooks in the way it is run.
This variable specifies functions called during redisplay when either the buffer or the size of a window has changed. The value should be a list of functions that take no argument.
Functions specified buffer-locally are called for any window showing the corresponding buffer if at least one window on that frame has been added, deleted or assigned another buffer or changed its total or body size since the last time window change functions were run. Each call is performed with the window showing the buffer temporarily selected and its buffer current.
Functions specified by the default value are called for each frame if at least one window on that frame has been added, deleted or assigned another buffer or changed its total or body size since the last time window change functions were run. Each call is performed with the frame temporarily selected and the selected window’s buffer current.
Finally, Emacs runs a normal hook that generalizes the behavior of
window-state-change-functions
.
The default value of this variable specifies functions called during redisplay when a window state change has been detected or the window state change flag has been set on at least one frame. The value should be a list of functions that take no argument.
Applications should put a function on this hook only if they want to
react to changes that happened on (or have been signaled for) two or
more frames since last redisplay. In every other case, putting the
function on window-state-change-functions
should be preferred.
Window change functions are called during redisplay for each frame as
follows: First, any buffer-local window buffer change function, window
size change function, selected window change and window state change
functions are called in this order. Next, the default values for
these functions are called in the same order. Then any buffer-local
window configuration change functions are called followed by functions
specified by the default value of those functions. Finally, functions
on window-state-change-hook
are run.
Window change functions are run for a specific frame only if a corresponding change was registered for that frame earlier. Such changes include the creation or deletion of a window or the assignment of another buffer or size to a window. Note that even when such a change has been registered, this does not mean that any of the hooks described above is run. If, for example, a change was registered within the scope of a window excursion (see Window Configurations), this will trigger a call of window change functions only if that excursion still persists at the time change functions are run. If it is exited earlier, hooks will be run only if registered by a change outside the scope of that excursion.
The window state change flag of a frame, if set, will cause
the default values of window-state-change-functions
(for that
frame) and window-state-change-hook
to be run during next
redisplay regardless of whether a window state change actually
occurred for that frame or not. After running any functions on these
hooks, the flag is reset for each frame. Applications can set that
flag and inspect its value using the following functions.
This function sets frame’s window state change flag if arg
is non-nil
and resets it otherwise. frame must be a live
frame and defaults to the selected one.
This functions returns t
if frame’s window state change
flag is set and nil
otherwise. frame must be a live
frame and defaults to the selected one.
While window change functions are run, the functions described next can be called to get more insight into what has changed for a specific window or frame since the last redisplay. All these functions take a live window as single, optional argument, defaulting to the selected window.
This function returns the buffer shown in window at the last
time window change functions were run for window’s frame. If it
returns nil
, window has been created after that. If it
returns t
, window was not shown at that time but has been
restored from a previously saved window configuration afterwards.
Otherwise, the return value is the buffer shown by window at
that time.
This function returns the total pixel width of window the last time window change functions found window live on its frame. It is zero if window was created after that.
This function returns the total pixel height of window the last time window change functions found window live on its frame. It is zero if window was created after that.
This function returns the pixel width of window’s text area the last time window change functions found window live on its frame. It is zero if window was created after that.
This function returns the pixel height of window’s text area the last time window change functions found window live on its frame. It is zero if window was created after that.
In order to find out which window or frame was selected the last time window change functions were run, the following functions can be used:
This function returns the selected window of frame at the last
time window change functions were run. If omitted or nil
frame defaults to the selected frame.
This function returns the selected window at the last time window change functions were run.
This function returns the selected frame at the last time window change functions were run.
Note that window change functions provide no information about which windows have been deleted since the last time they were run. If necessary, applications should remember any window showing a specific buffer in a local variable of that buffer and update it in a function run by the default values of any of the hooks that are run when a window buffer change was detected.
The following caveats should be considered when adding a function to window change functions:
window-state-change-hook
.
save-window-excursion
, with-selected-window
or with-current-buffer
can be used when running window change
functions.
window-configuration-change-hook
it does not
save or restore the selected window or frame or the current buffer
either.
A frame is a screen object that contains one or more Emacs windows (see Windows). It is the kind of object called a “window” in the terminology of graphical environments; but we can’t call it a “window” here, because Emacs uses that word in a different way. In Emacs Lisp, a frame object is a Lisp object that represents a frame on the screen. See Frame Type.
A frame initially contains a single main window and/or a minibuffer window; you can subdivide the main window vertically or horizontally into smaller windows. See Splitting Windows.
A terminal is a display device capable of displaying one or more Emacs frames. In Emacs Lisp, a terminal object is a Lisp object that represents a terminal. See Terminal Type.
There are two classes of terminals: text terminals and
graphical terminals. Text terminals are non-graphics-capable
displays, including xterm
and other terminal emulators. On
a text terminal, each Emacs frame occupies the terminal’s entire
screen; although you can create additional frames and switch between
them, the terminal only shows one frame at a time. Graphical
terminals, on the other hand, are managed by graphical display systems
such as the X Window System, which allow Emacs to show multiple frames
simultaneously on the same display.
On GNU and Unix systems, you can create additional frames on any available terminal, within a single Emacs session, regardless of whether Emacs was started on a text or graphical terminal. Emacs can display on both graphical and text terminals simultaneously. This comes in handy, for instance, when you connect to the same session from several remote locations. See Multiple Terminals.
This predicate returns a non-nil
value if object is a
frame, and nil
otherwise. For a frame, the value indicates which
kind of display the frame uses:
t
The frame is displayed on a text terminal.
x
The frame is displayed on an X graphical terminal.
w32
The frame is displayed on a MS-Windows graphical terminal.
ns
The frame is displayed on a GNUstep or Macintosh Cocoa graphical terminal.
pc
The frame is displayed on an MS-DOS terminal.
pgtk
The frame is displayed using pure GTK facilities.
This function returns the terminal object that displays frame.
If frame is nil
or unspecified, it defaults to the
selected frame.
This predicate returns a non-nil
value if object is a
terminal that is live (i.e., not deleted), and nil
otherwise.
For live terminals, the return value indicates what kind of frames are
displayed on that terminal; the list of possible values is the same as
for framep
above.
On a graphical terminal we distinguish two types of frames: A normal top-level frame is a frame whose window-system window is a child of the window-system’s root window for that terminal. A child frame is a frame whose window-system window is the child of the window-system window of another Emacs frame. See Child Frames.
To create a new frame, call the function make-frame
.
This function creates and returns a new frame, displaying the current buffer.
The parameters argument is an alist that specifies frame
parameters for the new frame. See Frame Parameters. If you specify
the terminal
parameter in parameters, the new frame is
created on that terminal. Otherwise, if you specify the
window-system
frame parameter in parameters, that
determines whether the frame should be displayed on a text terminal or a
graphical terminal. See Window Systems. If neither is specified,
the new frame is created in the same terminal as the selected frame.
Any parameters not mentioned in parameters default to the values
in the alist default-frame-alist
(see Initial Frame Parameters);
parameters not specified there default from the X resources or its
equivalent on your operating system (see X Resources in The GNU Emacs Manual). After the frame is created, this
function applies any parameters specified in
frame-inherited-parameters
(see below) it has no assigned yet,
taking the values from the frame that was selected when
make-frame
was called.
Note that on multi-monitor displays (see Multiple Terminals), the window manager might position the frame differently than specified by the positional parameters in parameters (see Position Parameters). For example, some window managers have a policy of displaying the frame on the monitor that contains the largest part of the window (a.k.a. the dominating monitor).
This function itself does not make the new frame the selected frame. See Input Focus. The previously selected frame remains selected. On graphical terminals, however, the window system may select the new frame for its own reasons.
A normal hook run by make-frame
before it creates the frame.
An abnormal hook run by make-frame
after it created the frame.
Each function in after-make-frame-functions
receives one
argument, the frame just created.
Note that any functions added to these hooks by your initial file are usually not run for the initial frame, since Emacs reads the initial file only after creating that frame. However, if the initial frame is specified to use a separate minibuffer frame (see Minibuffers and Frames), the functions will be run for both, the minibuffer-less and the minibuffer frame. Alternatively, you can add functions to these hooks in your “early init file” (see The Init File), in which case they will be in effect for the initial frame as well.
This variable specifies the list of frame parameters that a newly
created frame inherits from the currently selected frame. For each
parameter (a symbol) that is an element in this list and has not been
assigned earlier when processing make-frame
, the function sets
the value of that parameter in the created frame to its value in the
selected frame.
A normal hook run when the Emacs server starts using a client frame.
When this hook is called, the client frame is the selected one. Note
that, depending on how emacsclient
was invoked
(see Invoking emacsclient in The GNU Emacs Manual), this
client frame could be a new frame created for the client, or it could
be an existing frame that the server reused for handling the client
commands. See Emacs Server in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Emacs represents each terminal as a terminal object data type (see Terminal Type). On GNU and Unix systems, Emacs can use multiple terminals simultaneously in each session. On other systems, it can only use a single terminal. Each terminal object has the following attributes:
terminal-live-p
(i.e., x
,
t
, w32
, ns
, pc
, haiku
, or pgtk
).
See Frames.
There is no primitive for creating terminal objects. Emacs creates
them as needed, such as when you call make-frame-on-display
(described below).
This function returns the file name of the device used by
terminal. If terminal is omitted or nil
, it
defaults to the selected frame’s terminal. terminal can also be
a frame, meaning that frame’s terminal.
This function returns a list of all live terminal objects.
This function returns a terminal whose device name is given by
device. If device is a string, it can be either the file
name of a terminal device, or the name of an X display of the form
‘host:server.screen’. If device is a
frame, this function returns that frame’s terminal; nil
means
the selected frame. Finally, if device is a terminal object
that represents a live terminal, that terminal is returned. The
function signals an error if its argument is none of the above.
This function deletes all frames on terminal and frees the
resources used by it. It runs the abnormal hook
delete-terminal-functions
, passing terminal as the
argument to each function.
If terminal is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the
selected frame’s terminal. terminal can also be a frame,
meaning that frame’s terminal.
Normally, this function signals an error if you attempt to delete the
sole active terminal, but if force is non-nil
, you are
allowed to do so. Emacs automatically calls this function when the
last frame on a terminal is deleted (see Deleting Frames).
An abnormal hook run by delete-terminal
. Each function
receives one argument, the terminal argument passed to
delete-terminal
. Due to technical details, the functions may
be called either just before the terminal is deleted, or just
afterwards.
A few Lisp variables are terminal-local; that is, they have a
separate binding for each terminal. The binding in effect at any time
is the one for the terminal that the currently selected frame belongs
to. These variables include default-minibuffer-frame
,
defining-kbd-macro
, last-kbd-macro
, and
system-key-alist
. They are always terminal-local, and can
never be buffer-local (see Buffer-Local Variables).
On GNU and Unix systems, each X display is a separate graphical
terminal. When Emacs is started from within the X window system, it
uses the X display specified by the DISPLAY
environment
variable, or by the ‘--display’ option (see Initial Options in The GNU Emacs Manual). Emacs can connect to other X displays
via the command make-frame-on-display
. Each X display has its
own selected frame and its own minibuffer windows; however, only one
of those frames is the selected frame at any given moment
(see Input Focus). Emacs can even connect to other text
terminals, by interacting with the emacsclient
program.
See Emacs Server in The GNU Emacs Manual.
A single X server can handle more than one display. Each X display has a three-part name, ‘hostname:displaynumber.screennumber’. The first part, hostname, specifies the name of the machine to which the display is physically connected. The second part, displaynumber, is a zero-based number that identifies one or more monitors connected to that machine that share a common keyboard and pointing device (mouse, tablet, etc.). The third part, screennumber, identifies a zero-based screen number (a separate monitor) that is part of a single monitor collection on that X server. When you use two or more screens belonging to one server, Emacs knows by the similarity in their names that they share a single keyboard.
Systems that don’t use the X window system, such as MS-Windows, don’t support the notion of X displays, and have only one display on each host. The display name on these systems doesn’t follow the above 3-part format; for example, the display name on MS-Windows systems is a constant string ‘w32’, and exists for compatibility, so that you could pass it to functions that expect a display name.
This function creates and returns a new frame on display, taking the other frame parameters from the alist parameters. display should be the name of an X display (a string).
Before creating the frame, this function ensures that Emacs is set
up to display graphics. For instance, if Emacs has not processed X
resources (e.g., if it was started on a text terminal), it does so at
this time. In all other respects, this function behaves like
make-frame
(see Creating Frames).
This function returns a list that indicates which X displays Emacs has a connection to. The elements of the list are strings, and each one is a display name.
This function opens a connection to the X display display,
without creating a frame on that display. Normally, Emacs Lisp
programs need not call this function, as make-frame-on-display
calls it automatically. The only reason for calling it is to check
whether communication can be established with a given X display.
The optional argument xrm-string, if not nil
, is a string
of resource names and values, in the same format used in the
.Xresources file. See X Resources in The
GNU Emacs Manual. These values apply to all Emacs frames created on
this display, overriding the resource values recorded in the X server.
Here’s an example of what this string might look like:
"*BorderWidth: 3\n*InternalBorder: 2\n"
If must-succeed is non-nil
, failure to open the connection
terminates Emacs. Otherwise, it is an ordinary Lisp error.
This function closes the connection to display display. Before you can do this, you must first delete all the frames that were open on that display (see Deleting Frames).
On some multi-monitor setups, a single X display outputs to more
than one physical monitor. You can use the functions
display-monitor-attributes-list
and frame-monitor-attributes
to obtain information about such setups.
This function returns a list of physical monitor attributes on
display, which can be a display name (a string), a terminal, or
a frame; if omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected frame’s
display. Each element of the list is an association list,
representing the attributes of a physical monitor. The first element
corresponds to the primary monitor. The attribute keys and values
are:
Position of the top-left corner of the monitor’s screen and its size, in pixels, as ‘(x y width height)’. Note that, if the monitor is not the primary monitor, some of the coordinates might be negative.
Position of the top-left corner and size of the work area (usable space) in pixels as ‘(x y width height)’. This may be different from ‘geometry’ in that space occupied by various window manager features (docks, taskbars, etc.) may be excluded from the work area. Whether or not such features actually subtract from the work area depends on the platform and environment. Again, if the monitor is not the primary monitor, some of the coordinates might be negative.
Width and height in millimeters as ‘(width height)’
List of frames that this physical monitor dominates (see below).
Name of the physical monitor as string.
Source of the multi-monitor information as string; e.g., ‘XRandR 1.5’, ‘XRandr’ or ‘Xinerama’.
x, y, width, and height are integers. ‘name’ and ‘source’ may be absent.
A frame is dominated by a physical monitor when either the largest area of the frame resides in that monitor, or (if the frame does not intersect any physical monitors) that monitor is the closest to the frame. Every (non-tooltip) frame (whether visible or not) in a graphical display is dominated by exactly one physical monitor at a time, though the frame can span multiple (or no) physical monitors.
Here’s an example of the data produced by this function on a 2-monitor display:
(display-monitor-attributes-list) ⇒ (((geometry 0 0 1920 1080) ;; Left-hand, primary monitor (workarea 0 0 1920 1050) ;; A taskbar occupies some of the height (mm-size 677 381) (name . "DISPLAY1") (frames #<frame emacs@host *Messages* 0x11578c0> #<frame emacs@host *scratch* 0x114b838>)) ((geometry 1920 0 1680 1050) ;; Right-hand monitor (workarea 1920 0 1680 1050) ;; Whole screen can be used (mm-size 593 370) (name . "DISPLAY2") (frames)))
This function returns the attributes of the physical monitor dominating (see above) frame, which defaults to the selected frame.
On multi-monitor displays it is possible to use the command
make-frame-on-monitor
to make frames on the specified monitor.
This function creates and returns a new frame on monitor located
on display, taking the other frame parameters from the alist
parameters. monitor should be the name of the physical
monitor, the same string as returned by the function
display-monitor-attributes-list
in the attribute name
.
display should be the name of an X display (a string).
This variable is an abnormal hook run when the monitor configuration
changes, which can happen if a monitor is rotated, moved, added or
removed from a multiple-monitor setup, if the primary monitor changes,
or if the resolution of a monitor changes. It is called with a single
argument consisting of the terminal on which the monitor configuration
changed. Programs should call display-monitor-attributes-list
with the terminal as the argument to retrieve the new monitor
configuration on that terminal.
The geometry of a frame depends on the toolkit that was used to build
this instance of Emacs and the terminal that displays the frame. This
chapter describes these dependencies and some of the functions to deal
with them. Note that the frame argument of all of these functions
has to specify a live frame (see Deleting Frames). If omitted or
nil
, it specifies the selected frame (see Input Focus).
A visible frame occupies a rectangular area on its terminal’s display. This area may contain a number of nested rectangles, each serving a different purpose. The drawing below sketches the layout of a frame on a graphical terminal:
<------------ Outer Frame Width -----------> ____________________________________________ ^(0) ________ External/Outer Border _______ | | | |_____________ Title Bar ______________| | | | (1)_____________ Menu Bar ______________| | ^ | | (2)_____________ Tool Bar ______________| | ^ | | (3)_____________ Tab Bar _______________| | ^ | | | _________ Internal Border ________ | | ^ | | | | ^ | | | | | | | | | | | | | Outer | | | Inner | | | Native Frame | | | Frame | | | Frame Height | | | Height | | | Height | | | | | | | | | | | | |<--+--- Inner Frame Width ------->| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |___v______________________________| | | | | | |___________ Internal Border __________| | v v |___________ External/Outer Border __________| <-------- Native Frame Width -------->
In practice not all of the areas shown in the drawing will or may be present. The meaning of these areas is described below.
The outer frame is a rectangle comprising all areas shown in the drawing. The edges of that rectangle are called the outer edges of the frame. Together, the outer width and outer height of the frame specify the outer size of that rectangle.
Knowing the outer size of a frame is useful for fitting a frame into the working area of its display (see Multiple Terminals) or for placing two frames adjacent to each other on the screen. Usually, the outer size of a frame is available only after the frame has been mapped (made visible, see Visibility of Frames) at least once. For the initial frame or a frame that has not been created yet, the outer size can be only estimated or must be calculated from the window-system’s or window manager’s defaults. One workaround is to obtain the differences of the outer and native (see below) sizes of a mapped frame and use them for calculating the outer size of the new frame.
The position of the upper left corner of the outer frame (indicated by ‘(0)’ in the drawing above) is the outer position of the frame. The outer position of a graphical frame is also referred to as “the position” of the frame because it usually remains unchanged on its display whenever the frame is resized or its layout is changed.
The outer position is specified by and can be set via the left
and top
frame parameters (see Position Parameters). For a
normal, top-level frame these parameters usually represent its absolute
position (see below) with respect to its display’s origin. For a child
frame (see Child Frames) these parameters represent its position
relative to the native position (see below) of its parent frame. For
frames on text terminals the values of these parameters are meaningless
and always zero.
The external border is part of the decorations supplied by the window manager. It is typically used for resizing the frame with the mouse and is therefore not shown on “fullboth” and maximized frames (see Size Parameters). Its width is determined by the window manager and cannot be changed by Emacs’ functions.
External borders don’t exist on text terminal frames. For graphical
frames, their display can be suppressed by setting the
override-redirect
or undecorated
frame parameter
(see Window Management Parameters).
The outer border is a separate border whose width can be specified
with the border-width
frame parameter (see Layout Parameters). In practice, either the external or the outer border of a
frame are displayed but never both at the same time. Usually, the outer
border is shown only for special frames that are not (fully) controlled
by the window manager like tooltip frames (see Tooltips), child
frames (see Child Frames) and undecorated
or
override-redirect
frames (see Window Management Parameters).
Outer borders are never shown on text terminal frames and on frames
generated by GTK+ routines. On MS-Windows, the outer border is emulated
with the help of a one pixel wide external border. Non-toolkit builds
on X allow to change the color of the outer border by setting the
border-color
frame parameter (see Layout Parameters).
The title bar, a.k.a. caption bar, is also part of the
window manager’s decorations and typically displays the title of the
frame (see Frame Titles) as well as buttons for minimizing,
maximizing and deleting the frame. It can be also used for dragging
the frame with the mouse. The title bar is usually not displayed for
fullboth (see Size Parameters), tooltip (see Tooltips) and
child frames (see Child Frames) and doesn’t exist for terminal
frames. Display of the title bar can be suppressed by setting the
override-redirect
or the undecorated
frame parameters
(see Window Management Parameters).
The menu bar (see The Menu Bar) can be either internal (drawn by Emacs
itself) or external (drawn by the toolkit). Most builds (GTK+, Lucid,
Motif and MS-Windows) rely on an external menu bar. NS also uses an
external menu bar which, however, is not part of the outer frame.
Non-toolkit builds can provide an internal menu bar. On text terminal
frames, the menu bar is part of the frame’s root window (see Windows and Frames). As a rule, menu bars are never shown on child frames
(see Child Frames). Display of the menu bar can be suppressed by
setting the menu-bar-lines
parameter (see Layout Parameters)
to zero.
Whether the menu bar is wrapped or truncated whenever its width becomes too large to fit on its frame depends on the toolkit . Usually, only Motif and MS-Windows builds can wrap the menu bar. When they (un-)wrap the menu bar, they try to keep the outer height of the frame unchanged, so the native height of the frame (see below) will change instead.
Like the menu bar, the tool bar (see Tool bars) can be either
internal (drawn by Emacs itself) or external (drawn by a toolkit). The
GTK+ and NS builds have the tool bar drawn by the toolkit. The
remaining builds use internal tool bars. With GTK+ the tool bar can be
located on either side of the frame, immediately outside the internal
border, see below. Tool bars are usually not shown for child frames
(see Child Frames). Display of the tool bar can be suppressed by
setting the tool-bar-lines
parameter (see Layout Parameters) to zero.
If the variable auto-resize-tool-bars
is non-nil
, Emacs
wraps the internal tool bar when its width becomes too large for its
frame. If and when Emacs (un-)wraps the internal tool bar, it by
default keeps the outer height of the frame unchanged, so the native
height of the frame (see below) will change instead. Emacs built with
GTK+, on the other hand, never wraps the tool bar but may
automatically increase the outer width of a frame in order to
accommodate an overlong tool bar.
The tab bar (see Tab Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual) is always
drawn by Emacs itself. The tab bar appears above the tool bar in
Emacs built with an internal tool bar, and below the tool bar in
builds with an external tool bar.
Display of the tab bar can be suppressed by setting the
tab-bar-lines
parameter (see Layout Parameters) to zero.
The native frame is a rectangle located entirely within the outer frame. It excludes the areas occupied by an external or outer border, the title bar and any external menu or tool bar. The edges of the native frame are called the native edges of the frame. Together, the native width and native height of a frame specify the native size of the frame.
The native size of a frame is the size Emacs passes to the window-system or window manager when creating or resizing the frame from within Emacs. It is also the size Emacs receives from the window-system or window manager whenever these resize the frame’s window-system window, for example, after maximizing the frame by clicking on the corresponding button in the title bar or when dragging its external border with the mouse.
The position of the top left corner of the native frame specifies the native position of the frame. (1)–(3) in the drawing above indicate that position for the various builds:
Accordingly, the native height of a frame may include the height of the tool bar but not that of the menu bar (Lucid, Motif, MS-Windows) or those of the menu bar and the tool bar (non-toolkit and text terminal frames).
The native position of a frame is the reference position for functions
that set or return the current position of the mouse (see Mouse Position) and for functions dealing with the position of windows like
window-edges
, window-at
or coordinates-in-window-p
(see Coordinates and Windows). It also specifies the (0, 0) origin
for locating and positioning child frames within this frame
(see Child Frames).
Note also that the native position of a frame usually remains unaltered
on its display when removing or adding the window manager decorations by
changing the frame’s override-redirect
or undecorated
parameter (see Window Management Parameters).
The internal border is a border drawn by Emacs around the inner frame (see below). The specification of its appearance depends on whether or not the given frame is a child frame (see Child Frames).
For normal frames its width is specified by the internal-border-width
frame parameter (see Layout Parameters), and its color is specified by the
background of the internal-border
face.
For child frames its width is specified by the child-frame-border-width
frame parameter (but will use the internal-border-width
parameter as
fallback), and its color is specified by the background of the
child-frame-border
face.
The inner frame is the rectangle reserved for the frame’s windows. It’s enclosed by the internal border which, however, is not part of the inner frame. Its edges are called the inner edges of the frame. The inner width and inner height specify the inner size of the rectangle. The inner frame is sometimes also referred to as the display area of the frame.
As a rule, the inner frame is subdivided into the frame’s root window (see Windows and Frames) and the frame’s minibuffer window (see Minibuffer Windows). There are two notable exceptions to this rule: A minibuffer-less frame contains a root window only and does not contain a minibuffer window. A minibuffer-only frame contains only a minibuffer window which also serves as that frame’s root window. See Initial Frame Parameters for how to create such frame configurations.
The text area of a frame is a somewhat fictitious area that can be embedded in the native frame. Its position is unspecified. Its width can be obtained by removing from that of the native width the widths of the internal border, one vertical scroll bar, and one left and one right fringe if they are specified for this frame, see Layout Parameters. Its height can be obtained by removing from that of the native height the widths of the internal border and the heights of the frame’s internal menu and tool bars, the tab bar and one horizontal scroll bar if specified for this frame.
The absolute position of a frame is given as a pair (X, Y) of horizontal and vertical pixel offsets relative to an origin (0, 0) of the frame’s display. Correspondingly, the absolute edges of a frame are given as pixel offsets from that origin.
Note that with multiple monitors, the origin of the display does not necessarily coincide with the top-left corner of the entire usable display area of the terminal. Hence the absolute position of a frame can be negative in such an environment even when that frame is completely visible.
By convention, vertical offsets increase “downwards”. This means that the height of a frame is obtained by subtracting the offset of its top edge from that of its bottom edge. Horizontal offsets increase “rightwards”, as expected, so a frame’s width is calculated by subtracting the offset of its left edge from that of its right edge.
For a frame on a graphical terminal the following function returns the sizes of the areas described above:
This function returns geometric attributes of frame. The return value is an association list of the attributes listed below. All coordinate, height and width values are integers counting pixels. Note that if frame has not been mapped yet, (see Visibility of Frames) some of the return values may only represent approximations of the actual values—those that can be seen after the frame has been mapped.
outer-position
A cons representing the absolute position of the outer frame, relative to the origin at position (0, 0) of frame’s display.
outer-size
A cons of the outer width and height of frame.
external-border-size
A cons of the horizontal and vertical width of frame’s external borders as supplied by the window manager. If the window manager doesn’t supply these values, Emacs will try to guess them from the coordinates of the outer and inner frame.
outer-border-width
The width of the outer border of frame. The value is meaningful for non-GTK+ X builds only.
title-bar-size
A cons of the width and height of the title bar of frame as supplied by the window manager or operating system. If both of them are zero, the frame has no title bar. If only the width is zero, Emacs was not able to retrieve the width information.
menu-bar-external
If non-nil
, this means the menu bar is external (not part of the
native frame of frame).
menu-bar-size
A cons of the width and height of the menu bar of frame.
tool-bar-external
If non-nil
, this means the tool bar is external (not part of the
native frame of frame).
tool-bar-position
This tells on which side the tool bar on frame is and can be one
of left
, top
, right
or bottom
. The only
toolkit that currently supports a value other than top
is GTK+.
tool-bar-size
A cons of the width and height of the tool bar of frame.
internal-border-width
The width of the internal border of frame.
The following function can be used to retrieve the edges of the outer, native and inner frame.
This function returns the absolute edges of the outer, native or inner
frame of frame. frame must be a live frame and defaults to
the selected one. The returned list has the form (left top right bottom)
where all values are in pixels
relative to the origin of frame’s display. For terminal frames
the values returned for left and top are always zero.
Optional argument type specifies the type of the edges to return:
outer-edges
means to return the outer edges of frame,
native-edges
(or nil
) means to return its native edges and
inner-edges
means to return its inner edges.
By convention, the pixels of the display at the values returned for left and top are considered to be inside (part of) frame. Hence, if left and top are both zero, the pixel at the display’s origin is part of frame. The pixels at bottom and right, on the other hand, are considered to lie immediately outside frame. This means that if you have, for example, two side-by-side frames positioned such that the right outer edge of the frame on the left equals the left outer edge of the frame on the right, the pixels at that edge show a part of the frame on the right.
Each frame has a default font which specifies the default character size for that frame. This size is meant when retrieving or changing the size of a frame in terms of columns or lines (see Size Parameters). It is also used when resizing (see Window Sizes) or splitting (see Splitting Windows) windows.
The terms line height and canonical character height are sometimes used instead of “default character height”. Similarly, the terms column width and canonical character width are used instead of “default character width”.
These functions return the default height and width of a character in frame, measured in pixels. Together, these values establish the size of the default font on frame. The values depend on the choice of font for frame, see Font and Color Parameters.
The default font can be also set directly with the following function:
This sets the default font to font. When called interactively, it prompts for the name of a font, and uses that font on the selected frame. When called from Lisp, font should be a font name (a string), a font object, font entity, or a font spec.
If the optional argument keep-size is nil
, this keeps the
number of frame lines and columns fixed. (If non-nil
, the option
frame-inhibit-implied-resize
described in the next section will
override this.) If keep-size is non-nil
(or with a prefix
argument), it tries to keep the size of the display area of the current
frame fixed by adjusting the number of lines and columns.
If the optional argument frames is nil
, this applies the
font to the selected frame only. If frames is non-nil
, it
should be a list of frames to act upon, or t
meaning all existing
and all future graphical frames.
On graphical systems, the position of a normal top-level frame is specified as the absolute position of its outer frame (see Frame Geometry). The position of a child frame (see Child Frames) is specified via pixel offsets of its outer edges relative to the native position of its parent frame.
You can access or change the position of a frame using the frame
parameters left
and top
(see Position Parameters).
Here are two additional functions for working with the positions of an
existing, visible frame. For both functions, the argument frame
must denote a live frame and defaults to the selected frame.
For a normal, non-child frame this function returns a cons of the pixel
coordinates of its outer position (see Frame Layout) with respect to
the origin (0, 0)
of its display. For a child frame
(see Child Frames) this function returns the pixel coordinates of
its outer position with respect to an origin (0, 0)
at the native
position of frame’s parent.
Negative values never indicate an offset from the right or bottom edge of frame’s display or parent frame. Rather, they mean that frame’s outer position is on the left and/or above the origin of its display or the native position of its parent frame. This usually means that frame is only partially visible (or completely invisible). However, on systems where the display’s origin does not coincide with its top-left corner, the frame may be visible on a secondary monitor.
On a text terminal frame both values are zero.
This function sets the outer frame position of frame to (x, y). The latter arguments specify pixels and normally count from the origin at the position (0, 0) of frame’s display. For child frames, they count from the native position of frame’s parent frame.
Negative parameter values position the right edge of the outer frame by -x pixels left from the right edge of the screen (or the parent frame’s native rectangle) and the bottom edge by -y pixels up from the bottom edge of the screen (or the parent frame’s native rectangle).
Note that negative values do not permit to align the right or bottom
edge of frame exactly at the right or bottom edge of its display
or parent frame. Neither do they allow to specify a position that does
not lie within the edges of the display or parent frame. The frame
parameters left
and top
(see Position Parameters)
allow to do that, but may still fail to provide good results for the
initial or a new frame.
This function has no effect on text terminal frames.
This hook specifies the functions that are run when an Emacs frame is moved (assigned a new position) by the window-system or window manager. The functions are run with one argument, the frame that moved. For a child frame (see Child Frames), the functions are run only when the position of the frame changes in relation to that of its parent frame.
The canonical way to specify the size of a frame from within Emacs is by specifying its text size—a tuple of the width and height of the frame’s text area (see Frame Layout). It can be measured either in pixels or in terms of the frame’s canonical character size (see Frame Font).
For frames with an internal menu or tool bar, the frame’s native
height cannot be told exactly before the frame has been actually drawn.
This means that in general you cannot use the native size to specify the
initial size of a frame. As soon as you know the native size of a
visible frame, you can calculate its outer size (see Frame Layout)
by adding in the remaining components from the return value of
frame-geometry
. For invisible frames or for frames that have
yet to be created, however, the outer size can only be estimated. This
also means that calculating an exact initial position of a frame
specified via offsets from the right or bottom edge of the screen
(see Frame Position) is impossible.
The text size of any frame can be set and retrieved with the help of
the height
and width
frame parameters (see Size Parameters). The text size of the initial frame can be also set with
the help of an X-style geometry specification. See Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation in The GNU Emacs
Manual. Below we list some functions to access and set the size of an
existing, visible frame, by default the selected one.
These functions return the height and width of the text area of
frame, measured in units of the default font height and width of
frame (see Frame Font). These functions are plain shorthands
for writing (frame-parameter frame 'height)
and
(frame-parameter frame 'width)
.
If the text area of frame measured in pixels is not a multiple of its default font size, the values returned by these functions are rounded down to the number of characters of the default font that fully fit into the text area.
The functions following next return the pixel widths and heights of the native, outer and inner frame and the text area (see Frame Layout) of a given frame. For a text terminal, the results are in characters rather than pixels.
These functions return the outer width and height of frame in pixels.
These functions return the native width and height of frame in pixels.
These functions return the inner width and height of frame in pixels.
These functions return the width and height of the text area of frame in pixels.
On window systems that support it, Emacs tries by default to make the text size of a frame measured in pixels a multiple of the frame’s character size. This, however, usually means that a frame can be resized only in character size increments when dragging its external borders. It also may break attempts to truly maximize the frame or making it “fullheight” or “fullwidth” (see Size Parameters) leaving some empty space below and/or on the right of the frame. The following option may help in that case.
If this option is nil
(the default), a frame’s text pixel size is
usually rounded to a multiple of the current values of that frame’s
frame-char-height
and frame-char-width
whenever the frame
is resized. If this is non-nil
, no rounding occurs, hence frame
sizes can increase/decrease by one pixel.
Setting this variable usually causes the next resize operation to pass the corresponding size hints to the window manager. This means that this variable should be set only in a user’s initial file; applications should never bind it temporarily.
The precise meaning of a value of nil
for this option depends on
the toolkit used. Dragging the external border with the mouse is done
character-wise provided the window manager is willing to process the
corresponding size hints. Calling set-frame-size
(see below)
with arguments that do not specify the frame size as an integer multiple
of its character size, however, may: be ignored, cause a rounding
(GTK+), or be accepted (Lucid, Motif, MS-Windows).
With some window managers you may have to set this to non-nil
in
order to make a frame appear truly maximized or full-screen.
This function sets the size of the text area of frame, measured in terms of the canonical height and width of a character on frame (see Frame Font).
The optional argument pixelwise non-nil
means to measure
the new width and height in units of pixels instead. Note that if
frame-resize-pixelwise
is nil
, some toolkits may refuse to
truly honor the request if it does not increase/decrease the frame size
to a multiple of its character size.
This function resizes the text area of frame to a height of height lines. The sizes of existing windows in frame are altered proportionally to fit.
If pretend is non-nil
, then Emacs displays height
lines of output in frame, but does not change its value for the
actual height of the frame. This is only useful on text terminals.
Using a smaller height than the terminal actually implements may be
useful to reproduce behavior observed on a smaller screen, or if the
terminal malfunctions when using its whole screen. Setting the frame
height directly does not always work, because knowing the correct
actual size may be necessary for correct cursor positioning on
text terminals.
The optional fourth argument pixelwise non-nil
means that
frame should be height pixels high. Note that if
frame-resize-pixelwise
is nil
, some window managers may
refuse to truly honor the request if it does not increase/decrease the
frame height to a multiple of its character height.
When used interactively, this command will ask the user for the number of lines to set the height of the currently selected frame. You can also provide this value with a numeric prefix.
This function sets the width of the text area of frame, measured
in characters. The argument pretend has the same meaning as in
set-frame-height
.
The optional fourth argument pixelwise non-nil
means that
frame should be width pixels wide. Note that if
frame-resize-pixelwise
is nil
, some window managers may
refuse to fully honor the request if it does not increase/decrease the
frame width to a multiple of its character width.
When used interactively, this command will ask the user for the number of columns to set the width of the currently selected frame. You can also provide this value with a numeric prefix.
None of these three functions will make a frame smaller than needed to
display all of its windows together with their scroll bars, fringes,
margins, dividers, mode and header lines. This contrasts with requests
by the window manager triggered, for example, by dragging the external
border of a frame with the mouse. Such requests are always honored by
clipping, if necessary, portions that cannot be displayed at the right,
bottom corner of the frame. The parameters min-width
and
min-height
(see Size Parameters) can be used to obtain a
similar behavior when changing the frame size from within Emacs.
The abnormal hook window-size-change-functions
(see Hooks for Window Scrolling and Changes) tracks all changes of the inner size of a frame including those
induced by request of the window-system or window manager. To rule out
false positives that might occur when changing only the sizes of a
frame’s windows without actually changing the size of the inner frame,
use the following function.
This function returns non-nil
when the inner width or height of
frame has changed since window-size-change-functions
was
run the last time for frame. It always returns nil
immediately after running window-size-change-functions
for
frame.
By default, Emacs tries to keep the number of lines and columns of a frame’s text area unaltered when, for example, toggling its menu or tool bar, changing its default font or setting the width of any of its scroll bars. This means that in such case Emacs must ask the window manager to resize the frame’s window in order to accommodate the size change.
Occasionally, such implied frame resizing may be unwanted, for example, when a frame has been maximized or made full-screen (where it’s turned off by default). In general, users can disable implied resizing with the following option:
If this option is nil
, changing a frame’s font, menu bar, tool
bar, internal borders, fringes or scroll bars may resize its outer
frame in order to keep the number of columns or lines of its text area
unaltered. If this option is t
, no such resizing is done.
The value of this option can be also a list of frame parameters. In
that case, implied resizing is inhibited for the change of a parameter
that appears in this list. Parameters currently handled by this
option are font
, font-backend
,
internal-border-width
, menu-bar-lines
and
tool-bar-lines
.
Changing any of the scroll-bar-width
, scroll-bar-height
,
vertical-scroll-bars
, horizontal-scroll-bars
,
left-fringe
and right-fringe
frame parameters is handled
as if the frame contained just one live window. This means, for
example, that removing vertical scroll bars on a frame containing
several side by side windows will shrink the outer frame width by the
width of one scroll bar provided this option is nil
and keep it
unchanged if this option is t
or a list containing
vertical-scroll-bars
.
The default value is (tab-bar-lines tool-bar-lines)
for Lucid,
Motif and MS-Windows (which means that adding/removing a tool or tab
bar there does not change the outer frame height),
(tab-bar-lines)
on all other window systems including GTK+
(which means that changing any of the parameters listed above with the
exception of tab-bar-lines
may change the size of the outer
frame), and t
otherwise (which means the outer frame size never
changes implicitly when there’s no window system support).
Note that when a frame is not large enough to accommodate a change of
any of the parameters listed above, Emacs may try to enlarge the frame
even if this option is non-nil
.
Note also that window managers usually do not ask for resizing a frame when they change the number of lines occupied by an external menu or tool bar. Typically, such “wrappings” occur when a user shrinks a frame horizontally, making it impossible to display all elements of its menu or tool bar. They may also result from a change of the major mode altering the number of items of a menu or tool bar. Any such wrappings may implicitly alter the number of lines of a frame’s text area and are unaffected by the setting of this option.
A frame has many parameters that control its appearance and behavior. Just what parameters a frame has depends on what display mechanism it uses.
Frame parameters exist mostly for the sake of graphical displays.
Most frame parameters have no effect when applied to a frame on a text
terminal; only the height
, width
, name
,
title
, menu-bar-lines
, buffer-list
and
buffer-predicate
parameters do something special. If the
terminal supports colors, the parameters foreground-color
,
background-color
, background-mode
and
display-type
are also meaningful. If the terminal supports
frame transparency, the parameter alpha
is also meaningful.
By default, frame parameters are saved and restored by the desktop
library functions (see Desktop Save Mode) when the variable
desktop-restore-frames
is non-nil
. It’s the
responsibility of applications that their parameters are included in
frameset-persistent-filter-alist
to avoid that they get
meaningless or even harmful values in restored sessions.
These functions let you read and change the parameter values of a frame.
This function returns the value of the parameter parameter (a
symbol) of frame. If frame is nil
, it returns the
selected frame’s parameter. If frame has no setting for
parameter, this function returns nil
.
The function frame-parameters
returns an alist listing all the
parameters of frame and their values. If frame is
nil
or omitted, this returns the selected frame’s parameters
This function alters the frame frame based on the elements of
alist. Each element of alist has the form
(parm . value)
, where parm is a symbol naming
a parameter. If you don’t mention a parameter in alist, its
value doesn’t change. If frame is nil
, it defaults to
the selected frame.
Some parameters are only meaningful for frames on certain kinds of display (see Frames). If alist includes parameters that are not meaningful for the frame’s display, this function will change its value in the frame’s parameter list, but will otherwise ignore it.
When alist specifies more than one parameter whose value can affect the new size of frame, the final size of the frame may differ according to the toolkit used. For example, specifying that a frame should from now on have a menu and/or tool bar instead of none and simultaneously specifying the new height of the frame will inevitably lead to a recalculation of the frame’s height. Conceptually, in such case, this function will try to have the explicit height specification prevail. It cannot be excluded, however, that the addition (or removal) of the menu or tool bar, when eventually performed by the toolkit, will defeat this intention.
Sometimes, binding frame-inhibit-implied-resize
(see Implied Frame Resizing) to a non-nil
value around calls to this function
may fix the problem sketched here. Sometimes, however, exactly such
binding may be hit by the problem.
This function sets the frame parameter parm to the specified
value. If frame is nil
, it defaults to the selected
frame.
This function alters the frame parameters of all existing frames
according to alist, then modifies default-frame-alist
(and, if necessary, initial-frame-alist
) to apply the same
parameter values to frames that will be created henceforth.
You can specify the parameters for the initial startup frame by
setting initial-frame-alist
in your init file (see The Init File).
This variable’s value is an alist of parameter values used when creating the initial frame. You can set this variable to specify the appearance of the initial frame without altering subsequent frames. Each element has the form:
(parameter . value)
Emacs creates the initial frame before it reads your init
file. After reading that file, Emacs checks initial-frame-alist
,
and applies the parameter settings in the altered value to the already
created initial frame.
If these settings affect the frame geometry and appearance, you’ll see the frame appear with the wrong ones and then change to the specified ones. If that bothers you, you can specify the same geometry and appearance with X resources; those do take effect before the frame is created. See X Resources in The GNU Emacs Manual.
X resource settings typically apply to all frames. If you want to
specify some X resources solely for the sake of the initial frame, and
you don’t want them to apply to subsequent frames, here’s how to achieve
this. Specify parameters in default-frame-alist
to override the
X resources for subsequent frames; then, to prevent these from affecting
the initial frame, specify the same parameters in
initial-frame-alist
with values that match the X resources.
If these parameters include (minibuffer . nil)
, that indicates
that the initial frame should have no minibuffer. In this case, Emacs
creates a separate minibuffer-only frame as well.
This variable’s value is an alist of parameter values used when
creating an initial minibuffer-only frame (i.e., the minibuffer-only
frame that Emacs creates if initial-frame-alist
specifies a
frame with no minibuffer).
This is an alist specifying default values of frame parameters for all Emacs frames—the first frame, and subsequent frames. When using the X Window System, you can get the same results by means of X resources in many cases.
Setting this variable does not affect existing frames. Furthermore, functions that display a buffer in a separate frame may override the default parameters by supplying their own parameters.
If you invoke Emacs with command-line options that specify frame
appearance, those options take effect by adding elements to either
initial-frame-alist
or default-frame-alist
. Options
which affect just the initial frame, such as ‘--geometry’ and
‘--maximized’, add to initial-frame-alist
; the others add
to default-frame-alist
. see Command Line
Arguments for Emacs Invocation in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Just what parameters a frame has depends on what display mechanism
it uses. This section describes the parameters that have special
meanings on some or all kinds of terminals. Of these, name
,
title
, height
, width
, buffer-list
and
buffer-predicate
provide meaningful information in terminal
frames, and tty-color-mode
is meaningful only for frames on
text terminals.
These frame parameters give the most basic information about the
frame. title
and name
are meaningful on all terminals.
display
¶The display on which to open this frame. It should be a string of the
form ‘host:dpy.screen’, just like the
DISPLAY
environment variable. See Multiple Terminals, for
more details about display names.
display-type
¶This parameter describes the range of possible colors that can be used
in this frame. Its value is color
, grayscale
or
mono
.
title
¶If a frame has a non-nil
title, that title appears in the window
system’s title bar at the top of the frame, and also in the mode line
of windows in that frame if mode-line-frame-identification
uses
‘%F’ (see %
-Constructs in the Mode Line). This is normally the case when
Emacs is not using a window system, and can only display one frame at
a time. When Emacs is using a window system, this parameter, if
non-nil
, overrides the title determined by the name
parameter and the implicit title calculated according to
frame-title-format
. It also overrides the title determined by
icon-title-format
for iconified frames. See Frame Titles.
name
¶The name of the frame. If you don’t specify a name via this
parameter, Emacs sets the frame name automatically, as specified by
frame-title-format
and icon-title-format
, and that is
the frame’s title that will appear on display when Emacs uses a window
system (unless the title
parameter overrides it).
If you specify the frame name explicitly when you create the frame, the name is also used (instead of the name of the Emacs executable) when looking up X resources for the frame.
explicit-name
¶If the frame name was specified explicitly when the frame was created,
this parameter will be that name. If the frame wasn’t explicitly
named, this parameter will be nil
.
Parameters describing the X- and Y-offsets of a frame are always measured in pixels. For a normal, non-child frame they specify the frame’s outer position (see Frame Geometry) relative to its display’s origin. For a child frame (see Child Frames) they specify the frame’s outer position relative to the native position of the frame’s parent frame. (Note that none of these parameters is meaningful on TTY frames.)
left
¶The position, in pixels, of the left outer edge of the frame with respect to the left edge of the frame’s display or parent frame. It can be specified in one of the following ways.
A positive integer always relates the left edge of the frame to the left edge of its display or parent frame. A negative integer relates the right frame edge to the right edge of the display or parent frame.
(+ pos)
This specifies the position of the left frame edge relative to the left edge of its display or parent frame. The integer pos may be positive or negative; a negative value specifies a position outside the screen or parent frame or on a monitor other than the primary one (for multi-monitor displays).
(- pos)
This specifies the position of the right frame edge relative to the right edge of the display or parent frame. The integer pos may be positive or negative; a negative value specifies a position outside the screen or parent frame or on a monitor other than the primary one (for multi-monitor displays).
A floating-point value in the range 0.0 to 1.0 specifies the left edge’s offset via the left position ratio of the frame—the ratio of the left edge of its outer frame to the width of the frame’s workarea (see Multiple Terminals) or its parent’s native frame (see Child Frames) minus the width of the outer frame. Thus, a left position ratio of 0.0 flushes a frame to the left, a ratio of 0.5 centers it and a ratio of 1.0 flushes it to the right of its display or parent frame. Similarly, the top position ratio of a frame is the ratio of the frame’s top position to the height of its workarea or parent frame minus the height of the frame.
Emacs will try to keep the position ratios of a child frame unaltered if
that frame has a non-nil
keep-ratio
parameter
(see Frame Interaction Parameters) and its parent frame is resized.
Since the outer size of a frame (see Frame Geometry) is usually unavailable before a frame has been made visible, it is generally not advisable to use floating-point values when creating decorated frames. Floating-point values are more suited for ensuring that an (undecorated) child frame is positioned nicely within the area of its parent frame.
Some window managers ignore program-specified positions. If you want to
be sure the position you specify is not ignored, specify a
non-nil
value for the user-position
parameter as in the
following example:
(modify-frame-parameters nil '((user-position . t) (left . (+ -4))))
In general, it is not a good idea to position a frame relative to the right or bottom edge of its display. Positioning the initial or a new frame is either not accurate (because the size of the outer frame is not yet fully known before the frame has been made visible) or will cause additional flicker (if the frame has to be repositioned after becoming visible).
Note also, that positions specified relative to the right/bottom edge
of a display, workarea or parent frame as well as floating-point offsets
are stored internally as integer offsets relative to the left/top edge
of the display, workarea or parent frame edge. They are also returned
as such by functions like frame-parameters
and restored as such
by the desktop saving routines.
top
¶The screen position of the top (or bottom) edge, in pixels, with respect
to the top (or bottom) edge of the display or parent frame. It works
just like left
, except vertically instead of horizontally.
icon-left
¶The screen position of the left edge of the frame’s icon, in pixels,
counting from the left edge of the screen. This takes effect when the
frame is iconified, if the window manager supports this feature. If
you specify a value for this parameter, then you must also specify a
value for icon-top
and vice versa.
icon-top
¶The screen position of the top edge of the frame’s icon, in pixels, counting from the top edge of the screen. This takes effect when the frame is iconified, if the window manager supports this feature.
user-position
¶When you create a frame and specify its screen position with the
left
and top
parameters, use this parameter to say whether
the specified position was user-specified (explicitly requested in some
way by a human user) or merely program-specified (chosen by a program).
A non-nil
value says the position was user-specified.
Window managers generally heed user-specified positions, and some heed
program-specified positions too. But many ignore program-specified
positions, placing the window in a default fashion or letting the user
place it with the mouse. Some window managers, including twm
,
let the user specify whether to obey program-specified positions or
ignore them.
When you call make-frame
, you should specify a non-nil
value for this parameter if the values of the left
and top
parameters represent the user’s stated preference; otherwise, use
nil
.
z-group
¶This parameter specifies a relative position of the frame’s window-system window in the stacking (Z-) order of the frame’s display.
If this is above
, the window-system will display the window
that corresponds to the frame above all other window-system windows
that do not have the above
property set. If this is
nil
, the frame’s window is displayed below all windows that
have the above
property set and above all windows that have the
below
property set. If this is below
, the frame’s
window is displayed below all windows that do not have the
below
property set.
To position the frame above or below a specific other frame use the
function frame-restack
(see Raising, Lowering and Restacking Frames).
Frame parameters usually specify frame sizes in character units. On
graphical displays, the default
face determines the actual pixel
sizes of these character units (see Face Attributes).
width
¶This parameter specifies the width of the frame. It can be specified as in the following ways:
A positive integer specifies the width of the frame’s text area (see Frame Geometry) in characters.
If this is a cons cell with the symbol text-pixels
in its
CAR, the CDR of that cell specifies the width of the frame’s
text area in pixels.
A floating-point number between 0.0 and 1.0 can be used to specify the width of a frame via its width ratio—the ratio of its outer width (see Frame Geometry) to the width of the frame’s workarea (see Multiple Terminals) or its parent frame’s (see Child Frames) native frame. Thus, a value of 0.5 makes the frame occupy half of the width of its workarea or parent frame, a value of 1.0 the full width. Similarly, the height ratio of a frame is the ratio of its outer height to the height of its workarea or its parent’s native frame.
Emacs will try to keep the width and height ratio of a child frame
unaltered if that frame has a non-nil
keep-ratio
parameter
(see Frame Interaction Parameters) and its parent frame is resized.
Since the outer size of a frame is usually unavailable before a frame
has been made visible, it is generally not advisable to use
floating-point values when creating decorated frames. Floating-point
values are more suited to ensure that a child frame always fits within
the area of its parent frame as, for example, when customizing
display-buffer-alist
(see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) via
display-buffer-in-child-frame
.
Regardless of how this parameter was specified, functions reporting the
value of this parameter like frame-parameters
always report the
width of the frame’s text area in characters as an integer rounded, if
necessary, to a multiple of the frame’s default character width. That
value is also used by the desktop saving routines.
height
¶This parameter specifies the height of the frame. It works just like
width
, except vertically instead of horizontally.
user-size
¶This does for the size parameters height
and width
what
the user-position
parameter (see user-position) does for the position parameters top
and
left
.
min-width
¶This parameter specifies the minimum native width (see Frame Geometry) of the frame, in characters. Normally, the functions that
establish a frame’s initial width or resize a frame horizontally make
sure that all the frame’s windows, vertical scroll bars, fringes,
margins and vertical dividers can be displayed. This parameter, if
non-nil
allows to make a frame narrower than that with the
consequence that any components that do not fit will be clipped by the
window manager.
min-height
¶This parameter specifies the minimum native height (see Frame Geometry) of the frame, in characters. Normally, the functions that
establish a frame’s initial size or resize a frame make sure that all
the frame’s windows, horizontal scroll bars and dividers, mode and
header lines, the echo area and the internal menu and tool bar can be
displayed. This parameter, if non-nil
allows to make a frame
smaller than that with the consequence that any components that do not
fit will be clipped by the window manager.
fullscreen
¶This parameter specifies whether to maximize the frame’s width, height
or both. Its value can be fullwidth
, fullheight
,
fullboth
, or maximized
.21 A
fullwidth frame is as wide as possible, a fullheight frame
is as tall as possible, and a fullboth frame is both as wide and
as tall as possible. A maximized frame is like a “fullboth”
frame, except that it usually keeps its title bar and the buttons for
resizing and closing the frame. Also, maximized frames typically
avoid hiding any task bar or panels displayed on the desktop. A
“fullboth” frame, on the other hand, usually omits the title bar and
occupies the entire available screen space.
Full-height and full-width frames are more similar to maximized frames in this regard. However, these typically display an external border which might be absent with maximized frames. Hence the heights of maximized and full-height frames and the widths of maximized and full-width frames often differ by a few pixels.
With some window managers you may have to customize the variable
frame-resize-pixelwise
(see Frame Size) in order to make a
frame truly appear maximized or full-screen. Moreover, some window
managers might not support smooth transition between the various
full-screen or maximization states. Customizing the variable
x-frame-normalize-before-maximize
can help to overcome that.
Full-screen on macOS hides both the tool-bar and the menu-bar, however both will be displayed if the mouse pointer is moved to the top of the screen.
fullscreen-restore
¶This parameter specifies the desired fullscreen state of the frame
after invoking the toggle-frame-fullscreen
command (see Frame
Commands in The GNU Emacs Manual) in the “fullboth” state.
Normally this parameter is installed automatically by that command when
toggling the state to fullboth. If, however, you start Emacs in the
“fullboth” state, you have to specify the desired behavior in your initial
file as, for example
(setq default-frame-alist '((fullscreen . fullboth) (fullscreen-restore . fullheight)))
This will give a new frame full height after typing in it F11 for the first time.
fit-frame-to-buffer-margins
¶This parameter allows to override the value of the option
fit-frame-to-buffer-margins
when fitting this frame to the buffer
of its root window with fit-frame-to-buffer
(see Resizing Windows).
fit-frame-to-buffer-sizes
¶This parameter allows to override the value of the option
fit-frame-to-buffer-sizes
when fitting this frame to the buffer
of its root window with fit-frame-to-buffer
(see Resizing Windows).
These frame parameters enable or disable various parts of the frame, or control their sizes.
border-width
¶The width in pixels of the frame’s outer border (see Frame Geometry).
internal-border-width
¶The width in pixels of the frame’s internal border (see Frame Geometry).
child-frame-border-width
¶The width in pixels of the frame’s internal border (see Frame Geometry) if the given frame is a child frame (see Child Frames).
If this is nil
, the value specified by the
internal-border-width
parameter is used instead.
vertical-scroll-bars
¶Whether the frame has scroll bars (see Scroll Bars) for vertical
scrolling, and which side of the frame they should be on. The possible
values are left
, right
, and nil
for no scroll bars.
horizontal-scroll-bars
¶Whether the frame has scroll bars for horizontal scrolling (t
and
bottom
mean yes, nil
means no).
scroll-bar-width
¶The width of vertical scroll bars, in pixels, or nil
meaning to
use the default width.
scroll-bar-height
¶The height of horizontal scroll bars, in pixels, or nil
meaning
to use the default height.
left-fringe
¶right-fringe
The default width of the left and right fringes of windows in this frame (see Fringes). If either of these is zero, that effectively removes the corresponding fringe.
When you use frame-parameter
to query the value of either of
these two frame parameters, the return value is always an integer.
When using set-frame-parameter
, passing a nil
value
imposes an actual default value of 8 pixels.
right-divider-width
¶The width (thickness) reserved for the right divider (see Window Dividers) of any window on the frame, in pixels. A value of zero means to not draw right dividers.
bottom-divider-width
¶The width (thickness) reserved for the bottom divider (see Window Dividers) of any window on the frame, in pixels. A value of zero means to not draw bottom dividers.
menu-bar-lines
¶The number of lines to allocate at the top of the frame for a menu bar
(see The Menu Bar). The default is one if Menu Bar mode is enabled and
zero otherwise. See Menu Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual. For an
external menu bar (see Frame Layout), this value remains unchanged
even when the menu bar wraps to two or more lines. In that case, the
menu-bar-size
value returned by frame-geometry
(see Frame Geometry) allows to derive whether the menu bar actually
occupies one or more lines.
tool-bar-lines
¶The number of lines to use for the tool bar (see Tool bars). The default is one if Tool Bar mode is enabled and zero otherwise. See Tool Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual. This value may change whenever the tool bar wraps (see Frame Layout).
tool-bar-position
¶The position of the tool bar when Emacs was built with GTK+. Its value
can be one of top
, bottom
left
, right
. The
default is top
.
tab-bar-lines
¶The number of lines to use for the tab bar (see Tab Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual). The default is one if Tab Bar mode is enabled and zero otherwise. This value may change whenever the tab bar wraps (see Frame Layout).
line-spacing
¶Additional space to leave below each text line, in pixels (a positive integer). See Line Height, for more information.
no-special-glyphs
¶If this is non-nil
, it suppresses the display of any truncation
(see Truncation) and continuation glyphs for all the buffers
displayed by this frame. This is useful to eliminate such glyphs when
fitting a frame to its buffer via fit-frame-to-buffer
(see Resizing Windows). This frame parameter has effect only for
GUI frames shown on graphical displays, and only if the fringes are
disabled. This parameter is intended as a purely-presentation
feature, and in particular should not be used for frames where the
user can interactively insert text, or more generally where the cursor
is shown. A notable example of frames where this is used is tooltip
frames (see Tooltips).
These frame parameters, meaningful on all kinds of terminals, deal with which buffers have been, or should, be displayed in the frame.
minibuffer
¶Whether this frame has its own minibuffer. The value t
means
yes, nil
means no, only
means this frame is just a
minibuffer. If the value is a minibuffer window (in some other
frame), the frame uses that minibuffer.
This parameter takes effect when the frame is created. If specified as
nil
, Emacs will try to set it to the minibuffer window of
default-minibuffer-frame
(see Minibuffers and Frames). For
an existing frame, this parameter can be used exclusively to specify
another minibuffer window. It is not allowed to change it from a
minibuffer window to t
and vice-versa, or from t
to
nil
. If the parameter specifies a minibuffer window already,
setting it to nil
has no effect.
The special value child-frame
means to make a minibuffer-only
child frame (see Child Frames) whose parent becomes the frame
created. As if specified as nil
, Emacs will set this parameter
to the minibuffer window of the child frame but will not select the
child frame after its creation.
buffer-predicate
¶The buffer-predicate function for this frame. The function
other-buffer
uses this predicate (from the selected frame) to
decide which buffers it should consider, if the predicate is not
nil
. It calls the predicate with one argument, a buffer, once for
each buffer; if the predicate returns a non-nil
value, it
considers that buffer.
buffer-list
¶A list of buffers that have been selected in this frame, ordered most-recently-selected first.
unsplittable
¶If non-nil
, this frame’s window is never split automatically.
These parameters supply forms of interactions between different frames.
parent-frame
¶If non-nil
, this means that this frame is a child frame
(see Child Frames), and this parameter specifies its parent frame.
If nil
, this means that this frame is a normal, top-level frame.
delete-before
¶If non-nil
, this parameter specifies another frame whose deletion
will automatically trigger the deletion of this frame. See Deleting Frames.
mouse-wheel-frame
¶If non-nil
, this parameter specifies the frame whose windows will
be scrolled whenever the mouse wheel is scrolled with the mouse pointer
hovering over this frame, see Mouse Commands in The GNU
Emacs Manual.
no-other-frame
¶If this is non-nil
, then this frame is not eligible as candidate
for the functions next-frame
, previous-frame
(see Finding All Frames) and other-frame
, see Frame
Commands in The GNU Emacs Manual.
auto-hide-function
¶When this parameter specifies a function, that function will be called
instead of the function specified by the variable
frame-auto-hide-function
when quitting the frame’s only window
(see Quitting Windows) and there are other frames left.
minibuffer-exit
¶When this parameter is non-nil
, Emacs will by default make this
frame invisible whenever the minibuffer (see Minibuffers) is exited.
Alternatively, it can specify the functions iconify-frame
and
delete-frame
. This parameter is useful to make a child frame
disappear automatically (similar to how Emacs deals with a window) when
exiting the minibuffer.
keep-ratio
¶This parameter is currently meaningful for child frames (see Child Frames) only. If it is non-nil
, then Emacs will try to keep the
frame’s size (width and height) ratios (see Size Parameters) as well
as its left and right position ratios (see Position Parameters)
unaltered whenever its parent frame is resized.
If the value of this parameter is nil
, the frame’s position and
size remain unaltered when the parent frame is resized, so the position
and size ratios may change. If the value of this parameter is t
,
Emacs will try to preserve the frame’s size and position ratios, hence
the frame’s size and position relative to its parent frame may change.
More individual control is possible by using a cons cell: In that case
the frame’s width ratio is preserved if the CAR of the cell is
either t
or width-only
. The height ratio is preserved if
the CAR of the cell is either t
or height-only
. The
left position ratio is preserved if the CDR of the cell is either
t
or left-only
. The top position ratio is preserved if
the CDR of the cell is either t
or top-only
.
The parameters described below provide support for resizing a frame by dragging its internal borders with the mouse. They also allow moving a frame with the mouse by dragging the header or tab line of its topmost or the mode line of its bottommost window.
These parameters are mostly useful for child frames (see Child Frames) that come without window manager decorations. If necessary, they can be used for undecorated top-level frames as well.
drag-internal-border
¶If non-nil
, the frame can be resized by dragging its internal
borders, if present, with the mouse.
drag-with-header-line
¶If non-nil
, the frame can be moved with the mouse by dragging the
header line of its topmost window.
drag-with-tab-line
¶If non-nil
, the frame can be moved with the mouse by dragging the
tab line of its topmost window.
drag-with-mode-line
¶If non-nil
, the frame can be moved with the mouse by dragging the
mode line of its bottommost window. Note that such a frame is not
allowed to have its own minibuffer window.
snap-width
¶A frame that is moved with the mouse will “snap” at the border(s) of the display or its parent frame whenever it is dragged as near to such an edge as the number of pixels specified by this parameter.
top-visible
¶If this parameter is a number, the top edge of the frame never appears
above the top edge of its display or parent frame. Moreover, as many
pixels of the frame as specified by that number will remain visible when
the frame is moved against any of the remaining edges of its display or
parent frame. Setting this parameter is useful to guard against
dragging a child frame with a non-nil
drag-with-header-line
parameter completely out of the area
of its parent frame.
bottom-visible
¶If this parameter is a number, the bottom edge of the frame never
appears below the bottom edge of its display or parent frame. Moreover,
as many pixels of the frame as specified by that number will remain
visible when the frame is moved against any of the remaining edges of
its display or parent frame. Setting this parameter is useful to guard
against dragging a child frame with a non-nil
drag-with-mode-line
parameter completely out of the area of
its parent frame.
The following frame parameters control various aspects of the frame’s interaction with the window manager or window system. They have no effect on text terminals.
visibility
¶The state of visibility of the frame. There are three possibilities:
nil
for invisible, t
for visible, and icon
for
iconified. See Visibility of Frames.
auto-raise
¶If non-nil
, Emacs automatically raises the frame when it is
selected. Some window managers do not allow this.
auto-lower
¶If non-nil
, Emacs automatically lowers the frame when it is
deselected. Some window managers do not allow this.
icon-type
¶The type of icon to use for this frame. If the value is a string,
that specifies a file containing a bitmap to use; nil
specifies
no icon (in which case the window manager decides what to show); any
other non-nil
value specifies the default Emacs icon.
icon-name
¶The name to use in the icon for this frame, when and if the icon
appears. If this is nil
, the frame’s title is used.
window-id
¶The ID number which the graphical display uses for this frame. Emacs assigns this parameter when the frame is created; changing the parameter has no effect on the actual ID number.
outer-window-id
¶The ID number of the outermost window-system window in which the frame
exists. As with window-id
, changing this parameter has no
actual effect.
wait-for-wm
¶If non-nil
, tell Xt to wait for the window manager to confirm
geometry changes. Some window managers, including versions of Fvwm2
and KDE, fail to confirm, so Xt hangs. Set this to nil
to
prevent hanging with those window managers.
sticky
¶If non-nil
, the frame is visible on all virtual desktops on systems
with virtual desktops.
shaded
¶If non-nil
, tell the window manager to display the frame in a
way that its contents are hidden, leaving only the title bar.
use-frame-synchronization
¶If non-nil
, synchronize the frame redisplay with the refresh
rate of the monitor to avoid graphics tearing. At present, this is
only implemented on Haiku and the X window system inside no-toolkit
and X toolkit builds, does not work correctly with toolkit scroll
bars, and requires a compositing manager supporting the relevant
display synchronization protocols. The synchronizeResize
X
resource must also be set to the string "extended"
.
inhibit-double-buffering
¶If non-nil
, the frame is drawn to the screen without double
buffering. Emacs normally attempts to use double buffering, where
available, to reduce flicker. Set this property if you experience
display bugs or pine for that retro, flicker-y feeling.
skip-taskbar
¶If non-nil
, this tells the window manager to remove the frame’s
icon from the taskbar associated with the frame’s display and inhibit
switching to the frame’s window via the combination Alt-TAB.
On MS-Windows, iconifying such a frame will "roll in" its window-system
window at the bottom of the desktop. Some window managers may not honor
this parameter.
no-focus-on-map
¶If non-nil
, this means that the frame does not want to receive
input focus when it is mapped (see Visibility of Frames). Some
window managers may not honor this parameter.
no-accept-focus
¶If non-nil
, this means that the frame does not want to receive
input focus via explicit mouse clicks or when moving the mouse into it
either via focus-follows-mouse
(see Input Focus) or
mouse-autoselect-window
(see Mouse Window Auto-selection).
This may have the unwanted side-effect that a user cannot scroll a
non-selected frame with the mouse. Some window managers may not honor
this parameter. On Haiku, it also has the side-effect that the window
will not be able to receive any keyboard input from the user, not even
if the user switches to the frame using the key combination
Alt-TAB.
undecorated
¶If non-nil
, this frame’s window-system window is drawn without
decorations, like the title, minimize/maximize boxes and external
borders. This usually means that the window cannot be dragged, resized,
iconified, maximized or deleted with the mouse. If nil
, the frame’s
window is usually drawn with all the elements listed above unless their
display has been suspended via window manager settings.
Under X, Emacs uses the Motif window manager hints to turn off decorations. Some window managers may not honor these hints.
NS builds consider the tool bar to be a decoration, and therefore hide it on an undecorated frame.
override-redirect
¶If non-nil
, this means that this is an override redirect
frame—a frame not handled by window managers under X. Override
redirect frames have no window manager decorations, can be positioned
and resized only via Emacs’ positioning and resizing functions and are
usually drawn on top of all other frames. Setting this parameter has
no effect on MS-Windows.
ns-appearance
¶Only available on macOS, if set to dark
draw this frame’s
window-system window using the “vibrant dark” theme, and if set to
light
use the “aqua” theme, otherwise use the system default.
The “vibrant dark” theme can be used to set the toolbar and
scrollbars to a dark appearance when using an Emacs theme with a dark
background.
ns-transparent-titlebar
¶Only available on macOS, if non-nil
, set the titlebar and
toolbar to be transparent. This effectively sets the background color
of both to match the Emacs background color.
This frame parameter controls the way the cursor looks.
cursor-type
¶How to display the cursor. Legitimate values are:
box
Display a filled box. (This is the default.)
(box . size)
Display a filled box. However, display it as a hollow box if point is under masked image larger than size pixels in either dimension.
hollow
Display a hollow box.
nil
Don’t display a cursor.
bar
Display a vertical bar between characters.
(bar . width)
Display a vertical bar width pixels wide between characters.
hbar
Display a horizontal bar.
(hbar . height)
Display a horizontal bar height pixels high.
The cursor-type
frame parameter may be overridden by the
variables cursor-type
and
cursor-in-non-selected-windows
:
This buffer-local variable controls how the cursor looks in a selected
window showing the buffer. If its value is t
, that means to
use the cursor specified by the cursor-type
frame parameter.
Otherwise, the value should be one of the cursor types listed above,
and it overrides the cursor-type
frame parameter.
This buffer-local variable controls how the cursor looks in a window
that is not selected. It supports the same values as the
cursor-type
frame parameter; also, nil
means don’t
display a cursor in nonselected windows, and t
(the default)
means use a standard modification of the usual cursor type (solid box
becomes hollow box, and bar becomes a narrower bar).
This variable controls the width of the block cursor displayed on
extra-wide glyphs such as a tab or a stretch of white space. By
default, the block cursor is only as wide as the font’s default
character, and will not cover all of the width of the glyph under it
if that glyph is extra-wide. A non-nil
value of this variable
means draw the block cursor as wide as the glyph under it. The
default value is nil
.
This variable has no effect on text-mode frames, since the text-mode cursor is drawn by the terminal out of Emacs’s control.
This variable specifies how to blink the cursor. Each element has the
form (on-state . off-state)
. Whenever the cursor
type equals on-state (comparing using equal
), the
corresponding off-state specifies what the cursor looks like
when it blinks off. Both on-state and off-state
should be suitable values for the cursor-type
frame parameter.
There are various defaults for how to blink each type of cursor, if
the type is not mentioned as an on-state here. Changes in this
variable do not take effect immediately, only when you specify the
cursor-type
frame parameter.
These frame parameters control the use of fonts and colors.
font-backend
¶A list of symbols, specifying the font backends to use for
drawing characters on the frame, in order of priority. In Emacs built
without Cairo drawing on X, there are currently three potentially
available font backends: x
(the X core font driver), xft
(the Xft font driver), and xfthb
(the Xft font driver with
HarfBuzz text shaping). If built with Cairo drawing, there are also
three potentially available font backends on X: x
, ftcr
(the FreeType font driver on Cairo), and ftcrhb
(the FreeType
font driver on Cairo with HarfBuzz text shaping). When Emacs is built
with HarfBuzz, the default font driver is ftcrhb
, although use
of the ftcr
driver is still possible, but not recommended. On
MS-Windows, there are currently three available font backends:
gdi
(the core MS-Windows font driver), uniscribe
(font
driver for OTF and TTF fonts with text shaping by the Uniscribe
engine), and harfbuzz
(font driver for OTF and TTF fonts with
HarfBuzz text shaping) (see Windows Fonts in The GNU Emacs
Manual). The harfbuzz
driver is similarly recommended. On
Haiku, there can be several font drivers (see Haiku Fonts in The GNU Emacs Manual).
On other systems, there is only one available font backend, so it does not make sense to modify this frame parameter.
background-mode
¶This parameter is either dark
or light
, according
to whether the background color is a light one or a dark one.
tty-color-mode
¶This parameter overrides the terminal’s color support as given by the
system’s terminal capabilities database in that this parameter’s value
specifies the color mode to use on a text terminal. The value can be
either a symbol or a number. A number specifies the number of colors
to use (and, indirectly, what commands to issue to produce each
color). For example, (tty-color-mode . 8)
specifies use of the
ANSI escape sequences for 8 standard text colors. A value of −1 turns
off color support.
If the parameter’s value is a symbol, it specifies a number through
the value of tty-color-mode-alist
, and the associated number is
used instead.
screen-gamma
¶If this is a number, Emacs performs gamma correction which adjusts the brightness of all colors. The value should be the screen gamma of your display.
Usual PC monitors have a screen gamma of 2.2, so color values in
Emacs, and in X windows generally, are calibrated to display properly
on a monitor with that gamma value. If you specify 2.2 for
screen-gamma
, that means no correction is needed. Other values
request correction, designed to make the corrected colors appear on
your screen the way they would have appeared without correction on an
ordinary monitor with a gamma value of 2.2.
If your monitor displays colors too light, you should specify a
screen-gamma
value smaller than 2.2. This requests correction
that makes colors darker. A screen gamma value of 1.5 may give good
results for LCD color displays.
alpha
¶This parameter specifies the opacity of the frame, on graphical
displays that support variable opacity. It should be an integer
between 0 and 100, where 0 means completely transparent and 100 means
completely opaque. It can also have a nil
value, which tells
Emacs not to set the frame opacity (leaving it to the window manager).
To prevent the frame from disappearing completely from view, the
variable frame-alpha-lower-limit
defines a lower opacity limit.
If the value of the frame parameter is less than the value of this
variable, Emacs uses the latter. By default,
frame-alpha-lower-limit
is 20.
The alpha
frame parameter can also be a cons cell
(active . inactive)
, where active is the
opacity of the frame when it is selected, and inactive is the
opacity when it is not selected.
Some window systems do not support the alpha
parameter for child
frames (see Child Frames).
alpha-background
¶Sets the background transparency of the frame. Unlike the alpha
frame parameter, this only controls the transparency of the background
while keeping foreground elements such as text fully opaque. It
should be an integer between 0 and 100, where 0 means
completely transparent and 100 means completely opaque (default).
The following frame parameters are semi-obsolete in that they are automatically equivalent to particular face attributes of particular faces (see Standard Faces in The Emacs Manual):
font
¶The name of the font for displaying text in the frame. This is a
string, either a valid font name for your system or the name of an Emacs
fontset (see Fontsets). It is equivalent to the font
attribute of the default
face.
foreground-color
¶The color to use for characters. It is equivalent to
the :foreground
attribute of the default
face.
background-color
¶The color to use for the background of characters. It is equivalent to
the :background
attribute of the default
face.
mouse-color
¶The color for the mouse pointer. It is equivalent to the :background
attribute of the mouse
face.
cursor-color
¶The color for the cursor that shows point. It is equivalent to the
:background
attribute of the cursor
face.
border-color
¶The color for the border of the frame. It is equivalent to the
:background
attribute of the border
face.
scroll-bar-foreground
¶If non-nil
, the color for the foreground of scroll bars. It is
equivalent to the :foreground
attribute of the
scroll-bar
face.
scroll-bar-background
¶If non-nil
, the color for the background of scroll bars. It is
equivalent to the :background
attribute of the
scroll-bar
face.
Here’s how to examine the data in an X-style window geometry specification:
The function x-parse-geometry
converts a standard X window
geometry string to an alist that you can use as part of the argument to
make-frame
.
The alist describes which parameters were specified in geom, and
gives the values specified for them. Each element looks like
(parameter . value)
. The possible parameter
values are left
, top
, width
, and height
.
For the size parameters, the value must be an integer. The position
parameter names left
and top
are not totally accurate,
because some values indicate the position of the right or bottom edges
instead. The value possibilities for the position parameters are:
an integer, a list (+ pos)
, or a list (- pos)
;
as previously described (see Position Parameters).
Here is an example:
(x-parse-geometry "35x70+0-0") ⇒ ((height . 70) (width . 35) (top - 0) (left . 0))
Each terminal has a list of associated parameters. These terminal parameters are mostly a convenient way of storage for terminal-local variables, but some terminal parameters have a special meaning.
This section describes functions to read and change the parameter values
of a terminal. They all accept as their argument either a terminal or
a frame; the latter means use that frame’s terminal. An argument of
nil
means the selected frame’s terminal.
This function returns an alist listing all the parameters of terminal and their values.
This function returns the value of the parameter parameter (a
symbol) of terminal. If terminal has no setting for
parameter, this function returns nil
.
This function sets the parameter parameter of terminal to the specified value, and returns the previous value of that parameter.
Here’s a list of a few terminal parameters that have a special meaning:
background-mode
The classification of the terminal’s background color, either
light
or dark
.
normal-erase-is-backspace
Value is either 1 or 0, depending on whether
normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
is turned on or off on this
terminal. See DEL Does Not Delete in The Emacs Manual.
terminal-initted
After the terminal is initialized, this is set to the terminal-specific initialization function.
tty-mode-set-strings
When present, a list of strings containing escape sequences that Emacs
will output while configuring a tty for rendering. Emacs emits these
strings only when configuring a terminal: if you want to enable a mode
on a terminal that is already active (for example, while in
tty-setup-hook
), explicitly output the necessary escape
sequence using send-string-to-terminal
in addition to adding
the sequence to tty-mode-set-strings
.
tty-mode-reset-strings
When present, a list of strings that undo the effects of the strings
in tty-mode-set-strings
. Emacs emits these strings when
exiting, deleting a terminal, or suspending itself.
Every frame has a name
parameter; this serves as the default
for the frame title which window systems typically display at the top of
the frame. You can specify a name explicitly by setting the name
frame property.
Normally you don’t specify the name explicitly, and Emacs computes the
frame name automatically based on a template stored in the variable
frame-title-format
. Emacs recomputes the name each time the
frame is redisplayed.
This variable specifies how to compute a name for a frame when you
have not explicitly specified one (via the frame’s parameters;
see Basic Parameters). The variable’s value is actually a mode
line construct, just like mode-line-format
, except that the
‘%c’, ‘%C’, and ‘%l’ constructs are ignored.
See The Data Structure of the Mode Line.
This variable specifies how to compute the name for an iconified frame
when you have not explicitly specified the frame’s name via the
frame’s parameters. The resulting title appears in the frame’s icon
itself. If the value is a string, is should be a mode line construct
like that of frame-title-format
. The value can also be
t
, which means to use frame-title-format
instead; this
avoids problems with some window managers and desktop environments,
where a change in a frame’s title (when a frame is iconified) is
interpreted as a request to raise the frame and/or give it input
focus. It is also useful if you want the frame’s title to be the same
no matter if the frame is iconified or not. The default value is a
string identical to the default value of frame-title-format
.
This variable is set automatically by Emacs. Its value is t
when
there are two or more frames (not counting minibuffer-only frames or
invisible frames). The default value of frame-title-format
uses
multiple-frames
so as to put the buffer name in the frame title
only when there is more than one frame.
The value of this variable is not guaranteed to be accurate except
while processing frame-title-format
or
icon-title-format
.
A live frame is one that has not been deleted. When a frame is deleted, it is removed from its terminal display, although it may continue to exist as a Lisp object until there are no more references to it.
This function deletes the frame frame. The argument frame must specify a live frame (see below) and defaults to the selected frame.
It first deletes any child frame of frame (see Child Frames)
and any frame whose delete-before
frame parameter (see Frame Interaction Parameters) specifies frame. All such deletions are
performed recursively; so this step makes sure that no other frames with
frame as their ancestor will exist. Then, unless frame
specifies a tooltip, this function runs the hook
delete-frame-functions
(each function getting one argument,
frame) before actually killing the frame. After actually killing
the frame and removing the frame from the frame list, delete-frame
runs after-delete-frame-functions
.
Note that a frame cannot be deleted as long as its minibuffer serves as
surrogate minibuffer for another frame (see Minibuffers and Frames).
Normally, you cannot delete a frame if all other frames are invisible,
but if force is non-nil
, then you are allowed to do so.
This function returns non-nil
if the frame frame has not
been deleted. The possible non-nil
return values are like those
of framep
. See Frames.
Some window managers provide a command to delete a window. These work
by sending a special message to the program that operates the window.
When Emacs gets one of these commands, it generates a
delete-frame
event, whose normal definition is a command that
calls the function delete-frame
. See Miscellaneous System Events.
This command deletes all frames on frame’s terminal, except
frame. If frame uses another frame’s minibuffer, that
minibuffer frame is left untouched. The argument frame must
specify a live frame and defaults to the selected frame. Internally,
this command works by calling delete-frame
with force
nil
for all frames that shall be deleted.
This function does not delete any of frame’s child frames (see Child Frames). If frame is a child frame, it deletes frame’s siblings only.
With the prefix argument iconify, the frames are iconified rather than deleted.
This function returns a list of all the live frames, i.e., those that
have not been deleted. It is analogous to buffer-list
for
buffers, and includes frames on all terminals. The list that you get
is newly created, so modifying the list doesn’t have any effect on the
internals of Emacs.
This function returns a list of just the currently visible frames. See Visibility of Frames. Frames on text terminals always count as visible, even though only the selected one is actually displayed.
This function returns a list of Emacs’ frames, in Z (stacking) order
(see Raising, Lowering and Restacking Frames). The optional argument display
specifies which display to poll. display should be either a frame
or a display name (a string). If omitted or nil
, that stands for
the selected frame’s display. It returns nil
if display
contains no Emacs frame.
Frames are listed from topmost (first) to bottommost (last). As a
special case, if display is non-nil
and specifies a live
frame, it returns the child frames of that frame in Z (stacking) order.
This function is not meaningful on text terminals.
This function lets you cycle conveniently through all the frames on a
specific terminal from an arbitrary starting point. It returns the
frame following frame, in the list of all live frames, on
frame’s terminal. The argument frame must specify a live
frame and defaults to the selected frame. It never returns a frame
whose no-other-frame
parameter (see Frame Interaction Parameters) is non-nil
.
The second argument, minibuf, says which frames to consider when deciding what the next frame should be:
nil
Consider all frames except minibuffer-only frames.
visible
Consider only visible frames.
Consider only visible or iconified frames.
Consider only the frames using that particular window as their minibuffer window.
Consider all frames.
Like next-frame
, but cycles through all frames in the opposite
direction.
See also next-window
and previous-window
, in Cyclic Ordering of Windows.
Some Lisp programs need to find one or more frames that satisfy a
given criteria. The function filtered-frame-list
is provided for
this purpose.
This function returns the list of all the live frames which satisfy the
specified predicate. The argument predicate must be a
function of one argument, a frame to be tested against the filtering
criteria, and should return non-nil
if the frame satisfies the
criteria.
Normally, each frame has its own minibuffer window at the bottom, which
is used whenever that frame is selected. You can get that window with
the function minibuffer-window
(see Minibuffer Windows).
However, you can also create a frame without a minibuffer. Such a frame
must use the minibuffer window of some other frame. That other frame
will serve as surrogate minibuffer frame for this frame and cannot
be deleted via delete-frame
(see Deleting Frames) as long as
this frame is live.
When you create the frame, you can explicitly specify its minibuffer
window (in some other frame) with the minibuffer
frame parameter
(see Buffer Parameters). If you don’t, then the minibuffer is found
in the frame which is the value of the variable
default-minibuffer-frame
. Its value should be a frame that does
have a minibuffer.
If you use a minibuffer-only frame, you might want that frame to raise
when you enter the minibuffer. If so, set the variable
minibuffer-auto-raise
to t
. See Raising, Lowering and Restacking Frames.
This variable specifies the frame to use for the minibuffer window, by default. It does not affect existing frames. It is always local to the current terminal and cannot be buffer-local. See Multiple Terminals.
At any time, one frame in Emacs is the selected frame. The selected window (see Selecting Windows) always resides on the selected frame.
When Emacs displays its frames on several terminals (see Multiple Terminals), each terminal has its own selected frame. But only one of these is the selected frame: it’s the frame that belongs to the terminal from which the most recent input came. That is, when Emacs runs a command that came from a certain terminal, the selected frame is the one of that terminal. Since Emacs runs only a single command at any given time, it needs to consider only one selected frame at a time; this frame is what we call the selected frame in this manual. The display on which the selected frame is shown is the selected frame’s display.
This function returns the selected frame.
Some window systems and window managers direct keyboard input to the
window object that the mouse is in; others require explicit clicks or
commands to shift the focus to various window objects. Either
way, Emacs automatically keeps track of which frames have focus. To
explicitly switch to a different frame from a Lisp function, call
select-frame-set-input-focus
.
The plural “frames” in the previous paragraph is deliberate: while Emacs itself has only one selected frame, Emacs can have frames on many different terminals (recall that a connection to a window system counts as a terminal), and each terminal has its own idea of which frame has input focus. Under the X Window System, where user input is organized into individual “seats” of input, each seat in turn can have its own specific input focus. When you set the input focus to a frame, you set the focus for that frame’s terminal on the last seat which interacted with Emacs, but frames on other terminals and seats may still remain focused.
If the input focus is set before any user interaction has occurred on the specified terminal, then the X server picks a random seat (normally the one with the lowest number) and sets the input focus there.
Lisp programs can switch frames temporarily by calling the function
select-frame
. This does not alter the window system’s concept
of focus; rather, it escapes from the window manager’s control until
that control is somehow reasserted.
When using a text terminal, only one frame can be displayed at a time
on the terminal, so after a call to select-frame
, the next
redisplay actually displays the newly selected frame. This frame
remains selected until a subsequent call to select-frame
. Each
frame on a text terminal has a number which appears in the mode line
before the buffer name (see Variables Used in the Mode Line).
This function selects frame, raises it (should it happen to be
obscured by other frames) and tries to give it the window system’s
focus. On a text terminal, the next redisplay displays the new frame
on the entire terminal screen. The optional argument norecord
has the same meaning as for select-frame
(see below).
The return value of this function is not significant.
Ideally, the function described next should focus a frame without also raising it above other frames. Unfortunately, many window-systems or window managers may refuse to comply.
This function gives frame the focus of the X server without
necessarily raising it. frame nil
means use the selected
frame. Under X, the optional argument noactivate, if
non-nil
, means to avoid making frame’s window-system window
the “active” window which should insist a bit more on avoiding to
raise frame above other frames.
On MS-Windows the noactivate argument has no effect. However, if frame is a child frame (see Child Frames), this function usually focuses frame without raising it above other child frames.
If there is no window system support, this function does nothing.
This function selects frame frame, temporarily disregarding the focus of the X server if any. The selection of frame lasts until the next time the user does something to select a different frame, or until the next time this function is called. (If you are using a window system, the previously selected frame may be restored as the selected frame after return to the command loop, because it still may have the window system’s input focus.)
The specified frame becomes the selected frame, and its terminal
becomes the selected terminal. This function then calls
select-window
as a subroutine, passing the window selected
within frame as its first argument and norecord as its
second argument (hence, if norecord is non-nil
, this
avoids changing the order of recently selected windows and the buffer
list). See Selecting Windows.
This function returns frame, or nil
if frame has
been deleted.
In general, you should never use select-frame
in a way that
could switch to a different terminal without switching back when
you’re done.
Emacs cooperates with the window system by arranging to select frames
as the server and window manager request. When a window system
informs Emacs that one of its frames has been selected, Emacs
internally generates a focus-in event. When an Emacs frame is
displayed on a text-terminal emulator, such as xterm
, which
supports reporting of focus-change notification, the focus-in and
focus-out events are available even for text-mode frames. Focus
events are normally handled by handle-focus-in
.
This function handles focus-in events from window systems and
terminals that support explicit focus notifications. It updates the
per-frame focus flags that frame-focus-state
queries and calls
after-focus-change-function
. In addition, it generates a
switch-frame
event in order to switch the Emacs notion of the
selected frame to the frame most recently focused in some terminal.
It’s important to note that this switching of the Emacs selected frame
to the most recently focused frame does not mean that other frames do
not continue to have the focus in their respective terminals. Do not
invoke this function yourself: instead, attach logic to
after-focus-change-function
.
This function handles a switch-frame event, which Emacs generates for itself upon focus notification or under various other circumstances involving an input event arriving at a different frame from the last event. Do not invoke this function yourself.
This function redirects focus from frame to focus-frame.
This means that focus-frame will receive subsequent keystrokes and
events intended for frame. After such an event, the value of
last-event-frame
will be focus-frame. Also, switch-frame
events specifying frame will instead select focus-frame.
If focus-frame is omitted or nil
, that cancels any existing
redirection for frame, which therefore once again receives its own
events.
One use of focus redirection is for frames that don’t have minibuffers. These frames use minibuffers on other frames. Activating a minibuffer on another frame redirects focus to that frame. This puts the focus on the minibuffer’s frame, where it belongs, even though the mouse remains in the frame that activated the minibuffer.
Selecting a frame can also change focus redirections. Selecting frame
bar
, when foo
had been selected, changes any redirections
pointing to foo
so that they point to bar
instead. This
allows focus redirection to work properly when the user switches from
one frame to another using select-window
.
This means that a frame whose focus is redirected to itself is treated
differently from a frame whose focus is not redirected.
select-frame
affects the former but not the latter.
The redirection lasts until redirect-frame-focus
is called to
change it.
This function retrieves the last known focus state of frame.
It returns nil
if the frame is known not to be focused,
t
if the frame is known to be focused, or unknown
if
Emacs does not know the focus state of the frame. (You may see this
last state in TTY frames running on terminals that do not support
explicit focus notifications.)
This function is called with no arguments when Emacs notices that a frame may have gotten or lost focus. Focus events are delivered asynchronously, and may not be delivered in the expected order, so code that wants to do something depending on the state of focused frames have go through all the frames and check.
For instance, here’s a simple example function that sets the background color based on whether the frame has focus or not:
(add-function :after after-focus-change-function #'my-change-background) (defun my-change-background () (dolist (frame (frame-list)) (pcase (frame-focus-state frame) (`t (set-face-background 'default "black" frame)) (`nil (set-face-background 'default "#404040" frame)))))
Multiple frames may appear to have input focus simultaneously due to focus event delivery differences, the presence of multiple Emacs terminals, and other factors, and code should be robust in the face of this situation.
Depending on window system, focus events may also be delivered repeatedly and with different focus states before settling to the expected values. Code relying on focus notifications should “debounce” any user-visible updates arising from focus changes, perhaps by deferring work until redisplay.
This function may be called in arbitrary contexts, including from
inside read-event
, so take the same care as you might when
writing a process filter.
This option informs Emacs whether and how the window manager transfers focus when you move the mouse pointer into a frame. It can have three meaningful values:
nil
The default value nil
should be used when your window manager
follows a “click-to-focus” policy where you have to click the mouse
inside of a frame in order for that frame to gain focus.
t
The value t
should be used when your window manager has the focus
automatically follow the position of the mouse pointer but a frame that
gains focus is not raised automatically and may even remain occluded by
other window-system windows.
auto-raise
The value auto-raise
should be used when your window manager has
the focus automatically follow the position of the mouse pointer and a
frame that gains focus is raised automatically.
If this option is non-nil
, Emacs moves the mouse pointer to the
frame selected by select-frame-set-input-focus
. That function is
used by a number of commands like, for example, other-frame
and
pop-to-buffer
.
The distinction between the values t
and auto-raise
is not
needed for “normal” frames because the window manager usually takes
care of raising them. It is useful to automatically raise child frames
via mouse-autoselect-window
(see Mouse Window Auto-selection).
Note that this option does not distinguish “sloppy” focus (where the frame that previously had focus retains focus as long as the mouse pointer does not move into another window-system window) from “strict” focus (where a frame immediately loses focus when it’s left by the mouse pointer). Neither does it recognize whether your window manager supports delayed focusing or auto-raising where you can explicitly specify the time until a new frame gets focus or is auto-raised.
You can supply a “focus follows mouse” policy for individual Emacs
windows by customizing the variable mouse-autoselect-window
(see Mouse Window Auto-selection).
A frame on a graphical display may be visible, invisible, or iconified. If it is visible, its contents are displayed in the usual manner. If it is iconified, its contents are not displayed, but there is a little icon somewhere to bring the frame back into view (some window managers refer to this state as minimized rather than iconified, but from Emacs’ point of view they are the same thing). If a frame is invisible, it is not displayed at all.
The concept of visibility is strongly related to that of (un-)mapped
frames. A frame (or, more precisely, its window-system window) is and
becomes mapped when it is displayed for the first time and
whenever it changes its state of visibility from iconified
or
invisible
to visible
. Conversely, a frame is and becomes
unmapped whenever it changes its status from visible
to
iconified
or invisible
.
Visibility is meaningless on text terminals, since only the selected frame is actually displayed in any case.
This function returns the visibility status of frame frame. The
value is t
if frame is visible, nil
if it is
invisible, and icon
if it is iconified.
On a text terminal, all frames are considered visible for the purposes of this function, even though only one frame is displayed. See Raising, Lowering and Restacking Frames.
This function iconifies frame frame. If you omit frame, it iconifies the selected frame. This usually makes all child frames of frame (and their descendants) invisible (see Child Frames).
This function makes frame frame visible. If you omit frame,
it makes the selected frame visible. This does not raise the frame, but
you can do that with raise-frame
if you wish (see Raising, Lowering and Restacking Frames).
Making a frame visible usually makes all its child frames (and their descendants) visible as well (see Child Frames).
This function makes frame frame invisible. If you omit frame, it makes the selected frame invisible. Usually, this makes all child frames of frame (and their descendants) invisible too (see Child Frames).
Unless force is non-nil
, this function refuses to make
frame invisible if all other frames are invisible.
The visibility status of a frame is also available as a frame parameter. You can read or change it as such. See Window Management Parameters. The user can also iconify and deiconify frames with the window manager. This happens below the level at which Emacs can exert any control, but Emacs does provide events that you can use to keep track of such changes. See Miscellaneous System Events.
This function returns non-nil
if frame is currently
being rendered with double buffering. frame defaults to the
selected frame.
Most window systems use a desktop metaphor. Part of this metaphor is the idea that system-level windows (representing, e.g., Emacs frames) are stacked in a notional third dimension perpendicular to the screen surface. The order induced by stacking is total and usually referred to as stacking (or Z-) order. Where the areas of two windows overlap, the one higher up in that order will (partially) cover the one underneath.
You can raise a frame to the top of that order or lower a
frame to its bottom by using the functions raise-frame
and
lower-frame
. You can restack a frame directly above or
below another frame using the function frame-restack
.
Note that all functions described below will respect the adherence of
frames (and all other window-system windows) to their respective z-group
(see Position Parameters). For example, you usually cannot lower a
frame below that of the desktop window and you cannot raise a frame
whose z-group
parameter is nil
above the window-system’s
taskbar or tooltip window.
This function raises frame frame (default, the selected frame) above all other frames belonging to the same or a lower z-group as frame. If frame is invisible or iconified, this makes it visible. If frame is a child frame (see Child Frames), this raises frame above all other child frames of its parent.
This function lowers frame frame (default, the selected frame) below all other frames belonging to the same or a higher z-group as frame. If frame is a child frame (see Child Frames), this lowers frame below all other child frames of its parent.
This function restacks frame1 below frame2. This implies
that if both frames are visible and their display areas overlap,
frame2 will (partially) obscure frame1. If the optional
third argument above is non-nil
, this function restacks
frame1 above frame2. This means that if both frames are
visible and their display areas overlap, frame1 will (partially)
obscure frame2.
Technically, this function may be thought of as an atomic action performed in two steps: The first step removes frame1’s window-system window from the display. The second step reinserts frame1’s window into the display below (above if above is true) that of frame2. Hence the position of frame2 in its display’s Z (stacking) order relative to all other frames excluding frame1 remains unaltered.
Some window managers may refuse to restack windows.
Note that the effect of restacking will only hold as long as neither of
the involved frames is iconified or made invisible. You can use the
z-group
(see Position Parameters) frame parameter to add a
frame to a group of frames permanently shown above or below other
frames. As long as a frame belongs to one of these groups, restacking
it will only affect its relative stacking position within that group.
The effect of restacking frames belonging to different z-groups is
undefined. You can list frames in their current stacking order with the
function frame-list-z-order
(see Finding All Frames).
If this is non-nil
, activation of the minibuffer raises the frame
that the minibuffer window is in.
On window systems, you can also enable auto-raising (on frame selection) or auto-lowering (on frame deselection) using frame parameters. See Window Management Parameters.
The concept of raising and lowering frames also applies to text terminal frames. On each text terminal, only the top frame is displayed at any one time.
This function returns the top frame on terminal. terminal
should be a terminal object, a frame (meaning that frame’s terminal),
or nil
(meaning the selected frame’s terminal). If it does not
refer to a text terminal, the return value is nil
.
A frame configuration records the current arrangement of frames, all their properties, and the window configuration of each one. (See Window Configurations.)
This function returns a frame configuration list that describes the current arrangement of frames and their contents.
This function restores the state of frames described in configuration. However, this function does not restore deleted frames.
Ordinarily, this function deletes all existing frames not listed in
configuration. But if nodelete is non-nil
, the
unwanted frames are iconified instead.
Child frames are objects halfway between windows (see Windows) and “normal” frames. Like windows, they are attached to an owning frame. Unlike windows, they may overlap each other—changing the size or position of one child frame does not change the size or position of any of its sibling child frames.
By design, operations to make or modify child frames are implemented with the help of frame parameters (see Frame Parameters) without any specialized functions or customizable variables. Note that child frames are meaningful on graphical terminals only.
To create a new child frame or to convert a normal frame into a child
frame, set that frame’s parent-frame
parameter (see Frame Interaction Parameters) to that of an already existing frame. The
frame specified by that parameter will then be the frame’s parent frame
as long as the parameter is not changed or reset. Technically, this
makes the child frame’s window-system window a child window of the
parent frame’s window-system window.
The parent-frame
parameter can be changed at any time.
Setting it to another frame reparents the child frame. Setting
it to another child frame makes the frame a nested child frame.
Setting it to nil
restores the frame’s status as a top-level
frame—a frame whose window-system window is a child of its display’s
root window.22
Since child frames can be arbitrarily nested, a frame can be both a child and a parent frame. Also, the relative roles of child and parent frame may be reversed at any time (though it’s usually a good idea to keep the size of a child frame sufficiently smaller than that of its parent). An error will be signaled for the attempt to make a frame an ancestor of itself.
Most window-systems clip a child frame at the native edges
(see Frame Geometry) of its parent frame—everything outside these
edges is usually invisible. A child frame’s left
and top
parameters specify a position relative to the top-left corner of its
parent’s native frame. When the parent frame is resized, this position
remains conceptually unaltered.
NS builds do not clip child frames at the parent frame’s edges, allowing them to be positioned so they do not obscure the parent frame while still being visible themselves.
Usually, moving a parent frame moves along all its child frames and
their descendants as well, keeping their relative positions unaltered.
Note that the hook move-frame-functions
(see Frame Position)
is run for a child frame only when the position of the child frame
relative to its parent frame changes.
When a parent frame is resized, its child frames conceptually retain
their previous sizes and their positions relative to the left upper
corner of the parent. This means that a child frame may become
(partially) invisible when its parent frame shrinks. The parameter
keep-ratio
(see Frame Interaction Parameters) can be used to
resize and reposition a child frame proportionally whenever its parent
frame is resized. This may avoid obscuring parts of a frame when its
parent frame is shrunk.
A visible child frame always appears on top of its parent frame thus obscuring parts of it, except on NS builds where it may be positioned beneath the parent. This is comparable to the window-system window of a top-level frame which also always appears on top of its parent window—the desktop’s root window. When a parent frame is iconified or made invisible (see Visibility of Frames), its child frames are made invisible. When a parent frame is deiconified or made visible, its child frames are made visible.
When a parent frame is about to be deleted (see Deleting Frames), its child frames are recursively deleted before it. There is one exception to this rule: When the child frame serves as a surrogate minibuffer frame (see Minibuffers and Frames) for another frame, it is retained until the parent frame has been deleted. If, at this time, no remaining frame uses the child frame as its minibuffer frame, Emacs will try to delete the child frame too. If that deletion fails for whatever reason, the child frame is made a top-level frame.
Whether a child frame can have a menu or tool bar is window-system or window manager dependent. Most window-systems explicitly disallow menu bars for child frames. It seems advisable to disable both, menu and tool bars, via the frame’s initial parameters settings.
Usually, child frames do not exhibit window manager decorations like a title bar or external borders (see Frame Geometry). When the child frame does not show a menu or tool bar, any other of the frame’s borders (see Layout Parameters) can be used instead of the external borders.
In particular, under X (but not when building with GTK+), the frame’s
outer border can be used. On MS-Windows, specifying a non-zero outer
border width will show a one-pixel wide external border. Under all
window-systems, the internal border can be used. In either case, it’s
advisable to disable a child frame’s window manager decorations with the
undecorated
frame parameter (see Window Management Parameters).
To resize or move an undecorated child frame with the mouse, special
frame parameters (see Mouse Dragging Parameters) have to be used.
The internal border of a child frame, if present, can be used to resize
the frame with the mouse, provided that frame has a non-nil
drag-internal-border
parameter. If set, the snap-width
parameter indicates the number of pixels where the frame snaps at
the respective edge or corner of its parent frame.
There are two ways to drag an entire child frame with the mouse: The
drag-with-mode-line
parameter, if non-nil
, allows to drag
a frame without minibuffer window (see Minibuffer Windows) via the
mode line area of its bottommost window. The
drag-with-header-line
parameter, if non-nil
, allows to
drag the frame via the header line area of its topmost window.
In order to give a child frame a draggable header or mode line, the
window parameters mode-line-format
and header-line-format
are handy (see Window Parameters). These allow to remove an
unwanted mode line (when drag-with-header-line
is chosen) and to
remove mouse-sensitive areas which might interfere with frame dragging.
When the user drags a frame with a mouse and overshoots, it’s easy
to drag a frame out of the screen area of its parent. Retrieving such
a frame can be hairy once the mouse button has been released. To
prevent such a situation, it is advisable to set the frame’s
top-visible
or bottom-visible
parameter (see Mouse Dragging Parameters).
Set the top-visible
parameter of a child frame to a number
when you intend to allow the user dragging that frame by its header
line. Setting top-visible
to a number inhibits dragging the
top edge of the child frame above the top edge of its parent. Set the
bottom-visible
parameter to a number when you intend to drag
that frame via its mode line; this inhibits dragging the bottom edge
of the child frame beneath the bottom edge of its parent. In either
case, that number also specifies width and height (in pixels) of the
area of the child frame that remains visible during dragging.
When a child frame is used for displaying a buffer via
display-buffer-in-child-frame
(see Action Functions for Buffer Display), the frame’s auto-hide-function
parameter
(see Frame Interaction Parameters) can be set to a function, in
order to appropriately deal with the frame when the window displaying
the buffer shall be quit.
When a child frame is used during minibuffer interaction, for example,
to display completions in a separate window, the minibuffer-exit
parameter (see Frame Interaction Parameters) is useful in order to
deal with the frame when the minibuffer is exited.
The behavior of child frames deviates from that of top-level frames in a number of other ways as well. Here we sketch a few of them:
iconify-frame
on a child frame will try to iconify the top-level
frame corresponding to that child frame instead. To obtain a different
behavior, users may customize the option iconify-child-frame
described below.
z-group
(see Position Parameters)
of a child frame changes only the stacking order of child frames with
the same parent.
mouse-autoselect-window
can
help in this regard (see Mouse Window Auto-selection).
The following two functions can be useful when working with child and parent frames:
This function returns the parent frame of frame. The parent frame of frame is the Emacs frame whose window-system window is the parent window of frame’s window-system window. If such a frame exists, frame is considered a child frame of that frame.
This function returns nil
if frame has no parent frame.
This functions returns non-nil
if ancestor is an ancestor
of descendant. ancestor is an ancestor of descendant
when it is either descendant’s parent frame or it is an ancestor
of descendant’s parent frame. Both, ancestor and
descendant must specify live frames.
Note also the function window-largest-empty-rectangle
(see Coordinates and Windows) which can be used to inscribe a child
frame in the largest empty area of an existing window. This can be
useful to avoid that a child frame obscures any text shown in that
window.
Customizing the following option can be useful to tweak the behavior of
iconify-frame
for child frames.
This option tells Emacs how to proceed when it is asked to iconify a
child frame. If it is nil
, iconify-frame
will do nothing
when invoked on a child frame. If it is iconify-top-level
, Emacs
will try to iconify the top-level frame that is the ancestor of this
child frame instead. If it is make-invisible
, Emacs will try to
make this child frame invisible instead of iconifying it.
Any other value means to try iconifying the child frame. Since such an attempt may not be honored by all window managers and can even lead to making the child frame unresponsive to user actions, the default is to iconify the top level frame instead.
Sometimes it is useful to track the mouse, which means to display something to indicate where the mouse is and move the indicator as the mouse moves. For efficient mouse tracking, you need a way to wait until the mouse actually moves.
The convenient way to track the mouse is to ask for events to represent mouse motion. Then you can wait for motion by waiting for an event. In addition, you can easily handle any other sorts of events that may occur. That is useful, because normally you don’t want to track the mouse forever—only until some other event, such as the release of a button.
This macro executes body, with generation of mouse motion events
enabled. Typically, body would use read-event
to read
the motion events and modify the display accordingly. See Motion Events, for the format of mouse motion events.
The value of track-mouse
is that of the last form in
body. You should design body to return when it sees the
up-event that indicates the release of the button, or whatever kind of
event means it is time to stop tracking. Its value also controls how
mouse events are reported while a mouse button is held down: if it is
dropping
or drag-source
, the motion events are reported
relative to the frame underneath the pointer. If there is no such
frame, the events will be reported relative to the frame the mouse
buttons were first pressed on. In addition, the posn-window
of
the mouse position list will be nil
if the value is
drag-source
. This is useful to determine if a frame is not
directly visible underneath the mouse pointer.
The track-mouse
macro causes Emacs to generate mouse motion
events by binding the variable track-mouse
to a
non-nil
value. If that variable has the special value
dragging
, it additionally instructs the display engine to
refrain from changing the shape of the mouse pointer. This is
desirable in Lisp programs that require mouse dragging across large
portions of Emacs display, which might otherwise cause the mouse
pointer to change its shape according to the display portion it hovers
on (see Pointer Shape). Therefore, Lisp programs that need the
mouse pointer to retain its original shape during dragging should bind
track-mouse
to the value dragging
at the beginning of
their body.
The usual purpose of tracking mouse motion is to indicate on the screen the consequences of pushing or releasing a button at the current position.
In many cases, you can avoid the need to track the mouse by using
the mouse-face
text property (see Properties with Special Meanings).
That works at a much lower level and runs more smoothly than
Lisp-level mouse tracking.
The functions mouse-position
and set-mouse-position
give access to the current position of the mouse.
This function returns a description of the position of the mouse. The
value looks like (frame x . y)
, where x
and y are integers giving the (possibly rounded) position in
multiples of the default character size of frame (see Frame Font) relative to the native position of frame (see Frame Geometry).
If non-nil
, the value of this variable is a function for
mouse-position
to call. mouse-position
calls this
function just before returning, with its normal return value as the
sole argument, and it returns whatever this function returns to it.
This abnormal hook exists for the benefit of packages like xt-mouse.el that need to do mouse handling at the Lisp level.
If non-nil
, TTY menus will call mouse-position-function
as described above. This exists for cases where
mouse-position-function
is not safe to be called by the TTY
menus, such as if it could trigger redisplay.
This function warps the mouse to position x, y in frame frame. The arguments x and y are integers, giving the position in multiples of the default character size of frame (see Frame Font) relative to the native position of frame (see Frame Geometry).
The resulting mouse position is constrained to the native frame of frame. If frame is not visible, this function does nothing. The return value is not significant.
This function is like mouse-position
except that it returns
coordinates in units of pixels rather than units of characters.
This function warps the mouse like set-mouse-position
except that
x and y are in units of pixels rather than units of
characters.
The resulting mouse position is not constrained to the native frame of frame. If frame is not visible, this function does nothing. The return value is not significant.
On a graphical terminal the following two functions allow the absolute position of the mouse cursor to be retrieved and set.
This function returns a cons cell (x . y) of the coordinates of the mouse cursor position in pixels, relative to a position (0, 0) of the selected frame’s display.
This function moves the mouse cursor to the position (x, y). The coordinates x and y are interpreted in pixels relative to a position (0, 0) of the selected frame’s display.
The following function can tell whether the mouse cursor is currently visible on a frame:
This predicate function returns non-nil
if the mouse pointer
displayed on frame is visible; otherwise it returns nil
.
frame omitted or nil
means the selected frame. This is
useful when make-pointer-invisible
is set to t
: it
allows you to know if the pointer has been hidden.
See Mouse Avoidance in The Emacs Manual.
A Lisp program can pop up a menu so that the user can choose an alternative with the mouse. On a text terminal, if the mouse is not available, the user can choose an alternative using the keyboard motion keys—C-n, C-p, or up- and down-arrow keys.
This function displays a pop-up menu and returns an indication of what selection the user makes.
The argument position specifies where on the screen to put the top left corner of the menu. It can be either a mouse button event (which says to put the menu where the user actuated the button) or a list of this form:
((xoffset yoffset) window)
where xoffset and yoffset are coordinates, measured in pixels, counting from the top left corner of window. window may be a window or a frame.
If position is t
, it means to use the current mouse
position (or the top-left corner of the frame if the mouse is not
available on a text terminal). If position is nil
, it
means to precompute the key binding equivalents for the keymaps
specified in menu, without actually displaying or popping up the
menu.
The argument menu says what to display in the menu. It can be a
keymap or a list of keymaps (see Menu Keymaps). In this case, the
return value is the list of events corresponding to the user’s choice.
This list has more than one element if the choice occurred in a
submenu. (Note that x-popup-menu
does not actually execute the
command bound to that sequence of events.) On text terminals and
toolkits that support menu titles, the title is taken from the prompt
string of menu if menu is a keymap, or from the prompt
string of the first keymap in menu if it is a list of keymaps
(see Defining Menus).
Alternatively, menu can have the following form:
(title pane1 pane2...)
where each pane is a list of form
(title item1 item2...)
Each item should be a cons cell, (line . value)
,
where line is a string and value is the value to return if
that line is chosen. Unlike in a menu keymap, a nil
value does not make the menu item non-selectable.
Alternatively, each item can be a string rather than a cons
cell; this makes a non-selectable menu item.
If the user gets rid of the menu without making a valid choice, for
instance by clicking the mouse away from a valid choice or by typing
C-g, then this normally results in a quit and
x-popup-menu
does not return. But if position is a mouse
button event (indicating that the user invoked the menu with the
mouse) then no quit occurs and x-popup-menu
returns nil
.
Usage note: Don’t use x-popup-menu
to display a menu
if you could do the job with a prefix key defined with a menu keymap.
If you use a menu keymap to implement a menu, C-h c and C-h
a can see the individual items in that menu and provide help for them.
If instead you implement the menu by defining a command that calls
x-popup-menu
, the help facilities cannot know what happens inside
that command, so they cannot give any help for the menu’s items.
The menu bar mechanism, which lets you switch between submenus by
moving the mouse, cannot look within the definition of a command to see
that it calls x-popup-menu
. Therefore, if you try to implement a
submenu using x-popup-menu
, it cannot work with the menu bar in
an integrated fashion. This is why all menu bar submenus are
implemented with menu keymaps within the parent menu, and never with
x-popup-menu
. See The Menu Bar.
If you want a menu bar submenu to have contents that vary, you should
still use a menu keymap to implement it. To make the contents vary, add
a hook function to menu-bar-update-hook
to update the contents of
the menu keymap as necessary.
A normal hook run immediately before a pop-up menu is displayed,
either directly by calling x-popup-menu
, or through a menu
keymap. It won’t be called if x-popup-menu
returns for some
other reason without displaying a pop-up menu.
A dialog box is a variant of a pop-up menu—it looks a little
different, it always appears in the center of a frame, and it has just
one level and one or more buttons. The main use of dialog boxes is
for asking questions that the user can answer with “yes”, “no”,
and a few other alternatives. With a single button, they can also
force the user to acknowledge important information. The functions
y-or-n-p
and yes-or-no-p
use dialog boxes instead of the
keyboard, when called from commands invoked by mouse clicks.
This function displays a pop-up dialog box and returns an indication of what selection the user makes. The argument contents specifies the alternatives to offer; it has this format:
(title (string . value)...)
which looks like the list that specifies a single pane for
x-popup-menu
.
The return value is value from the chosen alternative.
As for x-popup-menu
, an element of the list may be just a
string instead of a cons cell (string . value)
.
That makes a box that cannot be selected.
If nil
appears in the list, it separates the left-hand items from
the right-hand items; items that precede the nil
appear on the
left, and items that follow the nil
appear on the right. If you
don’t include a nil
in the list, then approximately half the
items appear on each side.
Dialog boxes always appear in the center of a frame; the argument
position specifies which frame. The possible values are as in
x-popup-menu
, but the precise coordinates or the individual
window don’t matter; only the frame matters.
If header is non-nil
, the frame title for the box is
‘Information’, otherwise it is ‘Question’. The former is used
for message-box
(see message-box). (On text terminals, the
box title is not displayed.)
In some configurations, Emacs cannot display a real dialog box; so instead it displays the same items in a pop-up menu in the center of the frame.
If the user gets rid of the dialog box without making a valid choice,
for instance using the window manager, then this produces a quit and
x-popup-dialog
does not return.
You can specify the mouse pointer style for particular text or
images using the pointer
text property, and for images with the
:pointer
and :map
image properties. The values you can
use in these properties are in the table below. The actual shapes
may vary between systems; the descriptions are examples.
text
nil
The usual mouse pointer style used over text (an “I”-like shape).
arrow
vdrag
modeline
An arrow that points north-west.
hand
A hand that points upwards.
hdrag
A right-left arrow.
nhdrag
An up-down arrow.
hourglass
A rotating ring.
Over void parts of the window (parts that do not correspond to any
of the buffer contents), the mouse pointer usually uses the
arrow
style, but you can specify a different style (one of
those above) by setting void-text-area-pointer
.
This variable specifies the mouse pointer style for void text areas.
These include the areas after the end of a line or below the last line
in the buffer. The default is to use the arrow
(non-text)
pointer style.
When using some window systems, you can specify what the text
pointer style really looks like by setting the variable
x-pointer-shape
.
This variable specifies the pointer shape to use ordinarily in the
Emacs frame, for the text
pointer style.
This variable specifies the pointer shape to use when the mouse is over mouse-sensitive text.
These variables affect newly created frames. They do not normally affect existing frames; however, if you set the mouse color of a frame, that also installs the current value of those two variables. See Font and Color Parameters.
The values you can use, to specify either of these pointer shapes, are defined in the file lisp/term/x-win.el. Use M-x apropos RET x-pointer RET to see a list of them.
In window systems, such as X, data can be transferred between different applications by means of selections. X defines an arbitrary number of selection types, each of which can store its own data; however, only three are commonly used: the clipboard, primary selection, and secondary selection. Other window systems support only the clipboard. See Cut and Paste in The GNU Emacs Manual, for Emacs commands that make use of these selections. This section documents the low-level functions for reading and setting window-system selections.
This function sets a window-system selection. It takes two arguments: a selection type type, and the value to assign to it, data.
type should be a symbol; it is usually one of PRIMARY
,
SECONDARY
or CLIPBOARD
. These are symbols with
upper-case names, in accord with X Window System conventions. If
type is nil
, that stands for PRIMARY
.
If data is nil
, it means to clear out the selection.
Otherwise, data may be a string, a symbol, an integer, an
overlay, or a cons of two markers pointing to the same buffer. An
overlay or a pair of markers stands for text in the overlay or between
the markers. The argument data may also be a vector of valid
non-vector selection values.
If data is a string, then its text properties can specify values
used for individual data types. For example, if data has a
property named text/uri-list
, then a call to
gui-get-selection
with the data type text/uri-list
will
result in the value of that property being used instead of data
itself.
This function returns data.
This function accesses selections set up by Emacs or by other
programs. It takes two optional arguments, type and
data-type. The default for type, the selection type, is
PRIMARY
.
The data-type argument specifies the form of data conversion to
use, to convert the raw data obtained from another program into Lisp
data. Meaningful values include TEXT
, STRING
,
UTF8_STRING
, TARGETS
, LENGTH
, DELETE
,
FILE_NAME
, CHARACTER_POSITION
, NAME
,
LINE_NUMBER
, COLUMN_NUMBER
, OWNER_OS
,
HOST_NAME
, USER
, CLASS
, ATOM
, and
INTEGER
. (These are symbols with upper-case names in accord
with X conventions.) The default for data-type is
STRING
. Window systems other than X usually support only a
small subset of these types, in addition to STRING
.
This variable specifies the coding system to use when reading and
writing selections or the clipboard. See Coding Systems. The default is compound-text-with-extensions
, which
converts to the text representation that X11 normally uses.
When Emacs runs on MS-Windows, it does not implement X selections in
general, but it does support the clipboard. gui-get-selection
and gui-set-selection
on MS-Windows support the text data type
only; if the clipboard holds other types of data, Emacs treats the
clipboard as empty. The supported data type is STRING
.
For backward compatibility, there are obsolete aliases
x-get-selection
and x-set-selection
, which were the
names of gui-get-selection
and gui-set-selection
before
Emacs 25.1.
If you choose, for instance, “Copy Image” in a web browser, that
image is put onto the clipboard, and Emacs can access it via
gui-get-selection
. But in general, inserting image data into
an arbitrary buffer isn’t very useful—you can’t really do much with
it by default.
So Emacs has a system to let modes register handlers for these “complicated” selections.
types can be a MIME media type symbol, a regexp to match these, or a list of these symbols and regexps. For instance:
(yank-media-handler 'text/html #'my-html-handler) (yank-media-handler "image/.*" #'my-image-handler)
A mode can register as many handlers as required.
The handler function is called with two parameters: The MIME media type symbol and the data (as a string). The handler should then insert the object into the buffer, or save it, or do whatever is appropriate for the mode.
The yank-media
command will consult the registered handlers in
the current buffer, compare that with the available media types on the
clipboard, and then pass on the matching selection to the handler (if
any). If there’s more than one matching selection, the user is
queried first.
The yank-media-types
command can be used to explore the
clipboard/primary selection. It lists all the media types that are
currently available, and can be handy when creating handlers—to see
what data is actually available. Some applications put a surprising
amount of different data types on the clipboard.
When the user drops something from another application over Emacs,
Emacs will try to insert any text and open any URL that was dropped.
If text was dropped, then it will always be inserted at the location
of the mouse pointer where the drop happened, or saved in the kill
ring if insertion failed, which could happen if the buffer was
read-only. If a URL was dropped instead, then Emacs will first try to
call an appropriate handler function by matching the URL against
regexps defined in the variable dnd-protocol-alist
, and then
against those defined in the variables browse-url-handlers
and
browse-url-default-handlers
. Should no suitable handler be
located, Emacs will fall back to inserting the URL as plain text.
This variable is a list of cons cells of the form
(pattern . action)
. pattern is a regexp
that URLs are matched against after being dropped. action is a
function that is called with two arguments, should a URL being dropped
match pattern: the URL being dropped, and the action being
performed for the drop, which is one of the symbols copy
,
move
, link
, private
or ask
.
If action is private, then it means the program that
initiated the drop wants Emacs to perform an unspecified action with
the URL; a reasonable action to perform in that case is to open the URL
or copy its contents into the current buffer. Otherwise, action
has the same meaning as the action argument to
dnd-begin-file-drag
.
Emacs implements receiving text and URLs individually for each window system, and does not by default support receiving other kinds of data as drops. To support receiving other kinds of data, use the X-specific interface described below.
When a user drags something from another application over Emacs
under the X Window System, that other application expects Emacs to
tell it if Emacs understands the data being dragged. The function in
the variable x-dnd-test-function
is called by Emacs to
determine what to reply to any such inquiry. The default value is
x-dnd-default-test-function
, which accepts drops if the type of
the data to be dropped is present in x-dnd-known-types
.
Changing the variables x-dnd-test-function
and
x-dnd-known-types
can make Emacs accept or reject drops based
on some other criteria.
If you want to change the way Emacs receives drops of different data
types, or you want to enable it to understand a new type, change the variable
x-dnd-types-alist
. Doing so correctly requires detailed
knowledge of what data types other applications use for drag and drop.
These data types are typically implemented as special data types
that can be obtained from an X selection provided by the other
application. In most cases, they are either the same data types that
are typically accepted by gui-set-selection
, or MIME types,
depending on the specific drag-and-drop protocol being used. For
example, the data type used for plain text may be either
"STRING"
or "text/plain"
.
When Emacs runs on X window system, it supports the X Direct Save
(XDS) protocol, which allows users to save a file by
dragging and dropping it onto an Emacs window, such as a Dired window.
To comply with the unique requirements of XDS, these
drag-and-drop requests are processed specially: instead of being
handled according to x-dnd-types-alist
, they are handled by the
direct-save function that is the value of the variable
x-dnd-direct-save-function
. The value should be a function of
two arguments, need-name and filename. The XDS
protocol uses a two-step procedure for dragging files:
nil
, and the second argument filename
set to the basename of the file to be saved. It should return the
fully-expanded absolute file name under which to save the file. For
example, if a file is dragged to a Dired window, the natural directory
for the file is the directory of the file shown at location of the
drop. If saving the file is not possible for some reason, the
function should return nil
, which will cancel the drag-and-drop
operation.
nil
and the second argument filename set to the full
absolute name of the saved file. The function is then expected to do
whatever is needed given the fact that file was saved. For example,
Dired should update the directory on display by showing the new file
there.
The default value of x-dnd-direct-save-function
is
x-dnd-save-direct
.
When called with the need-name argument non-nil
, this
function prompts the user for the absolute file name under which it
should be saved. If the specified file already exists, it
additionally asks the user whether to overwrite it, and returns the
absolute file name only if the user confirms the overwriting.
When called with the need-name argument nil
, it reverts
the Dired listing if the current buffer is in Dired mode or one of its
descendants, and otherwise visits the file by calling find-file
(see Functions for Visiting Files).
This function works like x-dnd-save-direct
, but when called
with its need-name argument non-nil
, it doesn’t prompt
the user for the full name of the file to be saved; instead, it
returns its argument filename expanded against the current
buffer’s default directory (see Functions that Expand Filenames). (It still
asks for confirmation if a file by that name already exists in the
default directory.)
On capable window systems, Emacs also supports dragging contents from its frames to windows of other applications.
This function begins dragging text from frame to another program (known as the drop target), and returns the result of drag-and-drop operation when the text is dropped or the drag-and-drop operation is canceled. text is the text that will be inserted by the drop target.
action must be one of the symbols copy
or move
,
where copy
means that text should be inserted by the drop
target, and move
means the same as copy
, but in addition
the caller may have to delete text from its source as explained
below.
frame is the frame where the mouse is currently held down, or
nil
, which means to use the selected frame. This function may
return immediately if no mouse buttons are held down, so it should be
only called immediately after a down-mouse-1
or similar event
(see Mouse Events), with frame set to the frame where that
event was generated (see Click Events).
allow-same-frame specifies whether or not drops on top of frame itself are to be ignored.
The return value specifies the action that the drop target actually performed, and optionally what the caller should do. It can be one of the following symbols:
copy
The drop target inserted the dropped text.
move
The drop target inserted the dropped text, but in addition the caller should delete text from wherever it originated, such as its buffer.
private
The drop target performed some other unspecified action.
nil
The drag-and-drop operation was canceled.
This function begins dragging file from frame to another program, and returns the result of the drag-and-drop operation when the file is dropped or the drag-and-drop operation is canceled.
If file is a remote file, then a temporary copy will be made.
action must be one of the symbols copy
, move
or
link
, where copy
means that file should be opened
or copied by the drop target, move
means the drop target should
move the file to another location, and link
means the drop
target should create a symbolic link to file. It is an error to
specify link
as the action if file is a remote file.
frame and allow-same-frame have the same meaning as in
dnd-begin-text-drag
.
The return value is the action that the drop target actually performed, which can be one of the following symbols:
copy
The drop target opened or copied file to a different location.
move
The drop target moved file to a different location.
link
The drop target (usually a file manager) created a symbolic link to file.
private
The drop target performed some other unspecified action.
nil
The drag-and-drop operation was canceled.
This function is like dnd-begin-file-drag
, except that
files is a list of files. If the drop target doesn’t support
dropping multiple files, then the first file will be used instead.
This function is similar to dnd-begin-file-drag
(with the
default action of copy), but instead of specifying the action you
specify the name of the copy created by the target program in
name
.
The high-level interfaces described above are implemented on top of
a lower-level primitive. If you need to drag content other than files
or text, use the low-level interface x-begin-drag
instead. However, using it will require detailed knowledge of the
data types and actions used by the programs to transfer content via
drag-and-drop on each platform you want to support.
This function begins a drag from frame, and returns when the
drag-and-drop operation ends, either because the drop was successful,
or because the drop was rejected. The drop occurs when all mouse
buttons are released on top of an X window other than frame (the
drop target), or any X window if allow-current-frame is
non-nil
. If no mouse buttons are held down when the
drag-and-drop operation begins, this function may immediately return
nil
.
targets is a list of strings describing selection targets, much
like the data-type argument to gui-get-selection
, that
the drop target can request from Emacs (see Window System Selections).
action is a symbol describing the action recommended to the
target. It can either be XdndActionCopy
, which
means to copy the contents of the selection XdndSelection
to
the drop target; or XdndActionMove
, which means copy as with
XdndActionCopy
, and in addition the caller should delete
whatever was stored in that selection after copying it.
action may also be an alist which associates between symbols describing the available actions, and strings that the drop target is expected to present to the user to choose between the available actions.
If return-frame is non-nil
and the mouse moves over an
Emacs frame after first moving out of frame, then the frame to
which the mouse moves will be returned immediately. If
return-frame is the symbol now
, then any frame underneath
the mouse pointer will be returned without waiting for the mouse to
first move out of frame. return-frame is useful when you
want to treat dragging content from one frame to another specially,
while also being able to drag content to other programs, but it is not
guaranteed to work on all systems and with all window managers.
If follow-tooltip is non-nil
, the position of any tooltip
(such as one shown by tooltip-show
) will follow the location of
the mouse pointer whenever it moves during the drag-and-drop
operation. The tooltip will be hidden once all mouse buttons are
released.
If the drop was rejected or no drop target was found, this function
returns nil
. Otherwise, it returns a symbol describing the
action the target chose to perform, which can differ from action
if that isn’t supported by the drop target. XdndActionPrivate
is also a valid return value in addition to XdndActionCopy
and
XdndActionMove
; it means that the drop target chose to perform
an unspecified action, and no further processing is required by the
caller.
The caller must cooperate with the target to fully perform the action
chosen by the target. For example, callers should delete the buffer
text that was dragged if this function returns XdndActionMove
.
On X Windows, several different drag-and-drop protocols are
supported by x-begin-drag
. When dragging content that is known
to not be supported by a specific drag-and-drop protocol, it might be
desirable to turn that protocol off, by changing the values of the
following variables:
When this is non-nil
, the Motif drag and drop protocols are
disabled, and dropping onto programs that only understand them will
not work.
When this is nil
, the OffiX (old KDE) drag and drop protocol is
disabled. When this is the symbol files
, the OffiX protocol
will only be used if "FILE_NAME"
is one of the targets given to
x-begin-drag
. Any other value means to use the OffiX protocol
to drop all supported content.
When one of the "STRING"
, "UTF8_STRING"
,
"COMPOUND_TEXT"
or "TEXT"
targets is present in the list
given to x-begin-drag
, Emacs will try to use synthesized mouse
events and the primary selection to insert the text if the drop target
doesn’t support any drag-and-drop protocol at all.
A side effect is that Emacs will become the owner of the primary
selection upon such a drop. If that is not desired, then the drop
emulation can be disabled by setting this variable to nil
.
A color name is text (usually in a string) that specifies a color. Symbolic names such as ‘black’, ‘white’, ‘red’, etc., are allowed; use M-x list-colors-display to see a list of defined names. You can also specify colors numerically in forms such as ‘#rgb’ and ‘RGB:r/g/b’, where r specifies the red level, g specifies the green level, and b specifies the blue level. You can use either one, two, three, or four hex digits for r; then you must use the same number of hex digits for all g and b as well, making either 3, 6, 9 or 12 hex digits in all. (See the documentation of the X Window System for more details about numerical RGB specification of colors.)
These functions provide a way to determine which color names are valid, and what they look like. In some cases, the value depends on the selected frame, as described below; see Input Focus, for the meaning of the term “selected frame”.
To read user input of color names with completion, use
read-color
(see read-color).
This function reports whether a color name is meaningful. It returns
t
if so; otherwise, nil
. The argument frame says
which frame’s display to ask about; if frame is omitted or
nil
, the selected frame is used.
Note that this does not tell you whether the display you are using
really supports that color. When using X, you can ask for any defined
color on any kind of display, and you will get some result—typically,
the closest it can do. To determine whether a frame can really display
a certain color, use color-supported-p
(see below).
This function used to be called x-color-defined-p
,
and that name is still supported as an alias.
This function returns a list of the color names that are defined
and supported on frame frame (default, the selected frame).
If frame does not support colors, the value is nil
.
This function used to be called x-defined-colors
,
and that name is still supported as an alias.
This returns t
if frame can really display the color
color (or at least something close to it). If frame is
omitted or nil
, the question applies to the selected frame.
Some terminals support a different set of colors for foreground and
background. If background-p is non-nil
, that means you are
asking whether color can be used as a background; otherwise you
are asking whether it can be used as a foreground.
The argument color must be a valid color name.
This returns t
if color is a shade of gray, as defined on
frame’s display. If frame is omitted or nil
, the
question applies to the selected frame. If color is not a valid
color name, this function returns nil
.
This function returns a value that describes what color should ideally look like on frame. If color is defined, the value is a list of three integers, which give the amount of red, the amount of green, and the amount of blue. Each integer ranges in principle from 0 to 65535, but some displays may not use the full range. This three-element list is called the rgb values of the color.
If color is not defined, the value is nil
.
(color-values "black") ⇒ (0 0 0) (color-values "white") ⇒ (65535 65535 65535) (color-values "red") ⇒ (65535 0 0) (color-values "pink") ⇒ (65535 49344 52171) (color-values "hungry") ⇒ nil
The color values are returned for frame’s display. If
frame is omitted or nil
, the information is returned for
the selected frame’s display. If the frame cannot display colors, the
value is nil
.
This function used to be called x-color-values
,
and that name is still supported as an alias.
This function does the same as color-values
, but it returns
color values as floating-point numbers between 0.0 and 1.0 inclusive.
This function returns non-nil
if the color described by its RGB
triplet rgb is more readable against white background than
against dark background. The argument rgb should be a list of
the form (r g b)
, with each component a
floating-point number in the range 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive. You can use
color-name-to-rgb
to convert a color’s name to such a list.
Text terminals usually support only a small number of colors, and the computer uses small integers to select colors on the terminal. This means that the computer cannot reliably tell what the selected color looks like; instead, you have to inform your application which small integers correspond to which colors. However, Emacs does know the standard set of colors and will try to use them automatically.
The functions described in this section control how terminal colors are used by Emacs.
Several of these functions use or return rgb values, described in Color Names.
These functions accept a display (either a frame or the name of a terminal) as an optional argument. We hope in the future to make Emacs support different colors on different text terminals; then this argument will specify which terminal to operate on (the default being the selected frame’s terminal; see Input Focus). At present, though, the frame argument has no effect.
This function associates the color name name with color number number on the terminal.
The optional argument rgb, if specified, is an rgb value, a list
of three numbers that specify what the color actually looks like.
If you do not specify rgb, then this color cannot be used by
tty-color-approximate
to approximate other colors, because
Emacs will not know what it looks like.
This function clears the table of defined colors for a text terminal.
This function returns an alist recording the known colors supported by a text terminal.
Each element has the form (name number . rgb)
or (name number)
. Here, name is the color
name, number is the number used to specify it to the terminal.
If present, rgb is a list of three color values (for red, green,
and blue) that says what the color actually looks like.
This function finds the closest color, among the known colors
supported for display, to that described by the rgb value
rgb (a list of color values). The return value is an element of
tty-color-alist
.
This function finds the closest color to color among the known
colors supported for display and returns its index (an integer).
If the name color is not defined, the value is nil
.
This section describes some of the functions and variables for querying and using X resources, or their equivalent on your operating system. See X Resources in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more information about X resources.
The function x-get-resource
retrieves a resource value from the X
Window defaults database.
Resources are indexed by a combination of a key and a class. This function searches using a key of the form ‘instance.attribute’ (where instance is the name under which Emacs was invoked), and using ‘Emacs.class’ as the class.
The optional arguments component and subclass add to the key and the class, respectively. You must specify both of them or neither. If you specify them, the key is ‘instance.component.attribute’, and the class is ‘Emacs.class.subclass’.
This variable specifies the application name that x-get-resource
should look up. The default value is "Emacs"
. You can examine X
resources for other application names by binding this
variable to some other string, around a call to x-get-resource
.
This variable specifies the instance name that x-get-resource
should look up. The default value is the name Emacs was invoked with,
or the value specified with the ‘-name’ or ‘-rn’ switches.
To illustrate some of the above, suppose that you have the line:
xterm.vt100.background: yellow
in your X resources file (whose name is usually ~/.Xdefaults or ~/.Xresources). Then:
(let ((x-resource-class "XTerm") (x-resource-name "xterm")) (x-get-resource "vt100.background" "VT100.Background")) ⇒ "yellow"
(let ((x-resource-class "XTerm") (x-resource-name "xterm")) (x-get-resource "background" "VT100" "vt100" "Background")) ⇒ "yellow"
If this variable is non-nil
, Emacs does not look up X
resources, and X resources do not have any effect when creating new
frames.
The functions in this section describe the basic capabilities of a particular display. Lisp programs can use them to adapt their behavior to what the display can do. For example, a program that ordinarily uses a popup menu could use the minibuffer if popup menus are not supported.
The optional argument display in these functions specifies which
display to ask the question about. It can be a display name, a frame
(which designates the display that frame is on), or nil
(which
refers to the selected frame’s display, see Input Focus).
See Color Names, Text Terminal Colors, for other functions to obtain information about displays.
This function returns t
if popup menus are supported on
display, nil
if not. Support for popup menus requires
that the mouse be available, since the menu is popped up by clicking
the mouse on some portion of the Emacs display.
This function returns t
if display is a graphic display
capable of displaying several frames and several different fonts at
once. This is true for displays that use a window system such as X,
and false for text terminals.
This function returns t
if display has a mouse available,
nil
if not.
This function returns t
if the screen is a color screen.
It used to be called x-display-color-p
, and that name
is still supported as an alias.
This function returns t
if the screen can display shades of gray.
(All color displays can do this.)
This function returns non-nil
if all the face attributes in
attributes are supported (see Face Attributes).
The definition of “supported” is somewhat heuristic, but basically means that a face containing all the attributes in attributes, when merged with the default face for display, can be represented in a way that’s
Point (2) implies that a :weight black
attribute will be
satisfied by any display that can display bold, as will
:foreground "yellow"
as long as some yellowish color can be
displayed, but :slant italic
will not be satisfied by
the tty display code’s automatic substitution of a dim face for
italic.
This function returns t
if display supports selections.
Windowed displays normally support selections, but they may also be
supported in some other cases.
This function returns t
if display can display images.
Windowed displays ought in principle to handle images, but some
systems lack the support for that. On a display that does not support
images, Emacs cannot display a tool bar.
This function returns the number of screens associated with the display.
This function returns the height of the screen in pixels. On a character terminal, it gives the height in characters.
For graphical terminals, note that on multi-monitor setups this refers to the pixel height for all physical monitors associated with display. See Multiple Terminals.
This function returns the width of the screen in pixels. On a character terminal, it gives the width in characters.
For graphical terminals, note that on multi-monitor setups this refers to the pixel width for all physical monitors associated with display. See Multiple Terminals.
This function returns the height of the screen in millimeters,
or nil
if Emacs cannot get that information.
For graphical terminals, note that on multi-monitor setups this refers to the height for all physical monitors associated with display. See Multiple Terminals.
This function returns the width of the screen in millimeters,
or nil
if Emacs cannot get that information.
For graphical terminals, note that on multi-monitor setups this refers to the width for all physical monitors associated with display. See Multiple Terminals.
This variable allows the user to specify the dimensions of graphical
displays returned by display-mm-height
and
display-mm-width
in case the system provides incorrect values.
This function returns the backing store capability of the display. Backing store means recording the pixels of windows (and parts of windows) that are not exposed, so that when exposed they can be displayed very quickly.
Values can be the symbols always
, when-mapped
, or
not-useful
. The function can also return nil
when the question is inapplicable to a certain kind of display.
This function returns non-nil
if the display supports the
SaveUnder feature. That feature is used by pop-up windows
to save the pixels they obscure, so that they can pop down
quickly.
This function returns the number of planes the display supports. This is typically the number of bits per pixel. For a tty display, it is log to base two of the number of colors supported.
This function returns the visual class for the screen. The value is
one of the symbols static-gray
(a limited, unchangeable number
of grays), gray-scale
(a full range of grays),
static-color
(a limited, unchangeable number of colors),
pseudo-color
(a limited number of colors), true-color
(a
full range of colors), and direct-color
(a full range of
colors).
This function returns the number of color cells the screen supports.
These functions obtain additional information about the window
system in use where Emacs shows the specified display. (Their
names begin with x-
for historical reasons.)
This function returns the list of version numbers of the GUI window system running on display, such as the X server on GNU and Unix systems. The value is a list of three integers: the major and minor version numbers of the protocol, and the distributor-specific release number of the window system software itself. On GNU and Unix systems, these are normally the version of the X protocol and the distributor-specific release number of the X server software. On MS-Windows, this is the version of the Windows OS.
This function returns the vendor that provided the window system software (as a string). On GNU and Unix systems this really means whoever distributes the X server. On MS-Windows this is the vendor ID string of the Windows OS (Microsoft).
When the developers of X labeled software distributors as “vendors”, they showed their false assumption that no system could ever be developed and distributed noncommercially.
A position is the index of a character in the text of a buffer. More precisely, a position identifies the place between two characters (or before the first character, or after the last character), so we can speak of the character before or after a given position. However, we often speak of the character “at” a position, meaning the character after that position.
Positions are usually represented as integers starting from 1, but can also be represented as markers—special objects that relocate automatically when text is inserted or deleted so they stay with the surrounding characters. Functions that expect an argument to be a position (an integer), but accept a marker as a substitute, normally ignore which buffer the marker points into; they convert the marker to an integer, and use that integer, exactly as if you had passed the integer as the argument, even if the marker points to the wrong buffer. A marker that points nowhere cannot convert to an integer; using it instead of an integer causes an error. See Markers.
See also the field feature (see Defining and Using Fields), which provides functions that are used by many cursor-motion commands.
Point is a special buffer position used by many editing commands, including the self-inserting typed characters and text insertion functions. Other commands move point through the text to allow editing and insertion at different places.
Like other positions, point designates a place between two characters (or before the first character, or after the last character), rather than a particular character. Usually terminals display the cursor over the character that immediately follows point; point is actually before the character on which the cursor sits.
The value of point is a number no less than 1, and no greater than the buffer size plus 1. If narrowing is in effect (see Narrowing), then point is constrained to fall within the accessible portion of the buffer (possibly at one end of it).
Each buffer has its own value of point, which is independent of the value of point in other buffers. Each window also has a value of point, which is independent of the value of point in other windows on the same buffer. This is why point can have different values in various windows that display the same buffer. When a buffer appears in only one window, the buffer’s point and the window’s point normally have the same value, so the distinction is rarely important. See Windows and Point, for more details.
This function returns the value of point in the current buffer, as an integer.
(point) ⇒ 175
This function returns the minimum accessible value of point in the current buffer. This is normally 1, but if narrowing is in effect, it is the position of the start of the region that you narrowed to. (See Narrowing.)
This function returns the maximum accessible value of point in the
current buffer. This is (1+ (buffer-size))
, unless narrowing is
in effect, in which case it is the position of the end of the region
that you narrowed to. (See Narrowing.)
This function returns (point-max)
if flag is greater than
0, (point-min)
otherwise. The argument flag must be a
number.
This function returns the total number of characters in the current
buffer. In the absence of any narrowing (see Narrowing),
point-max
returns a value one larger than this.
If you specify a buffer, buffer, then the value is the size of buffer.
(buffer-size) ⇒ 35
(point-max) ⇒ 36
Motion functions change the value of point, either relative to the current value of point, relative to the beginning or end of the buffer, or relative to the edges of the selected window. See Point.
These functions move point based on a count of characters.
goto-char
is the fundamental primitive; the other functions use
that.
This function sets point in the current buffer to the value position.
If narrowing is in effect, position still counts from the
beginning of the buffer, but point cannot go outside the accessible
portion. If position is out of range, goto-char
moves
point to the beginning or the end of the accessible portion.
When this function is called interactively, position is the numeric prefix argument, if provided; otherwise it is read from the minibuffer.
goto-char
returns position.
This function moves point count characters forward, towards the
end of the buffer (or backward, towards the beginning of the buffer, if
count is negative). If count is nil
, the default
is 1.
If this attempts to move past the beginning or end of the buffer (or
the limits of the accessible portion, when narrowing is in effect), it
signals an error with error symbol beginning-of-buffer
or
end-of-buffer
.
In an interactive call, count is the numeric prefix argument.
This is just like forward-char
except that it moves
in the opposite direction.
The functions for parsing words described below use the syntax table
and char-script-table
to decide whether a given character is
part of a word. See Syntax Tables, and see Character Properties.
This function moves point forward count words (or backward if
count is negative). If count is omitted or nil
, it
defaults to 1. In an interactive call, count is specified by
the numeric prefix argument.
“Moving one word” means moving until point crosses a
word-constituent character, which indicates the beginning of a word,
and then continue moving until the word ends. By default, characters
that begin and end words, known as word boundaries, are defined
by the current buffer’s syntax table (see Table of Syntax Classes), but
modes can override that by setting up a suitable
find-word-boundary-function-table
, described below. Characters
that belong to different scripts (as defined by
char-script-table
), also define a word boundary
(see Character Properties). In any case, this function cannot
move point past the boundary of the accessible portion of the buffer,
or across a field boundary (see Defining and Using Fields). The most common case of
a field boundary is the end of the prompt in the minibuffer.
If it is possible to move count words, without being stopped
prematurely by the buffer boundary or a field boundary, the value is
t
. Otherwise, the return value is nil
and point stops at
the buffer boundary or field boundary.
If inhibit-field-text-motion
is non-nil
,
this function ignores field boundaries.
This function is just like forward-word
, except that it moves
backward until encountering the front of a word, rather than forward.
This variable affects the behavior of forward-word
and
backward-word
, and everything that uses them. If it is
non-nil
, then characters in the escape and character-quote
syntax classes count as part of words. Otherwise, they do not.
If this variable is non-nil
, certain motion functions including
forward-word
, forward-sentence
, and
forward-paragraph
ignore field boundaries.
This variable affects the behavior of forward-word
and
backward-word
, and everything that uses them. Its value is a
char-table (see Char-Tables) of functions to search for word
boundaries. If a character has a non-nil
entry in this table,
then when a word starts or ends with that character, the corresponding
function will be called with 2 arguments: pos and limit.
The function should return the position of the other word boundary.
Specifically, if pos is smaller than limit, then pos
is at the beginning of a word, and the function should return the
position after the last character of the word; otherwise, pos is
at the last character of a word, and the function should return the
position of that word’s first character.
This function is like forward-word
, but it is not affected by
find-word-boundary-function-table
. Lisp programs that should
not change behavior when word movement is modified by modes which set
that table, such as subword-mode
, should use this function
instead of forward-word
.
This function is like backward-word
, but it is not affected by
find-word-boundary-function-table
. Like with
forward-word-strictly
, use this function instead of
backward-word
when movement by words should only consider
syntax tables.
To move point to the beginning of the buffer, write:
(goto-char (point-min))
Likewise, to move to the end of the buffer, use:
(goto-char (point-max))
Here are two commands that users use to do these things. They are documented here to warn you not to use them in Lisp programs, because they set the mark and display messages in the echo area.
This function moves point to the beginning of the buffer (or the limits of the accessible portion, when narrowing is in effect), setting the mark at the previous position (except in Transient Mark mode, if the mark is already active, it does not set the mark.)
If n is non-nil
, then it puts point n tenths of the
way from the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer. In an
interactive call, n is the numeric prefix argument, if provided;
otherwise n defaults to nil
.
Warning: Don’t use this function in Lisp programs!
This function moves point to the end of the buffer (or the limits of
the accessible portion, when narrowing is in effect), setting the mark
at the previous position (except in Transient Mark mode when the mark
is already active). If n is non-nil
, then it puts point
n tenths of the way from the end of the accessible portion of
the buffer.
In an interactive call, n is the numeric prefix argument,
if provided; otherwise n defaults to nil
.
Warning: Don’t use this function in Lisp programs!
Text lines are portions of the buffer delimited by newline characters, which are regarded as part of the previous line. The first text line begins at the beginning of the buffer, and the last text line ends at the end of the buffer whether or not the last character is a newline. The division of the buffer into text lines is not affected by the width of the window, by line continuation in display, or by how tabs and control characters are displayed.
This function moves point to the beginning of the current line. With an
argument count not nil
or 1, it moves forward
count−1 lines and then to the beginning of the line.
This function does not move point across a field boundary
(see Defining and Using Fields) unless doing so would move beyond there to a
different line; therefore, if count is nil
or 1, and
point starts at a field boundary, point does not move. To ignore
field boundaries, either bind inhibit-field-text-motion
to
t
, or use the forward-line
function instead. For
instance, (forward-line 0)
does the same thing as
(beginning-of-line)
, except that it ignores field boundaries.
If this function reaches the end of the buffer (or of the accessible portion, if narrowing is in effect), it positions point there. No error is signaled.
Return the position that (beginning-of-line count)
would move to.
This function moves point to the end of the current line. With an
argument count not nil
or 1, it moves forward
count−1 lines and then to the end of the line.
This function does not move point across a field boundary
(see Defining and Using Fields) unless doing so would move beyond there to a
different line; therefore, if count is nil
or 1, and
point starts at a field boundary, point does not move. To ignore
field boundaries, bind inhibit-field-text-motion
to t
.
If this function reaches the end of the buffer (or of the accessible portion, if narrowing is in effect), it positions point there. No error is signaled.
Return the position that (end-of-line count)
would move to.
Like line-beginning-position
, but ignores fields (and is more
efficient).
Like line-end-position
, but ignores fields (and is more
efficient).
This function moves point forward count lines, to the beginning of
the line following that. If count is negative, it moves point
−count lines backward, to the beginning of a line
preceding that. If count is zero, it moves point to the
beginning of the current line. If count is nil
, that
means 1.
If forward-line
encounters the beginning or end of the buffer (or
of the accessible portion) before finding that many lines, it sets point
there. No error is signaled.
forward-line
returns the difference between count and the
number of lines actually moved. If you attempt to move down five lines
from the beginning of a buffer that has only three lines, point stops at
the end of the last line, and the value will be 2. As an explicit
exception, if the last accessible line is non-empty, but has no
newline (e.g., if the buffer ends without a newline), the function
sets point to the end of that line, and the value returned by the
function counts that line as one line successfully moved.
In an interactive call, count is the numeric prefix argument.
This function returns the number of lines between the positions start and end in the current buffer. If start and end are equal, then it returns 0. Otherwise it returns at least 1, even if start and end are on the same line. This is because the text between them, considered in isolation, must contain at least one line unless it is empty.
If the optional ignore-invisible-lines is non-nil
,
invisible lines will not be included in the count.
This function returns the number of words between the positions start and end in the current buffer.
This function can also be called interactively. In that case, it prints a message reporting the number of lines, words, and characters in the buffer, or in the region if the region is active.
This function returns the line number in the current buffer
corresponding to the buffer position pos. If pos is
nil
or omitted, the current buffer position is used. If
absolute is nil
, the default, counting starts at
(point-min)
, so the value refers to the contents of the
accessible portion of the (potentially narrowed) buffer. If
absolute is non-nil
, ignore any narrowing and return
the absolute line number.
Also see the functions bolp
and eolp
in Examining Text Near Point.
These functions do not move point, but test whether it is already at the
beginning or end of a line.
The line functions in the previous section count text lines, delimited only by newline characters. By contrast, these functions count screen lines, which are defined by the way the text appears on the screen. A text line is a single screen line if it is short enough to fit the width of the selected window, but otherwise it may occupy several screen lines.
In some cases, text lines are truncated on the screen rather than
continued onto additional screen lines. In these cases,
vertical-motion
moves point much like forward-line
.
See Truncation.
Because the width of a given string depends on the flags that control
the appearance of certain characters, vertical-motion
behaves
differently, for a given piece of text, depending on the buffer it is
in, and even on the selected window (because the width, the truncation
flag, and display table may vary between windows). See Usual Display Conventions.
These functions scan text to determine where screen lines break, and thus take time proportional to the distance scanned.
This function moves point to the start of the screen line count screen lines down from the screen line containing point. If count is negative, it moves up instead. If count is zero, point moves to the visual start of the current screen line.
The count argument can be a cons cell, (cols . lines)
, instead of an integer. Then the function moves by
lines screen lines, as described for count above, and puts
point cols columns from the visual start of that screen line.
The value of cols can be a float, and is interpreted in units of
the frame’s canonical character width (see Frame Font); this
allows specifying accurate horizontal position of point when the
target screen line uses variable fonts. Note that cols are
counted from the visual start of the line; if the window is
scrolled horizontally (see Horizontal Scrolling), the column where
point will end is in addition to the number of columns by which the
text is scrolled, and if the target line is a continuation line, its
leftmost column is considered column zero (unlike column-oriented
functions, see Counting Columns).
The return value is the number of screen lines over which point was moved. The value may be less in absolute value than count if the beginning or end of the buffer was reached.
The window window is used for obtaining parameters such as the
width, the horizontal scrolling, and the display table. But
vertical-motion
always operates on the current buffer, even if
window currently displays some other buffer.
The optional argument cur-col specifies the current column when the function is called. This is the window-relative horizontal coordinate of point, measured in units of font width of the frame’s default face. Providing it speeds up the function, especially in very long lines, because the function doesn’t have to go back in the buffer in order to determine the current column. Note that cur-col is also counted from the visual start of the line.
This function returns the number of screen lines in the text from
beg to end. The number of screen lines may be different
from the number of actual lines, due to line continuation, the display
table, etc. If beg and end are nil
or omitted,
they default to the beginning and end of the accessible portion of the
buffer.
If the region ends with a newline, that is ignored unless the optional
third argument count-final-newline is non-nil
.
The optional fourth argument window specifies the window for obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so on. The default is to use the selected window’s parameters.
Like vertical-motion
, count-screen-lines
always uses the
current buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in
window. This makes possible to use count-screen-lines
in
any buffer, whether or not it is currently displayed in some window.
This function moves point with respect to the text currently displayed in the selected window. It moves point to the beginning of the screen line count screen lines from the top of the window; zero means the topmost line. If count is negative, that specifies a position −count lines from the bottom (or the last line of the buffer, if the buffer ends above the specified screen position); thus, count of −1 specifies the last fully visible screen line of the window.
If count is nil
, then point moves to the beginning of the
line in the middle of the window. If the absolute value of count
is greater than the size of the window, then point moves to the place
that would appear on that screen line if the window were tall enough.
This will probably cause the next redisplay to scroll to bring that
location onto the screen.
In an interactive call, count is the numeric prefix argument.
The value returned is the screen line number point has moved to, relative to the top line of the window.
This function is like move-to-window-line
, except that when the
selected window is a part of a group of windows (see Window Group), move-to-window-group-line
will move to a position with
respect to the entire group, not just the single window. This
condition holds when the buffer local variable
move-to-window-group-line-function
is set to a function. In
this case, move-to-window-group-line
calls the function with
the argument count, then returns its result.
This function scans the current buffer, calculating screen positions. It scans the buffer forward from position from, assuming that is at screen coordinates frompos, to position to or coordinates topos, whichever comes first. It returns the ending buffer position and screen coordinates.
The coordinate arguments frompos and topos are cons cells of
the form (hpos . vpos)
.
The argument width is the number of columns available to display
text; this affects handling of continuation lines. nil
means
the actual number of usable text columns in the window, which is
equivalent to the value returned by (window-width window)
.
The argument offsets is either nil
or a cons cell of the
form (hscroll . tab-offset)
. Here hscroll is
the number of columns not being displayed at the left margin; most
callers get this by calling window-hscroll
. Meanwhile,
tab-offset is the offset between column numbers on the screen and
column numbers in the buffer. This can be nonzero in a continuation
line, when the previous screen lines’ widths do not add up to a multiple
of tab-width
. It is always zero in a non-continuation line.
The window window serves only to specify which display table to
use. compute-motion
always operates on the current buffer,
regardless of what buffer is displayed in window.
The return value is a list of five elements:
(pos hpos vpos prevhpos contin)
Here pos is the buffer position where the scan stopped, vpos is the vertical screen position, and hpos is the horizontal screen position.
The result prevhpos is the horizontal position one character back
from pos. The result contin is t
if the last line
was continued after (or within) the previous character.
For example, to find the buffer position of column col of screen line
line of a certain window, pass the window’s display start location
as from and the window’s upper-left coordinates as frompos.
Pass the buffer’s (point-max)
as to, to limit the scan to
the end of the accessible portion of the buffer, and pass line and
col as topos. Here’s a function that does this:
(defun coordinates-of-position (col line) (car (compute-motion (window-start) '(0 . 0) (point-max) (cons col line) (window-width) (cons (window-hscroll) 0) (selected-window))))
When you use compute-motion
for the minibuffer, you need to use
minibuffer-prompt-width
to get the horizontal position of the
beginning of the first screen line. See Minibuffer Contents.
Here are several functions concerned with balanced-parenthesis expressions (also called sexps in connection with moving across them in Emacs). The syntax table controls how these functions interpret various characters; see Syntax Tables. See Parsing Expressions, for lower-level primitives for scanning sexps or parts of sexps. For user-level commands, see Commands for Editing with Parentheses in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This function moves forward across arg (default 1) balanced groups of parentheses. (Other syntactic entities such as words or paired string quotes are ignored.)
This function moves backward across arg (default 1) balanced groups of parentheses. (Other syntactic entities such as words or paired string quotes are ignored.)
This function moves forward out of arg (default 1) levels of
parentheses. A negative argument means move backward but still to a
less deep spot. If escape-strings is non-nil
(as it is
interactively), move out of enclosing strings as well. If
no-syntax-crossing is non-nil
(as it is interactively), prefer
to break out of any enclosing string instead of moving to the start of
a list broken across multiple strings. On error, location of point is
unspecified.
This function is just like up-list
, but with a negated argument.
This function moves forward into arg (default 1) levels of parentheses. A negative argument means move backward but still go deeper in parentheses (−arg levels).
This function moves forward across arg (default 1) balanced expressions. Balanced expressions include both those delimited by parentheses and other kinds, such as words and string constants. See Parsing Expressions. For example,
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (concat∗ "foo " (car x) y z) ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(forward-sexp 3) ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (concat "foo " (car x) y∗ z) ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This function moves backward across arg (default 1) balanced expressions.
This function moves back to the argth beginning of a defun. If arg is negative, this actually moves forward, but it still moves to the beginning of a defun, not to the end of one. arg defaults to 1.
This function moves forward to the argth end of a defun. If arg is negative, this actually moves backward, but it still moves to the end of a defun, not to the beginning of one. arg defaults to 1.
If non-nil
, this buffer-local variable holds a regular
expression that specifies what text can appear before the
open-parenthesis that starts a defun. That is to say, a defun begins
on a line that starts with a match for this regular expression,
followed by a character with open-parenthesis syntax.
If this variable’s value is non-nil
, an open parenthesis in
column 0 is considered to be the start of a defun. If it is
nil
, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
The default is t
. If a string literal happens to have a
parenthesis in column 0, escape it with a backslash to avoid a false
positive.
If non-nil
, this variable holds a function for finding the
beginning of a defun. The function beginning-of-defun
calls this function instead of using its normal method, passing it its
optional argument. If the argument is non-nil
, the function
should move back by that many functions, like
beginning-of-defun
does.
If non-nil
, this variable holds a function for finding the end of
a defun. The function end-of-defun
calls this function instead
of using its normal method.
If Emacs is compiled with tree-sitter, it can use the tree-sitter
parser information to move across syntax constructs. Since what
exactly is considered a defun varies between languages, a major mode
should set treesit-defun-type-regexp
to determine that. Then
the mode can get navigation-by-defun functionality for free, by using
treesit-beginning-of-defun
and treesit-end-of-defun
.
This variable determines which nodes are considered defuns by Emacs. It can be a regexp that matches the type of defun nodes. (For “node” and “node type”, see Parsing Program Source.)
For example, python-mode
sets this variable to a regexp that
matches either ‘function_definition’ or ‘class_definition’.
Sometimes not all nodes matched by the regexp are valid defuns.
Therefore, this variable can also be a cons cell of the form
(regexp . pred), where pred should be a function
that takes a node as its argument, and returns non-nil
if the
node is a valid defun, or nil
if it is not valid.
This variable determines how Emacs treats nested defuns. If the value
is top-level
, navigation functions only move across top-level
defuns. If the value is nested
, navigation functions recognize
nested defuns.
The following two functions move point over a specified set of characters. For example, they are often used to skip whitespace. For related functions, see Motion and Syntax.
These functions convert the set string to multibyte if the buffer is multibyte, and they convert it to unibyte if the buffer is unibyte, as the search functions do (see Searching and Matching).
This function moves point in the current buffer forward, skipping over a given set of characters. It examines the character following point, then advances point if the character matches character-set. This continues until it reaches a character that does not match. The function returns the number of characters moved over.
The argument character-set is a string, like the inside of a
‘[…]’ in a regular expression except that ‘]’ does not
terminate it, and ‘\’ quotes ‘^’, ‘-’ or ‘\’.
Thus, "a-zA-Z"
skips over all letters, stopping before the
first nonletter, and "^a-zA-Z"
skips nonletters stopping before
the first letter (see Regular Expressions). Character classes
can also be used, e.g., "[:alnum:]"
(see Character Classes).
If limit is supplied (it must be a number or a marker), it specifies the maximum position in the buffer that point can be skipped to. Point will stop at or before limit.
In the following example, point is initially located directly before the ‘T’. After the form is evaluated, point is located at the end of that line (between the ‘t’ of ‘hat’ and the newline). The function skips all letters and spaces, but not newlines.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I read "∗The cat in the hat comes back" twice. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(skip-chars-forward "a-zA-Z ") ⇒ 18 ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I read "The cat in the hat∗ comes back" twice. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This function moves point backward, skipping characters that match
character-set, until limit. It is just like
skip-chars-forward
except for the direction of motion.
The return value indicates the distance traveled. It is an integer that is zero or less.
It is often useful to move point temporarily within a localized
portion of the program. This is called an excursion, and it is
done with the save-excursion
special form. This construct
remembers the initial identity of the current buffer, and its value
of point, and restores them after the excursion
completes. It is the standard way to move point within one part of a
program and avoid affecting the rest of the program, and is used
thousands of times in the Lisp sources of Emacs.
If you only need to save and restore the identity of the current
buffer, use save-current-buffer
or with-current-buffer
instead (see The Current Buffer). If you need to save or restore
window configurations, see the forms described in Window Configurations and in Frame Configurations.
This special form saves the identity of the current buffer and the
value of point in it, evaluates body, and finally
restores the buffer and its saved value of point. Both saved values are
restored even in case of an abnormal exit via
throw
or error (see Nonlocal Exits).
The value returned by save-excursion
is the result of the last
form in body, or nil
if no body forms were given.
Because save-excursion
only saves point for the
buffer that was current at the start of the excursion, any changes
made to point in other buffers, during the excursion, will
remain in effect afterward. This frequently leads to unintended
consequences, so the byte compiler warns if you call set-buffer
during an excursion:
Warning: Use ‘with-current-buffer’ rather than save-excursion+set-buffer
To avoid such problems, you should call save-excursion
only
after setting the desired current buffer, as in the following example:
(defun append-string-to-buffer (string buffer) "Append STRING to the end of BUFFER." (with-current-buffer buffer (save-excursion (goto-char (point-max)) (insert string))))
Likewise, save-excursion
does not restore window-buffer
correspondences altered by functions such as switch-to-buffer
.
Warning: Ordinary insertion of text adjacent to the saved
point value relocates the saved value, just as it relocates all
markers. More precisely, the saved value is a marker with insertion
type nil
. See Marker Insertion Types. Therefore, when the
saved point value is restored, it normally comes before the inserted
text.
This macro is like save-excursion
, but also saves and restores
the mark location and mark-active
. This macro does what
save-excursion
did before Emacs 25.1.
Narrowing means limiting the text addressable by Emacs editing commands to a limited range of characters in a buffer. The text that remains addressable is called the accessible portion of the buffer.
Narrowing is specified with two buffer positions, which become the beginning and end of the accessible portion. For most editing commands and primitives, these positions replace the values of the beginning and end of the buffer. While narrowing is in effect, no text outside the accessible portion is displayed, and point cannot move outside the accessible portion. Note that narrowing does not alter actual buffer positions (see Point); it only determines which positions are considered the accessible portion of the buffer. Most functions refuse to operate on text that is outside the accessible portion.
Commands for saving buffers are unaffected by narrowing; they save the entire buffer regardless of any narrowing.
If you need to display in a single buffer several very different types of text, consider using an alternative facility described in Swapping Text Between Two Buffers.
This function sets the accessible portion of the current buffer to start at start and end at end. Both arguments should be character positions.
In an interactive call, start and end are set to the bounds of the current region (point and the mark, with the smallest first).
However, when the narrowing has been set by with-restriction
with
a label argument (see below), narrow-to-region
can be used only
within the limits of that narrowing. If start or end are
outside these limits, the corresponding limit set by
with-restriction
is used instead. To gain access to other
portions of the buffer, use without-restriction
with the same
label.
This function sets the accessible portion of the current buffer to
include just the current page. An optional first argument
move-count non-nil
means to move forward or backward by
move-count pages and then narrow to one page. The variable
page-delimiter
specifies where pages start and end
(see Standard Regular Expressions Used in Editing).
In an interactive call, move-count is set to the numeric prefix argument.
This function cancels any narrowing in the current buffer, so that the entire contents are accessible. This is called widening. It is equivalent to the following expression:
(narrow-to-region 1 (1+ (buffer-size)))
However, when a narrowing has been set by with-restriction
with a
label argument (see below), the limits set by with-restriction
are restored, instead of canceling the narrowing. To gain access to
other portions of the buffer, use without-restriction
with the
same label.
This function returns non-nil
if the buffer is narrowed, and
nil
otherwise.
This special form saves the current bounds of the accessible portion,
evaluates the body forms, and finally restores the saved bounds,
thus restoring the same state of narrowing (or absence thereof) formerly
in effect. The state of narrowing is restored even in the event of an
abnormal exit via throw
or error (see Nonlocal Exits).
Therefore, this construct is a clean way to narrow a buffer temporarily.
This construct also saves and restores the narrowings that were set by
with-restriction
with a label argument (see below).
The value returned by save-restriction
is that returned by the
last form in body, or nil
if no body forms were given.
Caution: it is easy to make a mistake when using the
save-restriction
construct. Read the entire description here
before you try it.
If body changes the current buffer, save-restriction
still
restores the restrictions on the original buffer (the buffer whose
restrictions it saved from), but it does not restore the identity of the
current buffer.
save-restriction
does not restore point; use
save-excursion
for that. If you use both save-restriction
and save-excursion
together, save-excursion
should come
first (on the outside). Otherwise, the old point value would be
restored with temporary narrowing still in effect. If the old point
value were outside the limits of the temporary narrowing, this would
fail to restore it accurately.
Here is a simple example of correct use of save-restriction
:
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of foo This is the contents of foo This is the contents of foo∗ ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(save-excursion (save-restriction (goto-char 1) (forward-line 2) (narrow-to-region 1 (point)) (goto-char (point-min)) (replace-string "foo" "bar"))) ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of bar This is the contents of bar This is the contents of foo∗ ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This special form saves the current bounds of the accessible portion of the buffer, sets the accessible portion to start at start and end at end, evaluates the body forms, and restores the saved bounds. In that case it is equivalent to
(save-restriction (narrow-to-region start end) body)
When the optional argument label, which is evaluated to get the
label to use and must yield a non-nil
value, is present, the
narrowing is labeled. A labeled narrowing differs from a
non-labeled one in several ways:
narrow-to-region
and widen
can be used only within the start and end
limits.
with-restriction
and gain
access to other portions of the buffer, use without-restriction
with the same label argument. (Another way to gain access to
other portions of the buffer is to use an indirect buffer
(see Indirect Buffers).)
If you use with-restriction
with the optional label
argument, we recommend documenting the label in the doc strings
of the functions which use it, so that other Lisp programs your code
calls could lift the labeled narrowing if and when it needs.
This special form saves the current bounds of the accessible portion of the buffer, widens the buffer, evaluates the body forms, and restores the saved bounds. In that case it is equivalent to
(save-restriction (widen) body)
When the optional argument label is present, the narrowing set
by with-restriction
with the same label argument is
lifted.
A marker is a Lisp object used to specify a position in a buffer relative to the surrounding text. A marker changes its offset from the beginning of the buffer automatically whenever text is inserted or deleted, so that it stays with the two characters on either side of it.
A marker specifies a buffer and a position in that buffer. A marker can be used to represent a position in functions that require one, just as an integer could be used. In that case, the marker’s buffer is normally ignored. Of course, a marker used in this way usually points to a position in the buffer that the function operates on, but that is entirely the programmer’s responsibility. See Positions, for a complete description of positions.
A marker has three attributes: the marker position, the marker buffer, and the insertion type. The marker position is an integer that is equivalent (at a given time) to the marker as a position in that buffer. But the marker’s position value can change during the life of the marker, and often does. Insertion and deletion of text in the buffer relocate the marker. The idea is that a marker positioned between two characters remains between those two characters despite insertion and deletion elsewhere in the buffer. Relocation changes the integer equivalent of the marker.
Deleting text around a marker’s position leaves the marker between the
characters immediately before and after the deleted text. Inserting
text at the position of a marker normally leaves the marker either in
front of or after the new text, depending on the marker’s insertion
type (see Marker Insertion Types)—unless the insertion is done
with insert-before-markers
(see Inserting Text).
Insertion and deletion in a buffer must check all the markers and relocate them if necessary. This slows processing in a buffer with a large number of markers. For this reason, it is a good idea to make a marker point nowhere if you are sure you don’t need it any more. Markers that can no longer be accessed are eventually removed (see Garbage Collection).
Because it is common to perform arithmetic operations on a marker
position, most of these operations (including +
and
-
) accept markers as arguments. In such cases, the marker
stands for its current position.
Here are examples of creating markers, setting markers, and moving point to markers:
;; Make a new marker that initially does not point anywhere:
(setq m1 (make-marker))
⇒ #<marker in no buffer>
;; Set m1
to point between the 99th and 100th characters
;; in the current buffer:
(set-marker m1 100)
⇒ #<marker at 100 in markers.texi>
;; Now insert one character at the beginning of the buffer:
(goto-char (point-min))
⇒ 1
(insert "Q")
⇒ nil
;; m1
is updated appropriately.
m1
⇒ #<marker at 101 in markers.texi>
;; Two markers that point to the same position ;; are noteq
, but they areequal
. (setq m2 (copy-marker m1)) ⇒ #<marker at 101 in markers.texi> (eq m1 m2) ⇒ nil (equal m1 m2) ⇒ t
;; When you are finished using a marker, make it point nowhere.
(set-marker m1 nil)
⇒ #<marker in no buffer>
You can test an object to see whether it is a marker, or whether it is either an integer or a marker. The latter test is useful in connection with the arithmetic functions that work with both markers and integers.
This function returns t
if object is a marker, nil
otherwise. Note that integers are not markers, even though many
functions will accept either a marker or an integer.
This function returns t
if object is an integer or a marker,
nil
otherwise.
This function returns t
if object is a number (either
integer or floating point) or a marker, nil
otherwise.
When you create a new marker, you can make it point nowhere, or point to the present position of point, or to the beginning or end of the accessible portion of the buffer, or to the same place as another given marker.
The next four functions all return markers with insertion type
nil
. See Marker Insertion Types.
This function returns a newly created marker that does not point anywhere.
(make-marker) ⇒ #<marker in no buffer>
This function returns a new marker that points to the present position
of point in the current buffer. See Point. For an example, see
copy-marker
, below.
This function returns a new marker that points to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer. This will be the beginning of the buffer unless narrowing is in effect. See Narrowing.
This function returns a new marker that points to the end of the accessible portion of the buffer. This will be the end of the buffer unless narrowing is in effect. See Narrowing.
Here are examples of this function and point-min-marker
, shown in
a buffer containing a version of the source file for the text of this
chapter.
(point-min-marker) ⇒ #<marker at 1 in markers.texi> (point-max-marker) ⇒ #<marker at 24080 in markers.texi>
(narrow-to-region 100 200) ⇒ nil
(point-min-marker) ⇒ #<marker at 100 in markers.texi>
(point-max-marker) ⇒ #<marker at 200 in markers.texi>
If passed a marker as its argument, copy-marker
returns a
new marker that points to the same place and the same buffer as does
marker-or-integer. If passed an integer as its argument,
copy-marker
returns a new marker that points to position
marker-or-integer in the current buffer.
The new marker’s insertion type is specified by the argument insertion-type. See Marker Insertion Types.
(copy-marker 0) ⇒ #<marker at 1 in markers.texi>
(copy-marker 90000) ⇒ #<marker at 24080 in markers.texi>
An error is signaled if marker is neither a marker nor an integer.
Two distinct markers are considered equal
(even though not
eq
) to each other if they have the same position and buffer, or
if they both point nowhere.
(setq p (point-marker)) ⇒ #<marker at 2139 in markers.texi>
(setq q (copy-marker p)) ⇒ #<marker at 2139 in markers.texi>
(eq p q) ⇒ nil
(equal p q) ⇒ t
This section describes the functions for accessing the components of a marker object.
This function returns the position that marker points to, or
nil
if it points nowhere.
This function returns the buffer that marker points into, or
nil
if it points nowhere.
(setq m (make-marker)) ⇒ #<marker in no buffer>
(marker-position m) ⇒ nil
(marker-buffer m) ⇒ nil
(set-marker m 3770 (current-buffer)) ⇒ #<marker at 3770 in markers.texi>
(marker-buffer m) ⇒ #<buffer markers.texi>
(marker-position m) ⇒ 3770
When you insert text directly at the place where a marker points,
there are two possible ways to relocate that marker: it can point before
the inserted text, or point after it. You can specify which one a given
marker should do by setting its insertion type. Note that use of
insert-before-markers
ignores markers’ insertion types, always
relocating a marker to point after the inserted text.
This function sets the insertion type of marker marker to
type. If type is t
, marker will advance when
text is inserted at its position. If type is nil
,
marker does not advance when text is inserted there.
This function reports the current insertion type of marker.
All functions that create markers without accepting an argument that
specifies the insertion type, create them with insertion type
nil
(see Functions that Create Markers). Also, the mark has, by
default, insertion type nil
.
This section describes how to change the position of an existing marker. When you do this, be sure you know whether the marker is used outside of your program, and, if so, what effects will result from moving it—otherwise, confusing things may happen in other parts of Emacs.
This function moves marker to position in buffer. If buffer is not provided, it defaults to the current buffer.
If position is nil
or a marker that points nowhere, then
marker is set to point nowhere.
The value returned is marker.
(setq m (point-marker)) ⇒ #<marker at 4714 in markers.texi>
(set-marker m 55) ⇒ #<marker at 55 in markers.texi>
(setq b (get-buffer "foo")) ⇒ #<buffer foo>
(set-marker m 0 b) ⇒ #<marker at 1 in foo>
This is another name for set-marker
.
Each buffer has a special marker, which is designated the mark. When a buffer is newly created, this marker exists but does not point anywhere; this means that the mark doesn’t exist in that buffer yet. Subsequent commands can set the mark.
The mark specifies a position to bound a range of text for many
commands, such as kill-region
and indent-rigidly
. These
commands typically act on the text between point and the mark, which
is called the region. If you are writing a command that
operates on the region, don’t examine the mark directly; instead, use
interactive
with the ‘r’ specification. This provides the
values of point and the mark as arguments to the command in an
interactive call, but permits other Lisp programs to specify arguments
explicitly. See Code Characters for interactive
.
Some commands set the mark as a side-effect. Commands should do
this only if it has a potential use to the user, and never for their
own internal purposes. For example, the replace-regexp
command
sets the mark to the value of point before doing any replacements,
because this enables the user to move back there conveniently after
the replace is finished.
Once the mark exists in a buffer, it normally never ceases to
exist. However, it may become inactive, if Transient Mark mode
is enabled. The buffer-local variable mark-active
, if
non-nil
, means that the mark is active. A command can call the
function deactivate-mark
to deactivate the mark directly, or it
can request deactivation of the mark upon return to the editor command
loop by setting the variable deactivate-mark
to a
non-nil
value.
If Transient Mark mode is enabled, certain editing commands that normally apply to text near point, apply instead to the region when the mark is active. This is the main motivation for using Transient Mark mode. (Another is that this enables highlighting of the region when the mark is active. See Emacs Display.)
In addition to the mark, each buffer has a mark ring which is a
list of markers containing previous values of the mark. When editing
commands change the mark, they should normally save the old value of the
mark on the mark ring. The variable mark-ring-max
specifies the
maximum number of entries in the mark ring; once the list becomes this
long, adding a new element deletes the last element.
There is also a separate global mark ring, but that is used only in a few particular user-level commands, and is not relevant to Lisp programming. So we do not describe it here.
This function returns the current buffer’s mark position as an integer,
or nil
if no mark has ever been set in this buffer.
If Transient Mark mode is enabled, and mark-even-if-inactive
is
nil
, mark
signals an error if the mark is inactive.
However, if force is non-nil
, then mark
disregards
inactivity of the mark, and returns the mark position (or nil
)
anyway.
This function returns the marker that represents the current buffer’s mark. It is not a copy, it is the marker used internally. Therefore, changing this marker’s position will directly affect the buffer’s mark. Don’t do that unless that is the effect you want.
(setq m (mark-marker)) ⇒ #<marker at 3420 in markers.texi>
(set-marker m 100) ⇒ #<marker at 100 in markers.texi>
(mark-marker) ⇒ #<marker at 100 in markers.texi>
Like any marker, this marker can be set to point at any buffer you like. If you make it point at any buffer other than the one of which it is the mark, it will yield perfectly consistent, but rather odd, results. We recommend that you not do it!
This function sets the mark to position, and activates the mark. The old value of the mark is not pushed onto the mark ring.
Please note: Use this function only if you want the user to
see that the mark has moved, and you want the previous mark position to
be lost. Normally, when a new mark is set, the old one should go on the
mark-ring
. For this reason, most applications should use
push-mark
and pop-mark
, not set-mark
.
Novice Emacs Lisp programmers often try to use the mark for the wrong purposes. The mark saves a location for the user’s convenience. An editing command should not alter the mark unless altering the mark is part of the user-level functionality of the command. (And, in that case, this effect should be documented.) To remember a location for internal use in the Lisp program, store it in a Lisp variable. For example:
(let ((beg (point))) (forward-line 1) (delete-region beg (point))).
This function sets the current buffer’s mark to position, and
pushes a copy of the previous mark onto mark-ring
. If
position is nil
, then the value of point is used.
The function push-mark
normally does not activate the
mark. To do that, specify t
for the argument activate.
A ‘Mark set’ message is displayed unless nomsg is
non-nil
.
This function pops off the top element of mark-ring
and makes
that mark become the buffer’s actual mark. This does not move point in
the buffer, and it does nothing if mark-ring
is empty. It
deactivates the mark.
This variable, if non-nil
, enables Transient Mark mode. In
Transient Mark mode, every buffer-modifying primitive sets
deactivate-mark
. As a consequence, most commands that modify
the buffer also deactivate the mark.
When Transient Mark mode is enabled and the mark is active, many
commands that normally apply to the text near point instead apply to
the region. Such commands should use the function use-region-p
to test whether they should operate on the region. See The Region.
Lisp programs can set transient-mark-mode
to non-nil
,
non-t
values to enable Transient Mark mode temporarily. If the
value is lambda
, Transient Mark mode is automatically turned
off after any action, such as buffer modification, that would normally
deactivate the mark. If the value is (only . oldval)
,
then transient-mark-mode
is set to the value oldval after
any subsequent command that moves point and is not shift-translated
(see shift-translation), or after any other
action that would normally deactivate the mark. (Marking a region
with the mouse will temporarily enable transient-mark-mode
in
this way.)
If this is non-nil
, Lisp programs and the Emacs user can use the
mark even when it is inactive. This option affects the behavior of
Transient Mark mode. When the option is non-nil
, deactivation of
the mark turns off region highlighting, but commands that use the mark
behave as if the mark were still active.
If an editor command sets this variable non-nil
, then the editor
command loop deactivates the mark after the command returns (if
Transient Mark mode is enabled). All the primitives that change the
buffer set deactivate-mark
, to deactivate the mark when the
command is finished. Setting this variable makes it buffer-local.
To write Lisp code that modifies the buffer without causing
deactivation of the mark at the end of the command, bind
deactivate-mark
to nil
around the code that does the
modification. For example:
(let (deactivate-mark) (insert " "))
If Transient Mark mode is enabled or force is non-nil
,
this function deactivates the mark and runs the normal hook
deactivate-mark-hook
. Otherwise, it does nothing.
The mark is active when this variable is non-nil
. This
variable is always buffer-local in each buffer. Do not use the
value of this variable to decide whether a command that normally
operates on text near point should operate on the region instead. Use
the function use-region-p
for that (see The Region).
These normal hooks are run, respectively, when the mark becomes active
and when it becomes inactive. The hook activate-mark-hook
is
also run when the region is reactivated, for instance after using a
command that switches back to a buffer that has an active mark.
This function implements the shift-selection behavior of
point-motion commands. See Shift Selection in The GNU Emacs
Manual. It is called automatically by the Emacs command loop
whenever a command with a ‘^’ character in its interactive
spec is invoked, before the command itself is executed
(see ^).
If shift-select-mode
is non-nil
and the current command
was invoked via shift translation (see shift-translation), this function sets the mark and temporarily
activates the region, unless the region was already temporarily
activated in this way. Otherwise, if the region has been activated
temporarily, it deactivates the mark and restores the variable
transient-mark-mode
to its earlier value.
The value of this buffer-local variable is the list of saved former marks of the current buffer, most recent first.
mark-ring ⇒ (#<marker at 11050 in markers.texi> #<marker at 10832 in markers.texi> ...)
The value of this variable is the maximum size of mark-ring
. If
more marks than this are pushed onto the mark-ring
,
push-mark
discards an old mark when it adds a new one.
When Delete Selection mode (see Delete Selection in The GNU Emacs Manual) is enabled, commands that operate on the
active region (a.k.a. “selection”) behave slightly differently.
This works by adding the function delete-selection-pre-hook
to
the pre-command-hook
(see Command Loop Overview). That function
calls delete-selection-helper
to delete the selection as
appropriate for the command. If you want to adapt a command to Delete
Selection mode, put the delete-selection
property on the
function’s symbol (see Accessing Symbol Properties); commands that don’t have
this property on their symbol won’t delete the selection. This
property can have one of several values to tailor the behavior to what
the command is supposed to do; see the doc strings of
delete-selection-pre-hook
and delete-selection-helper
for the details.
The text between point and the mark is known as the region. Various functions operate on text delimited by point and the mark, but only those functions specifically related to the region itself are described here.
The next two functions signal an error if the mark does not point
anywhere. If Transient Mark mode is enabled and
mark-even-if-inactive
is nil
, they also signal an error
if the mark is inactive.
This function returns the position of the beginning of the region (as an integer). This is the position of either point or the mark, whichever is smaller.
This function returns the position of the end of the region (as an integer). This is the position of either point or the mark, whichever is larger.
Instead of using region-beginning
and region-end
, a
command designed to operate on a region should normally use
interactive
with the ‘r’ specification to find the
beginning and end of the region. This lets other Lisp programs
specify the bounds explicitly as arguments. See Code Characters for interactive
.
This function returns t
if Transient Mark mode is enabled, the
mark is active, and there is a valid region in the buffer. This
function is intended to be used by commands that operate on the
region, instead of on text near point, when the mark is active.
A region is valid if it has a non-zero size, or if the user option
use-empty-active-region
is non-nil
(by default, it is
nil
). The function region-active-p
is similar to
use-region-p
, but considers all regions as valid. In most
cases, you should not use region-active-p
, since if the region
is empty it is often more appropriate to operate on point.
This chapter describes the functions that deal with the text in a buffer. Most examine, insert, or delete text in the current buffer, often operating at point or on text adjacent to point. Many are interactive. All the functions that change the text provide for undoing the changes (see Undo).
Many text-related functions operate on a region of text defined by two
buffer positions passed in arguments named start and end.
These arguments should be either markers (see Markers) or numeric
character positions (see Positions). The order of these arguments
does not matter; it is all right for start to be the end of the
region and end the beginning. For example, (delete-region 1
10)
and (delete-region 10 1)
are equivalent. An
args-out-of-range
error is signaled if either start or
end is outside the accessible portion of the buffer. In an
interactive call, point and the mark are used for these arguments.
Throughout this chapter, “text” refers to the characters in the buffer, together with their properties (when relevant). Keep in mind that point is always between two characters, and the cursor appears on the character after point.
Many functions are provided to look at the characters around point.
Several simple functions are described here. See also looking-at
in Regular Expression Searching.
In the following four functions, “beginning” or “end” of buffer refers to the beginning or end of the accessible portion.
This function returns the character in the current buffer at (i.e.,
immediately after) position position. If position is out of
range for this purpose, either before the beginning of the buffer, or at
or beyond the end, then the value is nil
. The default for
position is point.
In the following example, assume that the first character in the buffer is ‘@’:
(string (char-after 1)) ⇒ "@"
This function returns the character in the current buffer immediately
before position position. If position is out of range for
this purpose, either at or before the beginning of the buffer, or beyond
the end, then the value is nil
. The default for
position is point.
This function returns the character following point in the current
buffer. This is similar to (char-after (point))
. However, if
point is at the end of the buffer, then following-char
returns 0.
Remember that point is always between characters, and the cursor
normally appears over the character following point. Therefore, the
character returned by following-char
is the character the
cursor is over.
In this example, point is between the ‘a’ and the ‘c’.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- Gentlemen may cry ``Pea∗ce! Peace!,'' but there is no peace. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(string (preceding-char)) ⇒ "a" (string (following-char)) ⇒ "c"
This function returns the character preceding point in the current
buffer. See above, under following-char
, for an example. If
point is at the beginning of the buffer, preceding-char
returns
0.
This function returns t
if point is at the beginning of the
buffer. If narrowing is in effect, this means the beginning of the
accessible portion of the text. See also point-min
in
Point.
This function returns t
if point is at the end of the buffer.
If narrowing is in effect, this means the end of accessible portion of
the text. See also point-max
in See Point.
This function returns t
if point is at the beginning of a line.
See Motion by Text Lines. The beginning of the buffer (or of its accessible
portion) always counts as the beginning of a line.
This function returns t
if point is at the end of a line. The
end of the buffer (or of its accessible portion) is always considered
the end of a line.
This section describes functions that allow a Lisp program to convert any portion of the text in the buffer into a string.
This function returns a string containing a copy of the text of the
region defined by positions start and end in the current
buffer. If the arguments are not positions in the accessible portion
of the buffer, buffer-substring
signals an
args-out-of-range
error.
Here’s an example which assumes Font-Lock mode is not enabled:
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of buffer foo ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(buffer-substring 1 10) ⇒ "This is t"
(buffer-substring (point-max) 10) ⇒ "he contents of buffer foo\n"
If the text being copied has any text properties, these are copied into the string along with the characters they belong to. See Text Properties. However, overlays (see Overlays) in the buffer and their properties are ignored, not copied.
For example, if Font-Lock mode is enabled, you might get results like these:
(buffer-substring 1 10) ⇒ #("This is t" 0 1 (fontified t) 1 9 (fontified t))
This is like buffer-substring
, except that it does not copy text
properties, just the characters themselves. See Text Properties.
This function returns the contents of the entire accessible portion of the current buffer, as a string. If the text being copied has any text properties, these are copied into the string along with the characters they belong to.
If you need to make sure the resulting string, when copied to a
different location, will not change its visual appearance due to
reordering of bidirectional text, use the
buffer-substring-with-bidi-context
function
(see buffer-substring-with-bidi-context).
This function filters the buffer text between start and end
using a function specified by the variable
filter-buffer-substring-function
, and returns the result.
The default filter function consults the obsolete wrapper hook
filter-buffer-substring-functions
(see the documentation string
of the macro with-wrapper-hook
for the details about this
obsolete facility). If it is nil
, it returns the unaltered
text from the buffer, i.e., what buffer-substring
would return.
If delete is non-nil
, the function deletes the text
between start and end after copying it, like
delete-and-extract-region
.
Lisp code should use this function instead of buffer-substring
,
buffer-substring-no-properties
,
or delete-and-extract-region
when copying into user-accessible
data structures such as the kill-ring, X clipboard, and registers.
Major and minor modes can modify filter-buffer-substring-function
to alter such text as it is copied out of the buffer.
The value of this variable is a function that filter-buffer-substring
will call to do the actual work. The function receives three
arguments, the same as those of filter-buffer-substring
,
which it should treat as per the documentation of that function. It
should return the filtered text (and optionally delete the source text).
The following two variables are obsoleted by
filter-buffer-substring-function
, but are still supported for
backward compatibility.
This obsolete variable is a wrapper hook, whose members should be functions
that accept four arguments: fun, start, end, and
delete. fun is a function that takes three arguments
(start, end, and delete), and returns a string. In
both cases, the start, end, and delete arguments are
the same as those of filter-buffer-substring
.
The first hook function is passed a fun that is equivalent to
the default operation of filter-buffer-substring
, i.e., it
returns the buffer-substring between start and end and
optionally deletes the original text from the buffer. In most cases,
the hook function will call fun once, and then do its own
processing of the result. The next hook function receives a fun
equivalent to this, and so on. The actual return value is the result
of all the hook functions acting in sequence.
This function returns the symbol (or word) at or near point, as a string. The return value includes no text properties.
If the optional argument really-word is non-nil
, it finds a
word; otherwise, it finds a symbol (which includes both word
characters and symbol constituent characters).
If the optional argument strict is non-nil
, then point
must be in or next to the symbol or word—if no symbol or word is
there, the function returns nil
. Otherwise, a nearby symbol or
word on the same line is acceptable.
Return the thing around or next to point, as a string.
The argument thing is a symbol which specifies a kind of
syntactic entity. Possibilities include symbol
, list
,
sexp
, defun
, filename
, existing-filename
,
url
, word
, sentence
, whitespace
,
line
, page
, string
, and others.
When the optional argument no-properties is non-nil
, this
function strips text properties from the return value.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- Gentlemen may cry ``Pea∗ce! Peace!,'' but there is no peace. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (thing-at-point 'word) ⇒ "Peace" (thing-at-point 'line) ⇒ "Gentlemen may cry ``Peace! Peace!,''\n" (thing-at-point 'whitespace) ⇒ nil
This variable allows users and modes to tweak how
thing-at-point
works. It’s an association list of things
and functions (called with zero parameters) to return that thing.
Entries for thing will be evaluated in turn until a
non-nil
result is returned.
For instance, a major mode could say:
(setq-local thing-at-point-provider-alist (append thing-at-point-provider-alist '((url . my-mode--url-at-point))))
If no providers have a non-nil
return, the thing will be
computed the standard way.
This function lets you compare portions of the text in a buffer, without copying them into strings first.
This function lets you compare two substrings of the same buffer or two
different buffers. The first three arguments specify one substring,
giving a buffer (or a buffer name) and two positions within the
buffer. The last three arguments specify the other substring in the
same way. You can use nil
for buffer1, buffer2, or
both to stand for the current buffer.
The value is negative if the first substring is less, positive if the first is greater, and zero if they are equal. The absolute value of the result is one plus the index of the first differing characters within the substrings.
This function ignores case when comparing characters
if case-fold-search
is non-nil
. It always ignores
text properties.
Suppose you have the text ‘foobarbar haha!rara!’ in the current buffer; then in this example the two substrings are ‘rbar ’ and ‘rara!’. The value is 2 because the first substring is greater at the second character.
(compare-buffer-substrings nil 6 11 nil 16 21) ⇒ 2
Insertion means adding new text to a buffer. The inserted text goes at point—between the character before point and the character after point. Some insertion functions leave point before the inserted text, while other functions leave it after. We call the former insertion after point and the latter insertion before point.
Insertion moves markers located at positions after the insertion
point, so that they stay with the surrounding text (see Markers).
When a marker points at the place of insertion, insertion may or may
not relocate the marker, depending on the marker’s insertion type
(see Marker Insertion Types). Certain special functions such as
insert-before-markers
relocate all such markers to point after
the inserted text, regardless of the markers’ insertion type.
Insertion functions signal an error if the current buffer is read-only (see Read-Only Buffers) or if they insert within read-only text (see Properties with Special Meanings).
These functions copy text characters from strings and buffers along with their properties. The inserted characters have exactly the same properties as the characters they were copied from. By contrast, characters specified as separate arguments, not part of a string or buffer, inherit their text properties from the neighboring text.
The insertion functions convert text from unibyte to multibyte in order to insert in a multibyte buffer, and vice versa—if the text comes from a string or from a buffer. However, they do not convert unibyte character codes 128 through 255 to multibyte characters, not even if the current buffer is a multibyte buffer. See Converting Text Representations.
This function inserts the strings and/or characters args into the
current buffer, at point, moving point forward. In other words, it
inserts the text before point. An error is signaled unless all
args are either strings or characters. The value is nil
.
This function inserts the strings and/or characters args into the
current buffer, at point, moving point forward. An error is signaled
unless all args are either strings or characters. The value is
nil
.
This function is unlike the other insertion functions in that it relocates markers initially pointing at the insertion point, to point after the inserted text. If an overlay begins at the insertion point, the inserted text falls outside the overlay; if a nonempty overlay ends at the insertion point, the inserted text falls inside that overlay.
This command inserts count instances of character into the current buffer before point. The argument count must be an integer, and character must be a character.
If called interactively, this command prompts for character using its Unicode name or its code point. See Inserting Text in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This function does not convert unibyte character codes 128 through 255 to multibyte characters, not even if the current buffer is a multibyte buffer. See Converting Text Representations.
If inherit is non-nil
, the inserted characters inherit
sticky text properties from the two characters before and after the
insertion point. See Stickiness of Text Properties.
This function inserts a portion of buffer from-buffer-or-name
into the current buffer before point. The text inserted is the region
between start (inclusive) and end (exclusive). (These
arguments default to the beginning and end of the accessible portion
of that buffer.) This function returns nil
.
In this example, the form is executed with buffer ‘bar’ as the current buffer. We assume that buffer ‘bar’ is initially empty.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(insert-buffer-substring "foo" 1 20) ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: bar ---------- We hold these truth∗ ---------- Buffer: bar ----------
This is like insert-buffer-substring
except that it does not
copy any text properties.
This is like insert-buffer-substring
, but works in the opposite
direction: The text is copied from the current buffer into
to-buffer. The block of text is copied to the current point in
to-buffer, and point (in that buffer) is advanced to after the
end of the copied text. Is start
/end
is nil
, the
entire text in the current buffer is copied over.
See Stickiness of Text Properties, for other insertion functions that inherit text properties from the nearby text in addition to inserting it. Whitespace inserted by indentation functions also inherits text properties.
This section describes higher-level commands for inserting text, commands intended primarily for the user but useful also in Lisp programs.
This command inserts the entire accessible contents of
from-buffer-or-name (which must exist) into the current buffer
after point. It leaves the mark after the inserted text. The value
is nil
.
This command inserts the character char (the last character typed);
it does so count times, before point, and returns nil
.
Most printing characters are bound to this command. In routine use,
self-insert-command
is the most frequently called function in Emacs,
but programs rarely use it except to install it on a keymap.
In an interactive call, count is the numeric prefix argument.
Self-insertion translates the input character through
translation-table-for-input
. See Translation of Characters.
This command calls auto-fill-function
whenever that is
non-nil
and the character inserted is in the table
auto-fill-chars
(see Auto Filling).
This command performs abbrev expansion if Abbrev mode is enabled and
the inserted character does not have word-constituent
syntax. (See Abbrevs and Abbrev Expansion, and Table of Syntax Classes.) It is also
responsible for calling blink-paren-function
when the inserted
character has close parenthesis syntax (see Blinking Parentheses).
The final thing this command does is to run the hook
post-self-insert-hook
. You could use this to automatically
reindent text as it is typed, for example. The functions on this hook
can use last-command-event
(see Information from the Command Loop) to
access the character just inserted.
If any function on this hook needs to act on the region (see The Region), it should make sure Delete Selection mode (see Delete Selection in The GNU Emacs Manual) doesn’t
delete the region before post-self-insert-hook
functions are
invoked. The way to do so is to add a function that returns
nil
to self-insert-uses-region-functions
, a special hook
that tells Delete Selection mode it should not delete the region.
Do not try substituting your own definition of
self-insert-command
for the standard one. The editor command
loop handles this function specially.
This command inserts newlines into the current buffer before point. If number-of-newlines is supplied, that many newline characters are inserted. In an interactive call, number-of-newlines is the numeric prefix argument.
This command calls self-insert-command
to insert newlines,
which may subsequently break the preceding line by calling
auto-fill-function
(see Auto Filling). Typically what
auto-fill-function
does is insert a newline; thus, the overall
result in this case is to insert two newlines at different places: one
at point, and another earlier in the line. newline
does not
auto-fill if number-of-newlines is non-nil
.
This command does not run the hook post-self-insert-hook
unless
called interactively or interactive is non-nil
.
This command indents to the left margin if that is not zero. See Margins for Filling.
The value returned is nil
.
This command can be used to ensure that you have a specific number of empty lines before point. (An “empty line” is here defined as a line with no characters on it—a line with space characters isn’t an empty line.) It defaults to ensuring that there’s a single empty line before point.
If point isn’t at the beginning of a line, a newline character is inserted first. If there’s more empty lines before point than specified, the number of empty lines is reduced. Otherwise it’s increased to the specified number.
This variable controls whether overwrite mode is in effect. The value
should be overwrite-mode-textual
, overwrite-mode-binary
,
or nil
. overwrite-mode-textual
specifies textual
overwrite mode (treats newlines and tabs specially), and
overwrite-mode-binary
specifies binary overwrite mode (treats
newlines and tabs like any other characters).
Deletion means removing part of the text in a buffer, without saving it in the kill ring (see The Kill Ring). Deleted text can’t be yanked, but can be reinserted using the undo mechanism (see Undo). Some deletion functions do save text in the kill ring in some special cases.
All of the deletion functions operate on the current buffer.
This function deletes the entire text of the current buffer
(not just the accessible portion), leaving it
empty. If the buffer is read-only, it signals a buffer-read-only
error; if some of the text in it is read-only, it signals a
text-read-only
error. Otherwise, it deletes the text without
asking for any confirmation. It returns nil
.
Normally, deleting a large amount of text from a buffer inhibits further
auto-saving of that buffer because it has shrunk. However,
erase-buffer
does not do this, the idea being that the future
text is not really related to the former text, and its size should not
be compared with that of the former text.
This command deletes the text between positions start and
end in the current buffer, and returns nil
. If point was
inside the deleted region, its value afterward is start.
Otherwise, point relocates with the surrounding text, as markers do.
This function deletes the text between positions start and end in the current buffer, and returns a string containing the text just deleted.
If point was inside the deleted region, its value afterward is start. Otherwise, point relocates with the surrounding text, as markers do.
This command deletes count characters directly after point, or
before point if count is negative. If killp is
non-nil
, then it saves the deleted characters in the kill ring.
In an interactive call, count is the numeric prefix argument, and killp is the unprocessed prefix argument. Therefore, if a prefix argument is supplied, the text is saved in the kill ring. If no prefix argument is supplied, then one character is deleted, but not saved in the kill ring.
The value returned is always nil
.
This command deletes count characters directly before point, or
after point if count is negative. If killp is
non-nil
, then it saves the deleted characters in the kill ring.
In an interactive call, count is the numeric prefix argument, and killp is the unprocessed prefix argument. Therefore, if a prefix argument is supplied, the text is saved in the kill ring. If no prefix argument is supplied, then one character is deleted, but not saved in the kill ring.
The value returned is always nil
.
This command deletes count characters backward, changing tabs
into spaces. When the next character to be deleted is a tab, it is
first replaced with the proper number of spaces to preserve alignment
and then one of those spaces is deleted instead of the tab. If
killp is non-nil
, then the command saves the deleted
characters in the kill ring.
Conversion of tabs to spaces happens only if count is positive. If it is negative, exactly −count characters after point are deleted.
In an interactive call, count is the numeric prefix argument, and killp is the unprocessed prefix argument. Therefore, if a prefix argument is supplied, the text is saved in the kill ring. If no prefix argument is supplied, then one character is deleted, but not saved in the kill ring.
The value returned is always nil
.
This option specifies how backward-delete-char-untabify
should
deal with whitespace. Possible values include untabify
, the
default, meaning convert a tab to many spaces and delete one;
hungry
, meaning delete all tabs and spaces before point with
one command; all
meaning delete all tabs, spaces and newlines
before point, and nil
, meaning do nothing special for
whitespace characters.
This section describes higher-level commands for deleting text, commands intended primarily for the user but useful also in Lisp programs.
This function deletes all spaces and tabs around point. It returns
nil
.
If backward-only is non-nil
, the function deletes
spaces and tabs before point, but not after point.
In the following examples, we call delete-horizontal-space
four
times, once on each line, with point between the second and third
characters on the line each time.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I ∗thought I ∗ thought We∗ thought Yo∗u thought ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(delete-horizontal-space) ; Four times.
⇒ nil
---------- Buffer: foo ----------
Ithought
Ithought
Wethought
You thought
---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This function joins the line point is on to the previous line, deleting
any whitespace at the join and in some cases replacing it with one
space. If join-following-p is non-nil
,
delete-indentation
joins this line to the following line
instead. Otherwise, if beg and end are non-nil
,
this function joins all lines in the region they define.
In an interactive call, join-following-p is the prefix argument,
and beg and end are, respectively, the start and end of
the region if it is active, else nil
. The function returns
nil
.
If there is a fill prefix, and the second of the lines being joined
starts with the prefix, then delete-indentation
deletes the
fill prefix before joining the lines. See Margins for Filling.
In the example below, point is located on the line starting ‘events’, and it makes no difference if there are trailing spaces in the preceding line.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- When in the course of human ∗ events, it becomes necessary ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(delete-indentation) ⇒ nil
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- When in the course of human∗ events, it becomes necessary ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
After the lines are joined, the function fixup-whitespace
is
responsible for deciding whether to leave a space at the junction.
This function replaces all the horizontal whitespace surrounding point
with either one space or no space, according to the context. It
returns nil
.
At the beginning or end of a line, the appropriate amount of space is none. Before a character with close parenthesis syntax, or after a character with open parenthesis or expression-prefix syntax, no space is also appropriate. Otherwise, one space is appropriate. See Table of Syntax Classes.
In the example below, fixup-whitespace
is called the first time
with point before the word ‘spaces’ in the first line. For the
second invocation, point is directly after the ‘(’.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This has too many ∗spaces This has too many spaces at the start of (∗ this list) ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(fixup-whitespace) ⇒ nil (fixup-whitespace) ⇒ nil
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This has too many spaces This has too many spaces at the start of (this list) ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This command replaces any spaces and tabs around point with a single
space, or n spaces if n is specified. It returns
nil
.
This function deletes blank lines surrounding point. If point is on a blank line with one or more blank lines before or after it, then all but one of them are deleted. If point is on an isolated blank line, then it is deleted. If point is on a nonblank line, the command deletes all blank lines immediately following it.
A blank line is defined as a line containing only tabs and spaces.
delete-blank-lines
returns nil
.
Delete trailing whitespace in the region defined by start and end.
This command deletes whitespace characters after the last non-whitespace character in each line in the region.
If this command acts on the entire buffer (i.e., if called
interactively with the mark inactive, or called from Lisp with
end nil
), it also deletes all trailing lines at the end of the
buffer if the variable delete-trailing-lines
is non-nil
.
Kill functions delete text like the deletion functions, but save it so that the user can reinsert it by yanking. Most of these functions have ‘kill-’ in their name. By contrast, the functions whose names start with ‘delete-’ normally do not save text for yanking (though they can still be undone); these are deletion functions.
Most of the kill commands are primarily for interactive use, and are not described here. What we do describe are the functions provided for use in writing such commands. You can use these functions to write commands for killing text. When you need to delete text for internal purposes within a Lisp function, you should normally use deletion functions, so as not to disturb the kill ring contents. See Deleting Text.
Killed text is saved for later yanking in the kill ring. This
is a list that holds a number of recent kills, not just the last text
kill. We call this a “ring” because yanking treats it as having
elements in a cyclic order. The list is kept in the variable
kill-ring
, and can be operated on with the usual functions for
lists; there are also specialized functions, described in this section,
that treat it as a ring.
Some people think this use of the word “kill” is unfortunate, since it refers to operations that specifically do not destroy the entities killed. This is in sharp contrast to ordinary life, in which death is permanent and killed entities do not come back to life. Therefore, other metaphors have been proposed. For example, the term “cut ring” makes sense to people who, in pre-computer days, used scissors and paste to cut up and rearrange manuscripts. However, it would be difficult to change the terminology now.
The kill ring records killed text as strings in a list, most recent first. A short kill ring, for example, might look like this:
("some text" "a different piece of text" "even older text")
When the list reaches kill-ring-max
entries in length, adding a
new entry automatically deletes the last entry.
When kill commands are interwoven with other commands, each kill command makes a new entry in the kill ring. Multiple kill commands in succession build up a single kill ring entry, which would be yanked as a unit; the second and subsequent consecutive kill commands add text to the entry made by the first one.
For yanking, one entry in the kill ring is designated the front of the ring. Some yank commands rotate the ring by designating a different element as the front. But this virtual rotation doesn’t change the list itself—the most recent entry always comes first in the list.
kill-region
is the usual subroutine for killing text. Any
command that calls this function is a kill command (and should
probably have ‘kill’ in its name). kill-region
puts the
newly killed text in a new element at the beginning of the kill ring or
adds it to the most recent element. It determines automatically (using
last-command
) whether the previous command was a kill command,
and if so appends the killed text to the most recent entry.
The commands described below can filter the killed text before they
save it in the kill ring. They call filter-buffer-substring
(see Examining Buffer Contents) to perform the filtering. By default,
there’s no filtering, but major and minor modes and hook functions can
set up filtering, so that text saved in the kill ring is different
from what was in the buffer.
This function kills the stretch of text between start and
end; but if the optional argument region is
non-nil
, it ignores start and end, and kills the
text in the current region instead. The text is deleted but saved in
the kill ring, along with its text properties. The value is always
nil
.
In an interactive call, start and end are point and
the mark, and region is always non-nil
, so the command
always kills the text in the current region.
If the buffer or text is read-only, kill-region
modifies the kill
ring just the same, then signals an error without modifying the buffer.
This is convenient because it lets the user use a series of kill
commands to copy text from a read-only buffer into the kill ring.
If this option is non-nil
, kill-region
does not signal an
error if the buffer or text is read-only. Instead, it simply returns,
updating the kill ring but not changing the buffer.
This function saves the stretch of text between start and
end on the kill ring (including text properties), but does not
delete the text from the buffer. However, if the optional argument
region is non-nil
, the function ignores start and
end, and saves the current region instead. It always returns
nil
.
In an interactive call, start and end are point and
the mark, and region is always non-nil
, so the command
always saves the text in the current region.
The command does not set this-command
to kill-region
, so a
subsequent kill command does not append to the same kill ring entry.
Yanking means inserting text from the kill ring, but it does not
insert the text blindly. The yank
command, and related
commands, use insert-for-yank
to perform special processing on
the text before it is inserted.
This function works like insert
, except that it processes the
text in string according to the yank-handler
text
property, as well as the variables yank-handled-properties
and
yank-excluded-properties
(see below), before inserting the
result into the current buffer.
string will be run through yank-transform-functions
(see
below) before inserting.
This function resembles insert-buffer-substring
, except that it
processes the text according to yank-handled-properties
and
yank-excluded-properties
. (It does not handle the
yank-handler
property, which does not normally occur in buffer
text anyway.)
If you put a yank-handler
text property on all or part of a
string, that alters how insert-for-yank
inserts the string. If
different parts of the string have different yank-handler
values (comparison being done with eq
), each substring is
handled separately. The property value must be a list of one to four
elements, with the following format (where elements after the first
may be omitted):
(function param noexclude undo)
Here is what the elements do:
When function is non-nil
, it is called instead of
insert
to insert the string, with one argument—the string to
insert.
If param is present and non-nil
, it replaces string
(or the substring of string being processed) as the object
passed to function (or insert
). For example, if
function is yank-rectangle
, param should be a list
of strings to insert as a rectangle.
If noexclude is present and non-nil
, that disables the
normal action of yank-handled-properties
and
yank-excluded-properties
on the inserted string.
If undo is present and non-nil
, it is a function that will be
called by yank-pop
to undo the insertion of the current object.
It is called with two arguments, the start and end of the current
region. function can set yank-undo-function
to override
the undo value.
This variable specifies special text property handling conditions for
yanked text. It takes effect after the text has been inserted (either
normally, or via the yank-handler
property), and prior to
yank-excluded-properties
taking effect.
The value should be an alist of elements (prop
. fun)
. Each alist element is handled in order. The inserted
text is scanned for stretches of text having text properties eq
to prop; for each such stretch, fun is called with three
arguments: the value of the property, and the start and end positions
of the text.
The value of this variable is the list of properties to remove from
inserted text. Its default value contains properties that might lead
to annoying results, such as causing the text to respond to the mouse
or specifying key bindings. It takes effect after
yank-handled-properties
.
This variable is a list of functions. Each function is called (in
order) with the string to be yanked as the argument, and should
return a (possibly transformed) string. This variable can be set
globally, but can also be used to create new commands that are
variations on yank
. For instance, to create a command that
works like yank
, but cleans up whitespace before inserting, you
could say something like:
(defun yank-with-clean-whitespace () (interactive) (let ((yank-transform-functions '(string-clean-whitespace))) (call-interactively #'yank)))
This section describes higher-level commands for yanking, which are
intended primarily for the user but useful also in Lisp programs.
Both yank
and yank-pop
honor the
yank-excluded-properties
variable and yank-handler
text
property (see Yanking).
This command inserts before point the text at the front of the kill
ring. It sets the mark at the beginning of that text, using
push-mark
(see The Mark), and puts point at the end.
If arg is a non-nil
list (which occurs interactively when
the user types C-u with no digits), then yank
inserts the
text as described above, but puts point before the yanked text and
sets the mark after it.
If arg is a number, then yank
inserts the argth
most recently killed text—the argth element of the kill ring
list, counted cyclically from the front, which is considered the
first element for this purpose.
yank
does not alter the contents of the kill ring, unless it
used text provided by another program, in which case it pushes that text
onto the kill ring. However if arg is an integer different from
one, it rotates the kill ring to place the yanked string at the front.
yank
returns nil
.
When invoked immediately after a yank
or another
yank-pop
, this command replaces the just-yanked entry from the
kill ring with a different entry from the kill ring. When this
command is invoked like that, the region contains text that was just
inserted by another yank command. yank-pop
deletes that text
and inserts in its place a different piece of killed text. It does
not add the deleted text to the kill ring, since it is already in the
kill ring somewhere. It does however rotate the kill ring to place
the newly yanked string at the front.
If arg is nil
, then the replacement text is the previous
element of the kill ring. If arg is numeric, the replacement is
the argth previous kill. If arg is negative, a more recent
kill is the replacement.
The sequence of kills in the kill ring wraps around, so if
yank-pop
is invoked repeatedly and reaches the oldest kill, the
one that comes after it is the newest one, and the one before the
newest one is the oldest one.
This command can also be invoked after a command that is not a yank command. In that case, it prompts in the minibuffer for a kill-ring entry, with completion, and uses the kill ring elements as the minibuffer history (see Minibuffer History). This allows the user to interactively select one of the previous kills recorded in the kill ring.
The return value is always nil
.
If this variable is non-nil
, the function yank-pop
uses
its value instead of delete-region
to delete the text
inserted by the previous yank
or
yank-pop
command. The value must be a function of two
arguments, the start and end of the current region.
The function insert-for-yank
automatically sets this variable
according to the undo element of the yank-handler
text property, if there is one.
These functions and variables provide access to the kill ring at a lower level, but are still convenient for use in Lisp programs, because they take care of interaction with window system selections (see Window System Selections).
The function current-kill
rotates the yanking pointer, which
designates the front of the kill ring, by n places (from newer
kills to older ones), and returns the text at that place in the ring.
If the optional second argument do-not-move is non-nil
,
then current-kill
doesn’t alter the yanking pointer; it just
returns the nth kill, counting from the current yanking pointer.
If n is zero, indicating a request for the latest kill,
current-kill
calls the value of
interprogram-paste-function
(documented below) before
consulting the kill ring. If that value is a function and calling it
returns a string or a list of several strings, current-kill
pushes the strings onto the kill ring and returns the first string.
It also sets the yanking pointer to point to the kill-ring entry of
the first string returned by interprogram-paste-function
,
regardless of the value of do-not-move. Otherwise,
current-kill
does not treat a zero value for n specially:
it returns the entry pointed at by the yanking pointer and does not
move the yanking pointer.
This function pushes the text string onto the kill ring and
makes the yanking pointer point to it. It discards the oldest entry
if appropriate. It also invokes the values of
interprogram-paste-function
(subject to
the user option save-interprogram-paste-before-kill
)
and interprogram-cut-function
(see below).
If replace is non-nil
, then kill-new
replaces the
first element of the kill ring with string, rather than pushing
string onto the kill ring.
This function appends the text string to the first entry in the
kill ring and makes the yanking pointer point to the combined entry.
Normally string goes at the end of the entry, but if
before-p is non-nil
, it goes at the beginning. This
function calls kill-new
as a subroutine, thus causing the
values of interprogram-cut-function
and possibly
interprogram-paste-function
(see below) to be invoked by
extension.
This variable provides a way of transferring killed text from other
programs, when you are using a window system. Its value should be
nil
or a function of no arguments.
If the value is a function, current-kill
calls it to get the
most recent kill. If the function returns a non-nil
value,
then that value is used as the most recent kill. If it returns
nil
, then the front of the kill ring is used.
To facilitate support for window systems that support multiple
selections, this function may also return a list of strings. In that
case, the first string is used as the most recent kill, and all
the other strings are pushed onto the kill ring, for easy access by
yank-pop
.
The normal use of this function is to get the window system’s
clipboard as the most recent kill, even if the selection belongs to
another application. See Window System Selections. However, if
the clipboard contents come from the current Emacs session, this
function should return nil
.
This variable provides a way of communicating killed text to other
programs, when you are using a window system. Its value should be
nil
or a function of one required argument.
If the value is a function, kill-new
and kill-append
call
it with the new first element of the kill ring as the argument.
The normal use of this function is to put newly killed text in the window system’s clipboard. See Window System Selections.
The variable kill-ring
holds the kill ring contents, in the
form of a list of strings. The most recent kill is always at the front
of the list.
The kill-ring-yank-pointer
variable points to a link in the
kill ring list, whose CAR is the text to yank next. We say it
identifies the front of the ring. Moving
kill-ring-yank-pointer
to a different link is called
rotating the kill ring. We call the kill ring a “ring” because
the functions that move the yank pointer wrap around from the end of the
list to the beginning, or vice-versa. Rotation of the kill ring is
virtual; it does not change the value of kill-ring
.
Both kill-ring
and kill-ring-yank-pointer
are Lisp
variables whose values are normally lists. The word “pointer” in the
name of the kill-ring-yank-pointer
indicates that the variable’s
purpose is to identify one element of the list for use by the next yank
command.
The value of kill-ring-yank-pointer
is always eq
to one
of the links in the kill ring list. The element it identifies is the
CAR of that link. Kill commands, which change the kill ring, also
set this variable to the value of kill-ring
. The effect is to
rotate the ring so that the newly killed text is at the front.
Here is a diagram that shows the variable kill-ring-yank-pointer
pointing to the second entry in the kill ring ("some text" "a
different piece of text" "yet older text")
.
kill-ring ---- kill-ring-yank-pointer | | | v | --- --- --- --- --- --- --> | | |------> | | |--> | | |--> nil --- --- --- --- --- --- | | | | | | | | -->"yet older text" | | | --> "a different piece of text" | --> "some text"
This state of affairs might occur after C-y (yank
)
immediately followed by M-y (yank-pop
).
This variable holds the list of killed text sequences, most recently killed first.
This variable’s value indicates which element of the kill ring is at the
front of the ring for yanking. More precisely, the value is a tail
of the value of kill-ring
, and its CAR is the kill string
that C-y should yank.
The value of this variable is the maximum length to which the kill
ring can grow, before elements are thrown away at the end. The default
value for kill-ring-max
is 120.
Most buffers have an undo list, which records all changes made
to the buffer’s text so that they can be undone. (The buffers that
don’t have one are usually special-purpose buffers for which Emacs
assumes that undoing is not useful. In particular, any buffer whose
name begins with a space has its undo recording off by default;
see Buffer Names.) All the primitives that modify the
text in the buffer automatically add elements to the front of the undo
list, which is in the variable buffer-undo-list
.
This buffer-local variable’s value is the undo list of the current
buffer. A value of t
disables the recording of undo information.
Here are the kinds of elements an undo list can have:
position
This kind of element records a previous value of point; undoing this element moves point to position. Ordinary cursor motion does not make any sort of undo record, but deletion operations use these entries to record where point was before the command.
(beg . end)
This kind of element indicates how to delete text that was inserted. Upon insertion, the text occupied the range beg–end in the buffer.
(text . position)
This kind of element indicates how to reinsert text that was deleted.
The deleted text itself is the string text. The place to
reinsert it is (abs position)
. If position is
positive, point was at the beginning of the deleted text, otherwise it
was at the end. Zero or more (marker . adjustment)
elements follow immediately after this element.
(t . time-flag)
This kind of element indicates that an unmodified buffer became
modified. A time-flag that is a non-integer Lisp timestamp
represents the visited file’s modification time as of
when it was previously visited or saved, using the same format as
current-time
; see Time of Day.
A time-flag of 0 means the buffer does not correspond to any file;
−1 means the visited file previously did not exist.
primitive-undo
uses these
values to determine whether to mark the buffer as unmodified once again;
it does so only if the file’s status matches that of time-flag.
(nil property value beg . end)
This kind of element records a change in a text property. Here’s how you might undo the change:
(put-text-property beg end property value)
(marker . adjustment)
This kind of element records the fact that the marker marker was relocated due to deletion of surrounding text, and that it moved adjustment character positions. If the marker’s location is consistent with the (text . position) element preceding it in the undo list, then undoing this element moves marker − adjustment characters.
(apply funname . args)
This is an extensible undo item, which is undone by calling funname with arguments args.
(apply delta beg end funname . args)
This is an extensible undo item, which records a change limited to the range beg to end, which increased the size of the buffer by delta characters. It is undone by calling funname with arguments args.
This kind of element enables undo limited to a region to determine whether the element pertains to that region.
nil
This element is a boundary. The elements between two boundaries are called a change group; normally, each change group corresponds to one keyboard command, and undo commands normally undo an entire group as a unit.
This function places a boundary element in the undo list. The undo
command stops at such a boundary, and successive undo commands undo
to earlier and earlier boundaries. This function returns nil
.
Calling this function explicitly is useful for splitting the effects of
a command into more than one unit. For example, query-replace
calls undo-boundary
after each replacement, so that the user can
undo individual replacements one by one.
Mostly, however, this function is called automatically at an appropriate time.
The editor command loop automatically calls undo-boundary
just
before executing each key sequence, so that each undo normally undoes
the effects of one command. A few exceptional commands are
amalgamating: these commands generally cause small changes to
buffers, so with these a boundary is inserted only every 20th command,
allowing the changes to be undone as a group. By default, the commands
self-insert-command
, which produces self-inserting input
characters (see User-Level Insertion Commands), and delete-char
,
which deletes characters (see Deleting Text), are amalgamating.
Where a command affects the contents of several buffers, as may happen,
for example, when a function on the post-command-hook
affects a
buffer other than the current-buffer
, then undo-boundary
will be called in each of the affected buffers.
This function can be called before an amalgamating command. It
removes the previous undo-boundary
if a series of such calls
have been made.
The maximum number of changes that can be amalgamated is controlled by
the amalgamating-undo-limit
variable. If this variable is 1,
no changes are amalgamated.
A Lisp program can amalgamate a series of changes into a single change
group by calling undo-amalgamate-change-group
(see Atomic Change Groups). Note that amalgamating-undo-limit
has no effect on
the groups produced by that function.
Some buffers, such as process buffers, can change even when no
commands are executing. In these cases, undo-boundary
is
normally called periodically by the timer in this variable. Setting
this variable to non-nil
prevents this behavior.
This variable is normally nil
, but the undo commands bind it to
t
. This is so that various kinds of change hooks can tell when
they’re being called for the sake of undoing.
This is the basic function for undoing elements of an undo list. It undoes the first count elements of list, returning the rest of list.
primitive-undo
adds elements to the buffer’s undo list when it
changes the buffer. Undo commands avoid confusion by saving the undo
list value at the beginning of a sequence of undo operations. Then the
undo operations use and update the saved value. The new elements added
by undoing are not part of this saved value, so they don’t interfere with
continuing to undo.
This function does not bind undo-in-progress
.
This macro removes all the undo boundaries inserted during the execution of body so that it can be undone as a single step.
Some commands leave the region active after execution in such a way that
it interferes with selective undo of that command. To make undo
ignore the active region when invoked immediately after such a command,
set the property undo-inhibit-region
of the command’s function
symbol to a non-nil
value. See Standard Symbol Properties.
This section describes how to enable and disable undo information for a given buffer. It also explains how the undo list is truncated automatically so it doesn’t get too big.
Recording of undo information in a newly created buffer is normally
enabled to start with; but if the buffer name starts with a space, the
undo recording is initially disabled. You can explicitly enable or
disable undo recording with the following two functions, or by setting
buffer-undo-list
yourself.
This command enables recording undo information for buffer
buffer-or-name, so that subsequent changes can be undone. If no
argument is supplied, then the current buffer is used. This function
does nothing if undo recording is already enabled in the buffer. It
returns nil
.
In an interactive call, buffer-or-name is the current buffer. You cannot specify any other buffer.
This function discards the undo list of buffer-or-name, and disables further recording of undo information. As a result, it is no longer possible to undo either previous changes or any subsequent changes. If the undo list of buffer-or-name is already disabled, this function has no effect.
In an interactive call, BUFFER-OR-NAME is the current buffer. You
cannot specify any other buffer. This function returns nil
.
As editing continues, undo lists get longer and longer. To prevent
them from using up all available memory space, garbage collection trims
them back to size limits you can set. (For this purpose, the size
of an undo list measures the cons cells that make up the list, plus the
strings of deleted text.) Three variables control the range of acceptable
sizes: undo-limit
, undo-strong-limit
and
undo-outer-limit
. In these variables, size is counted as the
number of bytes occupied, which includes both saved text and other
data.
This is the soft limit for the acceptable size of an undo list. The change group at which this size is exceeded is the last one kept.
This is the upper limit for the acceptable size of an undo list. The
change group at which this size is exceeded is discarded itself (along
with all older change groups). There is one exception: the very latest
change group is only discarded if it exceeds undo-outer-limit
.
If at garbage collection time the undo info for the current command exceeds this limit, Emacs discards the info and displays a warning. This is a last ditch limit to prevent memory overflow.
If this variable is non-nil
, when the undo info exceeds
undo-outer-limit
, Emacs asks in the echo area whether to
discard the info. The default value is nil
, which means to
discard it automatically.
This option is mainly intended for debugging. Garbage collection is inhibited while the question is asked, which means that Emacs might leak memory if the user waits too long before answering the question.
Filling means adjusting the lengths of lines (by moving the line
breaks) so that they are nearly (but no greater than) a specified
maximum width. Additionally, lines can be justified, which means
inserting spaces to make the left and/or right margins line up
precisely. The width is controlled by the variable fill-column
.
For ease of reading, lines should be no longer than 70 or so columns.
You can use Auto Fill mode (see Auto Filling) to fill text automatically as you insert it, but changes to existing text may leave it improperly filled. Then you must fill the text explicitly.
Most of the commands in this section return values that are not
meaningful. All the functions that do filling take note of the current
left margin, current right margin, and current justification style
(see Margins for Filling). If the current justification style is
none
, the filling functions don’t actually do anything.
Several of the filling functions have an argument justify.
If it is non-nil
, that requests some kind of justification. It
can be left
, right
, full
, or center
, to
request a specific style of justification. If it is t
, that
means to use the current justification style for this part of the text
(see current-justification
, below). Any other value is treated
as full
.
When you call the filling functions interactively, using a prefix
argument implies the value full
for justify.
This command fills the paragraph at or after point. If
justify is non-nil
, each line is justified as well.
It uses the ordinary paragraph motion commands to find paragraph
boundaries. See Paragraphs in The GNU Emacs Manual.
When region is non-nil
, then if Transient Mark mode is
enabled and the mark is active, this command calls fill-region
to fill all the paragraphs in the region, instead of filling only the
current paragraph. When this command is called interactively,
region is t
.
This command fills each of the paragraphs in the region from start
to end. It justifies as well if justify is
non-nil
.
If nosqueeze is non-nil
, that means to leave whitespace
other than line breaks untouched. If to-eop is non-nil
,
that means to keep filling to the end of the paragraph—or the next hard
newline, if use-hard-newlines
is enabled (see below).
The variable paragraph-separate
controls how to distinguish
paragraphs. See Standard Regular Expressions Used in Editing.
Most Emacs buffers use monospaced text, so all the filling functions
(like fill-region
) work based on the number of characters and
char-width
. However, Emacs can render other types of things,
like text that contains images and using proportional fonts, and the
pixel-fill-region
exists to handle that. It fills the region
of text between start and end at pixel granularity, so
text using variable-pitch fonts or several different fonts looks
filled regardless of different character sizes. The argument
pixel-width specifies the maximum pixel width a line is allowed
to have after filling; it is the pixel-resolution equivalent of the
fill-column
in fill-region
. For instance, this Lisp
snippet will insert text using a proportional font, and then fill this
to be no wider than 300 pixels:
(insert (propertize "This is a sentence that's ends here." 'face 'variable-pitch)) (pixel-fill-region (point) (point-max) 300)
If start isn’t at the start of a line, the horizontal position of start, converted to pixel units, will be used as the indentation prefix on subsequent lines.
The pixel-fill-width
helper function can be used to compute the
pixel width to use. If given no arguments, it’ll return a value
slightly less than the width of the current window. The first
optional value, columns, specifies the number of columns using
the standard, monospaced fonts, e.g. fill-column
. The second
optional value is the window to use. You’d typically use it like
this:
(pixel-fill-region start end (pixel-fill-width fill-column))
This command fills each paragraph in the region according to its individual fill prefix. Thus, if the lines of a paragraph were indented with spaces, the filled paragraph will remain indented in the same fashion.
The first two arguments, start and end, are the beginning
and end of the region to be filled. The third and fourth arguments,
justify and citation-regexp, are optional. If
justify is non-nil
, the paragraphs are justified as
well as filled. If citation-regexp is non-nil
, it means the
function is operating on a mail message and therefore should not fill
the header lines. If citation-regexp is a string, it is used as
a regular expression; if it matches the beginning of a line, that line
is treated as a citation marker.
Ordinarily, fill-individual-paragraphs
regards each change in
indentation as starting a new paragraph. If
fill-individual-varying-indent
is non-nil
, then only
separator lines separate paragraphs. That mode can handle indented
paragraphs with additional indentation on the first line.
This variable alters the action of fill-individual-paragraphs
as
described above.
This command considers a region of text as a single paragraph and fills
it. If the region was made up of many paragraphs, the blank lines
between paragraphs are removed. This function justifies as well as
filling when justify is non-nil
.
If nosqueeze is non-nil
, that means to leave whitespace
other than line breaks untouched. If squeeze-after is
non-nil
, it specifies a position in the region, and means
that whitespace other than line breaks should be left untouched before
that position.
In Adaptive Fill mode, this command calls fill-context-prefix
to
choose a fill prefix by default. See Adaptive Fill Mode.
This command inserts spaces between the words of the current line so
that the line ends exactly at fill-column
. It returns
nil
.
The argument how, if non-nil
specifies explicitly the style
of justification. It can be left
, right
, full
,
center
, or none
. If it is t
, that means to
follow specified justification style (see current-justification
,
below). nil
means to do full justification.
If eop is non-nil
, that means do only left-justification
if current-justification
specifies full justification. This is
used for the last line of a paragraph; even if the paragraph as a
whole is fully justified, the last line should not be.
If nosqueeze is non-nil
, that means do not change interior
whitespace.
This variable’s value specifies the style of justification to use for
text that doesn’t specify a style with a text property. The possible
values are left
, right
, full
, center
, or
none
. The default value is left
.
This function returns the proper justification style to use for filling the text around point.
This returns the value of the justification
text property at
point, or the variable default-justification
if there is no such
text property. However, it returns nil
rather than none
to mean “don’t justify”.
If this variable is non-nil
, a period followed by just one space
does not count as the end of a sentence, and the filling functions
avoid breaking the line at such a place.
If this variable is non-nil
, a sentence can end without a
period. This is used for languages like Thai, where sentences end
with a double space but without a period.
If this variable is non-nil
, it should be a string of
characters that can end a sentence without following spaces.
If this variable is non-nil
, two words of different kind (e.g.,
English and CJK) will be separated with a space when concatenating one
that is in the end of a line and the other that is in the beginning of
the next line for filling.
This variable provides a way to override the filling of paragraphs.
If its value is non-nil
, fill-paragraph
calls this
function to do the work. If the function returns a non-nil
value, fill-paragraph
assumes the job is done, and immediately
returns that value.
The usual use of this feature is to fill comments in programming language modes. If the function needs to fill a paragraph in the usual way, it can do so as follows:
(let ((fill-paragraph-function nil)) (fill-paragraph arg))
This variable provides a way to override how the filling functions,
such as fill-region
and fill-paragraph
, move forward to
the next paragraph. Its value should be a function, which is called
with a single argument n, the number of paragraphs to move, and
should return the difference between n and the number of
paragraphs actually moved. The default value of this variable is
forward-paragraph
. See Paragraphs in The GNU Emacs
Manual.
If this variable is non-nil
, the filling functions do not delete
newlines that have the hard
text property. These hard
newlines act as paragraph separators. See Hard and Soft Newlines in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This buffer-local variable, if non-nil
, specifies a string of
text that appears at the beginning of normal text lines and should be
disregarded when filling them. Any line that fails to start with the
fill prefix is considered the start of a paragraph; so is any line
that starts with the fill prefix followed by additional whitespace.
Lines that start with the fill prefix but no additional whitespace are
ordinary text lines that can be filled together. The resulting filled
lines also start with the fill prefix.
The fill prefix follows the left margin whitespace, if any.
This buffer-local variable specifies the maximum width of filled lines. Its value should be an integer, which is a number of columns. All the filling, justification, and centering commands are affected by this variable, including Auto Fill mode (see Auto Filling).
As a practical matter, if you are writing text for other people to
read, you should set fill-column
to no more than 70. Otherwise
the line will be too long for people to read comfortably, and this can
make the text seem clumsy.
The default value for fill-column
is 70. To disable Auto Fill
mode in a specific mode, you could say something like:
(add-hook 'foo-mode-hook (lambda () (auto-fill-mode -1))
This sets the left-margin
property on the text from from to
to to the value margin. If Auto Fill mode is enabled, this
command also refills the region to fit the new margin.
This sets the right-margin
property on the text from from
to to to the value margin. If Auto Fill mode is enabled,
this command also refills the region to fit the new margin.
This function returns the proper left margin value to use for filling
the text around point. The value is the sum of the left-margin
property of the character at the start of the current line (or zero if
none), and the value of the variable left-margin
.
This function returns the proper fill column value to use for filling
the text around point. The value is the value of the fill-column
variable, minus the value of the right-margin
property of the
character after point.
This function moves point to the left margin of the current line. The
column moved to is determined by calling the function
current-left-margin
. If the argument n is non-nil
,
move-to-left-margin
moves forward n−1 lines first.
If force is non-nil
, that says to fix the line’s
indentation if that doesn’t match the left margin value.
This function removes left margin indentation from the text between
from and to. The amount of indentation to delete is
determined by calling current-left-margin
. In no case does this
function delete non-whitespace. If from and to are omitted,
they default to the whole buffer.
This function adjusts the indentation at the beginning of the current
line to the value specified by the variable left-margin
. (That
may involve either inserting or deleting whitespace.) This function
is value of indent-line-function
in Paragraph-Indent Text mode.
This variable specifies the base left margin column. In Fundamental mode, RET indents to this column. This variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set in any fashion.
This variable gives major modes a way to specify not to break a line
at certain places. Its value should be a list of functions. Whenever
filling considers breaking the line at a certain place in the buffer,
it calls each of these functions with no arguments and with point
located at that place. If any of the functions returns
non-nil
, then the line won’t be broken there.
When Adaptive Fill Mode is enabled, Emacs determines the fill prefix automatically from the text in each paragraph being filled rather than using a predetermined value. During filling, this fill prefix gets inserted at the start of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph as described in Filling, and in Auto Filling.
Adaptive Fill mode is enabled when this variable is non-nil
.
It is t
by default.
This function implements the heart of Adaptive Fill mode; it chooses a fill prefix based on the text between from and to, typically the start and end of a paragraph. It does this by looking at the first two lines of the paragraph, based on the variables described below.
Usually, this function returns the fill prefix, a string. However,
before doing this, the function makes a final check (not specially
mentioned in the following) that a line starting with this prefix
wouldn’t look like the start of a paragraph. Should this happen, the
function signals the anomaly by returning nil
instead.
In detail, fill-context-prefix
does this:
adaptive-fill-function
(if any),
then the regular expression adaptive-fill-regexp
(see below).
The first non-nil
result of these, or the empty string if
they’re both nil
, becomes the first line’s candidate.
adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
below).
nil
.
Adaptive Fill mode matches this regular expression against the text starting after the left margin whitespace (if any) on a line; the characters it matches are that line’s candidate for the fill prefix.
The default value matches whitespace with certain punctuation characters intermingled.
Used only in one-line paragraphs, this regular expression acts as an
additional check of the validity of the one available candidate fill
prefix: the candidate must match this regular expression, or match
comment-start-skip
. If it doesn’t, fill-context-prefix
replaces the candidate with a string of spaces of the same width
as it.
The default value of this variable is "\\`[ \t]*\\'"
, which
matches only a string of whitespace. The effect of this default is to
force the fill prefixes found in one-line paragraphs always to be pure
whitespace.
You can specify more complex ways of choosing a fill prefix
automatically by setting this variable to a function. The function is
called with point after the left margin (if any) of a line, and it
must preserve point. It should return either that line’s fill
prefix or nil
, meaning it has failed to determine a prefix.
Auto Fill mode is a minor mode that fills lines automatically as text is inserted. See Auto Fill in The GNU Emacs Manual. This section describes some variables used by Auto Fill mode. For a description of functions that you can call explicitly to fill and justify existing text, see Filling.
Auto Fill mode also enables the functions that change the margins and justification style to refill portions of the text. See Margins for Filling.
The value of this buffer-local variable should be a function (of no
arguments) to be called after self-inserting a character from the table
auto-fill-chars
, see below. It may be nil
, in which case
nothing special is done in that case.
The value of auto-fill-function
is do-auto-fill
when Auto
Fill mode is enabled. That is a function whose sole purpose is to
implement the usual strategy for breaking a line.
This variable specifies the function to use for
auto-fill-function
, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. Major
modes can set buffer-local values for this variable to alter how Auto
Fill works.
A char table of characters which invoke auto-fill-function
when
self-inserted—space and newline in most language environments. They
have an entry t
in the table.
This variable, if non-nil
, means to fill lines automatically
within comments only. More precisely, this means that if a comment
syntax was defined for the current buffer, then self-inserting a
character outside of a comment will not call auto-fill-function
.
The sorting functions described in this section all rearrange text in
a buffer. This is in contrast to the function sort
, which
rearranges the order of the elements of a list (see Functions that Rearrange Lists).
The values returned by these functions are not meaningful.
This function is the general text-sorting routine that subdivides a buffer into records and then sorts them. Most of the commands in this section use this function.
To understand how sort-subr
works, consider the whole accessible
portion of the buffer as being divided into disjoint pieces called
sort records. The records may or may not be contiguous, but they
must not overlap. A portion of each sort record (perhaps all of it) is
designated as the sort key. Sorting rearranges the records in order by
their sort keys.
Usually, the records are rearranged in order of ascending sort key.
If the first argument to the sort-subr
function, reverse,
is non-nil
, the sort records are rearranged in order of
descending sort key.
The next four arguments to sort-subr
are functions that are
called to move point across a sort record. They are called many times
from within sort-subr
.
sort-subr
is
called. Therefore, you should usually move point to the beginning of
the buffer before calling sort-subr
.
This function can indicate there are no more sort records by leaving point at the end of the buffer.
nil
value to be used as the sort key, or
return nil
to indicate that the sort key is in the buffer
starting at point. In the latter case, endkeyfun is called to
find the end of the sort key.
nil
and this argument is omitted (or
nil
), then the sort key extends to the end of the record. There
is no need for endkeyfun if startkeyfun returns a
non-nil
value.
The argument predicate is the function to use to compare keys.
It is called with two arguments, the keys to compare, and should
return non-nil
if the first key should come before the second
in the sorting order. What exactly are the key arguments depends on
what startkeyfun and endkeyfun return. If predicate
is omitted or nil
, it defaults to <
if the keys are
numbers, to compare-buffer-substrings
if the keys are cons
cells (whose car
and cdr
are start and end buffer
positions of the key), and to string<
otherwise (with keys
assumed to be strings).
As an example of sort-subr
, here is the complete function
definition for sort-lines
:
;; Note that the first two lines of doc string ;; are effectively one line when viewed by a user. (defun sort-lines (reverse beg end) "Sort lines in region alphabetically;\ argument means descending order. Called from a program, there are three arguments:
REVERSE (non-nil means reverse order),\ BEG and END (region to sort). The variable `sort-fold-case' determines\ whether alphabetic case affects the sort order."
(interactive "P\nr") (save-excursion (save-restriction (narrow-to-region beg end) (goto-char (point-min)) (let ((inhibit-field-text-motion t)) (sort-subr reverse 'forward-line 'end-of-line)))))
Here forward-line
moves point to the start of the next record,
and end-of-line
moves point to the end of record. We do not pass
the arguments startkeyfun and endkeyfun, because the entire
record is used as the sort key.
The sort-paragraphs
function is very much the same, except that
its sort-subr
call looks like this:
(sort-subr reverse (lambda () (while (and (not (eobp)) (looking-at paragraph-separate)) (forward-line 1))) 'forward-paragraph)
Markers pointing into any sort records are left with no useful
position after sort-subr
returns.
If this variable is non-nil
, sort-subr
and the other
buffer sorting functions ignore case when comparing strings.
This command sorts the region between start and end alphabetically as specified by record-regexp and key-regexp. If reverse is a negative integer, then sorting is in reverse order.
Alphabetical sorting means that two sort keys are compared by comparing the first characters of each, the second characters of each, and so on. If a mismatch is found, it means that the sort keys are unequal; the sort key whose character is less at the point of first mismatch is the lesser sort key. The individual characters are compared according to their numerical character codes in the Emacs character set.
The value of the record-regexp argument specifies how to divide the buffer into sort records. At the end of each record, a search is done for this regular expression, and the text that matches it is taken as the next record. For example, the regular expression ‘^.+$’, which matches lines with at least one character besides a newline, would make each such line into a sort record. See Regular Expressions, for a description of the syntax and meaning of regular expressions.
The value of the key-regexp argument specifies what part of each record is the sort key. The key-regexp could match the whole record, or only a part. In the latter case, the rest of the record has no effect on the sorted order of records, but it is carried along when the record moves to its new position.
The key-regexp argument can refer to the text matched by a subexpression of record-regexp, or it can be a regular expression on its own.
If key-regexp is:
then the text matched by the digitth ‘\(...\)’ parenthesis grouping in record-regexp is the sort key.
then the whole record is the sort key.
then sort-regexp-fields
searches for a match for the regular
expression within the record. If such a match is found, it is the sort
key. If there is no match for key-regexp within a record then
that record is ignored, which means its position in the buffer is not
changed. (The other records may move around it.)
For example, if you plan to sort all the lines in the region by the first word on each line starting with the letter ‘f’, you should set record-regexp to ‘^.*$’ and set key-regexp to ‘\<f\w*\>’. The resulting expression looks like this:
(sort-regexp-fields nil "^.*$" "\\<f\\w*\\>" (region-beginning) (region-end))
If you call sort-regexp-fields
interactively, it prompts for
record-regexp and key-regexp in the minibuffer.
This command alphabetically sorts lines in the region between
start and end. If reverse is non-nil
, the sort
is in reverse order.
This command alphabetically sorts paragraphs in the region between
start and end. If reverse is non-nil
, the sort
is in reverse order.
This command alphabetically sorts pages in the region between
start and end. If reverse is non-nil
, the sort
is in reverse order.
This command sorts lines in the region between start and end, comparing them alphabetically by the fieldth field of each line. Fields are separated by whitespace and numbered starting from 1. If field is negative, sorting is by the −fieldth field from the end of the line. This command is useful for sorting tables.
This command sorts lines in the region between start and end, comparing them numerically by the fieldth field of each line. Fields are separated by whitespace and numbered starting from 1. The specified field must contain a number in each line of the region. Numbers starting with 0 are treated as octal, and numbers starting with ‘0x’ are treated as hexadecimal.
If field is negative, sorting is by the −fieldth field from the end of the line. This command is useful for sorting tables.
This variable specifies the default radix for
sort-numeric-fields
to parse numbers.
This command sorts the lines in the region between beg and end, comparing them alphabetically by a certain range of columns. The column positions of beg and end bound the range of columns to sort on.
If reverse is non-nil
, the sort is in reverse order.
One unusual thing about this command is that the entire line containing position beg, and the entire line containing position end, are included in the region sorted.
Note that sort-columns
rejects text that contains tabs, because
tabs could be split across the specified columns. Use M-x
untabify to convert tabs to spaces before sorting.
When possible, this command actually works by calling the sort
utility program.
The column functions convert between a character position (counting characters from the beginning of the buffer) and a column position (counting screen characters from the beginning of a line).
These functions count each character according to the number of
columns it occupies on the screen. This means control characters count
as occupying 2 or 4 columns, depending upon the value of
ctl-arrow
, and tabs count as occupying a number of columns that
depends on the value of tab-width
and on the column where the tab
begins. See Usual Display Conventions.
Column number computations ignore the width of the window and the
amount of horizontal scrolling. Consequently, a column value can be
arbitrarily high. The first (or leftmost) column is numbered 0. They
also ignore overlays and text properties, aside from invisibility.
Invisible text is considered as having zero width, unless
buffer-invisibility-spec
specifies that invisible text should
be displayed as ellipsis (see Invisible Text).
This function returns the horizontal position of point, measured in columns, counting from 0 at the left margin. The column position is the sum of the widths of all the displayed representations of the characters between the start of the current line and point.
This function moves point to column in the current line. The calculation of column takes into account the widths of the displayed representations of the characters between the start of the line and point.
When called interactively, column is the value of prefix numeric argument. If column is not an integer, an error is signaled.
If it is impossible to move to column column because that is in
the middle of a multicolumn character such as a tab, point moves to the
end of that character. However, if force is non-nil
, and
column is in the middle of a tab, then move-to-column
either converts the tab into spaces (when indent-tabs-mode
is
nil
), or inserts enough spaces before it (otherwise), so that
point can move precisely to column column. Other multicolumn
characters can cause anomalies despite force, since there is no
way to split them.
The argument force also has an effect if the line isn’t long
enough to reach column column; if it is t
, that means to
add whitespace at the end of the line to reach that column.
The return value is the column number actually moved to.
The indentation functions are used to examine, move to, and change whitespace that is at the beginning of a line. Some of the functions can also change whitespace elsewhere on a line. Columns and indentation count from zero at the left margin.
This section describes the primitive functions used to count and insert indentation. The functions in the following sections use these primitives. See Size of Displayed Text, for related functions.
This function returns the indentation of the current line, which is the horizontal position of the first nonblank character. If the contents are entirely blank, then this is the horizontal position of the end of the line.
This function considers invisible text as having zero width, unless
buffer-invisibility-spec
specifies that invisible text should
be displayed as ellipsis. See Invisible Text.
This function indents from point with tabs and spaces until column
is reached. If minimum is specified and non-nil
, then at
least that many spaces are inserted even if this requires going beyond
column. Otherwise the function does nothing if point is already
beyond column. The value is the column at which the inserted
indentation ends.
The inserted whitespace characters inherit text properties from the surrounding text (usually, from the preceding text only). See Stickiness of Text Properties.
If this variable is non-nil
, indentation functions can insert
tabs as well as spaces. Otherwise, they insert only spaces. Setting
this variable automatically makes it buffer-local in the current buffer.
An important function of each major mode is to customize the TAB key to indent properly for the language being edited. This section describes the mechanism of the TAB key and how to control it. The functions in this section return unpredictable values.
This is the command bound to TAB in most editing modes. Its usual action is to indent the current line, but it can alternatively insert a tab character or indent a region.
Here is what it does:
indent-region
to indent all the
text in the region (see Indenting an Entire Region).
indent-line-function
is indent-to-left-margin
(a trivial command that inserts a tab
character), or if the variable tab-always-indent
specifies that
a tab character ought to be inserted (see below), then it inserts a
tab character.
indent-line-function
. If the line is already
indented, and the value of tab-always-indent
is complete
(see below), it tries completing the text at point.
If rigid is non-nil
(interactively, with a prefix
argument), then after this command indents a line or inserts a tab, it
also rigidly indents the entire balanced expression which starts at
the beginning of the current line, in order to reflect the new
indentation. This argument is ignored if the command indents the
region.
This variable’s value is the function to be used by
indent-for-tab-command
, and various other indentation commands,
to indent the current line. It is usually assigned by the major mode;
for instance, Lisp mode sets it to lisp-indent-line
, C mode
sets it to c-indent-line
, and so on. The default value is
indent-relative
. See Automatic Indentation of code.
This command calls the function in indent-line-function
to
indent the current line in a way appropriate for the current major mode.
This function inserts a newline, then indents the new line (the one
following the newline just inserted) according to the major mode. It
does indentation by calling indent-according-to-mode
.
This command reindents the current line, inserts a newline at point,
and then indents the new line (the one following the newline just
inserted). It does indentation on both lines by calling
indent-according-to-mode
.
This variable can be used to customize the behavior of the TAB
(indent-for-tab-command
) command. If the value is t
(the default), the command normally just indents the current line. If
the value is nil
, the command indents the current line only if
point is at the left margin or in the line’s indentation; otherwise,
it inserts a tab character. If the value is complete
, the
command first tries to indent the current line, and if the line was
already indented, it calls completion-at-point
to complete the
text at point (see Completion in Ordinary Buffers).
If tab-always-indent
is complete
, whether to expand or
indent can be further customized via the tab-first-completion
variable. The following values can be used:
eol
Only complete if point is at the end of a line.
word
Complete unless the next character has word syntax.
word-or-paren
Complete unless the next character has word syntax or is a parenthesis.
word-or-paren-or-punct
Complete unless the next character has word syntax, or is a parenthesis, or is punctuation.
In any case, typing TAB a second time always results in completion.
Some major modes need to support embedded regions of text whose
syntax belongs to a different major mode. Examples include
literate programming source files that combine documentation and
snippets of source code, Yacc/Bison programs that include snippets of
Python or JS code, etc. To correctly indent the embedded chunks, the primary
mode needs to delegate the indentation to another mode’s indentation
engine (e.g., call js-indent-line
for JS code or
python-indent-line
for Python), while providing it with some
context to guide the indentation. Major modes, for their part, should
avoid calling widen
in their indentation code and obey
prog-first-column
.
This variable, when non-nil
, holds the indentation context for
the sub-mode’s indentation engine provided by the superior major mode.
The value should be a list of the form (first-column . rest
.
The members of the list have the following meaning:
The column to be used for top-level constructs. This replaces the default value of the top-level column used by the sub-mode, usually zero.
This value is currently unused.
The following convenience function should be used by major mode’s indentation engine in support of invocations as sub-modes of another major mode.
Call this function instead of using a literal value (usually, zero) of the column number for indenting top-level program constructs. The function’s value is the column number to use for top-level constructs. When no superior mode is in effect, this function returns zero.
This section describes commands that indent all the lines in the region. They return unpredictable values.
This command indents each nonblank line starting between start
(inclusive) and end (exclusive). If to-column is
nil
, indent-region
indents each nonblank line by calling
the current mode’s indentation function, the value of
indent-line-function
.
If to-column is non-nil
, it should be an integer
specifying the number of columns of indentation; then this function
gives each line exactly that much indentation, by either adding or
deleting whitespace.
If there is a fill prefix, indent-region
indents each line
by making it start with the fill prefix.
The value of this variable is a function that can be used by
indent-region
as a short cut. It should take two arguments, the
start and end of the region. You should design the function so
that it will produce the same results as indenting the lines of the
region one by one, but presumably faster.
If the value is nil
, there is no short cut, and
indent-region
actually works line by line.
A short-cut function is useful in modes such as C mode and Lisp mode,
where the indent-line-function
must scan from the beginning of
the function definition: applying it to each line would be quadratic in
time. The short cut can update the scan information as it moves through
the lines indenting them; this takes linear time. In a mode where
indenting a line individually is fast, there is no need for a short cut.
indent-region
with a non-nil
argument to-column has
a different meaning and does not use this variable.
This function indents all lines starting between start (inclusive) and end (exclusive) sideways by count columns. This preserves the shape of the affected region, moving it as a rigid unit.
This is useful not only for indenting regions of unindented text, but also for indenting regions of formatted code. For example, if count is 3, this command adds 3 columns of indentation to every line that begins in the specified region.
If called interactively with no prefix argument, this command invokes a transient mode for adjusting indentation rigidly. See Indentation Commands in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This is like indent-rigidly
, except that it doesn’t alter lines
that start within strings or comments.
In addition, it doesn’t alter a line if nochange-regexp matches at
the beginning of the line (if nochange-regexp is non-nil
).
This section describes two commands that indent the current line based on the contents of previous lines.
This command inserts whitespace at point, extending to the same column as the next indent point of the previous nonblank line. An indent point is a non-whitespace character following whitespace. The next indent point is the first one at a column greater than the current column of point. For example, if point is underneath and to the left of the first non-blank character of a line of text, it moves to that column by inserting whitespace.
If the previous nonblank line has no next indent point (i.e., none at a
great enough column position), indent-relative
either does
nothing (if unindented-ok is non-nil
) or calls
tab-to-tab-stop
. Thus, if point is underneath and to the right
of the last column of a short line of text, this command ordinarily
moves point to the next tab stop by inserting whitespace.
If first-only is non-nil
, only the first indent point is
considered.
The return value of indent-relative
is unpredictable.
In the following example, point is at the beginning of the second line:
This line is indented twelve spaces. ∗The quick brown fox jumped.
Evaluation of the expression (indent-relative nil)
produces the
following:
This line is indented twelve spaces. ∗The quick brown fox jumped.
In this next example, point is between the ‘m’ and ‘p’ of ‘jumped’:
This line is indented twelve spaces. The quick brown fox jum∗ped.
Evaluation of the expression (indent-relative nil)
produces the
following:
This line is indented twelve spaces. The quick brown fox jum ∗ped.
This command indents the current line like the previous nonblank line,
by calling indent-relative
with t
as the
first-only argument. The return value is unpredictable.
If the previous nonblank line has no indent points beyond the current column, this command does nothing.
This section explains the mechanism for user-specified tab stops and the mechanisms that use and set them. The name “tab stops” is used because the feature is similar to that of the tab stops on a typewriter. The feature works by inserting an appropriate number of spaces and tab characters to reach the next tab stop column; it does not affect the display of tab characters in the buffer (see Usual Display Conventions). Note that the TAB character as input uses this tab stop feature only in a few major modes, such as Text mode. See Tab Stops in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This command inserts spaces or tabs before point, up to the next tab
stop column defined by tab-stop-list
.
This variable defines the tab stop columns used by tab-to-tab-stop
.
It should be either nil
, or a list of increasing integers,
which need not be evenly spaced. The list is implicitly
extended to infinity through repetition of the interval between the
last and penultimate elements (or tab-width
if the list has
fewer than two elements). A value of nil
means a tab stop
every tab-width
columns.
Use M-x edit-tab-stops to edit the location of tab stops interactively.
These commands, primarily for interactive use, act based on the indentation in the text.
This command moves point to the first non-whitespace character in the current line (which is the line in which point is located).
This command moves point backward arg lines and then to the
first nonblank character on that line. If arg is omitted or
nil
, it defaults to 1.
This command moves point forward arg lines and then to the first
nonblank character on that line. If arg is omitted or
nil
, it defaults to 1.
The case change commands described here work on text in the current buffer. See Case Conversion in Lisp, for case conversion functions that work on strings and characters. See The Case Table, for how to customize which characters are upper or lower case and how to convert them.
This function capitalizes all words in the region defined by
start and end. To capitalize means to convert each word’s
first character to upper case and convert the rest of each word to lower
case. The function returns nil
.
If one end of the region is in the middle of a word, the part of the word within the region is treated as an entire word.
When capitalize-region
is called interactively, start and
end are point and the mark, with the smallest first.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of the 5th foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(capitalize-region 1 37) ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This Is The Contents Of The 5th Foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This function converts all of the letters in the region defined by
start and end to lower case. The function returns
nil
.
When downcase-region
is called interactively, start and
end are point and the mark, with the smallest first.
This function converts all of the letters in the region defined by
start and end to upper case. The function returns
nil
.
When upcase-region
is called interactively, start and
end are point and the mark, with the smallest first.
This function capitalizes count words after point, moving point
over as it does. To capitalize means to convert each word’s first
character to upper case and convert the rest of each word to lower case.
If count is negative, the function capitalizes the
−count previous words but does not move point. The value
is nil
.
If point is in the middle of a word, the part of the word before point is ignored when moving forward. The rest is treated as an entire word.
When capitalize-word
is called interactively, count is
set to the numeric prefix argument.
This function converts the count words after point to all lower
case, moving point over as it does. If count is negative, it
converts the −count previous words but does not move point.
The value is nil
.
When downcase-word
is called interactively, count is set
to the numeric prefix argument.
This function converts the count words after point to all upper
case, moving point over as it does. If count is negative, it
converts the −count previous words but does not move point.
The value is nil
.
When upcase-word
is called interactively, count is set to
the numeric prefix argument.
Each character position in a buffer or a string can have a text property list, much like the property list of a symbol (see Property Lists). The properties belong to a particular character at a particular place, such as, the letter ‘T’ at the beginning of this sentence or the first ‘o’ in ‘foo’—if the same character occurs in two different places, the two occurrences in general have different properties.
Each property has a name and a value. Both of these can be any Lisp
object, but the name is normally a symbol. Typically each property
name symbol is used for a particular purpose; for instance, the text
property face
specifies the faces for displaying the character
(see Properties with Special Meanings). The usual way to access the property
list is to specify a name and ask what value corresponds to it.
If a character has a category
property, we call it the
property category of the character. It should be a symbol. The
properties of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the
character.
Copying text between strings and buffers preserves the properties
along with the characters; this includes such diverse functions as
substring
, insert
, and buffer-substring
. Killing
and then yanking text (see The Kill Ring) also preserves the
properties, except that some properties are handled specially and
might be removed when text is yanked; see Yanking.
The simplest way to examine text properties is to ask for the value of
a particular property of a particular character. For that, use
get-text-property
. Use text-properties-at
to get the
entire property list of a character. See Text Property Search Functions, for
functions to examine the properties of a number of characters at once.
These functions handle both strings and buffers. Keep in mind that positions in a string start from 0, whereas positions in a buffer start from 1. Passing a buffer other than the current buffer may be slow.
This function returns the value of the prop property of the character after position pos in object (a buffer or string). The argument object is optional and defaults to the current buffer.
If position is at the end of object, the value is
nil
, but note that buffer narrowing does not affect the value.
That is, if object is a buffer or nil
, and the buffer is
narrowed and position is at the end of the narrowed buffer, the
result may be non-nil
.
If there is no prop property strictly speaking, but the character
has a property category that is a symbol, then get-text-property
returns
the prop property of that symbol.
This function is like get-text-property
, except that it checks
overlays first and then text properties. See Overlays.
The argument object may be a string, a buffer, or a window. If it is a window, then the buffer displayed in that window is used for text properties and overlays, but only the overlays active for that window are considered. If object is a buffer, then overlays in that buffer are considered first, in order of decreasing priority, followed by the text properties. If object is a string, only text properties are considered, since strings never have overlays.
This function is like get-char-property
, except that it pays
attention to properties’ stickiness and overlays’ advancement settings
instead of the property of the character at (i.e., right after)
position.
This is like get-char-property
, but gives extra information
about the overlay that the property value comes from.
Its value is a cons cell whose CAR is the property value, the
same value get-char-property
would return with the same
arguments. Its CDR is the overlay in which the property was
found, or nil
, if it was found as a text property or not found
at all.
If position is at the end of object, both the CAR and
the CDR of the value are nil
.
This variable holds an alist which maps property names to a list of
alternative property names. If a character does not specify a direct
value for a property, the alternative property names are consulted in
order; the first non-nil
value is used. This variable takes
precedence over default-text-properties
, and category
properties take precedence over this variable.
This function returns the entire property list of the character at
position in the string or buffer object. If object is
nil
, it defaults to the current buffer.
If position is at the end of object, the value is
nil
, but note that buffer narrowing does not affect the value.
That is, if object is a buffer or nil
, and the buffer is
narrowed and position is at the end of the narrowed buffer, the
result may be non-nil
.
This variable holds a property list giving default values for text
properties. Whenever a character does not specify a value for a
property, neither directly, through a category symbol, or through
char-property-alias-alist
, the value stored in this list is
used instead. Here is an example:
(setq default-text-properties '(foo 69) char-property-alias-alist nil) ;; Make sure character 1 has no properties of its own. (set-text-properties 1 2 nil) ;; What we get, when we ask, is the default value. (get-text-property 1 'foo) ⇒ 69
This function returns a copy of the intervals (i.e., text properties) in object as a list of intervals. object must be a string or a buffer. Altering the structure of this list does not change the intervals in the object.
(object-intervals (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold)) ⇒ ((0 3 (face bold)))
Each element in the returned list represents one interval. Each interval has three parts: The first is the start, the second is the end, and the third part is the text property itself.
The primitives for changing properties apply to a specified range of
text in a buffer or string. The function set-text-properties
(see end of section) sets the entire property list of the text in that
range; more often, it is useful to add, change, or delete just certain
properties specified by name.
Since text properties are considered part of the contents of the buffer (or string), and can affect how a buffer looks on the screen, any change in buffer text properties marks the buffer as modified. Buffer text property changes are undoable also (see Undo). Positions in a string start from 0, whereas positions in a buffer start from 1.
This function sets the prop property to value for the text
between start and end in the string or buffer object.
If object is nil
, it defaults to the current buffer.
This function adds or overrides text properties for the text between
start and end in the string or buffer object. If
object is nil
, it defaults to the current buffer.
The argument props specifies which properties to add. It should have the form of a property list (see Property Lists): a list whose elements include the property names followed alternately by the corresponding values.
The return value is t
if the function actually changed some
property’s value; nil
otherwise (if props is nil
or
its values agree with those in the text).
For example, here is how to set the comment
and face
properties of a range of text:
(add-text-properties start end '(comment t face highlight))
This function deletes specified text properties from the text between
start and end in the string or buffer object. If
object is nil
, it defaults to the current buffer.
The argument props specifies which properties to delete. It
should have the form of a property list (see Property Lists): a list
whose elements are property names alternating with corresponding values.
But only the names matter—the values that accompany them are ignored.
For example, here’s how to remove the face
property.
(remove-text-properties start end '(face nil))
The return value is t
if the function actually changed some
property’s value; nil
otherwise (if props is nil
or
if no character in the specified text had any of those properties).
To remove all text properties from certain text, use
set-text-properties
and specify nil
for the new property
list.
Like remove-text-properties
except that
list-of-properties is a list of property names only, not an
alternating list of property names and values.
This function completely replaces the text property list for the text
between start and end in the string or buffer object.
If object is nil
, it defaults to the current buffer.
The argument props is the new property list. It should be a list whose elements are property names alternating with corresponding values.
After set-text-properties
returns, all the characters in the
specified range have identical properties.
If props is nil
, the effect is to get rid of all properties
from the specified range of text. Here’s an example:
(set-text-properties start end nil)
Do not rely on the return value of this function.
This function acts on the text between start and end,
adding the face face to the face
text property.
face should be a valid value for the face
property
(see Properties with Special Meanings), such as a face name or an anonymous face
(see Faces).
If any text in the region already has a non-nil
face
property,
those face(s) are retained. This function sets the face
property to a list of faces, with face as the first element (by
default) and the pre-existing faces as the remaining elements. If the
optional argument appendp is non-nil
, face is
appended to the end of the list instead. Note that in a face list,
the first occurring value for each attribute takes precedence.
For example, the following code would assign an italicized green face to the text between start and end:
(add-face-text-property start end 'italic) (add-face-text-property start end '(:foreground "red")) (add-face-text-property start end '(:foreground "green"))
The optional argument object, if non-nil
, specifies a
buffer or string to act on, rather than the current buffer. If
object is a string, then start and end are
zero-based indices into the string.
The easiest way to make a string with text properties is with
propertize
:
This function returns a copy of string with the text properties
properties added. These properties apply to all the characters
in the string that is returned. Here is an example that constructs a
string with a face
property and a mouse-face
property:
(propertize "foo" 'face 'italic 'mouse-face 'bold-italic) ⇒ #("foo" 0 3 (mouse-face bold-italic face italic))
To put different properties on various parts of a string, you can
construct each part with propertize
and then combine them with
concat
:
(concat (propertize "foo" 'face 'italic 'mouse-face 'bold-italic) " and " (propertize "bar" 'face 'italic 'mouse-face 'bold-italic)) ⇒ #("foo and bar" 0 3 (face italic mouse-face bold-italic) 3 8 nil 8 11 (face italic mouse-face bold-italic))
See Examining Buffer Contents, for the function
buffer-substring-no-properties
, which copies text from the
buffer but does not copy its properties.
If you wish to add text properties to a buffer or remove them
without marking the buffer as modified, you can wrap the calls above
in the with-silent-modifications
macro. See Buffer Modification.
In typical use of text properties, most of the time several or many consecutive characters have the same value for a property. Rather than writing your programs to examine characters one by one, it is much faster to process chunks of text that have the same property value.
Here are functions you can use to do this. They use eq
for
comparing property values. In all cases, object defaults to the
current buffer.
For good performance, it’s very important to use the limit argument to these functions, especially the ones that search for a single property—otherwise, they may spend a long time scanning to the end of the buffer, if the property you are interested in does not change.
These functions do not move point; instead, they return a position (or
nil
). Remember that a position is always between two characters;
the position returned by these functions is between two characters with
different properties.
The function scans the text forward from position pos in the string or buffer object until it finds a change in some text property, then returns the position of the change. In other words, it returns the position of the first character beyond pos whose properties are not identical to those of the character just after pos.
If limit is non-nil
, then the scan ends at position
limit. If there is no property change before that point, this
function returns limit.
The value is nil
if the properties remain unchanged all the way
to the end of object and limit is nil
. If the value
is non-nil
, it is a position greater than or equal to pos.
The value equals pos only when limit equals pos.
Here is an example of how to scan the buffer by chunks of text within which all properties are constant:
(while (not (eobp))
(let ((plist (text-properties-at (point)))
(next-change
(or (next-property-change (point) (current-buffer))
(point-max))))
Process text from point to next-change...
(goto-char next-change)))
This is like next-property-change
, but scans back from pos
instead of forward. If the value is non-nil
, it is a position
less than or equal to pos; it equals pos only if limit
equals pos.
The function scans text for a change in the prop property, then returns the position of the change. The scan goes forward from position pos in the string or buffer object. In other words, this function returns the position of the first character beyond pos whose prop property differs from that of the character just after pos.
If limit is non-nil
, then the scan ends at position
limit. If there is no property change before that point,
next-single-property-change
returns limit.
The value is nil
if the property remains unchanged all the way to
the end of object and limit is nil
. If the value is
non-nil
, it is a position greater than or equal to pos; it
equals pos only if limit equals pos.
This is like next-single-property-change
, but scans back from
pos instead of forward. If the value is non-nil
, it is a
position less than or equal to pos; it equals pos only if
limit equals pos.
This is like next-property-change
except that it considers
overlay properties as well as text properties, and if no change is
found before the end of the buffer, it returns the maximum buffer
position rather than nil
(in this sense, it resembles the
corresponding overlay function next-overlay-change
, rather than
next-property-change
). There is no object operand
because this function operates only on the current buffer. It returns
the next address at which either kind of property changes.
This is like next-char-property-change
, but scans back from
pos instead of forward, and returns the minimum buffer
position if no change is found.
This is like next-single-property-change
except that it
considers overlay properties as well as text properties, and if no
change is found before the end of the object, it returns the
maximum valid position in object rather than nil
. Unlike
next-char-property-change
, this function does have an
object operand; if object is not a buffer, only
text-properties are considered.
This is like next-single-char-property-change
, but scans back
from pos instead of forward, and returns the minimum valid
position in object if no change is found.
This function returns non-nil
if at least one character between
start and end has a property prop whose value is
value. More precisely, it returns the position of the first such
character. Otherwise, it returns nil
.
The optional fifth argument, object, specifies the string or buffer to scan. Positions are relative to object. The default for object is the current buffer.
This function returns non-nil
if at least one character between
start and end does not have a property prop with value
value. More precisely, it returns the position of the first such
character. Otherwise, it returns nil
.
The optional fifth argument, object, specifies the string or buffer to scan. Positions are relative to object. The default for object is the current buffer.
Search for the next region of text whose property prop is a
match for value (which defaults to nil
), according to
predicate.
This function is modeled after search-forward
(see Searching for Strings) and friends, in that it moves point, but it also returns a
structure that describes the match instead of returning it in
match-beginning
and friends.
If the text property whose value is a match can’t be found, the
function returns nil
. If it’s found, point is placed at the
end of the region that has this matching text property, and the
function returns a prop-match
structure with information about
the match.
predicate can either be t
(which is a synonym for
equal
), nil
(which means “not equal”), or a predicate
that will be called with two arguments: value and the value of
the text property prop at the buffer position that is a
candidate for a match. The function should return non-nil
if
there’s a match, nil
otherwise.
If not-current is non-nil
, then if point is already in a
region where we have a property match, skip past that region and find
the next region instead.
The prop-match
structure has the following accessor functions:
prop-match-beginning
(the start of the match),
prop-match-end
(the end of the match), and
prop-match-value
(the value of property at the start of
the match).
In the examples below, we use a buffer whose contents is:
This is a bold and here’s bolditalic and this is the end.
That is, the “bold” words are the bold
face, and the
“italic” word is in the italic
face.
With point at the start:
(while (setq match (text-property-search-forward 'face 'bold t)) (push (buffer-substring (prop-match-beginning match) (prop-match-end match)) words))
This will pick out all the words that use the bold
face.
(while (setq match (text-property-search-forward 'face nil t)) (push (buffer-substring (prop-match-beginning match) (prop-match-end match)) words))
This will pick out all the bits that have no face properties, which
will result in the list ‘("This is a " "and here's "
"and this is the end")’ (only in reverse order, since we used
push
, see Modifying List Variables).
(while (setq match (text-property-search-forward 'face nil nil)) (push (buffer-substring (prop-match-beginning match) (prop-match-end match)) words))
This will pick out all the regions where face
is set to
something, but this is split up into where the properties change, so
the result here will be ‘("bold" "bold" "italic")’.
For a more realistic example where you might use this, consider that
you have a buffer where certain sections represent URLs, and these are
tagged with shr-url
.
(while (setq match (text-property-search-forward 'shr-url nil nil)) (push (prop-match-value match) urls))
This will give you a list of all those URLs.
This is just like text-property-search-forward
, but searches
backward instead, and if a match is found, point is placed at the
beginning of the matched region instead of the end.
Here is a table of text property names that have special built-in meanings. The following sections list a few additional special property names that control filling and property inheritance. All other names have no standard meaning, and you can use them as you like.
Note: the properties composition
, display
,
invisible
and intangible
can also cause point to move to
an acceptable place, after each Emacs command. See Adjusting Point After Commands.
category
¶If a character has a category
property, we call it the
property category of the character. It should be a symbol. The
properties of this symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the
character.
face
¶The face
property controls the appearance of the character
(see Faces). The value of the property can be the following:
(keyword
value …)
, where each keyword is a face attribute
name and value is a value for that attribute.
(foreground-color . color-name)
or (background-color . color-name)
. This specifies the
foreground or background color, similar to (:foreground
color-name)
or (:background color-name)
. This
form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
avoided.
(:filtered filter face-spec)
, that specifies the face given by face-spec,
but only if filter matches when the face is used for display.
The face-spec can use any of the forms mentioned above. The
filter should be of the form (:window param value)
, which matches for windows whose parameter param
is eq
to value. If the variable
face-filters-always-match
is non-nil
, all face filters
are deemed to have matched.
Font Lock mode (see Font Lock Mode) works in most buffers by
dynamically updating the face
property of characters based on
the context.
The add-face-text-property
function provides a convenient way
to set this text property. See Changing Text Properties.
font-lock-face
¶This property specifies a value for the face
property that Font
Lock mode should apply to the underlying text. It is one of the
fontification methods used by Font Lock mode, and is useful for
special modes that implement their own highlighting.
See Precalculated Fontification. When Font Lock mode is disabled,
font-lock-face
has no effect.
mouse-face
¶This property is used instead of face
when the mouse pointer
hovers over the text which has this property. When this happens, the
entire stretch of text that has the same mouse-face
property
value, not just the character under the mouse, is highlighted.
Emacs ignores all face attributes from the mouse-face
property
that alter the text size (e.g., :height
, :weight
, and
:slant
). Those attributes are always the same as for the
unhighlighted text.
cursor-face
¶This property is similar to mouse-face
, but it is used when
point (not the mouse) is inside text that has this property. The
highlighting happens only if the mode
cursor-face-highlight-mode
is enabled. When the variable
cursor-face-highlight-nonselected-window
is non-nil
, the
text with this face is highlighted even if the window is not selected,
similarly to what highlight-nonselected-windows
does for the
region (see The Mark and the Region in The GNU Emacs
Manual).
fontified
¶This property says whether the text is ready for display. If
nil
, Emacs’s redisplay routine calls the functions in
fontification-functions
(see Automatic Face Assignment) to prepare this
part of the buffer before it is displayed. It is used internally by
the just-in-time font locking code.
display
This property activates various features that change the
way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrow, or replaced with an image.
See The display
Property.
help-echo
¶If text has a string as its help-echo
property, then when you
move the mouse onto that text, Emacs displays that string in the echo
area, or in the tooltip window (see Tooltips), after passing it
through substitute-command-keys
.
If the value of the help-echo
property is a function, that
function is called with three arguments, window, object and
pos and should return a help string or nil
for
none. The first argument, window is the window in which
the help was found. The second, object, is the buffer, overlay or
string which had the help-echo
property. The pos
argument is as follows:
help-echo
property, and pos is the position in the overlay’s buffer.
display
property), pos is the position in that
string.
If the value of the help-echo
property is neither a function nor
a string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
You can alter the way help text is displayed by setting the variable
show-help-function
(see Help display).
This feature is used in the mode line and for other active text.
help-echo-inhibit-substitution
¶If the first character of a help-echo
string has a
non-nil
help-echo-inhibit-substitution
property, then it
is displayed as-is by show-help-function
, without being passed
through substitute-command-keys
.
keymap
¶The keymap
property specifies an additional keymap for
commands. When this keymap applies, it is used for key lookup before
the minor mode keymaps and before the buffer’s local map.
See Active Keymaps. If the property value is a symbol, the
symbol’s function definition is used as the keymap.
The property’s value for the character before point applies if it is
non-nil
and rear-sticky, and the property’s value for the
character after point applies if it is non-nil
and
front-sticky. (For mouse clicks, the position of the click is used
instead of the position of point.)
local-map
¶This property works like keymap
except that it specifies a
keymap to use instead of the buffer’s local map. For most
purposes (perhaps all purposes), it is better to use the keymap
property.
syntax-table
The syntax-table
property overrides what the syntax table says
about this particular character. See Syntax Properties.
read-only
¶If a character has the property read-only
, then modifying that
character is not allowed. Any command that would do so gets an error,
text-read-only
. If the property value is a string, that string
is used as the error message.
Insertion next to a read-only character is an error if inserting
ordinary text there would inherit the read-only
property due to
stickiness. Thus, you can control permission to insert next to
read-only text by controlling the stickiness. See Stickiness of Text Properties.
Since changing properties counts as modifying the buffer, it is not
possible to remove a read-only
property unless you know the
special trick: bind inhibit-read-only
to a non-nil
value
and then remove the property. See Read-Only Buffers.
inhibit-read-only
¶Characters that have the property inhibit-read-only
can be
edited even in read-only buffers. See Read-Only Buffers.
invisible
¶A non-nil
invisible
property can make a character invisible
on the screen. See Invisible Text, for details.
inhibit-isearch
¶A non-nil
inhibit-isearch
property will make isearch
skip the text.
intangible
¶If a group of consecutive characters have equal and non-nil
intangible
properties, then you cannot place point between them.
If you try to move point forward into the group, point actually moves to
the end of the group. If you try to move point backward into the group,
point actually moves to the start of the group.
If consecutive characters have unequal non-nil
intangible
properties, they belong to separate groups; each
group is separately treated as described above.
When the variable inhibit-point-motion-hooks
is non-nil
(as it is by default), the intangible
property is ignored.
Beware: this property operates at a very low level, and affects a lot of code
in unexpected ways. So use it with extreme caution. A common misuse is to put
an intangible property on invisible text, which is actually unnecessary since
the command loop will move point outside of the invisible text at the end of
each command anyway. See Adjusting Point After Commands. For these reasons, this
property is obsolete; use the cursor-intangible
property instead.
cursor-intangible
¶When the minor mode cursor-intangible-mode
is turned on, point
is moved away from any position that has a non-nil
cursor-intangible
property, just before redisplay happens.
Note that “stickiness” of the property (see Stickiness of Text Properties)
is taken into account when computing allowed cursor positions, so (for
instance) to insert a stretch of five ‘x’ characters into which
the cursor can’t enter, you should do something like:
(insert (propertize "xxxx" 'cursor-intangible t) (propertize "x" 'cursor-intangible t 'rear-nonsticky t))
When the variable cursor-sensor-inhibit
is non-nil
, the
cursor-intangible
property and the
cursor-sensor-functions
property (described below) are ignored.
field
¶Consecutive characters with the same field
property constitute a
field. Some motion functions including forward-word
and
beginning-of-line
stop moving at a field boundary.
See Defining and Using Fields.
cursor
¶Normally, the cursor is displayed at the beginning or the end of any
overlay and text property strings that “hide” (i.e., are displayed
instead of) the current buffer position. You can instead tell Emacs
to place the cursor on any desired character of these strings by
giving that character a non-nil
cursor
text property.
In addition, if the value of the cursor
property is an integer,
it specifies the number of buffer’s character positions, starting with
the position where the overlay or the display
property begins,
for which the cursor should be displayed on that character.
Specifically, if the value of the cursor
property of a
character is the number n, the cursor will be displayed on this
character for any buffer position in the range
[ovpos..ovpos+n)
, where ovpos is the
overlay’s starting position given by overlay-start
(see Managing Overlays), or the position where the display
text property begins in the buffer.
In other words, the string character with the cursor
property
of any non-nil
value is the character where to display the
cursor when the overlay or display string make point not visible on
display. The value of the property says for which buffer positions to
display the cursor there. If the value is an integer n, the
cursor is displayed there when point is anywhere between the beginning
of the overlay or display
property and n positions after
that. If the value is anything else and non-nil
, the cursor is
displayed there only when point is at the buffer position that is the
beginning of the display
property, or at overlay-start
if that position is not visible on display. Note that an integer
value of the cursor
property could mean that the cursor is
displayed on that character even when point is visible on display.
One subtlety of this property is that it doesn’t work to put this
property on a newline character that is part of a display or overlay
string. That’s because the newline doesn’t have a graphic
representation on the screen for Emacs to find when it looks for a
character on display with that cursor
property.
When the buffer has many overlay strings (e.g., see before-string) that conceal some of the buffer text or
display
properties that are strings, it is a good idea to use
the cursor
property on these strings to cue the Emacs display
about the places where to put the cursor while traversing these
strings. This directly communicates to the display engine where the
Lisp program wants to put the cursor, or where the user would expect
the cursor, when point is located on some buffer position that is
“covered” by the display or overlay string.
pointer
¶This specifies a specific pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this text or image. See Pointer Shape, for possible pointer shapes.
line-spacing
¶A newline can have a line-spacing
text or overlay property that
controls the height of the display line ending with that newline. The
property value overrides the default frame line spacing and the buffer
local line-spacing
variable. See Line Height.
line-height
¶A newline can have a line-height
text or overlay property that
controls the total height of the display line ending in that newline.
See Line Height.
wrap-prefix
If text has a wrap-prefix
property, the prefix it defines will
be added at display time to the beginning of every continuation line
due to text wrapping (so if lines are truncated, the wrap-prefix is
never used). It may be a string or an image (see Other Display Specifications), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
:width
or :align-to
display properties (see Specified Spaces).
A wrap-prefix may also be specified for an entire buffer using the
wrap-prefix
buffer-local variable (however, a
wrap-prefix
text-property takes precedence over the value of
the wrap-prefix
variable). See Truncation.
line-prefix
If text has a line-prefix
property, the prefix it defines will
be added at display time to the beginning of every non-continuation
line. It may be a string or an image (see Other Display Specifications), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
:width
or :align-to
display properties (see Specified Spaces).
A line-prefix may also be specified for an entire buffer using the
line-prefix
buffer-local variable (however, a
line-prefix
text-property takes precedence over the value of
the line-prefix
variable). See Truncation.
modification-hooks
¶If a character has the property modification-hooks
, then its
value should be a list of functions; modifying that character calls
all of those functions before the actual modification. Each function
receives two arguments: the beginning and end of the part of the
buffer being modified. Note that if a particular modification hook
function appears on several characters being modified by a single
primitive, you can’t predict how many times the function will
be called.
Furthermore, insertion will not modify any existing character, so this
hook will only be run when removing some characters, replacing them
with others, or changing their text-properties.
Unlike with other similar hooks, when Emacs calls these functions,
inhibit-modification-hooks
does not get bound to
non-nil
. If the functions modify the buffer, you should
consider binding this variable to non-nil
to prevent any buffer
changes running the change hooks. Otherwise, you must be prepared for
recursive calls. See Change Hooks.
Overlays also support the modification-hooks
property, but the
details are somewhat different (see Overlay Properties).
insert-in-front-hooks
¶insert-behind-hooks
The operation of inserting text in a buffer also calls the functions
listed in the insert-in-front-hooks
property of the following
character and in the insert-behind-hooks
property of the
preceding character. These functions receive two arguments, the
beginning and end of the inserted text. The functions are called
after the actual insertion takes place.
When these functions are called, inhibit-modification-hooks
is
bound to non-nil
. If the functions modify the buffer, you
might want to bind inhibit-modification-hooks
to nil
, so
as to cause the change hooks to run for these modifications. However,
doing this may call your own change hook recursively, so be sure to
prepare for that.
See also Change Hooks, for other hooks that are called when you change text in a buffer.
point-entered
¶point-left
The special properties point-entered
and point-left
record hook functions that report motion of point. Each time point
moves, Emacs compares these two property values:
point-left
property of the character after the old location,
and
point-entered
property of the character after the new
location.
If these two values differ, each of them is called (if not nil
)
with two arguments: the old value of point, and the new one.
The same comparison is made for the characters before the old and new
locations. The result may be to execute two point-left
functions
(which may be the same function) and/or two point-entered
functions (which may be the same function). In any case, all the
point-left
functions are called first, followed by all the
point-entered
functions.
It is possible to use char-after
to examine characters at various
buffer positions without moving point to those positions. Only an
actual change in the value of point runs these hook functions.
The variable inhibit-point-motion-hooks
by default inhibits
running the point-left
and point-entered
hooks, see
Inhibit point motion hooks.
These properties are obsolete; please use
cursor-sensor-functions
instead.
cursor-sensor-functions
¶This special property records a list of functions that react to cursor
motion. Each function in the list is called, just before redisplay,
with 3 arguments: the affected window, the previous known position of
the cursor, and one of the symbols entered
or left
,
depending on whether the cursor is entering the text that has this
property or leaving it. The functions are called only when the minor
mode cursor-sensor-mode
is turned on.
When the variable cursor-sensor-inhibit
is non-nil
, the
cursor-sensor-functions
property is ignored.
composition
¶This text property is used to display a sequence of characters as a
single glyph composed from components. But the value of the property
itself is completely internal to Emacs and should not be manipulated
directly by, for instance, put-text-property
.
minibuffer-message
¶This text property tells where to display temporary messages in an
active minibuffer. Specifically, the first character of the
minibuffer text which has this property will have the temporary
message displayed before it. The default is to display temporary
messages at the end of the minibuffer text. This text property is
used by the function that is the default value of
set-message-function
(see Displaying Messages in the Echo Area).
When this obsolete variable is
non-nil
, point-left
and point-entered
hooks are
not run, and the intangible
property has no effect. Do not set
this variable globally; bind it with let
. Since the affected
properties are obsolete, this variable’s default value is t
, to
effectively disable them.
If this variable is non-nil
, it specifies
a function called to display help strings. These may be
help-echo
properties, menu help strings (see Simple Menu Items, see Extended Menu Items), or tool bar help strings
(see Tool bars). The specified function is called with one
argument, the help string to display, which is passed through
substitute-command-keys
before being given to the function,
unless the help string has a non-nil
help-echo-inhibit-substitution
property on its first character; see
Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation. See the code of Tooltip mode
(see Tooltips in The GNU Emacs Manual) for an example of a
mode that uses show-help-function
.
If this variable is non-nil
, face filters that specify
attributes applied only when certain conditions are met will be deemed
to match always.
These text properties affect the behavior of the fill commands. They are used for representing formatted text. See Filling, and Margins for Filling.
hard
If a newline character has this property, it is a “hard” newline.
The fill commands do not alter hard newlines and do not move words
across them. However, this property takes effect only if the
use-hard-newlines
minor mode is enabled. See Hard and Soft Newlines in The GNU Emacs Manual.
right-margin
This property specifies an extra right margin for filling this part of the text.
left-margin
This property specifies an extra left margin for filling this part of the text.
justification
This property specifies the style of justification for filling this part of the text.
Self-inserting characters, the ones that get inserted into a buffer when the user types them (see User-Level Insertion Commands), normally take on the same properties as the preceding character. This is called inheritance of properties.
By contrast, a Lisp program can do insertion with inheritance or without,
depending on the choice of insertion primitive. The ordinary text
insertion functions, such as insert
, do not inherit any
properties. They insert text with precisely the properties of the
string being inserted, and no others. This is correct for programs
that copy text from one context to another—for example, into or out
of the kill ring. To insert with inheritance, use the special
primitives described in this section. Self-inserting characters
inherit properties because they work using these primitives.
When you do insertion with inheritance, which properties are inherited, and from where, depends on which properties are sticky. Insertion after a character inherits those of its properties that are rear-sticky. Insertion before a character inherits those of its properties that are front-sticky. When both sides offer different sticky values for the same property, the previous character’s value takes precedence.
By default, a text property is rear-sticky but not front-sticky; thus, the default is to inherit all the properties of the preceding character, and nothing from the following character.
You can control the stickiness of various text properties with two
specific text properties, front-sticky
and rear-nonsticky
,
and with the variable text-property-default-nonsticky
. You can
use the variable to specify a different default for a given property.
You can use those two text properties to make any specific properties
sticky or nonsticky in any particular part of the text.
If a character’s front-sticky
property is t
, then all
its properties are front-sticky. If the front-sticky
property is
a list, then the sticky properties of the character are those whose
names are in the list. For example, if a character has a
front-sticky
property whose value is (face read-only)
,
then insertion before the character can inherit its face
property
and its read-only
property, but no others.
The rear-nonsticky
property works the opposite way. Most
properties are rear-sticky by default, so the rear-nonsticky
property says which properties are not rear-sticky. If a
character’s rear-nonsticky
property is t
, then none of its
properties are rear-sticky. If the rear-nonsticky
property is a
list, properties are rear-sticky unless their names are in the
list.
This variable holds an alist which defines the default rear-stickiness
of various text properties. Each element has the form
(property . nonstickiness)
, and it defines the
stickiness of a particular text property, property.
If nonstickiness is non-nil
, this means that the property
property is rear-nonsticky by default. Since all properties are
front-nonsticky by default, this makes property nonsticky in both
directions by default.
The text properties front-sticky
and rear-nonsticky
, when
used, take precedence over the default nonstickiness specified in
text-property-default-nonsticky
.
Here are the functions that insert text with inheritance of properties:
Insert the strings strings, just like the function insert
,
but inherit any sticky properties from the adjoining text.
Insert the strings strings, just like the function
insert-before-markers
, but inherit any sticky properties from the
adjoining text.
See Inserting Text, for the ordinary insertion functions which do not inherit.
Instead of computing text properties for all the text in the buffer, you can arrange to compute the text properties for parts of the text when and if something depends on them.
The primitive that extracts text from the buffer along with its
properties is buffer-substring
. Before examining the properties,
this function runs the abnormal hook buffer-access-fontify-functions
.
This variable holds a list of functions for computing text properties.
Before buffer-substring
copies the text and text properties for a
portion of the buffer, it calls all the functions in this list. Each of
the functions receives two arguments that specify the range of the
buffer being accessed. (The buffer itself is always the current
buffer.)
The function buffer-substring-no-properties
does not call these
functions, since it ignores text properties anyway.
In order to prevent the hook functions from being called more than
once for the same part of the buffer, you can use the variable
buffer-access-fontified-property
.
If this variable’s value is non-nil
, it is a symbol which is used
as a text property name. A non-nil
value for that text property
means the other text properties for this character have already been
computed.
If all the characters in the range specified for buffer-substring
have a non-nil
value for this property, buffer-substring
does not call the buffer-access-fontify-functions
functions. It
assumes these characters already have the right text properties, and
just copies the properties they already have.
The normal way to use this feature is that the
buffer-access-fontify-functions
functions add this property, as
well as others, to the characters they operate on. That way, they avoid
being called over and over for the same text.
Clickable text is text that can be clicked, with either the mouse or via a keyboard command, to produce some result. Many major modes use clickable text to implement textual hyper-links, or links for short.
The easiest way to insert and manipulate links is to use the
button
package. See Buttons. In this section, we will
explain how to manually set up clickable text in a buffer, using text
properties. For simplicity, we will refer to the clickable text as a
link.
Implementing a link involves three separate steps: (1) indicating
clickability when the mouse moves over the link; (2) making RET
or mouse-2 on that link do something; and (3) setting up a
follow-link
condition so that the link obeys
mouse-1-click-follows-link
.
To indicate clickability, add the mouse-face
text property to
the text of the link; then Emacs will highlight the link when the
mouse moves over it. In addition, you should define a tooltip or echo
area message, using the help-echo
text property. See Properties with Special Meanings. For instance, here is how Dired indicates that file
names are clickable:
(if (dired-move-to-filename) (add-text-properties (point) (save-excursion (dired-move-to-end-of-filename) (point)) '(mouse-face highlight help-echo "mouse-2: visit this file in other window")))
To make the link clickable, bind RET and mouse-2 to commands that perform the desired action. Each command should check to see whether it was called on a link, and act accordingly. For instance, Dired’s major mode keymap binds mouse-2 to the following command:
(defun dired-mouse-find-file-other-window (event) "In Dired, visit the file or directory name you click on." (interactive "e") (let ((window (posn-window (event-end event))) (pos (posn-point (event-end event))) file) (if (not (windowp window)) (error "No file chosen")) (with-current-buffer (window-buffer window) (goto-char pos) (setq file (dired-get-file-for-visit))) (if (file-directory-p file) (or (and (cdr dired-subdir-alist) (dired-goto-subdir file)) (progn (select-window window) (dired-other-window file))) (select-window window) (find-file-other-window (file-name-sans-versions file t)))))
This command uses the functions posn-window
and
posn-point
to determine where the click occurred, and
dired-get-file-for-visit
to determine which file to visit.
Instead of binding the mouse command in a major mode keymap, you can
bind it within the link text, using the keymap
text property
(see Properties with Special Meanings). For instance:
(let ((map (make-sparse-keymap))) (define-key map [mouse-2] 'operate-this-button) (put-text-property link-start link-end 'keymap map))
With this method, you can easily define different commands for different links. Furthermore, the global definition of RET and mouse-2 remain available for the rest of the text in the buffer.
The basic Emacs command for clicking on links is mouse-2.
However, for compatibility with other graphical applications, Emacs
also recognizes mouse-1 clicks on links, provided the user
clicks on the link quickly without moving the mouse. This behavior is
controlled by the user option mouse-1-click-follows-link
.
See Mouse References in The GNU Emacs Manual.
To set up the link so that it obeys
mouse-1-click-follows-link
, you must either (1) apply a
follow-link
text or overlay property to the link text, or (2)
bind the follow-link
event to a keymap (which can be a major
mode keymap or a local keymap specified via the keymap
text
property). The value of the follow-link
property, or the
binding for the follow-link
event, acts as a condition for
the link action. This condition tells Emacs two things: the
circumstances under which a mouse-1 click should be regarded as
occurring inside the link, and how to compute an action code
that says what to translate the mouse-1 click into. The link
action condition can be one of the following:
mouse-face
If the condition is the symbol mouse-face
, a position is inside
a link if there is a non-nil
mouse-face
property at that
position. The action code is always t
.
For example, here is how Info mode handles mouse-1:
(keymap-set Info-mode-map "<follow-link>" 'mouse-face)
If the condition is a function, func, then a position pos
is inside a link if (func pos)
evaluates to
non-nil
. The value returned by func serves as the action
code.
For example, here is how pcvs enables mouse-1 to follow links on file names only:
(keymap-set map "<follow-link>" (lambda (pos) (eq (get-char-property pos 'face) 'cvs-filename-face)))
If the condition value is anything else, then the position is inside a link and the condition itself is the action code. Clearly, you should specify this kind of condition only when applying the condition via a text or overlay property on the link text (so that it does not apply to the entire buffer).
The action code tells mouse-1 how to follow the link:
If the action code is a string or vector, the mouse-1 event is
translated into the first element of the string or vector; i.e., the
action of the mouse-1 click is the local or global binding of
that character or symbol. Thus, if the action code is "foo"
,
mouse-1 translates into f. If it is [foo]
,
mouse-1 translates into foo.
For any other non-nil
action code, the mouse-1 event is
translated into a mouse-2 event at the same position.
To define mouse-1 to activate a button defined with
define-button-type
, give the button a follow-link
property. The property value should be a link action condition, as
described above. See Buttons. For example, here is how Help mode
handles mouse-1:
(define-button-type 'help-xref 'follow-link t 'action #'help-button-action)
To define mouse-1 on a widget defined with
define-widget
, give the widget a :follow-link
property.
The property value should be a link action condition, as described
above. For example, here is how the link
widget specifies that
a mouse-1 click shall be translated to RET:
(define-widget 'link 'item "An embedded link." :button-prefix 'widget-link-prefix :button-suffix 'widget-link-suffix :follow-link "\C-m" :help-echo "Follow the link." :format "%[%t%]")
This function returns non-nil
if position pos in the
current buffer is on a link. pos can also be a mouse event
location, as returned by event-start
(see Accessing Mouse Events).
A field is a range of consecutive characters in the buffer that are
identified by having the same value (comparing with eq
) of the
field
property (either a text-property or an overlay property).
This section describes special functions that are available for
operating on fields.
You specify a field with a buffer position, pos. We think of each field as containing a range of buffer positions, so the position you specify stands for the field containing that position.
When the characters before and after pos are part of the same
field, there is no doubt which field contains pos: the one those
characters both belong to. When pos is at a boundary between
fields, which field it belongs to depends on the stickiness of the
field
properties of the two surrounding characters (see Stickiness of Text Properties). The field whose property would be inherited by text
inserted at pos is the field that contains pos.
There is an anomalous case where newly inserted text at pos
would not inherit the field
property from either side. This
happens if the previous character’s field
property is not
rear-sticky, and the following character’s field
property is not
front-sticky. In this case, pos belongs to neither the preceding
field nor the following field; the field functions treat it as belonging
to an empty field whose beginning and end are both at pos.
In all of these functions, if pos is omitted or nil
, the
value of point is used by default. If narrowing is in effect, then
pos should fall within the accessible portion. See Narrowing.
This function returns the beginning of the field specified by pos.
If pos is at the beginning of its field, and
escape-from-edge is non-nil
, then the return value is
always the beginning of the preceding field that ends at pos,
regardless of the stickiness of the field
properties around
pos.
If limit is non-nil
, it is a buffer position; if the
beginning of the field is before limit, then limit will be
returned instead.
This function returns the end of the field specified by pos.
If pos is at the end of its field, and escape-from-edge is
non-nil
, then the return value is always the end of the following
field that begins at pos, regardless of the stickiness of
the field
properties around pos.
If limit is non-nil
, it is a buffer position; if the end
of the field is after limit, then limit will be returned
instead.
This function returns the contents of the field specified by pos, as a string.
This function returns the contents of the field specified by pos, as a string, discarding text properties.
This function deletes the text of the field specified by pos.
This function constrains new-pos to the field that old-pos belongs to—in other words, it returns the position closest to new-pos that is in the same field as old-pos.
If new-pos is nil
, then constrain-to-field
uses
the value of point instead, and moves point to the resulting position
in addition to returning that position.
If old-pos is at the boundary of two fields, then the acceptable
final positions depend on the argument escape-from-edge. If
escape-from-edge is nil
, then new-pos must be in
the field whose field
property equals what new characters
inserted at old-pos would inherit. (This depends on the
stickiness of the field
property for the characters before and
after old-pos.) If escape-from-edge is non-nil
,
new-pos can be anywhere in the two adjacent fields.
Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with the
special value boundary
, then any point within this special
field is also considered to be on the boundary.
Commands like C-a with no argument, that normally move backward
to a specific kind of location and stay there once there, probably
should specify nil
for escape-from-edge. Other motion
commands that check fields should probably pass t
.
If the optional argument only-in-line is non-nil
, and
constraining new-pos in the usual way would move it to a different
line, new-pos is returned unconstrained. This used in commands
that move by line, such as next-line
and
beginning-of-line
, so that they respect field boundaries only in
the case where they can still move to the right line.
If the optional argument inhibit-capture-property is
non-nil
, and old-pos has a non-nil
property of that
name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
You can cause constrain-to-field
to ignore all field boundaries
(and so never constrain anything) by binding the variable
inhibit-field-text-motion
to a non-nil
value.
Some editors that support adding attributes to text in the buffer do so by letting the user specify intervals within the text, and adding the properties to the intervals. Those editors permit the user or the programmer to determine where individual intervals start and end. We deliberately provided a different sort of interface in Emacs Lisp to avoid certain paradoxical behavior associated with text modification.
If the actual subdivision into intervals is meaningful, that means you can distinguish between a buffer that is just one interval with a certain property, and a buffer containing the same text subdivided into two intervals, both of which have that property.
Suppose you take the buffer with just one interval and kill part of the text. The text remaining in the buffer is one interval, and the copy in the kill ring (and the undo list) becomes a separate interval. Then if you yank back the killed text, you get two intervals with the same properties. Thus, editing does not preserve the distinction between one interval and two.
Suppose we attempt to fix this problem by coalescing the two intervals when the text is inserted. That works fine if the buffer originally was a single interval. But suppose instead that we have two adjacent intervals with the same properties, and we kill the text of one interval and yank it back. The same interval-coalescence feature that rescues the other case causes trouble in this one: after yanking, we have just one interval. Once again, editing does not preserve the distinction between one interval and two.
Insertion of text at the border between intervals also raises questions that have no satisfactory answer.
However, it is easy to arrange for editing to behave consistently for questions of the form, “What are the properties of text at this buffer or string position?” So we have decided these are the only questions that make sense; we have not implemented asking questions about where intervals start or end.
In practice, you can usually use the text property search functions in place of explicit interval boundaries. You can think of them as finding the boundaries of intervals, assuming that intervals are always coalesced whenever possible. See Text Property Search Functions.
Emacs also provides explicit intervals as a presentation feature; see Overlays.
The following functions replace characters within a specified region based on their character codes.
This function replaces all occurrences of the character old-char with the character new-char in the region of the current buffer defined by start and end. Both characters must have the same length of their multibyte form.
If noundo is non-nil
, then subst-char-in-region
does
not record the change for undo and does not mark the buffer as modified.
This was useful for controlling the old selective display feature
(see Selective Display).
subst-char-in-region
does not move point and returns
nil
.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of the buffer before. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(subst-char-in-region 1 20 ?i ?X) ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- ThXs Xs the contents of the buffer before. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This function replaces all occurrences of the character fromchar
with tochar in string. By default, substitution occurs in
a copy of string, but if the optional argument inplace is
non-nil
, the function modifies the string itself. In any
case, the function returns the resulting string.
This function applies a translation table to the characters in the buffer between positions start and end.
The translation table table is a string or a char-table;
(aref table ochar)
gives the translated character
corresponding to ochar. If table is a string, any
characters with codes larger than the length of table are not
altered by the translation.
The return value of translate-region
is the number of
characters that were actually changed by the translation. This does
not count characters that were mapped into themselves in the
translation table.
A register is a sort of variable used in Emacs editing that can hold a variety of different kinds of values. Each register is named by a single character. All ASCII characters and their meta variants (but with the exception of C-g) can be used to name registers. Thus, there are 255 possible registers. A register is designated in Emacs Lisp by the character that is its name.
This variable is an alist of elements of the form (name .
contents)
. Normally, there is one element for each Emacs
register that has been used.
The object name is a character (an integer) identifying the register.
The contents of a register can have several possible types:
A number stands for itself. If insert-register
finds a number
in the register, it converts the number to decimal.
A marker represents a buffer position to jump to.
A string is text saved in the register.
A rectangle is represented by a list of strings.
(window-configuration position)
This represents a window configuration to restore in one frame, and a position to jump to in the current buffer.
(frame-configuration position)
¶This represents a frame configuration to restore, and a position to jump to in the current buffer. Frame configurations are also known as framesets.
(file filename)
This represents a file to visit; jumping to this value visits file filename.
(file-query filename position)
This represents a file to visit and a position in it; jumping to this value visits file filename and goes to buffer position position. Restoring this type of position asks the user for confirmation first.
(buffer buffer-name)
This represents a buffer; jumping to this value switches to buffer buffer-name.
The functions in this section return unpredictable values unless otherwise stated.
This function returns the contents of the register
reg, or nil
if it has no contents.
This function sets the contents of register reg to value. A register can be set to any value, but the other register functions expect only certain data types. The return value is value.
This command displays what is contained in register reg.
This command inserts contents of register reg into the current buffer.
Normally, this command puts point before the inserted text, and the
mark after it. However, if the optional second argument beforep
is non-nil
, it puts the mark before and point after.
When called interactively, the command defaults to putting point after text, and a prefix argument inverts this behavior.
If the register contains a rectangle, then the rectangle is inserted with its upper left corner at point. This means that text is inserted in the current line and underneath it on successive lines.
If the register contains something other than saved text (a string) or a rectangle (a list), currently useless things happen. This may be changed in the future.
This function reads and returns a register name, prompting with
prompt and possibly showing a preview of the existing registers
and their contents. The preview is shown in a temporary window, after
the delay specified by the user option register-preview-delay
,
if its value and register-alist
are both non-nil
. The
preview is also shown if the user requests help (e.g., by typing the
help character). We recommend that all interactive commands which
read register names use this function.
This function can be used to transpose stretches of text:
This function exchanges two nonoverlapping portions of the buffer (if they overlap, the function signals an error). Arguments start1 and end1 specify the bounds of one portion and arguments start2 and end2 specify the bounds of the other portion.
Normally, transpose-regions
relocates markers with the transposed
text; a marker previously positioned within one of the two transposed
portions moves along with that portion, thus remaining between the same
two characters in their new position. However, if leave-markers
is non-nil
, transpose-regions
does not do this—it leaves
all markers unrelocated.
You can use the following function to replace the text of one buffer with the text of another buffer:
This function replaces the accessible portion of the current buffer
with the accessible portion of the buffer source. source
may either be a buffer object or the name of a buffer. When
replace-buffer-contents
succeeds, the text of the accessible
portion of the current buffer will be equal to the text of the
accessible portion of the source buffer.
This function attempts to keep point, markers, text properties, and
overlays in the current buffer intact. One potential case where this
behavior is useful is external code formatting programs: they
typically write the reformatted text into a temporary buffer or file,
and using delete-region
and insert-buffer-substring
would destroy these properties. However, the latter combination is
typically faster (See Deleting Text, and Inserting Text).
For its working, replace-buffer-contents
needs to compare the
contents of the original buffer with that of source which is a
costly operation if the buffers are huge and there is a high number of
differences between them. In order to keep
replace-buffer-contents
’s runtime in bounds, it has two
optional arguments.
max-secs defines a hard boundary in terms of seconds. If given
and exceeded, it will fall back to delete-region
and
insert-buffer-substring
.
max-costs defines the quality of the difference computation. If the actual costs exceed this limit, heuristics are used to provide a faster but suboptimal solution. The default value is 1000000.
replace-buffer-contents
returns t
if a non-destructive
replacement could be performed. Otherwise, i.e., if max-secs
was exceeded, it returns nil
.
This function replaces the region between beg and end using the given replace-fn. The function replace-fn is run in the current buffer narrowed to the specified region and it should return either a string or a buffer replacing the region.
The replacement is performed using replace-buffer-contents
(see
above) which also describes the max-secs and max-costs
arguments and the return value.
Note: If the replacement is a string, it will be placed in a temporary
buffer so that replace-buffer-contents
can operate on it.
Therefore, if you already have the replacement in a buffer, it makes
no sense to convert it to a string using buffer-substring
or
similar.
When auto-compression-mode
is enabled, Emacs automatically
uncompresses compressed files when you visit them, and automatically
recompresses them if you alter and save them. See Compressed
Files in The GNU Emacs Manual.
The above feature works by calling an external executable (e.g.,
gzip
). Emacs can also be compiled with support for built-in
decompression using the zlib library, which is faster than calling an
external program.
This function returns non-nil
if built-in zlib decompression is
available.
This function decompresses the region between start and
end, using built-in zlib decompression. The region should
contain data that were compressed with gzip or zlib. On success, the
function replaces the contents of the region with the decompressed
data. If allow-partial is nil
or omitted, then on
failure, the function leaves the region unchanged and returns
nil
. Otherwise, it returns the number of bytes that were not
decompressed and replaces the region text by whatever data was
successfully decompressed. This function can be called only in
unibyte buffers.
Base 64 code is used in email to encode a sequence of 8-bit bytes as a longer sequence of ASCII graphic characters. It is defined in Internet RFC232045 and also in RFC 4648. This section describes the functions for converting to and from this code.
This function converts the region from beg to end into base 64 code. It returns the length of the encoded text. An error is signaled if a character in the region is multibyte, i.e., in a multibyte buffer the region must contain only ASCII characters or raw bytes.
Normally, this function inserts newline characters into the encoded
text, to avoid overlong lines. However, if the optional argument
no-line-break is non-nil
, these newlines are not added, so
the output is just one long line.
This function is like base64-encode-region
, but it implements
the URL variant of base 64 encoding, per RFC 4648, and it doesn’t
insert newline characters into the encoded text, so the output is
just one long line.
If the optional argument no-pad is non-nil
then this
function doesn’t generate the padding (=
).
This function converts the string string into base 64 code. It
returns a string containing the encoded text. As for
base64-encode-region
, an error is signaled if a character in the
string is multibyte.
Normally, this function inserts newline characters into the encoded
text, to avoid overlong lines. However, if the optional argument
no-line-break is non-nil
, these newlines are not added, so
the result string is just one long line.
Like base64-encode-string
, but generates the URL variant of
base 64, and doesn’t insert newline characters into the encoded text,
so the result is just one long line.
If the optional argument no-pad is non-nil
then this
function doesn’t generate the padding.
This function converts the region from beg to end from base 64 code into the corresponding decoded text. It returns the length of the decoded text.
The decoding functions ignore newline characters in the encoded text.
If optional argument base64url is non-nil
, then padding
is optional, and the URL variant of base 64 encoding is used.
If optional argument ignore-invalid is non-nil
, then any
unrecognized characters are ignored.
This function converts the string string from base 64 code into the corresponding decoded text. It returns a unibyte string containing the decoded text.
The decoding functions ignore newline characters in the encoded text.
If optional argument base64url is non-nil
, then padding
is optional, and the URL variant of base 64 encoding is used.
If optional argument ignore-invalid is non-nil
, then any
unrecognized characters are ignored.
Emacs has built-in support for computing cryptographic hashes. A cryptographic hash, or checksum, is a digital fingerprint of a piece of data (e.g., a block of text) which can be used to check that you have an unaltered copy of that data.
Emacs supports several common cryptographic hash algorithms: MD5,
SHA-1, SHA-2, SHA-224, SHA-256, SHA-384 and SHA-512. MD5 is the
oldest of these algorithms, and is commonly used in message
digests to check the integrity of messages transmitted over a
network. MD5 and SHA-1 are not collision resistant (i.e., it is
possible to deliberately design different pieces of data which have
the same MD5 or SHA-1 hash), so you should not use them for anything
security-related. For security-related applications you should use
the other hash types, such as SHA-2 (e.g. sha256
or
sha512
).
This function returns a list of symbols representing algorithms that
secure-hash
can use.
This function returns a hash for object. The argument
algorithm is a symbol stating which hash to compute: one of
md5
, sha1
, sha224
, sha256
, sha384
or sha512
. The argument object should be a buffer or a
string.
The optional arguments start and end are character
positions specifying the portion of object to compute the
message digest for. If they are nil
or omitted, the hash is
computed for the whole of object.
If the argument binary is omitted or nil
, the function
returns the text form of the hash, as an ordinary Lisp string.
If binary is non-nil
, it returns the hash in binary
form, as a sequence of bytes stored in a unibyte string. The length
of the returned string depends on algorithm:
md5
: 32 characters (32 bytes if binary is
non-nil
).
sha1
: 40 characters (40 bytes if binary is
non-nil
).
sha224
: 56 characters (56 bytes if binary is
non-nil
).
sha256
: 64 characters (64 bytes if binary is
non-nil
).
sha384
: 96 characters (96 bytes if binary is
non-nil
).
sha512
: 128 characters (128 bytes if binary is
non-nil
).
This function does not compute the hash directly from the internal representation of object’s text (see Text Representations). Instead, it encodes the text using a coding system (see Coding Systems), and computes the hash from that encoded text. If object is a buffer, the coding system used is the one which would be chosen by default for writing the text of that buffer into a file. If object is a string, the user’s preferred coding system is used (see Recognize Coding in GNU Emacs Manual).
This function returns an MD5 hash. It is semi-obsolete, since for
most purposes it is equivalent to calling secure-hash
with
md5
as the algorithm argument. The object,
start and end arguments have the same meanings as in
secure-hash
. The function returns a 32-character string.
If coding-system is non-nil
, it specifies a coding system
to use to encode the text; if omitted or nil
, the default
coding system is used, like in secure-hash
.
Normally, md5
signals an error if the text can’t be encoded
using the specified or chosen coding system. However, if
noerror is non-nil
, it silently uses raw-text
coding instead.
Return a hash of buffer-or-name. If nil
, this defaults
to the current buffer. As opposed to secure-hash
, this
function computes the hash based on the internal representation of the
buffer, disregarding any coding systems. It’s therefore only useful
when comparing two buffers running in the same Emacs, and is not
guaranteed to return the same hash between different Emacs versions.
It should be somewhat more efficient on larger buffers than
secure-hash
is, and should not allocate more memory.
This function is equivalent to calling secure-hash
like this:
(secure-hash 'sha1 object start end binary)
It returns a 40-character string if binary is nil
, or a
40-byte unibyte string otherwise.
Emacs can display text from many external sources, like email and Web sites. Attackers may attempt to confuse the user reading this text by using obfuscated URLs or email addresses, and tricking the user into visiting a web page they didn’t intend to visit, or sending an email to the wrong address.
This usually involves using characters from scripts that visually look like ASCII characters (i.e., are homoglyphs), but there are also other techniques used, like using bidirectional overrides, or having an HTML link text that says one thing, while the underlying URL points somewhere else.
To help identify these suspicious text strings, Emacs provides a library to do a number of checks on text. (See UTS #39: Unicode Security Mechanisms for the rationale behind the checks that are available and more details about them.) Packages that present data that might be suspicious should use this library to flag suspicious text on display.
This function is the high-level interface function that packages
should use. It respects the textsec-check
user option, which
allows the user to disable the checks.
This function checks object (whose data type depends on type) to see if it looks suspicious when interpreted as a thing of type. The available types and the corresponding object data types are:
domain
Check whether a domain (e.g., ‘www.gnu.org’ looks suspicious. object should be a string, the domain name.
url
Check whether an URL (e.g., ‘http://gnu.org/foo/bar’) looks suspicious. object should be a string, the URL to check.
link
Check whether an HTML link (e.g., ‘<a
href='http://gnu.org'>fsf.org</a>’ looks suspicious. In this case,
object should be a cons
cell where the car
is the
URL string, and the cdr
is the link text. The link
is deemed suspicious if the link text contains a domain name, and that
domain name points to something other than the URL.
email-address
Check whether an email address (e.g., ‘foo@example.org’) looks suspicious. object should be a string.
local-address
Check whether the local part of an email address (the bit before the ‘@’ sign) looks suspicious. object should be a string.
name
Check whether a name (used in an email address header) looks suspicious. object should be a string.
email-address-header
Check whether a full RFC2822 email address header (e.g., ‘=?utf-8?Q?=C3=81?= <foo@example.com>’) looks suspicious. object should be a string.
If object is suspicious, this function returns a string that
explains why it is suspicious. If object is not suspicious, the
function returns nil
.
If the text is suspicious, the application should mark the suspicious
text with the textsec-suspicious
face, and make the explanation
returned by textsec-suspicious-p
available to the user in some way
(for example, in a tooltip). The application might also prompt the
user for confirmation before taking any action on a suspicious string
(like sending an email to a suspicious email address).
If compiled with GnuTLS, Emacs offers built-in cryptographic support. Following the GnuTLS API terminology, the available tools are digests, MACs, symmetric ciphers, and AEAD ciphers.
The terms used herein, such as IV (Initialization Vector), require some familiarity with cryptography and will not be defined in detail. Please consult https://www.gnutls.org/ for specific documentation which may help you understand the terminology and structure of the GnuTLS library.
The inputs to GnuTLS cryptographic functions can be specified in several ways, both as primitive Emacs Lisp types or as lists.
The list form is currently similar to how md5
and
secure-hash
operate.
buffer
Simply passing a buffer as input means the whole buffer should be used.
string
A string as input will be used directly. It may be modified by the function (unlike most other Emacs Lisp functions) to reduce the chance of exposing sensitive data after the function does its work.
(buffer-or-string start end coding-system noerror)
This specifies a buffer or a string as described above, but an optional range can be specified with start and end.
In addition an optional coding-system can be specified if needed.
The last optional item, noerror, overrides the normal error when
the text can’t be encoded using the specified or chosen coding system.
When noerror is non-nil
, this function silently uses
raw-text
coding instead.
(iv-auto
length)
This generates a random IV (Initialization Vector) of the specified length and passes it to the function. This ensures that the IV is unpredictable and unlikely to be reused in the same session.
This function returns the alist of the GnuTLS digest algorithms.
Each entry has a key which represents the algorithm, followed by a
plist with internal details about the algorithm. The plist will have
:type gnutls-digest-algorithm
and also will have the key
:digest-algorithm-length 64
to indicate the size, in bytes, of
the resulting digest.
There is a name parallel between GnuTLS MAC and digest algorithms but they are separate things internally and should not be mixed.
The digest-method can be the whole plist from
gnutls-digests
, or just the symbol key, or a string with the
name of that symbol.
The input can be specified as a buffer or string or in other ways (see Format of GnuTLS Cryptography Inputs).
This function returns nil
on error, and signals a Lisp error if
the digest-method or input are invalid. On success, it
returns a list of a binary string (the output) and the IV used.
This function returns the alist of the GnuTLS MAC algorithms.
Each entry has a key which represents the algorithm, followed by a
plist with internal details about the algorithm. The plist will have
:type gnutls-mac-algorithm
and also will have the keys
:mac-algorithm-length
:mac-algorithm-keysize
:mac-algorithm-noncesize
to indicate the size, in bytes, of the
resulting hash, the key, and the nonce respectively.
The nonce is currently unused and only some MACs support it.
There is a name parallel between GnuTLS MAC and digest algorithms but they are separate things internally and should not be mixed.
The hash-method can be the whole plist from
gnutls-macs
, or just the symbol key, or a string with the
name of that symbol.
The key can be specified as a buffer or string or in other ways (see Format of GnuTLS Cryptography Inputs). The key will be wiped after use if it’s a string.
The input can be specified as a buffer or string or in other ways (see Format of GnuTLS Cryptography Inputs).
This function returns nil
on error, and signals a Lisp error if
the hash-method or key or input are invalid.
On success, it returns a list of a binary string (the output) and the IV used.
This function returns the alist of the GnuTLS ciphers.
Each entry has a key which represents the cipher, followed by a plist
with internal details about the algorithm. The plist will have
:type gnutls-symmetric-cipher
and also will have the keys
:cipher-aead-capable
set to nil
or t
to indicate
AEAD capability; and :cipher-tagsize
:cipher-blocksize
:cipher-keysize
:cipher-ivsize
to indicate the size, in
bytes, of the tag, block size of the resulting data, the key, and the
IV respectively.
The cipher can be the whole plist from
gnutls-ciphers
, or just the symbol key, or a string with the
name of that symbol.
The key can be specified as a buffer or string or in other ways (see Format of GnuTLS Cryptography Inputs). The key will be wiped after use if it’s a string.
The iv and input and the optional aead_auth can be specified as a buffer or string or in other ways (see Format of GnuTLS Cryptography Inputs).
aead_auth is only checked with AEAD ciphers, that is, ciphers whose
plist has :cipher-aead-capable t
. Otherwise it’s ignored.
This function returns nil
on error, and signals a Lisp error if
the cipher or key, iv, or input are invalid,
or if aead_auth was specified with an AEAD cipher and was
invalid.
On success, it returns a list of a binary string (the output) and the IV used.
The cipher can be the whole plist from
gnutls-ciphers
, or just the symbol key, or a string with the
name of that symbol.
The key can be specified as a buffer or string or in other ways (see Format of GnuTLS Cryptography Inputs). The key will be wiped after use if it’s a string.
The iv and input and the optional aead_auth can be specified as a buffer or string or in other ways (see Format of GnuTLS Cryptography Inputs).
aead_auth is only checked with AEAD ciphers, that is, ciphers whose
plist has :cipher-aead-capable t
. Otherwise it’s ignored.
This function returns nil
on decryption error, and signals a
Lisp error if the cipher or key, iv, or input
are invalid, or if aead_auth was specified with an AEAD cipher
and was invalid.
On success, it returns a list of a binary string (the output) and the IV used.
Emacs can be compiled with built-in support for accessing SQLite databases. This section describes the facilities available for accessing SQLite databases from Lisp programs.
The function returns non-nil
if built-in SQLite support is
available in this Emacs session.
When SQLite support is available, the following functions can be used.
This function opens file as an SQLite database file. If
file doesn’t exist, a new database will be created and stored in
that file. If file is omitted or nil
, a new in-memory
database is created instead.
The return value is a database object that can be used as the argument to most of the subsequent functions described below.
This predicate returns non-nil
if object is an SQLite
database object. The database object returned by the
sqlite-open
function satisfies this predicate.
Close the database db. It’s usually not necessary to call this function explicitly—the database will automatically be closed if Emacs shuts down or the database object is garbage collected.
Execute the SQL statement. For instance:
(sqlite-execute db "insert into foo values ('bar', 2)")
If the optional values parameter is present, it should be either a list or a vector of values to bind while executing the statement. For instance:
(sqlite-execute db "insert into foo values (?, ?)" '("bar" 2))
This has exactly the same effect as the previous example, but is more efficient and safer (because it doesn’t involve any string parsing or interpolation).
sqlite-execute
usually returns the number of affected rows.
For instance, an ‘insert’ statement will typically return
‘1’, whereas an ‘update’ statement may return zero or a
higher number. However, when using SQL statements like
‘insert into … returning …’ and the like, the values
specified by ‘returning …’ will be returned instead.
Strings in SQLite are, by default, stored as utf-8
, and
selecting a text column will decode the string using that charset.
Selecting a blob column will return the raw data without any decoding
(i.e., it will return a unibyte string containing the bytes as stored
in the database). Inserting binary data into blob columns, however,
requires some care, as sqlite-execute
will, by default,
interpret all strings as utf-8
.
So if you have, for instance, GIF data in a unibyte string
called gif, you have to mark it specially to let
sqlite-execute
know this:
(put-text-property 0 1 'coding-system 'binary gif) (sqlite-execute db "insert into foo values (?, ?)" (list gif 2))
Select some data from db and return them. For instance:
(sqlite-select db "select * from foo where key = 2") ⇒ (("bar" 2))
As with the sqlite-execute
, you can optionally pass in a list
or a vector of values that will be bound before executing the select:
(sqlite-select db "select * from foo where key = ?" [2]) ⇒ (("bar" 2))
This is usually more efficient and safer than the method used by the previous example.
By default, this function returns a list of matching rows, where each
row is a list of column values. If return-type is full
,
the names of the columns (as a list of strings) will be returned as
the first element in the return value.
If return-type is set
, this function will return a
statement object instead. This object can be examined by using
the sqlite-next
, sqlite-columns
and sqlite-more-p
functions. If the result set is small, it’s often more convenient to
just return the data directly, but if the result set is large (or if
you won’t be using all the data from the set), using the set
method will allocate a lot less memory, and is therefore more
memory-efficient.
This function returns the next row in the result set statement,
typically an object returned by sqlite-select
.
(sqlite-next stmt) ⇒ ("bar" 2)
This function returns the column names of the result set
statement, typically an object returned by sqlite-select
.
(sqlite-columns stmt) ⇒ ("name" "issue")
This predicate says whether there is more data to be fetched from the
result set statement, typically an object returned by
sqlite-select
.
If statement is not going to be used any more, calling this function will free the resources used by statement. This is usually not necessary—when the statement object is garbage-collected, Emacs will automatically free its resources.
Start a transaction in db. When in a transaction, other readers
of the database won’t access the results until the transaction has
been committed by sqlite-commit
.
End a transaction in db and write the data out to its file.
End a transaction in db and discard any changes that have been made by the transaction.
Like progn
(see Sequencing), but executes body with a
transaction held, and commits the transaction at the end if body
completes normally. If body signals an error, or committing the
transaction fails, the changes in db performed by body are
rolled back. The macro returns the value of body if it
completes normally and commit succeeds.
Execute pragma in db. A pragma is usually a command that affects the database overall, instead of any particular table. For instance, to make SQLite automatically garbage collect data that’s no longer needed, you can say:
(sqlite-pragma db "auto_vacuum = FULL")
This function returns non-nil
on success and nil
if the
pragma failed. Many pragmas can only be issued when the database is
brand new and empty.
Load the named extension module into the database db. Extensions are usually shared-library files; on GNU and Unix systems, they have the .so file-name extension.
Return a string denoting the version of the SQLite library in use.
If you wish to list the contents of an SQLite file, you can use the
sqlite-mode-open-file
command. This will pop to a buffer using
sqlite-mode
, which allows you to examine (and alter) the
contents of an SQLite database.
Emacs can be compiled with built-in libxml2 support.
This function returns non-nil
if built-in libxml2 support is
available in this Emacs session.
When libxml2 support is available, the following functions can be used to parse HTML or XML text into Lisp object trees.
This function parses the text between start and end as HTML, and returns a list representing the HTML parse tree. It attempts to handle real-world HTML by robustly coping with syntax mistakes.
If start or end are nil
, they default to the values
from point-min
and point-max
, respectively.
The optional argument base-url, if non-nil
, should be
used for warnings and errors reported by the libxml2 library,
but Emacs currently calls the library with errors and warnings
disabled, so this argument is not used.
If the optional argument discard-comments is non-nil
,
any top-level comment is discarded. (This argument is obsolete and
will be removed in future Emacs versions. To remove comments, use the
xml-remove-comments
utility function on the data before you
call the parsing function.)
In the parse tree, each HTML node is represented by a list in which the first element is a symbol representing the node name, the second element is an alist of node attributes, and the remaining elements are the subnodes.
The following example demonstrates this. Given this (malformed) HTML document:
<html><head></head><body width=101><div class=thing>Foo<div>Yes
A call to libxml-parse-html-region
returns this DOM
(document object model):
(html nil (head nil) (body ((width . "101")) (div ((class . "thing")) "Foo" (div nil "Yes"))))
This function renders the parsed HTML in dom into the current
buffer. The argument dom should be a list as generated by
libxml-parse-html-region
. This function is, e.g., used by
EWW in The Emacs Web Wowser Manual.
This function is the same as libxml-parse-html-region
, except
that it parses the text as XML rather than HTML (so it is stricter
about syntax).
The DOM returned by libxml-parse-html-region
(and
the other XML parsing functions) is a tree structure where
each node has a node name (called a tag), and optional key/value
attribute list, and then a list of child nodes. The child
nodes are either strings or DOM objects.
(body ((width . "101")) (div ((class . "thing")) "Foo" (div nil "Yes")))
This function creates a DOM node of type tag. If given, attributes should be a key/value pair list. If given, children should be DOM nodes.
The following functions can be used to work with this structure. Each function takes a DOM node, or a list of nodes. In the latter case, only the first node in the list is used.
Simple accessors:
dom-tag node
Return the tag (also called “node name”) of the node.
dom-attr node attribute
Return the value of attribute in the node. A common usage would be:
(dom-attr img 'href) => "https://fsf.org/logo.png"
dom-children node
Return all the children of the node.
dom-non-text-children node
Return all the non-string children of the node.
dom-attributes node
Return the key/value pair list of attributes of the node.
dom-text node
Return all the textual elements of the node as a concatenated string.
dom-texts node
Return all the textual elements of the node, as well as the textual elements of all the children of the node, recursively, as a concatenated string. This function also takes an optional separator to be inserted between the textual elements.
dom-parent dom node
Return the parent of node in dom.
dom-remove dom node
Remove node from dom.
The following are functions for altering the DOM.
dom-set-attribute node attribute value
Set the attribute of the node to value.
dom-remove-attribute node attribute
Remove attribute from node.
dom-append-child node child
Append child as the last child of node.
dom-add-child-before node child before
Add child to node’s child list before the before
node. If before is nil
, make child the first child.
dom-set-attributes node attributes
Replace all the attributes of the node with a new key/value list.
The following are functions for searching for elements in the DOM. They all return lists of matching nodes.
dom-by-tag dom tag
Return all nodes in dom that are of type tag. A typical use would be:
(dom-by-tag dom 'td) => '((td ...) (td ...) (td ...))
dom-by-class dom match
Return all nodes in dom that have class names that match match, which is a regular expression.
dom-by-style dom style
Return all nodes in dom that have styles that match match, which is a regular expression.
dom-by-id dom style
Return all nodes in dom that have IDs that match match, which is a regular expression.
dom-search dom predicate
Return all nodes in dom where predicate returns a
non-nil
value. predicate is called with the node to be
tested as its parameter.
dom-strings dom
Return all strings in dom.
Utility functions:
dom-pp dom &optional remove-empty
Pretty-print dom at point. If remove-empty, don’t print textual nodes that just contain white-space.
dom-print dom &optional pretty xml
Print dom at point. If xml is non-nil
, print as
XML; otherwise, print as HTML. If pretty is
non-nil
, indent the HTML/XML logically.
When Emacs is compiled with JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) support, it provides several functions to convert between Lisp objects and JSON values. Any JSON value can be converted to a Lisp object, but not vice versa. Specifically:
true
, null
, false
.
true
is represented by the symbol t
. By default, the
remaining two are represented, respectively, by the symbols
:null
and :false
.
assq
.
Note that nil
, being both a valid alist and a valid plist,
represents {}
, the empty JSON object; not null
,
false
, or an empty array, all of which are different JSON
values.
This predicate returns non-nil
if Emacs has been built with
JSON support, and the library is available on the current
system.
If some Lisp object can’t be represented in JSON, the serialization
functions will signal an error of type wrong-type-argument
.
The parsing functions can also signal the following errors:
json-unavailable
Signaled when the parsing library isn’t available.
json-end-of-file
Signaled when encountering a premature end of the input text.
json-trailing-content
Signaled when encountering unexpected input after the first JSON object parsed.
json-parse-error
Signaled when encountering invalid JSON syntax.
Top-level values and the subobjects within these top-level values can be serialized to JSON. Likewise, the parsing functions will return any of the possible types described above.
This function returns a new Lisp string which contains the JSON representation of object. The argument args is a list of keyword/argument pairs. The following keywords are accepted:
:null-object
The value decides which Lisp object to use to represent the JSON
keyword null
. It defaults to the symbol :null
.
:false-object
The value decides which Lisp object to use to represent the JSON
keyword false
. It defaults to the symbol :false
.
This function inserts the JSON representation of object into the
current buffer before point. The argument args are interpreted
as in json-parse-string
.
This function parses the JSON value in string, which must be a
Lisp string. If string doesn’t contain a valid JSON object,
this function signals the json-parse-error
error.
The argument args is a list of keyword/argument pairs. The following keywords are accepted:
:object-type
The value decides which Lisp object to use for representing the
key-value mappings of a JSON object. It can be either
hash-table
, the default, to make hashtables with strings as
keys; alist
to use alists with symbols as keys; or plist
to use plists with keyword symbols as keys.
:array-type
The value decides which Lisp object to use for representing a JSON
array. It can be either array
, the default, to use Lisp
arrays; or list
to use lists.
:null-object
The value decides which Lisp object to use to represent the JSON
keyword null
. It defaults to the symbol :null
.
:false-object
The value decides which Lisp object to use to represent the JSON
keyword false
. It defaults to the symbol :false
.
This function reads the next JSON value from the current buffer,
starting at point. It moves point to the position immediately after
the value if contains a valid JSON object; otherwise it signals the
json-parse-error
error and doesn’t move point. The arguments
args are interpreted as in json-parse-string
.
The jsonrpc
library implements the JSONRPC
specification, version 2.0, as it is described in
https://www.jsonrpc.org/. As the name suggests, JSONRPC is a
generic Remote Procedure Call protocol designed around
JSON objects, which you can convert to and from Lisp objects
(see Parsing and generating JSON values).
Quoting from the spec, JSONRPC "is transport agnostic in that the concepts can be used within the same process, over sockets, over http, or in many various message passing environments."
To model this agnosticism, the jsonrpc
library uses objects of
a jsonrpc-connection
class, which represent a connection to a
remote JSON endpoint (for details on Emacs’s object system,
see EIEIO in EIEIO). In modern object-oriented parlance,
this class is “abstract”, i.e. the actual class of a useful
connection object is always a subclass of jsonrpc-connection
.
Nevertheless, we can define two distinct APIs around the
jsonrpc-connection
class:
In this scenario, the JSONRPC application selects a concrete subclass
of jsonrpc-connection
, and proceeds to create objects of that
subclass using make-instance
. To initiate a contact to the
remote endpoint, the JSONRPC application passes this object to the
functions jsonrpc-notify
, jsonrpc-request
, and/or
jsonrpc-async-request
. For handling remotely initiated
contacts, which generally come in asynchronously, the instantiation
should include :request-dispatcher
and
:notification-dispatcher
initargs, which are both functions of
3 arguments: the connection object; a symbol naming the JSONRPC method
invoked remotely; and a JSONRPC params
object.
The function passed as :request-dispatcher
is responsible for
handling the remote endpoint’s requests, which expect a reply from the
local endpoint (in this case, the program you’re building). Inside
that function, you may either return locally (a normal return) or
non-locally (an error return). A local return value must be a Lisp
object that can be serialized as JSON (see Parsing and generating JSON values). This
determines a success response, and the object is forwarded to the
server as the JSONRPC result
object. A non-local return,
achieved by calling the function jsonrpc-error
, causes an error
response to be sent to the server. The details of the accompanying
JSONRPC error
are filled out with whatever was passed to
jsonrpc-error
. A non-local return triggered by an unexpected
error of any other type also causes an error response to be sent
(unless you have set debug-on-error
, in which case this calls
the Lisp debugger, see Entering the Debugger on an Error).
In this scenario, jsonrpc-connection
is subclassed to implement
a different underlying transport strategy (for details on how to
subclass, see Inheritance.). Users of the
application-building interface can then instantiate objects of this
concrete class (using the make-instance
function) and connect
to JSONRPC endpoints using that strategy.
This API has mandatory and optional parts.
To allow its users to initiate JSONRPC contacts (notifications or
requests) or reply to endpoint requests, the subclass must have an
implementation of the jsonrpc-connection-send
method.
Likewise, for handling the three types of remote contacts (requests,
notifications, and responses to local requests), the transport
implementation must arrange for the function
jsonrpc-connection-receive
to be called after noticing a new
JSONRPC message on the wire (whatever that "wire" may be).
Finally, and optionally, the jsonrpc-connection
subclass should
implement the jsonrpc-shutdown
and jsonrpc-running-p
methods if these concepts apply to the transport. If they do, then
any system resources (e.g. processes, timers, etc.) used to listen for
messages on the wire should be released in jsonrpc-shutdown
,
i.e. they should only be needed while jsonrpc-running-p
is
non-nil
.
For convenience, the jsonrpc
library comes with a built-in
jsonrpc-process-connection
transport implementation that can
talk to local subprocesses (using the standard input and standard
output); or TCP hosts (using sockets); or any other remote endpoint
that Emacs’s process object can represent (see Processes).
Using this transport, the JSONRPC messages are encoded on the wire as plain text and prefaced by some basic HTTP-style enveloping headers, such as “Content-Length”.
For an example of an application using this transport scheme on top of JSONRPC, see the Language Server Protocol.
Along with the mandatory :request-dispatcher
and
:notification-dispatcher
initargs, users of the
jsonrpc-process-connection
class should pass the following
initargs as keyword-value pairs to make-instance
:
:process
Value must be a live process object or a function of no arguments producing one such object. If passed a process object, the object is expected to contain a pre-established connection; otherwise, the function is called immediately after the object is made.
:on-shutdown
Value must be a function of a single argument, the
jsonrpc-process-connection
object. The function is called
after the underlying process object has been deleted (either
deliberately by jsonrpc-shutdown
, or unexpectedly, because of
some external cause).
JSONRPC JSON objects are exchanged as Lisp plists (see Property Lists): JSON-compatible plists are handed to the dispatcher functions
and, likewise, JSON-compatible plists should be given to
jsonrpc-notify
, jsonrpc-request
, and
jsonrpc-async-request
.
To facilitate handling plists, this library makes liberal use of
cl-lib
library (see cl-lib in Common Lisp Extensions
for GNU Emacs Lisp) and suggests (but doesn’t force) its clients to
do the same. A macro jsonrpc-lambda
can be used to create a
lambda for destructuring a JSON-object like in this example:
(jsonrpc-async-request myproc :frobnicate `(:foo "trix") :success-fn (jsonrpc-lambda (&key bar baz &allow-other-keys) (message "Server replied back with %s and %s!" bar baz)) :error-fn (jsonrpc-lambda (&key code message _data) (message "Sadly, server reports %s: %s" code message)))
In many RPC situations, synchronization between the two communicating endpoints is a matter of correctly designing the RPC application: when synchronization is needed, requests (which are blocking) should be used; when it isn’t, notifications should suffice. However, when Emacs acts as one of these endpoints, asynchronous events (e.g. timer- or process-related) may be triggered while there is still uncertainty about the state of the remote endpoint. Furthermore, acting on these events may only sometimes demand synchronization, depending on the event’s specific nature.
The :deferred
keyword argument to jsonrpc-request
and
jsonrpc-async-request
is designed to let the caller indicate
that the specific request needs synchronization and its actual
issuance may be delayed to the future, until some condition is
satisfied. Specifying :deferred
for a request doesn’t mean it
will be delayed, only that it can be. If the request
isn’t sent immediately, jsonrpc
will make renewed efforts to
send it at certain key times during communication, such as when
receiving or sending other messages to the endpoint.
Before any attempt to send the request, the application-specific
conditions are checked. Since the jsonrpc
library can’t know
what these conditions are, the program can use the
jsonrpc-connection-ready-p
generic function (see Generic Functions) to specify them. The default method for this function
returns t
, but you can add overriding methods that return
nil
in some situations, based on the arguments passed to it,
which are the jsonrpc-connection
object (see Overview) and whichever value you passed as the :deferred
keyword argument.
In database terminology, an atomic change is an indivisible change—it can succeed entirely or it can fail entirely, but it cannot partly succeed. A Lisp program can make a series of changes to one or several buffers as an atomic change group, meaning that either the entire series of changes will be installed in their buffers or, in case of an error, none of them will be.
To do this for one buffer, the one already current, simply write a
call to atomic-change-group
around the code that makes the
changes, like this:
(atomic-change-group (insert foo) (delete-region x y))
If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of
atomic-change-group
, it unmakes all the changes in that buffer
that were during the execution of the body. This kind of change group
has no effect on any other buffers—any such changes remain.
If you need something more sophisticated, such as to make changes in
various buffers constitute one atomic group, you must directly call
lower-level functions that atomic-change-group
uses.
This function sets up a change group for buffer buffer, which defaults to the current buffer. It returns a handle that represents the change group. You must use this handle to activate the change group and subsequently to finish it.
To use the change group, you must activate it. You must do this before making any changes in the text of buffer.
This function activates the change group that handle designates.
After you activate the change group, any changes you make in that buffer become part of it. Once you have made all the desired changes in the buffer, you must finish the change group. There are two ways to do this: you can either accept (and finalize) all the changes, or cancel them all.
This function accepts all the changes in the change group specified by handle, making them final.
This function cancels and undoes all the changes in the change group specified by handle.
You can cause some or all of the changes in a change group to be
considered as a single unit for the purposes of the undo
commands (see Undo) by using undo-amalgamate-change-group
.
Amalgamate all the changes made in the change-group since the state
identified by handle. This function removes all undo boundaries
between undo records of changes since the state described by
handle. Usually, handle is the handle returned by
prepare-change-group
, in which case all the changes since the
beginning of the change-group are amalgamated into a single undo unit.
Your code should use unwind-protect
to make sure the group is
always finished. The call to activate-change-group
should be
inside the unwind-protect
, in case the user types C-g
just after it runs. (This is one reason why
prepare-change-group
and activate-change-group
are
separate functions, because normally you would call
prepare-change-group
before the start of that
unwind-protect
.) Once you finish the group, don’t use the
handle again—in particular, don’t try to finish the same group
twice.
To make a multibuffer change group, call prepare-change-group
once for each buffer you want to cover, then use nconc
to
combine the returned values, like this:
(nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1) (prepare-change-group buffer-2))
You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call
to activate-change-group
, and finish it with a single call to
accept-change-group
or cancel-change-group
.
Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer will get Emacs confused, so don’t let it happen; the first change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one finished.
These hook variables let you arrange to take notice of changes in buffers (or in a particular buffer, if you make them buffer-local). See also Properties with Special Meanings, for how to detect changes to specific parts of the text.
The functions you use in these hooks should save and restore the match data if they do anything that uses regular expressions; otherwise, they will interfere in bizarre ways with the editing operations that call them.
This variable holds a list of functions to call when Emacs is about to modify a buffer. Each function gets two arguments, the beginning and end of the region that is about to change, represented as integers. The buffer that is about to change is always the current buffer when the function is called.
This variable holds a list of functions to call after Emacs modifies a buffer. Each function receives three arguments: the beginning and end of the region just changed, and the length of the text that existed before the change. All three arguments are integers. The buffer that has been changed is always the current buffer when the function is called.
The length of the old text is the difference between the buffer positions before and after that text as it was before the change. As for the changed text, its length is simply the difference between the first two arguments.
Output of messages into the *Messages* buffer does not call these functions, and neither do certain internal buffer changes, such as changes in buffers created by Emacs internally for certain jobs, that should not be visible to Lisp programs.
The vast majority of buffer changing primitives will call
before-change-functions
and after-change-functions
in
balanced pairs, once for each change, where the arguments to these
hooks exactly delimit the change being made. Yet, hook functions
should not rely on this always being the case, because some complex
primitives call before-change-functions
once before making
changes, and then call after-change-functions
zero or more
times, depending on how many individual changes the primitive is
making. When that happens, the arguments to
before-change-functions
will enclose a region in which the
individual changes are made, but won’t necessarily be the minimal such
region, and the arguments to each successive call of
after-change-functions
will then delimit the part of text being
changed exactly. In general, we advise using either the before- or
the after-change hook, but not both.
The macro executes body normally, but arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a series of several changes—if that seems safe.
If a program makes several text changes in the same area of the buffer,
using the macro combine-after-change-calls
around that part of
the program can make it run considerably faster when after-change hooks
are in use. When the after-change hooks are ultimately called, the
arguments specify a portion of the buffer including all of the changes
made within the combine-after-change-calls
body.
Warning: You must not alter the values of
after-change-functions
within
the body of a combine-after-change-calls
form.
Warning: If the changes you combine occur in widely scattered parts of the buffer, this will still work, but it is not advisable, because it may lead to inefficient behavior for some change hook functions.
This executes body normally, except any buffer changes it makes
do not trigger the calls to before-change-functions
and
after-change-functions
. Instead there is a single call of each
of these hooks for the region enclosed by beg and end, the
parameters supplied to after-change-functions
reflecting the
changes made to the size of the region by body.
The result of this macro is the result returned by body.
This macro is useful when a function makes a possibly large number of
repetitive changes to the buffer, and the change hooks would otherwise
take a long time to run, were they to be run for each individual
buffer modification. Emacs itself uses this macro, for example, in
the commands comment-region
and uncomment-region
.
Warning: You must not alter the values of
before-change-functions
or after-change-function
within
body.
Warning: You must not make any buffer changes outside of the region specified by beg and end.
This variable is a normal hook that is run whenever a buffer is changed that was previously in the unmodified state.
If this variable is non-nil
, all of the change hooks are
disabled; none of them run. This affects all the hook variables
described above in this section, as well as the hooks attached to
certain special text properties (see Properties with Special Meanings) and overlay
properties (see Overlay Properties).
Also, this variable is bound to non-nil
while running those
same hook variables, so that by default modifying the buffer from
a modification hook does not cause other modification hooks to be run.
If you do want modification hooks to be run in a particular piece of
code that is itself run from a modification hook, then rebind locally
inhibit-modification-hooks
to nil
. However, doing this
may cause recursive calls to the modification hooks, so be sure to
prepare for that (for example, by binding some variable which tells
your hook to do nothing).
We recommend that you only bind this variable for modifications that
do not result in lasting changes to buffer text contents (for example
face changes or temporary modifications). If you need to delay change
hooks during a series of changes (typically for performance reasons),
use combine-change-calls
or combine-after-change-calls
instead.
This chapter covers the special issues relating to characters and how they are stored in strings and buffers.
Emacs buffers and strings support a large repertoire of characters from many different scripts, allowing users to type and display text in almost any known written language.
To support this multitude of characters and scripts, Emacs closely
follows the Unicode Standard. The Unicode Standard assigns a
unique number, called a codepoint, to each and every character.
The range of codepoints defined by Unicode, or the Unicode
codespace, is 0..#x10FFFF
(in hexadecimal notation),
inclusive. Emacs extends this range with codepoints in the range
#x110000..#x3FFFFF
, which it uses for representing characters
that are not unified with Unicode and raw 8-bit bytes that
cannot be interpreted as characters. Thus, a character codepoint in
Emacs is a 22-bit integer.
To conserve memory, Emacs does not hold fixed-length 22-bit numbers that are codepoints of text characters within buffers and strings. Rather, Emacs uses a variable-length internal representation of characters, that stores each character as a sequence of 1 to 5 8-bit bytes, depending on the magnitude of its codepoint24. For example, any ASCII character takes up only 1 byte, a Latin-1 character takes up 2 bytes, etc. We call this representation of text multibyte.
Outside Emacs, characters can be represented in many different encodings, such as ISO-8859-1, GB-2312, Big-5, etc. Emacs converts between these external encodings and its internal representation, as appropriate, when it reads text into a buffer or a string, or when it writes text to a disk file or passes it to some other process.
Occasionally, Emacs needs to hold and manipulate encoded text or binary non-text data in its buffers or strings. For example, when Emacs visits a file, it first reads the file’s text verbatim into a buffer, and only then converts it to the internal representation. Before the conversion, the buffer holds encoded text.
Encoded text is not really text, as far as Emacs is concerned, but
rather a sequence of raw 8-bit bytes. We call buffers and strings
that hold encoded text unibyte buffers and strings, because
Emacs treats them as a sequence of individual bytes. Usually, Emacs
displays unibyte buffers and strings as octal codes such as
\237
. We recommend that you never use unibyte buffers and
strings except for manipulating encoded text or binary non-text data.
In a buffer, the buffer-local value of the variable
enable-multibyte-characters
specifies the representation used.
The representation for a string is determined and recorded in the string
when the string is constructed.
This variable specifies the current buffer’s text representation.
If it is non-nil
, the buffer contains multibyte text; otherwise,
it contains unibyte encoded text or binary non-text data.
You cannot set this variable directly; instead, use the function
set-buffer-multibyte
to change a buffer’s representation.
Buffer positions are measured in character units. This function
returns the byte-position corresponding to buffer position
position in the current buffer. This is 1 at the start of the
buffer, and counts upward in bytes. If position is out of
range, the value is nil
.
Return the buffer position, in character units, corresponding to given
byte-position in the current buffer. If byte-position is
out of range, the value is nil
. In a multibyte buffer, an
arbitrary value of byte-position can be not at character
boundary, but inside a multibyte sequence representing a single
character; in this case, this function returns the buffer position of
the character whose multibyte sequence includes byte-position.
In other words, the value does not change for all byte positions that
belong to the same character.
The following two functions are useful when a Lisp program needs to map buffer positions to byte offsets in a file visited by the buffer.
This function is similar to position-bytes
, but instead of byte
position in the current buffer it returns the offset from the
beginning of the current buffer’s file of the byte that corresponds to
the given character position in the buffer. The conversion
requires to know how the text is encoded in the buffer’s file; this is
what the coding-system argument is for, defaulting to the value
of buffer-file-coding-system
. The optional argument
quality specifies how accurate the result should be; it should
be one of the following:
exact
The result must be accurate. The function may need to encode and decode a large part of the buffer, which is expensive and can be slow.
approximate
The value can be an approximation. The function may avoid expensive processing and return an inexact result.
nil
If the exact result needs expensive processing, the function will
return nil
rather than an approximation. This is the default
if the argument is omitted.
This function returns the buffer position corresponding to a file
position specified by byte, a zero-base byte offset from the
file’s beginning. The function performs the conversion opposite to
what bufferpos-to-filepos
does. Optional arguments
quality and coding-system have the same meaning and values
as for bufferpos-to-filepos
.
Return t
if string is a multibyte string, nil
otherwise. This function also returns nil
if string is
some object other than a string.
This function returns the number of bytes in string.
If string is a multibyte string, this can be greater than
(length string)
.
This function concatenates all its argument bytes and makes the result a unibyte string.
By default, Emacs starts in multibyte mode: it stores the contents of buffers and strings using an internal encoding that represents non-ASCII characters using multi-byte sequences. Multibyte mode allows you to use all the supported languages and scripts without limitations.
Under very special circumstances, you may want to disable multibyte character support, for a specific buffer. When multibyte characters are disabled in a buffer, we call that unibyte mode. In unibyte mode, each character in the buffer has a character code ranging from 0 through 255 (0377 octal); 0 through 127 (0177 octal) represent ASCII characters, and 128 (0200 octal) through 255 (0377 octal) represent non-ASCII characters.
To edit a particular file in unibyte representation, visit it using
find-file-literally
. See Functions for Visiting Files. You can
convert a multibyte buffer to unibyte by saving it to a file, killing
the buffer, and visiting the file again with
find-file-literally
. Alternatively, you can use C-x
RET c (universal-coding-system-argument
) and specify
‘raw-text’ as the coding system with which to visit or save a
file. See Specifying a Coding System for File Text in GNU Emacs Manual. Unlike find-file-literally
, finding
a file as ‘raw-text’ doesn’t disable format conversion,
uncompression, or auto mode selection.
The buffer-local variable enable-multibyte-characters
is
non-nil
in multibyte buffers, and nil
in unibyte ones.
The mode line also indicates whether a buffer is multibyte or not.
With a graphical display, in a multibyte buffer, the portion of the
mode line that indicates the character set has a tooltip that (amongst
other things) says that the buffer is multibyte. In a unibyte buffer,
the character set indicator is absent. Thus, in a unibyte buffer
(when using a graphical display) there is normally nothing before the
indication of the visited file’s end-of-line convention (colon,
backslash, etc.), unless you are using an input method.
You can turn off multibyte support in a specific buffer by invoking the
command toggle-enable-multibyte-characters
in that buffer.
Emacs can convert unibyte text to multibyte; it can also convert multibyte text to unibyte, provided that the multibyte text contains only ASCII and 8-bit raw bytes. In general, these conversions happen when inserting text into a buffer, or when putting text from several strings together in one string. You can also explicitly convert a string’s contents to either representation.
Emacs chooses the representation for a string based on the text from which it is constructed. The general rule is to convert unibyte text to multibyte text when combining it with other multibyte text, because the multibyte representation is more general and can hold whatever characters the unibyte text has.
When inserting text into a buffer, Emacs converts the text to the
buffer’s representation, as specified by
enable-multibyte-characters
in that buffer. In particular, when
you insert multibyte text into a unibyte buffer, Emacs converts the text
to unibyte, even though this conversion cannot in general preserve all
the characters that might be in the multibyte text. The other natural
alternative, to convert the buffer contents to multibyte, is not
acceptable because the buffer’s representation is a choice made by the
user that cannot be overridden automatically.
Converting unibyte text to multibyte text leaves ASCII characters unchanged, and converts bytes with codes 128 through 255 to the multibyte representation of raw eight-bit bytes.
Converting multibyte text to unibyte converts all ASCII and eight-bit characters to their single-byte form, but loses information for non-ASCII characters by discarding all but the low 8 bits of each character’s codepoint. Converting unibyte text to multibyte and back to unibyte reproduces the original unibyte text.
The next two functions either return the argument string, or a newly created string with no text properties.
This function returns a multibyte string containing the same sequence
of characters as string. If string is a multibyte string,
it is returned unchanged. The function assumes that string
includes only ASCII characters and raw 8-bit bytes; the
latter are converted to their multibyte representation corresponding
to the codepoints #x3FFF80
through #x3FFFFF
, inclusive
(see codepoints).
This function returns a unibyte string containing the same sequence of
characters as string. If string is a unibyte string, it
is returned unchanged. Otherwise, ASCII characters and
characters in the eight-bit
charset are converted to their
corresponding byte values. Use this function for string
arguments that contain only ASCII and eight-bit characters;
the function signals an error if any other characters are encountered.
This function returns a unibyte string containing a single byte of character data, byte. It signals an error if byte is not an integer between 0 and 255.
This converts the multibyte character char to a unibyte character, and returns that character. If char is neither ASCII nor eight-bit, the function returns −1.
This converts the unibyte character char to a multibyte character, assuming char is either ASCII or raw 8-bit byte.
Sometimes it is useful to examine an existing buffer or string as multibyte when it was unibyte, or vice versa.
Set the representation type of the current buffer. If multibyte
is non-nil
, the buffer becomes multibyte. If multibyte
is nil
, the buffer becomes unibyte.
This function leaves the buffer contents unchanged when viewed as a sequence of bytes. As a consequence, it can change the contents viewed as characters; for instance, a sequence of three bytes which is treated as one character in multibyte representation will count as three characters in unibyte representation. Eight-bit characters representing raw bytes are an exception. They are represented by one byte in a unibyte buffer, but when the buffer is set to multibyte, they are converted to two-byte sequences, and vice versa.
This function sets enable-multibyte-characters
to record which
representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
(including overlays, text properties and markers) so that they cover the
same text as they did before.
This function signals an error if the buffer is narrowed, since the narrowing might have occurred in the middle of multibyte character sequences.
This function also signals an error if the buffer is an indirect buffer. An indirect buffer always inherits the representation of its base buffer.
If string is already a unibyte string, this function returns string itself. Otherwise, it returns a new string with the same bytes as string, but treating each byte as a separate character (so that the value may have more characters than string); as an exception, each eight-bit character representing a raw byte is converted into a single byte. The newly-created string contains no text properties.
If string is a multibyte string, this function returns string itself. Otherwise, it returns a new string with the same bytes as string, but treating each multibyte sequence as one character. This means that the value may have fewer characters than string has. If a byte sequence in string is invalid as a multibyte representation of a single character, each byte in the sequence is treated as a raw 8-bit byte. The newly-created string contains no text properties.
The unibyte and multibyte text representations use different
character codes. The valid character codes for unibyte representation
range from 0 to #xFF
(255)—the values that can fit in one
byte. The valid character codes for multibyte representation range
from 0 to #x3FFFFF
. In this code space, values 0 through
#x7F
(127) are for ASCII characters, and values
#x80
(128) through #x3FFF7F
(4194175) are for
non-ASCII characters.
Emacs character codes are a superset of the Unicode standard.
Values 0 through #x10FFFF
(1114111) correspond to Unicode
characters of the same codepoint; values #x110000
(1114112)
through #x3FFF7F
(4194175) represent characters that are not
unified with Unicode; and values #x3FFF80
(4194176) through
#x3FFFFF
(4194303) represent eight-bit raw bytes.
This returns t
if charcode is a valid character, and
nil
otherwise.
(characterp 65) ⇒ t
(characterp 4194303) ⇒ t
(characterp 4194304) ⇒ nil
This function returns the largest value that a valid character
codepoint can have in Emacs. If the optional argument unicode
is non-nil
, it returns the largest character codepoint defined
by the Unicode Standard (which is smaller than the maximum codepoint
supported by Emacs).
(characterp (max-char)) ⇒ t
(characterp (1+ (max-char))) ⇒ nil
This function returns the character whose Unicode name is string.
If ignore-case is non-nil
, case is ignored in string.
This function returns nil
if string does not name a character.
;; U+03A3 (= (char-from-name "GREEK CAPITAL LETTER SIGMA") #x03A3) ⇒ t
This function returns the byte at character position pos in the current buffer. If the current buffer is unibyte, this is literally the byte at that position. If the buffer is multibyte, byte values of ASCII characters are the same as character codepoints, whereas eight-bit raw bytes are converted to their 8-bit codes. The function signals an error if the character at pos is non-ASCII.
The optional argument string means to get a byte value from that string instead of the current buffer.
A character property is a named attribute of a character that specifies how the character behaves and how it should be handled during text processing and display. Thus, character properties are an important part of specifying the character’s semantics.
On the whole, Emacs follows the Unicode Standard in its implementation of character properties. In particular, Emacs supports the Unicode Character Property Model, and the Emacs character property database is derived from the Unicode Character Database (UCD). See the Character Properties chapter of the Unicode Standard, for a detailed description of Unicode character properties and their meaning. This section assumes you are already familiar with that chapter of the Unicode Standard, and want to apply that knowledge to Emacs Lisp programs.
In Emacs, each property has a name, which is a symbol, and a set of
possible values, whose types depend on the property; if a character
does not have a certain property, the value is nil
. As a
general rule, the names of character properties in Emacs are produced
from the corresponding Unicode properties by downcasing them and
replacing each ‘_’ character with a dash ‘-’. For example,
Canonical_Combining_Class
becomes
canonical-combining-class
. However, sometimes we shorten the
names to make their use easier.
Some codepoints are left unassigned by the UCD—they don’t correspond to any character. The Unicode Standard defines default values of properties for such codepoints; they are mentioned below for each property.
Here is the full list of value types for all the character properties that Emacs knows about:
name
Corresponds to the Name
Unicode property. The value is a
string consisting of upper-case Latin letters A to Z, digits, spaces,
and hyphen ‘-’ characters. For unassigned codepoints, the value
is nil
.
general-category
¶Corresponds to the General_Category
Unicode property. The
value is a symbol whose name is a 2-letter abbreviation of the
character’s classification. For unassigned codepoints, the value
is Cn
.
canonical-combining-class
Corresponds to the Canonical_Combining_Class
Unicode property.
The value is an integer. For unassigned codepoints, the value
is zero.
bidi-class
¶Corresponds to the Unicode Bidi_Class
property. The value is a
symbol whose name is the Unicode directional type of the
character. Emacs uses this property when it reorders bidirectional
text for display (see Bidirectional Display). For unassigned
codepoints, the value depends on the code blocks to which the
codepoint belongs: most unassigned codepoints get the value of
L
(strong L), but some get values of AL
(Arabic letter)
or R
(strong R).
decomposition
Corresponds to the Unicode properties Decomposition_Type
and
Decomposition_Value
. The value is a list, whose first element
may be a symbol representing a compatibility formatting tag, such as
small
25; the other elements are characters that give the
compatibility decomposition sequence of this character. For
characters that don’t have decomposition sequences, and for unassigned
codepoints, the value is a list with a single member, the character
itself.
decimal-digit-value
Corresponds to the Unicode Numeric_Value
property for
characters whose Numeric_Type
is ‘Decimal’. The value is
an integer, or nil
if the character has no decimal digit value.
For unassigned codepoints, the value is nil
, which means
NaN, or “not a number”.
digit-value
Corresponds to the Unicode Numeric_Value
property for
characters whose Numeric_Type
is ‘Digit’. The value is an
integer. Examples of such characters include compatibility subscript
and superscript digits, for which the value is the corresponding
number. For characters that don’t have any numeric value, and for
unassigned codepoints, the value is nil
, which means
NaN.
numeric-value
Corresponds to the Unicode Numeric_Value
property for
characters whose Numeric_Type
is ‘Numeric’. The value of
this property is a number. Examples of characters that have this
property include fractions, subscripts, superscripts, Roman numerals,
currency numerators, and encircled numbers. For example, the value of
this property for the character U+2155 VULGAR FRACTION ONE
FIFTH is 0.2
. For characters that don’t have any numeric
value, and for unassigned codepoints, the value is nil
, which
means NaN.
mirrored
¶Corresponds to the Unicode Bidi_Mirrored
property. The value
of this property is a symbol, either Y
or N
. For
unassigned codepoints, the value is N
.
mirroring
Corresponds to the Unicode Bidi_Mirroring_Glyph
property. The
value of this property is a character whose glyph represents the
mirror image of the character’s glyph, or nil
if there’s no
defined mirroring glyph. All the characters whose mirrored
property is N
have nil
as their mirroring
property; however, some characters whose mirrored
property is
Y
also have nil
for mirroring
, because no
appropriate characters exist with mirrored glyphs. Emacs uses this
property to display mirror images of characters when appropriate
(see Bidirectional Display). For unassigned codepoints, the value
is nil
.
paired-bracket
Corresponds to the Unicode Bidi_Paired_Bracket
property. The
value of this property is the codepoint of a character’s paired
bracket, or nil
if the character is not a bracket character.
This establishes a mapping between characters that are treated as
bracket pairs by the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm; Emacs uses this
property when it decides how to reorder for display parentheses,
braces, and other similar characters (see Bidirectional Display).
bracket-type
Corresponds to the Unicode Bidi_Paired_Bracket_Type
property.
For characters whose paired-bracket
property is non-nil
,
the value of this property is a symbol, either o
(for opening
bracket characters) or c
(for closing bracket characters). For
characters whose paired-bracket
property is nil
, the
value is the symbol n
(None). Like paired-bracket
, this
property is used for bidirectional display.
old-name
Corresponds to the Unicode Unicode_1_Name
property. The value
is a string. For unassigned codepoints, and characters that have no
value for this property, the value is nil
.
iso-10646-comment
Corresponds to the Unicode ISO_Comment
property. The value is
either a string or nil
. For unassigned codepoints, the value
is nil
.
uppercase
Corresponds to the Unicode Simple_Uppercase_Mapping
property.
The value of this property is a single character. For unassigned
codepoints, the value is nil
, which means the character itself.
lowercase
Corresponds to the Unicode Simple_Lowercase_Mapping
property.
The value of this property is a single character. For unassigned
codepoints, the value is nil
, which means the character itself.
titlecase
Corresponds to the Unicode Simple_Titlecase_Mapping
property.
Title case is a special form of a character used when the first
character of a word needs to be capitalized. The value of this
property is a single character. For unassigned codepoints, the value
is nil
, which means the character itself.
special-uppercase
Corresponds to Unicode language- and context-independent special upper-casing
rules. The value of this property is a string (which may be empty). For
example mapping for U+00DF LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S is
"SS"
. For characters with no special mapping, the value is nil
which means uppercase
property needs to be consulted instead.
special-lowercase
Corresponds to Unicode language- and context-independent special
lower-casing rules. The value of this property is a string (which may
be empty). For example mapping for U+0130 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I
WITH DOT ABOVE the value is "i\u0307"
(i.e. 2-character string
consisting of LATIN SMALL LETTER I followed by U+0307
COMBINING DOT ABOVE). For characters with no special mapping,
the value is nil
which means lowercase
property needs to
be consulted instead.
special-titlecase
Corresponds to Unicode unconditional special title-casing rules. The value of
this property is a string (which may be empty). For example mapping for
U+FB01 LATIN SMALL LIGATURE FI the value is "Fi"
. For
characters with no special mapping, the value is nil
which means
titlecase
property needs to be consulted instead.
This function returns the value of char’s propname property.
(get-char-code-property ?\s 'general-category) ⇒ Zs
(get-char-code-property ?1 'general-category) ⇒ Nd
;; U+2084 (get-char-code-property ?\N{SUBSCRIPT FOUR} 'digit-value) ⇒ 4
;; U+2155 (get-char-code-property ?\N{VULGAR FRACTION ONE FIFTH} 'numeric-value) ⇒ 0.2
;; U+2163 (get-char-code-property ?\N{ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR} 'numeric-value) ⇒ 4
(get-char-code-property ?\( 'paired-bracket) ⇒ 41 ; closing parenthesis
(get-char-code-property ?\) 'bracket-type) ⇒ c
This function returns the description string of property prop’s
value, or nil
if value has no description.
(char-code-property-description 'general-category 'Zs) ⇒ "Separator, Space"
(char-code-property-description 'general-category 'Nd) ⇒ "Number, Decimal Digit"
(char-code-property-description 'numeric-value '1/5) ⇒ nil
This function stores value as the value of the property propname for the character char.
The value of this variable is a char-table (see Char-Tables) that
specifies, for each character, its Unicode General_Category
property as a symbol.
The value of this variable is a char-table that specifies, for each character, a symbol whose name is the script to which the character belongs, according to the Unicode Standard classification of the Unicode code space into script-specific blocks. This char-table has a single extra slot whose value is the list of all script symbols. Note that Emacs’ classification of characters into scripts is not a 1-for-1 reflection of the Unicode standard, e.g. there is no ‘symbol’ script in Unicode.
The value of this variable is a char-table that specifies the width of each character in columns that it will occupy on the screen.
The value of this variable is a char-table that specifies, for each
character, whether it is printable or not. That is, if evaluating
(aref printable-chars char)
results in t
, the character
is printable, and if it results in nil
, it is not.
An Emacs character set, or charset, is a set of characters
in which each character is assigned a numeric code point. (The
Unicode Standard calls this a coded character set.) Each Emacs
charset has a name which is a symbol. A single character can belong
to any number of different character sets, but it will generally have
a different code point in each charset. Examples of character sets
include ascii
, iso-8859-1
, greek-iso8859-7
, and
windows-1255
. The code point assigned to a character in a
charset is usually different from its code point used in Emacs buffers
and strings.
Emacs defines several special character sets. The character set
unicode
includes all the characters whose Emacs code points are
in the range 0..#x10FFFF
. The character set emacs
includes all ASCII and non-ASCII characters.
Finally, the eight-bit
charset includes the 8-bit raw bytes;
Emacs uses it to represent raw bytes encountered in text.
Returns t
if object is a symbol that names a character set,
nil
otherwise.
The value is a list of all defined character set names.
This function returns a list of all defined character sets ordered by
their priority. If highestp is non-nil
, the function
returns a single character set of the highest priority.
This function makes charsets the highest priority character sets.
This function returns the name of the character set of highest
priority that character belongs to. ASCII characters
are an exception: for them, this function always returns ascii
.
If restriction is non-nil
, it should be a list of
charsets to search. Alternatively, it can be a coding system, in
which case the returned charset must be supported by that coding
system (see Coding Systems).
This function returns the property list of the character set charset. Although charset is a symbol, this is not the same as the property list of that symbol. Charset properties include important information about the charset, such as its documentation string, short name, etc.
This function sets the propname property of charset to the given value.
This function returns the value of charsets property propname.
This command displays a list of characters in the character set charset.
Emacs can convert between its internal representation of a character and the character’s codepoint in a specific charset. The following two functions support these conversions.
This function decodes a character that is assigned a code-point
in charset, to the corresponding Emacs character, and returns
it. If charset doesn’t contain a character of that code point,
the value is nil
.
For backward compatibility, if code-point doesn’t fit in a Lisp
fixnum (see most-positive-fixnum), it can be
specified as a cons cell (high . low)
, where
low are the lower 16 bits of the value and high are the
high 16 bits. This usage is obsolescent.
This function returns the code point assigned to the character
char in charset. If
charset doesn’t have a codepoint for char, the value is
nil
.
The following function comes in handy for applying a certain function to all or part of the characters in a charset:
Call function for characters in charset. function
is called with two arguments. The first one is a cons cell
(from . to)
, where from and to
indicate a range of characters contained in charset. The second
argument passed to function is arg, or nil
if
arg is omitted.
By default, the range of codepoints passed to function includes
all the characters in charset, but optional arguments
from-code and to-code limit that to the range of
characters between these two codepoints of charset. If either
of them is nil
, it defaults to the first or last codepoint of
charset, respectively. Note that from-code and
to-code are charset’s codepoints, not the Emacs codes of
characters; by contrast, the values from and to in the
cons cell passed to function are Emacs character codes.
Those Emacs character codes are either Unicode code points, or Emacs
internal code points that extend Unicode and are beyond the Unicode
range of characters 0..#x10FFFF
(see Text Representations).
The latter happens rarely, with legacy CJK charsets for codepoints of
charset which specify characters not yet unified with Unicode.
Sometimes it is useful to find out which character set a particular character belongs to. One use for this is in determining which coding systems (see Coding Systems) are capable of representing all of the text in question; another is to determine the font(s) for displaying that text.
This function returns the charset of highest priority containing the
character at position pos in the current buffer. If pos
is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the current value of point.
If pos is out of range, the value is nil
.
This function returns a list of the character sets of highest priority that contain characters in the current buffer between positions beg and end.
The optional argument translation specifies a translation table
to use for scanning the text (see Translation of Characters). If
it is non-nil
, then each character in the region is translated
through this table, and the value returned describes the translated
characters instead of the characters actually in the buffer.
This function returns a list of character sets of highest priority
that contain characters in string. It is just like
find-charset-region
, except that it applies to the contents of
string instead of part of the current buffer.
A translation table is a char-table (see Char-Tables) that specifies a mapping of characters into characters. These tables are used in encoding and decoding, and for other purposes. Some coding systems specify their own particular translation tables; there are also default translation tables which apply to all other coding systems.
A translation table has two extra slots. The first is either
nil
or a translation table that performs the reverse
translation; the second is the maximum number of characters to look up
for translating sequences of characters (see the description of
make-translation-table-from-alist
below).
This function returns a translation table based on the argument
translations. Each element of translations should be a
list of elements of the form (from . to)
; this says
to translate the character from into to.
The arguments and the forms in each argument are processed in order, and if a previous form already translates to to some other character, say to-alt, from is also translated to to-alt.
During decoding, the translation table’s translations are applied to
the characters that result from ordinary decoding. If a coding system
has the property :decode-translation-table
, that specifies the
translation table to use, or a list of translation tables to apply in
sequence. (This is a property of the coding system, as returned by
coding-system-get
, not a property of the symbol that is the
coding system’s name. See Basic Concepts of
Coding Systems.) Finally, if
standard-translation-table-for-decode
is non-nil
, the
resulting characters are translated by that table.
During encoding, the translation table’s translations are applied to
the characters in the buffer, and the result of translation is
actually encoded. If a coding system has property
:encode-translation-table
, that specifies the translation table
to use, or a list of translation tables to apply in sequence. In
addition, if the variable standard-translation-table-for-encode
is non-nil
, it specifies the translation table to use for
translating the result.
This is the default translation table for decoding. If a coding
system specifies its own translation tables, the table that is the
value of this variable, if non-nil
, is applied after them.
This is the default translation table for encoding. If a coding
system specifies its own translation tables, the table that is the
value of this variable, if non-nil
, is applied after them.
Self-inserting characters are translated through this translation table before they are inserted. Search commands also translate their input through this table, so they can compare more reliably with what’s in the buffer.
This variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set.
This function returns a translation table made from vec that is
an array of 256 elements to map bytes (values 0 through #xFF) to
characters. Elements may be nil
for untranslated bytes. The
returned table has a translation table for reverse mapping in the
first extra slot, and the value 1
in the second extra slot.
This function provides an easy way to make a private coding system
that maps each byte to a specific character. You can specify the
returned table and the reverse translation table using the properties
:decode-translation-table
and :encode-translation-table
respectively in the props argument to
define-coding-system
.
This function is similar to make-translation-table
but returns
a complex translation table rather than a simple one-to-one mapping.
Each element of alist is of the form (from
. to)
, where from and to are either characters or
vectors specifying a sequence of characters. If from is a
character, that character is translated to to (i.e., to a
character or a character sequence). If from is a vector of
characters, that sequence is translated to to. The returned
table has a translation table for reverse mapping in the first extra
slot, and the maximum length of all the from character sequences
in the second extra slot.
When Emacs reads or writes a file, and when Emacs sends text to a subprocess or receives text from a subprocess, it normally performs character code conversion and end-of-line conversion as specified by a particular coding system.
How to define a coding system is an arcane matter, and is not documented here.
Character code conversion involves conversion between the internal representation of characters used inside Emacs and some other encoding. Emacs supports many different encodings, in that it can convert to and from them. For example, it can convert text to or from encodings such as Latin 1, Latin 2, Latin 3, Latin 4, Latin 5, and several variants of ISO 2022. In some cases, Emacs supports several alternative encodings for the same characters; for example, there are three coding systems for the Cyrillic (Russian) alphabet: ISO, Alternativnyj, and KOI8.
Every coding system specifies a particular set of character code
conversions, but the coding system undecided
is special: it
leaves the choice unspecified, to be chosen heuristically for each
file or string, based on the file’s or string’s data, when they are
decoded or encoded. The coding system prefer-utf-8
is like
undecided
, but it prefers to choose utf-8
when possible.
In general, a coding system doesn’t guarantee roundtrip identity: decoding a byte sequence using a coding system, then encoding the resulting text in the same coding system, can produce a different byte sequence. But some coding systems do guarantee that the byte sequence will be the same as what you originally decoded. Here are a few examples:
iso-8859-1, utf-8, big5, shift_jis, euc-jp
Encoding buffer text and then decoding the result can also fail to reproduce the original text. For instance, if you encode a character with a coding system which does not support that character, the result is unpredictable, and thus decoding it using the same coding system may produce a different text. Currently, Emacs can’t report errors that result from encoding unsupported characters.
End of line conversion handles three different conventions used on various systems for representing end of line in files. The Unix convention, used on GNU and Unix systems, is to use the linefeed character (also called newline). The DOS convention, used on MS-Windows and MS-DOS systems, is to use a carriage return and a linefeed at the end of a line. The Mac convention is to use just carriage return. (This was the convention used in Classic Mac OS.)
Base coding systems such as latin-1
leave the end-of-line
conversion unspecified, to be chosen based on the data. Variant
coding systems such as latin-1-unix
, latin-1-dos
and
latin-1-mac
specify the end-of-line conversion explicitly as
well. Most base coding systems have three corresponding variants whose
names are formed by adding ‘-unix’, ‘-dos’ and ‘-mac’.
The coding system raw-text
is special in that it prevents
character code conversion, and causes the buffer visited with this
coding system to be a unibyte buffer. For historical reasons, you can
save both unibyte and multibyte text with this coding system. When
you use raw-text
to encode multibyte text, it does perform one
character code conversion: it converts eight-bit characters to their
single-byte external representation. raw-text
does not specify
the end-of-line conversion, allowing that to be determined as usual by
the data, and has the usual three variants which specify the
end-of-line conversion.
no-conversion
(and its alias binary
) is equivalent to
raw-text-unix
: it specifies no conversion of either character
codes or end-of-line.
The coding system utf-8-emacs
specifies that the data is
represented in the internal Emacs encoding (see Text Representations). This is like raw-text
in that no code
conversion happens, but different in that the result is multibyte
data. The name emacs-internal
is an alias for
utf-8-emacs-unix
(so it forces no conversion of end-of-line,
unlike utf-8-emacs
, which can decode all 3 kinds of
end-of-line conventions).
This function returns the specified property of the coding system
coding-system. Most coding system properties exist for internal
purposes, but one that you might find useful is :mime-charset
.
That property’s value is the name used in MIME for the character coding
which this coding system can read and write. Examples:
(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 :mime-charset) ⇒ iso-8859-1 (coding-system-get 'iso-2022-cn :mime-charset) ⇒ iso-2022-cn (coding-system-get 'cyrillic-koi8 :mime-charset) ⇒ koi8-r
The value of the :mime-charset
property is also defined
as an alias for the coding system.
This function returns the list of aliases of coding-system.
The principal purpose of coding systems is for use in reading and
writing files. The function insert-file-contents
uses a coding
system to decode the file data, and write-region
uses one to
encode the buffer contents.
You can specify the coding system to use either explicitly
(see Specifying a Coding System for One Operation), or implicitly using a default
mechanism (see Default Coding Systems). But these methods may not
completely specify what to do. For example, they may choose a coding
system such as undecided
which leaves the character code
conversion to be determined from the data. In these cases, the I/O
operation finishes the job of choosing a coding system. Very often
you will want to find out afterwards which coding system was chosen.
This buffer-local variable records the coding system used for saving the
buffer and for writing part of the buffer with write-region
. If
the text to be written cannot be safely encoded using the coding system
specified by this variable, these operations select an alternative
encoding by calling the function select-safe-coding-system
(see User-Chosen Coding Systems). If selecting a different encoding
requires to ask the user to specify a coding system,
buffer-file-coding-system
is updated to the newly selected coding
system.
buffer-file-coding-system
does not affect sending text
to a subprocess.
This variable specifies the coding system for saving the buffer (by
overriding buffer-file-coding-system
). Note that it is not used
for write-region
.
When a command to save the buffer starts out to use
buffer-file-coding-system
(or save-buffer-coding-system
),
and that coding system cannot handle
the actual text in the buffer, the command asks the user to choose
another coding system (by calling select-safe-coding-system
).
After that happens, the command also updates
buffer-file-coding-system
to represent the coding system that
the user specified.
I/O operations for files and subprocesses set this variable to the coding system name that was used. The explicit encoding and decoding functions (see Explicit Encoding and Decoding) set it too.
Warning: Since receiving subprocess output sets this variable, it can change whenever Emacs waits; therefore, you should copy the value shortly after the function call that stores the value you are interested in.
The variable selection-coding-system
specifies how to encode
selections for the window system. See Window System Selections.
The variable file-name-coding-system
specifies the coding
system to use for encoding file names. Emacs encodes file names using
that coding system for all file operations. If
file-name-coding-system
is nil
, Emacs uses a default
coding system determined by the selected language environment. In the
default language environment, any non-ASCII characters in
file names are not encoded specially; they appear in the file system
using the internal Emacs representation.
Warning: if you change file-name-coding-system
(or
the language environment) in the middle of an Emacs session, problems
can result if you have already visited files whose names were encoded
using the earlier coding system and are handled differently under the
new coding system. If you try to save one of these buffers under the
visited file name, saving may use the wrong file name, or it may get
an error. If such a problem happens, use C-x C-w to specify a
new file name for that buffer.
On Windows 2000 and later, Emacs by default uses Unicode APIs to
pass file names to the OS, so the value of
file-name-coding-system
is largely ignored. Lisp applications
that need to encode or decode file names on the Lisp level should use
utf-8
coding-system when system-type
is
windows-nt
; the conversion of UTF-8 encoded file names to the
encoding appropriate for communicating with the OS is performed
internally by Emacs.
Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems:
This function returns a list of all coding system names (symbols). If
base-only is non-nil
, the value includes only the
base coding systems. Otherwise, it includes alias and variant coding
systems as well.
This function returns t
if object is a coding system
name or nil
.
This function checks the validity of coding-system. If that is
valid, it returns coding-system. If coding-system is
nil
, the function returns nil
. For any other values, it
signals an error whose error-symbol
is coding-system-error
(see signal).
This function returns the type of end-of-line (a.k.a. eol)
conversion used by coding-system. If coding-system
specifies a certain eol conversion, the return value is an integer 0,
1, or 2, standing for unix
, dos
, and mac
,
respectively. If coding-system doesn’t specify eol conversion
explicitly, the return value is a vector of coding systems, each one
with one of the possible eol conversion types, like this:
(coding-system-eol-type 'latin-1) ⇒ [latin-1-unix latin-1-dos latin-1-mac]
If this function returns a vector, Emacs will decide, as part of the
text encoding or decoding process, what eol conversion to use. For
decoding, the end-of-line format of the text is auto-detected, and the
eol conversion is set to match it (e.g., DOS-style CRLF format will
imply dos
eol conversion). For encoding, the eol conversion is
taken from the appropriate default coding system (e.g.,
default value of buffer-file-coding-system
for
buffer-file-coding-system
), or from the default eol conversion
appropriate for the underlying platform.
This function returns a coding system which is like coding-system
except for its eol conversion, which is specified by eol-type
.
eol-type should be unix
, dos
, mac
, or
nil
. If it is nil
, the returned coding system determines
the end-of-line conversion from the data.
eol-type may also be 0, 1 or 2, standing for unix
,
dos
and mac
, respectively.
This function returns a coding system which uses the end-of-line
conversion of eol-coding, and the text conversion of
text-coding. If text-coding is nil
, it returns
undecided
, or one of its variants according to eol-coding.
This function returns a list of coding systems that could be used to encode a text between from and to. All coding systems in the list can safely encode any multibyte characters in that portion of the text.
If the text contains no multibyte characters, the function returns the
list (undecided)
.
This function returns a list of coding systems that could be used to
encode the text of string. All coding systems in the list can
safely encode any multibyte characters in string. If the text
contains no multibyte characters, this returns the list
(undecided)
.
This function returns a list of coding systems that could be used to encode all the character sets in the list charsets.
This function checks whether coding systems in the list
coding-system-list
can encode all the characters in the region
between start and end. If all of the coding systems in
the list can encode the specified text, the function returns
nil
. If some coding systems cannot encode some of the
characters, the value is an alist, each element of which has the form
(coding-system1 pos1 pos2 …)
, meaning
that coding-system1 cannot encode characters at buffer positions
pos1, pos2, ....
start may be a string, in which case end is ignored and the returned value references string indices instead of buffer positions.
This function chooses a plausible coding system for decoding the text from start to end. This text should be a byte sequence, i.e., unibyte text or multibyte text with only ASCII and eight-bit characters (see Explicit Encoding and Decoding).
Normally this function returns a list of coding systems that could
handle decoding the text that was scanned. They are listed in order of
decreasing priority. But if highest is non-nil
, then the
return value is just one coding system, the one that is highest in
priority.
If the region contains only ASCII characters except for such
ISO-2022 control characters ISO-2022 as ESC
, the value is
undecided
or (undecided)
, or a variant specifying
end-of-line conversion, if that can be deduced from the text.
If the region contains null bytes, the value is no-conversion
,
even if the region contains text encoded in some coding system.
This function is like detect-coding-region
except that it
operates on the contents of string instead of bytes in the buffer.
If this variable has a non-nil
value, null bytes are ignored
when detecting the encoding of a region or a string. This allows the
encoding of text that contains null bytes to be correctly detected,
such as Info files with Index nodes.
If this variable has a non-nil
value, ISO-2022 escape sequences
are ignored when detecting the encoding of a region or a string. The
result is that no text is ever detected as encoded in some ISO-2022
encoding, and all escape sequences become visible in a buffer.
Warning: Use this variable with extreme caution,
because many files in the Emacs distribution use ISO-2022 encoding.
This function returns the list of character sets (see Character Sets) supported by coding-system. Some coding systems that support too many character sets to list them all yield special values:
(emacs)
.
(unicode)
.
iso-2022
.
emacs-mule
.
See Process Information, in
particular the description of the functions
process-coding-system
and set-process-coding-system
, for
how to examine or set the coding systems used for I/O to a subprocess.
This function selects a coding system for encoding specified text, asking the user to choose if necessary. Normally the specified text is the text in the current buffer between from and to. If from is a string, the string specifies the text to encode, and to is ignored.
If the specified text includes raw bytes (see Text Representations), select-safe-coding-system
suggests
raw-text
for its encoding.
If default-coding-system is non-nil
, that is the first
coding system to try; if that can handle the text,
select-safe-coding-system
returns that coding system. It can
also be a list of coding systems; then the function tries each of them
one by one. After trying all of them, it next tries the current
buffer’s value of buffer-file-coding-system
(if it is not
undecided
), then the default value of
buffer-file-coding-system
and finally the user’s most
preferred coding system, which the user can set using the command
prefer-coding-system
(see Recognizing
Coding Systems in The GNU Emacs Manual).
If one of those coding systems can safely encode all the specified
text, select-safe-coding-system
chooses it and returns it.
Otherwise, it asks the user to choose from a list of coding systems
which can encode all the text, and returns the user’s choice.
default-coding-system can also be a list whose first element is
t
and whose other elements are coding systems. Then, if no coding
system in the list can handle the text, select-safe-coding-system
queries the user immediately, without trying any of the three
alternatives described above. This is handy for checking only the
coding systems in the list.
The optional argument accept-default-p determines whether a
coding system selected without user interaction is acceptable. If
it’s omitted or nil
, such a silent selection is always
acceptable. If it is non-nil
, it should be a function;
select-safe-coding-system
calls this function with one
argument, the base coding system of the selected coding system. If
the function returns nil
, select-safe-coding-system
rejects the silently selected coding system, and asks the user to
select a coding system from a list of possible candidates.
If the variable select-safe-coding-system-accept-default-p
is
non-nil
, it should be a function taking a single argument.
It is used in place of accept-default-p, overriding any
value supplied for this argument.
As a final step, before returning the chosen coding system,
select-safe-coding-system
checks whether that coding system is
consistent with what would be selected if the contents of the region
were read from a file. (If not, this could lead to data corruption in
a file subsequently re-visited and edited.) Normally,
select-safe-coding-system
uses buffer-file-name
as the
file for this purpose, but if file is non-nil
, it uses
that file instead (this can be relevant for write-region
and
similar functions). If it detects an apparent inconsistency,
select-safe-coding-system
queries the user before selecting the
coding system.
This variable names the function to be called to request the user to
select a proper coding system for encoding text when the default
coding system for an output operation cannot safely encode that text.
The default value of this variable is select-safe-coding-system
.
Emacs primitives that write text to files, such as
write-region
, or send text to other processes, such as
process-send-region
, normally call the value of this variable,
unless coding-system-for-write
is bound to a non-nil
value (see Specifying a Coding System for One Operation).
Here are two functions you can use to let the user specify a coding system, with completion. See Completion.
This function reads a coding system using the minibuffer, prompting with string prompt, and returns the coding system name as a symbol. If the user enters null input, default specifies which coding system to return. It should be a symbol or a string.
This function reads a coding system using the minibuffer, prompting with string prompt, and returns the coding system name as a symbol. If the user tries to enter null input, it asks the user to try again. See Coding Systems.
This section describes variables that specify the default coding system for certain files or when running certain subprograms, and the function that I/O operations use to access them.
The idea of these variables is that you set them once and for all to the
defaults you want, and then do not change them again. To specify a
particular coding system for a particular operation in a Lisp program,
don’t change these variables; instead, override them using
coding-system-for-read
and coding-system-for-write
(see Specifying a Coding System for One Operation).
This variable is an alist of text patterns and corresponding coding
systems. Each element has the form (regexp
. coding-system)
; a file whose first few kilobytes match
regexp is decoded with coding-system when its contents are
read into a buffer. The settings in this alist take priority over
coding:
tags in the files and the contents of
file-coding-system-alist
(see below). The default value is set
so that Emacs automatically recognizes mail files in Babyl format and
reads them with no code conversions.
This variable is an alist that specifies the coding systems to use for
reading and writing particular files. Each element has the form
(pattern . coding)
, where pattern is a regular
expression that matches certain file names. The element applies to file
names that match pattern.
The CDR of the element, coding, should be either a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or a function name (a symbol with a function definition). If coding is a coding system, that coding system is used for both reading the file and writing it. If coding is a cons cell containing two coding systems, its CAR specifies the coding system for decoding, and its CDR specifies the coding system for encoding.
If coding is a function name, the function should take one
argument, a list of all arguments passed to
find-operation-coding-system
. It must return a coding system
or a cons cell containing two coding systems. This value has the same
meaning as described above.
If coding (or what returned by the above function) is
undecided
, the normal code-detection is performed.
This variable is an alist that specifies the coding systems to use for
reading and writing particular files. Its form is like that of
file-coding-system-alist
, but, unlike the latter, this variable
takes priority over any coding:
tags in the file.
This variable is an alist specifying which coding systems to use for a
subprocess, depending on which program is running in the subprocess. It
works like file-coding-system-alist
, except that pattern is
matched against the program name used to start the subprocess. The coding
system or systems specified in this alist are used to initialize the
coding systems used for I/O to the subprocess, but you can specify
other coding systems later using set-process-coding-system
.
Warning: Coding systems such as undecided
, which
determine the coding system from the data, do not work entirely reliably
with asynchronous subprocess output. This is because Emacs handles
asynchronous subprocess output in batches, as it arrives. If the coding
system leaves the character code conversion unspecified, or leaves the
end-of-line conversion unspecified, Emacs must try to detect the proper
conversion from one batch at a time, and this does not always work.
Therefore, with an asynchronous subprocess, if at all possible, use a
coding system which determines both the character code conversion and
the end of line conversion—that is, one like latin-1-unix
,
rather than undecided
or latin-1
.
This variable is an alist that specifies the coding system to use for
network streams. It works much like file-coding-system-alist
,
with the difference that the pattern in an element may be either a
port number or a regular expression. If it is a regular expression, it
is matched against the network service name used to open the network
stream.
This variable specifies the coding systems to use for subprocess (and network stream) input and output, when nothing else specifies what to do.
The value should be a cons cell of the form (input-coding
. output-coding)
. Here input-coding applies to input from
the subprocess, and output-coding applies to output to it.
This variable holds a list of functions that try to determine a coding system for a file based on its undecoded contents.
Each function in this list should be written to look at text in the
current buffer, but should not modify it in any way. The buffer will
contain the text of parts of the file. Each function should take one
argument, size, which tells it how many characters to look at,
starting from point. If the function succeeds in determining a coding
system for the file, it should return that coding system. Otherwise,
it should return nil
.
The functions in this list could be called either when the file is visited and Emacs wants to decode its contents, and/or when the file’s buffer is about to be saved and Emacs wants to determine how to encode its contents.
If a file has a ‘coding:’ tag, that takes precedence, so these functions won’t be called.
This function tries to determine a suitable coding system for
filename. It examines the buffer visiting the named file, using
the variables documented above in sequence, until it finds a match for
one of the rules specified by these variables. It then returns a cons
cell of the form (coding . source)
, where
coding is the coding system to use and source is a symbol,
one of auto-coding-alist
, auto-coding-regexp-alist
,
:coding
, or auto-coding-functions
, indicating which one
supplied the matching rule. The value :coding
means the coding
system was specified by the coding:
tag in the file
(see coding tag in The GNU Emacs Manual).
The order of looking for a matching rule is auto-coding-alist
first, then auto-coding-regexp-alist
, then the coding:
tag, and lastly auto-coding-functions
. If no matching rule was
found, the function returns nil
.
The second argument size is the size of text, in characters,
following point. The function examines text only within size
characters after point. Normally, the buffer should be positioned at
the beginning when this function is called, because one of the places
for the coding:
tag is the first one or two lines of the file;
in that case, size should be the size of the buffer.
This function returns a suitable coding system for file
filename. It uses find-auto-coding
to find the coding
system. If no coding system could be determined, the function returns
nil
. The meaning of the argument size is like in
find-auto-coding
.
This function returns the coding system to use (by default) for performing operation with arguments. The value has this form:
(decoding-system . encoding-system)
The first element, decoding-system, is the coding system to use for decoding (in case operation does decoding), and encoding-system is the coding system for encoding (in case operation does encoding).
The argument operation is a symbol; it should be one of
write-region
, start-process
, call-process
,
call-process-region
, insert-file-contents
, or
open-network-stream
. These are the names of the Emacs I/O
primitives that can do character code and eol conversion.
The remaining arguments should be the same arguments that might be given
to the corresponding I/O primitive. Depending on the primitive, one
of those arguments is selected as the target. For example, if
operation does file I/O, whichever argument specifies the file
name is the target. For subprocess primitives, the process name is the
target. For open-network-stream
, the target is the service name
or port number.
Depending on operation, this function looks up the target in
file-coding-system-alist
, process-coding-system-alist
,
or network-coding-system-alist
. If the target is found in the
alist, find-operation-coding-system
returns its association in
the alist; otherwise it returns nil
.
If operation is insert-file-contents
, the argument
corresponding to the target may be a cons cell of the form
(filename . buffer)
. In that case, filename
is a file name to look up in file-coding-system-alist
, and
buffer is a buffer that contains the file’s contents (not yet
decoded). If file-coding-system-alist
specifies a function to
call for this file, and that function needs to examine the file’s
contents (as it usually does), it should examine the contents of
buffer instead of reading the file.
You can specify the coding system for a specific operation by binding
the variables coding-system-for-read
and/or
coding-system-for-write
.
If this variable is non-nil
, it specifies the coding system to
use for reading a file, or for input from a synchronous subprocess.
It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network stream, but in
a different way: the value of coding-system-for-read
when you
start the subprocess or open the network stream specifies the input
decoding method for that subprocess or network stream. It remains in
use for that subprocess or network stream unless and until overridden.
The right way to use this variable is to bind it with let
for a
specific I/O operation. Its global value is normally nil
, and
you should not globally set it to any other value. Here is an example
of the right way to use the variable:
;; Read the file with no character code conversion.
(let ((coding-system-for-read 'no-conversion))
(insert-file-contents filename))
When its value is non-nil
, this variable takes precedence over
all other methods of specifying a coding system to use for input,
including file-coding-system-alist
,
process-coding-system-alist
and
network-coding-system-alist
.
This works much like coding-system-for-read
, except that it
applies to output rather than input. It affects writing to files,
as well as sending output to subprocesses and net connections. It
also applies to encoding command-line arguments with which Emacs
invokes subprocesses.
When a single operation does both input and output, as do
call-process-region
and start-process
, both
coding-system-for-read
and coding-system-for-write
affect it.
Binding coding-system-for-write
to a non-nil
value
prevents output primitives from calling the function specified by
select-safe-coding-system-function
(see User-Chosen Coding Systems). This is because C-x RET c
(universal-coding-system-argument
) works by binding
coding-system-for-write
, and Emacs should obey user selection.
If a Lisp program binds coding-system-for-write
to a value that
might not be safe for encoding the text to be written, it can also bind
coding-system-require-warning
to a non-nil
value, which
will force the output primitives to check the encoding by calling the
value of select-safe-coding-system-function
even though
coding-system-for-write
is non-nil
. Alternatively, call
select-safe-coding-system
explicitly before using the specified
encoding.
When this variable is non-nil
, no end-of-line conversion is done,
no matter which coding system is specified. This applies to all the
Emacs I/O and subprocess primitives, and to the explicit encoding and
decoding functions (see Explicit Encoding and Decoding).
Sometimes, you need to prefer several coding systems for some
operation, rather than fix a single one. Emacs lets you specify a
priority order for using coding systems. This ordering affects the
sorting of lists of coding systems returned by functions such as
find-coding-systems-region
(see Coding Systems in Lisp).
This function returns the list of coding systems in the order of their
current priorities. Optional argument highestp, if
non-nil
, means return only the highest priority coding system.
This function puts coding-systems at the beginning of the priority list for coding systems, thus making their priority higher than all the rest.
This macro executes body, like progn
does
(see progn), with coding-systems at the front of
the priority list for coding systems. coding-systems should be
a list of coding systems to prefer during execution of body.
All the operations that transfer text in and out of Emacs have the ability to use a coding system to encode or decode the text. You can also explicitly encode and decode text using the functions in this section.
The result of encoding, and the input to decoding, are not ordinary text. They logically consist of a series of byte values; that is, a series of ASCII and eight-bit characters. In unibyte buffers and strings, these characters have codes in the range 0 through #xFF (255). In a multibyte buffer or string, eight-bit characters have character codes higher than #xFF (see Text Representations), but Emacs transparently converts them to their single-byte values when you encode or decode such text.
The usual way to read a file into a buffer as a sequence of bytes, so
you can decode the contents explicitly, is with
insert-file-contents-literally
(see Reading from Files);
alternatively, specify a non-nil
rawfile argument when
visiting a file with find-file-noselect
. These methods result in
a unibyte buffer.
The usual way to use the byte sequence that results from explicitly
encoding text is to copy it to a file or process—for example, to write
it with write-region
(see Writing to Files), and suppress
encoding by binding coding-system-for-write
to
no-conversion
.
Here are the functions to perform explicit encoding or decoding. The
encoding functions produce sequences of bytes; the decoding functions
are meant to operate on sequences of bytes. All of these functions
discard text properties. They also set last-coding-system-used
to the precise coding system they used.
This command encodes the text from start to end according
to coding system coding-system. Normally, the encoded text
replaces the original text in the buffer, but the optional argument
destination can change that. If destination is a buffer,
the encoded text is inserted in that buffer after point (point does
not move); if it is t
, the command returns the encoded text as
a unibyte string without inserting it.
If encoded text is inserted in some buffer, this command returns the length of the encoded text.
The result of encoding is logically a sequence of bytes, but the buffer remains multibyte if it was multibyte before, and any 8-bit bytes are converted to their multibyte representation (see Text Representations).
Do not use undecided
for coding-system when
encoding text, since that may lead to unexpected results. Instead,
use select-safe-coding-system
(see select-safe-coding-system) to suggest a suitable encoding,
if there’s no obvious pertinent value for coding-system.
This function encodes the text in string according to coding
system coding-system. It returns a new string containing the
encoded text, except when nocopy is non-nil
, in which
case the function may return string itself if the encoding
operation is trivial. The result of encoding is a unibyte string.
This command decodes the text from start to end according
to coding system coding-system. To make explicit decoding
useful, the text before decoding ought to be a sequence of byte
values, but both multibyte and unibyte buffers are acceptable (in the
multibyte case, the raw byte values should be represented as eight-bit
characters). Normally, the decoded text replaces the original text in
the buffer, but the optional argument destination can change
that. If destination is a buffer, the decoded text is inserted
in that buffer after point (point does not move); if it is t
,
the command returns the decoded text as a multibyte string without
inserting it.
If decoded text is inserted in some buffer, this command returns the length of the decoded text. If that buffer is a unibyte buffer (see Selecting a Representation), the internal representation of the decoded text (see Text Representations) is inserted into the buffer as individual bytes.
This command puts a charset
text property on the decoded text.
The value of the property states the character set used to decode the
original text.
This command detects the encoding of the text if necessary. If
coding-system is undecided
, the command detects the
encoding of the text based on the byte sequences it finds in the text,
and also detects the type of end-of-line convention used by the text
(see eol type). If coding-system
is undecided-eol-type
, where eol-type is
unix
, dos
, or mac
, then the command detects only
the encoding of the text. Any coding-system that doesn’t
specify eol-type, as in utf-8
, causes the command to
detect the end-of-line convention; specify the encoding completely, as
in utf-8-unix
, if the EOL convention used by the text is known
in advance, to prevent any automatic detection.
This function decodes the text in string according to
coding-system. It returns a new string containing the decoded
text, except when nocopy is non-nil
, in which case the
function may return string itself if the decoding operation is
trivial. To make explicit decoding useful, the contents of
string ought to be a unibyte string with a sequence of byte
values, but a multibyte string is also acceptable (assuming it
contains 8-bit bytes in their multibyte form).
This function detects the encoding of the string if needed, like
decode-coding-region
does.
If optional argument buffer specifies a buffer, the decoded text is inserted in that buffer after point (point does not move). In this case, the return value is the length of the decoded text. If that buffer is a unibyte buffer, the internal representation of the decoded text is inserted into it as individual bytes.
This function puts a charset
text property on the decoded text.
The value of the property states the character set used to decode the
original text:
(decode-coding-string "Gr\374ss Gott" 'latin-1) ⇒ #("Grüss Gott" 0 9 (charset iso-8859-1))
This function decodes the text from from to to as if
it were being read from file filename using insert-file-contents
using the rest of the arguments provided.
The normal way to use this function is after reading text from a file without decoding, if you decide you would rather have decoded it. Instead of deleting the text and reading it again, this time with decoding, you can call this function.
Emacs can use coding systems to decode keyboard input and encode
terminal output. This is useful for terminals that transmit or
display text using a particular encoding, such as Latin-1. Emacs does
not set last-coding-system-used
when encoding or decoding
terminal I/O.
This function returns the coding system used for decoding keyboard
input from terminal. A value of no-conversion
means no
decoding is done. If terminal is omitted or nil
, it
means the selected frame’s terminal. See Multiple Terminals.
This command specifies coding-system as the coding system to use
for decoding keyboard input from terminal. If
coding-system is nil
, that means not to decode keyboard
input. If terminal is a frame, it means that frame’s terminal;
if it is nil
, that means the currently selected frame’s
terminal. See Multiple Terminals. Note that on modern MS-Windows
systems Emacs always uses Unicode input when decoding keyboard input,
so the encoding set by this command has no effect on Windows.
This function returns the coding system that is in use for encoding
terminal output from terminal. A value of no-conversion
means no encoding is done. If terminal is a frame, it means
that frame’s terminal; if it is nil
, that means the currently
selected frame’s terminal.
This command specifies coding-system as the coding system to use
for encoding terminal output from terminal. If
coding-system is nil
, that means not to encode terminal
output. If terminal is a frame, it means that frame’s terminal;
if it is nil
, that means the currently selected frame’s
terminal.
Input methods provide convenient ways of entering non-ASCII characters from the keyboard. Unlike coding systems, which translate non-ASCII characters to and from encodings meant to be read by programs, input methods provide human-friendly commands. (See Input Methods in The GNU Emacs Manual, for information on how users use input methods to enter text.) How to define input methods is not yet documented in this manual, but here we describe how to use them.
Each input method has a name, which is currently a string; in the future, symbols may also be usable as input method names.
This variable holds the name of the input method now active in the
current buffer. (It automatically becomes local in each buffer when set
in any fashion.) It is nil
if no input method is active in the
buffer now.
This variable holds the default input method for commands that choose an
input method. Unlike current-input-method
, this variable is
normally global.
This command activates input method input-method for the current
buffer. It also sets default-input-method
to input-method.
If input-method is nil
, this command deactivates any input
method for the current buffer.
This function reads an input method name with the minibuffer, prompting
with prompt. If default is non-nil
, that is returned
by default, if the user enters empty input. However, if
inhibit-null is non-nil
, empty input signals an error.
The returned value is a string.
This variable defines all the supported input methods. Each element defines one input method, and should have the form:
(input-method language-env activate-func title description args...)
Here input-method is the input method name, a string; language-env is another string, the name of the language environment this input method is recommended for. (That serves only for documentation purposes.)
activate-func is a function to call to activate this method. The args, if any, are passed as arguments to activate-func. All told, the arguments to activate-func are input-method and the args.
title is a string to display in the mode line while this method is active. description is a string describing this method and what it is good for.
The fundamental interface to input methods is through the
variable input-method-function
. See Reading One Event,
and Invoking the Input Method.
In POSIX, locales control which language to use in language-related features. These Emacs variables control how Emacs interacts with these features.
This variable specifies the coding system to use for decoding system
error messages and—on X Window system only—keyboard input, for
sending batch output to the standard output and error streams, for
encoding the format argument to format-time-string
, and for
decoding the return value of format-time-string
.
This variable specifies the locale to use for generating system error
messages. Changing the locale can cause messages to come out in a
different language or in a different orthography. If the variable is
nil
, the locale is specified by environment variables in the
usual POSIX fashion.
This variable specifies the locale to use for formatting time values.
Changing the locale can cause messages to appear according to the
conventions of a different language. If the variable is nil
, the
locale is specified by environment variables in the usual POSIX fashion.
This function returns locale data item for the current POSIX locale, if available. item should be one of these symbols:
codeset
Return the character set as a string (locale item CODESET
).
days
Return a 7-element vector of day names (locale items
DAY_1
through DAY_7
);
months
Return a 12-element vector of month names (locale items MON_1
through MON_12
).
paper
Return a list (width height)
of 2 integers, for
the default paper size measured in millimeters (locale items
_NL_PAPER_WIDTH
and _NL_PAPER_HEIGHT
).
If the system can’t provide the requested information, or if
item is not one of those symbols, the value is nil
. All
strings in the return value are decoded using
locale-coding-system
. See Locales in The GNU Libc Manual,
for more information about locales and locale items.
GNU Emacs provides two ways to search through a buffer for specified text: exact string searches and regular expression searches. After a regular expression search, you can examine the match data to determine which text matched the whole regular expression or various portions of it.
The ‘skip-chars…’ functions also perform a kind of searching. See Skipping Characters. To search for changes in character properties, see Text Property Search Functions.
These are the primitive functions for searching through the text in a
buffer. They are meant for use in programs, but you may call them
interactively. If you do so, they prompt for the search string; the
arguments limit and noerror are nil
, and repeat
is 1. For more details on interactive searching, see Searching and Replacement in The GNU Emacs Manual.
These search functions convert the search string to multibyte if the buffer is multibyte; they convert the search string to unibyte if the buffer is unibyte. See Text Representations.
This function searches forward from point for an exact match for string. If successful, it sets point to the end of the occurrence found, and returns the new value of point. If no match is found, the value and side effects depend on noerror (see below).
In the following example, point is initially at the beginning of the
line. Then (search-forward "fox")
moves point after the last
letter of ‘fox’:
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- ∗The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(search-forward "fox") ⇒ 20 ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- The quick brown fox∗ jumped over the lazy dog. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
The argument limit specifies the bound to the search, and should
be a position in the current buffer. No match extending after
that position is accepted. If limit is omitted or nil
, it
defaults to the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
What happens when the search fails depends on the value of
noerror. If noerror is nil
, a search-failed
error is signaled. If noerror is t
, search-forward
returns nil
and does nothing. If noerror is neither
nil
nor t
, then search-forward
moves point to the
upper bound and returns nil
.
The argument noerror only affects valid searches which fail to find a match. Invalid arguments cause errors regardless of noerror.
If count is a positive number n, the search is done n times; each successive search starts at the end of the previous match. If all these successive searches succeed, the function call succeeds, moving point and returning its new value. Otherwise the function call fails, with results depending on the value of noerror, as described above. If count is a negative number −n, the search is done n times in the opposite (backward) direction.
This function searches backward from point for string. It is
like search-forward
, except that it searches backwards rather
than forwards. Backward searches leave point at the beginning of the
match.
This function searches forward from point for a word match for string. If it finds a match, it sets point to the end of the match found, and returns the new value of point.
Word matching regards string as a sequence of words, disregarding punctuation that separates them. It searches the buffer for the same sequence of words. Each word must be distinct in the buffer (searching for the word ‘ball’ does not match the word ‘balls’), but the details of punctuation and spacing are ignored (searching for ‘ball boy’ does match ‘ball. Boy!’).
In this example, point is initially at the beginning of the buffer; the search leaves it between the ‘y’ and the ‘!’.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- ∗He said "Please! Find the ball boy!" ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(word-search-forward "Please find the ball, boy.") ⇒ 39 ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- He said "Please! Find the ball boy∗!" ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
If limit is non-nil
, it must be a position in the current
buffer; it specifies the upper bound to the search. The match found
must not extend after that position.
If noerror is nil
, then word-search-forward
signals
an error if the search fails. If noerror is t
, then it
returns nil
instead of signaling an error. If noerror is
neither nil
nor t
, it moves point to limit (or the
end of the accessible portion of the buffer) and returns nil
.
If count is a positive number, it specifies how many successive occurrences to search for. Point is positioned at the end of the last match. If count is a negative number, the search is backward and point is positioned at the beginning of the last match.
Internally, word-search-forward
and related functions use the
function word-search-regexp
to convert string to a
regular expression that ignores punctuation.
This command is identical to word-search-forward
, except that
the beginning or the end of string need not match a word
boundary, unless string begins or ends in whitespace.
For instance, searching for ‘ball boy’ matches ‘ball boyee’,
but does not match ‘balls boy’.
This function searches backward from point for a word match to
string. This function is just like word-search-forward
except that it searches backward and normally leaves point at the
beginning of the match.
This command is identical to word-search-backward
, except that
the beginning or the end of string need not match a word
boundary, unless string begins or ends in whitespace.
By default, searches in Emacs ignore the case of the text they are searching through; if you specify searching for ‘FOO’, then ‘Foo’ or ‘foo’ is also considered a match. This applies to regular expressions, too; thus, ‘[aB]’ would match ‘a’ or ‘A’ or ‘b’ or ‘B’.
If you do not want this feature, set the variable
case-fold-search
to nil
. Then all letters must match
exactly, including case. This is a buffer-local variable; altering the
variable affects only the current buffer. (See Introduction to Buffer-Local Variables.) Alternatively, you may change the default value.
In Lisp code, you will more typically use let
to bind
case-fold-search
to the desired value.
Note that the user-level incremental search feature handles case distinctions differently. When the search string contains only lower case letters, the search ignores case, but when the search string contains one or more upper case letters, the search becomes case-sensitive. But this has nothing to do with the searching functions used in Lisp code. See Incremental Search in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This buffer-local variable determines whether searches should ignore
case. If the variable is nil
they do not ignore case; otherwise
(and by default) they do ignore case.
This variable determines whether the higher-level replacement
functions should preserve case. If the variable is nil
, that
means to use the replacement text verbatim. A non-nil
value
means to convert the case of the replacement text according to the
text being replaced.
This variable is used by passing it as an argument to the function
replace-match
. See Replacing the Text that Matched.
A regular expression, or regexp for short, is a pattern that denotes a (possibly infinite) set of strings. Searching for matches for a regexp is a very powerful operation. This section explains how to write regexps; the following section says how to search for them.
For interactive development of regular expressions, you can use the M-x re-builder command. It provides a convenient interface for creating regular expressions, by giving immediate visual feedback in a separate buffer. As you edit the regexp, all its matches in the target buffer are highlighted. Each parenthesized sub-expression of the regexp is shown in a distinct face, which makes it easier to verify even very complex regexps.
Note that by default Emacs search ignores case (see Searching and Case). To enable case-sensitive regexp search and match, bind
case-fold-search
to nil
around the code you want to be
case-sensitive.
rx
Structured Regexp NotationRegular expressions have a syntax in which a few characters are special constructs and the rest are ordinary. An ordinary character is a simple regular expression that matches that character and nothing else. The special characters are ‘.’, ‘*’, ‘+’, ‘?’, ‘[’, ‘^’, ‘$’, and ‘\’; no new special characters will be defined in the future. The character ‘]’ is special if it ends a character alternative (see later). The character ‘-’ is special inside a character alternative. A ‘[:’ and balancing ‘:]’ enclose a character class inside a character alternative. Any other character appearing in a regular expression is ordinary, unless a ‘\’ precedes it.
For example, ‘f’ is not a special character, so it is ordinary, and therefore ‘f’ is a regular expression that matches the string ‘f’ and no other string. (It does not match the string ‘fg’, but it does match a part of that string.) Likewise, ‘o’ is a regular expression that matches only ‘o’.
Any two regular expressions a and b can be concatenated. The result is a regular expression that matches a string if a matches some amount of the beginning of that string and b matches the rest of the string.
As a simple example, we can concatenate the regular expressions ‘f’ and ‘o’ to get the regular expression ‘fo’, which matches only the string ‘fo’. Still trivial. To do something more powerful, you need to use one of the special regular expression constructs.
Here is a list of the characters that are special in a regular expression.
is a special character that matches any single character except a newline. Using concatenation, we can make regular expressions like ‘a.b’, which matches any three-character string that begins with ‘a’ and ends with ‘b’.
is not a construct by itself; it is a postfix operator that means to match the preceding regular expression repetitively as many times as possible. Thus, ‘o*’ matches any number of ‘o’s (including no ‘o’s).
‘*’ always applies to the smallest possible preceding expression. Thus, ‘fo*’ has a repeating ‘o’, not a repeating ‘fo’. It matches ‘f’, ‘fo’, ‘foo’, and so on.
The matcher processes a ‘*’ construct by matching, immediately, as many repetitions as can be found. Then it continues with the rest of the pattern. If that fails, backtracking occurs, discarding some of the matches of the ‘*’-modified construct in the hope that this will make it possible to match the rest of the pattern. For example, in matching ‘ca*ar’ against the string ‘caaar’, the ‘a*’ first tries to match all three ‘a’s; but the rest of the pattern is ‘ar’ and there is only ‘r’ left to match, so this try fails. The next alternative is for ‘a*’ to match only two ‘a’s. With this choice, the rest of the regexp matches successfully.
is a postfix operator, similar to ‘*’ except that it must match the preceding expression at least once. So, for example, ‘ca+r’ matches the strings ‘car’ and ‘caaaar’ but not the string ‘cr’, whereas ‘ca*r’ matches all three strings.
is a postfix operator, similar to ‘*’ except that it must match the preceding expression either once or not at all. For example, ‘ca?r’ matches ‘car’ or ‘cr’; nothing else.
are non-greedy variants of the operators ‘*’, ‘+’ and ‘?’. Where those operators match the largest possible substring (consistent with matching the entire containing expression), the non-greedy variants match the smallest possible substring (consistent with matching the entire containing expression).
For example, the regular expression ‘c[ad]*a’ when applied to the string ‘cdaaada’ matches the whole string; but the regular expression ‘c[ad]*?a’, applied to that same string, matches just ‘cda’. (The smallest possible match here for ‘[ad]*?’ that permits the whole expression to match is ‘d’.)
is a character alternative, which begins with ‘[’ and is terminated by ‘]’. In the simplest case, the characters between the two brackets are what this character alternative can match.
Thus, ‘[ad]’ matches either one ‘a’ or one ‘d’, and ‘[ad]*’ matches any string composed of just ‘a’s and ‘d’s (including the empty string). It follows that ‘c[ad]*r’ matches ‘cr’, ‘car’, ‘cdr’, ‘caddaar’, etc.
You can also include character ranges in a character alternative, by writing the starting and ending characters with a ‘-’ between them. Thus, ‘[a-z]’ matches any lower-case ASCII letter. Ranges may be intermixed freely with individual characters, as in ‘[a-z$%.]’, which matches any lower case ASCII letter or ‘$’, ‘%’ or period. However, the ending character of one range should not be the starting point of another one; for example, ‘[a-m-z]’ should be avoided.
A character alternative can also specify named character classes (see Character Classes). For example, ‘[[:ascii:]]’ matches any ASCII character. Using a character class is equivalent to mentioning each of the characters in that class; but the latter is not feasible in practice, since some classes include thousands of different characters. A character class should not appear as the lower or upper bound of a range.
The usual regexp special characters are not special inside a character alternative. A completely different set of characters is special: ‘]’, ‘-’ and ‘^’. To include ‘]’ in a character alternative, put it at the beginning. To include ‘^’, put it anywhere but at the beginning. To include ‘-’, put it at the end. Thus, ‘[]^-]’ matches all three of these special characters. You cannot use ‘\’ to escape these three characters, since ‘\’ is not special here.
The following aspects of ranges are specific to Emacs, in that POSIX allows but does not require this behavior and programs other than Emacs may behave differently:
case-fold-search
is non-nil
, ‘[a-z]’ also
matches upper-case letters.
Some kinds of character alternatives are not the best style even though they have a well-defined meaning in Emacs. They include:
‘[^’ begins a complemented character alternative. This matches any character except the ones specified. Thus, ‘[^a-z0-9A-Z]’ matches all characters except ASCII letters and digits.
‘^’ is not special in a character alternative unless it is the first character. The character following the ‘^’ is treated as if it were first (in other words, ‘-’ and ‘]’ are not special there).
A complemented character alternative can match a newline, unless newline is
mentioned as one of the characters not to match. This is in contrast to
the handling of regexps in programs such as grep
.
You can specify named character classes, just like in character alternatives. For instance, ‘[^[:ascii:]]’ matches any non-ASCII character. See Character Classes.
When matching a buffer, ‘^’ matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line in the text being matched (or the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). Otherwise it fails to match anything. Thus, ‘^foo’ matches a ‘foo’ that occurs at the beginning of a line.
When matching a string instead of a buffer, ‘^’ matches at the beginning of the string or after a newline character.
For historical compatibility reasons, ‘^’ can be used only at the beginning of the regular expression, or after ‘\(’, ‘\(?:’ or ‘\|’.
is similar to ‘^’ but matches only at the end of a line (or the end of the accessible portion of the buffer). Thus, ‘x+$’ matches a string of one ‘x’ or more at the end of a line.
When matching a string instead of a buffer, ‘$’ matches at the end of the string or before a newline character.
For historical compatibility reasons, ‘$’ can be used only at the end of the regular expression, or before ‘\)’ or ‘\|’.
has two functions: it quotes the special characters (including ‘\’), and it introduces additional special constructs.
Because ‘\’ quotes special characters, ‘\$’ is a regular expression that matches only ‘$’, and ‘\[’ is a regular expression that matches only ‘[’, and so on.
Note that ‘\’ also has special meaning in the read syntax of Lisp
strings (see String Type), and must be quoted with ‘\’. For
example, the regular expression that matches the ‘\’ character is
‘\\’. To write a Lisp string that contains the characters
‘\\’, Lisp syntax requires you to quote each ‘\’ with another
‘\’. Therefore, the read syntax for a regular expression matching
‘\’ is "\\\\"
.
Please note: For historical compatibility, special characters are treated as ordinary ones if they are in contexts where their special meanings make no sense. For example, ‘*foo’ treats ‘*’ as ordinary since there is no preceding expression on which the ‘*’ can act. It is poor practice to depend on this behavior; quote the special character anyway, regardless of where it appears.
As a ‘\’ is not special inside a character alternative, it can
never remove the special meaning of ‘-’, ‘^’ or ‘]’.
You should not quote these characters when they have no special
meaning. This would not clarify anything, since backslashes
can legitimately precede these characters where they have
special meaning, as in ‘[^\]’ ("[^\\]"
for Lisp string
syntax), which matches any single character except a backslash.
In practice, most ‘]’ that occur in regular expressions close a character alternative and hence are special. However, occasionally a regular expression may try to match a complex pattern of literal ‘[’ and ‘]’. In such situations, it sometimes may be necessary to carefully parse the regexp from the start to determine which square brackets enclose a character alternative. For example, ‘[^][]]’ consists of the complemented character alternative ‘[^][]’ (which matches any single character that is not a square bracket), followed by a literal ‘]’.
The exact rules are that at the beginning of a regexp, ‘[’ is special and ‘]’ not. This lasts until the first unquoted ‘[’, after which we are in a character alternative; ‘[’ is no longer special (except when it starts a character class) but ‘]’ is special, unless it immediately follows the special ‘[’ or that ‘[’ followed by a ‘^’. This lasts until the next special ‘]’ that does not end a character class. This ends the character alternative and restores the ordinary syntax of regular expressions; an unquoted ‘[’ is special again and a ‘]’ not.
Below is a table of the classes you can use in a character alternative, and what they mean. Note that the ‘[’ and ‘]’ characters that enclose the class name are part of the name, so a regular expression using these classes needs one more pair of brackets. For example, a regular expression matching a sequence of one or more letters and digits would be ‘[[:alnum:]]+’, not ‘[:alnum:]+’.
This matches any ASCII character (codes 0–127).
This matches any letter or digit. For multibyte characters, it matches characters whose Unicode ‘general-category’ property (see Character Properties) indicates they are alphabetic or decimal number characters.
This matches any letter. For multibyte characters, it matches characters whose Unicode ‘general-category’ property (see Character Properties) indicates they are alphabetic characters.
This matches horizontal whitespace, as defined by Annex C of the Unicode Technical Standard #18. In particular, it matches spaces, tabs, and other characters whose Unicode ‘general-category’ property (see Character Properties) indicates they are spacing separators.
This matches any character whose code is in the range 0–31.
This matches ‘0’ through ‘9’. Thus, ‘[-+[:digit:]]’ matches any digit, as well as ‘+’ and ‘-’.
This matches graphic characters—everything except spaces, ASCII and non-ASCII control characters, surrogates, and codepoints unassigned by Unicode, as indicated by the Unicode ‘general-category’ property (see Character Properties).
This matches any lower-case letter, as determined by the current case
table (see The Case Table). If case-fold-search
is
non-nil
, this also matches any upper-case letter. Note that a
buffer can have its own local case table different from the default
one.
This matches any multibyte character (see Text Representations).
This matches any non-ASCII character.
This matches any printing character—either spaces or graphic characters matched by ‘[:graph:]’.
This matches any punctuation character. (At present, for multibyte characters, it matches anything that has non-word syntax, and thus its exact definition can vary from one major mode to another, since the syntax of a character depends on the major mode.)
This matches any character that has whitespace syntax (see Table of Syntax Classes). Note that the syntax of a character, and thus which characters are considered “whitespace”, depends on the major mode.
This matches any unibyte character (see Text Representations).
This matches any upper-case letter, as determined by the current case
table (see The Case Table). If case-fold-search
is
non-nil
, this also matches any lower-case letter. Note that a
buffer can have its own local case table different from the default
one.
This matches any character that has word syntax (see Table of Syntax Classes). Note that the syntax of a character, and thus which characters are considered “word-constituent”, depends on the major mode.
This matches the hexadecimal digits: ‘0’ through ‘9’, ‘a’ through ‘f’ and ‘A’ through ‘F’.
For the most part, ‘\’ followed by any character matches only that character. However, there are several exceptions: certain sequences starting with ‘\’ that have special meanings. Here is a table of the special ‘\’ constructs.
specifies an alternative. Two regular expressions a and b with ‘\|’ in between form an expression that matches anything that either a or b matches.
Thus, ‘foo\|bar’ matches either ‘foo’ or ‘bar’ but no other string.
‘\|’ applies to the largest possible surrounding expressions. Only a surrounding ‘\( … \)’ grouping can limit the grouping power of ‘\|’.
If you need full backtracking capability to handle multiple uses of ‘\|’, use the POSIX regular expression functions (see POSIX Regular Expression Searching).
is a postfix operator that repeats the previous pattern exactly m times. Thus, ‘x\{5\}’ matches the string ‘xxxxx’ and nothing else. ‘c[ad]\{3\}r’ matches string such as ‘caaar’, ‘cdddr’, ‘cadar’, and so on.
is a more general postfix operator that specifies repetition with a minimum of m repeats and a maximum of n repeats. If m is omitted, the minimum is 0; if n is omitted, there is no maximum. For both forms, m and n, if specified, may be no larger than 2**16 − 1 .
For example, ‘c[ad]\{1,2\}r’ matches the strings ‘car’,
‘cdr’, ‘caar’, ‘cadr’, ‘cdar’, and ‘cddr’, and
nothing else.
‘\{0,1\}’ or ‘\{,1\}’ is equivalent to ‘?’.
‘\{0,\}’ or ‘\{,\}’ is equivalent to ‘*’.
‘\{1,\}’ is equivalent to ‘+’.
is a grouping construct that serves three purposes:
This last application is not a consequence of the idea of a parenthetical grouping; it is a separate feature that was assigned as a second meaning to the same ‘\( … \)’ construct because, in practice, there was usually no conflict between the two meanings. But occasionally there is a conflict, and that led to the introduction of shy groups.
is the shy group construct. A shy group serves the first two purposes of an ordinary group (controlling the nesting of other operators), but it does not get a number, so you cannot refer back to its value with ‘\digit’. Shy groups are particularly useful for mechanically-constructed regular expressions, because they can be added automatically without altering the numbering of ordinary, non-shy groups.
Shy groups are also called non-capturing or unnumbered groups.
is the explicitly numbered group construct. Normal groups get their number implicitly, based on their position, which can be inconvenient. This construct allows you to force a particular group number. There is no particular restriction on the numbering, e.g., you can have several groups with the same number in which case the last one to match (i.e., the rightmost match) will win. Implicitly numbered groups always get the smallest integer larger than the one of any previous group.
matches the same text that matched the digitth occurrence of a grouping (‘\( … \)’) construct.
In other words, after the end of a group, the matcher remembers the beginning and end of the text matched by that group. Later on in the regular expression you can use ‘\’ followed by digit to match that same text, whatever it may have been.
The strings matching the first nine grouping constructs appearing in the entire regular expression passed to a search or matching function are assigned numbers 1 through 9 in the order that the open parentheses appear in the regular expression. So you can use ‘\1’ through ‘\9’ to refer to the text matched by the corresponding grouping constructs.
For example, ‘\(.*\)\1’ matches any newline-free string that is composed of two identical halves. The ‘\(.*\)’ matches the first half, which may be anything, but the ‘\1’ that follows must match the same exact text.
If a ‘\( … \)’ construct matches more than once (which can happen, for instance, if it is followed by ‘*’), only the last match is recorded.
If a particular grouping construct in the regular expression was never matched—for instance, if it appears inside of an alternative that wasn’t used, or inside of a repetition that repeated zero times—then the corresponding ‘\digit’ construct never matches anything. To use an artificial example, ‘\(foo\(b*\)\|lose\)\2’ cannot match ‘lose’: the second alternative inside the larger group matches it, but then ‘\2’ is undefined and can’t match anything. But it can match ‘foobb’, because the first alternative matches ‘foob’ and ‘\2’ matches ‘b’.
matches any word-constituent character. The editor syntax table determines which characters these are. See Syntax Tables.
matches any character that is not a word constituent.
matches any character whose syntax is code. Here code is a character that represents a syntax code: thus, ‘w’ for word constituent, ‘-’ for whitespace, ‘(’ for open parenthesis, etc. To represent whitespace syntax, use either ‘-’ or a space character. See Table of Syntax Classes, for a list of syntax codes and the characters that stand for them.
matches any character whose syntax is not code.
matches any character whose category is code. Here code
is a character that represents a category: for example, in the standard
category table, ‘c’ stands for Chinese characters and ‘g’
stands for Greek characters. You can see the list of all the
currently defined categories with M-x describe-categories RET. You can also define your own categories in addition to
the standard ones using the define-category
function
(see Categories).
matches any character whose category is not code.
The following regular expression constructs match the empty string—that is, they don’t consume any characters—but whether they match depends on the context. For all, the beginning and end of the accessible portion of the buffer are treated as if they were the actual beginning and end of the buffer.
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the buffer or string being matched against.
matches the empty string, but only at the end of the buffer or string being matched against.
matches the empty string, but only at point. (This construct is not defined when matching against a string.)
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a word. Thus, ‘\bfoo\b’ matches any occurrence of ‘foo’ as a separate word. ‘\bballs?\b’ matches ‘ball’ or ‘balls’ as a separate word.
‘\b’ matches at the beginning or end of the buffer (or string) regardless of what text appears next to it.
matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a word, nor at the beginning or end of the buffer (or string).
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a word. ‘\<’ matches at the beginning of the buffer (or string) only if a word-constituent character follows.
matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. ‘\>’ matches at the end of the buffer (or string) only if the contents end with a word-constituent character.
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a symbol. A symbol is a sequence of one or more word or symbol constituent characters. ‘\_<’ matches at the beginning of the buffer (or string) only if a symbol-constituent character follows.
matches the empty string, but only at the end of a symbol. ‘\_>’ matches at the end of the buffer (or string) only if the contents end with a symbol-constituent character.
Not every string is a valid regular expression. For example, a string
that ends inside a character alternative without a terminating ‘]’
is invalid, and so is a string that ends with a single ‘\’. If
an invalid regular expression is passed to any of the search functions,
an invalid-regexp
error is signaled.
Here is a complicated regexp which was formerly used by Emacs to
recognize the end of a sentence together with any whitespace that
follows. (Nowadays Emacs uses a similar but more complex default
regexp constructed by the function sentence-end
.
See Standard Regular Expressions Used in Editing.)
Below, we show first the regexp as a string in Lisp syntax (to distinguish spaces from tab characters), and then the result of evaluating it. The string constant begins and ends with a double-quote. ‘\"’ stands for a double-quote as part of the string, ‘\\’ for a backslash as part of the string, ‘\t’ for a tab and ‘\n’ for a newline.
"[.?!][]\"')}]*\\($\\| $\\|\t\\| \\)[ \t\n]*" ⇒ "[.?!][]\"')}]*\\($\\| $\\| \\| \\)[ ]*"
In the output, tab and newline appear as themselves.
This regular expression contains four parts in succession and can be deciphered as follows:
[.?!]
The first part of the pattern is a character alternative that matches any one of three characters: period, question mark, and exclamation mark. The match must begin with one of these three characters. (This is one point where the new default regexp used by Emacs differs from the old. The new value also allows some non-ASCII characters that end a sentence without any following whitespace.)
[]\"')}]*
The second part of the pattern matches any closing braces and quotation
marks, zero or more of them, that may follow the period, question mark
or exclamation mark. The \"
is Lisp syntax for a double-quote in
a string. The ‘*’ at the end indicates that the immediately
preceding regular expression (a character alternative, in this case) may be
repeated zero or more times.
\\($\\| $\\|\t\\| \\)
The third part of the pattern matches the whitespace that follows the end of a sentence: the end of a line (optionally with a space), or a tab, or two spaces. The double backslashes mark the parentheses and vertical bars as regular expression syntax; the parentheses delimit a group and the vertical bars separate alternatives. The dollar sign is used to match the end of a line.
[ \t\n]*
Finally, the last part of the pattern matches any additional whitespace beyond the minimum needed to end a sentence.
In the rx
notation (see The rx
Structured Regexp Notation), the regexp could be written
(rx (any ".?!") ; Punctuation ending sentence. (zero-or-more (any "\"')]}")) ; Closing quotes or brackets. (or line-end (seq " " line-end) "\t" " ") ; Two spaces. (zero-or-more (any "\t\n "))) ; Optional extra whitespace.
Since rx
regexps are just S-expressions, they can be formatted
and commented as such.
rx
Structured Regexp Notation ¶As an alternative to the string-based syntax, Emacs provides the
structured rx
notation based on Lisp S-expressions. This
notation is usually easier to read, write and maintain than regexp
strings, and can be indented and commented freely. It requires a
conversion into string form since that is what regexp functions
expect, but that conversion typically takes place during
byte-compilation rather than when the Lisp code using the regexp is
run.
Here is an rx
regexp26 that matches a block comment in the C
programming language:
(rx "/*" ; Initial /* (zero-or-more (or (not (any "*")) ; Either non-*, (seq "*" ; or * followed by (not (any "/"))))) ; non-/ (one-or-more "*") ; At least one star, "/") ; and the final /
or, using shorter synonyms and written more compactly,
(rx "/*" (* (| (not "*") (: "*" (not "/")))) (+ "*") "/")
In conventional string syntax, it would be written
"/\\*\\(?:[^*]\\|\\*[^/]\\)*\\*+/"
The rx
notation is mainly useful in Lisp code; it cannot be
used in most interactive situations where a regexp is requested, such
as when running query-replace-regexp
or in variable
customization.
rx
regexps ¶The various forms in rx
regexps are described below. The
shorthand rx represents any rx
form. rx…
means zero or more rx
forms and, unless stated otherwise,
matches these forms in sequence as if wrapped in a (seq …)
subform.
These are all valid arguments to the rx
macro. All forms are
defined by their described semantics; the corresponding string regexps
are provided for ease of understanding only. A, B, …
denote (suitably bracketed) string regexp subexpressions therein.
"some-string"
Match the string ‘some-string’ literally. There are no characters with special meaning, unlike in string regexps.
?C
Match the character ‘C’ literally.
(seq rx…)
¶(sequence rx…)
(: rx…)
(and rx…)
Match the rxs in sequence. Without arguments, the expression
matches the empty string.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘AB…’
(subexpressions in sequence).
(or rx…)
¶(| rx…)
Match exactly one of the rxs.
If all arguments are strings, characters, or or
forms
so constrained, the longest possible match will always be used.
Otherwise, either the longest match or the
first (in left-to-right order) will be used.
Without arguments, the expression will not match anything at all.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A\|B\|…’.
unmatchable
¶Refuse any match. Equivalent to (or)
.
See regexp-unmatchable.
Normally, repetition forms are greedy, in that they attempt to match as many times as possible. Some forms are non-greedy; they try to match as few times as possible (see Non-greedy repetition).
(zero-or-more rx…)
¶(0+ rx…)
Match the rxs zero or more times. Greedy by default.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A*’ (greedy),
‘A*?’ (non-greedy)
(one-or-more rx…)
¶(1+ rx…)
Match the rxs one or more times. Greedy by default.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A+’ (greedy),
‘A+?’ (non-greedy)
(zero-or-one rx…)
¶(optional rx…)
(opt rx…)
Match the rxs once or an empty string. Greedy by default.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A?’ (greedy),
‘A??’ (non-greedy).
(* rx…)
¶Match the rxs zero or more times. Greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A*’
(+ rx…)
¶Match the rxs one or more times. Greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A+’
(? rx…)
¶Match the rxs once or an empty string. Greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A?’
(*? rx…)
¶Match the rxs zero or more times. Non-greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A*?’
(+? rx…)
¶Match the rxs one or more times. Non-greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A+?’
(?? rx…)
¶Match the rxs or an empty string. Non-greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A??’
(= n rx…)
(repeat n rx)
Match the rxs exactly n times.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A\{n\}’
(>= n rx…)
¶Match the rxs n or more times. Greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A\{n,\}’
(** n m rx…)
¶(repeat n m rx…)
Match the rxs at least n but no more than m times. Greedy.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘A\{n,m\}’
The greediness of some repetition forms can be controlled using the following constructs. However, it is usually better to use the explicit non-greedy forms above when such matching is required.
(minimal-match rx)
¶Match rx, with zero-or-more
, 0+
,
one-or-more
, 1+
, zero-or-one
, opt
and
optional
using non-greedy matching.
(maximal-match rx)
¶Match rx, with zero-or-more
, 0+
,
one-or-more
, 1+
, zero-or-one
, opt
and
optional
using greedy matching. This is the default.
(any set…)
¶(char set…)
(in set…)
Match a single character from one of the sets. Each set
is a character, a string representing the set of its characters, a
range or a character class (see below). A range is either a
hyphen-separated string like "A-Z"
, or a cons of characters
like (?A . ?Z)
.
Note that hyphen (-
) is special in strings in this construct,
since it acts as a range separator. To include a hyphen, add it as a
separate character or single-character string.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘[…]’
(not charspec)
¶Match a character not included in charspec. charspec can
be a character, a single-character string, an any
, not
,
or
, intersection
, syntax
or category
form,
or a character class.
If charspec is an or
form, its arguments have the same
restrictions as those of intersection
; see below.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘[^…]’, ‘\Scode’,
‘\Ccode’
(intersection charset…)
¶Match a character included in all of the charsets.
Each charset can be a character, a single-character string, an
any
form without character classes, or an intersection
,
or
or not
form whose arguments are also charsets.
not-newline
, nonl
¶Match any character except a newline.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘.’ (dot)
anychar
, anything
¶Match any character.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘.\|\n’ (for example)
Match a character from a named character class:
alpha
, alphabetic
, letter
Match alphabetic characters. More precisely, match characters whose Unicode ‘general-category’ property indicates that they are alphabetic.
alnum
, alphanumeric
Match alphabetic characters and digits. More precisely, match characters whose Unicode ‘general-category’ property indicates that they are alphabetic or decimal digits.
digit
, numeric
, num
Match the digits ‘0’–‘9’.
xdigit
, hex-digit
, hex
Match the hexadecimal digits ‘0’–‘9’, ‘A’–‘F’ and ‘a’–‘f’.
cntrl
, control
Match any character whose code is in the range 0–31.
blank
Match horizontal whitespace. More precisely, match characters whose Unicode ‘general-category’ property indicates that they are spacing separators.
space
, whitespace
, white
Match any character that has whitespace syntax (see Table of Syntax Classes).
lower
, lower-case
Match anything lower-case, as determined by the current case table.
If case-fold-search
is non-nil
, this also matches any
upper-case letter.
upper
, upper-case
Match anything upper-case, as determined by the current case table.
If case-fold-search
is non-nil
, this also matches any
lower-case letter.
graph
, graphic
Match any character except whitespace, ASCII and non-ASCII control characters, surrogates, and codepoints unassigned by Unicode, as indicated by the Unicode ‘general-category’ property.
print
, printing
Match whitespace or a character matched by graph
.
punct
, punctuation
Match any punctuation character. (At present, for multibyte characters, anything that has non-word syntax.)
word
, wordchar
Match any character that has word syntax (see Table of Syntax Classes).
ascii
Match any ASCII character (codes 0–127).
nonascii
Match any non-ASCII character (but not raw bytes).
Corresponding string regexp: ‘[[:class:]]’
(syntax syntax)
¶Match a character with syntax syntax, being one of the following names:
Syntax name | Syntax character |
---|---|
whitespace | - |
punctuation | . |
word | w |
symbol | _ |
open-parenthesis | ( |
close-parenthesis | ) |
expression-prefix | ' |
string-quote | " |
paired-delimiter | $ |
escape | \ |
character-quote | / |
comment-start | < |
comment-end | > |
string-delimiter | | |
comment-delimiter | ! |
For details, see Table of Syntax Classes. Please note that
(syntax punctuation)
is not equivalent to the character class
punctuation
.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\schar’ where char is the
syntax character.
(category category)
¶Match a character in category category, which is either one of the names below or its category character.
Category name | Category character |
---|---|
space-for-indent | space |
base | . |
consonant | 0 |
base-vowel | 1 |
upper-diacritical-mark | 2 |
lower-diacritical-mark | 3 |
tone-mark | 4 |
symbol | 5 |
digit | 6 |
vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark | 7 |
vowel-sign | 8 |
semivowel-lower | 9 |
not-at-end-of-line | < |
not-at-beginning-of-line | > |
alpha-numeric-two-byte | A |
chinese-two-byte | C |
greek-two-byte | G |
japanese-hiragana-two-byte | H |
indian-two-byte | I |
japanese-katakana-two-byte | K |
strong-left-to-right | L |
korean-hangul-two-byte | N |
strong-right-to-left | R |
cyrillic-two-byte | Y |
combining-diacritic | ^ |
ascii | a |
arabic | b |
chinese | c |
ethiopic | e |
greek | g |
korean | h |
indian | i |
japanese | j |
japanese-katakana | k |
latin | l |
lao | o |
tibetan | q |
japanese-roman | r |
thai | t |
vietnamese | v |
hebrew | w |
cyrillic | y |
can-break | | |
For more information about currently defined categories, run the
command M-x describe-categories RET. For how to define
new categories, see Categories.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\cchar’ where char is the
category character.
These all match the empty string, but only in specific places.
line-start
, bol
¶Match at the beginning of a line.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘^’
line-end
, eol
¶Match at the end of a line.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘$’
string-start
, bos
, buffer-start
, bot
¶Match at the start of the string or buffer being matched against.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\`’
string-end
, eos
, buffer-end
, eot
¶Match at the end of the string or buffer being matched against.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\'’
point
¶Match at point.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\=’
word-start
, bow
¶Match at the beginning of a word.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\<’
word-end
, eow
¶Match at the end of a word.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\>’
word-boundary
¶Match at the beginning or end of a word.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\b’
not-word-boundary
¶Match anywhere but at the beginning or end of a word.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\B’
symbol-start
¶Match at the beginning of a symbol.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\_<’
symbol-end
¶Match at the end of a symbol.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\_>’
(group rx…)
¶(submatch rx…)
Match the rxs, making the matched text and position accessible
in the match data. The first group in a regexp is numbered 1;
subsequent groups will be numbered one above the previously
highest-numbered group in the pattern so far.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\(…\)’
(group-n n rx…)
¶(submatch-n n rx…)
Like group
, but explicitly assign the group number n.
n must be positive.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\(?n:…\)’
(backref n)
¶Match the text previously matched by group number n.
n must be in the range 1–9.
Corresponding string regexp: ‘\n’
(literal expr)
¶Match the literal string that is the result from evaluating the Lisp expression expr. The evaluation takes place at call time, in the current lexical environment.
(regexp expr)
¶(regex expr)
Match the string regexp that is the result from evaluating the Lisp expression expr. The evaluation takes place at call time, in the current lexical environment.
(eval expr)
¶Match the rx form that is the result from evaluating the Lisp
expression expr. The evaluation takes place at macro-expansion
time for rx
, at call time for rx-to-string
,
in the current global environment.
rx
regexps ¶Translate the rx-forms to a string regexp, as if they were the
body of a (seq …)
form. The rx
macro expands to a
string constant, or, if literal
or regexp
forms are
used, a Lisp expression that evaluates to a string. Example:
(rx (+ alpha) "=" (+ digit)) ⇒ "[[:alpha:]]+=[[:digit:]]+"
Translate rx-expr to a string regexp which is returned.
If no-group is absent or nil
, bracket the result in a
non-capturing group, ‘\(?:…\)’, if necessary to ensure that
a postfix operator appended to it will apply to the whole expression.
Example:
(rx-to-string '(seq (+ alpha) "=" (+ digit)) t) ⇒ "[[:alpha:]]+=[[:digit:]]+"
Arguments to literal
and regexp
forms in rx-expr
must be string literals.
The pcase
macro can use rx
expressions as patterns
directly; see rx in pcase.
For mechanisms to add user-defined extensions to the rx
notation, see Defining new rx
forms.
rx
forms ¶The rx
notation can be extended by defining new symbols and
parameterized forms in terms of other rx
expressions. This is
handy for sharing parts between several regexps, and for making
complex ones easier to build and understand by putting them together
from smaller pieces.
For example, you could define name
to mean
(one-or-more letter)
, and (quoted x)
to mean
(seq ?' x ?')
for any x. These forms could then be
used in rx
expressions like any other: (rx (quoted name))
would match a nonempty sequence of letters inside single quotes.
The Lisp macros below provide different ways of binding names to definitions. Common to all of them are the following rules:
rx
forms, like digit
and group
, cannot
be redefined.
-regexp
to names; they cannot collide with anything else.
rx
or
rx-to-string
, not merely by their presence in definition
macros. This means that the order of definitions doesn’t matter, even
when they refer to each other, and that syntax errors only show up
when they are used, not when they are defined.
rx
expressions are expected; for example, in the body of a
zero-or-one
form, but not inside any
or category
forms. They are also allowed inside not
and
intersection
forms.
Define name globally in all subsequent calls to rx
and
rx-to-string
. If arglist is absent, then name is
defined as a plain symbol to be replaced with rx-form. Example:
(rx-define haskell-comment (seq "--" (zero-or-more nonl))) (rx haskell-comment) ⇒ "--.*"
If arglist is present, it must be a list of zero or more
argument names, and name is then defined as a parameterized form.
When used in an rx
expression as (name arg…)
,
each arg will replace the corresponding argument name inside
rx-form.
arglist may end in &rest
and one final argument name,
denoting a rest parameter. The rest parameter will expand to all
extra actual argument values not matched by any other parameter in
arglist, spliced into rx-form where it occurs. Example:
(rx-define moan (x y &rest r) (seq x (one-or-more y) r "!")) (rx (moan "MOO" "A" "MEE" "OW")) ⇒ "MOOA+MEEOW!"
Since the definition is global, it is recommended to give name a package prefix to avoid name clashes with definitions elsewhere, as is usual when naming non-local variables and functions.
Forms defined this way only perform simple template substitution.
For arbitrary computations, use them together with the rx
forms eval
, regexp
or literal
. Example:
(defun n-tuple-rx (n element) `(seq "<" (group-n 1 ,element) ,@(mapcar (lambda (i) `(seq ?, (group-n ,i ,element))) (number-sequence 2 n)) ">")) (rx-define n-tuple (n element) (eval (n-tuple-rx n 'element))) (rx (n-tuple 3 (+ (in "0-9")))) ⇒ "<\\(?1:[0-9]+\\),\\(?2:[0-9]+\\),\\(?3:[0-9]+\\)>"
Make the rx
definitions in bindings available locally for
rx
macro invocations in body, which is then evaluated.
Each element of bindings is on the form
(name [arglist] rx-form)
, where the parts
have the same meaning as in rx-define
above. Example:
(rx-let ((comma-separated (item) (seq item (0+ "," item))) (number (1+ digit)) (numbers (comma-separated number))) (re-search-forward (rx "(" numbers ")")))
The definitions are only available during the macro-expansion of body, and are thus not present during execution of compiled code.
rx-let
can be used not only inside a function, but also at top
level to include global variable and function definitions that need
to share a common set of rx
forms. Since the names are local
inside body, there is no need for any package prefixes.
Example:
(rx-let ((phone-number (seq (opt ?+) (1+ (any digit ?-))))) (defun find-next-phone-number () (re-search-forward (rx phone-number))) (defun phone-number-p (string) (string-match-p (rx bos phone-number eos) string)))
The scope of the rx-let
bindings is lexical, which means that
they are not visible outside body itself, even in functions
called from body.
Evaluate bindings to a list of bindings as in rx-let
,
and evaluate body with those bindings in effect for calls
to rx-to-string
.
This macro is similar to rx-let
, except that the bindings
argument is evaluated (and thus needs to be quoted if it is a list
literal), and the definitions are substituted at run time, which is
required for rx-to-string
to work. Example:
(rx-let-eval '((ponder (x) (seq "Where have all the " x " gone?"))) (looking-at (rx-to-string '(ponder (or "flowers" "young girls" "left socks")))))
Another difference from rx-let
is that the bindings are
dynamically scoped, and thus also available in functions called from
body. However, they are not visible inside functions defined in
body.
These functions operate on regular expressions.
This function returns a regular expression whose only exact match is
string. Using this regular expression in looking-at
will
succeed only if the next characters in the buffer are string;
using it in a search function will succeed if the text being searched
contains string. See Regular Expression Searching.
This allows you to request an exact string match or search when calling a function that wants a regular expression.
(regexp-quote "^The cat$") ⇒ "\\^The cat\\$"
One use of regexp-quote
is to combine an exact string match with
context described as a regular expression. For example, this searches
for the string that is the value of string, surrounded by
whitespace:
(re-search-forward (concat "\\s-" (regexp-quote string) "\\s-"))
The returned string may be string itself if it does not contain any special characters.
This function returns an efficient regular expression that will match any of the strings in the list strings. This is useful when you need to make matching or searching as fast as possible—for example, for Font Lock mode27.
If strings is the empty list, the return value is a regexp that never matches anything.
The optional argument paren can be any of the following:
The resulting regexp is preceded by paren and followed by ‘\)’, e.g. use ‘"\\(?1:"’ to produce an explicitly numbered group.
words
The resulting regexp is surrounded by ‘\<\(’ and ‘\)\>’.
symbols
The resulting regexp is surrounded by ‘\_<\(’ and ‘\)\_>’ (this is often appropriate when matching programming-language keywords and the like).
nil
The resulting regexp is surrounded by ‘\(’ and ‘\)’.
nil
The resulting regexp is surrounded by ‘\(?:’ and ‘\)’, if it is necessary to ensure that a postfix operator appended to it will apply to the whole expression.
The returned regexp is ordered in such a way that it will always match the longest string possible.
Up to reordering, the resulting regexp of regexp-opt
is
equivalent to but usually more efficient than that of a simplified
version:
(defun simplified-regexp-opt (strings &optional paren) (let ((parens (cond ((stringp paren) (cons paren "\\)")) ((eq paren 'words) '("\\<\\(" . "\\)\\>")) ((eq paren 'symbols) '("\\_<\\(" . "\\)\\_>")) ((null paren) '("\\(?:" . "\\)")) (t '("\\(" . "\\)"))))) (concat (car parens) (mapconcat 'regexp-quote strings "\\|") (cdr parens))))
This function returns the total number of grouping constructs (parenthesized expressions) in regexp. This does not include shy groups (see Backslash Constructs in Regular Expressions).
This function returns a regular expression matching a character in the list of characters chars.
(regexp-opt-charset '(?a ?b ?c ?d ?e)) ⇒ "[a-e]"
This variable contains a regexp that is guaranteed not to match any string at all. It is particularly useful as default value for variables that may be set to a pattern that actually matches something.
The Emacs regexp implementation, like many of its kind, is generally robust but occasionally causes trouble in either of two ways: matching may run out of internal stack space and signal an error, and it can take a long time to complete. The advice below will make these symptoms less likely and help alleviate problems that do arise.
\`
). This takes advantage
of fast paths in the implementation and can avoid futile matching
attempts. Other zero-width assertions may also bring benefits by
causing a match to fail early.
(It is a trade-off: successfully matched or-patterns run faster with the most frequently matched pattern first.)
Be especially careful with nested repetitions: they can easily result in very slow matching in the presence of ambiguities. For example, ‘\(?:a*b*\)+c’ will take a long time attempting to match even a moderately long string of ‘a’s before failing. The equivalent ‘\(?:a\|b\)*c’ is much faster, and ‘[ab]*c’ better still.
rx
(see The rx
Structured Regexp Notation); it can optimize some
or-patterns automatically and will never introduce capturing groups
unless explicitly requested.
If you run into regexp stack overflow despite following the above advice, don’t be afraid of performing the matching in multiple function calls, each using a simpler regexp where backtracking can more easily be contained.
In GNU Emacs, you can search for the next match for a regular
expression (see Syntax of Regular Expressions) either incrementally or not.
For incremental search commands, see Regular
Expression Search in The GNU Emacs Manual. Here we describe
only the search functions useful in programs. The principal one is
re-search-forward
.
These search functions convert the regular expression to multibyte if the buffer is multibyte; they convert the regular expression to unibyte if the buffer is unibyte. See Text Representations.
This function searches forward in the current buffer for a string of text that is matched by the regular expression regexp. The function skips over any amount of text that is not matched by regexp, and leaves point at the end of the first match found. It returns the new value of point.
If limit is non-nil
, it must be a position in the current
buffer. It specifies the upper bound to the search. No match
extending after that position is accepted. If limit is omitted
or nil
, it defaults to the end of the accessible portion of the
buffer.
What re-search-forward
does when the search fails depends on
the value of noerror:
nil
Signal a search-failed
error.
t
Do nothing and return nil
.
Move point to limit (or the end of the accessible portion of the
buffer) and return nil
.
The argument noerror only affects valid searches which fail to find a match. Invalid arguments cause errors regardless of noerror.
If count is a positive number n, the search is done n times; each successive search starts at the end of the previous match. If all these successive searches succeed, the function call succeeds, moving point and returning its new value. Otherwise the function call fails, with results depending on the value of noerror, as described above. If count is a negative number −n, the search is done n times in the opposite (backward) direction.
In the following example, point is initially before the ‘T’. Evaluating the search call moves point to the end of that line (between the ‘t’ of ‘hat’ and the newline).
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I read "∗The cat in the hat comes back" twice. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(re-search-forward "[a-z]+" nil t 5) ⇒ 27 ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I read "The cat in the hat∗ comes back" twice. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
This function searches backward in the current buffer for a string of text that is matched by the regular expression regexp, leaving point at the beginning of the first text found.
This function is analogous to re-search-forward
, but they are not
simple mirror images. re-search-forward
finds the match whose
beginning is as close as possible to the starting point. If
re-search-backward
were a perfect mirror image, it would find the
match whose end is as close as possible. However, in fact it finds the
match whose beginning is as close as possible (and yet ends before the
starting point). The reason for this is that matching a regular
expression at a given spot always works from beginning to end, and
starts at a specified beginning position.
A true mirror-image of re-search-forward
would require a special
feature for matching regular expressions from end to beginning. It’s
not worth the trouble of implementing that.
This function returns the index of the start of the first match for
the regular expression regexp in string, or nil
if
there is no match. If start is non-nil
, the search starts
at that index in string.
For example,
(string-match "quick" "The quick brown fox jumped quickly.") ⇒ 4
(string-match "quick" "The quick brown fox jumped quickly." 8) ⇒ 27
The index of the first character of the string is 0, the index of the second character is 1, and so on.
By default, if this function finds a match, the index of the first
character beyond the match is available as (match-end 0)
.
See The Match Data. If inhibit-modify is non-nil
, the
match data isn’t modified.
(string-match "quick" "The quick brown fox jumped quickly." 8) ⇒ 27
(match-end 0) ⇒ 32
This predicate function does what string-match
does, but it
avoids modifying the match data.
This function determines whether the text in the current buffer directly
following point matches the regular expression regexp. “Directly
following” means precisely that: the search is “anchored” and it can
succeed only starting with the first character following point. The
result is t
if so, nil
otherwise.
This function does not move point, but it does update the match data
(if inhibit-modify is nil
or missing, which is the
default). See The Match Data. As a convenience, instead of using the
inhibit-modify argument, you can use looking-at-p
,
described below.
In this example, point is located directly before the ‘T’. If it
were anywhere else, the result would be nil
.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I read "∗The cat in the hat comes back" twice. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (looking-at "The cat in the hat$") ⇒ t
This function returns t
if regexp matches the text
immediately before point (i.e., ending at point), and nil
otherwise.
Because regular expression matching works only going forward, this is
implemented by searching backwards from point for a match that ends at
point. That can be quite slow if it has to search a long distance.
You can bound the time required by specifying a non-nil
value
for limit, which says not to search before limit. In this
case, the match that is found must begin at or after limit.
Here’s an example:
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I read "∗The cat in the hat comes back" twice. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (looking-back "read \"" 3) ⇒ t (looking-back "read \"" 4) ⇒ nil
If greedy is non-nil
, this function extends the match
backwards as far as possible, stopping when a single additional
previous character cannot be part of a match for regexp. When
the match is extended, its starting position is allowed to occur
before limit.
As a general recommendation, try to avoid using looking-back
wherever possible, since it is slow. For this reason, there are no
plans to add a looking-back-p
function.
This predicate function works like looking-at
, but without
updating the match data.
If this variable is non-nil
, it should be a regular expression
that says how to search for whitespace. In that case, any group of
spaces in a regular expression being searched for stands for use of
this regular expression. However, spaces inside of constructs such as
‘[…]’ and ‘*’, ‘+’, ‘?’ are not affected by
search-spaces-regexp
.
Since this variable affects all regular expression search and match constructs, you should bind it temporarily for as small as possible a part of the code, and only where the Lisp code affected by the binding performs searches whose regexp was produced from interactive user input. In other words, this variable should only be used to tell regexp search primitives how to interpret whitespace typed by the user.
The usual regular expression functions do backtracking when necessary to handle the ‘\|’ and repetition constructs, but they continue this only until they find some match. Then they succeed and report the first match found.
This section describes alternative search functions which perform the full backtracking specified by the POSIX standard for regular expression matching. They continue backtracking until they have tried all possibilities and found all matches, so they can report the longest match, as required by POSIX. This is much slower, so use these functions only when you really need the longest match.
The POSIX search and match functions do not properly support the non-greedy repetition operators (see non-greedy). This is because POSIX backtracking conflicts with the semantics of non-greedy repetition.
This is like re-search-forward
except that it performs the full
backtracking specified by the POSIX standard for regular expression
matching.
This is like re-search-backward
except that it performs the full
backtracking specified by the POSIX standard for regular expression
matching.
This is like looking-at
except that it performs the full
backtracking specified by the POSIX standard for regular expression
matching.
This is like string-match
except that it performs the full
backtracking specified by the POSIX standard for regular expression
matching.
Emacs keeps track of the start and end positions of the segments of text found during a search; this is called the match data. Thanks to the match data, you can search for a complex pattern, such as a date in a mail message, and then extract parts of the match under control of the pattern.
Because the match data normally describe the most recent search only, you must be careful not to do another search inadvertently between the search you wish to refer back to and the use of the match data. If you can’t avoid another intervening search, you must save and restore the match data around it, to prevent it from being overwritten.
Notice that all functions are allowed to overwrite the match data unless they’re explicitly documented not to do so. A consequence is that functions that are run implicitly in the background (see Timers for Delayed Execution, and Idle Timers) should likely save and restore the match data explicitly.
This function replaces all or part of the text matched by the last search. It works by means of the match data.
This function performs a replacement operation on a buffer or string.
If you did the last search in a buffer, you should omit the
string argument or specify nil
for it, and make sure that
the current buffer is the one in which you performed the last search.
Then this function edits the buffer, replacing the matched text with
replacement. It leaves point at the end of the replacement
text.
If you performed the last search on a string, pass the same string as string. Then this function returns a new string, in which the matched text is replaced by replacement.
If fixedcase is non-nil
, then replace-match
uses
the replacement text without case conversion; otherwise, it converts
the replacement text depending upon the capitalization of the text to
be replaced. If the original text is all upper case, this converts
the replacement text to upper case. If all words of the original text
are capitalized, this capitalizes all the words of the replacement
text. If all the words are one-letter and they are all upper case,
they are treated as capitalized words rather than all-upper-case
words.
If literal is non-nil
, then replacement is inserted
exactly as it is, the only alterations being case changes as needed.
If it is nil
(the default), then the character ‘\’ is treated
specially. If a ‘\’ appears in replacement, then it must be
part of one of the following sequences:
This stands for the entire text being replaced.
This stands for the text that matched the nth subexpression in the original regexp. Subexpressions are those expressions grouped inside ‘\(…\)’. If the nth subexpression never matched, an empty string is substituted.
This stands for a single ‘\’ in the replacement text.
This stands for itself (for compatibility with replace-regexp
and related commands; see Regexp Replace in The GNU
Emacs Manual).
Any other character following ‘\’ signals an error.
The substitutions performed by ‘\&’ and ‘\n’ occur after case conversion, if any. Therefore, the strings they substitute are never case-converted.
If subexp is non-nil
, that says to replace just
subexpression number subexp of the regexp that was matched, not
the entire match. For example, after matching ‘foo \(ba*r\)’,
calling replace-match
with 1 as subexp means to replace
just the text that matched ‘\(ba*r\)’.
This function returns the text that would be inserted into the buffer
by replace-match
, but without modifying the buffer. It is
useful if you want to present the user with actual replacement result,
with constructs like ‘\n’ or ‘\&’ substituted with
matched groups. Arguments replacement and optional
fixedcase, literal, string and subexp have the
same meaning as for replace-match
.
This section explains how to use the match data to find out what was matched by the last search or match operation, if it succeeded.
You can ask about the entire matching text, or about a particular parenthetical subexpression of a regular expression. The count argument in the functions below specifies which. If count is zero, you are asking about the entire match. If count is positive, it specifies which subexpression you want.
Recall that the subexpressions of a regular expression are those expressions grouped with escaped parentheses, ‘\(…\)’. The countth subexpression is found by counting occurrences of ‘\(’ from the beginning of the whole regular expression. The first subexpression is numbered 1, the second 2, and so on. Only regular expressions can have subexpressions—after a simple string search, the only information available is about the entire match.
Every successful search sets the match data. Therefore, you should
query the match data immediately after searching, before calling any
other function that might perform another search. Alternatively, you
may save and restore the match data (see Saving and Restoring the Match Data) around
the call to functions that could perform another search. Or use the
functions that explicitly do not modify the match data;
e.g., string-match-p
.
A search which fails may or may not alter the match data. In the current implementation, it does not, but we may change it in the future. Don’t try to rely on the value of the match data after a failing search.
This function returns, as a string, the text matched in the last search or match operation. It returns the entire text if count is zero, or just the portion corresponding to the countth parenthetical subexpression, if count is positive.
If the last such operation was done against a string with
string-match
, then you should pass the same string as the
argument in-string. After a buffer search or match,
you should omit in-string or pass nil
for it; but you
should make sure that the current buffer when you call
match-string
is the one in which you did the searching or
matching. Failure to follow this advice will lead to incorrect results.
The value is nil
if count is out of range, or for a
subexpression inside a ‘\|’ alternative that wasn’t used or a
repetition that repeated zero times.
This function is like match-string
except that the result
has no text properties.
If the last regular expression search found a match, this function returns the position of the start of the matching text or of a subexpression of it.
If count is zero, then the value is the position of the start of the entire match. Otherwise, count specifies a subexpression in the regular expression, and the value of the function is the starting position of the match for that subexpression.
The value is nil
for a subexpression inside a ‘\|’
alternative that wasn’t used or a repetition that repeated zero times.
This function is like match-beginning
except that it returns the
position of the end of the match, rather than the position of the
beginning.
Here is an example of using the match data, with a comment showing the positions within the text:
(string-match "\\(qu\\)\\(ick\\)" "The quick fox jumped quickly.") ;0123456789 ⇒ 4
(match-string 0 "The quick fox jumped quickly.") ⇒ "quick" (match-string 1 "The quick fox jumped quickly.") ⇒ "qu" (match-string 2 "The quick fox jumped quickly.") ⇒ "ick"
(match-beginning 1) ; The beginning of the match ⇒ 4 ; with ‘qu’ is at index 4.
(match-beginning 2) ; The beginning of the match ⇒ 6 ; with ‘ick’ is at index 6.
(match-end 1) ; The end of the match ⇒ 6 ; with ‘qu’ is at index 6. (match-end 2) ; The end of the match ⇒ 9 ; with ‘ick’ is at index 9.
Here is another example. Point is initially located at the beginning of the line. Searching moves point to between the space and the word ‘in’. The beginning of the entire match is at the 9th character of the buffer (‘T’), and the beginning of the match for the first subexpression is at the 13th character (‘c’).
(list (re-search-forward "The \\(cat \\)") (match-beginning 0) (match-beginning 1)) ⇒ (17 9 13)
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- I read "The cat ∗in the hat comes back" twice. ^ ^ 9 13 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(In this case, the index returned is a buffer position; the first character of the buffer counts as 1.)
The functions match-data
and set-match-data
read or
write the entire match data, all at once.
This function returns a list of positions (markers or integers) that
record all the information on the text that the last search matched.
Element zero is the position of the beginning of the match for the
whole expression; element one is the position of the end of the match
for the expression. The next two elements are the positions of the
beginning and end of the match for the first subexpression, and so on.
In general, element
number 2n
corresponds to (match-beginning n)
; and
element
number 2n + 1
corresponds to (match-end n)
.
Normally all the elements are markers or nil
, but if
integers is non-nil
, that means to use integers instead
of markers. (In that case, the buffer itself is appended as an
additional element at the end of the list, to facilitate complete
restoration of the match data.) If the last match was done on a
string with string-match
, then integers are always used,
since markers can’t point into a string.
If reuse is non-nil
, it should be a list. In that case,
match-data
stores the match data in reuse. That is,
reuse is destructively modified. reuse does not need to
have the right length. If it is not long enough to contain the match
data, it is extended. If it is too long, the length of reuse
stays the same, but the elements that were not used are set to
nil
. The purpose of this feature is to reduce the need for
garbage collection.
If reseat is non-nil
, all markers on the reuse list
are reseated to point to nowhere.
As always, there must be no possibility of intervening searches between
the call to a search function and the call to match-data
that is
intended to access the match data for that search.
(match-data) ⇒ (#<marker at 9 in foo> #<marker at 17 in foo> #<marker at 13 in foo> #<marker at 17 in foo>)
This function sets the match data from the elements of match-list,
which should be a list that was the value of a previous call to
match-data
. (More precisely, anything that has the same format
will work.)
If match-list refers to a buffer that doesn’t exist, you don’t get an error; that sets the match data in a meaningless but harmless way.
If reseat is non-nil
, all markers on the match-list list
are reseated to point to nowhere.
store-match-data
is a semi-obsolete alias for set-match-data
.
When you call a function that may search, you may need to save and restore the match data around that call, if you want to preserve the match data from an earlier search for later use. Here is an example that shows the problem that arises if you fail to save the match data:
(re-search-forward "The \\(cat \\)")
⇒ 48
(foo) ; foo
does more searching.
(match-end 0)
⇒ 61 ; Unexpected result—not 48!
You can save and restore the match data with save-match-data
:
This macro executes body, saving and restoring the match data around it. The return value is the value of the last form in body.
You could use set-match-data
together with match-data
to
imitate the effect of the special form save-match-data
. Here is
how:
(let ((data (match-data)))
(unwind-protect
... ; Ok to change the original match data.
(set-match-data data)))
Emacs automatically saves and restores the match data when it runs process filter functions (see Process Filter Functions) and process sentinels (see Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes).
If you want to find all matches for a regexp in part of the buffer
and replace them, the most flexible way is to write an explicit loop
using re-search-forward
and replace-match
, like this:
(while (re-search-forward "foo[ \t]+bar" nil t) (replace-match "foobar"))
See Replacing the Text that Matched, for a
description of replace-match
.
It may be more convenient to limit the replacements to a specific
region. The function replace-regexp-in-region
does that.
This function replaces all the occurrences of regexp with
replacement in the region of buffer text between start and
end; start defaults to position of point, and end
defaults to the last accessible position of the buffer. The search
for regexp is case-sensitive, and replacement is inserted
without changing its letter-case. The replacement string can
use the same special elements starting with ‘\’ as
replace-match
does. The function returns the number of
replaced occurrences, or nil
if regexp is not found. The
function preserves the position of point.
(replace-regexp-in-region "foo[ \t]+bar" "foobar")
This function works similarly to replace-regexp-in-region
,
but searches for, and replaces, literal strings instead of
regular expressions.
Emacs also has special functions for replacing matches in a string.
This function copies string and searches it for matches for
regexp, and replaces them with rep. It returns the
modified copy. If start is non-nil
, the search for
matches starts at that index in string, and the returned value
does not include the first start characters of string.
To get the whole transformed string, concatenate the first
start characters of string with the return value.
This function uses replace-match
to do the replacement, and it
passes the optional arguments fixedcase, literal and
subexp along to replace-match
.
Instead of a string, rep can be a function. In that case,
replace-regexp-in-string
calls rep for each match,
passing the text of the match as its sole argument. It collects the
value rep returns and passes that to replace-match
as the
replacement string. The match data at this point are the result
of matching regexp against a substring of string.
This function replaces all occurrences of from-string with to-string in in-string and returns the result. It may return one of its arguments unchanged, a constant string or a new string. Case is significant, and text properties are ignored.
If you want to write a command along the lines of query-replace
,
you can use perform-replace
to do the work.
This function is the guts of query-replace
and related
commands. It searches for occurrences of from-string in the
text between positions start and end and replaces some or
all of them. If start is nil
(or omitted), point is used
instead, and the end of the buffer’s accessible portion is used for
end. (If the optional argument backward is
non-nil
, the search starts at end and goes backward.)
If query-flag is nil
, it replaces all
occurrences; otherwise, it asks the user what to do about each one.
If regexp-flag is non-nil
, then from-string is
considered a regular expression; otherwise, it must match literally. If
delimited-flag is non-nil
, then only replacements
surrounded by word boundaries are considered.
The argument replacements specifies what to replace occurrences with. If it is a string, that string is used. It can also be a list of strings, to be used in cyclic order.
If replacements is a cons cell, (function . data)
, this means to call function after each match to
get the replacement text. This function is called with two arguments:
data, and the number of replacements already made.
If repeat-count is non-nil
, it should be an integer. Then
it specifies how many times to use each of the strings in the
replacements list before advancing cyclically to the next one.
If from-string contains upper-case letters, then
perform-replace
binds case-fold-search
to nil
, and
it uses the replacements without altering their case.
Normally, the keymap query-replace-map
defines the possible
user responses for queries. The argument map, if
non-nil
, specifies a keymap to use instead of
query-replace-map
.
Non-nil
region-noncontiguous-p means that the region
between start and end is composed of noncontiguous pieces.
The most common example of this is a rectangular region, where the
pieces are separated by newline characters.
This function uses one of two functions to search for the next
occurrence of from-string. These functions are specified by the
values of two variables: replace-re-search-function
and
replace-search-function
. The former is called when the
argument regexp-flag is non-nil
, the latter when it is
nil
.
This variable holds a special keymap that defines the valid user
responses for perform-replace
and the commands that use it, as
well as y-or-n-p
and map-y-or-n-p
. This map is unusual
in two ways:
read-key-sequence
to get the input; instead, they read a single
event and look it up “by hand”.
Here are the meaningful bindings for query-replace-map
.
Several of them are meaningful only for query-replace
and
friends.
act
Do take the action being considered—in other words, “yes”.
skip
Do not take action for this question—in other words, “no”.
exit
Answer this question “no”, and give up on the entire series of questions, assuming that the answers will be “no”.
exit-prefix
Like exit
, but add the key that was pressed to
unread-command-events
(see Miscellaneous Event Input Features).
act-and-exit
Answer this question “yes”, and give up on the entire series of questions, assuming that subsequent answers will be “no”.
act-and-show
Answer this question “yes”, but show the results—don’t advance yet to the next question.
automatic
Answer this question and all subsequent questions in the series with “yes”, without further user interaction.
backup
Move back to the previous place that a question was asked about.
undo
Undo last replacement and move back to the place where that replacement was performed.
undo-all
Undo all replacements and move back to the place where the first replacement was performed.
edit
Enter a recursive edit to deal with this question—instead of any other action that would normally be taken.
edit-replacement
Edit the replacement for this question in the minibuffer.
delete-and-edit
Delete the text being considered, then enter a recursive edit to replace it.
recenter
scroll-up
scroll-down
scroll-other-window
scroll-other-window-down
Perform the specified window scroll operation, then ask the same
question again. Only y-or-n-p
and related functions use this
answer.
quit
Perform a quit right away. Only y-or-n-p
and related functions
use this answer.
help
Display some help, then ask again.
This variable holds a keymap that extends query-replace-map
by
providing additional key bindings that are useful in multi-buffer
replacements. The additional bindings are:
automatic-all
Answer this question and all subsequent questions in the series with “yes”, without further user interaction, for all remaining buffers.
exit-current
Answer this question “no”, and give up on the entire series of questions for the current buffer. Continue to the next buffer in the sequence.
This variable specifies a function that perform-replace
calls
to search for the next string to replace. Its default value is
search-forward
. Any other value should name a function of 3
arguments: the first 3 arguments of search-forward
(see Searching for Strings).
This variable specifies a function that perform-replace
calls
to search for the next regexp to replace. Its default value is
re-search-forward
. Any other value should name a function of 3
arguments: the first 3 arguments of re-search-forward
(see Regular Expression Searching).
This section describes some variables that hold regular expressions used for certain purposes in editing:
This is the regular expression describing line-beginnings that separate
pages. The default value is "^\014"
(i.e., "^^L"
or
"^\C-l"
); this matches a line that starts with a formfeed
character.
The following two regular expressions should not assume the match always starts at the beginning of a line; they should not use ‘^’ to anchor the match. Most often, the paragraph commands do check for a match only at the beginning of a line, which means that ‘^’ would be superfluous. When there is a nonzero left margin, they accept matches that start after the left margin. In that case, a ‘^’ would be incorrect. However, a ‘^’ is harmless in modes where a left margin is never used.
This is the regular expression for recognizing the beginning of a line
that separates paragraphs. (If you change this, you may have to
change paragraph-start
also.) The default value is
"[ \t\f]*$"
, which matches a line that consists entirely of
spaces, tabs, and form feeds (after its left margin).
This is the regular expression for recognizing the beginning of a line
that starts or separates paragraphs. The default value is
"\f\\|[ \t]*$"
, which matches a line containing only
whitespace or starting with a form feed (after its left margin).
If non-nil
, the value should be a regular expression describing
the end of a sentence, including the whitespace following the
sentence. (All paragraph boundaries also end sentences, regardless.)
If the value is nil
, as it is by default, then the function
sentence-end
constructs the regexp. That is why you
should always call the function sentence-end
to obtain the
regexp to be used to recognize the end of a sentence.
This function returns the value of the variable sentence-end
,
if non-nil
. Otherwise it returns a default value based on the
values of the variables sentence-end-double-space
(see Definition of sentence-end-double-space),
sentence-end-without-period
, and
sentence-end-without-space
.
A syntax table specifies the syntactic role of each character in a buffer. It can be used to determine where words, symbols, and other syntactic constructs begin and end. This information is used by many Emacs facilities, including Font Lock mode (see Font Lock Mode) and the various complex movement commands (see Motion).
A syntax table is a data structure which can be used to look up the syntax class and other syntactic properties of each character. Syntax tables are used by Lisp programs for scanning and moving across text.
Internally, a syntax table is a char-table (see Char-Tables).
The element at index c describes the character with code
c; its value is a cons cell which specifies the syntax of the
character in question. See Syntax Table Internals, for details.
However, instead of using aset
and aref
to modify and
inspect syntax table contents, you should usually use the higher-level
functions char-syntax
and modify-syntax-entry
, which are
described in Syntax Table Functions.
This function returns t
if object is a syntax table.
Each buffer has its own major mode, and each major mode has its own
idea of the syntax class of various characters. For example, in Lisp
mode, the character ‘;’ begins a comment, but in C mode, it
terminates a statement. To support these variations, the syntax table
is local to each buffer. Typically, each major mode has its own
syntax table, which it installs in all buffers that use that mode.
For example, the variable emacs-lisp-mode-syntax-table
holds
the syntax table used by Emacs Lisp mode, and
c-mode-syntax-table
holds the syntax table used by C mode.
Changing a major mode’s syntax table alters the syntax in all of that
mode’s buffers, as well as in any buffers subsequently put in that
mode. Occasionally, several similar modes share one syntax table.
See Major Mode Examples, for an example of how to set up a syntax
table.
A syntax table can inherit from another syntax table, which is called its parent syntax table. A syntax table can leave the syntax class of some characters unspecified, by giving them the “inherit” syntax class; such a character then acquires the syntax class specified by the parent syntax table (see Table of Syntax Classes). Emacs defines a standard syntax table, which is the default parent syntax table, and is also the syntax table used by Fundamental mode.
This function returns the standard syntax table, which is the syntax table used in Fundamental mode.
Syntax tables are not used by the Emacs Lisp reader, which has its own built-in syntactic rules which cannot be changed. (Some Lisp systems provide ways to redefine the read syntax, but we decided to leave this feature out of Emacs Lisp for simplicity.)
The syntax class of a character describes its syntactic role. Each syntax table specifies the syntax class of each character. There is no necessary relationship between the class of a character in one syntax table and its class in any other table.
Each syntax class is designated by a mnemonic character, which serves as the name of the class when you need to specify a class. Usually, this designator character is one that is often assigned that class; however, its meaning as a designator is unvarying and independent of what syntax that character currently has. Thus, ‘\’ as a designator character always stands for escape character syntax, regardless of whether the ‘\’ character actually has that syntax in the current syntax table. See Table of Syntax Classes, for a list of syntax classes and their designator characters.
A syntax descriptor is a Lisp string that describes the syntax
class and other syntactic properties of a character. When you want to
modify the syntax of a character, that is done by calling the function
modify-syntax-entry
and passing a syntax descriptor as one of
its arguments (see Syntax Table Functions).
The first character in a syntax descriptor must be a syntax class designator character. The second character, if present, specifies a matching character (e.g., in Lisp, the matching character for ‘(’ is ‘)’); a space specifies that there is no matching character. Then come characters specifying additional syntax properties (see Syntax Flags).
If no matching character or flags are needed, only one character (specifying the syntax class) is sufficient.
For example, the syntax descriptor for the character ‘*’ in C
mode is ". 23"
(i.e., punctuation, matching character slot
unused, second character of a comment-starter, first character of a
comment-ender), and the entry for ‘/’ is ‘. 14’ (i.e.,
punctuation, matching character slot unused, first character of a
comment-starter, second character of a comment-ender).
Emacs also defines raw syntax descriptors, which are used to describe syntax classes at a lower level. See Syntax Table Internals.
Here is a table of syntax classes, the characters that designate them, their meanings, and examples of their use.
Characters that separate symbols and words from each other. Typically, whitespace characters have no other syntactic significance, and multiple whitespace characters are syntactically equivalent to a single one. Space, tab, and formfeed are classified as whitespace in almost all major modes.
This syntax class can be designated by either ‘ ’ or ‘-’. Both designators are equivalent.
Parts of words in human languages. These are typically used in variable and command names in programs. All upper- and lower-case letters, and the digits, are typically word constituents.
Extra characters used in variable and command names along with word constituents. Examples include the characters ‘$&*+-_<>’ in Lisp mode, which may be part of a symbol name even though they are not part of English words. In standard C, the only non-word-constituent character that is valid in symbols is underscore (‘_’).
Characters used as punctuation in a human language, or used in a programming language to separate symbols from one another. Some programming language modes, such as Emacs Lisp mode, have no characters in this class since the few characters that are not symbol or word constituents all have other uses. Other programming language modes, such as C mode, use punctuation syntax for operators.
Characters used in dissimilar pairs to surround sentences or expressions. Such a grouping is begun with an open parenthesis character and terminated with a close. Each open parenthesis character matches a particular close parenthesis character, and vice versa. Normally, Emacs indicates momentarily the matching open parenthesis when you insert a close parenthesis. See Blinking Parentheses.
In human languages, and in C code, the parenthesis pairs are ‘()’, ‘[]’, and ‘{}’. In Emacs Lisp, the delimiters for lists and vectors (‘()’ and ‘[]’) are classified as parenthesis characters.
Characters used to delimit string constants. The same string quote character appears at the beginning and the end of a string. Such quoted strings do not nest.
The parsing facilities of Emacs consider a string as a single token. The usual syntactic meanings of the characters in the string are suppressed.
The Lisp modes have two string quote characters: double-quote (‘"’) and vertical bar (‘|’). ‘|’ is not used in Emacs Lisp, but it is used in Common Lisp. C also has two string quote characters: double-quote for strings, and apostrophe (‘'’) for character constants.
Human text has no string quote characters. We do not want quotation marks to turn off the usual syntactic properties of other characters in the quotation.
Characters that start an escape sequence, such as is used in string and character constants. The character ‘\’ belongs to this class in both C and Lisp. (In C, it is used thus only inside strings, but it turns out to cause no trouble to treat it this way throughout C code.)
Characters in this class count as part of words if
words-include-escapes
is non-nil
. See Motion by Words.
Characters used to quote the following character so that it loses its normal syntactic meaning. This differs from an escape character in that only the character immediately following is ever affected.
Characters in this class count as part of words if
words-include-escapes
is non-nil
. See Motion by Words.
This class is used for backslash in TeX mode.
Similar to string quote characters, except that the syntactic properties of the characters between the delimiters are not suppressed. Only TeX mode uses a paired delimiter presently—the ‘$’ that both enters and leaves math mode.
Characters used for syntactic operators that are considered as part of an expression if they appear next to one. In Lisp modes, these characters include the apostrophe, ‘'’ (used for quoting), the comma, ‘,’ (used in macros), and ‘#’ (used in the read syntax for certain data types).
Characters used in various languages to delimit comments. Human text has no comment characters. In Lisp, the semicolon (‘;’) starts a comment and a newline or formfeed ends one.
This syntax class does not specify a particular syntax. It says to look in the parent syntax table to find the syntax of this character.
(This syntax class is also known as “comment-fence”.) Characters that start or end a special kind of comment. Any generic comment delimiter matches any generic comment delimiter, but they cannot match a comment starter or comment ender; generic comment delimiters can only match each other.
This syntax class is primarily meant for use with the
syntax-table
text property (see Syntax Properties). You
can mark any range of characters as forming a comment, by giving the
first and last characters of the range syntax-table
properties
identifying them as generic comment delimiters.
(This syntax class is also known as “string-fence”.) Characters that start or end a string. This class differs from the string quote class in that any generic string delimiter can match any other generic string delimiter; but they do not match ordinary string quote characters.
This syntax class is primarily meant for use with the
syntax-table
text property (see Syntax Properties). You
can mark any range of characters as forming a string constant, by
giving the first and last characters of the range syntax-table
properties identifying them as generic string delimiters.
In addition to the classes, entries for characters in a syntax table can specify flags. There are eight possible flags, represented by the characters ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’, ‘b’, ‘c’, ‘n’, and ‘p’.
All the flags except ‘p’ are used to describe comment delimiters. The digit flags are used for comment delimiters made up of 2 characters. They indicate that a character can also be part of a comment sequence, in addition to the syntactic properties associated with its character class. The flags are independent of the class and each other for the sake of characters such as ‘*’ in C mode, which is a punctuation character, and the second character of a start-of-comment sequence (‘/*’), and the first character of an end-of-comment sequence (‘*/’). The flags ‘b’, ‘c’, and ‘n’ are used to qualify the corresponding comment delimiter.
Here is a table of the possible flags for a character c, and what they mean:
Emacs supports several comment styles simultaneously in any one syntax table. A comment style is a set of flags ‘b’, ‘c’, and ‘n’, so there can be up to 8 different comment styles, each one named by the set of its flags. Each comment delimiter has a style and only matches comment delimiters of the same style. Thus if a comment starts with the comment-start sequence of style “bn”, it will extend until the next matching comment-end sequence of style “bn”. When the set of flags has neither flag ‘b’ nor flag ‘c’ set, the resulting style is called the “a” style.
The appropriate comment syntax settings for C++ can be as follows:
‘124’
‘23b’
‘>’
This defines four comment-delimiting sequences:
This is a comment-start sequence for “b” style because the second character, ‘*’, has the ‘b’ flag.
This is a comment-start sequence for “a” style because the second character, ‘/’, does not have the ‘b’ flag.
This is a comment-end sequence for “b” style because the first character, ‘*’, has the ‘b’ flag.
This is a comment-end sequence for “a” style, because the newline character does not have the ‘b’ flag.
The function backward-prefix-chars
moves back over these
characters, as well as over characters whose primary syntax class is
prefix (‘'’). See Motion and Syntax.
In this section we describe functions for creating, accessing and altering syntax tables.
This function creates a new syntax table. If table is
non-nil
, the parent of the new syntax table is table;
otherwise, the parent is the standard syntax table.
In the new syntax table, all characters are initially given the “inherit” (‘@’) syntax class, i.e., their syntax is inherited from the parent table (see Table of Syntax Classes).
This function constructs a copy of table and returns it. If
table is omitted or nil
, it returns a copy of the
standard syntax table. Otherwise, an error is signaled if table
is not a syntax table.
This function sets the syntax entry for char according to
syntax-descriptor. char must be a character, or a cons
cell of the form (min . max)
; in the latter case,
the function sets the syntax entries for all characters in the range
between min and max, inclusive.
The syntax is changed only for table, which defaults to the current buffer’s syntax table, and not in any other syntax table.
The argument syntax-descriptor is a syntax descriptor, i.e., a string whose first character is a syntax class designator and whose second and subsequent characters optionally specify a matching character and syntax flags. See Syntax Descriptors. An error is signaled if syntax-descriptor is not a valid syntax descriptor.
This function always returns nil
. The old syntax information in
the table for this character is discarded.
Examples:
;; Put the space character in class whitespace.
(modify-syntax-entry ?\s " ")
⇒ nil
;; Make ‘$’ an open parenthesis character, ;; with ‘^’ as its matching close. (modify-syntax-entry ?$ "(^") ⇒ nil
;; Make ‘^’ a close parenthesis character, ;; with ‘$’ as its matching open. (modify-syntax-entry ?^ ")$") ⇒ nil
;; Make ‘/’ a punctuation character, ;; the first character of a start-comment sequence, ;; and the second character of an end-comment sequence. ;; This is used in C mode. (modify-syntax-entry ?/ ". 14") ⇒ nil
This function returns the syntax class of character, represented by its designator character (see Table of Syntax Classes). This returns only the class, not its matching character or syntax flags.
The following examples apply to C mode. (We use string
to make
it easier to see the character returned by char-syntax
.)
;; Space characters have whitespace syntax class. (string (char-syntax ?\s)) ⇒ " "
;; Forward slash characters have punctuation syntax.
;; Note that this char-syntax
call does not reveal
;; that it is also part of comment-start and -end sequences.
(string (char-syntax ?/))
⇒ "."
;; Open parenthesis characters have open parenthesis syntax.
;; Note that this char-syntax
call does not reveal that
;; it has a matching character, ‘)’.
(string (char-syntax ?\())
⇒ "("
This function makes table the syntax table for the current buffer. It returns table.
This function returns the current syntax table, which is the table for the current buffer.
This command displays the contents of the syntax table of buffer (by default, the current buffer) in a help buffer.
This macro executes body using table as the current syntax table. It returns the value of the last form in body, after restoring the old current syntax table.
Since each buffer has its own current syntax table, we should make that
more precise: with-syntax-table
temporarily alters the current
syntax table of whichever buffer is current at the time the macro
execution starts. Other buffers are not affected.
When the syntax table is not flexible enough to specify the syntax of
a language, you can override the syntax table for specific character
occurrences in the buffer, by applying a syntax-table
text
property. See Text Properties, for how to apply text properties.
The valid values of syntax-table
text property are:
If the property value is a syntax table, that table is used instead of the current buffer’s syntax table to determine the syntax for the underlying text character.
(syntax-code . matching-char)
A cons cell of this format is a raw syntax descriptor (see Syntax Table Internals), which directly specifies a syntax class for the underlying text character.
nil
If the property is nil
, the character’s syntax is determined from
the current syntax table in the usual way.
If this is non-nil
, the syntax scanning functions, like
forward-sexp
, pay attention to syntax-table
text
properties. Otherwise they use only the current syntax table.
This variable, if non-nil
, should store a function for applying
syntax-table
properties to a specified stretch of text. It is
intended to be used by major modes to install a function which applies
syntax-table
properties in some mode-appropriate way.
The function is called by syntax-ppss
(see Finding the Parse State for a Position),
and by Font Lock mode during syntactic fontification (see Syntactic Font Lock). It is called with two arguments, start and
end, which are the starting and ending positions of the text on
which it should act. It is allowed to arbitrarily move point within
the region delimited by start and end; such motions don’t
need to use save-excursion
(see Excursions). It is also
allowed to call syntax-ppss
on any position before end,
but if a Lisp program calls syntax-ppss
on some position and
later modifies the buffer at some earlier position, then it is that
program’s responsibility to call syntax-ppss-flush-cache
to
flush the now obsolete info from the cache.
Caution: When this variable is non-nil
, Emacs removes
syntax-table
text properties arbitrarily and relies on
syntax-propertize-function
to reapply them. Thus if this
facility is used at all, the function must apply all
syntax-table
text properties used by the major mode. In
particular, Modes derived from a CC Mode mode must not use this
variable, since CC Mode uses other means to apply and remove these
text properties.
This abnormal hook is run by the syntax parsing code prior to calling
syntax-propertize-function
. Its role is to help locate safe
starting and ending buffer positions for passing to
syntax-propertize-function
. For example, a major mode can add
a function to this hook to identify multi-line syntactic constructs,
and ensure that the boundaries do not fall in the middle of one.
Each function in this hook should accept two arguments, start
and end. It should return either a cons cell of two adjusted
buffer positions, (new-start . new-end)
, or
nil
if no adjustment is necessary. The hook functions are run
in turn, repeatedly, until they all return nil
.
This section describes functions for moving across characters that have certain syntax classes.
This function moves point forward across characters having syntax classes mentioned in syntaxes (a string of syntax class characters). It stops when it encounters the end of the buffer, or position limit (if specified), or a character it is not supposed to skip.
If syntaxes starts with ‘^’, then the function skips characters whose syntax is not in syntaxes.
The return value is the distance traveled, which is a nonnegative integer.
This function moves point backward across characters whose syntax classes are mentioned in syntaxes. It stops when it encounters the beginning of the buffer, or position limit (if specified), or a character it is not supposed to skip.
If syntaxes starts with ‘^’, then the function skips characters whose syntax is not in syntaxes.
The return value indicates the distance traveled. It is an integer that is zero or less.
This function moves point backward over any number of characters with expression prefix syntax. This includes both characters in the expression prefix syntax class, and characters with the ‘p’ flag.
This section describes functions for parsing and scanning balanced expressions. We will refer to such expressions as sexps, following the terminology of Lisp, even though these functions can act on languages other than Lisp. Basically, a sexp is either a balanced parenthetical grouping, a string, or a symbol (i.e., a sequence of characters whose syntax is either word constituent or symbol constituent). However, characters in the expression prefix syntax class (see Table of Syntax Classes) are treated as part of the sexp if they appear next to it.
The syntax table controls the interpretation of characters, so these functions can be used for Lisp expressions when in Lisp mode and for C expressions when in C mode. See Moving over Balanced Expressions, for convenient higher-level functions for moving over balanced expressions.
A character’s syntax controls how it changes the state of the parser, rather than describing the state itself. For example, a string delimiter character toggles the parser state between in-string and in-code, but the syntax of characters does not directly say whether they are inside a string. For example (note that 15 is the syntax code for generic string delimiters),
(put-text-property 1 9 'syntax-table '(15 . nil))
does not tell Emacs that the first eight chars of the current buffer are a string, but rather that they are all string delimiters. As a result, Emacs treats them as four consecutive empty string constants.
This section describes simple point-motion functions that operate based on parsing expressions.
This function scans forward count balanced parenthetical groupings from position from. It returns the position where the scan stops. If count is negative, the scan moves backwards.
If depth is nonzero, treat the starting position as being depth parentheses deep. The scanner moves forward or backward through the buffer until the depth changes to zero count times. Hence, a positive value for depth has the effect of moving out depth levels of parenthesis from the starting position, while a negative depth has the effect of moving deeper by -depth levels of parenthesis.
Scanning ignores comments if parse-sexp-ignore-comments
is
non-nil
.
If the scan reaches the beginning or end of the accessible part of the
buffer before it has scanned over count parenthetical groupings,
the return value is nil
if the depth at that point is zero; if
the depth is non-zero, a scan-error
error is signaled.
This function scans forward count sexps from position from. It returns the position where the scan stops. If count is negative, the scan moves backwards.
Scanning ignores comments if parse-sexp-ignore-comments
is
non-nil
.
If the scan reaches the beginning or end of (the accessible part of) the
buffer while in the middle of a parenthetical grouping, an error is
signaled. If it reaches the beginning or end between groupings but
before count is used up, nil
is returned.
This function moves point forward across count complete comments
(that is, including the starting delimiter and the terminating
delimiter if any), plus any whitespace encountered on the way. It
moves backward if count is negative. If it encounters anything
other than a comment or whitespace, it stops, leaving point at the
place where it stopped. This includes (for instance) finding the end
of a comment when moving forward and expecting the beginning of one.
The function also stops immediately after moving over the specified
number of complete comments. If count comments are found as
expected, with nothing except whitespace between them, it returns
t
; otherwise it returns nil
.
This function cannot tell whether the comments it traverses are embedded within a string. If they look like comments, it treats them as comments.
To move forward over all comments and whitespace following point, use
(forward-comment (buffer-size))
. (buffer-size)
is a
good argument to use, because the number of comments in the buffer
cannot exceed that many.
For syntactic analysis, such as in indentation, often the useful thing is to compute the syntactic state corresponding to a given buffer position. This function does that conveniently.
This function returns the parser state that the parser would reach at position pos starting from the beginning of the visible portion of the buffer. See Parser State, for a description of the parser state.
The return value is the same as if you call the low-level parsing
function parse-partial-sexp
to parse from the beginning of the
visible portion of the buffer to pos (see Low-Level Parsing). However, syntax-ppss
uses caches to speed up the
computation. Due to this optimization, the second value (previous
complete subexpression) and sixth value (minimum parenthesis depth) in
the returned parser state are not meaningful.
This function has a side effect: it adds a buffer-local entry to
before-change-functions
(see Change Hooks) for
syntax-ppss-flush-cache
(see below). This entry keeps the
cache consistent as the buffer is modified. However, the cache might
not be updated if syntax-ppss
is called while
before-change-functions
is temporarily let-bound, or if the
buffer is modified without running the hook, such as when using
inhibit-modification-hooks
. In those cases, it is necessary to
call syntax-ppss-flush-cache
explicitly.
This function flushes the cache used by syntax-ppss
, starting
at position beg. The remaining arguments, ignored-args,
are ignored; this function accepts them so that it can be directly
used on hooks such as before-change-functions
(see Change Hooks).
A parser state is a list of (currently) eleven elements
describing the state of the syntactic parser, after it parses the text
between a specified starting point and a specified end point in the
buffer using parse-partial-sexp
(see Low-Level Parsing).
Parsing functions such as syntax-ppss
(see Finding the Parse State for a Position)
also return a parser state as the value. parse-partial-sexp
can accept a parser state as an argument, for resuming parsing.
Here are the meanings of the elements of the parser state:
nil
if none.
nil
if none.
nil
if inside a string. More precisely, this is the
character that will terminate the string, or t
if a generic
string delimiter character should terminate it.
t
if inside a non-nestable comment (of any comment style;
see Syntax Flags); or the comment nesting level if inside a
comment that can be nested.
t
if the end point is just after a quote character.
nil
if not in a comment or in a
comment of style ‘a’; 1 for a comment of style ‘b’; 2 for a
comment of style ‘c’; and syntax-table
for a comment that
should be ended by a generic comment delimiter character.
nil
.
nil
.
Elements 1, 2, and 6 are ignored in a state which you pass as an
argument to parse-partial-sexp
to continue parsing. Elements 9
and 10 are mainly used internally by the parser code.
Some additional useful information is available from a parser state using these functions:
This function extracts, from parser state state, the last position scanned in the parse which was at top level in grammatical structure. “At top level” means outside of any parentheses, comments, or strings.
The value is nil
if state represents a parse which has
arrived at a top level position.
Return string
if the end position of the scan returning
state is in a string, and comment
if it’s in a comment.
Otherwise return nil
.
The most basic way to use the expression parser is to tell it to start at a given position with a certain state, and parse up to a specified end position.
This function parses a sexp in the current buffer starting at start, not scanning past limit. It stops at position limit or when certain criteria described below are met, and sets point to the location where parsing stops. It returns a parser state describing the status of the parse at the point where it stops.
If the third argument target-depth is non-nil
, parsing
stops if the depth in parentheses becomes equal to target-depth.
The depth starts at 0, or at whatever is given in state.
If the fourth argument stop-before is non-nil
, parsing
stops when it comes to any character that starts a sexp. If
stop-comment is non-nil
, parsing stops after the start of
an unnested comment. If stop-comment is the symbol
syntax-table
, parsing stops after the start of an unnested
comment or a string, or after the end of an unnested comment or a
string, whichever comes first.
If state is nil
, start is assumed to be at the top
level of parenthesis structure, such as the beginning of a function
definition. Alternatively, you might wish to resume parsing in the
middle of the structure. To do this, you must provide a state
argument that describes the initial status of parsing. The value
returned by a previous call to parse-partial-sexp
will do
nicely.
If this variable is non-nil
, scan-sexps
treats all
non-ASCII characters as symbol constituents regardless of
what the syntax table says about them. (However, syntax-table
text properties can still override the syntax.)
If the value is non-nil
, then comments are treated as
whitespace by the functions in this section and by forward-sexp
,
scan-lists
and scan-sexps
.
The behavior of parse-partial-sexp
is also affected by
parse-sexp-lookup-properties
(see Syntax Properties).
If this buffer local variable is non-nil
, a single character
which usually terminates a comment doesn’t do so when that character
is escaped. This is used in C and C++ Modes, where line comments
starting with ‘//’ can be continued onto the next line by
escaping the newline with ‘\’.
You can use forward-comment
to move forward or backward over
one comment or several comments.
Syntax tables are implemented as char-tables (see Char-Tables), but most Lisp programs don’t work directly with their elements. Syntax tables do not store syntax data as syntax descriptors (see Syntax Descriptors); they use an internal format, which is documented in this section. This internal format can also be assigned as syntax properties (see Syntax Properties).
Each entry in a syntax table is a raw syntax descriptor: a
cons cell of the form (syntax-code
. matching-char)
. syntax-code is an integer which
encodes the syntax class and syntax flags, according to the table
below. matching-char, if non-nil
, specifies a matching
character (similar to the second character in a syntax descriptor).
Use aref
(see Functions that Operate on Arrays) to get the raw syntax
descriptor of a character, e.g. (aref (syntax-table) ch)
.
Here are the syntax codes corresponding to the various syntax classes:
Code | Class | Code | Class |
0 | whitespace | 8 | paired delimiter |
1 | punctuation | 9 | escape |
2 | word | 10 | character quote |
3 | symbol | 11 | comment-start |
4 | open parenthesis | 12 | comment-end |
5 | close parenthesis | 13 | inherit |
6 | expression prefix | 14 | generic comment |
7 | string quote | 15 | generic string |
For example, in the standard syntax table, the entry for ‘(’ is
(4 . 41)
. 41 is the character code for ‘)’.
Syntax flags are encoded in higher order bits, starting 16 bits from the least significant bit. This table gives the power of two which corresponds to each syntax flag.
Prefix | Flag | Prefix | Flag |
‘1’ | (ash 1 16) | ‘p’ | (ash 1 20) |
‘2’ | (ash 1 17) | ‘b’ | (ash 1 21) |
‘3’ | (ash 1 18) | ‘n’ | (ash 1 22) |
‘4’ | (ash 1 19) | ‘c’ | (ash 1 23) |
Given a syntax descriptor desc (a string), this function returns the corresponding raw syntax descriptor.
Given a raw syntax descriptor syntax (an integer), this function returns the corresponding syntax descriptor (a character).
This function returns the raw syntax descriptor for the character in
the buffer after position pos, taking account of syntax
properties as well as the syntax table. If pos is outside the
buffer’s accessible portion (see accessible portion),
the return value is nil
.
This function returns the syntax code for the raw syntax descriptor syntax. More precisely, it takes the raw syntax descriptor’s syntax-code component, masks off the high 16 bits which record the syntax flags, and returns the resulting integer.
If syntax is nil
, the return value is nil
. This
is so that the expression
(syntax-class (syntax-after pos))
evaluates to nil
if pos
is outside the buffer’s
accessible portion, without throwing errors or returning an incorrect
code.
Categories provide an alternate way of classifying characters syntactically. You can define several categories as needed, then independently assign each character to one or more categories. Unlike syntax classes, categories are not mutually exclusive; it is normal for one character to belong to several categories.
Each buffer has a category table which records which categories are defined and also which characters belong to each category. Each category table defines its own categories, but normally these are initialized by copying from the standard categories table, so that the standard categories are available in all modes.
Each category has a name, which is an ASCII printing character in
the range ‘ ’ to ‘~’. You specify the name of a category
when you define it with define-category
.
The category table is actually a char-table (see Char-Tables).
The element of the category table at index c is a category
set—a bool-vector—that indicates which categories character c
belongs to. In this category set, if the element at index cat is
t
, that means category cat is a member of the set, and that
character c belongs to category cat.
For the next three functions, the optional argument table defaults to the current buffer’s category table.
This function defines a new category, with name char and documentation docstring, for the category table table.
Here’s an example of defining a new category for characters that have strong right-to-left directionality (see Bidirectional Display) and using it in a special category table. To obtain the information about the directionality of characters, the example code uses the ‘bidi-class’ Unicode property (see bidi-class).
(defvar special-category-table-for-bidi ;; Make an empty category-table. (let ((category-table (make-category-table)) ;; Create a char-table which gives the 'bidi-class' Unicode ;; property for each character. (uniprop-table (unicode-property-table-internal 'bidi-class))) (define-category ?R "Characters of bidi-class R, AL, or RLO" category-table) ;; Modify the category entry of each character whose ;; 'bidi-class' Unicode property is R, AL, or RLO -- ;; these have a right-to-left directionality. (map-char-table (lambda (key val) (if (memq val '(R AL RLO)) (modify-category-entry key ?R category-table))) uniprop-table) category-table))
This function returns the documentation string of category category in category table table.
(category-docstring ?a) ⇒ "ASCII" (category-docstring ?l) ⇒ "Latin"
This function returns a category name (a character) which is not
currently defined in table. If all possible categories are in use
in table, it returns nil
.
This function returns the current buffer’s category table.
This function returns t
if object is a category table,
otherwise nil
.
This function returns the standard category table.
This function constructs a copy of table and returns it. If
table is not supplied (or is nil
), it returns a copy of the
standard category table. Otherwise, an error is signaled if table
is not a category table.
This function makes table the category table for the current buffer. It returns table.
This creates and returns an empty category table. In an empty category table, no categories have been allocated, and no characters belong to any categories.
This function returns a new category set—a bool-vector—whose initial
contents are the categories listed in the string categories. The
elements of categories should be category names; the new category
set has t
for each of those categories, and nil
for all
other categories.
(make-category-set "al") ⇒ #&128"\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\2\20\0\0"
This function returns the category set for character char in the
current buffer’s category table. This is the bool-vector which
records which categories the character char belongs to. The
function char-category-set
does not allocate storage, because
it returns the same bool-vector that exists in the category table.
(char-category-set ?a) ⇒ #&128"\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\2\20\0\0"
This function converts the category set category-set into a string containing the characters that designate the categories that are members of the set.
(category-set-mnemonics (char-category-set ?a)) ⇒ "al"
This function modifies the category set of char in category
table table (which defaults to the current buffer’s category
table). char can be a character, or a cons cell of the form
(min . max)
; in the latter case, the function
modifies the category sets of all characters in the range between
min and max, inclusive.
Normally, it modifies a category set by adding category to it.
But if reset is non-nil
, then it deletes category
instead.
This function describes the category specifications in the current
category table. It inserts the descriptions in a buffer, and then
displays that buffer. If buffer-or-name is non-nil
, it
describes the category table of that buffer instead.
Emacs provides various ways to parse program source text and produce a syntax tree. In a syntax tree, text is no longer considered a one-dimensional stream of characters, but a structured tree of nodes, where each node represents a piece of text. Thus, a syntax tree can enable interesting features like precise fontification, indentation, navigation, structured editing, etc.
Emacs has a simple facility for parsing balanced expressions (see Parsing Expressions). There is also the SMIE library for generic navigation and indentation (see Simple Minded Indentation Engine).
In addition to those, Emacs also provides integration with the tree-sitter library if support for it was compiled in. The tree-sitter library implements an incremental parser and has support for a wide range of programming languages.
This function returns non-nil
if tree-sitter features are
available for the current Emacs session.
To be able to parse the program source using the tree-sitter library and access the syntax tree of the program, a Lisp program needs to load a language grammar library, and create a parser for that language and the current buffer. After that, the Lisp program can query the parser about specific nodes of the syntax tree. Then, it can access various kinds of information about each node, and search for nodes using a powerful pattern-matching syntax. This chapter explains how to do all this, and also how a Lisp program can work with source files that mix multiple programming languages.
Tree-sitter relies on language grammar to parse text in that
language. In Emacs, a language grammar is represented by a symbol.
For example, the C language grammar is represented as the symbol
c
, and c
can be passed to tree-sitter functions as the
language argument.
Tree-sitter language grammars are distributed as dynamic libraries. In order to use a language grammar in Emacs, you need to make sure that the dynamic library is installed on the system. Emacs looks for language grammars in several places, in the following order:
treesit-extra-load-path
;
user-emacs-directory
(see The Init File);
In each of these directories, Emacs looks for a file with file-name
extensions specified by the variable dynamic-library-suffixes
.
If Emacs cannot find the library or has problems loading it, Emacs
signals the treesit-load-language-error
error. The data of
that signal could be one of the following:
(not-found error-msg …)
This means that Emacs could not find the language grammar library.
(symbol-error error-msg)
This means that Emacs could not find in the library the expected function that every language grammar library should export.
(version-mismatch error-msg)
This means that the version of the language grammar library is incompatible with that of the tree-sitter library.
In all of these cases, error-msg might provide additional details about the failure.
This function returns non-nil
if the language grammar for
language exists and can be loaded.
If detail is non-nil
, return (t . nil)
when
language is available, and (nil . data)
when it’s
unavailable. data is the signal data of
treesit-load-language-error
.
By convention, the file name of the dynamic library for language is
libtree-sitter-language.ext, where ext is the
system-specific extension for dynamic libraries. Also by convention,
the function provided by that library is named
tree_sitter_language
. If a language grammar library
doesn’t follow this convention, you should add an entry
(language library-base-name function-name)
to the list in the variable treesit-load-name-override-list
, where
library-base-name is the basename of the dynamic library’s file name
(usually, libtree-sitter-language), and
function-name is the function provided by the library
(usually, tree_sitter_language
). For example,
(cool-lang "libtree-sitter-coool" "tree_sitter_cooool")
for a language that considers itself too “cool” to abide by conventions.
This function returns the version of the language grammar
Application Binary Interface (ABI) supported by the
tree-sitter library. By default, it returns the latest ABI version
supported by the library, but if min-compatible is
non-nil
, it returns the oldest ABI version which the library
still can support. Language grammar libraries must be built for
ABI versions between the oldest and the latest versions supported by
the tree-sitter library, otherwise the library will be unable to load
them.
This function returns the ABI version of the language
grammar library loaded by Emacs for language. If language
is unavailable, this function returns nil
.
A syntax tree is what a parser generates. In a syntax tree, each node represents a piece of text, and is connected to each other by a parent-child relationship. For example, if the source text is
1 + 2
its syntax tree could be
+--------------+ | root "1 + 2" | +--------------+ | +--------------------------------+ | expression "1 + 2" | +--------------------------------+ | | | +------------+ +--------------+ +------------+ | number "1" | | operator "+" | | number "2" | +------------+ +--------------+ +------------+
We can also represent it as an s-expression:
(root (expression (number) (operator) (number)))
Names like root
, expression
, number
, and
operator
specify the type of the nodes. However, not all
nodes in a syntax tree have a type. Nodes that don’t have a type are
known as anonymous nodes, and nodes with a type are named
nodes. Anonymous nodes are tokens with fixed spellings, including
punctuation characters like bracket ‘]’, and keywords like
return
.
To make the syntax tree easier to analyze, many language grammar
assign field names to child nodes. For example, a
function_definition
node could have a declarator
and a
body
:
(function_definition declarator: (declaration) body: (compound_statement))
To aid in understanding the syntax of a language and in debugging Lisp programs that use the syntax tree, Emacs provides an “explore” mode, which displays the syntax tree of the source in the current buffer in real time. Emacs also comes with an “inspect mode”, which displays information of the nodes at point in the mode-line.
This mode pops up a window displaying the syntax tree of the source in the current buffer. Selecting text in the source buffer highlights the corresponding nodes in the syntax tree display. Clicking on nodes in the syntax tree highlights the corresponding text in the source buffer.
This minor mode displays on the mode-line the node that starts at point. For example, the mode-line can display
parent field: (node (child (...)))
where node, child, etc., are nodes which begin at point. parent is the parent of node. node is displayed in a bold typeface. field-names are field names of node and of child, etc.
If no node starts at point, i.e., point is in the middle of a node, then the mode line displays the earliest node that spans point, and its immediate parent.
This minor mode doesn’t create parsers on its own. It uses the first
parser in (treesit-parser-list)
(see Using Tree-sitter Parser).
Authors of language grammars define the grammar of a programming language, which determines how a parser constructs a concrete syntax tree out of the program text. In order to use the syntax tree effectively, you need to consult the grammar file.
The grammar file is usually grammar.js in a language grammar’s project repository. The link to a language grammar’s home page can be found on tree-sitter’s homepage.
The grammar definition is written in JavaScript. For example, the
rule matching a function_definition
node may look like
function_definition: $ => seq( $.declaration_specifiers, field('declarator', $.declaration), field('body', $.compound_statement) )
The rules are represented by functions that take a single argument
$, representing the whole grammar. The function itself is
constructed by other functions: the seq
function puts together
a sequence of children; the field
function annotates a child
with a field name. If we write the above definition in the so-called
Backus-Naur Form (BNF) syntax, it would look like
function_definition := <declaration_specifiers> <declaration> <compound_statement>
and the node returned by the parser would look like
(function_definition (declaration_specifier) declarator: (declaration) body: (compound_statement))
Below is a list of functions that one can see in a grammar definition. Each function takes other rules as arguments and returns a new rule.
seq(rule1, rule2, …)
matches each rule one after another.
choice(rule1, rule2, …)
matches one of the rules in its arguments.
repeat(rule)
matches rule zero or more times. This is like the ‘*’ operator in regular expressions.
repeat1(rule)
matches rule one or more times. This is like the ‘+’ operator in regular expressions.
optional(rule)
matches rule zero or one times. This is like the ‘?’ operator in regular expressions.
field(name, rule)
assigns field name name to the child node matched by rule.
alias(rule, alias)
makes nodes matched by rule appear as alias in the syntax tree generated by the parser. For example,
alias(preprocessor_call_exp, call_expression)
makes any node matched by preprocessor_call_exp
appear as
call_expression
.
Below are grammar functions of lesser importance for reading a language grammar.
token(rule)
marks rule to produce a single leaf node. That is, instead of generating a parent node with individual child nodes under it, everything is combined into a single leaf node. See Retrieving Nodes.
token.immediate(rule)
Normally, grammar rules ignore preceding whitespace; this changes rule to match only when there is no preceding whitespace.
prec(n, rule)
gives rule the level-n precedence.
prec.left([n,] rule)
marks rule as left-associative, optionally with level n.
prec.right([n,] rule)
marks rule as right-associative, optionally with level n.
prec.dynamic(n, rule)
this is like prec
, but the precedence is applied at runtime
instead.
The documentation of the tree-sitter project has more about writing a grammar. Read especially “The Grammar DSL” section.
This section describes how to create and configure a tree-sitter parser. In Emacs, each tree-sitter parser is associated with a buffer. As the user edits the buffer, the associated parser and syntax tree are automatically kept up-to-date.
This variable contains the maximum size of buffers in which tree-sitter can be activated. Major modes should check this value when deciding whether to enable tree-sitter features.
Create a parser for the specified buffer and language
(see Tree-sitter Language Grammar). If buffer is omitted or
nil
, it stands for the current buffer.
By default, this function reuses a parser if one already exists for
language in buffer, but if no-reuse is
non-nil
, this function always creates a new parser.
If that buffer is an indirect buffer, its base buffer is used instead. That is, indirect buffers use their base buffer’s parsers. If the base buffer is narrowed, an indirect buffer might not be able to retrieve information of the portion of the buffer text that is invisible in the base buffer. Lisp programs should widen as necessary should they want to use a parser in an indirect buffer.
Given a parser, we can query information about it.
This function returns the buffer associated with parser.
This function returns the language used by parser.
This function checks if object is a tree-sitter parser, and
returns non-nil
if it is, and nil
otherwise.
There is no need to explicitly parse a buffer, because parsing is done automatically and lazily. A parser only parses when a Lisp program queries for a node in its syntax tree. Therefore, when a parser is first created, it doesn’t parse the buffer; it waits until the Lisp program queries for a node for the first time. Similarly, when some change is made in the buffer, a parser doesn’t re-parse immediately.
When a parser does parse, it checks for the size of the buffer.
Tree-sitter can only handle buffers no larger than about 4GB. If the
size exceeds that, Emacs signals the treesit-buffer-too-large
error with signal data being the buffer size.
Once a parser is created, Emacs automatically adds it to the internal parser list. Every time a change is made to the buffer, Emacs updates parsers in this list so they can update their syntax tree incrementally.
This function returns the parser list of buffer. If
buffer is nil
or omitted, it defaults to the current
buffer. If that buffer is an indirect buffer, its base buffer is used
instead. That is, indirect buffers use their base buffer’s parsers.
This function deletes parser.
Normally, a parser “sees” the whole buffer, but when the buffer is narrowed (see Narrowing), the parser will only see the accessible portion of the buffer. As far as the parser can tell, the hidden region was deleted. When the buffer is later widened, the parser thinks text is inserted at the beginning and at the end. Although parsers respect narrowing, modes should not use narrowing as a means to handle a multi-language buffer; instead, set the ranges in which the parser should operate. See Parsing Text in Multiple Languages.
Because a parser parses lazily, when the user or a Lisp program narrows the buffer, the parser is not affected immediately; as long as the mode doesn’t query for a node while the buffer is narrowed, the parser is oblivious of the narrowing.
Besides creating a parser for a buffer, a Lisp program can also parse a string. Unlike a buffer, parsing a string is a one-off operation, and there is no way to update the result.
This function parses string using language, and returns the root node of the generated syntax tree.
A Lisp program might want to be notified of text affected by incremental parsing. For example, inserting a comment-closing token converts text before that token into a comment. Even though the text is not directly edited, it is deemed to be “changed” nevertheless.
Emacs lets a Lisp program register callback functions (a.k.a.
notifiers) for these kinds of changes. A notifier function
takes two arguments: ranges and parser. ranges is a
list of cons cells of the form (start . end)
,
where start and end mark the start and the end positions
of a range. parser is the parser issuing the notification.
Every time a parser reparses a buffer, it compares the old and new parse-tree, computes the ranges in which nodes have changed, and passes the ranges to notifier functions. Note that the initial parse is also considered a “change”, so notifier functions are called on the initial parse, with range being the whole buffer.
This function adds function to parser’s list of after-change notifier functions. function must be a function symbol, not a lambda function (see Anonymous Functions).
This function removes function from the list of parser’s after-change notifier functions. function must be a function symbol, rather than a lambda function.
This function returns the list of parser’s notifier functions.
Here are some terms and conventions we use when documenting tree-sitter functions.
A node in a syntax tree spans some portion of the program text in the buffer. We say that a node is “smaller” or “larger” than another if it spans, respectively, a smaller or larger portion of buffer text than the other node. Since nodes that are deeper (“lower”) in the tree are children of the nodes that are “higher” in the tree, it follows that a lower node will always be smaller than a node that is higher in the node hierarchy. A node that is higher up in the syntax tree contains one or more smaller nodes as its children, and therefore spans a larger portion of buffer text.
When a function cannot find a node, it returns nil
. For
convenience, all functions that take a node as argument and return
a node, also accept the node argument of nil
and in that case
just return nil
.
Nodes are not automatically updated when the associated buffer is
modified, and there is no way to update a node once it is retrieved.
Using an outdated node signals the treesit-node-outdated
error.
This function returns a leaf node at buffer position pos. A leaf node is a node that doesn’t have any child nodes.
This function tries to return a node whose span covers pos: the node’s beginning position is less than or equal to pos, and the node’s end position is greater than or equal to pos.
If no leaf node’s span covers pos (e.g., pos is in the whitespace between two leaf nodes), this function returns the first leaf node after pos.
Finally, if there is no leaf node after pos, return the first leaf node before pos.
If parser-or-lang is a parser object, this function uses that
parser; if parser-or-lang is a language, this function uses the
first parser for that language in the current buffer, or creates one
if none exists; if parser-or-lang is nil
, this function
tries to guess the language at pos by calling
treesit-language-at
(see Parsing Text in Multiple Languages).
If this function cannot find a suitable node to return, it returns
nil
.
If named is non-nil
, this function looks only for named
nodes (see named node).
Example:
;; Find the node at point in a C parser's syntax tree. (treesit-node-at (point) 'c) ⇒ #<treesit-node (primitive_type) in 23-27>
This function returns the smallest node that covers the region of buffer text between beg and end. In other words, the start of the node is before or at beg, and the end of the node is at or after end.
Beware: calling this function on an empty line that is not
inside any top-level construct (function definition, etc.) most
probably will give you the root node, because the root node is the
smallest node that covers that empty line. Most of the time, you want
to use treesit-node-at
instead.
If parser-or-lang is a parser object, this function uses that
parser; if parser-or-lang is a language, this function uses the
first parser for that language in the current buffer, or creates one
if none exists; if parser-or-lang is nil
, this function
tries to guess the language at beg by calling
treesit-language-at
.
If named is non-nil
, this function looks for a named node
only (see named node).
This function returns the root node of the syntax tree generated by parser.
This function finds the first parser for language in the current
buffer, or creates one if none exists, and returns the root node
generated by that parser. If language is omitted, it uses the
first parser in the parser list. If it cannot find an appropriate
parser, it returns nil
.
Given a node, a Lisp program can retrieve other nodes starting from it, or query for information about this node.
This function returns the immediate parent of node.
If node is more than 1000 levels deep in a parse tree, the
return value is undefined. Currently it returns nil
, but that
could change in the future.
This function returns the n’th child of node. If
named is non-nil
, it counts only named nodes
(see named node).
For example, in a node that represents a string "text"
, there
are three children nodes: the opening quote "
, the string text
text
, and the closing quote "
. Among these nodes, the
first child is the opening quote "
, and the first named child
is the string text.
This function returns nil
if there is no n’th child.
n could be negative, e.g., −1 represents the last child.
This function returns all of node’s children as a list. If
named is non-nil
, it retrieves only named nodes.
This function finds the next sibling of node. If named is
non-nil
, it finds the next named sibling.
This function finds the previous sibling of node. If
named is non-nil
, it finds the previous named sibling.
To make the syntax tree easier to analyze, many language grammars
assign field names to child nodes (see field name). For example, a function_definition
node
could have a declarator
node and a body
node.
This function finds the child of node whose field name is field-name, a string.
;; Get the child that has "body" as its field name. (treesit-node-child-by-field-name node "body") ⇒ #<treesit-node (compound_statement) in 45-89>
This function finds the first child of node that extends beyond
buffer position pos. “Extends beyond” means the end of the
child node is greater or equal to pos. This function only looks
for immediate children of node, and doesn’t look in its
grandchildren. If named is non-nil
, it looks for the
first named child (see named node).
This function finds the smallest descendant node of node
that spans the region of text between positions beg and
end. It is similar to treesit-node-at
. If named
is non-nil
, it looks for the smallest named child.
This function traverses the subtree of node (including
node itself), looking for a node for which predicate
returns non-nil
. predicate is a regexp that is matched
against each node’s type, or a predicate function that takes a node
and returns non-nil
if the node matches. The function returns
the first node that matches, or nil
if none does.
By default, this function only traverses named nodes, but if all
is non-nil
, it traverses all the nodes. If backward is
non-nil
, it traverses backwards (i.e., it visits the last child
first when traversing down the tree). If depth is
non-nil
, it must be a number that limits the tree traversal to
that many levels down the tree. If depth is nil
, it
defaults to 1000.
Like treesit-search-subtree
, this function also traverses the
parse tree and matches each node with predicate (except for
start), where predicate can be a regexp or a function.
For a tree like the one below where start is marked ‘S’,
this function traverses as numbered from 1 to 12:
12 | S--------3----------11 | | | o--o-+--o 1--+--2 6--+-----10 | | | | o o +-+-+ +--+--+ | | | | | 4 5 7 8 9
Note that this function doesn’t traverse the subtree of start, and it always traverses leaf nodes first, before moving upwards.
Like treesit-search-subtree
, this function only searches for
named nodes by default, but if all is non-nil
, it
searches for all nodes. If backward is non-nil
, it
searches backwards.
While treesit-search-subtree
traverses the subtree of a node,
this function starts with node start and traverses every node
that comes after it in the buffer position order, i.e., nodes with
start positions greater than the end position of start.
In the tree shown above, treesit-search-subtree
traverses node
‘S’ (start) and nodes marked with o
, whereas this
function traverses the nodes marked with numbers. This function is
useful for answering questions like “what is the first node after
start in the buffer that satisfies some condition?”
This function moves point to the start or end of the next node after
node in the buffer that matches predicate. If start
is non-nil
, stop at the beginning rather than the end of a node.
This function guarantees that the matched node it returns makes progress in terms of buffer position: the start/end position of the returned node is always greater than that of node.
Arguments predicate, backward, and all are the same
as in treesit-search-forward
.
This function creates a sparse tree from root’s subtree.
It takes the subtree under root, and combs it so only the nodes
that match predicate are left. Like previous functions, the
predicate can be a regexp string that matches against each
node’s type, or a function that takes a node and returns
non-nil
if it matches.
For example, given the subtree on the left that consists of both numbers and letters, if predicate is “letter only”, the returned tree is the one on the right.
a a a | | | +---+---+ +---+---+ +---+---+ | | | | | | | | | b 1 2 b | | b c d | | => | | => | c +--+ c + e | | | | | +--+ d 4 +--+ d | | | e 5 e
If process-fn is non-nil
, instead of returning the
matched nodes, this function passes each node to process-fn and
uses the returned value instead. If non-nil
, depth
limits the number of levels to go down from root. If
depth is nil
, it defaults to 1000.
Each node in the returned tree looks like
(tree-sitter-node . (child …))
. The
tree-sitter-node of the root of this tree will be nil
if
root doesn’t match predicate. If no node matches
predicate, the function returns nil
.
This function finds immediate children of node that satisfy predicate.
The predicate function takes a node as argument and should
return non-nil
to indicate that the node should be kept. If
named is non-nil
, this function only examines named
nodes.
This function repeatedly finds the parents of node, and returns
the parent that satisfies predicate, a function that takes a node as
argument and returns a boolean that indicates a match. If no parent
satisfies predicate, this function returns nil
.
Normally this function only looks at the parents of node but not
node itself. But if include-node is non-nil
, this
function returns node if node satisfies predicate.
This function goes up the tree starting from node, and keeps doing so as long as the nodes satisfy predicate, a function that takes a node as argument. That is, this function returns the highest parent of node that still satisfies predicate. Note that if node satisfies predicate but its immediate parent doesn’t, node itself is returned.
This function returns the highest parent of node that has the
same type as node. If no such parent exists, it returns
nil
. Therefore this function is also useful for testing
whether node is top-level.
If predicate is nil
, this function uses node’s type
to find the parent. If predicate is non-nil
, this
function searches the parent that satisfies predicate. If
include-node is non-nil
, this function returns node
if node satisfies predicate.
Every node is associated with a parser, and that parser is associated with a buffer. The following functions retrieve them.
This function returns node’s associated parser.
This function returns node’s parser’s associated buffer.
This function returns node’s parser’s associated language.
Each node represents a portion of text in the buffer. Functions below find relevant information about that text.
Return the start position of node.
Return the end position of node.
Return the buffer text that node represents, as a string. (If node is retrieved from parsing a string, it will be the text from that string.)
Here are some predicates on tree-sitter nodes:
Checks if object is a tree-sitter syntax node.
Checks if node1 and node2 refer to the same node in a
tree-sitter syntax tree. This function uses the same equivalence
metric as equal
. You can also compare nodes using equal
(see Equality Predicates).
In general, nodes in a concrete syntax tree fall into two categories: named nodes and anonymous nodes. Whether a node is named or anonymous is determined by the language grammar (see named node).
Apart from being named or anonymous, a node can have other properties. A node can be “missing”: such nodes are inserted by the parser in order to recover from certain kinds of syntax errors, i.e., something should probably be there according to the grammar, but is not there. This can happen during editing of the program source, when the source is not yet in its final form.
A node can be “extra”: such nodes represent things like comments, which can appear anywhere in the text.
A node can be “outdated”, if its parser has reparsed at least once after the node was created.
A node “has error” if the text it spans contains a syntax error. It can be that the node itself has an error, or one of its descendants has an error.
A node is considered live if its parser is not deleted, and the buffer to which it belongs is a live buffer (see Killing Buffers).
This function returns non-nil
if node has the specified
property. property can be named
, missing
,
extra
, outdated
, has-error
, or live
.
Named nodes have “types” (see node type).
For example, a named node can be a string_literal
node, where
string_literal
is its type. The type of an anonymous node is
just the text that the node represents; e.g., the type of a ‘,’
node is just ‘,’.
This function returns node’s type as a string.
This function returns the index of node as a child node of its
parent. If named is non-nil
, it only counts named nodes
(see named node).
A child of a parent node could have a field name (see field name). This function returns the field name of node as a child of its parent.
This function returns the field name of the n’th child of
node. It returns nil
if there is no n’th child, or
the n’th child doesn’t have a field name.
Note that n counts both named and anonymous children, and n can be negative, e.g., −1 represents the last child.
This function returns the number of children of node. If
named is non-nil
, it only counts named children
(see named node).
Tree-sitter lets Lisp programs match patterns using a small declarative language. This pattern matching consists of two steps: first tree-sitter matches a pattern against nodes in the syntax tree, then it captures specific nodes that matched the pattern and returns the captured nodes.
We describe first how to write the most basic query pattern and how to capture nodes in a pattern, then the pattern-matching function, and finally the more advanced pattern syntax.
A query consists of multiple patterns. Each pattern is an
s-expression that matches a certain node in the syntax node. A
pattern has the form (type (child…))
.
For example, a pattern that matches a binary_expression
node that
contains number_literal
child nodes would look like
(binary_expression (number_literal))
To capture a node using the query pattern above, append
@capture-name
after the node pattern you want to
capture. For example,
(binary_expression (number_literal) @number-in-exp)
captures number_literal
nodes that are inside a
binary_expression
node with the capture name
number-in-exp
.
We can capture the binary_expression
node as well, with, for
example, the capture name biexp
:
(binary_expression (number_literal) @number-in-exp) @biexp
Now we can introduce the query functions.
This function matches patterns in query within node. The argument query can be either an s-expression, a string, or a compiled query object. For now, we focus on the s-expression syntax; string syntax and compiled queries are described at the end of the section.
The argument node can also be a parser or a language symbol. A parser means use its root node, a language symbol means find or create a parser for that language in the current buffer, and use the root node.
The function returns all the captured nodes in an alist with elements
of the form (capture_name . node)
. If
node-only is non-nil
, it returns the list of nodes
instead. By default the entire text of node is searched, but if
beg and end are both non-nil
, they specify the
region of buffer text where this function should match nodes. Any
matching node whose span overlaps with the region between beg
and end is captured; it doesn’t have to be completely contained
in the region.
This function raises the treesit-query-error
error if
query is malformed. The signal data contains a description of
the specific error. You can use treesit-query-validate
to
validate and debug the query.
For example, suppose node’s text is 1 + 2
, and
query is
(setq query '((binary_expression (number_literal) @number-in-exp) @biexp)
Matching that query would return
(treesit-query-capture node query) ⇒ ((biexp . <node for "1 + 2">) (number-in-exp . <node for "1">) (number-in-exp . <node for "2">))
As mentioned earlier, query could contain multiple patterns. For example, it could have two top-level patterns:
(setq query '((binary_expression) @biexp (number_literal) @number @biexp)
This function parses string as language, matches its root node with query, and returns the result.
Besides node type and capture name, tree-sitter’s pattern syntax can express anonymous node, field name, wildcard, quantification, grouping, alternation, anchor, and predicate.
An anonymous node is written verbatim, surrounded by quotes. A
pattern matching (and capturing) keyword return
would be
"return" @keyword
In a pattern, ‘(_)’ matches any named node, and ‘_’ matches
any named or anonymous node. For example, to capture any named child
of a binary_expression
node, the pattern would be
(binary_expression (_) @in-biexp)
It is possible to capture child nodes that have specific field names.
In the pattern below, declarator
and body
are field
names, indicated by the colon following them.
(function_definition declarator: (_) @func-declarator body: (_) @func-body)
It is also possible to capture a node that doesn’t have a certain
field, say, a function_definition
without a body
field:
(function_definition !body) @func-no-body
Tree-sitter recognizes quantification operators ‘:*’, ‘:+’, and ‘:?’. Their meanings are the same as in regular expressions: ‘:*’ matches the preceding pattern zero or more times, ‘:+’ matches one or more times, and ‘:?’ matches zero or one times.
For example, the following pattern matches type_declaration
nodes that have zero or more long
keywords.
(type_declaration "long" :*) @long-type
The following pattern matches a type declaration that may or may not
have a long
keyword:
(type_declaration "long" :?) @long-type
Similar to groups in regular expressions, we can bundle patterns into groups and apply quantification operators to them. For example, to express a comma-separated list of identifiers, one could write
(identifier) ("," (identifier)) :*
Again, similar to regular expressions, we can express “match any one of these patterns” in a pattern. The syntax is a vector of patterns. For example, to capture some keywords in C, the pattern would be
[ "return" "break" "if" "else" ] @keyword
The anchor operator :anchor
can be used to enforce juxtaposition,
i.e., to enforce two things to be directly next to each other. The
two “things” can be two nodes, or a child and the end of its parent.
For example, to capture the first child, the last child, or two
adjacent children:
;; Anchor the child with the end of its parent. (compound_expression (_) @last-child :anchor)
;; Anchor the child with the beginning of its parent. (compound_expression :anchor (_) @first-child)
;; Anchor two adjacent children. (compound_expression (_) @prev-child :anchor (_) @next-child)
Note that the enforcement of juxtaposition ignores any anonymous nodes.
It is possible to add predicate constraints to a pattern. For example, with the following pattern:
( (array :anchor (_) @first (_) @last :anchor) (:equal @first @last) )
tree-sitter only matches arrays where the first element is equal to
the last element. To attach a predicate to a pattern, we need to
group them together. Currently there are three predicates:
:equal
, :match
, and :pred
.
Matches if arg1 is equal to arg2. Arguments can be either strings or capture names. Capture names represent the text that the captured node spans in the buffer.
Matches if the text that capture-name’s node spans in the buffer matches regular expression regexp, given as a string literal. Matching is case-sensitive.
Matches if function fn returns non-nil
when passed each
node in nodes as arguments.
Note that a predicate can only refer to capture names that appear in the same pattern. Indeed, it makes little sense to refer to capture names in other patterns.
Besides s-expressions, Emacs allows the tree-sitter’s native query syntax to be used by writing them as strings. It largely resembles the s-expression syntax. For example, the following query
(treesit-query-capture node '((addition_expression left: (_) @left "+" @plus-sign right: (_) @right) @addition ["return" "break"] @keyword))
is equivalent to
(treesit-query-capture node "(addition_expression left: (_) @left \"+\" @plus-sign right: (_) @right) @addition [\"return\" \"break\"] @keyword")
Most patterns can be written directly as s-expressions inside a string. Only a few of them need modification:
:anchor
is written as ‘.’.
:equal
, :match
and :pred
are written as
#equal
, #match
and #pred
, respectively.
In general, predicates change their ‘:’ to ‘#’.
For example,
'(( (compound_expression :anchor (_) @first (_) :* @rest) (:match "love" @first) ))
is written in string form as
"( (compound_expression . (_) @first (_)* @rest) (#match \"love\" @first) )"
If a query is intended to be used repeatedly, especially in tight loops, it is important to compile that query, because a compiled query is much faster than an uncompiled one. A compiled query can be used anywhere a query is accepted.
This function compiles query for language into a compiled query object and returns it.
This function raises the treesit-query-error
error if
query is malformed. The signal data contains a description of
the specific error. You can use treesit-query-validate
to
validate and debug the query.
This function returns the language of query.
This function converts the s-expression query into the string format.
This function converts the s-expression pattern into the string format.
For more details, read the tree-sitter project’s documentation about pattern-matching, which can be found at https://tree-sitter.github.io/tree-sitter/using-parsers#pattern-matching-with-queries.
Sometimes, the source of a programming language could contain snippets of other languages; HTML + CSS + JavaScript is one example. In that case, text segments written in different languages need to be assigned different parsers. Traditionally, this is achieved by using narrowing. While tree-sitter works with narrowing (see narrowing), the recommended way is instead to specify regions of buffer text (i.e., ranges) in which a parser will operate. This section describes functions for setting and getting ranges for a parser.
Lisp programs should call treesit-update-ranges
to make sure
the ranges for each parser are correct before using parsers in a
buffer, and call treesit-language-at
to figure out the language
responsible for the text at some position. These two functions don’t
work by themselves, they need major modes to set
treesit-range-settings
and
treesit-language-at-point-function
, which do the actual work.
These functions and variables are explained in more detail towards the
end of the section.
This function sets up parser to operate on ranges. The
parser will only read the text of the specified ranges. Each
range in ranges is a pair of the form (beg . end)
.
The ranges in ranges must come in order and must not overlap. That is, in pseudo code:
(cl-loop for idx from 1 to (1- (length ranges)) for prev = (nth (1- idx) ranges) for next = (nth idx ranges) should (<= (car prev) (cdr prev) (car next) (cdr next)))
If ranges violates this constraint, or something else went
wrong, this function signals the treesit-range-invalid
error.
The signal data contains a specific error message and the ranges we
are trying to set.
This function can also be used for disabling ranges. If ranges
is nil
, the parser is set to parse the whole buffer.
Example:
(treesit-parser-set-included-ranges parser '((1 . 9) (16 . 24) (24 . 25)))
This function returns the ranges set for parser. The return
value is the same as the ranges argument of
treesit-parser-included-ranges
: a list of cons cells of the form
(beg . end)
. If parser doesn’t have any
ranges, the return value is nil
.
(treesit-parser-included-ranges parser) ⇒ ((1 . 9) (16 . 24) (24 . 25))
This function matches source with query and returns the
ranges of captured nodes. The return value is a list of cons cells of
the form (beg . end)
, where beg and
end specify the beginning and the end of a region of text.
For convenience, source can be a language symbol, a parser, or a node. If it’s a language symbol, this function matches in the root node of the first parser using that language; if a parser, this function matches in the root node of that parser; if a node, this function matches in that node.
The argument query is the query used to capture nodes
(see Pattern Matching Tree-sitter Nodes). The capture names don’t matter. The
arguments beg and end, if both non-nil
, limit the
range in which this function queries.
Like other query functions, this function raises the
treesit-query-error
error if query is malformed.
It should suffice for general Lisp programs to call the following two functions in order to support program sources that mix multiple languages.
This function updates ranges for parsers in the buffer. It makes sure
the parsers’ ranges are set correctly between beg and end,
according to treesit-range-settings
. If omitted, beg
defaults to the beginning of the buffer, and end defaults to the
end of the buffer.
For example, fontification functions use this function before querying for nodes in a region.
This function returns the language of the text at buffer position
pos. Under the hood it calls
treesit-language-at-point-function
and returns its return
value. If treesit-language-at-point-function
is nil
,
this function returns the language of the first parser in the returned
value of treesit-parser-list
. If there is no parser in the
buffer, it returns nil
.
Normally, in a set of languages that can be mixed together, there is a host language and one or more embedded languages. A Lisp program usually first parses the whole document with the host language’s parser, retrieves some information, sets ranges for the embedded languages with that information, and then parses the embedded languages.
Take a buffer containing HTML, CSS, and JavaScript
as an example. A Lisp program will first parse the whole buffer with
an HTML parser, then query the parser for
style_element
and script_element
nodes, which correspond
to CSS and JavaScript text, respectively. Then it sets the
range of the CSS and JavaScript parsers to the range which
their corresponding nodes span.
Given a simple HTML document:
<html> <script>1 + 2</script> <style>body { color: "blue"; }</style> </html>
a Lisp program will first parse with a HTML parser, then set ranges for CSS and JavaScript parsers:
;; Create parsers. (setq html (treesit-parser-create 'html)) (setq css (treesit-parser-create 'css)) (setq js (treesit-parser-create 'javascript))
;; Set CSS ranges. (setq css-range (treesit-query-range 'html '((style_element (raw_text) @capture)))) (treesit-parser-set-included-ranges css css-range)
;; Set JavaScript ranges. (setq js-range (treesit-query-range 'html '((script_element (raw_text) @capture)))) (treesit-parser-set-included-ranges js js-range)
Emacs automates this process in treesit-update-ranges
. A
multi-language major mode should set treesit-range-settings
so
that treesit-update-ranges
knows how to perform this process
automatically. Major modes should use the helper function
treesit-range-rules
to generate a value that can be assigned to
treesit-range-settings
. The settings in the following example
directly translate into operations shown above.
(setq treesit-range-settings (treesit-range-rules :embed 'javascript :host 'html '((script_element (raw_text) @capture))
:embed 'css :host 'html '((style_element (raw_text) @capture))))
This function is used to set treesit-range-settings
. It takes
care of compiling queries and other post-processing, and outputs a
value that treesit-range-settings
can have.
It takes a series of query-specs, where each query-spec is a query preceded by zero or more keyword/value pairs. Each query is a tree-sitter query in either the string, s-expression, or compiled form, or a function.
If query is a tree-sitter query, it should be preceded by two
keyword/value pairs, where the :embed
keyword
specifies the embedded language, and the :host
keyword
specifies the host language.
treesit-update-ranges
uses query to figure out how to set
the ranges for parsers for the embedded language. It queries
query in a host language parser, computes the ranges which the
captured nodes span, and applies these ranges to embedded language
parsers.
If query is a function, it doesn’t need any keyword and value pair. It should be a function that takes 2 arguments, start and end, and sets the ranges for parsers in the current buffer in the region between start and end. It is fine for this function to set ranges in a larger region that encompasses the region between start and end.
This variable helps treesit-update-ranges
in updating the
ranges for parsers in the buffer. It is a list of settings
where the exact format of a setting is considered internal. You
should use treesit-range-rules
to generate a value that this
variable can have.
This variable’s value should be a function that takes a single
argument, pos, which is a buffer position, and returns the
language of the buffer text at pos. This variable is used by
treesit-language-at
.
This section covers some general guidelines on developing tree-sitter integration for a major mode.
A major mode supporting tree-sitter features should roughly follow this pattern:
(define-derived-mode woomy-mode prog-mode "Woomy" "A mode for Woomy programming language." (when (treesit-ready-p 'woomy) (setq-local treesit-variables ...) ... (treesit-major-mode-setup)))
treesit-ready-p
automatically emits a warning if conditions for
enabling tree-sitter aren’t met.
If a tree-sitter major mode shares setup with its “native” counterpart, one can create a “base mode” that contains the common setup, like this:
(define-derived-mode woomy--base-mode prog-mode "Woomy" "An internal mode for Woomy programming language." (common-setup) ...)
(define-derived-mode woomy-mode woomy--base-mode "Woomy" "A mode for Woomy programming language." (native-setup) ...)
(define-derived-mode woomy-ts-mode woomy--base-mode "Woomy" "A mode for Woomy programming language." (when (treesit-ready-p 'woomy) (setq-local treesit-variables ...) ... (treesit-major-mode-setup)))
This function checks for conditions for activating tree-sitter. It checks whether Emacs was built with tree-sitter, whether the buffer’s size is not too large for tree-sitter to handle, and whether the grammar for language is available on the system (see Tree-sitter Language Grammar).
This function emits a warning if tree-sitter cannot be activated. If
quiet is message
, the warning is turned into a message;
if quiet is t
, no warning or message is displayed.
If all the necessary conditions are met, this function returns
non-nil
; otherwise it returns nil
.
This function activates some tree-sitter features for a major mode.
Currently, it sets up the following features:
treesit-font-lock-settings
(see Parser-based Font Lock)
is non-nil
, it sets up fontification.
treesit-simple-indent-rules
(see Parser-based Indentation)
is non-nil
, it sets up indentation.
treesit-defun-type-regexp
is non-nil
, it sets up
navigation functions for beginning-of-defun
and
end-of-defun
.
treesit-defun-name-function
is non-nil
, it sets up
add-log functions used by add-log-current-defun
.
treesit-simple-imenu-settings
(see Imenu) is
non-nil
, it sets up Imenu.
For more information on these built-in tree-sitter features, see Parser-based Font Lock, see Parser-based Indentation, and see Moving over Balanced Expressions.
For supporting mixing of multiple languages in a major mode, see Parsing Text in Multiple Languages.
Besides beginning-of-defun
and end-of-defun
, Emacs
provides some additional functions for working with defuns:
treesit-defun-at-point
returns the defun node at point, and
treesit-defun-name
returns the name of a defun node.
This function returns the defun node at point, or nil
if none
is found. It respects treesit-defun-tactic
: if its value is
top-level
, this function returns the top-level defun, and if
its value is nested
, it returns the immediate enclosing defun.
This function requires treesit-defun-type-regexp
to work. If
it is nil
, this function simply returns nil
.
This function returns the defun name of node. It returns
nil
if there is no defun name for node, or if node
is not a defun node, or if node is nil
.
Depending on the language and major mode, the defun names are names like function name, class name, struct name, etc.
If treesit-defun-name-function
is nil
, this function
always returns nil
.
If non-nil
, this variable’s value should be a function that is
called with a node as its argument, and returns the defun name of the
node. The function should have the same semantics as
treesit-defun-name
: if the node is not a defun node, or the
node is a defun node but doesn’t have a name, or the node is
nil
, it should return nil
.
Emacs’ tree-sitter integration doesn’t expose every feature provided by tree-sitter’s C API. Missing features include:
In addition, Emacs makes some changes to the C API to make the API more convenient and idiomatic:
nil
.
Below is the correspondence between all C API functions and their ELisp counterparts. Sometimes one ELisp function corresponds to multiple C functions, and many C functions don’t have an ELisp counterpart.
ts_parser_new treesit-parser-create ts_parser_delete ts_parser_set_language ts_parser_language treesit-parser-language ts_parser_set_included_ranges treesit-parser-set-included-ranges ts_parser_included_ranges treesit-parser-included-ranges ts_parser_parse ts_parser_parse_string treesit-parse-string ts_parser_parse_string_encoding ts_parser_reset ts_parser_set_timeout_micros ts_parser_timeout_micros ts_parser_set_cancellation_flag ts_parser_cancellation_flag ts_parser_set_logger ts_parser_logger ts_parser_print_dot_graphs ts_tree_copy ts_tree_delete ts_tree_root_node ts_tree_language ts_tree_edit ts_tree_get_changed_ranges ts_tree_print_dot_graph ts_node_type treesit-node-type ts_node_symbol ts_node_start_byte treesit-node-start ts_node_start_point ts_node_end_byte treesit-node-end ts_node_end_point ts_node_string treesit-node-string ts_node_is_null ts_node_is_named treesit-node-check ts_node_is_missing treesit-node-check ts_node_is_extra treesit-node-check ts_node_has_changes ts_node_has_error treesit-node-check ts_node_parent treesit-node-parent ts_node_child treesit-node-child ts_node_field_name_for_child treesit-node-field-name-for-child ts_node_child_count treesit-node-child-count ts_node_named_child treesit-node-child ts_node_named_child_count treesit-node-child-count ts_node_child_by_field_name treesit-node-child-by-field-name ts_node_child_by_field_id ts_node_next_sibling treesit-node-next-sibling ts_node_prev_sibling treesit-node-prev-sibling ts_node_next_named_sibling treesit-node-next-sibling ts_node_prev_named_sibling treesit-node-prev-sibling ts_node_first_child_for_byte treesit-node-first-child-for-pos ts_node_first_named_child_for_byte treesit-node-first-child-for-pos ts_node_descendant_for_byte_range treesit-node-descendant-for-range ts_node_descendant_for_point_range ts_node_named_descendant_for_byte_range treesit-node-descendant-for-range ts_node_named_descendant_for_point_range ts_node_edit ts_node_eq treesit-node-eq ts_tree_cursor_new ts_tree_cursor_delete ts_tree_cursor_reset ts_tree_cursor_current_node ts_tree_cursor_current_field_name ts_tree_cursor_current_field_id ts_tree_cursor_goto_parent ts_tree_cursor_goto_next_sibling ts_tree_cursor_goto_first_child ts_tree_cursor_goto_first_child_for_byte ts_tree_cursor_goto_first_child_for_point ts_tree_cursor_copy ts_query_new ts_query_delete ts_query_pattern_count ts_query_capture_count ts_query_string_count ts_query_start_byte_for_pattern ts_query_predicates_for_pattern ts_query_step_is_definite ts_query_capture_name_for_id ts_query_string_value_for_id ts_query_disable_capture ts_query_disable_pattern ts_query_cursor_new ts_query_cursor_delete ts_query_cursor_exec treesit-query-capture ts_query_cursor_did_exceed_match_limit ts_query_cursor_match_limit ts_query_cursor_set_match_limit ts_query_cursor_set_byte_range ts_query_cursor_set_point_range ts_query_cursor_next_match ts_query_cursor_remove_match ts_query_cursor_next_capture ts_language_symbol_count ts_language_symbol_name ts_language_symbol_for_name ts_language_field_count ts_language_field_name_for_id ts_language_field_id_for_name ts_language_symbol_type ts_language_version
An abbreviation or abbrev is a string of characters that may be expanded to a longer string. The user can insert the abbrev string and find it replaced automatically with the expansion of the abbrev. This saves typing.
The set of abbrevs currently in effect is recorded in an abbrev table. Each buffer has a local abbrev table, but normally all buffers in the same major mode share one abbrev table. There is also a global abbrev table. Normally both are used.
An abbrev table is represented as an obarray. See Creating and Interning Symbols, for information about obarrays. Each abbreviation is represented by a symbol in the obarray. The symbol’s name is the abbreviation; its value is the expansion; its function definition is the hook function for performing the expansion (see Defining Abbrevs); and its property list cell contains various additional properties, including the use count and the number of times the abbreviation has been expanded (see Abbrev Properties).
Certain abbrevs, called system abbrevs, are defined by a major
mode instead of the user. A system abbrev is identified by its
non-nil
:system
property (see Abbrev Properties).
When abbrevs are saved to an abbrev file, system abbrevs are omitted.
See Saving Abbrevs in Files.
Because the symbols used for abbrevs are not interned in the usual obarray, they will never appear as the result of reading a Lisp expression; in fact, normally they are never used except by the code that handles abbrevs. Therefore, it is safe to use them in a nonstandard way.
If the minor mode Abbrev mode is enabled, the buffer-local variable
abbrev-mode
is non-nil
, and abbrevs are automatically
expanded in the buffer. For the user-level commands for abbrevs, see
Abbrev Mode in The GNU Emacs Manual.
This section describes how to create and manipulate abbrev tables.
This function creates and returns a new, empty abbrev table—an obarray containing no symbols. It is a vector filled with zeros. props is a property list that is applied to the new table (see Abbrev Table Properties).
This function returns a non-nil
value if object is an
abbrev table.
This function undefines all the abbrevs in abbrev-table, leaving it empty.
This function returns a copy of abbrev-table—a new abbrev table containing the same abbrev definitions. It does not copy any property lists; only the names, values, and functions.
This function defines tabname (a symbol) as an abbrev table
name, i.e., as a variable whose value is an abbrev table. It defines
abbrevs in the table according to definitions, a list of
elements of the form (abbrevname expansion
[hook] [props...])
. These elements are passed as
arguments to define-abbrev
.
The optional string docstring is the documentation string of the variable tabname. The property list props is applied to the abbrev table (see Abbrev Table Properties).
If this function is called more than once for the same tabname, subsequent calls add the definitions in definitions to tabname, rather than overwriting the entire original contents. (A subsequent call only overrides abbrevs explicitly redefined or undefined in definitions.)
This is a list of symbols whose values are abbrev tables.
define-abbrev-table
adds the new abbrev table name to this list.
This function inserts before point a description of the abbrev table named name. The argument name is a symbol whose value is an abbrev table.
If human is non-nil
, the description is human-oriented.
System abbrevs are listed and identified as such. Otherwise the
description is a Lisp expression—a call to define-abbrev-table
that would define name as it is currently defined, but without
the system abbrevs. (The mode or package using name is supposed
to add these to name separately.)
define-abbrev
is the low-level basic function for defining an
abbrev in an abbrev table.
When a major mode defines a system abbrev, it should call
define-abbrev
and specify t
for the :system
property. Be aware that any saved non-system abbrevs are restored
at startup, i.e., before some major modes are loaded. Therefore, major
modes should not assume that their abbrev tables are empty when they
are first loaded.
This function defines an abbrev named name, in
abbrev-table, to expand to expansion and call hook,
with properties props (see Abbrev Properties). The return
value is name. The :system
property in props is
treated specially here: if it has the value force
, then it will
overwrite an existing definition even for a non-system abbrev of
the same name.
name should be a string. The argument expansion is
normally the desired expansion (a string), or nil
to undefine
the abbrev. If it is anything but a string or nil
, then the
abbreviation expands solely by running hook.
The argument hook is a function or nil
. If hook is
non-nil
, then it is called with no arguments after the abbrev is
replaced with expansion; point is located at the end of
expansion when hook is called.
If hook is a non-nil
symbol whose no-self-insert
property is non-nil
, hook can explicitly control whether
to insert the self-inserting input character that triggered the
expansion. If hook returns non-nil
in this case, that
inhibits insertion of the character. By contrast, if hook
returns nil
, expand-abbrev
(or abbrev-insert
)
also returns nil
, as if expansion had not really occurred.
Normally, define-abbrev
sets the variable
abbrevs-changed
to t
, if it actually changes the abbrev.
This is so that some commands will offer to save the abbrevs. It
does not do this for a system abbrev, since those aren’t saved anyway.
If this variable is non-nil
, it means that the user plans to use
global abbrevs only. This tells the commands that define mode-specific
abbrevs to define global ones instead. This variable does not alter the
behavior of the functions in this section; it is examined by their
callers.
A file of saved abbrev definitions is actually a file of Lisp code.
The abbrevs are saved in the form of a Lisp program to define the same
abbrev tables with the same contents. Therefore, you can load the file
with load
(see How Programs Do Loading). However, the
function quietly-read-abbrev-file
is provided as a more
convenient interface. Emacs automatically calls this function at
startup.
User-level facilities such as save-some-buffers
can save
abbrevs in a file automatically, under the control of variables
described here.
This is the default file name for reading and saving abbrevs. By default, Emacs will look for ~/.emacs.d/abbrev_defs, and, if not found, for ~/.abbrev_defs; if neither file exists, Emacs will create ~/.emacs.d/abbrev_defs.
This function reads abbrev definitions from a file named filename,
previously written with write-abbrev-file
. If filename is
omitted or nil
, the file specified in abbrev-file-name
is
used.
As the name implies, this function does not display any messages.
A non-nil
value for save-abbrevs
means that Emacs should
offer to save abbrevs (if any have changed) when files are saved. If
the value is silently
, Emacs saves the abbrevs without asking
the user. abbrev-file-name
specifies the file to save the
abbrevs in. The default value is t
.
This variable is set non-nil
by defining or altering any
abbrevs (except system abbrevs). This serves as a flag for various
Emacs commands to offer to save your abbrevs.
Save all abbrev definitions (except system abbrevs), for all abbrev
tables listed in abbrev-table-name-list
, in the file
filename, in the form of a Lisp program that when loaded will
define the same abbrevs. Tables that do not have any abbrevs to save
are omitted. If filename is nil
or omitted,
abbrev-file-name
is used. This function returns nil
.
Abbrevs are usually expanded by certain interactive commands,
including self-insert-command
. This section describes the
subroutines used in writing such commands, as well as the variables they
use for communication.
This function returns the symbol representing the abbrev named
abbrev. It returns nil
if that abbrev is not
defined. The optional second argument table is the abbrev table
in which to look it up. If table is nil
, this function
tries first the current buffer’s local abbrev table, and second the
global abbrev table.
This function returns the string that abbrev would expand into (as
defined by the abbrev tables used for the current buffer). It returns
nil
if abbrev is not a valid abbrev.
The optional argument table specifies the abbrev table to use,
as in abbrev-symbol
.
This command expands the abbrev before point, if any. If point does not
follow an abbrev, this command does nothing. To do the expansion, it
calls the function that is the value of the abbrev-expand-function
variable, with no arguments, and returns whatever that function does.
The default expansion function returns the abbrev symbol if it did
expansion, and nil
otherwise. If the abbrev symbol has a hook
function that is a symbol whose no-self-insert
property is
non-nil
, and if the hook function returns nil
as its
value, then the default expansion function returns nil
,
even though expansion did occur.
This function inserts the abbrev expansion of abbrev
, replacing
the text between start
and end
. If start
is
omitted, it defaults to point. name
, if non-nil
, should
be the name by which this abbrev was found (a string); it is used to
figure out whether to adjust the capitalization of the expansion. The
function returns abbrev
if the abbrev was successfully
inserted, otherwise it returns nil
.
This command marks the current location of point as the beginning of
an abbrev. The next call to expand-abbrev
will use the text
from here to point (where it is then) as the abbrev to expand, rather
than using the previous word as usual.
First, this command expands any abbrev before point, unless arg
is non-nil
. (Interactively, arg is the prefix argument.)
Then it inserts a hyphen before point, to indicate the start of the
next abbrev to be expanded. The actual expansion removes the hyphen.
When this is set non-nil
, an abbrev entered entirely in upper
case is expanded using all upper case. Otherwise, an abbrev entered
entirely in upper case is expanded by capitalizing each word of the
expansion.
The value of this variable is a buffer position (an integer or a marker)
for expand-abbrev
to use as the start of the next abbrev to be
expanded. The value can also be nil
, which means to use the
word before point instead. abbrev-start-location
is set to
nil
each time expand-abbrev
is called. This variable is
also set by abbrev-prefix-mark
.
The value of this variable is the buffer for which
abbrev-start-location
has been set. Trying to expand an abbrev
in any other buffer clears abbrev-start-location
. This variable
is set by abbrev-prefix-mark
.
This is the abbrev-symbol
of the most recent abbrev expanded. This
information is left by expand-abbrev
for the sake of the
unexpand-abbrev
command (see Expanding
Abbrevs in The GNU Emacs Manual).
This is the location of the most recent abbrev expanded. This contains
information left by expand-abbrev
for the sake of the
unexpand-abbrev
command.
This is the exact expansion text of the most recent abbrev expanded,
after case conversion (if any). Its value is nil
if the abbrev
has already been unexpanded. This contains information left by
expand-abbrev
for the sake of the unexpand-abbrev
command.
The value of this variable is a function that expand-abbrev
will call with no arguments to do the expansion. The function can do
anything it wants before and after performing the expansion.
It should return the abbrev symbol if expansion took place.
The following sample code shows a simple use of
abbrev-expand-function
. It assumes that foo-mode
is a
mode for editing certain files in which lines that start with ‘#’
are comments. You want to use Text mode abbrevs for those lines. The
regular local abbrev table, foo-mode-abbrev-table
is
appropriate for all other lines. See Standard Abbrev Tables, for the
definitions of local-abbrev-table
and text-mode-abbrev-table
.
See Advising Emacs Lisp Functions, for details of add-function
.
(defun foo-mode-abbrev-expand-function (expand) (if (not (save-excursion (forward-line 0) (eq (char-after) ?#))) ;; Performs normal expansion. (funcall expand) ;; We're inside a comment: use the text-mode abbrevs. (let ((local-abbrev-table text-mode-abbrev-table)) (funcall expand)))) (add-hook 'foo-mode-hook (lambda () (add-function :around (local 'abbrev-expand-function) #'foo-mode-abbrev-expand-function)))
Here we list the variables that hold the abbrev tables for the preloaded major modes of Emacs.
This is the abbrev table for mode-independent abbrevs. The abbrevs defined in it apply to all buffers. Each buffer may also have a local abbrev table, whose abbrev definitions take precedence over those in the global table.
The value of this buffer-local variable is the (mode-specific) abbreviation table of the current buffer. It can also be a list of such tables.
The value of this variable is a list of elements of the form
(mode . abbrev-table)
where mode is the name
of a variable: if the variable is bound to a non-nil
value,
then the abbrev-table is active, otherwise it is ignored.
abbrev-table can also be a list of abbrev tables.
This is the local abbrev table used in Fundamental mode; in other words, it is the local abbrev table in all buffers in Fundamental mode.
This is the local abbrev table used in Text mode.
This is the local abbrev table used in Lisp mode. It is the parent of the local abbrev table used in Emacs Lisp mode. See Abbrev Table Properties.
Abbrevs have properties, some of which influence the way they work.
You can provide them as arguments to define-abbrev
, and
manipulate them with the following functions:
Set the property prop of abbrev to value val.
Return the property prop of abbrev, or nil
if the
abbrev has no such property.
The following properties have special meanings:
:count
This property counts the number of times the abbrev has
been expanded. If not explicitly set, it is initialized to 0 by
define-abbrev
.
:system
If non-nil
, this property marks the abbrev as a system abbrev.
Such abbrevs are not saved (see Saving Abbrevs in Files).
:enable-function
If non-nil
, this property should be a function of no
arguments which returns nil
if the abbrev should not be used
and t
otherwise.
:case-fixed
If non-nil
, this property indicates that the case of the
abbrev’s name is significant and should only match a text with the
same pattern of capitalization. It also disables the code that
modifies the capitalization of the expansion.
Like abbrevs, abbrev tables have properties, some of which influence
the way they work. You can provide them as arguments to
define-abbrev-table
, and manipulate them with the functions:
Set the property prop of abbrev table table to value val.
Return the property prop of abbrev table table, or nil
if table has no such property.
The following properties have special meaning:
:enable-function
This is like the :enable-function
abbrev property except that
it applies to all abbrevs in the table. It is used before even trying
to find the abbrev before point, so it can dynamically modify the
abbrev table.
:case-fixed
This is like the :case-fixed
abbrev property except that it
applies to all abbrevs in the table.
:regexp
If non-nil
, this property is a regular expression that
indicates how to extract the name of the abbrev before point, before
looking it up in the table. When the regular expression matches
before point, the abbrev name is expected to be in submatch 1.
If this property is nil
, the default is to use
backward-word
and forward-word
to find the name. This
property allows the use of abbrevs whose name contains characters of
non-word syntax.
:parents
This property holds a list of tables from which to inherit other abbrevs.
:abbrev-table-modiff
This property holds a counter incremented each time a new abbrev is added to the table.
Emacs Lisp provides a limited form of concurrency, called threads. All the threads in a given instance of Emacs share the same memory. Concurrency in Emacs Lisp is “mostly cooperative”, meaning that Emacs will only switch execution between threads at well-defined times. However, the Emacs thread support has been designed in a way to later allow more fine-grained concurrency, and correct programs should not rely on cooperative threading.
Currently, thread switching will occur upon explicit request via
thread-yield
, when waiting for keyboard input or for process
output from asynchronous processes (e.g., during
accept-process-output
), or during blocking operations relating
to threads, such as mutex locking or thread-join
.
Emacs Lisp provides primitives to create and control threads, and also to create and control mutexes and condition variables, useful for thread synchronization.
While global variables are shared among all Emacs Lisp threads,
local variables are not—a dynamic let
binding is local. Each
thread also has its own current buffer (see The Current Buffer) and
its own match data (see The Match Data).
Note that let
bindings are treated specially by the Emacs
Lisp implementation. There is no way to duplicate this unwinding and
rewinding behavior other than by using let
. For example, a
manual implementation of let
written using
unwind-protect
cannot arrange for variable values to be
thread-specific.
In the case of lexical bindings (see Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings), a closure is an object like any other in Emacs Lisp, and bindings in a closure are shared by any threads invoking the closure.
Threads can be created and waited for. A thread cannot be exited directly, but the current thread can be exited implicitly, and other threads can be signaled.
Create a new thread of execution which invokes function. When function returns, the thread exits.
The new thread is created with no local variable bindings in effect. The new thread’s current buffer is inherited from the current thread.
name can be supplied to give a name to the thread. The name is used for debugging and informational purposes only; it has no meaning to Emacs. If name is provided, it must be a string.
This function returns the new thread.
This function returns t
if object represents an Emacs
thread, nil
otherwise.
Block until thread exits, or until the current thread is signaled. It returns the result of the thread function. If thread has already exited, this returns immediately.
Like signal
(see How to Signal an Error), but the signal is
delivered in the thread thread. If thread is the current
thread, then this just calls signal
immediately. Otherwise,
thread will receive the signal as soon as it becomes current.
If thread was blocked by a call to mutex-lock
,
condition-wait
, or thread-join
; thread-signal
will unblock it.
If thread is the main thread, the signal is not propagated there. Instead, it is shown as message in the main thread.
Yield execution to the next runnable thread.
Return the name of thread, as specified to make-thread
.
Return t
if thread is alive, or nil
if it is not.
A thread is alive as long as its function is still executing.
Return the object that thread is waiting on. This function is primarily intended for debugging, and is given a “double hyphen” name to indicate that.
If thread is blocked in thread-join
, this returns the
thread for which it is waiting.
If thread is blocked in mutex-lock
, this returns the mutex.
If thread is blocked in condition-wait
, this returns the
condition variable.
Otherwise, this returns nil
.
Return the current thread.
Return a list of all the live thread objects. A new list is returned by each invocation.
This variable keeps the main thread Emacs is running, or nil
if
Emacs is compiled without thread support.
When code run by a thread signals an error that is unhandled, the thread exits. Other threads can access the error form which caused the thread to exit using the following function.
This function returns the last error form recorded when a thread
exited due to an error. Each thread that exits abnormally overwrites
the form stored by the previous thread’s error with a new value, so
only the last one can be accessed. If cleanup is
non-nil
, the stored form is reset to nil
.
A mutex is an exclusive lock. At any moment, zero or one threads may own a mutex. If a thread attempts to acquire a mutex, and the mutex is already owned by some other thread, then the acquiring thread will block until the mutex becomes available.
Emacs Lisp mutexes are of a type called recursive, which means that a thread can re-acquire a mutex it owns any number of times. A mutex keeps a count of how many times it has been acquired, and each acquisition of a mutex must be paired with a release. The last release by a thread of a mutex reverts it to the unowned state, potentially allowing another thread to acquire the mutex.
This function returns t
if object represents an Emacs
mutex, nil
otherwise.
Create a new mutex and return it. If name is specified, it is a name given to the mutex. It must be a string. The name is for debugging purposes only; it has no meaning to Emacs.
Return the name of mutex, as specified to make-mutex
.
This will block until this thread acquires mutex, or until this
thread is signaled using thread-signal
. If mutex is
already owned by this thread, this simply returns.
Release mutex. If mutex is not owned by this thread, this will signal an error.
This macro is the simplest and safest way to evaluate forms while holding a mutex. It acquires mutex, invokes body, and then releases mutex. It returns the result of body.
A condition variable is a way for a thread to block until some event occurs. A thread can wait on a condition variable, to be woken up when some other thread notifies the condition.
A condition variable is associated with a mutex and, conceptually, with some condition. For proper operation, the mutex must be acquired, and then a waiting thread must loop, testing the condition and waiting on the condition variable. For example:
(with-mutex mutex (while (not global-variable) (condition-wait cond-var)))
The mutex ensures atomicity, and the loop is for robustness—there may be spurious notifications.
Similarly, the mutex must be held before notifying the condition. The typical, and best, approach is to acquire the mutex, make the changes associated with this condition, and then notify it:
(with-mutex mutex (setq global-variable (some-computation)) (condition-notify cond-var))
Make a new condition variable associated with mutex. If name is specified, it is a name given to the condition variable. It must be a string. The name is for debugging purposes only; it has no meaning to Emacs.
This function returns t
if object represents a condition
variable, nil
otherwise.
Wait for another thread to notify cond, a condition variable.
This function will block until the condition is notified, or until a
signal is delivered to this thread using thread-signal
.
It is an error to call condition-wait
without holding the
condition’s associated mutex.
condition-wait
releases the associated mutex while waiting.
This allows other threads to acquire the mutex in order to notify the
condition.
Notify cond. The mutex with cond must be held before
calling this. Ordinarily a single waiting thread is woken by
condition-notify
; but if all is not nil
, then all
threads waiting on cond are notified.
condition-notify
releases the associated mutex while waiting.
This allows other threads to acquire the mutex in order to wait on the
condition.
Return the name of cond, as passed to
make-condition-variable
.
Return the mutex associated with cond. Note that the associated mutex cannot be changed.
The list-threads
command lists all the currently alive threads.
In the resulting buffer, each thread is identified either by the name
passed to make-thread
(see Basic Thread Functions), or by
its unique internal identifier if it was not created with a name. The
status of each thread at the time of the creation or last update of
the buffer is shown, in addition to the object the thread was blocked
on at the time, if it was blocked.
The *Threads* buffer will automatically update twice per second. You can make the refresh rate faster or slower by customizing this variable.
Here are the commands available in the thread list buffer:
Show a backtrace of the thread at point. This will show where in its code the thread had yielded or was blocked at the moment you pressed b. Be aware that the backtrace is a snapshot; the thread could have meanwhile resumed execution, and be in a different state, or could have exited.
You may use g in the thread’s backtrace buffer to get an updated backtrace, as backtrace buffers do not automatically update. See Backtraces, for a description of backtraces and the other commands which work on them.
Signal the thread at point. After s, type q to send a quit signal or e to send an error signal. Threads may implement handling of signals, but the default behavior is to exit on any signal. Therefore you should only use this command if you understand how to restart the target thread, because your Emacs session may behave incorrectly if necessary threads are killed.
Update the list of threads and their statuses.
In the terminology of operating systems, a process is a space in which a program can execute. Emacs runs in a process. Emacs Lisp programs can invoke other programs in processes of their own. These are called subprocesses or child processes of the Emacs process, which is their parent process.
A subprocess of Emacs may be synchronous or asynchronous, depending on how it is created. When you create a synchronous subprocess, the Lisp program waits for the subprocess to terminate before continuing execution. When you create an asynchronous subprocess, it can run in parallel with the Lisp program. This kind of subprocess is represented within Emacs by a Lisp object which is also called a “process”. Lisp programs can use this object to communicate with the subprocess or to control it. For example, you can send signals, obtain status information, receive output from the process, or send input to it.
In addition to processes that run programs, Lisp programs can open connections of several types to devices or processes running on the same machine or on other machines. The supported connection types are: TCP and UDP network connections, serial port connections, and pipe connections. Each such connection is also represented by a process object.
This function returns t
if object represents an Emacs
process object, nil
otherwise. The process object can
represent a subprocess running a program or a connection of any
supported type.
In addition to subprocesses of the current Emacs session, you can also access other processes running on your machine. See Accessing Other Processes.
There are three primitives that create a new subprocess in which to run
a program. One of them, make-process
, creates an asynchronous
process and returns a process object (see Creating an Asynchronous Process).
The other two, call-process
and call-process-region
,
create a synchronous process and do not return a process object
(see Creating a Synchronous Process). There are various higher-level
functions that make use of these primitives to run particular types of
process.
Synchronous and asynchronous processes are explained in the following sections. Since the three functions are all called in a similar fashion, their common arguments are described here.
In all cases, the functions specify the program to be run. An error
is signaled if the file is not found or cannot be executed. If the
file name is relative, the variable exec-path
contains a list
of directories to search. Emacs initializes exec-path
when it
starts up, based on the value of the environment variable PATH
.
The standard file name constructs, ‘~’, ‘.’, and ‘..’,
are interpreted as usual in exec-path
, but environment variable
substitutions (‘$HOME’, etc.) are not recognized; use
substitute-in-file-name
to perform them (see Functions that Expand Filenames). nil
in this list refers to
default-directory
.
Executing a program can also try adding suffixes to the specified name:
This variable is a list of suffixes (strings) to try adding to the
specified program file name. The list should include ""
if you
want the name to be tried exactly as specified. The default value is
system-dependent.
Please note: The argument program contains only the name of the program file; it may not contain any command-line arguments. You must use a separate argument, args, to provide those, as described below.
Each of the subprocess-creating functions has a buffer-or-name
argument that specifies where the output from the program will go. It
should be a buffer or a buffer name; if it is a buffer name, that will
create the buffer if it does not already exist. It can also be
nil
, which says to discard the output, unless a custom filter
function handles it. (See Process Filter Functions, and Reading and Printing Lisp Objects.) Normally, you should avoid having multiple processes send
output to the same buffer because their output would be intermixed
randomly. For synchronous processes, you can send the output to a
file instead of a buffer (and the corresponding argument is therefore
more appropriately called destination). By default, both
standard output and standard error streams go to the same destination,
but all the 3 primitives allow optionally to direct the standard error
stream to a different destination.
All three of the subprocess-creating functions allow to specify
command-line arguments for the process to run. For call-process
and call-process-region
, these come in the form of a
&rest
argument, args. For make-process
, both the
program to run and its command-line arguments are specified as a list
of strings. The command-line arguments must all be strings, and they
are supplied to the program as separate argument strings. Wildcard
characters and other shell constructs have no special meanings in
these strings, since the strings are passed directly to the specified
program.
The subprocess inherits its environment from Emacs, but you can
specify overrides for it with process-environment
. See Operating System Environment. The subprocess gets its current directory from the
value of default-directory
.
The value of this variable is a string, the name of a directory that
contains programs that come with GNU Emacs and are intended for Emacs
to invoke. The program movemail
is an example of such a program;
Rmail uses it to fetch new mail from an inbox.
The value of this variable is a list of directories to search for
programs to run in subprocesses. Each element is either the name of a
directory (i.e., a string), or nil
, which stands for the default
directory (which is the value of default-directory
).
See executable-find, for the details of this search.
The value of exec-path
is used by call-process
and
start-process
when the program argument is not an absolute
file name.
Generally, you should not modify exec-path
directly. Instead,
ensure that your PATH
environment variable is set appropriately
before starting Emacs. Trying to modify exec-path
independently of PATH
can lead to confusing results.
This function is an extension of the variable exec-path
. If
default-directory
indicates a remote directory, this function
returns a list of directories used for searching programs on the
respective remote host. In case of a local default-directory
,
the function returns just the value of the variable exec-path
.
Lisp programs sometimes need to run a shell and give it a command
that contains file names that were specified by the user. These
programs ought to be able to support any valid file name. But the shell
gives special treatment to certain characters, and if these characters
occur in the file name, they will confuse the shell. To handle these
characters, use the function shell-quote-argument
:
This function returns a string that represents, in shell syntax, an argument whose actual contents are argument. It should work reliably to concatenate the return value into a shell command and then pass it to a shell for execution.
Precisely what this function does depends on your operating system. The function is designed to work with the syntax of your system’s standard shell; if you use an unusual shell, you will need to redefine this function. See Security Considerations.
;; This example shows the behavior on GNU and Unix systems. (shell-quote-argument "foo > bar") ⇒ "foo\\ \\>\\ bar" ;; This example shows the behavior on MS-DOS and MS-Windows. (shell-quote-argument "foo > bar") ⇒ "\"foo > bar\""
Here’s an example of using shell-quote-argument
to construct
a shell command:
(concat "diff -u " (shell-quote-argument oldfile) " " (shell-quote-argument newfile))
If the optional posix argument is non-nil
, argument
is quoted according to POSIX shell quoting rules, regardless of the
system’s shell. This is useful when your shell could run on a remote
host, which requires a POSIX shell in general.
(shell-quote-argument "foo > bar" (file-remote-p default-directory))
The following two functions are useful for combining a list of
individual command-line argument strings into a single string, and
taking a string apart into a list of individual command-line
arguments. These functions are mainly intended for converting user
input in the minibuffer, a Lisp string, into a list of string
arguments to be passed to make-process
, call-process
or
start-process
, or for converting such lists of arguments into a
single Lisp string to be presented in the minibuffer or echo area.
Note that if a shell is involved (e.g., if using
call-process-shell-command
), arguments should still be
protected by shell-quote-argument
;
combine-and-quote-strings
is not intended to protect
special characters from shell evaluation.
This function splits string into substrings, respecting double and single quotes, as well as backslash quoting.
(split-string-shell-command "ls /tmp/'foo bar'") ⇒ ("ls" "/tmp/foo bar")
This function splits string into substrings at matches for the
regular expression separators, like split-string
does
(see Creating Strings); in addition, it removes quoting from the
substrings. It then makes a list of the substrings and returns it.
If separators is omitted or nil
, it defaults to
"\\s-+"
, which is a regular expression that matches one or more
characters with whitespace syntax (see Table of Syntax Classes).
This function supports two types of quoting: enclosing a whole string
in double quotes "…"
, and quoting individual characters
with a backslash escape ‘\’. The latter is also used in Lisp
strings, so this function can handle those as well.
This function concatenates list-of-strings into a single string,
quoting each string as necessary. It also sticks the separator
string between each pair of strings; if separator is omitted or
nil
, it defaults to " "
. The return value is the
resulting string.
The strings in list-of-strings that need quoting are those that
include separator as their substring. Quoting a string encloses
it in double quotes "…"
. In the simplest case, if you
are consing a command from the individual command-line arguments,
every argument that includes embedded blanks will be quoted.
After a synchronous process is created, Emacs waits for the
process to terminate before continuing. Starting Dired on GNU or
Unix28 is an example of this: it
runs ls
in a synchronous process, then modifies the output
slightly. Because the process is synchronous, the entire directory
listing arrives in the buffer before Emacs tries to do anything with it.
While Emacs waits for the synchronous subprocess to terminate, the
user can quit by typing C-g. The first C-g tries to kill
the subprocess with a SIGINT
signal; but it waits until the
subprocess actually terminates before quitting. If during that time the
user types another C-g, that kills the subprocess instantly with
SIGKILL
and quits immediately (except on MS-DOS, where killing
other processes doesn’t work). See Quitting.
The synchronous subprocess functions return an indication of how the process terminated.
The output from a synchronous subprocess is generally decoded using a
coding system, much like text read from a file. The input sent to a
subprocess by call-process-region
is encoded using a coding
system, much like text written into a file. See Coding Systems.
This function calls program and waits for it to finish.
The current working directory of the subprocess is set to the current
buffer’s value of default-directory
if that is local (as
determined by unhandled-file-name-directory
), or "~" otherwise.
If you want to run a process in a remote directory use
process-file
.
The standard input for the new process comes from file infile if
infile is not nil
, and from the null device otherwise.
The argument destination says where to put the process output.
Here are the possibilities:
Insert the output in that buffer, before point. This includes both the standard output stream and the standard error stream of the process.
Insert the output in a buffer with that name, before point.
t
Insert the output in the current buffer, before point.
nil
Discard the output.
Discard the output, and return nil
immediately without waiting
for the subprocess to finish.
In this case, the process is not truly synchronous, since it can run in parallel with Emacs; but you can think of it as synchronous in that Emacs is essentially finished with the subprocess as soon as this function returns.
MS-DOS doesn’t support asynchronous subprocesses, so this option doesn’t work there.
(:file file-name)
Send the output to the file name specified, overwriting it if it already exists.
(real-destination error-destination)
Keep the standard output stream separate from the standard error stream;
deal with the ordinary output as specified by real-destination,
and dispose of the error output according to error-destination.
If error-destination is nil
, that means to discard the
error output, t
means mix it with the ordinary output, and a
string specifies a file name to redirect error output into.
You can’t directly specify a buffer to put the error output in; that is too difficult to implement. But you can achieve this result by sending the error output to a temporary file and then inserting the file into a buffer when the subprocess finishes.
If display is non-nil
, then call-process
redisplays
the buffer as output is inserted. (However, if the coding system chosen
for decoding output is undecided
, meaning deduce the encoding
from the actual data, then redisplay sometimes cannot continue once
non-ASCII characters are encountered. There are fundamental
reasons why it is hard to fix this; see Receiving Output from Processes.)
Otherwise the function call-process
does no redisplay, and the
results become visible on the screen only when Emacs redisplays that
buffer in the normal course of events.
The remaining arguments, args, are strings that specify command line arguments for the program. Each string is passed to program as a separate argument.
The value returned by call-process
(unless you told it not to
wait) indicates the reason for process termination. A number gives the
exit status of the subprocess; 0 means success, and any other value
means failure. If the process terminated with a signal,
call-process
returns a string describing the signal. If you
told call-process
not to wait, it returns nil
.
In the examples below, the buffer ‘foo’ is current.
(call-process "pwd" nil t) ⇒ 0 ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- /home/lewis/manual ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(call-process "grep" nil "bar" nil "lewis" "/etc/passwd") ⇒ 0 ---------- Buffer: bar ---------- lewis:x:1001:1001:Bil Lewis,,,,:/home/lewis:/bin/bash ---------- Buffer: bar ----------
Here is an example of the use of call-process
, as used to
be found in the definition of the insert-directory
function:
(call-process insert-directory-program nil t nil switches (if full-directory-p (concat (file-name-as-directory file) ".") file))
This function processes files synchronously in a separate process. It
is similar to call-process
, but may invoke a file name handler
based on the value of the variable default-directory
, which
specifies the current working directory of the subprocess.
The arguments are handled in almost the same way as for
call-process
, with the following differences:
Some file name handlers may not support all combinations and forms of the
arguments infile, buffer, and display. For example,
some file name handlers might behave as if display were nil
,
regardless of the value actually passed. As another example, some
file name handlers might not support separating standard output and error
output by way of the buffer argument.
If a file name handler is invoked, it determines the program to run based
on the first argument program. For instance, suppose that a
handler for remote files is invoked. Then the path that is used for
searching for the program might be different from exec-path
.
The second argument infile may invoke a file name handler. The file
name handler could be different from the handler chosen for the
process-file
function itself. (For example,
default-directory
could be on one remote host, and
infile on a different remote host. Or default-directory
could be non-special, whereas infile is on a remote host.)
If buffer is a list of the form (real-destination
error-destination)
, and error-destination names a file,
then the same remarks as for infile apply.
The remaining arguments (args) will be passed to the process
verbatim. Emacs is not involved in processing file names that are
present in args. To avoid confusion, it may be best to avoid
absolute file names in args, but rather to specify all file
names as relative to default-directory
. The function
file-relative-name
is useful for constructing such relative
file names. Alternatively, you can use file-local-name
(see Making Certain File Names “Magic”) to obtain an absolute file name as seen
from the remote host’s perspective.
This variable indicates whether a call of process-file
changes
remote files.
By default, this variable is always set to t
, meaning that a
call of process-file
could potentially change any file on a
remote host. When set to nil
, a file name handler could optimize
its behavior with respect to remote file attribute caching.
You should only ever change this variable with a let-binding; never
with setq
.
This user option indicates whether a call of process-file
returns a string describing the signal interrupting a remote process.
When a process returns an exit code greater than 128, it is
interpreted as a signal. process-file
requires to return a
string describing this signal.
Since there are processes violating this rule, returning exit codes
greater than 128 which are not bound to a signal, process-file
returns always the exit code as natural number for remote processes.
Setting this user option to non-nil
forces process-file
to
interpret such exit codes as signals, and to return a corresponding
string.
This function sends the text from start to end as
standard input to a process running program. It deletes the text
sent if delete is non-nil
; this is useful when
destination is t
, to insert the output in the current
buffer in place of the input.
The arguments destination and display control what to do
with the output from the subprocess, and whether to update the display
as it comes in. For details, see the description of
call-process
, above. If destination is the integer 0,
call-process-region
discards the output and returns nil
immediately, without waiting for the subprocess to finish (this only
works if asynchronous subprocesses are supported; i.e., not on MS-DOS).
The remaining arguments, args, are strings that specify command line arguments for the program.
The return value of call-process-region
is just like that of
call-process
: nil
if you told it to return without
waiting; otherwise, a number or string which indicates how the
subprocess terminated.
In the following example, we use call-process-region
to run the
cat
utility, with standard input being the first five characters
in buffer ‘foo’ (the word ‘input’). cat
copies its
standard input into its standard output. Since the argument
destination is t
, this output is inserted in the current
buffer.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- input∗ ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(call-process-region 1 6 "cat" nil t) ⇒ 0 ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- inputinput∗ ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
For example, the shell-command-on-region
command uses
call-shell-region
in a manner similar to this:
(call-shell-region
start end
command ; shell command
nil ; do not delete region
buffer) ; send output to buffer
This function executes the shell command command synchronously.
The other arguments are handled as in call-process
. An old
calling convention allowed passing any number of additional arguments
after display, which were concatenated to command; this is
still supported, but strongly discouraged.
This function is like call-process-shell-command
, but uses
process-file
internally. Depending on default-directory
,
command can be executed also on remote hosts. An old calling
convention allowed passing any number of additional arguments after
display, which were concatenated to command; this is still
supported, but strongly discouraged.
This function sends the text from start to end as
standard input to an inferior shell running command. This function
is similar than call-process-region
, with process being a shell.
The arguments delete
, destination
and the return value
are like in call-process-region
.
Note that this function doesn’t accept additional arguments.
This function executes command (a string) as a shell command, then returns the command’s output as a string.
This function runs program, waits for it to finish, and returns its output as a list of strings. Each string in the list holds a single line of text output by the program; the end-of-line characters are stripped from each line. The arguments beyond program, args, are strings that specify command-line arguments with which to run the program.
If program exits with a non-zero exit status, this function signals an error.
This function works by calling call-process
, so program output
is decoded in the same way as for call-process
.
This function is just like process-lines
, but does not signal
an error if program exits with a non-zero exit status.
In this section, we describe how to create an asynchronous process. After an asynchronous process is created, it runs in parallel with Emacs, and Emacs can communicate with it using the functions described in the following sections (see Sending Input to Processes, and see Receiving Output from Processes). Note that process communication is only partially asynchronous: Emacs sends and receives data to and from a process only when those functions are called.
An asynchronous process is controlled either via a pty
(pseudo-terminal) or a pipe. The choice of pty or pipe is made
when creating the process, by default based on the value of the
variable process-connection-type
(see below). If available,
ptys are usually preferable for processes visible to the user, as in
Shell mode, because they allow for job control (C-c, C-z,
etc.) between the process and its children, and because interactive
programs treat ptys as terminal devices, whereas pipes don’t support
these features. However, for subprocesses used by Lisp programs for
internal purposes (i.e., no user interaction with the subprocess is
required), where significant amounts of data need to be exchanged
between the subprocess and the Lisp program, it is often better to use
a pipe, because pipes are more efficient. Also, the total number of
ptys is limited on many systems, and it is good not to waste them
unnecessarily.
This function is the basic low-level primitive for starting
asynchronous subprocesses. It returns a process object representing
the subprocess. Compared to the more high-level start-process
,
described below, it takes keyword arguments, is more flexible, and
allows to specify process filters and sentinels in a single call.
The arguments args are a list of keyword/argument pairs.
Omitting a keyword is always equivalent to specifying it with value
nil
. Here are the meaningful keywords:
Use the string name as the process name; if a process with this name already exists, then name is modified (by appending ‘<1>’, etc.) to be unique.
Use buffer as the process buffer. If the value is nil
,
the subprocess is not associated with any buffer.
Use command as the command line of the process. The value
should be a list starting with the program’s executable file name,
followed by strings to give to the program as its arguments. If
the first element of the list is nil
, Emacs opens a new
pseudoterminal (pty) and associates its input and output with
buffer, without actually running any program; the rest of the
list elements are ignored in that case.
If coding is a symbol, it specifies the coding system to be
used for both reading and writing of data from and to the
connection. If coding is a cons cell
(decoding . encoding)
, then decoding
will be used for reading and encoding for writing. The coding
system used for encoding the data written to the program is also used
for encoding the command-line arguments (but not the program itself,
whose file name is encoded as any other file name; see file-name-coding-system).
If coding is nil
, the default rules for finding the
coding system will apply. See Default Coding Systems.
Initialize the type of device used to communicate with the subprocess.
Possible values are pty
to use a pty, pipe
to use a
pipe, or nil
to use the default derived from the value of the
process-connection-type
variable. If type is a cons cell
(input . output)
, then input will be used
for standard input and output for standard output (and standard
error if :stderr
is nil
).
On systems where ptys are not available (MS-Windows), this parameter is ignored, and pipes are used unconditionally.
Initialize the process query flag to query-flag. See Querying Before Exit.
If provided, stopped must be nil
; it is an error to use
any non-nil
value. The :stop
key is ignored otherwise
and is retained for compatibility with other process types such as
pipe processes. Asynchronous subprocesses never start in the stopped
state.
Initialize the process filter to filter. If not specified, a default filter will be provided, which can be overridden later. See Process Filter Functions.
Initialize the process sentinel to sentinel. If not specified, a default sentinel will be used, which can be overridden later. See Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes.
Associate stderr with the standard error of the process. A
non-nil
value should be either a buffer or a pipe process
created with make-pipe-process
, described below. If
stderr is nil
, standard error is mixed with standard
output, and both are sent to buffer or filter.
If stderr is a buffer, Emacs will create a pipe process, the
standard error process. This process will have the default
filter (see Process Filter Functions), sentinel (see Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes), and
coding systems (see Default Coding Systems). On the other hand,
it will use query-flag as its query-on-exit flag (see Querying Before Exit). It will be associated with the stderr buffer
(see Process Buffers) and send its output (which is the standard
error of the main process) there. To get the process object for the
standard error process, pass the stderr buffer to
get-buffer-process
.
If stderr is a pipe process, Emacs will use it as standard error process for the new process.
If file-handler is non-nil
, then look for a file name
handler for the current buffer’s default-directory
, and invoke
that file name handler to make the process. If there is no such
handler, proceed as if file-handler were nil
.
The original argument list, modified with the actual connection
information, is available via the process-contact
function.
The current working directory of the subprocess is set to the current
buffer’s value of default-directory
if that is local (as
determined by unhandled-file-name-directory
), or ~
otherwise. If you want to run a process in a remote directory, pass
:file-handler t
to make-process
. In that case, the
current working directory is the local name component of
default-directory
(as determined by file-local-name
).
Depending on the implementation of the file name handler, it might not
be possible to apply filter or sentinel to the resulting
process object. The :stderr
argument cannot be a pipe process,
file name handlers do not support pipe processes for this. A buffer
as :stderr
argument is accepted, its contents is shown without
the use of pipe processes. See Process Filter Functions, Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes,
and Accepting Output from Processes.
Some file name handlers may not support make-process
. In such
cases, this function does nothing and returns nil
.
This function creates a bidirectional pipe which can be attached to a
child process. This is useful with the :stderr
keyword of
make-process
. The function returns a process object.
The arguments args are a list of keyword/argument pairs.
Omitting a keyword is always equivalent to specifying it with value
nil
.
Here are the meaningful keywords:
Use the string name as the process name. As with
make-process
, it is modified if necessary to make it unique.
Use buffer as the process buffer.
If coding is a symbol, it specifies the coding system to be
used for both reading and writing of data from and to the
connection. If coding is a cons cell
(decoding . encoding)
, then decoding
will be used for reading and encoding for writing.
If coding is nil
, the default rules for finding the
coding system will apply. See Default Coding Systems.
Initialize the process query flag to query-flag. See Querying Before Exit.
If stopped is non-nil
, start the process in the stopped
state. In the stopped state, a pipe process does not accept incoming
data, but you can send outgoing data. The stopped state is set by
stop-process
and cleared by continue-process
(see Sending Signals to Processes).
Initialize the process filter to filter. If not specified, a default filter will be provided, which can be changed later. See Process Filter Functions.
Initialize the process sentinel to sentinel. If not specified, a default sentinel will be used, which can be changed later. See Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes.
The original argument list, modified with the actual connection
information, is available via the process-contact
function.
This function is a higher-level wrapper around make-process
,
exposing an interface that is similar to call-process
. It
creates a new asynchronous subprocess and starts the specified
program running in it. It returns a process object that stands
for the new subprocess in Lisp. The argument name specifies the
name for the process object; as with make-process
, it is
modified if necessary to make it unique. The buffer
buffer-or-name is the buffer to associate with the process.
If program is nil
, Emacs opens a new pseudoterminal (pty)
and associates its input and output with buffer-or-name, without
creating a subprocess. In that case, the remaining arguments
args are ignored.
The rest of args are strings that specify command line arguments for the subprocess.
In the example below, the first process is started and runs (rather, sleeps) for 100 seconds (the output buffer ‘foo’ is created immediately). Meanwhile, the second process is started, and given the name ‘my-process<1>’ for the sake of uniqueness. It inserts the directory listing at the end of the buffer ‘foo’, before the first process finishes. Then it finishes, and a message to that effect is inserted in the buffer. Much later, the first process finishes, and another message is inserted in the buffer for it.
(start-process "my-process" "foo" "sleep" "100") ⇒ #<process my-process>
(start-process "my-process" "foo" "ls" "-l" "/bin") ⇒ #<process my-process<1>> ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- total 8336 -rwxr-xr-x 1 root root 971384 Mar 30 10:14 bash -rwxr-xr-x 1 root root 146920 Jul 5 2011 bsd-csh ... -rwxr-xr-x 1 root root 696880 Feb 28 15:55 zsh4 Process my-process<1> finished Process my-process finished ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
Like start-process
, this function starts a new asynchronous
subprocess running program in it, and returns its process
object.
The difference from start-process
is that this function may
invoke a file name handler based on the value of default-directory
.
This handler ought to run program, perhaps on the local host,
perhaps on a remote host that corresponds to default-directory
.
In the latter case, the local part of default-directory
becomes
the working directory of the process.
This function does not try to invoke file name handlers for
program or for the rest of args. For that reason, if
program or any of args use the remote-file syntax
(see Making Certain File Names “Magic”), they must be converted either to file
names relative to default-directory
, or to names that identify
the files locally on the remote host, by running them through
file-local-name
.
Depending on the implementation of the file name handler, it might not be
possible to apply process-filter
or process-sentinel
to
the resulting process object. See Process Filter Functions, and Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes.
Some file name handlers may not support start-file-process
(for
example the function ange-ftp-hook-function
). In such cases,
this function does nothing and returns nil
.
This function is like start-process
, except that it uses a
shell to execute the specified command. The argument
command is a shell command string. The variable
shell-file-name
specifies which shell to use.
The point of running a program through the shell, rather than directly
with make-process
or start-process
, is so that you can
employ shell features such as wildcards in the arguments. It follows
that if you include any arbitrary user-specified arguments in the
command, you should quote them with shell-quote-argument
first,
so that any special shell characters do not have their special
shell meanings. See Shell Arguments. Of course, when executing
commands based on user input you should also consider the security
implications.
This function is like start-process-shell-command
, but uses
start-file-process
internally. Because of this, command
can also be executed on remote hosts, depending on default-directory
.
This variable controls the type of device used to communicate with
asynchronous subprocesses. If it is non-nil
, then ptys are
used, when available. Otherwise, pipes are used.
The value of process-connection-type
takes effect when
make-process
or start-process
is called. So you can
specify how to communicate with one subprocess by binding the variable
around the call to these functions.
Note that the value of this variable is ignored when
make-process
is called with a non-nil
value of the
:stderr
parameter; in that case, Emacs will communicate with
the process using pipes. It is also ignored if ptys are unavailable
(MS-Windows).
(let ((process-connection-type nil)) ; use a pipe
(start-process ...))
To determine whether a given subprocess actually got a pipe or a pty,
use the function process-tty-name
(see Process Information).
If a process sentinel/filter function has an error, Emacs will (by
default) pause Emacs for process-error-pause-time
seconds after
displaying this error, so that users will see the error in question.
However, this can lead to situations where Emacs becomes unresponsive
(if there’s a lot of these errors happening), so this can be disabled
by setting process-error-pause-time
to 0.
Deleting a process disconnects Emacs immediately from the subprocess. Processes are deleted automatically after they terminate, but not necessarily right away. You can delete a process explicitly at any time. If you explicitly delete a terminated process before it is deleted automatically, no harm results. Deleting a running process sends a signal to terminate it (and its child processes, if any), and calls the process sentinel. See Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes.
When a process is deleted, the process object itself continues to exist as long as other Lisp objects point to it. All the Lisp primitives that work on process objects accept deleted processes, but those that do I/O or send signals will report an error. The process mark continues to point to the same place as before, usually into a buffer where output from the process was being inserted.
This variable controls automatic deletion of processes that have
terminated (due to calling exit
or to a signal). If it is
nil
, then they continue to exist until the user runs
list-processes
. Otherwise, they are deleted immediately after
they exit.
This function deletes a process, killing it with a SIGKILL
signal if the process was running a program. The argument may be a
process, the name of a process, a buffer, or the name of a buffer. (A
buffer or buffer-name stands for the process that
get-buffer-process
returns, and a missing or nil
process means that the current buffer’s process should be
killed.) Calling delete-process
on a running process
terminates it, updates the process status, and runs the sentinel
immediately. If the process has already terminated, calling
delete-process
has no effect on its status, or on the running
of its sentinel (which will happen sooner or later).
If the process object represents a network, serial, or pipe
connection, its status changes to closed
; otherwise, it changes
to signal
, unless the process already exited. See process-status.
(delete-process "*shell*") ⇒ nil
Several functions return information about processes.
This command displays a listing of all living processes. In addition,
it finally deletes any process whose status was ‘Exited’ or
‘Signaled’. It returns nil
.
The processes are shown in a buffer named *Process List* (unless you specify otherwise using the optional argument buffer), whose major mode is Process Menu mode.
If query-only is non-nil
, it only lists processes
whose query flag is non-nil
. See Querying Before Exit.
This function returns a list of all processes that have not been deleted.
(process-list) ⇒ (#<process display-time> #<process shell>)
This function returns the number of processors, a positive integer.
Each usable thread execution unit counts as a processor.
By default, the count includes the number of available processors,
which you can override by setting the
OMP_NUM_THREADS
environment variable of OpenMP.
If the optional argument query is current
,
this function ignores OMP_NUM_THREADS
;
if query is all
, this function also counts processors
that are on the system but are not available to the current process.
This function returns the process named name (a string), or
nil
if there is none. The argument name can also be a
process object, in which case it is returned.
(get-process "shell") ⇒ #<process shell>
This function returns the command that was executed to start
process. This is a list of strings, the first string being the
program executed and the rest of the strings being the arguments that
were given to the program. For a network, serial, or pipe connection,
this is either nil
, which means the process is running or
t
(process is stopped).
(process-command (get-process "shell")) ⇒ ("bash" "-i")
This function returns information about how a network, a serial, or a
pipe connection was set up. When key is nil
, it returns
(hostname service)
for a network connection,
(port speed)
for a serial connection, and t
for a pipe connection. For an ordinary child process, this function
always returns t
when called with a nil
key.
If key is t
, the value is the complete status information
for the connection, server, serial port, or pipe; that is, the list of
keywords and values specified in make-network-process
,
make-serial-process
, or make-pipe-process
, except that
some of the values represent the current status instead of what you
specified.
For a network process, the values include (see
make-network-process
for a complete list):
:buffer
The associated value is the process buffer.
:filter
The associated value is the process filter function. See Process Filter Functions.
:sentinel
The associated value is the process sentinel function. See Sentinels: Detecting Process Status Changes.
:remote
In a connection, the address in internal format of the remote peer.
:local
The local address, in internal format.
:service
In a server, if you specified t
for service,
this value is the actual port number.
:local
and :remote
are included even if they were not
specified explicitly in make-network-process
.
For a serial connection, see make-serial-process
and
serial-process-configure
for the list of keys. For a pipe
connection, see make-pipe-process
for the list of keys.
If key is a keyword, the function returns the value corresponding to that keyword.
If process is a non-blocking network stream that hasn’t been
fully set up yet, then this function will block until that has
happened. If given the optional no-block parameter, this
function will return nil
instead of blocking.
This function returns the PID of process. This is an
integral number that distinguishes the process process from all
other processes running on the same computer at the current time. The
PID of a process is chosen by the operating system kernel
when the process is started and remains constant as long as the
process exists. For network, serial, and pipe connections, this
function returns nil
.
This function returns the name of process, as a string.
This function returns the status of process-name as a symbol. The argument process-name must be a process, a buffer, or a process name (a string).
The possible values for an actual subprocess are:
run
for a process that is running.
stop
for a process that is stopped but continuable.
exit
for a process that has exited.
signal
for a process that has received a fatal signal.
open
for a network, serial, or pipe connection that is open.
closed
for a network, serial, or pipe connection that is closed. Once a connection is closed, you cannot reopen it, though you might be able to open a new connection to the same place.
connect
for a non-blocking connection that is waiting to complete.
failed
for a non-blocking connection that has failed to complete.
listen
for a network server that is listening.
nil
if process-name is not the name of an existing process.
(process-status (get-buffer "*shell*")) ⇒ run
For a network, serial, or pipe connection, process-status
returns one of the symbols open
, stop
, or closed
.
The latter means that the other side closed the connection, or Emacs
did delete-process
. The value stop
means that
stop-process
was called on the connection.
This function returns non-nil
if process is alive. A
process is considered alive if its status is run
, open
,
listen
, connect
or stop
.
This function returns the symbol network
for a network
connection or server, serial
for a serial port connection,
pipe
for a pipe connection, or real
for a subprocess
created for running a program.
This function returns the exit status of process or the signal
number that killed it. (Use the result of process-status
to
determine which of those it is.) If process has not yet
terminated, the value is 0. For network, serial, and pipe connections
that are already closed, the value is either 0 or 256, depending on
whether the connection was closed normally or abnormally.
This function returns the terminal name that process is using for
its communication with Emacs—or nil
if it is using pipes
instead of a pty (see process-connection-type
in
Creating an Asynchronous Process). By default, this function returns the
terminal name if any of process’s standard streams use a
terminal. If stream is one of stdin
, stdout
, or
stderr
, this function returns the terminal name (or nil
,
as above) that process uses for that stream specifically. You
can use this to determine whether a particular stream uses a pipe or a
pty.
If process represents a program running on a remote host, this
function returns the local terminal name that communicates with
process; you can get the terminal name used by that program on
the remote host with the process property remote-tty
. If
process represents a network, serial, or pipe connection, this
function always returns nil
.
This function returns a cons cell (decode . encode)
,
describing the coding systems in use for decoding output from, and
encoding input to, process (see Coding Systems).
This function specifies the coding systems to use for subsequent output from and input to process. It will use decoding-system to decode subprocess output, and encoding-system to encode subprocess input.
Every process also has a property list that you can use to store miscellaneous values associated with the process.
This function returns the value of the propname property of process.
This function sets the value of the propname property of process to value.
This function returns the process plist of process.
This function sets the process plist of process to plist.
Asynchronous subprocesses receive input when it is sent to them by Emacs, which is done with the functions in this section. You must specify the process to send input to, and the input data to send. If the subprocess runs a program, the data appears on the standard input of that program; for connections, the data is sent to the connected device or program.
Some operating systems have limited space for buffered input in a pty. On these systems, Emacs sends an EOF periodically amidst the other characters, to force them through. For most programs, these EOFs do no harm.
Subprocess input is normally encoded using a coding system before the
subprocess receives it, much like text written into a file. You can use
set-process-coding-system
to specify which coding system to use
(see Process Information). Otherwise, the coding system comes from
coding-system-for-write
, if that is non-nil
; or else from
the defaulting mechanism (see Default Coding Systems).
Sometimes the system is unable to accept input for that process, because the input buffer is full. When this happens, the send functions wait a short while, accepting output from subprocesses, and then try again. This gives the subprocess a chance to read more of its pending input and make space in the buffer. It also allows filters (including the one currently running), sentinels and timers to run—so take account of that in writing your code.
In these functions, the process argument can be a process or
the name of a process, or a buffer or buffer name (which stands
for a process via get-buffer-process
). nil
means
the current buffer’s process.
This function sends process the contents of string as
standard input. It returns nil
. For example, to make a
Shell buffer list files:
(process-send-string "shell<1>" "ls\n") ⇒ nil
This function sends the text in the region defined by start and end as standard input to process.
An error is signaled unless both start and end are integers or markers that indicate positions in the current buffer. (It is unimportant which number is larger.)
This function makes process see an end-of-file in its input. The EOF comes after any text already sent to it. The function returns process.
(process-send-eof "shell") ⇒ "shell"
This function will tell you whether a process, which must not be
a connection but a real subprocess, has given control of its terminal
to a child process of its own. If this is true, the function returns
the numeric ID of the foreground process group of process; it
returns nil
if Emacs can be certain that this is not so. The
value is t
if Emacs cannot tell whether this is true. This
function signals an error if process is a network, serial, or
pipe connection, or if the subprocess is not active.
Sending a signal to a subprocess is a way of interrupting its
activities. There are several different signals, each with its own
meaning. The set of signals and their names is defined by the operating
system. For example, the signal SIGINT
means that the user has
typed C-c, or that some analogous thing has happened.
Each signal has a standard effect on the subprocess. Most signals kill the subprocess, but some stop (or resume) execution instead. Most signals can optionally be handled by programs; if the program handles the signal, then we can say nothing in general about its effects.
You can send signals explicitly by calling the functions in this
section. Emacs also sends signals automatically at certain times:
killing a buffer sends a SIGHUP
signal to all its associated
processes; killing Emacs sends a SIGHUP
signal to all remaining
processes. (SIGHUP
is a signal that usually indicates that the
user “hung up the phone”, i.e., disconnected.)
Each of the signal-sending functions takes two optional arguments: process and current-group.
The argument process must be either a process, a process
name, a buffer, a buffer name, or nil
. A buffer or buffer name
stands for a process through get-buffer-process
. nil
stands for the process associated with the current buffer. Except
with stop-process
and continue-process
, an error is
signaled if process does not identify an active process, or if
it represents a network, serial, or pipe connection.
The argument current-group is a flag that makes a difference
when you are running a job-control shell as an Emacs subprocess. If it
is non-nil
, then the signal is sent to the current process-group
of the terminal that Emacs uses to communicate with the subprocess. If
the process is a job-control shell, this means the shell’s current
subjob. If current-group is nil
, the signal is
sent to the process group of the immediate subprocess of Emacs. If
the subprocess is a job-control shell, this is the shell itself. If
current-group is lambda
, the signal is sent to the
process-group that owns the terminal, but only if it is not the shell
itself.
The flag current-group has no effect when a pipe is used to
communicate with the subprocess, because the operating system does not
support the distinction in the case of pipes. For the same reason,
job-control shells won’t work when a pipe is used. See
process-connection-type
in Creating an Asynchronous Process.
This function interrupts the process process by sending the
signal SIGINT
. Outside of Emacs, typing the interrupt
character (normally C-c on some systems, and DEL on
others) sends this signal. When the argument current-group is
non-nil
, you can think of this function as typing C-c
on the terminal by which Emacs talks to the subprocess.
This command kills the process process by sending the
signal SIGKILL
. This signal kills the subprocess immediately,
and cannot be handled by the subprocess. Interactively, it’ll prompt
the user for a process name, defaulting to the process (if any) in the
current buffer.
This function sends the signal SIGQUIT
to the process
process. This signal is the one sent by the quit
character (usually C-\) when you are not inside
Emacs.
This function stops the specified process. If it is a real
subprocess running a program, it sends the signal SIGTSTP
to
that subprocess. If process represents a network, serial, or
pipe connection, this function inhibits handling of the incoming data
from the connection; for a network server, this means not accepting
new connections. Use continue-process
to resume normal
execution.
Outside of Emacs, on systems with job control, the stop character
(usually C-z) normally sends the SIGTSTP
signal to a
subprocess. When current-group is non-nil
, you can think
of this function as typing C-z on the terminal Emacs uses to
communicate with the subprocess.
This function resumes execution of the process process. If it
is a real subprocess running a program, it sends the signal
SIGCONT
to that subprocess; this presumes that process
was stopped previously. If process represents a network,
serial, or pipe connection, this function resumes handling of the
incoming data from the connection. For serial connections, data that
arrived during the time the process was stopped might be lost.
This function sends a signal to process process. The argument signal specifies which signal to send; it should be an integer, or a symbol whose name is a signal.
The process argument can be a system process ID (an integer); that allows you to send signals to processes that are not children of Emacs. See Accessing Other Processes.
If process is a process object which contains the property
remote-pid
, or process is a number and remote is a
remote file name, process is interpreted as process on the
respective remote host, which will be the process to signal.
If process is a string, it is interpreted as process object with the respective process name, or as a number.
Sometimes, it is necessary to send a signal to a non-local
asynchronous process. This is possible by writing an own
interrupt-process
or signal-process
implementation.
This function must be added then to interrupt-process-functions
or signal-process-functions
, respectively.
This variable is a list of functions to be called for
interrupt-process
. The arguments of the functions are the same
as for interrupt-process
. These functions are called in the
order of the list, until one of them returns non-nil
. The
default function, which shall always be the last in this list, is
internal-default-interrupt-process
.
This is the mechanism, how Tramp implements interrupt-process
.
This variable is a list of functions to be called for
signal-process
. The arguments of the functions are the same as
for signal-process
. These functions are called in the order of
the list, until one of them returns non-nil
. The default
function, which shall always be the last in this list, is
internal-default-signal-process
.
This is the mechanism, how Tramp implements signal-process
.
The output that an asynchronous subprocess writes to its standard output stream is passed to a function called the filter function. The default filter function simply inserts the output into a buffer, which is called the associated buffer of the process (see Process Buffers). If the process has no buffer then the default filter discards the output.
If the subprocess writes to its standard error stream, by default
the error output is also passed to the process filter function.
Alternatively, you could use the :stderr
parameter with a
non-nil
value in a call to make-process
(see make-process) to make the destination
of the error output separate from the standard output.
When a subprocess terminates, Emacs reads any pending output, then stops reading output from that subprocess. Therefore, if the subprocess has children that are still live and still producing output, Emacs won’t receive that output.
Output from a subprocess can arrive only while Emacs is waiting: when
reading terminal input (see the function waiting-for-user-input-p
),
in sit-for
and sleep-for
(see Waiting for Elapsed Time or Input), in
accept-process-output
(see Accepting Output from Processes), and in
functions which send data to processes (see Sending Input to Processes).
This minimizes the problem of timing errors that usually plague parallel
programming. For example, you can safely create a process and only
then specify its buffer or filter function; no output can arrive
before you finish, if the code in between does not call any primitive
that waits.
On some systems, when Emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the
output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in
very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent
by setting the variable process-adaptive-read-buffering
to a
non-nil
value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading
from such processes, thus allowing them to produce more output before
Emacs tries to read it.
A process can (and usually does) have an associated buffer, which is an ordinary Emacs buffer that is used for two purposes: storing the output from the process, and deciding when to kill the process. You can also use the buffer to identify a process to operate on, since in normal practice only one process is associated with any given buffer. Many applications of processes also use the buffer for editing input to be sent to the process, but this is not built into Emacs Lisp.
By default, process output is inserted in the associated buffer.
(You can change this by defining a custom filter function,
see Process Filter Functions.) The position to insert the output is
determined by the process-mark
, which is then updated to point
to the end of the text just inserted. Usually, but not always, the
process-mark
is at the end of the buffer.
Killing the associated buffer of a process also kills the process.
Emacs asks for confirmation first, if the process’s
process-query-on-exit-flag
is non-nil
(see Querying Before Exit). This confirmation is done by the function
process-kill-buffer-query-function
, which is run from
kill-buffer-query-functions
(see Killing Buffers).
This function returns the associated buffer of the specified process.
(process-buffer (get-process "shell")) ⇒ #<buffer *shell*>
This function returns the process marker for process, which is the marker that says where to insert output from the process.
If process does not have a buffer, process-mark
returns a
marker that points nowhere.
The default filter function uses this marker to decide where to insert process output, and updates it to point after the inserted text. That is why successive batches of output are inserted consecutively.
Custom filter functions normally should use this marker in the same fashion.
For an example of a filter function that uses process-mark
,
see Process Filter Example.
When the user is expected to enter input in the process buffer for transmission to the process, the process marker separates the new input from previous output.
This function sets the buffer associated with process to
buffer. If buffer is nil
, the process becomes
associated with no buffer; if non-nil
and different from the
buffer associated with the process, the process mark will be set to
point to the end of buffer (unless the process mark is already
associated with buffer).
This function returns a nondeleted process associated with the buffer
specified by buffer-or-name. If there are several processes
associated with it, this function chooses one (currently, the one most
recently created, but don’t count on that). Deletion of a process
(see delete-process
) makes it ineligible for this function to
return.
It is usually a bad idea to have more than one process associated with the same buffer.
(get-buffer-process "*shell*") ⇒ #<process shell>
Killing the process’s buffer deletes the process, which kills the
subprocess with a SIGHUP
signal (see Sending Signals to Processes).
If the process’s buffer is displayed in a window, your Lisp program may wish to tell the process the dimensions of that window, so that the process could adapt its output to those dimensions, much as it adapts to the screen dimensions. The following functions allow communicating this kind of information to processes; however, not all systems support the underlying functionality, so it is best to provide fallbacks, e.g., via command-line arguments or environment variables.
Tell process that its logical window size has dimensions
width by height, in character units. If this function
succeeds in communicating this information to the process, it returns
t
; otherwise it returns nil
.
When windows that display buffers associated with process change their
dimensions, the affected processes should be told about these changes.
By default, when the window configuration changes, Emacs will
automatically call set-process-window-size
on behalf of every
process whose buffer is displayed in a window, passing it the smallest
dimensions of all the windows displaying the process’s buffer. This
works via window-configuration-change-hook
(see Hooks for Window Scrolling and Changes), which is told to invoke the function that is the value of
the variable window-adjust-process-window-size-function
for
each process whose buffer is displayed in at least one window. You
can customize this behavior by setting the value of that variable.
The value of this variable should be a function of two arguments: a
process and the list of windows displaying the process’s buffer. When
the function is called, the process’s buffer is the current buffer.
The function should return a cons cell (width . height)
that describes the dimensions of the logical process
window to be passed via a call to set-process-window-size
. The
function can also return nil
, in which case Emacs will not call
set-process-window-size
for this process.
Emacs supplies two predefined values for this variable:
window-adjust-process-window-size-smallest
, which returns the
smallest of all the dimensions of the windows that display a process’s
buffer; and window-adjust-process-window-size-largest
, which
returns the largest dimensions. For more complex strategies, write
your own function.
This variable can be buffer-local.
If the process has the adjust-window-size-function
property
(see Process Information), its value overrides the global and
buffer-local values of
window-adjust-process-window-size-function
.
A process filter function is a function that receives the standard output from the associated process. All output from that process is passed to the filter. The default filter simply outputs directly to the process buffer.
By default, the error output from the process, if any, is also passed to the filter function, unless the destination for the standard error stream of the process was separated from the standard output when the process was created. Emacs will only call the filter function during certain function calls. See Receiving Output from Processes. Note that if any of those functions are called by the filter, the filter may be called recursively.
A filter function must accept two arguments: the associated process and a string, which is output just received from it. The function is then free to do whatever it chooses with the output.
Quitting is normally inhibited within a filter function—otherwise,
the effect of typing C-g at command level or to quit a user
command would be unpredictable. If you want to permit quitting inside
a filter function, bind inhibit-quit
to nil
. In most
cases, the right way to do this is with the macro
with-local-quit
. See Quitting.
If an error happens during execution of a filter function, it is
caught automatically, so that it doesn’t stop the execution of whatever
program was running when the filter function was started. However, if
debug-on-error
is non-nil
, errors are not caught.
This makes it possible to use the Lisp debugger to debug filter
functions. See The Lisp Debugger. If an error is caught, Emacs pauses for
process-error-pause-time
seconds so that the user sees the
error. See Creating an Asynchronous Process.
Many filter functions sometimes (or always) insert the output in the process’s buffer, mimicking the actions of the default filter. Such filter functions need to make sure that they save the current buffer, select the correct buffer (if different) before inserting output, and then restore the original buffer. They should also check whether the buffer is still alive, update the process marker, and in some cases update the value of point. Here is how to do these things:
(defun ordinary-insertion-filter (proc string) (when (buffer-live-p (process-buffer proc)) (with-current-buffer (process-buffer proc) (let ((moving (= (point) (process-mark proc))))
(save-excursion
;; Insert the text, advancing the process marker.
(goto-char (process-mark proc))
(insert string)
(set-marker (process-mark proc) (point)))
(if moving (goto-char (process-mark proc)))))))
To make the filter force the process buffer to be visible whenever new
text arrives, you could insert a line like the following just before the
with-current-buffer
construct:
(display-buffer (process-buffer proc))
To force point to the end of the new output, no matter where it was
previously, eliminate the variable moving
from the example and
call goto-char
unconditionally. Note that this doesn’t
necessarily move the window point. The default filter actually uses
insert-before-markers
which moves all markers, including the
window point. This may move unrelated markers, so it’s generally
better to move the window point explicitly, or set its insertion type
to t
(see Windows and Point).
Note that Emacs automatically saves and restores the match data while executing filter functions. See The Match Data.
The output to the filter may come in chunks of any size. A program that produces the same output twice in a row may send it as one batch of 200 characters one time, and five batches of 40 characters the next. If the filter looks for certain text strings in the subprocess output, make sure to handle the case where one of these strings is split across two or more batches of output; one way to do this is to insert the received text into a temporary buffer, which can then be searched.
This function gives process the filter function filter.
If filter is nil
, it gives the process the default
filter, which inserts the process output into the process buffer. If
filter is t
, Emacs stops accepting output from the
process, unless it’s a network server process that listens for
incoming connections.
This function returns the filter function of process.
In case the process’s output needs to be passed to several filters, you can
use add-function
to combine an existing filter with a new one.
See Advising Emacs Lisp Functions.
Here is an example of the use of a filter function:
(defun keep-output (process output) (setq kept (cons output kept))) ⇒ keep-output
(setq kept nil) ⇒ nil
(set-process-filter (get-process "shell") 'keep-output) ⇒ keep-output
(process-send-string "shell" "ls ~/other\n") ⇒ nil kept ⇒ ("lewis@slug:$ "
"FINAL-W87-SHORT.MSS backup.otl kolstad.mss~ address.txt backup.psf kolstad.psf backup.bib~ david.mss resume-Dec-86.mss~ backup.err david.psf resume-Dec.psf backup.mss dland syllabus.mss " "#backups.mss# backup.mss~ kolstad.mss ")
When Emacs writes process output directly into a multibyte buffer,
it decodes the output according to the process output coding system.
If the coding system is raw-text
or no-conversion
, Emacs
converts the unibyte output to multibyte using
string-to-multibyte
, and inserts the resulting multibyte text.
You can use set-process-coding-system
to specify which coding
system to use (see Process Information). Otherwise, the coding
system comes from coding-system-for-read
, if that is
non-nil
; or else from the defaulting mechanism (see Default Coding Systems). If the text output by a process contains null
bytes, Emacs by default uses no-conversion
for it; see
inhibit-null-byte-detection, for how to
control this behavior.
Warning: Coding systems such as undecided
, which
determine the coding system from the data, do not work entirely
reliably with asynchronous subprocess output. This is because Emacs
has to process asynchronous subprocess output in batches, as it
arrives. Emacs must try to detect the proper coding system from one
batch at a time, and this does not always work. Therefore, if at all
possible, specify a coding system that determines both the character
code conversion and the end of line conversion—that is, one like
latin-1-unix
, rather than undecided
or latin-1
.
When Emacs calls a process filter function, it provides the process
output as a multibyte string or as a unibyte string according to the
process’s filter coding system. Emacs
decodes the output according to the process output coding system,
which usually produces a multibyte string, except for coding systems
such as binary
and raw-text
.
Output from asynchronous subprocesses normally arrives only while Emacs is waiting for some sort of external event, such as elapsed time or terminal input. Occasionally it is useful in a Lisp program to explicitly permit output to arrive at a specific point, or even to wait until output arrives from a process.
This function allows Emacs to read pending output from processes. The
output is given to their filter functions. If process is
non-nil
then this function does not return until some output
has been received from process or process has closed the
connection.
The arguments seconds and millisec let you specify timeout
periods. The former specifies a period measured in seconds and the
latter specifies one measured in milliseconds. The two time periods
thus specified are added together, and accept-process-output
returns after that much time, even if there is no
subprocess output.
The argument millisec is obsolete (and should not be used), because seconds can be floating point to specify waiting a fractional number of seconds. If seconds is 0, the function accepts whatever output is pending but does not wait.
If process is a process, and the argument just-this-one is
non-nil
, only output from that process is handled, suspending output
from other processes until some output has been received from that
process or the timeout expires. If just-this-one is an integer,
also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not
recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as
speech synthesis.
The function accept-process-output
returns non-nil
if it
got output from process, or from any process if process is
nil
; this can occur even after a process has exited if the
corresponding connection contains buffered data. The function returns
nil
if the timeout expired or the connection was closed before output
arrived.
If a connection from a process contains buffered data,
accept-process-output
can return non-nil
even after the
process has exited. Therefore, although the following loop:
;; This loop contains a bug. (while (process-live-p process) (accept-process-output process))
will often read all output from process, it has a race condition
and can miss some output if process-live-p
returns nil
while the connection still contains data. Better is to write the loop
like this:
(while (accept-process-output process))
If you have passed a non-nil
stderr to
make-process
, it will have a standard error process.
See Creating an Asynchronous Process. In that case, waiting for process
output from the main process doesn’t wait for output from the standard
error process. To make sure you have received both all of standard
output and all of standard error from a process, use the following
code:
(while (accept-process-output process)) (while (accept-process-output stderr-process))
If you passed a buffer to the stderr argument of
make-process
, you still have to wait for the standard error
process, like so:
(let* ((stdout (generate-new-buffer "stdout")) (stderr (generate-new-buffer "stderr")) (process (make-process :name "test" :command '("my-program") :buffer stdout :stderr stderr)) (stderr-process (get-buffer-process stderr))) (unless (and process stderr-process) (error "Process unexpectedly nil")) (while (accept-process-output process)) (while (accept-process-output stderr-process)))
Only when both accept-process-output
forms return nil
,
you can be sure that the process has exited and Emacs has read all its
output.
Reading pending standard error from a process running on a remote host is not possible this way.
Because threads were a relatively late addition to Emacs Lisp, and
due to the way dynamic binding was sometimes used in conjunction with
accept-process-output
, by default a process is locked to the
thread that created it. When a process is locked to a thread, output
from the process can only be accepted by that thread.
A Lisp program can specify to which thread a process is to be
locked, or instruct Emacs to unlock a process, in which case its
output can be processed by any thread. Only a single thread will wait
for output from a given process at one time—once one thread begins
waiting for output, the process is temporarily locked until
accept-process-output
or sit-for
returns.
If the thread exits, all the processes locked to it are unlocked.
Return the thread to which process is locked. If process
is unlocked, return nil
.
Set the locking thread of process to thread. thread
may be nil
, in which case the process is unlocked.
A process sentinel is a function that is called whenever the associated process changes status for any reason, including signals (whether sent by Emacs or caused by the process’s own actions) that terminate, stop, or continue the process. The process sentinel is also called if the process exits. The sentinel receives two arguments: the process for which the event occurred, and a string describing the type of event.
If no sentinel function was specified for a process, it will use the default sentinel function, which inserts a message in the process’s buffer with the process name and the string describing the event.
The string describing the event looks like one of the following (but this is not an exhaustive list of event strings):
"finished\n"
.
"deleted\n"
.
"exited abnormally with code exitcode (core dumped)\n"
.
The “core dumped” part is optional, and only appears if the process
dumped core.
"failed with code fail-code\n"
.
"signal-description (core dumped)\n"
. The
signal-description is a system-dependent textual description of
a signal, e.g., "killed"
for SIGKILL
. The “core
dumped” part is optional, and only appears if the process dumped
core.
"open from host-name\n"
.
"open\n"
.
"run\n"
.
"connection broken by remote peer\n"
.
A sentinel runs only while Emacs is waiting (e.g., for terminal
input, or for time to elapse, or for process output). This avoids the
timing errors that could result from running sentinels at random places in
the middle of other Lisp programs. A program can wait, so that
sentinels will run, by calling sit-for
or sleep-for
(see Waiting for Elapsed Time or Input), or accept-process-output
(see Accepting Output from Processes). Emacs also allows sentinels to run when the command loop is
reading input. delete-process
calls the sentinel when it
terminates a running process.
Emacs does not keep a queue of multiple reasons to call the sentinel of one process; it records just the current status and the fact that there has been a change. Therefore two changes in status, coming in quick succession, can call the sentinel just once. However, process termination will always run the sentinel exactly once. This is because the process status can’t change again after termination.
Emacs explicitly checks for output from the process before running the process sentinel. Once the sentinel runs due to process termination, no further output can arrive from the process.
A sentinel that writes the output into the buffer of the process
should check whether the buffer is still alive. If it tries to insert
into a dead buffer, it will get an error. If the buffer is dead,
(buffer-name (process-buffer process))
returns nil
.
Quitting is normally inhibited within a sentinel—otherwise, the
effect of typing C-g at command level or to quit a user command
would be unpredictable. If you want to permit quitting inside a
sentinel, bind inhibit-quit
to nil
. In most cases, the
right way to do this is with the macro with-local-quit
.
See Quitting.
If an error happens during execution of a sentinel, it is caught
automatically, so that it doesn’t stop the execution of whatever
programs was running when the sentinel was started. However, if
debug-on-error
is non-nil
, errors are not caught.
This makes it possible to use the Lisp debugger to debug the
sentinel. See The Lisp Debugger. If an error is caught, Emacs pauses for
process-error-pause-time
seconds so that the user sees the
error. See Creating an Asynchronous Process.
While a sentinel is running, the process sentinel is temporarily
set to nil
so that the sentinel won’t run recursively.
For this reason it is not possible for a sentinel to specify
a new sentinel.
Note that Emacs automatically saves and restores the match data while executing sentinels. See The Match Data.
This function associates sentinel with process. If
sentinel is nil
, then the process will have the default
sentinel, which inserts a message in the process’s buffer when the
process status changes.
Changes in process sentinels take effect immediately—if the sentinel is slated to be run but has not been called yet, and you specify a new sentinel, the eventual call to the sentinel will use the new one.
(defun msg-me (process event) (princ (format "Process: %s had the event '%s'" process event))) (set-process-sentinel (get-process "shell") 'msg-me) ⇒ msg-me
(kill-process (get-process "shell")) -| Process: #<process shell> had the event 'killed' ⇒ #<process shell>
This function returns the sentinel of process.
In case a process status changes need to be passed to several sentinels, you
can use add-function
to combine an existing sentinel with a new one.
See Advising Emacs Lisp Functions.
While a sentinel or filter function is running, this function returns
non-nil
if Emacs was waiting for keyboard input from the user at
the time the sentinel or filter function was called, or nil
if it
was not.
When Emacs exits, it terminates all its subprocesses. For
subprocesses that run a program, it sends them the SIGHUP
signal; connections are simply closed. Because subprocesses may be
doing valuable work, Emacs normally asks the user to confirm that it
is ok to terminate them. Each process has a query flag, which, if
non-nil
, says that Emacs should ask for confirmation before
exiting and thus killing that process. The default for the query flag
is t
, meaning do query.
This returns the query flag of process.
This function sets the query flag of process to flag. It returns flag.
Here is an example of using set-process-query-on-exit-flag
on a
shell process to avoid querying:
(set-process-query-on-exit-flag (get-process "shell") nil) ⇒ nil
If this user option is set to t
(the default), then Emacs asks
for confirmation before killing processes on exit. If it is
nil
, Emacs kills processes without confirmation, i.e., the
query flag of all processes is ignored.
In addition to accessing and manipulating processes that are subprocesses of the current Emacs session, Emacs Lisp programs can also access other processes. We call these system processes, to distinguish them from Emacs subprocesses.
Emacs provides several primitives for accessing system processes.
Not all platforms support these primitives; on those which don’t,
these primitives return nil
.
This function returns a list of all the processes running on the system. Each process is identified by its PID, a numerical process ID that is assigned by the OS and distinguishes the process from all the other processes running on the same machine at the same time.
If default-directory
points to a remote host, processes of that
host are returned.
This function returns an alist of attributes for the process specified
by its process ID pid. Each association in the alist is of the
form (key . value)
, where key designates the
attribute and value is the value of that attribute. The various
attribute keys that this function can return are listed below.
Not all platforms support all of these attributes; if an attribute is
not supported, its association will not appear in the returned alist.
If default-directory
points to a remote host, pid is
regarded as process of that host.
euid
The effective user ID of the user who invoked the process. The
corresponding value is a number. If the process was invoked by
the same user who runs the current Emacs session, the value is
identical to what user-uid
returns (see User Identification).
user
User name corresponding to the process’s effective user ID, a string.
egid
The group ID of the effective user ID, a number.
group
Group name corresponding to the effective user’s group ID, a string.
comm
The name of the command that runs in the process. This is a string that usually specifies the name of the executable file of the process, without the leading directories. However, some special system processes can report strings that do not correspond to an executable file of a program.
state
The state code of the process. This is a short string that encodes the scheduling state of the process. Here’s a list of the most frequently seen codes:
"D"
uninterruptible sleep (usually I/O)
"R"
running
"S"
interruptible sleep (waiting for some event)
"T"
stopped, e.g., by a job control signal
"Z"
zombie: a process that terminated, but was not reaped by its parent
For the full list of the possible states, see the manual page of the
ps
command.
ppid
The process ID of the parent process, a number.
pgrp
The process group ID of the process, a number.
sess
The session ID of the process. This is a number that is the process ID of the process’s session leader.
ttname
A string that is the name of the process’s controlling terminal. On Unix and GNU systems, this is normally the file name of the corresponding terminal device, such as /dev/pts65.
tpgid
The numerical process group ID of the foreground process group that uses the process’s terminal.
minflt
The number of minor page faults caused by the process since its beginning. (Minor page faults are those that don’t involve reading from disk.)
majflt
The number of major page faults caused by the process since its beginning. (Major page faults require a disk to be read, and are thus more expensive than minor page faults.)
cminflt
cmajflt
Like minflt
and majflt
, but include the number of page
faults for all the child processes of the given process.
utime
Time spent by the process in the user context, for running the application’s code. The corresponding value is a Lisp timestamp (see Time of Day).
stime
Time spent by the process in the system (kernel) context, for processing system calls. The corresponding value is a Lisp timestamp.
time
The sum of utime
and stime
. The corresponding
value is a Lisp timestamp.
cutime
cstime
ctime
Like utime
, stime
, and time
, but include the
times of all the child processes of the given process.
pri
The numerical priority of the process.
nice
The nice value of the process, a number. (Processes with smaller nice values get scheduled more favorably.)
thcount
The number of threads in the process.
start
The time when the process was started, as a Lisp timestamp.
etime
The time elapsed since the process started, as a Lisp timestamp.
vsize
The virtual memory size of the process, measured in kilobytes.
rss
The size of the process’s resident set, the number of kilobytes occupied by the process in the machine’s physical memory.
pcpu
The percentage of the CPU time used by the process since it started. The corresponding value is a nonnegative floating-point number. Although in theory the number can exceed 100 on a multicore platform, it is usually less than 100 because Emacs is typically single-threaded.
pmem
The percentage of the total physical memory installed on the machine used by the process’s resident set. The value is a floating-point number between 0 and 100.
args
The command-line with which the process was invoked. This is a string
in which individual command-line arguments are separated by blanks;
whitespace characters that are embedded in the arguments are quoted as
appropriate for the system’s shell: escaped by backslash characters on
GNU and Unix, and enclosed in double quote characters on Windows.
Thus, this command-line string can be directly used in primitives such
as shell-command
.
You can use a transaction queue to communicate with a subprocess
using transactions. First use tq-create
to create a transaction
queue communicating with a specified process. Then you can call
tq-enqueue
to send a transaction.
This function creates and returns a transaction queue communicating with process. The argument process should be a subprocess capable of sending and receiving streams of bytes. It may be a child process, or it may be a TCP connection to a server, possibly on another machine.
This function sends a transaction to queue queue. Specifying the queue has the effect of specifying the subprocess to talk to.
The argument question is the outgoing message that starts the transaction. The argument fn is the function to call when the corresponding answer comes back; it is called with two arguments: closure, and the answer received.
The argument regexp is a regular expression that should match
text at the end of the entire answer, but nothing before; that’s how
tq-enqueue
determines where the answer ends.
If the argument delay-question is non-nil
, delay sending
this question until the process has finished replying to any previous
questions. This produces more reliable results with some processes.
Shut down transaction queue queue, waiting for all pending transactions to complete, and then terminate the connection or child process.
Transaction queues are implemented by means of a filter function. See Process Filter Functions.
Emacs Lisp programs can open stream (TCP) and datagram (UDP) network
connections (see Datagrams) to other processes on the same machine
or other machines.
A network connection is handled by Lisp much like a subprocess, and is
represented by a process object. However, the process you are
communicating with is not a child of the Emacs process, has no
process ID, and you can’t kill it or send it signals. All you
can do is send and receive data. delete-process
closes the
connection, but does not kill the program at the other end; that
program must decide what to do about closure of the connection.
Lisp programs can listen for connections by creating network servers. A network server is also represented by a kind of process object, but unlike a network connection, the network server never transfers data itself. When it receives a connection request, it creates a new network connection to represent the connection just made. (The network connection inherits certain information, including the process plist, from the server.) The network server then goes back to listening for more connection requests.
Network connections and servers are created by calling
make-network-process
with an argument list consisting of
keyword/argument pairs, for example :server t
to create a
server process, or :type 'datagram
to create a datagram
connection. See Low-Level Network Access, for details. You can also use
the open-network-stream
function described below.
To distinguish the different types of processes, the
process-type
function returns the symbol network
for a
network connection or server, serial
for a serial port
connection, pipe
for a pipe connection, or real
for a
real subprocess.
The process-status
function returns open
,
closed
, connect
, stop
, or failed
for
network connections. For a network server, the status is always
listen
. Except for stop
, none of those values is
possible for a real subprocess. See Process Information.
You can stop and resume operation of a network process by calling
stop-process
and continue-process
. For a server
process, being stopped means not accepting new connections. (Up to 5
connection requests will be queued for when you resume the server; you
can increase this limit, unless it is imposed by the operating
system—see the :server
keyword of make-network-process
,
make-network-process
.) For a network stream connection, being
stopped means not processing input (any arriving input waits until you
resume the connection). For a datagram connection, some number of
packets may be queued but input may be lost. You can use the function
process-command
to determine whether a network connection or
server is stopped; a non-nil
value means yes.
Emacs can create encrypted network connections, using the built-in
support for the GnuTLS Transport Layer Security Library; see
the GnuTLS project page.
If your Emacs was compiled with GnuTLS support, the function
gnutls-available-p
is defined and returns non-nil
. For
more details, see Overview in The Emacs-GnuTLS manual.
The open-network-stream
function can transparently handle the
details of creating encrypted connections for you, using whatever
support is available.
This function opens a TCP connection, with optional encryption, and returns a process object that represents the connection.
The name argument specifies the name for the process object. It is modified as necessary to make it unique.
The buffer argument is the buffer to associate with the
connection. Output from the connection is inserted in the buffer,
unless you specify your own filter function to handle the output. If
buffer is nil
, it means that the connection is not
associated with any buffer.
The arguments host and service specify where to connect to;
host is the host name (a string), and service is the name of
a defined network service (a string) or a port number (an integer like
80
or an integer string like "80"
).
The remaining arguments parameters are keyword/argument pairs that are mainly relevant to encrypted connections:
:nowait boolean
If non-nil
, try to make an asynchronous connection.
:noquery query-flag
Initialize the process query flag to query-flag. See Querying Before Exit.
:coding coding
Use this to set the coding systems used by the network process, in
preference to binding coding-system-for-read
or
coding-system-for-write
. See make-network-process
, for
details.
:type type
The type of connection. Options are:
plain
An ordinary, unencrypted connection.
tls
ssl
A TLS (Transport Layer Security) connection.
nil
network
Start with a plain connection, and if parameters ‘:success’ and ‘:capability-command’ are supplied, try to upgrade to an encrypted connection via STARTTLS. If that fails, retain the unencrypted connection.
starttls
As for nil
, but if STARTTLS fails, drop the connection.
shell
A shell connection.
:always-query-capabilities boolean
If non-nil
, always ask for the server’s capabilities, even when
doing a ‘plain’ connection.
:capability-command capability-command
Command to query the host capabilities. This can either be a string (which will then be sent verbatim to the server) or a function (called with a single parameter: the “greeting” from the server when connecting) that should return a string.
:end-of-command regexp
:end-of-capability regexp
Regular expression matching the end of a command, or the end of the command capability-command. The latter defaults to the former.
:starttls-function function
Function of one argument (the response to capability-command),
which returns either nil
or the command to activate
STARTTLS, if supported.
:success regexp
Regular expression matching a successful STARTTLS negotiation.
:use-starttls-if-possible boolean
If non-nil
, do opportunistic STARTTLS upgrades even if Emacs
doesn’t have built-in TLS support.
:warn-unless-encrypted boolean
If non-nil
, and :return-value
is also non-nil
,
Emacs will warn if the connection isn’t encrypted. This is useful for
protocols like IMAP and the like, where most users would
expect the network traffic to be encrypted.
:client-certificate list-or-t
¶Either a list of the form (key-file cert-file)
,
naming the certificate key file and certificate file itself, or
t
, meaning to query auth-source
for this information
(see auth-source in Emacs auth-source
Library). Only used for TLS or STARTTLS. To
enable automatic queries of auth-source
when
:client-certificate
is not specified customize
network-stream-use-client-certificates
to t
.
:return-list cons-or-nil
The return value of this function. If omitted or nil
, return a
process object. Otherwise, a cons of the form
(process-object . plist)
, where plist can
include the following keywords:
:greeting string-or-nil
If non-nil
, the greeting string returned by the host.
:capabilities string-or-nil
If non-nil
, the host’s capability string.
:type symbol
The connection type: ‘plain’ or ‘tls’.
:shell-command string-or-nil
If the connection type
is shell
, this parameter will be
interpreted as a format-spec string (see Custom Format Strings)
that will be executed to make the connection. The specs available are
‘%s’ for the host name and ‘%p’ for the port number. For
instance, if you want to first ssh to ‘gateway’ before making a
plain connection, then this parameter’s value could be something like
‘ssh gateway nc %s %p’.
You create a server by calling make-network-process
(see make-network-process
) with :server t
. The server will
listen for connection requests from clients. When it accepts a client
connection request, that creates a new network connection, itself a
process object, with the following parameters:
The server’s process buffer value is never used directly, but the log function can retrieve it and use it to log connections by inserting text there.
process-contact
keywords :host
, :service
, :remote
.
A datagram connection communicates with individual packets rather
than streams of data. Each call to process-send
sends one
datagram packet (see Sending Input to Processes), and each datagram
received results in one call to the filter function.
The datagram connection doesn’t have to talk with the same remote
peer all the time. It has a remote peer address which specifies
where to send datagrams to. Each time an incoming datagram is passed
to the filter function, the peer address is set to the address that
datagram came from; that way, if the filter function sends a datagram,
it will go back to that place. You can specify the remote peer
address when you create the datagram connection using the
:remote
keyword. You can change it later on by calling
set-process-datagram-address
.
If process is a datagram connection or server, this function returns its remote peer address.
If process is a datagram connection or server, this function sets its remote peer address to address.
You can also create network connections by operating at a lower
level than that of open-network-stream
, using
make-network-process
.
make-network-process
¶The basic function for creating network connections and network
servers is make-network-process
. It can do either of those
jobs, depending on the arguments you give it.
This function creates a network connection or server and returns the
process object that represents it. The arguments args are a
list of keyword/argument pairs. Omitting a keyword is always
equivalent to specifying it with value nil
, except for
:coding
, :filter-multibyte
, and :reuseaddr
. Here
are the meaningful keywords (those corresponding to network options
are listed in the following section):
Use the string name as the process name. It is modified if necessary to make it unique.
Specify the communication type. A value of nil
specifies a
stream connection (the default); datagram
specifies a datagram
connection; seqpacket
specifies a sequenced packet stream
connection. Both connections and servers can be of these types.
If server-flag is non-nil
, create a server. Otherwise,
create a connection. For a stream type server, server-flag may
be an integer, which then specifies the length of the queue of pending
connections to the server. The default queue length is 5.
Specify the host to connect to. host should be a host name or
Internet address, as a string, or the symbol local
to specify
the local host. If you specify host for a server, it must
specify a valid address for the local host, and only clients
connecting to that address will be accepted. When using local
,
by default IPv4 will be used, specify a family of ipv6
to
override this. To listen on all interfaces, specify an address of
‘"0.0.0.0"’ for IPv4 or ‘"::"’ for IPv6. Note that on some
operating systems, listening on ‘"::"’ will also listen on IPv4,
so attempting to then listen separately on IPv4 will result in
EADDRINUSE
errors (‘"Address already in use"’).
service specifies a port number to connect to; or, for a server,
the port number to listen on. It should be a service name like
‘"https"’ that translates to a port number, or an integer like ‘443’
or an integer string like ‘"443"’ that specifies the port number
directly. For a server, it can also be t
, which means to let
the system select an unused port number.
family specifies the address (and protocol) family for
communication. nil
means determine the proper address family
automatically for the given host and service.
local
specifies a Unix socket, in which case host is
ignored. ipv4
and ipv6
specify to use IPv4 and IPv6,
respectively.
If use-external-socket is non-nil
use any sockets passed
to Emacs on invocation instead of allocating one. This is used by the
Emacs server code to allow on-demand socket activation. If Emacs
wasn’t passed a socket, this option is silently ignored.
For a server process, local-address is the address to listen on. It overrides family, host and service, so you might as well not specify them.
For a connection, remote-address is the address to connect to. It overrides family, host and service, so you might as well not specify them.
For a datagram server, remote-address specifies the initial setting of the remote datagram address.
The format of local-address or remote-address depends on the address family:
[a b c d p]
corresponding to
numeric IPv4 address a.b.c.d and port number
p.
[a b c d e f
g h p]
corresponding to numeric IPv6 address
a:b:c:d:e:f:g:h and
port number p.
(f . av)
, where f is the family number and
av is a vector specifying the socket address using one element
per address data byte. Do not rely on this format in portable code,
as it may depend on implementation defined constants, data sizes, and
data structure alignment.
If bool is non-nil
for a stream connection, return
without waiting for the connection to complete. When the connection
succeeds or fails, Emacs will call the sentinel function, with a
second argument matching "open"
(if successful) or
"failed"
. The default is to block, so that
make-network-process
does not return until the connection has
succeeded or failed.
If you’re setting up an asynchronous TLS connection, you have to also
provide the :tls-parameters
parameter (see below).
Depending on the capabilities of Emacs, how asynchronous
:nowait
is may vary. The three elements that may (or may not)
be done asynchronously are domain name resolution, socket setup, and
(for TLS connections) TLS negotiation.
Many functions that interact with process objects, (for instance,
process-datagram-address
) rely on them at least having a socket
before they can return a useful value. These functions will block
until the socket has achieved the desired status. The recommended way
of interacting with asynchronous sockets is to place a sentinel on the
process, and not try to interact with it before it has changed status
to ‘"run"’. That way, none of these functions will block.
When opening a TLS connection, this should be where the first element
is the TLS type (which should either be gnutls-x509pki
or
gnutls-anon
, and the remaining elements should form a keyword
list acceptable for gnutls-boot
. (This keyword list can be
obtained from the gnutls-boot-parameters
function.) The TLS
connection will then be negotiated after completing the connection to
the host.
If stopped is non-nil
, start the network connection or
server in the stopped state.
Use buffer as the process buffer.
Use coding as the coding system for this process. To specify
different coding systems for decoding data from the connection and for
encoding data sent to it, specify (decoding .
encoding)
for coding.
If you don’t specify this keyword at all, the default is to determine the coding systems from the data.
Initialize the process query flag to query-flag. See Querying Before Exit.
Initialize the process filter to filter.
If multibyte is non-nil
, strings given to the process
filter are multibyte, otherwise they are unibyte. The default is t
.
Initialize the process sentinel to sentinel.
Initialize the log function of a server process to log. The log function is called each time the server accepts a network connection from a client. The arguments passed to the log function are server, connection, and message; where server is the server process, connection is the new process for the connection, and message is a string describing what has happened.
Initialize the process plist to plist.
The original argument list, modified with the actual connection
information, is available via the process-contact
function.
The following network options can be specified when you create a
network process. Except for :reuseaddr
, you can also set or
modify these options later, using set-network-process-option
.
For a server process, the options specified with
make-network-process
are not inherited by the client
connections, so you will need to set the necessary options for each
child connection as it is created.
If device-name is a non-empty string identifying a network
interface name (see network-interface-list
), only handle
packets received on that interface. If device-name is nil
(the default), handle packets received on any interface.
Using this option may require special privileges on some systems.
If broadcast-flag is non-nil
for a datagram process, the
process will receive datagram packet sent to a broadcast address, and
be able to send packets to a broadcast address. This is ignored for a stream
connection.
If dontroute-flag is non-nil
, the process can only send
to hosts on the same network as the local host.
If keepalive-flag is non-nil
for a stream connection,
enable exchange of low-level keep-alive messages.
If linger-arg is non-nil
, wait for successful
transmission of all queued packets on the connection before it is
deleted (see delete-process
). If linger-arg is an
integer, it specifies the maximum time in seconds to wait for queued
packets to be sent before closing the connection. The default is
nil
, which means to discard unsent queued packets when the
process is deleted.
If oobinline-flag is non-nil
for a stream connection,
receive out-of-band data in the normal data stream. Otherwise, ignore
out-of-band data.
Set the priority for packets sent on this connection to the integer priority. The interpretation of this number is protocol specific; such as setting the TOS (type of service) field on IP packets sent on this connection. It may also have system dependent effects, such as selecting a specific output queue on the network interface.
If reuseaddr-flag is non-nil
(the default) for a stream
server process, allow this server to reuse a specific port number (see
:service
), unless another process on this host is already
listening on that port. If reuseaddr-flag is nil
, there
may be a period of time after the last use of that port (by any
process on the host) where it is not possible to make a new server on
that port.
This function sets or modifies a network option for network process
process. The accepted options and values are as for
make-network-process
. If no-error is non-nil
,
this function returns nil
instead of signaling an error if
option is not a supported option. If the function successfully
completes, it returns t
.
The current setting of an option is available via the
process-contact
function.
To test for the availability of a given network feature, use
featurep
like this:
(featurep 'make-network-process '(keyword value))
The result of this form is t
if it works to specify
keyword with value value in make-network-process
.
Here are some of the keyword—value pairs you can test in
this way.
(:nowait t)
Non-nil
if non-blocking connect is supported.
(:type datagram)
Non-nil
if datagrams are supported.
(:family local)
Non-nil
if local (a.k.a. “UNIX domain”) sockets are supported.
(:family ipv6)
Non-nil
if IPv6 is supported.
(:service t)
Non-nil
if the system can select the port for a server.
To test for the availability of a given network option, use
featurep
like this:
(featurep 'make-network-process 'keyword)
The accepted keyword values are :bindtodevice
, etc.
For the complete list, see Network Options. This form returns
non-nil
if that particular network option is supported by
make-network-process
(or set-network-process-option
).
These additional functions are useful for creating and operating on network connections. Note that they are supported only on some systems.
This function returns a list describing the network interfaces of the
machine you are using. The value is an alist whose elements have the
form (ifname . address)
. ifname is a string
naming the interface, address has the same form as the
local-address and remote-address arguments to
make-network-process
, i.e. a vector of integers. By default
both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are returned if possible.
Optional argument full non-nil
means to instead return a
list of one or more elements of the form (ifname addr bcast netmask)
. ifname is a non-unique
string naming the interface. addr, bcast, and
netmask are vectors of integers detailing the IP address,
broadcast address, and network mask.
Optional argument family specified as symbol ipv4
or
ipv6
restricts the returned information to IPv4 and IPv6
addresses respectively, independently of the value of full.
Specifying ipv6
when IPv6 support is not available will result
in an error being signaled.
Some examples:
(network-interface-list) ⇒ (("vmnet8" . [172 16 76 1 0]) ("vmnet1" . [172 16 206 1 0]) ("lo0" . [65152 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0]) ("lo0" . [0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0]) ("lo0" . [127 0 0 1 0]))
(network-interface-list t) ⇒ (("vmnet8" [172 16 76 1 0] [172 16 76 255 0] [255 255 255 0 0]) ("vmnet1" [172 16 206 1 0] [172 16 206 255 0] [255 255 255 0 0]) ("lo0" [65152 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0] [65152 0 0 0 65535 65535 65535 65535 0] [65535 65535 65535 65535 0 0 0 0 0]) ("lo0" [0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0] [0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0] [65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 0]) ("lo0" [127 0 0 1 0] [127 255 255 255 0] [255 0 0 0 0]))
This function returns information about the network interface named
ifname. The value is a list of the form
(addr bcast netmask hwaddr flags)
.
The Internet protocol address.
The broadcast address.
The network mask.
The layer 2 address (Ethernet MAC address, for instance).
The current flags of the interface.
Note that this function returns only IPv4 information.
This function converts the Lisp representation of a network address to a string.
A five-element vector [a b c d p]
represents an IPv4 address a.b.c.d and port
number p. format-network-address
converts that to the
string "a.b.c.d:p"
.
A nine-element vector [a b c d e
f g h p]
represents an IPv6 address along
with a port number. format-network-address
converts that to
the string
"[a:b:c:d:e:f:g:h]:p"
.
If the vector does not include the port number, p, or if
omit-port is non-nil
, the result does not include the
:p
suffix.
This function perform hostname lookups on name, which is
expected to be an ASCII-only string, otherwise it signals an error. Call
puny-encode-domain
on name first if you wish to lookup
internationalized hostnames.
If successful, this function returns a list of Lisp representations of network
addresses (see make-network-process
, for a description of the
format), otherwise return nil
. In the latter case, it also logs
an error message hopefully explaining what went wrong.
By default, this function attempts both IPv4 and IPv6 lookups. The
optional argument family controls this behavior, specifying the
symbol ipv4
or ipv6
restricts lookups to IPv4 and IPv6
respectively.
If optional argument hints is numeric
, the function
treats the name as a numerical IP address (and does not perform DNS
lookups). This can be used to check whether a string is a valid
numerical representation of an IP address, or to convert a numerical
string to its canonical representation. e.g.
(network-lookup-address-info "127.1" 'ipv4 'numeric) ⇒ ([127 0 0 1 0]) (network-lookup-address-info "::1" nil 'numeric) ⇒ ([0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0])
Be warned that there are some surprising valid forms, especially for IPv4, e.g ‘0xe3010203’ and ‘0343.1.2.3’ are both valid, as are ‘0’ and ‘1’ (but they are invalid for IPv6).
Emacs can communicate with serial ports. For interactive use,
M-x serial-term opens a terminal window. In a Lisp program,
make-serial-process
creates a process object.
The serial port can be configured at run-time, without having to
close and re-open it. The function serial-process-configure
lets you change the speed, bytesize, and other parameters. In a
terminal window created by serial-term
, you can click on the
mode line for configuration.
A serial connection is represented by a process object, which can be
used in a similar way to a subprocess or network process. You can send and
receive data, and configure the serial port. A serial process object
has no process ID, however, and you can’t send signals to it, and the
status codes are different from other types of processes.
delete-process
on the process object or kill-buffer
on
the process buffer close the connection, but this does not affect the
device connected to the serial port.
The function process-type
returns the symbol serial
for a process object representing a serial port connection.
Serial ports are available on GNU/Linux, Unix, and MS Windows systems.
Start a terminal-emulator for a serial port in a new buffer. port is the name of the serial port to connect to. For example, this could be /dev/ttyS0 on Unix. On MS Windows, this could be COM1, or \\.\COM10 (double the backslashes in Lisp strings).
speed is the speed of the serial port in bits per second. 9600
is a common value. The buffer is in Term mode; see Term Mode in The GNU Emacs Manual, for the commands to use in that buffer.
You can change the speed and the configuration in the mode line menu.
If line-mode is non-nil
, term-line-mode
is used;
otherwise term-raw-mode
is used.
This function creates a process and a buffer. Arguments are specified as keyword/argument pairs. Here’s the list of the meaningful keywords, with the first two (port and speed) being mandatory:
:port port
This is the name of the serial port. On Unix and GNU systems, this is a file name such as /dev/ttyS0. On Windows, this could be COM1, or \\.\COM10 for ports higher than COM9 (double the backslashes in Lisp strings).
:speed speed
The speed of the serial port in bits per second. This function calls
serial-process-configure
to handle the speed; see the
following documentation of that function for more details.
:name name
The name of the process. If name is not given, port will serve as the process name as well.
:buffer buffer
The buffer to associate with the process. The value can be either a
buffer or a string that names a buffer. Process output goes at the
end of that buffer, unless you specify an output stream or filter
function to handle the output. If buffer is not given, the
process buffer’s name is taken from the value of the :name
keyword.
:coding coding
If coding is a symbol, it specifies the coding system used for
both reading and writing for this process. If coding is a cons
(decoding . encoding)
, decoding is used for
reading, and encoding is used for writing. If not specified,
the default is to determine the coding systems from the data itself.
:noquery query-flag
Initialize the process query flag to query-flag. See Querying Before Exit. The flags defaults to nil
if unspecified.
:stop bool
Start process in the stopped state if bool is
non-nil
. In the stopped state, a serial process does not
accept incoming data, but you can send outgoing data. The stopped
state is cleared by continue-process
and set by
stop-process
.
:filter filter
Install filter as the process filter.
:sentinel sentinel
Install sentinel as the process sentinel.
:plist plist
Install plist as the initial plist of the process.
:bytesize
:parity
:stopbits
:flowcontrol
These are handled by serial-process-configure
, which is called
by make-serial-process
.
The original argument list, possibly modified by later configuration,
is available via the function process-contact
.
Here is an example:
(make-serial-process :port "/dev/ttyS0" :speed 9600)
This function configures a serial port connection. Arguments are
specified as keyword/argument pairs. Attributes that are not given
are re-initialized from the process’s current configuration (available
via the function process-contact
), or set to reasonable default
values. The following arguments are defined:
:process process
:name name
:buffer buffer
:port port
Any of these arguments can be given to identify the process that is to be configured. If none of these arguments is given, the current buffer’s process is used.
:speed speed
The speed of the serial port in bits per second, a.k.a. baud
rate. The value can be any number, but most serial ports work only
at a few defined values between 1200 and 115200, with 9600 being the
most common value. If speed is nil
, the function ignores
all other arguments and does not configure the port. This may be
useful for special serial ports such as Bluetooth-to-serial converters,
which can only be configured through ‘AT’ commands sent through the
connection. The value of nil
for speed is valid only for
connections that were already opened by a previous call to
make-serial-process
or serial-term
.
:bytesize bytesize
The number of bits per byte, which can be 7 or 8. If bytesize
is not given or nil
, it defaults to 8.
:parity parity
The value can be nil
(don’t use parity), the symbol
odd
(use odd parity), or the symbol even
(use even
parity). If parity is not given, it defaults to no parity.
:stopbits stopbits
The number of stopbits used to terminate a transmission
of each byte. stopbits can be 1 or 2. If stopbits is not
given or nil
, it defaults to 1.
:flowcontrol flowcontrol
The type of flow control to use for this connection, which is either
nil
(don’t use flow control), the symbol hw
(use RTS/CTS
hardware flow control), or the symbol sw
(use XON/XOFF software
flow control). If flowcontrol is not given, it defaults to no
flow control.
Internally, make-serial-process
calls
serial-process-configure
for the initial configuration of the
serial port.
This section describes how to pack and unpack arrays of bytes,
usually for binary network protocols. These functions convert byte arrays
to alists, and vice versa. The byte array can be represented as a
unibyte string or as a vector of integers, while the alist associates
symbols either with fixed-size objects or with recursive sub-alists.
To use the functions referred to in this section, load the
bindat
library.
Conversion from byte arrays to nested alists is also known as deserializing or unpacking, while going in the opposite direction is also known as serializing or packing.
To control unpacking and packing, you write a data layout
specification, also called a Bindat type expression. This can
be a base type or a composite type made of several fields,
where the specification controls the length of each field to be
processed, and how to pack or unpack it. We normally keep bindat type
values in variables whose names end in -bindat-spec
; that kind
of name is automatically recognized as risky (see File Local Variables).
Creates a Bindat type value object according to the Bindat type expression type.
A field’s type describes the size (in bytes) of the object
that the field represents and, in the case of multibyte fields, how
the bytes are ordered within the field. The two possible orderings
are big endian (also known as “network byte ordering”) and
little endian. For instance, the number #x23cd
(decimal
9165) in big endian would be the two bytes #x23
#xcd
;
and in little endian, #xcd
#x23
. Here are the possible
type values:
u8
byte
Unsigned byte, with length 1.
uint bitlen &optional le
Unsigned integer in network byte order (big-endian), with bitlen bits.
bitlen has to be a multiple of 8.
If le is non-nil
, then use little-endian byte order.
sint bitlen le
Signed integer in network byte order (big-endian), with bitlen bits.
bitlen has to be a multiple of 8.
If le is non-nil
, then use little-endian byte order.
str len
Unibyte string (see Text Representations) of length len bytes.
When packing, the first len bytes of the input string are copied
to the packed output. If the input string is shorter than len,
the remaining bytes will be null (zero) unless a pre-allocated string
was provided to bindat-pack
, in which case the remaining bytes
are left unmodified. If the input string is multibyte with only ASCII
and eight-bit
characters, it is converted to unibyte before it
is packed; other multibyte strings signal an error. When unpacking,
any null bytes in the packed input string will appear in the unpacked
output.
strz &optional len
If len is not provided, this is a variable-length
null-terminated unibyte string (see Text Representations). When
packing into strz
, the entire input string is copied to the
packed output followed by a null (zero) byte. (If pre-allocated
string is provided for packing into strz
, that pre-allocated
string should have enough space for the additional null byte appended
to the output string contents, see Functions to Unpack and Pack Bytes). The length
of the packed output is the length of the input string plus one (for
the null terminator). The input string must not contain any null
bytes. If the input string is multibyte with only ASCII and
eight-bit
characters, it is converted to unibyte before it is
packed; other multibyte strings signal an error. When unpacking a
strz
, the resulting output string will contain all bytes up to
(but excluding) the null byte that terminated the input string.
If len is provided, strz
behaves the same as str
,
but with a couple of differences:
Caution: The packed output will not be null-terminated unless the input string is shorter than len bytes or it contains a null byte within the first len bytes.
vec len [type]
Vector of len elements. The type of the elements is given by type, defaulting to bytes. The type can be any Bindat type expression.
repeat len [type]
Like vec
, but it unpacks to and packs from lists, whereas
vec
unpacks to vectors.
bits len
List of bits that are set to 1 in len bytes. The bytes are
taken in big-endian order, and the bits are numbered starting with
8 * len − 1
and ending with zero. For example:
bits 2
unpacks #x28
#x1c
to (2 3 4 11 13)
and #x1c
#x28
to (3 5 10 11 12)
.
fill len
len bytes used as a mere filler. In packing, these bytes are
left unchanged, which normally means they remain zero.
When unpacking, this just returns nil
.
align len
Same as fill
except the number of bytes is that needed to skip
to the next multiple of len bytes.
type exp
This lets you refer to a type indirectly: exp is a Lisp expression which should return a Bindat type value.
unit exp
This is a trivial type which uses up 0 bits of space. exp describes the value returned when we try to “unpack” such a field.
struct fields...
Composite type made of several fields. Every field is of the form
(name type)
where type can be any Bindat
type expression. name can be _
when the field’s value
does not deserve to be named, as is often the case for align
and fill
fields.
When the context makes it clear that this is a Bindat type expression,
the symbol struct
can be omitted.
In the types above, len and bitlen are given as an integer specifying the number of bytes (or bits) in the field. When the length of a field is not fixed, it typically depends on the value of preceding fields. For this reason, the length len does not have to be a constant but can be any Lisp expression and it can refer to the value of previous fields via their name.
For example, the specification of a data layout where a leading byte gives the size of a subsequent vector of 16 bit integers could be:
(bindat-type (len u8) (payload vec (1+ len) uint 16))
In the following documentation, type refers to a Bindat type
value as returned from bindat-type
, raw to a byte
array, and struct to an alist representing unpacked field data.
This function unpacks data from the unibyte string or byte
array raw
according to type. Normally, this starts unpacking at the
beginning of the byte array, but if idx is non-nil
, it
specifies a zero-based starting position to use instead.
The value is an alist or nested alist in which each element describes one unpacked field.
This function selects a field’s data from the nested alist
struct. Usually struct was returned by
bindat-unpack
. If name corresponds to just one argument,
that means to extract a top-level field value. Multiple name
arguments specify repeated lookup of sub-structures. An integer
name acts as an array index.
For example, (bindat-get-field struct a b 2 c)
means
to find field c
in the third element of subfield b
of
field a
. (This corresponds to struct.a.b[2].c
in
the C programming language syntax.)
Although packing and unpacking operations change the organization of data (in memory), they preserve the data’s total length, which is the sum of all the fields’ lengths, in bytes. This value is not generally inherent in either the specification or alist alone; instead, both pieces of information contribute to its calculation. Likewise, the length of a string or array being unpacked may be longer than the data’s total length as described by the specification.
This function returns the total length of the data in struct, according to type.
This function returns a byte array packed according to type from
the data in the alist struct. It normally creates and fills a
new byte array starting at the beginning. However, if raw
is non-nil
, it specifies a pre-allocated unibyte string or vector to
pack into. If idx is non-nil
, it specifies the starting
offset for packing into raw.
When pre-allocating, you should make sure (length raw)
meets or exceeds the total length to avoid an out-of-range error.
Convert the Internet address vector ip to a string in the usual dotted notation.
(bindat-ip-to-string [127 0 0 1]) ⇒ "127.0.0.1"
Bindat type expressions are not limited to the types described earlier. They can also be arbitrary Lisp forms returning Bindat type expressions. For example, the type below describes data which can either contain a 24-bit error code or a vector of bytes:
(bindat-type (len u8) (payload . (if (zerop len) (uint 24) (vec (1- len)))))
Furthermore, while composite types are normally unpacked to (and packed from) association lists, this can be changed via the use of the following special keyword arguments:
:unpack-val exp
When the list of fields ends with this keyword argument, then the value returned when unpacking is the value of exp instead of the standard alist. exp can refer to all the previous fields by their name.
:pack-val exp
If a field’s type is followed by this keyword argument, then the value packed into this field is returned by exp instead of being extracted from the alist.
:pack-var name
If the list of fields is preceded by this keyword argument, then all
the subsequent :pack-val
arguments can refer to the overall
value to pack into this composite type via the variable named
name.
For example, one could describe a 16-bit signed integer as follows:
(defconst sint16-bindat-spec (let* ((max (ash 1 15)) (wrap (+ max max))) (bindat-type :pack-var v (n uint 16 :pack-val (if (< v 0) (+ v wrap) v)) :unpack-val (if (>= n max) (- n wrap) n))))
Which would then behave as follows:
(bindat-pack sint16-bindat-spec -8) ⇒ "\377\370" (bindat-unpack sint16-bindat-spec "\300\100") ⇒ -16320
Finally, you can define new Bindat type forms to use in Bindat type
expressions with bindat-defmacro
:
Define a new Bindat type expression named name and taking
arguments args. Its behavior follows that of defmacro
,
which the important difference that the new forms can only be used
within Bindat type expressions.
This chapter describes a number of features related to the display that Emacs presents to the user.
display
PropertyThe function redraw-frame
clears and redisplays the entire
contents of a given frame (see Frames). This is useful if the
screen is corrupted.
This function clears and redisplays frame frame. If frame
is omitted or nil
, it redraws the selected frame.
Even more powerful is redraw-display
:
This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If you call these functions when input is available, they don’t redisplay immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen eventually—after all the input has been processed.
On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
has been suspended and resumed. Non-nil
means there is no need
to redraw, nil
means redrawing is needed. The default is nil
.
Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for input. With the following function, you can request an immediate attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually waiting for input.
This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
force, if non-nil
, forces the redisplay to be performed,
instead of being preempted if input is pending.
The function returns t
if it actually tried to redisplay, and
nil
otherwise. A value of t
does not mean that
redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
newly arriving input.
Although redisplay
tries immediately to redisplay, it does
not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
Emacs does a redisplay. If object is a window, that window is
to be updated. If object is a buffer or buffer name, all
windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If object is
nil
(or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
it waits for input, or when the function redisplay
is called.
A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be nil
,
meaning only the selected window, or t
, meaning all the
windows.
This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
window that is about to be redisplayed, with current-buffer
set
to the buffer displayed in that window.
When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs can continue the line (make it wrap to the next screen line), or truncate the line (limit it to one screen line). The additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called continuation lines. Continuation is not the same as filling; continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents, and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word boundary. See Filling.
On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
indicate truncated and continued lines (see Fringes). On a text
terminal, and on a graphical display when fringe-mode
was
turned off, a ‘$’ in the rightmost column of the window indicates
truncation; a ‘\’ on the rightmost column indicates a line that
wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
for this; see Display Tables).
Since wrapping and truncation of text contradict each other, Emacs turns off line truncation when wrapping is requested, and vice versa.
If this buffer-local variable is non-nil
, lines that extend
beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
continued. As a special exception, the variable
truncate-partial-width-windows
takes precedence in
partial-width windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
entire frame width).
This variable controls line truncation in partial-width windows.
A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
width (see Splitting Windows). If the value is nil
, line
truncation is determined by the variable truncate-lines
(see
above). If the value is an integer n, lines are truncated if
the partial-width window has fewer than n columns, regardless of
the value of truncate-lines
; if the partial-width window has
n or more columns, line truncation is determined by
truncate-lines
. For any other non-nil
value, lines are
truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
truncate-lines
.
When horizontal scrolling (see Horizontal Scrolling) is in use in a window, that forces truncation.
If this buffer-local variable is non-nil
, it defines a
wrap prefix which Emacs displays at the start of every
continuation line. (If lines are truncated, wrap-prefix
is
never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (see Other Display Specifications), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
:width
or :align-to
display properties (see Specified Spaces). The value is interpreted in the same way as a display
text property. See The display
Property.
A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
wrap-prefix
text or overlay property. This takes precedence
over the wrap-prefix
variable. See Properties with Special Meanings.
If this buffer-local variable is non-nil
, it defines a
line prefix which Emacs displays at the start of every
non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
(see Other Display Specifications), or a stretch of whitespace such as
specified by the :width
or :align-to
display properties
(see Specified Spaces). The value is interpreted in the same way
as a display
text property. See The display
Property.
A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
line-prefix
text or overlay property. This takes precedence
over the line-prefix
variable. See Properties with Special Meanings.
The echo area is used for displaying error messages
(see Errors), for messages made with the message
primitive,
and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
place on the screen as the echo area. See The
Minibuffer in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying t
as the output
stream. See Output Streams.
This section describes the standard functions for displaying messages in the echo area.
This function displays a message in the echo area.
format-string is a format string, and arguments are the
objects for its format specifications, like in the format-message
function (see Formatting Strings). The resulting formatted string
is displayed in the echo area; if it contains face
text
properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (see Faces).
The string is also added to the *Messages* buffer, but without
text properties (see Logging Messages in *Messages*).
Typically grave accent and apostrophe in the format translate to
matching curved quotes, e.g., "Missing `%s'"
might result in
"Missing ‘foo’"
. See Text Quoting Style, for how to influence
or inhibit this translation.
In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream, followed by a newline.
When inhibit-message
is non-nil
, no message will be displayed
in the echo area, it will only be logged to ‘*Messages*’.
If format-string is nil
or the empty string,
message
clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
onto the screen immediately.
(message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name)) -| Reverting ‘subr.el’... ⇒ "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
---------- Echo Area ---------- Reverting ‘subr.el’... ---------- Echo Area ----------
To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
depending on its size, use display-message-or-buffer
(see below).
Warning: If you want to use your own string as a message
verbatim, don’t just write (message string)
. If
string contains ‘%’, ‘`’, or ‘'’ it may be
reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use (message
"%s" string)
.
The following facilities allow users and Lisp programs to control how echo-area messages are displayed.
If this variable is non-nil
, it should be a function of one
argument, the text of a message to display in the echo area. That
function will be called by message
and related functions. If
the function returns nil
, the message is displayed in the echo
area as usual. If the function returns a string, that string is
displayed in the echo area instead of the original message. If
the function returns any other non-nil
value, that means the
message was already handled, so message
will not display
anything in the echo area.
The default value calls set-minibuffer-message
, described
below.
If this variable is non-nil
, it should be a function of no
arguments; message
and related functions call it when their
argument message is nil
or the empty string, to clear the echo
area.
Usually this function is called when the next input event arrives
after displaying an echo-area message. The function is expected to
clear the message displayed by its counterpart function specified by
set-message-function
, but doesn’t have to. If the function
wants the echo area to remain uncleared, it should return the symbol
dont-clear-message
; any other value will result in the echo
area being cleared.
The default value is the function that clears the message displayed in an active minibuffer.
The value of this user option is a list of functions to be called for
handling display of echo-area messages. Each function is called with
one argument, the text of the message to display. If the function
returns a string, that string replaces the original message, and the
next function in the list is called with the new message text. If the
function returns nil
, the next function in the list is called
with the same text; if the last function in the list returns
nil
, the message text is displayed in the echo area. If the
function returns a non-nil
value that is not a string, the
message is considered to be handled, and no further functions in the
list are called.
The three useful functions to be put in the list that is the value of this option are described below.
This function displays message in the echo-area when the
minibuffer is not active, and at the end of the minibuffer when the
minibuffer is active. However, if the text shown in the active
minibuffer has the minibuffer-message
text property
(see Properties with Special Meanings) on some character, the message will be
displayed before the first character having that property.
This function is by default the only member of the list in
set-message-functions
.
If an echo-area message matches any regexp in the list that is
the value of the user option inhibit-message-regexps
, this
function suppresses the display of that message and returns a
non-nil
value that is not a string. Thus, if this function is
in the list set-message-functions
, the rest of the functions in
the list will not be called when message matches the regexps in
inhibit-message-regexps
. To ensure a matching message
will never be displayed, make this function be the first element of
the list in set-message-functions
.
This function accumulates several echo-area messages emitted one after
another, and returns them as a single string in which individual
messages are separated by newlines. Up to multi-message-max
recent messages can be accumulated. The accumulated messages are
discarded when more than multi-message-timeout
seconds have
elapsed since the time the first message was emitted.
When this variable is non-nil
, message
and related functions
will not display any messages in the Echo Area. Echo-area messages
are still logged in the *Messages* buffer, though.
This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during the execution of body. It displays message, executes body, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring the previous echo area contents.
This function displays a message like message
, but may display it
in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
a command that was invoked using the mouse—more precisely, if
last-nonmenu-event
(see Information from the Command Loop) is either
nil
or a list—then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
same criterion that y-or-n-p
uses to make a similar decision; see
Yes-or-No Queries.)
You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
last-nonmenu-event
to a suitable value around the call.
This function displays a message like message
, but uses a dialog
box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
support them, then message-box
uses the echo area, like
message
.
This function displays the message message, which may be either a
string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
echo area, as defined by max-mini-window-height
, it is displayed
in the echo area, using message
. Otherwise,
display-buffer
is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up buffer is used, the window used to display it.
If message is a string, then the optional argument buffer-name is the name of the buffer used to display it when a pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to *Message*. In the case where message is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
The optional arguments action and frame are as for
display-buffer
, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
echo area, or nil
if there is none.
When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung. A convenient way to do this is to use a progress reporter.
Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
(let ((progress-reporter (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..." 0 500))) (dotimes (k 500) (sit-for 0.01) (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k)) (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress reporting very fast.
When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
message in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
message is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
on a filename, for instance, use format-message
before calling this
function.
The arguments min-value and max-value should be numbers
standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
results of point-min
and point-max
correspondingly.
max-value should be greater than min-value.
Alternatively, you can set min-value and max-value to
nil
. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
process percentages; it instead displays a “spinner” that rotates a
notch each time you update the progress reporter.
If min-value and max-value are numbers, you can give the argument current-value a numerical value specifying the initial progress; if omitted, this defaults to min-value.
The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The progress reporter will wait for at least min-change more percents of the operation to be completed before printing next message; the default is one percent. min-time specifies the minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
This function calls progress-reporter-update
, so the first
message is printed immediately.
This function does the main work of reporting progress of your operation. It displays the message of reporter, followed by progress percentage determined by value. If percentage is zero, or close enough according to the min-change and min-time arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
reporter must be the result of a call to
make-progress-reporter
. value specifies the current
state of your operation and must be between min-value and
max-value (inclusive) as passed to
make-progress-reporter
. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
then value should be the result of a call to point
.
Optional argument suffix is a string to be displayed after
reporter’s main message and progress text. If reporter is
a non-numerical reporter, then value should be nil
, or a
string to use instead of suffix.
This function respects min-change and min-time as passed
to make-progress-reporter
and so does not output new messages
on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
likely negate your effort.
This function is similar to progress-reporter-update
except
that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
reporter, value, and suffix have the same meaning as for
progress-reporter-update
. Optional new-message allows
you to change the message of the reporter. Since this function
always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
presented to the user.
This function should be called when the operation is finished. It prints the message of reporter followed by word ‘done’ in the echo area.
You should always call this function and not hope for
progress-reporter-update
to print ‘100%’. Firstly, it may
never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
Secondly, ‘done’ is more explicit.
This is a convenience macro that works the same way as dotimes
does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
above. It allows you to save some typing. The argument
reporter-or-message can be either a string or a progress
reporter object.
You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this subsection using this macro as follows:
(dotimes-with-progress-reporter (k 500) "Collecting some mana for Emacs..." (sit-for 0.01))
Using a reporter object as the reporter-or-message argument is useful if you want to specify the optional arguments in make-progress-reporter. For instance, you can write the previous example as follows:
(dotimes-with-progress-reporter (k 500) (make-progress-reporter "Collecting some mana for Emacs..." 0 500 0 1 1.5) (sit-for 0.01))
This is another convenience macro that works the same way as dolist
does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
above. As in dotimes-with-progress-reporter
,
reporter-or-message
can be a progress reporter or a string.
You can rewrite the previous example with this macro as follows:
(dolist-with-progress-reporter (k (number-sequence 0 500)) "Collecting some mana for Emacs..." (sit-for 0.01))
Sometimes it’s unclear whether an operation will take a long time to execute or not, or it can be inconvenient to implement a progress reporter. This macro can be used in those situations.
(with-delayed-message (2 (format "Gathering data for %s" entry)) (setq data (gather-data entry)))
In this example, if the body takes more than two seconds to execute, the message will be displayed. If it takes a shorter time than that, the message won’t be displayed. In either case, the body is evaluated as normally, and the return value of the final element in the body is the return value of the macro.
The message element is evaluated before body, and is always evaluated, whether the message is displayed or not.
Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
in the *Messages* buffer so that the user can refer back to
them. This includes all the messages that are output with
message
. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
mode messages-buffer-mode
. Nothing prevents the user from
killing the *Messages* buffer, but the next display of a message
recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
*Messages* buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
should use the function messages-buffer
.
This function returns the *Messages* buffer. If it does not
exist, it creates it, and switches it to messages-buffer-mode
.
This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the *Messages*
buffer. The value t
means there is no limit on how many lines to
keep. The value nil
disables message logging entirely. Here’s
how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
(let (message-log-max) (message ...))
This variable has the name of the buffer where messages should be
logged to, and defaults to *Messages*. Some packages may find
it useful to temporarily redirect the output to a different buffer
(perhaps to write the buffer out to a log file later), and they can
bind this variable to a different buffer name. (Note that this buffer
(if it doesn’t exist already), will be created and put into
messages-buffer-mode
.)
To make *Messages* more convenient for the user, the logging facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
ones produced by y-or-n-p
: the first is ‘question’,
and the second is ‘question...answer’. The first
message conveys no additional information beyond what’s in the second,
so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
A series of progress messages has successive messages like
those produced by make-progress-reporter
. They have the form
‘base...how-far’, where base is the same each
time, while how-far varies. Logging each message in the series
discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
The functions make-progress-reporter
and y-or-n-p
don’t have to do anything special to activate the message log
combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
are logged that share a common prefix ending in ‘...’.
These variables control details of how the echo area works.
This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
displayed in the echo area. If it is non-nil
, then the cursor
appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
point—not in the echo area at all.
The value is normally nil
; Lisp programs bind it to t
for brief periods of time.
This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared—either by
(message nil)
or for any other reason.
This variable determines how much time should elapse before command characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix key (such as C-x) and then delays this many seconds before continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key sequence are echoed immediately.)
If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
the entire message, wrapping long line as needed. But if the variable
message-truncate-lines
is non-nil
, long lines of
echo-area message are instead truncated to fit the mini-window width.
The variable max-mini-window-height
, which specifies the
maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
see Minibuffer Windows).
Warnings are a facility for a program to inform the user of a possible problem, but continue running (as opposed to signaling an error, see Errors).
Every warning is a textual message, which explains the problem for the user, with the associated severity level which is a symbol. Here are the supported severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their meanings:
:emergency
A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon if the user does not attend to it promptly.
:error
A report about data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
:warning
A report about data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but raise suspicion of a possible problem.
:debug
A report of information that may be useful if the user is currently debugging the Lisp program which issues the warning.
When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
signal a Lisp error by calling error
or signal
(see How to Signal an Error) or report a warning with severity
:error
. Signaling a Lisp error is the easiest thing to do, but
it means the signaling program cannot continue execution. If you want
to take the trouble of implementing a way to continue processing
despite the invalid data, then reporting a warning of severity
:error
is the right way of informing the user of the problem.
For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an error that
way and continue compiling other functions. (If the program signals a
Lisp error and then handles it with condition-case
, the user
won’t see the error message; reporting that as a warning instead
avoids that problem.)
In addition to severity level, each warning has a warning type
to classify it. The warning type is either a symbol or a list of
symbols. If it is a symbol, it should be the custom group that you
use for the program’s user options; if it is a list, the first element
of the list should be that custom group. For example, byte compiler
warnings use the warning type (bytecomp)
. If the warning type
is a list, the elements of the list after the first one, which should
be arbitrary symbols, represent subcategories of the warning: they
will be displayed to the user to better explain the nature of the
warning.
This function reports a warning, using the string message as the
warning text and type as the warning type. level should
be the severity level, and defaults to :warning
if omitted or
nil
.
buffer-name, if non-nil
, specifies the name of the buffer
for logging the warning message. By default, it is *Warnings*.
This function reports a warning using the value returned by
(format-message message args…)
as the
message text in the *Warnings* buffer. In other respects it is
equivalent to display-warning
.
This function reports a warning using the value returned by
(format-message message args…)
as the
message text, emacs
as the warning type, and :warning
as
the severity level. It exists for compatibility only; we recommend
not using it, because you should specify a specific warning type.
Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding the variables described in this section.
This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning severity levels. Each element defines one severity level, and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
Each element has the form (level string [function])
, where level is the severity level it
defines. string specifies the textual description of this
level. string should use ‘%s’ to specify where to put the
warning type information, or it can omit the ‘%s’ so as not to
include that information.
The optional function, if non-nil
, is a function to call
with no arguments, to get the user’s attention. A notable example is
ding
(see Beeping).
Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
If non-nil
, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
display-warning
calls this function with the warnings buffer
the current buffer, and the function can insert text into it. That
text becomes the beginning of the warning message.
The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
entry in warning-levels
. It should return a list to use
instead of that entry (the value need not be an actual member
of warning-levels
, but it must have the same structure). By
constructing this value, the function can change the severity of the
warning, or specify different handling for a given severity level.
If the variable’s value is nil
, there’s no prefix text, before
the warning is displayed, starting with the string part of the
entry in warning-levels
corresponding to the warning’s level.
Programs can bind this variable to t
to say that the next
warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
The series ends when the local binding of this variable is unbound and
warning-series
becomes nil
again.
The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
equivalent to t
, except that the next warning will also call
the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer the current
buffer. The function can, for example, insert text which will serve
as a header for the series of warnings.
Once a series has begun, the value of this variable is a marker which points to the buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
The variable’s normal value is nil
, which means to handle
each warning separately.
When this variable is non-nil
, it specifies a fill prefix to
use for filling the text of each warning.
The column at which to fill warnings.
This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
in the warning text. The result of formatting the type this way
gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
entry in warning-levels
. The default value is " (%s)"
.
If you bind it to the empty string ""
then the warning type
won’t appear at all.
These variables are used by users to control what happens when a Lisp program reports a warning.
This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
shown immediately to the user, by popping the warnings buffer in some
window. The default is :warning
, which means to show the
warning buffer for any warning severity except :debug
. The
warnings of lower severity levels will still be written into the
warnings buffer, but the buffer will not be forced onto display.
This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
logged in the warnings buffer. Warnings of lower severity will be
completely ignored: not written to the warnings buffer and not
displayed. The default is :warning
, which means to log
warnings of any severity except :debug
.
This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed immediately when they occur. Each element of the list should be a list of symbols. If an element of this list has the same elements as the first elements in a warning type, then the warning of that type will not be shown on display by popping the warnings buffer in some window (the warning will still be logged in the warnings buffer).
For example, if the value of this variable is a list like this:
((foo) (bar subtype))
then warnings whose types are foo
or (foo)
or
(foo something)
or (bar subtype other)
will not
be shown to the user.
This list specifies which warning types should be ignored: not logged
in the warnings buffer and not shown to the user. The structure and
the matching of warning types are the same as for
warning-suppress-types
above.
During startup, Emacs delays showing any warnings until after it
loads and processes the site-wide and user’s init files
(see Summary: Sequence of Actions at Startup). Let-binding (see Local Variables) the
values of these options around some code in your init files which
might emit a warning will therefore not work, because it will not be
in effect by the time the warning is actually processed. Thus, if you
want to suppress some warnings during startup, change the values of
the above options in your init file early enough, or put those
let-binding forms in your after-init-hook
or
emacs-startup-hook
functions. See The Init File.
Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
use the function delay-warning
for this. Emacs automatically
delays any warnings emitted during the early stages of startup, and
shows them only after the init files are processed.
This function is the delayed counterpart to display-warning
(see Warning Basics), and it is called with the same arguments.
The warning message is queued into delayed-warnings-list
.
The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
(type message [level [buffer-name]])
with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
display-warning
. Immediately after running
post-command-hook
(see Command Loop Overview), the Emacs
command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
then resets the variable to nil
.
Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
mechanism can change the variable delayed-warnings-hook
:
This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
post-command-hook
, in order to process and display delayed
warnings. Emacs also runs this hook during startup, after loading the
site-start and user init files (see Summary: Sequence of Actions at Startup), because
warnings emitted before that are automatically delayed.
Its default value is a list of two functions:
(collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
The function collapse-delayed-warnings
removes repeated entries
from delayed-warnings-list
. The function
display-delayed-warnings
calls display-warning
on each
of the entries in delayed-warnings-list
, in turn, and then sets
delayed-warnings-list
to nil
.
You can make characters invisible, so that they do not appear on
the screen, with the invisible
property. This can be either a
text property (see Text Properties) or an overlay property
(see Overlays). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
of the text.
In the simplest case, any non-nil
invisible
property makes
a character invisible. This is the default case—if you don’t alter
the default value of buffer-invisibility-spec
, this is how the
invisible
property works. You should normally use t
as the value of the invisible
property if you don’t plan
to set buffer-invisibility-spec
yourself.
More generally, you can use the variable buffer-invisibility-spec
to control which values of the invisible
property make text
invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
in advance, by giving them different invisible
values, and
subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
value of buffer-invisibility-spec
.
Controlling visibility with buffer-invisibility-spec
is
especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
the buffer looking for properties to change.
This variable specifies which kinds of invisible
properties
actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
buffer-local.
t
A character is invisible if its invisible
property is
non-nil
. This is the default.
Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
character’s invisible
property fits any one of these criteria,
the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
atom
A character is invisible if its invisible
property value is
atom or if it is a list with atom as a member; comparison
is done with eq
.
(atom . t)
A character is invisible if its invisible
property value is
atom or if it is a list with atom as a member; comparison
is done with eq
. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
displays as an ellipsis.
Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
buffer-invisibility-spec
and removing elements from it.
This function adds the element element to
buffer-invisibility-spec
. If buffer-invisibility-spec
was t
, it changes to a list, (t)
, so that text whose
invisible
property is t
remains invisible.
This removes the element element from
buffer-invisibility-spec
. This does nothing if element
is not in the list.
A convention for use of buffer-invisibility-spec
is that a
major mode should use the mode’s own name as an element of
buffer-invisibility-spec
and as the value of the
invisible
property:
;; If you want to display an ellipsis: (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) ;; If you don’t want ellipsis: (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) ;; When done with the invisibility: (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) ;; Or respectively: (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
You can check for invisibility using the following function:
If pos-or-prop is a marker or number, this function returns a
non-nil
value if the text at that position is currently
invisible.
If pos-or-prop is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
to mean a possible value of the invisible
text or overlay
property. In that case, this function returns a non-nil
value
if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
current value of buffer-invisibility-spec
.
The return value of this function is t
if the text would be
completely hidden on display, or a non-nil
, non-t
value
if the text would be replaced by an ellipsis.
Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
such as next-line
, previous-line
, ignore invisible
newlines if line-move-ignore-invisible
is non-nil
(the
default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn’t exist in
the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
would not inherit the invisible
property. Additionally, if the
text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
try and reflect the command’s movement by a visible movement of the
cursor.
Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward one more character.
These adjustments of point that ended up in the middle of
invisible text can be disabled by setting disable-point-adjustment
to a non-nil
value. See Adjusting Point After Commands.
Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
this, the overlay should have a non-nil
isearch-open-invisible
property. The property value should be a
function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
isearch-open-invisible-temporary
property which is a function.
The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
the second is nil
to make the overlay visible, or t
to
make it invisible again.
Selective display refers to a pair of related features for hiding certain lines on the screen.
The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
hiding is now obsolete and deprecated; instead you should use the
invisible
property (see Invisible Text) to get the same effect.
In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a user-level feature.
The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
example, C-f (forward-char
) moves point unhesitatingly
into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
example, next-line
skips hidden lines, since it searches only
for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
parts of the text are hidden.
When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the control-m’s are output as newlines. This means that when you next read in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display effect is seen only within Emacs.
This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
selective-display
is t
, then the character
control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
display.
selective-display
is a positive integer, then
lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
displayed.
When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
next-line
command to skip any number of hidden lines.
However, character movement commands (such as forward-char
) do
not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
or delete text in a hidden portion.
In the examples below, we show the display appearance of the
buffer foo
, which changes with the value of
selective-display
. The contents of the buffer do not
change.
(setq selective-display nil) ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- 1 on this column 2on this column 3n this column 3n this column 2on this column 1 on this column ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(setq selective-display 2) ⇒ 2 ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- 1 on this column 2on this column 2on this column 1 on this column ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
If this buffer-local variable is non-nil
, then Emacs displays
‘…’ at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
This example is a continuation of the previous one.
(setq selective-display-ellipses t) ⇒ t ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- 1 on this column 2on this column ... 2on this column 1 on this column ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis (‘…’). See Display Tables.
Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for editing. Many help commands use this feature.
This function executes the forms in body while arranging to insert
any output they print into the buffer named buffer-name, which is
first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
form with-temp-buffer-window
below.) Finally, the buffer is
displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
If the forms in body do not change the major mode in the output
buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
then with-output-to-temp-buffer
makes this buffer read-only at
the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
into clickable cross-references. See Tips for
Documentation Strings, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
documentation strings, for more details.
The string buffer-name specifies the temporary buffer, which need
not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
as unmodified after with-output-to-temp-buffer
exits.
with-output-to-temp-buffer
binds standard-output
to the
temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in body. Output
using the Lisp output functions within body goes by default to
that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
they are “output” in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
See Output Functions.
Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior of this construct; they are listed below.
The value of the last form in body is returned.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo" (print 20) (print standard-output)) ⇒ #<buffer foo> ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- 20 #<buffer foo> ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
If this variable is non-nil
, with-output-to-temp-buffer
calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
It is a good idea for this function to run temp-buffer-show-hook
just as with-output-to-temp-buffer
normally would, inside of
save-selected-window
and with the chosen window and buffer
selected.
This normal hook is run by with-output-to-temp-buffer
before
evaluating body. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
buffer in Help mode.
This normal hook is run by with-output-to-temp-buffer
after
displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
This macro is similar to with-output-to-temp-buffer
. Like that
construct, it executes body while arranging to insert any output
it prints into the buffer named buffer-or-name and displays that
buffer in some window. Unlike with-output-to-temp-buffer
,
however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
The argument buffer-or-name specifies the temporary buffer. It
can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
marked as unmodified and read-only when with-temp-buffer-window
exits.
This macro does not call temp-buffer-show-function
. Rather, it
passes the action argument to display-buffer
(see Choosing a Window for Displaying a Buffer) in order to display the buffer.
The value of the last form in body is returned, unless the argument quit-function is specified. In that case, it is called with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of body. The final return value is then whatever quit-function returns.
This macro uses the normal hooks temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
and temp-buffer-window-show-hook
in place of the analogous hooks
run by with-output-to-temp-buffer
.
The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
with-temp-buffer-window
but differ from it as specified:
This macro is like with-temp-buffer-window
but unlike that makes
the buffer specified by buffer-or-name current for running
body.
A window showing a temporary buffer can be fitted to the size of that buffer using the following mode:
When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are automatically resized to fit their buffer’s contents.
A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
are not resized. By default, this mode uses fit-window-to-buffer
(see Resizing Windows) for resizing. You can specify a different
function by customizing the options temp-buffer-max-height
and
temp-buffer-max-width
below.
The effect of this option can be overridden by providing a suitable
window-height
, window-width
or window-size
action
alist entry for display-buffer
(see Action Alists for Buffer Display).
This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
displaying a temporary buffer when temp-buffer-resize-mode
is
enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
be resized is selected.
This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
displaying a temporary buffer when temp-buffer-resize-mode
is
enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
resized is selected.
The following function uses the current buffer for temporary display:
This function momentarily displays string in the current buffer at position. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer’s modification status.
The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
input event is char, momentary-string-display
ignores it
and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
as input. Thus, typing char will simply remove the string from
the display, while typing (say) C-f will remove the string from
the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
char is a space by default.
The return value of momentary-string-display
is not meaningful.
If the string string does not contain control characters, you can
do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
deleting) an overlay with a before-string
property.
See Overlay Properties.
If message is non-nil
, it is displayed in the echo area
while string is displayed in the buffer. If it is nil
, a
default message says to type char to continue.
In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the second line:
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of foo. ∗Second line. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(momentary-string-display "**** Important Message! ****" (point) ?\r "Type RET when done reading") ⇒ t
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the contents of foo. **** Important Message! ****Second line. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- ---------- Echo Area ---------- Type RET when done reading ---------- Echo Area ----------
You can use overlays to alter the appearance of a buffer’s text on the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set; these affect the display of the text within the overlaid portion of the buffer.
Editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay, you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
This section describes the functions to create, delete and move overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not recorded in the buffer’s undo list, since the overlays are not considered part of the buffer’s contents.
This function returns t
if object is an overlay.
This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to buffer and ranges from start to end. Both start and end must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers. If buffer is omitted, the overlay is created in the current buffer.
An overlay whose start and end specify the same buffer position is known as empty. A non-empty overlay can become empty if the text between its start and end is deleted. When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can cause it to be deleted by giving it the ‘evaporate’ property (see evaporate property).
The arguments front-advance and rear-advance specify what
happens when text is inserted at the beginning (i.e., before
start) and at the end. If they are both nil
, the
default, then the overlay extends to include any text inserted at the
beginning, but not text inserted at the end. If front-advance
is non-nil
, text inserted at the beginning of the overlay is
excluded from the overlay. If rear-advance is non-nil
,
text inserted at the end of the overlay is included in the overlay.
This function returns the position at which overlay starts, as an integer.
This function returns the position at which overlay ends, as an integer.
This function returns the buffer that overlay belongs to. It
returns nil
if overlay has been deleted.
This function deletes the specified overlay. The overlay continues to exist as a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on display.
A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
position in a buffer again by calling move-overlay
.
This function moves overlay to buffer, and places its bounds at start and end in that buffer. Both arguments start and end must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
If buffer is omitted, overlay stays in the same buffer it was already associated with; if overlay was previously deleted (and thus isn’t associated with any buffer), it goes into the current buffer.
The return value is overlay.
This function is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay.
This function removes all the overlays between start and end whose property name has the specified value. It can move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
If name is omitted or nil
, it means to delete all overlays in
the specified region. If start and/or end are omitted or
nil
, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
Therefore, (remove-overlays)
removes all the overlays in the
current buffer.
This function returns a copy of overlay. The copy has the same endpoints and properties as overlay. However, the text insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the overlay are set to their default values.
Here are some examples:
;; Create an overlay.
(setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
⇒ #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
(overlay-start foo) ⇒ 1
(overlay-end foo) ⇒ 10 (overlay-buffer foo) ⇒ #<buffer display.texi> ;; Give it a property we can check later. (overlay-put foo 'happy t) ⇒ t ;; Verify the property is present. (overlay-get foo 'happy) ⇒ t
;; Move the overlay.
(move-overlay foo 5 20)
⇒ #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
(overlay-start foo)
⇒ 5
(overlay-end foo)
⇒ 20
;; Delete the overlay. (delete-overlay foo) ⇒ nil ;; Verify it is deleted. foo ⇒ #<overlay in no buffer> ;; A deleted overlay has no position. (overlay-start foo) ⇒ nil (overlay-end foo) ⇒ nil (overlay-buffer foo) ⇒ nil
;; Undelete the overlay. (move-overlay foo 1 20) ⇒ #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi> ;; Verify the results. (overlay-start foo) ⇒ 1 (overlay-end foo) ⇒ 20 (overlay-buffer foo) ⇒ #<buffer display.texi>
;; Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.
(overlay-get foo 'happy)
⇒ t
Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in most respects they are different. See Text Properties, for comparison.
Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays. Changing a buffer’s text properties marks the buffer as modified, while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in the buffer’s undo list.
Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each overlay. The priority value is used to decide which of the overlapping overlays will “win”.
These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
This function returns the value of property prop recorded in
overlay, if any. If overlay does not record any value for
that property, but it does have a category
property which is a
symbol, that symbol’s prop property is used. Otherwise, the value
is nil
.
This function sets the value of property prop recorded in overlay to value. It returns value.
This returns a copy of the property list of overlay.
See also the function get-char-property
which checks both
overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
See Examining Text Properties.
Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table of them:
priority
¶This property’s value determines the priority of the overlay. If you
want to specify a priority value, use either nil
(or zero), or
a positive integer, or a cons of two values. Any other value triggers
undefined behavior.
The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
character and both specify the same property with different values;
the one whose priority
value is higher overrides the other.
(For the face
property, the higher priority overlay’s value
does not completely override the other value; instead, its individual
face attributes override the corresponding face attributes of the
face
property whose priority is lower.) If two overlays have
the same priority value, and one is “nested” in the other (i.e.,
covers fewer buffer or string positions), then the inner one will
prevail over the outer one. If neither is nested in the other then
you should not make assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
When a Lisp program puts overlays with defined priorities on text that
might have overlays without priorities, this could cause undesirable
results, because any overlay with a positive priority value will
override all the overlays without a priority. Since most Emacs
features that use overlays don’t specify priorities for their
overlays, integer priorities should be used with care. Instead of
using integer priorities and risk overriding other overlays, you can
use priority values of the form (primary . secondary)
,
where the primary value is used as described above, and
secondary is the fallback value used when primary and the
nesting considerations fail to resolve the precedence between
overlays. In particular, priority value (nil . n)
,
with n a positive integer, allows to have the overlays ordered
by priority when necessary without completely overriding other
overlays.
Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
If you need to put overlays in priority order, use the sorted
argument of overlays-at
. See Searching for Overlays.
window
¶If the window
property is non-nil
, then the overlay
applies only on that window.
category
¶If an overlay has a category
property, we call it the
category of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
face
¶This property controls the appearance of the text (see Faces). The value of the property can be the following:
(keyword
value …)
, where each keyword is a face attribute
name and value is a value for that attribute.
(foreground-color . color-name)
or (background-color . color-name)
. This specifies the
foreground or background color, similar to (:foreground
color-name)
or (:background color-name)
. This
form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
avoided.
mouse-face
¶This property is used instead of face
when the mouse is within
the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
from this property that alter the text size (e.g., :height
,
:weight
, and :slant
); those attributes are always the
same as in the unhighlighted text.
display
¶This property activates various features that change the
way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
See The display
Property.
help-echo
¶If an overlay has a help-echo
property, then when you move the
mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in
the echo area, or as a tooltip. For details see Text help-echo.
field
¶Consecutive characters with the same field
property constitute a
field. Some motion functions including forward-word
and
beginning-of-line
stop moving at a field boundary.
See Defining and Using Fields.
modification-hooks
¶This property’s value is a list of functions to be called if any character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly within the overlay.
The hook functions are called both before and after each change. If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made in the buffer text.
When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
overlay, nil
, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
modified.
When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
overlay, t
, the beginning and end of the text range just
modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
(For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
beginning and end are equal.)
When these functions are called, inhibit-modification-hooks
is
bound to non-nil
. If the functions modify the buffer, you
might want to bind inhibit-modification-hooks
to nil
, so
as to cause the change hooks to run for these modifications. However,
doing this may call your own change hook recursively, so be sure to
prepare for that. See Change Hooks.
Text properties also support the modification-hooks
property,
but the details are somewhat different (see Properties with Special Meanings).
insert-in-front-hooks
¶This property’s value is a list of functions to be called before and
after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
conventions are the same as for the modification-hooks
functions.
insert-behind-hooks
¶This property’s value is a list of functions to be called before and
after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
conventions are the same as for the modification-hooks
functions.
invisible
¶The invisible
property can make the text in the overlay
invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
See Invisible Text, for details.
intangible
¶The intangible
property on an overlay works just like the
intangible
text property. It is obsolete. See Properties with Special Meanings, for details.
isearch-open-invisible
This property tells incremental search (see Incremental Search in The GNU Emacs Manual) how to make an invisible overlay visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. See Invisible Text.
isearch-open-invisible-temporary
This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay visible, temporarily, during the search. See Invisible Text.
before-string
¶This property’s value is a string to add to the display at the beginning of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any sense—only on the screen. Note that if the text at the beginning of the overlay is made invisible, the string will not be displayed.
after-string
¶This property’s value is a string to add to the display at the end of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any sense—only on the screen. Note that if the text at the end of the overlay is made invisible, the string will not be displayed.
line-prefix
This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each non-continuation line at display-time. See Truncation.
wrap-prefix
This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation line at display-time. See Truncation.
evaporate
¶If this property is non-nil
, the overlay is deleted automatically
if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
an empty overlay (see empty overlay) a
non-nil
evaporate
property, that deletes it immediately.
Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
from the buffer.
keymap
¶If this property is non-nil
, it specifies a keymap for a
portion of the text. This keymap takes precedence over most other
keymaps (see Active Keymaps), and it is used when point is within
the overlay, where the front-
and rear-advance properties define whether the boundaries are
considered as being within or not.
local-map
¶The local-map
property is similar to keymap
but replaces the
buffer’s local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
The keymap
and local-map
properties do not affect a
string displayed by the before-string
, after-string
, or
display
properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
keymap
or local-map
text property. See Properties with Special Meanings.
This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
position pos in the current buffer. If sorted is non-nil
,
the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
order. An overlay contains position pos if it begins at or before
pos, and ends after pos.
To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the overlays that specify property prop for the character at point:
(defun find-overlays-specifying (prop) (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point))) found) (while overlays (let ((overlay (car overlays))) (if (overlay-get overlay prop) (setq found (cons overlay found)))) (setq overlays (cdr overlays))) found))
This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region beg through end. An overlay overlaps with a region if it contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays (see empty overlay) overlap if they are at beg, strictly between beg and end, or at end when end denotes the position at the end of the accessible part of the buffer.
This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
of an overlay, after pos. If there is none, it returns
(point-max)
.
This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
end of an overlay, before pos. If there is none, it returns
(point-min)
.
As an example, here’s a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
primitive function next-single-char-property-change
(see Text Property Search Functions). It searches forward from position
pos for the next position where the value of a given property
prop
, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
changes.
(defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop) (save-excursion (goto-char position) (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop))) (while (and (not (eobp)) (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval)) (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point)) (next-single-property-change (point) prop))))) (point)))
Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you check the width of a character. See Indentation Primitives, and Motion by Screen Lines, for related functions.
This function returns the width in columns of the character
char, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
into account the buffer’s display table, if any; see Display Tables). The width of a tab character is usually tab-width
(see Usual Display Conventions).
Return non-nil
if char is an uppercase character
according to Unicode.
This function returns the width in columns of the string string,
if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Optional arguments from and to specify the substring of
string to consider, and are interpreted as in substring
(see Creating Strings).
The return value is an approximation: it only considers the values
returned by char-width
for the constituent characters, always
takes a tab character as taking tab-width
columns, ignores
display properties and fonts, etc. For these reasons, we recommend
using window-text-pixel-size
or string-pixel-width
,
described below, instead.
This function returns a new string that is a truncation of string which fits within width columns on display.
If string is narrower than width, the result is equal to string; otherwise excess characters are omitted from the result. If a multi-column character in string exceeds the goal width, that character is omitted from the result. Thus, the result can sometimes fall short of width, but cannot go beyond it.
The optional argument start-column specifies the starting
column; it defaults to zero. If this is non-nil
, then the
first start-column columns of the string are omitted from the
result. If one multi-column character in string extends across
the column start-column, that character is omitted.
The optional argument padding, if non-nil
, is a padding
character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to
extend it to exactly width columns. The padding character is
appended at the end of the result if it falls short of width, as
many times as needed to reach width. It is also prepended at
the beginning of the result if a multi-column character in
string extends across the column start-column.
If ellipsis is non-nil
, it should be a string which will
replace the end of string when it is truncated. In this case,
more characters will be removed from string to free enough space
for ellipsis to fit within width columns. However, if
the display width of string is less than the display width of
ellipsis, ellipsis will not be appended to the result. If
ellipsis is non-nil
and not a string, it stands for the
value returned by the function truncate-string-ellipsis
,
described below.
The optional argument ellipsis-text-property, if non-nil
,
means hide the excess parts of string with a display
text
property (see The display
Property) showing the ellipsis, instead of
actually truncating the string.
(truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4) ⇒ "ab" (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s) ⇒ " ab "
This function uses string-width
and char-width
to find
the suitable truncation point when string is too wide, so it
suffers from the same basic issues as string-width
does. In
particular, when character composition happens within string,
the display width of a string could be smaller than the sum of widths
of the constituent characters, and this function might return
inaccurate results.
This function returns the string to be used as an ellipses in
truncate-string-to-width
and other similar contexts. The value
is that of the variable truncate-string-ellipsis
, if it’s
non-nil
, the string with the single character U+2026
HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS if that character can be displayed on the
selected frame, and the string ‘...’ otherwise.
The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
displayed in a given window. This function is used by
fit-window-to-buffer
and fit-frame-to-buffer
(see Resizing Windows) to make a window exactly as large as the text
it contains.
This function returns the size of the text of window’s buffer in pixels. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines. This function exists to allow Lisp programs to adjust the dimensions of window to the buffer text it needs to display, and for other similar situations.
The return value can also optionally (see below) include the buffer position of the first line whose dimensions were measured.
The optional argument from, if non-nil
, specifies the
first text position to consider, and defaults to the minimum
accessible position of the buffer. If from is t
, it
stands for the minimum accessible position that is not a newline
character. If from is a cons, its car
specifies a buffer
position, and its cdr
specifies the vertical offset in pixels
from that position to the first screen line whose text is to be
measured. (The measurement will start from the visual beginning of
that screen line.) In that case, the return value will instead be a
list of the pixel-width, pixel-height, and the buffer position of the
first line that was measured. The optional argument to, if
non-nil
, specifies the last text position to consider, and
defaults to the maximum accessible position of the buffer. If
to is t
, it stands for the maximum accessible position
that is not a newline character.
The optional argument x-limit, if non-nil
, specifies the
maximum X coordinate beyond which text should be ignored; it is
therefore also the largest value of pixel-width that the function can
return. If x-limit nil
or omitted, it means to use the
pixel-width of window’s body (see Window Sizes); this
default means that text of truncated lines wider than the window will
be ignored. This default is useful when the caller does not intend to
change the width of window. Otherwise, the caller should
specify here the maximum width window’s body may assume; in
particular, if truncated lines are expected and their text needs to be
accounted for, x-limit should be set to a large value. Since
calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it’s always a
good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
The optional argument y-limit, if non-nil
, specifies the
maximum Y coordinate beyond which text is to be ignored; it is
therefore also the maximum pixel-height that the function can return.
If y-limit is nil
or omitted, it means to consider all the
lines of text till the buffer position specified by to. Since
calculating the pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it
makes sense to specify this argument; in particular, if the caller
does not know the size of the buffer.
The optional argument mode-lines nil
or omitted means to
not include the height of the mode-, tab- or header-line of window
in the return value. If it is either the symbol mode-line
,
tab-line
or header-line
, include only the height of that
line, if present, in the return value. If it is t
, include the
height of all of these lines, if present, in the return value.
The optional argument ignore-line-at-end controls whether or not to count the height of text in to’s screen line as part of the returned pixel-height. This is useful if your Lisp program is only interested in the dimensions of text up to and excluding the visual beginning of to’s screen line.
window-text-pixel-size
treats the text displayed in a window as a
whole and does not care about the size of individual lines. The
following function does.
This function calculates the pixel dimensions of each line displayed in the specified window. It does so by walking window’s current glyph matrix—a matrix storing the glyph (see Glyphs) of each buffer character currently displayed in window. If successful, it returns a list of cons pairs representing the x- and y-coordinates of the lower right corner of the last character of each line. Coordinates are measured in pixels from an origin (0, 0) at the top-left corner of window. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
If the optional argument first is an integer, it denotes the index
(starting with 0) of the first line of window’s glyph matrix to be
returned. Note that if window has a header line, the line with
index 0 is that header line. If first is nil
, the first line to
be considered is determined by the value of the optional argument
body: If body is non-nil
, this means to start with
the first line of window’s body, skipping any header line, if
present. Otherwise, this function will start with the first line of
window’s glyph matrix, possibly the header line.
If the optional argument last is an integer, it denotes the index
of the last line of window’s glyph matrix that shall be returned.
If last is nil
, the last line to be considered is determined by
the value of body: If body is non-nil
, this means to
use the last line of window’s body, omitting window’s mode
line, if present. Otherwise, this means to use the last line of
window which may be the mode line.
The optional argument inverse, if nil
, means that the
y-pixel value returned for any line specifies the distance in pixels
from the left edge (body edge if body is non-nil
) of
window to the right edge of the last glyph of that line.
inverse non-nil
means that the y-pixel value returned for
any line specifies the distance in pixels from the right edge of the
last glyph of that line to the right edge (body edge if body is
non-nil
) of window. This is useful for determining the
amount of slack space at the end of each line.
The optional argument left, if non-nil
means to return the
x- and y-coordinates of the lower left corner of the leftmost character
on each line. This is the value that should be used for windows that
mostly display text from right to left.
If left is non-nil
and inverse is nil
, this
means that the y-pixel value returned for any line specifies the
distance in pixels from the left edge of the last (leftmost) glyph of
that line to the right edge (body edge if body is non-nil
)
of window. If left and inverse are both
non-nil
, the y-pixel value returned for any line specifies the
distance in pixels from the left edge (body edge if body is
non-nil
) of window to the left edge of the last (leftmost)
glyph of that line.
This function returns nil
if the current glyph matrix of
window is not up-to-date which usually happens when Emacs is busy,
for example, when processing a command. The value should be retrievable
though when this function is run from an idle timer with a delay of zero
seconds.
This is much like window-text-pixel-size
, but can be used when
the buffer isn’t shown in a window. (window-text-pixel-size
is
faster when it is, so this function shouldn’t be used in that case.)
buffer-or-name must specify a live buffer or the name of a live buffer and defaults to the current buffer. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one; the function will compute the text dimensions as if buffer is displayed in window. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text line and the pixel-height of all the text lines of the buffer specified by buffer-or-name.
The optional arguments x-limit and y-limit have the same
meaning as with window-text-pixel-size
.
This is a convenience function that uses window-text-pixel-size
to compute the width of string (in pixels).
This function returns the height in pixels of the line at point in the selected window. The value includes the line spacing of the line (see Line Height).
When character compositions are in effect, sequence of characters can be composed for display to form grapheme clusters, for example to display accented characters, or ligatures, or Emoji, or when complex text shaping requires that for some scripts. When that happens, characters no longer map in a simple way to display columns, and display layout decisions with such strings, such as truncating too wide strings, can be a complex job. This function helps in performing such jobs: it splits up its argument string into a list of substrings, where each substring produces a single grapheme cluster that should be displayed as a unit. Lisp programs can then use this list to construct visually-valid substrings of string which will look correctly on display, or compute the width of any substring of string by adding the width of its constituents in the returned list, etc.
For instance, if you want to display a string without the first glyph, you can say:
(apply #'insert (cdr (string-glyph-split string))))
When a buffer is displayed with line numbers (see Display Custom in The GNU Emacs Manual), it is sometimes useful to know the width taken for displaying the line numbers. The following function is for Lisp programs which need this information for layout calculations.
This function returns the width used for displaying the line numbers
in the selected window. If the optional argument pixelwise is
the symbol columns
, the return value is a float number of the
frame’s canonical columns; if pixelwise is t
or any other
non-nil
value, the value is an integer and is measured in
pixels. If pixelwise is omitted or nil
, the value is the
integer number of columns of the font defined for the
line-number
face, and doesn’t include the 2 columns used to pad
the numbers on display. If line numbers are not displayed in the
selected window, the value is zero regardless of the value of
pixelwise. Use with-selected-window
(see Selecting Windows) if you need this information about another window.
The total height of each display line consists of the height of the contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing above or below the display line.
The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is one. (A display line that is continued doesn’t include a final newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of the corresponding frame’s default font, see Frame Font.)
There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height, either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the actual line height can never be less than the default.
A newline can have a line-height
text or overlay property
that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
newline. The property value can be one of several forms:
t
If the property value is t
, the newline character has no
effect on the displayed height of the line—the visible contents
alone determine the height. The line-spacing
property of the
newline, described below, is also ignored in this case. This is
useful for tiling small images (or image slices) without adding blank
areas between the images.
(height total)
If the property value is a list of the form shown, that adds extra
space below the display line. First Emacs uses height as
a height spec to control extra space above the line; then it
adds enough space below the line to bring the total line height
up to total. In this case, any value of line-spacing
property for the newline is ignored.
Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates into a number—the specified line height. There are several ways to write a height spec; here’s how each of them translates into a number:
integer
If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
float
If the height spec is a float, float, the numeric height value is float times the frame’s default line height.
(face . ratio)
If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
is ratio times the height of face face. ratio can
be any type of number, or nil
which means a ratio of 1.
If face is t
, it refers to the current face.
(nil . ratio)
If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height is ratio times the height of the contents of the line.
Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way or another. If the line contents’ height is less than that, Emacs adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified total height.
If you don’t specify the line-height
property, the line’s
height consists of the contents’ height plus the line spacing.
There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
parts of Emacs text.
On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
lines in a frame, using the line-spacing
frame parameter
(see Layout Parameters). However, if the default value of
line-spacing
is non-nil
, it overrides the
frame’s line-spacing
parameter. An integer specifies the
number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
the spacing relative to the frame’s default line height.
You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
buffer-local line-spacing
variable. An integer specifies
the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
Finally, a newline can have a line-spacing
text or overlay
property that can enlarge the default frame line spacing and the
buffer local line-spacing
variable: if its value is larger than
the buffer or frame defaults, that larger value is used instead, for
the display line ending in that newline (unless the newline also has
the line-height
property whose value is one of the special
values which cause line-spacing
to be ignored, see above).
One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line height.
On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
A face is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining, etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
like (:foreground "red" :weight bold)
. Such a list is called
an anonymous face. For example, you can assign an anonymous
face as the value of the face
text property, and Emacs will
display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
See Properties with Special Meanings.
More commonly, a face is referred to via a face name: a Lisp
symbol associated with a set of face attributes29. Named faces are
defined using the defface
macro (see Defining Faces).
Emacs comes with several standard named faces (see Basic Faces).
Some parts of Emacs require named faces (e.g., the functions documented in Face Attribute Functions). Unless otherwise stated, we will use the term face to refer only to named faces.
This function returns a non-nil
value if object is a
named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
Otherwise, it returns nil
.
Face attributes determine the visual appearance of a face. The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible values, and their effects.
Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
value unspecified
. This special value means that the face
doesn’t specify that attribute directly. An unspecified
attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
description :inherit
attribute below); or, failing that, to an
underlying face (see Displaying Faces). (However,
unspecified
is not a valid value in defface
.)
A face attribute can also have the value reset
. This special
value stands for the value of the corresponding attribute of the
default
face.
The default
face must explicitly specify all attributes, and
cannot use the special value reset
.
Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the attribute is ignored.
:family
Font family name (a string). See Fonts in The GNU
Emacs Manual, for more information about font families. The function
font-family-list
(see below) returns a list of available family
names.
:foundry
The name of the font foundry for the font family specified by
the :family
attribute (a string). See Fonts in The
GNU Emacs Manual.
:width
Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
ultra-condensed
, extra-condensed
, condensed
,
semi-condensed
, normal
, regular
, medium
,
semi-expanded
, expanded
, extra-expanded
, or
ultra-expanded
.
:height
The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in units of 1/10 point.
The value can also be floating point or a function, which specifies the height relative to an underlying face (see Displaying Faces). A floating-point value specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the underlying face. A function value is called with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer argument, it must return an integer.
The height of the default face must be specified using an integer; floating point and function values are not allowed.
:weight
Font weight—one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
ultra-bold
, extra-bold
, bold
, semi-bold
,
normal
, semi-light
, light
, extra-light
, or
ultra-light
. On text terminals which support
variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
half-bright.
:slant
¶Font slant—one of the symbols italic
, oblique
,
normal
, reverse-italic
, or reverse-oblique
. On
text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
displayed as half-bright.
:foreground
Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color name, or a hexadecimal color specification. See Color Names. On black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by stipple patterns.
:distant-foreground
Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like :foreground
but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
If the foreground is near the region face background,
:distant-foreground
is used instead so the text is readable.
:background
Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color name, or a hexadecimal color specification. See Color Names.
:underline
¶Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
way. The possible values of the :underline
attribute are:
nil
Don’t underline.
t
Underline with the foreground color of the face.
Underline in color color, a string specifying a color.
(:color color :style style :position position)
color is either a string, or the symbol foreground-color
,
meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
:color
means to use the foreground color of the face.
style should be a symbol line
or wave
, meaning to
use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute :style
means to use a straight line. position, if non-nil
, means to
display the underline at the descent of the text, instead of at the
baseline level. If it is a number, then it specifies the amount of
pixels above the descent to display the underline.
:overline
¶Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
If the value is t
, overlining uses the foreground color of the
face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
value nil
means do not overline.
:strike-through
¶Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
color. The value is used like that of :overline
.
:box
¶Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
values of the :box
attribute, and what they mean:
nil
Don’t draw a box.
t
Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color color.
(:line-width (vwidth . hwidth) :color color :style style)
You can explicitly specify all aspects of the box with a plist on this form. Any element in this plist can be omitted.
The values of vwidth and hwidth specify respectively the
width of the vertical and horizontal lines to draw; they default to (1
. 1). A negative horizontal or vertical width −n means
to draw a line of width n that occupies the space of the
underlying text, thus avoiding any increase in the character height or
width. For simplification the width could be specified with only a
single number n instead of a list, such case is equivalent to
((abs n) . n)
.
The value of color specifies the color to draw with. The default
is the background color of the face for 3D boxes and
flat-button
, and the foreground color of the face for other
boxes.
The value of style specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
released-button
, the box looks like a 3D button that is not
being pressed. If it is pressed-button
, the box looks like a
3D button that is being pressed. If it is nil
,
flat-button
or omitted, a plain 2D box is used.
If you use the :box
face attribute on strings displayed instead
of buffer text via the display
text property, special
considerations might apply if the surrounding buffer text also has the
:box
face attribute. See Display Specs That Replace The Text.
:inverse-video
Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
value should be t
(yes) or nil
(no).
:stipple
The background stipple, a bitmap.
The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
listed in the variable x-bitmap-file-path
.
Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
of the form (width height data)
. Here,
width and height specify the size in pixels, and
data is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
row. Each row occupies (width + 7) / 8 consecutive bytes
in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
If the value is nil
, that means use no stipple pattern.
Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
:font
The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object or a fontset. If it is a font object, it specifies the font to be used by the face for displaying ASCII characters. See Low-Level Font Representation, for information about font objects, font specs, and font entities. See Fontsets, for information about fontsets.
When specifying this attribute using set-face-attribute
or
set-face-font
(see Face Attribute Functions), you may also
supply a font spec, a font entity, or a string. Emacs converts such
values to an appropriate font object, and stores that font object as
the actual attribute value. If you specify a string, the contents of
the string should be a font name (see Fonts in The GNU Emacs
Manual); if the font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs
chooses the first font matching those wildcards. Specifying this
attribute also changes the values of the :family
,
:foundry
, :width
, :height
, :weight
, and
:slant
attributes.
:inherit
¶The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
faces (see Displaying Faces). If the face to inherit from is
unspecified
, it is treated the same as nil
, since Emacs
never merges :inherit
attributes. If a list of faces is used,
attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
faces.
:extend
Whether or not this face will be extended beyond end of line and will
affect the display of the empty space between the end of line and the
edge of the window. The value should be t
to display the empty
space between end of line and edge of the window using this face, or
nil
to not use this face for the space between the end of the
line and the edge of the window. When Emacs merges several faces for
displaying the empty space beyond end of line, only those faces with
:extend
non-nil
will be merged. By default, only a
small number of faces, notably, region
, have this attribute
set. This attribute is different from the others in that when a theme
doesn’t specify an explicit value for a face, the value from the
original face definition by defface
is inherited
(see Defining Faces).
Some modes, like hl-line-mode
, use a face with an
:extend
property to mark the entire current line. Note,
however, that Emacs will always allow you to move point after the
final character in a buffer, and if the buffer ends with a newline
character, point can be placed on what is seemingly a line at the end
of the buffer—but Emacs can’t highlight that “line”, because it
doesn’t really exist.
This function returns a list of available font family names. The
optional argument frame specifies the frame on which the text is
to be displayed; if it is nil
, the selected frame is used.
This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
for bitmap files, for the :stipple
attribute.
This returns t
if object is a valid bitmap specification,
suitable for use with :stipple
(see above). It returns
nil
otherwise.
The usual way to define a face is through the defface
macro.
This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default face
spec. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
foreground color on low-color terminals.
People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
usual procedure is to define a face with defface
, and then use
its name directly.
Note that once you have defined a face (usually with defface
),
you cannot later undefine this face safely, except by restarting
Emacs.
This macro declares face as a named face whose default face spec
is given by spec. You should not quote the symbol face,
and it should not end in ‘-face’ (that would be redundant). The
argument doc is a documentation string for the face. The
additional keyword arguments have the same meanings as in
defgroup
and defcustom
(see Common Item Keywords).
If face already has a default face spec, this macro does nothing.
The default face spec determines face’s appearance when no customizations are in effect (see Customization Settings). If face has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom face spec(s), which override the default face spec spec. However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the appearance of face will again be determined by its default face spec.
As an exception, if you evaluate a defface
form with
C-M-x (eval-defun
) or with C-x C-e
(eval-last-sexp
) in Emacs Lisp mode, a special feature of these
commands overrides any custom face specs on the face, causing the face
to reflect exactly what the defface
says.
The spec argument is a face spec, which states how the face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an alist whose elements each have the form
(display . plist)
display specifies a class of terminals (see below). plist
is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
can also write an element as (display plist)
.
The display part of an element of spec determines which terminals the element matches. If more than one element of spec matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for display:
default
This element of spec doesn’t match any terminal; instead, it specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if used, must be the first element of spec. Each of the following elements can override any or all of these defaults.
t
This element of spec matches all terminals. Therefore, any
subsequent elements of spec are never used. Normally t
is used in the last (or only) element of spec.
If display is a list, each element should have the form
(characteristic value…)
. Here
characteristic specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
values are possible classifications which display should
apply to. Here are the possible values of characteristic:
type
The kind of window system the terminal uses—either graphic
(any graphics-capable display), x
, pc
(for the MS-DOS
console), w32
(for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), haiku
(for
Haiku), pgtk
(for pure GTK), or tty
(a non-graphics-capable
display). See window-system.
class
What kinds of colors the terminal supports—either color
,
grayscale
, or mono
.
background
The kind of background—either light
or dark
.
min-colors
An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
should support. This matches a terminal if its
display-color-cells
value is at least the specified integer.
supports
Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in value… (see Face Attributes). See Display Face Attribute Testing, for more information on exactly how this testing is done.
If an element of display specifies more than one value for a given characteristic, any of those values is acceptable. If display has more than one element, each element should specify a different characteristic; then each characteristic of the terminal must match one of the values specified for it in display.
For example, here’s the definition of the standard face
highlight
:
(defface highlight '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light)) :background "darkseagreen2") (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark)) :background "darkolivegreen") (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light)) :background "darkseagreen2") (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark)) :background "darkolivegreen") (((class color) (min-colors 8)) :background "green" :foreground "black") (t :inverse-video t)) "Basic face for highlighting." :group 'basic-faces)
Internally, Emacs stores each face’s default spec in its
face-defface-spec
symbol property (see Symbol Properties).
The saved-face
property stores any face spec saved by the user
using the customization buffer; the customized-face
property
stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
saved; and the theme-face
property stores an alist associating
the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
specs for that face. The face’s documentation string is stored in the
face-documentation
property.
Normally, a face is declared just once, using defface
, and
any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
custom-set-faces
function; see Applying Customizations), or
by face remapping (see Face Remapping). In the rare event that
you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
face-spec-set
function.
This function applies spec as a face spec for face
.
spec should be a face spec, as described in the above
documentation for defface
.
This function also defines face as a valid face name if it is not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
The optional argument spec-type determines which spec to set.
If it is omitted or nil
or face-override-spec
, this
function sets the override spec, which overrides face specs on
face of all the other types mentioned below. This is useful
when calling this function outside of Custom code. If spec-type
is customized-face
or saved-face
, this function sets the
customized spec or the saved custom spec, respectively. If it is
face-defface-spec
, this function sets the default face spec
(the same one set by defface
). If it is reset
, this
function clears out all customization specs and override specs from
face (in this case, the value of spec is ignored). The
effect of any other value of spec-type on the face specs is
reserved for internal use, but the function will still define
face itself and recalculate its attributes, as described above.
This section describes functions for directly accessing and modifying the attributes of a named face.
This function returns the value of the attribute attribute for face on frame. See Face Attributes, for the supported attributes.
If frame is omitted or nil
, that means the selected frame
(see Input Focus). If frame is t
, this function
returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames,
i.e. the value of the attribute before applying the face spec in the
face’s defface
definition (see Defining Faces) or the spec
set by face-spec-set
. This default value of attribute is
normally unspecified
, unless you have specified some other
value using set-face-attribute
; see below.
If inherit is nil
, only attributes directly defined by
face are considered, so the return value may be
unspecified
, or a relative value. If inherit is
non-nil
, face’s definition of attribute is merged
with the faces specified by its :inherit
attribute; however the
return value may still be unspecified
or relative. If
inherit is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
absolute.
To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
a value of default
for inherit; this will resolve any
unspecified or relative values by merging with the default
face
(which is always completely specified).
For example,
(face-attribute 'bold :weight) ⇒ bold
This function returns non-nil
if value, when used as the
value of the face attribute attribute, is relative. This means
it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
another face.
unspecified
is a relative value for all attributes. For
:height
, floating point and function values are also relative.
For example:
(face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0) ⇒ t
This function returns an alist of attributes of face. The
elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
(attr-name . attr-value)
. Optional argument
frame specifies the frame whose definition of face to
return; if omitted or nil
, the returned value describes the
default attributes of face for newly created frames, i.e. the
values these attributes have before applying the face spec in the
face’s defface
definition or the spec set by
face-spec-set
. These default values of the attributes are
normally unspecified
, unless you have specified some other
value using set-face-attribute
; see below.
If value1 is a relative value for the face attribute attribute, returns it merged with the underlying value value2; otherwise, if value1 is an absolute value for the face attribute attribute, returns value1 unchanged.
Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
calculate its attributes on each frame (see Defining Faces). The
function set-face-attribute
can override this calculation by
directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
This function sets one or more attributes of face for frame. The attributes specified in this way override the face spec(s) belonging to face. See Face Attributes, for the supported attributes.
The extra arguments arguments specify the attributes to set, and
the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
names (such as :family
or :underline
) and values. Thus,
(set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
sets the attribute :weight
to bold
and the attribute
:slant
to italic
.
If frame is t
, this function sets the default attributes
for newly created frames; they will effectively override the attribute
values specified by defface
. If frame is nil
,
this function sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as
for newly created frames.
To reset the value of an attribute, that is, to indicate that
the face doesn’t by itself specify a value for the attribute, use the
special value unspecified
(not nil
!) for the
attribute, and set the frame argument to t
, in addition
to the call with frame set to nil
. This is because the
default attributes for newly created frames are merged with the face’s
spec in defface
when a new frame is created, and so having
unspecified
in the default attributes for new frames will be
unable to override defface
; the special call to this function
as described above will arrange for defface
to be overridden.
Note that the attribute-value pairs are evaluated in the order they
are specified, with the exception of the :family
and
:foundry
attributes, which are evaluated first. This means
that if a certain attribute is specified more than once, only the last
value will be used. It also means that in some cases a different
order of attributes will produce different results. For example, when
:weight
is placed before :font
, the weight value is
applied to the current font of the face, and might be rounded to the
closest available weight of that font, whereas when :font
is
placed before :weight
the weight value is applied to the
specified font.
The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
set-face-attribute
. Values of t
and nil
(or
omitted) for their frame argument are handled just like
set-face-attribute
and face-attribute
. The commands
read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
These set the :foreground
attribute (or :background
attribute, respectively) of face to color.
This sets the :stipple
attribute of face to
pattern.
Change the font-related attributes of face to those of
font (a string or a font object). See face-font-attribute,
for the supported formats of the font argument. This function
sets the attribute :font
of the face, and indirectly also the
:family
, :foundry
, :width
, :height
,
:weight
, and :slant
attributes, as defined by the font.
If frame is non-nil
, only change the attributes on the
specified frame.
This sets the :weight
attribute of face to normal
if bold-p is nil
, and to bold otherwise.
This sets the :slant
attribute of face to normal if
italic-p is nil
, and to italic otherwise.
This sets the :underline
attribute of face to
underline.
This sets the :inverse-video
attribute of face to
inverse-video-p.
This swaps the foreground and background colors of face face.
This sets the :extend
attribute of face to
extend.
The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don’t
specify frame, they refer to the selected frame; t
refers
to the default data for new frames. They return unspecified
if
the face doesn’t define any value for that attribute. If
inherit is nil
, only an attribute directly defined by the
face is returned. If inherit is non-nil
, any faces
specified by its :inherit
attribute are considered as well, and
if inherit is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
return value is always specified, use a value of default
for
inherit.
This function returns the name of the font used by the specified face.
If the optional argument frame is specified, it returns the name
of the font of face for that frame; frame defaults to the
selected frame if it is nil
or omitted. If frame is
t
, the function reports on the font defaults for face to
be used for new frames.
By default, the returned font is for displaying ASCII characters, but
if frame is anything but t
, and the optional third
argument character is supplied, the function returns the font
name used by face for that character.
These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
respectively) of face face, as a string. If the color is
unspecified, they return nil
.
This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
face, or nil
if it doesn’t have one.
This function returns a non-nil
value if the :weight
attribute of face is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
semi-bold
, bold
, extra-bold
, or
ultra-bold
). Otherwise, it returns nil
.
This function returns a non-nil
value if the :slant
attribute of face is italic
or oblique
, and
nil
otherwise.
This function returns non-nil
if face face specifies
a non-nil
:underline
attribute.
This function returns non-nil
if face face specifies
a non-nil
:inverse-video
attribute.
This function returns non-nil
if face face specifies
a non-nil
:extend
attribute. The inherit argument
is passed to face-attribute
.
When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If these various sources together specify more than one face for a particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from highest to lowest priority:
region
face. See Standard Faces in The GNU Emacs
Manual.
nil
face
property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
the overlay has a mouse-face
property and the mouse is near
enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
specified by the mouse-face
property instead. See Overlay Properties.
When multiple overlays cover the same character, an overlay with higher priority overrides those with lower priority. See Overlays.
face
or mouse-face
property,
Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. See Properties with Special Meanings. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
See Font Lock Mode.)
mode-line
face. For the mode line of a
non-selected window, Emacs applies the mode-line-inactive
face.
For a header line, Emacs applies the header-line
face.
For a tab line, Emacs applies the tab-line
face.
before-string
or
after-string
properties (see Overlay Properties), or from a
display string (see Other Display Specifications), and the string doesn’t
contain a face
or mouse-face
property, or these
properties leave some face attributes undefined, but the buffer text
affected by the overlay/display property does define a face or those
attributes, Emacs applies the face attributes of the “underlying”
buffer text. Note that this is so even if the overlay or display
string is displayed in the display margins (see Displaying in the Margins).
default
face.
At each stage, if a face has a valid :inherit
attribute,
Emacs treats any attribute with an unspecified
value as having
the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). see Face Attributes. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
at the next level of face merging.
The variable face-remapping-alist
is used for buffer-local or
global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
to implement the text-scale-adjust
command (see Text
Scale in The GNU Emacs Manual).
The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
(face . remapping)
. This causes Emacs to display
any text having the face face with remapping, rather than
the ordinary definition of face.
remapping may be any face spec suitable for a face
text
property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
description of the face
text property in Properties with Special Meanings. remapping serves as the complete specification for
the remapped face—it replaces the normal definition of face,
instead of modifying it.
If face-remapping-alist
is buffer-local, its local value takes
effect only within that buffer. If face-remapping-alist
includes faces applicable only to certain windows, by using the
(:filtered (:window param val) spec)
,
that face takes effect only in windows that match the filter
conditions (see Properties with Special Meanings). To turn off face filtering
temporarily, bind face-filters-always-match
to a non-nil
value, then all face filters will match any window.
Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If remapping references
the same face name face, either directly or via the
:inherit
attribute of some other face in remapping, that
reference uses the normal definition of face. For instance, if
the mode-line
face is remapped using this entry in
face-remapping-alist
:
(mode-line italic mode-line)
then the new definition of the mode-line
face inherits from the
italic
face, and the normal (non-remapped) definition of
mode-line
face.
The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
face-remapping-alist
. Most Lisp code should use these
functions instead of setting face-remapping-alist
directly, to
avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
face-remapping-alist
buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
face-remapping-alist
entries of the form
(face relative-spec-1 relative-spec-2 ... base-spec)
where, as explained above, each of the relative-spec-N and
base-spec is either a face name, or a property list of
attribute/value pairs. Each of the relative remapping entries,
relative-spec-N, is managed by the
face-remap-add-relative
and face-remap-remove-relative
functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
the text size. The base remapping entry, base-spec, has
the lowest priority and is managed by the face-remap-set-base
and face-remap-reset-base
functions; it is intended for major
modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
This function adds specs as relative remappings for face face in the current buffer. specs should be a list where each element is either a face name, or a property list of attribute/value pairs.
The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
pass this object as an argument to face-remap-remove-relative
if you need to remove the remapping later.
;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces: (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic) ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%: (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
Note that buffer-local face remapping does not work reliably for
parent faces of basic faces (see Basic Faces). (These are the
faces that are used in mode lines, header lines, and other basic
decorations of windows and frames.) For instance,
mode-line-inactive
inherits from mode-line
, but
remapping mode-line
won’t normally have the desired effect on
mode-line-inactive
, especially if done locally for some
buffers. Instead you have to remap mode-line-inactive
directly.
This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
face-remap-add-relative
. cookie should be the Lisp
object returned by face-remap-add-relative
when the remapping
was added.
This function sets the base remapping of face in the current
buffer to specs. If specs is empty, the default base
remapping is restored, similar to calling face-remap-reset-base
(see below); note that this is different from specs containing a
single value nil
, which has the opposite result (the global
definition of face is ignored).
This overwrites the default base-spec, which inherits the global face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if so desired.
This function sets the base remapping of face to its default value, which inherits from face’s global definition.
Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
This function returns a list of all defined face names.
This function returns the face number of face face. This
is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
However, functions that manipulate glyphs, such as
make-glyph-code
and glyph-face
(see Glyphs) access
the face numbers internally. Note that the face number is stored as
the value of the face
property of the face symbol, so we
recommend not to set that property of a face to any value of your own.
This function returns the documentation string of face face, or
nil
if none was specified for it.
This returns t
if the faces face1 and face2 have the
same attributes for display.
This returns non-nil
if the face face displays
differently from the default face.
A face alias provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the face-alias
property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
makes modeline
an alias for the mode-line
face.
(put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
This macro defines obsolete-face
as an alias for
current-face, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
may be removed in future. when should be a string indicating
when obsolete-face
was made obsolete (usually a version number
string).
This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by Font-Lock.
This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
when Font Lock Mode isn’t enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
variable usually holds just one function, jit-lock-function
.
The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a buffer position pos. Collectively they should attempt to assign faces to the text in the current buffer starting at pos.
The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
face
property. They should also add a non-nil
fontified
property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
already.
It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
character after pos already has a non-nil
fontified
property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
function finishes are the ones that really matter.
For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
Note that, when the buffer text includes very long lines, these
functions are called as if they were in a with-restriction
form
(see Narrowing), with a
long-line-optimizations-in-fontification-functions
label and
with the buffer narrowed to a portion around pos.
If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them, rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users have customized those existing faces to give Emacs a certain look, your program will fit in without additional customization.
Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use. See Faces for Font Lock.
default
The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the attribute on this face (see Face Attributes).
mode-line-active
mode-line-inactive
header-line
tab-line
Basic faces used for the mode line, header line, and tab line.
tool-bar
tab-bar
fringe
scroll-bar
window-divider
border
child-frame-border
Basic faces used for the corresponding decorations of GUI frames.
cursor
The basic face used for the text cursor.
mouse
The basic face used for displaying mouse-sensitive text when the mouse pointer is on that text.
bold
italic
bold-italic
underline
fixed-pitch
fixed-pitch-serif
variable-pitch
These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., bold
has a bold :weight
attribute), with all other attributes
unspecified (and so given by default
).
shadow
For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored part of a filename in the minibuffer (see Minibuffers for File Names in The GNU Emacs Manual).
link
link-visited
For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different buffer or location.
highlight
For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
it is commonly assigned to the mouse-face
property for cursor
highlighting (see Properties with Special Meanings).
match
isearch
lazy-highlight
For text matching (respectively) permanent search matches, interactive search matches, and lazy highlighting other matches than the current interactive one.
error
warning
success
For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example, these are used for messages in *Compilation* buffers.
Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
select a font for that character30. See Fonts in The GNU Emacs Manual. Normally,
Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
character—specifically, the face attributes :family
,
:weight
, :slant
, and :width
(see Face Attributes). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
the closest matching font. The variables in this section
control how Emacs makes this selection.
If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have this form:
(family alternate-families...)
If family is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other families given in alternate-families, one by one, until it finds a family that does exist.
If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
(:width
, :height
, :weight
, and :slant
),
this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
decreasing importance. The default is (:width :height :weight
:slant)
.
Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so on.
The attributes :weight
and :width
have symbolic values in
a range centered around normal
. Matches that are more extreme
(farther from normal
) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
less extreme (closer to normal
); this is designed to ensure that
non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
italic
face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
default one. But if you put :slant
before :height
, the
italic
face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
quite right.
This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a given registry is specified and doesn’t exist. Each element should have this form:
(registry alternate-registries...)
If registry is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other registries given in alternate-registries, one by one, until it finds a registry that does exist.
Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use them.
This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
nil
, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. t
means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular expression in the list. For example,
(setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
allows the use of scalable fonts with registry iso10646-1
.
This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should be a list of elements of the form
(fontname-regexp . scale-factor)
If fontname-regexp matches the font name that is about to be used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the factor scale-factor. You would use this feature to normalize the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their nominal heights and widths would suggest.
This function returns a list of available font names that match name. name should be a string containing a font name in either the Fontconfig, GTK+, or XLFD format (see Fonts in The GNU Emacs Manual). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be used: the ‘*’ character matches any substring, and the ‘?’ character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching font names.
If the optional arguments reference-face and frame are specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same size as reference-face (a face name) currently is on the frame frame.
The optional argument maximum sets a limit on how many fonts to
return. If it is non-nil
, then the return value is truncated
after the first maximum matching fonts. Specifying a small
value for maximum can make this function much faster, in cases
where many fonts match the pattern.
The optional argument width specifies a desired font width. If
it is non-nil
, the function only returns those fonts whose
characters are (on average) width times as wide as
reference-face.
This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
family on frame. If family is omitted or nil
,
this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
available fonts. Otherwise, family must be a string; it may
contain the wildcards ‘?’ and ‘*’.
The list describes the display that frame is on; if frame is
omitted or nil
, it applies to the selected frame’s display
(see Input Focus).
Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
[family width point-size weight slant fixed-p full registry-and-encoding]
The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
The last three elements give additional information about the font.
fixed-p is non-nil
if the font is fixed-pitch.
full is the full name of the font, and
registry-and-encoding is a string giving the registry and
encoding of the font.
A fontset is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names, just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
This function defines a new fontset according to the specification string fontset-spec. The string should have this format:
fontpattern, [charset:font]...
Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
The first part of the string, fontpattern, should have the form of a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be ‘fontset-alias’.
The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
fontpattern in its entirety. The short name is
‘fontset-alias’. You can refer to the fontset by either
name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
signaled, unless noerror is non-nil
, in which case this
function does nothing.
If optional argument style-variant-p is non-nil
, that says
to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
is made by altering fontpattern to indicate the bold and/or italic
status.
The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset. See below for the details.
The construct ‘charset:font’ specifies which font to use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here, charset is the name of a character set, and font is the font to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of times in the specification string.
For the remaining character sets, those that you don’t specify explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on fontpattern: it replaces ‘fontset-alias’ with a value that names one character set. For the ASCII character set, ‘fontset-alias’ is replaced with ‘ISO8859-1’.
In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
Thus if fontpattern is this,
-*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
the font specification for ASCII characters would be this:
-*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
-*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that have ‘song ti’ or ‘fangsong ti’ in the family field. In such a case, ‘Fontset-n’ can be specified as below:
Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\ chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have ‘fixed’ in the family field, and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card ‘*’ in the family field.
This function modifies the existing fontset to use the font specified by font-spec for displaying the specified characters.
If fontset is nil
, this function modifies the fontset of
the selected frame or that of frame if frame is not
nil
.
If fontset is t
, this function modifies the default
fontset, whose short name as a string is ‘fontset-default’.
The characters argument can be a single character which should
be displayed using font-spec. It can also be a cons cell
(from . to)
, where from and to are
characters. In that case, use font-spec for all the characters
in the range from and to (inclusive).
characters may be a charset symbol (see Character Sets). In that case, use font-spec for all the characters in the charset.
characters may be a script symbol (see char-script-table). In that case, use font-spec for all the characters belonging to the script.
characters may be nil
, which means to use font-spec
for any character in fontset for which no font-spec is
specified.
font-spec may be a font-spec object created by the function
font-spec
(see Low-Level Font Representation).
font-spec may be a cons cell (family . registry)
, where family is a family name of a font
(possibly including a foundry name at the head), and registry is
a registry name of a font (possibly including an encoding name at the
tail).
font-spec may be a font name, a string.
font-spec may be nil
, which explicitly specifies that
there’s no font for the specified characters. This is useful,
for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
Use Area (PUA).
The optional argument add, if non-nil
, specifies how to
add font-spec to the font specifications previously set for
characters. If it is prepend
, font-spec is
prepended to the existing specs. If it is append
,
font-spec is appended. By default, font-spec overwrites
the previously set font specs.
For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font whose
family name is ‘Kochi Gothic’ for all characters belonging to
the charset japanese-jisx0208
:
(set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
Note that this function should generally be called from the user’s init files, and more generally before any of characters were displayed in the current Emacs session. That’s because for some scripts, Emacs caches the way they are displayed, and the cached information includes the font used for them – once these characters are displayed once, the cached font will continue to be used regardless of changes in the fontsets.
This function returns non-nil
if Emacs ought to be able to
display char. Or more precisely, if the selected frame’s fontset
has a font to display the character set that char belongs to.
Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset does that, this function’s value may not be accurate.
This function may return non-nil
even when there is no font
available, since it also checks whether the coding system for the text
terminal can encode the character (see Terminal I/O Encoding).
Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case you need to do so, this section explains how.
In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp object types: font objects, font specs, and font entities.
Return t
if object is a font object, font spec, or font
entity. Otherwise, return nil
.
The optional argument type, if non-nil
, determines the
exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, type
should be one of font-object
, font-spec
, or
font-entity
.
A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has opened. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can be inspected.
Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
position position in the window window. If window
is nil
, it defaults to the selected window. If string is
nil
, position specifies a position in the current buffer;
otherwise, string should be a string, and position
specifies a position in that string.
A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the specifications in a font spec.
Return a new font spec using the specifications in arguments,
which should come in property
-value
pairs. The possible
specifications are as follows:
:name
The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK+ format. See Fonts in The GNU Emacs Manual.
:family
:foundry
:weight
:slant
:width
These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
See Face Attributes. :family
and :foundry
are
strings, while the other three are symbols. As example values,
:slant
may be italic
, :weight
may be bold
and :width
may be normal
.
:size
The font size—either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
:adstyle
Additional typographic style information for the font, such as ‘sans’. The value should be a string or a symbol.
:registry
¶The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as ‘iso8859-1’. The value should be a string or a symbol.
:dpi
The resolution in dots per inch for which the font is designed. The value must be a non-negative number.
:spacing
The spacing of the font: proportional, dual, mono, or charcell. The
value should be either an integer (0 for proportional, 90 for dual,
100 for mono, 110 for charcell) or a one-letter symbol (one of
P
, D
, M
, or C
).
:avgwidth
The average width of the font in 1/10 pixel units. The value should be a non-negative number.
:script
The script that the font must support (a symbol).
:lang
The language that the font should support. The value should be a symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the value is matched against the “Additional Style” field of the XLFD name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the spec are required to support codepages needed for the language. Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this property: ‘ja’, ‘ko’, and ‘zh’.
:otf
¶The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as ‘libotf’ on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
(script-tag langsys-tag gsub gpos)
where script-tag is the OpenType script tag symbol;
langsys-tag is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
nil
to use the default language system; gsub
is a list
of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or nil
if none is
required; and gpos
is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
symbols, or nil
if none is required. If gsub
or
gpos
is a list, a nil
element in that list means that
the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
gpos
element may be omitted. For the list of OpenType script,
language, and feature tags, see
the list of registered OTF tags.
:type
¶The symbol that specifies the font backend used to draw the
characters. The possible values depend on the platform and on how
Emacs was configured at build time. Typical values include
ftcrhb
and xfthb
on X, harfbuzz
on MS-Windows,
ns
on GNUstep, etc. It can also be nil
if left
unspecified, typically in a font-spec.
Set the font property property in the font-spec font-spec to value. The property can any of the ones described above.
A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec: like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single, specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity referring to a scalable font.
This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
font-spec on frame frame. If frame is nil
,
it defaults to the selected frame.
This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font spec font-spec.
The optional argument frame, if non-nil
, specifies the
frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
num, if non-nil
, should be an integer that specifies the
maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
prefer, if non-nil
, should be another font spec, which is
used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
spec.
If you call set-face-attribute
and pass a font spec, font
entity, or font name string as the value of the :font
attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
actual value of the :font
attribute for that face.
The following functions can be used to obtain information about a font. For these functions, the font argument can be a font object, a font entity, or a font spec.
This function returns the value of the font property property
for font. The property can any of the ones that
font-spec
supports.
If font is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
property, the return value is nil
. If font is a
font object or font entity, the value for the :script property
may be a list of scripts supported by the font, and the value of the
:otf
property is a cons of the form (gsub . gpos)
, where gsub and gpos are lists
representing OpenType features supported by the font, of the form
((script-tag (langsys-tag feature...) ...) ...)
where script-tag, langsys-tag, and feature are symbols representing OpenType layout tags.
If font is a font object, the special property
:combining-capability
is non-nil
if the font backend of
font supports rendering of combining characters for non-OpenType
fonts.
This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
font. The optional argument frame specifies the frame on
which the font is to be displayed. If it is nil
, the selected
frame is used. The return value has the form
(:family family :height height :weight weight :slant slant :width width)
where the values of family, height, weight, slant, and width are face attribute values. Some of these key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not specified by font.
This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
matching font. See Fonts in The GNU Emacs Manual, for
information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns nil
.
If the optional argument fold-wildcards is non-nil
,
consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
The following two functions return important information about a font.
This function returns information about a font specified by its
name, a string, as it is used on frame. If frame is
omitted or nil
, it defaults to the selected frame.
The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
[opened-name full-name size height
baseline-offset relative-compose default-ascent
max-width ascent descent space-width
average-width filename capability]
. Here’s the
description of each components of this vector:
The name used to open the font, a string.
The full name of the font, a string.
The pixel size of the font.
The height of the font in pixels.
The offset in pixels from the ASCII baseline, positive upward.
Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
The maximum advance width of the font.
The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers should be equal to the value of height above.
The width, in pixels, of the font’s space character.
The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses the value of space-width instead, when it calculates text layout on display.
The file name of the font as a string. This can be nil
if the
font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font’s file name.
A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
of x
, opentype
, truetype
, type1
,
pcf
, or bdf
. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
additional elements describing the GSUB and GPOS features
supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
((script (langsys feature …) …)
…)
, where script is a symbol representing an OpenType
script tag, langsys is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
tag (or nil
, which stands for the default langsys), and each
feature is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
This function returns information about a font-object. (This is
in contrast to font-info
, which takes the font name, a string,
as its argument.)
The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
[name filename pixel-size max-width
ascent descent space-width average-width
capability]
. Here’s the description of each components of this
vector:
The font name, a string.
The file name of the font as a string. This can be nil
if the
font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font’s file name.
The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
The maximum advance width of the font.
The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers gives the font height.
The width, in pixels, of the font’s space character.
The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses the value of space-width instead, when it calculates text layout on display.
A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
of x
, opentype
, truetype
, type1
,
pcf
, or bdf
. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
additional elements describing the GSUB and GPOS features
supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
((script (langsys feature …) …)
…)
, where script is a symbol representing an OpenType
script tag, langsys is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
tag (or nil
, which stands for the default langsys), and each
feature is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
The following four functions return size information about fonts used by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration, returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question was remapped. See Face Remapping.
This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by the current buffer’s default face, as that face is defined for the selected frame.
This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the current buffer’s default face, as that face is defined for the selected frame.
This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
face in window. The specified window must be a live
window. If nil
or omitted, window defaults to the
selected window, and face defaults to the default face in
window.
This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
face in window. The specified window must be a live
window. If nil
or omitted, window defaults to the
selected window, and face defaults to the default face in
window.
On graphical displays, Emacs draws fringes next to each window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
The following buffer-local variables control the position and width of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
text. If the value is non-nil
, they appear outside the display
margins. See Displaying in the Margins.
This variable, if non-nil
, specifies the width of the left
fringe in pixels. A value of nil
means to use the left fringe
width from the window’s frame.
This variable, if non-nil
, specifies the width of the right
fringe in pixels. A value of nil
means to use the right fringe
width from the window’s frame.
Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
the values specified by the left-fringe
and right-fringe
frame parameters (see Layout Parameters).
The above variables actually take effect via the function
set-window-buffer
(see Buffers and Windows), which calls
set-window-fringes
as a subroutine. If you change one of these
variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
showing the buffer, unless you call set-window-buffer
again in
each affected window. You can also use set-window-fringes
to
control the fringe display in individual windows.
This function sets the fringe widths of window window.
If window is nil
, the selected window is used.
The argument left specifies the width in pixels of the left
fringe, and likewise right for the right fringe. A value of
nil
for either one stands for the default width. If
outside-margins is non-nil
, that specifies that fringes
should appear outside of the display margins.
If window is not large enough to accommodate fringes of the desired width, this leaves the fringes of window unchanged.
The values specified here may be later overridden by invoking
set-window-buffer
(see Buffers and Windows) on window
with its keep-margins argument nil
or omitted. However,
if the optional fifth argument persistent is non-nil
and
the other arguments are processed successfully, the values specified
here unconditionally survive subsequent invocations of
set-window-buffer
. This can be used to permanently turn off
fringes in the minibuffer window, consult the description of
set-window-scroll-bars
for an example (see Scroll Bars).
This function returns information about the fringes of a window
window. If window is omitted or nil
, the selected
window is used. The value has the form (left-width
right-width outside-margins persistent)
.
Fringe indicators are tiny icons displayed in the window fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries, etc.
When this is non-nil
, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
displays. See Fringes. This variable is automatically
buffer-local in every buffer.
This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries—that is, the first and last line in the buffer—with angle icons when they appear on the screen. In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show there is text below the screen.
There are three kinds of basic values:
nil
Don’t display any of these fringe icons.
left
Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
right
Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
Display the angle icons in the left fringe and don’t display the arrows.
Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
have the form (indicator . position)
. Here,
indicator is one of top
, bottom
, up
,
down
, and t
(which covers all the icons not yet
specified), while position is one of left
, right
and nil
.
For example, ((top . left) (t . right))
places the top angle
bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left))
.
This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
value is an alist of elements (indicator
. bitmaps)
, where indicator specifies a logical indicator
type and bitmaps specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
indicator.
Each indicator should be one of the following symbols:
truncation
, continuation
.Used for truncation and continuation lines.
up
, down
, top
, bottom
, top-bottom
Used when indicate-buffer-boundaries
is non-nil
:
up
and down
indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
below the window edge; top
and bottom
indicate the
topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and top-bottom
indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
empty-line
Used to indicate empty lines after the buffer end when
indicate-empty-lines
is non-nil
.
overlay-arrow
Used for overlay arrows (see The Overlay Arrow).
Each bitmaps value may be a list of symbols (left
right [left1 right1])
. The left and
right symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
fringe, for the specific indicator. left1 and right1 are
specific to the bottom
and top-bottom
indicators, and
are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
Alternatively, bitmaps may be a single symbol which is used in
both left and right fringes.
See Fringe Bitmaps, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
to define your own. In addition, nil
represents the empty
bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
When fringe-indicator-alist
has a buffer-local value, and
there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
t
, the corresponding value from the default value of
fringe-indicator-alist
is used.
When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on the current buffer’s cursor type.
If this is non-nil
, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
fringe.
This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
alist where each element has the form (cursor-type
. bitmap)
, which means to use the fringe bitmap bitmap to
display cursors of type cursor-type.
Each cursor-type should be one of box
, hollow
,
bar
, hbar
, or hollow-small
. The first four have
the same meanings as in the cursor-type
frame parameter
(see Cursor Parameters). The hollow-small
type is used
instead of hollow
when the normal hollow-rectangle
bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
Each bitmap should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to be displayed for that logical cursor type. See Fringe Bitmaps.
When fringe-cursor-alist
has a buffer-local value, and there is
no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
default value of fringes-indicator-alist
is used.
The fringe bitmaps are the actual bitmaps which represent the
logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
symbol.
These symbols are referred to by the variable
fringe-indicator-alist
, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
(see Fringe Indicators), and the variable
fringe-cursor-alist
, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
(see Fringe Cursors).
Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
right fringe, by using a display
property for one of the
characters appearing in the line (see Other Display Specifications). Such
a display specification has the form
(fringe bitmap [face])
fringe is either the symbol left-fringe
or
right-fringe
. bitmap is a symbol identifying the bitmap
to display. The optional face names a face whose foreground and
background colors are to be used to display the bitmap, using the
attributes of the fringe
face for colors that face didn’t
specify. If face is omitted, that means to use the attributes
of the default
face for the colors which the fringe
face
didn’t specify. For predictable results that don’t depend on the
attributes of the default
and fringe
faces, we recommend
you never omit face, but always provide a specific face. In
particular, if you want the bitmap to be always displayed in the
fringe
face, use fringe
as face.
For instance, to display an arrow in the left fringe, using the
warning
face, you could say something like:
(overlay-put (make-overlay (point) (point)) 'before-string (propertize "x" 'display `(left-fringe right-arrow warning)))
Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
how they are currently used in Emacs (via
fringe-indicator-alist
and fringe-cursor-alist
):
left-arrow
, right-arrow
Used to indicate truncated lines.
left-curly-arrow
, right-curly-arrow
Used to indicate continued lines.
right-triangle
, left-triangle
The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
up-arrow
, down-arrow
bottom-left-angle
, bottom-right-angle
top-left-angle
, top-right-angle
left-bracket
, right-bracket
empty-line
Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
filled-rectangle
, hollow-rectangle
filled-square
, hollow-square
vertical-bar
, horizontal-bar
Used for different types of fringe cursors.
exclamation-mark
, question-mark
large-circle
Not used by core Emacs features.
The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
containing position pos in window window. The return
value has the form (left right ov)
, where left
is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or nil
if no bitmap), right is similar for the right fringe, and ov
is non-nil
if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
The value is nil
if pos is not visible in window.
If window is nil
, that stands for the selected window.
If pos is nil
, that stands for the value of point in
window.
This function defines the symbol bitmap as a new fringe bitmap, or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
The argument bits specifies the image to use. It should be either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap. (Note that this order of bits is opposite of the order in XBM images; see XBM Images.)
The height is normally the length of bits. However, you
can specify a different height with non-nil
height. The width
is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-nil
width. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
The argument align specifies the positioning of the bitmap
relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
center the bitmap. The allowed values are top
, center
,
or bottom
.
The align argument may also be a list (align
periodic)
where align is interpreted as described above.
If periodic is non-nil
, it specifies that the rows in
bits
should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
height.
This function destroys the fringe bitmap identified by bitmap. If bitmap identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of eliminating it entirely.
This sets the face for the fringe bitmap bitmap to face.
If face is nil
, it selects the fringe
face. The
bitmap’s face controls the color to draw it in.
face is merged with the fringe
face, so normally
face should specify only the foreground color.
The overlay arrow is useful for directing the user’s attention to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with overlays (see Overlays).
This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
particular line, or nil
if the arrow feature is not in use.
On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored if the
left fringe is shown; instead a glyph is displayed in the fringe area
to the left of the display area.
This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical display, or when the left fringe is not shown, the arrow text appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is overwritten.
The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
of overlay-arrow-position
in that buffer points into that
buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
by creating buffer-local bindings of overlay-arrow-position
.
However, it is usually cleaner to use
overlay-arrow-variable-list
to achieve this result.
You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
before-string
property. See Overlay Properties.
You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
overlay-arrow-variable-list
.
This variable’s value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
overlay-arrow-position
has its normal meaning because it is on
this list.
Each variable on this list can have properties
overlay-arrow-string
and overlay-arrow-bitmap
that
specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals or graphical
terminals without the left fringe shown) or fringe bitmap
(for graphical terminals with a left fringe) to display at the
corresponding overlay arrow position. If either property is not set,
the default overlay-arrow-string
or overlay-arrow
fringe
indicator is used.
Normally the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
controls
whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
scroll-bar-width
specifies how wide they are (nil
meaning
the default).
The frame parameter horizontal-scroll-bars
controls whether
the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
parameter scroll-bar-height
specifies how high they are
(nil
meaning the default). See Layout Parameters.
Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
function horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
which takes no
argument returns non-nil
if they are available on your system.
The following three functions take as argument a live frame which defaults to the selected one.
This function reports the scroll bar types for frame frame. The
value is a cons cell (vertical-type .
horizontal-type)
, where vertical-type is either
left
, right
, or nil
(which means no vertical scroll
bar.) horizontal-type is either bottom
or nil
(which means no horizontal scroll bar).
This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of frame in pixels.
This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of frame in pixels.
You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by using the following function:
This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
for window window. If window is nil
, the selected
window is used.
width specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
(nil
means use the width specified for the frame).
vertical-type specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
if so, where. The possible values are left
, right
,
t
, which means to use the frame’s default, and nil
for no
vertical scroll bar.
height specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in
pixels (nil
means use the height specified for the frame).
horizontal-type specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll
bar. The possible values are bottom
, t
, which means to
use the frame’s default, and nil
for no horizontal scroll bar.
Note that for a mini window the value t
has the same meaning as
nil
, namely to not show a horizontal scroll bar. You have to
explicitly specify bottom
in order to show a horizontal scroll
bar in a mini window.
If window is not large enough to accommodate a scroll bar of the desired dimension, this leaves the corresponding scroll bar unchanged.
The values specified here may be later overridden by invoking
set-window-buffer
(see Buffers and Windows) on window
with its keep-margins argument nil
or omitted. However,
if the optional fifth argument persistent is non-nil
and
the other arguments are processed successfully, the values specified
here unconditionally survive subsequent invocations of
set-window-buffer
.
Using the persistent argument of set-window-scroll-bars
and set-window-fringes
(see Fringe Size and Position) you can
reliably and permanently turn off scroll bars and/or fringes in any
minibuffer window by adding the following snippet to your early init
file (see The Init File).
(add-hook 'after-make-frame-functions (lambda (frame) (set-window-scroll-bars (minibuffer-window frame) 0 nil 0 nil t) (set-window-fringes (minibuffer-window frame) 0 0 nil t)))
The following four functions take as argument a live window which defaults to the selected one.
This function returns a list of the form (width
columns vertical-type height lines
horizontal-type persistent)
.
The value width is the value that was specified for the width of
the vertical scroll bar (which may be nil
); columns is the
(possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
actually occupies.
The value height is the value that was specified for the height of
the horizontal scroll bar (which may be nil
); lines is the
(possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
actually occupies.
The value of persistent is the value specified for window
with the last successful invocation of set-window-scroll-bars
,
nil
if there never was one.
This function reports the scroll bar type for window window. The
value is a cons cell (vertical-type .
horizontal-type)
. Unlike window-scroll-bars
, this reports
the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
scroll-bar-mode
are taken into account.
This function returns the width in pixels of window’s vertical scrollbar.
This function returns the height in pixels of window’s horizontal scrollbar.
If you do not specify a window’s scroll bar settings via
set-window-scroll-bars
, the buffer-local variables
vertical-scroll-bar
, horizontal-scroll-bar
,
scroll-bar-width
and scroll-bar-height
in the buffer being
displayed control the window’s scroll bars. The function
set-window-buffer
examines these variables. If you change them
in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
take note of the new values by calling set-window-buffer
specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local when set.
This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
possible values are left
, right
, t
, which means to
use the frame’s default, and nil
for no scroll bar.
This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
possible values are bottom
, t
, which means to use the
frame’s default, and nil
for no scroll bar.
This variable specifies the width of the buffer’s vertical scroll bars,
measured in pixels. A value of nil
means to use the value
specified by the frame.
This variable specifies the height of the buffer’s horizontal scroll
bar, measured in pixels. A value of nil
means to use the value
specified by the frame.
Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
customizing the variables scroll-bar-mode
and
horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
.
This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
all frames. The possible values are nil
for no scroll bars,
left
to put scroll bars on the left and right
to put
scroll bars on the right.
This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all frames.
Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame’s windows. A right
divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
right-divider-width
. A bottom divider is drawn between a
window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
is specified by the frame parameter bottom-divider-width
. In
either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
See Layout Parameters.
Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left, which means that its width contributes to the total width of that window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which means that its width contributes to the total height of that window. See Window Sizes. When a window has both, a right and a bottom divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right divider ends above the bottom divider.
Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines are present. The following three faces allow the customization of the appearance of dividers:
window-divider
When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
window-divider-first-pixel
This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
the same value used for the window-divider
face.
window-divider-last-pixel
This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
same value used for the window-divider
face.
You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the following two functions.
Return the width (thickness) in pixels of window’s right divider. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one. The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
Return the width (thickness) in pixels of window’s bottom divider. window must be a live window and defaults to the selected one. The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost window on a minibuffer-less frame.
display
Property ¶The display
text property (or overlay property) is used to
insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
displays. Display specifications in the same display
property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
for the display
property, only one of the values takes effect,
following the rules of get-char-property
. See Examining Text Properties.
The value of the display
property should be a display
specification, or a list or vector containing several display
specifications.
This convenience function can be used to get a specific display
property, no matter whether the display
property is a vector, a
list or a simple property. This is like get-text-property
(see Examining Text Properties), but works on the display
property only.
position is the position in the buffer or string to examine, and
prop is the display
property to return. The optional
object argument should be either a string or a buffer, and
defaults to the current buffer. If the optional properties
argument is non-nil
, it should be a display
property,
and in that case, position and object are ignored. (This
can be useful if you’ve already gotten the display
property
with get-char-property
, for instance (see Examining Text Properties).
Add display
property prop of value to the text from
start to end.
If any text in the region has a non-nil
display
property, those properties are retained. For instance:
(add-display-text-property 4 8 'height 2.0) (add-display-text-property 2 12 'raise 0.5)
After doing this, the region from 2 to 4 will have the raise
display
property, the region from 4 to 8 will have both the
raise
and height
display
properties, and finally
the region from 8 to 12 will only have the raise
display
property.
If object is non-nil
, it should be a string or a buffer.
If nil
, this defaults to the current buffer.
Some of the display specifications allow inclusion of Lisp forms,
which are evaluated at display time. This could be unsafe in certain
situations, e.g., when the display specification was generated by some
external program/agent. Wrapping a display specification in a list
that begins with the special symbol disable-eval
, as in
(disable-eval spec)
, will disable evaluation of any
Lisp in spec, while still supporting all the other display
property features.
The rest of this section describes several kinds of display specifications and what they mean.
Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display instead of the text that has the property. These are called replacing display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is replaced in this way.
If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing display specifications make most other display specifications irrelevant, since those don’t apply to the replacement.
For replacing display specifications, the text that has the
property means all the consecutive characters that have the same
Lisp object as their display
property; these characters are
replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
objects as their display
properties (i.e., objects which are
not eq
), they are handled separately.
Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has the property with the specified string (see Other Display Specifications). Consider the following function:
(defun foo () (dotimes (i 5) (let ((string (concat "A")) (start (+ i i (point-min)))) (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string) (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
display
property which is a string "A"
, but they don’t
all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
string object, so they are replaced with one ‘A’; the fact that
the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
put-text-property
is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
characters get a second string (concat
creates a new string
object), so they are replaced with one ‘A’; and so on. Thus, the
ten characters appear as five A’s.
Note: Using :box
face attribute (see Face Attributes) on a
replacing display
string that is adjacent to normal text with
the same :box
style can lead to display artifacts when moving
the cursor across the text with this face attribute. These can be
avoided by applying the :box
attribute directly to the text
being replaced, rather than (or in addition to) the display
string itself. Here’s an example:
;; Causes display artifacts when moving the cursor across text (progn (put-text-property 1 2 'display (propertize " [" 'face '(:box t))) (put-text-property 2 3 'face '(:box t)) (put-text-property 3 4 'display (propertize "] " 'face '(:box t))))
;; No display artifacts due to `:box' (progn (add-text-properties 1 2 '(face (:box t) display " [")) (put-text-property 2 3 'face '(:box t)) (add-text-properties 3 4 '(face (:box t) display "] ")))
To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
specification of the form (space . props)
, where
props is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
place of all of those characters. These are the properties you
can use in props to specify the weight of the space:
:width width
If width is a number, it specifies that the space width should be width times the normal character width. width can also be a pixel width specification (see Pixel Specification for Spaces).
:relative-width factor
Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
same display
property. The space width is the pixel width of
that character, multiplied by factor. (On text-mode terminals,
the “pixel width” of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
:align-to hpos
Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach the column
hpos. If hpos is a number, it is a column number, and is
measured in units of the canonical character width (see Frame Font). hpos can also be a pixel width specification
(see Pixel Specification for Spaces). When the current line is wider than
the window, and is either displayed by one or more continuation lines,
or is truncated and possibly scrolled horizontally (see Horizontal Scrolling), hpos is measured from the beginning of the logical
line, not from the visual beginning of the screen line. This way,
alignment produced by :align-to
is consistent with functions
that count columns, such as current-column
and
move-to-column
(see Counting Columns).
You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
:height height
Specifies the height of the space. If height is a number, it specifies that the space height should be height times the normal character height. The height may also be a pixel height specification (see Pixel Specification for Spaces).
:relative-height factor
Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height of the text having this display specification by factor.
:ascent ascent
If the value of ascent is a non-negative number no greater than 100, it specifies that ascent percent of the height of the space should be considered as the ascent of the space—that is, the part above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units with a pixel ascent specification (see Pixel Specification for Spaces).
Don’t use both :height
and :relative-height
together.
The :width
and :align-to
properties are supported on
non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
are not.
Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display. See Bidirectional Display, for the details.
The value of the :width
, :align-to
, :height
,
and :ascent
properties can be a special kind of expression that
is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
as an absolute number of pixels.
The following expressions are supported:
expr ::= num | (num) | unit | elem | pos | image | xwidget | form num ::= integer | float | symbol unit ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
elem ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin | scroll-bar | text pos ::= left | center | right form ::= (num . expr) | (op expr ...) op ::= + | -
The form num specifies a fraction of the default frame font
height or width. The form (num)
specifies an absolute
number of pixels. If num is a symbol, symbol, its
buffer-local variable binding is used; that binding can be either a
number or a cons cell of the forms shown above (including yet another
cons cell whose car
is a symbol that has a buffer-local
binding).
The in
, mm
, and cm
units specify the number of
pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
width
and height
units correspond to the default width
and height of the current face. An image specification of the form
(image . props)
(see Image Descriptors)
corresponds to the width or height of the specified image. Similarly,
an xwidget specification of the form (xwidget . props)
stands for the width or height of the specified xwidget.
See Embedded Native Widgets.
The elements left-fringe
, right-fringe
,
left-margin
, right-margin
, scroll-bar
, and
text
specify the width of the corresponding area of the window.
When the window displays line numbers (see Size of Displayed Text), the width of the text
area is decreased by the screen
space taken by the line-number display.
The left
, center
, and right
positions can be
used with :align-to
to specify a position relative to the left
edge, center, or right edge of the text area. When the window
displays line numbers, and :align-to
is used in display
properties of buffer text (as opposed to header line, see below), the
left
and the center
positions are offset to account for
the screen space taken by the line-number display.
Any of the above window elements (except text
) can also be
used with :align-to
to specify that the position is relative to
the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
the left-margin, use
:align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative to the left edge of the text area. For example, ‘:align-to 0’ aligns with the first text column in the text area. When the window displays line numbers, the text is considered to start where the space used for line-number display ends.
A value of the form (num . expr)
stands for the
product of the values of num and expr. For example,
(2 . in)
specifies a width of 2 inches, while (0.5 .
image)
specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
image (which should be given by its image spec).
The form (+ expr ...)
adds up the value of the
expressions. The form (- expr ...)
negates or subtracts
the value of the expressions.
Text shown in the header line that uses :align-to
display
specifications is not automatically realigned when
display-line-numbers-mode
is turned on and off, or when the
width of line numbers on display changes. To arrange for the
header-line text alignment to be updated, thus keeping the header-line
text aligned with the buffer text, turn on the
header-line-indent-mode
in the buffer and use its two
variables, header-line-indent
and
header-line-indent-width
, in the display specification.
See Window Header Lines. Here’s a simple example:
(setq header-line-format (concat (propertize " " 'display '(space :align-to (+ header-line-indent-width 10))) "Column"))
This will keep the text ‘Column’ on the header line aligned with
column 10 of buffer text, regardless of whether
display-line-numbers-mode
is on or off, and also when
line-number display changes its width.
Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
in the display
text property.
string
Display string instead of the text that has this property.
Recursive display specifications are not supported—string’s
display
properties, if any, are not used.
(image . image-props)
This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (see Image Descriptors). When used as a display specification, it means to display the image instead of the text that has the display specification.
(slice x y width height)
This specification together with image
specifies a slice
(a partial area) of the image to display. The elements y and
x specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
width and height specify the width and height of the
slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
in the range 0.0–1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
of the entire image.
((margin nil) string)
A display specification of this form means to display string instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same position as that text. It is equivalent to using just string, but it is done as a special case of marginal display (see Displaying in the Margins).
(left-fringe bitmap [face])
(right-fringe bitmap [face])
This display specification on any character of a line of text causes the specified bitmap be displayed in the left or right fringes for that line, instead of the characters that have the display specification. The optional face specifies the face whose colors are to be used for the bitmap display. See Fringe Bitmaps, for the details.
(space-width factor)
This display specification affects all the space characters within the text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces factor times as wide as normal. The element factor should be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
(min-width (width))
This display specification ensures the text that has it takes at least width space on display, by adding a stretch of white space to the end of the text if the text is shorter than width. The text is partitioned using the identity of the parameter, which is why the parameter is a list with one element. For instance:
(insert (propertize "foo" 'display '(min-width (6.0))))
This will add padding after ‘foo’ bringing the total width up to
the width of six normal characters. Note that the affected characters
are identified by the (6.0)
list in the display property,
compared with eq
. The element width can be either an
integer or a float specifying the required minimum width of the text
(see Pixel Specification for Spaces).
(height height)
This display specification makes the text taller or shorter. Here are the possibilities for height:
(+ n)
This means to use a font that is n steps larger. A step is defined by the set of available fonts—specifically, those that match what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as another step. n should be an integer.
(- n)
This means to use a font that is n steps smaller.
A number, factor, means to use a font that is factor times as tall as the default font.
A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
If the height value doesn’t fit the previous possibilities, it is
a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
height
bound to the current specified font height.
(raise factor)
This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line. It is mainly meant to support display of subscripts and superscripts.
The factor must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down.
Note that if the text also has a height
display specification,
which was specified before (i.e. to the left of) raise
, the
latter will affect the amount of raising or lowering in pixels,
because that is based on the height of the text being raised.
Therefore, if you want to display a sub- or superscript that is
smaller than the normal text height, consider specifying raise
before height
.
You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
package it in another list of the form
(when condition . spec)
.
Then the specification spec applies only when
condition evaluates to a non-nil
value. During the
evaluation, object
is bound to the string or buffer having the
conditional display
property. position
and
buffer-position
are bound to the position within object
and the buffer position where the display
property was found,
respectively. Both positions can be different when object
is a
string.
Note that condition will only be evaluated when redisplay examines the text where this display spec is located, so this feature is best suited for conditions that are relatively stable, i.e. yield, for each particular buffer position, the same results on every evaluation. If the results change for the same text location, e.g., if the result depends on the position of point, then the conditional specification might not do what you want, because redisplay examines only those parts of buffer text where it has reasons to assume that something changed since the last display cycle.
A buffer can have blank areas called display margins on the
left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
but you can put things into the display margins using the
display
property. There is currently no way to make text or
images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
margin display specification in the display
property of some
text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
but that text does not.
A margin display specification looks like ((margin
right-margin) spec)
or ((margin left-margin) spec)
.
Here, spec is another display specification that says what to
display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
or an image descriptor.
To display something in the margin in association with
certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
that text, put on that text an overlay with a before-string
property, and put the margin display specification on the contents of
the before-string.
Note that if the string to be displayed in the margin doesn’t specify a face, its face is determined using the same rules and priorities as it is for strings displayed in the text area (see Displaying Faces). If this results in undesirable “leaking” of faces into the margin, make sure the string has an explicit face specified for it.
Before the display margins can display anything, you must give them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these variables:
This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
cell (a.k.a. “column”) units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
A value of nil
means no left marginal area.
This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of nil
means no right marginal area.
Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
set-window-buffer
. Do not use these variables to try to
determine the current width of the left or right margin. Instead, use
the function window-margins
.
You can also set the margin widths immediately.
This function specifies the margin widths for window window, in
character cell units. The argument left controls the left
margin, and right controls the right margin (default 0
).
If window is not large enough to accommodate margins of the desired width, this leaves the margins of window unchanged.
The values specified here may be later overridden by invoking
set-window-buffer
(see Buffers and Windows) on window
with its keep-margins argument nil
or omitted.
This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
window as a cons cell of the form (left . right)
. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
its width is returned as nil
; if neither of the two margins exist,
the function returns (nil)
. If window is nil
, the
selected window is used.
To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the display
property of text that is displayed (see The display
Property).
Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
display-images-p
to determine if images can in principle be
displayed (see Display Feature Testing).
Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
demand; if so, the variable dynamic-library-alist
can be used
to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
See Dynamically Loaded Libraries.
Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
available), XPM (libXpm
), GIF (libgif
or
libungif
), JPEG (libjpeg
), TIFF (libtiff
), PNG
(libpng
), SVG (librsvg
), and WebP (libwebp
).
Each of these image formats is associated with an image type
symbol. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
pbm
, xbm
, xpm
, gif
, jpeg
,
tiff
, png
, svg
, and webp
.
On some platforms, the built-in image support that doesn’t require any optional libraries includes BMP images.31
Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
(libMagickWand
) support, Emacs can display any image format
that ImageMagick can. See ImageMagick Images. All images
displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol imagemagick
.
This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which are potentially supported in the current configuration.
“Potentially” means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
available, use image-type-available-p
.
This function returns non-nil
if images of type type can
be loaded and displayed. type must be an image type symbol.
For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
function always returns t
. For image types whose support
libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns t
if the library
could be loaded and nil
otherwise.
An image descriptor is a list which specifies the underlying
data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
value of a display
overlay or text property (see Other Display Specifications); but See Showing Images, for convenient helper
functions to insert images into buffers.
Each image descriptor has the form (image . props)
,
where props is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
and values, including at least the pair :type type
that
specifies the image type.
Image descriptors which define image dimensions, :width
,
:height
, :max-width
and :max-height
, may take
either an integer, which represents the dimension in pixels, or a pair
(value . em)
, where value is the dimension’s
length in ems32. One em is equivalent to the height of the font
and value may be an integer or a float.
The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
:type type
The image type. See Image Formats. Every image descriptor must include this property.
:file file
This says to load the image from file file. If file is
not an absolute file name, it is expanded relative to each of the
directories mentioned by image-load-path
(see Defining Images).
:data data
This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
either :data
or :file
, but not both.
For most image types, the value of a :data
property should be a
string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
:data
; for some others, :data
alone is not enough, so
you need to use other image properties along with :data
. See
the following subsections for details.
:margin margin
This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
image. The value, margin, must be a non-negative number, or a
pair (x . y)
of such numbers. If it is a pair,
x specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and y
specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If :margin
is not
specified, the default is zero.
:ascent ascent
This specifies the amount of the image’s height to use for its
ascent—that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
ascent, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
center
.
If ascent is a number, that percentage of the image’s height is used for its ascent.
If ascent is center
, the image is vertically centered
around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
properties and overlays that apply to the image.
If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
:relief relief
This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value, relief, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If relief is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
:width width, :height height
The :width
and :height
keywords are used for scaling the
image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
aspect ratio may not be preserved.
:max-width max-width, :max-height max-height
The :max-width
and :max-height
keywords are used for
scaling if the size of the image exceeds these values. If
:width
is set, it will have precedence over max-width
,
and if :height
is set, it will have precedence over
max-height
, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
wish.
If both :max-width
and :height
are specified, but
:width
is not, preserving the aspect ratio might require that
width exceeds :max-width
. If this happens, scaling will use a
smaller value for the height so as to preserve the aspect ratio while
not exceeding :max-width
. Similarly when both
:max-height
and :width
are specified, but :height
is not. For example, if you have a 200x100 image and specify that
:width
should be 400 and :max-height
should be 150,
you’ll end up with an image that is 300x150: Preserving the aspect
ratio and not exceeding the “max” setting. This combination of
parameters is a useful way of saying “display this image as large as
possible, but no larger than the available display area”.
:scale scale
This should be a number, where values higher than 1 means to increase
the size, and lower means to decrease the size, by multiplying both
the width and height. For instance, a value of 0.25 will make the
image a quarter size of what it originally was. If the scaling makes
the image larger than specified by :max-width
or
:max-height
, the resulting size will not exceed those two
values. If both :scale
and :height
/:width
are
specified, the height/width will be adjusted by the specified scaling
factor.
:rotation angle
Specifies a rotation angle in degrees. Only multiples of 90 degrees
are supported, unless the image type is imagemagick
. Positive
values rotate clockwise, negative values counter-clockwise. Rotation
is performed after scaling and cropping.
:flip flip
If this is t
, the image will be horizontally flipped.
Currently it has no effect if the image type is imagemagick
.
Vertical flipping can be achieved by rotating the image 180 degrees
and toggling this value.
:transform-smoothing smooth
If this is t
, any image transform will have smoothing applied;
if nil
, no smoothing will be applied. The exact algorithm used
is platform dependent, but should be equivalent to bilinear
filtering. Disabling smoothing will use the nearest neighbor
algorithm.
If this property is not specified, create-image
will use the
image-transform-smoothing
user option to say whether scaling
should be done or not. This option can be nil
(no smoothing),
t
(use smoothing) or a predicate function that’s called with
the image object as the only parameter, and should return either
nil
or t
. The default is for down-scaling to apply
smoothing, and for large up-scaling to not apply smoothing.
:index frame
See Multi-Frame Images.
:conversion algorithm
This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the image before it is displayed; the value, algorithm, specifies which algorithm.
laplace
emboss
Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a disabled button.
(edge-detection :matrix matrix :color-adjust adjust)
¶Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. matrix must be either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels around that position. matrix specifies, for each pixel in the neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc., as shown below:
(x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 x-1/y x/y x+1/y x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum of the factors’ absolute values.
Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
(1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1)
Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
( 2 -1 0 -1 0 1 0 1 -2)
disabled
Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
:mask mask
If mask is heuristic
or (heuristic bg)
, build
a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
visible behind the image. If bg is not specified, or if bg
is t
, determine the background color of the image by looking at
the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
bg must be a list (red green blue)
specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
If mask is nil
, remove a mask from the image, if it has
one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
specifying :mask nil
.
:pointer shape
This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this image. See Pointer Shape, for available pointer shapes.
:map map
¶This associates an image map of hot spots with this image.
An image map is an alist where each element has the format
(area id plist)
. An area is specified
as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
A rectangle is a cons
(rect . ((x0 . y0) . (x1 . y1)))
which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
corners of the rectangle area.
A circle is a cons
(circle . ((x0 . y0) . r))
which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; r may
be a float or integer.
A polygon is a cons
(poly . [x0 y0 x1 y1 ...])
where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
plist of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a help-echo
property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
a pointer
property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
it is on the hot-spot.
See Pointer Shape, for available pointer shapes.
When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
event is composed by combining the id of the hot-spot with the
mouse event; for instance, [area4 mouse-1]
if the hot-spot’s
id is area4
.
Note that the map’s coordinates should reflect the displayed image
after all transforms have been done (rotation, scaling and so on), and
also note that Emacs (by default) performs auto-scaling of images, so
to make things match up, you should either specify :scale 1.0
when creating the image, or use the result of
image-compute-scaling-factor
to compute the elements of the
map.
This function returns t
if image spec has a mask bitmap.
frame is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
frame nil
or omitted means to use the selected frame
(see Input Focus).
This function returns non-nil
if frame supports image
scaling and rotation. frame nil
or omitted means to use
the selected frame (see Input Focus). The returned list includes
symbols that indicate which image transform operations are supported:
scale
Image scaling is supported by frame via the :scale
,
:width
, :height
, :max-width
, and
:max-height
properties.
rotate90
Image rotation is supported by frame if the rotation angle is an integral multiple of 90 degrees.
If image transforms are not supported, :rotation
, :crop
,
:width
, :height
, :scale
, :max-width
and
:max-height
will only be usable through ImageMagick, if
available (see ImageMagick Images).
To use XBM format, specify xbm
as the image type. This image
format doesn’t require an external library, so images of this type are
always supported.
Additional image properties supported for the xbm
image type are:
:foreground foreground
The value, foreground, should be a string specifying the image
foreground color, or nil
for the default color. This color is
used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame’s
foreground color.
:background background
The value, background, should be a string specifying the image
background color, or nil
for the default color. This color is
used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame’s
background color.
If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an external file, use the following three properties:
:data data
The value, data, specifies the contents of the image. There are three formats you can use for data:
:data-height
and :data-width
.
stride * height
bits, where
stride is the smallest multiple of 8 greater than or equal to
the width of the image. In this case, you should specify
:data-height
, :data-width
and :stride
, both to
indicate that the string contains just the bits rather than a whole
XBM file, and to specify the size of the image.
:stride stride
The number of bool vector entries stored for each row; the smallest multiple of 8 greater than or equal to width.
To use XPM format, specify xpm
as the image type. The
additional image property :color-symbols
is also meaningful with
the xpm
image type:
:color-symbols symbols
The value, symbols, should be an alist whose elements have the
form (name . color)
. In each element, name is
the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and color
specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
If your Emacs build has ImageMagick support, you can use the
ImageMagick library to load many image formats (see File
Conveniences in The GNU Emacs Manual). The image type symbol
for images loaded via ImageMagick is imagemagick
, regardless of
the actual underlying image format.
To check for ImageMagick support, use the following:
(image-type-available-p 'imagemagick)
This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
BMP
for .bmp images.
The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
imagemagick-types
, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
value of t
enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
Regardless of the value of this variable,
imagemagick-types-inhibit
(see below) takes precedence.
The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
imagemagick-enabled-types
. A value of t
disables
ImageMagick entirely.
This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
Emacs uses this in conjunction with the :format
image property
(see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
of an image. Each element has the form (type
extension)
, where type is a symbol specifying an image
content-type, and extension is a string that specifies the
associated file name extension.
Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional image descriptor properties:
:background background
background, if non-nil
, should be a string specifying a
color, which is used as the image’s background color if the image
supports transparency. If the value is nil
, it defaults to the
frame’s background color.
:format type
The value, type, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
image data, as found in image-format-suffixes
. This is used
when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
:crop geometry
The value of geometry should be a list of the form
(width height x y)
. width and
height specify the width and height of the cropped image. If
x is a positive number it specifies the offset of the cropped
area from the left of the original image, and if negative the offset
from the right. If y is a positive number it specifies the
offset from the top of the original image, and if negative from the
bottom. If x or y are nil
or unspecified the crop
area will be centered on the original image.
If the crop area is outside or overlaps the edge of the image it will
be reduced to exclude any areas outside of the image. This means it
is not possible to use :crop
to increase the size of the image
by entering large width or height values.
Cropping is performed after scaling but before rotation.
SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) is an XML format for specifying images. SVG images support the following additional image descriptor properties:
:foreground foreground
foreground, if non-nil
, should be a string specifying a
color, which is used as the image’s foreground color. If the value is
nil
, it defaults to the current face’s foreground color.
:background background
background, if non-nil
, should be a string specifying a
color, which is used as the image’s background color if the image
supports transparency. If the value is nil
, it defaults to the
current face’s background color.
:css css
css, if non-nil
, should be a string specifying the CSS to
override the default CSS used when generating the image.
If your Emacs build has SVG support, you can create and manipulate these images with the following functions from the svg.el library.
Create a new, empty SVG image with the specified dimensions. args is an argument plist with you can specify following:
:stroke-width
The default width (in pixels) of any lines created.
:stroke
The default stroke color on any lines created.
This function returns an SVG object, a Lisp data structure that specifies an SVG image, and all the following functions work on that structure. The argument svg in the following functions specifies such an SVG object.
Create a gradient in svg with identifier id. type
specifies the gradient type, and can be either linear
or
radial
. stops is a list of percentage/color pairs.
The following will create a linear gradient that goes from red at the start, to green 25% of the way, to blue at the end:
(svg-gradient svg "gradient1" 'linear '((0 . "red") (25 . "green") (100 . "blue")))
The gradient created (and inserted into the SVG object) can later be used by all functions that create shapes.
All the following functions take an optional list of keyword parameters that alter the various attributes from their default values. Valid attributes include:
:stroke-width
The width (in pixels) of lines drawn, and outlines around solid shapes.
:stroke-color
The color of lines drawn, and outlines around solid shapes.
:fill-color
The color used for solid shapes.
:id
The identified of the shape.
:gradient
If given, this should be the identifier of a previously defined gradient object.
:clip-path
Identifier of a clip path.
Add to svg a rectangle whose upper left corner is at position x/y and whose size is width/height.
(svg-rectangle svg 100 100 500 500 :gradient "gradient1")
Add to svg a circle whose center is at x/y and whose radius is radius.
Add to svg an ellipse whose center is at x/y, and whose horizontal radius is x-radius and the vertical radius is y-radius.
Add to svg a line that starts at x1/y1 and extends to x2/y2.
Add to svg a multiple-segment line (a.k.a. “polyline”) that goes through points, which is a list of X/Y position pairs.
(svg-polyline svg '((200 . 100) (500 . 450) (80 . 100)) :stroke-color "green")
Add a polygon to svg where points is a list of X/Y pairs that describe the outer circumference of the polygon.
(svg-polygon svg '((100 . 100) (200 . 150) (150 . 90)) :stroke-color "blue" :fill-color "red")
Add the outline of a shape to svg according to commands, see SVG Path Commands.
Coordinates by default are absolute. To use coordinates relative to
the last position, or – initially – to the origin, set the attribute
:relative to t
. This attribute can be specified for the
function or for individual commands. If specified for the function,
then all commands use relative coordinates by default. To make an
individual command use absolute coordinates, set :relative to
nil
.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((100 . 100))) (lineto ((200 . 0) (0 . 200) (-200 . 0))) (lineto ((100 . 100)) :relative nil)) :stroke-color "blue" :fill-color "lightblue" :relative t)
Add the specified text to svg.
(svg-text svg "This is a text" :font-size "40" :font-weight "bold" :stroke "black" :fill "white" :font-family "impact" :letter-spacing "4pt" :x 300 :y 400 :stroke-width 1)
Add an embedded (raster) image to svg. If datap is
nil
, image should be a file name; otherwise it should be a
string containing the image data as raw bytes. image-type should be a
MIME image type, for instance "image/jpeg"
.
(svg-embed svg "~/rms.jpg" "image/jpeg" nil :width "100px" :height "100px" :x "50px" :y "75px")
To svg add an embedded (raster) image placed at
relative-filename. relative-filename is searched inside
file-name-directory
of the :base-uri
svg image property.
:base-uri
specifies a (possibly non-existing) file name of the
svg image to be created, thus all the embedded files are searched
relatively to the :base-uri
filename’s directory. If
:base-uri
is omitted, then filename from where svg image is
loaded is used. Using :base-uri
improves the performance of
embedding large images, comparing to svg-embed
, because all the
work is done directly by librsvg.
;; Embedding /tmp/subdir/rms.jpg and /tmp/another/rms.jpg (svg-embed-base-uri-image svg "subdir/rms.jpg" :width "100px" :height "100px" :x "50px" :y "75px") (svg-embed-base-uri-image svg "another/rms.jpg" :width "100px" :height "100px" :x "75px" :y "50px") (svg-image svg :scale 1.0 :base-uri "/tmp/dummy" :width 175 :height 175)
Add a clipping path to svg. If applied to a shape via the :clip-path property, parts of that shape which lie outside of the clipping path are not drawn.
(let ((clip-path (svg-clip-path svg :id "foo"))) (svg-circle clip-path 200 200 175)) (svg-rectangle svg 50 50 300 300 :fill-color "red" :clip-path "url(#foo)")
Add the custom node tag to svg.
(svg-node svg 'rect :width 300 :height 200 :x 50 :y 100 :fill-color "green")
Remove the element with identifier id
from the svg
.
Finally, the svg-image
takes an SVG object as its argument and
returns an image object suitable for use in functions like
insert-image
.
Here’s a complete example that creates and inserts an image with a circle:
(let ((svg (svg-create 400 400 :stroke-width 10))) (svg-gradient svg "gradient1" 'linear '((0 . "red") (100 . "blue"))) (svg-circle svg 200 200 100 :gradient "gradient1" :stroke-color "green") (insert-image (svg-image svg)))
SVG paths allow creation of complex images by combining lines, curves, arcs, and other basic shapes. The functions described below allow invoking SVG path commands from a Lisp program.
Move the pen to the first point in points. Additional points
are connected with lines. points is a list of X/Y coordinate
pairs. Subsequent moveto
commands represent the start of a
new subpath.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 100) (100 . 200) (0 . 100)))) :fill "white" :stroke "black")
End the current subpath by connecting it back to its initial point. A line is drawn along the connection.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 100) (100 . 200) (0 . 100))) (closepath) (moveto ((75 . 125) (100 . 150) (125 . 125))) (closepath)) :fill "red" :stroke "black")
Draw a line from the current point to the first element in points, a list of X/Y position pairs. If more than one point is specified, draw a polyline.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 100))) (lineto ((100 . 200) (0 . 100)))) :fill "yellow" :stroke "red")
Draw a horizontal line from the current point to the first element in x-coordinates. Specifying multiple coordinates is possible, although this usually doesn’t make sense.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((100 . 200))) (horizontal-lineto (300))) :stroke "green")
Draw vertical lines.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 100))) (vertical-lineto (300))) :stroke "green")
Using the first element in coordinate-sets, draw a cubic Bézier
curve from the current point. If there are multiple coordinate sets,
draw a polybezier. Each coordinate set is a list of the form
(x1 y1 x2 y2 x y)
, where
(x, y) is the curve’s end point. (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) are control points at the
beginning and at the end, respectively.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((100 . 100))) (curveto ((200 100 100 200 200 200) (300 200 0 100 100 100)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "red")
Using the first element in coordinate-sets, draw a cubic Bézier
curve from the current point. If there are multiple coordinate sets,
draw a polybezier. Each coordinate set is a list of the form
(x2 y2 x y)
, where (x, y) is the curve’s end point and (x2, y2) is the
corresponding control point. The first control point is the
reflection of the second control point of the previous command
relative to the current point, if that command was curveto
or smooth-curveto
. Otherwise the first control point
coincides with the current point.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((100 . 100))) (curveto ((200 100 100 200 200 200))) (smooth-curveto ((0 100 100 100)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "blue")
Using the first element in coordinate-sets, draw a quadratic
Bézier curve from the current point. If there are multiple coordinate
sets, draw a polybezier. Each coordinate set is a list of the form
(x1 y1 x y)
, where (x, y) is the curve’s end point and (x1, y1) is the
control point.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 100))) (quadratic-bezier-curveto ((300 100 300 200))) (quadratic-bezier-curveto ((300 300 200 300))) (quadratic-bezier-curveto ((100 300 100 200))) (quadratic-bezier-curveto ((100 100 200 100)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "pink")
Using the first element in coordinate-sets, draw a quadratic
Bézier curve from the current point. If there are multiple coordinate
sets, draw a polybezier. Each coordinate set is a list of the form
(x y)
, where (x, y) is the curve’s
end point. The control point is the reflection of the control point
of the previous command relative to the current point, if that command
was quadratic-bezier-curveto
or
smooth-quadratic-bezier-curveto
. Otherwise the control
point coincides with the current point.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 100))) (quadratic-bezier-curveto ((300 100 300 200))) (smooth-quadratic-bezier-curveto ((200 300))) (smooth-quadratic-bezier-curveto ((100 200))) (smooth-quadratic-bezier-curveto ((200 100)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "lightblue")
Using the first element in coordinate-sets, draw an elliptical
arc from the current point. If there are multiple coordinate sets,
draw a sequence of elliptical arcs. Each coordinate set is a list of
the form (rx ry x y)
, where
(x, y) is the end point of the ellipse, and
(rx, ry) are its radii. Attributes may be appended to
the list:
:x-axis-rotation
The angle in degrees by which the x-axis of the ellipse is rotated relative to the x-axis of the current coordinate system.
:large-arc
If set to t
, draw an arc sweep greater than or equal to 180
degrees. Otherwise, draw an arc sweep smaller than or equal to 180
degrees.
:sweep
If set to t
, draw an arc in positive angle direction.
Otherwise, draw it in negative angle direction.
(svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 250))) (elliptical-arc ((75 75 200 350)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "red") (svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 250))) (elliptical-arc ((75 75 200 350 :large-arc t)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "green") (svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 250))) (elliptical-arc ((75 75 200 350 :sweep t)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "blue") (svg-path svg '((moveto ((200 . 250))) (elliptical-arc ((75 75 200 350 :large-arc t :sweep t)))) :fill "transparent" :stroke "gray") (svg-path svg '((moveto ((160 . 100))) (elliptical-arc ((40 100 80 0))) (elliptical-arc ((40 100 -40 -70 :x-axis-rotation -120))) (elliptical-arc ((40 100 -40 70 :x-axis-rotation -240)))) :stroke "pink" :fill "lightblue" :relative t)
For PBM images, specify image type pbm
. Color, gray-scale and
monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
image properties are supported.
:foreground foreground
The value, foreground, should be a string specifying the image
foreground color, or nil
for the default color. This color is
used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame’s
foreground color.
:background background
The value, background, should be a string specifying the image
background color, or nil
for the default color. This color is
used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame’s
background color.
The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
Image type gif
.
Supports the :index
property. See Multi-Frame Images.
Image type jpeg
.
Image type png
.
Image type tiff
.
Supports the :index
property. See Multi-Frame Images.
Image type webp
.
The functions create-image
, defimage
and
find-image
provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
data in file-or-data. file-or-data can be a file name or
a string containing the image data; data-p should be nil
for the former case, non-nil
for the latter case. If
file-or-data is a relative file name, the function will search
for it in directories mentioned in image-load-path
.
The optional argument type is a symbol specifying the image type.
If type is omitted or nil
, create-image
tries to
determine the image type from the file’s first few bytes, or else
from the file’s name.
The remaining arguments, props, specify additional image properties—for example,
(create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :mask 'heuristic)
See Image Descriptors, for the list of supported properties. Some properties are specific to certain image types, and are described in subsections specific to those types.
The function returns nil
if images of this type are not
supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
This macro defines symbol as an image name. The arguments specs is a list which specifies how to display the image. The third argument, doc, is an optional documentation string.
Each argument in specs has the form of a property list, and each
one should specify at least the :type
property and either the
:file
or the :data
property. The value of :type
should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
:file
is the file to load the image from, and the value of
:data
is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
example:
(defimage test-image ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm") (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
defimage
tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
usable—that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
stored in symbol.
If none of the alternatives will work, then symbol is defined
as nil
.
Return the value of property in image. Properties can be
set by using setf
. Setting a property to nil
will
remove the property from the image.
This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one of a list of image specifications specs.
Each specification in specs is a property list with contents
depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
properties :type type
and either :file file
or :data data
, where type is a symbol specifying
the image type, e.g., xbm
, file is the file to load the
image from, and data is a string containing the actual image data.
The first specification in the list whose type is supported, and
file exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
returned. If no specification is satisfied, nil
is returned.
The image is looked for in image-load-path
.
This variable’s value is a list of locations in which to search for image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list, that is taken to be a list of directories to search.
The default is to search in the images subdirectory of the
directory specified by data-directory
, then the directory
specified by data-directory
, and finally in the directories in
load-path
. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
supply the subdirectory explicitly. For example, to find the
image images/foo/bar.xpm within data-directory
, you
should specify the image as follows:
(defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the Lisp package library.
The function searches for image first using image-load-path
,
excluding data-directory
/images, and then in
load-path
, followed by a path suitable for library, which
includes ../../etc/images and ../etc/images relative to
the library file itself, and finally in
data-directory
/images.
Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
the directory in which image was found, followed by the value of
load-path
. If path is given, it is used instead of
load-path
.
If no-error is non-nil
and a suitable path can’t be
found, don’t signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
before, except that nil
appears in place of the image directory.
Here is an example of using image-load-path-for-library
:
(defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm")) (image-load-path (cons (car load-path) image-load-path))) (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
Images are automatically scaled when created based on the
image-scaling-factor
variable. The value is either a floating
point number (where numbers higher than 1 means to increase the size
and lower means to shrink the size), or the symbol auto
, which
will compute a scaling factor based on the font pixel size.
You can use an image descriptor by setting up the display
property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
section.
This function inserts image in the current buffer at point. The
value image should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
returned by create-image
, or the value of a symbol defined with
defimage
. The argument string specifies the text to put
in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or nil
,
insert-image
uses " "
by default.
The argument area specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
If it is left-margin
, the image appears in the left margin;
right-margin
specifies the right margin. If area is
nil
or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
buffer’s text.
The argument slice specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
slice is nil
or omitted the whole image is inserted.
(However, note that images are chopped on display at the window’s
right edge, because wrapping images is not supported.) Otherwise,
slice is a list (x y width
height)
which specifies the x and y positions and
width and height of the image area to insert. Integer
values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
0.0–1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
image.
Internally, this function inserts string in the buffer, and gives
it a display
property which specifies image. See The display
Property. By default, doing interactive searches in the buffer will
consider string when searching. If inhibit-isearch is
non-nil
, this is inhibited.
This function inserts image in the current buffer at point, like
insert-image
, but splits the image into rowsxcols
equally sized slices.
Emacs displays each slice as a separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that displays (large) images.
This function puts image image in front of pos in the current buffer. The argument pos should be an integer or a marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear. The argument string specifies the text that should hold the image as an alternative to the default ‘x’.
The argument image must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
by create-image
or stored by defimage
.
The argument area specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
If it is left-margin
, the image appears in the left margin;
right-margin
specifies the right margin. If area is
nil
or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
buffer’s text.
Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
before-string
property containing text that has a display
property whose value is the image. (Whew! that was a mouthful…)
This function removes images in buffer between positions
start and end. If buffer is omitted or nil
,
images are removed from the current buffer.
This removes only images that were put into buffer the way
put-image
does it, not images that were inserted with
insert-image
or in other ways.
This function returns the size of an image as a pair
(width . height)
. spec is an image
specification. pixels non-nil
means return sizes measured
in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
of frame (see Frame Font). frame is the frame on which
the image will be displayed. frame nil
or omitted means
use the selected frame (see Input Focus).
This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is larger than this limit.
If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating point, it specifies the maximum image height and width as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
max-image-size
is subsequently changed (see Image Cache).
This function returns t
if point is on an image, and nil
otherwise.
Images inserted with the insertion functions above also get a local keymap installed in the text properties (or overlays) that span the displayed image. This keymap defines the following commands:
Increase the image size (image-increase-size
)
Decrease the image size (image-decrease-size
).
Rotate the image (image-rotate
).
Flip the image horizontally (image-flip-horizontally
).
Flip the image vertically (image-flip-vertically
).
Save the image to a file (image-save
).
Interactively crop the image (image-crop
).
Interactively cut a rectangle from the image (image-cut
).
See Image Mode in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more details about these image-specific key bindings.
Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there are multiple “frames” in the image. At present, Emacs supports multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as DJVM.
The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
A multi-frame image has a property :index
, whose value is an
integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
This function returns non-nil
if image contains more than
one frame. The actual return value is a cons (nimages
. delay)
, where nimages is the number of frames and
delay is the delay in seconds between them, or nil
if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
to be treated as multiple pages do not.
This function returns the index of the current frame number for image, counting from 0.
This function switches image to frame number n. It
replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
of the range, unless nocheck is non-nil
. If image
does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
as a hollow box.
This function animates image. The optional integer index
specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
argument limit controls the length of the animation. If omitted
or nil
, the image animates once only; if t
it loops
forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
minimum frame delay of 0.01 (image-minimum-frame-delay
) seconds.
If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
image-default-frame-delay
.
This function returns the timer responsible for animating image, if there is one.
Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
cache for an existing image specification equal
to the desired
specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
This function removes the image with specification spec from the
image cache of frame frame. Image specifications are compared
using equal
. If frame is nil
, it defaults to the
selected frame. If frame is t
, the image is flushed on
all existing frames.
In Emacs’s current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal (see Multiple Terminals). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
One use for image-flush
is to tell Emacs about a change in an
image file. If an image specification contains a :file
property, the image is cached based on the file’s contents when the
image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
image-flush
flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
Another use for image-flush
is for memory conservation. If
your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
period much shorter than image-cache-eviction-delay
(see
below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
it. If filter is omitted or nil
, it clears the cache for
the selected frame. If filter is a frame, it clears the cache
for that frame. If filter is t
, all image caches are
cleared. Otherwise, filter is taken to be a file name, and all
images associated with that file name are removed from all image
caches.
If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the associated memory.
This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
If the value is nil
, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
debugging.
This function returns the total size of the current image cache, in bytes. An image of size 200x100 with 24 bits per color will have a cache size of 60000 bytes, for instance.
Emacs sometimes uses buttons (for clicking on) or small graphics (to illustrate something). Since Emacs is available on a wide variety of systems with different capabilities, and users have different preferences, Emacs provides a facility to handle this in a convenient way, allowing customization, graceful degradation, accessibility, as well as themability: Icons.
The central macro here is define-icon
, and here’s a simple
example:
(define-icon outline-open button '((image "right.svg" "open.xpm" "open.pbm" :height line) (emoji "▶️") (symbol "▶" "➤") (text "open" :face icon-button)) "Icon used for buttons for opening a section in outline buffers." :version "29.1" :help-echo "Open this section")
Which alternative will actually be displayed depends on the value of
the user option icon-preference
(see Icons in The GNU
Emacs Manual) and on the results of run-time checks for what the
current frame’s terminal can actually display.
The macro in the example above defines outline-open
as an icon,
and inherits properties from the icon called button
(so this is
meant as a clickable button to be inserted in a buffer). It is
followed by a list of icon types along with the actual icon
shapes themselves. In addition, there’s a doc string and various
keywords that contain additional information and properties.
To instantiate an icon, you use icon-string
, which will
consult the current Customize theming, and the icon-preference
user option, and finally what the Emacs is able to actually display.
If icon-preference
is (image emoji symbol text)
(i.e.,
allowing all of these forms of icons), in this case,
icon-string
will first check that Emacs is able to display
images at all, and then whether it has support for each of those
different image formats. If that fails, Emacs will check whether
Emacs can display emojis (in the current frame). If that fails, it’ll
check whether it can display the symbol in question. If that fails,
it’ll use the plain text version.
For instance, if icon-preference
doesn’t contain image
or emoji
, it’ll skip those entries.
Code can confidently call icon-string
in all circumstances and
be sure that something readable will appear on the screen, no
matter whether the user is on a graphical terminal or a text terminal,
and no matter which features Emacs was built with.
Define an icon name, a symbol, with the display alternatives in
spec, that can be later instantiated using icon-string
.
The name is the name of the resulting keyword.
The resulting icon will inherit specs from parent, and from their parent’s parents, and so on, and the lowest descendent element wins.
specs is a list of icon specifications. The first element of each specification is the type, and the rest is something that can be used as an icon of that type, and then optionally followed by a keyword list. The following icon types are available:
image
In this case, there may be many images listed as candidates. Emacs
will choose the first one that the current Emacs instance can show.
If an image is listed is an absolute file name, it’s used as is, but it’s
otherwise looked up in the list image-load-path
(see Defining Images).
emoji
This should be a (possibly colorful) emoji.
symbol
This should be a (monochrome) symbol character.
text
Icons should also have a textual fallback. This can also be used for
the visually impaired: if icon-preference
is just
(text)
, all icons will be replaced by text.
Various keywords may follow the list of icon specifications. For instance:
(symbol "▶" "➤" :face icon-button)
Unknown keywords are ignored. The following keywords are allowed:
:face
The face to be used for the icon.
:height
This is only valid for image
icons, and can be either a number
(which specifies the height in pixels), or the symbol line
,
which will use the default line height in the currently selected
window.
:width
This is only valid for image
icons, and can be either a number
(which specifies the width in pixels), or the symbol font
,
which will use the width in pixels of the current buffer’s default
face font.
doc should be a doc string.
keywords is a list of keyword/value pairs. The following keywords are allowed:
:version
The (approximate) Emacs version this button first appeared. (This keyword is mandatory.)
:group
The customization group this icon belongs in. If not present, it is inferred.
:help-echo
The help string shown when hovering over the icon with the mouse pointer.
This function returns a string suitable for display in the current buffer for icon.
Alternatively, you can get a “deconstructed” version of icon
with this function. It returns a plist (see Property Lists) where
the keys are string
, face
and image. (The latter
is only present if the icon is represented by an image.) This can be
useful if the icon isn’t to be inserted directly in the buffer, but
needs some sort of pre-processing first.
Icons can be customized with M-x customize-icon. Themes can specify changes to icons with, for instance:
(custom-theme-set-icons 'my-theme '(outline-open ((image :height 100) (text " OPEN "))) '(outline-close ((image :height 100) (text " CLOSE " :face warning))))
Emacs is able to display native widgets, such as GTK+ WebKit widgets,
in Emacs buffers when it was built with the necessary support
libraries and is running on a graphical terminal. To test whether
Emacs supports display of embedded widgets, check that the
xwidget-internal
feature is available (see Features).
To display an embedded widget in a buffer, you must first create an
xwidget object, and then use that object as the display specifier
in a display
text or overlay property (see The display
Property).
Embedded widgets can send events notifying Lisp code about changes occurring within them. (see Xwidget events).
This creates and returns an xwidget object. If
buffer is omitted or nil
, it defaults to the current
buffer. If buffer names a buffer that doesn’t exist, it will be
created. The type identifies the type of the xwidget component,
it can be one of the following:
webkit
The WebKit component.
The width and height arguments specify the widget size in pixels, and title, a string, specifies its title. related is used internally by the WebKit widget, and specifies another WebKit widget that the newly created widget should share settings and subprocesses with.
The xwidget that is returned will be killed alongside its buffer
(see Killing Buffers). You can also kill it using
kill-xwidget
. Once it is killed, the xwidget may continue to
exist as a Lisp object and act as a display
property until all
references to it are gone, but most actions that can be performed on
live xwidgets will no longer be available.
This function returns t
if object is an xwidget,
nil
otherwise.
This function returns t
if object is an xwidget that
hasn’t been killed, and nil
otherwise.
This function kills xwidget, by removing it from its buffer and releasing window system resources it holds.
This function returns the property list of xwidget.
This function replaces the property list of xwidget with a new property list given by plist.
This function returns the buffer of xwidget. If xwidget
has been killed, it returns nil
.
This function sets the buffer of xwidget to buffer.
This function returns a list of xwidget objects associated with the
buffer, which can be specified as a buffer object or a name of
an existing buffer, a string. The value is nil
if buffer
contains no xwidgets.
This function browses the specified uri in the given xwidget. The uri is a string that specifies the name of a file or a URL.
This function causes the browser widget specified by xwidget to
execute the specified JavaScript script
.
This function executes the specified script like
xwidget-webkit-execute-script
does, but it also returns the
script’s return value as a string. If script doesn’t return a
value, this function returns default, or nil
if
default was omitted.
This function returns the title of xwidget as a string.
This function resizes the specified xwidget to the size widthxheight pixels.
This function returns the desired size of xwidget as a list of
the form (width height)
. The dimensions are in
pixels.
This function returns the attributes of xwidget as a vector of
the form [type title width height]
.
The attributes are usually determined by make-xwidget
when the
xwidget is created.
This function allows you to arrange that Emacs will ask the user for
confirmation before exiting or before killing a buffer that has
xwidget associated with it. If flag is non-nil
,
Emacs will query the user, otherwise it will not.
This function returns the current setting of xwidgets
query-on-exit flag, either t
or nil
.
Send an input event event to xwidget. The precise action performed is platform-specific. See Input Events.
You can optionally pass the frame on which the event was generated via
frame. On X11, modifier keys in key events will not be
considered if frame is nil
, and the selected frame is not
an X-Windows frame.
On GTK, only keyboard and function key events are supported. Mouse, motion, and click events are dispatched to the xwidget without going through Lisp code, and as such shouldn’t require this function to be called.
Start an incremental search on the WebKit widget xwidget with the string query as the query. case-insensitive denotes whether or not the search is case-insensitive, backwards determines if the search is performed backwards towards the start of the document, and wrap-around determines whether or not the search terminates at the end of the document.
If the function is called while a search query is already present, then the query specified here will replace the existing query.
To stop a search query, use xwidget-webkit-finish-search
.
Display the next search result in xwidget. This function will
signal an error if a search query has not been already started in
xwidget through xwidget-webkit-search
.
If wrap-around
was non-nil
when xwidget-webkit-search
was called, then the search will restart from the beginning of the
document when its end is reached.
Display the previous search result in xwidget. This function
signals an error if a search query has not been already started in
xwidget through xwidget-webkit-search
.
If wrap-around
was non-nil
when xwidget-webkit-search
was called, then the search will restart from the end of the
document when its beginning is reached.
Finish a search operation started with xwidget-webkit-search
in
xwidget. If there is no query currently ongoing, this function
signals an error.
Load text, a string, into xwidget, which should be a WebKit xwidget. Any HTML markup in text will be processed by xwidget while rendering the text.
Optional argument base-uri, which should be a string, specifies the absolute location of the web resources referenced by text, to be used for resolving relative links in text.
Make xwidget, a WebKit widget, load the rel-posth element in its navigation history.
If rel-pos is zero, the current page will be reloaded instead.
Return the navigation history of xwidget, up to limit items in each direction. If not specified, limit defaults to 50.
The returned value is a list of the form (back here forward)
, where here is the current
navigation item, while back is a list of items containing the
items recorded by WebKit before the current navigation item, and
forward is a list of items recorded after the current navigation
item. back, here and forward can all be nil
.
When here is nil
, it means that no items have been
recorded yet; if back or forward are nil
, it means
that there is no history recorded before or after the current item
respectively.
Navigation items are themselves lists of the form (idx title uri)
. In these lists, idx is an index that
can be passed to xwidget-webkit-goto-history
, title is
the human-readable title of the item, and uri is the URI of the
item. The user should normally have no reason to load uri
manually to reach a specific history item. Instead, idx should
be passed as an index to xwidget-webkit-goto-history
.
Return an estimate of how much data is remaining to be transferred before the page displayed by the WebKit widget xwidget is fully loaded.
The value returned is a float ranging between 0.0 and 1.0.
Make the WebKit widget xwidget store cookies in file.
file must be an absolute file name. The new setting will also
affect any xwidget that was created with xwidget as the
related
argument to make-xwidget
, and widgets related to
those as well.
If this function is not called at least once on xwidget or a related widget, xwidget will not store cookies on disk at all.
Terminate any data transfer still in progress in the WebKit widget xwidget as part of a page-loading operation. If a page is not being loaded, this function does nothing.
The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating buttons that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of hyperlinks.
A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties, attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are called button properties. One of these properties, the action property, specifies a function which is called when the user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action function may examine the button and use its other properties as desired.
In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the Widget package. See Introduction in The Emacs Widget Library. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster, smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user, the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
Each button has an associated list of properties defining its appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used for application specific purposes. The following properties have special meaning to the Button package:
action
¶The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
the single argument button. By default this is ignore
,
which does nothing.
mouse-action
¶This is similar to action
, and when present, will be used
instead of action
for button invocations resulting from
mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting RET). If not
present, mouse-clicks use action
instead.
face
¶This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
displayed; by default this is the button
face.
mouse-face
¶This is an additional face which controls appearance during
mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
the usual Emacs highlight
face.
keymap
¶The button’s keymap, defining bindings active within the button
region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
in the variable button-map
, which defines RET and
mouse-2 to invoke the button.
type
¶The button type. See Button Types.
help-echo
¶A string displayed by the Emacs tooltip help system; by default,
"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"
. Alternatively, a function
that returns, or a form that evaluates to, a string to be displayed or
nil
. For details see Text help-echo.
The function is called with three arguments, window,
object, and pos. The second argument, object, is
either the overlay that had the property (for overlay buttons), or the
buffer containing the button (for text property buttons). The other
arguments have the same meaning as for the special text property
help-echo
.
follow-link
¶The follow-link
property, defining how a mouse-1 click
behaves on this button, See Defining Clickable Text.
button
¶All buttons have a non-nil
button
property, which may be useful
in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
standard button functions do).
There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
Every button has a button type, which defines default values for the button’s properties. Button types are arranged in a hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types, so that it’s easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for specific tasks.
Define a button type called name (a symbol).
The remaining arguments
form a sequence of property value pairs, specifying default
property values for buttons with this type (a button’s type may be set
by giving it a type
property when creating the button, using
the :type
keyword argument).
In addition, the keyword argument :supertype
may be used to
specify a button-type from which name inherits its default
property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
name is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
reflected in its subtypes.
Using define-button-type
to define default properties for
buttons is not necessary—buttons without any specified type use the
built-in button-type button
—but it is encouraged, since
doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
initialized from the button’s type (which defaults to the built-in
button type button
). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
the button is governed by the face
property; by default (via
the face
property inherited from the button
button-type)
this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
called make-...button
, and those that also insert the button
text, called insert-...button
.
The button-creation functions all take the &rest
argument
properties, which should be a sequence of property value
pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see Button Properties. In addition, the keyword argument :type
may be
used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
see Button Types. Any properties not explicitly specified
during creation will be inherited from the button’s type (if the type
defines such a property).
The following functions add a button using an overlay (see Overlays) to hold the button properties:
This makes a button from beg to end in the current buffer, and returns it.
This inserts a button with the label label at point, and returns it.
The following functions are similar, but using text properties (see Text Properties) to hold the button properties. Such buttons do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However, if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
This makes a button from beg to end in the current buffer, using text properties.
This inserts a button with the label label at point, using text properties.
Sometimes it’s more convenient to make a string into a button without
inserting it into a buffer immediately, for instance when creating
data structures that may then, later, be inserted into a buffer. This
function makes string into such a string, and callback
will be called when the user clicks on the button. The optional
data parameter will be used as the parameter when callback
is called. If nil
, the button is used as the parameter instead.
These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons. Often these are used by a button’s invocation function to determine what to do.
Where a button parameter is specified, it means an object referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons). Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button’s invocation function when it is invoked.
Return the position at which button starts.
Return the position at which button ends.
Get the property of button button named prop.
Set button’s prop property to val.
Call button’s action
property (i.e., invoke the function
that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
button). If use-mouse-action is non-nil
, try to
invoke the button’s mouse-action
property instead of
action
; if the button has no mouse-action
property, use
action
as normal. If the button-data
property is
present in button, use that as the argument for the
action
function instead of button.
Return button’s text label.
Return button’s button-type.
Return t
if button has button-type type, or one of
type’s subtypes.
Return the button at position pos in the current buffer, or
nil
. If the button at pos is a text property button, the
return value is a marker pointing to pos.
Set the button-type type’s prop property to val.
Get the property of button-type type named prop.
Return t
if button-type type is a subtype of supertype.
These are commands and functions for locating and operating on buttons in an Emacs buffer.
push-button
is the command that a user uses to actually push
a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to RET
and to mouse-2 using a local keymap in the button’s overlay or
text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
such as forward-button
and backward-button
are
additionally available in the keymap stored in
button-buffer-map
; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
button-buffer-map
as a parent keymap for its keymap.
Alternatively, the button-mode
can be switched on for much the
same effect: It’s a minor mode that does nothing else than install
button-buffer-map
as a minor mode keymap.
If the button has a non-nil
follow-link
property, and
mouse-1-click-follows-link
is set, a quick mouse-1 click
will also activate the push-button
command.
See Defining Clickable Text.
Perform the action specified by a button at location pos.
pos may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
use-mouse-action is non-nil
, or pos is a
mouse-event (see Mouse Events), try to invoke the button’s
mouse-action
property instead of action
; if the button
has no mouse-action
property, use action
as normal.
pos defaults to point, except when push-button
is invoked
interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
event’s position is used. If there’s no button at pos, do
nothing and return nil
, otherwise return t
.
Move to the nth next button, or nth previous button if
n is negative. If n is zero, move to the start of any
button at point. If wrap is non-nil
, moving past either
end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
display-message is non-nil
, the button’s help-echo string
is displayed. Any button with a non-nil
skip
property
is skipped over. Returns the button found, and signals an error if no
buttons can be found. If no-error is non-nil
, return nil
instead of signaling the error.
Move to the nth previous button, or nth next button if
n is negative. If n is zero, move to the start of any
button at point. If wrap is non-nil
, moving past either
end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
display-message is non-nil
, the button’s help-echo string
is displayed. Any button with a non-nil
skip
property
is skipped over. Returns the button found, and signals an error if no
buttons can be found. If no-error is non-nil
, return nil
instead of signaling the error.
Return the next button after (for next-button
) or before (for
previous-button
) position pos in the current buffer. If
count-current is non-nil
, count any button at pos
in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that structure. This is like the “view” component in the “model–view–controller” design paradigm. Ewoc means “Emacs’s Widget for Object Collections”.
An ewoc is a structure that organizes information required to construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed header text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp objects that you specify); and last, fixed footer text. Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
Typically, you define an ewoc with ewoc-create
, and then pass
the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node’s textual
representation to another, and so forth. See Abstract Display Functions.
A node encapsulates a data element much the way a variable holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a new value in its place, like so:
(ewoc-data node) ⇒ value (ewoc-set-data node new-value) ⇒ new-value
You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into some other structure. The example (see Abstract Display Example) uses the latter approach.
When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
buffer. You can update all nodes by calling ewoc-refresh
, or
just specific nodes using ewoc-invalidate
, or all nodes
satisfying a predicate using ewoc-map
. Alternatively, you can
delete invalid nodes using ewoc-delete
or ewoc-filter
,
and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
In this subsection, ewoc and node stand for the structures described above (see Abstract Display), while data stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
elements). pretty-printer should be a function that takes one
argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
inserts its textual description at point using insert
(and never
insert-before-markers
, because that would interfere with the
Ewoc package’s internal mechanisms).
Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
the footer and every node’s textual description. If nosep
is non-nil
, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
making nodes invisible by arranging for pretty-printer
to do nothing for those nodes.
An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
ewoc-create
.
This returns the buffer where ewoc maintains its text.
This returns a cons cell (header . footer)
made from ewoc’s header and footer.
This sets the header and footer of ewoc to the strings header and footer, respectively.
These add a new node encapsulating data, putting it, respectively, at the beginning or end of ewoc’s chain of nodes.
These add a new node encapsulating data, adding it to ewoc before or after node, respectively.
These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of node in ewoc.
This returns the node in ewoc found at zero-based index n.
A negative n means count from the end. ewoc-nth
returns
nil
if n is out of range.
This extracts the data encapsulated by node and returns it.
This sets the data encapsulated by node to data.
This determines the node in ewoc which contains point (or
pos if specified), and returns that node. If ewoc has no
nodes, it returns nil
. If pos is before the first node,
it returns the first node; if pos is after the last node, it returns
the last node. The optional third arg guess
should be a node that is likely to be near pos; this doesn’t
alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
This returns the start position of node.
These move point to the previous or next, respectively, argth node
in ewoc. ewoc-goto-prev
does not move if it is already at
the first node or if ewoc is empty, whereas ewoc-goto-next
moves past the last node, returning nil
. Excepting this special
case, these functions return the node moved to.
This moves point to the start of node in ewoc.
This function regenerates the text of ewoc. It works by deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the data elements’ representations, and then calling the pretty-printer function for each node, one by one, in order.
This is similar to ewoc-refresh
, except that only nodes in
ewoc are updated instead of the entire set.
This deletes each node in nodes from ewoc.
This calls predicate for each data element in ewoc and
deletes those nodes for which predicate returns nil
.
Any args are passed to predicate.
This calls predicate for each data element in ewoc
and returns a list of those elements for which predicate
returns non-nil
. The elements in the list are ordered
as in the buffer. Any args are passed to predicate.
This calls map-function for each data element in ewoc and
updates those nodes for which map-function returns non-nil
.
Any args are passed to map-function.
Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to implement a color components display, an area in a buffer that represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB value) in various ways.
(setq colorcomp-ewoc nil colorcomp-data nil colorcomp-mode-map nil colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"]) (defun colorcomp-pp (data) (if data (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data))) (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x" (format "%02X" comp) " " (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n")) (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X" (aref colorcomp-data 0) (aref colorcomp-data 1) (aref colorcomp-data 2))) (samp " (sample text) ")) (insert "Color\t: " (propertize samp 'face `(foreground-color . ,cstr)) (propertize samp 'face `(background-color . ,cstr)) "\n")))) (defun colorcomp (color) "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer. The buffer is in Color Components mode." (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ") (when (string= "" color) (setq color "green")) (unless (color-values color) (error "No such color: %S" color)) (switch-to-buffer (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color))) (kill-all-local-variables) (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode mode-name "Color Components") (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map) (erase-buffer) (buffer-disable-undo) (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8)) (color-values color)))) (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp "\nColor Components\n\n" (substitute-command-keys "\n\\{colorcomp-mode-map}")))) (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data) (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc) (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0) (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1) (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2) (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
other words, the “controller” part of the “model–view–controller”
design paradigm) by defining commands to modify colorcomp-data
and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
together conveniently.
(defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta) (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index))) (unless (= limit cur) (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta))) (ewoc-invalidate colorcomp-ewoc (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index) (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1)))) (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1)) (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1)) (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1)) (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1)) (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1)) (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1)) (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit () "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer. The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)." (interactive) (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X" (aref colorcomp-data 0) (aref colorcomp-data 1) (aref colorcomp-data 2))) (kill-buffer nil)) (setq colorcomp-mode-map (define-keymap :suppress t "i" 'colorcomp-R-less "o" 'colorcomp-R-more "k" 'colorcomp-G-less "l" 'colorcomp-G-more "," 'colorcomp-B-less "." 'colorcomp-B-more "SPC" 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit))
Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
ewoc is created to be either nil
or an index into the vector
colorcomp-data
, the actual color components.
This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
The value of blink-paren-function
may be nil
, in which
case nothing is done.
If this variable is nil
, then blink-matching-open
does
nothing.
This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching parenthesis before giving up.
This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
This function is the default value of blink-paren-function
. It
assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
displays the character’s context in the echo area. To avoid long
delays, this function does not search farther than
blink-matching-paren-distance
characters.
Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
(defun interactive-blink-matching-open () "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point." (interactive)
(let ((blink-matching-paren-distance (buffer-size)) (blink-matching-paren t)) (blink-matching-open)))
This section describes how characters are actually displayed by Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a glyph (a graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen), whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example, the character ‘a’ (character code 97) is displayed as ‘a’. Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a sequence of two glyphs, ‘^L’, while the newline character (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a display table, which maps each character code into a sequence of glyphs. See Display Tables.
Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the absence of a display table, which can override these conventions; see Display Tables).
tab-width
controls the number of
spaces per tab stop (see below).
ctl-arrow
. If this variable is non-nil
(the default),
these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
first glyph is ‘^’ (a display table can specify a glyph to use
instead of ‘^’); e.g., the DEL character is displayed as
‘^?’.
If ctl-arrow
is nil
, these characters are displayed as
octal escapes (see below).
This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line conversion (see Basic Concepts of Coding Systems).
The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
nil
. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
specify the characters for which you want special display behavior.
The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
mode line using the new values, call the function
force-mode-line-update
(see Mode Line Format).
This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
displayed. If it is non-nil
, they are displayed as a caret
followed by the character: ‘^A’. If it is nil
, they are
displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
digits, as in ‘\001’.
The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
command tab-to-tab-stop
. See Adjustable Tab Stops.
A display table is a special-purpose char-table
(see Char-Tables), with display-table
as its subtype, which
is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
display table object. The next section (see Active Display Table)
describes the various standard display tables and their precedence.
This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
nil
in all elements.
The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
codes; the element at index c says how to display the character
code c. The value should be nil
(which means to display
the character c according to the usual display conventions;
see Usual Display Conventions), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
display the character c as those glyphs; see Glyphs).
Warning: if you use the display table to change the display of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long line.
The display table also has six extra slots which serve special
purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; nil
in any slot
means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this is ‘$’). See Glyphs. On graphical terminals, Emacs by default uses arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has no effect, unless you disable the fringes (see Window Fringes in the GNU Emacs Manual).
The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is ‘\’). On graphical terminals, Emacs by default uses curved arrows in the fringes to indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect, unless you disable the fringes.
The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character code (the default is ‘\’).
The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is ‘^’).
A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the default is ‘...’). See Selective Display.
The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the default is ‘|’). See Splitting Windows. This currently has effect only on text terminals; on graphical terminals, if vertical scroll bars are supported and in use, a scroll bar separates the two windows, and if there are no vertical scroll bars and no dividers (see Window Dividers), Emacs uses a thin line to indicate the border.
For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
the effect of setting ctl-arrow
to a non-nil
value
(see Glyphs, for the function make-glyph-code
):
(setq disptab (make-display-table)) (dotimes (i 32) (or (= i ?\t) (= i ?\n) (aset disptab i (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph) (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph))))) (aset disptab 127 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph) (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))
This function returns the value of the extra slot slot of
display-table. The argument slot may be a number from 0 to
5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
truncation
, wrap
, escape
, control
,
selective-display
, and vertical-border
.
This function stores value in the extra slot slot of
display-table. The argument slot may be a number from 0 to
5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
truncation
, wrap
, escape
, control
,
selective-display
, and vertical-border
.
This function displays a description of the display table display-table in a help buffer.
This command displays a description of the current display table in a help buffer.
Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
The window’s display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
buffer’s display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
standard display table; if that is nil
, Emacs uses the usual
character display conventions (see Usual Display Conventions). (Emacs does
not “merge” display tables: For instance, if the window has a
display table, the buffer’s display table and the standard display
table are completely ignored.)
Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
table, call force-mode-line-update
(see Mode Line Format).
This function returns window’s display table, or nil
if
there is none. The default for window is the selected window.
This function sets the display table of window to table.
The argument table should be either a display table or
nil
.
This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
specifies the buffer’s display table. If it is nil
, there is
no buffer display table.
The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
default is typically nil
, in an interactive session if the
terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
to ASCII approximations. See Text Quoting Style.
The disp-table library defines several functions for changing the standard display table.
A glyph is a graphical symbol which occupies a single character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp as a glyph code, which specifies a character and optionally a face to display it in (see Faces). The main use of glyph codes is as the entries of display tables (see Display Tables). The following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
This function returns a glyph code representing char char with
face face. If face is omitted or nil
, the glyph
uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
face is non-nil
, the glyph code is not necessarily an
integer object.
This function returns the character of glyph code glyph.
This function returns face of glyph code glyph, or nil
if
glyph uses the default face.
You can set up a glyph table to change how glyph codes are
actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
use glyphless-char-display
instead (see Glyphless Character Display).
The value of this variable, if non-nil
, is the current glyph
table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
be a vector whose gth element specifies how to display glyph
code g, where g is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
nil
Display this glyph literally.
Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
Display the specified glyph code instead.
Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the glyph table is displayed literally.
Glyphless characters are characters which are displayed in a special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of being displayed literally. These include characters which are explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters which cannot be encoded by the terminal’s coding system (on a text terminal).
The glyphless-display-mode
minor mode can be used to toggle
displaying glyphless characters in a convenient manner in the current
buffer. If this mode is enabled, all the glyphless characters are
displayed as boxes that display acronyms of their character names.
For more fine-grained (and global) control, this variable can be used. The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the following display methods:
nil
Display the character in the usual way.
zero-width
Don’t display the character.
thin-space
Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or 1-character wide on text terminals.
empty-box
Display an empty box.
hex-code
Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in hexadecimal notation.
Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at most 6 ASCII characters. As an exception, if the string includes just one character, on text-mode terminals that character will be displayed without a box; this allows to handle such “acronyms” as a replacement character for characters that cannot be displayed by the terminal.
(graphical . text)
Display with graphical on graphical displays, and with text on text terminals. Both graphical and text must be one of the display methods described above.
The thin-space
, empty-box
, hex-code
, and
ASCII string display methods are drawn with the
glyphless-char
face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
square brackets, ‘[]’.
The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
be encoded by the terminal’s coding system. Its value should be one
of the above display methods, except zero-width
.
If a character has a non-nil
entry in an active display table,
the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
glyphless-char-display
at all.
This user option provides a convenient way to set
glyphless-char-display
for groups of similar characters. Do
not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
via a custom :set
function (see Defining Customization Variables),
which updates glyphless-char-display
.
Its value should be an alist of elements (group
. method)
, where group is a symbol specifying a group of
characters, and method is a symbol specifying how to display
them.
group should be one of the following:
c0-control
ASCII control characters U+0000
to U+001F
,
excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
sequences like ‘^A’; see How Text Is Displayed in The GNU Emacs Manual).
c1-control
Non-ASCII, non-printing characters U+0080
to
U+009F
(normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
‘\230’).
format-control
Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as U+200E LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, but excluding characters that have graphic images, such as U+00AD SOFT HYPHEN.
bidi-control
This is a subset of format-control
, but only includes
characters that are related to bidirectional formatting control, like
U+2069 POP DIRECTIONAL ISOLATE and U+202A LEFT-TO-RIGHT
EMBEDDING. See Bidirectional Display.
Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as U+200E LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, but excluding characters that have graphic images, such as U+00AD SOFT HYPHEN.
variation-selectors
Unicode VS-1 through VS-256 (U+FE00 through U+FE0F and U+E0100 through U+E01EF), which are used to select between different glyphs for the same codepoints (typically emojis).
no-font
Characters for which there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded by the terminal’s coding system, or those for which the text-mode terminal has no glyphs.
The method symbol should be one of zero-width
,
thin-space
, empty-box
, or hex-code
. These have
the same meanings as in glyphless-char-display
, above.
This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the screen) to attract the user’s attention. Be conservative about how often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more appropriate (see Errors).
This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see visible-bell
below).
It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
do-not-terminate is non-nil
.
This is a synonym for ding
.
This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
represent a bell. Non-nil
means yes, nil
means no.
This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
provided the terminal’s Termcap entry defines the visible bell
capability (‘vb’).
If this is non-nil
, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
non-nil
, it takes precedence over the visible-bell
variable.
Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window System. Both Emacs and X use the term “window”, but use it differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
x
¶Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
w32
Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
ns
Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on GNUstep and macOS).
pc
Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
haiku
Emacs is displaying the frame using the Application Kit on Haiku.
pgtk
Emacs is displaying the frame using pure GTK facilities.
nil
Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
This variable holds the value of window-system
used for the
first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
as a daemon, it does not create any initial
frames, so initial-window-system
is nil
, except on
MS-Windows, where it is still w32
. See daemon in The GNU Emacs Manual.)
This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
used for displaying frame (which defaults to the currently
selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
one documented for the variable window-system
above.
Do not use window-system
and
initial-window-system
as predicates or boolean flag variables,
if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
graphic displays. That is because window-system
is not a good
indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
display-graphic-p
or any of the other display-*-p
predicates described in Display Feature Testing.
Tooltips are special frames (see Frames) that are used to display helpful hints (a.k.a. “tips”) related to the current position of the mouse pointer. Emacs uses tooltips to display help strings about active portions of text (see Properties with Special Meanings) and about various UI elements, such as menu items (see Extended Menu Items) and tool-bar buttons (see Tool bars).
Tooltip Mode is a minor mode that enables display of tooltips. Turning off this mode causes the tooltips be displayed in the echo area. On text-mode (a.k.a. “TTY”) frames, tooltips are always displayed in the echo area.
When Emacs is built with the GTK+ toolkit or Haiku windowing support,
it by default displays tooltips using toolkit functions, and the
appearance of the tooltips is then controlled by the toolkit’s
settings. Toolkit-provided tooltips can be disabled by changing the
value of the variable use-system-tooltips
to nil
. The
rest of this subsection describes how to control non-toolkit tooltips,
which are presented by Emacs itself.
Tooltips are displayed in special frames called tooltip frames, which have their own frame parameters (see Frame Parameters). Unlike other frames, the default parameters for tooltip frames are stored in a special variable.
This customizable option holds the default frame parameters used for
displaying tooltips. Any font and color parameters are ignored, and the
corresponding attributes of the tooltip
face are used instead.
If left
or top
parameters are included, they are used as
absolute frame-relative coordinates where the tooltip should be shown.
(Mouse-relative position of the tooltip can be customized using the
variables described in Tooltips in The GNU Emacs Manual.)
Note that the left
and top
parameters, if present,
override the values of mouse-relative offsets.
The tooltip
face determines the appearance of text shown in
tooltips. It should generally use a variable-pitch font of size that
is preferably smaller than the default frame font.
This abnormal hook is a list of functions to call when Emacs needs to
display a tooltip. Each function is called with a single argument
event which is a copy of the last mouse movement event. If a
function on this list actually displays the tooltip, it should return
non-nil
, and then the rest of the functions will not be
called. The default value of this variable is a single function
tooltip-help-tips
.
If you write your own function to be put on the
tooltip-functions
list, you may need to know the buffer of the
mouse event that triggered the tooltip display. The following
function provides that information.
This function returns the buffer over which event occurred.
Call it with the argument of the function from
tooltip-functions
to obtain the buffer whose text triggered the
tooltip. Note that the event might occur not over a buffer (e.g.,
over the tool bar), in which case this function will return
nil
.
Other aspects of tooltip display are controlled by several customizable settings; see Tooltips in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi, and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text bidirectional text. This section describes the facilities and options for editing and displaying bidirectional text.
Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in logical (or reading) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in which characters are displayed on the screen (called visual order) is not the same as logical order; the characters’ screen positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer position. In performing this bidirectional reordering, Emacs follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a. UBA), which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard (https://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/). Emacs provides a “Full Bidirectionality” class implementation of the UBA, consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v9.0. Note, however, that the way Emacs displays continuation lines when text direction is opposite to the base paragraph direction deviates from the UBA, which requires to perform line wrapping before reordering text for display.
If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-nil
(the
default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (see Overlay Properties, and see The display
Property). If the value is
nil
, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
buffer.
The default value of bidi-display-reordering
controls the
reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
including the text displayed in mode lines (see Mode Line Format)
and header lines (see Window Header Lines).
Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
bidi-display-reordering
is non-nil
in the buffer. This
is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
display, it is not enough to test the value of
bidi-display-reordering
alone. The correct test is this:
(if (and enable-multibyte-characters bidi-display-reordering) ;; Buffer is being reordered for display )
However, unibyte display and overlay strings are reordered if their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-ASCII strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display or overlay string includes non-ASCII characters, these characters are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
Text covered by display
text properties, by overlays with
display
properties whose value is a string, and by any other
properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
single character U+FFFC
, known as the Object Replacement
Character. This means that placing a display property over a portion
of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
surrounds it.
Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a base direction, either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin. Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin, and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
Where exactly paragraphs start and end, for the purpose of the Emacs
UBA implementation, is determined by the following two
buffer-local variables (note that paragraph-start
and
paragraph-separate
have no influence on this). By default both
of these variables are nil
, and paragraphs are bounded by empty
lines, i.e., lines that consist entirely of zero or more whitespace
characters followed by a newline.
If non-nil
, this variable’s value should be a regular
expression matching a line that starts or separates two paragraphs.
The regular expression is always matched after a newline, so it is
best to anchor it, i.e., begin it with a "^"
.
If non-nil
, this variable’s value should be a regular
expression matching a line separates two paragraphs. The regular
expression is always matched after a newline, so it is best to anchor
it, i.e., begin it with a "^"
.
If you modify any of these two variables, you should normally modify
both, to make sure they describe paragraphs consistently. For
example, to have each new line start a new paragraph for
bidi-reordering purposes, set both variables to "^"
.
By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of determining the base direction is specified by the UBA; in a nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph. However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You can use following variable to do this:
If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
right-to-left
or left-to-right
, all paragraphs in the
buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
is equivalent to nil
(the default), which means to determine
the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
Modes for program source code should set this to left-to-right
.
Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
need to set this explicitly (see Basic Major Modes).
This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
buffer. The returned value is a symbol, either
left-to-right
or right-to-left
. If buffer is
omitted or nil
, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
buffer-local value of the variable bidi-paragraph-direction
is
non-nil
, the returned value will be identical to that value;
otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
bidi-display-reordering
is nil
as well as unibyte
buffers, this function always returns left-to-right
.
Sometimes there’s a need to move point in strict visual order, either to the left or to the right of its current screen position. Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
This function moves point of the currently selected window to the buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left of point on the screen. If direction is positive, point will move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of direction.
The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the punctuation characters used as separators have weak directionality, they take on the directionality of surrounding text. As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional content can be displayed to the left of the preceding field, messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this problem:
bidi-string-mark-left-to-right
, described below, comes
in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
U+200F RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or RLM, instead.) This
is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
display
property or overlay with a
property value of the form (space . PROPS)
(see Specified Spaces). Emacs treats this display specification as a paragraph
separator, and reorders the text on either side separately.
This function returns its argument string, possibly modified,
such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
reordering on display, the function appends the LRM
character to the string. The appended LRM character is made
invisible by giving it an invisible
text property of t
(see Invisible Text).
The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
characters stored as their bidi-class
property
(see Character Properties). Lisp programs can change these
properties by calling the put-char-code-property
function.
However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
UBA, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
affect all Emacs frames and windows.
Similarly, the mirroring
property is used to display the
appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
such changes affect all of Emacs display.
The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by inserting into the text special directional control characters, LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (LRO) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE (RLO). Any characters between a RLO and the following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (PDF) control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they were strong right-to-left characters, i.e. they will be reversed on display. Similarly, any characters between LRO and PDF or newline will display as if they were strong left-to-right, and will not be reversed even if they are strong right-to-left characters.
These overrides are useful when you want to make some text unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes, known as phishing. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very different.
Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a right-to-left character, or vice versa.
This function looks at the text of the specified object between
positions from (inclusive) and to (exclusive), and returns
the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
specified region of text, it returns nil
.
The optional argument object specifies which text to search, and
defaults to the current buffer. If object is non-nil
, it
can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
the function. This is because telling the function about the window
allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
covered by overlays.
When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the UBA has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to achieve that effect.
This function works similar to buffer-substring
(see Examining Buffer Contents), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
argument no-properties, if non-nil
, means remove the text
properties from the copy of the text.
This chapter is about starting and getting out of Emacs, access to values in the operating system environment, and terminal input, output.
See Building Emacs, for related information. See Emacs Display, for additional operating system status information pertaining to the terminal and the screen.
This section describes what Emacs does when it is started, and how you can customize these actions.
When Emacs is started up, it performs the following operations
(see normal-top-level
in startup.el):
load-path
, by running the file named
subdirs.el in each directory in the list. Normally, this file
adds the directory’s subdirectories to the list, and those are scanned
in their turn. The files subdirs.el are normally generated
automatically when Emacs is installed.
load-path
directories. This file is intended for registering input methods.
The search is only for any personal leim-list.el files that you
may have created; it skips the directories containing the standard Emacs
libraries (these should contain only a single leim-list.el file,
which is compiled into the Emacs executable).
before-init-time
to the value of
current-time
(see Time of Day). It also sets
after-init-time
to nil
, which signals to Lisp programs
that Emacs is being initialized.
LANG
.
package-activate-all
to activate any
optional Emacs Lisp package that has been installed. See Packaging Basics. However, Emacs doesn’t activate the packages when
package-enable-at-startup
is nil
or when it’s started
with one of the options ‘-q’, ‘-Q’, or ‘--batch’. To
activate the packages in the latter case, package-activate-all
should be called explicitly (e.g., via the ‘--funcall’ option).
initial-window-system
specifies (see initial-window-system). The initialization function,
window-system-initialization
, is a generic function
(see Generic Functions) whose actual implementation is different
for each supported window system. If the value of
initial-window-system
is windowsystem, then the
appropriate implementation of the initialization function is defined
in the file term/windowsystem-win.el. This file should
have been compiled into the Emacs executable when it was built.
before-init-hook
.
initial-frame-alist
and default-frame-alist
(see Initial Frame Parameters) for the graphical frame, by calling the
window-system-initialization
function for that window system.
This is not done in batch (noninteractive) or daemon mode.
custom-reevaluate-setting
to re-initialize the members
of the list custom-delayed-init-variables
. These are any
pre-loaded user options whose default value depends on the run-time,
rather than build-time, context.
See custom-initialize-delay.
inhibit-default-init
is non-nil
, nor if the options
‘-q’, ‘-Q’, or ‘--batch’ were specified.
abbrev-file-name
, if that file exists and can be read
(see abbrev-file-name). This is not done if the
option ‘--batch’ was specified.
after-init-time
to the value of
current-time
. This variable was set to nil
earlier;
setting it to the current time signals that the initialization phase
is over, and, together with before-init-time
, provides the
measurement of how long it took.
after-init-hook
and
delayed-warnings-hook
. The latter shows any warnings emitted
during previous stages of startup, which are automatically delayed.
initial-major-mode
.
tty-setup-hook
. This is not done
in --batch
mode, nor if term-file-prefix
is nil
.
inhibit-startup-echo-area-message
.
--batch
was specified.
(substitute-command-keys initial-scratch-message)
into that buffer.
initial-buffer-choice
is a string, it visits the file (or
directory) with that name. If it is a function, it calls the function
with no arguments and selects the buffer that it returns. If one file
is given as a command line argument, that file is visited and its
buffer displayed alongside initial-buffer-choice
. If more than
one file is given, all of the files are visited and the *Buffer
List* buffer is displayed alongside initial-buffer-choice
.
emacs-startup-hook
.
frame-notice-user-settings
, which modifies the
parameters of the selected frame according to whatever the init files
specify.
window-setup-hook
. The only difference between this
hook and emacs-startup-hook
is that this one runs after the
previously mentioned modifications to the frame parameters.
inhibit-startup-screen
or initial-buffer-choice
are non-nil
, or if the ‘--no-splash’ or ‘-Q’ command-line
options were specified.
server-start
.
(On POSIX systems, if a background daemon was requested, it then
detaches from the controlling terminal.) See Emacs
Server in The GNU Emacs Manual.
emacs-session-restore
passing it as argument the ID of the
previous session. See Session Management.
The following options affect some aspects of the startup sequence.
This variable, if non-nil
, inhibits the startup screen. In
that case, Emacs typically displays the *scratch* buffer; but
see initial-buffer-choice
, below.
Do not set this variable in the init file of a new user, or in a way that affects more than one user, as that would prevent new users from receiving information about copyleft and basic Emacs usage.
inhibit-startup-message
and inhibit-splash-screen
are
aliases for this variable.
If non-nil
, this variable is a string that specifies a file or
directory for Emacs to display after starting up, instead of the
startup screen.
If its value is a function, Emacs calls that function which must
return a buffer which is then displayed.
If its value is t
, Emacs displays the *scratch* buffer.
This variable controls the display of the startup echo area message. You can suppress the startup echo area message by adding text with this form to your init file:
(setq inhibit-startup-echo-area-message "your-login-name")
Emacs explicitly checks for an expression as shown above in your init
file; your login name must appear in the expression as a Lisp string
constant. You can also use the Customize interface. Other methods of
setting inhibit-startup-echo-area-message
to the same value do
not inhibit the startup message. This way, you can easily inhibit the
message for yourself if you wish, but thoughtless copying of your init
file will not inhibit the message for someone else.
This variable, if non-nil
, should be a string, which is treated
as documentation to be inserted into the *scratch* buffer when
Emacs starts up or when that buffer is recreated. If it is
nil
, the *scratch* buffer is empty.
The following command-line options affect some aspects of the startup sequence. See Initial Options in The GNU Emacs Manual.
--no-splash
Do not display a splash screen.
--batch
Run without an interactive terminal. See Batch Mode.
--daemon
--bg-daemon
--fg-daemon
Do not initialize any display; just start a server. (A “background” daemon automatically runs in the background.)
--no-init-file
-q
Do not load either the init file, or the default library.
--no-site-file
Do not load the site-start library.
--quick
-Q
Equivalent to ‘-q --no-site-file --no-splash’.
--init-directory
Specify the directory to use when finding the Emacs init files.
When you start Emacs, it normally attempts to load your init file. This is either a file named .emacs or .emacs.el in your home directory, or a file named init.el in a subdirectory named .emacs.d in your home directory.
The command-line switches ‘-q’, ‘-Q’, and ‘-u’
control whether and where to find the init file; ‘-q’ (and the
stronger ‘-Q’) says not to load an init file, while ‘-u
user’ says to load user’s init file instead of yours.
See Entering Emacs in The GNU Emacs Manual. If neither
option is specified, Emacs uses the LOGNAME
environment
variable, or the USER
(most systems) or USERNAME
(MS
systems) variable, to find your home directory and thus your init
file; this way, even if you have su’d, Emacs still loads your own init
file. If those environment variables are absent, though, Emacs uses
your user-id to find your home directory.
Emacs also attempts to load a second init file, called the early init file, if it exists. This is a file named early-init.el in your ~/.emacs.d directory. The difference between the early init file and the regular init file is that the early init file is loaded much earlier during the startup process, so you can use it to customize some things that are initialized before loading the regular init file. For example, you can customize the process of initializing the package system, by setting variables such as package-load-list or package-enable-at-startup. See Package Installation in The GNU Emacs Manual.
An Emacs installation may have a default init file, which is a
Lisp library named default.el. Emacs finds this file through
the standard search path for libraries (see How Programs Do Loading). The Emacs distribution does not come with this file; it is
intended for local customizations. If the default init file exists,
it is loaded whenever you start Emacs. But your own personal init
file, if any, is loaded first; if it sets inhibit-default-init
to a non-nil
value, then Emacs does not subsequently load the
default.el file. In batch mode, or if you specify ‘-q’
(or ‘-Q’), Emacs loads neither your personal init file nor
the default init file.
Another file for site-customization is site-start.el. Emacs loads this before the user’s init file. You can inhibit the loading of this file with the option ‘--no-site-file’.
This variable specifies the site-customization file to load before the
user’s init file. Its normal value is "site-start"
. The only
way you can change it with real effect is to do so before dumping
Emacs.
See Init File Examples in The GNU Emacs Manual, for examples of how to make various commonly desired customizations in your .emacs file.
If this variable is non-nil
, it prevents Emacs from loading the
default initialization library file. The default value is nil
.
This normal hook is run, once, just before loading all the init files (site-start.el, your init file, and default.el). (The only way to change it with real effect is before dumping Emacs.)
This normal hook is run, once, just after loading all the init files (site-start.el, your init file, and default.el), before loading the terminal-specific library (if started on a text terminal) and processing the command-line action arguments.
This normal hook is run, once, just after handling the command line arguments. In batch mode, Emacs does not run this hook.
This normal hook is very similar to emacs-startup-hook
.
The only difference is that it runs slightly later, after setting
of the frame parameters. See window-setup-hook.
This variable holds the absolute file name of the user’s init file. If the actual init file loaded is a compiled file, such as .emacs.elc, the value refers to the corresponding source file.
This variable holds the name of the Emacs default directory.
It defaults to ${XDG_CONFIG_HOME-'~/.config'}/emacs/
if that directory exists and ~/.emacs.d/ and ~/.emacs do
not exist,
otherwise to ~/.emacs.d/ on all platforms but MS-DOS.
Here, ${XDG_CONFIG_HOME-'~/.config'}
stands for the value of the environment variable XDG_CONFIG_HOME
if that variable is set, and for ~/.config otherwise.
See How Emacs Finds Your Init File in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Each terminal type can have its own Lisp library that Emacs loads when
run on that type of terminal. The library’s name is constructed by
concatenating the value of the variable term-file-prefix
and the
terminal type (specified by the environment variable TERM
).
Normally, term-file-prefix
has the value "term/"
;
changing this is not recommended. If there is an entry matching
TERM
in the term-file-aliases
association list,
Emacs uses the associated value in place of TERM
.
Emacs finds the file in the normal manner, by searching the
load-path
directories, and trying the ‘.elc’ and
‘.el’ suffixes.
The usual role of a terminal-specific library is to enable special
keys to send sequences that Emacs can recognize. It may also need to
set or add to input-decode-map
if the Termcap or Terminfo entry
does not specify all the terminal’s function keys. See Terminal Input.
When the name of the terminal type contains a hyphen or underscore,
and no library is found whose name is identical to the terminal’s
name, Emacs strips from the terminal’s name the last hyphen or
underscore and everything that follows
it, and tries again. This process is repeated until Emacs finds a
matching library, or until there are no more hyphens or underscores in the name
(i.e., there is no terminal-specific library). For example, if the
terminal name is ‘xterm-256color’ and there is no
term/xterm-256color.el library, Emacs tries to load
term/xterm.el. If necessary, the terminal library can evaluate
(getenv "TERM")
to find the full name of the terminal type.
Your init file can prevent the loading of the terminal-specific
library by setting the variable term-file-prefix
to nil
.
You can also arrange to override some of the actions of the
terminal-specific library by using tty-setup-hook
. This is
a normal hook that Emacs runs after initializing a new text terminal.
You could use this hook to define initializations for terminals that do not
have their own libraries. See Hooks.
If the value of this variable is non-nil
, Emacs loads a
terminal-specific initialization file as follows:
(load (concat term-file-prefix (getenv "TERM")))
You may set the term-file-prefix
variable to nil
in your
init file if you do not wish to load the
terminal-initialization file.
On MS-DOS, Emacs sets the TERM
environment variable to ‘internal’.
This variable is an association list mapping terminal types to
their aliases. For example, an element of the form ("vt102"
. "vt100")
means to treat a terminal of type ‘vt102’ like one of
type ‘vt100’.
This variable is a normal hook that Emacs runs after initializing a
new text terminal. (This applies when Emacs starts up in non-windowed
mode, and when making a tty emacsclient
connection.) The
hook runs after loading your init file (if applicable) and the
terminal-specific Lisp file, so you can use it to adjust the
definitions made by that file.
For a related feature, see window-setup-hook.
You can use command-line arguments to request various actions when you start Emacs. Note that the recommended way of using Emacs is to start it just once, after logging in, and then do all editing in the same Emacs session (see Entering Emacs in The GNU Emacs Manual). For this reason, you might not use command-line arguments very often; nonetheless, they can be useful when invoking Emacs from session scripts or debugging Emacs. This section describes how Emacs processes command-line arguments.
This function parses the command line that Emacs was called with, processes it, and (amongst other things) loads the user’s init file and displays the startup messages.
The value of this variable is t
once the command line has been
processed.
If you redump Emacs by calling dump-emacs
(see Building Emacs), you may wish to set this variable to nil
first in
order to cause the new dumped Emacs to process its new command-line
arguments.
This variable is an alist of user-defined command-line options and associated handler functions. By default it is empty, but you can add elements if you wish.
A command-line option is an argument on the command line, which has the form:
-option
The elements of the command-switch-alist
look like this:
(option . handler-function)
The CAR, option, is a string, the name of a command-line option (including the initial hyphen). The handler-function is called to handle option, and receives the option name as its sole argument.
In some cases, the option is followed in the command line by an
argument. In these cases, the handler-function can find all the
remaining command-line arguments in the variable
command-line-args-left
(see below). (The entire list of
command-line arguments is in command-line-args
.)
Note that the handling of command-switch-alist
doesn’t treat
equals signs in option specially. That is, if there’s an option
like --name=value
on the command line, then only a
command-switch-alist
member whose car
is literally
--name=value
will match this option. If you want to parse such
options, you need to use command-line-functions
instead (see
below).
The command-line arguments are parsed by the command-line-1
function in the startup.el file. See also Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation in The
GNU Emacs Manual.
The value of this variable is the list of command-line arguments passed to Emacs.
The value of this variable is the list of command-line arguments that have not yet been processed.
This variable’s value is a list of functions for handling an
unrecognized command-line argument. Each time the next argument to be
processed has no special meaning, the functions in this list are called,
in order of appearance, until one of them returns a non-nil
value.
These functions are called with no arguments. They can access the
command-line argument under consideration through the variable
argi
, which is bound temporarily at this point. The remaining
arguments (not including the current one) are in the variable
command-line-args-left
.
When a function recognizes and processes the argument in argi
, it
should return a non-nil
value to say it has dealt with that
argument. If it has also dealt with some of the following arguments, it
can indicate that by deleting them from command-line-args-left
.
If all of these functions return nil
, then the argument is treated
as a file name to visit.
There are two ways to get out of Emacs: you can kill the Emacs job, which exits permanently, or you can suspend it, which permits you to reenter the Emacs process later. (In a graphical environment, you can of course simply switch to another application without doing anything special to Emacs, then switch back to Emacs when you want.)
Killing Emacs means ending the execution of the Emacs process.
If you started Emacs from a terminal, the parent process normally
resumes control. The low-level primitive for killing Emacs is
kill-emacs
.
This command calls the hook kill-emacs-hook
, then exits the
Emacs process and kills it.
If exit-data is an integer, that is used as the exit status of the Emacs process. (This is useful primarily in batch operation; see Batch Mode.)
If exit-data is a string, its contents are stuffed into the terminal input buffer so that the shell (or whatever program next reads input) can read them.
If exit-data is neither an integer nor a string, or is omitted, that means to use the (system-specific) exit status which indicates successful program termination.
If restart is non-nil
, instead of just exiting at the
end, start a new Emacs process, using the same command line arguments
as the currently running Emacs process.
The kill-emacs
function is normally called via the
higher-level command C-x C-c
(save-buffers-kill-terminal
). See Exiting in The GNU
Emacs Manual. It is also called automatically if Emacs receives a
SIGTERM
or SIGHUP
operating system signal (e.g., when the
controlling terminal is disconnected), or if it receives a
SIGINT
signal while running in batch mode (see Batch Mode).
This normal hook is run by kill-emacs
, before it kills Emacs.
Because kill-emacs
can be called in situations where user
interaction is impossible (e.g., when the terminal is disconnected),
functions on this hook should not attempt to interact with the user.
If you want to interact with the user when Emacs is shutting down, use
kill-emacs-query-functions
, described below.
When Emacs is killed, all the information in the Emacs process,
aside from files that have been saved, is lost. Because killing Emacs
inadvertently can lose a lot of work, the
save-buffers-kill-terminal
command queries for confirmation if
you have buffers that need saving or subprocesses that are running.
It also runs the abnormal hook kill-emacs-query-functions
:
When save-buffers-kill-terminal
is killing Emacs, it calls the
functions in this hook, after asking the standard questions and before
calling kill-emacs
. The functions are called in order of
appearance, with no arguments. Each function can ask for additional
confirmation from the user. If any of them returns nil
,
save-buffers-kill-emacs
does not kill Emacs, and does not run
the remaining functions in this hook. Calling kill-emacs
directly does not run this hook.
This command does the same as save-buffers-kill-emacs
, but
instead of just killing the current Emacs process at the end, it’ll
restart a new Emacs process, using the same command line arguments as
the currently running Emacs process.
On text terminals, it is possible to suspend Emacs, which
means stopping Emacs temporarily and returning control to its superior
process, which is usually the shell. This allows you to resume
editing later in the same Emacs process, with the same buffers, the
same kill ring, the same undo history, and so on. To resume Emacs,
use the appropriate command in the parent shell—most likely
fg
.
Suspending works only on a terminal device from which the Emacs session was started. We call that device the controlling terminal of the session. Suspending is not allowed if the controlling terminal is a graphical terminal. Suspending is usually not relevant in graphical environments, since you can simply switch to another application without doing anything special to Emacs.
Some operating systems (those without SIGTSTP
, or MS-DOS) do
not support suspension of jobs; on these systems, suspension
actually creates a new shell temporarily as a subprocess of Emacs.
Then you would exit the shell to return to Emacs.
This function stops Emacs and returns control to the superior process.
If and when the superior process resumes Emacs, suspend-emacs
returns nil
to its caller in Lisp.
This function works only on the controlling terminal of the Emacs
session; to relinquish control of other tty devices, use
suspend-tty
(see below). If the Emacs session uses more than
one terminal, you must delete the frames on all the other terminals
before suspending Emacs, or this function signals an error.
See Multiple Terminals.
If string is non-nil
, its characters are sent to Emacs’s
superior shell, to be read as terminal input.
The characters in string are not echoed by the superior shell;
only the results appear.
Before suspending, suspend-emacs
runs the normal hook
suspend-hook
. After the user resumes Emacs,
suspend-emacs
runs the normal hook suspend-resume-hook
.
See Hooks.
The next redisplay after resumption will redraw the entire screen,
unless the variable no-redraw-on-reenter
is non-nil
.
See Refreshing the Screen.
Here is an example of how you could use these hooks:
(add-hook 'suspend-hook (lambda () (or (y-or-n-p "Really suspend?") (error "Suspend canceled"))))
(add-hook 'suspend-resume-hook (lambda () (message "Resumed!") (sit-for 2)))
Here is what you would see upon evaluating (suspend-emacs "pwd")
:
---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ---------- Really suspend? y ---------- Buffer: Minibuffer ----------
---------- Parent Shell ---------- bash$ /home/username bash$ fg
---------- Echo Area ---------- Resumed!
Note that ‘pwd’ is not echoed after Emacs is suspended. But it is read and executed by the shell.
This variable is a normal hook that Emacs runs before suspending.
This variable is a normal hook that Emacs runs on resuming after a suspension.
If tty specifies a terminal device used by Emacs, this function
relinquishes the device and restores it to its prior state. Frames
that used the device continue to exist, but are not updated and Emacs
doesn’t read input from them. tty can be a terminal object, a
frame (meaning the terminal for that frame), or nil
(meaning
the terminal for the selected frame). See Multiple Terminals.
If tty is already suspended, this function does nothing.
This function runs the hook suspend-tty-functions
, passing the
terminal object as an argument to each function.
This function resumes the previously suspended terminal device
tty; where tty has the same possible values as it does
for suspend-tty
.
This function reopens the terminal device, re-initializes it, and
redraws it with that terminal’s selected frame. It then runs the
hook resume-tty-functions
, passing the terminal object as an
argument to each function.
If the same device is already used by another Emacs terminal, this function signals an error. If tty is not suspended, this function does nothing.
This function returns non-nil
if tty is the
controlling terminal of the Emacs session; tty can be a
terminal object, a frame (meaning the terminal for that frame), or
nil
(meaning the terminal for the selected frame).
This command suspends a frame. For GUI frames, it calls
iconify-frame
(see Visibility of Frames); for frames on
text terminals, it calls either suspend-emacs
or
suspend-tty
, depending on whether the frame is displayed on the
controlling terminal device or not.
Emacs provides access to variables in the operating system environment through various functions. These variables include the name of the system, the user’s UID, and so on.
This variable holds the standard GNU configuration name for the hardware/software configuration of your system, as a string. For example, a typical value for a 64-bit GNU/Linux system is ‘"x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu"’.
The value of this variable is a symbol indicating the type of operating system Emacs is running on. The possible values are:
aix
IBM’s AIX.
berkeley-unix
Berkeley BSD and its variants.
cygwin
Cygwin, a POSIX layer on top of MS-Windows.
darwin
Darwin (macOS).
gnu
The GNU system (using the GNU kernel, which consists of the HURD and Mach).
gnu/linux
A GNU/Linux system—that is, a variant GNU system, using the Linux kernel. (These systems are the ones people often call “Linux”, but actually Linux is just the kernel, not the whole system.)
gnu/kfreebsd
A GNU (glibc-based) system with a FreeBSD kernel.
haiku
The Haiku operating system, a derivative of the Be Operating System.
hpux
Hewlett-Packard HPUX operating system.
nacl
Google Native Client (NaCl) sandboxing system.
ms-dos
Microsoft’s DOS. Emacs compiled with DJGPP for MS-DOS binds
system-type
to ms-dos
even when you run it on MS-Windows.
usg-unix-v
AT&T Unix System V.
windows-nt
Microsoft Windows NT, 9X and later. The value of system-type
is always windows-nt
, e.g., even on Windows 10.
We do not wish to add new symbols to make finer distinctions unless it
is absolutely necessary! In fact, we hope to eliminate some of these
alternatives in the future. If you need to make a finer distinction
than system-type
allows for, you can test
system-configuration
, e.g., against a regexp.
This function returns the name of the machine you are running on, as a string.
If this variable is non-nil
, it is used instead of
system-name
for purposes of generating email addresses. For
example, it is used when constructing the default value of
user-mail-address
. See User Identification.
This function returns the value of the environment variable var,
as a string. var should be a string. If var is undefined
in the environment, getenv
returns nil
. It returns
‘""’ if var is set but null. Within Emacs, a list of environment
variables and their values is kept in the variable process-environment
.
(getenv "USER") ⇒ "lewis"
The shell command printenv
prints all or part of the environment:
bash$ printenv PATH=/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin USER=lewis
TERM=xterm SHELL=/bin/bash HOME=/home/lewis
...
This command sets the value of the environment variable named
variable to value. variable should be a string.
Internally, Emacs Lisp can handle any string. However, normally
variable should be a valid shell identifier, that is, a sequence
of letters, digits and underscores, starting with a letter or
underscore. Otherwise, errors may occur if subprocesses of Emacs try
to access the value of variable. If value is omitted or
nil
(or, interactively, with a prefix argument), setenv
removes variable from the environment. Otherwise, value
should be a string.
If the optional argument substitute is non-nil
, Emacs
calls the function substitute-env-vars
to expand any
environment variables in value.
setenv
works by modifying process-environment
; binding
that variable with let
is also reasonable practice.
setenv
returns the new value of variable, or nil
if it removed variable from the environment.
This macro sets the environment variables according to variables
temporarily when executing body. The previous values are
restored when the form finishes. The argument variables should
be a list of pairs of strings of the form
(var value)
, where var is the name of the
environment variable and value is that variable’s value.
(with-environment-variables (("LANG" "C") ("LANGUAGE" "en_US:en")) (call-process "ls" nil t))
This variable is a list of strings, each describing one environment
variable. The functions getenv
and setenv
work by means
of this variable.
process-environment ⇒ ("PATH=/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin" "USER=lewis"
"TERM=xterm" "SHELL=/bin/bash" "HOME=/home/lewis" ...)
If process-environment
contains multiple elements that
specify the same environment variable, the first of these elements
specifies the variable, and the others are ignored.
This variable holds the list of environment variables Emacs inherited from its parent process when Emacs started.
This variable holds a string that says which character separates
directories in a search path (as found in an environment variable). Its
value is ":"
for Unix and GNU systems, and ";"
for MS systems.
This function returns the connection-local value of variable
path-separator
. That is ";"
for MS systems and a local
default-directory
, and ":"
for Unix and GNU systems, or
a remote default-directory
.
This function takes a search path string such as the value of
the PATH
environment variable, and splits it at the separators,
returning a list of directories. nil
in this list means
the current directory. Although the function’s name says
“colon”, it actually uses the value of variable path-separator
.
(parse-colon-path ":/foo:/bar") ⇒ (nil "/foo/" "/bar/")
This variable holds the program name under which Emacs was invoked. The value is a string, and does not include a directory name.
This variable holds the directory in which the Emacs executable was
located when it was run, or nil
if that directory cannot be
determined.
If non-nil
, this is a directory within which to look for the
lib-src and etc subdirectories. In an installed Emacs,
it is normally nil
. It is non-nil
when Emacs can’t find those directories in their standard installed
locations, but can find them in a directory related somehow to the one
containing the Emacs executable (i.e., invocation-directory
).
This function returns the current 1-minute, 5-minute, and 15-minute system load averages, in a list. The load average indicates the number of processes trying to run on the system.
By default, the values are integers that are 100 times the system load
averages, but if use-float is non-nil
, then they are
returned as floating-point numbers without multiplying by 100.
If it is impossible to obtain the load average, this function signals an error. On some platforms, access to load averages requires installing Emacs as setuid or setgid so that it can read kernel information, and that usually isn’t advisable.
If the 1-minute load average is available, but the 5- or 15-minute averages are not, this function returns a shortened list containing the available averages.
(load-average) ⇒ (169 48 36)
(load-average t) ⇒ (1.69 0.48 0.36)
The shell command uptime
returns similar information.
This function returns the process ID of the Emacs process, as an integer.
This variable holds the erase character that was selected in the system’s terminal driver, before Emacs was started.
This variable holds the system null device. Its value is
"/dev/null"
for Unix and GNU systems, and "NUL"
for MS
systems.
This function returns the connection-local value of variable
null-device
. That is "NUL"
for MS systems and a local
default-directory
, and "/dev/null"
for Unix and GNU
systems, or a remote default-directory
.
This variable says which user’s init files should be used by
Emacs—or nil
if none. ""
stands for the user who
originally logged in. The value reflects command-line options such as
‘-q’ or ‘-u user’.
Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort of
user profile, should obey this variable in deciding where to find it.
They should load the profile of the user name found in this variable.
If init-file-user
is nil
, meaning that the ‘-q’,
‘-Q’, or ‘-batch’ option was used, then Lisp packages should
not load any customization files or user profile.
This holds the email address of the user who is using Emacs.
This function returns the name under which the user is logged in.
It uses the environment variables LOGNAME
or USER
if
either is set. Otherwise, the value is based on the effective
UID, not the real UID.
If you specify uid (a number), the result is the user name that
corresponds to uid, or nil
if there is no such user.
This function returns the user name corresponding to Emacs’s real
UID. This ignores the effective UID, and the
environment variables LOGNAME
and USER
.
This function returns the full name of the logged-in user—or the value
of the environment variable NAME
, if that is set.
If the Emacs process’s user-id does not correspond to any known user (and
provided NAME
is not set), the result is "unknown"
.
If uid is non-nil
, then it should be a number (a user-id)
or a string (a login name). Then user-full-name
returns the full
name corresponding to that user-id or login name. If you specify a
user-id or login name that isn’t defined, it returns nil
.
The symbols user-login-name
, user-real-login-name
and
user-full-name
are variables as well as functions. The functions
return the same values that the variables hold. These variables allow
you to fake out Emacs by telling the functions what to return. The
variables are also useful for constructing frame titles (see Frame Titles).
This function returns the real UID of the user.
This function returns the effective UID of the user.
This function returns the effective GID of the Emacs process.
This function returns the real GID of the Emacs process.
This function returns a list of strings, listing the user names on the
system. If Emacs cannot retrieve this information, the return value
is a list containing just the value of user-real-login-name
.
This function returns a list of strings, listing the names of user
groups on the system. If Emacs cannot retrieve this information, the
return value is nil
.
This function returns the group name that corresponds to the numeric
group ID gid, or nil
if there is no such group.
This section explains how to determine the current time and time zone.
Many functions like current-time
and file-attributes
return Lisp timestamp values that count seconds, and that can
represent absolute time by counting seconds since the epoch of
1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). Typically these
counts ignore leap seconds; however, GNU and some other operating
systems can be configured to count leap seconds.
Although traditionally Lisp timestamps were integer pairs, their
form has evolved and programs ordinarily should not depend on the
current default form. If your program needs a particular timestamp
form, you can use the time-convert
function to convert it to the
needed form. See Time Conversion.
There are currently three forms of Lisp timestamps, each of which represents a number of seconds:
(ticks . hz)
, where hz is
positive. This represents ticks/hz seconds, which is the
same time as plain ticks if hz is 1. A common value for
hz is 1000000000, for a nanosecond-resolution
clock.
(high low micro
pico)
, where 0≤low<65536,
0≤micro<1000000, and 0≤pico<1000000.
This represents the number of seconds using the formula:
high * 2**16 + low + micro * 10**−6 +
pico * 10**−12.
If current-time-list
is t
,
some functions may default to returning two- or
three-element lists, with omitted micro and pico
components defaulting to zero.
On all current machines pico is a multiple of 1000, but this
may change as higher-resolution clocks become available.
Function arguments, e.g., the time argument to
format-time-string
, accept a more-general time value
format, which can be a Lisp timestamp, nil
for the current
time, a finite floating-point number for seconds, or a list
(high low micro)
or (high
low)
that is a truncated list timestamp with missing elements
taken to be zero.
Time values can be converted to and from calendrical and other forms.
Some of these conversions rely on operating system functions that
limit the range of possible time values, and signal an error such as
‘"Specified time is not representable"’ if the
limits are exceeded. For instance, a system might not support
timestamps before the epoch, or years far in the future.
You can convert a time value into
a human-readable string using format-time-string
, into a Lisp
timestamp using time-convert
, and into other forms using
decode-time
and float-time
. These functions are
described in the following sections.
This function returns the current time and date as a human-readable
string. The format does not vary for the initial part of the string,
which contains the day of week, month, day of month, and time of day
in that order: the number of characters used for these fields is
always the same, although (unless you require English weekday or
month abbreviations regardless of locale) it is typically more
convenient to use format-time-string
than to extract
fields from the output of current-time-string
,
as the year might not have exactly four digits, and additional
information may some day be added at the end.
The argument time, if given, specifies a time to format, instead of the current time. The optional argument zone defaults to the current time zone rule. See Time Zone Rules. The operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
(current-time-string) ⇒ "Fri Nov 1 15:59:49 2019"
This boolean variable is a transition aid. If t
,
current-time
and related functions return timestamps in list
form, typically (high low micro pico)
;
otherwise, they use (ticks . hz)
form. Currently
this variable defaults to t
, for behavior compatible with
previous Emacs versions. Developers are encouraged to test
timestamp-related code with this variable set to nil
, as it
will default to nil
in a future Emacs version, and will be
removed in some version after that.
This function returns the current time as a Lisp timestamp.
If current-time-list
is nil
,
the timestamp has the form (ticks . hz)
where
ticks counts clock ticks and hz is the clock ticks per second.
Otherwise, the timestamp has the list form
(high low usec psec)
.
You can use (time-convert nil t)
or (time-convert nil 'list)
to obtain a particular form regardless of the value of
current-time-list
. See Time Conversion.
This function returns the current time as a floating-point number of seconds since the epoch. The optional argument time, if given, specifies a time to convert instead of the current time.
Warning: Since the result is floating point, it may not be
exact. Do not use this function if precise time stamps are required.
For example, on typical systems (float-time '(1 . 10))
displays
as ‘0.1’ but is slightly greater than 1/10.
time-to-seconds
is an alias for this function.
Return the current CPU time along with its resolution. The
return value is a pair (CPU-TICKS . TICKS-PER-SEC)
. The
CPU-TICKS counter can wrap around, so values cannot be
meaningfully compared if too much time has passed between them.
The default time zone is determined by the TZ
environment
variable. See Operating System Environment. For example, you can tell Emacs
to default to Universal Time with (setenv "TZ" "UTC0")
. If
TZ
is not in the environment, Emacs uses system wall clock time,
which is a platform-dependent default time zone.
The set of supported TZ
strings is system-dependent. GNU and
many other systems support TZDB timezones, e.g.,
‘"America/New_York"’ specifies the time zone and daylight saving
time history for locations near New York City. GNU and most other
systems support POSIX-style TZ
strings, e.g.,
‘"EST5EDT,M4.1.0,M10.5.0"’ specifies the rules used in New
York from 1987 through 2006. All systems support the string
‘"UTC0"’ meaning Universal Time.
Functions that convert to and from local time accept an optional
time zone rule argument, which specifies the conversion’s time
zone and daylight saving time history. If the time zone rule is
omitted or nil
, the conversion uses Emacs’s default time zone.
If it is t
, the conversion uses Universal Time. If it is
wall
, the conversion uses the system wall clock time. If it is
a string, the conversion uses the time zone rule equivalent to setting
TZ
to that string. If it is a list (offset abbr), where
offset is an integer number of seconds east of Universal Time
and abbr is a string, the conversion uses a fixed time zone with
the given offset and abbreviation. An integer offset is treated
as if it were (offset abbr), where abbr is a numeric
abbreviation on POSIX-compatible platforms and is unspecified on
MS-Windows.
This function returns a list describing the time zone that the user is in.
The value has the form (offset abbr)
. Here
offset is an integer giving the number of seconds ahead of Universal Time
(east of Greenwich). A negative value means west of Greenwich. The
second element, abbr, is a string giving an abbreviation for the
time zone, e.g., ‘"CST"’ for China Standard Time or for
U.S. Central Standard Time. Both elements can change when daylight
saving time begins or ends; if the user has specified a time zone that
does not use a seasonal time adjustment, then the value is constant
through time.
If the operating system doesn’t supply all the information necessary to
compute the value, the unknown elements of the list are nil
.
The argument time, if given, specifies a time value to analyze instead of the current time. The optional argument zone defaults to the current time zone rule. The operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
These functions convert time values (see Time of Day) to Lisp timestamps, or into calendrical information and vice versa.
Many operating systems use 64-bit signed integers to count seconds, and can represent times far in the past or future. However, some are more limited. For example, old-fashioned operating systems that use 32-bit signed integers typically handle only times from 1901-12-13 20:45:52 through 2038-01-19 03:14:07 Universal Time.
Calendrical conversion functions use the Gregorian calendar even for dates before the Gregorian calendar was introduced, and for dates in the far distant past or future for which the Gregorian calendar is wildly inaccurate and disagrees with common practice in scientific fields like astronomy and paleontology, which use Julian-calendar year lengths. Year numbers count since the year 1 BCE, and do not skip zero as traditional Gregorian years do; for example, the year number −37 represents the Gregorian year 38 BCE.
This function converts a time value into a Lisp timestamp.
The form argument specifies the timestamp form to be returned.
If form is the symbol integer
, this function returns an
integer count of seconds. If form is a positive integer, it
specifies a clock frequency and this function returns an integer-pair
timestamp (ticks . form)
. If form is
t
, this function treats it as a positive integer suitable for
representing the timestamp; for example, it is treated as 1000000000
if time is nil
and the platform timestamp has nanosecond
resolution. If form is list
, this function returns an
integer list (high low micro pico)
.
Although a nil
form currently acts like
list
, this is planned to change in a future Emacs version, so
callers requiring list timestamps should pass list
explicitly.
If time is not a time value, this function signals an error.
Otherwise, if time cannot be represented exactly, conversion
truncates it toward minus infinity. When form is t
,
conversion is always exact so no truncation occurs, and the returned
clock resolution is no less than that of time. By way of
contrast, although float-time
can also convert any time value
without signaling an error, the result might not be exact.
See Time of Day.
For efficiency this function might return a value that is eq
to
time, or that otherwise shares structure with time.
Although (time-convert nil nil)
is equivalent to
(current-time)
, the latter may be a bit faster.
(setq a (time-convert nil t)) ⇒ (1564826753904873156 . 1000000000)
(time-convert a 100000) ⇒ (156482675390487 . 100000)
(time-convert a 'integer) ⇒ 1564826753
(time-convert a 'list) ⇒ (23877 23681 904873 156000)
This function converts a time value into calendrical information. If you don’t specify time, it decodes the current time, and similarly zone defaults to the current time zone rule. See Time Zone Rules. The operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
The form argument controls the form of the returned seconds element, as described below. The return value is a list of nine elements, as follows:
(seconds minutes hour day month year dow dst utcoff)
Here is what the elements mean:
The number of seconds past the minute, with form described below.
The number of minutes past the hour, as an integer between 0 and 59.
The hour of the day, as an integer between 0 and 23.
The day of the month, as an integer between 1 and 31.
The month of the year, as an integer between 1 and 12.
The year, an integer typically greater than 1900.
The day of week, as an integer between 0 and 6, where 0 stands for Sunday.
t
if daylight saving time is effect, nil
if it is not
in effect, and −1 if this information is not available.
An integer indicating the Universal Time offset in seconds, i.e., the number of seconds east of Greenwich.
The seconds element is a Lisp timestamp that is nonnegative and
less than 61; it is less than 60 except during positive leap seconds
(assuming the operating system supports leap seconds). If the
optional form argument is t
, seconds uses the same
precision as time; if form is integer
,
seconds is truncated to an integer. For example, if time
is the timestamp (1566009571321 . 1000)
, which represents
2019-08-17 02:39:31.321 UTC on typical systems that lack leap seconds,
then (decode-time time t t)
returns ((31321 . 1000)
39 2 17 8 2019 6 nil 0)
, whereas (decode-time time t
'integer)
returns (31 39 2 17 8 2019 6 nil 0)
. If form
is omitted or nil
, it currently defaults to integer
but
this default may change in future Emacs releases, so callers requiring
a particular form should specify form.
Common Lisp Note: Common Lisp has different meanings for
dow, dst
and utcoff, and its second is an
integer between 0 and 59 inclusive.
To access (or alter) the elements in the calendrical information, the
decoded-time-second
, decoded-time-minute
,
decoded-time-hour
, decoded-time-day
,
decoded-time-month
, decoded-time-year
,
decoded-time-weekday
, decoded-time-dst
and
decoded-time-zone
accessors can be used.
This function converts time to a Lisp timestamp.
It can act as the inverse of decode-time
.
Ordinarily the first argument is a list
(second minute hour day month
year ignored dst zone)
that specifies a
decoded time in the style of decode-time
. For the meanings of
these list elements, see the table under decode-time
.
In particular, dst says how to interpret timestamps during a
daylight saving fallback when timestamps are repeated.
If dst is −1, the DST value is guessed; if it
is t
or nil
the timestamp with that DST value
is returned, with an error signaled if no such timestamp exists.
Unfortunately a dst value of t
or nil
does not
disambiguate timestamps duplicated when a TZDB-based timezone moves
further west of Greenwich, such as disambiguating the two
standard-time timestamps 2020-12-27 01:30 when zone is
‘"Europe/Volgograd"’, which at 02:00 that day changed
standard time from 4 to 3 hours east of Greenwich; if you need to
handle situations like this you can use a numeric zone to
disambiguate instead.
The first argument can also be a list (second minute
hour day month year)
, which is treated like
the list (second minute hour day
month year nil -1 nil)
.
As an obsolescent calling convention, this function can be given six
or more arguments. The first six arguments second,
minute, hour, day, month, and year
specify most of the components of a decoded time. If there are more
than six arguments the last argument is used as zone and
any other extra arguments are ignored, so that (apply
#'encode-time (decode-time ...))
works. In this obsolescent
convention, dst is −1 and zone defaults to the
current time zone rule (see Time Zone Rules).
When modernizing an obsolescent caller, ensure that the more-modern
list equivalent contains 9 elements with a dst
element that
is −1, not nil
.
Year numbers less than 100 are not treated specially. If you want them
to stand for years above 1900, or years above 2000, you must alter them
yourself before you call encode-time
.
The operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
However, timestamps ranging from the epoch to the near future are
always supported.
The encode-time
function acts as a rough inverse to
decode-time
. For example, you can pass the output of
the latter to the former as follows:
(encode-time (decode-time ...))
You can perform simple date arithmetic by using out-of-range values for seconds, minutes, hour, day, and month; for example, day 0 means the day preceding the given month. Take care when doing so, as it is common for this to fail in some cases. For example:
;; Try to compute the time one month from now. ;; Watch out; this might not work as expected. (let ((time (decode-time))) (setf (decoded-time-month time) (+ (decoded-time-month time) 1)) time)
Unfortunately, this code might not work as expected if the resulting
time is invalid due to month length differences,
daylight saving transitions, time zone changes,
or missing leap days or leap seconds. For example, if executed on
January 30 this code yields a nonexistent date February 30,
which encode-time
would adjust to early March.
Similarly, adding four years to February 29, 2096 would yield the
nonexistent date February 29, 2100; and adding one hour to 01:30 on
March 13, 2022 in New York would yield a timestamp 02:30 that does not
exist because clocks sprang forward from 02:00 to 03:00 that day.
To avoid some (though not all) of the problem, you
can base calculations on the middle of the affected unit, e.g., start
at the 15th of the month when adding months. Alternatively, you can use the
calendar and time-date libraries.
These functions convert time values to text in a string, and vice versa. Time values are either represented as a Lisp timestamp (see Time of Day) or a decoded time structure (see Time Conversion).
This function parses the time-string string and returns the
corresponding Lisp timestamp. The argument string should represent
a date-time, and should be in one of the forms recognized by
parse-time-string
(see below). This function assumes Universal
Time if string lacks explicit time zone information,
and assumes earliest values if string lacks month, day, or time.
The operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
This function parses the time-string string into a decoded time structure (see Time Conversion). The argument string should resemble an RFC 822 (or later) or ISO 8601 string, like “Fri, 25 Mar 2016 16:24:56 +0100” or “1998-09-12T12:21:54-0200”, but this function will attempt to parse less well-formed time strings as well.
For a more strict function (that will error out upon invalid input),
this function can be used instead. It can parse all variants of
the ISO 8601 standard, so in addition to the formats mentioned above,
it also parses things like “1998W45-3” (week number) and
“1998-245” (ordinal day number). To parse durations, there’s
iso8601-parse-duration
, and to parse intervals, there’s
iso8601-parse-interval
. All these functions return decoded
time structures, except the final one, which returns three of them
(the start, the end, and the duration).
This function converts time (which should be a Lisp timestamp,
and defaults to the current time if time is omitted or
nil
) to a string according to format-string. The
conversion uses the time zone rule zone, which defaults to the
current time zone rule. See Time Zone Rules. The argument
format-string may contain ‘%’-sequences which say to
substitute parts of the time. Here is a table of what the
‘%’-sequences mean:
This stands for the abbreviated name of the day of week.
This stands for the full name of the day of week.
This stands for the abbreviated name of the month.
This stands for the full name of the month.
This is a synonym for ‘%x %X’.
This stands for the century, that is, the year divided by 100, truncated toward zero. The default field width is 2.
This stands for the day of month, zero-padded.
This is a synonym for ‘%m/%d/%y’.
This stands for the day of month, blank-padded.
This stands for the ISO 8601 date format, which is like ‘%+4Y-%m-%d’ except that any flags or field width override the ‘+’ and (after subtracting 6) the ‘4’.
This stands for the year without century (00–99) corresponding to the current ISO week number. ISO weeks start on Monday and end on Sunday. If an ISO week begins in one year and ends in another, the rules regarding which year ‘%g’ will produce are complex and will not be described here; however, in general, if most of the week’s days are in the ending year, ‘%g’ will produce that year.
This stands for the year with century corresponding to the current ISO week number.
This is a synonym for ‘%b’.
This stands for the hour (00–23).
This stands for the hour (01–12).
This stands for the day of the year (001–366).
This stands for the hour (0–23), blank padded.
This stands for the hour (1–12), blank padded.
This stands for the month (01–12).
This stands for the minute (00–59).
This stands for a newline.
This stands for the nanoseconds (000000000–999999999). To ask for fewer digits, use ‘%3N’ for milliseconds, ‘%6N’ for microseconds, etc. Any excess digits are discarded, without rounding.
This stands for ‘AM’ or ‘PM’, as appropriate.
This stands for the calendar quarter (1–4).
This is a synonym for ‘%I:%M:%S %p’.
This is a synonym for ‘%H:%M’.
This stands for the integer number of seconds since the epoch.
This stands for the second (00–59, or 00–60 on platforms that support leap seconds).
This stands for a tab character.
This is a synonym for ‘%H:%M:%S’.
This stands for the numeric day of week (1–7). Monday is day 1.
This stands for the week of the year (01–52), assuming that weeks start on Sunday.
This stands for the week of the year according to ISO 8601.
This stands for the numeric day of week (0–6). Sunday is day 0.
This stands for the week of the year (01–52), assuming that weeks start on Monday.
This has a locale-specific meaning. In the default locale (named ‘C’), it is equivalent to ‘%D’.
This has a locale-specific meaning. In the default locale (named ‘C’), it is equivalent to ‘%T’.
This stands for the year without century (00–99).
This stands for the year with century.
This stands for the time zone abbreviation (e.g., ‘EST’).
This stands for the time zone numerical offset. The ‘z’ can be preceded by one, two, or three colons; if plain ‘%z’ stands for ‘-0500’, then ‘%:z’ stands for ‘-05:00’, ‘%::z’ stands for ‘-05:00:00’, and ‘%:::z’ is like ‘%::z’ except it suppresses trailing instances of ‘:00’ so it stands for ‘-05’ in the same example.
This stands for a single ‘%’.
One or more flag characters can appear immediately after the ‘%’. ‘0’ pads with zeros, ‘+’ pads with zeros and also puts ‘+’ before nonnegative year numbers with more than four digits, ‘_’ pads with blanks, ‘-’ suppresses padding, ‘^’ upper-cases letters, and ‘#’ reverses the case of letters.
You can also specify the field width and type of padding for any of
these ‘%’-sequences. This works as in printf
: you write
the field width as digits in a ‘%’-sequence, after any flags.
For example, ‘%S’ specifies the number of seconds since the minute;
‘%03S’ means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, ‘%_3S’ to
pad with spaces to 3 positions. Plain ‘%3S’ pads with zeros,
because that is how ‘%S’ normally pads to two positions.
The characters ‘E’ and ‘O’ act as modifiers when used after
any flags and field widths in a ‘%’-sequence. ‘E’ specifies
using the current locale’s alternative version of the date and time.
In a Japanese locale, for example, %Ex
might yield a date format
based on the Japanese Emperors’ reigns. ‘E’ is allowed in
‘%Ec’, ‘%EC’, ‘%Ex’, ‘%EX’, ‘%Ey’, and
‘%EY’.
‘O’ means to use the current locale’s alternative representation of numbers, instead of the ordinary decimal digits. This is allowed with most letters, all the ones that output numbers.
To help debug programs, unrecognized ‘%’-sequences stand for themselves and are output as-is. Programs should not rely on this behavior, as future versions of Emacs may recognize new ‘%’-sequences as extensions.
This function uses the C library function strftime
(see Formatting Calendar Time in The GNU C Library Reference
Manual) to do most of the work. In order to communicate with that
function, it first converts time and zone to internal form;
the operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
This function also encodes format-string using the coding system
specified by locale-coding-system
(see Locales); after
strftime
returns the resulting string,
this function decodes the string using that same coding
system.
This function converts its argument seconds into a string of years, days, hours, etc., according to format-string. The argument format-string may contain ‘%’-sequences which control the conversion. Here is a table of what the ‘%’-sequences mean:
The integer number of 365-day years.
The integer number of days.
The integer number of hours.
The integer number of minutes.
The number of seconds. If the optional ‘,’ parameter is used, it’s a floating point number, and the number after the ‘,’ specifies how many decimals to be used. ‘%,2s’ means “use two decimals”.
Non-printing control flag. When it is used, other specifiers must be
given in the order of decreasing size, i.e., years before days, hours
before minutes, etc. Nothing will be produced in the result string to
the left of ‘%z’ until the first non-zero conversion is
encountered. For example, the default format used by
emacs-uptime
(see emacs-uptime)
"%Y, %D, %H, %M, %z%S"
means that the number of seconds
will always be produced, but years, days, hours, and minutes will only
be shown if they are non-zero.
Non-printing control flag that works along the same lines as ‘%z’, but instead suppresses printing of trailing zero-value time elements.
Produces a literal ‘%’.
Upper-case format sequences produce the units in addition to the numbers, lower-case formats produce only the numbers.
You can also specify the field width by following the ‘%’ with a
number; shorter numbers will be padded with blanks. An optional
period before the width requests zero-padding instead. For example,
"%.3Y"
might produce "004 years"
.
Emacs provides several functions and primitives that return time, both elapsed and processor time, used by the Emacs process.
This function returns a string representing the Emacs
uptime—the elapsed wall-clock time this instance of Emacs is
running. The string is formatted by format-seconds
according
to the optional argument format. For the available format
descriptors, see format-seconds. If format
is nil
or omitted, it defaults to "%Y, %D, %H, %M,
%z%S"
.
When called interactively, it prints the uptime in the echo area.
This function returns the processor run time used by Emacs, as a Lisp timestamp (see Time of Day).
Note that the time returned by this function excludes the time Emacs was not using the processor, and if the Emacs process has several threads, the returned value is the sum of the processor times used up by all Emacs threads.
If the system doesn’t provide a way to determine the processor run
time, get-internal-run-time
returns the same time as
current-time
.
This function returns the duration of the Emacs initialization (see Summary: Sequence of Actions at Startup) in seconds, as a string. When called interactively, it prints the duration in the echo area.
These functions perform calendrical computations using time values
(see Time of Day). As with any time value, a value of
nil
for any of their
time-value arguments stands for the current system time, and a finite
number stands for the number of seconds since the epoch.
This returns t
if the time value t1 is less than the time value
t2.
This returns t
if the two time values t1 and t2 are
equal. The result is nil
if either argument is a NaN.
For the purpose of comparison, a nil
argument represents the
current time with infinite resolution, so this function returns
nil
if one argument is nil
and the other is not, and
callers can therefore use nil
to represent an unknown time
value that does not equal any timestamp.
This returns the time difference t1 − t2 between
two time values, as a Lisp timestamp. The result is exact and its clock
resolution is no worse than the worse of its two arguments’ resolutions.
If you need the difference in units
of elapsed seconds, you can convert it with time-convert
or
float-time
. See Time Conversion.
This returns the sum of two time values,
using the same conversion rules as time-subtract
.
One argument should represent a time difference rather than a point in time,
as a time value that is often just a single number of elapsed seconds.
Here is how to add a number of seconds to a time value:
(time-add time seconds)
This function returns the number of days between the beginning of year 1 and time-value, assuming the default time zone. The operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
This is not quite the inverse of the time-to-days
function, as
it uses the Emacs epoch (instead of the year 1) for historical
reasons. To get the inverse, subtract (time-to-days 0)
from
days, in which case days-to-time
may return nil
if
days is negative.
This returns the day number within the year corresponding to time-value, assuming the default time zone. The operating system limits the range of time and zone values.
This function returns t
if year is a leap year.
Return the number of days in month in year. For instance, February 2020 has 29 days.
Return the date of ordinal in year as a decoded time structure. For instance, the 120th day in 2004 is April 29th.
You can set up a timer to call a function at a specified future time or after a certain length of idleness. A timer is a special object that stores the information about the next invocation times and the function to invoke.
This predicate function returns non-nil
if object
is a
timer.
Emacs cannot run timers at any arbitrary point in a Lisp program; it
can run them only when Emacs could accept output from a subprocess:
namely, while waiting or inside certain primitive functions such as
sit-for
or read-event
which can wait. Therefore, a
timer’s execution may be delayed if Emacs is busy. However, the time of
execution is very precise if Emacs is idle.
Emacs binds inhibit-quit
to t
before calling the timer
function, because quitting out of many timer functions can leave
things in an inconsistent state. This is normally unproblematical
because most timer functions don’t do a lot of work. Indeed, for a
timer to call a function that takes substantial time to run is likely
to be annoying. If a timer function needs to allow quitting, it
should use with-local-quit
(see Quitting). For example, if
a timer function calls accept-process-output
to receive output
from an external process, that call should be wrapped inside
with-local-quit
, to ensure that C-g works if the external
process hangs.
It is usually a bad idea for timer functions to alter buffer
contents. When they do, they usually should call undo-boundary
both before and after changing the buffer, to separate the timer’s
changes from user commands’ changes and prevent a single undo entry
from growing to be quite large.
Timer functions should also avoid calling functions that cause Emacs
to wait, such as sit-for
(see Waiting for Elapsed Time or Input). This can lead to
unpredictable effects, since other timers (or even the same timer) can
run while waiting. If a timer function needs to perform an action
after a certain time has elapsed, it can do this by scheduling a new
timer.
If a timer function performs a remote file operation, it can be in
conflict with an already running remote file operation of the same
connection. Such conflicts are detected, and they result in a
remote-file-error
error (see Standard Errors). This should
be protected by wrapping the timer function body with
(ignore-error 'remote-file-error ...)
If a timer function calls functions that can change the match data, it should save and restore the match data. See Saving and Restoring the Match Data.
This sets up a timer that calls the function function with
arguments args at time time. If repeat is a number
(integer or floating point), the timer is scheduled to run again every
repeat seconds after time. If repeat is nil
,
the timer runs only once.
time may specify an absolute or a relative time.
Absolute times may be specified using a string with a limited variety of formats, and are taken to be times today, even if already in the past. The recognized forms are ‘xxxx’, ‘x:xx’, or ‘xx:xx’ (military time), and ‘xxam’, ‘xxAM’, ‘xxpm’, ‘xxPM’, ‘xx:xxam’, ‘xx:xxAM’, ‘xx:xxpm’, or ‘xx:xxPM’. A period can be used instead of a colon to separate the hour and minute parts.
To specify a relative time as a string, use numbers followed by units. For example:
denotes 1 minute from now.
denotes 65 seconds from now.
denotes exactly 103 months, 123 days, and 10862 seconds from now.
For relative time values, Emacs considers a month to be exactly thirty days, and a year to be exactly 365.25 days.
Not all convenient formats are strings. If time is a number
(integer or floating point), that specifies a relative time measured in
seconds. The result of encode-time
can also be used to specify
an absolute value for time.
In most cases, repeat has no effect on when first call
takes place—time alone specifies that. There is one exception:
if time is t
, then the timer runs whenever the time is a
multiple of repeat seconds after the epoch. This is useful for
functions like display-time
. For instance, the following will
make function run at every “whole” minute (e.g.,
‘11:03:00’, ‘11:04:00’, etc):
(run-at-time t 60 function)
If Emacs didn’t get any CPU time when the timer would have run (for example if the system was busy running another process or if the computer was sleeping or in a suspended state), the timer will run as soon as Emacs resumes and is idle.
The function run-at-time
returns a timer value that identifies
the particular scheduled future action. You can use this value to call
cancel-timer
(see below).
This is exactly the same as run-at-time
(so see that definition
for an explanation of the parameters; secs is passed as
time to that function), but is meant to be used when the delay
is specified in seconds.
A repeating timer nominally ought to run every repeat seconds, but remember that any invocation of a timer can be late. Lateness of one repetition has no effect on the scheduled time of the next repetition. For instance, if Emacs is busy computing for long enough to cover three scheduled repetitions of the timer, and then starts to wait, it will immediately call the timer function three times in immediate succession (presuming no other timers trigger before or between them). If you want a timer to run again no less than n seconds after the last invocation, don’t use the repeat argument. Instead, the timer function should explicitly reschedule the timer.
This variable’s value specifies the maximum number of times to repeat calling a timer function in a row, when many previously scheduled calls were unavoidably delayed.
Execute body, but give up after seconds seconds. If
body finishes before the time is up, with-timeout
returns
the value of the last form in body. If, however, the execution of
body is cut short by the timeout, then with-timeout
executes all the timeout-forms and returns the value of the last
of them.
This macro works by setting a timer to run after seconds seconds. If body finishes before that time, it cancels the timer. If the timer actually runs, it terminates execution of body, then executes timeout-forms.
Since timers can run within a Lisp program only when the program calls a
primitive that can wait, with-timeout
cannot stop executing
body while it is in the midst of a computation—only when it
calls one of those primitives. So use with-timeout
only with a
body that waits for input, not one that does a long computation.
The function y-or-n-p-with-timeout
provides a simple way to use
a timer to avoid waiting too long for an answer. See Yes-or-No Queries.
This cancels the requested action for timer, which should be a
timer—usually, one previously returned by run-at-time
or
run-with-idle-timer
. This cancels the effect of that call to
one of these functions; the arrival of the specified time will not
cause anything special to happen.
The list-timers
command lists all the currently active timers.
The command c (timer-list-cancel
) will cancel the timer
on the line under point. You can sort the list by column using the
command S (tabulated-list-sort
).
Here is how to set up a timer that runs when Emacs is idle for a certain length of time. Aside from how to set them up, idle timers work just like ordinary timers.
Set up a timer which runs the next time Emacs is idle for secs
seconds. The value of secs may be a number or a value of the type
returned by current-idle-time
.
If repeat is nil
, the timer runs just once, the first time
Emacs remains idle for a long enough time. More often repeat is
non-nil
, which means to run the timer each time Emacs
remains idle for secs seconds.
The function run-with-idle-timer
returns a timer value which you
can use in calling cancel-timer
(see Timers for Delayed Execution).
Emacs becomes idle when it starts waiting for user input
(unless it waits for input with a timeout, see Reading One Event), and
it remains idle until the user provides some input. If a timer is set
for five seconds of idleness, it runs approximately five seconds after
Emacs first becomes idle. Even if repeat is non-nil
,
this timer will not run again as long as Emacs remains idle, because
the duration of idleness will continue to increase and will not go
down to five seconds again.
Emacs can do various things while idle: garbage collect, autosave or handle data from a subprocess. But these interludes during idleness do not interfere with idle timers, because they do not reset the clock of idleness to zero. An idle timer set for 600 seconds will run when ten minutes have elapsed since the last user command was finished, even if subprocess output has been accepted thousands of times within those ten minutes, and even if there have been garbage collections and autosaves.
When the user supplies input, Emacs becomes non-idle while executing the input. Then it becomes idle again, and all the idle timers that are set up to repeat will subsequently run another time, one by one.
Do not write an idle timer function containing a loop which does a
certain amount of processing each time around, and exits when
(input-pending-p)
is non-nil
. This approach seems very
natural but has two problems:
Similarly, do not write an idle timer function that sets up another idle timer (including the same idle timer) with secs argument less than or equal to the current idleness time. Such a timer will run almost immediately, and continue running again and again, instead of waiting for the next time Emacs becomes idle. The correct approach is to reschedule with an appropriate increment of the current value of the idleness time, as described below.
If Emacs is idle, this function returns the length of time Emacs has
been idle, using the same format as
current-time
(see Time of Day).
When Emacs is not idle, current-idle-time
returns nil
.
This is a convenient way to test whether Emacs is idle.
The main use of current-idle-time
is when an idle timer
function wants to “take a break” for a while. It can set up another
idle timer to call the same function again, after a few seconds more
idleness. Here’s an example:
(defvar my-resume-timer nil "Timer for `my-timer-function' to reschedule itself, or nil.") (defun my-timer-function () ;; If the user types a command whilemy-resume-timer
;; is active, the next time this function is called from ;; its main idle timer, deactivatemy-resume-timer
. (when my-resume-timer (cancel-timer my-resume-timer)) ...do the work for a while... (when taking-a-break (setq my-resume-timer (run-with-idle-timer ;; Compute an idle time break-length ;; more than the current value. (time-add (current-idle-time) break-length) nil 'my-timer-function))))
This section describes functions and variables for recording or manipulating terminal input. See Emacs Display, for related functions.
This function sets the mode for reading keyboard input. If
interrupt is non-nil
, then Emacs uses input interrupts.
If it is nil
, then it uses CBREAK mode. The default
setting is system-dependent. Some systems always use CBREAK mode
regardless of what is specified.
When Emacs communicates directly with X, it ignores this argument and uses interrupts if that is the way it knows how to communicate.
If flow is non-nil
, then Emacs uses XON/XOFF
(C-q, C-s) flow control for output to the terminal. This
has no effect except in CBREAK mode.
The argument meta controls support for input character codes
above 127. If meta is t
, Emacs converts characters with
the 8th bit set into Meta characters, before it decodes them as needed
(see Terminal I/O Encoding). If meta is nil
,
Emacs disregards the 8th bit; this is necessary when the terminal uses
it as a parity bit. If meta is the symbol encoded
, Emacs
first decodes the characters using all the 8 bits of each byte, and
then converts the decoded single-byte characters into Meta characters
if they have their eighth bit set. Finally, if meta is neither
t
nor nil
nor encoded
, Emacs uses all 8 bits of
input unchanged, both before and after decoding them. This is good
for terminals that use 8-bit character sets and don’t encode the Meta
modifier as the eighth bit.
If quit-char is non-nil
, it specifies the character to
use for quitting. Normally this character is C-g.
See Quitting.
The current-input-mode
function returns the input mode settings
Emacs is currently using.
This function returns the current mode for reading keyboard input. It
returns a list, corresponding to the arguments of set-input-mode
,
of the form (interrupt flow meta quit)
in
which:
is non-nil
when Emacs is using interrupt-driven input. If
nil
, Emacs is using CBREAK mode.
is non-nil
if Emacs uses XON/XOFF (C-q, C-s)
flow control for output to the terminal. This value is meaningful only
when interrupt is nil
.
is t
if Emacs treats the eighth bit of input characters as
the Meta bit before decoding input; encoded
if Emacs treats the
eighth bit of the decoded single-byte characters as the Meta bit;
nil
if Emacs clears the eighth bit of every input character;
any other value means Emacs uses all eight bits as the basic character
code.
is the character Emacs currently uses for quitting, usually C-g.
This function returns a vector containing the last 300 input events from the keyboard or mouse. All input events are included, whether or not they were used as parts of key sequences. Thus, you always get the last 300 input events, not counting events generated by keyboard macros. (These are excluded because they are less interesting for debugging; it should be enough to see the events that invoked the macros.)
If include-cmds is non-nil
, complete key sequences in the
result vector are interleaved with pseudo-events of the form
(nil . COMMAND)
, where COMMAND is the binding of
the key sequence (see Command Loop Overview).
A call to clear-this-command-keys
(see Information from the Command Loop)
causes this function to return an empty vector immediately afterward.
This function opens a dribble file named filename. When a dribble file is open, each input event from the keyboard or mouse (but not those from keyboard macros) is written in that file. A non-character event is expressed using its printed representation surrounded by ‘<…>’. Be aware that sensitive information (such as passwords) may end up recorded in the dribble file.
You close the dribble file by calling this function with an argument
of nil
.
See also the open-termscript
function (see Terminal Output).
The terminal output functions send output to a text terminal, or keep
track of output sent to the terminal. The variable baud-rate
tells you what Emacs thinks is the output speed of the terminal.
This variable’s value is the output speed of the terminal, as far as Emacs knows. Setting this variable does not change the speed of actual data transmission, but the value is used for calculations such as padding.
It also affects decisions about whether to scroll part of the screen or repaint on text terminals. See Forcing Redisplay, for the corresponding functionality on graphical terminals.
The value is measured in baud.
If you are running across a network, and different parts of the
network work at different baud rates, the value returned by Emacs may be
different from the value used by your local terminal. Some network
protocols communicate the local terminal speed to the remote machine, so
that Emacs and other programs can get the proper value, but others do
not. If Emacs has the wrong value, it makes decisions that are less
than optimal. To fix the problem, set baud-rate
.
This function sends string to terminal without alteration.
Control characters in string have terminal-dependent effects.
(If you need to display non-ASCII text on the terminal, encode it
using one of the functions described in Explicit Encoding and Decoding.)
This function operates only on text terminals. terminal may be
a terminal object, a frame, or nil
for the selected frame’s
terminal. In batch mode, string is sent to stdout
when
terminal is nil
.
One use of this function is to define function keys on terminals that have downloadable function key definitions. For example, this is how (on certain terminals) to define function key 4 to move forward four characters (by transmitting the characters C-u C-f to the computer):
(send-string-to-terminal "\eF4\^U\^F") ⇒ nil
This function is used to open a termscript file that will record
all the characters sent by Emacs to the terminal. It returns
nil
. Termscript files are useful for investigating problems
where Emacs garbles the screen, problems that are due to incorrect
Termcap entries or to undesirable settings of terminal options more
often than to actual Emacs bugs. Once you are certain which characters
were actually output, you can determine reliably whether they correspond
to the Termcap specifications in use.
(open-termscript "../junk/termscript") ⇒ nil
You close the termscript file by calling this function with an
argument of nil
.
See also open-dribble-file
in Recording Input.
To play sound using Emacs, use the function play-sound
. Only
certain systems are supported; if you call play-sound
on a
system which cannot really do the job, it gives an error.
The sound must be stored as a file in RIFF-WAVE format (‘.wav’) or Sun Audio format (‘.au’).
This function plays a specified sound. The argument, sound, has
the form (sound properties...)
, where the properties
consist of alternating keywords (particular symbols recognized
specially) and values corresponding to them.
Here is a table of the keywords that are currently meaningful in sound, and their meanings:
:file file
This specifies the file containing the sound to play.
If the file name is not absolute, it is expanded against
the directory data-directory
.
:data data
This specifies the sound to play without need to refer to a file. The value, data, should be a string containing the same bytes as a sound file. We recommend using a unibyte string.
:volume volume
This specifies how loud to play the sound. It should be a number in the range of 0 to 1. The default is to use whatever volume has been specified before.
:device device
This specifies the system device on which to play the sound, as a string. The default device is system-dependent.
Before actually playing the sound, play-sound
calls the functions in the list play-sound-functions
.
Each function is called with one argument, sound.
This function is an alternative interface to playing a sound file specifying an optional volume and device.
A list of functions to be called before playing a sound. Each function is called with one argument, a property list that describes the sound.
To define system-specific X11 keysyms, set the variable
system-key-alist
.
This variable’s value should be an alist with one element for each
system-specific keysym. Each element has the form (code
. symbol)
, where code is the numeric keysym code (not
including the vendor-specific bit,
−2**28),
and symbol is the name for the function key.
For example (168 . mute-acute)
defines a system-specific key (used
by HP X servers) whose numeric code is
−2**28
+ 168.
It is not crucial to exclude from the alist the keysyms of other X servers; those do no harm, as long as they don’t conflict with the ones used by the X server actually in use.
The variable is always local to the current terminal, and cannot be buffer-local. See Multiple Terminals.
You can specify which keysyms Emacs should use for the Control, Meta, Alt, Hyper, and Super modifiers by setting these variables:
The name of the keysym that should stand for the Control modifier (respectively, for Alt, Meta, Hyper, and Super). For example, here is how to swap the Meta and Alt modifiers within Emacs:
(setq x-alt-keysym 'meta) (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
The command-line option ‘-batch’ causes Emacs to run noninteractively. In this mode, Emacs does not read commands from the terminal, it does not alter the terminal modes, and it does not expect to be outputting to an erasable screen. The idea is that you specify Lisp programs to run; when they are finished, Emacs should exit. The way to specify the programs to run is with ‘-l file’, which loads the library named file, or ‘-f function’, which calls function with no arguments, or ‘--eval=form’.
This variable is non-nil
when Emacs is running in batch mode.
If the specified Lisp program signals an unhandled error in batch mode, Emacs exits with a non-zero exit status after invoking the Lisp debugger which shows the Lisp backtrace (see Invoking the Debugger) on the standard error stream:
$ emacs -Q --batch --eval '(error "foo")'; echo $?
Error: error ("foo") mapbacktrace(#f(compiled-function (evald func args flags) #<bytecode -0x4f85c5 7c45e2f81>)) debug-early-backtrace() debug-early(error (error "foo")) signal(error ("foo")) error("foo") eval((error "foo") t) command-line-1(("--eval" "(error \"foo\")")) command-line() normal-top-level()
foo 255
Any Lisp program output that would normally go to the echo area,
either using message
, or using prin1
, etc., with
t
as the stream (see Output Streams), goes instead to
Emacs’s standard descriptors when in batch mode: message
writes
to the standard error descriptor, while prin1
and other print
functions write to the standard output. Similarly, input that would
normally come from the minibuffer is read from the standard input
descriptor. Thus, Emacs behaves much like a noninteractive
application program. (The echo area output that Emacs itself normally
generates, such as command echoing, is suppressed entirely.)
Non-ASCII text written to the standard output or error descriptors is
by default encoded using locale-coding-system
(see Locales)
if it is non-nil
; this can be overridden by binding
coding-system-for-write
to a coding system of you choice
(see Explicit Encoding and Decoding).
In batch mode, Emacs will enlarge the value of the
gc-cons-percentage
variable from the default of ‘0.1’ up to
‘1.0’. Batch jobs that are supposed to run for a long time
should adjust the limit back down again, because this means that less
garbage collection will be performed by default (and more memory
consumed).
Emacs supports the X Session Management Protocol, which is used to suspend and restart applications. In the X Window System, a program called the session manager is responsible for keeping track of the applications that are running. When the X server shuts down, the session manager asks applications to save their state, and delays the actual shutdown until they respond. An application can also cancel the shutdown.
When the session manager restarts a suspended session, it directs these applications to individually reload their saved state. It does this by specifying a special command-line argument that says what saved session to restore. For Emacs, this argument is ‘--smid session’.
Emacs supports saving state via a hook called
emacs-save-session-functions
. Emacs runs this hook when the
session manager tells it that the window system is shutting down. The
functions are called with no arguments, and with the current buffer
set to a temporary buffer. Each function can use insert
to add
Lisp code to this buffer. At the end, Emacs saves the buffer in a
file, called the session file.
Subsequently, when the session manager restarts Emacs, it loads the
session file automatically (see Loading). This is performed by a
function named emacs-session-restore
, which is called during
startup. See Summary: Sequence of Actions at Startup.
If a function in emacs-save-session-functions
returns
non-nil
, Emacs tells the session manager to cancel the
shutdown.
Here is an example that just inserts some text into *scratch* when Emacs is restarted by the session manager.
(add-hook 'emacs-save-session-functions 'save-yourself-test)
(defun save-yourself-test () (insert (format "%S" '(with-current-buffer "*scratch*" (insert "I am restored")))) nil)
Emacs is able to send notifications on systems that support the
freedesktop.org Desktop Notifications Specification and on MS-Windows.
In order to use this functionality on POSIX hosts, Emacs must have
been compiled with D-Bus support, and the notifications
library
must be loaded. See D-Bus in D-Bus integration in Emacs.
The following function is supported when D-Bus support is available:
This function sends a notification to the desktop via D-Bus, consisting of the parameters specified by the params arguments. These arguments should consist of alternating keyword and value pairs. The supported keywords and values are as follows:
:bus bus
The D-Bus bus. This argument is needed only if a bus other than
:session
shall be used.
:title title
The notification title.
:body text
The notification body text. Depending on the implementation of the notification server, the text could contain HTML markups, like ‘"<b>bold text</b>"’, hyperlinks, or images. Special HTML characters must be encoded, as ‘"Contact <postmaster@localhost>!"’.
:app-name name
The name of the application sending the notification. The default is
notifications-application-name
.
:replaces-id id
The notification id that this notification replaces. id
must be the result of a previous notifications-notify
call.
:app-icon icon-file
The file name of the notification icon. If set to nil
, no icon
is displayed. The default is notifications-application-icon
.
:actions (key title key title ...)
A list of actions to be applied. key and title are both strings. The default action (usually invoked by clicking the notification) should have a key named ‘"default"’. The title can be anything, though implementations are free not to display it.
:timeout timeout
The timeout time in milliseconds since the display of the notification at which the notification should automatically close. If −1, the notification’s expiration time is dependent on the notification server’s settings, and may vary for the type of notification. If 0, the notification never expires. Default value is −1.
:urgency urgency
The urgency level. It can be low
, normal
, or critical
.
:action-items
When this keyword is given, the title string of the actions is interpreted as icon name.
:category category
The type of notification this is, a string. See the Desktop Notifications Specification for a list of standard categories.
:desktop-entry filename
This specifies the name of the desktop filename representing the calling program, like ‘"emacs"’.
:image-data (width height rowstride has-alpha bits channels data)
This is a raw data image format that describes the width, height, rowstride, whether there is an alpha channel, bits per sample, channels and image data, respectively.
:image-path path
This is represented either as a URI (‘file://’ is the only URI schema supported right now) or a name in a freedesktop.org-compliant icon theme from ‘$XDG_DATA_DIRS/icons’.
:sound-file filename
The path to a sound file to play when the notification pops up.
:sound-name name
A themable named sound from the freedesktop.org sound naming specification from ‘$XDG_DATA_DIRS/sounds’, to play when the notification pops up. Similar to the icon name, only for sounds. An example would be ‘"message-new-instant"’.
:suppress-sound
Causes the server to suppress playing any sounds, if it has that ability.
:resident
When set the server will not automatically remove the notification
when an action has been invoked. The notification will remain resident
in the server until it is explicitly removed by the user or by the
sender. This hint is likely only useful when the server has the
:persistence
capability.
:transient
When set the server will treat the notification as transient and by-pass the server’s persistence capability, if it should exist.
:x position
:y position
Specifies the X, Y location on the screen that the notification should point to. Both arguments must be used together.
:on-action function
Function to call when an action is invoked. The notification id and the key of the action are passed as arguments to the function.
:on-close function
Function to call when the notification has been closed by timeout or by the user. The function receive the notification id and the closing reason as arguments:
expired
if the notification has expired
dismissed
if the notification was dismissed by the user
close-notification
if the notification was closed by a call to
notifications-close-notification
undefined
if the notification server hasn’t provided a reason
Which parameters are accepted by the notification server can be
checked via notifications-get-capabilities
.
This function returns a notification id, an integer, which can be used
to manipulate the notification item with
notifications-close-notification
or the :replaces-id
argument of another notifications-notify
call. For example:
(defun my-on-action-function (id key) (message "Message %d, key \"%s\" pressed" id key)) ⇒ my-on-action-function
(defun my-on-close-function (id reason) (message "Message %d, closed due to \"%s\"" id reason)) ⇒ my-on-close-function
(notifications-notify :title "Title" :body "This is <b>important</b>." :actions '("Confirm" "I agree" "Refuse" "I disagree") :on-action 'my-on-action-function :on-close 'my-on-close-function) ⇒ 22
A message window opens on the desktop. Press ``I agree''. ⇒ Message 22, key "Confirm" pressed Message 22, closed due to "dismissed"
This function closes a notification with identifier id.
bus can be a string denoting a D-Bus connection, the default is
:session
.
Returns the capabilities of the notification server, a list of
symbols. bus can be a string denoting a D-Bus connection, the
default is :session
. The following capabilities can be
expected:
:actions
The server will provide the specified actions to the user.
:body
Supports body text.
:body-hyperlinks
The server supports hyperlinks in the notifications.
:body-images
The server supports images in the notifications.
:body-markup
Supports markup in the body text.
:icon-multi
The server will render an animation of all the frames in a given image array.
:icon-static
Supports display of exactly 1 frame of any given image array. This
value is mutually exclusive with :icon-multi
.
:persistence
The server supports persistence of notifications.
:sound
The server supports sounds on notifications.
Further vendor-specific caps start with :x-vendor
, like
:x-gnome-foo-cap
.
Return information on the notification server, a list of strings.
bus can be a string denoting a D-Bus connection, the default is
:session
. The returned list is (name vendor
version spec-version)
.
The product name of the server.
The vendor name. For example, ‘"KDE"’, ‘"GNOME"’.
The server’s version number.
The specification version the server is compliant with.
If spec_version is nil
, the server supports a
specification prior to ‘"1.0"’.
When Emacs runs on MS-Windows as a GUI session, it supports a small subset of the D-Bus notifications functionality via a native primitive:
This function displays an MS-Windows tray notification as specified by params. MS-Windows tray notifications are displayed in a balloon from an icon in the notification area of the taskbar.
Value is the integer unique ID of the notification that can be used to
remove the notification using w32-notification-close
, described
below. If the function fails, the return value is nil
.
The arguments params are specified as keyword/value pairs. All the
parameters are optional, but if no parameters are specified, the
function will do nothing and return nil
.
The following parameters are supported:
:icon icon
Display icon in the system tray. If icon is a string, it should specify a file name from which to load the icon; the specified file should be a .ico Windows icon file. If icon is not a string, or if this parameter is not specified, the standard Emacs icon will be used.
:tip tip
Use tip as the tooltip for the notification. If tip is a string, this is the text of a tooltip that will be shown when the mouse pointer hovers over the tray icon added by the notification. If tip is not a string, or if this parameter is not specified, the default tooltip text is ‘Emacs notification’. The tooltip text can be up to 127 characters long (63 on Windows versions before W2K). Longer strings will be truncated.
:level level
Notification severity level, one of info
, warning
, or
error
. If given, the value determines the icon displayed to the
left of the notification title, but only if the :title
parameter
(see below) is also specified and is a string.
:title title
The title of the notification. If title is a string, it is displayed in a larger font immediately above the body text. The title text can be up to 63 characters long; longer text will be truncated.
:body body
The body of the notification. If body is a string, it specifies the text of the notification message. Use embedded newlines to control how the text is broken into lines. The body text can be up to 255 characters long, and will be truncated if it’s longer. Unlike with D-Bus, the body text should be plain text, with no markup.
Note that versions of Windows before W2K support only :icon
and
:tip
. The other parameters can be passed, but they will be
ignored on those old systems.
There can be at most one active notification at any given time. An
active notification must be removed by calling
w32-notification-close
before a new one can be shown.
To remove the notification and its icon from the taskbar, use the following function:
This function removes the tray notification given by its unique id.
Several operating systems support watching of filesystems for changes to files or their attributes. If configured properly, Emacs links a respective library like inotify, kqueue, gfilenotify, or w32notify statically. These libraries enable watching of filesystems on the local machine.
It is also possible to watch filesystems on remote machines, see Remote Files in The GNU Emacs Manual. This does not depend on one of the libraries linked to Emacs.
Since all these libraries emit different events upon notified file
changes, Emacs provides a special library filenotify
which
presents a unified interface to applications. Lisp programs that want
to receive file notifications should always use this library in
preference to the native ones. This section documents the
filenotify
library functions and variables.
Add a watch for filesystem events pertaining to file. This arranges for filesystem events pertaining to file to be reported to Emacs.
The returned value is a descriptor for the added watch. Its type
depends on the underlying library, and in general cannot be assumed to
be an integer as in the example below. It should be used for
comparison by equal
only.
If the file cannot be watched for some reason, this function
signals a file-notify-error
error.
Sometimes, mounted filesystems cannot be watched for file changes.
This is not detected by this function, and so a non-nil
return
value does not guarantee that changes on file will be actually
notified.
If file is a symlink, it doesn’t follow that link. Just file itself will be watched.
flags is a list of conditions to set what will be watched for. It can include the following symbols:
change
watch for changes in file’s contents
attribute-change
watch for changes in file attributes, like permissions or modification time
If file is a directory, change
watches for file creation
and deletion in that directory. Some of the native file notification
libraries also report file changes in that case. This does not work
recursively.
When any event happens, Emacs will call the callback function passing it a single argument event, which is of the form
(descriptor action file [file1])
descriptor is the same object as the one returned by this function. action is the description of the event. It could be any one of the following symbols:
created
file was created
deleted
file was deleted
changed
file’s contents has changed; with w32notify library, reports attribute changes as well
renamed
file has been renamed to file1
attribute-changed
a file attribute was changed
stopped
watching file has stopped
Note that the w32notify library does not report
attribute-changed
events. When some file’s attribute, like
permissions or modification time, has changed, this library reports a
changed
event. Likewise, the kqueue library does not
reliably report file attribute changes when watching a directory.
The stopped
event means that watching the file has been
discontinued. This could be because file-notify-rm-watch
was
called (see below), or because the file being watched was deleted, or
due to another error reported from the underlying library which makes
further watching impossible.
file and file1 are the name of the file(s) whose event is being reported. For example:
(require 'filenotify) ⇒ filenotify
(defun my-notify-callback (event) (message "Event %S" event)) ⇒ my-notify-callback
(file-notify-add-watch "/tmp" '(change attribute-change) 'my-notify-callback) ⇒ 35025468
(write-region "foo" nil "/tmp/foo") ⇒ Event (35025468 created "/tmp/.#foo") Event (35025468 created "/tmp/foo") Event (35025468 changed "/tmp/foo") Event (35025468 deleted "/tmp/.#foo")
(write-region "bla" nil "/tmp/foo") ⇒ Event (35025468 created "/tmp/.#foo") Event (35025468 changed "/tmp/foo") Event (35025468 deleted "/tmp/.#foo")
(set-file-modes "/tmp/foo" (default-file-modes) 'nofollow) ⇒ Event (35025468 attribute-changed "/tmp/foo")
Whether the action renamed
is returned depends on the used
watch library. Otherwise, the actions deleted
and
created
could be returned in a random order.
(rename-file "/tmp/foo" "/tmp/bla") ⇒ Event (35025468 renamed "/tmp/foo" "/tmp/bla")
(delete-file "/tmp/bla") ⇒ Event (35025468 deleted "/tmp/bla")
Removes an existing file watch specified by its descriptor.
descriptor should be an object returned by
file-notify-add-watch
.
Removes all existing file notification watches from Emacs.
Use this command with caution, because it could have unexpected side effects on packages relying on file watches. It is intended mainly for debugging purposes, or when Emacs has been stalled.
Checks a watch specified by its descriptor for validity.
descriptor should be an object returned by
file-notify-add-watch
.
A watch can become invalid if the file or directory it watches is
deleted, or if the watcher thread exits abnormally for any other
reason. Removing the watch by calling file-notify-rm-watch
also makes it invalid.
(make-directory "/tmp/foo") ⇒ Event (35025468 created "/tmp/foo")
(setq desc (file-notify-add-watch "/tmp/foo" '(change) 'my-notify-callback)) ⇒ 11359632
(file-notify-valid-p desc) ⇒ t
(write-region "bla" nil "/tmp/foo/bla") ⇒ Event (11359632 created "/tmp/foo/.#bla") Event (11359632 created "/tmp/foo/bla") Event (11359632 changed "/tmp/foo/bla") Event (11359632 deleted "/tmp/foo/.#bla")
;; Deleting a file in the directory doesn't invalidate the watch. (delete-file "/tmp/foo/bla") ⇒ Event (11359632 deleted "/tmp/foo/bla")
(write-region "bla" nil "/tmp/foo/bla") ⇒ Event (11359632 created "/tmp/foo/.#bla") Event (11359632 created "/tmp/foo/bla") Event (11359632 changed "/tmp/foo/bla") Event (11359632 deleted "/tmp/foo/.#bla")
;; Deleting the directory invalidates the watch. ;; Events arrive for different watch descriptors. (delete-directory "/tmp/foo" 'recursive) ⇒ Event (35025468 deleted "/tmp/foo") Event (11359632 deleted "/tmp/foo/bla") Event (11359632 deleted "/tmp/foo") Event (11359632 stopped "/tmp/foo")
(file-notify-valid-p desc) ⇒ nil
A dynamically loaded library is a library that is loaded on demand, when its facilities are first needed. Emacs supports such on-demand loading of support libraries for some of its features.
This is an alist of dynamic libraries and external library files implementing them.
Each element is a list of the form
(library files…)
, where the car
is
a symbol representing a supported external library, and the rest are
strings giving alternate filenames for that library.
Emacs tries to load the library from the files in the order they appear in the list; if none is found, the Emacs session won’t have access to that library, and the features it provides will be unavailable.
Image support on some platforms uses this facility. Here’s an example of setting this variable for supporting images on MS-Windows:
(setq dynamic-library-alist '((xpm "libxpm.dll" "xpm4.dll" "libXpm-nox4.dll") (png "libpng12d.dll" "libpng12.dll" "libpng.dll" "libpng13d.dll" "libpng13.dll") (jpeg "jpeg62.dll" "libjpeg.dll" "jpeg-62.dll" "jpeg.dll") (tiff "libtiff3.dll" "libtiff.dll") (gif "giflib4.dll" "libungif4.dll" "libungif.dll") (svg "librsvg-2-2.dll") (gdk-pixbuf "libgdk_pixbuf-2.0-0.dll") (glib "libglib-2.0-0.dll") (gobject "libgobject-2.0-0.dll")))
Note that image types pbm
and xbm
do not need entries in
this variable because they do not depend on external libraries and are
always available in Emacs.
Also note that this variable is not meant to be a generic facility for accessing external libraries; only those already known by Emacs can be loaded through it.
This variable is ignored if the given library is statically linked into Emacs.
Like any application, Emacs can be run in a secure environment, where the operating system enforces rules about access and the like. With some care, Emacs-based applications can also be part of a security perimeter that checks such rules. Although the default settings for Emacs work well for a typical software development environment, they may require adjustment in environments containing untrusted users that may include attackers. Here is a compendium of security issues that may be helpful if you are developing such applications. It is by no means complete; it is intended to give you an idea of the security issues involved, rather than to be a security checklist.
A file that Emacs visits can contain variable settings that affect
the buffer visiting that file; See File Local Variables.
Similarly, a directory can specify local variable values common to all
files in that directory; see Directory Local Variables. Although
Emacs takes some effort to protect against misuse of these variables,
a security hole can be created merely by a package setting
safe-local-variable
too optimistically, a problem that is all
too common. To disable this feature for both files and directories,
set enable-local-variables
to nil
.
Although Emacs normally respects access permissions of the underlying operating system, in some cases it handles accesses specially. For example, file names can have handlers that treat the files specially, with their own access checking. See Making Certain File Names “Magic”. Also, a buffer can be read-only even if the corresponding file is writable, and vice versa, which can result in messages such as ‘File passwd is write-protected; try to save anyway? (yes or no)’. See Read-Only Buffers.
Emacs has several functions that deal with passwords, e.g.,
read-passwd
. See Reading a Password.
Although these functions do not attempt to
broadcast passwords to the world, their implementations are not proof
against determined attackers with access to Emacs internals. For
example, even if Elisp code uses clear-string
to scrub a password from
its memory after using it, remnants of the password may still reside
in the garbage-collected free list. See Modifying Strings.
Emacs can send commands to many other applications, and applications
should take care that strings sent as operands of these commands are
not misinterpreted as directives. For example, when using a shell
command to rename a file a to b, do not simply use the
string mv a b
, because either file name might start
with ‘-’, or might contain shell metacharacters like ‘;’.
Although functions like shell-quote-argument
can help avoid
this sort of problem, they are not panaceas; for example, on a POSIX
platform shell-quote-argument
quotes shell metacharacters but
not leading ‘-’. On MS-Windows, quoting for ‘%’ assumes
none of the environment variables have ‘^’ in their name.
See Shell Arguments. Typically it is safer
to use call-process
than a subshell. See Creating a Synchronous Process. And it is safer yet to use builtin Emacs functions; for
example, use (rename-file "a" "b" t)
instead of
invoking mv
. See Changing File Names and Attributes.
Emacs attempts to infer the coding systems of the files and network connections it accesses. See Coding Systems. If Emacs infers incorrectly, or if the other parties to the network connection disagree with Emacs’s inferences, the resulting system could be unreliable. Also, even when it infers correctly, Emacs often can use bytes that other programs cannot. For example, although to Emacs the null byte is just a character like any other, many other applications treat it as a string terminator and mishandle strings or files containing null bytes.
POSIX specifies several environment variables that can affect how
Emacs behaves. Any environment variable whose name consists entirely
of uppercase ASCII letters, digits, and the underscore may affect the
internal behavior of Emacs. Emacs uses several such variables, e.g.,
EMACSLOADPATH
. See Library Search. On some platforms some
environment variables (e.g., PATH
, POSIXLY_CORRECT
,
SHELL
, TMPDIR
) need to have properly-configured values in
order to get standard behavior for any utility Emacs might invoke.
Even seemingly-benign variables like TZ
may have security
implications. See Operating System Environment.
Emacs has customization and other variables with similar
considerations. For example, if the variable shell-file-name
specifies a shell with nonstandard behavior, an Emacs-based
application may misbehave.
When Emacs is installed, if the installation directory hierarchy can be modified by untrusted users, the application cannot be trusted. This applies also to the directory hierarchies of the programs that Emacs uses, and of the files that Emacs reads and writes.
Emacs often accesses the network, and you may want to configure it to
avoid network accesses that it would normally do. For example, unless
you set tramp-mode
to nil
, file names using a certain
syntax are interpreted as being network files, and are retrieved
across the network. See The Tramp Manual in The Tramp
Manual.
Emacs applications have the same sort of race-condition issues that
other applications do. For example, even when
(file-readable-p "foo.txt")
returns t
, it could be that
foo.txt is unreadable because some other program changed the
file’s permissions between the call to file-readable-p
and now.
See Testing Accessibility.
When Emacs exhausts memory or other operating system resources, its behavior can be less reliable, in that computations that ordinarily run to completion may abort back to the top level. This may cause Emacs to neglect operations that it normally would have done.
Emacs provides a standard way to distribute Emacs Lisp code to users. A package is a collection of one or more files, formatted and bundled in such a way that users can easily download, install, uninstall, and upgrade it.
The following sections describe how to create a package, and how to put it in a package archive for others to download. See Packages in The GNU Emacs Manual, for a description of user-level features of the packaging system.
These sections are mostly directed towards package archive maintainers—much of this information is not relevant for package authors (i.e., people who write code that will be distributed via these archives).
A package is either a simple package or a multi-file package. A simple package is stored in a package archive as a single Emacs Lisp file, while a multi-file package is stored as a tar file (containing multiple Lisp files, and possibly non-Lisp files such as a manual).
In ordinary usage, the difference between simple packages and multi-file packages is relatively unimportant; the Package Menu interface makes no distinction between them. However, the procedure for creating them differs, as explained in the following sections.
Each package (whether simple or multi-file) has certain attributes:
A short word (e.g., ‘auctex’). This is usually also the symbol prefix used in the program (see Emacs Lisp Coding Conventions).
A version number, in a form that the function version-to-list
understands (e.g., ‘11.86’). Each release of a package should be
accompanied by an increase in the version number so that it will be
recognized as an upgrade by users querying the package archive.
This is shown when the package is listed in the Package Menu. It should occupy a single line, ideally in 36 characters or less.
This is shown in the buffer created by C-h P
(describe-package
), following the package’s brief description
and installation status. It normally spans multiple lines, and should
fully describe the package’s capabilities and how to begin using it
once it is installed.
A list of other packages (possibly including minimal acceptable version numbers) on which this package depends. The list may be empty, meaning this package has no dependencies. Otherwise, installing this package also automatically installs its dependencies, recursively; if any dependency cannot be found, the package cannot be installed.
Installing a package, either via the command package-install-file
,
or via the Package Menu, creates a subdirectory of
package-user-dir
named name-version, where
name is the package’s name and version its version
(e.g., ~/.emacs.d/elpa/auctex-11.86/). We call this the
package’s content directory. It is where Emacs puts the
package’s contents (the single Lisp file for a simple package, or the
files extracted from a multi-file package).
Emacs then searches every Lisp file in the content directory for
autoload magic comments (see Autoload). These autoload
definitions are saved to a file named name-autoloads.el
in the content directory. They are typically used to autoload the
principal user commands defined in the package, but they can also
perform other tasks, such as adding an element to
auto-mode-alist
(see How Emacs Chooses a Major Mode). Note that a package
typically does not autoload every function and variable defined
within it—only the handful of commands typically called to begin
using the package. Emacs then byte-compiles every Lisp file in the
package.
After installation, the installed package is loaded: Emacs
adds the package’s content directory to load-path
, and
evaluates the autoload definitions in name-autoloads.el.
Whenever Emacs starts up, it automatically calls the function
package-activate-all
to make installed packages available to the
current session. This is done after loading the early init file, but
before loading the regular init file (see Summary: Sequence of Actions at Startup).
Packages are not automatically made available if the user option
package-enable-at-startup
is set to nil
in the early
init file.
This function makes the packages available to the current session.
The user option package-load-list
specifies which packages to
make available; by default, all installed packages are made available.
See Package Installation in The GNU Emacs Manual.
In most cases, you should not need to call package-activate-all
,
as this is done automatically during startup. Simply make sure to put
any code that should run before package-activate-all
in the early
init file, and any code that should run after it in the primary init
file (see Init File in The GNU Emacs Manual).
This function initializes Emacs’ internal record of which packages are
installed, and then calls package-activate-all
.
The optional argument no-activate, if non-nil
, causes
Emacs to update its record of installed packages without actually
making them available.
A simple package consists of a single Emacs Lisp source file. The file must conform to the Emacs Lisp library header conventions (see Conventional Headers for Emacs Libraries). The package’s attributes are taken from the various headers, as illustrated by the following example:
;;; superfrobnicator.el --- Frobnicate and bifurcate flanges -*- lexical-binding:t -*- ;; Copyright (C) 2022 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
;; Author: J. R. Hacker <jrh@example.com> ;; Version: 1.3 ;; Package-Requires: ((flange "1.0")) ;; Keywords: multimedia, hypermedia ;; URL: https://example.com/jrhacker/superfrobnicate ... ;;; Commentary: ;; This package provides a minor mode to frobnicate and/or ;; bifurcate any flanges you desire. To activate it, just type ... ;;;###autoload (define-minor-mode superfrobnicator-mode ...
The name of the package is the same as the base name of the file, as written on the first line. Here, it is ‘superfrobnicator’.
The brief description is also taken from the first line. Here, it is ‘Frobnicate and bifurcate flanges’.
The version number comes from the ‘Package-Version’ header, if it exists, or from the ‘Version’ header otherwise. One or the other must be present. Here, the version number is 1.3.
If the file has a ‘;;; Commentary:’ section, this section is used as the long description. (When displaying the description, Emacs omits the ‘;;; Commentary:’ line, as well as the leading comment characters in the commentary itself.)
If the file has a ‘Package-Requires’ header, that is used as the package dependencies. In the above example, the package depends on the ‘flange’ package, version 1.0 or higher. See Conventional Headers for Emacs Libraries, for a description of the ‘Package-Requires’ header. If the header is omitted, the package has no dependencies.
The ‘Keywords’ and ‘URL’ headers are optional, but recommended.
The command describe-package
uses these to add links to its
output. The ‘Keywords’ header should contain at least one
standard keyword from the finder-known-keywords
list.
The file ought to also contain one or more autoload magic comments,
as explained in Packaging Basics. In the above example, a magic
comment autoloads superfrobnicator-mode
.
See Creating and Maintaining Package Archives, for an explanation of how to add a single-file package to a package archive.
A multi-file package is less convenient to create than a single-file package, but it offers more features: it can include multiple Emacs Lisp files, an Info manual, and other file types (such as images).
Prior to installation, a multi-file package is stored in a package archive as a tar file. The tar file must be named name-version.tar, where name is the package name and version is the version number. Its contents, once extracted, must all appear in a directory named name-version, the content directory (see Packaging Basics). Files may also extract into subdirectories of the content directory.
One of the files in the content directory must be named
name-pkg.el. It must contain a single Lisp form,
consisting of a call to the function define-package
, described
below. This defines the package’s attributes: version, brief
description, and requirements.
For example, if we distribute version 1.3 of the superfrobnicator as a multi-file package, the tar file would be superfrobnicator-1.3.tar. Its contents would extract into the directory superfrobnicator-1.3, and one of these would be the file superfrobnicator-pkg.el.
This function defines a package. name is the package name, a
string. version is the version, as a string of a form that can
be understood by the function version-to-list
. docstring
is the brief description.
requirements is a list of required packages and their versions.
Each element in this list should have the form (dep-name
dep-version)
, where dep-name is a symbol whose name is
the dependency’s package name, and dep-version is the
dependency’s version (a string).
If the content directory contains a file named README, this file is used as the long description (overriding any ‘;;; Commentary:’ section).
If the content directory contains a file named dir, this is
assumed to be an Info directory file made with install-info
.
See Invoking
install-info in Texinfo. The relevant Info files should also
be present in the content directory. In this case, Emacs will
automatically add the content directory to Info-directory-list
when the package is activated.
Do not include any .elc files in the package. Those are created when the package is installed. Note that there is no way to control the order in which files are byte-compiled.
Do not include any file named name-autoloads.el. This file is reserved for the package’s autoload definitions (see Packaging Basics). It is created automatically when the package is installed, by searching all the Lisp files in the package for autoload magic comments.
If the multi-file package contains auxiliary data files (such as
images), the package’s Lisp code can refer to these files via the
variable load-file-name
(see Loading). Here is an example:
(defconst superfrobnicator-base (file-name-directory load-file-name)) (defun superfrobnicator-fetch-image (file) (expand-file-name file superfrobnicator-base))
If your package contains files that you don’t wish to distribute to
users (e.g. regression tests), you can add them to an
.elpaignore file. In this file, each line lists a file or a
wildcard matching files; those files should be ignored when producing
your package’s tarball on ELPA (see Creating and Maintaining Package Archives). (ELPA
will pass this file to the tar
command via the -X
command-line option, when it prepares the package for download.)
Via the Package Menu, users may download packages from package
archives. Such archives are specified by the variable
package-archives
, whose default value lists the archives
hosted on GNU ELPA and
non-GNU ELPA. This section describes
how to set up and maintain a package archive.
The value of this variable is an alist of package archives recognized by the Emacs package manager.
Each alist element corresponds to one archive, and should have the
form (id . location)
, where id is the name of
the archive (a string) and location is its base location
(a string).
If the base location starts with ‘http:’ or ‘https:’, it is treated as an HTTP(S) URL, and packages are downloaded from this archive via HTTP(S) (as is the case for the default GNU archive).
Otherwise, the base location should be a directory name. In this case, Emacs retrieves packages from this archive via ordinary file access. Such local archives are mainly useful for testing.
A package archive is simply a directory in which the package files, and associated files, are stored. If you want the archive to be reachable via HTTP, this directory must be accessible to a web server; See Interfacing to an archive web server.
A convenient way to set up and update a package archive is via the
package-x
library. This is included with Emacs, but not loaded
by default; type M-x load-library RET package-x RET to
load it, or add (require 'package-x)
to your init file.
See Lisp Libraries in The GNU Emacs Manual.
After you create an archive, remember that it is not accessible in the
Package Menu interface unless it is in package-archives
.
Maintaining a public package archive entails a degree of responsibility. When Emacs users install packages from your archive, those packages can cause Emacs to run arbitrary code with the permissions of the installing user. (This is true for Emacs code in general, not just for packages.) So you should ensure that your archive is well-maintained and keep the hosting system secure.
One way to increase the security of your packages is to sign them using a cryptographic key. If you have generated a private/public gpg key pair, you can use gpg to sign the package like this:
gpg -ba -o file.sig file
For a single-file package, file is the package Lisp file; for a multi-file package, it is the package tar file. You can also sign the archive’s contents file in the same way. Make the .sig files available in the same location as the packages. You should also make your public key available for people to download; e.g., by uploading it to a key server such as https://pgp.mit.edu/. When people install packages from your archive, they can use your public key to verify the signatures.
A full explanation of these matters is outside the scope of this manual. For more information on cryptographic keys and signing, see GnuPG in The GNU Privacy Guard Manual. Emacs comes with an interface to GNU Privacy Guard, see EasyPG in Emacs EasyPG Assistant Manual.
A web server providing access to a package archive must support the following queries:
Return a lisp form describing the archive contents. The form is a list of ’package-desc’ structures (see package.el), except the first element of the list is the archive version.
Return the long description of the package.
Return the signature for the file.
Return the file. This will be the tarball for a multi-file package, or the single file for a simple package.
For those users who live backwards in time, here is information about downgrading to Emacs version 28.2. We hope you will enjoy the greater simplicity that results from the absence of many Emacs 29.4 features.
substitute-command-keys
. One
prominent example is format-prompt
and all its many callers.
This makes the strings they produce much more predictable, returning
to you, the Lisp programmer, control on which punctuation characters
will appear in the text presented to the users. For similar reasons,
the substitute-quotes
function was deleted.
buffer-modified-p
function again reliably returns
either nil
or t
, not any other confusing values.
compiled-function-p
. Lisp programs
are expected to test explicitly for the relevant types of function
objects: built-in, byte-compiled, and natively-compiled. For the same
reasons we deleted the functions pos-bol
, pos-eol
,
file-attribute-file-identifier
, and quite a few others. We
don’t expect anyone to miss those fancy functions.
x-show-tip
can no longer be specified by
Lisp programs; it is hard-coded in the function. This will lead to a
simpler, easier maintained code, and no one should want to control the
timeout after which the tip pops down.
setopt
was deleted; use customize-variable
instead, or invoke the :set
function from Lisp.
lisp-directory
variable, as the value can be
easily deduced from other similar variables, like
installation-directory
and source-directory
, each one
when it’s relevant.
get-display-property
and add-display-text-property
; use
the generic get-text-property
and put-text-property
instead.
keymap-set
, keymap-global-set
,
keymap-local-set
, keymap-substitute
,
keymap-lookup
, and some others were deleted. We have found the
traditional define-key
, global-set-key
,
local-set-key
, substitute-key-definition
, and
key-binding
more than enough, and their minor inconsistencies
in the syntax of keys they accept a source of endless fun in Emacs
Lisp programming. Why make Emacs programming a dull place? For the
same reasons we deleted key-valid-p
, since we consider the
permissive nature of kbd
more in the spirit of Emacs Lisp.
string-pixel-width
and
string-glyph-split
, as we consider it inappropriate for Lisp
programs to do display layout calculations, where these functions come
in handy. Display is for the display engine, written in C, and should
stay there!
xwidget-perform-lispy-event
, xwidget-webkit-load-html
,
and xwidget-webkit-back-forward-list
, were deleted as part of
our continuing effort to gradually delete the entire Xwidget
functionality in some previous release of Emacs.
:stderr
property of a process in a
make-process
call once again forces the process’s connection to
use pipes, not ptys, for all the standard streams — a considerable
simplification of this complex interface.
string-equal-ignore-case
. Use compare-strings
instead.
Several features that complicated the byte compiler have been removed:
defcustom
types, like
double-quoting symbols in choice
lists.
with-buffer-unmodified-if-unchanged
was deleted.
Lisp programs that need to leave the buffer unmodified in these cases
can always compare the text before and after the modifications.
string-edit
and read-string-from-buffer
were removed, as we consider the fun of programming them anew every
time an important part of the education of each Emacs Lisp developer.
readablep
and the related variable
print-unreadable-function
, since no one is supposed to want to
print unreadable Lisp objects.
multisession-value
,
define-multisession-variable
, and
list-multisession-values
.
cursor-face
text property was dropped. We
consider the rest of the faces adequate for supporting this
functionality.
tooltip-show
dropped support for optional face
arguments text-face
and default-face
that allow fancy
control of the face of the tip text and top frame colors. We decided
that tooltips should all look the same, to prevent user confusion.
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. https://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See https://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. https://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program—to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name of author This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see https://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
program Copyright (C) year name of author This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see https://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read https://www.gnu.org/licenses/why-not-lgpl.html.
This chapter describes no additional features of Emacs Lisp. Instead it gives advice on making effective use of the features described in the previous chapters, and describes conventions Emacs Lisp programmers should follow.
You can automatically check some of the conventions described below
by running the command M-x checkdoc RET when visiting a
Lisp file. It cannot check all of the conventions, and not all the
warnings it gives necessarily correspond to problems, but it is worth
examining them all. Alternatively, use the command M-x
checkdoc-current-buffer RET to check the conventions in the
current buffer, or checkdoc-file
when you want to check a file
in batch mode, e.g., with a command run by M-x compile RET.
Here are conventions that you should follow when writing Emacs Lisp code intended for widespread use:
This convention is mandatory for any file that includes custom definitions. If fixing such a file to follow this convention requires an incompatible change, go ahead and make the incompatible change; don’t postpone it.
Occasionally, for a command name intended for users to use, it is more convenient if some words come before the package’s name prefix. For example, it is our convention to have commands that list objects named as ‘list-something’, e.g., a package called ‘frob’ could have a command ‘list-frobs’, when its other global symbols begin with ‘frob-’. Also, constructs that define functions, variables, etc., work better if they start with ‘define-’, so put the name prefix later on in the name.
This recommendation applies even to names for traditional Lisp
primitives that are not primitives in Emacs Lisp—such as
copy-list
. Believe it or not, there is more than one plausible
way to define copy-list
. Play it safe; append your name prefix
to produce a name like foo-copy-list
or mylib-copy-list
instead.
If you write a function that you think ought to be added to Emacs under
a certain name, such as twiddle-files
, don’t call it by that name
in your program. Call it mylib-twiddle-files
in your program,
and send mail to ‘bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org’ suggesting we add
it to Emacs. If and when we do, we can change the name easily enough.
If one prefix is insufficient, your package can use two or three alternative common prefixes, so long as they make sense.
lexical-binding
in new code, and
converting existing Emacs Lisp code to enable lexical-binding
if it doesn’t already. See Using Lexical Binding.
provide
at the end of each separate Lisp file.
See Features.
require
to make sure they are loaded.
See Features.
(eval-when-compile (require 'bar))
This tells Emacs to load bar just before byte-compiling
foo, so that the macro definition is available during
compilation. Using eval-when-compile
avoids loading bar
when the compiled version of foo is used. It should be
called before the first use of the macro in the file. See Macros and Byte Compilation.
require
that library at the top-level and be done
with it. But if your file contains several independent features, and
only one or two require the extra library, then consider putting
require
statements inside the relevant functions rather than at
the top-level. Or use autoload
statements to load the extra
library when needed. This way people who don’t use those aspects of
your file do not need to load the extra library.
cl-lib
library
rather than the old cl
library. The latter library is
deprecated and will be removed in a future version of Emacs.
framep
and frame-live-p
. We recommend to
avoid using this -p
suffix in boolean variable names, unless
the variable is bound to a predicate function; instead, use a
-flag
suffix or names like is-foo
.
unload-feature
will undo the changes usually done by
loading a feature (like adding functions to hooks). However, if
loading feature does something unusual and more complex, you can
define a function named feature-unload-function
, and make
it undo any such special changes. unload-feature
will then
automatically run this function if it exists. See Unloading.
(defalias 'gnus-point-at-bol (if (fboundp 'point-at-bol) 'point-at-bol 'line-beginning-position))
eval-after-load
and with-eval-after-load
in
libraries and packages (see Hooks for Loading). This feature is
meant for personal customizations; using it in a Lisp program is
unclean, because it modifies the behavior of another Lisp file in a
way that’s not visible in that file. This is an obstacle for
debugging, much like advising a function in the other package.
path
in its name, preferring file
,
file-name
, or directory
instead, since Emacs follows the
GNU convention to use the term path only for search paths,
which are lists of directory names.
follow-link
condition, so that the link obeys mouse-1-click-follows-link
.
See Defining Clickable Text. See Buttons, for an easy method of
implementing such clickable links.
Changing all the Emacs major modes to respect this convention was a lot of work; abandoning this convention would make that work go to waste, and inconvenience users. Please comply with it.
The reason for this rule is that a non-prefix binding for ESC in any context prevents recognition of escape sequences as function keys in that context.
For a state that accepts ordinary Emacs commands, or more generally any kind of state in which ESC followed by a function key or arrow key is potentially meaningful, then you must not define ESC ESC, since that would preclude recognizing an escape sequence after ESC. In these states, you should define ESC ESC ESC as the way to escape. Otherwise, define ESC ESC instead.
Following these conventions will make your program fit better into Emacs when it runs.
next-line
or previous-line
in programs; nearly
always, forward-line
is more convenient as well as more
predictable and robust. See Motion by Text Lines.
In particular, don’t use any of these functions:
beginning-of-buffer
, end-of-buffer
replace-string
, replace-regexp
insert-file
, insert-buffer
If you just want to move point, or replace a certain string, or insert a file or buffer’s contents, without any of the other features intended for interactive users, you can replace these functions with one or two lines of simple Lisp code.
Vectors are advantageous for tables that are substantial in size and are accessed in random order (not searched front to back), provided there is no need to insert or delete elements (only lists allow that).
message
function, not princ
. See The Echo Area.
error
(or signal
). The function error
does not return.
See How to Signal an Error.
Don’t use message
, throw
, sleep-for
, or
beep
to report errors.
It is occasionally useful to tell the user where an error originated,
even if debug-on-error
is nil
. In such cases, a
lower-case Lisp symbol can be prepended to the error message. For
example, the error message “Invalid input” could be extended to say
“some-function: Invalid input”.
yes-or-no-p
or
y-or-n-p
should start with a capital letter and end with
‘?’.
Enter the answer (default 42):
interactive
, if you use a Lisp expression to produce a list
of arguments, don’t try to provide the correct default values for
region or position arguments. Instead, provide nil
for those
arguments if they were not specified, and have the function body
compute the default value when the argument is nil
. For
instance, write this:
(defun foo (pos) (interactive (list (if specified specified-pos))) (unless pos (setq pos default-pos)) ...)
rather than this:
(defun foo (pos) (interactive (list (if specified specified-pos default-pos))) ...)
This is so that repetition of the command will recompute these defaults based on the current circumstances.
You do not need to take such precautions when you use interactive specs ‘d’, ‘m’ and ‘r’, because they make special arrangements to recompute the argument values on repetition of the command.
Here are ways of improving the execution speed of byte-compiled Lisp programs.
memq
, member
,
assq
, or assoc
is even faster than explicit iteration. It
can be worth rearranging a data structure so that one of these primitive
search functions can be used.
byte-compile
property. If the property is non-nil
, then the function is
handled specially.
For example, the following input will show you that aref
is
compiled specially (see Functions that Operate on Arrays):
(get 'aref 'byte-compile) ⇒ byte-compile-two-args
Note that in this case (and many others), you must first load the
bytecomp library, which defines the byte-compile
property.
defvar
definitions for these variables, like this:
(defvar foo)
Such a definition has no effect except to tell the compiler
not to warn about uses of the variable foo
in this file.
declare-function
statement (see Telling the Compiler that a Function is Defined).
require
(see require) for
that package to avoid compilation warnings for them, like this:
(require 'foo)
If you need only macros from some file, you can require it only at compile time (see Evaluation During Compilation). For instance,
(eval-when-compile (require 'foo))
with-no-warnings
. See Compiler Errors.
Here are some tips and conventions for the writing of documentation strings. You can check many of these conventions by running the command M-x checkdoc-minor-mode.
apropos
.
You can fill the text if that looks good. Emacs Lisp mode fills
documentation strings to the width specified by
emacs-lisp-docstring-fill-column
. However, you can sometimes
make a documentation string much more readable by adjusting its line
breaks with care. Use blank lines between sections if the
documentation string is long.
For a function, the first line should briefly answer the question, “What does this function do?” For a variable, the first line should briefly answer the question, “What does this value mean?” Prefer to answer these questions in a way that will make sense to users and callers of the function or the variable. In particular, do not tell what the function does by enumerating the actions of its code; instead, describe the role of these actions and the function’s contract.
Don’t limit the documentation string to one line; use as many lines as you need to explain the details of how to use the function or variable. Please use complete sentences for the rest of the text too.
eval
refers to its first argument as ‘FORM’, because the
actual argument name is form
:
Evaluate FORM and return its value.
Also write metasyntactic variables in capital letters, such as when you show the decomposition of a list or vector into subunits, some of which may vary. ‘KEY’ and ‘VALUE’ in the following example illustrate this practice:
The argument TABLE should be an alist whose elements have the form (KEY . VALUE). Here, KEY is ...
foo
, write “foo”, not
“Foo” (which is a different symbol).
This might appear to contradict the policy of writing function argument values, but there is no real contradiction; the argument value is not the same thing as the symbol that the function uses to hold the value.
If this puts a lower-case letter at the beginning of a sentence and that annoys you, rewrite the sentence so that the symbol is not at the start of it.
t
and nil
without surrounding
punctuation. For example:
CODE can be `lambda', nil, or t.
Note that when Emacs displays these doc strings, Emacs will usually display ‘`’ (grave accent) as ‘‘’ (left single quotation mark) and ‘'’ (apostrophe) as ‘’’ (right single quotation mark), if the display supports displaying these characters. See Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation. (Some previous versions of this section recommended using the non-ASCII single quotation marks directly in doc strings, but this is now discouraged, since that leads to broken help string displays on terminals that don’t support displaying those characters.)
Help mode automatically creates a hyperlink when a documentation string uses a single-quoted symbol name, if the symbol has either a function or a variable definition. You do not need to do anything special to make use of this feature. However, when a symbol has both a function definition and a variable definition, and you want to refer to just one of them, you can specify which one by writing one of the words ‘variable’, ‘option’, ‘function’, or ‘command’, immediately before the symbol name. (Case makes no difference in recognizing these indicator words.) For example, if you write
This function sets the variable `buffer-file-name'.
then the hyperlink will refer only to the variable documentation of
buffer-file-name
, and not to its function documentation.
If a symbol has a function definition and/or a variable definition, but those are irrelevant to the use of the symbol that you are documenting, you can write the words ‘symbol’ or ‘program’ before the symbol name to prevent making any hyperlink. For example,
If the argument KIND-OF-RESULT is the symbol `list', this function returns a list of all the objects that satisfy the criterion.
does not make a hyperlink to the documentation, irrelevant here, of the
function list
.
Normally, no hyperlink is made for a variable without variable documentation. You can force a hyperlink for such variables by preceding them with one of the words ‘variable’ or ‘option’.
Hyperlinks for faces are only made if the face name is preceded or followed by the word ‘face’. In that case, only the face documentation will be shown, even if the symbol is also defined as a variable or as a function.
To make a hyperlink to Info documentation, write the single-quoted name of the Info node (or anchor), preceded by ‘info node’, ‘Info node’, ‘info anchor’ or ‘Info anchor’. The Info file name defaults to ‘emacs’. For example,
See Info node `Font Lock' and Info node `(elisp)Font Lock Basics'.
To make a hyperlink to a man page, write the single-quoted name of the man page, preceded by ‘Man page’, ‘man page’, or ‘man page for’. For example,
See the man page `chmod(1)' for details.
The Info documentation is always preferable to man pages, so be sure
to link to an Info manual where available. For example,
chmod
is documented in the GNU Coreutils manual, so it is
better to link to that instead of the man page.
To link to a customization group, write the single-quoted name of the group, preceded by ‘customization group’ (the first character in each word is case-insensitive). For example,
See the customization group `whitespace' for details.
Finally, to create a hyperlink to URLs, write the single-quoted URL, preceded by ‘URL’. For example,
The GNU project website has more information (see URL `https://www.gnu.org/').
forward-char
.
(This is normally ‘C-f’, but it may be some other character if the
user has moved key bindings.) See Substituting Key Bindings in Documentation.
Each use of ‘\\[…]’ slows the display of the documentation string by a tiny amount. If you use a lot of them, these tiny slowdowns will add up, and might become tangible, especially on slow systems. So our recommendation is not to over-use them; e.g., try to avoid using more than one reference to the same command in the same doc string.
dired-find-file
is:
In Dired, visit the file or directory named on this line.
defcustom
. See Defining Global Variables.
nil
values are equivalent and indicate explicitly what
nil
and non-nil
mean.
The argument FOO can be either a number \(a buffer position) or a string (a file name).
This avoids a bug in Emacs versions older than 27.1, where the ‘(’ was treated as the start of a defun (see Defuns in The GNU Emacs Manual). If you do not anticipate anyone editing your code with older Emacs versions, there is no need for this work-around.
We recommend these conventions for comments:
Comments that start with a single semicolon, ‘;’, should all be aligned to the same column on the right of the source code. Such comments usually explain how the code on that line does its job. For example:
(setq base-version-list ; There was a base (assoc (substring fn 0 start-vn) ; version to which file-version-assoc-list)) ; this looks like ; a subversion.
Comments that start with two semicolons, ‘;;’, should be aligned to the same level of indentation as the code. Such comments usually describe the purpose of the following lines or the state of the program at that point. For example:
(prog1 (setq auto-fill-function ... ... ;; Update mode line. (force-mode-line-update)))
We also normally use two semicolons for comments outside functions.
;; This Lisp code is run in Emacs when it is to operate as ;; a server for other processes.
If a function has no documentation string, it should instead have a two-semicolon comment right before the function, explaining what the function does and how to call it properly. Explain precisely what each argument means and how the function interprets its possible values. It is much better to convert such comments to documentation strings, though.
Comments that start with three (or more) semicolons, ‘;;;’, should start at the left margin. We use them for comments that should be considered a heading by Outline minor mode. By default, comments starting with at least three semicolons (followed by a single space and a non-whitespace character) are considered section headings, comments starting with two or fewer are not.
(Historically, triple-semicolon comments have also been used for commenting out lines within a function, but this use is discouraged in favor of using just two semicolons. This also applies when commenting out entire functions; when doing that use two semicolons as well.)
Three semicolons are used for top-level sections, four for sub-sections, five for sub-sub-sections and so on.
Typically libraries have at least four top-level sections. For example when the bodies of all of these sections are hidden:
;;; backquote.el --- implement the ` Lisp construct... ;;; Commentary:... ;;; Code:... ;;; backquote.el ends here
(In a sense the last line is not a section heading as it must never be followed by any text; after all it marks the end of the file.)
For longer libraries it is advisable to split the code into multiple sections. This can be done by splitting the ‘Code:’ section into multiple sub-sections. Even though that was the only recommended approach for a long time, many people have chosen to use multiple top-level code sections instead. You may chose either style.
Using multiple top-level code sections has the advantage that it avoids introducing an additional nesting level but it also means that the section named ‘Code’ does not contain all the code, which is awkward. To avoid that, you should put no code at all inside that section; that way it can be considered a separator instead of a section heading.
Finally, we recommend that you don’t end headings with a colon or any other punctuation for that matter. For historic reasons the ‘Code:’ and ‘Commentary:’ headings end with a colon, but we recommend that you don’t do the same for other headings anyway.
Generally speaking, the M-; (comment-dwim
) command
automatically starts a comment of the appropriate type; or indents an
existing comment to the right place, depending on the number of
semicolons.
See Manipulating Comments in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Emacs has conventions for using special comments in Lisp libraries to divide them into sections and give information such as who wrote them. Using a standard format for these items makes it easier for tools (and people) to extract the relevant information. This section explains these conventions, starting with an example:
;;; foo.el --- Support for the Foo programming language -*- lexical-binding: t; -*- ;; Copyright (C) 2010-2021 Your Name
;; Author: Your Name <yourname@example.com> ;; Maintainer: Someone Else <someone@example.com> ;; Created: 14 Jul 2010
;; Keywords: languages ;; URL: https://example.com/foo ;; This file is not part of GNU Emacs. ;; This file is free software... ... ;; along with this file. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
The very first line should have this format:
;;; filename --- description -*- lexical-binding: t; -*-
The description should be contained in one line. If the file needs to
set more variables in the ‘-*-’ specification, add it after
lexical-binding
. If this would make the first line too long, use
a Local Variables section at the end of the file.
The copyright notice usually lists your name (if you wrote the file). If you have an employer who claims copyright on your work, you might need to list them instead. Do not say that the copyright holder is the Free Software Foundation (or that the file is part of GNU Emacs) unless your file has been accepted into the Emacs distribution. For more information on the form of copyright and license notices, see the guide on the GNU website.
After the copyright notice come several header comment lines, each beginning with ‘;; header-name:’. Here is a table of the conventional possibilities for header-name:
This header states the name and email address of at least the principal
author of the library. If there are multiple authors, list them on
continuation lines led by ;;
and a tab or at least two spaces.
We recommend including a contact email address, of the form
‘<…>’. For example:
;; Author: Your Name <yourname@example.com> ;; Someone Else <someone@example.com> ;; Another Person <another@example.com>
This header has the same format as the Author header. It lists the person(s) who currently maintain(s) the file (respond to bug reports, etc.).
If there is no Maintainer header, the person(s) in the Author header is/are presumed to be the maintainer(s). Some files in Emacs use ‘emacs-devel@gnu.org’ for the maintainer, which means the author is no longer responsible for the file, and that it is maintained as part of Emacs.
This optional line gives the original creation date of the file, and is for historical interest only.
If you wish to record version numbers for the individual Lisp program, put them in this line. Lisp files distributed with Emacs generally do not have a ‘Version’ header, since the version number of Emacs itself serves the same purpose. If you are distributing a collection of multiple files, we recommend not writing the version in every file, but only the main one.
This line lists keywords for the finder-by-keyword
help command.
Please use that command to see a list of the meaningful keywords. The
command M-x checkdoc-package-keywords RET will find and display
any keywords that are not in finder-known-keywords
. If you set
the variable checkdoc-package-keywords-flag
non-nil
,
checkdoc commands will include the keyword verification in its checks.
This field is how people will find your package when they’re looking for things by topic. To separate the keywords, you can use spaces, commas, or both.
The name of this field is unfortunate, since people often assume it is the place to write arbitrary keywords that describe their package, rather than just the relevant Finder keywords.
These lines state the website of the library.
If ‘Version’ is not suitable for use by the package manager, then
a package can define ‘Package-Version’; it will be used instead.
This is handy if ‘Version’ is an RCS id or something else that
cannot be parsed by version-to-list
. See Packaging Basics.
If this exists, it names packages on which the current package depends for proper operation. See Packaging Basics. This is used by the package manager both at download time (to ensure that a complete set of packages is downloaded) and at activation time (to ensure that a package is only activated if all its dependencies have been).
Its format is a list of lists on a single line. The car
of
each sub-list is the name of a package, as a symbol. The cadr
of each sub-list is the minimum acceptable version number, as a string
that can be parsed by version-to-list
. An entry that lacks a
version (i.e., an entry which is just a symbol, or a sub-list of one
element) is equivalent to entry with version "0". For instance:
;; Package-Requires: ((gnus "1.0") (bubbles "2.7.2") cl-lib (seq))
Packages that don’t need to support Emacs versions older than Emacs 27 can have the ‘Package-Requires’ header split across multiple lines, like this:
;; Package-Requires: ((emacs "27.1") ;; (compat "29.1.4.1"))
Note that with this format, you still need to start the list on the same line as ‘Package-Requires’.
The package code automatically defines a package named ‘emacs’ with the version number of the currently running Emacs. This can be used to require a minimal version of Emacs for a package.
Just about every Lisp library ought to have the ‘Author’ and ‘Keywords’ header comment lines. Use the others if they are appropriate. You can also put in header lines with other header names—they have no standard meanings, so they can’t do any harm.
We use additional stylized comments to subdivide the contents of the library file. These should be separated from anything else by blank lines. Here is a table of them:
This begins introductory comments that explain how the library works. It should come right after the copying permissions, terminated by a ‘Change Log’, ‘History’ or ‘Code’ comment line. This text is used by the Finder package, so it should make sense in that context.
This begins an optional log of changes to the file over time. Don’t put too much information in this section—it is better to keep the detailed logs in a version control system (as Emacs does) or in a separate ChangeLog file. ‘History’ is an alternative to ‘Change Log’.
This begins the actual code of the program.
This is the footer line; it appears at the very end of the file. Its purpose is to enable people to detect truncated versions of the file from the lack of a footer line.
This chapter describes how the runnable Emacs executable is dumped with the preloaded Lisp libraries in it, how storage is allocated, and some internal aspects of GNU Emacs that may be of interest to C programmers.
This section explains the steps involved in building the Emacs executable. You don’t have to know this material to build and install Emacs, since the makefiles do all these things automatically. This information is pertinent to Emacs developers.
Building Emacs requires GNU Make version 3.81 or later.
Compilation of the C source files in the src directory produces an executable file called temacs, also called a bare impure Emacs. It contains the Emacs Lisp interpreter and I/O routines, but not the editing commands.
The command temacs -l loadup
would run temacs
and direct it to load loadup.el. The loadup
library
loads additional Lisp libraries, which set up the normal Emacs editing
environment. After this step, the Emacs executable is no longer
bare.
Because it takes some time to load the standard Lisp files, the
temacs executable usually isn’t run directly by users.
Instead, one of the last steps of building Emacs runs the command
‘temacs -batch -l loadup --temacs=dump-method’. The
special option --temacs tells temacs
how to record
all the standard preloaded Lisp functions and variables, so that when
you subsequently run Emacs, it will start much faster. The
--temacs option requires an argument dump-method, which
can be one of the following:
Record the preloaded Lisp data in a dump file. This
method produces an additional data file which Emacs will load at
startup. The produced dump file is usually called emacs.pdmp,
and is installed in the Emacs exec-directory
(see Help Functions). This method is the most preferred one, as it does not
require Emacs to employ any special techniques of memory allocation,
which might get in the way of various memory-layout techniques used by
modern systems to enhance security and privacy.
Like ‘pdump’, but used while bootstrapping Emacs, when no previous Emacs binary and no *.elc byte-compiled Lisp files are available. The produced dump file is usually named bootstrap-emacs.pdmp in this case.
This method causes temacs
to dump out an executable program,
called emacs, which has all the standard Lisp files already
preloaded into it. (The ‘-batch’ argument prevents
temacs
from trying to initialize any of its data on the
terminal, so that the tables of terminal information are empty in the
dumped Emacs.) This method is also known as unexec, because it
produces a program file from a running process, and thus is in some
sense the opposite of executing a program to start a process.
Although this method was the way that Emacs traditionally saved its
state, it is now deprecated.
Like ‘dump’, but used when bootstrapping Emacs with the
unexec
method.
The dumped emacs executable (also called a pure Emacs)
is the one which is installed. If the portable dumper was used to
build Emacs, the emacs executable is actually an exact copy of
temacs, and the corresponding emacs.pdmp file is
installed as well. The variable preloaded-file-list
stores a
list of the preloaded Lisp files recorded in the dump file or
in the dumped Emacs executable. If you port Emacs to a new operating
system, and are not able to implement dumping of any kind, then Emacs
must load loadup.el each time it starts.
By default the dumped emacs executable records details such
as the build time and host name. Use the
--disable-build-details option of configure
to
suppress these details, so that building and installing Emacs twice
from the same sources is more likely to result in identical copies of
Emacs.
You can specify additional files to preload by writing a library named site-load.el that loads them. You may need to rebuild Emacs with an added definition
#define SITELOAD_PURESIZE_EXTRA n
to make n added bytes of pure space to hold the additional files; see src/puresize.h. (Try adding increments of 20000 until it is big enough.) However, the advantage of preloading additional files decreases as machines get faster. On modern machines, it is usually not advisable.
After loadup.el reads site-load.el, it finds the
documentation strings for primitive and preloaded functions (and
variables) in the file etc/DOC where they are stored, by
calling Snarf-documentation
(see Accessing Documentation).
You can specify other Lisp expressions to execute just before dumping by putting them in a library named site-init.el. This file is executed after the documentation strings are found.
If you want to preload function or variable definitions, there are three ways you can do this and make their documentation strings accessible when you subsequently run Emacs:
nil
value for byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings
as a local variable in each of these files, and load them with either
site-load.el or site-init.el. (This method has the
drawback that the documentation strings take up space in Emacs all the
time.)
It is not advisable to put anything in site-load.el or
site-init.el that would alter any of the features that users
expect in an ordinary unmodified Emacs. If you feel you must override
normal features for your site, do it with default.el, so that
users can override your changes if they wish. See Summary: Sequence of Actions at Startup.
Note that if either site-load.el or site-init.el changes
load-path
, the changes will be lost after dumping.
See Library Search. To make a permanent change to
load-path
, use the --enable-locallisppath option
of configure
.
In a package that can be preloaded, it is sometimes necessary (or
useful) to delay certain evaluations until Emacs subsequently starts
up. The vast majority of such cases relate to the values of
customizable variables. For example, tutorial-directory
is a
variable defined in startup.el, which is preloaded. The default
value is set based on data-directory
. The variable needs to
access the value of data-directory
when Emacs starts, not when
it is dumped, because the Emacs executable has probably been installed
in a different location since it was dumped.
This function delays the initialization of symbol to the next
Emacs start. You normally use this function by specifying it as the
:initialize
property of a customizable variable. (The argument
value is unused, and is provided only for compatibility with the
form Custom expects.)
In the unlikely event that you need a more general functionality than
custom-initialize-delay
provides, you can use
before-init-hook
(see Summary: Sequence of Actions at Startup).
This function dumps the current state of Emacs into a dump
file to-file, using the pdump
method. Normally, the
dump file is called emacs-name.dmp, where
emacs-name is the name of the Emacs executable file. The
optional argument track-referrers, if non-nil
, causes the
portable dumper to keep additional information to help track
down the provenance of object types that are not yet supported by the
pdump
method.
Although the portable dumper code can run on many platforms, the dump files that it produces are not portable—they can be loaded only by the Emacs executable that dumped them.
If you want to use this function in an Emacs that was already dumped, you must run Emacs with the ‘-batch’ option.
If you’re including ‘.el’ files in the dumped Emacs and that
‘.el’ file has code that is normally run at load time, that code
won’t be run when Emacs starts after dumping. To help work around
that problem, you can put functions on the
after-pdump-load-hook
hook. This hook is run when starting
Emacs.
This function dumps the current state of Emacs into an executable file
to-file, using the unexec
method. It takes symbols from
from-file (this is normally the executable file temacs).
This function cannot be used in an Emacs that was already dumped.
This function is deprecated, and by default Emacs is built without
unexec
support so this function is not available.
If the current Emacs session restored its state from a dump
file, this function returns information about the dump file and the
time it took to restore the Emacs state. The value is an alist
((dumped-with-pdumper . t) (load-time . time) (dump-file-name . file))
,
where file is the name of the dump file, and time is the
time in seconds it took to restore the state from the dump file.
If the current session was not restored from a dump file, the
value is nil
.
Emacs Lisp uses two kinds of storage for user-created Lisp objects: normal storage and pure storage. Normal storage is where all the new data created during an Emacs session are kept (see Garbage Collection). Pure storage is used for certain data in the preloaded standard Lisp files—data that should never change during actual use of Emacs.
Pure storage is allocated only while temacs
is loading the
standard preloaded Lisp libraries. In the file emacs, it is
marked as read-only (on operating systems that permit this), so that
the memory space can be shared by all the Emacs jobs running on the
machine at once. Pure storage is not expandable; a fixed amount is
allocated when Emacs is compiled, and if that is not sufficient for
the preloaded libraries, temacs allocates dynamic memory for
the part that didn’t fit. If Emacs will be dumped using the
pdump
method (see Building Emacs), the pure-space overflow
is of no special importance (it just means some of the preloaded stuff
cannot be shared with other Emacs jobs). However, if Emacs will be
dumped using the now obsolete unexec
method, the resulting
image will work, but garbage collection (see Garbage Collection)
is disabled in this situation, causing a memory leak. Such an
overflow normally won’t happen unless you try to preload additional
libraries or add features to the standard ones. Emacs will display a
warning about the overflow when it starts, if it was dumped using
unexec
. If this happens, you should increase the compilation
parameter SYSTEM_PURESIZE_EXTRA
in the file
src/puresize.h and rebuild Emacs.
This function makes a copy in pure storage of object, and returns it. It copies a string by simply making a new string with the same characters, but without text properties, in pure storage. It recursively copies the contents of vectors and cons cells. It does not make copies of other objects such as symbols, but just returns them unchanged. It signals an error if asked to copy markers.
This function is a no-op except while Emacs is being built and dumped; it is usually called only in preloaded Lisp files.
The value of this variable is the number of bytes of pure storage allocated so far. Typically, in a dumped Emacs, this number is very close to the total amount of pure storage available—if it were not, we would preallocate less.
This variable determines whether defun
should make a copy of the
function definition in pure storage. If it is non-nil
, then the
function definition is copied into pure storage.
This flag is t
while loading all of the basic functions for
building Emacs initially (allowing those functions to be shareable and
non-collectible). Dumping Emacs as an executable always writes
nil
in this variable, regardless of the value it actually has
before and after dumping.
You should not change this flag in a running Emacs.
When a program creates a list or the user defines a new function (such as by loading a library), that data is placed in normal storage. If normal storage runs low, then Emacs asks the operating system to allocate more memory. Different types of Lisp objects, such as symbols, cons cells, small vectors, markers, etc., are segregated in distinct blocks in memory. (Large vectors, long strings, buffers and certain other editing types, which are fairly large, are allocated in individual blocks, one per object; small strings are packed into blocks of 8k bytes, and small vectors are packed into blocks of 4k bytes).
Beyond the basic vector, a lot of objects like markers, overlays and
buffers are managed as if they were vectors. The corresponding C data
structures include the union vectorlike_header
field whose
size
member contains the subtype enumerated by enum pvec_type
and an information about how many Lisp_Object
fields this structure
contains and what the size of the rest data is. This information is
needed to calculate the memory footprint of an object, and used
by the vector allocation code while iterating over the vector blocks.
It is quite common to use some storage for a while, then release it by (for example) killing a buffer or deleting the last pointer to an object. Emacs provides a garbage collector to reclaim this abandoned storage. The garbage collector operates, in essence, by finding and marking all Lisp objects that are still accessible to Lisp programs. To begin with, it assumes all the symbols, their values and associated function definitions, and any data presently on the stack, are accessible. Any objects that can be reached indirectly through other accessible objects are also accessible, but this calculation is done “conservatively”, so it may slightly overestimate how many objects that are accessible.
When marking is finished, all objects still unmarked are garbage. No matter what the Lisp program or the user does, it is impossible to refer to them, since there is no longer a way to reach them. Their space might as well be reused, since no one will miss them. The second (sweep) phase of the garbage collector arranges to reuse them. (But since the marking was done “conservatively”, not all unused objects are guaranteed to be garbage-collected by any one sweep.)
The sweep phase puts unused cons cells onto a free list for future allocation; likewise for symbols and markers. It compacts the accessible strings so they occupy fewer 8k blocks; then it frees the other 8k blocks. Unreachable vectors from vector blocks are coalesced to create largest possible free areas; if a free area spans a complete 4k block, that block is freed. Otherwise, the free area is recorded in a free list array, where each entry corresponds to a free list of areas of the same size. Large vectors, buffers, and other large objects are allocated and freed individually.
Common Lisp note: Unlike other Lisps, GNU Emacs Lisp does not call the garbage collector when the free list is empty. Instead, it simply requests the operating system to allocate more storage, and processing continues until
gc-cons-threshold
bytes have been used.This means that you can make sure that the garbage collector will not run during a certain portion of a Lisp program by calling the garbage collector explicitly just before it (provided that portion of the program does not use so much space as to force a second garbage collection).
This command runs a garbage collection, and returns information on
the amount of space in use. (Garbage collection can also occur
spontaneously if you use more than gc-cons-threshold
bytes of
Lisp data since the previous garbage collection.)
garbage-collect
returns a list with information on amount of space in
use, where each entry has the form ‘(name size used)’
or ‘(name size used free)’. In the entry,
name is a symbol describing the kind of objects this entry represents,
size is the number of bytes used by each one, used is the number
of those objects that were found live in the heap, and optional free is
the number of those objects that are not live but that Emacs keeps around for
future allocations. So an overall result is:
((conses
cons-size used-conses free-conses) (symbols
symbol-size used-symbols free-symbols) (strings
string-size used-strings free-strings) (string-bytes
byte-size used-bytes) (vectors
vector-size used-vectors) (vector-slots
slot-size used-slots free-slots) (floats
float-size used-floats free-floats) (intervals
interval-size used-intervals free-intervals) (buffers
buffer-size used-buffers) (heap
unit-size total-size free-size))
Here is an example:
(garbage-collect) ⇒ ((conses 16 49126 8058) (symbols 48 14607 0) (strings 32 2942 2607) (string-bytes 1 78607) (vectors 16 7247) (vector-slots 8 341609 29474) (floats 8 71 102) (intervals 56 27 26) (buffers 944 8) (heap 1024 11715 2678))
Below is a table explaining each element. Note that last heap
entry
is optional and present only if an underlying malloc
implementation
provides mallinfo
function.
Internal size of a cons cell, i.e., sizeof (struct Lisp_Cons)
.
The number of cons cells in use.
The number of cons cells for which space has been obtained from the operating system, but that are not currently being used.
Internal size of a symbol, i.e., sizeof (struct Lisp_Symbol)
.
The number of symbols in use.
The number of symbols for which space has been obtained from the operating system, but that are not currently being used.
Internal size of a string header, i.e., sizeof (struct Lisp_String)
.
The number of string headers in use.
The number of string headers for which space has been obtained from the operating system, but that are not currently being used.
This is used for convenience and equals to sizeof (char)
.
The total size of all string data in bytes.
Size in bytes of a vector of length 1, including its header.
The number of vector headers allocated from the vector blocks.
Internal size of a vector slot, always equal to sizeof (Lisp_Object)
.
The number of slots in all used vectors. Slot counts might include some or all overhead from vector headers, depending on the platform.
The number of free slots in all vector blocks.
Internal size of a float object, i.e., sizeof (struct Lisp_Float)
.
(Do not confuse it with the native platform float
or double
.)
The number of floats in use.
The number of floats for which space has been obtained from the operating system, but that are not currently being used.
Internal size of an interval object, i.e., sizeof (struct interval)
.
The number of intervals in use.
The number of intervals for which space has been obtained from the operating system, but that are not currently being used.
Internal size of a buffer, i.e., sizeof (struct buffer)
.
(Do not confuse with the value returned by buffer-size
function.)
The number of buffer objects in use. This includes killed buffers
invisible to users, i.e., all buffers in all_buffers
list.
The unit of heap space measurement, always equal to 1024 bytes.
Total heap size, in unit-size units.
Heap space which is not currently used, in unit-size units.
If there was overflow in pure space (see Pure Storage), and Emacs
was dumped using the (now obsolete) unexec
method
(see Building Emacs), then garbage-collect
returns
nil
, because a real garbage collection cannot be done in that
case.
If this variable is non-nil
, Emacs displays a message at the
beginning and end of garbage collection. The default value is
nil
.
This is a normal hook that is run at the end of garbage collection. Garbage collection is inhibited while the hook functions run, so be careful writing them.
The value of this variable is the number of bytes of storage that must
be allocated for Lisp objects after one garbage collection in order to
trigger another garbage collection. You can use the result returned by
garbage-collect
to get an information about size of the particular
object type; space allocated to the contents of buffers does not count.
The initial threshold value is GC_DEFAULT_THRESHOLD
, defined in
alloc.c. Since it’s defined in word_size
units, the
value is 400,000 for the default 32-bit configuration and 800,000 for
the 64-bit one. If you specify a larger value, garbage collection
will happen less often. This reduces the amount of time spent garbage
collecting (so Lisp programs will run faster between cycles of garbage
collection that happen more rarely), but increases total memory use.
You may want to do this when running a program that creates lots of
Lisp data, especially if you need it to run faster. However, we
recommend against increasing the threshold for prolonged periods of
time, and advise that you never set it higher than needed for the
program to run in reasonable time. Using thresholds higher than
necessary could potentially cause higher system-wide memory pressure,
and also make each garbage-collection cycle take much more time, and
should therefore be avoided.
You can make collections more frequent by specifying a smaller value, down
to 1/10th of GC_DEFAULT_THRESHOLD
. A value less than this minimum
will remain in effect only until the subsequent garbage collection, at which
time garbage-collect
will set the threshold back to the minimum.
The value of this variable specifies the amount of consing before a
garbage collection occurs, as a fraction of the current heap size.
This criterion and gc-cons-threshold
apply in parallel, and
garbage collection occurs only when both criteria are satisfied.
As the heap size increases, the time to perform a garbage collection increases. Thus, it can be desirable to do them less frequently in proportion.
As with gc-cons-threshold
, do not enlarge this more than
necessary, and never for prolonged periods of time.
Control over the garbage collector via gc-cons-threshold
and
gc-cons-percentage
is only approximate. Although Emacs checks
for threshold exhaustion regularly, for efficiency reasons it does not
do so immediately after every change to the heap or to
gc-cons-threshold
or gc-cons-percentage
, so exhausting
the threshold does not immediately trigger garbage collection. Also,
for efficiency in threshold calculations Emacs approximates the heap
size, which counts the bytes used by currently-accessible objects in
the heap.
The value returned by garbage-collect
describes the amount of
memory used by Lisp data, broken down by data type. By contrast, the
function memory-limit
provides information on the total amount of
memory Emacs is currently using.
This function returns an estimate of the total amount of bytes of virtual memory that Emacs is currently using, divided by 1024. You can use this to get a general idea of how your actions affect the memory usage.
This variable is t
if Emacs is nearly out of memory for Lisp
objects, and nil
otherwise.
This returns a list of numbers that count the number of objects created in this Emacs session. Each of these counters increments for a certain kind of object. See the documentation string for details.
This functions returns an amount of total system memory and how much
of it is free. On an unsupported system, the value may be nil
.
If default-directory
points to a remote host, memory
information of that host is returned.
This variable contains the total number of garbage collections done so far in this Emacs session.
This variable contains the total number of seconds of elapsed time during garbage collection so far in this Emacs session, as a floating-point number.
It can sometimes be useful to see where Emacs is using memory (in various variables, buffers, and caches). This command will open a new buffer (called ‘"*Memory Report*"’) that will give an overview, in addition to listing the “largest” buffers and variables.
All the data here is approximate, because there’s really no consistent way to compute the size of a variable. For instance, two variables may share parts of a data structure, and this will be counted twice, but this command may still give a useful high-level overview of which parts of Emacs are using memory.
The garbage collector described above is used to manage data visible
from Lisp programs, as well as most of the data internally used by the
Lisp interpreter. Sometimes it may be useful to allocate temporary
internal objects using the C stack of the interpreter. This can help
performance, as stack allocation is typically faster than using heap
memory to allocate and the garbage collector to free. The downside is
that using such objects after they are freed results in undefined
behavior, so uses should be well thought out and carefully debugged by
using the GC_CHECK_MARKED_OBJECTS
feature (see
src/alloc.c). In particular, stack-allocated objects should
never be made visible to user Lisp code.
Currently, cons cells and strings can be allocated this way. This
is implemented by C macros like AUTO_CONS
and
AUTO_STRING
that define a named Lisp_Object
with block
lifetime. These objects are not freed by the garbage collector;
instead, they have automatic storage duration, i.e., they are
allocated like local variables and are automatically freed at the end
of execution of the C block that defined the object.
For performance reasons, stack-allocated strings are limited to
ASCII characters, and many of these strings are immutable,
i.e., calling ASET
on them produces undefined behavior.
These functions and variables give information about the total amount
of memory allocation that Emacs has done, broken down by data type.
Note the difference between these and the values returned by
garbage-collect
; those count objects that currently exist, but
these count the number or size of all allocations, including those for
objects that have since been freed.
The total number of cons cells that have been allocated so far in this Emacs session.
The total number of floats that have been allocated so far in this Emacs session.
The total number of vector cells that have been allocated so far in this Emacs session. This includes vector-like objects such as markers and overlays, plus certain objects not visible to users.
The total number of symbols that have been allocated so far in this Emacs session.
The total number of string characters that have been allocated so far in this session.
The total number of intervals that have been allocated so far in this Emacs session.
The total number of strings that have been allocated so far in this Emacs session.
The C part of Emacs is portable to C99 or later: C11-specific features such as ‘<stdalign.h>’ and ‘_Noreturn’ are not used without a check, typically at configuration time, and the Emacs build procedure provides a substitute implementation if necessary. Some C11 features, such as anonymous structures and unions, are too difficult to emulate, so they are avoided entirely.
At some point in the future the base C dialect will no doubt change to C11.
Lisp primitives are Lisp functions implemented in C. The details of interfacing the C function so that Lisp can call it are handled by a few C macros. The only way to really understand how to write new C code is to read the source, but we can explain some things here.
An example of a special form is the definition of or
, from
eval.c. (An ordinary function would have the same general
appearance.)
DEFUN ("or", For, Sor, 0, UNEVALLED, 0, doc: /* Eval args until one of them yields non-nil, then return that value. The remaining args are not evalled at all. If all args return nil, return nil.
usage: (or CONDITIONS...) */) (Lisp_Object args) { Lisp_Object val = Qnil;
while (CONSP (args)) { val = eval_sub (XCAR (args)); if (!NILP (val)) break; args = XCDR (args); maybe_quit (); }
return val; }
Let’s start with a precise explanation of the arguments to the
DEFUN
macro. Here is a template for them:
DEFUN (lname, fname, sname, min, max, interactive, doc)
This is the name of the Lisp symbol to define as the function name; in
the example above, it is or
.
This is the C function name for this function. This is the name that
is used in C code for calling the function. The name is, by
convention, ‘F’ prepended to the Lisp name, with all dashes
(‘-’) in the Lisp name changed to underscores. Thus, to call
this function from C code, call For
.
This is a C variable name to use for a structure that holds the data for the subr object that represents the function in Lisp. This structure conveys the Lisp symbol name to the initialization routine that will create the symbol and store the subr object as its definition. By convention, this name is always fname with ‘F’ replaced with ‘S’.
This is the minimum number of arguments that the function requires. The
function or
allows a minimum of zero arguments.
This is the maximum number of arguments that the function accepts, if
there is a fixed maximum. Alternatively, it can be UNEVALLED
,
indicating a special form that receives unevaluated arguments, or
MANY
, indicating an unlimited number of evaluated arguments (the
equivalent of &rest
). Both UNEVALLED
and MANY
are
macros. If max is a number, it must be more than min but
less than 8.
This is an interactive specification, a string such as might be used
as the argument of interactive
in a Lisp function
(see Using interactive
). In the case
of or
, it is 0
(a null pointer), indicating that or
cannot be called interactively. A value of ""
indicates a
function that should receive no arguments when called interactively.
If the value begins with a ‘"(’, the string is evaluated as a
Lisp form. For example:
DEFUN ("foo", Ffoo, Sfoo, 0, 3, "(list (read-char-by-name \"Insert character: \")\ (prefix-numeric-value current-prefix-arg)\ t)", doc: /* ... */)
This is the documentation string. It uses C comment syntax rather than C string syntax because comment syntax requires nothing special to include multiple lines. The ‘doc:’ identifies the comment that follows as the documentation string. The ‘/*’ and ‘*/’ delimiters that begin and end the comment are not part of the documentation string.
If the last line of the documentation string begins with the keyword ‘usage:’, the rest of the line is treated as the argument list for documentation purposes. This way, you can use different argument names in the documentation string from the ones used in the C code. ‘usage:’ is required if the function has an unlimited number of arguments.
Some primitives have multiple definitions, one per platform (e.g.,
x-create-frame
). In such cases, rather than writing the
same documentation string in each definition, only one definition has
the actual documentation. The others have placeholders beginning with
‘SKIP’, which are ignored by the function that parses the
DOC file.
All the usual rules for documentation strings in Lisp code (see Tips for Documentation Strings) apply to C code documentation strings too.
The documentation string can be followed by a list of C function attributes for the C function that implements the primitive, like this:
DEFUN ("bar", Fbar, Sbar, 0, UNEVALLED, 0 doc: /* ... */ attributes: attr1 attr2 ...)
You can specify more than a single attribute, one after the other. Currently, only the following attributes are recognized:
noreturn
Declares the C function as one that never returns. This corresponds
to the C11 keyword _Noreturn
and to __attribute__ ((__noreturn__))
attribute of GCC (see Function Attributes in Using the GNU Compiler Collection).
const
Declares that the function does not examine any values except its
arguments, and has no effects except the return value. This
corresponds to __attribute__ ((__const__))
attribute of
GCC.
noinline
This corresponds to __attribute__ ((__noinline__))
attribute of GCC, which prevents the function from being considered
for inlining. This might be needed, e.g., to countermand effects of
link-time optimizations on stack-based variables.
After the call to the DEFUN
macro, you must write the
argument list for the C function, including the types for the
arguments. If the primitive accepts a fixed maximum number of Lisp
arguments, there must be one C argument for each Lisp argument, and
each argument must be of type Lisp_Object
. (Various macros and
functions for creating values of type Lisp_Object
are declared
in the file lisp.h.) If the primitive is a special form, it
must accept a Lisp list containing its unevaluated Lisp arguments as a
single argument of type Lisp_Object
. If the primitive has no
upper limit on the number of evaluated Lisp arguments, it must have
exactly two C arguments: the first is the number of Lisp arguments,
and the second is the address of a block containing their values.
These have types ptrdiff_t
and Lisp_Object *
,
respectively. Since Lisp_Object
can hold any Lisp object of
any data type, you can determine the actual data type only at run
time; so if you want a primitive to accept only a certain type of
argument, you must check the type explicitly using a suitable
predicate (see Type Predicates).
Within the function For
itself, the local variable
args
refers to objects controlled by Emacs’s stack-marking
garbage collector. Although the garbage collector does not reclaim
objects reachable from C Lisp_Object
stack variables, it may
move some of the components of an object, such as the contents of a
string or the text of a buffer. Therefore, functions that access
these components must take care to refetch their addresses after
performing Lisp evaluation. This means that instead of keeping C
pointers to string contents or buffer text, the code should keep the
buffer or string position, and recompute the C pointer from the
position after performing Lisp evaluation. Lisp evaluation can occur
via calls to eval_sub
or Feval
, either directly or
indirectly.
Note the call to maybe_quit
inside the loop: this function
checks whether the user pressed C-g, and if so, aborts the
processing. You should do that in any loop that can potentially
require a large number of iterations; in this case, the list of
arguments could be very long. This increases Emacs responsiveness and
improves user experience.
You must not use C initializers for static or global variables unless the variables are never written once Emacs is dumped. These variables with initializers are allocated in an area of memory that becomes read-only (on certain operating systems) as a result of dumping Emacs. See Pure Storage.
Defining the C function is not enough to make a Lisp primitive available; you must also create the Lisp symbol for the primitive and store a suitable subr object in its function cell. The code looks like this:
defsubr (&sname);
Here sname is the name you used as the third argument to DEFUN
.
If you add a new primitive to a file that already has Lisp primitives
defined in it, find the function (near the end of the file) named
syms_of_something
, and add the call to defsubr
there. If the file doesn’t have this function, or if you create a new
file, add to it a syms_of_filename
(e.g.,
syms_of_myfile
). Then find the spot in emacs.c where all
of these functions are called, and add a call to
syms_of_filename
there.
The function syms_of_filename
is also the place to define
any C variables that are to be visible as Lisp variables.
DEFVAR_LISP
makes a C variable of type Lisp_Object
visible
in Lisp. DEFVAR_INT
makes a C variable of type int
visible in Lisp with a value that is always an integer.
DEFVAR_BOOL
makes a C variable of type int
visible in Lisp
with a value that is either t
or nil
. Note that variables
defined with DEFVAR_BOOL
are automatically added to the list
byte-boolean-vars
used by the byte compiler.
These macros all expect three arguments:
lname
The name of the variable to be used by Lisp programs.
vname
The name of the variable in the C sources.
doc
The documentation for the variable, as a C comment. See Documentation Basics, for more details.
By convention, when defining variables of a “native” type
(int
and bool
), the name of the C variable is the name
of the Lisp variable with -
replaced by _
. When the
variable has type Lisp_Object
, the convention is to also prefix
the C variable name with V
. i.e.
DEFVAR_INT ("my-int-variable", my_int_variable, doc: /* An integer variable. */); DEFVAR_LISP ("my-lisp-variable", Vmy_lisp_variable, doc: /* A Lisp variable. */);
There are situations in Lisp where you need to refer to the symbol
itself rather than the value of that symbol. One such case is when
temporarily overriding the value of a variable, which in Lisp is done
with let
. In C sources, this is done by defining a
corresponding, constant symbol, and using specbind
. By
convention, Qmy_lisp_variable
corresponds to
Vmy_lisp_variable
; to define it, use the DEFSYM
macro.
i.e.
DEFSYM (Qmy_lisp_variable, "my-lisp-variable");
To perform the actual binding:
specbind (Qmy_lisp_variable, Qt);
In Lisp symbols sometimes need to be quoted, to achieve the same
effect in C you again use the corresponding constant symbol
Qmy_lisp_variable
. For example, when creating a buffer-local
variable (see Buffer-Local Variables) in Lisp you would write:
(make-variable-buffer-local 'my-lisp-variable)
In C the corresponding code uses Fmake_variable_buffer_local
in
combination with DEFSYM
, i.e.
DEFSYM (Qmy_lisp_variable, "my-lisp-variable"); Fmake_variable_buffer_local (Qmy_lisp_variable);
If you want to make a Lisp variable that is defined in C behave
like one declared with defcustom
, add an appropriate entry to
cus-start.el. See Defining Customization Variables, for a description of
the format to use.
If you directly define a file-scope C variable of type
Lisp_Object
, you must protect it from garbage-collection by
calling staticpro
in syms_of_filename
, like this:
staticpro (&variable);
Here is another example function, with more complicated arguments. This comes from the code in window.c, and it demonstrates the use of macros and functions to manipulate Lisp objects.
DEFUN ("coordinates-in-window-p", Fcoordinates_in_window_p, Scoordinates_in_window_p, 2, 2, 0, doc: /* Return non-nil if COORDINATES are in WINDOW. ...
or `right-margin' is returned. */) (register Lisp_Object coordinates, Lisp_Object window) { struct window *w; struct frame *f; int x, y; Lisp_Object lx, ly;
w = decode_live_window (window); f = XFRAME (w->frame); CHECK_CONS (coordinates); lx = Fcar (coordinates); ly = Fcdr (coordinates); CHECK_NUMBER (lx); CHECK_NUMBER (ly); x = FRAME_PIXEL_X_FROM_CANON_X (f, lx) + FRAME_INTERNAL_BORDER_WIDTH (f); y = FRAME_PIXEL_Y_FROM_CANON_Y (f, ly) + FRAME_INTERNAL_BORDER_WIDTH (f);
switch (coordinates_in_window (w, x, y)) { case ON_NOTHING: /* NOT in window at all. */ return Qnil;
...
case ON_MODE_LINE: /* In mode line of window. */ return Qmode_line;
...
case ON_SCROLL_BAR: /* On scroll-bar of window. */ /* Historically we are supposed to return nil in this case. */ return Qnil;
default: emacs_abort (); } }
Note that C code cannot call functions by name unless they are defined
in C. The way to call a function written in Lisp is to use
Ffuncall
, which embodies the Lisp function funcall
. Since
the Lisp function funcall
accepts an unlimited number of
arguments, in C it takes two: the number of Lisp-level arguments, and a
one-dimensional array containing their values. The first Lisp-level
argument is the Lisp function to call, and the rest are the arguments to
pass to it.
The C functions call0
, call1
, call2
, and so on,
provide handy ways to call a Lisp function conveniently with a fixed
number of arguments. They work by calling Ffuncall
.
eval.c is a very good file to look through for examples; lisp.h contains the definitions for some important macros and functions.
If you define a function which is side-effect free or pure, give it
a non-nil
side-effect-free
or pure
property,
respectively (see Standard Symbol Properties).
This section describes the Emacs module API and how to use it as part of writing extension modules for Emacs. The module API is defined in the C programming language, therefore the description and the examples in this section assume the module is written in C. For other programming languages, you will need to use the appropriate bindings, interfaces and facilities for calling C code. Emacs C code requires a C99 or later compiler (see C Dialect), and so the code examples in this section also follow that standard.
Writing a module and integrating it into Emacs comprises the following tasks:
The following subsections describe these tasks and the API itself in more detail.
Once your module is written, compile it to produce a shared library,
according to the conventions of the underlying platform. Then place
the shared library in a directory mentioned in load-path
(see Library Search), where Emacs will find it.
If you wish to verify the conformance of a module to the Emacs dynamic module API, invoke Emacs with the --module-assertions option. See Initial Options in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Begin your module by including the header file emacs-module.h and defining the GPL compatibility symbol:
#include <emacs-module.h> int plugin_is_GPL_compatible;
The emacs-module.h file is installed into your system’s include tree as part of the Emacs installation. Alternatively, you can find it in the Emacs source tree.
Next, write an initialization function for the module.
int
emacs_module_init (struct emacs_runtime *runtime)
¶Emacs calls this function when it loads a module. If a module does
not export a function named emacs_module_init
, trying to load
the module will signal an error. The initialization function should
return zero if the initialization succeeds, non-zero otherwise. In
the latter case, Emacs will signal an error, and the loading of the
module will fail. If the user presses C-g during the
initialization, Emacs ignores the return value of the initialization
function and quits (see Quitting). (If needed, you can catch user
quitting inside the initialization function, see should_quit.)
The argument runtime is a pointer to a C struct
that
includes 2 public fields: size
, which provides the size of the
structure in bytes; and get_environment
, which provides a
pointer to a function that allows the module initialization function
access to the Emacs environment object and its interfaces.
The initialization function should perform whatever initialization is required for the module. In addition, it can perform the following tasks:
A module can verify that the Emacs executable which loads the module
is compatible with the module, by comparing the size
member of
the runtime structure with the value compiled into the module:
int emacs_module_init (struct emacs_runtime *runtime) { if (runtime->size < sizeof (*runtime)) return 1; }
If the size of the runtime object passed to the module is smaller than what it expects, it means the module was compiled for an Emacs version newer (later) than the one which attempts to load it, i.e. the module might be incompatible with the Emacs binary.
In addition, a module can verify the compatibility of the module
API with what the module expects. The following sample code
assumes it is part of the emacs_module_init
function shown
above:
emacs_env *env = runtime->get_environment (runtime); if (env->size < sizeof (*env)) return 2;
This calls the get_environment
function using the pointer
provided in the runtime
structure to retrieve a pointer to the
API’s environment, a C struct
which also has a
size
field holding the size of the structure in bytes.
Finally, you can write a module that will work with older versions of Emacs, by comparing the size of the environment passed by Emacs with known sizes, like this:
emacs_env *env = runtime->get_environment (runtime); if (env->size >= sizeof (struct emacs_env_26)) emacs_version = 26; /* Emacs 26 or later. */ else if (env->size >= sizeof (struct emacs_env_25)) emacs_version = 25; else return 2; /* Unknown or unsupported version. */
This works because later Emacs versions always add members to the environment, never remove any members, so the size can only grow with new Emacs releases. Given the version of Emacs, the module can use only the parts of the module API that existed in that version, since those parts are identical in later versions.
emacs-module.h defines a preprocessor macro
EMACS_MAJOR_VERSION
. It expands to an integer literal which is
the latest major version of Emacs supported by the header.
See Version Information. Note that the value of
EMACS_MAJOR_VERSION
is a compile-time constant and does not
represent the version of Emacs that is currently running and has
loaded your module. If you want your module to be compatible with
various versions of emacs-module.h as well as various versions
of Emacs, you can use conditional compilation based on
EMACS_MAJOR_VERSION
.
We recommend that modules always perform the compatibility verification, unless they do their job entirely in the initialization function, and don’t access any Lisp objects or use any Emacs functions accessible through the environment structure.
This gives the module functions names so that Lisp code could call it by that name. We describe how to do this in Writing Module Functions below.
The main reason for writing an Emacs module is to make additional functions available to Lisp programs that load the module. This subsection describes how to write such module functions.
A module function has the following general form and signature:
emacs_value
emacs_function (emacs_env *env, ptrdiff_t nargs, emacs_value *args, void *data)
¶The env argument provides a pointer to the API
environment, needed to access Emacs objects and functions. The
nargs argument is the required number of arguments, which can be
zero (see make_function
below for more flexible specification
of the argument number), and args is a pointer to the array of
the function arguments. The argument data points to additional
data required by the function, which was arranged when
make_function
(see below) was called to create an Emacs
function from emacs_function
.
Module functions use the type emacs_value
to communicate Lisp
objects between Emacs and the module (see Conversion Between Lisp and Module Values). The
API, described below and in the following subsections,
provides facilities for conversion between basic C data types and the
corresponding emacs_value
objects.
In the module function’s body, do not attempt to access
elements of the args array beyond the index
nargs-1
: memory for the args array is allocated
exactly to accommodate nargs values, and accessing beyond that
will most probably crash your module. In particular, if the value of
nargs passed to the function at run time is zero, it must not
access args at all, as no memory will have been allocated for it
in that case.
A module function always returns a value. If the function returns
normally, the Lisp code which called it will see the Lisp object
corresponding to the emacs_value
value the function returned.
However, if the user typed C-g, or if the module function or its
callees signaled an error or exited nonlocally (see Nonlocal Exits in Modules), Emacs will ignore the returned value and quit or throw as
it does when Lisp code encounters the same situations.
The header emacs-module.h provides the type
emacs_function
as an alias type for a function pointer to a
module function.
After writing your C code for a module function, you should make a
Lisp function object from it using the make_function
function,
whose pointer is provided in the environment (recall that the pointer
to the environment is returned by get_environment
). This is
normally done in the module initialization function (see module initialization function), after verifying the API
compatibility.
emacs_value
make_function (emacs_env *env, ptrdiff_t min_arity, ptrdiff_t max_arity, emacs_function func, const char *docstring, void *data)
¶This returns an Emacs function created from the C function func,
whose signature is as described for emacs_function
above.
The arguments
min_arity and max_arity specify the minimum and maximum
number of arguments that func can accept. The max_arity
argument can have the special value emacs_variadic_function
,
which makes the function accept an unlimited number of arguments, like
the &rest
keyword in Lisp (see Features of Argument Lists).
The argument data is a way to arrange for arbitrary additional
data to be passed to func when it is called. Whatever pointer
is passed to make_function
will be passed unaltered to
func.
The argument docstring specifies the documentation string for
the function. It should be either an ASCII string, or a
UTF-8 encoded non-ASCII string, or a NULL
pointer; in
the latter case the function will have no documentation. The
documentation string can end with a line that specifies the advertised
calling convention, see Documentation Strings of Functions.
Since every module function must accept the pointer to the environment
as its first argument, the call to make_function
could be made
from any module function, but you will normally want to do that from
the module initialization function, so that all the module functions
are known to Emacs once the module is loaded.
Finally, you should bind the Lisp function to a symbol, so that Lisp
code could call your function by name. For that, use the module
API function intern
(see intern) whose pointer is
also provided in the environment that module functions can access.
Combining the above steps, code that arranges for a C function
module_func
to be callable as module-func
from Lisp will
look like this, as part of the module initialization function:
emacs_env *env = runtime->get_environment (runtime); emacs_value func = env->make_function (env, min_arity, max_arity, module_func, docstring, data); emacs_value symbol = env->intern (env, "module-func"); emacs_value args[] = {symbol, func}; env->funcall (env, env->intern (env, "defalias"), 2, args);
This makes the symbol module-func
known to Emacs by calling
env->intern
, then invokes defalias
from Emacs to bind
the function to that symbol. Note that it is possible to use
fset
instead of defalias
; the differences are described
in defalias.
Module functions including the emacs_module_init
function
(see module initialization function) may only interact with Emacs
by calling environment functions from some live emacs_env
pointer while being called directly or indirectly from Emacs. In
other words, if a module function wants to call Lisp functions or
Emacs primitives, convert emacs_value
objects to and from C
datatypes (see Conversion Between Lisp and Module Values), or interact with Emacs in any other
way, some call from Emacs to emacs_module_init
or to a module
function must be in the call stack. Module functions may not interact
with Emacs while garbage collection is running; see Garbage Collection. They may only interact with Emacs from Lisp interpreter
threads (including the main thread) created by Emacs; see Threads.
The --module-assertions command-line option can detect some
violations of the above requirements. See Initial Options in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Using the module API, it is possible to define more complex
function and data types: inline functions, macros, etc. However, the
resulting C code will be cumbersome and hard to read. Therefore, we
recommend that you limit the module code which creates functions and
data structures to the absolute minimum, and leave the rest for a Lisp
package that will accompany your module, because doing these
additional tasks in Lisp is much easier, and will produce a much more
readable code. For example, given a module function
module-func
defined as above, one way of making a macro
module-macro
based on it is with the following simple Lisp
wrapper:
(defmacro module-macro (&rest args) "Documentation string for the macro." (module-func args))
The Lisp package which goes with your module could then load the
module using the load
primitive (see Emacs Dynamic Modules) when
the package is loaded into Emacs.
By default, module functions created by make_function
are not
interactive. To make them interactive, you can use the following
function.
void
make_interactive (emacs_env *env, emacs_value function, emacs_value spec)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 28, makes the function
function interactive using the interactive specification
spec. Emacs interprets spec like the argument to the
interactive
form. Using interactive
, and
see Code Characters for interactive
. function must be an Emacs module
function returned by make_function
.
Note that there is no native module support for retrieving the
interactive specification of a module function. Use the function
interactive-form
for that. Using interactive
. It is not
possible to make a module function non-interactive once you have made
it interactive using make_interactive
.
If you want to run some code when a module function object (i.e., an
object returned by make_function
) is garbage-collected, you can
install a function finalizer. Function finalizers are available
since Emacs 28. For example, if you have passed some heap-allocated
structure to the data argument of make_function
, you can
use the finalizer to deallocate the structure. See (libc)Basic
Allocation, and see (libc)Freeing after Malloc. The
finalizer function has the following signature:
void finalizer (void *data)
Here, data receives the value passed to data when calling
make_function
. Note that the finalizer can’t interact with
Emacs in any way.
Directly after calling make_function
, the newly-created
function doesn’t have a finalizer. Use set_function_finalizer
to add one, if desired.
void
emacs_finalizer (void *ptr)
¶The header emacs-module.h provides the type
emacs_finalizer
as a type alias for an Emacs finalizer
function.
emacs_finalizer
get_function_finalizer (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 28, returns the function
finalizer associated with the module function represented by
arg. arg must refer to a module function, that is, an
object returned by make_function
. If no finalizer is
associated with the function, NULL
is returned.
void
set_function_finalizer (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg, emacs_finalizer fin)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 28, sets the function
finalizer associated with the module function represented by arg
to fin. arg must refer to a module function, that is, an
object returned by make_function
. fin can either be
NULL
to clear arg’s function finalizer, or a pointer to a
function to be called when the object represented by arg is
garbage-collected. At most one function finalizer can be set per
function; if arg already has a finalizer, it is replaced by
fin.
With very few exceptions, most modules need to exchange data with
Lisp programs that call them: accept arguments to module functions and
return values from module functions. For this purpose, the module
API provides the emacs_value
type, which represents
Emacs Lisp objects communicated via the API; it is the
functional equivalent of the Lisp_Object
type used in Emacs C
primitives (see Writing Emacs Primitives). This section describes
the parts of the module API that allow to create
emacs_value
objects corresponding to basic Lisp data types, and
how to access from C data in emacs_value
objects that
correspond to Lisp objects.
All of the functions described below are actually function pointers provided via the pointer to the environment which every module function accepts. Therefore, module code should call these functions through the environment pointer, like this:
emacs_env *env; /* the environment pointer */ env->some_function (arguments...);
The emacs_env
pointer will usually come from the first argument
to the module function, or from the call to get_environment
if
you need the environment in the module initialization function.
Most of the functions described below became available in Emacs 25, the first Emacs release that supported dynamic modules. For the few functions that became available in later Emacs releases, we mention the first Emacs version that supported them.
The following API functions extract values of various C data
types from emacs_value
objects. They all raise the
wrong-type-argument
error condition (see Type Predicates)
if the argument emacs_value
object is not of the type expected
by the function. See Nonlocal Exits in Modules, for details of how signaling
errors works in Emacs modules, and how to catch error conditions
inside the module before they are reported to Emacs. The
API function type_of
(see type_of)
can be used to obtain the type of a emacs_value
object.
intmax_t
extract_integer (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg)
¶This function returns the value of a Lisp integer specified by
arg. The C data type of the return value, intmax_t
, is
the widest integer data type supported by the C compiler, typically
long long
. If the value of arg doesn’t fit into an
intmax_t
, the function signals an error using the error symbol
overflow-error
.
bool
extract_big_integer (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg, int *sign, ptrdiff_t *count, emacs_limb_t *magnitude)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 27, extracts the
integer value of arg. The value of arg must be an
integer (fixnum or bignum). If sign is not NULL
, it
stores the sign of arg (-1, 0, or +1) into *sign
. The
magnitude is stored into magnitude as follows. If count
and magnitude are both non-NULL
, then magnitude must
point to an array of at least *count
unsigned long
elements. If magnitude is large enough to hold the magnitude of
arg, then this function writes the magnitude into the
magnitude array in little-endian form, stores the number of
array elements written into *count
, and returns true
.
If magnitude is not large enough, it stores the required array
size into *count
, signals an error, and returns false
.
If count is not NULL
and magnitude is NULL
,
then the function stores the required array size into *count
and returns true
.
Emacs guarantees that the maximum required value of *count
never exceeds min (PTRDIFF_MAX, SIZE_MAX) / sizeof
(emacs_limb_t)
, so you can use malloc (*count * sizeof *magnitude)
to allocate the magnitude
array without worrying about integer
overflow in the size calculation.
This is an unsigned integer type, used as the element type for the magnitude arrays for the big integer conversion functions. The type is guaranteed to have unique object representations, i.e., no padding bits.
This macro expands to a constant expression specifying the maximum
possible value for an emacs_limb_t
object.
The expression is suitable for use in #if
.
double
extract_float (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg)
¶This function returns the value of a Lisp float specified by
arg, as a C double
value.
struct timespec
extract_time (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 27, interprets arg
as an Emacs Lisp time value and returns the corresponding struct
timespec
. See Time of Day. struct timespec
represents a
timestamp with nanosecond precision. It has the following members:
time_t tv_sec
Whole number of seconds.
long tv_nsec
Fractional seconds as a number of nanoseconds.
For timestamps returned by extract_time
,
this is always nonnegative and less than one billion.
(Although POSIX requires the type of tv_nsec
to be long
,
the type is long long
on some nonstandard platforms.)
See (libc)Elapsed Time.
If time has higher precision than nanoseconds, then this
function truncates it to nanosecond precision towards negative
infinity. This function signals an error if time (truncated to
nanoseconds) cannot be represented by struct timespec
. For
example, if time_t
is a 32-bit integer type, then a time
value of ten billion seconds would signal an error, but a time
value of 600 picoseconds would get truncated to zero.
If you need to deal with time values that are not representable by
struct timespec
, or if you want higher precision, call the Lisp
function encode-time
and work with its return value.
See Time Conversion.
bool
copy_string_contents (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg, char *buf, ptrdiff_t *len)
¶This function stores the UTF-8 encoded text of a Lisp string specified
by arg in the array of char
pointed by buf, which
should have enough space to hold at least *len
bytes,
including the terminating null byte. The argument len must not
be a NULL
pointer, and, when the function is called, it should
point to a value that specifies the size of buf in bytes.
If the buffer size specified by *len
is large enough to
hold the string’s text, the function stores in *len
the
actual number of bytes copied to buf, including the terminating
null byte, and returns true
. If the buffer is too small, the
function raises the args-out-of-range
error condition, stores
the required number of bytes in *len
, and returns
false
. See Nonlocal Exits in Modules, for how to handle pending error
conditions.
The argument buf can be a NULL
pointer, in which case the
function stores in *len
the number of bytes required for
storing the contents of arg, and returns true
. This is
how you can determine the size of buf needed to store a
particular string: first call copy_string_contents
with
NULL
as buf, then allocate enough memory to hold the
number of bytes stored by the function in *len
, and call
the function again with non-NULL
buf to actually perform
the text copying.
emacs_value
vec_get (emacs_env *env, emacs_value vector, ptrdiff_t index)
¶This function returns the element of vector at index. The
index of the first vector element is zero. The function raises
the args-out-of-range
error condition if the value of
index is invalid. To extract C data from the value the function
returns, use the other extraction functions described here, as
appropriate for the Lisp data type stored in that element of the
vector.
ptrdiff_t
vec_size (emacs_env *env, emacs_value vector)
¶This function returns the number of elements in vector.
void
vec_set (emacs_env *env, emacs_value vector, ptrdiff_t index, emacs_value value)
¶This function stores value in the element of vector whose
index is index. It raises the args-out-of-range
error
condition if the value of index is invalid.
The following API functions create emacs_value
objects from basic C data types. They all return the created
emacs_value
object.
emacs_value
make_integer (emacs_env *env, intmax_t n)
¶This function takes an integer argument n and returns the
corresponding emacs_value
object. It returns either a fixnum
or a bignum depending on whether the value of n is inside the
limits set by most-negative-fixnum
and
most-positive-fixnum
(see Integer Basics).
emacs_value
make_big_integer (emacs_env *env, int sign, ptrdiff_t count, const emacs_limb_t *magnitude)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 27, takes an
arbitrary-sized integer argument and returns a corresponding
emacs_value
object. The sign argument gives the sign of
the return value. If sign is nonzero, then magnitude must
point to an array of at least count elements specifying the
little-endian magnitude of the return value.
The following example uses the GNU Multiprecision Library (GMP) to
calculate the next probable prime after a given integer.
See (gmp)Top, for a general overview of GMP, and see (gmp)Integer
Import and Export for how to convert the magnitude
array
to and from GMP mpz_t
values.
#include <emacs-module.h> int plugin_is_GPL_compatible; #include <assert.h> #include <limits.h> #include <stdint.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <gmp.h> static void memory_full (emacs_env *env) { static const char message[] = "Memory exhausted"; emacs_value data = env->make_string (env, message, strlen (message)); env->non_local_exit_signal (env, env->intern (env, "error"), env->funcall (env, env->intern (env, "list"), 1, &data)); } enum { order = -1, endian = 0, nails = 0, limb_size = sizeof (emacs_limb_t), max_nlimbs = ((SIZE_MAX < PTRDIFF_MAX ? SIZE_MAX : PTRDIFF_MAX) / limb_size) }; static bool extract_big_integer (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg, mpz_t result) { ptrdiff_t nlimbs; bool ok = env->extract_big_integer (env, arg, NULL, &nlimbs, NULL); if (!ok) return false; assert (0 < nlimbs && nlimbs <= max_nlimbs); emacs_limb_t *magnitude = malloc (nlimbs * limb_size); if (magnitude == NULL) { memory_full (env); return false; } int sign; ok = env->extract_big_integer (env, arg, &sign, &nlimbs, magnitude); assert (ok); mpz_import (result, nlimbs, order, limb_size, endian, nails, magnitude); free (magnitude); if (sign < 0) mpz_neg (result, result); return true; } static emacs_value make_big_integer (emacs_env *env, const mpz_t value) { size_t nbits = mpz_sizeinbase (value, 2); int bitsperlimb = CHAR_BIT * limb_size - nails; size_t nlimbs = nbits / bitsperlimb + (nbits % bitsperlimb != 0); emacs_limb_t *magnitude = nlimbs <= max_nlimbs ? malloc (nlimbs * limb_size) : NULL; if (magnitude == NULL) { memory_full (env); return NULL; } size_t written; mpz_export (magnitude, &written, order, limb_size, endian, nails, value); assert (written == nlimbs); assert (nlimbs <= PTRDIFF_MAX); emacs_value result = env->make_big_integer (env, mpz_sgn (value), nlimbs, magnitude); free (magnitude); return result; } static emacs_value next_prime (emacs_env *env, ptrdiff_t nargs, emacs_value *args, void *data) { assert (nargs == 1); mpz_t p; mpz_init (p); extract_big_integer (env, args[0], p); mpz_nextprime (p, p); emacs_value result = make_big_integer (env, p); mpz_clear (p); return result; } int emacs_module_init (struct emacs_runtime *runtime) { emacs_env *env = runtime->get_environment (runtime); emacs_value symbol = env->intern (env, "next-prime"); emacs_value func = env->make_function (env, 1, 1, next_prime, NULL, NULL); emacs_value args[] = {symbol, func}; env->funcall (env, env->intern (env, "defalias"), 2, args); return 0; }
emacs_value
make_float (emacs_env *env, double d)
¶This function takes a double
argument d and returns the
corresponding Emacs floating-point value.
emacs_value
make_time (emacs_env *env, struct timespec time)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 27, takes a struct
timespec
argument time and returns the corresponding Emacs
timestamp as a pair (ticks . hz)
. See Time of Day. The return value represents exactly the same timestamp as
time: all input values are representable, and there is never a
loss of precision. time.tv_sec
and
time.tv_nsec
can be arbitrary values. In particular,
there’s no requirement that time be normalized. This means that
time.tv_nsec
can be negative or larger than 999,999,999.
emacs_value
make_string (emacs_env *env, const char *str, ptrdiff_t len)
¶This function creates an Emacs string from C text string pointed by
str whose length in bytes, not including the terminating null
byte, is len. The original string in str can be either an
ASCII string or a UTF-8 encoded non-ASCII string;
it can include embedded null bytes, and doesn’t have to end in a
terminating null byte at str[len]
. The function
raises the overflow-error
error condition if len is
negative or exceeds the maximum length of an Emacs string. If
len is zero, then str can be NULL
, otherwise it
must point to valid memory. For nonzero len, make_string
returns unique mutable string objects.
emacs_value
make_unibyte_string (emacs_env *env, const char *str, ptrdiff_t len)
¶This function is like make_string
, but has no restrictions on
the values of the bytes in the C string, and can be used to pass
binary data to Emacs in the form of a unibyte string.
The API does not provide functions to manipulate Lisp data
structures, for example, create lists with cons
and list
(see Building Cons Cells and Lists), extract list members with car
and
cdr
(see Accessing Elements of Lists), create vectors with vector
(see Functions for Vectors), etc. For these, use intern
and
funcall
, described in the next subsection, to call the
corresponding Lisp functions.
Normally, emacs_value
objects have a rather short lifetime: it
ends when the emacs_env
pointer used for their creation goes
out of scope. Occasionally, you may need to create global
references: emacs_value
objects that live as long as you
wish. Use the following two functions to manage such objects.
emacs_value
make_global_ref (emacs_env *env, emacs_value value)
¶This function returns a global reference for value.
void
free_global_ref (emacs_env *env, emacs_value global_value)
¶This function frees the global_value previously created by
make_global_ref
. The global_value is no longer valid
after the call. Your module code should pair each call to
make_global_ref
with the corresponding free_global_ref
.
An alternative to keeping around C data structures that need to be
passed to module functions later is to create user pointer
objects. A user pointer, or user-ptr
, object is a Lisp object
that encapsulates a C pointer and can have an associated finalizer
function, which is called when the object is garbage-collected
(see Garbage Collection). The module API provides
functions to create and access user-ptr
objects. These
functions raise the wrong-type-argument
error condition if they
are called on emacs_value
that doesn’t represent a
user-ptr
object.
emacs_value
make_user_ptr (emacs_env *env, emacs_finalizer fin, void *ptr)
¶This function creates and returns a user-ptr
object which wraps
the C pointer ptr. The finalizer function fin can be a
NULL
pointer (meaning no finalizer), or it can be a function of
the following signature:
typedef void (*emacs_finalizer) (void *ptr);
If fin is not a NULL
pointer, it will be called with the
ptr as the argument when the user-ptr
object is
garbage-collected. Don’t run any expensive code in a finalizer,
because GC must finish quickly to keep Emacs responsive.
void *get_user_ptr
(emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg)
¶This function extracts the C pointer from the Lisp object represented by arg.
void
set_user_ptr (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg, void *ptr)
¶This function sets the C pointer embedded in the user-ptr
object represented by arg to ptr.
emacs_finalizer
get_user_finalizer (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg)
¶This function returns the finalizer of the user-ptr
object
represented by arg, or NULL
if it doesn’t have a
finalizer.
void
set_user_finalizer (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg, emacs_finalizer fin)
¶This function changes the finalizer of the user-ptr
object
represented by arg to be fin. If fin is a
NULL
pointer, the user-ptr
object will have no
finalizer.
Note that the emacs_finalizer
type works for both user pointer
an module function finalizers. See Module Function Finalizers.
This subsection describes a few convenience functions provided by
the module API. Like the functions described in previous
subsections, all of them are actually function pointers, and need to
be called via the emacs_env
pointer. Description of functions
that were introduced after Emacs 25 calls out the first version where
they became available.
bool
eq (emacs_env *env, emacs_value a, emacs_value b)
¶This function returns true
if the Lisp objects represented by
a and b are identical, false
otherwise. This is
the same as the Lisp function eq
(see Equality Predicates),
but avoids the need to intern the objects represented by the
arguments.
There are no API functions for other equality predicates, so
you will need to use intern
and funcall
, described
below, to perform more complex equality tests.
bool
is_not_nil (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg)
¶This function tests whether the Lisp object represented by arg
is non-nil
; it returns true
or false
accordingly.
Note that you could implement an equivalent test by using
intern
to get an emacs_value
representing nil
,
then use eq
, described above, to test for equality. But using
this function is more convenient.
emacs_value
type_of (emacs_env *env, emacs_value arg
)
¶This function returns the type of arg as a value that represents
a symbol: string
for a string, integer
for an integer,
process
for a process, etc. See Type Predicates. You can
use intern
and eq
to compare against known type symbols,
if your code needs to depend on the object type.
emacs_value
intern (emacs_env *env, const char *name)
¶This function returns an interned Emacs symbol whose name is name, which should be an ASCII null-terminated string. It creates a new symbol if one does not already exist.
Together with funcall
, described below, this function provides
a means for invoking any Lisp-callable Emacs function, provided that
its name is a pure ASCII string. For example, here’s how to
intern a symbol whose name name_str
is non-ASCII, by
calling the more powerful Emacs intern
function
(see Creating and Interning Symbols):
emacs_value fintern = env->intern (env, "intern"); emacs_value sym_name = env->make_string (env, name_str, strlen (name_str)); emacs_value symbol = env->funcall (env, fintern, 1, &sym_name);
emacs_value
funcall (emacs_env *env, emacs_value func, ptrdiff_t nargs, emacs_value *args)
¶This function calls the specified func passing it nargs
arguments from the array pointed to by args. The argument
func can be a function symbol (e.g., returned by intern
described above), a module function returned by make_function
(see Writing Module Functions), a subroutine written in C, etc. If
nargs is zero, args can be a NULL
pointer.
The function returns the value that func returned.
If your module includes potentially long-running code, it is a good idea to check from time to time in that code whether the user wants to quit, e.g., by typing C-g (see Quitting). The following function, which is available since Emacs 26.1, is provided for that purpose.
bool
should_quit (emacs_env *env)
¶This function returns true
if the user wants to quit. In that
case, we recommend that your module function aborts any on-going
processing and returns as soon as possible. In most cases, use
process_input
instead.
To process input events in addition to checking whether the user wants to quit, use the following function, which is available since Emacs 27.1.
enum emacs_process_input_result
process_input (emacs_env *env)
¶This function processes pending input events. It returns
emacs_process_input_quit
if the user wants to quit or an error
occurred while processing signals. In that case, we recommend that
your module function aborts any on-going processing and returns as
soon as possible. If the module code may continue running,
process_input
returns emacs_process_input_continue
. The
return value is emacs_process_input_continue
if and only if
there is no pending nonlocal exit in env
. If the module
continues after calling process_input
, global state such as
variable values and buffer content may have been modified in arbitrary
ways.
int
open_channel (emacs_env *env, emacs_value pipe_process)
¶This function, which is available since Emacs 28, opens a channel to
an existing pipe process. pipe_process must refer to an
existing pipe process created by make-pipe-process
. Pipe Processes. If successful, the return value will be a new file
descriptor that you can use to write to the pipe. Unlike all other
module functions, you can use the returned file descriptor from
arbitrary threads, even if no module environment is active. You can
use the write
function to write to the file descriptor. Once
done, close the file descriptor using close
. (libc)Low-Level
I/O.
Emacs Lisp supports nonlocal exits, whereby program control is
transferred from one point in a program to another remote point.
See Nonlocal Exits. Thus, Lisp functions called by your module
might exit nonlocally by calling signal
or throw
, and
your module functions must handle such nonlocal exits properly. Such
handling is needed because C programs will not automatically release
resources and perform other cleanups in these cases; your module code
must itself do it. The module API provides facilities for
that, described in this subsection. They are generally available
since Emacs 25; those of them that became available in later releases
explicitly call out the first Emacs version where they became part of
the API.
When some Lisp code called by a module function signals an error or
throws, the nonlocal exit is trapped, and the pending exit and its
associated data are stored in the environment. Whenever a nonlocal
exit is pending in the environment, any module API function
called with a pointer to that environment will return immediately
without any processing (the functions non_local_exit_check
,
non_local_exit_get
, and non_local_exit_clear
are
exceptions from this rule). If your module function then does nothing
and returns to Emacs, a pending nonlocal exit will cause Emacs to act
on it: signal an error or throw to the corresponding catch
.
So the simplest “handling” of nonlocal exits in module functions is to do nothing special and let the rest of your code to run as if nothing happened. However, this can cause two classes of problems:
Therefore, we recommend that your module functions check for nonlocal exit conditions and recover from them, using the functions described below.
enum emacs_funcall_exit
non_local_exit_check (emacs_env *env)
¶This function returns the kind of nonlocal exit condition stored in env. The possible values are:
enum emacs_funcall_exit
non_local_exit_get (emacs_env *env, emacs_value *symbol, emacs_value *data)
¶This function returns the kind of nonlocal exit condition stored in
env, like non_local_exit_check
does, but it also returns
the full information about the nonlocal exit, if any. If the return
value is emacs_funcall_exit_signal
, the function stores the
error symbol in *symbol
and the error data in
*data
(see How to Signal an Error). If the return value is
emacs_funcall_exit_throw
, the function stores the catch
tag symbol in *symbol
and the throw
value in
*data
. The function doesn’t store anything in memory
pointed by these arguments when the return value is
emacs_funcall_exit_return
.
You should check nonlocal exit conditions where it matters: before you allocated some resource or after you allocated a resource that might need freeing, or where a failure means further processing is impossible or infeasible.
Once your module function detected that a nonlocal exit is pending, it can either return to Emacs (after performing the necessary local cleanup), or it can attempt to recover from the nonlocal exit. The following API functions will help with these tasks.
void
non_local_exit_clear (emacs_env *env)
¶This function clears the pending nonlocal exit conditions and data from env. After calling it, the module API functions will work normally. Use this function if your module function can recover from nonlocal exits of the Lisp functions it calls and continue, and also before calling any of the following two functions (or any other API functions, if you want them to perform their intended processing when a nonlocal exit is pending).
void
non_local_exit_throw (emacs_env *env, emacs_value tag, emacs_value value)
¶This function throws to the Lisp catch
symbol represented by
tag, passing it value as the value to return. Your module
function should in general return soon after calling this function.
One use of this function is when you want to re-throw a non-local exit
from one of the called API or Lisp functions.
void
non_local_exit_signal (emacs_env *env, emacs_value symbol, emacs_value data)
¶This function signals the error represented by the error symbol symbol with the specified error data data. The module function should return soon after calling this function. This function could be useful, e.g., for signaling errors from module functions to Emacs.
Emacs Lisp provides a rich set of the data types. Some of them, like cons cells, integers and strings, are common to nearly all Lisp dialects. Some others, like markers and buffers, are quite special and needed to provide the basic support to write editor commands in Lisp. To implement such a variety of object types and provide an efficient way to pass objects between the subsystems of an interpreter, there is a set of C data structures and a special type to represent the pointers to all of them, which is known as tagged pointer.
In C, the tagged pointer is an object of type Lisp_Object
. Any
initialized variable of such a type always holds the value of one of the
following basic data types: integer, symbol, string, cons cell, float,
or vectorlike object. Each of these data types has the
corresponding tag value. All tags are enumerated by enum Lisp_Type
and placed into a 3-bit bitfield of the Lisp_Object
. The rest of the
bits is the value itself. Integers are immediate, i.e., directly
represented by those value bits, and all other objects are represented
by the C pointers to a corresponding object allocated from the heap. Width
of the Lisp_Object
is platform- and configuration-dependent: usually
it’s equal to the width of an underlying platform pointer (i.e., 32-bit on
a 32-bit machine and 64-bit on a 64-bit one), but also there is a special
configuration where Lisp_Object
is 64-bit but all pointers are 32-bit.
The latter trick was designed to overcome the limited range of values for
Lisp integers on a 32-bit system by using 64-bit long long
type for
Lisp_Object
.
The following C data structures are defined in lisp.h to represent the basic data types beyond integers:
struct Lisp_Cons
Cons cell, an object used to construct lists.
struct Lisp_String
String, the basic object to represent a sequence of characters.
struct Lisp_Vector
Array, a fixed-size set of Lisp objects which may be accessed by an index.
struct Lisp_Symbol
Symbol, the unique-named entity commonly used as an identifier.
struct Lisp_Float
Floating-point value.
These types are the first-class citizens of an internal type system.
Since the tag space is limited, all other types are the subtypes of
Lisp_Vectorlike
. Vector subtypes are enumerated
by enum pvec_type
, and nearly all complex objects like windows, buffers,
frames, and processes fall into this category.
Below there is a description of a few subtypes of Lisp_Vectorlike
.
Buffer object represents the text to display and edit. Window is the part
of display structure which shows the buffer or is used as a container to
recursively place other windows on the same frame. (Do not confuse Emacs Lisp
window object with the window as an entity managed by the user interface
system like X; in Emacs terminology, the latter is called frame.) Finally,
process object is used to manage the subprocesses.
Two structures (see buffer.h) are used to represent buffers
in C. The buffer_text
structure contains fields describing the
text of a buffer; the buffer
structure holds other fields. In
the case of indirect buffers, two or more buffer
structures
reference the same buffer_text
structure.
Here are some of the fields in struct buffer_text
:
beg
The address of the buffer contents. The buffer contents is a linear C
array of char
, with the gap somewhere in its midst.
gpt
gpt_byte
The character and byte positions of the buffer gap. See The Buffer Gap.
z
z_byte
The character and byte positions of the end of the buffer text.
gap_size
The size of buffer’s gap. See The Buffer Gap.
modiff
save_modiff
chars_modiff
overlay_modiff
These fields count the number of buffer-modification events performed
in this buffer. modiff
is incremented after each
buffer-modification event, and is never otherwise changed;
save_modiff
contains the value of modiff
the last time
the buffer was visited or saved; chars_modiff
counts only
modifications to the characters in the buffer, ignoring all other
kinds of changes (such as text properties); and overlay_modiff
counts only modifications to the buffer’s overlays.
beg_unchanged
end_unchanged
The number of characters at the start and end of the text that are known to be unchanged since the last complete redisplay.
unchanged_modified
overlay_unchanged_modified
The values of modiff
and overlay_modiff
, respectively,
after the last complete redisplay. If their current values match
modiff
or overlay_modiff
, that means
beg_unchanged
and end_unchanged
contain no useful
information.
markers
The markers that refer to this buffer. This is actually a single marker, and successive elements in its marker chain (a linked list) are the other markers referring to this buffer text.
intervals
The interval tree which records the text properties of this buffer.
Some of the fields of struct buffer
are:
header
A header of type union vectorlike_header
is common to all
vectorlike objects.
own_text
A struct buffer_text
structure that ordinarily holds the buffer
contents. In indirect buffers, this field is not used.
text
A pointer to the buffer_text
structure for this buffer. In an
ordinary buffer, this is the own_text
field above. In an
indirect buffer, this is the own_text
field of the base buffer.
next
A pointer to the next buffer, in the chain of all buffers, including killed buffers. This chain is used only for allocation and garbage collection, in order to collect killed buffers properly.
pt
pt_byte
The character and byte positions of point in a buffer.
begv
begv_byte
The character and byte positions of the beginning of the accessible range of text in the buffer.
zv
zv_byte
The character and byte positions of the end of the accessible range of text in the buffer.
base_buffer
In an indirect buffer, this points to the base buffer. In an ordinary buffer, it is null.
local_flags
This field contains flags indicating that certain variables are local
in this buffer. Such variables are declared in the C code using
DEFVAR_PER_BUFFER
, and their buffer-local bindings are stored
in fields in the buffer structure itself. (Some of these fields are
described in this table.)
modtime
The modification time of the visited file. It is set when the file is written or read. Before writing the buffer into a file, this field is compared to the modification time of the file to see if the file has changed on disk. See Buffer Modification.
auto_save_modified
The time when the buffer was last auto-saved.
last_window_start
The window-start
position in the buffer as of the last time the
buffer was displayed in a window.
clip_changed
This flag indicates that narrowing has changed in the buffer. See Narrowing.
prevent_redisplay_optimizations_p
This flag indicates that redisplay optimizations should not be used to display this buffer.
inhibit_buffer_hooks
This flag indicates that the buffer should not run the hooks
kill-buffer-hook
, kill-buffer-query-functions
(see Killing Buffers), and buffer-list-update-hook
(see The Buffer List). It is set at buffer creation (see Creating Buffers), and avoids slowing down internal or temporary buffers, such
as those created by with-temp-buffer
(see Current Buffer).
name
A Lisp string that names the buffer. It is guaranteed to be unique.
See Buffer Names. This and the following fields have their names
in the C struct definition end in a _
to indicate that they
should not be accessed directly, but via the BVAR
macro, like
this:
Lisp_Object buf_name = BVAR (buffer, name);
save_length
The length of the file this buffer is visiting, when last read or
saved. It can have 2 special values: −1 means auto-saving was
turned off in this buffer, and −2 means don’t turn off
auto-saving if buffer text shrinks a lot. This and other fields
concerned with saving are not kept in the buffer_text
structure
because indirect buffers are never saved.
directory
The directory for expanding relative file names. This is the value of
the buffer-local variable default-directory
(see Functions that Expand Filenames).
filename
The name of the file visited in this buffer, or nil
. This is
the value of the buffer-local variable buffer-file-name
(see Buffer File Name).
undo_list
backed_up
auto_save_file_name
auto_save_file_format
read_only
file_format
file_truename
invisibility_spec
display_count
display_time
These fields store the values of Lisp variables that are automatically
buffer-local (see Buffer-Local Variables), whose corresponding
variable names have the additional prefix buffer-
and have
underscores replaced with dashes. For instance, undo_list
stores the value of buffer-undo-list
.
mark
The mark for the buffer. The mark is a marker, hence it is also
included on the list markers
. See The Mark.
local_var_alist
The association list describing the buffer-local variable bindings of this buffer, not including the built-in buffer-local bindings that have special slots in the buffer object. (Those slots are omitted from this table.) See Buffer-Local Variables.
major_mode
Symbol naming the major mode of this buffer, e.g., lisp-mode
.
mode_name
Pretty name of the major mode, e.g., "Lisp"
.
keymap
abbrev_table
syntax_table
category_table
display_table
These fields store the buffer’s local keymap (see Keymaps), abbrev table (see Abbrev Tables), syntax table (see Syntax Tables), category table (see Categories), and display table (see Display Tables).
downcase_table
upcase_table
case_canon_table
These fields store the conversion tables for converting text to lower case, upper case, and for canonicalizing text for case-fold search. See The Case Table.
minor_modes
An alist of the minor modes of this buffer.
pt_marker
begv_marker
zv_marker
These fields are only used in an indirect buffer, or in a buffer that
is the base of an indirect buffer. Each holds a marker that records
pt
, begv
, and zv
respectively, for this buffer
when the buffer is not current.
mode_line_format
header_line_format
case_fold_search
tab_width
fill_column
left_margin
auto_fill_function
truncate_lines
word_wrap
ctl_arrow
bidi_display_reordering
bidi_paragraph_direction
selective_display
selective_display_ellipses
overwrite_mode
abbrev_mode
mark_active
enable_multibyte_characters
buffer_file_coding_system
cache_long_line_scans
point_before_scroll
left_fringe_width
right_fringe_width
fringes_outside_margins
scroll_bar_width
indicate_empty_lines
indicate_buffer_boundaries
fringe_indicator_alist
fringe_cursor_alist
scroll_up_aggressively
scroll_down_aggressively
cursor_type
cursor_in_non_selected_windows
These fields store the values of Lisp variables that are automatically
buffer-local (see Buffer-Local Variables), whose corresponding
variable names have underscores replaced with dashes. For instance,
mode_line_format
stores the value of mode-line-format
.
overlays
The interval tree containing this buffer’s overlays.
last_selected_window
This is the last window that was selected with this buffer in it, or nil
if that window no longer displays this buffer.
The fields of a window (for a complete list, see the definition of
struct window
in window.h) include:
frame
The frame that this window is on, as a Lisp object.
mini
Non-zero if this window is a minibuffer window, a window showing the minibuffer or the echo area.
pseudo_window_p
¶Non-zero if this window is a pseudo window. A pseudo window is either a window used to display the menu bar or the tool bar (when Emacs uses toolkits that don’t display their own menu bar and tool bar) or the tab bar or a window showing a tooltip on a tooltip frame. Pseudo windows are in general not accessible from Lisp code.
parent
Internally, Emacs arranges windows in a tree; each group of siblings
has a parent window whose area includes all the siblings. This field
points to the window’s parent in that tree, as a Lisp object. For the
root window of the tree and a minibuffer window this is always
nil
.
Parent windows do not display buffers, and play little role in display except to shape their child windows. Emacs Lisp programs cannot directly manipulate parent windows; they operate on the windows at the leaves of the tree, which actually display buffers.
contents
For a leaf window and windows showing a tooltip, this is the buffer,
as a Lisp object, that the window is displaying. For an internal
(“parent”) window, this is its first child window. For a pseudo
window showing a menu or tool bar this is nil
. It is also
nil
for a window that has been deleted.
next
prev
The next and previous sibling of this window as Lisp objects.
next
is nil
if the window is the right-most or
bottom-most in its group; prev
is nil
if it is the
left-most or top-most in its group. Whether the sibling is left/right
or up/down is determined by the horizontal
field of the
sibling’s parent: if it’s non-zero, the siblings are arranged
horizontally.
As a special case, next
of a frame’s root window points to the
frame’s minibuffer window, provided this is not a minibuffer-only or
minibuffer-less frame. On such frames prev
of the minibuffer
window points to that frame’s root window. In any other case, the
root window’s next
and the minibuffer window’s (if present)
prev
fields are nil
.
left_col
The left-hand edge of the window, measured in columns, relative to the leftmost column (column 0) of the window’s native frame.
top_line
The top edge of the window, measured in lines, relative to the topmost line (line 0) of the window’s native frame.
pixel_left
pixel_top
The left-hand and top edges of this window, measured in pixels, relative to the top-left corner (0, 0) of the window’s native frame.
total_cols
total_lines
The total width and height of the window, measured in columns and lines respectively. The values include scroll bars and fringes, dividers and/or the separator line on the right of the window (if any).
pixel_width;
pixel_height;
The total width and height of the window measured in pixels.
start
A marker pointing to the position in the buffer that is the first character (in the logical order, see Bidirectional Display) displayed in the window.
pointm
¶This is the value of point in the current buffer when this window is selected; when it is not selected, it retains its previous value.
old_pointm
The value of pointm
at the last redisplay time.
force_start
If this flag is non-nil
, it says that the window has been
scrolled explicitly by the Lisp program, and the value of the
window’s start
was set for redisplay to honor. This affects
what the next redisplay does if point is off the screen: instead of
scrolling the window to show the text around point, it moves point to
a location that is on the screen.
optional_new_start
This is similar to force_start
, but the next redisplay will
only obey it if point stays visible.
start_at_line_beg
Non-nil
means current value of start
was the beginning of a line
when it was chosen.
use_time
This is the last time that the window was selected. The function
get-lru-window
uses this field.
sequence_number
A unique number assigned to this window when it was created.
last_modified
The modiff
field of the window’s buffer, as of the last time
a redisplay completed in this window.
last_overlay_modified
The overlay_modiff
field of the window’s buffer, as of the last
time a redisplay completed in this window.
last_point
The buffer’s value of point, as of the last time a redisplay completed in this window.
last_had_star
A non-zero value means the window’s buffer was modified when the window was last updated.
vertical_scroll_bar_type
horizontal_scroll_bar_type
The types of this window’s vertical and horizontal scroll bars.
scroll_bar_width
scroll_bar_height
The width of this window’s vertical scroll bar and the height of this window’s horizontal scroll bar, in pixels.
left_margin_cols
right_margin_cols
The widths of the left and right margins in this window. A value of zero means no margin.
left_fringe_width
right_fringe_width
The pixel widths of the left and right fringes in this window. A value of −1 means use the values of the frame.
fringes_outside_margins
A non-zero value means the fringes outside the display margins; othersize they are between the margin and the text.
window_end_pos
This is computed as z
minus the buffer position of the last glyph
in the current matrix of the window. The value is only valid if
window_end_valid
is non-zero.
window_end_bytepos
The byte position corresponding to window_end_pos
.
window_end_vpos
The window-relative vertical position of the line containing
window_end_pos
.
window_end_valid
This field is set to a non-zero value if window_end_pos
and
window_end_vpos
are truly valid. This is zero if nontrivial
redisplay is pre-empted, since in that case the display that
window_end_pos
was computed for did not get onto the screen.
cursor
A structure describing where the cursor is in this window.
last_cursor_vpos
The window-relative vertical position of the line showing the cursor as of the last redisplay that finished.
phys_cursor
A structure describing where the cursor of this window physically is.
phys_cursor_type
phys_cursor_height
phys_cursor_width
The type, height, and width of the cursor that was last displayed on this window.
phys_cursor_on_p
This field is non-zero if the cursor is physically on.
cursor_off_p
Non-zero means the cursor in this window is logically off. This is used for blinking the cursor.
last_cursor_off_p
This field contains the value of cursor_off_p
as of the time of
the last redisplay.
must_be_updated_p
This is set to 1 during redisplay when this window must be updated.
hscroll
This is the number of columns that the display in the window is scrolled horizontally to the left. Normally, this is 0. When only the current line is hscrolled, this describes how much the current line is scrolled.
min_hscroll
Minimum value of hscroll
, set by the user via
set-window-hscroll
(see Horizontal Scrolling). When only
the current line is hscrolled, this describes the horizontal scrolling
of lines other than the current one.
vscroll
Vertical scroll amount, in pixels. Normally, this is 0.
dedicated
Non-nil
if this window is dedicated to its buffer.
combination_limit
This window’s combination limit, meaningful only for a parent window.
If this is t
, then it is not allowed to delete this window and
recombine its child windows with other siblings of this window.
window_parameters
The alist of this window’s parameters.
display_table
The window’s display table, or nil
if none is specified for it.
update_mode_line
Non-zero means this window’s mode line needs to be updated.
mode_line_height
header_line_height
The height in pixels of the mode line and the header line, or −1 if not known.
base_line_number
The line number of a certain position in the buffer, or zero. This is used for displaying the line number of point in the mode line.
base_line_pos
The position in the buffer for which the line number is known, or zero meaning none is known. If it is −1, don’t display the line number as long as the window shows that buffer.
column_number_displayed
The column number currently displayed in this window’s mode line, or −1 if column numbers are not being displayed.
current_matrix
desired_matrix
Glyph matrices describing the current and desired display of this window.
The fields of a process (for a complete list, see the definition of
struct Lisp_Process
in process.h) include:
name
A Lisp string, the name of the process.
command
A list containing the command arguments that were used to start this
process. For a network or serial process, it is nil
if the
process is running or t
if the process is stopped.
filter
A Lisp function used to accept output from the process.
sentinel
A Lisp function called whenever the state of the process changes.
buffer
The associated buffer of the process.
pid
An integer, the operating system’s process ID. Pseudo-processes such as network or serial connections use a value of 0.
childp
A flag, t
if this is really a child process. For a network or
serial connection, it is a plist based on the arguments to
make-network-process
or make-serial-process
.
mark
A marker indicating the position of the end of the last output from this process inserted into the buffer. This is often but not always the end of the buffer.
kill_without_query
If this is non-zero, killing Emacs while this process is still running does not ask for confirmation about killing the process.
raw_status
The raw process status, as returned by the wait
system call.
status
The process status, as process-status
should return it. This
is a Lisp symbol, a cons cell, or a list.
tick
update_tick
If these two fields are not equal, a change in the status of the process needs to be reported, either by running the sentinel or by inserting a message in the process buffer.
pty_flag
Non-zero if communication with the subprocess uses a pty; zero if it uses a pipe.
infd
The file descriptor for input from the process.
outfd
The file descriptor for output to the process.
tty_name
The name of the terminal that the subprocess is using,
or nil
if it is using pipes.
decode_coding_system
Coding-system for decoding the input from this process.
decoding_buf
A working buffer for decoding.
decoding_carryover
Size of carryover in decoding.
encode_coding_system
Coding-system for encoding the output to this process.
encoding_buf
A working buffer for encoding.
inherit_coding_system_flag
Flag to set coding-system
of the process buffer from the
coding system used to decode process output.
type
Symbol indicating the type of process: real
, network
,
serial
.
Here are some guidelines for use of integer types in the Emacs C source code. These guidelines sometimes give competing advice; common sense is advised.
int len = strlen
(s);
unless the length of s
is required for other reasons to
fit in int
range.
size_t
instead of ptrdiff_t
, or uintptr_t
instead
of intptr_t
).
int
for Emacs character codes, in the range 0 .. 0x3FFFFF.
More generally, prefer int
for integers known to be in
int
range, e.g., screen column counts.
ptrdiff_t
for sizes, i.e., for integers bounded by the
maximum size of any individual C object or by the maximum number of
elements in any C array. This is part of Emacs’s general preference
for signed types. Using ptrdiff_t
limits objects to
PTRDIFF_MAX
bytes, but larger objects would cause trouble
anyway since they would break pointer subtraction, so this does not
impose an arbitrary limit.
ssize_t
except when communicating to low-level APIs that
have ssize_t
-related limitations. Although it’s equivalent to
ptrdiff_t
on typical platforms, ssize_t
is occasionally
narrower, so using it for size-related calculations could overflow.
Also, ptrdiff_t
is more ubiquitous and better-standardized, has
standard printf
formats, and is the basis for Emacs’s internal
size-overflow checking. When using ssize_t
, please note that
POSIX requires support only for values in the range −1 ..
SSIZE_MAX
.
intptr_t
for internal representations of pointers, or
for integers bounded only by the number of objects that can exist at
any given time or by the total number of bytes that can be allocated.
However, prefer uintptr_t
to represent pointer arithmetic that
could cross page boundaries. For example, on a machine with a 32-bit
address space an array could cross the 0x7fffffff/0x80000000 boundary,
which would cause an integer overflow when adding 1 to
(intptr_t) 0x7fffffff
.
EMACS_INT
for representing values
converted to or from Emacs Lisp fixnums, as fixnum arithmetic is based
on EMACS_INT
.
off_t
, time_t
). Do not assume that a system type is
signed, unless this assumption is known to be safe. For example,
although off_t
is always signed, time_t
need not be.
intmax_t
for representing values that might be any
signed integer value.
A printf
-family function can print such a value
via a format like "%"PRIdMAX
.
bool
, false
and true
for booleans.
Using bool
can make programs easier to read and a bit faster than
using int
. Although it is also OK to use int
, 0
and 1
, this older style is gradually being phased out. When
using bool
, respect the limitations of the replacement
implementation of bool
. In particular,
boolean bitfields should be of type
bool_bf
, not bool
, so that they work correctly even when
compiling Objective C with standard GCC.
unsigned int
or signed int
to
int
, as int
is less portable: it might be signed, and
might not be. Single-bit bit fields should be unsigned int
or
bool_bf
so that their values are 0 or 1.
Here is a list of the more important error symbols in standard Emacs, grouped by concept. The list includes each symbol’s message and a cross reference to a description of how the error can occur.
Each error symbol has a set of parent error conditions that is a
list of symbols. Normally this list includes the error symbol itself
and the symbol error
. Occasionally it includes additional
symbols, which are intermediate classifications, narrower than
error
but broader than a single error symbol. For example, all
the errors in accessing files have the condition file-error
. If
we do not say here that a certain error symbol has additional error
conditions, that means it has none.
As a special exception, the error symbols quit
and
minibuffer-quit
don’t have the condition error
, because
quitting is not considered an error.
Most of these error symbols are defined in C (mainly data.c),
but some are defined in Lisp. For example, the file userlock.el
defines the file-locked
and file-supersession
errors.
Several of the specialized Lisp libraries distributed with Emacs
define their own error symbols. We do not attempt to list of all
those here.
See Errors, for an explanation of how errors are generated and handled.
error
The message is ‘error’. See Errors.
quit
The message is ‘Quit’. See Quitting.
minibuffer-quit
The message is ‘Quit’. This is a subcategory of quit
.
See Quitting.
args-out-of-range
The message is ‘Args out of range’. This happens when trying to access an element beyond the range of a sequence, buffer, or other container-like object. See Sequences, Arrays, and Vectors, and see Text.
arith-error
The message is ‘Arithmetic error’. This occurs when trying to perform integer division by zero. See Numeric Conversions, and see Arithmetic Operations.
beginning-of-buffer
The message is ‘Beginning of buffer’. See Motion by Characters.
buffer-read-only
The message is ‘Buffer is read-only’. See Read-Only Buffers.
circular-list
The message is ‘List contains a loop’. This happens when a circular structure is encountered. See Read Syntax for Circular Objects.
cl-assertion-failed
The message is ‘Assertion failed’. This happens when the
cl-assert
macro fails a test. See Assertions in Common Lisp
Extensions.
coding-system-error
The message is ‘Invalid coding system’. See Coding Systems in Lisp.
cyclic-function-indirection
The message is ‘Symbol's chain of function indirections contains a loop’. See Symbol Function Indirection.
cyclic-variable-indirection
The message is ‘Symbol's chain of variable indirections contains a loop’. See Variable Aliases.
dbus-error
The message is ‘D-Bus error’. See Errors and Events in D-Bus integration in Emacs.
end-of-buffer
The message is ‘End of buffer’. See Motion by Characters.
end-of-file
The message is ‘End of file during parsing’. Note that this is
not a subcategory of file-error
, because it pertains to the
Lisp reader, not to file I/O. See Input Functions.
file-already-exists
This is a subcategory of file-error
. See Writing to Files.
permission-denied
This is a subcategory of file-error
, which occurs when the OS
doesn’t allow Emacs to access a file or a directory for some reason.
file-date-error
This is a subcategory of file-error
. It occurs when
copy-file
tries and fails to set the last-modification time of
the output file. See Changing File Names and Attributes.
file-error
We do not list the error-strings of this error and its subcategories,
because the error message is normally constructed from the data items
alone when the error condition file-error
is present. Thus,
the error-strings are not very relevant. However, these error symbols
do have error-message
properties, and if no data is provided,
the error-message
property is used. See Files.
file-missing
This is a subcategory of file-error
. It occurs when an
operation attempts to act on a file that is missing. See Changing File Names and Attributes.
compression-error
This is a subcategory of file-error
, which results from
problems handling a compressed file. See How Programs Do Loading.
file-locked
This is a subcategory of file-error
. See File Locks.
file-supersession
This is a subcategory of file-error
. See Buffer Modification Time.
file-notify-error
This is a subcategory of file-error
. It happens, when a file
could not be watched for changes. See Notifications on File Changes.
remote-file-error
This is a subcategory of file-error
, which results from
problems in accessing a remote file. See Remote Files in The
GNU Emacs Manual. Often, this error appears when timers, process
filters, process sentinels or special events in general try to access
a remote file, and collide with another remote file operation. In
general it is a good idea to write a bug report.
See Bugs in The GNU Emacs Manual.
ftp-error
This is a subcategory of remote-file-error
, which results from
problems in accessing a remote file using ftp. See Remote Files in The GNU Emacs Manual.
invalid-function
The message is ‘Invalid function’. See Symbol Function Indirection.
invalid-read-syntax
The message is usually ‘Invalid read syntax’. See Printed Representation and Read Syntax. This error can also be raised by commands like
eval-expression
when there’s text following an expression. In
that case, the message is ‘Trailing garbage following expression’.
invalid-regexp
The message is ‘Invalid regexp’. See Regular Expressions.
mark-inactive
The message is ‘The mark is not active now’. See The Mark.
no-catch
The message is ‘No catch for tag’. See Explicit Nonlocal Exits: catch
and throw
.
range-error
The message is Arithmetic range error
.
overflow-error
The message is ‘Arithmetic overflow error’. This is a subcategory
of range-error
.
This can happen with integers exceeding the integer-width
limit.
See Integer Basics.
scan-error
The message is ‘Scan error’. This happens when certain syntax-parsing functions find invalid syntax or mismatched parentheses. Conventionally raised with three argument: a human-readable error message, the start of the obstacle that cannot be moved over, and the end of the obstacle. See Moving over Balanced Expressions, and see Parsing Expressions.
search-failed
The message is ‘Search failed’. See Searching and Matching.
setting-constant
The message is ‘Attempt to set a constant symbol’. This happens
when attempting to assign values to nil
, t
,
most-positive-fixnum
, most-negative-fixnum
, and keyword
symbols. It also happens when attempting to assign values to
enable-multibyte-characters
and some other symbols whose direct
assignment is not allowed for some reason. See Variables that Never Change.
text-read-only
The message is ‘Text is read-only’. This is a subcategory of
buffer-read-only
. See Properties with Special Meanings.
undefined-color
The message is ‘Undefined color’. See Color Names.
user-error
The message is the empty string. See How to Signal an Error.
user-search-failed
This is like ‘search-failed’, but doesn’t trigger the debugger, like ‘user-error’. See How to Signal an Error, and see Searching and Matching. This is used for searching in Info files, see Search Text in Info.
void-function
The message is ‘Symbol's function definition is void’. See Accessing Function Cell Contents.
void-variable
The message is ‘Symbol's value as variable is void’. See Accessing Variable Values.
wrong-number-of-arguments
The message is ‘Wrong number of arguments’. See Features of Argument Lists.
wrong-type-argument
The message is ‘Wrong type argument’. See Type Predicates.
unknown-image-type
The message is ‘Cannot determine image type’. See Images.
inhibited-interaction
The message is ‘User interaction while inhibited’. This error is
signaled when inhibit-interaction
is non-nil
and a user
interaction function (like read-from-minibuffer
) is called.
In this section we list some of the more general keymaps. Many of these exist when Emacs is first started, but some are loaded only when the respective feature is accessed.
There are many other, more specialized, maps than these; in particular those associated with major and minor modes. The minibuffer uses several keymaps (see Minibuffer Commands that Do Completion). For more details on keymaps, see Keymaps.
2C-mode-map
A sparse keymap for subcommands of the prefix C-x 6.
See Two-Column Editing in The GNU Emacs Manual.
abbrev-map
¶A sparse keymap for subcommands of the prefix C-x a.
See Defining Abbrevs in The GNU Emacs Manual.
button-buffer-map
A sparse keymap useful for buffers containing buffers.
You may want to use this as a parent keymap. See Buttons.
button-map
A sparse keymap used by buttons.
ctl-x-4-map
A sparse keymap for subcommands of the prefix C-x 4.
ctl-x-5-map
A sparse keymap for subcommands of the prefix C-x 5.
ctl-x-map
A full keymap for C-x commands.
ctl-x-r-map
¶A sparse keymap for subcommands of the prefix C-x r.
See Registers in The GNU Emacs Manual.
esc-map
A full keymap for ESC (or Meta) commands.
function-key-map
The parent keymap of all local-function-key-map
(q.v.) instances.
global-map
The full keymap containing default global key bindings.
Modes should not modify the Global map.
goto-map
A sparse keymap used for the M-g prefix key.
help-map
A sparse keymap for the keys following the help character C-h.
See Help Functions.
Helper-help-map
A full keymap used by the help utility package.
It has the same keymap in its value cell and in its function cell.
input-decode-map
The keymap for translating keypad and function keys.
If there are none, then it contains an empty sparse keymap.
See Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events.
key-translation-map
A keymap for translating keys. This one overrides ordinary key
bindings, unlike local-function-key-map
. See Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events.
kmacro-keymap
¶A sparse keymap for keys that follows the C-x C-k prefix search.
See Keyboard Macros in The GNU Emacs Manual.
local-function-key-map
The keymap for translating key sequences to preferred alternatives.
If there are none, then it contains an empty sparse keymap.
See Keymaps for Translating Sequences of Events.
menu-bar-file-menu
¶menu-bar-edit-menu
menu-bar-options-menu
global-buffers-menu-map
menu-bar-tools-menu
menu-bar-help-menu
These keymaps display the main, top-level menus in the menu bar.
Some of them contain sub-menus. For example, the Edit menu contains
menu-bar-search-menu
, etc. See The Menu Bar.
minibuffer-inactive-mode-map
¶A full keymap used in the minibuffer when it is not active.
See Editing in the Minibuffer in The GNU Emacs Manual.
mode-line-coding-system-map
¶mode-line-input-method-map
mode-line-column-line-number-mode-map
These keymaps control various areas of the mode line.
See Mode Line Format.
mode-specific-map
The keymap for characters following C-c. Note, this is in the
global map. This map is not actually mode-specific: its name was chosen
to be informative in C-h b (display-bindings
),
where it describes the main use of the C-c prefix key.
mouse-appearance-menu-map
¶A sparse keymap used for the S-mouse-1 key.
mule-keymap
The global keymap used for the C-x RET prefix key.
narrow-map
¶A sparse keymap for subcommands of the prefix C-x n.
prog-mode-map
¶The keymap used by Prog mode.
See Basic Major Modes.
query-replace-map
multi-query-replace-map
A sparse keymap used for responses in query-replace
and related
commands; also for y-or-n-p
and map-y-or-n-p
. The functions
that use this map do not support prefix keys; they look up one event at a
time. multi-query-replace-map
extends query-replace-map
for multi-buffer replacements. See query-replace-map.
search-map
A sparse keymap that provides global bindings for search-related commands.
special-mode-map
¶The keymap used by Special mode.
See Basic Major Modes.
tab-prefix-map
The global keymap used for the C-x t prefix key for tab-bar related commands.
See Tab Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual.
tab-bar-map
¶The keymap defining the contents of the tab bar.
See Tab Bars in The GNU Emacs Manual.
tool-bar-map
The keymap defining the contents of the tool bar.
See Tool bars.
universal-argument-map
¶A sparse keymap used while processing C-u.
See Prefix Command Arguments.
vc-prefix-map
The global keymap used for the C-x v prefix key.
x-alternatives-map
¶A sparse keymap used to map certain keys under graphical frames.
The function x-setup-function-keys
uses this.
The following is a list of some hook variables that let you provide functions to be called from within Emacs on suitable occasions.
Most of these variables have names ending with ‘-hook’. They are
normal hooks, run by means of run-hooks
. The value of such
a hook is a list of functions; the functions are called with no
arguments and their values are completely ignored. The recommended way
to put a new function on such a hook is to call add-hook
.
See Hooks, for more information about using hooks.
The variables whose names end in ‘-functions’ are usually abnormal hooks (some old code may also use the deprecated ‘-hooks’ suffix). Their values are lists of functions, but these functions are called in a special way: they are either passed arguments, or their return values are used in some way. The variables whose names end in ‘-function’ have single functions as their values.
This is not an exhaustive list, it only covers the more general hooks.
For example, every major mode defines a hook named
‘modename-mode-hook’. The major mode command runs this
normal hook with run-mode-hooks
as the very last thing it does.
See Mode Hooks. Most minor modes have mode hooks too.
A special feature allows you to specify expressions to evaluate if and when a file is loaded (see Hooks for Loading). That feature is not exactly a hook, but does a similar job.
activate-mark-hook
deactivate-mark-hook
See The Mark.
after-change-functions
before-change-functions
first-change-hook
See Change Hooks.
after-change-major-mode-hook
change-major-mode-after-body-hook
See Mode Hooks.
after-init-hook
before-init-hook
emacs-startup-hook
window-setup-hook
See The Init File.
after-insert-file-functions
write-region-annotate-functions
write-region-post-annotation-function
after-make-frame-functions
before-make-frame-hook
server-after-make-frame-hook
See Creating Frames.
after-save-hook
before-save-hook
write-contents-functions
write-file-functions
See Saving Buffers.
after-setting-font-hook
¶Hook run after a frame’s font changes.
auto-save-hook
See Auto-Saving.
before-hack-local-variables-hook
hack-local-variables-hook
See File Local Variables.
buffer-access-fontify-functions
buffer-list-update-hook
¶Hook run when the buffer list changes (see The Buffer List).
buffer-quit-function
¶Function to call to quit the current buffer.
change-major-mode-hook
comint-password-function
This abnormal hook permits a derived mode to supply a password for the underlying command interpreter without prompting the user.
command-line-functions
delayed-warnings-hook
¶The command loop runs this soon after post-command-hook
(q.v.).
focus-in-hook
¶focus-out-hook
See Input Focus.
delete-frame-functions
after-delete-frame-functions
See Deleting Frames.
delete-terminal-functions
See Multiple Terminals.
pop-up-frame-function
split-window-preferred-function
echo-area-clear-hook
find-file-hook
find-file-not-found-functions
font-lock-extend-after-change-region-function
font-lock-extend-region-functions
font-lock-fontify-buffer-function
font-lock-fontify-region-function
font-lock-mark-block-function
font-lock-unfontify-buffer-function
font-lock-unfontify-region-function
fontification-functions
frame-auto-hide-function
See Quitting Windows.
quit-window-hook
See Quitting Windows.
kill-buffer-hook
kill-buffer-query-functions
See Killing Buffers.
kill-emacs-hook
kill-emacs-query-functions
See Killing Emacs.
menu-bar-update-hook
See The Menu Bar.
minibuffer-setup-hook
minibuffer-exit-hook
mouse-leave-buffer-hook
¶Hook run when the user mouse-clicks in a window.
mouse-position-function
See Mouse Position.
prefix-command-echo-keystrokes-functions
¶An abnormal hook run by prefix commands (such as C-u) which
should return a string describing the current prefix state. For
example, C-u produces ‘C-u-’ and ‘C-u 1 2 3-’. Each
hook function is called with no arguments and should return a string
describing the current prefix state, or nil
if there’s no
prefix state. See Prefix Command Arguments.
prefix-command-preserve-state-hook
¶Hook run when a prefix command needs to preserve the prefix by passing the current prefix command state to the next command. For example, C-u needs to pass the state to the next command when the user types C-u - or follows C-u with a digit.
pre-redisplay-functions
Hook run in each window just before redisplaying it. See Forcing Redisplay.
post-command-hook
pre-command-hook
post-gc-hook
See Garbage Collection.
post-self-insert-hook
suspend-hook
suspend-resume-hook
suspend-tty-functions
resume-tty-functions
See Suspending Emacs.
syntax-begin-function
syntax-propertize-extend-region-functions
syntax-propertize-function
font-lock-syntactic-face-function
See Syntactic Font Lock. See Syntax Properties.
temp-buffer-setup-hook
temp-buffer-show-function
temp-buffer-show-hook
See Temporary Displays.
tty-setup-hook
window-configuration-change-hook
window-scroll-functions
window-size-change-functions
Jump to: | -
,
;
:
?
.
'
"
(
)
[
]
@
*
/
\
&
#
%
`
^
+
<
=
>
|
$
0
1
2
3
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
You may also encounter ‘#^^’, used for sub-char-tables.
This is the behavior specified for languages like Common Lisp and C for constants, and this differs from languages like JavaScript and Python where an interpreter is required to signal an error if a program attempts to change an immutable object. Ideally the Emacs Lisp interpreter will evolve in latter direction.
For more information about collation rules and their locale dependencies, see The Unicode Collation Algorithm. Some Standard C libraries, such as the GNU C Library (a.k.a. glibc) implement large portions of the Unicode Collation Algorithm and use the associated locale data, Common Locale Data Repository, or CLDR.
It is sometimes also referred to as a true list, but we generally do not use this terminology in this manual.
There is no strictly equivalent way to add an element to
the end of a list. You can use (append listname (list
newelt))
, which creates a whole new list by copying listname
and adding newelt to its end. Or you can use (nconc
listname (list newelt))
, which modifies listname
by following all the CDRs and then replacing the terminating
nil
. Compare this to adding an element to the beginning of a
list with cons
, which neither copies nor modifies the list.
This usage of “key” is not related to the term “key sequence”; it means a value used to look up an item in a table. In this case, the table is the alist, and the alist associations are the items.
It is sometimes also referred to as an S-expression or sexp, but we generally do not use this terminology in this manual.
This definition of “environment” is specifically not intended to include all the data that can affect the result of a program.
To be precise, under the default dynamic scoping rule, the value cell always holds the variable’s current value, but this is not the case under the lexical scoping rule. See Scoping Rules for Variable Bindings, for details.
With some exceptions; for instance, a lexical binding can also be accessed from the Lisp debugger.
The MS-DOS version of Emacs uses _dir-locals.el instead, due to limitations of the DOS filesystems.
This only
works in code using lexical-binding
.
This is related to, but different from currying, which transforms a function that takes multiple arguments in such a way that it can be called as a chain of functions, each one with a single argument.
If the number of arguments that func can accept is unlimited,
then the new function will also accept an unlimited number of
arguments, so in that case apply-partially
doesn’t reduce the
number of arguments that the new function could accept.
Note that unlike the built-in function, this version accepts any number of arguments.
Some elements actually supply two arguments.
Button-down is the conservative antithesis of drag.
It is required for menus which do not use a toolkit, e.g., on a text terminal.
In MS-Windows versions of Emacs compiled for the Cygwin
environment, you can use the functions
cygwin-convert-file-name-to-windows
and
cygwin-convert-file-name-from-windows
to convert between the
two file-name syntaxes.
Emacs follows the GNU convention to use the term file name instead of the term pathname. We use the term path only for search paths, which are lists of directory names.
On PGTK frames, setting
the values fullheight
and fullwidth
has no effect.
On Haiku, child frames are only visible when a parent frame is active, owing to a limitation of the Haiku windowing system. Owing to the same limitation, child frames are only guaranteed to appear above their top-level parent; that is to say, the top-most frame in the hierarchy, which does not have a parent frame.
An RFC, an acronym for Request for Comments, is a numbered Internet informational document describing a standard. RFCs are usually written by technical experts acting on their own initiative, and are traditionally written in a pragmatic, experience-driven manner.
This internal representation is based on one of the encodings defined by the Unicode Standard, called UTF-8, for representing any Unicode codepoint, but Emacs extends UTF-8 to represent the additional codepoints it uses for raw 8-bit bytes and characters not unified with Unicode.
The Unicode specification writes these tag names inside ‘<..>’ brackets, but the tag names in Emacs do not include the brackets; e.g., Unicode specifies ‘<small>’ where Emacs uses ‘small’.
It could be written much simpler with non-greedy operators (how?), but that would make the example less interesting.
Note that regexp-opt
does not
guarantee that its result is absolutely the most efficient form
possible. A hand-tuned regular expression can sometimes be slightly
more efficient, but is almost never worth the effort.
On other systems, Emacs uses a Lisp emulation of
ls
; see Contents of Directories.
For backward compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.
In this context, the term font has nothing to do with Font Lock (see Font Lock Mode).
On MS-Windows, this requires w32-use-native-image-API
to be set
non-nil
.
In typography an em is a distance equivalent to the height of the type. For example when using 12 point type 1 em is equal to 12 points. Its use ensures distances and type remain proportional.
The benefits of a Common Lisp-style package system are considered not to outweigh the costs.
We do use these occasionally, but try not to overdo it.